THE History of Travail in the West and East Indies, and other countries lying either way, towards the fruitful and rich Moluccaes'.  
As Moscovia, Persia, Arabia, Syria, Egypt, Ethiopia, Guinea, China in Cathayo, and Giapan: With a discourse of the Northwest passage.  In the hand of our Lord be all the corners of the earth. Psal. 94. 
Gathered in part, and done into english by Richard Eden.  
Newly set in order, augmented, and finished by Richard wills.  
¶ Imprinted at London by Richard jug. 1577.  
Cum Privilegio.   

To the right noble and excellent Lady, the Lady Brigit, Countess of bedford, my singular good Lady and Mistress.  
ALL studies have their special times (Right noble Lady) all good parts, and singular qualities of the mind are holden up, and maintained with honour. The silly child learneth in his tender age how to speak, to read, to write: young lads bestow their time in the study of other liberal sciences: as years come on, and wit increaseth, so finally, the whole course of learning is run over. Again, the art of Grammar is wont erst to be learned, and than Logic afterward: natural Philosophy goeth not before eloquence in our schools: Geometry is first read, & than Geography. So that the studies of good letters have their times in respect of man's age, they have their times in the order of learning: yea they have a time, that maketh us all to bestow therein our time, and to study each faculty in due time, I mean that special time they flourish in. I may not deny but that learning hath at all times ben well accounted of, in most countries the skill of divers languages well thought of, & learned men to have been always rewarded. what is than that special time wherein all studies do flooryshe? Learning may be right well compared unto the flouts & fruits of the earth, and the special time of learning, unto their singular seasons. In May, flowers: in june, Cherries: at Harvest, corn: in September, Grapes: so fareth it in the study of good letters. There was a time when the art of grammar was so much esteemed, that Gramariens proceeded masters thereof as woorshypfully, as other professors now do in any other faculty. Than was it honourable to be a Poet: honourable I say, for that the Poet Laureate enjoyed the honour of a Palatine. that time is paste. There was a time when Logic & Astrology only so wearied the heads of young scholars, yea and busied old age also, that true Philosophy in deed was almost forgotten, eloquence defaced, the languages exiled. that time is past. Not long since happy was he that had any skill in the greek tongue, he was thought a great scholar that could make a greek verse. Now a days, who studieth not rather the Hebrew language? Where have you almost any greek author printed? Geography lay hidden many hundred years in darkness and oblivion, without regard and price: of late who taketh not upon him to discourse of the whole world, and each province thereof particularly, even by hearsay, although in the first principles of that art, he be altogether ignorant and unskilful? This time is now. So long as Poetry was esteemed, the art of grammar accounted of, Logic much made of, Astrology well thought of: Divine Poets, good Gramariens, perfect Logiciens, excellent Astronomers nowhere wanted.  
A Virgile can you never want where one Mecènas is. Honour & promotion bestowed upon the maintainers of controversies in religion, hath brought grey hears from endless Sophistry, from Scotus formalites, from Buridan and Burley, from Holcot, from Bricot, from Vademecum, from Dormi secure, and taught younger years rather to pass through Aristotle and his interpreters, than ever to dwell therein: caused them to study the scriptures, to read over the fathers, to confer the counsels, to learn the greek and Hebrew languages, to search the Chalday Paraphraste, to peruse the old Doctors, to translate the new writers, to heap up common places, to discourse of sects, to write cunningly, to preach eloquently: and made them to be, for brawling Sophisters, grave Philosophers, for formal Dunces, plain doctors, for rude questionaries, divine Orators, for unskilful schoolmen, eloquent and grave divines.  
It is now almost one hundred & fifty years ago, that Don Henrico, son of john the first of that name King in Portugal, and Nepheu unto our King Henry the fourth, made his viage after the conquest of Sep●a to the Canaries, and encouraged the Portugals to search the coasts of Africa, and to seek the lands thereabout not spoken of tofore. His grand Nepheu john the second, so furthered this enterprise, that the Portugal ships halled the Cape of good hope, discovered Aethiopia, and sailed where antiquity denied passage, beyond all Africa into the Indian seas. He sent also expert and cunning travelers into Egypt, and the red sea coasts to espy what way the Portugals might look for beyond the Cape of good hope to calicut in India: the which voyage in his son Emanuel his time, was prosperously taken in hand by Vasquez Gama, the ninth day of july, in the year of our Lord .1497. & happily ended in july again, two years after, to his great credit and preferment, to the immortal fame & honour of his Prince and country. Here began the study of Geography, that ever since Ptolomeus reign lay trodden under foot, & buried in dust and ashes, to spring up again, and by the relations of skilful travelers in Europe, Africa, & asia: through the discovery of the far Indies, the Moluccaes', & new found lands, of late so to be wondered at, as no other faculty more. I dare be bold to say, that generally all Christians, jews, Turks, moors, Infidels, & Barbares be this day in love with geography. The wild and rogishe Tartars might for famine perish in the winter, if they in the summer skilfully followed not the sun. The heathen Giapans divided the world into three parts: Africa was described by a Moor. The jews report the estates of all countries to the Turks. The Turkish basha's govern the sweetest provinces in Europe, Africa, and Asia, no men greater travelers than Christians. Who but Geographers do teach us what parts of the earth be cold, warm, or temperate? Of whom do we learn how to divide the world into parts, the parts into provinces, the provinces into shires? of Geographers. unto whom have we to make recourse for Maps, Globes, tables, and Cards, wherein the divers countries of the world are set down? unto Geographers. Set geography aside, you shall neither be able to get intelligences of the situation and strength of any city, nor of the limits and bounds of any country, nor of the rule and government of any kingdom, nor be able well to travail out of your own doors. will you see what wise and expert travelers, skilful in geometry and Astronomy, (for that is to be a Geographer in deed) be able to do? 
King of Portugal & Algarbs, Lord of Guinea, of the conquest, navigation, and traffic into Ethiopia, Arabia, Persia, & India.  Look you on the King of Portugals title: the two parts, of the three therein, were achieved by Vasques Gama, and other traveylers' adventures. Consider the fruits, the drugs, the pearl, the treasure, the millions of gold and silver, the spaniards have brought out of the West Indies since the first voyage of Columbus: The great commodities our nation reapeth by the travail of our countrymen into Barbary, Guiny, and moscovia, will be a sufficient testimony unto all us Englishmen, what it is to be a skilful traveler, what to be a painful Geographer, and learned. Desire of rule breedeth victories, victories come by conquests, conquests are furthered by travail, travail can not be maintained without great wealth, wealth maketh all travail pleasant. The Northwesterne viage, be it never so full of difficulties, will become as plausible as any other journey, if our passengers may return with plenty of silver, silks, and pearl. Let Columbus, Americus, Cortesius, be well set forth again, and bountefully rewarded, you shall hear of other new found lands yet altogether unknown. Let Gama be set in place, and Gama will tell you the situation, the manners, the force and wealth of foreign nations▪ for Gama his endeavour was, not only by his friend Coelius to descry the country wheresoever he came, but also to learn himself the riches, strength, and conditions of the people. Honour maintaineth art: and the skill in Geography, as all other sciences, hath but a time of preferment, the which than chief might be looked for, when it is most esteemed. This in the noble mind of Cadamust bred that earnest desire, after Don Henrico his example, to travail, to pen his own adventures into the Southeast and East parts, to make the navigation of Gama and his companions known unto the world. The occasions, the good success, the great commodities whereof, Barros a counsellor of the Portugal King, painted out long ago in many books, Osorius of late, historically hath written the same in few. This made Marcus Paulus Venetus a courtier in Tartary, Hayton the Armenian to become a Frenchman, jews Vartomanne a traveler in Ethiopia, Brocardus an inhabiter of jury, & each one of them to leave his painful journey with posterity in writing. This inflamed the spaniards to take upon them the discovery of the West and Southwesterne lands, done and written by Columbus, Pinzonus, Alfonsus, Cortesius, and Americus, of whom that region America hath name. Whose long letters and tedious reports of things there brought to pass in the conquest of that half world, the strange beasts, the sundry sorts of fruits, the joys and riches the which that country yieldeth, the manners and fashions of the people, their cities, and princely palaces, their nobility, their manner of government, their wars, their servile estate under the kings of Spain, their conversion unto the Christian faith, P. Martyr a learned and grave man, borne at Angleria in the duchy of Milane, than Precedent of the Spanish kings counsel for the west Indies, gathered into one volume, and leaving a side all superfluous narrations, made thereof, as it were, one brief and continual history. This volume divided he into eight Decades, after the Greek word, so calling the sundry parcels thereof, for that each one containeth in it ten particular books or chapters. R. Eden our countryman did into English, when K. Philippe was in England, the three first Decades, and the fourth also, though under a wrong title, according to the dutch Printers edition, wherein the fift, sixth, seventh, and eight Decades were left out. He translated moreover Gonzales Ferdinandus Ouiedus breviary of the west Indies, & gathered together out of many mighty and huge works, some other pretty pamflettes concerning the spaniards and Portugals voyages into the late discovered lands, adding thereto certain discourses of the north parts. These his aforesaid doings, as few men's works at the first come exactly abroad, this painful translator minded, if not to amend, at the least to augment, by putting thereunto in English jews Vartomannus Navigation into Egypt, Arabia, Syria, Persia, and India, with our Merchants Moscovian and Persian traveles: but death prevented his purpose, not suffering him to accomplish his desire.  
Christian charity therefore unto the party departed, caused me to help his works forward: Nature moved me to take some pains in placing orderly, that which he had confusely given out, the better to direct, and the more to profit the reader: My profession enforced me to cut of some superfluous translations, and to fill up the rest of his doings with P. Martyrs other writings, and finally to furnish his want with my own store. Hoping and persuading with myself, that if God likewise call me from these worldly Navigations, and earthly descriptions, before my other travel in this faculty, taken long since in hand, be ended: some other professor of Cosmography will so reward me after my death, as presently of this dead man I do deserve. Other credit seek I none therefore, I look for no praise, I hope not for honour, I gape for no gain by this kind of study. I know this day no place, no preferment, no public chair, no ordinary lecture, no common stipend, no special reward due unto the students in Geography: no not at this time, when this faculty was never more set by: no not in this realm, where it never more flourished. The honourable name of a Christian, and the infallible fruits thereof, ever inclined me, even from my tender years, for the small portion of learning that god hath lent me, to do good, if I could, unto many: and specially to make those my friends and well doers known unto the world, by whose benevolence & favour I do live, and am maintained. In the small number whereof, for amongst many well willers I find but few well doers, your Honour (right noble Lady) my Lord & you, his noble children and yours, since my first return from beyond the seas, must I confess to have stood me chief in steed: & humbly acknowledge, the first yearly pension I ever was assured of in England, to have been by your Ladyship bestowed on me. Wherefore as I will most willingly yield unto many other of your honours gentlemen to come of great houses, to have wealthier friends, larger possessions & revenues than I, to be more active, more comely, more wise, politic, learned, & to have seen more: so in humble duty, loyal service, sincere affection & good will to your Honour, I may, I can, I will contend with any of them all, even to the vttermust force and power of my heart, head, body, life, blood, mind, & soul. In testimony whereof, and full assurance of my service unto you for ever, these last doings of R. Eden newly increased, my first labours in our language, his history & mine of travel in the west & East Indies, altogether in one volume, dutifully do I present unto your Honour, with all humility praying & most earnestly requesting your good Ladyship, that you will vouchsafe it, & by leisure, in this journey, the which my Lord and you have determined into the west country, to let your page read them over to your Honour's recreation, as one of the principal causes wherefore at this time they were set forth. If variety of matter, occurrents out of foreign countries, news of new found lands, the sundry sorts of government, the different manners & fashions of divers nations, the wonderful works of nature, the sights of strange trees, fruits, foul, and beasts, the infinite treasure of Pearl, Gold, Silver, & joys may recreate and delight a mind traveled in weighty matters, & wearied with great affairs: credit me, good Madam, in listening unto this work, shall you have recreation, you shall find delight in reading over these relations, wherein so new, so strange, so divers, so many recreations and delights of the mind are expressed. Your Honour's good liking thereof, will be to me no small contentation for this work painfully done, a good occasion speedily to finish the rest of my own labours concerning this faculty, a great encouragement and comfort to bestow my whole time hereafter only in that study, wherewith all my former knowledge in Philosophy and Geography may end. The which, conveniently now, I am in good hope to perform, with my Lord and your Ladyshyps' good leave, and continuance of my duty and effectual desire to do your Honours the better service.  
At London the 4. day. of july. 1577. Your honours servant humbly at commandment. Richard wills.   

R. Wills Preface unto the Reader, wherein is set down a general sum as it were of the whole work.  
THis great and large bolume consisteth principally of four parts, agreeable unto those four corners of the world, whereunto the skilful seamen and merchants adventurers of late years have chiefly travailed, and yet specially are wont to resort. The first part containeth four Decades, written by P. Martyr, 
The first part, the first Decade  a learned & grave counsellor of Charles the Emperor fift of that name, concerning the spaniards voyages Southwestwarde, & their famous exploits done in these newly discovered parts of the world, the which usually we now call the west Indies. Hereunto have we added Gonzalus Eerdinandus Ouiedus brief history touching the same matter, so that the first part of our volume hath five particular books. In the first whereof cap 1.2.3 4 and 5. P. Martyr describeth Columbus first and second navigations and discoveries of certain Islands made by him specially and his brother. In the 6. chapter or book thereof (for both names we find) is set forth Columbus third voyage, and the discovery of Peru, in the maigne west Indish land. In the seventh, his troubles both in the west Indies, and return into spain with his brother, being both prisoners. The 8. is of P. Alfonsus' voyages that same way. In the 9 are declared the travails of Vincent and Peter Pinzoni, and other Spaniards likewise thither from Palos. The 10. is a conclusion of the whole Decade, with particular mention of some special novelties, & Columbus fourth voyage began. So that in the first Decade you have historically set down the discovery of the west Indies, taken in hand about the year of our Lord .1492. by Columbus and his companions, until the year 1510. as P. Martyr witnesseth fol. 8. 43 47. and 54. This worthy travailer and skilful seaman died at Validolid in spain. An. dom. 1506. as Lopez reporteth cap. 25. in his general history de las India's.  
The second Decade containeth Peru matters, 
The second Decade.  entitled by P. Martyr, Creditus Cortinens, that is, a continent or maigne land, as in deed it is of itself with the rest of America, in like manner as Europe, Affryk, & Asia, be one continent or maigne land united together. In the first and second chapters of this Decade, shall you read the voyages of Fogeda and Nicuesa, to Dariena. In the third, Colmenaris travails, Nicuesa his death, and the indish king Comogrus benevolence: In the fourth, Vasquez Nunnez doings in Vraba gulf. His conquest of rebellious Barbarian kings in the fift. In the sixth Quicedus & Colmenaris embassage out of Dariena to Hispaniola, and the religion of king Commendator in Cuba. The seventh book containeth Petrus Aria's journey to Paria in Peru. The .8. the dissension betwixt the Spaniards and Portugals for their bounds, and making of five Bishops in these newly found parts of the world. In the 9 are showed the rivers of Darien, and philosophically the causes of so great waters there. That country is described in the .10 and the extreme hunger, abidden by the companions of Nicuesa, set forth.  
In the first, second, and third chapters of the third Decade, is contained an abridgement of Vascus Nunnez relations, 
The third Decade.  concerning his voyage to the south sea, for it lieth south from Darien, usually termed now a days Mar deal zur, and may also be called the wide east Indyshe Ocean. The discovery thereof made by Nunnez, the king subdued by him, especially king Commogrus christening by the name of Charles, and the winning of king Tumanama or Tubanama and his country. In the fourth chapter shall you find Columbus fourth viage, began An. do. 1502 to the main west Indyshe land, with the description of some part thereof, lying betwixt our Atlantike or western Ocean, and the aforesaid Mar deal zur, as Vraba, and Beragua. In respect of the history and course of years, this book might have been placed before the second Decade, but it should seem that these reports came no sooner to. P. Martyr his hands, wherefore he began this fourth book right well thus. I was determined. etc. The fifth book containeth. P. Aria's journey mentioned dec. 2 lib. 7. to the north side of Peru, wherein Carthagena and S. Martha, two famous havens, do stand, with a description of the country and people thereof. In the sixth you have a disputation touching the Levant stream or eastern surge of the sea, the discovery of Baccalaos done by Cabot. P. Aria's arrival in Darien, the building of. S. Maria antiqua there, with other fortresses, finally the commodities and unwholesomeness of Darien. In the .7 8. & .9 books, shall you have a description of Hispaniola, Cuba, and other Islands thereabout, done by Andrea's Moralis. And in the .10 shall you read of the Island Dives in Mar deal zur, of the king thereof subdued by Andreas Moralis, of Pearls & the finding thereof, of Petrus Arias Captains doings against the Cannibals, of the Barbares fowling, & the manner of the gathering of gold in Dariena.  
The fourth Decade, for so was it named in the Spaniards edition of. 
The fourth Decade.  P. Martyr his works set forth at Alcala in Spain An. do. 1530. though the Basile and Cullen printers have entitled it, De insulis nuper inventis, that is, of Islands lately found out, to wit, after Columbus voyages: this book I say was by. P. Mar. culled out of the Indian registers, containing special notes that seemed unto him most meet to be published: as the discovery of certain Islands and creeks, namely jucatan (done by Fernandes of Corduba & his companions) Cozumella, the islands of Sacrifice, the Islands of women, the province Coluacan and Palmaria etc. by john Gri●alua & his fellows: the jucaians' captivity and discovery of Florida made by those spaniards which Diegus Velasquen sent out of Cuba, and Ferd. Cortesius first navigation, wherein he conquered Potanchana in new Spain, the death of Valdivia, the execution of Vascus Nunnez, king Muteezuna his presents to Charles the Emperor, his books, letters, and superstitions, finally the ruin of Hispaniola, and utter decay thereof, if heed should not be taken in tyme.  
Last of all Gonzalus Ferdinandus Ouedus history containeth in .18. several chapters (each one whereof hath his proper title) a brief declaration of the west Indysh navigation, of the metals the which are found in those lately discovered lands, of the manners of the people, rites, customs, and ceremonies, of the beasts, fowls, birds, worms, fishes, seas, rivers, springs, trees, plants, herbs, & divers other things that are engendered there both on the land & in the water. To this have we added certain special reports of new Spain or Mexico, of Peru▪ of Rio de la Plata, & the country lying thereunto, of the lands Laborador & Baccalaos, with the discovering of Florida. And thus much for the first part of this volume.  
The second part of this work appeareth what it is, by the title thereof set down. 
The second part.  Fol. 230. to wit, a discourse to prove that there is a passage to the Moluccaes' by the northwest, the which presently. M. Cap. Furbisher attempteth, with certain reports of the province China in Cathayo, where he hath to strike in his voyage, and thirdly of Giapan, and other Islands by the way. The which second part, wherein matter concerning the northwest is handled, is so much the shorter, by how much the first part seemed overlong: besides that the particularities of this corner of the world are not yet so thoroughly known, but that other writers shall doubtless in more ample manner employ their labour therein after the return of our northwesterne travailers. The which I wish to be most happy and prosperous, as they most valiantly & painfully, to the renown of our english nation, do show to have taken it in hand.  
In the third part shall you find a description of the northeasterne frosty seas and kingdoms lying that way: as Moscovia, Schondia, 
The third part.  or Denmark, Groenlande, Island, Laponia, Norway, Suecia▪ or Swethlande, Bothnia, and Gothlande: out of Zeiglerus, Paulus iovius, Haiton, and Sebastian free lord or Baron of Herbestein, with the countries as well north and North-east beyond Moscovia, namely Petzora, juhra, and other provinces of the Tartars: as also the voyages made through Moscovia by the merchants of London into Persia, containing many special things worth the knowledge, both of the country itself, the commodities thereof, the manners of the people, and the privileges granted unto our merchants by the Sophy or Shaugh the Persian king.  
Finally in the fourth part are set down our merchants voyages into Guinea, 
The fourth part.  and the other parcels of Africa lying towards the Southeast, jews Vertomannus navigations into egypt, Ethiopia, Arabia, Syria, Persia, and east India, even to the fruitful Moluccaes', with the prices of drugs and other wares brought from thence. Whereto for a conclusion, have we added partly out of Maximilian Transiluanus letter written unto the Cardinal of Saltzburge, and partly out of P. Martyrs other works, that famous navigation made round about the whole world: the contention betwixt the Portugals and spaniards for the Moluccaes', & the decyding thereof by Pope Alexander the sixth: and last of all the abridgement of. P. Martyrs four last Decades, wherein especially that noble and glorious conquest of Mexico is written. Generally this much of the four parts of this large volume. The lesser parcels and special matter contained in each part, you have so exactly rehearsed in the table of the Decades. Fol. 173. and in the residue of the whole work before each chapter so evidently set down, that any particular table thereof at all the reader greatly needeth not, if so be that he be able to remember in what region of the world, East, West, North, or South, that be, the which he looketh for.  
Now concerning. R. eden's own doings, sincerely to say what I think, and curteousely to yield him that due praise the which worthily these his labours deserve, yet not to flatter him neither, where any fault hath been committed: as highly he was to be commended for Englyshing so strange, so wonderful, so profitable histories as these are, nothing inferior to the books of ancient writers, far exceeding the multitude of foolish commentaries and frivolous translations, to to licentiousely used in our time: So may the gentle reader forbear his oversight, in so great a work, where some Spanish proverb, harsh latin phrase, or unclean speech may seem hardly englished, or any rash note to shame the text. I would excuse him for translating the days by the latin names, as Fol. 12. Non. April. thus. At the Nones of Apryll. item, 3. Idus Octobris. thus. The third day of the Ideses of October. item. Fol. 17. tertio Kalend. Maij. thus. The third day before the kalends of may: meaning in deed, the fifth day of Apryll, the .13. day of October, the 29. of April: but therein it should seem that he followed his own humour, for he observeth the same phrase of translating throughout. P. Martyrs whole work. Many of his english words cannot be excused in my opinion for smelling to much of the Latin, as Dominators. Folly 5. Ponderouse. Fol. 23. dictionaries. Fol. 25. Portentouse. Fol. 28. Antiques. Fol. 31. despicable. Eol. 387. Solicitate. Fol. 76. obsequious. Fol. 90. homicide. Fol. 390. imbibed. Fol. 395. Destructive. Fol. 276. Prodigious. Fol. 279. with other such like: in the steed of Lords, weighty, subjects, wonderful, ancient, low, careful, dutiful, manslaughter, drunken, noisome, monstrous. etc. the which faults he confesseth in other his own verses, writing thus of himself.  
I have not for every word asked counsel  
of eloquent Eliot, or Sir Thomas Moor:  
Take it therefore as I have intended,  
the faults with favour may soon be a mended.   

Certain Preambles here follow, gathered by R. Eden, for the better understanding of the whole work.  

Of the first discovering of the west Indies.  
A Certain Caravel sailing in the West Ocean, about the coasts of Spain, had a forcybly and continual wind from the East, whereby it was driven to a land unknown, 
A hard beginning.  and not described in any map or card of the sea, and was driven still along by the coast of the same for the space of many days, until it came to a haven, where in a short time the most part of the mariners, being long before very weak and feeble by reason of hunger and travail, died: So that only the Pilot, with three or four other, remained alive. And not only they that died, did not enjoy the Indies which they first discovered to their misfortune, but the residue also that lived had in manner as little fruition of the same: not leaving, or at the least not openly publishing any memory thereof, neither of the place, or what it was called, or in what year it was found: Albeit, the fault was not theirs, but rather the malice of other, or the envy of that which we call fortune. I do not therefore marvel, that the ancient histories affirm, that great things proceed and increase of small and obscure beginnings, sith we have seen the same verified in this finding of the Indies, being so notable and new a thing. We need not be curious to seek the name of the Pilot, sith death made a short end of his doings. Some will, that he came from Andaluzia, and traded to the Islands of Canaria, and the Island of Madera, when this large and mortal navigation chanced unto him. Other say that he was a Byscanne, 
The Pilot that first found the Indies.  and traded into England and France. Gther also, that he was a Portugal, & that either he went or came from Mina or India: which agreeth well with the name of these new lands, 
Mina.  as I have said before. Again, some there be that say that he brought the Caravel to Portugal, or to the Island of Madera, or to some other of the Islands called De los Azores. Yet do none of them affirm any thing, although they all affirm that the Pilot died in the house of Christopher Colon, with whom remained all such writings and annotations as he had made of his voyage in the sad caravel, aswell of such things as he observed both by land and sea, as also of the elevation of the pole in those lands which he had discovered.   

What manner of man Christopher Colon (otherwise called Columbus) was, and how he came first to the knowledge of the Indies.  
CHristopher Colon was borne in Cugureo, or (as some say) in Nerui, a village in the territory of Genua in Italy. He descended as some think, of the house of the Pelestreles of Placentia in Lombardy. He began of a child to be a mariner: of whose art they have great exercise on the river of Genua. He traded many years into Suria, and other parts of the East. After this, he became a master in making cards for the sea, whereby he had great vantage. He came to Portugal to know the reason & description of the south coasts of Africa, and the navigations of the Portugals, thereby to make his cards more perfect to be sold. He married in Portugal, as some say: or as many say, in the Island of Madera, where he dwelled at such time as the said caravel arrived there, whose Pilot sojourned in his house, and died also there, bequeathing to Colon his card of the description of such new lands as he had found, whereby Colon had the first knowledge of the Indies. Some have thought that Colon was well learned in the Latin tongue and the science of cosmography: and that he was thereby first moved to seek the lands of Antipodes, and the rich Island of Cipango, whereof Marchus Paulus writeth. Also that he had red what Plato in his dialogs of Timeus and Cricias, writeth of the great Island of Atlantide, and of a great land in the west Ocean undiscovered, being bigger than Asia and Africa. Furthermore that he had knowledge what aristotel and Theophrastus say in their books of marvels, where they write that certain merchants of Carthage, sailing from the straights of Gibraltar toward the West and South, found after many days a great Island not inhabited, yet replenished with all things requisite, and having many navigable rivers. In deed Colan was not greatly learned: 
Colon was not much learned.  yet of good understanding. And when he had knowledge of the said new lands by the information of the dead Pilot, 
Colon conferred with learned men.  made relation thereof to certain learned men, with whom he conferred as touching the like things mentioned of old authors. He communicated this secret and conferred chiefly with a friar, named john Perez of Marchena, that dwelled in the monastery of Rabida. So that I verily believe, that in manner all that he declared, and many things more that he left unspoken, were written by the said Spanish Pilot that died in his house. For I am persuaded, that if Colon by science attained to the knowledge of the Indies, he would long before have communicate this secret to his own country men the Genueses, that travail all the world for gains, and not have come into Spain for this purpose. But doubtless he never thought of any such thing, before he chanced to be acquainted with the said Pilot, who found those lands by fortune, according to the saying of Pliny, Quod ars docere non potuit, casus invenit. That is, That art could not teach, chance found. Albeit, the more Christian opinion is, to think that God of his singular providence and infinite goodness, at the length with eyes of compassion as it were looking down from heaven upon the sons of Adam, so long kept under Satan's captivity, intended even then (for causes to him only known) to raise those winds of mercy whereby that caravel (herein most like unto the ship of Noah, whereby the remnant of the whole world was saved, as by this Caravel this new world received the first hope of their salvation) was driven to these lands. But we will now declare what great things followed of this small beginning, and how Colon followed this matter, revealed unto him not without God's providence.   

What labour and travail Colon took in attempting his first voyage to the Indies.  
AFter the death of the Pilot & mariners of the Spanish caravel that discovered the Indies, Christopher Colon purposed to seek the same. But in how much more he desired this, the less was his power to accomplish his desire. For, beside that of himself he was not able to furnish one ship, he lacked also the favour of a king, under whose protection he might so enjoy the riches he hoped to find, that none other might take the same from him, or defeat him thereof. And seeing the king of Portugal occupied in the conquest of Africa, and the Navigations of the East, which were then first attempted, the king of Castyle likewise no less busied in the wars of Granada, he sent to his brother Bartholomewe Colon (who was also privy to this secret) to practise with the king of England (Henry the seventh) being very rich and without wars, 
King Henry the seventh.  promising to bring him great riches in short time, if he would show him favour, and furnish him with ships to discover the new Indies, whereof he had certain knowledge. But neither here being able to bring his suit to pass, he caused the matter to be moved to the king of Portugal Don Alonso, the fifth of that name: at whose hands he found neither favour nor money, 
barnard knew not all things.  forasmuch as the Licenciat Calzadilla the bishop of Viseo, and one master Rodrigo, men of credit in the science of cosmography, withstood him, and contended that there neither was nor could any gold or other riches be found in the west, as Colon affirmed. By reason whereof he was very sad and pensive: but yet was not discouraged, or despaired of the hope of his good adventure, which he afterward found. This done, he took shipping at Lisburne, and came to Palos of Moguer, where he communed with Martin Alonso Pinzon, an expert Pilot, who offered himself unto him. After this, disclosing the whole secrets of his mind to john Perez of Marchena (a friar of thorder of saint Frances in Rabida, & well learned in cosmography) and declaring unto him how by following the course of the Sun by a temperate voyage, rich and great lands might be found: the friar greatly commended his enterprise, and gave him counsel to break the matter to the Duke of Medina Sidonia, Don Enrique of Guzman, a great lord, and very rich: and also to Don Luis of Cerda, the Duke of Medina Celi, who at that time had great provision of ships well furnished in his haven of Santa Maria. But whereas both these Dukes took the matter for a dream, and as a thing devised of an Italian deceiver, who (as they thought) had before with like pretence deluded the kings of England and Portugal, the friar gave him courage to go to the court of the catholic prince's Don Ferdinando, and lady Isabella princes of Castyle, affirming that they would be joyful of such news: And for his better furtherance herein, wrote ●etters by him to friar Ferdinando of Talavera the queen's confessor. Christopher Colon therefore, repaired to the court of the catholic princes, in the year .1486. and delivered unto their hands the petition of his request, as concerning the discovering of the new Indies. But they being more careful, and applying all their mind how they might drive the moors out of the kingdom of Granada, 
The conquest of Granada.  which great enterprise they had already taken in hand, did little or nothing esteem the matter. But Colon not thus discouraged, found the means to declare his suit to such as had sometimes private communication with the king. Yet because he was a stranger, and went but in simple apparel, nor otherwise credited then by the letter of a grey friar, they believed him not, neither gave ear to his words, whereby he was greatly tormented in his imagination. Only Alonso of Quintanilia, the kings chief auditor, gave him meat and drink at his own charges, and heard gladly such things as he declared of the lands not then found: desiring him in the mean time to be content with that poor entertainment, and not to despair of his enterprise: putting him also in good comfort that he should, at one time or other, come to the speech of the catholic princes. And thus shortly after, by the means of Alonso of Quintanilia, Colon was brought to the presence and audience of the Cardinal Don Pero Gonzales of Mendoza, archbishop of Toledo, 
The archbishop of Toledo,  a man of great revenues and authority with the king and queen, who brought him before them, after that he well perceived and examined his intent. And by this means was his suit heard of the catholic princes, who also red the book of his memorials which he presented unto them. And although at the first they took it for vain and false that he promised, nevertheless they put him in good hope that he should be well dispatched when they had finished the wars of Granada which they had now in hand. With which answer, Colon began to revive his spirits, with hope to be better esteemed, and more favourably to be heard among the gentlemen & noble men of the court, who before took him only for a crafty fellow and deceiver: and was nothing dismayed or discouraged when soever he debated the matter with them, although many judged him fantastical, as is the manner of ignorant men, to call all such as attempt any thing beyond their reach, and the compass of their knowledge, thinking the world to be no bigger than the cagies wherein they are brought up and live. But to return to Colon. So hot and urgent was the siege of Granada, that they presently granted him his demand to seek the new lands, and to bring from thence gold, silver, pearls, precious stones, spices, and such other rich things. They gave him also the tenth part of all the revenues and customs due unto the king, of all such lands as he should discover, not doing prejudice in any thing to the king of Portugal. The particulars of this agreement were made in the town called Sancta Fe: and the privilege of the reward in Granada the xxx day of Apryll, the same year that the city was won. And whereas the said catholic princes had not money presently to dispatch Colon, Luis of. S. Angel, the kings secretary of accomtes, lent them six Quentes of Maraz, which in a gross sum make xvi thousand ducades.  
In the scutcheon of arms given to Columbus by Don Ferdinando and queen Isabel, these verses were written.  Por Castilia, y por Leon. Nuevo mondo hallo Colon. 
For Castille and for Leon.  
A new world found was by Colon.   

Why they were called Indies.  
SOme think that the people of the new world were called Indians, because they are of the colour of the east Indians. And although (as it semmeth to me) they differ much in colour and fashions, 
The colour of the East Indians.  yet is it true, that of India they were called Indians. India is properly called that great province of Asia, in the which great Alexander kept his wars, and was so named of the river Indus: and is divided into many kingdoms confining with the same. From this great India (called the East India) came great companies of men, as writeth Herodotus, and inhabited that part of Ethiopia that lieth between the sea Bermeia (otherwise called the red sea, or the gulf of Arabia) and the river of Nilus: all which regions that great Christian prince Prester john doth now possess. The said Indians prevailed so much, that they utterly changed the customs and name of that land, and called it India: by reason whereof, Ethiopia also hath of long time been called India. And hereupon came it that Aristotle, Seneca, and certain other old authors said, that India was not far from Spain. After this also, of later days our west India was so called, of the said India of Prester john where the Portugals had their trade: For the Pilot of the caravel that was first driven by forcible wind to an unknown land in the west Ocean, called the same India, because the Portugals so called such lands as they had lately discovered eastward. Christophor Colon also, after the said Pilot, called the west lands by the same name: Albeit some that take Colonus for an expert Cosmographer, think that he so named them of the East India, as to be the furthest and unknown end thereof, reaching into the West, under the other hemisphery or half globe of the earth beneath us: affirming that when he first attempted to discover the Indies, he went chief to seek the rich Island of Cipango, which falleth on the part of great China or Cathay, as writeth Marcus Paulus Venetus, and other: And that he should sooner come thither by following the course of the Sun Westward, then against the same.   

Of the colour of the Indians.  
ONe of the marvelous things that God useth in the composition of man, is colour: which doubtless can not be considered without great admiration, in holding one to be white, and an other black, being colours utterly contrary: some likewise to be yellow, which is between black and white: and other of other colours, as it were of divers liveries. And as these colours are to be marveled at, even so is it to be considered, how they differ one from an other, as it were by degrees, forasmuch as some men are white after divers sorts of whiteness, yellow after divers manners of yellow, & black after divers sorts of blackness: & how from white they go to yellow by discolouring to brown & red, and to black by ash colour, & murry, somewhat lighter than black, 
The colour of the west Indians.  & tawny like unto the west Indians, which are altogether in general either purple or tawny, like unto sodde Quinses, or of the colour of chestnuts or olives, which colour is to them natural: and not by their going naked, as many have thought: albeit their nakedness have somewhat helped thereunto. Therefore in like manner, and with such diversity as men are commonly white in Europe, and black in Africa, even with like variety are they tawny in these Indies, with divers degrees diversly inclining more or less to black or white. No less marvel is it to consider, that men are white in Seville, and black at the cape of Buena Speranza, and of Chestnut colour at the river of Plata, being all in equal degrees from the Equinoctial line. Likewise, that the men of Africa and Asia, that live under the burnt line (called Zona Torrida) are black: and not they that live beneath, or on this side the same line, as in Mexico, jucatan, Quauhtema, Lian, Nicaragua, Panama, Santo Domingo, Paria, Cape Saint Augustine, Lima, Quito, and other lands of Peru, which touch in the same Equinoctial. For in all the tract of these coasts, certain black men were found only in Quarequa, when Vaschus Nunnez of Balboa discovered the sea of Sur. By reason whereof it may seem, that such variety of colours proceedeth of man, and not of the earth: which may well be, although we be all borne of Adam & Eve, & know not the cause why God hath so ordained it, otherwise then to consider that his divine majesty hath done this, as infinite other, to declare his omnipotency and wisdom, 
God's wisdom & power is seen in his works.  in such diversities of colours, as appear not only in the nature of man, but the like also in beasts, birds, and flowers, where divers and contrary colours are seen in one little feather, or the leaves growing out of one little stalk. another thing is also greatly to be noted, as touching these Indians: and this is, that their hear is not curled, as is the moors and Ethiopians that inhabit the same clime: neither are they bald, except very seldom, and that but little. All which things may give further occasions to Philosophers to search the secrets of nature, and complexions of men, with the novelties of the new world.   

❧ A most ancient testimony of the West Indies, by the writing of the divine Philosopher Plato.  
PLato in his famous and divine Dialogue, named Timeus, where he entreateth of the universal nature and frame of the whole world, taketh for his principle the most ancient history of an Island, in time of great antiquity, named Athlantides, making also mention of the king, people, and inhabitants of the same: and that they kept war against the athenians, and were overcome of them. Plato also there inducing the said history to be rehearsed by one named Critia, who affirmed that he had often heard it of his Uncle, who was in the time of Solon, one of the seven sages of the Greeks. This Critia declared, that when Solon went into Egypt to a certain city named Sdim, situate upon the river of Nilus, where the division and recurring of the river, maketh the Island Delta, he there spoke with certain learned priests, very skilful in knowledge of antiquities of many worlds past. Insomuch that they made mention of many things that were before the flood of Noah, or Deucalion, and also before the universal conflagration or burning of the world in the time of Phaeton, forasmuch as the wars between the people of the said Island of Athlantides and the athenians, was long before the general flood, and the conflagration aforesaid. Plato induceth the priest, speaking to Solon in manner as followeth.  
Things most marvelous and true (O Solon) remain in ancient writings and memory of our predecessors, and old ages long before our times. But above all things, one exceedeth all admiration for the greatness and singularity thereof, which is this: It is in our records of most antiquities, that in times past your city of Athens hath oftentimes kept wars against an innumerable multitude of nations which came from the sea Athlantike, in manner into all Europe and Asia: whereas now appeareth no such nation, forasmuch as the said sea is now all over navigable: And yet at that time had, in the mouth, and as it were in the entry (where you place the Columns of Hercules) an Island which was said to be much greater than all Africa and Asia, and that from thence was passage to many other Islands near thereabout, and from the said Islands to the continent or firm land, which was right over against it near unto the sea: Yet, that within the mouth, there was a little gulf with a port: the deep sea without, was the true sea, and the land without was the true continent. This Island was named Athlantides, and in it was a king of marvelous great power and might, who had the dominion of the said Island, and many other, and also a great part of the continent land whereof we have spoken, and much more toward our parts also, forasmuch as they were dominatours of the third part of the world containing Africa, Egypt, and Europe, even unto the sea Tirrhenum. The power therefore of them being then so great, they came to invade both your country and ours, and all other that are within the Columns of Hercules. Then (O Solon) the virtue of your city showed itself famous in magnanimity and feats of arms, with the assemblance of the other Grecians, in resisting their great power, until you had driven them out of our lands, and restored us to our liberty. But shortly after that this enterprise was achieved, befell a marvelous great earthquake, and exundation or overflowing of the sea, which continued for the space of one day and night: In the which the earth opened itself, and inglutted all those valiant and warlike men, and the said Island Athlantides sunk into the bottom of the sea, which was the occasion that never from that time forward, any ship could sail that way, by reason of the great mud and slime which remained of the drowned Island.  
This is the sum of those things which old Critia said he had understood of Solon. And certainly these words of Plato of the said Island, have caused great contention among many great Philosophers, which have written commentaries upon the said Dialogue of Timeus composed by Plato: insomuch that the same in those days being utterly unknown, many have taken this narration of Solon, for an allegorical fable, and have interpreted the same in divers senses and meanings. But it may now well appear the true meaning hereof to be this: that Plato intending to write of the universal frame of the world, the which he knew to be made an habitation for the divine best man, and also beholding therein the great ornament and beauty of the heaven and stars, whereby man might know his God and creator, it might seem to him a thing to far from reason, that only two parts thereof should be inhabited, and the other part desolate and deprived of men: and that the Sun and stars might seem to show their light only half their course without profit, shining only upon the sea and desolate places, destitute of man and other living creatures. And therefore Plato had in great admiration the history of the said Egyptian priest, making mention of an other part of the world beside Asia, Europa, and Africa, and thought it worthy to be rehearsed in the beginning of his divine Dialogue aforesaid. We ought therefore certainly to think ourselves most bound unto God, that in these our times it hath pleased him to reveal and discover this secret in the finding of this new world, whereby we are certainly assured, that under our Pole star, and under the Equinoctial line, are most goodly and ample regions, as well and commodiously inhabited, as are other parts of the world best known unto us.   
The testimony of the Poet Seneca in his Tragedy De Medea, where by the spirit of Poetical fury, he saith.  
Venient annis  
Secula seris, quibus Oceanus  
Vincula rerum laxet, et ingens  
Pateat tellus, Typhisque novos  
Detegat Orbs,  
Nec sit terris, ultima Thyle.  
Which may be thus Englished.  
In late years new worlds shallbe found,  
And new lands shall then appear on the ground.  
When Typhis Navigation new worlds shall find out,  
Then shall not Thyle for last be left out. 
Thyle is Island.   
For than shall the Ocean dissolve his large bands,  
And show forth new worlds, regions, and lands.   

❧ To the most noble prince and catholic king, Charles, Peter Martyr of Angleria wisheth perpetual felicity.  
THe divine providence, from the time that he first created the world, hath reserved unto this day the knowledge of the great and large Ocean sea: 
The largeness of the Ocean unknown to this day.  In the which time he hath opened the same, chiefly unto you (most mighty Prince) by the good fourtune and happy success of your grandfather by your mother side. The same providence (I know not by what destiny) hath brought me out of my native country of Milane, and out of the city of Rome (where I continued almost ten years) into Spain, that I might particularly collect these marvelous and new things, which should otherwise perhaps have lain drowned in the whirlpool of oblivion, forasmuch as the spaniards (men worthy great commendation) had only care to the general inventions of these things. Notwithstanding, I do not challenge unto me only, the thanks of the travail bestowed herein, whereas the chief reward thereof is due to Ascanius, 
Cardinal Ascanius.  viscount Cardinal, who perceiving that I was willing to depart out of the city to be present at the wars of Granatum, 
The wars at Granatum against the moors.  dissuaded me from my purpose: But seeing that I was fully resolved to depart, exhorted & required me to write unto him such news as were famous in Spain, & worthy to be noted. I took therefore my journey into Spain, chiefly for the desire I had to see th'expedition which was prepared against the enemies of the faith, forasmuch as in italy, by reason of the dissension among the Princes, I could find nothing wherewith I might feed my wit, being a young man desirous of knowledge and experience of things. I was therefore present at the wars, from whence I writ to Cardinal Ascanius, and by sundry epistles certified him of such things as I thought most worthy to be put in memory. But when I perceived that his fortune was turned from a natural mother to a stepdame, I ceased from writing. Yet after I saw, that by thoverthrow of the enemies of our faith, Spain was purged of the moors, as of an evil weed plucked up by the roots, lest I should bestow my slippery years in unprofitable idleness, I was minded to return to Italy. But the singular benignity of both the catholic king and queen now departed, and their large promises toward me upon my return from my legacy of Babylon, detained me from my purpose. Yet doth it not repent me that I drew back my foot, aswell for that I see in no other place of the world at this time the like worthy things to be done: as also that in manner throughout all Italy, 
Italy disquieted with wars.  by reason of the discord of Christian Princes, I perceived all things to run headlong into ruin, the countries to be destroyed and made fat with human blood, the cities sacked, 
The sequels of war.  virgins and matrons with their goods and possessions carried away as captives, and miserable innocentes without offence to be slain unarmed within their own houses. Of the which calamities, I did not only hear the lamentable outcries, but did also feel the same: For even the blood of mine own kinsfolks and friends, was not free from that cruelty. As I was therefore musing with myself of these things, the Cardinal of Arragone, after that he had seen the two first books of my Decades written to Ascanius, required me in the name of king Fredrick his uncle, 
King Fredrick.  to put forth the other eight epistle books. In the mean time also, while I was void of all care as touching the matters of the Ocean, the Apostolical messengers of the bishop of Rome, Leo the tenth (by whose wholesome counsel and authority we trust the calamities of Italy shallbe finished) raised me as it were from sleep, & encouraged me to proceed as I had begun. To his holiness I writ two Decades, comprised in short books, after the manner of epistles, and added them to the first, which was printed without mine advise, as shall further appear by the preface following. But now I return to you (most noble Prince) from whom I have somewhat digressed. Therefore whereas your grandfather by your mother's side, have subdued all Spain under your dominion, 

Spain subdued from the moors.  
The kingdom of Naples.   except only one corner of the same, and have also left you the kingdom of Naples, with the fruitful islands of our seas, it is surely a great thing and worthy to be noted in our chronicles. But not offending the reverence due to our predecessors, whatsoever from the beginning of the world hath been done or written to this day, to my judgement seemeth but little, if we consider what new lands and countries, what new seas, what sundry nations and tongues, what gold mines, what treasuries of pearls they have left unto your highness, beside other revenues. The which, what they are, and how great, these three Decades shall declare. Come therefore most noble Prince elected of God, and enjoy that high estate of things not yet understood to men. We offer unto you the Equinoctial line hitherto unknown, 
The temperateness of the Equinoctial unknown to the old writers.  and burnt by the furious heat of the son, and unhabitable after the opinion of the old writers, a few excepted: but now found to be most replenished with people, fair, fruitful, and most fortunate, with a thousand Islands crowned with gold and beautiful pearls, besides that great portion of earth supposed to be part of the firm land, 
Continent or firm land as big as three Europe's.  exceeding in quantity three Europe's. Come therefore and embrace this new world, and suffer us no longer to consume in desire of your presence. From hence, from hence I say (most noble young Prince) shall instruments be prepared for you, 
Riches are the instruments of conquests.  whereby all the world shallbe under your obeisance. And thus I bid your majesty farewell: to whose taste if I shall perceive the fruits of this my tillage to be delectable, I will hereafter do my endeavour that you may receive the same more abundantly. From Madrid, the day before the kalends of October, In the year of Christ M.D.XUI.   


The first Book of the Decades of the Ocean, written by Peter Martyr of Angleria Milenoes', counsaylour to the king of Spain, and Protonotary Apostolical to Ascanius Sphorcia, Viscount Cardinal. etc.  
THe reverend and thankful antiquity was accustomed to esteem those men as gods, 
The rewards of virtue.  by whose industry and magnanimity such lands and regions were discovered, as were unknown to their predecessors. But unto us, having only one God, whom we honour in triplicity of person, this resteth, that albeit we do not worship that kind of men with divine honour, yet do we reverence them, and worthily marvel at their noble acts and enterprises. Unto kings and princes we give due obeisance, by whose governance and furtherance they have been aided to perform their attempts: we commend both, and for their just deserts worthily extol them. Wherefore, as concerning the Islands of the west Ocean, lately discovered, 
The Islands of the West Ocean.  and of the auctors of the same (which thing you desire by your letters to know) I will begin at the first author thereof, lest I be injurious to any man. Take it therefore as followeth.  
Christophorus Colonus (otherwise called Columbus) a gentleman of Italy, borne in the city of Genua, 
Christophorus Colonus.  persuaded Fernando and Elizabeth, catholic princes, that he doubted not to find certain Islands of India, near unto our Ocean sea, 
India.  if they would furnish him with ships and other things appertaining: affirming that thereby not only the Christian religion might be enlarged, but Spain also enriched by the great plenty of gold, pearls, precious stones, and spices, which might be found there. At the length three ships were appointed him at the kings charges: of the which one was a great carrack with decks, and the other two were light merchant ships without decks, which the Spaniards call Caravelas. Thus he departed from the costs of Spain about the kalends of September, in the year of Christ .1492. and set forward on his voyage, 
The first voyage of Colonus  being accompanied with Cc.xx spaniards. The fortunate Islands (as many think them to be, which the Spaniards call Canariae, 
The Islands of Canary. Gades, or Calsmals.  found but of late days) are distant from the Islands of Gades a thousand and two hundredth miles, according to their accounts, for they say they are distant three hundred leagues: 

A league, what it containeth by sea.  
The fortunate Islands.   whereas such as are expert sea men, affirm that every league containeth four miles, after their supputations. These Islands were called fortunate, for the temperate air which is in them. For neither the coldness of winter is sharp unto them, nor the heat of summer intolerable. Yet some men are of opinion, that those were in old time called the fortunate Islands, which the Portugals call Capo Verde. 
Capo Verde.  Colonus therefore sailed first to the Islands of Canariae, to the intent there to refresh his ships with fresh water and fuel, before he committed himself to this so laborious a voyage. And because I have hear made mention of the Islands of Canariae, it shall not be much from my purpose, to declare how of unknown they became known, and of savage and wild, better manured: For by the long course of many years, they were forgotten, and remained as unknown.  

The vii Islands of Canary. Betanchor a French man subdued the Islands of Canary. etc.  These seven Islands (therefore) called the Canaries, were found by chance by a french man, called Betanchor, by the permission of queen Katherine, protectrixe of king john her son, while he was yet in his nonage, about the year of Christ. M. CCCC.U. This Betanchor invaded two of these Islands called Lancelotus and Fortisuentura, which he inhabited & brought to better culture. He being dead, his son and heir sold both the said Islands to certain Spaniards.  
After this, Farnandus Peraria and his wife, invaded Ferrea and Gomera. The other three were subdued in our time. Grancanaria, by Petrus de Vera, citizen of the noble city of Xericium, and Michael of Moxica. Palma and Tenerifen, by Alphonsus Lugo, at the king's charges. Gomera and Ferrea were easily subdued: But the matter went hard with Alphonsus Lugo. 
Alphonsus Lugo.  For that naked and wild nation, fighting only with stones and clubs, drove his army to flight at the first assault, and slew about four hundred of his men: But at the length he overcame them. And thus all the Islands of Canariae were added to the dominion of Spain. From these Islands Colonus directing his voyage toward the west, following the falling of the sun, but declining somewhat toward the left hand, sailed on forward xxxiii days continually, having only the fruition of the heaven and the water. Then the spaniards which were accompanied with him, 
Colonus men rebel against him.  began first to murmur secretly among themselves, and shortly after with words of reproach spoke evil of Colonus their governor, and consulted with themselves, either to rid him out of the way, or else to cast him into the sea: raging that they were deceived of a stranger, an outlandyshe man, a Ligurian, a Genues, and brought into such dangerous places, that they might never return again. And after xxxiii days were passed, they furiously cried out against him, and threatened him that he should pass no further. 
Fair words and promises.  But he ever with gentle words and large promises, appeased their fury, and prolonged day after day, some time desiring them to bear with him yet a while, and some time putting them in remembrance that if they should attempt any thing against him, or otherwise disobey him, it would be reputed for treason. Thus after a few days, with cheerful hearts they espied the land long looked for. In this first navigation, he discovered vi islands, whereof two were exceeding great: Of which, the one he called Hispaniola, and the other johanna. 
Hispaniola. johanna.  But at that time he knew not perfectly that johanna (otherwise called Cuba) was an island. As they coasted along by the shore of certain of these islands, 
Nightingales sing in November.  they heard nightingalings sing in the thick woods in the month of November. They found also great rivers of fresh water, and natural havens, of capacity to harbour great navies of ships. Sailing by the coasts of johanna, from the north point to the west, he road little less than eight hundred miles (for they call it a hundred and fourscore leagues) supposing that it had been the continent or firm land, because he could neither find the lands end, nor any token of the end, as far as he could judge with his eye: wherefore he determined to turn back again, being partly thereto enforced by the roughness of the sea, for the sea banks of the island of johanna, by sundry wyndynges and turnings, bend themselves so much toward the north, that the northnortheast wind roughly tossed the ships by reason of the winter. Turning therefore the stems of his ships toward the East, he affirmed that he had found the island of Ophir, 
The Island of Ophir.  whither Solomon's ships sailed for gold. But the description of the Cosmographers well considered, it seemeth that both these, and the other islands adjoining, 
The Islands of Antilia.  are the islands of Antilia. This island he called Hispaniola, on whose north side as he approached near to the land, the keel or bottom of the biggest vessel ran upon a blind rock covered with water, 
A shipwreck.  and clove in sunder: but the plainness of the rock was a help to them that they were not drowned. Making haste therefore with the other two ships to help them, they brought away all the men without hurt. Here coming first a land, 
The people of the Island.  they saw certain men of the Island, who perceiving an unknown nation coming toward them, flocked together, and ran all into the thick woods, as it had been hares coursed with greyhounds. 
Naked people.  Our men pursuing them, took only one woman, whom they brought to the ships: where filling her with meat and wine, and appareling her, they let her departed to her company. Shortly after a great multitude of them came running to the shore to behold this new nation, whom they thought to have descended from heaven. They cast themselves by heaps into the sea, 

Expert swymmers.  
Gold for earth and glass.   & came swimming to the ships, bringing gold with them, which they changed with our men for earthen pots, drinking glasses, points, pings, hawks bells, looking glasses, & such other trifles. Thus growing to further familiarity, our men were honourably entertained of the king of that part of the island, 
Many kings  whose name was Guacc●narillus: for it hath many kings, as when Aeneas arrived in Italy, he found Latium divided into many kingdoms and provinces, as Latium, Mezeutium, Turnum, and Tarchontem, which were separated with narrow bounds, as shall more largely appear hereafter. At the even tide about the falling of the son, when our men went to prayer, and kneeled on their knees after the manner of the Christians, 
Religious and human people  they did the like also. And after what manner so ever they saw them pray to the cross, they followed them in all points as well as they could. They showed much humanity towards our men, 
Canoas'.  and helped them with their lighters or small boats (which they call Canoas') to unlade their broken ship, and that with such celerity and cheerfulness, that no friend for friend, or kinsman for kinsman, in such case moved with pity, could do more. Their boats are made only of one tree, 
Monoxyla, They have no iron.  made hollow with a certain sharp stone (for they have no iron) and are very long and narrow. Many affirm that they have seen some of them with forty oars. The wild and mischievous people called Canibales, or Caribes, 
Canibales, or Caribes. Anthropophagis.  which were accustomed to eat man's flesh (& called of the old writers, Anthropophagi) molest them exceedingly, invading their country, taking them captive, killing & eating them. As our men sailed to the islands of these meek and human people, they left the islands of the Canibales, in manner in the midst of their voyage toward the south. They complained that their islands were no less vexed with the incursions of these manhunting Canibales when they go forth a roving to seek their prey, then are other tame beasts, 
The cruelty of the Canibales.  of Lions and Tigers. Such children as they take, they geld to make them fat, as we do cock chickens and young hogs, and eat them when they are well fed: of such as they eat, they first eat the entrails and extreme parts, as hands, feet, arms, neck, and head. The other most fleshy parts, they powder for store, as we do pestles of pork, and gammondes of bacon: yet do they abstain from eating of women, and count it vile. Therefore such young women as they take, they keep for increase, as we do hens to lay eggs: the old women, they make their drudges. They of the islands (which we may now call ours) both the men and the women, when they perceive the Canibales coming, have none other shift but only to flee: for although they use very sharp arrows made of reeds, yet are they of small force to repress the fury of the Canibales: for even they themselves confess, that ten of the Canibales are able to overcome a hundred of them if they encounter with them. Their meat is a certain root, which they call Ages, 

Ages. Roots in the steed of meat. jucca.  
Bread of roots   much like a navewe root in form and greatness, but of sweet taste, much like a green chestnut. They have also an other kind of roots, which they call jucca, whereof they make bread in kyke manner. They use Ages more often roasted or sodden, then to make bread thereof. But they never eat jucca, except it be first sliced and pressed (for it is full of liquor) and then baked or sodden. But this is to be marveled at, that the juice of this root is a poison as strong as Aconitum, 
In herb of strange nature.  so that if it be drunk, it causeth present death, and yet the bread made of the mass thereof, is of good taste and wholesome, as they all have proved. They make also another kind of bread of a certain pulse, called Panicum, much like unto wheat, 
Maizium.  whereof is great plenty in the Dukedom of Milan, Spain, and Cranatum. But that of this Country is longer by a span, somewhat sharp toward the end, and as big as a man's arm in the brawn: the grains whereof are set in a marvelous order, & are in form somewhat like a Pease. While they be sour and unripe, they are white, but when they are ripe, they be very black, when they are broken, they be whiter than snow: this kind of grain they call Maizium. Gold is of some estimation among them: 
Gold in estimation.  for some of them hang certain small pieces thereof at their ears and nostrils. A little beyond this place, our men went a land for fresh water, where they chanced upon a river, 
Gold in the sands of rivers.  whose sand was mixed with much gold. They found there no kinds of four footed beasts, except three kinds of little coneys. These islands also nourish serpents, 

Serpents without venom.  
Turtle doves. Ducks. Popinjays.   but such as are without hurt. Likewise wild geese, turtle doves, and ducks, much greater than ours, and as white as swans, with heads of purple colour. Also Popinjays, of the which some are green, some yellow, & some like them of India, 
Plini.  with yellow rings about their necks, as Pliny describeth them. Of these they brought forty with them, of most lively and delectable colours, having their feathers intermingled with green, yellow, and purple, which variety delighteth the sense not a little. Thus much thought I good to speak of popinjays (right noble prince) specially to this intent, that albeit the opinion of Christophorus Colonus (who affirmeth these islands to be part of India) doth not in all points agree with the judgement of ancient writers as touching the bigness of the Sphere and compass of the Globe, 

These Islands are part of India.  
The Indians are Antipodes to the spaniards.   as concerning the navigable portion of the same being under us, yet the Popinjays and many other things brought from thence, do declare that these Islands savour somewhat of India, either being near unto it, or else of the same nature: forasmuch as Aristole also, about the end of his book de Caelo & Mundo, 
Aristotle. Seneca.  and likewise Seneca▪ with divers other authors not ignorant in cosmography, do taffirme that India is no long tract by sea, 

India not far from Spain. Mastyx. Aloe.  
Gossampine cotton or bombase. Seres.   distant from Spain by the west Ocean, for the soil of these islands bringeth forth Mastyx, Aloes, and sundry other sweet gums and spices, as doth India, Cotton also of the Gossampine tree, as in India in the country of the people called Seres.  
The languages of all the nations of these islands, may well be written with our Latin letters. For they call heaven Turei. 
The language of these Indians.  A house Boa. Gold Cauni. A good man, Taino. Nothing, Mayani. All other words of their language, they pronounce as plainly as we do the Latin tongue. 
Trees & fruits unknown to us  In these islands they found no trees known unto them, but Pine apple trees, and Date trees, and those of marvelous height, and exceeding hard, by reason of the great moistness and fatness of the ground, 

Fat and moist ground.  
Heat continual & temperate. The fruitfulness of Hispaniola.   with continual and temperate heat of the sun, which endureth so all the whole year. They plainly affirm the island of Hispaniola to be the most fruitful land that the heaven compasseth about, as shall more largely appear hereafter in the particular description of the same, which we intend to set forth when we shallbe better instructed. Thus making a league of friendship with the king, and leaving with him xxxviii men to search the island, he departed to Spain, taking with him ten of the inhabitants to learn the Spanish tongue, to the intent to use them afterward for interpreters. Colonus therefore at his return was honourably received of the king and queen, who caused him to sit in their presence, which is a token of great love and honour among the spaniards. He was also made Admiral of the Ocean, and his brother governor of the island.  
Toward the second voyage he was furnished with xvii ships, whereof three were great caractes of a thousand tun xii were of that sort which the Spaniards call Caravelas, without decks, 
The second voyage of Colonus.  and two other of the same sort somewhat bigger, and more apt to bear decks, by reason of the greatness of their masts. He had also a thousand and two hundred armed footmen well appointed: among which were many artificers, as smiths, Carpenters, miners, and such other, certain horsemen also, well armed: Likewise mares, sheep, heyghfers, and such other of both kinds for increase: Likewise all kind of pulse, or grain, and corn, as wheat, barley, rye, beans, and pease, and such other, 
Corn & seeds to sow.  aswell for food as to sow: beside vines, plants, and seeds, of such trees, fruits, and herbs, as those countries lack, and (not to be forgotten) sundry kinds of artyllerie and iron tools, 
Tools and artyllerie.  as bows, arrows, crossbows, bills, hargabusses, broad swords, large targets, pikes, mattocks, shovels, hammers, nails, saws, axes, and such other, Thus being furnished accordingly, they set forward from the Islands of Gades (now called Cales) the seventh day before the kalends of October, in the year of Christ .1493. and arrived at the islands of Canary at the kalends of October: Of these islands, the last is called Ferrea, in which there is no other water that may be drunk, 
Water dropping from a tree continually.  but only that is gathered of the dew, which continually distilleth from one only tree, growing on the highest bank of the island, and falleth into a round trench made with man's hand: we were informed of these things within few days after his departure. What shall succeed, we will certify you hereafter. Thus far ye well, from the court, at the Ideses of November .1493.   

The second book of the first Decade, to Ascanius Sphorcia, Viscount Cardinal. etc.  
YOu repeat (right honourable prince) that you are desirous to know what news we have in Spain from the new world, and that those things have greatly delighted you, which I wrote unto your highness of the first Navigation: You shall now therefore receive what hath succeeded. 
Methymna Campi. Castilia Vetus.  Methymna Campi, is a famous town in high Spain, in respect from you, and is in that part of Spain which is called Castilia Vetus, being distant from Gades about xl miles. Here the court remained, 
Gades.  when about the ix of the kalends of Apryll, in this year of ninety and four, there were posts sent to the king and queen, certifying them that there were twelve ships come from the new islands, and arrived at Gades: but the governor of the ships sent word to the king and queen, that he had none other matter to certify them of by the posts, but only that the Admiral with five ships, and fourscore and ten men, remained still in Hispaniola to search the secrets of the island, and that as touching other matters, he himself would shortly make relation in their presence by word of mouth: therefore the day before the Nones of Apryl, he came to the Court himself. What I learned of him, and other faithful and credible men, which came with him from the Admiral, I will rehearse unto you, in such order as they declared the same to me, when I demanded them: take it therefore as followeth. The third day of the Ideses of October, departing from Ferrea, the last of the islands of Canariae, and from the coasts of Spain, 
The islands of Ferrea.  with a Navy of seventeen ships, they sailed xxi days before they came to any island, inclining of purpose more toward the left hand then at the first voyage, following the north North-east wind, and arrived first at the islands of the Canibales or Caribes, 
Islands of the Canibales.  of which only the fame was known to our men. Among these, they chanced first upon one, so beset with trees, that they could not see so much as an elle space of bare earth or stony ground, this they called Dominica, because they found it on the Sunday. 
The Island of Dominica.  They tarried here no time, because they saw it to be desert. In the space of these xxi days, they think that they sailed eight hundred & xx. leagues, the north North-east wind was so full with them, and so freshly followed the stern of their ships. After they had sailed a little further, they espied divers islands replenished with sundry kinds of trees, from the which came fragrant savours of spices and sweet Gums: here they saw neither man nor beast, except certain Lysartes of huge bigness, 
Lysartes.  as they reported which went aland to view the country. This island they called Galana or Galanta: from the cape or point of this island, 
The Island of Galanta.  espying a mountain a far of, they sailed thither. About xxx miles from this mountain, they saw a river dessending, which seemed to be a token of some great and large flood. This is the first land which they found inhabited from the islands of Canariae, and is an island of the Canibales, 
The Island of Guadalupea.  as they learned by the interpreters which they took with them from Hispaniola into Spain at their first voyage. Searching the island, they found innumerable villages of twenty houses, or xxx at the most, set round about in order, 
Villages of twenty or xxx houses.  making the street in compass like a market place. And forasmuch as I have made mention of their houses, it shall not be greatly from my purpose to describe in what manner they are builded: 
The building of their houses.  They are made round like bells or round pavilions. Their frame is raised of exceeding high trees, set close together, and fast rampaired in the ground, so standing aslope, and bending inward, that the tops of the trees join together, and bear one against another, having also within the house certain strong and short props or posts which sustain the trees from falling. They cover them with the leaves of date trees, and other trees strongly compact and hardened, wherewith they make them close from wind and weather. At the short posts or props within the house, they tie ropes of the cotton of gossampine trees, or other ropes made of certain long & rough roots, 
Gossampine cotton.  much like unto the shrub called Spartum, whereof in old time they used to make bands for vines, and gables and ropes for ships. These they tie overthwart the house from post to post, on these they lay as it were certain matresses made of the cotton of gossampine trees, which grow plentifully in these islands. This cotton the Spaniards call Algodon, 
Bombase. Hanging beds.  and the Italians Bombasine: and thus they sleep in hanging beds. At the entrance of one of their houses, they saw two images of wood like unto serpents, which they thought had been such idols as they honour: but they learned afterward that they were set there only for comeliness, for they know none other god than the sun and moon, although they make certain images of gossampine cotton to the similitude of such fantasies as they say appear to them in the night. 
Images.  Our men found in their houses, all kinds of earthen vessels, not much unlike unto ours. They found also in their kytchens, man's flesh, 
Fine cookery.  ducks flesh, & goose flesh, all in one pot, and other on the spyts ready to be laid to the fire. Entering into their inner lodgings, they found faggots of the bones of men's arms and legs, 
Arrowheades of bones.  which they reserve to make heads for their arrows, because they lack iron, the other bones they cast away when they have eaten the flesh. They found likewise the head of a young man fastened to a post, and yet bleeding. They have in some villages, one great hall or palace, about the which their common houses are placed: to this they resort, as often as they come together to play. When they perceived the coming of our men, they fled. In their houses they found also above thirty children captives, which were reserved to be eaten, but our men took them away to use them for interpreters. Searching more diligently the inner parts of the island, they found seven other rivers, bigger than this which we spoke of before, running through the island, with fruitful and pleasant banks, delectable to behold. This island they called Guadalupea, for the similitude that it hath to the mount Guadalupus in Spain, 
The mount Guadalupus.  where the image of the virgin Marie is religiously honoured, but the inhabitants call it Carucueria, or Queraquiera: It is the chief habitation of the Canibales. 
Carucueria.  They brought from this island vii Popinjays, bigger than Pheasants, 
Popinjays bigger than pheasants.  much dyffering from other in colour, having their backs, breasts, and bellies of purple colour, and their wings of other variable colours: in all these islands is no less plenty of popinjays, then with us of sparrows or starelynges. As we bring up capons and hens to frank and make them fat, so do they these bigger kinds of popinjays for the same purpose. After that they had thus searched the island, 
The Canibales driven to flight.  and driven these Canibales to flight (which ran away at their first approach, as soon as they had espied them) they called their company together, and as soon as they had broken the Canibales boats or lighters (which they call Canoas') they loosed their anchors the day before the Ideses of November, and departed from Guadalupea. Colonus the Admiral, for the desire he had to see his companions, which at his first voyage he left the year before in Hispaniola to search the country, let pass many islands both on his right hand, & left hand, and sailed directly thither. By the way there appeared from the north a great island, which the captives that were taken in Hispaniola, called Madanino, or Matinino, 
Matinino an Island of women.  affirming it to be inhabited only with women, to whom the Canibales have access at certain times of the year, as in old time the Thracians had to the Amazons in the island of Lesbos: the men children they send to their fathers, but the women they keep with them selves. They have great and strong caves or dens in the ground, to the which they flee for safgarde if any men resort unto them at any other time than is appointed, and there defend themselves with bows and arrows, against the violence of such as attempt to invade them. They could not at this time approach to this island, by reason of the North North-east wind, which blewe so vehemently from the same, whereas they now followed the East southeast. After they departed from Madanino, and sailed by the space of xl miles, they passed not far from an other island which the captives said to be very populus, and replenished with all things necessary for the life of man. 

The Islands of Mons Serratus.  
Hunting for men.   This they called Mons Serratus, because it was full of mountains. The captives further declared, that the Canibales are wont at some time to go from their own coasts above a thousand miles to hunt for men. The day following, they saw an other island, the which because it was round, they called Sancta Maria Rotunda. 
Sancta Maria Rotunda.  The next day, they found an other, which they called S. Martini, which they let pass also, 
Sanctus Martinus.  because they had no leisure to tarry. Likewise the third day they espied an other, whose Diametral side, extending from the east to the west, 
Sancta Maria Antiqua.  they judged to be a hundred & fifty mile. They affirm all these islands to be marvelous fair and fruitful: This last, they called Sancta Maria Antiqua. Sailing forward, and leaving many other islands, after they had sailed about forty miles, they chanced upon an other, much bigger than any of the rest, which thinhabitants call Ay Ay, but they named it Insula crucis: 
Insula crucis, an Island of the Canibales.  Here they cast anchor to fetch fresh water. The Admiral also commanded xxx men to go a land out of his own ship, and to search the island: Here they found four dogs on the shore. 
The Canibales are expert Archers.  The Inhabitants are Canibales, and marvelous expert in shooting, as well women as men, and use to infect their arrows with poison. When they had tarried there two days, they saw a far of a Canoa, in the which were eight men, and as many women, having with them bows and arrows. 
Arrows in●ected with venom.  They fiercely assailed our men without all fear, and hurt some of them with their venomous arrows. Among these there was a certain woman, to whom the other gave reverence, and obeyed as though she were their queen. Her son waited upon her, being a young man, strongly made, of terrible and frowning countenance, and a Lion's face. Our men, least they should take the more hurt by being wounded a far of, thought it best to join with them. 
A conflict with the Canibales.  Therefore with all speed, setting forward with their oars the brigandine in which they were set aland, they overturned their Canoa with a great violence, which being overwhelmed, they notwithstanding, as well the women as the men, swimming, cast their darts at our men thick and threefold. At the length, gathering themselves together upon a rock covered with the water, they fought manfully until they were overcome and taken, one being slain, and the queen's son sore wounded. When they were brought into the Admiral's ship, they did no more put of their fierceness and cruel countenances, then do the Lions of Lybia when they perceive themselves to be bound in chains. There is no man able to behold them, 
The fierceness & terrible countenance of the Canibales.  but he shall feel his bowels grate with a certain horror, nature hath endued them with so terrible menacing and cruel aspect. This conjecture I make of me self, & other which oftentimes went with me to see them at Methymna Campi: but now to return to the voyage. Proceeding thus further and further, 
Methymna Campi.  more than five hundred miles, first toward the west south-west, then toward the south-west, and at the length toward the west northwest, they entered into a main large sea, having in it innumerable islands, marvelously differing one from another, 
Innumerable Islands.  for some of them were very fruitful, and full of herbs and trees, other some, very dry, barren, and rough, with high rocky mountains of stone, whereof some were of bright blue, or asurine colour, and other glistering white: wherefore they supposed them, by good reason, 
The mines of metals & precious stones.  to be the mynes of metals and precious stones: but the roughness of the sea, and multitude of islands standing so thick together, hindered them so, that they could cast no anchor, lest the bigger vessels should run upon the rocks: therefore they deferred the searching of these islands until another time: they were so many, and stood so thick, that they could not number them, yet the smaller vessels which drew no great depth, entered among them, and numbered forty and six islands, but the bigger vessels kept aloof in the main sea▪ for fear of the rocks. They call the sea where this multitude of islands are situate, Archipelagus. 
The sea called Archipelagus.  From this tract proceeding forward, in the mid way there lieth an island which thinhabitants call Burichina, or Buchena: 
Insula. S. johannes or Buchena.  but they named it Insula. S. johannis. divers of them whom we had delivered from the Canibales, said that they were borne in this island, affirming it to be very populous and fruitful, having also many fair woods and havens. There is deadly hatred and continual battle between them and the Canibales. They have no boats to pass from their own coasts to the Canibales: but if it be their chance to overcome them when they make incursion into their country to seek their pray (as it sometime happeneth, the fortune of war being uncertain) they serve them with like sauce, requiting death for death. 
Death for death  For one of them mangeleth an other in pieces, and roast them, and eat them even before their eyes. They tarried not in this island: Yet in the west angle thereof, a few of them went a land for fresh water, and found a great and high house after the manner of their building, having xii other of their vulgar cottages placed about the same, but were all left desolate, whether it were that they resorted to the mountains by reason of the heat which was that time of the year, 
●he mountains are col●er than the ●●aynes.  and to return to the plain when the air waxeth colder, or else for fear of the Canibales which make incursion into the island at certain seasons. In all this island is only one king. The south side hereof extendeth about two hundredth miles. Shortly after, they came to the island of Hispaniola, being distant from the first island of the Canibales, five hundredth leagues. Here they found all things out of order, and their fellows slain which they left here at their first voyage. 
●rom Domi●●ca to Hispa●●ola five hun●●ed leagues.  In the beginning of Hispaniola (having in it many regions and kingdoms as we have said) is the region of Xamana, whose king is named Guaccanarillus. This Guaccanarillus joined friendship with our men at the first voyage, 

●he Spaniar●s left in the ●ande are ●yne.  
●yng Guacca●●rillus re●●leth.   and made a league with them: but in the absence of the Admiral, he rebelled, and was the cause of our men's destruction, although he dissimuled the same, and pretended friendship at the Admirales return. As our men sailed on yet a little further, they espied a long Canoa with many oars, in which was the brother of Guaccanarillus, with only one man waiting on him. He brought with him two images of gold, which he gave the admiral in the name of his brother, 
Two images of gold.  and told a tale in his language as concerning the death of our men, as they proved afterward, but at this time had no regard to his communication for lack of interpreters, which were either all dead, or escaped and stolen away when they drew near the islands. But of the ten, seven died by change of air and diet. The inhabitants of these islands have been ever so used to live at liberty, in play and pastime, 
Liberty and idleness.  that they can hardly away with the yoke of servitude, which they attempt to shake of by all means they may. And surely if they had received our religion, 
A happy kind of life.  I would think their life most happy of all men, if they might therewith enjoy their ancient liberty. A few things content them, having no delight in such superfluities, 
Superfluity.  for the which in other places men take infinite pains, and commit many unlawful acts, and yet are never satisfied, whereas many have to much, and none enough. 
Many have to much, and none enough.  But among these simple souls, a few clothes serve the naked: weights and measures are not needful to such as can not skill of craft and deceit, and have not the use of pestiferous money, the seed of innumerable mischiefs: so that if we shall not be ashamed to confess the truth, they seem to live in that golden world of the which old writers speak so much, 
The golden word.  wherein men lived simply and innocently without enforcement of laws, without quarrelling, judges, and libels, content only to satisfy nature, without further vexation for knowledge of things to come. Yet these naked people also are tormented with ambition, for the desire they have to enlarge their dominions: by reason whereof, 
Naked men troubled with ambition.  they keep war and destroy one another, from the which plague I suppose the golden world was not free. For even then also, Cede, non cedam, that is, give place, and I will not give place, 
give place.  had entered among men. But now to return to the matter from which we have digressed. The admiral desirous to know further of the death of his men, sent for Guaccanerillus to come to him to his ship, dissimuling that he knew any thing of the matter. After that he came aboard ship, saluting the Admiral and his company, 
The Admiral sendeth for the king.  giving also certain gold to the captains and officers, turned him to the women captives, which not long before our men had delivered from the Canibales, and earnestly beholding one of them whom our men called Katherine, he spoke gently unto her. And thus when he had seen and marveled at the horses, 
No horses in the Islands.  and such other things as were in the ship, unknown to them, and had with a good grace and merrily asked leave of the Admiral, he departed. Yet some there were which counseled the Admiral to keep him still, that if they might by any means prove that he was consenting to the death of our men, he might be punished accordingly. But the Admiral considering that it was yet no time to incense the inhabitants minds to wrath, 
A time for all ●ynges.  dismissed him. The next day following, the kings brother resorting to the ships, either in his own name or in his brothers, seduced the women. For on the next night about midnight, this Katherine, 
A desperate adventure of a woman.  aswell to recover her own liberty, as also her fellows, being suborned thereto either by the king or his brother's promises, attempted a much more difficult and dangerous adventure than did Cloelia of Rome, which being in hostage with other maids to the king Porcena, 
Cloelia of Rome.  deceived her keepers, and road over the river Tiber, with the other virgins which were pledges with her. For whereas they swam over the river on horseback, this Katherine with seven other women, trusting only to the strength of their own arms, swum above three long miles, and that also at such time as the sea was somewhat rough: for even so far of from the shore lay the ships at road, as nigh as they could conjecture. But our men following them with the shipboates, by the same light seen on the shore, whereby the women were led, took three of them, supposing that Katherine with the other four, went to Guaccanarillus: for in the spring of the morning, certain messengers being sent unto him by the Admiral, had intelligence that he was fled with all his family and stuff, and the women also, which thing ministered further suspection that he was consenting to the death of our men. Wherefore the Admiral sent forth an army of three hundred men, over the which he appointed one Melchior to be captain, willing him to make diligent search to find out Guaccanarillus. 
Guaccanarillus is sought.  Melchior therefore with the smallest vessels entering into the country by the rivers, 
Melchior.  and scouring the shores, chanced into certain crooked gulfs, defended with five little & steep hills, supposing that it had been the mouth of some great river. He found hear also a very commodious and safe haven, and therefore named it Portus Regalis. They say that the entrance of this is so crooked and bending, that after the ships are once within the same, whether they turn them to the left hand, or to the right, they can not perceive where they came in, until they return to the mouth of the river, although it be there so broad that three of the bigest vessels may sail together on a froont. The sharp and high hills on the one side and on the other, so broke the wind, that they were uncertain how to rule their sails. In the middle gulf of the river, there is a promontory or point of the land with a pleasant grove, full of popinjays and other birds, 
Popyngiayes and birds.  which breed therein & sing very sweetly: They perceived also that two rivers of no small largeness fell into the haven. While they thus searched the land between both, Melchior espied a high house a far of, where supposing that Guaccanarillus had lain hid, he made toward it: and as he was going, there met him a man with a frowning countenance, and a grim look, with a hundred men following him, armed with bows and arrows, and long and sharp staves like iavelynnes, made hard at the ends with fire, who approaching towards our men, spoke out aloud with a terrible voice, saying that they were Taini (that is) noble men, and not Canibales: 
Taini.  but when our men had given them signs of peace, they left both their weapons and fierceness. Thus giving each of them certain hawks bells, 
Hawks bells.  they took it for so great a reward, that they desired to enter bonds of near friendship with us, and feared not immediately to submit themselves under our power, and resorted to our ships with their presents. 
A large house.  They that measured the house (being made in round form) found it to be from side to side xxxii great paces, compassed about with thirty. other vulgar houses, having in them many beams cross over, 
Reeds of sundry colours.  & covered with reeds of sundry colours, wreathed & as it were weaved with marvelous art. When our men asked some of them where they might find Guaccanarillus? They answered, that that region was none of his, but their kings, being there present: Yet they said they supposed that Guaccanarillus was gone from the plain to the mountains. Making therefore a brotherly league with this Cacicus (that is to say a king) they returned to the Admiral, 
Caccius.  to make relation what they had seen and heard: whereupon he sent forth divers other Centurians with their hundreds, to search the country yet further: 
Hoiedus and Gorualanus.  among which were Hoiedus and Gorualanus, noble young gentlemen, and of great courage. And as they went toward the mountains to seek Guaccanerillus, dividing the mountains between them, one of them found on the one side thereof, four rivers falling from the same mountains, and the other found three on the other side. 
Gold in rivers ●allyng from mountains.  In the sands of all these rivers is found great plenty of gold, which the inhabitants of the same island which were with us, gathered in this manner: making holes in the sand with their hands a cubit deep, 
The manner of gathering gold.  and taking up sand with their left hands from the bottom of the same, 
Grains of gold.  they picked out grains of gold with their right hands without any more art or cunning, and so delivered it to our men, who affirm that many of them thus gathered, were as big as tars or fitches. And I me self saw a mass of rude gold (that is to say, such as was never molten) like unto such stones as are found in the bottoms of rivers, weighing niene ounces, which Hoieda himself found. 
A mass of rude gold weighing ix. ounces.  Being contented with these signs, they returned to the Admiral to certify him hereof. For the Admiral had commanded under pain of punishment, that they should meddle no further than their commission: which was only, to search the places with their signs. For the fame went that there was a certain king of the mountains from whence those rivers had their fall, 
Caunaboa▪ king of the house of gold.  whom they call Cacicus Caunaboa, that is, the lord of the house of gold, for they call a house Boa, gold, Cauni, and a king or lord Cacicus, as we have said before. They affirm that there can nowhere be found better fish, 
Wholesome water, and plenty of fish.  nor of more pleasant taste, or more wholesome then in these rivers: also the waters of the same to be most wholesome to drink. Melchior himself told me, that in the month of December, the days & nights be of equal length among the Canibales: 
The day and night of equal length in December.  but the sphere or circles of the heaven agreeth not thereunto, albeit that in the same month, some birds make their nests, and some have already hatched their eggs by reason of the heat, 
Birds breed in December.  being rather continual then extreme. He told me also when I questioned with him as concerning the elevation of the pole from the horizontal line, 

The elevation of the pole.  
The stars are called guardens of the pole.   that all the stars called Plastrum or charles wain, are hid under the North pole to the Canibales. And surely there returned none from thence at this vioage, to whom there is more credit to be given, then to this man. But if he had been skilful in Astronomy, he should have said that the day was almost equal with the night: For in no place toward the stay of the son (called Solsticium) can the night be equal with the day. And as for them, they never came under the Equinoctial, 
The Equinoctial line.  forasmuch as they had ever the North pole their guide, and ever elevate in sight above the Horizontal. Thus have I briefly written unto your honour, as much as I thought sufficient at this time, and shall shortly hereafter (by God's favour) write unto you more largely of such matters as shallbe daily better known. For the Admiral himself (whom I use famyerly as my very friend) hath promised me by his letters, that he will give me knowledge of all such things as shall chance. He hath now chosen a strong place where he may build a city, near unto a commodious haven, and hath already builded many houses, and a chapel, 
A chapel and priests.  in the which (as in a new world heretofore void of all religion) God is daily served with xiii priests, according to the manner of our churches. When the time now approached that he promised to send to the king and queen, and having prosperous wind for that purpose, sent back the xii caravels, whereof we made mention before: which was no small hindrance and grief unto him, especially considering the death of his men whom he left in the island at the first voyage, whereby we are yet ignorant of many places and other secrets, whereof we might otherwise have had further knowledge: but as time shall reveal them again, so will I advertise you of the same. And that you may the better know by conference had with the Apothecaries and merchant strangers Sirophenicians, what this Regions bear, 
Merchants Syrophenicians.  & how hot their ground is, I have sent you all kinds of grains, with the bark and inner parts of that tree which they suppose to be the Cinamome tree. 
The Cinamome tree.  And if it be your pleasure to taste either of the grains, or of the small seeds, the which you should perceive to have fallen from these grains, or of the wood it self, touch them first softly, moving them to your lips, for although they be not hurtful, yet for their excess of heat, they are sharp, and bite the tongue if they remain any while thereon: but if the tongue be blystered by tasting of them, the same is taken away by drinking of water. Of the corn also whereof they make their bread, this bringer shall deliver some grains to your lordship, both white and black, and therewith also a trunk of the tree of Aloes, the which if you cut in pieces, you shall feel a sweet savour to proceed from the same. 
Xiloaloes', or Lignum Aloes.  Thus far you heartily well, from the Court of Methymna Campi, the third day before the kalends of May. Anno Dom. 1494.   

The third book of the first Decade, to Lodovic Cardinal of Aragonie, and Neviewe to the king.  
YOu desire that foolish Phaeton should again rule the chariots of the Sun, and contend to draw sweet liquors out of the hard flint, whereas you require me to describe unto you the new world, found in the west by the good fortune and governance of the Catholic princes Ferdinandus and Elizabeth, your Uncle and Aunt, showing me also the letters of king Fredrick your Uncle, written to me in that behalf: But sith you have laid this burden on my back, in whose power it is to command me to take upon me more than I am well able, ye both shall receive this precious stone rudely closed in lead after my manner of workmanship. Wherefore, when you shall perceive the learned sort friendly, the malicious enviously, and the backbiters furiously, to bend their slanderous darts against our fair Nymphs of the Ocean, you shall freely protest in how short time, and in the midst of what troubles and calamities you have enforced me to write of the same. Thus far you well, from Granata the nienth day before the kalends of May.  
We have declared in the book herebefore, how the Admiral passed by the coasts of the Canibales, 
Hispaniola.  to the island of Hispaniola with his whole navy: But now we intend further to show what he found as concerning the nature of this island, after that he had better searched the secrets of the same: Likewise of the island of Cuba near unto it, which he supposed to be the firm land. Hispaniola therefore (which he affirmeth to be Ophir, whereof we read in the third book of the kings) is of latitude five south degrees, 
Ophir, whither Solomon's ships sailed for Gold.  having the north pole elevate on the north side xxvii degrees, and on the south side (as they say) xxii. degrees, it reacheth in length from East to West, seven hundred and fourscore miles, it is distant from the islands of Gades (called Cales) xlix. degrees, and more, as some say: the form of the island resembleth the leaf of a Chesnutte tree. Upon a high hill on the North side of the island, he builded a city, because this place was most apt for that purpose, 
Isabel.  by reason of a mine of stones which was near unto the same, serving well both to build with, and also to make lime: at the bottom of this hill, is there a great plain of threescore miles in length, and in breadth somewhere xii somewhere twenty miles where it is brodest, & six miles where it is narrowest: through this plain run divers fair rivers of wholesome waters, but the greatest of them, which is navigable, falleth into the haven of the city for the space of half a furlong: how fertile and fruitful this valley is, you shall understand by these things which follow. On the shore of this river, they have lymitted and enclosed certain ground, to make gardens and orchards, 
A token of marvelous fruitfulness.  in the which all kind of bigger herbs, as radish, lettuce, coleworts, borage, & such other, wax ripe within xvi days after the seed is sown, likewise Melones, Gourds, Cucumbers, 
Herbs green all the whole year.  and such other, within the space of xxxvi days, these garden herbs they have fresh & green all the whole year. Also the roots of the canes or reeds of the liquor whereof sugar is made, 
Sugar reeds, plants and vines.  grow a cubit high within the space of xu days, but the liquor is not yet hardened. The like they affirm of plants or shrouds of young vines, and that they have the second year gathered ripe and sweet grapes of the same: but by reason of to much rankness they bear but few clusters. Furthermore, a man of the country sowed a little Wheat about the kalends of Februarye, 
Corn & grain ripe twice a year.  and brought with him to the city an handful of the ripe ears of the same the third day before the kalends of April, which was that year the vigil of the Resurrection of our Lord. Also, all kinds of pulse, as beans, peason, fitches, tars, & such other, are ripe twice in the year, as all they which come from thence affirm with one voice, yet the ground is not universally apt to bear wheat. In the mean time while these things were doing, the Admiral sent out a company of xxx men to search the Region of Cipanga, otherwise called Cibana. 
The region of Cipanga, or Cibana.  This Region is full of mountains and rocks: and in the middle back of the whole island is great plenty of gold. 
Gold.  When they that went to search the region were returned, they reported marvelous things as touching the great riches of this Region. From these mountains, descend four great rivers, which by the marvelous industry of nature, divideth the whole island into four parts, in manner equal, overspreading & watering the whole island with their branches. Of these four rivers, the one reacheth toward the east, this the inhabitants call junna: another toward the west, and is called Attibunicus: the third toward the North, named jachem: the last reacheth into the South, and is called Naiba. The day before the Ideses of March, the Admiral himself, with all his horsemen, and four hundred footmen, marched directly toward the South side of the golden Region. Thus passing over the river, the plain, and the mountain which environed the other side of the plain, 
The golden region of Cibana.  he chanced upon an other vale, with a river much bigger than the first, & many other mean rivers running through. When he had also conveyed his army over the river, and passed the second vale, which was in no part inferior to the first, he made away through the third mountain, where was no passage before, and descended into another vale, which was now the beginning of Cibana. 
The vale of Cibana.  Through this also run many floods and rivers out of every hill, and in the sands of them all is found great plenty of gold. And when he had now entered threescore and twelve miles into the golden Region from the city, he intended to build a fortress upon the top of a hill, standing by the shore of a certain great river, that he might the better and more safely search the secrets of the inner parts of the Region: this he called the fortress of saint Thomas, the which in the mean time while he was building, 
Gold for hawks bells.  the inhabitants being desirous of hawks bells, and other of our things, resorted daily thither, to whom the Admiral declared, that if they would bring gold, they should have whatsoever they would ask. Forthwith turning their backs, and running to the shore of the next river, they returned in a short time, bringing with them their hands full of gold. Amongst all other, there came an old man, bringing with him two pebble stones of gold, weyghing an ounce, 
Grains and pebble stones of gold.  desiring them to give him a bell for the same: who when he saw our men marvel at the bigness thereof, he made signs that they were but small and of no value in respect of some that he had seen, and taking in his hand four stones, the least whereof was as big as a Walnut, and the biggest as big as an Orange, he said that there was found pieces of gold so big in his country, being but half a days journey from thence, and that they had no regard to the gathering thereof, whereby we perceived that they pass not much for gold, 
They pass not for gold, in that it is gold only but. etc.  inasmuch as it is gold only, but so far esteem it, as the hand of the Artificer hath fashioned it in any comely form. For who doth greatly esteem rough marble, or unwrought ivory? but if they be wrought with the cunning hand of Phidias or Praxiteles, and shaped to the similitude of the fair Nymphs or Fairs of the sea (called Nereiades) or the Fairs of the woods (called Hamadryads) they shall never lack buyers. Beside this old man, there came also divers other, bringing with them pybble stones of gold, weighing ten or xii drams, & feared not to confess, that in the place where they gathered that gold, there were found sometime stones of gold as big as the head of a child. 
Stones of gold as big as the head of a child.  When he had tarried here a few days, he sent one Luxanus, a noble young gentleman, with a few armed men, to search all the parts of this region: who at his return, reported that the inhabitants showed him greater things than we have spoken of here before, but he did openly declare nothing thereof, which they thought was done by the Admiral's commandment. They have woods full of certain spices, but not such as we commonly use: these they gather even as they do gold, that is, 
Spices.  as much as will serve for their purpose, every man for himself, to exchange the same with the inhabitants of other countries adjoining to them, for such things as they lack, as dishes, pots, stools, and such other necessaries. As Luxanus returned to the Admiral (which was about the Ideses of March) he found in the woods certain wild vines, 
Wild vines of pleasant taste.  ripe, and of pleasant taste, but the inhabitants pass not on them. This region, though it be full of stones and rocks (and is therefore called Cibana, which is as much to say as a stone) yet it is well replenished with trees and pastures, yea they constantly affirm, 
Fruitful mountains.  that if the grass of these mountains be cut, it groweth again within the space of four days, higher than wheat. And forasmuch as many showers of rain do fall in this region, whereof the rivers and floods have their increase, 
Gold in the land of rivers falling from the mountains.  in every of the which gold is found mixed with sand in all places, they judge that the gold is driven from the mountains, by the vehement course of the streams which fall from the same, and run into the rivers. The people of this region are given to idleness and play, for such as inhabit the mountains, 
Liberty and idleness. The mountains are cold.  sit quaking for cold in the Winter season, and had rather to wander up and down idly, then take the pains to make them apparel, where as they have woods full of Gossampine cotton: but such as dwell in the valles or plains, feel no cold in Winter. When the Admiral had thus searched the beginning of the region of Cibana, he repaired to Isabel (for so he named the city) where, leaving the governance of the Island with his deputies, he prepared himself to search further the limits of the Island of Cuba or johanna, which he yet doubted to be the firm land, 
The island of Cuba.  and distant from Hispaniola only lxx miles. This did he with more speedy expedition, calling to remembrance the kings commandment, who willed him first with all celerity, to overrun the coasts of the new Islands, 
Lest any other prince. etc.  lest any other prince should in the mean time attempt to invade the same, for the king of Portugal affirmed that it pertained only to him to discover these unknown lands: but the bishop of Rome, 
Dissension between the Portiugales and Spaniards.  Alexander the sixth, to avoid the cause of this dissension, granted to the king of Spain by the authority of his leaden bulls, that no other prince should be so bold, as to make any voyages to any of these unknown regions, lying without the precinct of a direct line drawn from the North to the South a hundred leagues Westward, without the parallels of the Islands called Capud Viride, or Cabouerde, 
The islands of coboverde or Hesperides.  which we think to be those that in old time were called Hesperides: these pertain to the king of Portugal, and from these his Pylotes, which do yearly search new coasts and regions, direct their course to the East, sailing ever toward the left hand by the back of afric, and the seas of the Ethiopians: neither to this day had the Portugals at any time sailed southward or Westward from the Islands of Caboverde. 
The Portugals usages.  Preparing therefore three ships, he made haste toward the Island of jobanna or Cuba, whither he came in short space, and named the point thereof, where he first arrived, Alpha and O, that is, the first and the last: for he supposed that there had been the end of our East, because the son falleth there, and of the West, because it riseth there. For it is apparent, that Westward, it is the beginning of India beyond the river of Ganges, and Eastward, 
The end of the east and west.  the furthest end of the same: which thing is not contrary to reason, forasmuch as the Cosmographers have left the limits of India beyond Ganges undetermined, where as also some were of opinion, that India was not far from the coasts of Spain, 
Note. India not far from Spain.  as we have said before. Within the prospect of the beginning of Cuba, he found a commodious haven in the extreme angle of the Island of Hispaniola, for in this part the Island receiveth a great gulf: this haven he named Saint Nicholas port, 
saint Nicolas port.  being scarcely twenty leagues from Cuba. As he departed from hence, and sailed Westward by the South side of Cuba, the further that he went, so much the more the sea seemed to be extended in breadth, and to bend toward the South. On the South side of Cuba, he found an Island which the inhabitants call jamaica, this he affirmeth to be longer & brother than the Island of Scicile, having in it only one mountain, which on every part, 
The island of jamaica.  beginning from the sea, riseth by little and little into the midst of the Island, and that so plainly without roughness, that such as go up to the top of the same, can scarcely perceive that they ascended: This Island he affirmeth to be very fruitful and full of people, aswell in thinner parts of the same, as by the shore, 
Quick witted people.  and that the inhabitants are of quicker wit then in the other Islands, and more expert Artificers, and warlike men: For in many places where he would have arrived, they came armed against him, and forbade him with threatening words: but being overcome, they made a league of friendship with him. Thus departing from jamaica, 
The compass of the earth.  he sailed toward the West, with a prosperous wind, for the space of threescore and ten days, thinking that he had passed so far by the compass of the earth being underneath us, 
Aurea Chersonesus, or Malaccha.  that he had been near unto Aurea Chersonesus (now called Malaccha) in our east India, beyond the beginning of Persides: for he plainly believed that he had left only two of the twelve hours of the sun, 
A secret of Astronomy.  which were unknown to us, for the old writers have left half the course of the sun untouched, where as they have but only discussed that superficial part of the earth which lieth between the Islands of Gades, and the river of Ganges, 
The river of Ganges.  or at the uttermost, to Aurea Chersonesus. In this Navigation, he chanced on many furious seas, running with a fall as it had been the streams of floods, also many whyrlepooles, 
Dangerous straits by reason of many Islands.  and shelves, with many other dangers, and strayghtes, by reason of the multitude of islands which lay on every side. But not regarding all these perils, he determined to proceed, until he had certain knowledge whether Cuba were an island, or firm land. Thus he sailed forward, coasting ever by the shore toward the West for the space of. CC.xxii. leagues, that is, about a thousand and three hundred miles, and gave names to seven hundred islands by the way, leaving also on the left hand (as he feared not to report) three thousand here and there. But let us now return to such things as he found worthy to be noted in this navigation. Sailing therefore by the side of Cuba, and searching the nature of the places, he espied not far from Alpha and O a large haven, 
A large haven.  of capacity to harborowe many ships, whose entrance is bending, being enclosed on both sides with capes or points which receive the water: this haven is large within, and of exceeding depth. Sailing by the shore of this port, he saw not far from the same, two cottages, covered with reeds, and in many places fire kindled. Here he sent certain armed men out of the ships to the cottages, where they found neither man nor woman, but rostemeate enough, 
Roasted fish and serpents of viii. foot long.  for they found certain spyttes of wood lying at the fire, having fish on them about a hundred pound weight, and two serpents of eight foot long apiece: whereat marvelling, and looking about if they could espy any of the inhabitants, and that none appeared in sight (for they fled all to the mountains at the coming of our men) they fell to their meat, and ate the fish taken with other men's travail, but they abstained from the serpents, which they affirm to differ nothing from the Crocodiles of Egypt, 
Crocodiles of Egipte.  but only in bigness: for (as Pliny saith) Crocodiles have sometimes been found of xviii cubits long, but of these the biggest were but of eight foot. Thus being well refreshed, they entered into the next wood, where they found many of the same kind of serpents, hanging upon boughs of trees, of the which, some had their mouths tied with strings, and some their teeth taken out. And as they searched the places near unto the haven, they saw about lxx men in the top of a high rock, which fled as soon as they had espied our men, who by signs and tokens of peace calling them again, there was one which came near them, and stood on the top of a rock, seeming as though he were yet fearful: but the Admiral sent one Didacus to him, a man of the same country, whom he had at his first voyage taken in the island of Guanahaini, being near unto Cuba, willing him to come near, and not to be afraid. When he heard Didacus speak to him in his own tongue, he came boldly to him, and shortly after resorted to his company, persuading them to come without all fear. After this message was done, there dessended from the rocks to the ships, about threescore and ten of the inhabitants, proffering friendship and gentleness to our men: which the Admiral accepted thankfully, and gave them divers rewards, and that the rather, for that he had intelligence by Didacus the interpreter, that they were the kings fishers, 
The kings fishers.  sent of their lord to take fish against a solemn feast which he prepared for another king. And whereas the admirals men had eaten the fish which they left at the fire, they were the gladder thereof, because they had left the serpents: for there is nothing among their delicate dishes, that they esteem so much as these serpents, in so much that it is no more lawful for common people to eat of them, 
Serpents esteemed for delicate mea●●  than Peacocks or pheasants among us: as for the fishes, they doubted not to take as many more the same night. Being asked why they first roasted the fish which they intended to bear to their king? they answered, that they might be the fresher and uncorrupted. Thus joining hands for a token of further friendship, every man resorted to his own. The Admiral went forward as he had appointed, following the falling of the sun from the beginning of Cuba, called Alpha and O: the shores or sea banks even unto this haven, albeit they be full of trees, yet are they rough with mountains: 
Blossoms & fruits both at one time.  of these trees, some were full of blossoms and flowers, and other laden with fruits. Beyond the haven, the land is more fertile and populus, whose inhabitants are more gentle, and more desirous of our things: for as soon as they had espied our ships, they flocked all to the shore, bringing with them such bread as they are accustomed to eat, and gourds full of water, offering them unto our men, and further, desiring them to come aland. In all these Islands is a certain kind of trees as big as Elms, 
Trees which bear gourds.  which bear Gourds in the stead of fruits, these they use only for drinking pots, and to fetch water in, but not for meat, for the inner substance of them is sourer than gall, and the bark as hard as any shell. At the Ideses of May, the watchmen looking out of the top castle of the ship, toward the South, saw a multitude of Islands standing thick together, 
A multitude of Islands.  being all well replenished with trees, grass, and herbs, and well inhabited: in the shore of the continent, he chanced into a navigable river, whose water was so hot, 
Hot water.  that no man might endure to abide his hand therein any time. The day following, espying a far of a Canoa of fishermen of the inhabitants, fearing lest they should flee at the sight of our men, he commanded certain to assail them privily with the ship boats: but they fearing nothing, tarried the coming of our men. Now shall you hear a new kind of fishing. Like as we with greyhounds do hunt Hares in the plain fields, 
A strange kind of fisshing.  so do they, as it were with a hunting fish, take other fishes: this fish was of shape or form unknown unto us, but the body thereof not much unlike a great ye'll, having on the hinder part of the head a very tough skin, like unto a great bag or purse: this fish is tied by the side of the boat with a cord, let down so far into the water, that the fish may lie close hid by the keel or bottom of the same, for she may in no case abide the sight of the air. Thus when they espy any great fish, or Tortoise (whereof there is great abundance, 
Abundance of Tortoises.  bigger than great targets) they let the cord at length, but when she feeleth herself loosed, she invadeth the fish or Tortoise as swiftly as an arrow, and where she hath once fastened her hold, she casteth the purse of skin, whereof we spoke before, and by drawing the same together, so graspeleth her prey, that no man's strength is sufficient to unloose the same, except by little and little drawing the line, she be lifted somewhat above the brim of the water, for then, as soon as she seeth the brightness of the air, she letteth go her hold. The pray therefore being now drawn near to the brim of the water, there leapeth suddenly out of the boat into the sea, 
Fisher men.  so many fishers as may suffice to hold fast the pray, until the rest of the company have taken it into the boat. Which thing done, they lose so much of the cord, that the hunting fish may again return to her place within the water, where by an other cord, they let down to her a piece of the pray, as we use to reward greyhounds after they have killed their game. This fish, they call Guaicanum, but our men call it Reversum. They gave our men four Tortoises taken by this means, 
The fish Guaicanum.  and those of such bigness, that they almost filled their fishing boat: for these fishes are esteemed among them for delicate meat. Our men recompensed them again with other rewards, and so let them departed. Being asked of the compass of that land, they answered that it had no end westward. Most instantly they desired the Admiral to come a land, 
human people.  or in his name to send one with them to salute their Cazicus, (that is) their king, affirming that he would give our men many presents, if they would go to him. But the Admiral, lest he should be hindered of the voyage which he had begun, refused to go with them. Then they desired to know his name, and told our men likewise the name of their king. Thus sailing on yet further ever toward the West, within few days he came near unto a certain exceeding high mountain, 
A mountain fruitful and well inhabited  well inhabited by reason of the great fertility of the same. the inhabitauntes of this mountain, brought to our ship, bread, gossampine cotton, coneys, & sundry kinds of wyldfoule, demanding religiously of th'interpreters, if this nation descended not from heaven. The king of this people, and divers other sage men that stood by him, informed him that that land was no Island. Shortly after, entering into one of the islands being on the left hand of this land, they found no body therein, for they fled all at the coming of our men: Yet found they there four dogs of marvelous deformed shape, 
Dogs of strange shape and dumb  & such as could not bark. This kind of dogs, they eat as we do goats. Here is great plenty of geese, ducks, and hearons. Between these islands and the continent, he entered into so narrow straits, that he could scarcely turn back the ships, and these also so shallow, that the keel of the ships sometime razed on the sands. 
white and thick water.  The water of these streyghtes, for the space of forty miles, was white and thick, like unto milk, and as though meal had been sparkled throughout all that sea. And when they had at the length escaped these strayghtes, and were now come into a main and large sea, and had sailed thereon for the space of fourscore miles, they espied an other exceeding high mountain, whither the Admiral resorted to store his ships with fresh water and fuel. Hear among certain woods of Date trees, 
Woods of date trees.  & pineapple trees of exceeding height, he found two native springs of fresh water. In the mean time, while the wood was cutting, and the barrels filling, one of our archers went into the wood to hunt, where he espied a certain man with a white vesture, 
Men apparelled like white ●●yers.  so like a friar of thorder of saint mary of Mercedis, that at the first sight he supposed it had been the Admiral's priest, which he brought with him, being a man of the same order: but two other followed him immediately out of the same woods. Shortly after, he saw a far of a whole company of men clothed in apparel, being about thirty. in number. 
apparelled ●en.  Then turning his back, and crying out to his fellows, he made haste to the ships with all that he might drive. These appareled men, made signs and tokens to him to tarry, and not to be afraid, but that notwithstanding he ceased not to flee. The Admiral being advertised hereof, and not a little rejoicing that he had found a civil people, incontinently sent forth armed men, with commandment that if need should so require, they should enter forty miles into the island, until they might find either those appareled men, or other inhabitants of that country. When they had passed over the wood, they came into a great plain full of grass and herbs, in which appeared no token of any pathway. Here attempting to go through the grass and herbs, they were so entangled and bewrapt therein, that they were scarcely able to pass a mile, the grass being there little lower than our ripe corn: being therefore wearied, they were enforced to return again, finding no pathway. The day following he sent forth xxv. armed men another way, commanding them to make diligent search and inquisition what manner of people inhabited the land: Who departing, when they had found, not far from the sea side, certain steps of wild beasts, of the which they suspected some to be of Lion's feet, being stricken with fear, returturned back again. As they came, they found a wood in the which were many native vines, here and there creeping about high trees, 
Native vines. Trees bearing spices & sweet fruits.  with many other trees bearing aromatical fruits and spices. Of these vines they brought with them into Spain many clusters of grapes, very ponderous, and full of liquor: but of the other fruits they brought none, because they putrefied by the way in the ship, & were cast into the sea. They say also that in the lands or meadows of those woods, they saw flocks of great Cranes, twice as big as ours. As he went forward, and turned his sails toward certain other mountains, he espied two cottages on the shore, in the which he saw only one man, who being brought to the ship, signified with head, fingers, and by all other signs that he could devise, that the land which lay beyond those mountains was very full of people: and as the Admiral drew near the shore of the same, there met him certain Canoas', having in them many people of the country, who made signs and tokens of peace and friendship. But here Didacus the interpreter, 
divers languages in the Island of Cuba.  which understood the language of thinhabitants of the beginning of Cuba, understood not them one whit, whereby they considered that in sundry provinces of Cuba, were sundry languages. He had also intelligence, that in the inland of this region was a king of great power, & accustomed to wear apparel: he said that all the tract of this shore was drowned with water, and full of mud, beset with many trees, after the manner of our marshes: Yet whereas in this place they went aland for fresh water, 
Pearls in shelfyshes.  they found many of the shelfyshes in the which pearls are gathered. But that could not cause the Admiral to tract the time there, intending at this voyage, only to prove how many lands & seas he could discover according to the kings commandment. As they yet proceeded forward, they saw here and there, all the way along by the shore, a great smoke rising, until they came to an other mountain four score miles distant, there was no rock or hill that could be seen, but the same was all of a smoke. But whether these fires were made by thinhabitants for their necessary business, or (as we are wont to set beacons on fire when we suspect thapproach of our enemies) thereby to give warning to their neighbours to be in a readiness, & gather together, if perhaps our men should attempt any thing against them, or otherwise as (seemeth most likely) to call them together, as to a wonder, to behold our ships, they know yet no certainty. In this tract, the shores bended sometime toward the South, and sometime toward the West and west south-west, and the sea was every where entangled with Islands, 
The sea entangled with Islands.  by reason whereof, the keels of the ships often times razed the sands for shalownesse of the water: So that the ships being very sore bruised and appaired, the sails, cables, and other tackelinges, in manner rotten, and the victuals (especially the biskette bread) corrupted by taking water at the rifts evil closed, the Admiral was enforced to turn back again: This last point where he touched of Cuba (not yet being known to be an island) he called evangelista. Thus turning his sails toward other islands lying not far from the supposed continent, he chanced into a main sea, where was such a multitude of great Tortoises, that sometime they stayed the ships: 

A multitude of great Tortoises.  
A gulf of white water.   Not long after, he entered into a gulf of white water, like unto that whereof we spoke before. At the length, fearing the shelves of the islands, he returned to the shore of Cuba by the same way which he came. Here a multitude of thinhabitants, as well women as men, resorted to him with cheerful countenances, and with fear, bringing with them popingayes, bread, water, and cunnyes, but especially stock doves, much bigger than ours, which he affirmeth, in savour and taste, to be much more pleasant than our partridges. Wherefore where as in eating of them he perceived a certain savour of spice to proceed from them, he commanded the crop to be opened of such as were newly killed, and found the same full of sweet spices, which he argued to be the cause of their strange taste: For it standeth with good reason, that the flesh of beasts, should draw the nature and quality of their accustomed nourishment. As the Admiral hard mass on the shore, there came toward him a certain governor, a man of four score years of age, and of great gravity, 
The humanity of a reverend old governor  although he were naked saving his privy parts. He had a great train of men waiting on him. All the while the priest was at mass, he showed himself very humble, and gave reverent attendance, with grave and demure countenance. When the mass was ended, he presented to the Admiral a basket of the fruits of his country, delivering the same with his own hands. When the Admiral had gently entertained him, desiring leave to speak, he made an oration in the presence of Didacus the interpreter, to this effect. I have been advertised (most mighty prince) that you have of late with great power subdued many lands and Regions, hitherto unknown to you, 
An oration of the naked governor.  and have brought no little fear upon all the people and inhabitants of the same: the which your good fortune, you shall bear with less insolency, if you remember that the souls of men have two journeys after they are departed from this body: The one, foul and dark, 
Their opinion of the soul of man.  prepared for such as are injurious and cruel to mankind: the other, pleasant and delectable, ordained for them which in their life time loved peace and quietness. If therefore you acknowledge yourself to be mortal, and consider that every man shall receive condign reward or punishment for such things as he hath done in this life, you will wrongfully hurt no man. When he had said these words and other like, which were declared to the Admiral by the interpreter, he marvelling at the judgement of the naked old man, answered, that he was glad to hear his opinion as touching the sundry journeys and rewards of souls departed from their bodies, supposing that nother he, or any other of thinhabitants of those Regions, had had any knowledge thereof: declaring further, that the chief cause of his coming thither, was to instruct them in such godly knowledge and true religion: 
Desire of gold, found that which religion could not ●ynde.  and that he was sent into those countries by the Christian king of Spain (his lord and master) for the same purpose, and specially to subdue and punish the Canibales, and such other mischievous people, 
Virtus post nummos. etc.  and to defend innocentes against the violence of evil doers, willing him, and all other such as embraced virtue, in no case to be afraid, but rather to open his mind unto him, if either he, or any other such quiet men as he was, had sustained any wrong of their neighbours, and that he would see the same revenged. These comfortable words of the Admiral so pleased the old man, that notwithstanding his extreme age, he would gladly have gone with the Admiral, as he had done in deed, if his wife and children had not hindered him of his purpose: but he marveled not a little, that the Admiral was under the dominion of another: and much more, when the interpreter told him of the glory, magnificence, pomp, great power, and furnimentes of war of our kings, and of the multitudes of cities and towns which were under their dominions. Intending therefore to have gone with the Admiral, his wife and children fell prostrate at his feet, with tears desiring him not to forsake them and leave them desolate: at whose pitiful requests, the worthy old man being moo●ed, remained at home to the comfort of his people and family, satisfying rather them then himself: for not yet ceasing to wonder, and of heavy countenance because he might not departed, he demanded oftentimes if that land were not heaven, which brought forth such a kind of men? For it is certain, that among them the land is as common as the sun and water, 
The land as common as▪ the sun and water.  and that Mine and Thine (the seeds of all mischief) have no place with them. They are content with so little, that in so large a country they have rather superfluity than scarcenesss: so that (as we have said before) they seem to live in the golden world without toil, living in open gardens, not entrenched with dyches, divided with hedges, or defended with walls: they deal truly one with another without laws, without books, and without judges: they take him for an evil and mischievous man, which taketh pleasure in doing hurt to other. And albeit that they delight not in superfluities, yet make they provision for the increase of such roots whereof they make their bread, as Maizium, jucca, and Ages, contented with such simple diet, whereby health is preserved, and diseases avoided. The admiral therefore departing from thence, 
Simple diet.  and minding to return again shortly after, chanced to come again to the Island of jamaica, being on the south side thereof, and coasted all along by the shore of the same from the West to the East, from whose last corner on the East side, when he saw toward the North side on his left hand certain high mountains, he knew at the length that it was the south side of the Island of Hispaniola, which he had not yet passed by. Wherefore, 
Hispaniola.  at the kalends of September, entering into the haven of the same Island, called saint Nicholas haven, he repaired his ships, to the intent that he might again waste and spoil the Islands of the Canibales, and burn all their Canoas', 
The Canibales.  that those ravening wolves might no longer persecute and devour the innocent sheep: but he was at this time hindered of his purpose, by reason of a disease which he had gotten by to much watching. Thus being feebl● a●d weak, 
Sickness of to much Watching.  he was led of the Mariners to the city of Is●●ella, where, with his two brethren which were there, and other of his familiars, he recovered his health in short space: yet could he not at this time assail the Canibales, by reason of sedition that was risen of late among the spaniards which he had left in Hispaniola, whereof we will speak more hereafter. Thus far ye well.   

The fourth book of the first Decade, to Lodovic Cardinal of Aragonie.  
COlonus the Admiral of the Ocean, returning (as he supposed) from the continent or firm land of East India, 
east India  had advertisement that his brother Boilus, and one Peter Margarita, an old familiar of the kings, and a noble man, 
The Spaniards rebel in the Admiral's absence.  with divers other of those to whom he had left the government of the Island, were (of corrupted mind against him) departed into Spain. Wherefore, aswell to purge himself of such crimes, as they should lay to his charge, as also to make a supply of other men in the place of them which were returned, and especially to provide for victuals, as wheat, wine, oil, and such other, which the spaniards are accustomed to eat, because they could not yet well agree with such meats as they found in the Islands, determined shortly to take his voyage into Spain: but what he did before his departure, I will briefly rehearse.  
The kings of the Islands which had hitherto lived quietly, and content with their little which they thought abundant, whereas they now perceived that our men began to fasten foot within their regions, 
The kings of the island rebel.  & to bear rule among them, they took the matter so grievously, that they thought nothing else but by what means they might utterly destroy them, and for ever abolish the memory of their name, 
The Spaniards misbehaviour.  for that kind of men (the spaniards I mean, which followed the Admiral in that navigation) were for the most part unruly, regarding nothing but idleness, play, and liberty, and would by no means abstain from injuries, ravishing of the women of the Islands before the faces of their husbands, fathers, and brethren: by which their abominable mysdemeanour, they disquieted the minds of all the inhabitants, insomuch that wheresoever they found any of our men unprepared, they slew them with such fierceness and gladness, as though they had offered sacrifice to God. 
A just revenge.  Intending therefore to pacify their troubled minds, and to punish them that slew his men before he departed from thence, he sent for the king of that vale, which in the book before we described to be at the foot of the mountains of the region of Cibana, this kings name was Guarionexius: who, the more straightly to concyle unto him the friendship of the Admiral, gave his sister to wife to Didacus, a man from his child's age brought up with the Admiral, whom he used for his interpreter in the provinces of Cuba. After this, he sent for Caunaboa, called the lord of the house of gold, that is, of the mountains of Cibana: For this Caunaboa he sent one Captain Hoieda, whom the dictionaries of Caunaboa had enforced to keep his hold, 
captain Hoieda.  besieging for the space of thirty days the fortress of saint Thomas, in the which Hoieda with his fifty soldiers stood at their defence, until the coming of the Admiral. While Hoieda remained with Caunaboa, many ambassadors of the kings of divers regions were sent to Caunaboa, persuading him in no condition to permit the Christians to inhabit the Island, except he had rather serve then rule. On the other party, Hoieda advertised Caunaboa to go to the Admiral, and to make a league of friendship with him: but the ambassadors on the contrary part, threatened him, that if he would so do, the other kings would invade his region. But Hoieda answered them again, that whereas they conspired to maintain their liberty, they should by that means be brought to servitude & destruction, if they intended to resist or keep war against the Christians. Thus Caunaboa on the one side and the other being troubled, as it were a rock in the sea beaten with contrary floods, and much more vexed with the storms of his guilty conscience, for that he had privily slain twenty of our men under pretence of peace, feared to come to the Admiral: but at the length, having excogitated his deceit, 
Caunaboa conspireth the Admiral's death.  to have slain the Admiral and his company, under the colour of friendship, if opportunity would so have served, he repaired to the Admiral, with his whole family, and many other waiting on him, armed after their manner. Being demanded why he brought so great a rout of men with him, he answered, that it was not decent for so great a prince as he was, to go out of his house without such a band of men: but the thing chanced much otherwise then he looked for, for he fell into the snares which he had prepared for other, for whereas by the way he began to repent him that he came forth of his house, Hoieda with many fair words & promises brought him to the Admiral, at whose commandment he was immediately taken and put in prison, so that the souls of our men were not long from their bodies unrevenged. Thus Caunaboa with all his family being taken, the Admiral was determined to run over the Island, but he was certified that there was such famine among the inhabitants, 
Famine in the island of hispaniola.  that there was already fifty thousand men dead thereof, and that they died yet daily, as it were rotten sheep, the cause whereof, was well known to be their own obstinacy and frowardness: for whereas they saw that our men intended to choose them a dwelling place in the Island, supposing that they might have driven them from thence if the victuals of the Island should fail, they determined with themselves, not only to leave sowing and planting, 
The hunger of gold causeth great famine.  but also to destroy and pluck up by the roots, every man in his own region, that which they had already sown, of both kinds of bread, whereof we made mention in the first book, but especially among the mountains of Cibana, otherwise called Cipanga, forasmuch as they had knowledge that the gold which aboundeth in that region, was the chief cause that detained our men in the Island. In the mean time, he sent forth a Captain with a band of men, to search the South side of the Island, who at his return, reported that throughout all the regions that he travailed, there was such scarcenesss of bread, that for the space of xvi days, he ate nothing but the roots of herbs, and of young date trees, or the fruits of other wild trees: but Guarionexius the king of the vale, lying beneath the mountains of Cibana, whose kingdom was not so wasted as the other, gave our men certain victuals. Within a few days after, both that the journeys might be the shorter, and also that our men might have more safe places of refuge, if the inhabitants should hereafter rebel in like manner, he builded another fortress (which he called the Tower of Conception) between the City of Isabel, 
The tower of conception.  and Saint Thomas fortress, in the marches of the kingdom of this Guarionexius, within the precinct of Cibana, upon the side of a hill, having a fair river of wholesome water running hard by the same. Thus when the inhabitants saw new buildings to be daily erected, and our ships lying in the haven rotten and half broken, they began to despair of any hope of liberty, and wandered up and down with heavy cheer. From the Tower of Conception, searching diligently the inner parts of the mountains of Cibana, there was a certain king which gave them a mass of rude gold as big as a man's fist, weighing twenty ounces: this gold was not found in the bank of that river, but in a heap of dry earth, and was like unto the stone called Tophus, which is soon resolved into sand. This mass of gold I me self saw in Castille, in the famous City of Metbymna Campi, where the Court lay all that winter. I saw also a great piece of pure Electrum, of the which bells, and Apothecaries mortars, & many such other vessels and instruments may be made, as were in old time of copper the city of Corinthus. 
Electrum is a metal naturally mixed of one portion of gold, & an other of silver, being of property to bewray poison, and was therefore in old time in greater estimation than gold. The mine of Electrum.  This piece of Electrum was of such weight, that I was not only with both my hands unable to lift it from the ground, but also not of strength to remove it either one way or other: they affirmed that it weighed more than three hundred pound weight, after eight ounces to the pound, it was found in the house of a certain prince, and left him by his predecessors: and albeit that in the days of the inhabitants yet living, Electrum was no where digged, yet knew they where the mine thereof was, but our men with much ado could hardly cause them to show them the place, they bore them such privy hatred, yet at the length they brought them to the mine, being now ruinated and stopped with stones and rubbyshe: it is much easier to dig then is the iron mine, and might be restored again, if miners and other workmen skilful therein were appointed thereto. 
another kind of amber is taken out of great whale fishes.  Not far from the tower of Conception, in the same mountains, is found great plenty of Amber, and out of certain rocks of the same, distilleth a substance of the yellow colour which the Painters use. Not far from these mountains are many great woods, 
Orpement o● oker.  in the which are none other trees than Brasile, which the Italians call Verzino. 
Woods of brasile trees.  But here perhaps (right noble prince) you would ask, what should be the cause, that where as the spaniards have brought out of these Islands certain ships laden with Brasile, somewhat of Gossampine cotton, a quantity of Amber, a little gold, & some spices, why they have not brought such plenty of gold, and such other rich merchandises, as the fruitfulness of these regions seem to promise? To this I answer, that when Colonus the Admiral was likewise demanded the cause hereof, he made answer, that the spaniards which he took with him into these regions, were given rather to sleep, play, and idleness, then to labour, 
Licentiusnes of to much liberty.  and were more studious of sedition and news, then desirous of peace and quietness: also, that being given to licentiousness, they rebelled & forsook him, finding matter of false accusation against him, because he went about to repress their outrageousness: by reason whereof, he was not yet able to break the power of the inhabitants, and freely to possess the full dominion of the Island, and these hindrances to be the cause that hitherto the gains have scarcely countervailed the charges: albeit, 
And this only gathered, and not digged out of the body of the mine.  even this year while I wrote these things at your request, they gathered in two months the sum of a thousand and two hundred pounds weight of gold. But because we intend to speak more largely of these things in their place, we will now return from whence we have digressed. When the inhabitants perceived that they could by no means shake the yoke from their necks, they made humble supplication to the Admiral, that they might stand to their tribute, and apply themselves to reincrease the fruits of their country, being now almost wasted. He granted them their request, and appointed such order that every region should pay their tribute, with the commodities of their countries, according to their portion, and at such time as they were agreed upon: but the violent famine did frustrate all these appointments, for all the travails of their bodies, were scarcely able to suffice to find them meat in the woods, whereby to sustain their lives, being of long time contented with roots and the fruits of wild trees: yet many of the kings with their people, even in this extreme necessity, brought part of their tribute, most humbly desiring the Admiral to have compassion of their calamities, and to bear with them yet a while, until the Island were restored to the old state, promising further, that that which was now wanting, should then be double recompensed. But few of the inhabitants of the mountains of Cibava kept their promise, because they were sorer oppressed with famine than any of the other. They say that the inhabitants of these mountains differ no less in language and manners from them which dwell in the plains, 
The nature of the region disposeth the manner of the people.  then among us the rusticals of the country, from the gentlemen of the court: whereas notwithstanding they live as it were both under one portion of heaven, and in many things much after one fashion, as in nakedness, and rude simplicity. But now let us return to Caunaboa the king of the house of gold, 
King Caunaboa in captivity.  being in captivity. When he perceived himself to be ●ast in prison, fretting and grating his teeth, as it had been a Lion of Libya, and daily and nightly devising with himself how he might be delivered, began to persuade the Admiral, that forasmuch as he had now taken unto his dominion the region of Cipanga or Cibava (whereof he was king) it should be expedient to send thither a garrison of Christian men, to defend the same from the incursions of his old enemies and borderers: for he said, that it was signified unto him, that the country was wasted and spoiled with such incursions. By this crafty devise, he thought to have brought to pass, that his brother which was in that region, and the other his kinsfolks and friends with their adherentes, should have taken, either by sleight or force, as many of our men as might have redeemed him. But the Admiral understanding his crafty meaning, sent Hoieda with such a company of men, as might vanquish the Cibavians, if they should move war against them. Our men had scarcely entered into the region, but the brother of Caunaboa came against them with an army of five thousand naked men, armed after their manner, with clubs, 
Caunaboa his brother rebelleth.  arrows tipped with bones, and spears made hard at the ends with fire. He stole upon our men being in one of their houses, and encamped round about the same on every side. This Cibavian, as a man not ignorant in the discipline of war, about the distance of a furlong from the house, divided his army into five battles, appointing to every one of them a circuit by equal division, and placed the froont of his own battle directly against our men. When he had thus set his battles in good array, he gave certain signs that the whole army should march forward in order with equal paces, 
A conflict between the Cibanians and the Spaniards.  and with a larome freshly assail their enemies, in such sort that none might escape. But our men judging it better to encounter with one of the battles, then to abide the brunt of the whole army, gave onset on the main battle aranged in the plain, because that place was most commodious for the horsemen. When the horsemen therefore had given the charge, they overthrew them with the breasts of their horses, and slew as many as abode the end of the fight, the residue being stricken with fear, disparkled, and fled to the mountains and rocks: from whence they made a pitiful howling to our men, desiring them to spare them, protesting that they would never more rebel, but do what so ever they would command them, if they would suffer them to live in their own country. Thus the brother of Caunaboa being taken, the Admiral licensed the people to resort every man to his own: these things thus fortunately achieved, this region was pacified. Among these mountains, the vale which Caunaboa inhabited, is called Mag●na, and is exceeding fruitful, having in it many goodly springs and rivers, in the sand whereof is found great plenty of gold. The same year in the month of june, 
A great tempest in the month of june.  they say there arose such a boisterous tempest of wind from the south-west, as hath not lightly been heard of, the violence whereof was such, that it plucked up by the roots whatsoever great trees were within the reach of the force thereof. When this whirlwind came to the haven of the city, it beat down to the bottom of the sea three ships, which lay at anchor, and broke the cables in sunder, and that (which is the greater marvel) without any storm or roughness of the sea, only turning them three or four times about. The inhabitants also affirm, that the same year the sea extended itself further into the land, and rose higher than ever it did before by the memory of man, by the space of a cubit. The people therefore muttered among themselves, that our nation had troubled the elements, & caused such portentous signs. These tempests of the air (which the Grecians call Tiphones, that is, whyrlewyndes) they call Furacanes, which they say, do often times chance in this Island: 

Whirl winds.  
Furacanes.   but that neither they, nor their great grandfathers, ever saw such violent and furious Furacanes, that plucked up great trees by the roots, neither yet such surges and vehement motions on the sea, that so wasted the land: as in deed it may appear, forasmuch as wheresoever the sea banks are near to any plain, there are in manner every where flourishing meadows reaching even unto the shore: but now let us return to Caunaboa. 
The death of king Caunaboa and his brother.  As king Caunaboa therefore and his brother should have been brought into Spain, they died by the way, for very pensiveness and anguish of mind. The Admiral, whose ships were drowned in the foresaid tempest, perceiving himself to be now enclosed, commanded forthwith two other ships (which the Spaniards call Caravelas) to be made: for he had with him all manner of Artificers pertaining thereunto. While these things were doing, he sent forth Bartholomeus Colonus his brother, being Lieutenant of the Island, with an army of men to search the gold mines, being distant threescore leagues from the city of Isabel, which were found by the conduct of certain people of the Island, before the mines of Cipanga or Cibana were known. In these mines they found certain deep pits, which had been digged in old time, out of these pits, the Admiral (who affirmeth this Island of Hispaniola to be Ophir, 
The gold mines of Solomon.  as we said before) supposeth that Solomon the king of Jerusalem had his great riches of gold, whereof we read in the old Testament, and that his ships sailed to this Ophir by the gulf of Persia, called Sinus Persicus. But whether it be so or not, it lieth not in me to judge, but in my opinion it is far of. As the miners digged the superficial or uppermost part of the earth of the mines, 
Gold in the superficial parts of the earth.  during for the space of six miles, & in divers places sifted the same on the dry land, they found such plenty of gold, that every hired labourer could easily find every day the weight of three drams. These mines being thus searched & found, the Lieutenant certified the Admiral hereof by his letters, the which when he had received, the fifth day of the Ideses of March, Anno. 1495. he entered into his new ships, and took his voyage directly to Spain, to advertise the king of all his affairs, leaving the whole regiment of the Island with his brother the Lieutenant.   

The fift book of the first Decade, to Lodovic Cardinal of Aragonie.  
AFter the Admiral's departing into Spain, his brother the lieutenant builded a fortress in the gold mines, as he had commanded him: this he called the golden tower, 
The golden tower.  because the labourers found gold in the earth, and stone whereof they made the walls of the fortress. He consumed three months in making the instruments wherewith the gold should be gathered, washed, tried, and molten: yet was he at this time, by reason of want of victuals, 
Lack of victuals.  enforced to leave all things imperfect, and to go seek for meat. Thus as he, with a band of armed men, had entered threescore miles further within the land, the people of the country here and there resorting to him, gave him a certain portion of their bread, in exchange for other of our things: but he could not long tarry here, because they lacked meat in the fortress, whither he hasted with such as he had now gotten. Leaving therefore in the fortress a garrison of ten men, with that portion of the Island bread which yet remained, leaving also with them a Hound to take those kinds of little beasts which they call Vsias, not much unlike our Coneys, he returned to the fortress of Conception. This also was the month wherein the king Guarionexius, and also Manicautexius borderer unto him, should have brought in their tributes. Remaining there the whole month of june, he exacted the whole tribute of these two kings, & victuals necessary for him and such as he brought with him, which were about four hundred in number. 
victuals brought from Spain.  Shortly after, about the kalends of july, there came three Caravels from Spain, bringing with them sundry kinds of victuals, as wheat, oil, wine, bacon, & Martelinas beef, which were divided to every man according as need required, some also was lost in the carriage for lack of good looking to. At the arrival of these ships, the Lieutenant received commandment from the king and the Admiral his brother, that he with his men should remove their habitation to the south side of the Island, because it was nearer to the gold mines: Also that he should make diligent search for those kings which had slain the Christian men, and to send them with their confederates bound into Spain. At the next voyage therefore he sent three hundred captives, with three kings, and when he had diligently searched the coasts of the south side, he transported his habitation, and builded a fortress there, upon the top of a hill near unto a sure haven: 
Saint Domi●ikes tower.  this fortress he called saint Dominic'S tower. Into this haven runneth a river of wholesome water, replenished with sundry kinds of good fishes: they affirm this river to have many benefits of nature, for where so ever it runneth, all things are exceeding pleasant and fruitful, having on every side groves of Date trees, and divers other of the Island fruits so plentifully, that as they sailed along by the shore, oftentimes the branches thereof, laden with flowers and fruits, hung so over their heads, that they might pluck them with their hands: also that the fruitfulness of this ground, is either equal with the soil of Isabel, or better. In Isabel he left only certain sick men, and ship wryghtes, 
Isabel.  whom he had appointed to make certain caravels, the residue of his men, he conveyed to the south, to saint Dominickes tower. After he had builded this fortress, leaving therein a garrison of twenty men, he with the remanent of his soldiers, prepared themselves to search the inner parts of the West side of the Island, hitherto known only by name. Therefore about xxx leagues, (that is) fourscore and ten miles from the fortress, he chanced on the river Naiba, 
The River of Naiba.  which we said to defend from the mountains of Cibava, right toward the south, by the midst of the island. When he had overpassed this river with a company of armed men divided into xxv decurions, that is, ten in a company, with their captains, he sent two decurions to the regions of those kings in whose lands were the great woodds of brasile trees. Inclining toward the left hand, they found the woods, entered into them, and felled the high and precious trees, 
Woods of Brasile trees.  which were to that day untouched. Each of the decurions filled certain of the island houses with the trunks of brasile, there to be reserved until the ships came which should carry them away. But the Lieutenant directing his journey toward the right hand, not far from the banks of the river of Naiba, found a certain king whose name was Beuchius Anacauchoa, encamped against thinhabitants of the province of Naiba, to subdue them under his dominion, as he had done many other kings of the island, borderers unto him. The palace of this great king, is called Xaragua, & is situate toward the West end of the island, distant from the river of Naiba xxx leagues. All the princes which dwell between the West end & his palace, are dictionaries unto him. All that region from Naiba, to the furthest marches of the west, is utterly without gold, although it be full of mountains. When the king had espied our men, laying a part his weapons, 
Mountains without gold.  & giving signs of peace, he spoke gently to them (uncertain whether it were of humanity or fear) and demanded of them what they would have. The lieutenant answered, That he should pay tribute to the Admiral his brother, in the name of the Christian king of Spain. To whom he said, How can you require that of me, whereas never a region under my dominion bringeth forth gold? For he had heard, that there was a strange nation entered into the island, which made great search for gold: But he supposed that they desired some other thing. The lieutenant answered again, God forbid that we should enjoin any man to pay such tribute as he might not easily forbear, or such as were not engendered or growing in the region: but we understand that your regions bring forth great plenty of Gossampine cotton, and hemp, with such other, whereof we desire you to give us part. When he heard these words, he promised with cheerful countenance, to give him as much of these things as he would require. Thus dismissing his army, and sending messengers before, he himself accompanied the Lieutenant, and brought him to his palace, being distant (as we have said) xxx leagues. In all this tract, they passed through the jurisdiction of other princes, being under his dominion: Of the which, some gave them hemp, of no less goodness to make tackelinges for ships then our wood: Other some brought bread, and some gossamppne cotton. And so every of them paid tribute with such commodities as their countries brought forth. At the length they came to the kings mansion place of Xaragua. Before they entered into the palace, a great multitude of the kings servants & subjects resorted to the court, honourably (after their manner) to receive their king Beuchius Anacauchoa, with the strangers which he brought with him to see the magnificence of his court. But now shall you hear how they were entertained. Among other triumphs and sights, two are especially to be noted: first, there met them a company of xxx women, 
The kings wives.  being all the kings wives and concubines, bearing in their hands branches of date trees, singing and dancing: they were all naked, saving that their privy parts were covered with breeches of gossampine cotton: but the virgins, having their hear hanging down about their shoulders, tied about the forehead with a fillet, were utterly naked. They affirm that their faces, breasts, paps, hands, 
Well favoured women.  and other parts of their bodies, were exceeding smooth, and well proportioned, but somewhat inclining to a lovely brown. They supposed that they had seen those most beautiful Dryads, or the native nymphs or fairs of the fountains whereof the antiques spoke so much. 
Dryads.  The branches of date trees, which they bore in their right hands when they danced, they delivered to the lieutenant, with low courtesy and smiling countenance. Thus entering into the kings house, they found a delicate supper prepared for them, after their manner. When they were well refreshed with meat, the night drawing on, they were brought by the kings officers, every man to his lodging, according to his degree, in certain of their houses about the palace, where they rested them in hanging beds, after the manner of the country, whereof we have spoken more largely in an other place.  
The day following, they brought our men to their common hall, into the which they come together as often as they make any notable games or triumphs, as we have said before. Here, after many daunsynges, singings, maskinge, runnynge, 
A pretty pastime.  wrestlyng, and other trying of masteries, suddenly there appeared in a large plain near unto the hall, two great armies of men of war, which the king for his pastime had caused to be prepared, as the Spaniards use the play with reeds, which they call juga de Canias. As the armies drew near together, they assailed the one the other as fiercely, as if mortal enemies with their banners spleade, should fight for their goods, their lands, their lives, their liberty, their country, their wives & their children, so that within the moment of an hour, four men were slain, and many wounded. 
Four men slain in sport  The battle also should have continued longer, if the king had not, at the request of our men, caused them to cease. The third day, the Lieutenant counselling the king to sow more plenty of gossampine upon the banks near unto the water's side, that they might the better pay their tribute privately, according to the multitude of their houses, he prepared to Isabel, to visit the sick men which he had left there, and also to see how his works went forward. In the time of his absence xxx of his men were consumed with diverse diseases. 
Provision for diseased men.  Wherefore being sore troubled in his mind, and in manner at his wits end, what he were best to do, for as much as he wanted all things necessary, as well to restore them to health which were yet acrased, as also victuals to maintain the whole multitude, where as there was yet no ship come from Spain: at the length, he determined to send abroad the sick men here and there to sundry regions of the island, and to the castles which they had erected in the same. For directly from the city of Isabel to saint Dominic'S tower, that is, from the north to the south, through the island, 
The castles or towers of hispaniola.  they had builded thus many castles. first, xxxvi. miles distant from Isabel, they builded the castle of Sperantia. From Sperantia xxv miles, was the castle of saint Katherine. From saint Katherine's twenty miles, was saint james tower. Other twenty miles from saint james tower, was a stronger fortress than any of the other, which they called the tower of Conception, which he made the stronger, because it was situate at the roots of the golden mountains of Cibana, in the great and large plain, 
The golden mountains of Cibana.  so fruitful and well inhabited as we have before described. He builded also an other in the mid way between the tower of Conception, & saint Dominic'S tower, the which also was stronger than the tower of Conception, because it was within the limits of a great king, having under his dominion five thousand men, whose chief city and head of the Realm, being called Bonawm, he willed that the castle should also be called after the same name. Therefore leaving the sick men in these castles, and other of the island houses near unto the same, he himself repaired to saint Dominic'S, exacting tributes of all the kings which were in his way. When he had tarried there a few days, there was a rumour spread, that all the kings about the borders of the tower of Conception, had conspired with desperate minds to rebel against the Spaniards. 
The kings rebel.  When the Lieutenant was certified hereof, he took his journey toward them immediately, not being discouraged either by the length of the way, or feebleness of his soldiers, being in manner foreweried with travail. As he drew near unto them, he had advertisement that king Guarionexius was chosen by other princes to be the captain of this rebellion, and that he was enforced thereto half unwilling, being seduced by persuasions and provocations: the which is more likely to be true, for that he had before had experience of the power and policy of our men. They came together at a day appointed, accompanied with xu thousand men, armed after their manner, 
An army of xv. thousand Barbarians.  once again to prove the fortune of war. Here the Lieutenant, consulting with the Captain of the fortress and the other soldiers of whom he had the conduct, determined to set upon them unwares in their own houses, before they could prepare their army. He sent forth therefore to every king a Centurion, that is, a captain of a hundred, which were commanded upon a sudden to invade their houses in the night, and to take them sleeping, before the people (being scattered here & there) might assemble together. Thus secretly entering into their villages, not fortified with walls, 
The kings are taken prisoners.  trenches, or bulwarks, they broke in upon them, took them, bound them, & led away every man his prisoner according as they were commanded. The Lieutenant himself with his hundred men, assailed king Guarionexius as the worthier parsonage, whom he took prisoner, as did the other captains their kings, and at the same hour appointed. Fourteen of them were brought the same night to the tower of Conception. Shortly after, when he had put to death two of the kings which were the chief authors of this new revolt, 
king Guarionexius is pardoned.  and had suborned Guarionexius & the other kings to attempt the same, lest the people for sorrow of their kings should neglect or forsake their country, which thing might have been great incommodity to our men, who by th'increase of their seeds and fruits were oftentimes aided, he freely pardoned and dismissed Guarionexius and the other kings, the people in the mean time flocking together about the tower, to the number of five thousand without weapons, with pitiful howling for the deliverance of their kings: The air thundered, & the earth trembled through the vehemency of their outcry. The Lieutenant warned Guarionexius and the other kings, with threatenings, with rewards, and with promises, never thereafter to attempt any such thing. Then Guarionexius made an oration to the people, of the great power of our men, of their clemency toward offenders, & liberality to such as remain faithful, desiring them to quiet their minds, and from thenceforth neither in deed nor thought to interpryse any thing against the christians, but to obey and serve them, except they would daily bring themselves into further calamities. When the oration was finished, they took him up, and set him on their shoulders, and so carried him home to his own palace: and by this means, this Region was pacified for a while. But our men, with heavy countenance wandered up and down, as desolate in a strange country, lacking victuals, and worn out of apparel, whereas xu months were now passed sense the Admiral's departure, 
Lack of victuals.  during which time, they could hear nothing out of Spain. The lieutenant comforted them all that he could with fair words and promises. In the mean time, Beuchius Anacauchoa (the king of the West parts of the Region of Xaragua (of whom we spoke before) sent messengers to the lieutenant, to signify unto him, that he had in a readiness the gossampine cotton, and such other things as he willed him to prepare for the payment of his tribute. Whereupon the lieutenant took his journey thither, and was honourably received of the king and his sister, sometime the wife of Caunaboa the king of Cibana, bearing no less rule in the governance of her brother's kingdom, than he himself: For they affirmed her to be a wise woman, of good manners, & pleasant in company. She earnestly persuaded her brother, by th'example of her husband, to love and obey the Christians. This woman was called Anacaona. He found in the palace of Beuchius Anacauchoa xxxii kings, 
xxxii. kings.  which had brought their tributes with them, and abode his coming. They brought with them also, beside their tribute assigned them, further to demerit the favour of our men, great plenty of victuals, as both kinds of bread, coneys, and fishes, already dried, because they should not putrefy: 
Serpents eaten.  Serpents also of that kind which we said to be esteemed among them as most delicate meat, and like unto Crocodiles saving in bygnes. These serpents they call juannas, which our men learned (somewhat to late) to have been engendered in the island: For unto that day, none of them durst adventure to taste of them, by reason of their horrible deformity and loathsomeness. Yet the Lieutenant, being enticed by the pleasantness of the kings sister, determined to taste of the serpents. But when he felt the flesh thereof to be so delicate to his tongue, he fell to amain without all fear: the which thing his companions perceiving, were not behind him in greediness, insomuch that they had now none other talk, then of the sweetness of these serpents, which they affirm to be of more pleasant taste, then either our pheasants or Partridges: but they lose their taste, except they be prepared after a certain fashion, as do Peacocks and pheasants, except they be interlarded before they be roasted. They prepare them therefore after this manner: first, taking out their bowels, 
The dressing of serpents to be eaten.  even from the throat to the thighs, they wash and rub their bodies very clean both within & without, then rolling them together on a circle, involved after the manner of a sleeping snake, they thrust them into a pot, of no bigger capacity then to hold them only, this done, putting a little water unto them, with a portion of the Island Pepper, they seeth them with a soft fire of sweet wood, and such as maketh no great smoke: Of the ●atte of them being thus sodde, is made an exceeding pleasant broth or pottage. They say also, that there is no meat to be compared to the eggs of these serpents, which they use to seeth by themselves: they are good to be eaten as soon as they are sodde, 
Serpent's eggs eaten.  and may also be reserved many days after. But having said thus much of their entertainment and dainty fare, let us now speak of other matters. When the lieutenant had filled one of the Island houses with the Gossampine cotton which he had received for tribute, 
Gossopine cotton.  the kings promised furthermore to give him as much of their bread as he would demand: he gave them hearty thanks, and gently accepted their friendly proffer. In the mean time, while this bread was a gathering in sundry regions, to be brought to the palace of Beuchius Anachaucoa king of Xaragua, he sent messengers to Isabel, for one of the two caravels which were lately made there, intending to send the same again thither laden with bread. The Mariners glad of these tidings, sailed about the Island, and in short space brought the ship to the coasts of Xaragua. The sister of king Beuchius Anacauchoa, that wise and pleasant woman Anacuona (the wife sometime of Caunaboa the king of the golden house of the mountains of Cibana, 
Queen Anacaona.  whose husband died in the way when he should have been carried into Spain) when she heard say that our ship was arrived on the shore of her native country, persuaded the king her brother, that they both might go together to see it: for the place where the ship lay, was not passed vi miles distant from Xaragua. They rested all night in the midway, in a certain village in the which was the treasury or jewel house of Anacaona. 
The treasury of Queen Anacaona.  Her treasure was neither gold, silver, or precious stones, but only things necessary to be used, as chairs, stools, settels, dishes, potingers, pots, pans, basins, treyes, and such other household stuff and instruments, workmanly made of a certain black and hard shining wood, which that excellent learned physician, john baptist Elisius, affirmeth to be Hebene. Whatsoever portion of wit nature hath given to the inhabitants of these islands, 
Hebene wood.  the same doth most appear in these kind of works, in which they show great art and cunning, but those which this woman had, were made in the island of Guanabba, situate in the mouth of the west side of Hispaniola: 
The Island of Guanabba.  In these they grave the lively images of such fantasies as they suppose they see walk by night, which the antiques called Lemures: Also the images of men, serpents, beasts, & what so ever other thing they have once seen. What would you think (most noble prince) that they could do, 
Cunning Artificers.  if they had the use of Iron and steel? For they only first make these soft in the fire, & afterward make them hollow and carve them with a certain stone which they find in the rivers. 
A stone in the steed of Iron.  Of stools and chairs, she gave the lieutenant fourteen, and of vessels pertaining to the table and kitchen, she gave him threescore, some of wood, and some of earth, also gossampyne cotton ready spun, four great bottoms of exceeding weight. The day following, when they came to the sea side, where was an other village of the kings, the lieutenant commanded the ship boat to be brought to the shore. The king also had prepared two Canoas', painted after their manner, one for himself, and certain of his gentlemen, an other for his sister Anacaona and her waiting women: but Anacaona desired to be carried in the ship boat with the lieutenant. When they now approached near unto the ship, certain great pieces of ordinance, were discharged of purpose, the sea was filled with thunder, 
Guns.  and the air with smoke, they trembled and quaked for fear, supposing that the frame of the world had been in danger of falling, but when they saw the Lieutenant laugh, and look cheerfully on them, they called again their spirits, and when they yet drew nearer to the ship, and heard the noise of the flutes, shawlmes, and drums, they were wonderfully astonished at the sweet harmony thereof. 
Musical instruments.  Entering into the ship, and beholding the foreshyp and the stern, the top castle, the mast, the hatches, the cabbens, the keel, and the tacklynges, the brother fyxing his eyes on the sister, 
Ignorance causeth admiration.  and the sister on the brother, they were both as it were dumb and amazed, and wist not what to say for to much wondering. While beholding these things, they wandered up and down the ship, the Lieutenant commanded the anchors to be loosed, and the sails to be hoist up. Then were they further astonished, when they saw so great a mole to move as it were by itself, without oars, and without the force of man: for there arose from the earth such a wind, as a man would have wished for of purpose. Yet furthermore, when they perceived the ship to move sometime forward, and sometime backward, sometime toward the right hand, and sometime toward the left, and that with one wind, and in manner at one instant, they were at their wits end for to much admiration. These things finished, and the ships laden with bread, and such other rewards, they being also recompensed with other of our things, he dismissed not only the king Beuchius Anachauchoa and his sister, but likewise all their servants & women, replenished with joy & wondering. After this, he himself took his journey by foot with his soldiers to the city of Isabel, where he was advertised that one Roldanus Ximenus, a naughty fellow (whom before, being his servant, he had preferred to be captain of the miners and labourers, & after made him a judge in causers of controversy) had used himself outrageously, and was maliciously minded against him, and further, 
The intemperancy & malice of a servile wit advanced.  the cause of much mischief in his absence. For king Guarionexius (who a while before was pardoned of his former rebellion, and persuaded the people to obey the spaniards) was by his noughty usage, and such other as were confedered with him, so accensed to revenge the injuries which they sustained at his hands, beside the abominable acts which they, following only the law of nature, abhorred to admit, 
Ciguanians.  that he, with his family, familiars, and dictionaries, of desperate mind fled to the mountains, being distant from Isabel only ten leagues westward, toward the north side of the sea. These mountains, and also the inhabitants of the same, they call by one name, Ciguaios. The great king of all the kings and regions of these mountains is called Maiobanexius, and his court or palace is named Capronus: the mountains are rough, high, and such as no man can pass to the tops thereof, they are also bending, and have their corners reaching down to the sea. Between both the corners of the mountains, is there a great plain, by the which many rivers fall from the mountains into the sea, the people are very fierce and warlike men, having their original of the Canibales: for when they descend from the mountains to the plains, to keep war with their borderers, they eat all such as they kill. Guarionexius therefore, fleeing to this king of these mountains, gave him many presents of such things as are wanting in his country, therewith declaring how vilely, villainously, and violently he had been used of our men, with whom he could nothing prevail, neither by fair means, nor by foul, neither by humility, nor by stoutness, and that to be the cause of his resorting, to him at that time, most humbly desiring him to be his defence against thoppressions of such mischievous people. Maiobanexius hereupon, made him promiss to aid and help him against the Christians all that he might. The Lieutenant therefore made haste to the fortress of Conception, whither, as soon as he was come, he sent for Roldanus Xeminus, who with such as followed him, lay in certain of the Island villages, xii. miles distant from the fortress. At his coming, the lieutenant asked him what all these stirs and tumults meant? He answered without abashment, Your brother the Admiral hath to do therewith, and shall answer for the fame before the king, for we perceive that the king hath so put him in trust, that he hath had no regard to us: here we perish for hunger, while we follow you, and are driven to seek our unhappy food in the deserts: Your brother also assigned me assystaunt with you in governing the Island. Wherefore, sith you have na more respect unto us, we are determined no longer to be under your obedience. When Roldanus had spoken these words, and such other, the lieutenant would have laid hands on him, but he escaped his fingers, and fled to the West parts of the region of Xaragua, having with him a train of threescore and ten men, which were of his confederacy. Here this filthy sink of rebels thus conspired, played their vages, and lived with lose bridles in all kind of mischief, robbing the people, 
Licentiousness in liberty.  spoiling the country, and ravishing both wives and virgins. While these things were doing in the Island, the Admiral had eight ships appointed him by the king, of the which he sent two laden with victuals, from Cales or Gades of Hercules pillars, 
Hercules' pillars.  directly to the Lieutenant his brother. These ships by chance arrived first on that side of the Island where Roldanus Xeminus ranged with his companions. Roldanus in short time had seduced them, promising them in the steed of mattocks, 
A violent persuasion.  wenches paps: for labour, pleasure: for hunger, abundance: and for weariness and watching, sleep and quietness. 
The fury of Guarionexius.  Guarionexius in the mean time assembled a power of his friends and confederates, & came oftentimes down into the plain, and slew as many of the Christian men as he could meet conveniently, and also the Island men which were their friends, wasting their ground, destroying their seeds, and spoiling their villages. But Roldanus and his adherentes, albeit they had knowledge that the Admiral would shortly come, yet feared they nothing, because they had seduced the new men which came in the first ships. While the lieutenant was thus tossed in the midst of these storms, in the mean time his brother the Admiral set forward from the coasts of Spain: but not directly to Hispaniola, for he turned more toward the south. 
The third voyage of Colonus the Admiral.  In the which voyage, what he did, what coasts both of the land and sea he compassed, and what new regions he discovered, we will first declare: for to what end and conclusion the said tumults and seditions came, we will express in the end of the book following. Thus far ye well.   

The sixth book of the first Decade, to Lodovic Cardinal of Aragonie.  
COlonus the Admiral, the third day of the kalends of june, in the year of Christ 1498. hoist up his sails in the haven of the town Barramedabas, not far distant from Cales, and set forward on his voyage with eight ships laden with victuals and other necessaries. He diverted from his accustomed race, which was by the Islands of Canary, by reason of certain frenchmen pirates and rovers on the sea, which lay in the right way to meet with him. 
French men pirates.  In the way from Cales to the Islands of Canary, about fourscore and ten miles toward the left hand, is the Island of Madera, more southward than the city of Civil by four degrees, 
The island of Madera.  for the Pole Arctic is elevate to Civil xxxvi degrees, but to this Island (as the Mariners say) only xxxii He sailed therefore first to Madera, and sending from thence directly to Hispaniola the residue of the ships laden with victuals and other necessaries, he himself with one ship with decks, and two Merchant caravels, coasted toward the South to come to the Equinoctial line, and so forth to follow the tract of the same toward the West, to the intent to search the natures of such places as he could find under or near unto the same, leaving Hispaniola on the north side on his right hand. In the middle of this race, lie xiii. Islands of the Portugals, which were in old time called Hesperides, and are now called Caput Viride, or Caboverde, these are situate in the sea, right over against the inner parts of Ethiope, Westward two days sailing. One of these the Portugals call Bonavista. With the Snails, or rather the Tortoises of this Island, many leprous men are healed and cleansed of their leprosy. 
Healing of the leper.  Departing suddenly from hence, by reason of the contagiousness of the air, he sailed. CCCClxxx. miles toward the West south-west, which is in the midst between the West and the South. 
Contagious air and extreme heat.  There was he so vexed with maladies and heat (for it was the month of june) that his ships were almost set on fire: The hoops of his barrels cracked and broke, and the fresh water ran out: the men also complained that they were not able to abide that extremity of heat. Here the north pole was elevate only .v. degrees from the Hozizontall. For the space of viii days, in the which he suffered these extremites, only the first day was fair, but all the other, cloudy and rainy, yet nevertheless fervent hot: Wherefore it oftentimes repent him not a little, that ever he took that way. Being tossed in these dangers and vexations eight continual days, at the length an Eastsoutheast wind arose, and gave a prosperous blast to his sails. Which wind following directly toward the west, he found the stars over that parallel placed in other order, and an other kind of air, as the Admiral himself toiled me. And they all affirm, that within three days sailing, they found most temperate and pleasant air. The Admiral also affirmeth, that from the clime of the great heat and unwholesome air, he ever ascended by the back of the sea, as it were by a high mountain toward heaven, yet in all this time, could he not once see any land: But at the length, the day before the kalends of july, the watchman looking forth of the top castle of the greatest ship, cried out aloud for joy that he espied three exceeding high mountains, exhorting his fellows to be of good cheer, and to put away all pensiveness: for they were very heavy and sorrowful, as well for the grief which they sustained by reason of th'intolerable heat, as also that their fresh water failed them, which ran out at the rifts of the barels, caused by extreme heat, as we have said. Thus being well comforted, they drew to the land, but at their first approach they could not aryue, by reason of the shalownes of the sea near the shore: Yet looking out of their ships, they might well perceive that the Region was inhabited, and well cultured, for they saw very fair gardens, and pleasant meadows: from the trees and herbs whereof, when the morning dews began to rise, there proceeded many sweet savours. Twenty miles distant from hence, they chanced into a haven, very apt to harborowe ships, but it had no river running into it. Sailing on yet somewhat further, he found at the length a commodious haven, wherein he might repair his ships, and make provision of fresh water and fuel. Arenalis calleth this land Puta. 
The island of Puta.  They found no houses near unto the haven, but innumerable steps of certain wild beasts feet, of the which they found one dead, much like a goat. The day following, they saw a Canoa coming a far of, having in it four and twenty young men of goodly corporature and high stature, 
People of comely corporature, and long hear, near the Equinoctial.  all armed with targets, bows, & arrows: the hear of their heads was long and plain, and cut on the forehead much after the manner of the Spaniards, their privy parts were covered with fyllets of gossampine cotton, of sundry colours interlaced, & were beside all over naked. Here the Admiral, considering with himself the corporature of this people, and nature of the land, he believed the same to be so much the nearer heaven, than other regions of the same parallel, and further removed from the gross vapours of the vales, 
The higher, the colder.  and marshes, how much the highest tops of the bigest mountains are distant from the deep vales. For he earnestly affirmeth, that in all that navigation, he never went out of the parallels of Ethiope: So great difference is there between the nature of thinhabitants, and of the soils of divers regions, all under one clime or parallel, as is to see between the people and regions being in the firm land of Ethiope, and them of the Islands under the same clime, having the pole star elevate in the same degree. For the Ethiopians are all black, having their hear curled, more like wool then hear: but these people of the Island of Puta, (being as I have said under the clime of Ethiope) are white, with long hear, and of yellow colour Wherefore it is apparent, the cause of this so great difference, to be rather by the disposition of the earth, than constitution of heaven. For we know, that snow falleth on the mountains of the Equinoctial, or burnt line, and the same to endure there continually: we know likewise, that the inhabitants of the regions far distant from that line toward the north, are molested with great heat. The Admiral, that he might allure the young men to him with gentleness, showed them looking glasses, fair and bright vessels of copper, hawks bells, and such other things unknown to them. But the more they were called, so much the more they suspected craft and deceit, and fled backward: Yet did they with great admiration behold our men and their things, but still having their oars in their hands ready to flee. When the Admiral saw that he could by no means allure them by gifts, he thought to prove what he could do with musical instruments, and therefore commanded that they which were in the greatest ship, should play on their drums and shawlmes. 
Musical instruments.  But the young men supposing this to be a token of battle, left their oars, & in the twincling of an eye had their arrows in their bows, and their targets on their arms: and thus directing their arrows toward our men, stood in expectation to know what this noise might mean. Our men likewise preparing their bows and arrows, approached toward them by little and little. But they departing from the Admiral's ship, and trusting to the dexterity of their oars, came so near one of the less ships, that one of them plucked the cloak from the governor of the ship, and as well as they could by signs, required him to come aland, promising faith that they would commune with him of peace. But when they saw him go to the Admiral's ship, whither he went to ask leave that he might commune with them, suspecting hereby some further deceit, they leapt immediately into the Canoa, and fleedde as swift as the wind, so that to conclude, they could by no means be alured to familiarity: Wherefore the Admiral thought it not convenient to bestow any long time there at this voyage. No great space from this Island, ever toward the West, 
The violent course of the water from the East to the West.  the Admiral saith he found so outrageous a fall of water, running with such a violence from the East to the West, that it was nothing inferior to a mighty stream falling from high mountains. He also confessed, that since the first day that ever he knew what the sea meant, he was never in such fear. Proceeding yet somewhat further in this dangerous voyage, he found certain gulfs of eight miles, as it had been the entrance of some great haven, into the which the said violent streams did fall. These gulfs or streyghtes he called Os Draconis, that is, the Dragon's mouth: and the Island directly overagainst the same, he called Margarita. 
The gulf called Os Draconis.  Out of these strayghtes, issued no less force of fresh water, which encountering with the salt, did strive to pass forth, so that between both the waters, was no small conflict: But entering into the gulf, at the length he found the water thereof very fresh and good to drink. The Admiral himself, and they which were his companions in this byoage, being men of good credit, and perceiving my diligence in searching for these matters, told me yet of a greater thing, that is, 
A sea of fresh water.  that for the space of xxvi leagues, amounting to a hundredth and four miles, he sailed ever by fresh water, insomuch that the further he proceeded, especially toward the west, he affirmed the water to be the fresher. After this, he came to a high mountain inhabited only with Monkeys or Marmasits, 
Marmosets. Monkeys.  on that part toward the East: For that side was rough with rocky and stony mountains, and therefore not inhabited with men. Yet they that went a land to search the country, found near unto the sea, many fair fields, well tilled and sown, but no people, nor yet houses or cottages: Perhaps they were gone further into the country, to sow their corn, and apply their husbandry, as we often see our husbandmen to leave their stations and villages for the same purpose. In the west side of that mountain, they espied a large plain, whither they made haste, and cast anchor in the broad river. As soon as the inhabitants had knowledge that a strange nation was arrived in their coasts, 
The fair and large region of Paria.  they came flocking without all fear to see our men. We understood by their signs and poyntynges, that this Region was called Paria, and that it was very large: in so much that the further it reacheth toward the west, to be so much the better inhabited and replenished with people. The Admiral therefore, taking into his ship four of the men of that land, searched the west parts of the same. By the temperateness of the air, the pleasantness of the ground, and the multitude of people which they saw daily more & more as they sailed, they conjectured that these things portended some great matter: as in deed their opinion failed them not, as we will further declare in his place. The son not yet risen, but beginning even now to rise, being one day alured by the pleasantness of the place, and sweet savours which breathed from the land to the ships, they went a land: Here they found a greater multitude of people, then in any other place. As our men approached toward them, there came certain messengers from their Cacici, 
human people.  that is, the kings of the country, to desire the Admiral in the name of their princes to come to their palaces without fear, and that they and all theirs should be at his commandment. When the Admiral had thanked them, and made his excuse for that time, there came innumerable people with their boats to the ships, having for the most part chains about their necks, garlands on their heads, and bracelets on their arms of pearls of India, and that so commonly, that our women in plays and triumphs, have not greater plenty of stones of glass and crystal in their garlands, crowns, girdles, and such other tyrementes. Being asked where they gathered them, they pointed to the next shore by the sea banks. They signified also, by certain scornful gestures which they made with their mouths and hands, that they nothing esteemed pearls. Taking also baskets in their hands, they made signs that the same might be filled with them in short space. But because the corn wherewith his ships were laden to be carried into Hispaniola, had taken hurt by reason of the salt water, he determined to defer this mart to a more convenient time: Yet he sent to land two of the ship boats laden with men, to th'intent to fetch some garlands of pearls for exchange of our things, and also somewhat to search the nature of the Region, and disposition of the people. They entertained our men gently, and came flocking to them by heaps, as it had been to behold some strange monsters. first there came to meet our men, two men of gravity, whom the multitude followed: One of these was well in age, and the other but young. They think it was the father, with his son which should succeed him. When the one had saluted and embraced the other, they brought our men into a certain round house, near unto the which was a great court. 
chairs and stools of Hebene.  Hither were brought many chairs and stools made of a certain black wood, and very cunningly wrought. After that our men and their Princes were set, their waiting men came in laden, some with sundry delicate dysihes, and some with wine: But their meat, was only fruits, and those of divers kinds, and utterly unknown to us. Their wine was both white and red, not made of grapes, but of the liquor of divers fruits, and very pleasant in drinking. After this banquet made in the old man's house, the young man brought them to his tabernacle or mansion place, where was a great company both of men and women, but they stood dissevered the one from the other. They are white, even as our men are, 
white men near the Equinoctial.  saving such as are much conversant in the sun. They are also very gentle, and full of humanity toward strangers. They cover their privy parts with gossampine cotton, wrought with sundry colours, and are beside all naked. There was few, or none, that had not either a collar, a chain, or a bracelet of gold and pearls, and many had all. Being asked where they had that gold, they pointed to certain mountains, seeming with their countenance to dissuade our men from going thither: For putting their arms in their mouths, and grinning as though they bit the same, still pointing to the mountains, they seemed to insinuate that men were eaten there: but whether they meant by the Canibales, or wild beasts, our men could not well perceive. They took it exceeding grievously, that they could neither understand our men, nor our men them. When they which were sent to land, were returned to the ships about three of the clock at after noon the same day, bringing with them certain garlands, and collars of pearls, they loosed their anchors to depart, minding to come again shortly, when all things were set in good order in Hispaniola: but he was prevented by another, which defeated him of the reward of his travail. He was also hindered at this time by reason of the shalownesse of the sea, 
Shalownesse of the sea.  & violent course of the water, which with continual tossing, bruised the greatest ship as often as any great gale of wind arose. To avoid the dangers of such shallow places and shelves, he ever sent one of the smallest caravels before to try the way with sounding, 
The use of Caravels or Brigandines.  and the bigest ships followed behind. The regions being in the large province of Paria, for the space of. CCxxx. miles, are called of the inhabitants, Cumana, and Manacapana: from these regions distant. lx. leagues, is there an other region called Curiana. When he had thus passed over this long tract of sea, supposing still that it had been an Island, & doubting that he might pass by the West to the North directly to Hispaniola, 
A river of marvelous depth and breadth.  he chanced into a river of xxx cubit's depth, and of such breadth as hath not lightly been heard of. For he affirmeth it to be xxviii leagues. A little further toward the West, yet somewhat more southward, as the bending of the shore required, he entered into a sea full of herbs or weeds. The seed of the herbs which swim on the water, are much like the berries of the tree called Lentiscus, which beareth the sweet gum called Mastix: they grew so thick, that they sometime in manner stayed the ships. The Admiral reported, that here there is not one day throughout all the year much longer or shorter than an other, and that the North pole is here elevate only five degrees as at Paria, in whose tract all these coasts lie. 
The elevation of the Pole as Paria.  He also declared certain things as concerning the variety of the north pole: the which because they seem contrary to thopinions of all the Astronomers, I will touch them but with a dry foot, as saith the proverb. 
Note a secret as concerning the Pole star.  But it is well known (most noble prince) that which we call the pole star, or north star (called of the Italians Tramontana) is not the very point of the pole arctic, upon the which the axes or extremities of heavens are turned about. The which thing may well be proved, if when the stars first appear, you behold the pole star through any narrow hole: For so, 
An experience.  applying your instrument thereto in the morning, somewhat before the day spring have blemished their light, if then you look through the same hole, you shall perceive it to be moved from the place where you saw it first. But how it cometh to pass, that at the beginning of the evening twilight it is elevate in that Region only five degrees in the month of june, and in the morning twilight to be elevate xu degrees by the same quadrant, I do not understand, 
A marvelous secret.  nor yet do the reasons which he bringeth, in any point satisfy me. For he saith, that he hereby conjectured, that the earth is not perfectly round: but that when it was created, there was a certain heap raised thereon, much higher than the other parts of the same. So that (as he saith) it is not round after the form of an apple or a bal (as other think) but rather like a pear as it hangeth on the tree, and that Paria is the Region which possesseth the superminent or highest part thereof nearest unto heaven: In so much that he earnestly contendeth, the earthly paradise to be situate in the tops of those three hills, which we said before, that the watchman saw out of the top castle of the ship, and that the outrageous streams of the fresh waters which so violently issue out of the said gulfs, and strive so with the salt water, fall headlong from the tops of the said mountains: But of this matter, it shall suffice to have said thus much. Let us now therefore return to the history from which we have digressed. When he perceived himself to be thus enwrapped in so great a gulf beyond his expectation, so that he had now no hope to find any passage toward the north, whereby he might sail directly to Hispaniola, he was enforced to turn back the same way by the which he came, and directed his vyoage to Hispaniola by the north of that land lying toward the East. They which afterward searched this land more curyouslye, will it to be part of the continent or firm land of India, and not of Cuba as the Admiral supposed: For there are many which affirm that they have sailed round about Cuba. But whether it be so or not, or whether envying the good fortune of this man, they seek occasion of quarreling against him, 
Time revealeth al things.  I can not judge: But time shall speak, which in time appointed, revealeth both truth and falsehood. But whether Paria be continent or not, the Admiral doth not much contend, but he supposeth it to be continent: He also affirmeth that Paria is more southward than Hispaniola, by eight hundred fourscore and two miles. At the length he came to Hispaniola (to see his soldiers which he left with his brethren) the third day of the kalends of September, in the year .1498. but (as often times chanceth in human things) among his so many prosperous, pleasant, and lucky affairs, fortune mingled some seeds of wormwood, and corrupted his pure corn with the malicious weeds of cockle.   

¶ The seventh book of the first decade, to the same Lodovic Cardinal. etc.  
WHen the Admiral was now come to the Island of Hispaniola, he found all things confounded and out of order. For Roldanus (of whom we spoke before) refused in his absence to obey his brother, 
The Spaniards rebel in the admirals absence.  trusting to the multitude of such as were confedered with him, and not only behaved himself proudly against the admirals brother and Lieutenant, sometime his master, but also sent letters to his reproach to the king of Spain, therein accusing both the brethren, laying heinous matters to their charges. But the Admiral again sent messengers to the king, which might inform him of their rebellion, instantly desiring his grace to send him a new supply of men, whereby he might suppress their lecentiousnes, and punish them for their mischievous acts. They accused the Admiral and his brother to be unjust men, cruel enemies, 
The Spaniards accuse the Admiral.  and shedders of the Spanish blood, declaring that upon every light occasion they would rack them, hang them, and head them, and that they took pleasure therein, and that they departed from them, as from cruel tyrants and wild beasts rejoicing in blood, also the kings enemies: affirming likewise, that they well perceived their intent to be none other than to usurp th'empire of the Islands, which thing (they said) they suspected by a thousand conjectures, and especially in that they would permit none to resort to the gold mines, but only such as were their familiars. The Admiral on the contrary part, when he desired aid of the king to infringe their insolency, 
The Admiral● answer.  avouched that all those his accusers, which had devised such lies against him, were noughty fellows, abominable knaves and villains, thieves and bands, ruffians, adulterers, & ravishers of women, false perjured vagabonds, and such as had been either convict, in prisons, or fled for fear of judgement: so escaping punishment, but not leaving vice, wherein they still continued, and brought the same with them to the island, living there in like manner as before, in theft, lechery, & all kinds of mischief, and so given to Idleness and sleep, that whereas they were brought thither for miners, labourers, & scullyans, they would not now go one furlong from their houses, except they were borne on men's backs, like unto them which in old time were called Aediles Curules: For, to this office they put the miserable island men, whom they handled most cruelly. For lest their hands should discontinue from shedding of blood, 
These had the custodies of the temples.  and the better to try their strength and manhood, they used now & then for their pastime, to strive among themselves, and prove who could most cleanly with his sword at one stroke strike of the head of an innocent: So that he which could with most agility make the head of one of those poor wretches to flee quite and clean from the body to the ground at one struck, 
A cruel & devilish pastime.  he was the best man, and counted most honourable. These things, and many such other, the one of them laid to the others charge before the king. While these things were doing, the Admiral sent his brother the lieutenant with an army of fourscore and ten footmen, and a few horsemen (with three thousand of the Island men, which were mortal enemies to the ciguavians) to meet the people of Ciguava, with King Guarionexius their grand captain, who had done much mischief to our men, and such as favoured them. Therefore when the Lieutenant had conducted his army to the banks of a certain great river running by the plain, which we said before to lie between the corners of the mountains of Ciguava and the sea, he found two scouts of his enemies lurking in certain bushes, whereof the one, casting himself headlong into the sea, escaped, and by the mouth of the river swam over to his companions: the other being taken, declared that in the wood on the other side the river, there lay in camp six thousand ciguavians ready, unwares to assail our men passing buy. Wherefore the Lieutenant finding a shallow place where he might pass over, he with his whole army entered into the river, the which thing when the ciguavians had espied, they came running out of the woods with a terrible cry, and most horrible aspect, much like unto the people called Agathyrsi, of whom the poet virgil speaketh: For they were all painted and spotted with sundry colours, and especial with black and red, which they make of certain fruits nourished for the same purpose in their gardens, with the juice whereof they paint themselves from the forehead, even to the knees, 
Hear made long & black by art.  having their hear (which by art they make long and black, if nature deny it them) wreathed and rolled after a thousand fashions, a man would think them to be devils incarnate newly broke out of hell, they are so like unto hellhounds. As our men waded over the river, they shot at them, and hurled darts so thick, that it almost took the light of the son from our men: insomuch that if they had not borne of the force thereof with their targets, the matter had gone wrong with them. Yet at the length, many being wounded, they passed over the river: which thing when the enemies saw, they fled, whom our men pursuing, slew some in the chase, but not many, by reason of their swiftness of foot. Thus being in the woods, they shot at our men more safely, for they being accustomed to the woods, and naked without any let, passed through the bushes and shrubs, as it had been wild bores or Hearts, whereas our men were hindered by reason of their apparel, targets, long javelins, & ignorance of the place. Wherefore, when he had rested there all that night in vain, and the day following he saw no stirring in the woods, he went (by the counsel and conduct of the other Island men which were in his army) immediately from thence to the mountains, in the which king Maiobanexius had his chief mansion place, in the village called Capronum, 
King Maiobanexius.  by the which name also the kings palace was called, being in the same village. Thus marching forward with his army, about twelve miles of, he encamped in the village of another king, which the inhabitants had forsaken for fear of our men: Yet making diligent search, they found two, by whom they had knowledge that there was ten kings with Maiobanexius in his palace of Capronum, with an army of eight thousand ciguavians. At the Lieutenants first approach, he durst not give them battle, 
An army of eight thousand ciguavians.  until he had somewhat better searched the region: yet did he in the mean time skyrmyshe with them twice. The next night about midnight, he sent forth scouts, and with them guides of the Island men which knew the country: Whom the ciguavians espying from the mountains, prepared themselves to the battle, with a terrible cry or alarm after their manner, but yet durst not come out of the woods, supposing that the Lieutenant with his main army had been even at hand. The day following, when he brought his army to the place where they encamped, leaping out of the woods, they twice attempted the fortune of war, fiercely assailing our men with a main force, and wounding many before they could cover them with their targets: Yet our men put them to flight, slew many, and took many, the residue fled to the woods, where they kept them still as in their most safe hold. Of them which were taken, he sent one, and with him another of the Island men, which was of his part, to Maiobanexius, with commandment in this effect, The lieutenant brought not hither his army (O Maiobanexius) to keep war either against you, or your people, for he greatly desireth your friendship: but his intent is, that Guarionexius, who hath persuaded you to be his aid against him, to the great destruction of your people, and undoing of your country, may have due correction, aswell for his disobedience toward him, as also for raising tumults among the people: Wherefore he requireth you, 
King Guarionexius.  and exhorteth you to deliver Guarionexius into his hands, the which thing if you shall perform, the Admiral his brother will not only gladly admit you to his friendship, but also enlarge and defend your dominion. And if herein you refuse to accomplish his request, it will follow, that you shall shortly repent you thereof: For your kingdom shallbe wasted with sword and fire, and you shall abide the fortune of war, whereof you have had experience with favour, as you shall further know hereafter to your pain, if with stubbornness you provoke him to show the uttermost of his power. When the messenger had thus done his arant, Maiobanexius answered, that Guarionexius was a good man, endued with many virtues as all men knew, and therefore he thought him worthy his aid, especially in as much as he fled to him for succour, and that he had made him such promise, whom also he had proved to be his faithful friend: again, that they were naughty men, violent, and cruel, 
Natural hatred of vice.  desiring other men's goods, and such as spared not to shed innocentes blood: in fine, that he would not have to do with such mischievous men, nor yet enter into friendship with them. When these things came to the lieutenants ear, he commanded the village to be burnt where he himself encamped, with many other villages there about: and when he drew near to the place where Maiobanexius lay, he sent messengers to him again, to common the matter with him, and to will him to send some one of his most faithful friends to entreat with him of peace. Whereupon the king sent unto him one of his chief gentlemen, and with him two other to wait on him. When he came to the lieutenants presence, he friendly required him to persuade his lord and master in his name, and earnestly to admonish him, 
The lieutenants gentleness toward Maiobanexius.  not to suffer his flourishing kingdom to be spoiled, or himself to abide the hazard of war for Guarionexius sake: and further to exhort him to deliver him, except he would procure the destruction both of himself, his people, and his country. When the messenger was returned, Maiobanexius assembled the people, declaring unto them what was done: but they cried out on him to deliver Guarionexius, and began to curse the day that ever they had received him, thus to disturb their quietness. Maiobanexius answered them, that Guarionexius was a good man, 
A rare faithfulness in a barbarous king.  & had well deserved of him, giving him many princely presents, and had also taught both his wife and him to sing and dance, which thing he did not little esteem, and was therefore fully resolved in no case to forsake him, or against all humanity to betray his friend, which fled to him for succour, but rather to abide all extremities with him, then to minister occasion of obloquy to slanderers, to report that he had betrayed his guest, whom he took into his house with warranties. Thus dimissing the people, sighing and with sorrowful hearts, he called Guarionexius before him, promising him again, that he would be partaker of his fortune while life lasted: in so much that he thought it not best to send any further word to the lieutenant, but appointed him whom before he sent to him, to keep the way with a garrison of men, to thintent, that if any messengers should be sent from the lieutenant, to slay them by the way, and admit none to communication, or further entreaty of peace. In the mean time, the Lieutenant sent two, whereof the one was a captive Ciguavian, and the other an Island man, of them which were friends to our men: and they were both taken and slain. 
The lieutenants messengers are slain.  The Lieutenant followed them only with ten footmen & four horsemen, finding his messengers dead in the way, he was further provoked to wrath, and determined more extremely to deal with Maiobanexius, & therefore went forward incontinently with his whole army to his chief palace of Capronum, where he yet lay encamp. At his approach, all the kings fled. every man his way, & forsook their captain Maiobanexius, who also with all his family, fled to the rough mountains. Some of the ciguavians sought for Guarionexius to slay him, for that he was the cause of all these troubles: but his feet saved his life, for he fled in time to the mountains, where he lurked in manner alone among the desolate rocks. Whereas now the lieutenants soldiers were foreweryed with long war, with watching, labour, and hunger (for it was now three months sense the wars began) many desired leave to depart to the tower of Conception, where they had graneges, & exercised tillage. He gave them their passports with allowance of victuals, and so that only thirty remained with him. These three months war, they continued very painful and miserably: So that during all that time, they had none other meat but only Cazibi, 
The Spaniards are painful in the wars.  that is, such roots whereof they make their bread, and that but seldom to their fill: also Vsias, that is, little beasts like conies, if by chance now and then they took some with their hounds. Their drink was none other then water, such as they found, sometime sweet, and sometime muddy, savering of the marishes. Among these delicates, that little sleep that they had, was ever for the most part abroad under the firmament, and that not without watchmen, and in continual removing, as the nature of war requireth. 
A desperate adventure with thirty men.  With these few therefore, the lieutenant determined to search the mountains, dens, and caves, if he could in any place find the steps of Maiobanexius or Guarionexius. In the mean time certain of his men (whom hunger enforced to go a hunting, to prove if they could take any coneys) chanced upon two of Maiobanexius familiars, which were sent to certain villages of his, to make provision of bread. These he enforced to declare where their lord lay hid, & used the same also for guides, to bring our men to the place. Twelve of our men took this enterprise in hand, painting themselves after the manner of the ciguavians: So that by this stratagem or policy, they came suddenly upon Maiobanexius, 
A policy.  and took him prisoner, with his wife, children, & family, and conveyed them to the tower of Conception to the lieutenant. Within a few days after, hunger compelled Guarionexius to come out of the dens, whom certain of the people fearing the lieutenant, bewrayed to our hunters. The lieutenant being certified hereof, sent forth a band of foot men, commanding them to lie in ambush until such time as Guarionexius went from the plains to the mountains, and then suddenly to entrap him. They went as they were commanded, took him, and brought him away with them, and by this means were all the regions near about pacified and quieted. A certain noble woman of near kindred to Maiobanexius, and wife to another king, whose dominion was yet untouched, followed him in all these adversities. They affirm this woman to be the fairest and most beautiful, that ever nature brought forth in the Island: Whom, 
A beautiful woman.  when the king her husband, who loved her most ardently (as her beauty deserved) heard say that she was taken prisoner, he wandered up and down the deserts like a man out of his wit, not knowing what to do or say. But at the length, he came to the Lieutenant, promising most faithfully, that he would submit himself and all that he could make, under his power, so that he would restore him his wife. The Lieutenant accepted the condition, & restored him his wife, with certain other rulers and gentlemen which he had taken prisoners before: charging them, and binding them with an oath, to be ever ready at his commandment. Shortly after, this king of his own free motion, came again to the Lieutenant, bringing with him five thousand men without weapons, saving only such instruments as they use in tillage of their ground. He brought with him also seeds to sow, wherewith at his own charge, he caused such plenty of their corn and fruits to grow in sundry places of the large vale, whereof we spoke before, that shortly after, were seen many fair and fruitful fields that came thereof: and for his gentleness being rewarded of the lieutenant with certain of our things, he departed joyfully. When the report hereof came to the ciguavians, 
The kings submit themselves to the lieutenant.  it moved the minds of the kings to hope of clemency, whereupon they came together to the lieutenant with humble submission and faithful promise, ever after to be under his obedience, desiring him to restore unto them their king with his family. At their request, the kings wife and his household was set at liberty, but the king kept still as a prisoner. These things did the Lieutenant in the Island, not yet knowing what his adversaries and accusers had laid to his charge before the king of Spain: who being disquieted with their quarelinges and accusations, and especially for that by reason of their dissension, of so great abundance of gold and other things, there was as yet but little brought into Spain, appointed a new governor, which should see a redress in these things: 
A new governor of the Island.  and either to punish such as were faulty, or else to send them to him. What was found against the Admiral and his brother, or against his adversaries which accused him, I do not well know. But this I am sure of, that both the brethren are taken, brought, and cast in prison, with their goods confiscate. But as soon as the king understood that they were brought bound to Cales, he sent messengers in post, with commandment that they should be loosed and come freely to his presence: whereby he declared that he took their troubles grievously. It is also said, that the new governor sent letters to the king, written with the admirals hand in strange and unknown sypheringes, to his brother the lieutenant being absent, willing him to be in a readiness with a power of armed men to come and aid him, if the governor should proffer him any violence. Whereof the governor having knowledge (as he saith) being also advertised that the lieutenant was gone to his brother before the men which he had prepared were in a readiness, apprehended them both unwares, before the multitude came together. What will follow, time, the most true and prudent judge will declare. Thus far ye well.   

¶ The eight book of the first Decade, to Cardinal Lodovic.  

The Ocean sea heretofore unknown.  THe great, rich, and plentiful Ocean sea, heretofore unknown, and now found by Christophorus Colonus the Admiral, by th'authority & furtherance of the catholic king, I have presented unto your honour (right noble Prince) like a golden chain unworkmanly wrought: but you shall now receive a precious jewel to be appendent thereto. Therefore among such as were pilots or governors under the admiral, and had diligently marked the courses & differences of the winds, many had licences granted them of the king to seek further at their own charges, upon condition to pay him faithfully his portion, which is the fift part. But because among all other, one Petrus Alphonsus, called Nignus by his surname, 
The navigation of Petrus Alphonsus.  sailed toward the south with more prosperous fortune than any of the other, I think it best first to speak somewhat of his voyage. He therefore with only one ship, well furnished at his own charges, after that he had his passport, with commandment in no case to cast anchor past fifty leagues distant from any place where the Admiral had touched, sailed first to Paria, where the Admiral found both the men and women so laden with chains, garlands, and bracelets of pearls, as we have said before. Coasting therefore along by the same shore, according to the king's commandment (yet leaving behind him the regions of Cumana and Manacapana) he came to the regions which thinhabitants thereof call Curiana, where he found a haven (as he saith) much like the port of Gades or Cales: into the which entering, he saw a far of certain houses one the shore, and perceived, when he drew near, that it was a village of only eight houses. proceeding yet further for the space of three miles, he espied an other village well replenished with people, where there met him fifty naked men on a company, having with them a certain ruler, who desired Alphonsus to come to their coasts. He brought with him at this time, many hawks bells, pins, needles, bracelets, chains, garlands, and rings, with counterfeit stones and glasses, and such other tryfelles, the which within the moment of an hour, he had exchanged for fifteen ounces of their pearls, 
Pearls for trifles.  which they wore about their necks and arms. Then they yet more earnestly desired him to sail to their coasts, promising him that he should there have as many pearls as he would desire. He condescended to their request: and the day following, 
Great plenty of pearls.  came to the place where they appointed him: Lying there at anchor, a great multitude of people resorted to him, instantly requiring him to come aland. But when he considered the innumerable multitude of people which was there assembled, and he had only xxxiii men in his company, he durst not commit himself to their hands, but gave them to understand by signs and tokens, that they should come to the ship with their Canoas': for their boats (which the men of the island call Canoas') are made only of one whole piece of wood as in the Islands, yet more rude, and not so artificially as theirs are: these they call Gallitas. These swarmed therefore to the ship as fast as they might, bringing with them great plenty of pearls (which they call Tenoras') exchanging the same for our merchandise. He found this people to be of gentle nature, simple, and innocent, being conversant with them in their houses, for the space of xx. days. Their houses are made of wood, covered with the leaves of date trees. Their meat for the most part, is the shelfyshes in the which the pearls are engendered, 
Shel fishes in which pearls are engendered.  whereof their sea costs are full. They have also great plenty of wild beasts, as hearts, wild bores, and coneyes like unto hares, both in colour and bigness, stock doves also, and turtle doves: likewise geese and ducks, which they nourish in their houses as we do. peacocks flee about in manner in every wood and grove, but they are not distinct with sundry colours as ours are: for the cocks are like unto the hens. These people of Curiana are crafty hunters, and exceeding cunning archers, so that they will not lightly miss any beast or bird that they shoot at. Our men consumed certain days hear very plesauntely: during which time, whosoever brought them a peacock, had for the same four pings: he that brought a pheasaunte, 
Their manner of bargaining.  had two, and for a stock dove, or turtle dove, one, and for a goose, a small looking glass, or a little stone of glass. Thus they bought and sold with proffering and bidding, denying and refusing, as it had been in a great market. When pings were proffered them, they asked what they should do with them, being naked: But our men satisfied them with a crafty answer, declaring by tokens that they were very necessary, 
The use of pins.  to pick their teeth, and to pull thorns out of their flesh. But above all things, 
Hawks bells in great estimation.  hawks bells were most esteemed among them, for their sound & fair colour, and would therefore give much for one of them. Our men, lodging in their houses, heard in the night season horrible noises & rorynges of wild beasts in the woods, which are full of exceeding great and high trees of sundry kinds: 
Roaring of wild beasts.  but the beasts of these woods, are not noisome to men, for the people of the country go daily a hunting naked, with their bows and arrows, yet hath it not been hard of, that any man hath been slain of any wild beast. As many hearts or wild bores as our men would desire them to bring, they would kill in the woods with their arrows, 
Hearts and wild bores.  and not to fail to bring them. They lack kine, goats and sheep. Their bread is made of roots, as is theirs of the islands. This nation, hath black hear, gross and somewhat curled, yet long also. They keep their teeth very white, and for that purpose use to carry a certain herb between their lips for the most part of the day, and to wash their mouthts when they cast it away. The women do all their business at home in their houses, and have also the cure of tillage of the ground: but the men apply themselves to the wars and hunting, to play, singing and dancing. They have sundry kinds of water pots, jugs, and drinking cups made of earth in other places about them, and brought thither for exchange of other things: For they use fairs and markets for the same purpose, and are greatly desirous of such things, as are not brought forth or made in their country, as nature hath given a disposition to all men, to desire and be delighted with new and strange things. Many of them had hanging at their pearls the images of certain beasts and birds, very artifitiously made of gold, 
Cunning artificers.  but not pure: these also are brought them from other places for exchange of other things. The gold whereof they are made, is native, and of much like fineness to that whereof the florins are coined. 
Base gold.  The men of this country, enclose their privy members in a gourd, cut after the fashion of a coddepice, or else cover the same with the shell of a tortoise, tied about their loins with laces of gossampine cotton: In other places of that tract, they thrust the sinew within the sheeths thereof, and bind the skin fast with a string. The great wild beasts whereof we spoke before, and many other things which are not found in any of the Islands, testify that this region is part of the continet or firm land. But the chiefest conjecture whereby they argue the same, is, 
Tokens of the continent or firm land.  that by the coasts of that land, from Paria toward the west, they sailed about three. M. miles, finding no sign or token of any end. These people of Curiana (which some call Curtana) being demanded where they had such plenty of gold, signified that it was brought them from a region called Canchieta, 
The golden region of Canchieta.  or Cauchieta, being distant from them six suns, that is, six days journey westward: and that their images of gold were made in the same region. Whereupon our men directed their voyage thither immediately, and arrived there at the kalends of November, in the year of Christ a thousand and five hundred. The people of the country resorted to them without fear, bringing with them of the gold which we said to be native in that region. This people had also collars of pearls about their necks, which were brought them from Curiana for exchange of their merchandises. None of them would exchange any of those things which they had out of other countries: as neither the Curians gold, nor the Canchietans pearls: yet among the Canchietans they found but little gold ready gathered. They took with them from thence certain very fair Marmosets or Monkeys, and many Popyngayes of sundry colours. In the month of November, the air was there most temperate, and nothing cold. The guardens of the north pole were out of sight to both these people, they are so near the Equinoctial. 
The Equinoctial line.  Of the degrees of the pole, they can give none other account. These people are well disposed men, of honest conditions, and nothing suspicious, for almost all the night long they resorted to the ship with their boats, and went aboard ship without fear, as did the Curians. They call pearls, Corixas. They are somewhat jealous, for when any strangers come among them, they ever place their women behind them. In this region of Canchieta, the gossampine trees grow of themselves commonly in many places, 
Gossampine trees.  as do with us elms, willows, and sallowes: and therefore they use to make breeches of cotton, wherewith they cover their privy parts in many other regions thereabout. When they had yet sailed on forward by the same coasts, there came forth against them about two thousand men, armed after their manner, forbidding them to come aland. These people were so rude and savage, that our men could by no means allure them to familiarity. Our men therefore, contented only with their pearls, returned back the same way they came, where they remained with the Curians continually for the space of twenty days, & filled their bellies well with good meat. And here it seemeth to me not far from my purpose, to declare what chanced unto them in their return when they came now within the sight of the coast of Paria. They happened therefore in the way, at Os Draconis, and the gulfs of Paria (whereof we spoke before) to meet with a navy of xviii. Canoas' of Canibales, which went a roving to hunt for men: 
Canibales in the gulfs of Paria.  who assoon as they had espied our men, assailed their ship fiercely, & without fear enclosed the same, disturbing our men on every side with their arrows: but our men so feared them with their guns, that they fled immediately, whom our men following with the ship boat, took one of their Canoas', and in it only one Cannibal (for the other had escaped) and with him another man bound, who with tears running down his cheeks, and with gesture of his hands, eyes, and head, signified that six of his companions had been cruelly cut in pieces, and eaten of that mischievous nation, and that he should have been likewise handled the day following: wherefore they gave him power over the Cannibal, to do with him what he would. Then with the Cannibals own club, 
Death for death.  he laid on him all that he might drive with hand and foot, grinning and fretting as it had been a wild bore, thinking that he had not yet sufficiently revenged the death of his companions, when he had beaten out his brains and guts. When he was demanded after what sort the Canibales were wont to invade other countries, he answered, that they ever used to carry with them in their Canoas', a great multitude of clubs, the which, wheresoever they do land, 
How the Canibales fortify their camp.  they pitch in the ground, and encamp themselves within the compass of the same, to lie the more safely in the night season. In Curiana they found the head of a captain of the Canibales, nailed over the door of a certain governor for a token of victory, as it had been the standard or helmet taken from the enemy in battle. In these coasts of Paria is a region called Haraia, in the which great plenty of salt is gathered after a strange sort: 
Haraia.  for the sea being there tossed with the power of the winds, driveth the salt waters into a large plain by the sea side, where, afterward when the sea waxeth calm, and the sun beginneth to shine, the water is congealed into most pure and white salt, wherewith innumerable shyypes might be laden, if men did resort thither for the same before there fale any rain: For the rain melteth it, and causeth it to sink into the sand, and so by the poors of the earth, to return to the place from whence it was driven. Other say, that the plain is not filled from the sea, but of certain springs whose water is more sharp and salt then the water of the sea. 
springs of salt water.  Thinhabitantes do greatly esteem this bay of salt, which they use, not only for their own commodity, but also working the same into a square form like unto bricks, they sell it to strangers for exchange of other things which the lack. 
The bodies of princes dried and reserved.  In this Region, they stretch and dry the dead bodies of their kings and noble men, laying the same upon a certain frame of wood, much like unto a hurdle or grediren, with a gentle fire under the same, by little and little consuming the flesh, and keeping the skin hole with the bones enclosed therein. These dried carcases, they have in great reverence, and honour them for their household and familiar gods. They say that in this place they saw a man, & in an other place a woman, thus dried and reserved. When they departed from Curiana, the viii day of the Ideses of February, to return to Spain, they had threescore and xvi pounds weight (after viii ounces to the pound) of pearls, which they bought for exchange of our things, amounting to the value of five shillings. Departing therefore, they consumed threescore days in their journey (although it were shorter than from Hispaniola) by reason of the continual course of the sea in the west, which did not only greatly stay the ship, but also sometimes drive it back. But at the length they came home so laden with pearls, that they were with every mariner, in manner as common as chaff. But the master of the ship, Petrus Alphonsus, being accused of his companions that he had stowlen a great multitude of precious pearls, and defrauded the king of his portion which was the fifth part, was taken of Fernando de Vega, a man of great learning and experience, & governor of Gallecia, where they arrived, and was there kept in prison a long tyme. But he still denieth that ever he detained any part of the pearls. Many of these pearls were as big as hazel nuts, 
Orient pearls as big as hazel nuts.  and as orient (as we call it) as they be of the East parts: Yet not of so great price, by reason that the holes thereof are not so perfect. When I my self was present with the right honourable duke of Methyna, and was bidden to dinner with him, in the city of Civil, they brought to him above a hundred and twenty ounces of pearls to be sold, which surely did greatly delight me with their fairness and brightness. Some say, that Alphonsus had not these pearls in Curiana, being distant from Os Draconis more than a hundred & twenty leagues, but that they had them in the regions of Cumana and Manacapana, near unto Os Draconis and the island of Margarita: for they deny that there is any pearls found in Curiana. But sith the matter is yet in controversy, 
The Island of Margarita.  we will pass to other matters. Thus much you have, whereby you may conjecture, what commodity in time to come may be looked for from these new lands of the west Ocean, whereas at the first discovering, they show such tokens of great riches. Thus far ye well.   

¶ The ix book of the first Decade to Cardinal Lodoutke.  
VIncentiagnes Pinzonus, & also Aries Pinzonus, his nephew by his brother side, 
The navigation of Vincentius, and Aries Pinzonus.  which accompanied the Admiral Colonus in his first viage, & were by him appointed to be masters of two of the small ships which the Spaniards call Caravelas, being moved by the great riches & amplitude of the new lands, furnished of their own charges four Caravels, in the haven of their own country, which the spaniards call Palos, bordering on the west Ocean. Having therefore the king's licence & passport to departed, they loosed from the haven, about the kalends of December, in the year .1499. This haven of Palos, is threescore & twelve miles distant from Gades, commonly called Cales, and lxiiii miles from Civil. All thinhabitants of this town, not one excepted, are greatly given to searching of the sea, and continually exercised in sailing. They also directed their voyage first to the island of Canary by the islands of Hesperides, 
The Islands of Canary. Caboverde.  now called Caboverde, which some call Gorgodes Meducias. Sailing therefore directly toward the south from that island of Hesperides which the Portugals (being possessers of the same) call Sancti jacobi, and departing from thence at the Ideses of january, they followed the south-west wind, 
S. james Island.  being in the midst between the south and the west. When they supposed that they had sailed about three hundredth leagues by the same wind, they say that they lost the sight of the north star: 
The north pole out of sight.  and were shortly after tossed with exceeding tempests both of wind and sea, and vexed with intolerable heat: Yet sailed they on further (not without great danger) for the space of two hundred & forty leagues, following yet the same wind by the lost pole. Wherefore, whether habitable regions be under the Equinoctial line or not, let these men and the old writers, aswell Philosophers as poets and cosmographers discuss. 
Habitable regions under the Equinoctial line.  For these men affirm it to be habitable, and marvelously replenished with people: and they, that it is unhabitable by reason of the son beams depending perpendicularly or directly over the same. Yet were there many of the old writers, which attempted to prove it habitable. These mariners being demanded, if they saw the south pole, they answered that they knew no star there like unto this pole, that might be decerued about the point: but that they saw an other order of stars, and a certain thick mist rising from the horizontal line, which greatly hindered their sight. They contend also, that there is a great heap or rising in the midst of the earth, which taketh away the sight of the south pole, until they have utterly passed over the same: but they verily believe that they saw other images of stars, much differing from the situation of the stars of our hemisphery, or half circle of heaven. How so ever the matter be, as they inform us, we certify you. At the length, the seventh day of the kalends of Februarye, the espied land a far of, and seeing the water of the sea to be trobelous, sounding with their plummet, they found it to be xvi▪ fathames deep. Going a land, and tarrying there for the space of two days, they departed, because they saw no people stirring, although they found certain steps of men by the sea side. Thus graving on the trees & the stones near unto the shore, the kings name and theirs, and the time of their coming thither, they departed. Not far from this station, following the fierce on the land by night, they found a nation lying under the open firmament, after the manner of war. Our men thought it not best to trouble them until the morning. Therefore, at the rising of the son, forty of our men well armed, went toward them: against whom came forth xxxii of them, with bows, slings and darts, even ready to fight. The other company followed them, armed after the same manner. Our men affirm that they were of higher stature then either the Almains or Pannonians. 
People of high stature.  They beheld our men with frowning & threatening countenance: but our men thought it not good to fall to bickering with them, uncertain whether it were for fear, or because they would not drive them to flight. Wherefore they went about to allure them by fair means & rewards: but they refused all kind of gentleness, and stood ever in a readiness to fight, declaring the same by signs and tokens. Thus our men resorted to their ships, and they to the place from whence they came, without any further business. The same night about midnight, they fled, & left the place void where they lay in the camp. 
A vagabond kind of men.  Our men suppose them to be a vagabund and wandering nation, like unto the Scythians, without houses or certain dwelling places, living only with the fruits of the earth, having their wives and children following them. Such as measured their footsteps in the sand, affirm with great oaths, that one of their feet is almost as long as two feet of our men of the mean sort. Sailing on yet further, 
Giants.  they found an other river, but not of depth sufficient to bear the Caravels: they sent therefore the four ship boats to land, full of armed men to search the country. They espied upon a high hill near unto the sea side, a great multitude of people, to whom our company sent forth one man with certain of our things to allure them to exchange. And when he had cast a hawks bell toward them, they cast down a wedge of gold a cubit long: the which as he sto●ped to take up, they suddenly enclosed him, and carried him away, But he was shortly after rescued by his companions, to some of their pains: for they slew eight of our men, & wounded many a far of, with their arrows, and darts made of wood, hardened at the ends with fire. After this they encompassed our ship boats within the river, and came rashly within the reach of our men, laying hold on the boats sides, where they were thrust through, and hewn in pieces as it had been sheep, 
Desperate ●oldnesse.  by reason they were naked. Yet would they not for all this give over, but took from our men one of their boats, having no men in it: for the governor thereof being slain with an arrow, the other fled and escaped. And thus they left this fierce and warlike people, sailing toward the northwest, along by the same coasts, with sorrowful hearts for the death of their companions. When they had sailed about xl leagues, they chanced into a sea of such fresh water, that they filled their barrels and hoggesheades therewith. 
A sea of fresh water.  Searching the cause hereof, they understood that a vehement course of rivers descended with great violence from the tops of certain great hills. They say also that there lieth within the sea, many fortunate and fruitful Islands, 
Many fruitful Islands.  and well inhabited, and that thinhabitants of this tract are men of meek nature, and such as do not refuse strangers, yet little profitable to them, because they have no marchandyes for their purpose, 
human people.  as gold, or precious stones: for lack whereof, they brought from thence thirty captives to sell for slaves. Thinhabitantes call this region Mariatambal. The region of the east part of that river, is called Camomorus, and that of the west part Paricora, in the midland whereof, thinhabitants signified that there is great plenty of gold: For, following this river directly toward the North (as the bending of the shore required) they recovered again the sight of the north pole. All the coast of this tract, pertaineth to Paria, 
Regions of Paria.  the which (as we said before) was first found by Colonus himself, and hath in manner in every place great abundance of pearls. 
Gold & pearls  They say that these coasts are adjoining unto, and all one with Os Draconis, and also bordering upon the regions of Cumana, Manacapana, Curiana, Cauchieta, and Cuchibachoa: Wherefore they thought it to be part of the firm land of India, beyond the river of Ganges. For the great & large compass thereof, doth not permit that it should be an island, albeit the whole earth uncovered with water, largely taken, may be called an Island. From the point of that land where they lost the sight of the north pole, sailing by a continual tract about three hundred leagues toward the west side of Paria, they say that (almost in the mid way) they chanced into a river called Maragnonum, which they affirm to be of such exceeding breadth, that it might seem incredible, if the antiques did not make mention of the like. Being demanded of me if it were not salt water where it divided the land, they answered that the water thereof was very fresh and sweet, and that the further it ran, to be so much the fresher: also full of Islands and wholesome fish: they dare avouch the breadth thereof to be more than thirty leagues. Yet if we well weigh and consider the largeness and wideness of Boriostomea and Spiriostomea, the mouths of the famous river of Ister (now called Danubius) and how far they violate or corrupt the salt water with their freshness, we shall cease to marvel, although this other river be greater: for who can diminish the power of nature, but that it may make this bigger than the other, and another bigger than this? And I suppose this to be the river whereof Colonus the Admiral made mention in the description of his voyage in these coasts. But we shall hereafter have further knowledge hereof: let us now therefore return to the commodities of these regions. 
The commodities of the regions & islands about Paria. Brasile.  They found in many islands about Paria, great woods of Brasile trees, and brought away with them three thousand pounds weight thereof. They say that the Brasile of Hispaniola, is much better than this to die cloth with a more fair and durable colour. From hence, following the winds (which the Spaniards call Northuest, and the Italians Graeco) they passed by many Islands very fruitful, yet left desolate and wasted by reason of the cruelty of the Canibales: for they went aland in many places, they found the ruins of many destroyed houses: yet in some places they found men, but those exceeding fearful, fleeing to the mountains, rocks, and woods at the sight of every stranger or ship, & wandering without houses or certain abiding places, for fear of the Cannibals laying wait and hunting after them. 
Canibales.  Here they found those great trees which of themselves in divers places bring forth that fruit or spice, which the Apothecaries call Cassia Phistula, and that of no less goodness, 
Trees of Cassia fistula.  then that which the physicians minister to such as be diseased with the ague, but it was not ripe at their being there. They affirm that there are trees of such bigness, that xvi men joining hands together, and standing in compass, can scarcely embrace some of them. Among these trees is found that monstrous beast with a snout like a fox, 
A monstrous beast.  a tail like a marmasette, ears like a bat, hands like a man, and feet like an ape, bearing her whelps about with her in an outward belly much like unto a great bag or purse. The dead carcase of this beast, you saw with me, and turned it over and over with your own hands, marvelling at that new belly, and wonderful provision of nature. They say it is known by experience, that she never letteth her whelps go out of that purse, except it be either to play, or to suck, until such time that they be able to get their living by themselves. They took this beast with her whelps: But the whelps died shortly after in the ships, Yet the dam lived certain months: but at the length, not being able to abide so great alteration of air, and change of meat, she died also in the way. But of this beast, we have saidt enough. Let us now therefore return to the authors of these things. These two Pinzoni, the uncle and the nephew, sustained many great troubles & horrible tempests and perils in this navigation. For when they had now sailed by the coasts of Paria about two hundred leagues, & (as they supposed) beyond the city of Cathay, and the costs of East India beyond the river of Ganges, there rose suddenly so fierce a tempest in the month of july, that of the four Caravels which they had with them, two were drowned even before their eyes: and the third lying at anchor, with like suddenness carried out of their sight through the violence of the tempest: the fourth also lying at anchor, was so shaken and bruised, that all the seams thereof were almost loosed: Yet came they to land out of this last ship, but utterly despairing of the ship. Wherefore consulting with themselves what was best to be done in so extreme a case, and how to provide them a safe dwelling place in those Regions, being out of all hope how to departed from thence, 
Extreme remedy in a desperate case.  they determined to slay all the inhabytauntes of the country near about them, lest they with the other should conspire together to kill them, but their fortune was better: For the Caravel which the tempest had carried away, was come to them again. This had in it xviii men: And the other that remained, was saved and repaired. With these two therefore, they took their voyage directly to Spain, and thus being tossed with tempests, and vexed with adversities, they returned to their native country of Palos, to their wives and children, the day before the kalends of October, with the loss of many of their dear friends & neighbours. They brought with them Cinamome and ginger: but not very good, 
Cinamome and Ginger.  because they were not there fully seasoned with the heat of the son, before they brought them from thence. They brought also certain precious stones, which Baptista Elysius' that excellent philosopher, and your lordships physician, affirmeth to be true Topases. After these men's return, 
Topases.  other of their neighbours being moved thereto by a certain emulation, to prove if their fortune would be any better, like men of good courage, 
Men of noble courage.  being nothing discomforted by the hard fortune of their neighbours, knowing that it often times chanceth, that that which is one man's undoing, is an other man's making, attempted a new voyage toward the south by the costs of Paria, 
Another voyage.  following the steps of Colonus the Admiral, who had first discovered the same. They also brought with them great plenty of Cassia fistula, and found that precious medicine called of the Spaniards Animae album, 
Animae album  whose perfume is of most excellent effect to heal the rheums, murres, and heaviness of the head. As touching this viage, as yet I know no other news that I thought worthy to certify you of, wherefore, I will now make an end of this book, because you put me so often in remembrance of your departure: Yet to accomplish the Decade, I will declare somewhat of the superstitions of Hispaniola. 

The superstitions of Hispaniola.  
The errors of the old gentility.   You shall now therefore understand the illusions wherewith the people of the Island have been seduced after the errors of the old gentility, and wandered in the ignorance and blindness of human nature, corrupted by the disobedience of our first parents, which hath remained in all nations upon the face of the earth, except where it hath pleased GOD by the light of his spirit by his word, to power upon his elect the grace of renovation, by the light whereof the natural darkness receiveth some clearness as in a glass, until imperfection shallbe abolished. Our men therefore were long in the Island of Hispaniola, before they knew that the people thereof honoured any other thing than the lights of heaven, or had any other religion: but when they had been now long conversant with them, and by understanding their language, drew to a further familiarity, they had knowledge that they used divers rites and superstitions: I have therefore gathered these few things following, out of a book written by one Ramonus an Eremite, whom Colonus had left with certain kings of the Island to instruct them in the Christian faith. And because in manner their whole religion is none other thing than idolatry, I will begin at their idols. It is therefore apparent by the images which they honour openly and commonly, 
Idolatry and idols.  that there appear unto them in the night seasons, certain fantasies and illusions of evil spirits, seducing them into many fond and foolish errors: for they make certain images of Gossampine cotton, 
Illusions of evil spirits. Images of gossampine catton.  folded or wreathed after their manner, and hard stopped within. These images they make sitting, much like unto the pictures of spirits and devils which our painters are accustomed to paint upon walls: but forasmuch as I me self sent you four of these images, you may better presently signify unto the king your uncle, what manner of things they are, and how like unto painted devils, than I can express the same by writing. These images, the inhabitants call Zemes, whereof the least, made to the likeness of young devils, they bind to their foreheads when they go to the wars against their enemies, 
Young devils.  and for that purpose have they those strings hanging at them which you see. Of these, they believe to obtain rain, if rain be lacking, likewise fair weather: for they think that these Zemes are the mediators and messengers of the great god, whom they acknowledge to be only one, eternal, without end, omnipotent, and invisible. Thus every king hath his particular Zemes, which he honoureth. They call the eternal god by these two names, jocauna and Guamaonocon, as their predecessors taught them, affirming that he hath a father called by these five names: that is, Attabeira, Mamona, Guacarapita, Liella, Guimazoa. Now shall you hear what they fable on the earth as touching the original of man There is in the Island, a region called Caunana, where they feign that manknyde came first out of two caves of a mountain: and that the bigest sort of men came forth of the mouth of the bigest cave, and the least sort out of the least cave. The rock in the which these caves are, they call Canta. The greatest den, they name Cazibaxagua, and the less, Amaiauna. They say, that before it was lawful for men to come forth of the cave, 
Fables much like ovid his transformations.  the mouth of the cave was kept and watched nightly by a man whose name was Machochael: this Machochael, departing somewhat far from the cave, to the intent to see what things were abroad, was suddenly taken of the sun, (whose sight he was forbidden) & was turned into a stone. They feign the like of divers other, that whereas they went forth in the night season a fishing so far from the cave, that they could not return before the rising of the sun (the which it was not lawful for them to behold) they were transformed into Myrobalane trees, which of themselves grow plentifully in the Island. They say furthermore, that a certain ruler called Vagoniona, sent one forth of the cave to go a fishing, who by like chance was turned into a nightingale, 
The nightinggale.  because the sun was risen before he came again to the cave: and that yearly about the same time that he was turned into a bird, he doth in the night with a mourning song bewail his misfortune, and call for the help of his master Vagoniona: And this they think to be the cause why that bird singeth in the night season. But Vagoniona▪ being sore troubled in his mind for the loss of his familiar friend whom he loved so entirely, leaving the men in the cave, brought forth only the women with their sucking children, leaving the women in one of the islands of that tract, called Mathinino, and carried the children away with him: 
The Island of Mathinino.  which poor wretches oppressed with famine, fainted and remained on the bank of a certain river, where they were turned into frogs, and cried toa, toa, that is, mamma, mamma, as children are wont to cry for the mother's pap. 
Children turned into Frogs  And hereof they say it cometh that frogs use to cry so pitifully in the spring time of the year: And that men were scattered abroad in the caves of Hispaniola without the company of women. They say also, that where as Vagoniona himself was accustomed to wander in divers places, and yet by a special grace never transformed, descended to a certain fair woman whom he saw in the bottom of the sea, 
A special grace.  and received of her certain pebble stones of marble (which they call Cibas) and also certain yellow and bright plates of latton, which they call Guaninos. These things to this day are had in great estimation among the kings, as goodly jewels, and most holy relics. 
Holy relics.  But now (most noble prince) you shall hear a more pleasant fable. There is a certain cave called jovanaboina, in the territory of a certain king whose name is Machinnech: 
A holy cave.  This cave they honour more religiously than did the Greeks in time paste, Corinth, Cyrrha, or Nysa, and have adorned it with pictures of a thousand fashions. In th'entrance of this cave they have two graven Zemes, whereof the one is called Binthaitel, and the other Marohu. Being demanded why they had this cave in so great reverence, they answered earnestly, because the sun and the moon came first out of the same to give light to the world: 
The original of the sun and moon.  they have religious concourse to these caue●, as we are accustomed to go on Pilgrimage to Rome, or Uaticane, Compostella, or Jerusalem, as most holy & head places of our religion. They are also subject to another kind of superstition: for they think that dead folks walk in the night, and eat the fruit called Guannaba, 
Walking spirits.  unknown unto us, & somewhat like unto a Quinse: affirming also that they are conversant with living people, even in their beds, and to deceive women in taking upon them the shape of men, showing themselves as though they would have to do with them: but when the matter cometh to actual deed, suddenly to vanish away. If any do suspect that a dead body lieth by him, 
A remedy agayest walking spirits.  when he feeleth any strange thing in the bed, they say he shallbe out of doubt by feeling of the belly thereof: affirming that the spirits of dead men may take upon them all the members of man's body, saving only the navel. If therefore by the lack of the navel he do perceive that a dead body lieth by him, the feeling is immediately resolved. They believe verily, that in the night, and oftentimes in their journeys, and especially in common and high ways, dead men do meet with the living: Against whom, if any man be stout and out of fear, the fantasy vanisheth incontinently: but if any fear, the fantasy or vision doth so assault him and strike him with further fear, that many are thereby astonished, and have the limbs of their bodies taken. The inhabitants being demanded of whom they had those vain superstitions, they answered, that they were left them of their forefathers, as by descent of inheritance, and that they have had the same before the memory of man, composed in certain rhymes and songs, which it was lawful for none to learn, but only the kings sons, who committed the same to memory, because they had never any knowledge of letters. These they sing before the people on certain solemn and festival days, as most religious ceremonies: while in the mean time they play on a certain instrument made of one whole piece of wood, somewhat hollow like a tymbrel. Their priests and divines (whom they call Boitios) instruct them in these superstitions: 
Priests and divines. Physicians.  These priests are also physicians, devising a thousand crafts and subtleties how to deceive the simple people which have them in great reverence: for they persuade them that the Zemes use to speak with them familiarly, 
Ignorance is nourished with superstition.  and tell them of things to come. And if any have been sick, and are recovered, they make them believe that they obtained their health of the Zemes. These Boitii bind themselves to much fasting, and outward cleanliness, and pourgynges, especially when they take upon them the cure of any prince, for than they drink the powder of a certain herb, by whose quality they are driven into a fury, at which time (as they say) they learn many things by revelation of the Zemes. Then putting secretly in their mouths, 
A powder of marvelous effect.  either a stone, or a bone, or a piece of flesh, they come to the sick person, commanding all to departed out of that place, except one or two, whom it shall please the sick man to appoint: this done, they go about him three or four times, greatly deforming their faces, lips, and northrils, with sundry filthy gestures, blowing, breathing, and sucking the forehead, temples, 
A strange manner of curing.  and neck of the patiented, whereby (they say) they draw the evil air from him, and suck the disease out of his veins: then rubbing him about the shoulders, thighs, and legs, and drawing down their hands close by his feet, holding them yet fast together, they run to the door being open, where they unclose and shake their hands, affirming that they have driven away the disease, and that the patient shall shortly be perfectly restored to health. After this, coming behind him, he conveyeth a piece of flesh out of his own mouth like a iuggeler, and showeth it to the sick man, saying, Behold, you have eaten to much, you shall now be whole, because I have taken this from you. But if he intend yet further to deceive the patiented, 
Angry gods.  he persuadeth him that his Zemes is angry, either because he hath not builded him a chapel, or not honoured him religiously, or not dedicated unto him a grove or garden. And if it so chance that the sick person die, his kynsfolks, by witchcraft, 
They make the dead to speak.  enforce the dead to confess whether he died by natural destiny, or by the negligence of the Boitius, in that he had not fasted as he should have done, or not ministered a convenient medicine for the disease: so that if this physician be found faulty, they take reu●nge of him. Of these stones or bones which these Boitii carry in their mouths, if the women can come by them, they keep them religiously, believing them to be greatly effectual to help women travailing with child, and therefore honour them as they do their Zemes. For divers of the inhabitants honour Zemes of divers fashions: some make them of wood, as they were admonished by certain visions appearing unto them in the woods: Other, which have received answer of them among the rocks, make them of stone and marble. Some they make of roots, to the similitude of such as appear to them when they are gathering the roots called Ages, whereof they make their bread, as we have said before. These Zemes they believe to send plenty & fruitfulness of those roots, as the antiquity believed such fairies or spirits as they called Dryads, 
Fairies or spirits of the gentiles, much like to the papists.  Hamadryades, Satyros, Panes, and Nereids, to have the cure & providence of the sea, woods, springs, and fountains, assigning to every thing their peculiar gods: Even so do thinhabitants of this Island attribute a Zemes to every thing, supposing the same to give ear to their invocations. Wherefore, as often as the kings ask counsel of their Zemes as concerning their wars, increase of fruits, or scarceness, or health and sickness, they enter into the house dedicate to their Zemes, where, snuffing up into their nosthryls the powder of the herb called Cohobba (wherewith the Boitii are driven into a fury) they say that immediately they see the houses turned topsye turvy, 
The powder of the herb Cohobba.  and men to walk with their heels upward, of such force is this powder, utterly to take away all sense. As soon as this madness ceaseth, he embraceth his knees with his arms, holding down his head. And when he hath remained thus a while astonished, he lifteth up his head, as one that came new out of sleep: and thus looking up toward heaven, first he fumbleth certain confounded words with himself, then certain of the nobility or chief gentlemen that are about him (for none of the common people are admitted to these mysteries) with loud voices give tokens of rejoicing that he is returned to them from the speech of the Zemes, 
secret mysteries.  demanding of him what he hath seen. Then he opening his mouth, doteth that the Zemes spoke to him during the time of his trance, declaring that he had revelations either concerning victory or destruction, famine or plenty, health or sickness, 
Revelations.  or whatsoever happeneth first on his tongue. Now (most noble Prince) what need you hereafter to marvel of the spirit of Apollo so shaking his Sibylles with extreme fury: 
The spirit of Apollo. The Sibylles,  you had thought that the superstitious antiquity had perished. But now whereas I have declared thus much of the Zemes in general, I thought it not good to let pass what is said of them in particular. They say therefore that a certain king called Guamaretus, had a Zemes whose name was Corochotum, who (they say) was oftentimes wont to descend from the highest place of the house where Guamaretus kept him fast bound. They affirm, that the cause of this his breaking of his bands and departure, was either to hide himself, or to go seek for meat, or else for the act of generation: and that sometimes being offended that the king Guamaretus had been negligent and slack in honouring him, he was wont to lie hid for certain days. They say also, that in the kings village there are sometime children borne having two crowns, 
Children with two crowns.  which they suppose to be the children of Corochotum the Zemes. They feign likewise, that Guamaretus being overcome of his enemies in battle, and his village with the palace consumed with fire, Corochotus broke his bands, and was afterward found a furlong of, safe and without hurt. He hath also another Zemes called Epileguanita, made of wood, in shape like a four footed beast: who also is said, 
Wandering images.  often times to have gone from the place where he is honoured, into the woods. As soon as they perceive him to be gone, a great multitude of them gather together to seek him, with devout prayers: and when they have found him, bring him home religiously on their shoulders to the chapel dedicated unto him. But they complain, that sense the coming of the Christian men into the Island, he fled for altogether, and could never sense be found, whereby they divined the destruction of their country. They honoured an other Zemes in the likeness of a woman, on whom waited two other like men, as they were ministers to her. 

A woman Zemes of great power.  
Mediators.   One of these, executed thoffice of a mediator to the other Zemes, which are under the power and commandment of this woman, to raise winds, clouds, and rain. The other is also at her commandment a messenger to the other Zemes, which are joined with her in governance, to gather together the waters which fall from the high hills to the valleys, that being loosed, they may with force bruste out into great floods, and overflow the country, if the people do not give due honour to her Image. There remaineth yet one thing worthy to be noted, wherewith we will make an end of this book. It is a thing well known, and yet fresh in memory among the inhabitants of the island, that there was sometime two kings (of the which one was the father of Guarionexius, of whom we made mention before) which were wont to abstain five days together continually from meat & drink, to know somewhat of their Zemes of things to come, and that for this fasting being acceptable to their Zemes, 
A marvelous illusion of the devil.  they received answer of them, that within few years there should come to the island a nation of men covered with apparel, which should destroy all the customs and ceremonies of the island, and either slay all their children, or bring them into servitude. The common sort of the people understood this oracle to be meant of the Canibales, & therefore when they had any knowledge of their coming, they ever fled, and were fully determined never more to adventure the battle with them. But when they saw that the spaniards had entered into the Island, consulting among themselves of the matter, they concluded that this was the nation which was meant by th'oracle. Wherein, their opinion deceived them not, for they are now all subject to the christians, all such being slain as stobernely resisted: 
The idols abolished.  Nor yet remaineth there any memory of their Zemes, for they are all brought into Spain, that we might be certified of their illusions of evil spirits and Idols, the which you yourself (most noble Prince) have seen and felt when I was present with you. I let pass many things because you put me in remembrance that to morrow you take your journey toward your country, to bring home the queen your aunt, whom you accompanied hither at the commandment of king Fredrick your uncle. Wherefore I bid you farewell for this time, desiring you to remember your Martyr, whom you have compelled in the name of the king your uncle, to gather these few things out of a large field of histories.   

The tenth and last book of the first Decade, as a conclusion of the former books: written to Inacus jopez Mendocius, County of Tendilla, & viceroy of Granata.  
AT the first beginning and new attempt, when Colonus had taken upon him the enterprise to search the Ocean sea, I was earnestly moved and required by the letters of certain of my friends and noble men of Rome, to write those things as should happen. For they whispered with great admiration, that where as there were many new lands found, and nations which lived naked and after the law of nature, they could hear no certainty thereof, being greatly desirous of the same. In this mean time had fortune overthrown Ascanius (his brother Lodovic being cast out of Milan by the frenchmen) whose authority would not suffer me to be idle, 
Milan in the hands of the french men,  but ever to have my pen in hand. To him I wrote the two first books of this decade, beside many other of my hid commentaries which you shall see shortly: but fortune did no less withdraw my mind from writing, then disturb Ascanius from power. As he was tossed with contrary storms, and ceased to persuade me: even so slacked my ferventness to inquire any further, until the year of Christ▪ 1500 when the Court remained at Granata where you are viceroy: At which time, Lodovic the Cardinal of Aragonie, nephew to king Fredrick by his brother's side (being at Granata with the queen Parthenopea the sister of our Catholic king) brought me king frederic's letters, whereby he exhorted me to finish the other books which followed the two epistle books, which I write to Ascanius: For they both acknowledged that they had the copy of all that I writ to cardinal Ascanius. And albeit that even than I was sick (as you know) yet took I the burden upon me, and applied myself to writing. I have therefore chosen these few things, out of a great heap of such as seemed to me most worthy to be noted among the large writings of the aucthoures and searchers of the same. Wherefore, forasmuch as you have endeavoured to wrest out of my hands the whole example of all my works, to add the same to the innumerable volumes of your library, I thought it good now to make a brief rehearsal of those things which were done from that year of a thousand and five hundred, even unto this year which is the tenth from that: 
The history following, containeth the acts of ten years.  For I intend to write more largely of these things hereafter, if god grant me life. I had written a whole book by itself of the superstytions of the people of the island, supposing therewith to have accomplished the whole Decade consisting of ten books. But I have added this to the tenth as a perpendyculer line, and as it were a back guide or rearward to the other: So that you may knit the first tenth to the ninth, & impute this to occupy the place of the tenth to fill up the Decade. This order have I appointed, lest I should be compelled often times to write over the whole work, or send you the same defaced with blots and interlyning. But now let us come to our purpose. The ship masters and mariners ran over many coasts during these ten years: But ever followed such as were first found by Colonus. For rasing continually along by the tract of Paria, 
Paria part of the firm land of East India.  which they believe to be part of the firm land or continent of east India, some of them chanced upon certain new lands toward the east, and some toward the west, in which they found both gold and frankincense. For they brought from thence many jewels and ouches of gold, 
Gold & Frankincense.  and great plenty of frankincense, which they had of the people of those countries, partly for exchange of some of our things, and partly by force, over coming them by war. Yet in some places, although they be naked, 
The fierceness of the naked people.  they overcame our men, and slew whole armies. For they are exceeding fierce, and use venomous arrows, and long staves like iavelens, made hard at the end with fire. They found many beasts, both creeping and four footed, much dyffering from ours, variable and of sundry shapes innumerable: yet not hurtful, except Lions, Tigers, and Crocodiles. This I mean in sundry regions of that great land of Paria, but not in the islands: no not so much as one, for all the beasts of the islands, are meek and without hurt, except men, which (as we have said) are in many islands devourers of man's flesh. There are also divers kinds of fowls. And in many places bats of such bygnes, that they are equal with turtle doves. These bats, have oftentimes assaulted men in the night in their sleep, and so bitten them with their venomous teeth, that they have been thereby almost driven to madness, in so much that they have been compelled to flee from such places, as from ravenous Harpies. In an other place, where certain of them slept in the night season on the sands by the sea side, a monster coming out of the sea, came upon one of them secretly, and carried him away by the midst out of the sight of his fellows, to whom he cried in vain for help, 
A man devoured of a monster of the sea.  until the beast leapt into the sea with her pray. It was the kings pleasure that they should remain in these lands, and build towns and fortresses: whereunto they were so well willing, that divers proffered themselves to take upon them the subduing of the land, making great suit to the king that they might be appointed thereto. The coast of this tract is exceeding great and large, 
Note the largeness of the new Islands.  and the regions and lands thereof extend marvelous far, so that they affirm the continent of these regions with the Islands about the same, to be thrice as big as all Europe, beside those lands that the Portugals have found southward, which are also exceeding large. Therefore doubtless Spain hath deserved great praise in these our days, in that it hath made known unto us so many thousands of Antipodes which lay hid before, and unknown to our forefathers: 
Antipodes.  and hath thereby ministered so large matter to write of, to such learned wits as are desirous to set forth knowledge to the commodity of men: to whom I opened a way when I gathered these things rudely together as you see: the which, nevertheless I trust you will take in good part, aswell for that I can not adorn my rudeness with better vesture, as also that I never took pen in hand to write like an historiographer, but only by epistles scribeled in haste, to satisfy them, from whose commandments I might not draw back my foot. But now I have digressed enough, let us now therefore return to Hispaniola. Our men have found by experience, that the bread of the Island is of small strength to such as have been used to our bread made of wheat, and that their strengths were much decayed by using of the same: 
The nature of the place, altereth the forms and qualities of things.  wherefore the king hath of late commanded that wheat should be sown there in divers places, and at sundry times of the year: It groweth into hollow reeds, with few ears, but those very big and fruitful. They find the like softness and delicateness to be in herbs, which grow there to the height of corn. Neat or cattle, become of bigger stature, and exceeding fat, but their flesh is more unsavoury, and their bones (as they say) either without marrow, or the same to be very waterish: but of hogs and swine, they affirm the contrary, that they are more wholesome, and of better taste, by reason of certain wild fruits which they eat, being of much better nourishment than mast. There is almost none other kind of flesh commonly sold in the market. The multitude of hogs are exceedingly increased, and become wild as soon as they are out of the swineherds keeping. They have such plenty of beasts and fowls, 
Plenty of beasts and foul.  that they shall hereafter have no need to have any brought from other places. The increase of all beasts grow bigger than the brood they came of, by reason of the rankness of the pasture, although their feeding be only of grass, without either barley or other grain. But we have said enough of Hispaniola. They have now found that Cuba (which of long time they thought to have been firm land, 
Cuba is an Island.  for the great length thereof) is an Island: yet is it no marvel that the inhabitants themselves told our men when they searched the length thereof, that it was without end. For this nation being naked, and content with a little, and with the limits of their own country, is not greatly curious to know what their neighbours do, or the largeness of their dominion, nor yet knew they if there were any other thing under heaven, beside that which they walked on with their feet. Cuha is from the East into the West, much longer than Hispaniola, and in breadth from the North to the South, 
The 〈◊〉 of Cuba.  much less than they supposed at the first: for it is very narrow in respect of the length, and is for the most part very fruitful and pleasant. Eastward, not far from Hispaniola, there lieth an Island less than Hispaniola more than by the half, which our men called Sancti johannis, 
The Island of Burichema, of S. johannis. Gold mines.  being in manner square, in this they found exceeding rich gold mines: but being now occupied in the gold mines of Hispaniola, they have not yet sent labourers into the Island. But the plenty and revenue of gold of all other regions, give place to Hispaniola, where they give themselves in manner to none other thing then to gather gold, of which work this order is appointed. To every such witty and skilful man as is put in trust to be a surveyor or overseer of these works, there is assigned one or more kings of the Island, with their subjects. These kings according to their league, come with their people at certain times of the year, and resort every of them to the gold mine to the which he is assigned, where they have all manner of dygging or mining tools delivered them, and every king with his men, have a certain reward allowed them for their labour. For when they depart from the mines to sowing of corn, and other tillage (whereunto they are addict at certain other times, lest their food should fail them.) they receive for their labour, 
tillage,  one a jerkin, or a doublet, another a shirt, another a cloak or a cap: for they now take pleasure in these things, and go no more naked as they were wont to do. And thus they use the help and labour of the inhabitants, both for the tillage of their ground, and in their gold mines, as though they were their servants or bondmen. They bear this yoke of servitude with an evil will, but yet they bear it: they call these hired labourers, Anaborias: yet the king doth not suffer that they should be used as bondmen, and only at his pleasure, they are set at liberty, or appointed to work. At such time as they are called together of their kings to work (as soldiers or pioneers are assembled of their centurions) many of them steel away to the mountains and woods, where they lie lurking, 
They abhor labour.  being content for that time to live with wild fruits, rather than take the pains to labour. They are docible and apt to learn, 
They are docible.  and have now utterly forgotten their old superstitions. They believe godly, and bear well in memory such things as they have learned of our ●ayth. 
The kings children.  Their kings children are brought up with the chiefest of our men, and are instructed in letters and good manners, When they are grown to man's age, they send them home to their countries to be example to other, and especially to govern the people, if their fathers be dead, that they may the better set forth the Christian religion, and keep their subjects in love and obedience. By reason whereof, they come now by fair means & gentle persuasions, to the mines which lie in two regions of the island, 
The two chief gold mines of Hispaniola.  about thirty miles distant from the city of Dominica, whereof the on is called Sancti Christophori: and the other being distant about fourscore and ten miles, is called Cibava, not far from the chief haven called Portus Regalis. These regions are very large, in the which in many places here and there, are found sometime even in the upper crust of the earth, and sometime among the stones, certain round pieces or plates of gold, sometime of small quantity, and in some places of great weight: in so much that there hath been found round pieces of three hundred pound weight, and one of three thousand, three hundred and ten pound weight, the which (as you hard) was sent whole to the king in that ship in the which the governor Boadilla was coming home into Spain, the ship with all the men being drowned by the way, 
A costly shipwreck.  by reason it was ouerladen with the weight of gold & multitude of men, albeit, there were more than a thousand persons which saw and handled the piece of gold. And whereas here I speak of a pound, I do not mean the common pound, but the sum of the ducat of gold, with the coin called Triens, which is the third part of a pound. 
Pesus.  which they call Pesus. The sum of the weight hearof, the spaniards call Castelanum Aureum. All the gold that is digged in the mountains of Cibava and Port Regale, is carried to the tower of Conception, where shops with all things appertaining are ready furnished to fine it, 
The fynyng and distributing of gold.  melt it, and cast it into wedges. That done, they take the kings portion thereof, which is the fift part, and so restore to every man his own which he got with his labour. But the gold which is found in saint Christophorus mine and the regions there about, is carried to the shops which are in the village called Bonaventura. In these two shops, is molten yearly above three hundred thousand pound weight of gold. 
Three hundred thousand weight of gold melted yearly in Hispaniola.  If any man be known deceytfullye to keep back any portion of gold, whereof he hath not made the kings officers privy, he forfeyteth the same for a fine. There chanceth among them oftentimes many contentions and controversies, the which unless the magistrates of the Island do fynyshe, the case is removed by appellation to the high counsel of the court, from whose sentence it is not lawful to appeal in all the dominions of Castyle. But let us now return to the new lands, 
The new lands.  from whence we have digressed. They are innumerable, divers, and exceeding fortunate. Wherefore the spaniards in these our days, and their noble enterprises, do not give place either to the facts of Saturnus, or Hercules, or any other of the ancient princes of famous memory, which were canonised among the gods, called Heroes, for their searching of new lands and regions, and bringing the same to better culture and civility. Oh God, 

Enlarging of the Christian religion.  
The original of true nobility.   how large & far shall our posterity see the Christian religion extended? how large a camp have they now to wander in, which by the true nobility that is in them, or moved by virtue, will attempt either to deserve like praise among men, or reputation of well doing before God? What I conceive in my mind of these things, I am not able to express with pen or tongue. I will now therefore so make an end of this perpendicular conclusion of the whole Decade, as minding hereafter to search and gather every thing particularly, that I may at further leisure write the same more at large. For Colonus the Admiral, with four ships, and a hundred, threescore, and ten men, appointed by the king, discovered in the year of Christ .1520. the land overagainst the West corner of Cuba, distant from the same about a hundred and thirty leagues: in the midst of which tract, lieth an Island called Guanassa. 
The Island of Guanassa.  From hence he directed his voyage backward toward the East, by the shore of that coast, supposing that he should have found the coasts of Paria, but it chanced otherwise. It is said also that Vincencius Agnes (of whom we have spoken before) and one johannes Daiz (with divers other, 
The voyage of johannes Diaz.  of whose voyages I have as yet no certain knowledge) have overrun those coasts: but if God grant me life, I trust to know the truth hereof, and to advertise you of the same. Thus far ye well.   
The end of the first Decade.   


The first book of the second Decade, to Leo Bishop of Rome, the tenth of that name, of the supposed continent or firm land.  
SInce the time that Galeatius Butrigarius of Bononie, and johannes Cursius of Florence (most holy father) came to the Catholic king of Spain, the one of your holiness embassage, and the other for the affairs of his common wealth, I was ever for the most part in their company, and for their virtues and wisdom had them in great reverence. And whereas they were greatly given to study, and continual revolving of divers auctors, they chanced upon certain books, negligently let slip out of my hands, entreating of the large lands and regions hitherto lying hid, and almost West Antipodes, found of late by the spaniards. Yet being alured and delighted with the newness and strangeness of the matter, 
West Antipodes.  although rudely adorned, they commended the same, therewith earnestly desiring me in their own names, and requiring me in the name of your holiness, to add hereunto all such things as were found after that time, and to give them a copy thereof, to send to your holiness, that you might thereby understand, both how great commodities is chanced to the progeny of mankind, as also increase of the militant congregation in these our days, 
The increase of the Christian congregation.  by the fortunate enterprises of the kings of Spain. For like as razed and unpaynted tables, are apt to receive what forms soever are first drawn thereon by the hand of the painter, even so these naked and simple people, do soon receive the customs of our religion, and by conversation of our men, shake of their fierce and native barbarousness. I have thought it good therefore to satisfy the request of these wise men, especially using th'authority of your name, whereunto not to have obeyed, I should esteem myself to have committed a heinous offence. Wherefore I will now briefly rehearse in order, what hid coasts the spaniards overran, who were thauthors thereof, where they rested, what further hope they brought, and finally what great things those tracts of lands do promise in time to come. In the declaration of my decade of the ocean, which is now printed and dispersed throughout Christendom unwares to me, I described how Christophorus Colonus found those islands whereof we have spoken, and that turning from thence toward the left hand southward, he chanced into great regions of lands, and large seas, distant from the Equinoctial line, only from five degrees to ten: 
Of lands distant from the Equinoctial, from five degrees to ten.  where he found broad rivers and exceeding high mountains covered with snow, and hard by the sea banks, where were many commodious and quiet havens. But Colonus being now departed out of this life, the king began to take care, how those lands might be inhabited with Christian men, 
The death of Colonus.  to th'increase of our faith: whereupon he gave licence by his letters patents to all such as would take the matter in hand, and especially to two, whereof Diego Nicuesa was one, 
A general licence.  & the other was Alphonsus Fogeda. Wherefore about the Ideses of December, 
The navigation of Alphonsus Fogeda.  Alphonsus departing first with three hundred soldiers from the island of Hispaniola (in the which we said the Spaniards had builded a city, & planted their habitation) & sailing in manner full south, he came to one of the havens found before, which Colonus named Portus carthaginis, both because of the island standing against the course of the stream, and also that by reason of the largeness of the place and bending sides, it is much like to the haven of Spain called Carthago. The inhabitants call the Island Codego, as the spaniards call the Island of their haven Scombria. This region is called of the inhabitants Caramairi, in the which they affirm both the men and women to be of goodly stature, but naked. 
The region of Caramairi.  The men have their hear cut round by their ears, but the women were it long, both the men and women are very good archers. Our men found certain trees in this province, which bore great plenty of sweet apples, but hurtful, for they turn into worms when they are eaten. 

Apples which turn into worms.  
A tree whose shadow is hurtful.   Especially the shadow of the tree is contagious, for such as sleep under it any time, have their heads swollen, and lose their sight: but if they sleep but a while, their sight cometh again after a few days. This port is distant four hundred, fifty, & six miles from that port of Hispaniola which the spaniards call Beata, in the which also they furnish themselves when they prepare any voyage to seek other new lands. When Fogeda had entered into the haven, he enuaded, slew, and spoiled the people, whom he found naked and scattered: for they were given him for a pray by the kings letters patents, because they had been before time cruel against the Christians, and could never be alured to permit them quietly to come within their dominions. Here they found gold, but in no great quantity, nor yet that pure: they make of it certain breast plates and brooches which they wear for comeliness. But Fogeda not content with these spoils, using certain captives, which he had taken before, for guides, entered into a village twelve miles distant from the sea side further into the land, into the which they were fled when he first enuaded. Here he found a naked people, 
Warlike people.  but apt to war: for they were armed with targets, shields, long swords made of wood, and bows with arrows typt with bone, or hardened with fire. As soon as they had espied our men, they with their guests whom they had receiceyved, assailed them with desperate minds, being thereto more earnestly provoked, beholding the calamity of these which fled unto them, by the violence done to their women and children, in the spoil and slaughter. In this conflict our men had the overthrow: in the which, one johannes de Lacossa (being in authority next unto Fogeda the captain, and also the first that gathered gold in the sands of Vraba) was slain with fifty soldiers: 
Arrows infected with poison.  for these people infect their arrows with the deadly poison of a certain herb. The other with their captain Fogeda being discomfited, fled to the ships. While they remained thus in the haven of Carthago, sorrowful and pensive for the loss of their companions, 
The navigation of Diego Nicuesa.  the other captain Diego Nicuesa, (whom they left in Hispaniola, preparing himself toward the voyage in the haven Beata) came to them with five ships, and seven hundred fourscore and fifteen men. For the greater number of soldiers followed Nicuesa, both because free liberty was given them to choose which of the capitains them list, and also that by reason of his age, he was of greater authority: But esspetially because the rumour was that Beragua being by the kings commission appointed to Nicuesa, 
The regions of Vraba and Beragua.  was richer in gold than Vraba assigned to Alphonsus Fogeda. Therefore, at the arrival of Nicuesa, they consulted what was best to be done: and determined first to revenge the death of their fellows. whereupon, setting their battle in array, they marched in the night toward them which slew Cossa with his companions. Thus stealing on them unwares in the last watch of the night, 
The spaniards revenge the death of their companions.  and encompassing the village where they lay, consysting of a hundred houses and more, having also in it thrice as many of their neighbours as of themselves, they set it on fire, with diligent watch that none might escape. And thus in short time they brought them and their houses to ashes, and made them pay the ransom of blood with blood: for of a great multitude of men and women, 
A great slaughter.  they spared only two children, all other being destroyed with fire or sword, except few which escaped privily, they learned by these reserved children, that Cossa and his fellows were cut in pieces, and eaten of them that slew them. By reason whereof, they suppose that these people of Camairi took their original of the Caribes, otherwise called Canibales. 
Canibales.  Here they found some gold among the ashes. 
The hunger of gold.  For the hunger of gold did no less encourage our men to adventure these perils and labours, than did the possessing of the lands. These things thus finished, and the death of Cossa and his fellows revenged, they returned to the haven. After this, Fogeda which came first, first likewise departing with his army to seek Vraba, committed to his governance, sailed by an Island called Fortis, lying in the midway between Vraba and the haven of Carthago: into the which dessending, 
The Island Fortis.  he found it to be an Island of the Canibales, bringing with him from thence two men and seven women, for the residue escaped. Here he found in the cottages of them that fled, a hundred, fourscore, and ten drams of gold, 
Wrought gold.  cast and wrought in divers forms. Sailing forward from hence, he came to the East coasts of Vraba, which the inhabitants call Carihana, from whence the Caribes or Canibales of the Islands are said to have their name and original. Here he began to build a fortress, and a village near unto the same, therein intending to place their first habitation. Shortly after, being instructed by certain captives, that there was about twelve miles further within the land, a certain village called Tirufi, having in it a rich gold mine, he determined to destroy the village, to the which when he came, he found the inhabitants ready to defend their right, and that so stoutly, that encountering with them, he was repulsed with shame and damage: for these people also use bows and venomous arrows. Within a few days after, being enforced for lack of victuals to invade another village, he himself was stricken in the thigh with an arrow. Some of his fellows say, that he was thus wounded of one of the inhabitants whose wife he had led away captive before. They say also that he had first friendly communed with Fogeda for redeeming of his wife, and had appointed a day to bring a portion of gold for her ransom, and that he came at the day assigned, not laden with gold, but armed with bows and arrows, with eight other confederate with him, which had been before partakers of the injuries done to them first at the haven of Carthago, and afterward at the burning of the village, in revenge whereof, they had desperately consecrated themselves to death: But the matter being known, the captain of this conspiracy was slain of Fogeda his companions, and his wife detained in captivity. Fogeda also through the maliciousness of the venom, consumed and was dried up by little & little. While these things chanced thus, they espied Nicuesa the other captain, to whom Beragua the region of the West side of Vraba was assigned to inhabit. 
Nicuesa.  He gave wind to his sails to take his voyage toward Beragua, the day after that Fogeda departed out of the haven of Carthago. He with his army that he brought with him, coasted ever along by the shore, until he came to the gulf Coiba, whose kings name is Careta. 
The gulf Coiba.  Here he found their language to be in manner nothing like unto that of Hispaniola, or of the haven of Carthago: whereby he perceived that in this tract, there are many languages differing from their own borderers. Nicuesa departing from Coiba, went to the province or lieutenantship of Fogeda his companion. Within a few days after, he himself entering into one of those merchant ships which the spaniards call Caravelas, commanded that the bigger vessels should follow far behind. He took with him two small ships commonly called Bergandines or Brigandines. I have thought it good in all the discourse of these books, to use the common names of things, because I had rather be plain then curious, especially forasmuch as there do daily arise many new things unknown to the antiquity, whereof they have left no true names. After the departure of Nicuesa, there came a ship from Hispaniola to Fogeda, the captain whereof, was one Barnardino de Calavera, 
Barnardino de Calavera.  who had stolen the same from Hispaniola with threescore men, without leave or advice of the Admiral and the other governors. With the victuals which this ship brought, they refreshed themselves, and somewhat recovered their strengths, much weakened for lack of meat. Fogeda his companions whyspered and muttered against him daily more and more, that he fed them forth with vain hope: for he had told them that he left Ancisus in Hispaniola (whom he chose by the kings commission to be a judge in causes, because he was learned in the law) to come shortly after him with a ship laden with victuals, and that he marveled that he was not come many days since. And herein he said nothing but truth: for when he departed, he left Ancisus half ready to follow him. But his fellows supposing that all that he had said of Ancisus had been feigned, some of them determined privily to steal away the two Brigandines from Fogeda, and to return to Hispaniola. But Fogeda having knowledge hereof, prevented their device: for leaving the custody of the fortress with a certain noble gentleman called Francisco Pizarro, he himself thus wounded, with a few other in his company, entered into the ship whereof we spoke before, and sailed directly to Hispaniola, both to heal the wound of his thigh, if any remedy might be found, 
Fogeda returneth to Hispaniola.  and also to know what was the cause of Ancisus tarrying: leaving hope with his fellows (which were now brought from three hundred to threescore, partly by famine, and partly by war) that he would return within the space of xu days, 
Famine.  prescribing also a condition to Pizarro and his companions, that it should not be imputed to them for treason, to departed from thence if he came not again at the day appointed, with vyttuales, and a new supply of men. These xu days being now past, whereas they could yet hear nothing of Fogeda, and were daily more and more oppressed with sharp hunger, they entered into the two Brigandines which were left, and departed from that land. And as they were now sailing on the main sea toward Hispaniola, a tempest suddenly arising, swallowed one of the Brigandines with all that were therein. Some of their fellows affirm, that they plainly saw a fish of huge greatness, swimming about the Brigandine (for those seas bring forth great monsters) and that with a stroke of her tail, 
A Brigandine drowned with the stroke of a fish.  she broke the rudder of the ship in pieces, which failing, the Brigandine being driven about by force of the tempest, was drowned not far from the Island called Fortis, lying between the coasts of the haven Carthago and Vraba. As they of the other Brigandine would have landed in the Island, they were driven back with the bows and arrows of the fierce barbarians. Proceeding therefore on their voyage, they met by chance with Ancisus, between the haven of Carthago, 
The region of Cuchibacoa.  and the region of Cuchibacoa in the mouth of the river which the spaniards called Boium gatti, that is, the house of the cat, because they saw a cat first in that place: Boium, in the tongue of Hispaniola, is a house. Ancisus came with a ship laden with all things necessary, both for meat, and drink, and apparel, bringing also with him an another Brigandine. This is he for whose coming the captain Fogeda looked for so long. He loosed anchor from Hispaniola in the Ideses of September: and the fourth day after his departure, he espied certain high mountains, the which for the abundance of snow which lieth there continually in the tops thereof, the Spaniards called Serra Nevata, 
Serra Nevata.  when Colonus the first finder of those regions passed by the same. The fift day he sailed by Os Draconis▪ 
Os Draconis.  They which were in the Brigandine, told Ancisus that Fogeda was returned to Hispaniola: but Ancisus supposing that they had feigned that tale, commanded them by th'authority of his commission to turn back again. The Brigandiners obeyed & followed him: yet made they humble suit unto him that he would grant them that with his favour they might either go again to Hispaniola, or that he himself would bring them to Nicuesa: and that they would for his gentleness, declared toward them in this behalf, reward him with two thousand drams of gold: for they were rich in gold, 
rich in gold, and poor in bread.  but poor in bread. But Ancisus assented to neither of their requests, affirming that he might by no means go any other way, then to Vraba the province assigned to Fogeda. Whereupon, by their conduct, he took his voyage directly toward Vraba, But now let it not seem tedious to your holiness, to hear of one thing worthy to be remembered, which chanced to this Lieutenant Ancisus as he came thither: for he also cast anchor in the coasts of the region of Caramairi, which we said to be famous, by reason of the haven of Carthago, and of the goodly stature, strength, and beauty both of men and women being in the same. Here he sent certain to go aland on the shore both to fetch fresh water, & also to repair the ship boat which was sore bruised. In this mean time, a great multitude of the people of the country, armed after their manner, came about our men, as they were occupied about their business, and stood in a readiness to fight, for the space of three days continually, during which time, neither durst they set upon our men, nor our men assail them. Thus both parties keeping their array, stood still three whole days, the one gazing on the other. Yet all this time our men applied their work, placing the shypwryghtes in the midst of their army. As they stood thus amazed, two of our company went to fill their water pots at the mouth of the river near unto them both, where suddenly there came forth against them a captain of the barbarians with ten armed men, which enclosed them, and with terrible countenance bend their arrows against them, but shot them not of. One of our men fled, but the other remained, calling his fellow again, and rebuking him for his fearfulness. Then he spoke to the barbarians in their own language, which he had learned being conversant with the captives that were carried from thence long before. They marvelling to hear a stranger speak in their native tongue, put of their fierceness, and fell to friendly communication, demanding who were the captains of that company which were arrived in their land. He answered that they were strangers passing by, and that he marveled why they would attempt to drive them from their coasts, and disturb their ships: arguing them of folly and cruelty, and further threatening their ruin and destruction, except they would use themselves more friendly toward them. For he advertised them that there would shortly come into their land armed men, in number like unto the sands of the sea, and that to their utter destruction, not only if they resisted them not, but also except they received them, and entertained them honourably. In the mean time, Ancisus was informed that his men were detained: wherefore suspecting some deceit, 
The use of targets against venomous arrows.  he brought forth all his target men, for fear of their venomous arrows: and setting them in battle array, he marched forward toward them which stayed his men. But he which communed with the barbarians, giving him a sign with his hand to proceed no further, he stayed, and calling to him the other, he knew that all was safe: for the barbarians proffered him peace, because they were not they whom they suspected them to have been, meaning by Fogeda & Nicuesa, who had spoiled the village standing there by the sea side, and carried away many captives, and also burned another village further within the land. And therefore (as they said) the cause of their coming thither, was to revenge those injuries, if by any means they could, yet that they would not exercise their weapons against the innocent: 
The barbarians have respect to justice.  for they said, it was ungodly to fight against any, not being provoked. Laying apart therefore their bows and arrows, they entertained our men gently, and gave them great plenty of salted fish, 
Salted fish.  and bread of their country, and filled their vessels with Cider made of their country fruits and seeds, not inferior to wine in goodness. Thus Ancisus having entered into friendship, 
Wine of fruits and seeds.  and made a league of peace with thinhabitants of Caramairi, which were before sore provoked by other captains, he launched from that land, and directed his course to Vraba by the Island Fortis, having in his ship a hundred and fifty fresh men, which were substitute in the place of such as were dead: also twelve Mares, and many swine, and other beasts both males and females for increase. Likewise, 
Artyllerie.  fifty pieces of ordinance, with great multitude of targets, swords, javelins, and such other weapons for the wars, but all this with evil speed, and in an evil hour: for as they were even now entering into the haven, the governor of the ship which sat at the helm, struck the ship upon the sands, 
Ancisus shipwreck.  where it was so fast enclosed and beaten with the waves of the sea, that it opened in the midst, and all lost that was therein, a thing surely miserable to behold: for of all the victuals that they had, they saved only twelve barrels of meal, with a few cheeses, and a little bysket bread, for all the beasts were drowned, and they themselves escaped hardly and half naked, by help of the Brigandine and ship boat, carrying with them only a few weapons. Thus they fell from one calamity into another, being now more careful for their lives then for gold. Yet being brought alive and in health to that land which they so greatly desired, they could do no less then to provide for the susteyning of their bodies, because they could not live only by air: and whereas their own failed, they must needs live by other men's. Yet among these so many adversities, one good chance offered itself unto them: for they found, not far from the sea side, a grove of Date trees, among the which, and also among the reek or weeds of the marshes, 
A grove of date trees.  they espied a multitude of wild bores, with whose flesh they fed themselves well certain days. 
Wild bores.  These they say to be less than ours, and with so short tails, that they thought they had been cut of. They differ also from ours in their feet: for their hinder feet are whole undivided, and also without any hoof. But they affirm that they have proved by experience, their flesh to be of better taste and more wholesome than ours. During this time, they fed also of Dates, and the roots of young Date trees, which they eat likewise in Civil and Granata, where they call them Palmitoes, of the leaves whereof they make besoms in Rome. Sometimes also they eat of the apples of that region, which have the taste of prunes, and have also stones in them, 
Apples of a strange kind.  and are but little and of red colour: I suppose them to be of that kind, whereof I ate in the city of Alexandria in Egypt, in the month of Apryll, the trees whereof, the jews that dwell there, being learned in the law of Moses, 
Cedars of Libanus.  affirm to be the Cedars of Libanus, which bear old fruits and new all the year, as doth the orange tree. These apples are good to be eaten, and have a certain sweetness mixed with a gentle sharpness, as have the fruits called Sorbes. Thinhabytantes plant these trees in their orchards and gardens, and nourish them with great diligence as we do cherries, peaches, and quinses. This tree in leaves, height, and trunk, is very like unto the tree that beareth the fruit called Zizipha, which the Apothecaries call juiuba. But whereas now the wild bores began to fail them, they were again enforced to consult and provide for the time to come: Whereupon with their whole army, they entered further into the land. The Canibales of this province, are most expert archers. Ancisus had in his company, a hundred men. They met by the way with only three men of thinhabitants, 
Men of desperate boldness.  naked, and armed with bows & venomous arrows, who without all fear, assailed our men fyercesly, wounded many, and slew many, and when they emptied their quivers, fled as swiftly as the wind: For (as we have said) they are exceeding swift of foot by reason of their lose gooing from their child's age, they affirm that they let slip no arrow out of their bows in vain. Our men therefore returned the same way that they came, much more unfortunate than they were before, and consulted among themselves to leave the land, especially because the inhabitants had overthrown the fortress which Fogeda builded, and had burnt thirty houses of the village, as soon as Pizarrus and his company left of Fogeda, and forsaken the land. By this occasion therefore, being driven to seek further, they had intelligence that the west side of that gulf of Vraba, 
The gulf of Vraba.  was more fruitful & better to inhabit. Wherefore, they sent the one half of their men thither with the brigandine, and left the other near to the sea side on the east part. This gulf, is fourteen miles in breadth, and how much the further it entereth into the firm land, it is so much the narrower. Into the gulf of Vraba, there fall many rivers, but one (as they say) more fortunate than the river of Nilus in Egypt. 
The great river of Darien.  This river is called Darien, upon the banks whereof, being very fruitful of trees and grass, they intended to plant their new colony or habitation. But the inhabytantes marvelling at the brigandyne being bigger than their canoas, and specially at the sails thereof, first sent away their children and weakesse sort of their people with their baggage and household stuff, and assembled all such together both men and women, as were meet for the wars. Thus being armed with weapons and desperate minds, they stood in a readiness to fight, and tarried the coming of our men upon a little hill, as it were to take the advantage of the ground: our men judged them to be about five hundred in number. Then Ancisus the captain of our men, and lieutenant in the steed of Fogeda, setting his men in order of battle array, and with his whole company kneeling on his knees, they all made humble prayers to GOD for the victory, and a vow to the image of the blessed virgin which is honoured in Civil, by the name of Sancta Maria Antiqua, promising to send her many golden gifts, and a stranger of that country: also, to name the village Sancta Maria Antiqua after her name: likewise to erect a temple called by the same name, or at the least to dedicate the king of that province his palace to that use, if it should please her to assist them in this dangerous enterprise. This done, all the soldiers took an oath, 
The soldiers make an oath.  that no man should turn his back to his enemies. Then the captain commanding them to be in a readiness with their targets and javelins, and the trumpeter to blow the battle, they fiercely assailed their enemies with a larome: but the naked barbarians, not long able to abide the force of our men, were put to flight, 
The barbarians are driven to flight.  with their king and captain Cemaccus. Our men entered into the village, where they found plenty of meat, such as the people of the country use, sufficient to assuage their present hunger, as bread made of roots, with certain fruits unlike unto ours, which they reserve for store, as we do chestnuts. Of these people, the men are utterly naked, but the women, from the navel downward are covered with a fine cloth made of gossampine cotton. This region is utterly without any sharpness of winter: for the mouth of this river of Darien, 
The river of Darien, but seven. degrees from the Equinoctial line.  is only eight degrees distant from the Equinoctial line, so that the common sort of our men, scarcely perceive any difference in length between the day and night all the whole year: but because they are ignorant in astronomy, they can perceive no small difference. Therefore we need not much pass if the degree differ somewhat from their opinion, forasmuch as the difference can not be great. The day after that they arrived at the land, they sailed along by the river, where they found a great thicket of reeds, continuing for the space of a mile in length, supposing (as it chanced in deed) that the borderers thereabout which had fled, had either lain lurking there, or else to have hid their stuff among those reeds: Whereupon, arming themselves with their targets, for fear of the people lying in ambush, they searched the thicket diligently, 
Gold found in a thicket of reeds.  and found it without men, but replenished with household stuff and gold. They found also a great multitude of sheets, made of the silk or cotton of the gossampine tree: likewise divers kinds of vessels & tools made of wood, 
Breast plates of gold.  and many of earth: also many breast plates of gold, and ouches wrought after their manner, to the sum of a hundred & two pound weight: for they also take pleasure in the beauty of gold, and work it very artificially, although it be not the price of things among them as with us. They have it out of other regions, for exchange of such things as their country bringeth forth: 
The golden regions are for the most part barren.  for such regions as have plenty of bread and gossampine, lack gold, and such as bring forth gold, are for the most part rough with mountains and rocks, and therefore barren: and thus they exercise merchandise without the use of money. Rejoicing therefore with double gladness, aswell in that they saw great likeness of gold, as also that fortune had offered them so fair and fruitful a country, they sent for their fellows whom they had left before in the East side of the gulf of Vraha. Yet some say, that the air is there unwholesome, because that part of the region lieth in a low valley, environed with mountains and marshes.   

The second book of the second Decade, of the supposed continent.  
I Have described to your holiness where Fogeda with his company (to whom the large tracts of Vraba was assigned to inhabit) intended to fasten their foot. Let us now therefore leave them of Vraba for a while, and return again to Nicuesa, to whom the governance and Lieutenauntshyp of the most large province of Beragua (being the West side of the gulf of Vraba) was appointed. We have declared how Nicuesa, departing with one Caravel and two Brigandines, from Vraba the jurisdiction of his friend & companion Fogeda, directed his course Westward to Beragua, leaving the bigger ships somewhat behind him, to follow him a far of, but he took this device in an evil hour, for he both lost his fellows in the night, and went past the mouth of the river Beragua, which he chiefly sought. One Lupus Olanus a Cantabrian, 
Lupus Olanus  and governor of one of the great ships, had the conduct of one of the Brigandines: he coming behind, learned of the inhabitants, which was the way Eastward to the gulf of Beragua, overpassed and left behind of Nicuesa. Olanus therefore directing his course toward the East, met with the other Brigandine, which had also wandered out of the way by reason of the darkness of the night. The governor of this Brigandine, was one Petrus de Vmbria. 
Petrus de Vmbria.  Thus both being glad of their meeting, they consulted what was best to be done, and which way they could conjecture their governor had taken his voyage. After deliberation, they judged that Nicuesa could no more lack some to put him in remembrance of Beragua, than they themselves were mindful hereof, hoping also to find him there. They sailed therefore toward Beragua, where they found within xvi miles distant, a river which Colonus named Lagartos, because it nourisheth great Lysards, which in the Spanish tongue are called Lagartos. 
The river Lagartos.  These Lysards are hurtful both unto man and beast, and in shape much like unto the Crocodiles of the river Nilus in Egypt. In this river they found their companions and fellows of their error, lying at anchor with the great ships, which followed behind by the governors commandment. Here the whole assembly being careful and disquieted by reason of the governors error, after consultation, by the advice of the captains of the Brigandines, who had razed near unto the coasts of Beragua, they sailed directly thither. Beragua, 
The golden river of Beragua.  in the language of the inhabitants of the same province, is as much to say, as the golden river. The region itself is also called by the same name, taking name of the river. In the mouth of this river, the greatest vessels cast anchor, and conveyed all their victuales and other necessaries to land with their ship boats, and elected Lupus Olanus to be their governor in steed of Nicuesa whom they had lost. By thadvice therefore of Olanus and the other under capytaines, that all hope of departure might be taken from the soldiers which they had now brought thither, and to make them the more willing to inhabit that land, they utterly forsook and cast of those ships being now rotten for age, and suffered them to be shaken and bruised of the surges of the sea. Yet of their soundest planks, with other new, made of the trees of that Region (which they say to be exceeding big and high) they framed a new caravel shortly after, which they might use to serve for their necessity. But Beragua was found by the unfortunate destiny of Petrus de Vmbria, 
The enterprise & death of Petrus de Vmbria  For he, being a man of prompt wit and apt forwardness to attempt things (in which sometime fortune will bear a stroke notwithstanding our providence) took upon him th'adventure to search the shore, to th'intent to find a way for his fellows where they might best come aland. For this purpose, he chose him xii mariners, and went aboard the ship boat which served the greatest ships. The flowing of the sea, raged and roared there, with a horrible whurling, as we read of the dangerous place of Scylla in the sea of Cicilie, 
The dangerous place of Scylla in the sea of Cicile.  by reason of the huge & ragged rocks reaching into the sea, from which the waves rebounding with violence, make a great noise and roughness on the water, which roughness or reflowing, the Spaniards call Resacca, In these dangers wretched Vmbria wrestled a while, but in short space, a wave of the sea almost as big as a mountain, rebounding from the rocks, overwhelmed the boat, and devoured the same with the men, even in the sight of their fellows: So that of them all, only one escaped by reason he was expert in swimming. For getting hold of the corner of a rock, and sustaining the rage of the sea until the next day when it waxed calm, and the shore was dry by the fall of the water, he escaped and resorted to his company. But Vmbria with the other eleven, were utterly cast away. The residue of the company, durst not commit themselves to the ship boats, but went aland with their brygantines. Where remaining a few days, and sailing along by the river, they found certain villages of the inhabitants, which they call Mumu. Here they began to build a fortress, and to sow seeds after the manner of their country, in a certain vale of fruitful ground, because in other places the region is barren. As these things were thus doing in Beragua, one of their company standing upon the top of a high rock of especial, and lifting his eyes toward the West, began to cry, Linen sails, linen sails. And the nearer it drew toward him, he perceived it to be a ship boat, coming with a little sail: yet received they it with much rejoicing, for it was the fisher boat of Nicuesa his Caravel, and of capacity to carry only five men, and had now but three in it, which had stolen it from Nicuesa, because he refused to give credit to them that he had passed Beragua, and left it behind him Eastward. For they seeing Nicuesa and his fellows to consume daily by famine, thought that they would prove fortune with that boat, if their chance might be to find Beragua, as in deed it was. Debating therefore with their fellows of these matters, they declared how Nicuesa erred and lost the Caravel by tempest, and that he was now wandering among the marshes of unknown coasts, full of misery and in extreme penury of all things, 
The miserable case of Nicuesa  having now lived for the space of threescore and ten days, only with herbs and roots, & seldom with fruits of the country, contented to drink water, and yet that oftentimes failing, because he was instant to travail Westward by foot, supposing by that means to come to Beragua. Colonus the first finder of this main land, had coasted along by this tract, and named it Gracia Dei, but thinhabitants call it Cerabaro. Through this region, there runneth a river, which our men named Sancti Matthei, distant from the West side of Beragua, 
The river of S. Matthei.  about an hundred and thirty miles. Here I let pass the name of this river, and of many other places by the names which thinhabitants use, because our men are ignorant thereof. Thus Lupus Olanus the conductor of one of the ships of Nicuesa, and now also vice lieutenant in his steed, after that he had received this information of the Mariners, sent thither a Brigandine under their guiding. These Mariners therefore, which came in the fisher boat, found Nicuesa, and brought him to the place where Olanus lay, 
The rigocousnesse of Nicuesa.  whom at his coming he cast in prison, and accused him of treason, because he usurped the authority of the lieutenantship, and that for the desire he had to bear rule and be in authority, he took no care of his errors: also that he behaved himself negligently, demanding furthermore of him, what was the cause of his so long delay. Likewise he spoke to all the under officers sharply, and with a troubled mind, and within few days after, commanded them to truss up their packs, and make them ready to departed. They desired him to quiet himself, and to forbear them a while, until they had reaped the corn that they had sown, which would shortly be ripe: for all kind of corn waxeth ripe there every fourth month after it is sown. 
Corn waxeth ripe every fourth month  But he utterly denied to tarry any whit, but that he would forthwith departed from that unfortunate land, and plucked up by the roots all that ever was brought into the gulf of Beragua, and commanded them to direct their course toward the East. After they had sailed about the space of sixteen miles, a certain young man, whose name was Gregory, a Genues borne, and of a child brought up with Colonus, called to remembrance that there was a haven not far from thence: and to prove his sayings true, he gave his fellows these tokens, that is, that they should find upon the shore, an anchor of a lost ship half covered with sand, and under a tree next unto the haven a spring of clear water. They came to the land, found the anchor and the spring, and commended the wit and memory of the young man, that he only among many of the Mariners which had searched those coasts with Colonus, 
The commendation of a young man brought up with Colonus. Portus belus.  bore the thing so well in mind. This haven Colonus called Portus belus. Where as in this voyage for lack of victuals, they were sometimes enforced to go aland, they were evil entreated of thinhabitants: by reason whereof, their strengths were so weakened with hunger, that they were not able to keep war against naked men, 
Weakness of hunger.  or scarcely to bear their harness on their backs: and therefore our men lost twenty of their companions, which were slain with venomous arrows. They consulted to leave the one half of their fellows in the haven of Portus belus, & the other part Nicuesa took with him toward the East, where about twenty and eight miles from Portus belus, he intended to build a fortress hard by the sea side, upon the point or cape, which in time past Colonus named Marmor, but they were so feeble by reason of long hunger, 
Cape Marmor.  that their strength served them not to sustain such labour, yet he erected a little tower, able to resist the first assault of the inhabitants: this tower he called Nomen Dei. From the time that he left Beragua, what in the journey among the sandy plains, 
Nomen Dei.  than also for hunger while he builded the tower, of the few which remained alive, he lost two hundred. And thus by little and little, the multitude of seven hundred, fourscore, and five men, was brought now to scarcely one hundred. While Nicuesa lived with these few miserable men, there arose a contention among them of Vraba, as concerning the Lievetenantshyppe: for one Vascus Nunnez, by the judgement of all men, trusting more to his strength then wit, stirred up certain light fellows against Ancisus, saying that Ancisus had not the kings letters patents for that office, and that it was not sufficient that he was authorized by Fogeda, and therefore forbade that he should execute the office of the lieutenantship, and willed them to choose certain of their own company, by whose counsel and authority they might be governed. Thus being divided into factions, by reason that Fogeda their captain came not again, whom they supposed to be now dead of his venomous wound, they contended whether it were best to substitute Nicuesa in his place. The wisest sort, such as were familiar with Nicuesa, & could not bear the insolency of Vascus Nunnez, thought it good that Nicuesa should be sought out throughout all those coasts: for they had knowledge that he departed from Beragua, because of the barrenness of the ground, and that by the example of Ancisus, and such other as had made shipwreck, it were possible that he might wander in some secret place, and that they could not be quiet in their minds, until they knew the certainty whether he with his fellows were alive or dead. But Vascus Nunnez, fearing lest at the coming of Nicuesa, he should not be had in authority among his fellows, said they were mad men to think that Nicuesa lived, and although he were alive, yet that they had no need of his help: for he avouched that there was none of his fellows, that were not as meet to rule as Nicuesa. While they were thus reasoning to and fro, 
The navigation of Rodericus Colmenaris.  one Rodericus Colmenaris arrived in those coasts with two great ships, having in them threescore fresh men, with great plenty of victuals and apparel. Of the navigation of this Colmenaris, I intend to speak somewhat more. He therefore departed from the haven of Hispaniola, called Beata (where they prepare and furnish themselves which make any voyage into these lands) about the Ideses of October, in the year .1510. and landed the ix of November in a region in the large province of Paria, found by Colonus between the haven Carthago, and the region of Cuchibachoa. In this voyage, what by the roughness of the sea, and fierceness of the barbarians, he suffered many incommodities: for when his fresh water failed, he sailed to the mouth of a certain river which thinhabitants call Gaira, being apt to receive ships. This river had his course from the top of an exceeding high mountain covered with snow, 
An exceeding high mountain covered with snow.  higher than the which, all the companions of this captain Rodericus say, that they never saw: And that by good reason, if it were covered with snow in that region, which is not past ten degrees distant from the Equinoctial line. As they began to draw water out of their ship boat, a certain king made toward them, appareled with vestures of gossampine cotton, 
appareled men.  having twenty noble men in his company appareled also: which thing seemed strange to our men, and not seen before in those parties. The kings apparel hung lose from his shoulders to his elbows, and from the girdle downward, it was much like a woman's kirtle, reaching even to his heels. As he drew near toward our men, he seemed friendly to admonish them to take none of the water of that river, affirming it to be unwholesome for men, and showed them that not far from thence, there was a river, of good water. They came to the river, and endeavouring to come near the shore, they were driven back by tempest. Also the burbuling of the sand, declared the sea to be but shallow there. They were therefore enforced to return to the first river where they might safely cast anchor. This king laid wait for our men: for as they were filling their barrels, he set on them with about seven hundred men (as our men judged) armed after their manner, although they were naked: for only the king and his noble men were appareled. They took away the shypboate, and broke it in manner to chips: so fiercely assailing our men with their venomous arrows, that they slew of them forty and seven, 
spaniards slain with venomous arrows.  before they could cover themselves with their targets. For that poison is of such force, that albeit the wounds were not great, yet they died thereof immediately, for they yet knew no remedy against this kind of poison, as they after learned of the inhabitants of Hispaniola: for this Island bringeth forth an herb which quencheth and mortifieth the violent poison of the herb, wherewith their arrows are infected, so that it be ministered in tyme. 
A remedy against venomous arrows  Yet of our company which went for water, seven escaped that conflict, and hid themselves in a hollow tree, lurking there until night, yet escaped they not the hands of their enemies: for the ship departed from thence in the night season, and left them there, supposing that they had been slain. Thus by many such perils and dangers (which I lightly overpass, because I will not be tedious to your holiness) he arrived at the length at the haven of Vraba, 
The haven of Vraba.  and cast anchor at the East side thereof, from whence not long before, our men departed to the West side, by reason of the barrenness of that soil. When he had continued a while in the haven, and saw no man stirring, marveled at the silence of the places (for he supposed there to have found his fellows) he could not conjecture what this should mean: and thereupon began to suspect that either they were dead, or that they had changed the place of their habitation. To know the certainty hereof, he commanded all the great ordinance, and other small guns which he had in his ships, to be charged, and fierce to be made in the night upon the tops of the rocks. Thus the fierce being kindled, he commanded all the guns to be shot of at one instant, by the horrible noise whereof, the gulf of Vraba was shaken, although it were xxiiii miles distant, for so broad is the gulf. This noise was heard of their fellows in Dariena, and they answered them again with mutual fierce. Wherefore, by the following of these fierce, Colmenaris brought his ships to the West side. Here those wretched and miserable men of Dariena, which now through famine and feebleness, held their weary souls in their teeth, ready to departed from their bodies, by reason of the calamities which befell unto them after Ancisus shipwreck, lifting up their hands to heaven, with the tears running down their cheeks both for joy and sorrow, embraced Rodericus and his fellows with such kind of rejoicing, as their present necessity seemed to require: for whereas they were before his coming, without victuals, and almost naked, he brought them abundance of meat, drink, and apparel. It resteth now (most holy father) to declare what came of the dissension among them of Vraba, as concerning the governance after the loss of their captains.   

The third book of the second Decade, of the supposed continent.  
ALl the chief officers in Beragua, and such as were most politic in counsel, determined that Nicuesa should be sought out, if by any means he could be found. whereupon they took from Ancisus the governor, refusing the coming of Nicuesa, a Brigandine which he made of his own charges: and agreed, against both the will of Ancisus, and the master of fence Vaschus Nunnez, that Nicuesa should be sought forth to take away the strife as touching the government. They elected therefore Colmenaris (of whom we spoke before) to take this matter in hand, willing him to make diligent search for Nicuesa in those coasts where they supposed he erred: for they heard that he had forsaken Beragua, the region of an unfruitful ground. They gave him therefore commandment to bring Nicuesa with him, and further to declare unto him that he should do right good service to come thither, in taking away the occasion of their seditions. Colmenaris took the thing upon him the more gladly, because Nicuesa was his very friend, supposing his coming with victuals should be no less thankful to Nicuesa and his company, than it was to them of Vraba. Furnishing therefore one of his own ships which he brought with him, and also the Brigandine taken from Ancisus, he freighted the same with part of the victuals and other necessaries which he brought with him before from Hispaniola to Vraba. Thus coursing along by all the coasts and gulfs near thereabout, at the length, at the point called Marmor, he found Nicuesa, of all living men most infortunate, 
Nicuesa is found in a miserable case.  in manner dried up with extreme hunger, filthy and horrible to behold, with only threescore men in his company, left alive of seven hundred. They all seemed to him so miserable, that he no less lamented their case, then if he had found them dead. But Colmenaris comforted his friend Nicuesa, and embracing him with tears and cheerful words, relieved his spirits, and further encouraged him with great hope of better fortune, declaring also that his coming was looked for, and greatly desired of all the good men of Vraba, for that they hoped that by his authority, their discord and contention should be finished. Nicuesa thanked his friend Colmenaris after such sort as his calamity required. Thus they took ship together, and sailed directly to Vraba. But so variable and unconstant is the nature of man, that he soon groweth out of use, becometh insolent and unmindful of benefits after to much felicity: for Nicuesa after thus many tears and weepyngs, 
Insolency oft● much felicity.  after divers bewailings of his infortunate destiny, after so many thanksgiving, yea after that he had fallen down to the ground and kissed the feet of Colmenaris his saviour, he began to quarrel with him before he came yet at Vraba, reproving him & them all for the alteration of the state of things in Vraba, and for the gathering of gold, affirming that none of them ought to have laid hand of any gold without the advice of him or Fogeda his companion. When these sayings and such like, came to the ears of them of Vraba, they so stirred up the minds of Ancisus lieutenant for Fogeda, and also of Vaschus Nunnez of the contrary part, against Nicuesa, that shortly after his arrival with his threescore men, they commanded him with threatening to departed from thence: but this pleased not the better sort. Yet fearing lest tumult should be among the people, whom Vaschus Nunnez had stirred to factions, the best part was fain to give place to the greatest. This wretched man therefore Nicuesa thus drowned in miseries, was thrust into the Brigandine which he himself brought, and with him only seventeen men, of his threescore which remained alive. He took ship in the kalends of March, in the year .1511. intending to go to Hispaniola to complain of the rashness of Vaschus Nunnez and of the violence done to him by Ancisus: But he entered into the Brigandine in an unfortunate hour, for he was never seen after. They suppose that the Brigandine was drowned with all the men therein. And thus unhappy Nicuesa falling headlong out of one misery into another, 
The death of Nicuesa.  ended his life more miserably than he lived. Nicuesa being thus vilely rejected, and their vyttuals consumed which Colmenaris brought them, falling in manner mad for hunger, they were enforced like ravening wolves seeking their prey, to invade such as dwelled about their confines. Vaschus Nunnez therefore, their new captain of their own election, assembling together a hundred and thirty men, and setting them in order of battle after his swoordplayers fashion, puffed up with pride, placed his soldiers as pleased him, in the forward and rearward, and some, as partizens, about his own person. 
Famine enforceth them to fall to spayling. Careta king of Coiba.  Thus assosiating with him Colmenaris, he went to spoil the kings which were borderers thereabout, and came first to a region about that coast called Coiba (whereof we made mention before) imperiously and with cruel countenance commanding the king of the region, whose name was Careta (of whom they were never troubled as often as they passed by his dominions) to give them victuals. But Careta denied that he could give them any at that time, alleging that he had oftentimes aided the Christians as they passed by those coasts, by reason whereof, his store was now consumed: also that by the means of the continual war which he kept ever from his child's age with a king whose name was Poncha, bordering upon his dominion, he and his family were in great scarcenesss of all things. But Vaschus would admit none of these excuses, and thereupon took Careta prisoner, spoiled his village, and brought him bound with his two wives and children, 
King Careta is taken and spoiled.  and all his family to Dariena. With this king Careta, they found three of the fellows of Nicuesa, the which when Nicuesa passed by those coasts to seek Beragua, fearing punishment for their evil deserts, stole away from the ships lying at anchor: And when the navy departed, committed themselves to the mercy of Careta▪ who entertained them very friendly. They had now been there eighteen months, and were therefore as utterly naked as the people of the country. During this time, the meat of thinhabitants seemed unto them delicate dishes & princely fare, especially because they enjoyed the same without any strife for mine and thine, 
Mine & thine the seeds of all mischief.  which two things move and enforce men to such hard shifts and miseries, that in living they seem not to live. Yet desired they to return to their old cares, of such force is education and natural affection toward them with whom we have been brought up. The vyttuals which Vaschus brought from the village of Careta, to his fellows left in Dariena, was rather somewhat to assuage their present hunger, then utterly to take away their necessity. But as touching Ancisus, 
Ancisus, Lieutenant for Fogeda, is cast in prison.  being lieutenant for Fogeda, whether it were before these things, or after, I know not: but this I am sure of, that after the rejecting of Nicuesa, many occasions were sought against Ancisus by Vaschus and his factionaries. Howsoever it was, Ancisus was taken, and cast in prison, and his goods confiscate: the cause hereof was (as Vaschus alleged) that Ancisus had his commission of the lieutenantship of Fogeda only, whom they said to be now dead, and not of the king, saying that he would not obey any man that was not put in office by the king himself by his letters patents Yet at the request of the gravest sort, he was somewhat pacified, and dealt more gently with him, having some compassion on his calamities, and thereupon commanded him to be loosed. Ancisus being at liberty, 
Ancisus taketh his voyage to Hispaniola.  took ship to departed from thence to Hispaniola: but before he had hoist up his sail, all the wisest sort resorted to him, humbly desiring him to return again, promising that they would do their diligence, that Vaschus being reconciled, he might be restored to his full authority of the lieutenantship: but Ancisus refused to consent to their request, and so departed. Yet some there were that murmured that God and his angels showed this revenge upon Ancisus, because Nicuesa was rejected through his counsel. 
The revenge of God.  How so ever it be, the searchers of the new lands fall headlong into ruin by their own folly, 
The inconveniences of discord.  consuming themselves with civil discord, not weighing so great a matter, nor employing their best endeavour about the same, as the worthiness of the thing requireth. In this mean time, they determined all with one agreement, to send messengers into Hispaniola to the young Admiral and viceroy, son and heir to Christophorus Colonus the finder of these lands, and to the other governors of the Island (from whom the new lands receive their aid and laws) to signify unto them what state they stood in, and in what necessity they lived, also what they had found, and in what hope they were of greater things, if they were furnished with plenty of victuals and other necessaries. For this purpose they elected, at the assignment of Vaschus, one Valdivia, being one of his faction, and instructed by him against Ancisus, and to be assystant with him, they appointed one Zamudius a Cantabrian, so that commandment was given to Valdivia to return from Hispaniola with victuals, & Zamudius was appointed to take his voyage into Spain to the king. They took ship both together with Ancisus, having in mind to certify the king how things were handled there, much otherwise then Zamudius information. I me self spoke with both Ancisus & Zamudius at their coming to the court. While they were occupied about these matters, those wretched men of Dariena loosed Careta the king of Coiba, upon condition that he should aid them in their wars against his enemy and theirs, 
King Poncha.  king Poncha, bordering upon his dominions. Careta made a league with them, promising that as they passed by his kingdom, he would give them all things necessary, & meet them with an army of men, to go forward with them to the battle against Poncha. Their weapons are neither bows nor venomed arrows, as we said thinhabitants to have, which dwell eastward beyond the gulf. They fight therefore at hand with long sword (which they call Macanas) made of wood, 
sword of wood.  because they have no Iron. They use also long staves like javelins, hardened at the ends with fire, or typt with bone, also certain slings and darts. Thus aftet the league made with Careta, both he and our men had certain days appointed them to till their ground and sow their seeds. 
King Careta conspireth with the Spaniards against king Poncha.  This done, by the aid of Careta, and by his conduction, they marched toward the palace of Poncha, who fled at their coming. They spoiled his village, and mitigated their hunger with such vyttuals as they found there: yet could they not help their fellows therewith, by reason of the far distance of the place, although they had great plenty: for the village of Poncha was more than a hundred miles distant from Dariena, whereas was also none other remedy, but that the same should have been carried on men's backs to the sea side, being far of, where they left their ships in the which they came to the village of Careta. Here they found certain pounds weight of gold, graven & wrought into sundry ouches. After the sacking of this village, they resorted toward the ships, intending to leave the kings of the inland untouched at this time, and to invade only them which dwelled by the sea coasts. Not far from Coiba, in the same tract, there is a region named Comogra, 
The region of Comogra, distant from Dariena xxx leagues.  and the king thereof called Comogrus, after the same name. To this king they came first next after the subversion of Poncha, and found his palace situate in a fruitful plain of xii leagues in breadth, at the roots of the further side of the next mountains. Comogrus had in his court a certain noble man of near consanguitie to king Careta, which had fled to Comogrus by reason of certain dissensions which was between Careta & him, these noble men, they call jura. This jura therefore of Coiba, met our men by the way, and conciled Comogrus to them, because he was well known to our men, 
King Comogrus.  from the time that Nicuesa passed first by those coasts. Our men therefore went quietly to the palace of Comogrus, being distant from Dariena thirty leagues by a plain way about the mountains. This king Comogrus had seven sons, young men, of comely form and stature, which he had by sundry wives. His palace was framed of posts or props made of trees fastened together after a strange sort, 
The kings palace.  and of so strong building, that it is of no less strength than walls of stone. They which measured the length of the floor thereof, found it to be a hundred and fifty paces, and in breadth, fourscore foot, being roofed and paved with marvelous art. They found his storehouse furnished with abundance of delicate victuals, after the manner of their country, and his wine seller replenished with great vessels of earth and also of wood, filled with their kind of wine and cider, for they have no grapes: but like as they make their bread of those three kinds of roots called jucca, 
Wine & cider.  Agis, and Maizium (whereof we spoke in the first Decade) so make they their wine of the fruits of Date trees, and Cider of other fruits and seeds, as do the Almains, flemings, english men, & our spaniards which inhabit the mountains, as the Vascons and Asturians: likewise in the mountains of the Alpes, the Noricians, swevians, and Heluecians, make certain drinks of barley, wheat, hops, and apples. They say also that with Comogrus they drunk wines of sundry tastes, both white and black. 
Black wine.  But now you shall hear of a thing more monstrous to behold. Entering therefore into the inner parts of the palace, they were brought into a chamber hanged about with the carcases of men, tied with ropes of gossampine cotton. Being demanded what they meant by that superstition, they answered that those were the carcases of the father, grandfather, & great grandfather, with other the ancestors of their king Comogrus, declaring that they had the same in great reverence, and that they took it for a godly thing to honour them religiously, and therefore appareled every of the same sumptuously with gold and precious stones, according unto their estate. After this sort did the antiquity honour their Penates, which they thought had the governance of their lives. 
The carcases of men dried.  How they dry these carcases upon certain instruments made of wood, like unto hurdells, with a soft fire under the same, so that only the skin remaineth to hold the bones together, we have described in the former Decade. Of Comogrus his seven sons, the eldest had an excellent natural wit. He therefore thought it good to flatter and please this wandering kind of men (our men I mean) living only by shifts and spoil, lest being offended, and seeking occasions against him & his family, they should handle him as they did other which sought no means how to gratify them: Wherefore, he gave Vaschus and Colmenaris four thousand ounces of gold artificially wrought, and also fifty slaves, which he had taken in the wars: for such, either they sell for exchange of other things, or otherwise use them as them listeth, for they have not the use of money. This gold with as much more which they had in another place, our men weighed in the porch of Comogrus his palace, to separate the fift part thereof, 
The distribution of gold.  which portion is due to the kings Exchequer: for it is decreed, that the fift part of both gold, pearls, and precious stones, should be assigned to the kings treasurers, and the residue to be divided among themselves by composition. Here as brabbling and contention arose among our men about the dividing of gold, this eldest son of king Comogrus being present, whom we praised for his wisdom, coming somewhat with an angry countenance toward him which held the balances, he struck them with his fist, and scattered all the gold that was therein about the porch, 
Young Comogrus his oration.  sharply rebuking them with words in this essecte. What is the matter, you Christian men, that you so greatly esteem so little portion of gold more than your own quietness, which nevertheless you intend to deface from these fair ouches, and to melt the same into a rude mass. If your hunger of gold be so insatiable, that only for the desire you have thereto, 
The hunger of gold.  you disquiet so many nations, and you yourselves also sustain so many calamities and incommodities, living like banished men out of your own country, I will show you a region flowing with gold, 
A region flowing with gold.  where you may satisfy your ravening appetites: But you must attempt the thing with a greater power, for it standeth you in hand by force of arms to overcome kings of great puissance, and rigorous defenders of their dominions. For beside other, 
King Tumanama.  the great king Tumanama will come forth against you, whose kingdom is most rich with gold, and distant from hence only two suns, that is, six days: for they number the days by the sun. Furthermore, or ever you can come thither, you must pass over the mountains inhabited of the cruel Canibales, a fierce kind of men, 
Canibales.  devourers of man's flesh, living without laws, wandering, and without Empire: for they also being desirous of gold, have subdued them under their dominion, which before inhabited the gold mines of the mountains, 
The gold mines of the mountains.  and use them like bondmen, using their labour in digging and working their gold in plates and sundry images, like unto these which you see here: for we do no more esteem rude gold unwrought, than we do clods of earth, 
unwrought gold not esteemed.  before it be formed by the hand of the workman to the similitude either of some vessel necessary for our use, or some ouche beautiful to be worn. These things do we receive of them for exchange of other of our things, as of prisoners taken in war, which they buy to eat, or for sheets and other things pertaining to the furniture of household, such as they lack which inhabit the mountains, and especially for victuals, whereof they stand in great need, by reason of the barrenness of the mountains. This journey therefore must be made open by force of men, and when you are passing over these mountains (pointing with his finger toward the south mountains) you shall see another sea, where they sail with ships as big as yours (meaning the Caravels) using both sails and oars as you do, although the men be naked as we are: all the way that the water runneth from the mountains, and all that side lying toward the South, 
Abundance of gold.  bringeth forth gold abundantly. As he said these words, he pointed to the vessels in which they use to serve their meat, affirming that king Tumanama, and all the other kings beyond the mountains, 
Household stuff of gold.  had such & all other their household stuff of gold, and that there was no less plenty of gold among those people of the South, then of Iron with us: for he knew by relation of our men, whereof our swords and other weapons were made. Our captains marvelling at the oration of the naked young man (for they had for interpreters those three men which had been before a year and a half conversant in the court of king Careta) pondered in their minds, and earnestly considered his sayings, so that his rashness in scattering the gold out of the balances, they turned to mirth and urbanity, commending his doing and saying therein. Then they asked him friendly, upon what certain knowledge he spoke those things, or what he thought best herein to be done, if they should bring a greater supply of men? To this young Comogrus, staying a while with himself, as it were an Orator preparing himself to speak of some grave matter, and disposing his body to a gesture meet to persuade, spoke thus in his mother tongue, give ear unto me, O you Christians. Albeit that the greedy hunger of gold hath not yet vexed us naked men, yet do we destroy one another by reason of ambition and desire to rule. 
Naked people tormented with ambition.  Hereof springeth mortal hatred among us, and hereof cometh our destruction. Our predecessors kept wars, and so did Comogrus my father, with princes being borderers about him. In the which wars, as we have overcome, so have we been overcome, as doth appear by the number of bondmen among us, which we took by the overthrow of our enemies, of the which I have given you fifty. Likewise at another time, our adversaries having the upper hand against us, led away many of us captive, for such is the chance of war. Also, among our familiars (whereof a great number have been captives with them) behold here is one which of long time led a painful life in bondage under the yoke of that king beyond the mountains, in whose kingdom is such abundance of gold. Of him, and such other innumerable, and likewise by the resort of free men on their side coming to us, and again of our men resorting to them by safe conduct, these things have been ever as well known unto us, as our own possessions: but that you may be the better assured hereof, 
A vehement persuasion.  and be out of all suspection that you shall not be deceived, make me the guide of this voyage, binding me fast, and keeping me in safe custody to be hanged on the next tree, if you find my sayings in any point untrue. Follow my counsel therefore, and send for a thousand Christian men apt for the wars, by whose power we may, with also the men of war of Comogrus my father, armed after our manner, invade the dominions of our enemies: where both you may be satisfied with gold, and we for our conducting and aydyng you in this enterprise, shall think ourselves abundantly rewarded, in that you shall help to deliver us from the injuries and perpetual fear of our enemies. After these words, this prudent young Comogrus held his peace, and our men moved with great hope and hunger of gold, 
A token of hunger.  began again to swallow down their spittle.   

The fourth book of the second Decade, of the supposed continent.  
AFter that they had tarried here a few days, and baptized Comogrus, with all his family, and named him by the name of Charles, after the king of Spain, 
King Comogrus is baptized with his family.  they returned to their fellows in Dariena, leaving with him the hope of the thousand soldiers, which his son required to pass over those mountains toward the South sea. Thus entering into the village which they had chosen to inhabit, they had knowledge that Valdivia was returned within six months after his departure, but with no great plenty of victuals, because he brought but a small ship: yet with hope that shortly after, there should be sent them abundance of victuals, and a new supply of men. For young Colonus the Admiral, and viceroy of Hispaniola, and the other governors of the Island, acknowledged that hitherto they had no respect to them of Dariena, because they supposed that Ancisus the lieutenant had safely arrived there with his ship laden with victuals: willing them from henceforth to be of good cheer, and that they should lack nothing hereafter, but that at this present time they had no bigger ship whereby they might send them greater plenty of necessaries by Valdivia. The vyttuals therefore which he brought, served rather somewhat to mitigate their present necessity, then to satisfy their lack. Wherefore, within a few days after Valdivia his return, they fell again into like scarcenesss: especially forasmuch as a great storm and tempest which came from the high mountains, with horrible thunder and lightning in the month of November, 
Horrible thunder and lightning in the month of November.  brought with it such a flood, that it partly carried away, and partly drowned all the corn and seeds which they had sown in the month of September, in a fruitful ground before they went to king Comogrus. The seeds which they of Hispaniola call Maizium, and they of Vraba call Hobba, whereof they make their bread, which also we said to be ripe thrice every year, because those regions are not bitten with the sharpness of winter by reason of their nearness to the Equinoctial line. It is also agreeable to the principles of natural philosophy, that this bread made of Maizius or Hobba, should be more wholesome for the inhabitants of those countries than bread made of wheat, by reason that it is of easier digestion: for whereas cold is wanting, the natural heat is not driven from the outward parts into the inward parts and precordials, whereby digestion is much strengthened. Being therefore thus frustrate of the increase of their seeds, and the kings near about them, spoiled of both victuals and gold, they were enforced to seek their meat further of, and therewith to signify to the governors of Hispaniola with what great necessity they were oppressed, and what they had learned of Comogrus as concerning the Regions toward the South, willing them in consideration thereof, to advertise the king to send them a thousand soldiers, by whose help they might by force make way through the mountains, dividing the sea on both sides, if they could not bring the same to pass quietly. The same Valdivia was also sent on this message, carrying with him to the kings treasurers (having their office of receipt in Hispaniola) three hundred pounds weight of gold, after eight ounces to the pound, for the fift portion due to the kings excheker. This pound of eight ounces, the Spaniards call Marcha, which in weight amounteth to fifty pieces of gold called Castellani, but the Castilians call a pound Pesum. We conclude therefore, that the sum hereof, was xu thousand of those pieces of gold called Castellani. And thus is it apparent by this account, that they received of the barbarous kings, a thousand and five hundred pounds, of eight ounces to the pound: all the which they found ready wrought in sundry kinds of ouches, as chains, bracelets, tablets, and plates, both to hang before their breasts, and also at their ears, and nosethryls. Valdivia therefore took shipping in the same caravel in the which he came last, and returned also before the third day of the Ideses of january, in the year of Christ M.D.XI What chanced to him in this voyage, we will declare in place convenient. But let us now return to them which remained in Vraba. After the dismissing of Valdivia, being pricked forward with outrageous hunger, they determined to search the inner parts of that gulf in sundry places. The extreme angle or point of the same gulf is distant from the entrance thereof, about fourscore miles. This angle or corner, the Spaniards call Culata. Vaschus himself came to this point with a hundred men, coasting along by the gulf with one brygandine and certain of the boats of those regions, which the Urabians call Vru, like unto them which thinhabitants of Hispaniola call Canoas'. From this point, there falleth aryver from the East into the gulf, ten times bigger than the river of Dariena, which also so falleth into the same. Sailing along by the river about the space of thirty miles (for they call it niene leagues) and somewhat inclining toward the right hand southward, they found certain villages of thinhabitants, the king whereof was called Dabaiba. Our men also were certified before, that Cemacchus the king of Dariena, whom they put to flight in the battle, fled to this Dabaiba, but at the coming of our men, Dabaiba also fled. It is thought that he was admonished by Cemacchus, that he should not abide the brunt of our men. He followed his counsel, forsook his villages, and left all things desolate: yet our men found heaps of bows and arrows, also much household stuff, and many fishing boats. But those marish grounds were neither apt for sowing of seeds, or planting of trees, 
Maryshe ground.  by reason whereof, they found there few such things as they desired, that is, plenty of victuals: for the inhabitants of this region have no bread, but such as they get in other countries near about them by exchange for their fish, only to serve their own necessity: yet found they in the houses of those which fled, gold wrought and graven, amounting to the sum of seven thousand of those pieces, which we said to be called Castellani: also certain Canoas', of the which they brought away two with them, and great plenty of their household stuff, with certain bundles of bows & arrows. They say, that from the marishes of that river, there come certain bats in the night season, as big as turtle doves, invading men, and biting them with a deadly wound, as some of them testify which have been bitten of the same. I me self communing with Ancisus the Lieutenant whom they rejected, and among other things asking him of the venomous biting of these bats, 
Ancisus bitten of a Bat.  he told me that he himself was bitten by one of them on the heel, his foot lying uncovered in the night, by reason of the heat in summer season, but that it hurt him no more, then if he had been bitten by any other beast not venomous. Other say, that the biting of some of them is venomous: yet that the same is healed incontinently, if it be washed with water of the sea. Ancisus told me also, that the venomous wounds made by the Canibales arrows infected with poison, are healed by washing with water of the sea, and also by cauterizing with hot irons, and that he had experience thereof in the region of Caribana, where many of his men were so wounded. They departed therefore from the point of the gulf of Vraba, not well contented, because they were not saden with victuals. In this their return, there arose so great a tempest in that wide gulf, that they were enforced to cast into the sea all the household stuff, 
A tempest.  which they took from the poor wretches which lived only by fishing. The sea also swallowed up the two boats that they took from them, wherewith the men were likewise drowned. The same time that Vaschus Nunnez attempted to search the point of the gulf toward the south, even then by agreement, did Rodericus Colmenaris take his voyage toward the mountains by the east, with threescore men, by the river of the other gulf. About forty miles distant from the mouth of the other river, (for they call it twelve leagues) he found certain villages situate upon the banks of the river, whose Chivi (that is) king, they call Turui. With this king did Colmenaris yet remain, when Vaschus after his return to Dariena, sailing by the same river, came to him. Here refreshing their whole company with the victuals of this Turui, they departed from thence together. 
King Turui.  Other forty miles from hence, the river encompasseth an Island inhabited with fishermen. In this, because they saw great plenty of trees which bear Cassia fistula, they named the Island Cannafistula. They found in it lx villages of ten cottages apiece. 
The Island of Cannafistula.  On the right side of the Island there runneth another river, whose channel is of depth sufficient to bear Brigandines. This river they called Riwm Nigrum, from the mouth whereof, about xv miles distant, they found a town of five. C. houses severed, whose Chebi (that is) king, was called Abenamachei. They all forsook their houses, as soon as they heard of our men's coming: but when they saw that our men pursued them, they turned again, & ran upon them with desperate minds, as men driven from their own possessions. Their weapons are swords of wood, & long staves like javelins, hardened at the end with fire: but they use neither bows nor arrows, nor any other of the inhabitants of the West side of the gulf. The poor naked wretches were easily driven to flight with our weapons. As our men followed them in the chase, they took the king Abenamachei, and certain of his noble men. A common soldier of ours, whom the king had wounded, coming to him when he was taken, cut of his arm at one stroke with his sword: but this was done unawares to the captains. The number of the Christian men which were here, was about an hundred and fifty: the one half whereof the captains left here, and they with the residue rowed up the river again, with twelve of the boats of those regions, which they call Vru, as they of Hispaniola call them Canoas' as we have said. From the river of Riuus Niger, and the Island of Cannafistula, for the space of threescore and ten miles, leaving both on the right hand and on the left, many rivers falling into it bigger than itself, they entered into one, by the conducting of one of the naked inhabitants, being appointed a guide for that purpose. Upon the bank of this river next unto the mouth of the same, there was a king called Abibeiba, who because the region was full of marshes, had his palace builded in the top of a high tree, 
King Abibeiba dwelleth in a tree.  a new kind of building, and seldom seen: but that land bringeth forth trees of such exceeding height, that among their branches a man may frame large houses: as we read the like in divers auctors, how in many regions where the Ocean sea riseth and overfloweth the land, the people were accustomed to flee to the high trees, 
The rising of the Ocean sea.  and after the fall of the water, to take the fish left on the land. This manner of building, is to lay beams cross over the branches of the trees, fast bound together, and thereupon to raise their frame, strongly made against wind and weather. Our men suppose that they build their houses in trees, by reason of the great floods and overflowing of rivers, which oftentimes chance in those regions. These trees are of such height, that the strength of no man's arm, 
Trees of marvelous height.  is able to hurl a stone to the houses builded therein. And therefore do I give the better credit to Pliny, 
Pliny.  and other auctors, which writ that the trees in some places in India are so high by reason of the fruitfulness of the ground, abundance of water, and heat of the region, that no man is able to shoot over them with an arrow: and by judgement of all men, 
Fruitful ground.  it is thought that there is no fruitefuller ground under the sun, than this is whereof we now entreat. Our men measuring many of these trees, found them to be of such bigness, that seven men, yea sometimes eight, holding hand in hand with their arms stretched forth, were scarcely able to fathom them about: yet have they their cellars in the ground, well replenished with such wines whereof we have spoken before. For albeit that the vehemency of the wind is not of power to cast down those houses, or to break the branches of the trees, yet are they tossed therewith, and sway somewhat from side to side, by reason whereof, the wine should be much troubled with moving. All other necessary things, they have with them in the trees. When the king or any other of the noble men, dine or sup in these trees, their wives are brought them from the cellars by their servants, which by means of exercise, are accustomed with no less celerytie to run up and down the stairs adherente to the tree, then do our waiting boys upon the plain ground fetch us what we call for from the cobbarde beside our dining table. Our men therefore came to the tree of king Abibeiba, and by thinterpreters called him forth to communication, giving him signs of peace, and thereupon willing him to come down. But he denied that he would come out of his house, desiring them to suffer him to live after his fashion: but our men fell from fair words to threatening, that except he would descend with all his family, they would either overthrow the tree, or else set it on fire. When he had denied them again, 
Abibeiba, the king of the tree, yieldeth to Vaschus.  they fell to hewing the tree with their axes. Abibeiba seeing the chips fall from the tree on every side, changed his purpose, and came down with only two of his sons. Thus after they had entreated of peace, they communed of gathering of gold. Abibeiba answered that he had no gold, and that he never had any need thereof, nor yet regarded it any more than stones. 
Gold no more esteemed then stones.  But when they were instant upon him, he said unto them, If you so greatly desire gold, I will seek for some in the next mountains, and bring it unto you: for it is plentifully engendered in those mountains. Then he appointed a day when he would bring this gold. But Abebeiba came neither at the day, nor after the day appointed. They departed therefore from thence well refreshed with his victuals and wine, but not with gold as they hoped: yet were they informed the like by Abibeiba and his dictionaries as concerning the gold mines and the Canibales, as they heard before of king Comogrus. Sailing yet further about thirty miles, they chanced upon certain cottages of the Canibales, 
Canibales.  but utterly void without men or stuff: for when they had knowledge that our men wandered in the provinces near about them, they resorted to the mountains, carrying all their goods and stuff with them.   

The fift book of the second Decade, of the supposed continent.  
IN the mean time while these things were done along by the shores or banks of the river, a certain Decurian, that is, a captain over ten, of the company of those which Vaschus and Colmenaris had left for a garrison in Rivo Nigro, in the dominion of king Abinamachei, whether it were that he was compelled through hunger, or that his fatal day was now come, he attempted with his soldiers to search the countries near thereabout, and entered into the village of a king called Abraiba. This captains name was Raia, whom Abraiba slew with two of his fellows, but the residue fled. Within a few days after, Abraiba having compassion on the calamity of his kinsman and neighbour Abenamacheius, being driven from his own possessions (whose arm also we said before that one of the soldiers cut of at the river of Rivo Nigro) and now remaining with Abraiba, to whom he fled by stealth after he was taken, went to Abibeiba th'inhabitor of the tree, who had now likewise forsaken his country for fear of our men, and wandered in the desolate mountains and woods. When he had therefore found him, he spoke to him in this effect, What thing is this, oh unfortunate Abibeiba? or what nation is this that so tormenteth us, that we can not enjoy our quiet liberty? how long, how long I say, shall we suffer their cruelty? were it not much better for us to die, then to abide such injuries and oppressions as you, as Abinamacheius our kinsman, as Cemacchus, as Careta, as Poncha, as I and other princes of our order do sustain? Can any thing be more intolerable, then to see our wives, our children, and our subjects, to be led away captives, and our goods to be spoiled even before our faces? I take the gods to witness, that I speak not so much for mine own part, as I do for you, whose case I lament: for albeit they have not yet touched me, nevertheless by th'example of other, I ought to think that my destruction is not far of. 
Men good enough if they had iron.  Let us therefore (if we be men) try our strength, & prove our fortune against them which have dealt thus cruelly with Abenamacheius, and driven him out of his country, let us set on them with all our power, and utterly destroy them. And if we can not slay them all, yet shall we make them afraid either to assail us again, or at the least diminish their power: for whatsoever shall befall, nothing can chance worse unto us then that which we now suffer. When Abibeiba heard these words, & such otherlike, he condescended to do in all things as Abraiba would require: whereupon they appointed a day to bring their conspiracy to pass, but the thing chanced not according to their desire: for of those which we said to have passed to the Cannibals, there returned by chance to Riuus Niger, the night before the day appointed to work their feat, thirty men, to the aid of them which were left there, if any sedition should rise as they suspected. Therefore at the dawning of the day, the confederate kings, with five hundredth of their dictionaries armed after their manner, besieged the village with a terrible alarum, knowing nothing of the new men which came thither the same night. Here our target men came forth against them, and first assailed them a far of with their arrows, then with their pikes, and last with their swords: but the naked silly souls, perceiving a greater number of their adversaries than they looked for, were soon driven to flight, and slain for the most part like scattering sheep. The kings escaped, they slew many, and took many captives, 
Captives.  which they sent to Dariena, where they used them for labourers to till and sow their ground. These things thus happily achieved, and that province quieted, they returned by the river to Dariena, leaving their thirty men for a garrison, 
A garrison of thirty men.  under the governance of one Furatado a captain. This Furatado therefore, sent from Rivo Nigro, where he was appointed governor twenty of his fellows, and one woman, with xxiiii captives, to Vaschus and his company, in one of the bigest Canoas' of that province. As they rowed down by the river, there came forth suddenly overthwart the river against them four great Canoas', 
eighteen spaniards slain and drowned.  which overthrew their boat, and slew as many of them as they could come by, because they were unprepared, suspecting no such thing. Our men were all drowned and slain, except two, which hide themselves among certain faggots that swam on the water, in the which they lay lurking, and so escaped to their fellows in Dariena: who by them being advertised hereof, began to cast their wits what this thing might mean, being no less solicitate for themselves, then meditating in what danger their fellows had been in Rivo Nigro, except by good fortune, those thirty new men which were sent to them, had come to the village the night before the conspiracy should have been wrought. Consulting therefore what was best to be done herein, at the length with diligent searching, they had intelligence that five kings, that is to wit, 
The kings which conspired the death of the Christians.  Abibeiba the inhabitor of the tree, and Cemaccus driven from his village which our men now possessed, Abraiba also and Abenamacheius, kinsmen, with Dabaiba the king of the fisher men, inhabiting the corner of the gulf which we called Culata, were all assembled to conspire the Christian men's destruction at a day assigned: which thing had surely come to pass, if it had not been otherwise hindered by God's providence. 
A strange chance.  It is therefore ascribed to a miracle, and truly not unworthily, if we way how chance detected and bewrayed the counsel of these kings. And because it is worthy to be heard, I will declare it in few words. Vascus Nunnez therefore, who rather by power then by election, usurped the governance in Dariena, being a master of fence, and rather a rash roister than a politic captain (although fortune sometime favoureth fools) among many women which in divers of these regions he had taken captive, had one, which in favour and beauty excelled all other. To this woman her brother often times resorted, who was also driven out of his country with king Cemacchus, 
Women can keep no counsel.  with whom he was very familiar, and one of his chief gentlemen. Among other communication which he had with his sister whom he loved entirely, he uttered these words, My dear and well-beloved sister, give ear to my sayings, and keep most secretly that which I will declare unto you, if you desire your own wealth and mine, and the prosperity of our country and kinsfolks. The insolency and cruelty of these men which have driven us out of our possessions, is so intolerable, that the princes of the land are determined no longer to sustain their oppressions. By the conducting therefore of five kings (which he named in order) they have prepared a hundred great Canoas', 
An army of an hundred Canoas', and five. M. men.  with five thousand men of war by land and by sea, with victuals also in the village of Tichiri, sufficient to maintain such an army: declaring further, that the kings by agreement, had divided among them the goods and heads of our men, and therefore admonished her, 
Triumph before victory.  at the day appointed by some occasion to convey herself out of the way, lest she should be slain in the confusion of the battle: For the soldier victorer, is not wont to spare any that cometh in his race. And thus showing his sister the day assigned to the slaughter, he departed. But the young woman (for it is the sword that women fear, 
Affection corrupteth true judgement.  and observe more than the gravity of Cato) whether it were for the love or fear that she had to Vaschus, forgetting her parents, her kinsfolks, her country, and all her friends, yea and all the kings into whose throats Vaschus had thrust his sword, she opened all the matter unto him, and concealed none of those things which her undiscrete brother had declared to her. When Vaschus therefore had heard the matter, he caused Fulvia, (for so had they named her) to send for her brother, who came to her immediately, was taken, & enforced to tell the whole circumstances of the matter: whereupon he plainly confessed, that king Cemacchus his lord and master, 
The conspiracy of the kings is detected.  sent those four Canoas' to the destruction of our men, and that these new conspiracies were attempted by his counsel: likewise that Cemacchus sought the destruction of Vaschus himself, when he sent him xl men, under pretence of friendship, to till and sow his ground, after the manner of the country, giving them in commandment to slay Vaschus at Marris, whither he resorted to comfort his labourers, 
King Cemaechus conspireth the death of Vaschus.  as the manner is of all good husbands, yet durst they at no time execute their lords commandment upon him, because Vaschus came never among them a foot or unarmed, but was accustomed to ride to them in harness with a javelin in his hand, and a sword by his side. Wherefore Cemacchus being frustrate of his particular counsel, took this last thing in hand, to his own destruction and his neighbours: 
Vaschus pursueth the kings with threescore and ten men.  for the conspiracy being detected, Vascus called threescore and ten soldiers, commanding them to follow him, but declared nothing unto them whither he went, or what he intended to do. He went forward therefore first toward Cemacchus, which lay from him only ten miles: but he had knowledge that he was fled to Dabaiba, the king of the marshes of Culata. Yet searching his village, he found a noble man, a ruler under him, and also his kinsman, whom he took prisoner, with many other of his familiars and friends both men and women. The same hour that he set forward to seek for Cemacchus, Rodericus Colmenaris rowed up the river with four of their byggest Canoas', and threescore men, by the conduction of the maids brother who brought him to the village of Tichiri, 
Colmenaris sacketh the village of Tichiri.  in the which we said all their victuals to remain which were prepared for their army. Colmenaris therefore sacked the village, and possessed all their victuals, and wine of sundry colours, likewise took the governor thereof prisoner, and hanged him on the tree in which he dwelled himself, commanding him to be shot through with arrows in the sight of thinhabitants, 
five rulers hanged & shot through with arrows.  and with him four other rulers to be hanged on gibbets, to the example of other rebels. This punishment thus executed upon the conspirators, struck the hearts of all thinhabitants of the province with such fear, that there is not now a man that dare stir his finger against the wrath of our men. They live now therefore quietly, and the other kings by their example do the gladlier live in subjection, with less offence bearing the yoke which they can by no means shake of.   

The sixth book of the second Decade, of the supposed continent.  
THese things thus finished, assembling all their company together, they determined with one consent, that a messenger should forthwith be sent to Hispaniola (from whence they have their laws and aid) to declare the whole order of all these affairs, first to the Admiral and governor of the Island, and afterward to the King of Spain, and to persuade him to send those thousand men which young Comogrus said to be expedient to pass over the mountains, lying between them and the golden regions toward the South▪ Vaschus himself did greatly affect this embassage: but neither would the residue of his fellows elect him thereto, nor his factionaries suffer him to depart, aswell for that thereby they thought they should be left desolate, as also that they murmured, that if Vaschus should once go from them, he would never return to such turmoils and calamities, by the example of Valdivia and Zamudius, who had been now absent sense the month of january, in so much that they thought they would never come again: but the matter was otherwise then they took it, as I will show in his place, for they were perished. At the length after many scrutinies, they elected one john Quicedus, a grave man, well in years, 
johan. Quicedus is sent to Spain.  and treasurer of the kings Exchequer in those provinces: they had conceived a good opinion of this Quicedus, that all things should be well brought to pass by his means, aswell for his wisdom, as also that they were in good hope of his return, because he had brought his wife with him to those regions, whom he left with his fellows for a pledge of his coming again. When they had thus elected Quicedus, they were again of divers opinions whom they might join with him for assistance, affirming that it were a dangerous thing to commit so weighty a matter to one man's hands, not that they mistrusted Quicedus, but because the life of man is frail, & the change of the air perilous, especially to them, having now of long time been accustomed to the temperature near unto the Equinoctial, if they should be compelled to return to the North, with alteration of air & diet. They thought it therefore good to appoint a companion to Quicedus, that if by chance the one should fail, tother might remain, & that if they both escaped, the king should give the better credit to the relation of both. After long consultation therefore, they chose Rodericus Colmenaris, a man of good experience, of whom we have oftentimes made mention: for from his youth he had travailed over all Europe by land and by sea, and was present at the doings of all things in Italy against the French men, of whose return also, they had no small hope, because he had many farms, and had tilled and sown much ground in Dariena, by the increase whereof, he might get much gold by selling the same to his fellows. He left therefore the charge of all his affairs in Dariena with his partner Alphonsus Nunnez, a judge of the law, who also was like to have been chosen procurator of this voyage before Colmenaris, if one had not put them in remembrance that he had a wife at Matritis, 
A wife is a hindrance.  fearing lest being overcome with her tears, he would no more return. Colmenaris therefore, a free man, & at liberty, being associate assystant with Quicedus, they took shipping together in a Brigandine, the fourth day of the kalends of November, in the year of Christ .1512. In this voyage, being tossed with sundry tempests, they were by the violence of the wind cast upon the West coasts of that large Island, which in the first Decade we called Cuba, supposed to have been firm land. They were sore oppressed with hunger, for it was now three months since they departed from their fellows: by reason whereof, they were enforced to take land, to prove what aid they could get among the inhabitants. Their chance therefore was to arrive in that part of the Island, where Valdivia was driven aland by tempest. But oh you wretched men of Dariena, tarry for Valdivia, whom you sent to provide to help your necessities, provide for yourselves rather, and trust not to them whose fortune ye know not. 
The death of aldivia.  For when he arrived in Cuba, the inhabitants slew him with all his fellows, and left the Caravel wherein they were carried, torn in pieces, and half 〈◊〉 with sand on the shore, where Quicedus and Colmena●●● 〈◊〉 the fragments thereof, bewailed their fellows my●fortune: but they found none of their carcases, supposing that they were either drowned, or devoured of the Canibales, which oftentimes make incursions into that Island to hunt for men. But at the length, by two of the Island men which they had taken, they had knowledge of Valdivia his destruction, and that the inhabitants the more greedily attempted the same, for that they had heard by the babbling of one of his fellows, that he had great plenty of gold: 
Hurt of lavyshnesse of the tongue.  for they also take pleasure in the beauty of gold, which they form artificially into sundry ouches. Thus our men stricken with pensiveness for the cruel destiny of their fellows, and in vain seeking revenge for their injuries, determined to forsake that unfortunate land, departing from those covetous naked barbarians, with more sorrow and necessity than they were in before. Or ever they had passed the South side of Cuba, they fell into a thousand misfortunes, and had intelligence that Fogeda arrived thereabout, leading a miserable life, 
The calamities and death of Fogeda.  tossed and turmoiled with tempests, and vexed with a thousand perplexities: so that departing from thence almost alone, his fellows being for the most part all consumed with maladies and famine, he came with much difficulty to Hispaniola, 
Maladies and famine.  where he died by force of the poison of his venomous wound which he had received in Vraba as we have said before. But Ancisus elected Lieutenant, sailed by all those coasts with much better fortune: 
The prosperous voyage of Ancisus.  for as he himself told me, he found prosperous winds in those parties, and was well entertained of thinhabitants of Cuba, but this specially in the dominion of a certain king whose name was Commendator: for whereas he desired of the Christian men which passed by, to be baptized, demanding the name of the governor of the Island next unto Hispaniola, being a noble man, and a knight of the order of Galatrava, of which order, 
A king of Cuba baptized by the name of Commendator.  all are called Commendatores, this king's desire was to be named after him. King Commendator therefore friendly received Ancisus, & gave him great abundance of all things necessary. But what Ancisus learned of their religion during the time of his remaining there, I have thought good to advertise your holiness. You shall therefore understand, that certain of our men sailing by the coasts o● 〈◊〉, left with king Commendator a certain poor mariner being diseased, who in short space recovering his health, and having now somewhat learned their language, 
A marvelous history how God wrought miracles by the simple faith of a mariner.  began to grow into great estimation with the king and his subjects, insomuch that he was oftentimes the kings Lieutenant in his wars against other princes his borderers. This man's fortune was so good, that all things prospered well that he took in hand: and albeit that he were not learned, yet was he a virtuous and well meaning man, according to his knowledge, and did religiously honour the blessed virgin, bearing ever about with him her picture fair painted upon paper, 
Be not rash in judgement.  and sowed in his apparel near unto his breast, signifying unto the king, that this holiness was the cause of all his victories: persuading him to do the like, and to cast away all his Zemes, which were none other than the similitudes of evil spirits, most cruel enemies and devourers of our souls, and to take unto him the holy virgin and mother of God to be his patroness, if he desired all his affairs aswell in war as in peace to succeed prosperously: also that the blessed virgin would at no time fail him, but be ever ready to help him and his, if they would with devout hearts call upon her name. The mariner had soon persuaded the naked nation, and thereupon gave the king (who demanded the same) his picture of the virgin, to whom he builded and dedicated a chapel and an alter, 
A Chapel builded to the picture of the virgin Marie.  ever after contemning and rejecting his Zemes. Of these Zemes made of gossampine cotton, to the similitudes of spirits walking in the night, which they oftentimes see, and speak with them familyerly, we have spoken sufficiently in the ninth book of the first Decade. Furthermore, according to the institution of this mariner, when the son draweth toward the fall, this king Commendator with all his family, both men and women, resort daily to the said chapel of the virgin Marie, where kneeling on their knees, and reverently bowing down their heads, holding their hands joined together, they salute the image of the virgin with these words, ave Maria, ave Maria, for few of them can rehearse any more words of this prayer. At Ancisus his being there, they took him and his fellows by the hands, and led them to this chapel with rejoicing, saying that they would show them marvelous things. When they were entered, they pointed with their fingers to the Image of the virgin, all to be set and hanged about with ouches and jewels, and many earthen pots, filled some with sundry meats, and some with water, round about all the tabernacle: for these things they offer to the image in the steed of sacrifice, 
One superstititious religion turned into an other, holdeth still many things of the first.  according to their old superstition toward their Zemes. Being demanded why they did thus, they answered, Lest the image should lack meat, if perhaps it should be a hungered: for they most certainly believe that images may hunger, and that they do eat & drink. But what aid and help they confess that they have had of the godly power of this image, that is of the blessed virgin, it is a thing worthy to be heard, and most assuredly to be taken for a truth: for by the report of our men, there is such fervent godly love and zeal in these simple men toward the holy virgin, 
Zeal without knowledge is never godly.  that to them being in the danger of war against their enemies, they do in manner (if I may so term it) compel her to descend from heaven to help them in their necessities. 
Mark this blindness.  For such is the goodness of God, that he hath left unto men in manner a price whereby we may purchase him with his holy angels & saints, that is to wit, burning love, charity, and zeal. 
This ignorance is to be lamented.  How therefore can the blessed virgin at any time be absent from them which call for her help with pure faith and fervent love? Commendator himself, with all his noble men and gentlemen, do testify with one voice, that in a fought battle in the which this mariner was captain, bearing with him this picture of the virgin Marie, the Zemes of their enemies turned their backs, 
The devil dissembleth to keep his in blindness still.  and trembled in the presence of the virgin's image, and in the sight of them all: for every of them bring their Zemes to the battle, hoping by their help to obtain the victory. Yea they say further, that during the time of the battle, they saw not only an Image, but a lively woman clothed in fair and white apparel, aiding them against their enemies: which thing also the enemies themselves acknowledged, confessing that on the contrary part, she appeared to them shaking a sceptre in her hand with threatening countenance, 
A notable lie of a papistical heretic.  which caused their hearts to shake and faint for fear: but after that this mariner departed from them, being taken into a ship of certain Christians passing by those coasts, Commendator declared that he with all his subjects, continually observed his institutions: insomuch that being at contention with another prince, which of their Zemes were most holy and of greatest power, the matter grew to such extremity, that they tried it with hand strokes: and that in all these attempts, the blessed virgin never failed him, 
One blasphemy upon another.  but was ever present in the brunt of the battle, and gave him easy victory with a small power of men, against a main army of his enemies. Being demanded with what words they cried upon the virgin Mary when they assailed their enemies, they answered that they had learned no other words of the Mariners doctrine, but Sancta Maria adiwa nos. Sancta Maria adiwa nos. That is, holy Marie help us, holy Marie help us, and this also in the Spanish tongue: for he had left these words in the mouths of all men. While they murdered and destroyed themselves thus on both sides, they fell to entreaty of peace, and agreed to try the matter, not hand to hand by combat of certain chosen for both parties, as the manner was among the Romans and divers other nations in the old time, or by any sleight or policy, but that two young men should be chosen, for each party one, with their hands bound fast behind them in the plain field, both parties being sworn to acknowledge that Zemes to be the better, which first loosed the bands of the young man which stood bound for the trial of his religion. Thus dividing themselves, and placing the said young men before them in the sight of them all, with their hands fast bound by their enemies, 
The devil appeareth in his likeness.  the contrary part called first on their Zemes (that is the devil, to whose similitude their Images are made) who immediately appeared in his likeness about the young man that stood bound in the defence of Satan's kingdom. 
What likeness?  But as soon as Commendator with his company cried Sancta Maria adiwa nos, Sancta Maria adiwa nos, forthwith there appeared a fair virgin clothed in white, at whose presence the devil vanquished immediately. 
A strange miracle not to be credited.  But the virgin, having along rod in her hand, & putting the same on the bands of the young man that stood for Commendator, his hands were loosed immediately in the sight of them all, and his bands found about the hands of him that stood for the other party, 
Another miracle.  insomuch that they themselves found him double bound. But for all this, were not the enemies satisfied, quarreling that this thing was done by some sleight or devise of man, & not by the power of the better Zemes. And thereupon required, for thavoiding of all suspection, that there might be eight grave and sage men appointed, 
Wise men.  for each side four, which should bind the men in the sight of them all, and also give judgement whether the thing were done without craft or guile. Oh pure simplicity and constant faith: oh golden and blessed confidence. Commendator and his familiars, doubted not to grant their enemies their request, with like faith wherewith the diseased woman obtained health of the flux of her blood, 
Math. xiiii. This is another matter.  and whereby Peter feared not to walk on the sea at the sight of his master Christ. These young men therefore were bound in the presence of these eight grave men, and were placed within their lists in the sight of both parties. Thus upon a sign given, when they called upon their Zemes, 
The devil appeareth again  there appeared in the sight of them all, a devil with a long tail, a wide mouth, great teeth, and horns, resembling the similitude of the image which the king being enemy to Commendator honoured for his Zemes. As the devil attempted to lose the bands of his client, the blessed virgin was immediately present as before at the call of Commendator & his subjects, & with her rod loosed the bands of her suppliant, 
The virgin Mary in her own person overcometh the devil.  which were again likewise found fast tied about the hands of him that stood for the contrary part. The enemies therefore of Commendator, being stricken with great fear, and amazed by reason of this great miracle, confessed that the Zemes of the virgin was better than their Zemes: for the better proof whereof, these pagans being borderers to Commendator, which had ever before been at continual war and enmity with him, when they had knowledge that Ancisus was arrived in those coasts, they sent Ambassadors unto him, to desire him to send them priests, of whom they might be baptized: whereupon he sent them two which he had there with him at that present. They baptized in one day an hundred and thirty of thinhabitants, sometime enemies to Commendator, but now his friends, and joined with him in alliance. All such as came to be baptized, gave the priests of their own liberality, 
The priests reward.  either a cock or a hen, but no capons, for they can not yet skill how to carve their cock chickens to make them capons. 
Why name you Capons?  Also certain salted fishes, and new fine cakes made of their bread: likewise certain fowls franked and made fat. When the priests resorted to the ships, six of these new baptized men accompanied them laden with victuals, wherewith they led a joyful Easter: for on the Sunday, two days before saint Lazarus day, they departed from Dariena, and touched at that time only the cape or angle of Cuba, near unto the East side of Hispaniola. At the request of Commendator, Ancisus left with him one of his company, to the intent to teach him and his subjects, with other his borderers, the salutation of the angel, which we call the ave Maria: for they think themselves to be so much the more beloved of the blessed virgin, as they can rehearse the more words of that prayer. Thus Ancisus taking his leave of king Commendator, 
Ancisus voyage to Spain.  directed his course to Hispaniola, from which he was not far. Shortly after, he took his voyage to Spain, and came to Valladoleto to the king, to whom he made grievous complaint of the insolency of Vaschus Nunnez, insomuch that by his procurement the king gave sentence against him. 
Ancisus complaineth of Vaschus.  Thus much have I thought good (most holy father) whereof to advertise your holiness, 
Mark to whom this feigned miraculous story was written.  as concerning the religion of these nations, not only as I have been instructed of Ancisus (with whom I was daily conversant in the Court, and used him familiarly) but also as I was informed of divers other men of great authority, to the intent that your excellency may understand how docible this kind of men are, and with what facility they may be alured to embrace our religion: but this can not be done suddenly, yet we have great cause to hope that in short time they will be all drawn by little and little, to the evangelical law of Christ, to the great increase of his flock. But let us now return to the messengers or procurators as concerning the affairs of Dariena.   

The seventh book of the second Decade, of the supposed continent.  
FRom Dariena to Hispaniola, is eight days sailing, and sometimes less with a prosperous wind: yet Quicedus and Colmenaris the procurators of Dariena, by reason of tempests & contrary winds, could scarcely sail it in a hundred days. When they had tarried a few days in Hispaniola, and had declared the cause of the coming to the Admiral and the other governors, they took shipping in two merchant ships, being ready furnished, which were also accustomed to sail to and fro between Spain and the Island of Hispaniola. They departed from Dariena (as we said before) the fourth day of the Calends of November, in the year of Christ .1512. and came not to the court before the kalends of May in the year following, being the year of Christ .1513. At their coming to the court, johannes Fonseca (to whom at the beginning the charge of these affairs was committed, whom also for his faithful service toward the king, 
The procurators of Dariena are honourably received at the court.  your holiness created general Commissary in the wars against the moors) received them honourably, as men coming from the new world, from naked nations, and lands unknown to other men. By the preferment therefore of the Bishop of Burges, Quicedus and Colmenaris were brought before the king, and declared their legacy in his presence. Such news and presents as they brought, were delectable to the king and his noble men, for the newness and strangeness thereof. They also sojourned with me oftentimes. Their countenances do declare the intemperateness of the air and region of Dariena, for they are yellow, like unto them that have the yellow gaundies, and also swollen: but they ascribe the cause hereof, to the hunger which they sustained in times past. I have been advertised of the affairs of this new world, not only by these procurators of Dariena, and Ancisus, and Zamudius, but also by conference with Baccia the lawyer, who ran over a great part of those coasts: likewise by relation of Vincentius Annez▪ the patron of the ships, and Alphonsus Nignus, both being men of great experience, and well travailed in those parties, beside many other, of whom we have made mention in other places, for there came never any from thence to the court, but took great pleasure to certify me of all things, either by word of mouth or by writing. Of many things therefore which I learned of them, I have gathered such as to my judgement seem most worthy to satisfy them that take delight in histories. But let us now declare what followed after the coming of the procurators of Dariena. Therefore, before their arrival, there was a rumour spread in the court, that the chief governors and lieutenants Nicuesa and Fogeda, also johannes de la Cossa (a man of such reputation, 
The great master of the king's ships.  that by the kings letters patents he was named the great master of the kings ships) were all perished by mischance: and that those few which yet remained alive in Dariena, were at contention and discord among themselves, so that they neither endeavoured their diligence to allure those simple nations to our faith, nor yet had regard to search the natures of those regions. In consideration whereof, the king was determined to send a new captain thither, which should restore and set all things in good order, and put them out of authority which had usurped the Empire of those provinces without the kings special commandment. To this office, was one Petrus Arias assigned, 
Petrus Arias is elected governor of Dariena.  a man of great prowess, and a citizen of Sego●ia, but when the procurators of Dariena had published in the court how great a matter it was, and of what moment, many laboured earnestly to the king, to take the office out of his hands: but the Bishop of Burges, being the kings chief chaplain, and one of the Commissioners appointed by him in these matters, being advertised hereof, came immediately to the king, and spoke to him in this effect: May it please your highness to understand (most catholic prince) that whereas Petrus Arias, 
The oration of the Bishop of Burges, in the defence of Petrus Arias.  a man of valiant courage and great service, hath offered himself to adventure his life in your majesties affairs, under uncertain hope of gain, and most certain perils, yet that notwithstanding, some other have ambitiously maliced his felicity and preferment, labouring for the office whereto he is elected. It may please your grace herein, so to show him your favour, and permit him to enjoy his said office, as your majesty do know him to be a worthy and meet man for the same, having in time past had great experience of his prowess and valiantness, aswell in behaving himself, as ordering his soldiers, as your highness may the better consider, if it shall please you to call to remembrance his doings in the wars of Aphryca, 
The wars of Aphryca.  where he showed himself both a wise Captain, and a valiant soldier. As concerning his manners and usages otherways, they are not unknown to your majesty, under whose wing he hath of a child ben brought up in the Court, and ever found faithful toward your highness. Wherefore, to declare my opinion, under your grace's favour (whom it hath pleased to appoint me a Commissioner in these affairs) I think it were ungodly that he should be put from his office at the suit of any other, especially being thereto moved by ambition and covetousness, who perchance would prove themselves to be the same men in the office, if they should obtain it, as they now show themselves in the ambitious desiring of the same. When the Bishop had said these words, the king confirmed the election of Petrus Arias, in more ample manner then before, willing the bishop to appoint him a thousand and two hundred soldiers at his charges, making him a warrant to the officers of his Exchequer, to deliver him money in priest for the same purpose. Petrus Arias therefore being thus put in office, and authorized by the kings letters patents under his broad seal, chose a great number of his soldiers in the court, and so departed from Valladoleto, about the Calends of October, in the year .1513. and sailed first to Civil, being a very rich city, and well replenished with people, where by the kings magistrates, he was furnished with men and victuals, and other necessaries pertaining to so great a matter: for the king hath in this city erected a house, serving only for the affairs of the Ocean, 
A house in Civil appointed to the affairs of India.  to the which all they that go or come from the new lands and Islands, resort to give accounts, aswell what they carry thither, as what they bring from thence, that the king may be truly answered of his custom of the fift part, both of gold and other things, as we have said before. This house they call the house of the Contracts of Indi. Petrus Arias found in Civil above two thousand young men, 
Perulariae.  which made great suit to go with him, likewise no small number of covetous old men, of the which, many offered themselves to go with him of their own charges without the king's stipend. But lest the ships should be pestered with to great a multitude, or lest victuals should fail them, the liberty of free passage was restraint. It was also decreed that no stranger might pass without the kings licence. Wherefore I do not a little marvel at Aloisius Cadamustus a Venetian, and writer of the Portugals voyages, that he was not ashamed to write thus of the spaniards navigations: we went, we saw, we did: whereas he never went, nor any Venetian saw, but he stole certain annotations out the three first books of my first Decade, written to Cardinal Ascanius & Arcimboldus, supposing that I would never have published the same. It might also happen that he came by the copy thereof at the hand of some ambassador of Venice, for I have granted the copy to many of them, & was not dangerous to forbid them to communicate the same to other. How so ever it be, this honest man Aloisius Cadamustus feared not to challenge unto him the fruit of another man's labour. Of the inventions of the Portugals (which surely are wonderful) whether he have written that which he hath seen (as he saith) or likewise bereaved other men of the just commendations of their travails, 
The Portugals inventions.  I will not judge, but am content to let him live after his manner. Among the company of these soldiers, there were none embarked but such as were licensed by the king, except a few Italians, Genues, who by friendship and suit were admitted for the admirals sake young Colonus, son and heir to Christophorus Colonus, 
The navigation of Petrus Arias.  the first finder of those lands. Petrus Arias therefore took shipping in the river Betis (now called Guadalquevir) running by the city of Civil, about the beginning of the year of Christ .1514. But he loosed anchor in an evil hour, for such a tempest followed shortly after his departure, 
A shipwreck.  that it rend in pieces two of his ships, and so tossed the other, that they were enforced to heave overboard part of their victuals to lighten them. All such as escaped, sailed back again to the coasts of Spain, where, being newly furnished and refreshed by the kings officers, they went forward on their voyage. The master Pilot of the governors ship, was johannes Vesputius a Florentine, the nephew of Americus Vesputius, who left him as it were by descent of inheritance, 
Americus Vesputius.  th'experience of the Mariners faculty, and knowledge of the sea, card, and compass. But we were advertised of late by certain which came from Hispaniola, that they had passed the Ocean with more prosperous wind: for this merchant ship coming from Hispaniola, found them landing at certain islands near thereabout. But in the mean time, while my importunate callers on, Galeaceus Butrigarius, and johannes Cursius, men studious by all means to gratify your holiness, ceased not to put me in remembrance that they had one in a readiness to departed into Italy, & tarried only to carry with him unto your holiness these my fair Nereids, although rudely decked, lest I should bestow much time in vain, I have let pass many things, & will rehearse only such as seem in my judgement most worthy memory, although somewhat disordered, as occasion hath served. So it is therefore, that this Petrus Arias hath a wife named Helisabetha Boadilla, 
A notable example of a valiant woman.  being niese by the brother's side to the marquis of Boadilla, which rendered the city of Segovia to Fernando and Helisabeth princes of Spain, at such time as the Portugals invaded the kingdom of Castille, by reason whereof, they were encouraged first to resist, and then with open war to assail and expulse the Portugals, for the great treasure which king Henry brother to queen Helisabeth had gathered together there. This marquis, while she lived, did ever show a manly and stout mind, both in peace and war, so that by her counsel, many noble things were brought to good effect in Castille: unto this noble woman the wife of Petrus Arias was niese by her brother's side. She, following the magnanimity of her aunt, perceiving her husband now furnishing himself to departed to the unknown coasts of the new world, and those large tracts of land and sea, spoke these words unto him: My most dear and well-beloved husband, 
The wife of Petrus Arias.  we ought not now to forgeat that from our young years we have been joined together with the yoke of holy matrimony, to thintent that we should so live together, and not asunder, during the time of our natural life: wherefore for my part, to declare my affection herein, you shall understand, that whither soever your fatal destiny shall drive you, either by the furious waves of the great Ocean, or by the manifold and horrible dangers of the land, I will surely bear you company: there can no peril chance to me so terrible, nor any kind of death so cruel, that shall not be much easier for me to abide, then to live so far separate from you. It were much better for me to die, and either to be cast into the sea, to be devoured of the fishes, or on the land to the Canibales, then with continual mourning and bewailing, to live in death, and die living, while I consume in looking rather for my husbands letters, then for himself. This is my full determination, not rashly, nor presently excogitate, nor conceived by the light fantasy of woman's brain, but with long deliberation and good advisement. Now therefore choose to whether of these two you will assent, either to thrust your sword in my throat, or to grant me my request. As for the children which god hath given us as pledges of our inseparable love (for they had four sons, and as many daughters) shall not stay me a moment: let us leave unto them such goods and possessions as have been left us by our parents and friends, whereby they may live among the woorshypfull of their order: for other things I take no care. When this noble matron of manly virtue had finished these words, her husband seeing the constant mind of his wife, and her in a readiness to do according to her words, had no heart to deny her loving petition, but embracing her in his arms, commended her intent, and consented to her request. She followed him therefore, as did Ipsicratea her Mithridates, with her hear hanging lose about her shoulders: for she loved her husband, as did Halicarnassea of Caria hers, being dead, and as did Artemisia her Mausolus. We have also had advertisement since their departure, that she (being brought up as it were among soft feathers) hath with no less stout courage sustained the roringes and rages of the Ocean, than did either her husband, or any of the Mariners brought up even among the surges of the sea. But to have said thus much hereof, this shall suffice: let us now speak of other things no less worthy memory. Therefore, whereas in the first Decade we have made mention of Vincentius Annez Pinzonus, ye shall understand▪ that he accompanied Christophorus Colonus the Admiral in his first voyage, and afterward made an other voyage of his own charges with only one ship. Again, the first year after the departing of the captains Nicuesa and Fogeda, he ran over those coasts from Hispaniola, and searched all the South side of Cuba, from the East to the West, and sailed round about that Island, which to that day, for the great length thereof, was thought to have been part of the continent or firm land, although some other say that they did the like. Vincentius Annez therefore, knowing now by experience that Cuba was an Island, sailed on further, and found other lands Westward from Cuba, but such as the Admiral had first touched. Wherefore, being in manner encompassed with this new land, turning his course toward the left hand, and rasing the coasts of that land by the East, overpassing also the mouths of the gulfs of Beragua, Vraba, and Cuchibachoa, he arrived at the region which in the first Decade we called Paria and Os Draconis, and entered into the great gulf of fresh water, which Colonus discovered, being replenished with great abundance of fish, and famous by reason of the multitude of Islands lying in the same, being distant Eastward from Curiana about an hundred and thirty miles, in the which tract, are the regions of Cumana and Manacapana, which also in the sixth book of the first Decade we said to be regions of the large province of Paria, 
Plenty of pearls.  where many affirm to be the greatest plenty of the best pearls, and not in Curiana. The kings of these regions (whom they call Chiacones, as they of Hispaniola call them Cacici) being certified of the coming of our men, sent certain spies to inquire what new nation was arrived in their coasts, what they brought, and what they would have, and in the mean time furnished a number of their Canoas' (which they call Chichos) with men armed after their manner: for they were not a little astonished to behold our ships with the sails spread, whereas they use no sails, nor can use but small ones if they would, by reason of the narrowness of their Canoas'. Swarming therefore about the ship with their Canoas' (which we may well call Monoxyla, because they are made of one whole tree) they feared not to shoot at our men, being yet within their ships, and keeping themselves under the hatches, as safely as if they had been defended with stone walls. But when our men had shot of certain pieces of ordinance against them, they were so discomfited with the noise and slaughter thereof, 
The use of guns.  that they drove themselves to flight. Being thus disparkled, our men chased them with the ship boat, took many, and slew many. When the kings heard the noise of the guns, and were certified of the loss of their men, they sent ambassadors to Vincentius Agnes to entreat of peace, fearing the spoil of their goods, and destruction of their people, if our men should come aland in their wrath and fury. They desired peace therefore, as could be conjectured by their signs and poyntynges: for our men understood not one word of their language. And for the better proof that they desired peace, 
Great abundance of gold & frankincense.  they presented our men with three thousand of those weights of gold that the spaniards call Castellanum Aureum, 
Olibanum.  which they commonly call Pesum. Also a great barrel of wood full of most excellent masculine Frankincense, weighing about two thousand and six hundred pounds weight, after eight ounces to the pound: whereby they knew that that land brought forth great plenty of Frankincense, 
Sabea is a country in ●rabia, which bringeth forth Frankincense.  for there is no intercourse of merchandise between the inhabitants of Paria and the Sabeans, being so far distant, whereas also they of Paria know nothing without their own coasts. With the gold and Frankincense which they presented to our men, they gave them also a great multitude of their peacocks, both cocks and hens, dead and alive, aswell to satisfy their present necessity, as also to carry with them into Spain for increase, likewise certain carpets, coverlets, table clothes, and hangyngs, made of Gossampine silk, finely wrought after a strange device, with pleasant and variable colours, having golden bells, and such other spangles and pendants, as the Italians call Sonaglios, and the spaniards Cascaveles, hanging at the purfles thereof. They gave them furthermore speaking popyngayes of sundry colours, as many as they would ask: for in Paria there is no less plenty of popyngayes, then with us of doves or sparows. Thinhabitants of these regions, both men & women, are appareled with vestures made of gossampine cotton, the men to the knees, and the women to the calf of the leg. The fashion of their apparel is simple and plain, much like unto the Turks: but the men's is double, and quilted, like that which the Turks use in the wars. The princes of Paria are rulers but for one year: but their authority is no less among the people both in peace and war, 
Rulers for one year.  then is th'authority of other kings in those regions. Their villages are builded in compass, 
The great gulf of Paria.  along by the banks of all that great gulf. five of their princes came to our men with their presents, whose names I thought worthy to be put in this history, in remembrance of so notable a thing, Chiaconus Chiavaccha (that is, the prince of Chiavaccha, for they call princes or kings Chiaconus) Chiaconus Pintiguanus, Chiaconus Chamailaba, Chiaconus Polomus▪ and Chiaconus Potto. The gulf being first found of the Admiral Colonus, they call Baia Nativitatis, because he entered into the same in the day of the nativity of Christ, but at that time he only passed by it without any further searching, and Baia in the Spanish tongue, signifieth a gulf. When Vincentius had thus made a league with these princes, following his appointed course, he found many regions toward the East, desolate by reason of divers floods and overflowyngs of waters: also many standing pools in divers places, and those of exceeding largeness. He ceased not to follow this tract, until he came to the point or cape of that most long land. This point seemeth as though it would invade the mount Atlas in Aphrica: for it prospecteth toward that part of afric, which the Portugals call Caput bonae Sperantiae. The poynte● or capes of the mount Atlas, are rough and savage, near unto the sea. The cape of Bona Speranza, gathereth thirty and four degrees of the South pole, called the pole Antarctic, but that point only seven degrees. I suppose this land to be that, which I find in old writers of cosmography to be called the great Island Atlantike, 
The great Island Atlantike.  without any further declaring either of the situation, or of the nature thereof.   

The eight book of the second Decade, of the supposed continent.  
WHen john the king of Portugal lived, which was predecessor to him that now reigneth, there arose a great contention between the Castilians and the Portugals, 
Contention between the Castilians & Portugals for the new lands.  as concerning the dominion of these new found lands. The Portugals, because they were the first that durst attempt to search the Ocean sea since the memory of man, affirmed that all the navigations of the Ocean, aught to pertain to them only. The Castilians argued on the contrary part, that whatsoever God by the ministration of nature hath created on the earth, was at the beginning common among men, and that it is therefore lawful to every man to possess such lands as are void of Christian inhabitors. While the matter was thus uncertaynelye debated, both parties agreed that the controversy should be desyded by the bishop of Rome, and plighted faith to stand to his arbitrement. The kingdom of Castille was at that time governed by that great queen Helisabeth with her husband: for the Realm of Castille was her dowry. She also and the king of Portugal, were cousin germans of two sisters, by reason whereof, the dissension was more easily pacified. By the assent therefore of both parties, Alexander the bishop of Rome, 
The bishop of Rome divideth the land.  the vi of that name, by th'authority of his leaden bull, drew a right line from the North to the South, an hundred leagues Westward, without the parallels of those Islands which are called Caput Viride, or Caboverde, within the compass of this line (although some deny it) falleth the point of this land whereof we have spoken, which they call Caput Sancti Augustini, otherwise called Promontorium Sancti Augustini, that is, saint Augustine's cape or point: and therefore it is not lawful for the Castilians to fasten foot in the beginning of that land. Vincentius Annez therefore departed from thence, being advertised of the inhabitants, that on the other side of the high mountains toward the South, lying before his eyes, 
The golden region of Ciamba.  there was a region called Ciamba, which brought forth great plenty of gold. Of certain captives which he took in the gulf of Paria (which certainly pertaineth to the dominion of Castille) he brought some with him to Hispaniola, and left them with the young Admiral to learn our language: but he himself repaired to the court, to make earnest suit to the king, that by his favour he might be governor of the Island of Sancti johannis (otherwise called Burichena, being distant from Hispaniola only xxv leagues) because he was the first finder of gold in that Island. 
The Island of S. johannis.  Before Vincentius made suit for this office, one Don Christopher, a Portugal, the son of the county of Camigna, was governor of the Island, whom the Canibales of the other Islands slew, with all the Christian men that were in the same, except the Bishop and his familiars, which fled and shifted for themselves, forsaking the church and all the ornaments thereof: for your holiness hath consecrated five bishops in these islands, 
five bishops of the Island made by the bishop of Rome.  at the request of the most catholic king. In Sancto Dominico the chief city of Hispaniola, Garsia de Padilla, a regular Friar of the order of saint Francis, is bishop. In the town of Conception, doctor Petrus Xuares of Deza, and in the Island of saint john or Burichena, Alphonsus Mansus a licenciate, being both obseruantes of the institution of saint Peter. The fourth is Friar barnard of Mesa, a man of noble parentage, borne in Toledo, a preacher, & bishop of the Island of Cuba. The fift is johannes Cabedus, a friar preacher, whom your holiness anointed minister of Christ, to teach the Christian faith among the inhabitants of Dariena. The Canibales shall shortly repent them, and the blood of our men shallbe revenged, and that the sooner, because that shortly after they had committed this abominable slaughter of our men, they came again from their own Island of Sancta crux (otherwise called Ay Ay) to the Island of Sancti johannis, 
The Canibales of the Island of Sancta Crux.  and slew a king which was a friend to our men, and ate him, and all his family, utterly subverting his village, upon this occasion, that violating the law of hostage, he had slain seven Canibales which were left with him by composition to make certain Canoas', because the Island of Sancti johannis beareth greater trees, and apt for that purpose, then doth the Island of Sancti crux, the chief habitation of the Canibales. These Canibales yet remaining in the Island, certain of our men sailing from Hispaniola, chanced upon them. The thing being understood by the interpreters, our men quarreling with them, and calling them to account for that mischievous deed, they immediately directed their bows and venomous arrows against them, and with cruel countenances threatened them to be quiet, lest it should repent them of their coming thither. Our men fearing their venomous arrows (for they were not prepared to fight) gave them signs of peace. Being demanded why they destroyed the village, and where the king was with his family, they answered, that they razed the village, and cut the king with his family in pieces, and ate them in the revenge of their seven woorkmen: and that they had made faggots of their bones, to carry them to the wives and children of their slain workmen, in witness that the bodies of their husbands and parents lay not unrevenged, and therewith showed the faggots of bones to our men, who being astonished at their fierceness and cruelty, were enforced to dissemble the matter, and hold their peace, quarrelling no further with them at that tyme. These and such other things do daily chance, the which I do let pass, lest I should offend the ears of your holiness with such bloody narrations. Thus have we sufficiently digressed from the regions of Beragua and Vraba, being the chiefest foundations of our purpose. We will now therefore entreat somewhat of the largeness and depth of the rivers of Vraba: 
The rivers of Vraba.  also declare both what they and the lands which they run through do bring forth: likewise of the greatness of the land from the East to the West, and of the breadth thereof from the South to the North, and what their opinion and hope is of things yet unknown in the same. We will therefore begin at the new names, wherewith the spaniards have named these provinces, since they were under the dominions of the Christians.   

The ninth book of the second Decade, of the supposed continent.  
BEragua therefore they called Castilia Aure●▪ that is, golden Castille, and Vraba they named Andalusia nova, that is, new Andalusia. And like as of many Islands which they subdued, they chose Hispaniola for the chief place of their habitation: so in the large tract of Paria, they appointed their colony or biding place in the two regions of Vraba and Beragua▪ that all such as attempt any voyages in those coasts, may resort to them, as to safe ports to be refreshed when they are weary or driven to necessity. Al our seeds and plants do now marvelously increase in Vraba, likewise blades, sets, slips, graffs, sugar canes, and such other as are brought from other places to those regions, 
The fruitfulness of Vraba.  as also beasts and fowls, as we have said before: O marvelous fruitfulness. Twenty days after the seed is sown, they gather ripe cucumbers, and such like, but Colwoortes, Beets, lettuce, Borage, are ripe within the space often days. Gourds, Melones, and Pompions, within the space of xxviii days. 
The fruitfulness of Dariena  Dariena hath many native trees and fruits, of divers kinds, with sundry tastes, & wholesome for the use of men, of the which I have thought it good to describe certain of the best. They nourish a tree which they call Guaiana, that beareth a fruit much resembling the kind of Citrons which are commonly called Limones, of taste somewhat sharp, mixed with sweetness. They have also abundance of nuts of pinetrees, and great plenty of Date trees, which bear fruits bigger than the Dates that are known to us, but they are not apt to be eaten for their to much sourness. Wild & barren Date trees grow of themselves in sundry places, the branches whereof they use for besoms, and eat also the buds of the same. Guaravana, being higher and bigger than the orange tree, bringeth forth a great fruit as big as pome Citrons. There is another tree much like to a chestnut tree, whose fruit is like to the bigger sort of figs, being wholesome and of pleasant taste. Mameis, is another tree that bringeth forth fruit as big as an orange, in taste nothing inferior to the best kinds of Melones. Guananala, beareth a fruit less than any of the other, but of sweet savour like spice, and of delectable taste. Hovos is another tree, whose fruit both in shape and taste is much like to prunes, but somewhat bigger: they are surely persuaded that this is the Myrobalane tree. These grow so abundantly in Hispaniola, that the hogs are fed with the fruit thereof, as with mast among us. The hogs like this kind of feeding so well, that when these fruits wax ripe, the swineheards can by no means keep them out of the woods of these trees, by reason whereof, a great multitude of them are become wild. They also affirm, that in Hispaniola swine's flesh is of much better taste and more wholesome than mutton: 
swines flesh of better taste & more wholesome than mutton,  for it is not to be doubted, but that divers kinds of meats do engender sundry tastes and qualities in such as are nourished therewith. The most puissant prince Ferdinandus, declared that he had eaten of another fruit brought from those lands, being full of scales, with keys, much like a pineapple in form and colour, but in tenderness equal to melow pepons, and in taste exceeding all garden fruits: for it is no tree, but an herb, much like unto an archichoke, or Acantho: The king himself gave the chiefest commendation to this. I have eaten none of these fruits: for of a great number which they brought from thence, only one remained uncorrupted, 
Fruits putrefied on the sea.  the other being putrefied by reason of the long voyage. All such as have eaten of them newly gathered in their native soil, do marvelously commend their sweetness and pleasant taste. They dig also out of the ground certain roots growing of themselves, which they call Betatas, 
Betatas.  much like unto the navy roots of Milan, or the great puffs or muhrooms of the earth. Howsoever they be dressed, either fried or sodde, they give place to no such kind of meat in pleasant tenderness. The skin is somewhat tougher than either the navies or muhrooms, and of earthy colour, but the inner meat thereof is very white: These are nourished in gardens, as we said of jucca in the first Decade. They are also eaten raw, and have the taste of raw chestnuts, but are somewhat sweeter. We have spoken sufficiently of trees, herbs, and fruits, we will now therefore entreat of things sencitive. The lands and desolate pastures of these regions, are inhabited and devoured of wild and terrible beasts, 
Lions and Tigers.  as Lions, Tigers, and such other monsters as we now know, and have been described of old auctors in time past. But there is specially one beast engendered here, 
A strange beast.  in which nature hath endeavoured to show her cunning: This beast is as big as an Ox, armed with a long snout like an Elephant, and yet no Elephant, of the colour of an ox, and yet no ox, with the hoof of a horse, and yet no horse, with ears also much like unto an Elephant, but not so open, nor so much hanging down, yet much wider then the ears of any other beast. Of the beast which beareth her whelps about with her in her second belly as in a purse (being known to none of the old writers) I have spoken in the first Decade, which I doubt not to have come to the hands of your holiness. Let us now therefore declare what resteth of the floods and rivers of Vraba. 
The rivers of Vraba.  The river of Dariena falleth into the gulf of Vraba, with a narrow channel, scarcely able to bear the Canoas' or Lighters of that province, and runneth by the village where they chose their dwelling place, but the river in the corner of the gulf which we said that Vaschus passed by, they found to be xxiiii furlongs in breadth (which they call a league) and of exceeding depth, 
A league is xxiiii. furlongs.  as of two hundred cubits, falling into the gulf by divers mouths. They say that this river falleth into the gulf of Vraba, like as the river Ister (otherwise called Danubius, and Danowe) falleth into the sea Pontic, 
Danubius.  and Nilus into the sea of Egypt, wherefore they named it Grandis, that is, great: which also they affirm to nourish many and great Crocodiles, as the old writers testify of Nilus, 
A Crocodile is much like a Newt, but of exceeding kygnesse.  and especially as I have learned by experience, having sailed up and down the river of Nilus, when I was sent Ambassador to the Sultan of Alcay●, at the commandment of the most catholic king. What I may therefore gather out of the writings of so many learned authors as concerning the river of Nilus, I know not: for they say that nature hath given two rivers of that name to water the land, whether they will them to spring out of the mountains of the moon or the sun, or out of the tops of the rough mountains of Ethiopia, affirming one of the same to fall into the gulf of Egypt toward the North, and the other into the south Ocean sea. What shall we say in this place? Of that Nilus in Egypt there is no doubt. 
The Portugals navigations.  The Portugals also which sail by the coasts of the Ethiopians called Nigritae, and by the kingdom of Melinda, passing under the Equinoctial line, among their marvelous inventions have found another toward the South, and earnestly affirm the same to be also derived from the mountains of the moon, and that it is another channel of Nilus, because it bringeth forth Crocodiles, whereas it hath not been read before time, that any other river nourished Crocodiles saving only Nilus. This river the Portugals call Senega. It runneth through the region of the Nigritas, being very fruitful toward the North shore, but on the South side sandy and rough. Crocodiles are also engendered herein. What shall we then say of this third? yea I may well say the fourth: for I suppose them also to be Crocodiles, which Colonus with his company found, armed with scales as hard as shells, in the river called Delagartos, whereof we have made mention before. Shall we say that these rivers of Dariena also and Vraba, have their original from the mountains of the moon, whereas they spring out of the next mountains, and can by no means have the same original with Nilus in Egypt, or that in Nigrita, or else that in the kingdom of Melinda, from whence so ever they are derived, whereas these other (as we have said) spring out of the next mountains, which divide another South sea, with no great distance from the North Ocean. Wherefore, it appeareth by experience of such as have travailed the world in our time, that other waters beside the river of Nilus in Egypt, may likewise bring forth Crocodiles. In the marishes also and fens of the regions of Dariena, are found great plenty of pheasants and Peacocks (but not of variable colours) with many other kinds of birds and fowls unlike unto ours, aswell apt to be eaten, as also to delight the ears of men with pleasant noise. But our spaniards, because they are ignorant in fowling, take but few. Also innumerable popinjays of sundry kinds are found chattering in the groves of those fenny places. Of these there are some equal to Capons in bigness, and some as little as sparrows. But of the diversity of popyngayes, we have spoken sufficiently in the first Decade: for in the race of this large land, Colonus himself brought and sent to the court a great number of every kind, the which it was lawful for all the people to behold, and are yet daily brought in like manner. There remaineth yet one thing most worthy to be put in history, 
A philosophical discourse as concerning th'original of springs and rivers.  the which, I had rather to have chanced into the hands of Cicero or Livy, then into mine: for the thing is so marvelous in my estimation, that I find my wit more entangled in the description hereof, then is said of the hen when she seeth her young chicken enwrapped in tow or flax. 
The breadth of the land at Vraba, from the North Ocean to the South sea.  The breadth of that land from the North Ocean to the south sea, is only six days journey, by relation of the inhabitants. The multitude therefore and greatness of the rivers on the one side, and on the other side the narrowness of the land, bring me into such doubt how it can come to pass, that in so little a space of three days journey, measuring from the high tops of those mountains, I do not understand how so many and so great rivers may have recourse unto this North sea: for it is to be thought, that as many do flow toward th'inhabitants of the south. These rivers of Vraba are but small, in comparison of many other in those coasts: for the spaniards say, that in the time of Colonus, they found and passed by an other river after this, whose gulf falling into the sea, they affirm to be little less than a hundred miles in the first coasts of Paria, as we have said elsewhere: for they say, that it falleth from the tops of high mountains with so swift and furious a course, that by the violence and greatness thereof, it driveth back the sea, although it be rough & enforced with a contrary wind. They all affirm likewise, that in all the large tract thereof, they felt no sour or salted water, but that all the water was freeshe, sweet, and apt to be drunk. the inhabitauntes call this river Maragnonum, and the regions adjacent to the same, Mariatambal, Camamorus, and Paricora: beside those rivers which I have named before, as Darien▪ Grandis, Dabaiba, Beragua, Sancti Mathei, Boius gatti, Delagartos, & Gaira, they which of late have searched those coasts, have found many other. Deliberating therefore with myself, from whence these mountains, being so narrow and near unto the sea on both sides, have such great hollow caves or dens of such capacity, and from whence they are filled, to cast forth such abundance of water: hereof also asking them the opinions of the inhabitants, they affirm them to be of divers judgements herein, alleging first the greatness of the mountains to be the cause, which they say to be very high, which thing also Colonus the first finder thereof affirmeth to be true, adding thereunto that the paradise of pleasure is in the tops of those mountains which appear from the gulf of Paria & Os Draconis, as he is fully persuaded. They agree therefore that there are great caves within these mountains, but it resteth to consider from whence they are filled. If therefore all the rivers of fresh waters, by the opinion of many, do so flow out of the sea, 
The sea.  as driven and compelled through the passages or pores of the earth, by the ponderous weight of the sea itself, as we see them break forth of the springs, and direct their course to the sea again, than the thing is less to be marveled at here, then in other places: for we have not read that in any other place, two such seas have environed any land with so narrow lymyttes: 
The land enclosed with two seas.  for it hath on the right side the great Ocean, where the sun goeth down on the left hand, and another on the other side where the sun riseth, nothing inferior to the first in greatness, for they suppose it to be mixed and joined as all one with the sea of East India. This land therefore being burdened with so great a weight on the one side, & on the other, (if this opinion be of any value) is enforced to swallow up such devoured waters, and again to cast forth the same in open springs and streams. But if we shall deny that the earth draweth humours of the sea, and agree that all fountains or springs are engendered of the conversion or turning of air into water, 
Conversion of air into water in the caves of mountains.  distilling within the hollow places of the mountains (as the most part think) we will give place rather to th'authority of them which stick to those reasons, then that our sense is satisfied of the full truth thereof. Yet do I not repugn, that in some caves of mountains, water is turned into air: for I me self have seen, how in the caves of many mountains in Spain, in manner showers of rain do fall continually, and that the water gathered by this means, doth send forth certain rivers by the sides of the mountains, wherewith all such trees as are planted on the steep or foot of the mountains, as vines, olive trees, and such other, are watered, and this especially in one place: as the right honourable Lodovic the Cardinal of Aragonie, most obsequious to your holiness, and two other bishops of Italy, whereof the one is Silvius Pandonus, and the other an Archbishop (whose name and title I do not remember) can bear me witness: for when we were together at Granata, lately delivered from the dominion of the moors, and walked for our pastime to certain pleasant hills (by the which there ran a fair river)▪ while Cardinal Lodovic occupied himself in shooting at birds which were in the bushes near unto the river, I & tother two bishops determined to climb the mountains, to search the original and spring of the river: for we were not far from the tops thereof. Following therefore the course of the river, we found a great cave, in which was a continual fall of water, as it had been a shower of rain, the water whereof, falling into a trench made with man's hand, increaseth to a river, and runneth down by the sides of the mountains. The like is also seen in this famous town of Valladoleto (where we now sojourn) in a certain green close, not past a furlong distant from the walls of the town. I grant therefore, that in certain places, by conversion of the airy dew into water, within the caves of such mountains, many springs and rivers are engendered: but I suppose that nature was not sollicitate to bring forth such great floods by this so small industry. Two reasons therefore do sound best to my judgement: whereof the one is, 

The often fall of rain and continual spring tyme.  
The Equinoctial.   the often fall of rain: the other, the continual autumn or spring time which is in those regions, being so near unto the Equinoctial, that the common people can perceive no difference between the length of the day and the night throughout all the year, where as these two seasons are more apt to engender abundance of rain, than either extreme winter, or fervent summer. another reason in effect much like unto the first, is this: If the sea be full of pores, and that by the pores thereof, being opened by the south winds, 
The pores of the sea, and the south wind.  we shall consent that vapours are lifted up, whereof the watery clouds are engendered, this land must needs be moisted with more showers than any other, if it be as narrow as they say, and environed with two main seas collaterally beating on the same: howsoever it be, I can not but give credit to the report of such worthy men as have recourse to those regions, and can no less then declare the same, albeit it may seem incredible to some ignorant persons, not knowing the power of nature, to whom, Pliny was persuaded, that nothing was impossible. We have therefore thought it good to make this discourse by the way of argument, lest on the one side, men of good learning and judgement, and on the other side, such as are studious to find occasions of quarrelling in other men's writings, should judge us to be so undiscrete, lightly to give credit to every tale, not being consonant to reason: but of the force and great violence of those fresh waters, which repulsing the sea, make so great a gulf (as we have said) I think the cause thereof to be the great multitude of floods and rivers, which being gathered together, make so great a pool, and not one river, as they suppose. And forasmuch as the mountains are exceeding high and steep, I think the violence of the fall of the waters to be of such force, that this conflict between the waters, is caused by thimpulsion of the pool, that the salt water can not enter into the gulf. But here perhaps some will marvel at me, why I should marvel so much hereat, speaking unto me scornfully, after this manner: Why doth he so marvel at the great rivers of those regions? Hath not Italy his Eridanus, 
The flood Eridanus.  named the king of rivers of the old writers? Have not other regions also the like? as we read of Tanais, Ganges, and Danubius, which are said so to overcome the sea, that fresh water may be drawn forty miles within the same. These men I would satisfy with this answer. The famous river of Padus in Italy (which they now call Po, and was of the Greeks called Eridanus) hath the great mountains called Alpes, dividing France, Germany, and Pannonie, from Italy, lying at the back thereof, as it were bulwarks agger, full of moisture, and with a long tract receiving Ticinam, with innumerable other great rivers, falleth into the sea Adriatic. The like is also to be understood of the other. But these rivers (as our men were informed by the kings) fall into the Ocean sea with larger and fuller channels near hand, and some there are which affirm this land to be very large in other places, although it be but narrow here. There cometh also to my remembrance another cause, the which although it be of no great force, yet do I intend to write it. Perhaps therefore the length of the land reaching far from the East to the West, if it be narrow, may be a help hereunto: for as we read, 
The river Alpheus.  that the river Alpheus passeth through the hollow places under the sea, from the city of Elis in Peloponeso, and breaketh forth at the fountain or spring Arethusa in the Island of Sicilia, so is it possible that these mountains may have such long caves pertaining unto them, 
Long caves in the mountains.  that they may be the receptacles of the water passing through the lands being far distant, and that the same waters coming by so long a tract, may in the way be greatly increased, by the conversion of air into water, as we have said. Thus much have I spoken freely, permitting both to them which do friendly interpret other men's doings, and also to the malicious scorners, to take the thing even as them listeth, for hitherto I can make no further declaration hereof, but when the truth shallbe better known, I will do my diligence to commit the same to writing. Now therefore, forasmuch as we have spoken thus much of the breadth of this land, we intend to describe the length and form of the same.   

The tenth book of the second Decade, of the supposed continent.  
THat land reacheth forth into the sea, even as doth Italy, 
The length and form of the Island.  although not like the leg of a man, as it doth. But now I compare a Pigmean or a dwarf, to a Giant: for that part thereof which the spaniards have over run, from the said East point which reacheth toward the sea Atlantike, (the end not being yet found toward the West) is more than eight times longer than Italy. And by what reason I am moved to say eight times, your holiness shall understand. From the time therefore that I first determined to obey their requests, who willed me first in your name to write these things in the Latin tongue, I did my endeavour that all things might come forth with due trial and experience: whereupon I repaired to the Bishop of Burges, being the chief refuge of this navigation. As we were therefore secretly together in one chamber, we had many instruments pertaining to these affairs, as globes, 
Cards of the sea.  and many of those maps which are commonly called the shipman's cards, or cards of the sea. Of the which, one was drawn by the Portugals, 
The card of Americus Vesputius.  whereunto Americus Vesputius is said to have put to his hand, being a man most expert in this faculty, and a Florentine borne, who also under the stipend of the Portugals, had sailed toward the South pole many degrees beyond the Equinoctial. In this card we found the first front of this land to be brother than the kings of Vraba had persuaded our men of their mountains. To another, Colonus the Admiral, while he yet lived, and searched those places, 
The card of Colouns.  had given the beginning with his own hands: whereunto Bartholomeus Colonus his brother and lieutenant had added his judgement, for he also had sailed about those coasts. Of the spaniards likewise, as many as thought themselves to have any knowledge what pertained to measure the land & the sea, drew certain cards in parchment as concerning these navigations. Of all other, 
The card of johannes de la Cossa.  they most esteem them which johannes de la Cossa the companion of Fogeda (whom we said to be slain of the people of Caramairi in the haven of Carthago) and another expert pilot called Andreas Moralis, had set forth. 
The card of Andrea's moralis.  And this aswell for the great experience which they both had (to whom these tracts were aswell known as the chambers of their own houses) as also that they were thought to be cunninger in that part of cosmography, which teacheth the description and measuring of the sea. Conferring therefore all these cards together, in every of the which was drawn a live, expressing not the miles, but leagues, after the manner of the spaniards, we took our compasses, & began to measure the sea coasts after this order. 
The manner of measuring the cards.  From that point or front which we said to be included within the live pertaining to the Portugals jurisdiction, being drawn by the parallels of the Islands of Caboverde, but a hundred leagues further toward the West (which they have now also searched on every side) we found three hundred leagues to the entrance of the river Maragnonum: and from thence to Os Draconis, seven hundred leagues, but somewhat less by the description of some, for they do not agree in all points exquisitely. The Spaniards will that a league contain four miles by sea, 
A league.  and but three by land. From Os Draconis, to the cape or point of Cuchibacoa, which being passed, there is a gulf on the left hand, we measured three hundred leagues in one Card, & much thereabout in another. From this point of Cuchibacoa, to the region of Caramairi, in which is the haven Carthago (which some call Carthagena) we found about a hundred & seventy leagues. From Caramairi to the Island Fortis, fifty leagues. From thence to the gulfs of Vraba, among the which is the village called Sancta Maria Antiqua, where the Spaniards have appointed their habitation, only xxxiii leagues. From the river of Vraba in the province of Dariena, to the river of Beragua, where Nicuesa had intended to have fastened his foot, if God had not otherwise decreed, we measured a hundred and thirty leagues. From Beragua, to that river, which we said of Colonus to be called Sancti Matthei, in the which also Nicuesa losing his Caravel, wandered in great calamities, we found in our Cards only a hundred and forty leagues: Yet many other which of late time have come from these parts, have described many more leagues in this tract from the river of Sancti Matthei, in which also they place divers rivers, as Aburema, with the Island called Scutum Cateba, lying before it, whose kings name is Fancies combusta. Likewise another river called Zobraba, after that, Vrida, and then Duraba, in the which gold is found. Furthermore, many goodly havens, as Cerabaro and Hiebra, so called of the inhabitants. And thus if your holiness will confer these numbers together, you shall find in this account, a thousand, five hundred, twenty and five leagues, which amount to five thousand & seven hundred miles, from the point of Sancti Matthei, which they call Sinum perditorum, that is, The gulf of the lost men. But we may not leave here: for after this, one Astur Ouetensis, otherwise named johannes Dias de Solis, 
The navigation of johannes Dias.  borne in Nebrissa (which bringeth forth many learned men) sailing from this river toward the West, overran many coasts and leagues, but the midst of that shore bendeth toward the North, and is not therefore directly placed in order with the other, yet may we gather by a diameter or right line, about three hundred leagues. Hereby may you gather what is the length of this land, but of the breadth, perhaps we shall hereafter have further knowledge. Let us now speak somewhat of the variety of the degrees of the elevation of the pole stars. This land therefore, 
The elevation of the pole.  although it reach forth from the East into the West, yet is it crooked, and hath the point bending so toward the South, that it looseth the sight of the North pole, and is extended beyond the Equinoctial line seven degrees toward the South pole: but the point hereof, pertaineth to the jurisdiction of the Portugals, as we have said. 
The jurisdiction of the Portugals,  Leaving this point, and sailing toward Paria, the North star is seen again, & is so much the more lifted up, in how much the region inclineth more toward the West. The spaniards therefore have divers degrees of elevations, until they come to Dariena, being their chief station and dwelling place in those lands: for they have forsaken Beragua, where they found the North pole elevate viii degrees, but from hence, the land doth so much bend toward the North, that it is there in manner equal with the degrees of the straights of Hercules pillars, 
Hercules' pillars.  especially if we measure certain lands found by them toward the North side of Hispaniola, among the which there is an Island about three. C. and xxv leagues from Hispaniola, as they say which have searched the same, named Boiuca, or Agnaneo, 
The Island Boiuca or Agnaneo. The renovation of age. A water of marvelous virtue.  in the which is a continual spring of running water, of such marvelous virtue, that the water thereof being drunk, perhaps with some diet, maketh old men young again. And here must I make protestation to your honesse, not to think this to be said lightly or rashly, for they have so spread this rumour for a truth throughout all the court, that not only all the people, but also many of them whom wisdom or fortune hath divided from the common sort, think it to be true: but if you shall ask my opinion herein, I will answer, that I will not attribute so great power to nature, but that God hath no less reserved this prerogative to himself, then to search the hearts of men, or to give substance to privation, (that is) being, to no being, except we shall believe the fable of Colchis of Aeson renovate, to be as true as the writings of Sibylla Erythrea. Albeit perhaps the schools of Physicians and natural philosophers, will not much stick to affirm, that by the use of certain secret medicines and diet, the accidents of age (as they call them) may be long hidden and deferred, 
The accidents of age may be hidden.  which they will to be understood by the renovation of age. And to have said thus much of the length and breadth of these regions, and of the rough and hugeous mountains, with their watery caves, also of the divers degrees of that land, I think it sufficient. But I thought it not good to let pass what chanced to these miserable men among their general calamities. I remember that when I was a child, me thought my bowels grated, and that my spirits were marvelously troubled for very pity, when I read in the poet Uirgyl, how Achemenides was left of Ulysses upon the sea banks among the giants called Cyclopes, where for the space of many days from the departing of Ulysses, until the coming of Aeneas, he eat none other meat, but only berries and haws. 
Extreme hunger.  But our unfortunate Spaniards, which followed Nicuesa to inhabit Beragua, would have esteemed haws & berries for great delicates. What should I hear speak of the head of an ass bought for a great price, 
This was at the siege of Jerusalem.  and of such other extremities as men have suffered in towns besieged? After that Nicuesa had determined to leave Beragua for the barrenness of the soil, he attempted to search Portum Bellum, and then the coasts of the point called Marmor, if he might there find a place more fortunate to inhabit. In this mean time, so grievous famine oppressed his soldiers, that they neither abstained from eating of mangy dogs, 
Many dogs eaten.  which they had with them, aswell for their defence as for hunting (for in the war against the naked people, dogs stood them in great stead) nor yet sometime from the slain inhabitants: for they found not there any fruitful trees, or plenty of fowls, as in Dariena, but a barren ground, and not meet to be inhabited. Here certain of the soldiers made a bargain with one of their fellows for the price of a lean dog, 
A mangy dog ●●are sold.  who also was almost dead for hunger: they gave the owner of the dog many of those pieces of gold which they call Pesos, or golden Castellans. Thus agreeing of the price, they flayed the dog to be eaten, and cast his mangy skin, with the bones of the head hanging thereto, among the bushes. The day following, a certain footman of their company, chanced to find the skin being now full of maggottes and stinking. He brought it home with him, sodde it, and eat it. Many resorted to him with their dishes for the broth of the sodde skin, proffering him for every dysshefull a piece of gold. 
Broth of a mangy dog's skin.  An other found two toads, and sodde them, 
Toads eaten.  which a sick man bought of him for two fine shurtes, curiously wrought of linen intermyxed with gold. Certain other wandering about to seek for victuals, found in a pathway in the midst of a field, a dead man, of the inhabitants, which had been slain of his own company, and was now rotten and stinking. They drew him a side, dismembered him secretly, roasted him, 
A dead man eaten.  and ate him, therewith asswagyng their hunger, as if they had been fed with pheasauntes. One also, which departing from his companions in the night season, went a fishing among the reeds of the marishes, lived only with slime or mud for the space of certain days, until at the length creeping, & almost dead, he found the way to his fellows. And thus these miserable men of Beragua, vexed with these and such other afflictions, were brought from the number of seven hundredth, threescore and ten soldiers, scarcely to forty, being now also added to the company of them in Dariena. Few were slain of thinhabitants, but the residue consumed by famine, breathed out their weary souls, opening a way to the new lands for such as shall come after them, appeasing the fury of the barbarous nations, with the price of their blood. considering therefore, after these storms, 
Note.  with what ease other men shall overrun and inhabit these lands, in respect to the calamities that these men have suffered, they shall seem to go to bride feasts, where all things are ready prepared against their coming. But where Petrus Arias arrived with the kings navy and new supply of men, to this hour I know no certainty. 
Petrus Arias whom the Spanyard●s call Ped●arias.  What shall chance hereafter, I will make diligent inquisition, if I shall understand this to be acceptable to your holiness. Thus I bid you farewell: from the court of the most catholic king, the day before the nonce of December, in the year of Christ .1514.    


The first book of the third Decade, to the Bishop of Rome Leo the tenth.  
I Was determined (most holy father) to have closed up the gates to this new world, supposing that I had wandered far enough in the coasts thereof, while in the mean time new letters were brought me from thence, which caused me again to take my pen in hand: for I received letters not only from certain of mine acquaintance there, but also from Vaschus Nunnez, 
Vaschus Nunnez, governor of Dariena.  whom we said by the confidence of his own power with his confederates, to have usurped the governance of Dariena, after the rejecting of Nicuesa and Ancisus, lieutenants. By his letter, written after his warlike manner, we understand that he hath passed over the mountains, dividing the Ocean, 
The new south Ocean.  known to us, from the other main sea on the south side of this land, hitherto unknown. His epistle is greater than that called Capreensis de Seiano. But we have gathered out of that and other, only such things as we thought most worthy to be noted. Vaschus so behaved himself in these affairs, that he did not only pacify the kings displeasure conceived against him, but also made him so favourable and gracious good lord toward him, that he rewarded him and his companions with many honourable gifts and privileges for their attempts. Wherefore, I desire your holiness to incline your attentive ears, & to consider with a joyful mind what they have brought to pass in these great enterprises: for this valiant nation (the spaniards I mean) have not only with great pains and innumerable dangers subdued, 
Commendation of the spaniards.  to the Christian empire, infinite hundreds and legions, but also myrtades of men. Vaschus Nunnez therefore, 
A valiant mind can not be idle.  whether it were that he was impatient of idleness, (for a valiant mind can not rest in one place, or be unoccupied) or lest any other should prevent him in so great a matter (suspecting the new governor Petrus Arias) or being moved by both these causes, and especially for that the king had taken displeasure with him for such things as he had done before, took the adventure upon him, with a few men to bring that to pass which the son of king Comogrus thought could hardly have been done with the aid of a thousand men, whereof Petrus Arias was appointed captain for the same purpose. Assembling therefore certain of the old soldiers of Dariena, and many of those which came lately from Hispaniola, alured by the fame of greater plenty of gold, 
Vaschus his voyage toward the golden mountains.  he gathered an army of a hundred fourscore and ten men. Thus being furnished, and ready to take his voyage by sea, while the wind served him, he departed from Dariena with one Brigandine, and ten of their boats which they call Canoas', as we have said. first therefore arriving in the dominion of Careta king of Coiba, and friend to the Christians, and leaving his ship and boats there, 
Careta king of Coiba.  he made his devout prayers to almighty God, and therewith went forward on his journey by land toward the mountains. Here he first entered into the region of king Poncha, 
King Poncha.  who fled at his coming, as he had done before. But Vaschus sent messengers to him by the conduct of certain of Careta his men, promising him friendship & defence against his enemies, with many other benefits. Poncha thus enticed with fair speech and friendly proffers, both of our men, and of the Caretans, came to our men gladly and willingly, making a league of friendship with them. Vaschus entertained him very friendly, and persuaded him never thereafter to stand in fear. Thus they joined hands, embraced, and gave great gifts the one to the other, to knit up the knot of continual amity. Poncha gave Vaschus a hundred and ten pounds weight of gold, of that pound which the Spaniards call Pesum. He had no greater plenty of gold at this time, by reason he was spoiled the year before, as we have said. Vaschus to recompense one benefit with another, gave him certain of our things, as counterfeit rings, Crystal stones, copper chains, & bracelets, hawks bells, looking glasses, and such other fine stuff. These things they set much by, & greatly esteem: for such things as are strange, 
Strange things are counted precious.  are every where counted precious. He gave also to Poncha certain axes to fell trees, which he accepted as a princely gift, because they lack Iron, and all other metals except gold: by reason whereof, 
Lack of Iron.  they are enforced with great labour to cut their trees to build their houses, and specially to make their boats hollow, with-without instruments of Iron, with certain sharp stones, which they find in the rivers. 
A stone in the steed of Iron.  Thus Vaschus, leaving all things in safety behind him, marched forward with his army toward the mountains, by the conduct of certain guides and labourers which Poncha had given him, aswell to lead him the way, as also to carry his baggages, and open the straights through the desolate places and craggy rocks full of the dens of wild beasts: for there is seldom any intercourse of buying and selling between these naked people, because they stand in need of few things, and have not the use of money: but if at any time they exercise any bartering, they do it but near hand, exchanging gold for household stuff, with their confines, which somewhat esteem the same for ornament when it is wrought. Other superfluities they utterly contemn, 
Superfluities hinder liberty.  as hindrances of their sweet liberty, forasmuch as they are given only to play and idleness. And for this cause the high ways which lie between their regions, are not much worn with many journeys, yet have their scouts certain privy marks, whereby they know the way the one to invade the others dominions, and spoil and infest themselves on both sides with mutual incursions privily in the night season. By the help therefore of their guides and labourers, with our Carpenters, he passed over the horrible mountains, 
Carpenters.  and many great rivers lying in the way, over the which he made bridges, 
bridges.  either with piles or trunks of trees. And here do I let pass many things which they suffered for lack of necessaries, being also in manner overcome with extreme labour, lest I should be tedious in rehearsing things of small value. But I have thought it good not to omit such doings as he had with the kings by the way. Therefore or ever he came to the tops of the high mountains, he entered into a region called Quarequa, 
The region of Quarequa.  and met with the king thereof called by the same name, with a great band of men armed after their manner, as with bows and arrows, long and broad two handed swords made of wood, long staves hardened at the ends with fire, darts also and slings. He came proudly and cruelly against our men, and sent messengers to them to bid them stand and proceed no further, demanding whither they went, and what they had to do there? Herewith he came forth and showed himself, being appareled with all his nobility, but the other were all naked. Then approaching toward our men, he threatened them, with a Lion's countenance, to departed from thence, except they would be slain every mother's son. When our men denied that they would go back, he assailed them fiercely, but the battle was soon finished: 
king Quarequa is driven to flight. Hargabusies.  for assoon as they heard the noise of the hargabusies, they believed that our men carried thunder and lightening about with them. Many also being slain and sore wounded with quarrels of crossbows, they turned their backs and fled. 
Crossbows  Our men following them in the chase, hewed them in pieces, as the Butchers do flesh in the shambles, from one an arm, from another a leg, from him a buttock, from another a shoulder, and from some the neck from the body at one stroke. Thus, six hundred of them, with their king, were slain like bruit beasts. 
vi. C. Barbarians are slain  Vaschus found the house of this king infected with most abominable and unnatural lechery: for he found the kings brother, and many other young men in women's apparel, smooth and effeminately decked, which by the report of such as dwelled about him, he abused with preposterous venus. Of these about the number of forty, he commanded to be given for a pray to his dogs: for (as we have said) the spaniards use the help of dogs in their wars against the naked people, 
The use of dogs in the war against the naked Barbarians.  whom they invade as fiercely and ravenyngly, as if they were wild bores or Hearts: insomuch that our spaniards have found their dogs no less faithful to them in all dangers and enterprises, than did the Colophonians or Castabalences, which instituted whole armies of dogs, so made to serve in the wars, that being accustomed to place them in the forefront of the battles, they never shrunk or gave back. 
Natural hatred of unnatural sin.  When the people had heard of the severe punishment which our men had executed upon that filthy kind of men, they resorted to them as it had been to Hercules for refuge, by violence bringing with them all such as they knew to be infected with that pestilence, spitting in their faces, and crying out to our men to take revenge of them, and rid them out of the world from among men, as contagious beasts. This stinking abomination had not yet entered among the people, but was exercised only by the noble men and gentlemen. But the people lifting up their hands & eyes toward heaven, 
I would all men were of this opinion.  gave tokens that God was grievously offended with such vile deeds, affirming this to be the cause of their so many thunderynges, lightening, and tempests, wherewith they are so often troubled, and of the overflowing of waters which drown their sets and fruits, whereof famine and divers diseases ensue, as they simply and faithfully believe, although they know none other GOD then the sun, whom only they honour, thinking that it doth both give and take away, as it is pleased or offended: Yet are they very docible, 
The harvest is great, and the workmen but few.  and easy to be alured to our customs and religion, if they had any teacher. In their language there is nothing unpleasant to the ear, or hard to be pronounced, but that all their words may be written with latin letters, as we said of the inhabitants of Hispaniola. 
Warlike people.  It is a warlike nation, and hath been ever hitherto molestous to their borderers: but the region is not fortunate with fruitful ground, or plenty of gold. Yet is it full of great barren mountains, 
The higher, the colder.  being somewhat cold by reason of their height, and therefore the noble men and gentlemen are appareled, but the common people live content only with the benefits of nature. There is a region not past two days journey distant from Quarequa, in which they found only black moors, 
A region of black Moors  and those exceeding fierce and cruel. They suppose that in time past certain black moors sailed thither out of Ethiopia to rob, and that by shipwreck or some other chance, they were driven to those mountains. The inhabitants of Quarequa live in continual war and debate with these black men. Here Vaschus leaving in Quarequa many of his soldiers (which by reason they were not yet accustomed to such travails and hunger, 
Diseases of change of air and diet.  fell into divers diseases) took with him certain guides of the Quarequatans', to conduct him to the tops of the mountains. From the palace of king Poncha, to the prospect of the other south sea, 
The south sea.  is only six days journey, the which nevertheless, by reason of many hindrances & chances, and especially for lack of victuals, he could accomplish in no less than xxv days. But at the length, the seventh day of the kalends of October, he beheld with wondering eyes the tops of the high mountains, showed unto him by the guides of Quarequa, from the which he might see the other sea so long looked for, and never seen before of any man coming out of our world. Approaching therefore to the tops of the mountains, he commanded his army to stay, and went himself alone to the top, as it were to take the first possession thereof. Where, falling prostrate upon the ground, 
Prayer.  and raising himself again upon his knees, as the manner of the Christians is to pray, lifting up his eyes and hands toward heaven, and directing his face toward the new found south sea, he powered forth his humble and devout prayers before almighty God, as a spiritual sacrifice with thanks giving, that it pleased his divine majesty, to reserve unto that day the victory and praise of so great a thing unto him, being a man but of small wit and knowledge, of little experience, and base parentage. 
God raiseth the poor from the dounghyl  When he had thus made his prayers after his warlike manner, he beckoned with his hand to his companions, to come to him, showing them the great main sea heretofore unknown to th'inhabitants of Europe, afric, and Asia. Here again he fell to his prayers as before, desiring almighty God (and the blessed virgin) to favour his beginnings, and to give him good success to subdue those lands, to the glory of his holy name, and increase of his true religion. All his companions did likewise, and praised God with loud voices for joy. Then Vascus, with no less manly courage than Hannibal of Carthage showed his soldiers italy, and the promontories of the Alpes, 
Hannibal of Carthage.  exhorted his men to life up their hearts, and to behold the land even now under their feet, and the sea before their eyes, which should be unto them a full and just reward of their great labours and travails now overpassed. When he had said these words, he commanded them to raise certain heaps of stones, in the stead of altars, for a token of possession. They descending from the tops of the mountains, lest such as might come after him should argue him of lying or falsehood, he wrote the king of Castles name here and there, on barks of the trees, both on the right hand and on the left, and raised heaps of stones all the way that he went, until he came to the region of the next king toward the south, whose name was Chiapes. This king came forth against him with a great multitude of men, threatening and forbidding him not only to pass through his dominions, 
King Chiapes.  but also to go no further. Hereupon Vaschus set his battle in array, 
A battle.  and exhorted his men (being now but few) fiercely to assail their enemies, and to esteem them no better than dogs meat, as they should be shortly. Placing therefore the harquebusiers and mastiffs in the forefroont, they saluted king Chiapes and his men with such alarum, 
Chiapes is driven to flight.  that when they heard the noise of the guns, saw the flames of fire, and smelled the savour of brimstone (for the wind blewe towards them) they drove themselves to flight, with such fear lest thunderboultes and lightnings followed them, that many fell down to the ground, whom our men pursuing, first keeping their order, and after breaking their array, slew but few, and took many captive: For they determined to use no extremity, but to pacify those regions as quietly as they might. Entering therefore into the palace of king Chiapes, Vaschus commanded many of the captives to be loosed, 
Vaschus sendeth for king Chiapes.  willing them to search out their king, and to exhort him to come thither: and that in so doing, he would be his friend, and proffer him peace, beside many other benefits: But if he refused to come, it should turn to the destruction of him and his, and utter subversion of his country. And that they might the more assuredly do this message to Chiapes, he sent with them certain of the guides which came with him from Quarequa. 
Chiapes submitteth him sel●e to Vaschus.  Thus Chiapes, being persuaded aswell by the Quarequans, who could conjecture to what end the matter would come, by th'experience which they had seen in themselves and their king, as also by the reasons of his own men, to whom Vaschus had made such friendly promises in his behalf, came forth of the caves in the which he lurked, and submitted himself to Vaschus, who accepted him friendly. They joined hands, embraced the one the other, made a perpetual league of friendship, and gave great rewards on both sides. Chiapes gave Vaschus four hundred pounds weight of wrought gold, of those pounds which they call Pesos, and Vaschus recompensed him again with certain of our things. Thus being made friends, they remained together a few days, until Vaschus soldiers were come, which he left behind him in Quarequa. Then calling unto him the guides and labourers which came with him from thence, he rewarded them liberally, and dismissed them with thanks. Shortly after, by the conduct of Chiapes himself, and certain of his men departing from the tops of the mountains, he came in the space of four days to the banks of the new sea: where assembling all his men together, with the kings scribes and notaries, they addicted all that main sea with all the lands adjacent thereunto, to the dominion and Empire of Castille. Here he left part of his soldiers with Chiapes, that he might the easilier search those coasts. And taking with him niene of their lighters made of one whole tree (which they call Culchas, as thinhabitants of Hispaniola call them Canoas') & also a band of fourscore men, with certain of Chiapes men, he passed over a great river, and came to the region of a certain king, whose name was Coquera. He attempted to resist our men as did the other, and with like success: for he was overcome and put to flight. But Vaschus, who intended to win him with gentleness, sent certain Chiapeans to him, to declare the great power of our men, how invincible they were, how merciful to such as submit themselves, also cruel and severe to such as obstinately withstand them: Promising him furthermore, that by the friendship of our men, he might be well assured by th'example of other, not only to live in peace and quietness himself, but also to be revenged of the injuries of his enemies: Willing him in conclusion so to weigh the matter, that if he refused this gentleness proffered unto him by so great a victorer, he should or it were long learn by feeling, to repent him to late of that peril which he might have avoided by hearing. Coquera with these words and examples, shaken with great fear, came gladly with the messengers, bringing with him .650. Pesos of wrought gold, which he gave unto our men. Vaschus rewarded him likewise, as we said before of Poncha. Coquera being thus pacified, they returned to the palace of Chiapes, where, visiting their companions, and resting there a while, Vaschus determined to search the next great gulf, the which, from the furthest reaching thereof into the land of their countries, 
A gulf of threescore miles. Saint Michael's gulf.  from the entrance of the main sea, they say to be threescore miles. This they named saint Michael's gulf, which they say to be full of inhabited Islands and hugeous rocks. Entering therefore into the niene boats of Culchas, wherewith he passed over the river before, 
The manly courage and godly zeal of Vaschus  having also with him the same company of fourscore whole men, he went forward on his purpose, although he were greatly dissuaded by Chiapes, who earnestly desired him not to attempt that voyage at that time, affirming the gulf to be so tempestuous and stormy three months in the year, that the sea was there by no means navigable, and that he had seen many Culchas devoured of whirlpools, even before his eyes. But invincible Vaschus, impatient of idleness, and void of all fear in God's cause, answered, that God and his holy saints would prosper his enterprises in this case, forasmuch as the matter touched God, and the defence of the Christian religion, for the maintenance whereof, it should be necessary to have abundance of riches and treasure, as the sinews of war against the enemies of the faith. 

riches are the sinews of war  
The faithfulness of king Chiapes.   Thus using also the office both of an orator and preacher, and having persuaded his companions, he launched from the land. But Chyapes, lest Vaschus should any thing doubt of his faithfulness toward him, proffered himself to go with him whither soever he went, and would by no means assent that Vaschus should departed from his palace, but that he would bring him on the way, and take part of his fortune. Therefore, assoon as they were now entered into the main sea, such surges & conflicts of water arose against them, that they were at their wits ends, 
A tempest on the sea.  whither to turn them, or where to rest. Thus being tossed and amazed with fear, the one looked on the other with pale & uncheerful countenances, but especially Chiapes and his company, who had before time with their eyes seen the experience of those jeopardies, were greatly discomforted (yet as God would) they escaped all, and landed at the next Island, where, making fast their boats, they rested there that night. 
The increasing of the South sea.  Here the water so increased, that it almost overflowed the Island. They say also, that the South sea doth so in manner boil and swell, that when it is at the highest, it doth cover many great rocks, which at the fall thereof, are seen far above the water. But on the contrary part, all such as inhabit the North sea, affirm with one voice, that it scarcely riseth at any time a cubit above the banks, 
The north Ocean.  as they also confess which inhabit the Island of Hispaniola, and other Islands situate in the same. The Island therefore being now dry by the fall of the water, they resorted to their boats, which they found all overwhelmed, & full of sand, and some sore bruised with great rifts, and almost lost by reason their cables were broken: such as were bruised, they tied fast with their girdles, with slips of the barks of trees, and with tough and long stalks of certain herbs of the sea, 
Hard shift in necessity.  stopping the rifts or chynkes with grass, according to the present necessity. Thus were they enforced to return back again, like unto men that came from shipwreck, being almost consumed with hunger, because their victuals were utterly destroyed by tempest. The inhabitants declared that there is heard all the year horrible roaring of the sea among those Islands, as often as it riseth or falleth, but this most especially in those three months in the which it is most boisterous, as Chiapes told Vaschus before, meaning (as they could conjecture by his words) October, November, and December: for he signified the present moon, & the two moons following, counting the months by the moons, whereas it was now October. Here therefore refreshing himself and his soldiers a while, and passing by one unprofitable king, he came to another, whose name was Tumaccus, after the name of the region, 
The region Tumacca.  being situate on that side of the gulf. This Tumaccus came forth against our men, as did the other, and with like fortune: for he was overcome, driven to flight, and many of his men slain. 
King Tumaccus is driven to flight.  He himself was also sore wounded, but yet escaped. Vaschus sent certain messengers of the Chiapians to him, to return, and not to be afraid: but he could be nothing moved, neither by promises, nor threatenings: yet when the messengers were instant, and ceased not to threaten death to him and his family, with the utter desolation of his kingdom, if he persisted in that obstinacy, at the length he sent his son with them, whom Vaschus honourably enterteyning, apparelling him gorgeously, and giving him many gifts, sent him to his father, willing him to persuade him of the puissance, munificence, liberality, humanity, and clemency of our men. Tumaccus being moved by this gentleness declared toward his son, came with him the third day, bringing nothing with him at that tyme. But after that he knew that our men desired gold and pearls, he sent for two hundred and fourteen Pesos of gold, and two hundred and forty of the bigest and fairest pearls, 
Gold and pearls.  beside a great number of the smallest sort. Our men marveled at the bigness and fairness of these pearls, although they were not perfectly white, because they take them not out of the sea muscles, except they first roast them, that they may the easilier open themself, 
Muscles of the sea.  and also that the fish may have the better taste, which they esteem for a delicate and princely dish, and set more thereby, then by the pearls themselves. Of these things I was informed of one Arbolantius, being one of Vaschus companions, whom he sent to the king with many pearls, and certain of those sea muscles. But when Tumaccus saw that our men so greatly regarded the beauty of the pearls, he commanded certain of his men to prepare themselves to go a fishing for pearls: 
fishing for pearls.  Who departing, came again within four days, bringing with them twelve pound weight of orient pearls, after eight ounces to the pound. Thus rejoicing on both parties, they embraced, and made a league of continual friendship. Tumaccus thought himself happy that he had presented our men with such thankful gifts, and was admitted to their friendship: and our men thinking themselves happy and blessed that they had found such tokens of great riches, 
The thirst of gold.  swallowed down their spittle for thirst. At all these doings, king Chiapes was present, as a witness and companion. He also rejoiced not a little, aswell that by his conducting he saw that our men should be satisfied of their desire, as also that by this means he had declared to the next king his borderer and enemy, what friends he had of our men, 
Ambition among naked men.  by whose aid he might live in quietness, and be revenged of his adversary, if need should so require. For (as we have said) these naked kings infest themselves with grievous wars, only for ambition and desire to rule. Vaschus boasteth in his epistle, that he learned certain marvelous secrets of Tumaccus himself, as concerning the great riches of this land, whereof (as he saith) he would utter nothing at this present, forasmuch as Tumaccus told it him in his ear. But he was informed of both the kings, that there is an Island in that gulf, greater than any of the other, having in it but only one king, and him of so great power, that at such times of the year as the sea is calm, 
A king of grea● power.  he invadeth their dominions with a great navy of Culchas, spoiling and carrying away for a pray all that he meeteth. This Island is distant from these coasts, only twenty miles: So that the promontories or points thereof, reaching into the sea, may be seen from the hills of this continent. In the sea near about this Island, sea muscles are engendered, of such quantity, that many of them are as broad as bucklers. In these are pearls found (being the hearts of those shell fishes) oftentimes as big as beans, 
Big pearls.  sometimes bigger than olives, 
Cleopatra, queen of Egypt, resolved a pearl in vinegar & drunk it. Price five thousand pound of our money.  and such as sumptuous Cleopatra might have desired. Although this Island be so near to the shore of this firm land, yet is the beginning thereof in the main sea, without the mouth of the gulf. Vaschus being joyful and merry with this rich communication, fantasing now in manner nothing but princes treasures, began to speak fierce and cruel words against the tyrant of that Island, meaning hereby to win the minds of the other kings, and bind them to him with a nearer bond of petition. Yet therefore railing further on him with spiteful and approbrious words, he swore great oaths, that he would forthwith invade the Island, spoiling, destroying, burning, drowning, and hanging, sparing neither sword nor fire, until he had revenged their injuries: and therewith commanded his Culchas to be in a readiness. But the two kings, Chiapes and Tumaccus▪ exhorted him friendly to defer this enterprise, until a more quiet season, because that sea was nor navigable without great danger, being now the beginning of November: Wherein the kings seemed to say true. For as Vaschus himself writeth, great roaring of the sea was heard among the islands of the gulf, by reason of the raging and conflict of the water. Great rivers also, descending from the tops of the mountains the same time of the year, and overflowing their banks, driving down with their violence great rocks and trees, make a marvelous noise. Likewise the fury of the South and north-east winds, associate with thunder and lightning at the same season, did greatly molest them. While the wether was fair, they were vexed in the night with cold, and in the day time the heat of the Son troubled them, whereof it is no marvel, forasmuch as they were near unto the Equinoctial line, although they make no mention of the elevation of the pole, for in such regions, in the night the Moon and other cold planets, but in the day the Son and other hot planets, do chiefly exercise their influence, although the antiquity were of an other opinion, supposing the Equinoctial circle to be unhatable and desolate, by reason of the heat of the Son, having his course perpendicularly or directly over the same, except a few of the contrary opinion, whose assertions the Portugals have at these days by experience proved to be true: for they sail yearly to thinhabitants of the south pole, being in manner Antipodes to the people called Hyperborei under the North pole, and exercise merchandise with them. And here have I named Antipodes, forasmuch as I am not ignorant that there hath been men of singular wit and great learning, which have denied that there is Antipodes, that is, such as walk feet to feet. But it is most certain, that it is not given to any one man to know all things, for even they also were men, whose property is to err, and be deceived in many things. Nevertheless, the Portugals of our time, have sailed to the five and fifty degree of the south pole: 
The stars about the south pole.  where, compassing about the point thereof, they might see throughout all the heaven about the same, certain shynning white clouds here and there among the stars, like unto them which are seen in the tract of heaven called Lactea via, that is, the milk white way. They say, there is no notable star near about that pole, like unto this of ours, which the common people think to be the pole of itself (called of the Italians Tramontana, 
A similitude declaring Antipodes.  and of the spaniards Nortes) but that the same falleth beneath the Ocean. When the Son descendeth from the midst of the exiltree of the world from us, it riseth to them, as a pair of balances, whose weight inclining from the equal poise in the midst toward either of the sides, causeth the one end to rise as much as the other falleth. When therefore it is Autumn with us, it is spring time with them, and summer with us, when it is winter with them. But it sufficeth to have said thus much of strange matters. Let us now therefore return to the history, and to our men.   

The second book of the third Decade.  
VAschus by thadvice of king Chiapes and Tumaccus, determined to defer his voyage to the said Island, until the next spring or summer, at which time, Chiapes offered himself to accompany our men, and aid them therein all that he might. In this mean time, Vaschus had knowledge that these kings had nets and fishing places in certain stations of that sea near unto the shore where they were accustomed to fish for sea muscles, in the which pearls are engendered, 
The manner of of fishing for pearls.  and that for this purpose they had certain divers or fishers, exercised from their youth in swimming under the water. But they do this only at certain times when the sea is calm, that they may the easier come to the place where these shell fishes are wont to lie: for the bigger that they are, so much lie they the deeper & nearer to the bottom: but the lesser, as it were daughters to tother, are nearer the brim of the water: likewise the least of all, as it were their nieses, are yet nearer to the superficial part thereof. To them of the bigest fort which lie lowest, the fys●hers descend the depth of three men's height, and sometime four, but to the daughters or nieses, as their succession, they descend only to the mid thigh. Sometimes also, after that the sea hath been disquieted with vehement tempests, they find a great multitude of these fishes on the sands, being driven to the shore by the violence of the water. The pearls of these, which are found on the sand, are but little, the fish itself, is more pleasant in eating, then are our oysters, as our men report: But perhaps hunger, the sweet sauce of all meats, caused our men so to think. Whether pearls be the hearts of sea muscles (as Aristotle supposed) or the birth or spawn of their entrails (as Pliny thought) or whether they cleave continually to the rocks, or wander by companies in the sea by the guiding of the eldest, whether every fish bring forth one pearl or more, at one birth, or at divers: also whether they be filed from the rocks whereunto they cleave, or may be easily pulled away, or otherwise fall of by themselves when they are come to their full growth: Likewise whether pearls be hard within the shell, or soft, our men have as yet no certain experience, but I trust or it be long to know the truth hereof: for our men are even now in hand with the matter. Also, as soon as I shall be advertised of the arrival of Petrus Arias the captain of our men, 
Petrus Arias.  I will desire him by my letters to make diligent search for these things, and certify me thereof in all points. I know that he will not be slack or omit any thing herein, for he is my very friend, and one that taketh great pleasure in considering the works of nature. And surely it seemeth unto me undecent, that we should with silence overslyp so great a thing, which aswell in the old time, as in our days, hath and yet doth, draw both men and women to the immoderate desire of superfluous pleasure. 
Wanton and superfluous pleasures.  Spain therefore shallbe able hereafter with pearls to satisfy the greedy appetite of such as in wanton pleasures are like unto Cleopatra and Asopus: So that from henceforth we shall neither envy nor reverence the nice fruitfulness of Stoidum, or Taprobana, or the red sea. But let us now return to our purpose. Vaschus therefore determined with the fishers of Chiapes, to prove what might be done in his fish pools or stations of sea muscles. Chiapes to show himself obedient to Vaschus his request, although the sea were boisterous, commanded thirty of his fishers to prepare themselves, and to resort to the fishing places. Vaschus sent only six of his men with them, to behold them from the sea banks, but not to commit themselves to the danger of the sea. The fishing place was distant from the palace of Chiapes about ten miles. 
The fishing place of king Chiapes.  They durst not adventure to dive to the bottom, by reason of the fury of the sea: Yet of the muscles which lie highest, and of such as were driven to the shore by the violence of the water, they brought two great farthels in the space of a few days. The pearls of these were but little, about the bigness of small fitches: yet very fair and beautiful, by reason that they were taken newly out of the fish, being yet raw. And that they should not be reproved of lying, as concerning the bigness of these sea muscles, they sent many of them into Spain to the king, with the pearls, the fish being taken out: We think verily that there may in no place bigger be found. These shell fishes therefore being thus found here in so many places in that sea, and gold in manner in every house, 
Gold in manner in every house. The rich treasury of nature.  do argue the rich treasury of nature to be hid in those coasts, forasmuch as great riches have been found, as it were in the little finger of a giants' hand. What then may we think of the whole hand of the giant (for hitherto they have only been in hand with the confines of Vraba) when they shall have throughly searched all the coasts and secrets of the inner parts of all that large land? But Vaschus contented with these signs, and joyful of his good success in these enterprises, determined by another way to return to his fellows in Dariena, where also they have gold mines, 
The gold mines of Dariena.  about ten miles from the village. He gave therefore king Chiapes leave to departed, and to follow him no further, counselling him to continue faithful unto the christian king his lord and master. Thus embracing the one the other, & joining hands, Chiapes departed with tears, declaring the good mind which he bore to our men. Vaschus leaving his sick men with Chiapes, went forward on his journey with the residue, having also with him for guides three of Chiapes Mariners. He conveyed his army over a great river, into the dominion of a certain king called Teaocha, who being advertised of the coming of our men, 
King Teaocha enterteyneth Vaschus friendly.  of whose famous acts he had heard much before, was very glad thereof, and entertained them honourably, so that for a token of his friendly affection toward them, he gave Vaschus twenty pounds weight of wrought gold, after eight ounces to the pound: 
Twenty pound weight of wrought gold.  also two hundred big pearls, but not fair, by reason they were taken out of the muscles after they had been sodden. After they had joined hands, Vaschus recompensed him with certain of our things: likewise rewarding his guides the servants of Chiapes, he dismissed them with commendations to their lord. King Teaocha, at the departure of our men from his palace, did not only appoint them guides to conduct them in the way, but also gave them certain slaves, in the steed of beasts to carry their victuals, because they should pass through many deserts, barren and rough mountains and terrible woods full of Tigers and Lions. 
Deserts full of wild beasts.  He sent also one of his sons with these slaves, lading them with salted and dried fish, & bread of those regions, made of the roots of Maizium and jucca. 
Dried fish.  He also commanded his son not to departed from our men, until he were licenced by Vaschus. By their conducting therefore, Vaschus came to the dominion of an other king, whose name was Pacra, a cruel tyrant, fearful to the other kings his borderers, 
King Pacra a tyrant.  and of greater power than any of them. This tyrant, whether it were that his guilty conscience, for his mischievous acts, put him in fear that our men would revenge the same, or that he thought himself inferior to resist them, fled at their coming. Vaschus writeth, that in these regions in the month of November, 
Great heat in the month of November.  he was sore afflicted with great heat and intolerable thirst, by reason that side of the mountains hath little water: insomuch that they were in danger to have perished, but that certain of thinhabitants showed them of a spring, which was in the secret place of a wood, whither Vaschus with all speed sent two quick & strong young men of his companions, with their gourds, and such water vessels as Teaocha his men brought with them. Of thinhabitants, there durst none departed from their company, because the wild beasts do soon invade naked men: For in those mountains, and especially in the woods near unto the spring, they say that they are sometimes taken out of their houses in the night, except they take good heed that the doors be well spared. 
Hurt by wild beasts.  It shall not be from my purpose here to declare a particular chance, before I enter any further in this matter. They say therefore, that the last year the region of Dariena was no less infested and troubled with a fierce Tiger, 
A Tiger. Calidonia is a forest in scotland. Nemea is a wood in Greece.  than was Calidonia in time passed with a wild Boor, and Nemea with a horrible Lion. For they affirm that for the space of six whole months, there passed not one night without some hurt done: so that it killed nightly either a Bullock, a Mare, a Dog, or a Hog, and sometimes even in the high ways of the village: For our men have now great herds of cattle in those regions. They say also, that when this Tiger had whelps, no man might safely go forth of his doors, 
Tiger's whelps.  because she spared not men, if she met first with them. But at the length, necessity enforced them to invent a policy how they might be revenged of such bloodshed. Searching therefore diligently her footsteps, 
Thus the Egyptians take Crocodiles  and following the path whereby she was accustomed in the night season to wander out of her den to seek her pray, they made a great trench or pit in her walk, covering the same with hurdles, whereupon they cast part of the earth, and dispersed the residue. The dog Tiger chanced first into this pitfall, 
The dog tiger taken.  and fell upon the points of sharp stakes, and such other engines as were of purpose fixed in the bottom of the trench. Being thus wounded, he roared so terribly, that it grated the bowels of such as hard him, 
The roaring of the tiger.  and the woods and mountains near about rebounded the noise of the horrible cry. When they perceived that he was laid fast, they resorted to the trench, and slew him with stones, darts, and pikes. With his teeth and claws he broke the darts into a thousand chips. Being yet dead, he was fearful to all such as beheld him: what then think you he would have done being alive and lose? One johannes Ledisma of Civil, a near friend to Vascus, and one of the companions of his travails, 
Tiger's flesh eaten.  told me that he himself did eat of the flesh of that Tiger, and that it was nothing inferior to beef in goodness. Being demanded how they knew it to be a Tiger, forasmuch as none of them had ever seen a Tiger: they answered that they knew it by the spots, fierceness, agility, and such other marks and tokens whereby ancient writers have described the Tiger. For some of them had before time seen other spotted wild beasts, as Libardes and Panthers. The dog Tiger being thus killed, 
The birth tiger.  they following the trase of his steps toward the mountains, came to the den where the bitch remained with her two young sucking whelps. But she was not in the den at their coming. 
Tiger's whelps.  They first carried away the whelps with them. But afterwards, fearing lest they should die because they were young, intending when they were bigger to send them into Spain, they put chains of iron about their necks, and carried them again to their den: whither returning within a few days after, they found the den empty, and they chains not removed from their place. They suppose that the dam in her fury tore them in pieces, 
A strange thing.  and carried them away, lest any should have the fruition of them. For they plainly affirm, that it was not possible that they should be loosed from the chains alive. The skin of the dead Tiger stuffed with dry herbs and straws, they sent to Hispaniola, to the Admiral, and other of the chief rulers, from whom the new lands receive their laws and succour. It shall at this time suffice to have written thus much of the Tigers, as I have learned by report of them which both sustained damage by their ravening, and also handled the skin of that which was slain. 
King Pacra.  Let us now therefore return to king Pacra, from whom we have digressed. When Vaschus had entered into the houses forsaken of Pacra, he sent messengers to reconcile him, as he had done the other kings. At the first he refused to come: but after threatenings he came, with three other kings in his company. Vaschus writeth, that he never saw a more monstrous & deformed creature, and that nature hath only given him human shape, and otherwise to be worse than a bruit beast, with manners according to the lineaments of his body. He abused, with most abominable lechery, the daughters of four kings his borderers, from whom he had taken them by violence. 
Natural hatred of vice.  Of the filthy behaviour of Pacra, of his cruelty, and injures done by him, many of the other kings made grievous complaints to Vaschus, as unto a high judge, and just revenger, most humbly beseeching him to see such things punished, forasmuch as they took him for a man sent of God for that purpose. hereupon Vaschus, aswell to win their good wills, as also to show an example of terror to such as used like fashions, commanded that this monstrous beast, with the other three kings which were subject to him, 
Four Kings devoured of dogs.  and of like conditions, should be given for a pray to his fighting dogs, and their torn carcases to be burned. Of these dogs which they use in the wars, 
The use of dogs in war against naked men.  they tell marvelous things: for they say, that they run upon thinhabitants, armed after their manner, with no less fierceness, then if they were Hearts or wild Boars, if the Spaniards do but only point toward them with their fingers: insomuch that oftentimes they have had no need to drive their enemies to flight with swords or arrows, but have done the same only with dogs, placed in the forefront of their battle, and letting them slip with their watch word and privy token: whereupon the barbarians strycken with fear, by reason of the cruel countenances of their mastiffs, with their desperate boldness, and unaccustomed howling and barking, have disparckled at the first onset, and broke their array. Yet it chanceth otherwise when they have any conflict against the Canibales, and the people of Caramairi: 
The Canibales are expert archers.  for these are fiercer and more warlike men, also so expert archers, that they can most certainly direct their venomous arrows against the dogs, with such celereity as if they were thunderbolts, by reason whereof, they sometimes kill many of them. the inhabitauntes of these mountains do not keep war with bows and arrows, but use only Macanis, that is, certain long and broad swords made of wood, also slings, long pikes, 
Swords of wood.  and darts, hardened at the ends with fire. While king Pacra yet lived, no man could know of him, neither by fair means nor by fowl, where he had the gold which was found in his house: for our men found in his jewel house fifty pounds weight of gold. Being therefore demanded where he had it, 
Fifty pound weight of gold.  he answered, that they which gathered the same in those mountains in his father's days, were all dead, and that sense he was a child, he never esteemed gold more than stones: More than this they could not get of him. By this severe punishment executed upon Pacra, Vaschus concyled unto him the minds of all the other kings of that province, and by this means it came to pass, that when he sent for the sick men which he left behind him with king Chiapes, another king which was in the mid way, 
King Bononiama, friend to the christians.  (whose name was Bononiama) entertained them gently, and gave them twenty pound weight of pure wrought gold, beside great plenty of victuals. And not this only, 
Wrought gold.  but also accompanied them himself, until he had brought them safely from his palace, into the dominion of Pacra, where taking each of them by the right hands, he delivered them to Vaschus himself, as a faithful pledge committed to his charge, and therewith spoke to Vaschus in this effect: Most mighty and valiant victorer, behold, I here deliver unto you, your companions in such plight as I received them: wishing that I had been aswell able to give them health, 
The oration of king Bononiama.  as they were heartily welcome to such poor entertainment as I was able to show them. For the favour and gentleness which I have found both in you and them, 
The spark of the law of nature, is the law written in the hearts of men.  he shall reward you which sendeth thundering and lightening to the destruction of mischievous men, and of his clemency giveth unto good men plenty of jucca and Maizium in due season. As he spoke these words, he lifted up his hands and eyes toward the Son, whom they honour as God. Then he spoke further to Vaschus, saying, In that you have destroyed and slain our violent and proud enemies, you have brought peace and quietness to us and our families, and bound us for ever to love and obey you. You have so overcome and tamed wild monsters, that we think you to be sent from heaven, for the punishment of evil men, and defence of innocentes, that under the protection of your mighty sword, we may hereafter lead our lives without fear, and with more quietness give thanks to the giver of all good things, for his mercy showed unto us in this behalf. When the interpreter had told Vaschus that the king Bononiana had said these words, and such like, Vaschus rendered him like thanks for his humanity declared toward our men, and rewarded him as he had done other in whom he found like gentleness. Vaschus writeth, that he learned many things of this king as concerning the great richesse of these regions, but that he would at this present speak nothing thereof, and rehearseth the same, as things like to have good success. What this implicate Hyperbole, or advancement meaneth, I do not well understand, but he plainly seemeth hereby to promise many great things. And surely it is to be thought, 
Great plenty of gold.  that according to his hope, great riches may be looked for. For they came in manner into none of thinhabitants houses, but that they found in them either bresteplates or curettes of gold, or else golden ouches, jewels, or garlands to wear about their heads, necks, or arms. I conjecture therefore thus by a similitude of our houses: 
A similitude for the proof of plenty of gold.  If among us any man of great power were moved with the desire to have great plenty of Iron, and would enter into Italy with a main force, as did the Goths in time past, what abundance of Iron should he have in their houses, whereas he should find in one place a frying-pan, in another a cauldron, here a trivet, and there a spit●e, and these in manner in every poor man's house, with such other innumerable? whereby any man may conjecture, that iron is plentifully engendered in such regions where they have so great use thereof. Our men also perceived, that the inhabitants of these regions do no more esteem gold than we do iron, nor yet so much, after they saw to what use iron served us. Thus much have I thought good to write to your holiness, of such things as I have gathered out of the letters of Vaschus Nunnez, and learned by word of mouth of such as were his companions in these affairs. As we receive them, so we give them unto you. Time, which revealeth all secrets, shall hereafter minister larger argument of writing. They could at this time do no great thing in searching the gold mines, forasmuch as of a hundred, fourscore, and ten men, which Vaschus brought with him from Dariena, there remained only threescore and ten, or at the most fourscore, whose aid he now used in these dangerous adventures, leaving ever the crazed men behind him in the kings houses all the way that he went, but they most especially fell into sundry diseases, which came lately from Hispaniola, 
Change of diet is dangerous.  for they were not able to abide such calamities, as to live only contented with the bread of those regions, and wild herbs, without salt, drinking none other than river water, and that oftentimes either lacking, or unwholesome, where as before their stomachs had been used to good meats. But the old soldiers of Dariena, were hardened to abide all sorrows, & exceeding tolerable of labour, heat, hunger, 
Old soldiers.  & watching, insomuch that merrily they make their boast, that they have observed a longer & sharper Lent than ever your holiness enjoined: for they say, that for the space of four whole years, 
A long lent.  they ate none other than herbs and fruits, except now and then perhaps fish, and very seldom flesh: yea, and that sometime for lack of all these, they have not abhorred from mangy dogs and filthy toads, as we have said before. The old soldiers of Dariena, I call those which first followed the captains Nicuesa and Fogeda, to inhabit the land, of the which now few were living. But let us now omit these things, and return to Vaschus, the vyctourer of the mountains.   

The third book of the third Decade.  
WHen Vaschus had remained thirty days in the palace of king Pacra, conciling unto him the minds of the inhabitants, and providing things necessary for his companions. As he departed from thence, by the conduct of certain of king Teaocha his men, and came to the bank of the river Comogrus, 
Comogrus.  whereof the region and king thereof, are named by the same name, he found the sides of these mountains so rude and barren, that there was nothing apt to be eaten but wild roots, and certain unpleasant fruits of trees. Two kings being near of blood, inhabited this unfortunate region, which Vaschus overpassed with all speed, 
Two poor kings.  for fear of hunger. One of these poor kings was named Cotochus, and the other Ciuriza. He took them both with him, to guide him the way, and dismissed Teaocha his men with victuals and rewards. Thus for the space of three days, 
Deserts.  he wandered through many desert woods, craggy mountains, & muddy marshes, full of such quamyres, that men are oftentimes swallowed up in them, if they look not the more warily to their feet: also through places not frequented with resort of men, and such as nature had not yet opened to their use, forasmuch as the inhabitants have seldom intercourse between them, but only by sundry incursions, the one to spoil and destroy the other: being otherwise contented to live only after the law of nature, without all worldly toil for superfluous pleasures. Thus entering at the length into the territory of another king, whose name was Becheb●ea, they found all things void and in silence: for the king and his subjects were all fled to the woods. When Vaschus sent messengers to fetch him, he did not only at the first submit him self, but also promise his aid, with all that he might make: Protesting furthermore, that he fled not for fear that our men would do them injury, but that he hid himself for very shame and grief of mind, for that he was not able to receive them honourably, according unto their dignity, because his store of victuals was consumed. Yet in a token of obedience and friendship, he sent our men many vessels of gold, desiring them to accept them as the gift of a friend, 
Vessels of gold.  whose good will wanted not in greater things, if his ability were greater. By which words, the poor man seemed to insinuate that he had been rob, and otherwise cruelly handled of his borderers, by reason whereof, our men were enforced to departed from thence more hungerly than they came. As they went forward therefore, they espied certain naked men coming down from a hill toward them. Vaschus commanded his army to stay, and sent his interpreters to them, to know what they would have. Then one of them, to whom the other seemed to give reverence, spoke in this effect. Our lord and king Chiorisus, greeteth you well, willing us to declare that he hard of your puissance and virtue, 
king Chiorisus sendeth Vaschus thirty. dishes of pure gold.  whereby you have subdued evil men, and revenged the wrongs done to innocentes: For the which your noble facts and justice, as he doth honour your fame, so would he think himself most happy, if he might receive you into his palace. But, forasmuch as his fortune hath been so evil (as he imputeth it) that being out of your way, you have overpassed him, he hath sent you this gold, in token of his good will and friendship toward you. And with these words he delivered to Vaschus thirty dishes of pure gold, adding hereunto, that when so ever it should please him to take the pains to come to their king, he should receive greater gifts. He declared further, that a king which was their borderer and mortal enemy, was very rich in gold, and that in subduing of him, they should both obtain great richesse, and also deliver them from daily vexations: which thing might easily be done by their help, because they knew the country. Vaschus put them in good comfort, and gave them for reward certain Iron axes, 
Axes of Iron more esteemed than any gold.  which they more esteemed then great heaps of gold. For they have they have little need of gold, having not the use of pestiferous money: but he that may get but one axe or hatchet, thinketh himself richer than ever was Crassus. For even these naked men, do perceive that an axe is necessary for a thousand uses, and confess that gold is desired only for certain vain and effeminate pleasures, as a thing which the life of man may lack without any inconvenience: for our gluttony and superfluous sumptuousness hath not yet corrupted them. By reason whereof, they take it for no shame to lack cobordes of plate, whereas the pride and wantonness of our time, doth in manner impute it to us for ignominy, to be without that, whereof by nature we have no need. But their contentation with the benefits of nature, doth plainly declare, that men may lead a free and happy life without tables, table clothes, carpets, napkins, and towels, with such other innumerable, whereof they have no use, except perhaps the kings furnish their tables with a few golden vessels. But the common people drive away hunger with a piece of their bread in the one hand, and a piece of broiled fish, or some kind of fruit in the other hand: for they eat flesh but seldom. When their fingers are imbrued with any ounctuous meats, they wipe them either on the soles of their feet, or on their thighs, ye and sometimes on the skins of their privy members, in the steed of a napkin: and for this cause do they oftentimes wash themselves in the rivers. Our men therefore went forward laden with gold, 
Plenty of gold and scarcenesss of meat.  but sore afflicted with hunger. Thus they came at the length to the dominion of king Pocchorrosa, who fled at their coming. Here for the space of thirty days, they filled their empty bellies with bread of the roots of Maizium. In the mean time, Vaschus sent for Pocchorrosa, who being alured with promises and fair words, came and submmitted himself, bringing with him for a present fifteen pounds weight of wrought gold, and a few slaves: Vaschus rewarded him as he had done other before. When he was minded to departed, he was advertised, that he should pass through the dominion of a certain king, whose name was Tumanama. This is he whom the son of king Comogrus declared to be of so great power, and fearful to all his borderers, and with whom many of Comogrus familiars had been captive, but our men now perceived that they measured his power by their own: For their kings are but gnats (compared to Elephants) in respect to the power & policy of our men. Our men were also informed by such as dwelled near about Tumanama, that his region was not beyond the mountains as they supposed, nor yet so rich in gold as young Comogrus had declared: Yet consulted they of his subduing, which they thought they might the easeliar bring to pass, because Pocchorrosa was his mortal enemy, who most gladly promised them his advice and aid herein. Vaschus therefore, leaving his sick men in the village of Pocchorrosa, took with him threescore of his most valiant soldiers, and declared unto them, how king Tumanama had often times spoken proud and threatening words against them: 
A good policy.  Likewise that it now stood them in hand of necessity to pass through his dominion, and that he thought it best to set upon him unwares. The soldiers consented to his advice, and exhorted him to give the adventure, promising that they would follow him, whither soever he went. They determined therefore to go two days journey in one day, that Tumanama, not knowing of their sudden coming, might have no leisure to assemble an army: and the thing came to pass even as they had devised. For in the first watch of the night, our men, with the Pocchorrosians, invaded the village and palace of Tumanama, where they took him prisoner, suspecting nothing less. He had with him two young men, which he abused unnaturally, also fourscore women, which he had taken violently from divers kings: likewise, a great number of his gentlemen & subjects were taken straggling in other villages near about his palace. For their houses are not adherent together as ours be, because they are oftentimes troubled with vehement whirlewyndes, by reason of the sudden changes and motions of the air, caused by the influence of the planets, 
The cause of vehement winds near the Equinocciall.  in the equality of the day and night, being there in manner both of one length throughout all the year, forasmuch as they are near unto the Equinoctial line, as we have said before. Their houses are made of trees, covered, and after their manner thatched with the stalks of certain rough herbs. To the palace of Tumanama, was only one house adherent, and that even as big as the palace itself. Either of these houses were in length a hundred and twenty paces, and in breadth fifty paces, as our men measured them. In these two houses the king was accustomed to muster his men, as often as he prepared an army. When Tumanama therefore was thus taken captive, with all his Sardanapanicall family, the Pocchorrosians bragged and threatened him, being now bound, that he should shortly be hanged: the other kings also his borderers, rejoiced at his misfortune. Whereby our men perceived that Tumanama was no less troublesome to his neighbours, than was Pacra to the kings of the south side of the mountains. Vaschus also the better to please them, threatened him grievously, but in deed intended no evil towards him. 
Vaschus his Words to King Tumanama.  He spoke therefore sharply unto him with these words: Thou shalt now suffer punishment thou cruel tyrant, for thy pride and abominations. Thou shalt know of what power the christians are, whom thou hast so contemned, and threatened to draw by the hear of their heads to the next river, and there to drown them, as thou hast oftentimes made thy vaunt among thy naked slaves: But thou thyself shalt first feel that, which thou hast prepared for others. And herewith commanded him to be taken up: Nevertheless giving a privy token of pardon to them which laid hands on him. Thus unhappy Tumanama, fearing and believing that Vaschus had meant in earnest as he commanded, fell prostrate at his feet, and with tears desired pardon: Protesting that he never spoke any such words, but that perhaps his noble men in their drunkenness had so abused their tongues, which he could not rule: For their wines, although they be not made of grapes, yet are they of force to make men drunken. He declared furthermore, that the other kings his borderers had of malice surmised such lies of him, envying his fortune, because he was of greater power than they, most humbly desiring Vaschus, 
Oderuut quem metuunt.  that as he took him to be a just victorer, so to give no credit unto their unjust and malicious complaints: Adding hereunto, that if it would please him to pardon him, not having offended, he would bring him great plenty of gold. Thus laying his right hand on his breast, he swore by the Son, that he ever loved and feared the Christians sense he first heard of their fame and victories: especially when he hard say, that they had Michanas, that is, sword sharper than theirs, and such as cut in pieces all things that come in their ways. Then directing his eyes toward Vaschus, who had his sword in his hand, he spoke thus, Who (except he were out of his wit) dare life up his hand against this sword of yours, wherewith you are able with one struck to cleave a man from the head to the navel? Let no man therefore persuade you (O most mighty victorer) that ever such words proceeded out of my mouth. As Tumanama with trembling spoke these words, therewith swallowing down the knot of death, Vaschus seemed by his tears to be moved to compassion, and speaking to him with cheerful countenance, commanded him to be loosed. This done, he sent immediately to his palace for thirty pounds weight of pure gold, artificyally wrought into sundry ouches, 
Xxx. pound weight of wrought gold.  which his wives and concubines used to wear. Also the third day following, his noble men and gentlemen, 
Threescore pounds weight of gold.  sent threescore pounds weight of gold for their fine and ransom. Tumanama being demanded where they had that gold: he answered, that it was not gathered in his dominions, but that it was brought his ancestors from the river Comogrus toward the south, But the Pocchorrosians and other his enemies said that he lied, affirming that his kingdom was rich in gold. Tumanama on the contrary part, instantly protested that he never knew any gold my in all his dominions: yet denied not but that there hath sometimes been found certain small grains of gold, to the gathering whereof, he never had any regard, because they could not get it without great & long labour. 
They abhorrce labour.  While these things were doing, the sick men which Vaschus had left in the village of Pocchorrosa, came to him the viii day of the kalends of january, in the year of Christ. M.D.XIII. bringing with them certain labourers from the kings of the south, with sundry instruments to dig the ground, and gather gold. Thus passing over the day of the nativity of Christ without bodily labour, upon Saint Stephen's day he brought certain miners to the side of a hill, not far distant from the palace of Tumanama, where (as he saith) he perceived by the colour of the earth, that it was like to bring forth gold. When they had digged a pit, 
The colour of the golden earth, and a trial of the same.  not past a hand breadth and a half, and sifted the earth thereof, they found certain small grains of gold, no bigger than lintel seeds, amounting to the weight of twelve grains, as they proved with their balances of assay, before a notary and witness, that the better credit might be given thereto. Whereby they argued, that the rychenesse of that land was agreeable to the report of the borderers, although Vaschus could by no means cause Tumanama to confess the same. They suppose that he nothing esteemed so small a portion: but other say, that he denied his country to be fruitful of gold, lest by reason thereof, the desire of gold might entice our men to inhabit his kingdom, as in deed the silly king was a prophet in so thinking. For they chose that and the region of Pocchorrosa to inhabit, and determined to build towns in them both, if it should so please the king of Castille: aswell that they might be baiting places and vittailing houses for such as should journey toward the south, as also that both the regions were fruitful, and of good ground to bear fruits and trees. Intending now therefore to departed from thence, he tried the earth by chance in an other place, where the colour of the ground, with certain shining stones, seemed to be a token of gold, where causing a small pit to be digged, little beneath the upper crust of the earth, he found so much gold, as weighed the piece of gold which the Spaniards call Castellanum aureum, 
Tokens of great plentle of gold.  and is commonly called Pesus, but not in one grain. Rejoicing at these tokens, in hope of great riches, he bad Tumanama to be of good comfort, promising him that he would be his friend and defender, so that he troubled not any of the kings, which were friends to the Christians: He also persuaded him to gather plenty of gold. Some say that he led away all Tumanama his women, and spoiled him, lest he should rebel. Yet he delivered his son to Vaschus, to be brought up with our men, to learn their language and religion, that he might hereafter the better use his help, aswell in all things that he should have to do with our men, as also more politicly rule, and obtain the love of his own subjects. Vischus at this time fell into a vehement fever, by reason of excess of labour, immoderate watching, and hunger, insomuch that departing from thence, he was fain to be borne upon men's backs in sheets of gossampyne cotton: likewise also many of his soldiers, which were so weak, that they could neither go nor stand. 
Feebleness of hunger and watching.  To this purpose they used the help of thinhabitants, who showed themselves in all things willing and obedient. Also some of them which were somewhat feeble, and not able to travail, although not grievously sick, were led by the arms, until they came to the dominion of king Comogrus, a great friend to the Christians, of whom we have largely made mention before. At Vaschus coming thither, he found that the old king was dead, and his son (whom we so praised for his wisdom) to reign in his stead, and that he was baptized by the name of Charles. The palace of this Comogrus, is situate at the foot of a steep hill well cultured, having toward the south a plain of twelve leagues in breadth, and very fruitful. This plain they call Zavana. Beyond this, are the great and high mountains, which divide the two seas, whereof we have spoken before. Out of the steep hills, springeth the river Comogrus, which runneth through the said plain to the high mountains, receiving into his channel by their valleys, 
The river Comogrus.  all other rivers, and so falleth into the south sea: It is distant from Dariena, about threescore and ten leagues toward the west. As our men therefore came to these parties, king Comogrus (otherwise called Charles by his christian name) met them joyfully, and entertained them honourably, giving them their fill of pleasant meats and drinks: He gave also to Vaschus twenty pound weight of wrought gold. Vaschus recompensed him with things which he esteemed much more, as axes, and sundry kinds of carpenters tools: also a soldiers cloak, and a fair shirt, wrought with needle work. By these gifts, Comogrus thought himself to be half a God among his borderers. Vaschus at his departing from hence, earnestly charged Comogrus, and the other kings, to remain faithful and obedient to the christan king of Castille, if they desired to live in peace and quietness, and that they should hereafter more diligently apply themselves to the gathering of gold, to be sent to the great Christian Tiba (that is) king: Declaring further, that by this means, they should both get them and their posterity a patron and defender against their enemies, and also obtain great abundance of our things. These affairs thus happily achieved, he went forward on his voyage to the palace of king Poncha, where he found four young men, which were come from Dariena, to certify him that there were certain ships come from Hispaniola laden with victuals, and other necessaries. 
Vaschus returneth to Dariena.  Wherefore taking with him twenty of his most lusty soldiers, he made haste to Dariena, with long journeys: leaving the residue behind him, to follow at their leisure. He writeth, that he came to Dariena the xiiii Ca of Fe. An. 1514. The date of his letter is: 
The good fortune of Vaschus.  From Darena, the four day of March. He writeth in the same letter, that he had many sore conflicts, & that he was yet neither wounded, or lost any of his men in the battle: and therefore in all his large letter, there is not one leaf without thanks giving to almighty God for his delivery, and preservation from so many imminent perils. He attempted no enterprise, or took in hand any voyage, without th'invocation of God and his holy saints. Thus was Vaschus Balboa of a violent Goliath, turned into Heliseus, and from Anteus to Hercules, the conqueror of monsters. Being therefore thus turned from a rash roister, to a politic and discrete capttayne, he was judged worthy to be advanced to great honour: By reason whereof, he was both received into the kings favour, 
O flattering fortune, look his death in the book of the Island lately found  and thereupon created the general or lieutenant of the kings army in those Regions. Thus much have I gathered both by the letters of certain my faithful friends being in Dariena, and also by word of mouth of such as came lately from thence. If your holiness desire to know what I think herein, surely, by such things as I have seen, I believe these things to be true, even so thorder and agreeing of Vaschus and his companions warlike letters, seem to confirm the same. The spaniard therefore shall not need hereafter, with undermyning the earth with intolerable labour, to break the bones of our mother, 
The earth is our general mother.  and enter many miles into her bowels, and with innumerable dangers cut in sunder whole mountains, to make away to the court of infernal Pluto, to bring from thence wicked gold, the seed of innumerable mescheeves, without the which, 
The cout of infernal Pluto.  notwithstanding we may now scarcely lead a happy life, sith iniquity hath so prevailed, and made us slaves to that, whereof we are lords by nature: The spaniard (I say) shall not need with such travails and difficulty, to dig far into the earth for gold, but shall find it plentifully, in manner in the upper crust of the earth, or in the sands of rivers dried up by the heat of summer, only washing the earth softly from the same, and shall with like facility gather plenty of pearls. Certainly the reverent antiquity (by all the Cosmographers assent) obtained not so great a benefit of nature, nor yet aspired to the knowledge hereof, because there came never man before out of our known world, to these unknown nations, at the least with a power of men by force of arms, in manner of conquest: whereas otherwise nothing can be gotten here, forasmuch as these nations are for the most part severe defenders of their patrimonies, and cruel to strangers, in no condition admitting them otherwise then by conquest, especially the fierce Canibales or Caribes. For these wily hunters of men, give themselves to none other kind of exercise, 
Manhuntees.  but only to manhunting, and tillage, after their manner. At the coming therefore of our men into their regions, they look as surely to have them fall into their snares, as if they were hearts or wild bores: and with no less confidence, 
The fyersness● of the Canibales.  lick their lips secretly, in hope of their pray. If they get the upper hand, they eat them greedyly: if they mistrust themselves to be the weaker part, they trust to their feet, and flee swifter than the wind. Again, if the matter be tried on the water, aswell the women as the men can dive and swim, as though they had been ever brought up and fed in the water. It is no marvel therefore, if the large tract of these regions have been hitherto unknown. But now sith it hath pleased God to discover the same in our time, it shall become us to show our natural love to mankind, and duty to God, 
Our duty to god, and natural love to mankind.  to endeavour ourselves to bring them to civility and true religion, to th'increase of Christ's flock, to the confusion of Infidels and the devil their father, who delighteth in our destruction, as he hath done done from the beginning. By the good success of th●se first fruits, our hope is that the Christian religion shall str●●●h forth her arms very far, which thing should the sooner come to pass, if all men to their power, especially Christian princes (to whom it chiefly pertaineth) would put their hands to the plough of the lords vinyeard: 

The office of Christian princes.  
The harvest is great.   The harvest surely is great, but the workmen are but few. As we have said at the beginning, your holiness shall hereafter nourish many myriades of broods of chickens under your wings. But let us now return to speak of Beragua, being the West side of Vraba, and first found by Colonus the Admiral, then unfortunately governed by Diego Nicuesa, and now left in manner desolate, with the other large regions of those provinces, brought from their wild and beastly rudeness, to civility and true religion.   

The fourth book of the third Decade.  
I Was determined (most holy father) to have proceeded no further herein, but the one fiery spark, yet remaining in my mind, would not suffer me to cease. Whereas I have therefore declared how Beragua was first found by Colonus, me think I should commit a heinous crime, if I should defraud the man of the due commendations of his travails, of his cares and troubles, and finally of the dangers & perils which he sustained in that navigation. Therefore in the year of Christ 1502. in the .6. day of the Ideses of May, 
The fourth navigation of Colonus the Admiral.  he hoist up his sails, and departed from the Islands of Gades, with four ships, of fifty or threescore tun a piece, with a hundred, threescore, and ten men, and came with prosperous wind to the Islands of Canariae, within five days following. From thence, arriving the .16. day at the Island of Dominica, being the chief habitation of the Canibales, he sa●led from Dominica to Hispaniola in five other days. Thus within the space of .26. days, with prosperous wind, and by the swift fall of the Ocean from the East to the West, he sailed from Spain to Hispaniola, which course is counted of the mariners, to be no less than a thousand and two hundred leagues. He tarried but a while in Hispaniola, whether it were willingly, 
From Spain to Hispaniola a thousand and two hundred leagues.  or that he were so admonished of the Vice Roy. Directing therefore his voyage from thence toward the west, leaving the Islands of Cuba and jamaica on his right hand toward the north, he writeth that he chanced upon an Island more southward than jamaica, which thinhabitants call Guanassa, so flourishing and fruitful, that it might seem an earthly paradise. Coasting along by the shores of this Island, he met two of the Canoas', or boats of those provinces, which were drawn with two naked slaves against the stream. In these boats was carried a ruler of the Island, with his wife and children, all naked. The slaves seeing our men a land, made signs to them with proud countenance in their masters name, to stand out of the way, and threatened them, if they would not give place. 
Simple people  Their simpleness is such, that they neither feared the multitude, or power of our men, or the greatness and strangeness of our ships. They thought that our men would have honoured their master with like reverence as they did. Our men had entelligence at the length, that this ruler was a great merchant, 
A great merchant.  which came to the mart from other coasts of the Island: for they exercise buying and selling by exchange with their confines. He had also with him good store of such ware as they stand in need of, or take pleasure in: as laton bells, razors, knives, and hatchettes made of a certain sharp yellow bright stone, with handles of a strong kind of wood: also many other necessary instruments, with kitchen stuff, and vessels for all necessary uses: likewise sheets of gossampine cotton, wrought of sundry colours. Our men took him prisoner, with all his family, but Colonus commanded him to be loosed shortly after, and the greatest part of his goods to be restored, to win his friendship. Being here instructed of a land lying further toward the south, he took his voyage thither. Therefore little more than ten miles distant from hence, he found a large land, which th'inhabitants called Quiriquetana, but he named it Ciamba. When he went a land, and commanded his chaplain to say mass on the sea banks, a great confluence of the naked inhabitants flocked thither, simply and without fear, bringing with them plenty of meat and fresh water, 
Gentle people.  marvelling at our men, as they had been some strange miracle. When they had presentted their gifts, they went somewhat backward, and made low courtesy after their manner, bowing their heads and bodies reverently. He recompensed their gentleness, rewarding them with other of our things, as counters, bracelets, and garlands of glass, and counterfeit stones, looking glasses, needles, and pins, with such other trash, which seemed unto them precious merchandise. In this great tract, there are two regions, whereof the one is called Tuia, and the other Maia. He writeth, 
The regions of Tuia & Maia.  that all that land is very fair and wholesome, by reason of the excellent temperateness of the air: And that it is inferior to no land in fruitful ground, being partly full of mountains, and partly large plains: also replenished with many goodly trees, wholesome herbs, continuing green, and flourishing all the whole year. It beareth also very many holly trees, 
Seven kinds of date trees.  and pyneaple trees. Also vii kinds of date trees, whereof some are fruitful, and some barren. It bringeth forth likewise of itself Pelgoras, 
Wild vines.  and wild vines, laden with grapes, even in the woods among other trees. He saith furthermore, that there is such abundance of other pleasunt and profitable fruits, that they pass not of vines. Of one of those kinds of date trees, they make certain long and broad swords, and darts. These regions bear also gossampyne trees here and there commonly in the woods. 
Mirobalanes.  Likewise Mirobalanes of sundry kinds, as those which the physicians call Emblicos, and Chebulos: Maizium also, jucca, Ages, and Battatas, like unto those which we have said before to be found in other regions in these coasts. The same noorysheth also Lions, Tigers, Hearts, Roes, Goats, and divers other beasts. 
Birds and fowls.  Likewise sundry kinds of birds and fowls: among the which they keep only them to frank and feed, which are in colour, bygnes, and taste, much like unto our Pehennes. 
People of goodly stature.  He saith that thinhabitants are of high and goodly stature, well lymmed and protioned, both men and women, covering their privy parts with fine breeches of gossampyne cotton, wrought with divers colours. And that they may seem the more comely and beautiful (as they take it) they paint their bodies red and black, with the juice of certain apples, 
They point their bodies.  which they plant in their gardens for the same purpose. Some of them paint their whole bodies, some but part, and other some draw the portitures of herbs, flowers, and knots, every one as seemeth best to his own fantasy. Their language differeth utterly, from theirs of the Islands near about them. From these regions, the waters of the sea ran with as full a course towards the West, 
The swift course of the sea from the East to the West.  as if it had been the fail of a swift river. Nevertheless he determined to search the East parts of this land, revolving in his mind that the regions of Paria & Os draconis with other coasts found before towards the East, should be near there about, as in deed they were. Departing therefore from the large region of Quiriquetana, the xiii day of the kalends of September, when he had sailed thirty leagues, he found a river, within the mouth whereof he drew fresh water in the sea: 
Fresh water in the sea.  where also the shore was so clean without rocks, that he found ground every where, where he might aptly cast anchor. He writeth, that the swift course of the Ocean was so vehement and contrary, that in the space of forty days, he could scarcely sail threescore and ten leagues, and that with much difficulty, with many fetches and compassynges, finding himself to be some times repulsed and driven far back by the violent course of the sea, when he would have taken land toward the evening, least perhaps wandering in unknown coasts in the darkness of the night, he might be in danger of shipwreck. He writeth, that in the space of eight leagues, he found three great and fair rivers, 
Fair rivers. Great reeds.  upon the banks whereof there grew reeds bigger than a man's thigh. In these rivers was also great plenty of fish, and great Tortoises: 
Great Tortoises.  Likewise in many places, multitudes of Crocodyles lying in the sand, and yaning to take the heat of the son: beside, divers other kinds of beasts, whereunto he gave no names. He sayeth also, that the soil of that land is very divers and variable, being somewhere stony and full of rough and craggy promontories, or points reaching into the sea, and in other places as fruitful as may be. They have also divers kings and rulers. In some places they call a king Cacicus: in other places they call him Quebi, and somewhere Tiba. Such as have behaved themselves valiantly in the wars against their enemies, and have their faces full of scars, they call Cupras, and honour them as the antiquity did the gods which they called Heroes, supposed to be the souls of such men, as in their life time excelled in virtue and noble acts. The common people they call Chivi, and a man, they call Homem. When they say in their language, take man, they say Hoppa home. After this, he came to an other river apt to bear great ships, before the mouth whereof, lie four small Islands, full of flourishing and fruitful trees: 
Quatuor tempora.  these Islands he named Quatuor tempora. From hence, sailing toward the East for the space of xiii leagues, still against the violent course of the water, he found twelve other small Islands, in the which, because he found a new kind of fruits, much like unto our Lemons, he called them Limonar●s. Wandering yet further the same way for the space of xii leagues, he found a great haven entering into the land, after the manner of a gulf, the space of three leagues, and in manner as broad, into the which fell a great river. Here was Nicuesa lost afterward, when he sought Beragua, by reason whereof, they called it Rio de los perdidos, that is, the river of the lost men. Thus Colonus the Admiral, yet further continuing his course against the fury of the sea, found many high mountains, and horrible valleys, with divers rivers and havens, from all the which (as he saith) proceeded sweet savours, greatly recreating and comforting nature: insomuch that in all this long tract, there was not one of his men diseased, until he came to a region which thinhabitants call Quicuris, 
The region of Quicuri.  in the which is the haven called Cariai, named Mirobalanus by the Admiral, because the Mirobalane trees are native in the regions thereabout. In this haven of Cariai, 
The haven of Cariai or Mirobalanus  there came about two hundred of thinhabitants to the sea side, with every of them three or four darts in their hands, yet of condition gentle enough, and not refusing strangers. Their coming was for none other purpose, then to know what this new nation meant, or what they brought with them. When our men had given them signs of peace, they came swimming to the ships, and desired to barter with them by exchange. The Admiral, to allure them to friendship, give them many of our things: But they refused them, suspecting some deceit thereby, because he would not receive theirs. They wrought all by signs: 
Civil and human people  for one understood not a word of the others language. Such gifts as were sent them, they left on the shore, and would take no part thereof. They are of such civility and humanity, that they esteem it more honourable to give, then to take. They sent our men two young women, being virgins, of commendable favour, and goodly stature, signifying unto them, that they might take them away with them, if it were their pleasure. These women, after the manner of their country, were covered from their ankles somewhat above their privy parts, with a certain cloth made of gossampine cotton, but the men are all naked. The women use to cut their hear: but the men let it grow on the hinder part of their heads, and cut it on the fore part. Their long hear, they bind up with fyllettes, and wind it in sundry rolls, as our maids are accustomed to do. The virgins which were sent to the Admiral, he decked in fair apparel, and gave them many gifts, and sent them home again. But likewise all these rewards and apparel they left upon the shore, because our men had refused their gifts. Yet took he two men away with him (and those very willingly) that by learning the Spanish tongue, he might afterward use them for interpreters. He considered that the tracts of these coasts were not greatly troubled with vehement motions, or overflowings of the sea, forasmuch as trees grow in the sea not far from the shore, even as they do upon the banks of rivers: the which thing also other do affirm, which have latelyer searched those coasts, declaring that the sea riseth and falleth but little thereabout. He saith furthermore, that in the prospect of this land, there are trees engendered even in the sea, which after that they are grown to any height, 
Trees growing in the sea after a strange sort.  bend down the tops of their branches into the ground: which embracing them, causeth other branches to spring out of the same, and take root in the earth, bringing forth trees in their kind successively, as did the first root from whence they had their original, as do also the sets of vines, when only both the ends thereof are put into the ground. 
Pliny.  Pliny in the twelfth book of his natural history maketh mention of such trees, describing them to be on the land, but not in the sea. The Admiral writeth also, that the like beasts are engendered in the coasts of Cariai, as in other provinces of these regions, and such as we have spoken of before: 
A strange kind of Monkeys.  Yet that there is one found here in nature much differing from the other. This beast is of the bigness of a great Monkey, but with a tail much longer and bigger, it liveth in the woods, and removeth from tree to tree in this manner: Hanging by the tail upon the branch of a tree, and gathering strength by swaying her body twice or thrice to and fro, she casteth herself from branch to branch, and so from tree to tree, as though she flew. An archer of ours hurt one of them, who, perceiving herself to be wounded, 
A Monkey fighteth with a man.  leapt down from the tree, and fiercely set on him which gave her the wound, in so much that he was fain to defend himself with his sword. And thus by chance, cutting of one of her arms, he took her, and with much a do brought her to the ships, where within a while she waxed tame. While she was thus kept and bound with chains, certain other of our hunters had chased a wild Boar out of the marshes near unto the sea side: for hunger and desire of flesh, caused them to take double pleasure in hunting. In this mean time other which remained in the ships, going a land to recreate themselves, took this Monkey with them, who, assoon as she had espied the Boar, set up her bristles, and made toward him. The Boar likewise shook his bristles, 
A conflict between a Monkey and a wild Boar.  and whet his teeth. The Monkey furiously invaded the Boar, wrapping her tail about his body, & with her arm, reserved of her victorer, held him so fast about the throat, that he was suffocate. These people of Cariai, 
The bodies of kings dried and reserved.  use to dry the dead bodies of their princes upon hurdles, and so reserve them involved in the leaves of trees. As he went forward, about twenty leagues from Cariai, he found a gulf of such largeness, that it contained xii leagues in compass, in the mouth of this gulf was four little Islands, so near together, that they made a safe haven to enter into the gulf: This gulf is the haven which we said before to be called Cerabaro of thinhabitants. But they have now learned, that only the land of the one side thereof, lying on the right hand at the entering of the gulf, is called by that name, but that on the left side, is called Aburema. He saith that all this gulf is full of fruitful Islands, well replenished with goodly trees, and the ground of the sea to be very clean without rocks, and commodious to cast anchor: likewise the sea of the gulf to have great abundance of fish, and the land on both the sides to be inferior to none in fruitfulness. At his first arriving, he espied two of thinhabitants, having chains about their necks, made of ouches (which they call Guavines) of base gold, artificially wrought in the forms of Eagles, and Lions, with divers other beasts, and fowls. Of the two Cariaians' which he brought with him from Cariai, he was informed that the regions of Cerabaro and Aburema were rich in gold, and that the people of Cariai, have all their gold from thence for exchange of other of their things. They told him also, that in the same regions there are five villages, not far from the sea side, whose inhabitants apply themselves only to the geathering of gold. The names of these villages are these, Chirara, Puren, Chitaza, jureche, A●amea. All the men of the province of Cerabaro, go naked, & are painted with divers colours. They take great pleasure in wearing garlands of flowers, 
Crowns of beasts claws.  and crowns made of the claws of Lions & Tigers. The women cover only their privy parts with a fillet of gossampine cotton. Departing from hence, & coasting still by the same shore for the space of xviii. leagues, he came to another river, where he espied about three hundred naked men in a company. When they saw the ships draw near the land, they cried out aloud, with cruel countenances, shaking their wooden swords, and hurling darts, taking also water in their mouths, and spouting the same against our men: whereby they seemed to insinuate, that they would receive no condition of peace, 
spiteful people.  or have aught to do with them. Here he commanded certain pieces of ordinance to be shot of coward them, yet so to overshoot them, that none might be hurt thereby: For he ever determined to deal quietly & peaceably with these new nations. At the noise therefore of the guns, and sight of the fire, they fell down to the ground, and desired peace. 
Guns make peace.  Thus entering into further friendship, they exchanged their chains and ouches of gold, for glasses, and hawks bells, and such other merchandise. They use drums or timbrels made of the shells of certain sea fishes, wherewith they encourage themselves in the wars. In this tract are these seven rivers, Acateba, Quareba, Zobroba, 
Seven golden rivers  Aiaguitin, Vrida, Duribha, Beragua, in all the which, gold is found. They defend themselves against rain and heat with certain great leaves of trees, in the stead of cloaks. Departing from hence, he searched the coasts of Ebetere, and Embigar, into the which fall the goodly rivers of Zohoran and Cubigar: 
Note where the plenty of gold endeth  And here ceaseth the plenty and fruitfulness of gold, in the tract of fifty leagues, or there about. From hence, only three leagues distant, is the rock which in the unfortunate discourse of Nicuesa we said was called of our men Pignonem, but of thinhabitants the Region is called Vibba. In this tract also, about fire leagues from thence, is the haven which Colonus called Portus belus (whereof we have spoken before) in the region which th'inhabitants call Xaguaguara. This region is very populous, but they go all naked. The king is painted with black colours, but all the people with red. The king and seven of his noble men, had every of them a little plate of gold hanging at their nostrils, down unto their lips: and this they take for a comely ornament. The men enclose their privy members in a shell, and the women cover theirs with a fillet of gossampine cotton, tied about their loins. In their gardens they nourish a fruit much like the nut of a pine tree, the which (as we have said in an other place) groweth on a shrub, much like unto an artichoke, but the fruit is much softer, and meat for a king: also certain trees which bear gourds, whereof we have spoken before: this tree they call Hibuero. In these coasts they met sometimes with Crocodiles lying on the sands, 
Crocodiles of sweet savour.  the which when they fled, or took the water, they left a very sweet savour behind them, sweeter than musk or Castoreum. When I was sent ambassador for the catholic king of Castille, to the Soltane of Babylon, or Alcayre in Egypt, 
Alcayr or Babylon in Egypt.  thinhabitants near unto the river of Nilus told me the like of their female Crocodiles, affirming furthermore, that the fat or shewet of them, is equal in sweetness with the pleasant gums of Arabia. But the Admiral was now at the length enforced of necessity to departed from hence, aswell for that he was no longer able to abide the contrary and violent course of the water, as also that his ships were daily more and more putrefied, and eaten through with certain worms, 
ships eaten with worms.  which are engendered of the warmness of the water in all those tracts, near unto the Equinoctial line. The venetians call these worms Bissas. The same are also engendered in two havens of the city of Alexandria in Egypt, 
Alexandria in Egypt.  and destroy the ships if they lie long at anchor. They are a cubit in length, and somewhat more, not passing the quantity of a finger in bigness. The spanish mariner calleth this pestilence Broma. Colonus therefore, whom before the great monsters of the sea could not fear, now fearing this Broma, being also sore vexed with the contrary fall of the sea, directed his course with the Ocean toward the west, and came first to the river Hiebra, distant only two leagues from the river of Beragua, because that was commodious to harborowe great ships. This region is named after the river, and is called Beragua the less, because both the rivers are in the dominion of the king which inhabiteth the region of Beragua. But what chanced unto him in this voyage on the right hand and on the left, let us now declare. While therefore Colonus the Admiral remained yet in the river Hiebra, he sent Bartholomeus Colonus his brother, and lieutenant of Hispaniola, with the ship boats, and threescore and eight men, to the river of Beragua, where the king of the region, being naked, 
How the king of Beragua entertained the Lieutenant.  and painted after the manner of the country, came towards them, with a great multitude of men waiting on him, but all unarmed and without weapons, giving also signs of peace. When he approached nearer, and entered communication with our men, certain of his gentlemen, nearest about his person, remembering the majesty of a king, and that it stood not with his honour to bargain standing, took a great stone out of the river, washing and rubbing it very decently, and so put it under him, 
Their reverence to their king.  with humble reverence. The king thus sitting, seemed with signs and tokens, to insinuate that it should be lawful for our men to search and view all the rivers within his dominion. Wherefore, the sixth day of the Ideses of February, leaving his boats with certain of his company, he went by land a foot, from the banks of Beragua, until he came to the river of Duraba, which he affirmeth to be richer in gold then either Hiehra or Beragua: For gold is engendered in all rivers of that land, insomuch that among the roots of trees growing by the banks of the rivers, and among the stones left of the water, and also wheresoever they digged a hole or pit in the ground, not past the depth of a handful and a half, they found the earth, being taken out thereof, mixed with gold: whereupon he determined to fasten his foot there, and to inhabit. Which thing the people of the country perceiving, and smelling what inconvenience and mischief might thereof ensue to their country, if they should parmit strangers to plant their inhabitations there, assembled a great army, and with horrible outcries assailed our men (who had now begun to build houses) so desperately, that they were scarcely able for to abide the first brunt. These naked Barbarians at their first approach, used only slings and darts: 
slings and darts.  but when they came nearer to hand strokes, they fought with their wooden swords, which they call Machanas, as we have said before. A man would not think what great malice and wrath was kindled in their hearts against our men, and with what desperate minds they fought for the defence of their liberty, which they more esteem then life or riches: 
Liberty more esteemed then riches.  For they were now so void of all fear, and contemning death, that they neither feared long bows or cross bows, nor yet (which is most to be marveled) were any thing discouraged at the terrible noise of the guns, shot of from the ships. They retired once: but shortly after increasing their number, they returned more fiercely then at the first. They would have been contented to have received our men friendly as strangers, but not as inhabitors. The more instant that our men were to remain, so much the greater multitude of borderers flocked together daily, disturbing them both night and day, sometimes on the one side, and sometimes on the other. The ships lying at anchor near unto the shore, warded them on the back half: 
The spaniards are driven to flight.  but at the length they were fain to forsake this land, and return back the same way by the which they came. Thus with much difficulty & danger they came to the Island of jamaica, lying on the south side of Hispaniola & Cuba, with their ships as full of holes as syves, and holes so eaten with worms, as though they had been bored through with wymbles. The water entered so fast at the rifts and holes, that if they had not with the painful labour of their hands emptied the same as fast, they were like to have perished: where as yet by this means they arrived at jamaica, although in manner half dead. But their calamity ceased not here: For as fast as their ships leaked, their strength diminished, so that they were no longer able to keep them from sinking. 
A miserable case.  By reason whereof, falling into the hands of the Barbarians, and enclosed without hope of departure, they led their lives for the space of ten months among the naked people, more miserably than ever did Achemenides among the Giants, called Ciclopes, rather living, then being either contented or satisfied with the strange meats of that Island, and that only at such times as pleased the Barbarians to give them part of theirs. The deadly enmity and malice which these barbarous kings bear one against an other, made greatly with our men: For at such times as they attempted war against their borderers, they would sometimes give our men part of their bread, to aid them. But how miserable and wretched a thing it is to live only with bread gotten by begging, your holiness may easily conjecture: especially where all other accustomed food is lacking, as wine, oil, flesh, butter, cheese, and milk, wherewith the stomachs of our people of Europe have ever been nourished, even from their cradles. 
Necessity hath no law.  Therefore as necessity is subject to no law: so doth it enforce men to attempt desperate adventures, and those the sooner, which by a certain nobility of nature, do no further esteem life than it is joined with some felicity. 
How far life is to be esteemed  Bartholomeus Colonus therefore, intending rather to prove what God would do with him and his companions in these extremities, than any longer to abide the same, commanded Diegus Mendez his steward, with two guides of that Island, whom he had hired with promises of great rewards at their return, to enter into one of their Canoas', and take their voyage to Hispaniola. Being thus tossed on the sea to and fro from rock to rock, by reason of the shortness and narrowness of the Canoa, they arrived at the length at the last corner of Hispaniola, being distant from jamaica forty leagues. Here his guides departing from him, returned again to Colonus, for the rewards which he had promised them: but Diegus Mendez went on forward a foot, until he came to the city called Sanctus Dominicus, 
Sanctus Dominicus.  being the chief & head city of the Island. The officers and rulers of Hispaniola, being informed of the matter, appointed him two ships, wherewith he returned to his master and companions. As he found them, so came they to Hispaniola, very feeble, and in manner naked. What chanced of them afterward, I know not as yet. Let us now therefore leave these particulars, and speak somewhat more of generals. In all those tracts, which we said here before to have been found by Colonus the Admiral, both he himself writeth, and all his companions of that voyage confess, 
Lands found by Colonus.  that the trees, herbs, and fruits, are flourishing and green all the whole year, and the air so temperate & wholesome, that of all his company there never fell one man sick, 
Themperat regions and wholesome air.  nor yet were vexed either with extreme cold or heat, for the space of fifty leagues, from the great haven of Cerabaro, to the rivers of Hiebra and Beragua. Thinhabitantes of Cerabaro, and the nations which are betwixt that & the said rivers, apply not themselves to the gathering of gold, but only at certain times of the year, and are very expert and cunning herein, as are our miners of silver and Iron. 
Expert miners  They know by long experience in what places gold is most abundantly engendered: as by the colour of the water of the rivers, and such as fall from the mountains, and also by the colour of the earth and stones. They believe a certain godly nature to be in gold, 
A godly nature in gold.  forasmuch as they never gather it, except they use certain religious expiations or purging, as to abstain from women, and all kinds of pleasures, and delicate meats and drinks, during all the time that their golden harvest lasteth. They suppose that men do naturally live and die as other beasts do, 
Golden harvest  and therefore honour none other thing as God: Yet do they pray to the Son, and honour it when it riseth. But let us now speak of the mountains, and situation of these lands. 
High and great mountains.  From all the sea banks of these regions, exceeding great and high mountains are seen toward the South, yet reaching by a continual tract from the East into the west, by reason whereof, I suppose that the two great seas (whereof I have spoken largely before) are divided with these mountains, as it were with bulwarks, lest they should join and repugn, as Italy divideth the sea called Tirrhenum, 
Tirrhenum is now called Tuscan.  from the sea Adriatic, which is now commonly called the gulf of Venice. For which way so ever they sailed from the point called Promontorium, S. Augustini (which pertaineth to the Portugals, and prospecteth against the sea Atlantike) even unto Vraba and the haven Cerabaro, and to the furthest lands found hitherto westward, they had ever great mountains in sight, both near hand, and also far of, in all that long race. These mountains were in some place smooth, pleasant, and fruitful, full of goodly trees and herbs, and somewhere high, rough, full of rocks, and barren, as chanceth in the famous mountain of Taurus in Asia, and also in divers coasts of our mountains of Apennini, & such other of like bigness. The rydgies also of these mountains are divided with goodly and fair valleys. That part of the mountains which includeth the limits of Beragua, 
The mountains of Beragua higher than the clouds.  is thought to be higher than the clouds, insomuch that (as they say) the tops of them can seldom be seen for the multitude of thick clouds which are beneath the same. Colanus the Admiral, the first finder of these regions, affirmeth that the tops of the mountains of Beragua, are more than fifty miles in height. 
Mountains of fifty miles height.  He saith furthermore, that in the same region at the roots of the mountains the way is open to the south sea, & compareth it as it were between Venice and Genua, or janua, as the Genues will have it called, which fable that their city was builded of janus. 
janus otherwase called japhet the son of Noe.  He affirmeth also, that this land reacheth forth toward the south, and that from hence it taketh the beginning of breadth: like as from the Alpes, out of the narrow thigh of Italy, we see the large and main lands of France, Germany, and Pannonie, to the Sarmatians and Scythians, even unto the mountains and rocks of Riphea, and the frozen sea, and embrace therewith, as with a continual bond, all Thracia, and Grecia, with all that is included within the promontory or point of Malea, and Hellespontus southward, and the sea Euzinus, and the marishes of Meotis in Scythia northward. The Admiral supposeth, that on the left hand, in sailing toward the west, this land is joined to India, beyond the river of Ganges, and that on the right hand toward the North, 
By this conjecture, the way should open to Cathai by the Hyperboreans.  it is extended to the frozen sea, beyond the Hyperborcans and the North pole: So that both the seas (that is to mean that south sea which we said to be found by Vaschus, and our Ocean) should join and meet in the corners of that land, and that the waters of these seas do not only enclose and compass the same without division, as Europe is enclosed with the seas of Hellespontus, and Tanais with the frozen Ocean, and our sea of Tyrrhenum with the Spanish seas: But in my opinion, the vehement course of the Ocean toward the west, doth signify the let that the said two seas should not so join together, 
Look the navigation of Cabote. Deca. three lib. vi.  but rather that that land is adherent to the firm lands toward the North, as we have said before. It shall suffice to have said thus much of the length hereof: Let us now therefore speak somewhat of the breadth of the same. We have made mention before how the south sea is divided by narrow limits from our Ocean, as it was proved by th'experience of Vaschus Nunnez and his companions, which first made open the way thither. But as diversly the mountains of our Alpes in Europe are somewhere narrow, and in some place broad: even so, by the like providence of nature, this land in some part thereof reacheth far in breadth, and is in other places coarcted with narrow limits from sea to sea, with valleys also in some places, whereby men may pass from the one side to the other. Where we have described the regions of Vraba and Beragua to be situate, these seas are divided by small distance: Yet ought we to think the region, which the great river of Maragnonus runneth through, 
The great river Maragnonus.  to be very large, if we shall grant Maragnonum to be a river, and no sea, as the fresh waters of the same aught to persuade us. For in such narrow caves of the earth, there can be no swallowing gulfs of such bigness as to receive or nourish so great abundance of water. The like is also to be supposed of the great river of Dabaiba, 
The great river Dabaiba, or sancti johannes.  which we said to be from the corner of the gulf of Vraba, in some place of forty fathoms depth, and somewhere fifty: also three miles in breadth, and so to fall into the sea. We must needs grant, that the earth is broad there, by the which the river passeth from the high mountains of Dabaiba from the East, and not from the west. They say that this river consisteth and taketh his increase of four other rivers, falling from the mountains of Dabaiba. 
The rivers have their increase from the springs of the mountains. The river of Nilus in Egypt.  Our men call this river Flumen. S. johannis. They say also that from hence it falleth into the gulf of Vraba by seven mouths, as doth the river of Nilus into the sea of Egypt: Likewise that in the same region of Vraba, there are in some places narrow straits, not passing fifteen leagues, and the same to be savage, and without any passage, by reason of divers marshes and desolate ways, which the Latins call Lamas, 
marishes and desolate ways  but the spaniards according to their variety call them Tremedales, Trampales, Cenegales, Sumideros, & Zabondaderos. But before we pass any further, it shall not be greatly from our purpose to declare from whence these mountains of Dabaiba have their name, 
A superstitious opinion of the original of the mountains of Dabaiba.  according unto thantiquities of thinhabitants. They said that Dabaiba was a woman, of great magnanimity and wisdom among their predecessors in old time, whom in her life all thinhabitants of those provinces did greatly reverence, and being dead, gave her divine honour, and named the region after her name, believing that she sendeth thunder and lightning, to destroy the fruits of the earth if she be angered, and to send plenty if she be well pleased. This superstition hath been persuaded them by a crafty kind of men, under pretence of religion, to thintent that they might enjoy such gifts and offerings as were brought to the place where she was honoured. This is sufficient for this purpose. They say furthermore, that the marishes of the narrow land, whereof we have spoken, bring forth great plenty of Crocodiles, Dragons, Bats, and Gnats, 
Dragons and Crocodiles in the marishes.  being very hurtful. Therefore whensoever they take any journey toward the south, they go out of the way toward the mountains, and eschew the regions near unto those perilous fens or marshes. Some think that there is a valley lying that way that the river runneth, which our men call Rio de los perdidos, that is, the river of the lost men (so named by the misfortune which there befell to Nicuesa and his company) and not far distant from the haven Cerabaro, which divideth those mountains toward the south. 
The haven Cerabaro.  But let us now finish this book with a few other things worthy to be noted. They say therefore, that on the right hand and left hand from Dariena there are twenty rivers, 
Twenty golden rivers.  in all the which great plenty of gold is found. Being demanded what was the cause why they brought no greater abundance of gold from thence: they answered, that they lacked miners, and that the men which they took with them from Spain thither, were not accustomed to labour, but for the most part brought up in the wars. This land seemeth also to promise many precious stones: 
Precious stones.  For beside those which I said to be found near unto Cariai and Sancta Martha, one Andreas Moralis, a pilot (who had travailed those coasts with johannes de la Cossa while he yet lived) had a precious Diamond, 
A precious Diamond of exceeding bigness.  which he bought of a naked young man in the region of Cumana, in the province of Paria. This stone was as long as two joints of a man's middle finger, and as big as the first joint of the thumb, being also painted on every side, consisting of eight squares, perfectly formed by nature. They say that with this they made scars in anuylles and hammers, and broke the teeth of files, the stone remaining unperyshed. The young man of Cumana, wore this stone about his neck among other ouches, & sold it to Andrea's Moralis for five of our counterfeit stones, made of glass, of divers colours, wherewith the ignorant young man was greatly delighted: They found also certain Topases on the shore. 
Topasis.  But the estimation of gold was so far entered into the heads of our men, that they had no regard to stones. Also the most part of the spaniards, do laugh them to scorn which use to wear many stones, specially such as are common, judging it to be an effeminate thing, and more meet for women than men. The noble men only, when they celebrate solemn marriages, or set forth any triumphs, wear chains of gold, beset with precious stones, and use fair apparel of silk, embroidered with gold, intermixed with pearls and precious stones, and not at other times. They think it no less effeminate for men to smell of the sweet savours of Arabia, and judge him to be infected with some kind of filthy lechery, in whom they smell the savour of musk or Castoreum. But like as by one apple taken from a tree, we may perceive the tree to be fruitful, and by one fish taken in a river, we may know that fish is engendered in the same: even so, by a little gold, and by one stone, we ought to consider that this land bringeth forth great plenty of gold, and precious stones. What they have found in the port of Sancta Martha, in the region of Cariai, when the whole navy passed thereby under the governance of Petrus Arias and his company, with certain other of the kings officers, I have sufficiently declared in his place. To be short therefore, all things do so flourish, grow, increase, and prosper, that the last are ever better than the first. And surely to declare my opinion herein, whatsoever hath heretofore been discovered by the famous travails of Saturnus and Hercules, with such other whom the antiquity for their heroical facts honoured as gods, seemeth but little and obscure, if it be compared to the spaniards victorious labours. Thus I bid your holiness farewell, desiring you to certify me how you like these first fruits of the Ocean, that being encouraged with your exhortations, I may the gladlier, and with less tediousness, write such things as shall chance hereafter.   

The fifth book of the third Decade.  
ALL such living creatures, as under the circle of the moon bring forth any thing, are accustomed by th'instinct of nature, as soon as they are delivered of their birth, either to close up the matrice, or at the least to be quiet for a space: But our most fruitful Ocean and new world, engendereth and bringeth forth daily new births, whereby men of great wit, and especially such as are studious of new and marvelous things, may have somewhat at hand wherewith to feed their minds. If your holiness do ask to what purpose is all this: ye shall understand, that I had scarcely finished the history of such things as chanced to Vaschus Nunnez and his company in their voyage to the south sea, when suddenly there came new letters from Petrus Arias the new governor, whom the king had appointed the year before with an army of men and a navy of ships to sail to these new lands. He signified by his letters, that he with his navy and company arrived all safely. Furthermore, johannes Cabedus (whom your holiness at the request of the most catholic king had created Bishop of that province of Dariena) and three other of the chief officers joined in commission to be his assystantes, as Alfonsus de Ponte, Diegus Marques, and johannes de Tavira, confirmed the same letters, and subscribed them with their names. The navigation therefore of Petrus Arias, 
The navigation of Petrus Arias.  was in this manner. The day before the Ideses of Apryl, in the year of Christ .1514. he hoist up his sails, in the town of saint Lucar de Barrameda, situate in the mouth of the river Baetis, which the spaniards now call Guadalchebir. The seven Islands of Canaria are about four hundred miles distant from the place where this river falleth into the sea. Some think that these are the Islands which the old writers did call the fortunate Islands: 
The Island of Canary.  but other think the contrary. The name of these Islands are these. The two that appear first in sight, are named Lanzelota and Fortisuentura. On the backhalfe of these, lieth Magna Canaria or Grancanaria. Beyond that is Teverif and Gomera somewhat toward the north from that Palma and Ferrea lie behind, as it were a bulwark to all the other. Petrus Arias therefore, arrived at Gomera the eight day after his departure, with a navy of seventeen ships, & a thousand and five hundred men, although there were only a thousand and two hundred assigned him by the kings letters. It is said furthermore, that he left behind him more than two thousand, very pensive and sighing that they also might not be received, proffering themselves to go at their own charges. He tarried xvi. days in Gomera, to the intent to make provision of fuel and fresh water, 
Provision of fresh water and fuel.  but chiefly to repair his ships, being sore bruised with tempests, and especially the governors ship, which had lost the rudder: For these Islands are a commodious resting place for all such as intend to attempt any navigations in that main sea. Departing from hence in the Nones of May, he saw no more land until the third day of june, at the which he arrived at Dominica an Island of the Canibales, being distant from Gomera about eight hundred leagues. Here he remained four days, making new provision of fresh water and fuel, during which time, he saw no man, nor yet any steps of men, but found plenty of sea Crabs and great Lisarts. From hence he sailed by the Islands of Matinina (otherwise called Madanino) Guadalupea and Galanta (otherwise called Galana) of all which we have spoken in the first Decade. He passed also through the sea of herbs or weeds, continuing a long tract: Yet neither he, 
The sea of herbs.  nor Colonus the Admiral (who first found these Islands, and sailed through this sea of weeds) have declared any reason how these weeds should come. Some think the sea to be very muddy there, and that these weeds are engendered in the bottom thereof, and so being loosed, to ascend to the uppermost part of the water, as we see oftentimes chance in certain standing pools, and sometimes also in great rivers. Other suppose that they are not engendered there, but to be beaten from certain rocks by the violence of the water in tempests: And thus they leave the matter in doubt. Neither have they yet any certain experience whether they stick fast and give place to the ships, or wander lose upon the water: But it is to be thought, that they are engendered there, for otherwise they should be driven together on heaps, by the impulsion of the ships, even as a beasome gathereth the sweepynges of a house, and should also let the course of the ships. The fourth day after that he departed from Dominica, 
These mountains are called Montes Nivales, or Serra Nevata, Decade ii lib. 1. and ii  the high mountains covered with snow (whereof we have spoken in the second Decade) appeared unto him. They say that there the seas run as swiftly toward the west, as it were a river falling from the tops of high mountains, although they failed not directly toward the west, but inclined somewhat to the south. From these mountains falleth the river of Gaira, famous by the slaughter of our men, at such time as Rodericus Colmenares passed by those coasts, as we have said before: Likewise many other fair rivers have their original from the same mountains. This province (in the which is also the region of Caramairi) hath in it two notable havens, of the which our men named the one Carthago or Carthagena, and tother Sancta Martha, the region whereof th'inhabitants call Saturma. The port of Sancta Martha, 
Mountains covered with snow.  is nearer to the mountains covered with snow, called Montes Nivales, for it is at the roots of the same mountains, but the haven of Carthago is more westward, about fifty leagues. He writeth marvelous things of the haven of Sancta Martha, which they also confirm that came lately from thence: Of the which young Vesputius is one, to whom Americus Vesputius his uncle (being a florentine borne) left the exact knowledge of the mariners faculty, as it were by inheritance after his death, for he was a very expert master in the knowledge of his card, his compass, and the elevation of the pole star, with all that pertaineth thereto. This young Vesputius was assigned by the king to be one of the masters of the governors ship, because he was cunning in judging the degrees of the elevation of the pole star by the quadrant: For the charge of governing the rudder, was chiefly committed to one johannes Serranus a Spaniard, who had oftentimes overrun those coasts. Vesputius is my very familiar friend, and a witty young man, in whose company I take great pleasure, and therefore use him oftentimes for my guest. He hath also made many voyages into these coasts, and diligently noted such things as he hath seen. Petrus Arias therefore writeth, and he confirmeth the same, that thinhabitants of these regions took their original of the Caribbes or Canibales, as appeared by the desperate fierceness and cruelty which they oftentimes showed to our men when they passed by their coasts. 
The stoutness of the Barbarians.  Such stoutness and fortitude of mind is naturally engendered in these naked Barbarians, that they feared not to assail our whole navy, and to forbid them to come a land. They fight with venomous arrows, as we have said before. perceiving that our men contemned their threatenings, they ran furiously into the sea, 
The Canibales fight in the water.  even up to the breasts, nothing fearing either the bigness or multitude of our ships, but ceased not continually, being thus in the water, to cast darts, and to shoot their venomous arrows as thick as hail: Insomuch that our men had been in great danger, if they had not been defended by the cages or pavisses of the ships, and their targets: Yet were two of them wounded, which died shortly after. But this conflict continued so sharp, that at the length our men were enforced to shoot of their greatest pieces of ordinance with hayleshoote: 
The use of guns.  at the slaughter and terrible noise whereof, the Barbarians being sore discomfited and shaken with fear, thinking the same to be thunder and lightning, turned their backs, and fled amain. They greatly fear thunder, 
The generation of thunder and lightning.  because these regions are oftentimes vexed with thunder and lightnings, by reason of the high mountains, and dearness of the same to the region of the air, wherein such fiery tempests are engendered, which the philosophers call Meteora. And albeit that our men had now driven their enemies to flight, and saw them disparkled and out of order, yet doubted they, and were of divers opinions, whether they should pursue them, or not. On the one party shame pricked them forward, and on the other side, fear caused them to cast many perils, especially considering the venomous arrows which these Barbarians can direct so certainly. To departed from them with a dry foot (as saith the proverb) with so great a navy, and such an army, they reputed it as a thing greatly sounding to their reproach and dishonour. At the length therefore, shame overcoming fear, they pursued them, and came to land with their ship boats. The governor of the navy, & also Vesputius do write, that the haven is no less than three leagues in compass, being also safe without rocks, and the water thereof so clear, that a man may see pybble stones in the bottom twenty cubits deep. They say likewise, that there falleth two fair rivers of fresh water into the haven: but the same to be meeter to bear the Canoas' of these provinces, than any bigger vessels. It is a delectable thing to hear what they tell of the plenty and variety, and also of the pleasant taste of the fishes, aswell of these rivers, as of the sea thereabout: By reason whereof they found here many fisher boats and nets wonderfully wrought of the stalks of certain herbs or weeds, dried and tawed, 
Plenty of fish.  and wreathed with cords of spun gossampyne cotton. For the people of Caramairi, Gaira, and Saturma, are very cunning in fisheing, and use to sell fish to their borderers, 
Cunning fishers.  for exchange of such things as they lack. When our men had thus chased the Barbarians from the sea coasts, and had now entered into their houses, they assailed them with new skirmishes, especially when they saw them fall to sacking and spoiling, and their wives and children taken captive. Their household stuff was made of great reeds, which grow on the sea banks, and the stalks of certain herbs beaten, and afterward made hard. The floors thereof were strewed with herbs of sundry colours, 
tapistry.  and the walls hanged with a kind of tapstery, artificially made of gossampine cotton, and wrought with pictures of Lions, Tigers, and Eagles. The doors of their houses and chambers were full of divers kinds of shells, hanging lose by small cords, that being shaken by the wind, they might make a certain ratteling, and also a whistling noise, by gathering the wind in their hollow places: for herein they have great delight, and impute this for a goodly ornament. divers have showed me many wonderful things of these regions, 
This is he whom Cardanus praiseth.  especially one Conzalus Fernandus Ouiedus, being one of the magistrates appointed in that office, which the spaniards call Veedor, who hath also hitherto entered further into the land than any other. He affirmeth, that he chanced upon the fragment of a sapphire, bigger than the egg of a goose, and that in certain hills where he travailed with thirty men, 

Precious stones.  
The smaragd is the true H●merode. Another kind of Amber is found in Whales.   he found many of the precious stones called Smaragdes, Calcidones, and jaspers', beside great pieces of Amber of the mountains. He also, with divers other, do affirm that in the houses of some of the Canibales of these regions, they found the like precious stones, set in gold, and enclosed in tapstery or arras (if it may so be called) wherewith they hang their houses. The same land bringeth forth also many woods of brasile trees, 

Gold and Brasile.  
Marchasites are flowers of metals, by the colours whereof, the kinds of metals are known.   and great plenty of gold, in so much that in manner in all places they found on the sea banks, & on the shores, certain marchasites in token of gold. Fernandus Ouiedus declareth furthermore, that in a certain region called Zenu, lying fourscore and ten miles from Dariena Eastward, they exercise a strange kind of merchandise: For in the houses of the inhabitants, they found great chests and baskets, made of the twigs and leaves of certain trees apt for that purpose, being all full of grasshoppers, Grylles, Crabs, or Crefyshes, Snails also, and Locusts, which destroy the fields of corn, 
These Locusts burn the corn with touching, and devour the residue. They are in India of three foot length.  all well dried and salted. Being demanded why they reserved such a multitude of these beasts: they answered, that they kept them to be sold to their borderers, which dwell further within the land, and that for the exchange of these precious birds, and salted fishes, they received of them certain strange things, wherein partly they take pleasure, and partly use them for their necessary affairs. These people dwell not together, but scattered here and there. Thinhabitantes of Caramairi, seem to dwell in an earthly Paradise, their region is so fair and fruitful, without outrageous heat, or sharp cold, with little difference of the length of day and night throughout all the year. After that our men had thus driven the Barbarians to flight, they entered into a valley, of two leagues in breadth, and three in length, extending to certain fruitful mountains, full of grass, herbs, and trees, at the roots whereof, lie two other valleys toward the right hand and the left, through either of the which runneth a fair river, whereof the river of Caira is one, but unto the other they have yet given no name. In these valleys they found many fair gardens, and pleasant fields, watered with trenches, distributed in marvelous order, 
Gardens.  with no less art than our Insubrians and etrurians use to water their fields. 
Insubres are now called Lombard's, and Hetruci, Tuscans.  Their common meat, is Ages, jucca, Maizium, Battata, with such other roots and fruits of trees, and also such fish as they use in the Islands and other regions of these provinces. They eat man's flesh but seldom, because they meet not oftentimes with strangers, except they go forth of their one dominions with a main army, of purpose to hunt for men, when their ravening appetite pricketh them forward: For they abstain from themselves, and eat none but such as they take in the wars, or otherwise by chance. But surely it is a miserable thing to hear how many myriades of men these filthy and unnatural devourers of men's flesh have consumed, 
One myriad, is ten thousand.  and left thousands of most fair and fruitful Islands and regions desolate without men: by reason whereof, our men found so many Islands, which for their fairness and fruitfulness might seem to be certain earthly Paradyses, and yet were utterly void of men. Hereby your holiness may consider how pernicious a kind of men this is. We have said before, that the Island named Sancti johannis (which th'inhabitants call Burichena) is next to Hispaniola. It is said, that only the Canibales which dwell in the other Islands near about this, as in the Island called Hayhay or Sansta Crucis, and in Guadalupea (otherwise called Queraqueiera, or Carucuiera) have in our time violently taken out of the said Island of Sancti johannis, more than five thousand men to be eaten. But let it suffice thus much to have wandered by these monstrous bloodsuckers. We will now therefore speak somewhat of the roots whereof they make their bread, forasmuch as the same shall hereafter be food to Christian men, in stead of bread made of wheat, and in the stead of radish, with such other roots as they have been accustomed to eat in Europe. We have oftentimes said before, that jucca is a root, whereof the best and most delicate bread is made, both in the firm land of these regions, and also in the Islands: but how it is tilled or husbanded, how it groweth, and of how divers kinds it is, I have not yet declared. Therefore, 
The manner of planting the root jucca.  when they intend to plant this jucca, they make a hole in the earth, knee deep, and raise a heap of the earth taken out of the same, fashioning it like a square bed, of niene foot breadth on every side, setting twelve trunks of these roots (being about a foot and a half long a piece) in every of the said beds, containing three roots of a side, so laid a slope, that the ends of them join in manner together in the centre or midst of the bed within the ground. Out of the joints of the roots, and spaces between the same, spring the tops and blades of new roots, which by little and little increasing, grow to the bygnes and length of a man's arm in the brawn, and oftentimes as big as the thigh: so that by the time of their full ripeness, 
Earth turned into roots.  in manner all the earth of the heap is converted into roots. But they say that these roots are not ripe in less than a year and a half, and that the longer they are suffered to grow, even until two years complete, they are so much the better, and more perfect to make bread thereof. When they are taken forth of the earth, 
How bread is made of roots  they scrape them, and slyse them, with certain sharp stones, serving for the same purpose: And thus laying them between two great stones, or putting them in a sack made of the stalks of certain tough herbs and small reeds, they press them (as do we cheese or crabs, to draw out the juice thereof) and so let them dry a day before they eat them. The juice or liquor they cast away: for (as we have said) it is deadly poison in the Islands. Yet is the juice of such as grow in the firm land wholesome, if it be sodde, as is the whey of our milk. They say that there are many kinds of this jucca, whereof some are more pleasant and delicate than the other, and are therefore reserved as it were to make five Manchet for the kings own table: But the Gentlemen eat of the meaner sort, and the common people of the basest. The finest they call Cazabbi, which they make round like cakes, in certain presses, before they seeth it, or bake it. They say furthermore, that there are likewise divers kinds of the roots of Ages, and Battata. But they use these rather as fruits, and dishes of service, then to make bread thereof, as we use Rapes, Radishes, muhrooms, Navies, Persnippes', and such like. In this case, they most especially esteem the best kind of Battatas, which in pleasant taste and tenderness, far exceedeth our muhrooms. It shall suffice to have said thus much of roots: We will now therefore speak of another kind of their bread. We declared before, that they have a kind of grain or Pulse, much like unto Panicum, but with somewhat bigger grains, 
Panicum is a grain somewhat like mil: The Italians call it Melica.  which they beat into meal, upon certain great hollow stones, with the labour of their hands, when they lack jucca, and of this is made the more vulgar or common bread. It is sown thrice a year, so that the fruitfulness of the ground may bear it, by reason of the equality of the time, whereof we have spoken sufficiently before. In these regions they found also the grain of Maizium, and sundry kinds of fruits of trees, 
He meaneth the equal length of day and night which is continually in regions under the Equinoctial line.  diligently planted, and well husbanded. The way between the regions of Caramairi and Saturma, is fair, brood, and right forth. They found here also sundry kinds of water pots made of earth, of divers colours, in the which they both fetch and keep fresh water: Likewise sundry kinds of jugs, godderdes, drinking cups, pots, pans, dishes, and platters, artificially made. When the governor had given commandment by proclamation, that the inhabitants should either obey the Christian king, and embrace our religion, or else to departed out of their country: they answered with venomous arrows. In this skirmish, our men took some of them: whereof, clothing the most part in fair apparel, they sent them again to their own company: But leading the residue to the ships, to th'intent to show them the power and magnificence of the christians, that they might declare the same to their companions, thereby to win their favour, they apparelled them likewise, and sent them after their fellows. They affirm, that in all the rivers of these coast, they saw great arguments and tokens of gold. They found here and there in their houses good store of Heart's flesh, & Boar's flesh, wherewith they fed themselves delicately. They also have great plenty of sundry kinds of birds, and fowls, whereof they bring up many in their houses, some for necessary food, and other for dainty dishes, as we do Hens and Partridges. Our men hereby conjecture, that the air of these regions is very wholesome, 
Wholesome air.  forasmuch as sleeping all night under the firmament on the banks of the rivers, none of them were at any time offended with rheums or headache, by reason of any noisome humour, or vapour proceeding from the earth, air, or water. 
Gossampine Cotton. Feathers.  Our men furthermore found there many great bottoms of gossampyne cotton ready spun, and fardelies of divers kinds of feathers, whereof they make themselves crests and plumes, after the manner of our men of arms: also certain cloaks, which they esteem as most comely ornaments. They found likewise an innumerable multitude of bows and arrows. 
Bows and arrows.  Thinhabitants also of these regions, in some places use to burn the carcases of their princes when they are dead, and to reserve their bones buried with spices in certain hills. In other places, 
Dead bodies reserved.  they only dry them, and imbawme them with spices and sweet gums, and so reserve them in sepulchres in their own houses. somewhere also, they dry them, spice them, adorn them with precious jewels, and ouches, and so reverently place them in certain tabernacles, made for the same purpose in their own palaces. When our men had many of their tablets, bracelets, collars, and such other ouches (which they call Guanines) they found them rather to be made of laton then of gold: 
Gonzalus Oui●dus sayeth, that they gild marvelously with the juice of a certain herb.  whereby they suppose that they have used to exchange their ware with some crafty strangers, which brought them those counterfeit ouches, to defraud them of their gold: For even our men perceived not the deceit until they came to the melting. Furthermore, certain of our buyl●ers wandering a little way from the sea coasts, chanced to ●ynde certain pieces of white marble: whereby they think, 
White marble.  that in time past some strangers have come to those lands, which have digged marble out of the mountains, and left those fragments on the plain. There our men learned that the river Maragnonus descendeth from the mountains covered with snow, called Montes Nivales, 
The great river Maragnonus. This joineth with the mighty river called Flumen Amazonum, found of late.  or Serra Nevata, and the same to be increased by many other rivers, which fall into it throughout all the low and waterly regions, by the which it runneth with so long a tract from the said mountains into the sea, and this to be the cause of the greatness thereof. These things being thus brought to pass, the governor commanded the trumpeter to blow a retreat: whereupon they which were sent to land (being five hundred in number) making a great shout for joy of their victory, set themselves in order of battle, and so keeping their array, returned to the ships laden with spoil of those provinces, and shining in soldiers cloaks of feathers, 
Cloaks of feathers.  with fair plumes and crests of variable colours. In this mean time, having repaired their ships, and furnished the same with all necessaries, they loosed anchor the xvi day of the kalends of july, directing their course to the haven of Carthagena, in the which voyage they destroyed and wasted certain Islands of the Canibales, lying in the way, according as they were commanded by the king. But the swift course of the water deceived both johannes Sarranus the chief Pilot of the governors ship, and all the other, 
The swift course of the water.  although they made their boast that they perfectly knew the nature thereof: For they affirm, that in one night they were carried forty leagues beyond their estimation. 
Forty leagues in one night.    

The sixth book of the third Decade.  
Here must we somewhat digress from Cosmography, 
Sundry opinions why the sea runneth with so swift course from the East into the West.  & make a philosophical discourse to search the secret causes of nature. For whereas they all affirm with one consent, that the sea runneth there from the east to the west, as swiftly as it were a river falling from high mountains, I thought it not good to let such matter slip untouched. The which while I consider, I am drawn into no small ambiguity and doubt, whither those waters have their course, which flow with so continual a tract in circuit from the East, as though they fled to the west, never to return, and yet neither the west thereby any whit the more filled, nor the East emptied. If we shall say that they fall to their centre (as is the nature of heavy things) and assign the Equinoctial line to be the centre (as some affirm) what centre shall we appoint to be able to receive so great abundance of water? 

The Equinoctial line.  
Why all waters move toward the south or Equinoctial, read Cardanus ae subtilit liber two. de elementis. straights.   Or what circumference shall be found wet? They which have searched those coasts, have yet found no like reason to be true. Many think that there should be certain large straights or entrances in the corner of that great land, which we described to be eight times bigger than italy, and the corner thereof to be full of gulfs, whereby they suppose that some strayghtes should pass through the same, lying on the west side of the Island of Cuba, and that the said strayghtes should swallow up those waters, and so convey the same into the west, and from thence again into our East Ocean, or north seas, as some think. 
As by the straight of Magelanus The north lands.  Other will, that the gulf of that great land be closed up, and the land to reach far toward the north on the back side of Cuba, so that it embrace the north lands, which the frozen sea encompasseth under the north pole, and that all the land of those coasts, should join together as one firm land: Whereby they conjecture, that those waters should be turned about by the object or resistance of that land, so bending toward the north, as we see the waters turned about in the crooked banks of certain rivers. But this agreeth not in all points. For they also which have searched the frozen sea, 
The frozen sea.  and sailed from thence into the west, do likewise affirm, that those north seas flow continually toward the west, although nothing so swiftly. These north seas have been searched by one Sebastian Cabot, 
Sebastian Cabot.  a Venetian borne, whom being yet but in manner an infant, his parents carried with them into England, having occasion to resort thither for trade of merchandise, as is the manner of the venetians, to leave no part of the world unsearched to obtain richesse. He therefore furnished two ships in England at his own charges: And first with three hundredth men, 
The voyage of Sebastian Cabot from England to the frozen sea.  directed his course so far toward the north pole, that even in the month of july he found monstrous heaps of Ice swimming on the sea, and in manner continual day light: Yet saw he the land in that tract free from Ice, which had been molten by heat of the Son. Thus seeing such heaps of Ice before him, he was enforced to turn his sails, and follow the west, so coasting still by the shore, that he was thereby brought so far into the south, by reason of the land bending so much southward, that it was there almost equal in latitude with the sea called Fretum Herculeum, having the north pole elevate in manner in the same degree. He sailed likewise in this tract so far toward the west, that he had the Island of Cuba on his left hand, in manner in the same degree of longitude. As he travailed by the coasts of this great land (which he named Baccalaos) he saith, that he found the like course of the waters toward the west, but the same to run more softly and gently, than the swift waters which the spaniards found in their navigations southward. Wherefore, it is not only more like to be true, but aught also of necessity to be concluded, that between both the lands hitherto unknown, there should be certain great open places, whereby the waters should thus continually pass from the East into the west: which waters I suppose to be driven about the globe of the earth by the uncessant moving and impulsion of the heavens, and not to beswalowed up and cast out again by the breathing of Demogorgon, 
Demogorgon is the spirit of the earth.  as some have imagined, because they see the seas by increase & decrease, to flow & reflow. Sebastian Cabot himself, named those lands Baccalaos, because that in the seas thereabout he found so great multitudes of certain big fishes, much like unto Tunnies (which th'inhabitants call Baccalaos) that they sometimes stayed his ships. He found also the people of those regions covered with beasts skins: 
People covered with beasts skins.  yet not without the use of reason. He also saith there is great plenty of Bears in those regions, which use to eat fish: For plungeing themselves into the water where they perceive a multitude of these fishes to lie, they fasten their claws in their scales, and so draw them to land, and eat them: So that (as he saith) the Bears being thus satisfied with fish, are not noisome to men. He declareth further, that in many places of these regions, he saw great plenty of laton among the inhabitants. Cabot is my very friend, whom I use fam●lierlye, and delight to have him sometimes keep me company in my own house: For being called out of England by the commandment of the catholic king of Castille, after the death of Henry king of England, the seventh of that name, he was made one of our counsel and assistance as touching the affairs of the new Indies, looking daily for ships to be furnished for him to discover this hid secret of nature. This voyage is appointed to be begun in March in the year next following, being the year of Christ .1516. What shall succeed, your holiness shallbe advertised by my letters, if God grant me life. Some of the Spaniards deny that Cabot was the first finder of the land of bacalaos, and affirm that he went not so far westewarde: But it shall suffice to have said thus much of the gulfs and strayghtes, and of Sebastian Cabot. Let us now therefore return to the Spaniards. At this time, they let pass the haven of Carthago untouched, 
The Islands of the Canybales.  with all the Islands of the Canibales there about, which they named Insulas Sancti Bernardi, leaving also behind their backs, all the region of Caramairi. here by reason of a sudden tempest, they were cast upon the Island Fortis, 
The Island Fortis.  being about fifty leagues distant from the entrance of the gulf of Vraba. In this Island, they found in the houses of thinhabitants, many baskets made of certain great sea reeds, 
Salt.  full of salt. For this Island hath in it many goodly salt bays, by reason whereof they have great plenty of salt, which they sell to other nations for such things as they stand in need of. Not far from hence, a great Curlew, as big as a Stork, 
A strange thing  came flying to the governors ship, and suffered herself to be easily taken, which being carried about among all the ships of the navy, died shortly after: They saw also a great multitude of the same kind of fowls on the shore a far of. The governors ship, which we said to have lost the rudder, being now sore bruised, and in manner unprofitable, they left behind, to follow at leisure. The navy arrived at Dariena the twelfth day of the kalends of july, and the governors ship (being void of men) was driven aland in the same coasts within four days after. The spaniards which now inhabited Dariena, with their Captain and lieutenant Vaschus Nunnez Balboa (of whom we have largely made mention before) being certified of the arrival of Petrus Arias and his company, went forth three miles to meet him, 
How Vaschus received the new governor.  and received him honourably, and religiously with the psalm Te deum laudamus, giving thanks to god by whose safe conduct they were brought so prosperously thither to all their comforts. They received them gladly into their houses builded after the manner of those provinces. I may well call these regions, Provinces, a Procul Victis (that is) such as are overcome far of, forasmuch as our men do now inhabit the same, all the barbarous kings and idolaters being ejected. They entertained them with such cheer as they were able to make them: as with the fruits of those regions, and new bread, both made of roots, and the grain Maizium. Other delicates to make up the feast, were of their own store, which they brought with them in their ships, as powdered flesh, salted fish, and bread made of wheat: for they brought with them many barrels of wheat meal for the same purpose. here may your holiness, not without just cause of admiration, behold a kings navy and great multitude of Christians, inhabiting not only the regions situate under the circle of heaven, called Tropicus Cancri, but also in manner under the Equinoctial line, contrary to the opinion of the old writers, a few excepted. 
Habitable regions under the Equinoctial line.  But after that they are now met together, let us further declare what they determined to do. Therefore, the day after that the navy arrived, there assembled a company of Spaniards th'inhabitors of Dariena, to the number of four hundred and fifty men. Petrus Arias the governor of the navy, and his company, conferred with them both privily and openly of certain articles, whereof it was the kings pleasure he should inquire: and most especially as concerning such things whereof Vaschus the first finder and Admiral of the South sea, made mention in his large letter sent from Dariena to Spain. In this inquisition they found althyngs to be true whereof Vaschus had certified the king by his letters, and thereupon concluded, that in the dominions of Comogra, Pocchorrosa & Tumanama at the assignment of Vaschus, certain fortresses should be erected forthwith, to thintent there to plant their colony or habitation. 
Where the new governor planteth his habitation.  To the better accomplishment hereof, they sent immediately one johannes Aiora, a noble young gentleman of Corduba, and under Lieutenant, with four hundred men, and four Caravels, and one other little ship. Thus departing, he sailed first directly to the haven of Comogrus, distant from Dariena about twenty and five leagues, as they write in their last letters. From hence, he is appointed to send a hundred and fifty of his four hundred, toward the South, by a new and righter way found of late, by the which (as they say) it is not past twenty and six leagues from the palace of king Comogrus to the entrance of the gulf of Sancti Michaelis. The residue of the four hundred shall remain there, to be an aid and secure to all such as shall journey to and fro. Those hundred and fifty which are assigned to go southward, take with them for interpreters certain of our men, which had learned the soothern language of the bondmen which were given to Vaschus when he overran those regions, and also certain of the bondmen themselves which had now learned the Spanish tongue. They say that the haven of Pocchorrosa is only seven leagues distant from the haven of Comogrus. In Pocchorrosa he is assigned to leave fifty men, 
A passenger ship.  with the lightest ship, which may be a passenger between them: that like as we use post horses by land, so may they by this currant ship, in short space certify the lieutenant and th'inhabitors of Dariena of such things as shall chance. They intend also to build houses in the region of Tumanama. The palace of king Tumanama, is distant from Pocchorrosa about twenty leagues. Of these four hundred men, being of the old soldiers of Dariena, & men of good experience, fifty were appointed to be as it were Decurians, 
Decurians are officers divided into tens etc.  to guide and conduct the new men from place to place to do their affairs. When they had thus set all things in order, they thought it good to advertise the king hereof, and therewith to certify him, that in those provinces there is a king named Dabaiba, whose dominion is very rich in gold: but the same to be yet untouched by reason of his great power. 
The gold mines of Dabaiba.  His kingdom joineth to the second great river, named Dabaiba after his name, which falleth into the sea out of the corner of the gulf of Vraba, as we have largely declared before. The common report is, that all the land of his dominions is rich in gold. The palace of king Dabaiba is fifty leagues distant from Dariena. The inhabitants say, that from the palace, the gold mines reach to the borders on every side. Albeit our men have also gold mines not to be contemned, even within three leagues of Dariena, in the which they gather gold in many places at this present: Yet do they affirm greater plenty to be in the mines of Dabaiba. In the books of our first fruits, written to your holiness, we made mention of this Dabaiba, wherein our men were deceived, 
An error.  and mystooke the matter: For where they found the fishermen of king Dabaiba in the marshes, they thought his region had been there also. They determined therefore to send to king Dabaiba, three hundred choice young men, to be chosen out of the whole army, as most apt to the wars, and well furnished with all kinds of armour and artyllerie, to the intent to go unto him, and will him, either friendly and peaceably to permit them to inhabit part of his kingdom, with the fruition of the gold mines, or else to bid him battle, and drive him out of his country. In their letters, they oftentimes repeat this for an argument of great riches to come, that they in a manner digged the ground in no place, but found the earth mixed with sparks and small grains of gold. They have also advertised the king, that it shallbe commodious to place inhabitors in the haven of Sancta Martha, in the region of Saturma, 
The region of Saturma. The Island of Dominica.  that it may be a place of refuge for them that sail from the Island of Dominica, from the which (as they say) it is but four or five days sailing to that haven of the region of Saturma, and from the haven, but three days sailing to Dariena. But this is to be understood in going, and not in returning. For the returning from thence is so laborious and difficult, 
Difficult sailing against the course of the sea.  by reason of the contrary course of the water, that they seem as it were to ascend high mountains, and strive against the power of Neptunus. This swift course of the sea towards the west, is not so violent to them which return to Spain from the Islands of Hispaniola and Cuba, although they also do labour against the fall of the Ocean: The cause whereof is, that the sea is here very large, so that the waters have their full scope. But in the tract of Paria, the waters are constrained together by the bending sides of that great land, and by the multitude of Islands lying against it, as the like is seen in the strayghtes or narrow seas of Scicile, where the violent course of the waters cause the dangerous places of Scylla and Charybdis by reason of those narrow seas which contain jonium, 
The dangerous straights of Scylla and Charybdis.  Libicum, and Tirrhenum. Colonus the first finder of these regions, hath left in writing, that sailing from the Island of Guanassa, and the provinces of jaia, Maia, and Cerabaro, being regions of the west marches of Beragua, he found the course of the water so vehement and furious against the forepart of his ship, while he sailed from those coasts toward the East, that he could at no time touch the ground with his sounding plummet, but that the contrary violence of the water would bear it up from the bottom: He affirmeth also, that he could never in one whole day, with a meetly good wind, win one mile of the course of the water. 
The vehement course of the sea from the east to the west.  And this is the cause why they are oftentimes enforced to sail first by the Islands of Cuba and Hispaniola, and so into the main sea toward the North, when they return to Spain, that the North winds may further their voyage, which they can not bring to pass by a direct course: But of the motions of the Ocean sea to and fro, this shall suffice. Let us now therefore rehearse what they write of Dariena, and of their habitation there, which they call Sancta Maria Antiqua, planted on the sea banks of Dariena. The situation of the place, hath no natural munition or defence, and the air is more pestiferous then in Sardus. The Spanish inhabitors are all pale and yellow, like unto them which have the yellow jaundice: which nevertheless cometh not of the nature of the region, as it is situate under the heaven. For in many regions being under the self same degree of latitude, having the pole of the same elevation, they find wholesome & temperate air, in such places where as the earth bringeth forth fair springs of water, or where wholesome rivers run by banks of pure earth without mud: but most especially where they inhabit the sides of the hills, and not the valleys. But that habitation which is on the banks of the river of Dariena, is situate in a deep valley, and environed on every side with high hills: By reason whereof, it receiveth the Son beams at noontide directly parpendicular over their heads, and are therefore sore vexed by reflection of the beams, both before, behind, and from the sides. For it is the reflection of the son beams which causeth fervent heat, 
By what means the Son beams are cause of fervent heat.  and not their access or nearness to the earth, forasmuch as they are not passable in themselves, as doth manifestly appear by the snow lying continually unmoulten upon certain high mountains, as your holiness knoweth right well. The son beams therefore falling on the mountains, are reflected downward into the valley, by reason of the object of the declining sides of the hills, as it were the fall of a great round stone, rolled from the top of a mountain. The valley therefore receiveth both those beams which fall directly thereon, and also those which are reflected downward from every side of the mountains. Their habitation therefore in Driena, 
The pernicious air of Dariena.  is pernicious and unwholesome, only of the particular nature of the place, and not by the situation of the region as it is plase under the heaven, or near to the son. The place is also contagious by the nature of the soil, by reason it is compassed about with muddy and stinking marshes, the infection whereof is not a little increased by the heat. The village is self is in a marsh, and in manner a standing puddle, where, of the drops falling from the hands of the bondmen, while they water the pavements of their houses, Toads are engendered immediately, 
Toads and Flees engendered of drops of water.  as I myself saw in an other place the drops of that water turn into flees in the summer season. Furthermore, wheresoever they dig the ground the depth of a handful and a half, there springeth out unwholesome and corrupt water, of the nature of the river, which runneth through the deep and muddy channel of the valley, and so falleth into the sea: Now therefore they consult of removing their inhabitations. Necessity caused them first to fasten their foot here, 
Necessity hath no law.  because that they which first arrived in those lands, were oppressed with such urgent hunger, that they had no respect to change the place, although they were thus vexed by the contagion of the soil and heat of the Son, beside the corrupt water, and infectious air, by reason of venomous vapours, and exhalations rising from the same. another great incommodity was, that the place was destitute of a commodious haven, being three leagues distant from the mouth of the gulf: The way is also rough and difficult to bring victuals and other necessaries from the sea. But let us now speak somewhat of other particular things which chanced. Therefore shortly after that they were arrived, there happened many things whereof they had no knowledge before. A certain well learned physician of Civil, whom partly the authority of the Bishop of Dariena, and partly the desire of gold, had alured to those lands, was so scared with lightening in the night season, lying in bed with his wife, that the house and all the stuff therein being set on fire and burnt, 
A house set on fire with lightning.  he and his wife being both sore scorched, ran forth crying, and almost naked, hardly escaping the danger of death. And an other time, as certain of them stood one the shore, a great Crocodile suddenly carried away a masty of a year and a half old, 
A dog devoured of a Crocodile.  as a kite should have snatched up a chicken: and this even in the presence of them all, 
Tanquam canis de Nilo.  where the miserable dog cried in vain for the help of his master. In the night season they were tormented with the biting of Bats, which are there so noisome, 
The biting of Bats.  that if they bite any man in his sleep, they put him in danger of life, only with drawing of blood: In so much that some have died thereof, falling as it were into a consumption through the maliciousness of the venomous wound. If these Bats chance to find a cock or a hen abroad in the night season, they bite them by the combs, and so kill them. They also which went last into these regions, do write, that the land is troubled with Crocodiles, Lions, and Tigers: but that they have now devised arts aod ingens how to take them. 
Lions and Tigers.  Likewise that in the houses of their fellows, they found the hides and cases of such Lions and Tigers as they had killed. They write furthermore, that by reason of the rankness and fruitfulness of the ground, kine, swine, and horses, do marvelously increase in these regions, and grow to a much bigger quantity than they which were of the first brood. 
Beasts wax higher in their kind.  Of the exceeding highness of the trees with their fruits, of the garden herbs, fruits, plants, and seeds, which our men brought from Spain, and sowed and set the same in these regions: likewise of the Hearts and other four footed beasts both tame and wild, also of divers kinds of fowls, birds, and fishes, they write even as we have declared in the decades before. Careta, the king of the region of Cioba, was with them for the space of three days: whom when they had friendly entertained, and showed him the secret places of their ships, their Horses also, with their trappers, bards, and other furnimentes, beside many other things which seemed strange to him, and had further delighted his mind with the harmony of their musycal instruments, & given him many rewards, they dismissed him half amazed with to much admiration. He signified unto them, that there are trees in that province, 
Note.  of the planks whereof if ships were made, they should be safe from the worms of the sea, which they call Bromas. 
Broma or Bissa are worms which destroy ships.  How these worms gnaw and corrode the ships, we have declared before. Our ships are greatly troubled with this plague, if they lie long in the havens of these regions. But they affirm that the wood of this tree is so bitter, that the worms will not taste thereof. There is also an other tree peculiar to these lands, 
A venomous tree.  whose leaves if they only touch the bare in any place of a man's body, they cause great blisters, and those so malicious, that except the same be forthwith healed with salt water or fasting spittle, they do incontinently engender deadly pains. They say likewise, that the savour of the wood is present poison, and that it can no whither be carried without danger of life. 
Perhaps their venomous arrows are made of this wood.  When thinhabitants of the Island of Hispaniola had oftentimes attempted to shake of the yoke of servitude, and could never bring the same to pass, neither by open war, nor yet by privy conspiracies, they were determined in the night season to have killed our men in their sleep with the smoke of this wood: But when the Christian men had knowledge hereof, they compelled the poor wretches to confess their intent, and punished the chief auctors of the device. They have also a certain herb with the savour whereof they are preserved from the hurt of this venomous wood, 
A preservative against poison.  so that they may bear it safely. Of these small things it shall suffice to have said thus much. They look daily for many greater things to certify us of from the Islands of the south sea: 
The Islands of the south sea.  For at such time as the messenger which brought our letters departed from thence, Petrus Arias prepared an expedition to that rich Island which lieth in the mouth of the gulf called Sinus S. Michaelis, 
The rich Island called Dites.  and reacheth into the south sea, being also left untouched of vaschus, by reason that the Sea was at that time of the year sore troubled with tempests, as we have further declared in Vaschus his viage to the south. We look therefore daily for greater things than are hitherto passed: For they have now taken in hand to subdue many other provinces, which we suppose to be either very rich, or to bring forth some strange works of nature. johannes Diaz Solisius of Nebrissa (of whom we have made mention before) is sent by the froont of the cape or point of Sancti Augustini (which reacheth seven degrees beyond the Equinoctial line, 
Cap. sancti Augustini. Of the evil success of these viages, read decade, 3. Liber. 9  and pertaineth to the dominion of the Portugals) to th'intent to overrun the south side, from the back half of Paria, Cumana, Cuquibacca, with the havens of Cartbago, and Sancta Martha, of Dariena also, and Beragua, that more perfect and certain knowledge may be had of those tracts. Furthermore, one johannes Poncius was sent forth with three ships, to destroy the Canibales, 
An expedition to destroy the Canibales.  both in the land and Islands there about: aswell that the nations of the more human and innocent people may at the length live without fear of that pestiferous generation, as also the better and more safely to search the secrets and richesse of those regions. Many other likewise were sent divers and sundry ways, as Gasper Badaiocius to search the West parts, Franciscus Bexerra, to sail by the corner of the gulf, and Valleius, to pass by the mouth or entrance thereof to the east coasts of the gulf, to search the secrets of that land, in the which Fogeda with his company had of late begun to plant their habitation, and had builded a fortress and a village. Badaiocius departed first from Dariena, with fourscore soldiers well appointed, whom Lodovicus Mercado followed with fifty: To Bezerra were also fourscore assigned, and threescore and ten to Valleius. 
Look decade .3. Lib. 9  Whether they shall arrive at safe and commodious havens, or fall into unfortunate stations, he only knoweth whose providence ruleth all: for as for us men we are included within the knowledge of things after they have chanced. Let us now therefore come to other matters.   

The seventh book of the third decade.  
PEtrus Arias the governor of the supposed continent, was scarcely entered into the main sea with his navy, onward on his viage to Dariena, but I was advertised that one Andreas Moralis a pilot, 
The navigations of Andreas Moralis.  who had oftentimes overrun the coasts of these new seas, and the Islands of the same, was come to the court to sell such merchandise as he brought with him from thence. This man had diligently searched the tract of the supposed continent, and especially thinner regions of the Island of Hispaniola, whereunto he was appointed by his brother Nicolaus Ouandus (the governor of the Island, and chief Commendator of the order of the knights of Alcantara) because he was a witty man, and more apt to search such things than any other: so that with his own hands he drew fair cards and tables of such regions as he discovered. Wherein as he hath been found faithful of such as have since had better trial hereof, so is he in most credit amongst the best sort. He therefore resorted to me, as all they are accustomed to do which return from the Ocean. What I learned of him and divers other, of things heretofore unknown, I will now declare. 
A particular description of the Island of Hispaniola.  The beginning of this narration, shallbe the particular description of the Island of Hispaniola, forasmuch as it is the head, and as it were, the principal mart of all the liberality of the Ocean, & hath a thousand & again a thousand, fair, pleasant, beautiful, 
Nereids are nymphs of the sea, he meaneth Islands. Tethis the wife of Neptunus & goddess of the sea.  & rich Nereids, which lie about it on every side, adourning this their lady & mother, as it were an other Tethis the wife of Neptunus, enuyroning her about, & attending upon her as their queen & patroness. But of these Nereiades (that is to say, the Islands placed about her) we will speak more hereafter. Let us in the mean time declare somewhat of the Island which our men named Margarita Dives (which the spaniards call De las perlas) being now well known, and lying in the south sea in the gulf called Sinus Sancti Michaelis (that is) saint Michael's gulf. This Island hath presently brought to our knowledge many strange and wonderful things, and promiseth no small hope of greater things in time to come. In this is found great plenty of pearls, 
Great pearls.  so fair and great, that the sumptuous queen Cleopatra might have seemed to wear them in her crowns, chains, and bracelets. Of the shelfyshes wherein these are engendered, we will speak somewhat more in th'end of this narration. 
Hispaniola like unto the earthy paradise  But let us now return to Hispaniola, most like unto the earthly paradise. In the description hereof, we will begin of the imposition of divers names, then of the form of the Island, temperate air, and beneficial heaven, and finally of the division of the regions. Therefore for the righter pronunciation of the names, your holiness must understand, that they are pronounced with thaccent, as you may know by the verge set over the heads of the vowels, as in the name of the Island Matinino, where the accent is in the last vowel, and the like to be understood in all other names. They say therefore, that the first inhabitors of the Island were transported in their Canoas' (that is, 
The first inhabitors of Hispaniola.  boats made of one whole piece of wood) from the Island of Matinino, being like banished men driven from thence by reason of certain contrary factions and divisions among themselves, like as we read how Dardanus came from Corytho, and Teucrus from Creta into Asia, and that the region where they placed their habitation, was afterward called Troianum. The like we read how the Tyrians and Sidonians arrived with their navy in Libya by the fabulous conduction of Dido. These Matinians in like manner being banished from their own country, planted their first habitation in that part of the Island of Hispaniola, which they call Cahonao, upon the bank of the river named Bahaboni as is red in the beginning of the Romans that Aeneas' of Troy arrived in the region of Italy, called Latium, upon the banks of the river of Tiber. Within the mouth of the river of Bahaboni, lieth an Island, where it is said that thinhabitants builded their first house, which they named Camoteia. This house they consecrated shortly after, and honoured the same reverently, with continual gifts and monuments, even until the coming of our men, like as the Christians have ever religiously honoured jerusalem the fountain and original of our faith: 
Jerusalem.  As also the Turks attribute the like to the city of Mecha in Araby, and the inhabitants of the fortunate Islands (called the Islands of Canary) to Tyrma, builded upon a high rock, 
Mecha. The Islands of Canary.  from the which many were wont with joyful minds and songs to cast themselves down headlong, being persuaded by their priests that the souls of all such as so died for the love of Tyrma, should thereby enjoy eternal felicity. The conquerors of the Islands of Canary, found them yet remaining in that superstition even until our time, nor yet is the memory of their sacrifices utterly worn away: the rock also reserveth the old name unto this day. I have also learned of late, that there yet remaineth in the Island some of the faction of Betanchor the Frencheman, 
Betanchor a frenchman.  and first that brought the Islands to good culture and civility, being thereto licensed by the king of Castille, as I have said before. These do yet (for the most part) observe both the language and manners of the French men, although the heirs and successors of Betanchor, had sold the two subdued Islands to certain men of Castille: Yet th'inhabitors which succeeded Betanchor, and builded them houses, and increased their families there, do continue to this day, and live quietly and pleasantly with the spaniards, not grieved with the sharp cold of France. But let us now return to thinhabitants of Matinino and Hispaniola. The Island of Hispaniola was first named by the first inhabitors Quizqueia, and then Haiti: and this not by chance, 
The first names of Hispaniola.  or at the pleasure of such as devised these names, but of credulity and belief of some great effect. For Quizqueia, is as much to say as, A great thing, and that so great, that none may be greater. They interpret also, that Quizqueia signifieth, large, universal, or all, in like signification as the Greeks named their god called Pan, because that for the greatness thereof, these simple souls supposed it to be the whole world: and that the Son beams gave light to none other world, but only to this Island, with the other adjacent about the same, and thereupon thought it most worthy to be called great, as the greatest of all other known to them. Haiti is as much to say by interpretation, as, rough, sharp, or craggy. But by a figurative speech called denomination (whereby the whole is named by part) they named the whole Island Haiti (that is) rough: Forasmuch as in many places the face of this Island is rough, by reason of the craggy mountains, horrible thick woods, and terribly dark and deep valleys, environed with great & high mountains, although it be in many other places exceeding beautiful and flourishing. here must we somewhat digress from thorder we are entered into. Perhaps your holiness will marvel by what means these simple men should of so long sustenance bear in mind such principles, whereas they have no knowledge of letters. So it is therefore, that from the beginning, 
Their manner of learning.  their princes have ever been accustomed to commit their children to the governance of their wise men, which they call Boitios, to be instructed in knowledge, and to bear in memory such things as they learn. They give themselves chief to two things: As generally, to learn th'original and success of things, and particularly, to rehearse the noble facts of their grandfathers, great grandfathers, and ancestors, 
Ballets and rhymes.  aswell in peace as in war. These two things they have of old time composed in certain miters and ballets in their language. These rhymes or ballets, they call Arei●os. And as our minstrels are accustomed to sing to the Harp or Lute, so do they in like manner sing these songs, and dance to the same, playing on Timbrels made of shells of certain fishes: These Timbrels they call Maguei. 
Singing and daunceing. Songs of love and mourning.  They have also songs and ballets of love, and other of lamentations and mourning, some also to encourage them to the wars, with every of them their tunes agreeable to the matter. They exercise themselves much in daunceing, wherein they are very active, and of greater agility than our men, by reason they give themselves to nothing so much, and are not hindered with apparel, which is also the cause of their swiftness of foot. In their 〈◊〉 left them of their ancestors, they have prophecies of the coming of our men into their country. 
Prophesses.  These they sing with mourning, and as it were with groaning, bewail the loss of their liberty and servitude. 
Note.  For these prophecies make mention that there should come into the Island Maguacochios, that is, men clothed in apparel, and armed with such swords as should cut a man in sunder at one stroke, under whose yoke their posterity should be subdued. 
Their familiarity with spirits.  And here I do not marvel that their predecessors could prophecy of the servitude and bondage of their succession (if it be true that is said) of the familiarity they have with spirits, which appear to them in the night, whereof we have largely made mention in the nienth book of the first decade, where also we have entreated of their Zemes (that is) their Idols, and Images of devils which they honoured. 
The devil is driven away by baptism.  But they say that since these Zemes were taken away by the Christians, the spirits have no more appeared. Our men ascribe this to the sign of the cross, wherewith they defend themselves from such spirits: For they are now all cleansed and sanctified by the water of baptism, whereby they have renounced the devil, andare consecrated the holy members of Christ. 
surveyors.  They are universally studious to know the bounds and limits of their regions & kingdoms, and especially their Mitani (that is) noble men: so that even they are not utterly ignorant in the surveying of their lands. The common people have none other care then of setting, sowing, and planting. They are most expert fishers, by reason that throughout the whole year, they are accustomed daily to plunge themselves in the rivers, so that in manner they live no less in the water then on the land. They are also given to hunting: For (as I have said before) they have two kinds of four footed beasts, whereof the one is, little Cunnes, called Vtias, and other Serpents, named juannas, much like unto Crocodiles, 
Serpents. A Crocodile is much like to our Ewte or Lyserte.  of eight foot length, of most pleasant taste, and living on the land. All the Islands nourish innumerable birds and fowls: as Stockdoves, Ducks, Geese, Hearons, beside no less number of Popingiais then sparrows with us. Every king hath his subjects divided to sundry affairs: as some to hunting, other to fishing, & other some to husbandry. But let us now return to speak further of the names. We have said that Quizqueia and Haiti, were the old names of this Island. The whole Island was also called Cipanga, 
Cipanga.  of the region of the mountains abounding with gold: like as our ancient poets called all Italy Latium, 
Italy called Latium.  of part thereof. Therefore as they called Ausonia and Hesperia, Italy: even so by the names of Quizqueia, Haiti, and Cipanga, they understood the whole Island of Hispaniola. 
Isabel.  Our men did first name it Isabel, of queen Helisabeth, which in the Spanish tongue is called Isabel, and so named it of the first Colony where they planted their habitation, upon the bank near unto they sea on the North side of the Island, as we have further declared in the first decade. But of the names, this shall suffice. Let us now therefore speak of the form of the Island. 
The form of the Island of Hispaniola.  They which first overran it, described it unto me to be like unto the leaf of a Chestnut tree, with a gulf toward the west side, lying open against the Island of Cuba. But the expert shypmaistier Andrea's Moralis, brought me the form thereof somewhat differing from that. For from both the corners, as from the East angle and the West, he described it to be indented & eaten with many great gulfs, and the corners to reach forth very far, and placeth many large and safe havens in the great gulf on the East side: 
A particular card of Hispaniola.  But I trust shortly so to travail further herein, that a perfect card of the particular description of Hispaniola may be sent unto your holiness. For they have now drawn the Geographical description thereof in cards, even as your holiness hath seen the form and situation of Spain and Italy, with their mountains, valleys, rivers, cities, and colonies. Let us therefore without shamefastness compare the Island of Hispaniola to Italy, sometime the head and queen of the whole world. 
Hispaniola compared to Ita●ie.  For if we consider the quantity, it shallbe found little less, and much more fruitful. It reacheth from the East into the West, five hundred and forty miles, according to the computation of the later searchers, although the Admiral somewhat increased this number, as we have said in the first decade. It is in breadth somewhere almost three hundred miles, and in some places narrower, where the corners are extended: But it is surely much more blessed and fortunate than Italy, 
The temprature of Hispaniola.  being for the most part thereof so temperate and flourishing, that it is neither vexed with sharp cold, nor afflicted with immoderate hear. It hath both the steyinge or conversions of the Son (called Solstitia) in manner equal with the Equinoctial, 
The Equinoctial.  with little difference between the length of the day and the night throughout all the year. For on the south side, the day ascendeth scarcely an hour in length above the night, or contrariwise. But the difference is more on the north side: Yet are there some regions in the Island in the which the cold is of some force. 
Cold accidental. and not by the situation of the region.  But your holiness must understand this to be incident by reason of the object or nearness of the mountains, as we will more largely declare hereafter: Yet is not this cold so piercing or sharp, that thinhabitants are molested with snow or biting frost. In other places, 
Perpetual spring and summer.  the Island enjoyeth perpetual spring time, and is fortunate with continual summer and harvest. The trees flourish there all the whole year, and the meadows continue always green. All things are exceeding fortunate, and grow to great perfection. How wonderfully all garden herbs and fruits do increase, 
marvelous fruitfulness.  so that within the space of sixteen days after the seed is sown, all herbs of small steams, as lettisse, borage, radish, and such other, come to their full ripenesss, and also how herbs of the bigger sort, as Gourds, Melons, Cucumbers, Pompons, Sitrons, and such other, come to their perfection in the space of thirty days, we have sufficiently, declared elsewhere. Of the beasts transported out of Spain thither, 
Beasts.  we have said how they grow to a much greater kind: 
Oxen and swine of exceeding bigness.  insomuch that when they fall into communication of the oxen or kine, they compare them in bigness to Elephants, and swine to Mules: but this somewhat by an excessive kind of speech. We have also made mention how their swines flesh is more savoury and of far better and of more pleasant taste, and more wholesome than ours, 
Swine fed with Mirobalanes.  by reason that they are fed with the fruits of Mirobalane trees, and other pleasant and nourishing fruits of that country, which grow there of themselves, as do with us Beeches, Holly, and Okes. Uines would also prosper there with marvelous increase, if they had any regard to the planting thereof. The like increase cometh of wheat, if it be sown upon the mountains, where the cold is of some strength: but not in the same plains, by reason of to much fatness and rankness of the ground. It is in manner incredible to hear, that an ear of wheat should be bigger than a man's arm in the brawn, and more than a span in length, bearing also more than a thousand grains, 
An ear of wheat as big as a man's arm in the brawn.  as they all confess with one voice, and earnestly affirm the same with others. Yet they say that the bread of the Island called Cazabbi, made of the root of jucca, to be more wholesome, because it is of easier digestion, and is cultured with less labour, and greater increase. The residue of the time which they spend not in setting and planting, they bestow in gathering of gold. They have now such plenty of four footed beasts, that Horses and ox hides, with sheep skins, and goat skins, and such other, 
Great plenty of cattle.  are brought from thence into Spain: so that now the daughter in many things helpeth and succoureth her mother. Of the trees of brasyle, spices, the grain which coloureth scarlet in bright shining red, mastix, gossampyne cotton, the precious metal called Electrum, and such other commodities of this Island, we have spoken sufficiently before. What therefore can chance more happy unto man upon the earth, 
Incommodities of intemperate. regions  than there to live where he need not to be driven to close chambers with sharp cold or fainting heat, nor yet in winter either to be laden with heavy apparel, or to burn the shins with continual sitting at the fire, which things make men old in short time, by resolving the natural heat, whereof a thousand diseases ensue. 
Wholesome air and water.  They also affirm the air to be very healthful, and the waters and rivers to be no less wholesome, as they which have their continual course through the earth of the golden mines. 
Gold every where.  For there is in manner no rivers, no mountains, and but few plains, that are utterly without gold. But let us now at the length come to the particular description of the inner parts of this blessed Island. We have before declared how it is in manner equally divided with four great rivers, descending from high mountains, whereof that which runneth towards the East, is called junna, as that towards the West is named Attibunicus, the third is Nahiba or Haiba, which runneth Southward, the fourth is called jache, & falleth toward the North. But this shipmaster hath brought an other description, observed of the inhabitants from the beginning. Let us therefore divide the whole Island into five parts, calling the regions of every province by their old names: and finally make mention of such things as are worthy memory in every of them. The beginning of the Island on the East side, is contained in the province named Caizcimu, so named for that in their language Cimu signifieth the front or beginning of any thing. After this, followeth the province of Huhabo, and then Caihabo, the fourth is Bainoa. Guaccaiarima containeth the west corner. But the last save one, Bainoa is of larger bounds than the three other. Caizcimu reacheth from the first front of the Island to the river Hozama, which runneth by the city of saint Dominicke. But toward the North side, 
The city of S. Dominick.  it is ended at the rough mountains of Haiti. Hubaho, is included within the mountains Haiti and the river jaciga. Caeiabo the third province, containeth all that lieth between Cubabo and Dahatio, even unto the mouth of the river of jaceha or jache (one of the four which divide the Island equally) & ascendeth to the mountains of Cibava, where the greatest plenty of gold is found, out of the which also the river Demahus springeth: and joining with the springs of the river of Naiba (being an other of the four which divideth the Island toward the south sea) falleth to an other bank of the river of saint Dominick. Bainoa, beginneth at the confines of Caiabi, and reacheth even unto the Island of Cahini, which lieth near unto the sea banks of the North side of the Island, where we said that they erected the first colony or habitation. The province of Guaccaiarima, occupieth the remanent toward the west: this they named Guaccaiarima, 
Of provinces divided into regions.  because it is the extreme or uttermost part of the Island. For jarima in their language, signifieth the tail or end of any thing, and Gua, is an article which they use oftentimes in the names of things, and especially in the names of their kings, as Guarionexius & Guaccanarillus. In the province of Cazium, are these regions, Higuei, Guanama, Reyre, Xagua, Aramana, Arabo, Hazoa, Macorix, Caiacoa, Guaiagua, Baguavimabo, & the rough mountains of Haiti. Here let us speak somewhat of their aspirations, which they use otherwise then the Latins do. It is to be noted that there is no aspiration in their vowels, which hath not the effect of a consonant. So that they pronounce their aspirations more vehemently than we do the consonant. f. Yea, all such words as in their tongue are aspirate, are pronounced with like breath and spirit as is f. saving that herein the neither lip is not moved to the uppermost teeth. With open mouths and shaking their breasts they breathe out these aspirations, 

The pronunciation of the hebrews and Arabians.  
The moors and Arabians possessed Spain.   ha, he, high, ho, hu, as the hebrews and Arabians are accustomed to pronounce theirs. I find also that the spaniards use the like vehemency in the aspirations of those words which they have received of the moors & Arabians which possessed Spain, and continued there many years, as in these words Almohadda, which signifieth a pillow or bolster, also Almohaza, that is a horse comb: with divers such other words, which they speak in manner which panting breasts, and vehement spirit. I have thought it good to rehearse these things, because among the Latins it oftentimes so chanceth, that only the accent or aspiration, changeth the signification of the word, as hora, for an hour, and ora, for the plurale number of this word os, 
How the aspiration changeth the signification of words.  which signifieth the mouth: also ora, which signifieth regions or coasts. The like also chanceth in the diversity of the accent, as occido I kill, & occido I fall: even so in the language of these simple men, there are many things to be observed. But let us now return to the description. In the province of Hubabo, are these regions, Xamana, Canabacoa, Cubabo, with many other, 
divers languages in the Island.  the names whereof I have not yet learned. The province of Cubabo, containeth these regions, Migua and Cacacubana. The inhabitants of this region, have a peculiar language much differing from the common language of the Island, and are called Maioriexes. There is also an other region called Cubana, whose language differeth from the other. Likewise the region of Baiohagua, hath a divers tongue. There are also other regions, as Dahabon, Cybaho, and Manababo. Cotoy is in the middle of the Island. By this runneth the river Nizaus, and the mountains called Mathaitin, Hazua, & Neibaymao, confine which the same. In the province of Bainoa, are the regions of Maguana, jagohaiucho, Baurucco, Dabaiagua, & Attibuni, so named of the river: also Caunoa, Buiaici, Dababonici, Maiaguariti, Atiei, Maccazina, Guahabba, Annivici, Marien, Guaricco, Amaguei, Xaragua, Yaguana, Azuei, jacchi, Honorucco, Diaguo, Camaie, & Neibaimao. In Guaccaierima the last province, these regions are contained Mavicarao, Guabagua, Taquenazabo, Nimaca, Baiona the less, Cabaini, jamaici, Manabaxao, Zavana, Habacoa, and Ayquiora. But let us entreat somewhat of the particulars of the regions. In the province of Caizcimu, within the great gulf of the beginning, there is a great cave in a hollow rock under the root of a high mountain, about two furlongs from the sea, the entry of this cave is not much unlike the doors of a great temple, being very large, and turning many ways. Andrea's Moralis the shipmaster, at the commandment of the governor, attempted to search the cave with the smallest vessels. He sayeth that by certain privy ways many rivers have concourse to this cave, 
rivers devoured of caves.  as it were a sink or channel. After th'experience hereof, they ceased to marvel whither other rivers ran, which coming fourscore and ten miles were swallowed up, so that they appeared no more, nor yet fell into the sea by any known ways. Now therefore they suppose that rivers swallowed up by the hollow places of that stony mountain, fall into this cave. As the shipmaster entered into the cave, his ship was almost swallowed. For he saith, that there are many whyrlepooles and rysinges or boylynges of the water, which make a violent conflict and horrible roaring, one encountering the other: 
Whirlpools, and conflict of waters.  also many huge holes and hollow places, so that what on the one side with whirlpooles, and on the other side with the boiling of the water, his ship was long in manner tossed up and down like a ball. It greatly repented him that he had entered, yet knew he no way how to come forth. He now wandered in darkness, aswell for the obscureness of the cave into the which he was far entered, as also that in it were thick clouds, 
Clouds in the cave.  engendered of the moist vapours proceeding of the conflict of the waters, which continually fall with great violence into the cave on every side. He compareth the noise of these waters, 
The Cataracts of Nilus.  to the fall of the famous river Nilus from the mountains of Ethiope, they were also deaf, that one could not hear what an other said. But at the length with great danger and fear, he came forth of the cave, as it had been out of hell. About threescore miles distant from the chief city of saint Dominicke, there are certain high mountains, 
A standing pool in the top of a high mountain.  upon the tops whereof is a lake or standing pool inaccessible, never yet seen of them which came lately to the Island, both by reason of the roughroughnesse of the mountains, and also for that there is no path or open way to the tops of the same. But at the length the shipmaster being conducted thither by one of the kings, ascended to the tops of the mountains, and came to the pool. 
Fearne and bramble bushes, grow only in cold regions.  He saith that the cold is there of some force: and in token of winter, he found fern and bramble bushes, which two grow only in cold regions. These mountains, they call Ymizui Hibabaino. This pool is of fresh water three miles in compass, and well replenished with divers kinds of fishes. Many small rivers or brooks fall into it. It hath no passage out, because it is on every side enclosed with the tops of mountains. But let us now speak of an other pool, which may well be called a sea in the mydlande, and be compared to the Caspian or Hyrcanian sea in the firm land of Asia, with certain other lakes and pools of fresh water. 
The Caspian and Hyrcanian sea.    

The eight book of the third decade.  
THe province of Bainoa being thrice as big as the three first, that is, Caizcimu, Vhabo, and Caibabo, includeth a valley named Caiovani, 
A great lake of sour and salt water.  in the which there is a lake of salt, sour, and bitter water, as we read of the sea called Caspium, lying in the firm land between Sarmatia and Hyrcania. We have therefore named it Caspium, although it be not in the region of Hyrcania. It hath many swallowing gulfs, by the which, both the water of the sea springeth into it, and also such as fall into it from the mountains are swallowed up. They think that the caves thereof, 
Sea fishes in lakes of the midland.  are so large and deep, that great fishes of the sea pass by the same into the lake. Among these fishes, there is one called Tiburonus, which cutteth a man in sunder by the midst at one snap with his teeth, and devoureth him. 
The devouring Fish called Tiburonus.  In the river Hozama, running by the chief city of saint Dominicke, these Tiburoni do sometimes come from the sea, and devour many of thinhabitants: especially such as do daily ploonge themselves in the water, to th'intent to keep their bodies very clean. The rivers which fall into the lake, are these. From the North side Guanicabon: 
The rivers that fall into the lake Caspium.  From the south, Xaccoei: from the East, Guannabo: And from the West, Occoa. They say that these rivers are great and continual, and that beside these, there are twenty other small rivers which fall into this Caspium. Also on the North side within a furlong of the lake, there are above two hundredth springs, 
CC. springe● within the space of a furlong.  occupying likewise about a furlong in circuit, the water whereof is cold in summer, fresh also, and wholesome to be drunk. These springs make a river that can not be waded over, which near at hand joining with the other, falleth into the lake. Here must we stay a while. The king of this region found his wife praying in a Chapel builded by the Christians within the precinct of his dominion, 
A miracle.  and required her company to satisfy his fleshly lust. His wife reproved him, and put him in remembrance to have respect to the holy place. The words which she spoke to him were these, Teitoca, Teitoca, which is as much to say, as, be quiet, be quiet. 
The Indian language.  Techeta cynato guamechyna: That is, God will be greatly angry. Guamechyna, signifieth God, Techeta greatly, Cynato angry. But the husband haling her by the arm, said, Guaibba, that is, go, Cynato macabuca guamechyna: That is, What is that to me if God be angry? And with these words as he proffered her violence, suddenly he became dumb and lame. 
A king stricken dumb and lame by a miracle.  Yet by this miracle being stricken with repentance, he ever after led a religious life, insomuch that from thenceforth he would never suffer the Chapel to be swept or decked with any other man's hand. By the same miracle, many of thinhabitants, and all the Christians being moved, resorted devoutly to the Chapel. They take it in good part that the king suffered the revenge of that reproach. Let us now return to Caspium. That salt lake is tossed with storms and tempests, and oftentimes drowneth small ships or fisher boats, and swalloweth them up with the mariners: In so much that it hath not been heard of, that any man drowned by shyppewracke, 
Such as are drowned in the lake are not cast up again.  ever plunged up again, or was cast on the shore, as commonly chanceth of the dead bodies of such as are drowned in the sea. These tempests, are the dainty banquets of the Tiburones. This Caspium, is called Hagueigabon. In the midst hereof, lieth an Island named Guarizacca, to the which they resort when they go a fishing: but it is now cultured. There is in the same plain, an other lake next unto this, whose water is mixed of salt and fresh, 
A lake of salt & fresh water.  and is therefore neither apt to be drunk, nor yet to be refused in urgent necessity: This containeth in length twenty and five miles, and in breadth eight miles, in some places also niene or ten. It receiveth many rivers, which have no passage out of the same, but are swallowed up as in the other. Water springeth out of the sea into this also: but in no great quantity, which is the cause that it is so commyxt. In the same province towards the west side, 
A lake of fresh water.  there is an other lake of fresh water, not far distant from Caspius: this the inhabitants call jainagua. The same salt lake hath on the North side thereof, an other named Guaccaa: this is but little, as not past three or four miles in breadth, and one in length, the water of this may well be drunk. On the South side of the salt lake, there lieth an other named Babbareo, of three miles in length, and in manner round. The water of this is fresh, as of the two other. This lake, because it hath no passage out, nor yet any swallowing gulfs, conveyeth the superfluous waters to the sea, if it be increased with the streams which fall sometimes more abundantly from the mountains: this is in the region of Xamana in the province of Bainoa. There is an other called Guaniba, lying between the East and the South, near unto the side of Caspius: this is ten miles in length, and almost round. There are furthermore many other small standing pools or lakes dispersed here and there in the Island, 
A lake of ten miles in length.  which I will let pass, lest I should be tedious in remaining to long in one thing. I will therefore make an end with this addition, that in all these great plenty of fish and foul is nourished. All these lakes lie in a large plain, the which from the East reacheth into the West a hundredth and twenty miles, being of breadth xviii miles where it is narrowest, 
A plain of a hundred and twenty miles  and xxv where it is largest. Looking toward the West, it hath collaterally on the left hand the mountains of Daiguani, and on the right hand, the mountains of Gaigua, so called of the name of the vale itself. At the roots of the mountains of Caigua toward the North side, there lieth an other vale much longer and larger then that before named: For it containeth in length almost two hundredth miles, 
A plain of two hundred miles in length.  and in breadth thirty where it is largest, and about twenty where it is narrowest. This vale in some part thereof, is called Maguana, in an other place, Iguaniu, and else where, Hathathiei. And forasmuch as we have here made mention of this part of the vale named Hathathiei, we will somewhat digress from the discourse of this description, and entreat of a thing so strange and marvelous, that the like hath not been heard of. So it is therefore, that the king of this region named Caramatexius, taketh great pleasure in fishing. Into his nets chanced a young fish, of the kind of those huge monsters of the sea which th'inhabitors call Manati, not found I suppose in our seas, 
The marvelous fish Manati.  nor known to our men before this tyme. This fish is four footed, and in shape like unto a Tortoise, although she be not covered with a shell, but with scales, and those of such hardness, & couched in such order, that no arrow can hurt her. Her scales are beset & defended with a thousand knobs, her back is plain, and her head utterly like the head of an Ox. She liveth both in the water, & on the land, she is slow of moving, of condition meek, gentle, associable, 
A monster of the sea fed with man's hand.  and loving to mankind, and of a marvelous sense or memory, as are the Elephant and the Delphyn. The king nourished this fish certain days at home with the bread of the country, made of the root of jucca & Panycke, & with such other roots as men are accustomed to eat: For when she was yet but young, he cast her into a pool or lake near unto his palace, there to be fed with hand. This lake also receiveth waters, and casteth not the same forth again. It was in time passed called Guaurabo: but is now called the lake of Manati, after the name of this fish, which wandered safely in the same for the space of xxv years, and grew exceeding big. Whatsoever is written of the Delphines' of Baian or Arion, are much inferior to the doings of this fish, which for her gentle nature they named Matum, that is, gentle, or noble. Therefore whensoever any of the kings familiars, especially such as are known to her, resort to the banks of the lake, and call Matum, Matum, 
Matum.  than she (as mindful of such benefits as she hath received of men) lifteth up her head, and cometh to the place whither she is called, and there receiveth meat at the hands of such as feed her. 
A fish carrieth men over the lake.  If any desirous to pass over the lake, make signs and tokens of their intent, she boweth herself to them, therewith as it were gently inviting them to amount upon her, and conveyeth them safely over. It hath been seen, that this monstrous fish hath at one time safely carried over ten men singing and playing. 
A marvelous thing.  But if by chance when she lifted up her head she espied any of the Christian men, she would immediately plunge down again into the water, and refuse to obey, because she had once received injury at the hands of a certain wanton young man among the Christians, who had cast a sharp dart at her, although she were not hu●te, by reason of the hardness of her skin, being rough, and full of scales and knobs, as we have said: Yet did she bear in memory th'injury she sustained, with so gentle a revenge requiting th'ingratitude of him, which had dealt with her so ungentelly. From that day whensoever she was called by any of her familiars, she would first look circumspectly about her, lest any were present appareled after the manner of the Christians. She would oftentimes play and wrestle upon the bank with the kings chamberlens, and especially with a young man whom the king favoured well, being also accustomed to feed her. She would be sometimes as pleasant and full of play as it had been a moonkey or marmoset, and was of long time a great comfort and solace to the whole Island: For no small confluence aswell of the Christians as of thinhabitants, had daily concourse to behold so strange a miracle of nature, the contemplation whereof was no less pleasant than wonderful. They say that the meat of this kind of fish, is of good taste, and that many of them are engendered in the seas thereabout. But at the length, this pleasant playfelowe was lost, 
The river Attibunicus.  and carried into the sea by the great river Attibunicus, one of the four which divide the Island: For at that time there chaunc●d so terrible a tempest of wind, and rain, with such floods ensuing, that the like hath not lightly been heard of. By reason of this tempest, the river Attibunicus so overflowed the banks, that it filled the whole vale, and mixed itself with all the other lakes: at which time also, this gentle Matum & pleasant companion, following the vehement course and fall of the floods, was thereby restored to his old mother and native waters, and since that time never seen again. Thus having digressed sufficiently, let us now come to the situation of the vale. It hath collaterally the mountains of Cibava and Caiguam, which bring it to the South sea. There is an other vale beyond the mountains of Cibava toward the North, this is called the vale of Guarionexius, because that before the memory of man, 
The great vale of Guarionexius.  the predecessors & ancestors of king Guarionexius, to whom it is descended by right of inheritance, were ever the Lords of the whole vale. Of this king, we have spoken largely in the first narration of the Island in the first Decade. This vale is of length from the East to the West, a hundred and fourscore miles, and of breadth from the South to the North, thirty miles where it is narrowest, and fifty where it is brodest. It beginneth from the region Canobocoa by the provinces of Huhabo and Caiabo, and endeth in the province of Bainoa, and the region of Mariena: it lieth in the midst between the mountains of Cibava, and the mountains of Cahonai & Caxacubuna. There is no province nor any region, which is not notable by the majesty of mountains, fruitfulness of vales, pleasantness of hills, and delectableness of plains, with abundance of fair rivers running through the same. There are no sides of mountains or hills, no rivers, 
Gold in all mountains▪ and gold and fish in all rivers.  which abound not with gold and delicate fishes, except only one river, which from th'original thereof, with the springs of the same breaking forth of the mountains, cometh out salt, and so continueth until it perish: This river is called Babuan, and runneth through the middle of the region Maguana, in the province of Bainoa. They suppose that this river hath made itself a way under the ground, 
Salt bays.  by some passages of plaster, or salt earth: for there are in the Island many notable salt bays, whereof we will speak more hereafter. We have declared how the Island is divided by four rivers, and five provinces. There is also an other partition, which is this, The whole Island consisteth of the tops of four mountains, which divide it by the midst from the East to the West: in all these is abundance of nooryshing moisture, and great plenty of gold, of the caves also of the which, the waters of all the rivers (into the which the caves empty themselves) have their original and increase. 
The rivers have their increase from the caves of the mountains. No hurtful or ravening beast in the Island.  There are likewise in them horrible dens, obscure and dark vales, and mighty rocks of stone. There was never any noisome beast found in it, nor yet any ravening four footed beast: no Lion, no Bear, no fierce Tigers, no crafty Foxes, nor devouring wolves. All things are blessed and fortunate, and now more fortunate, for that so many thousands of men are received to be the sheep of Christ's flock, all their zemes and Images of devils being rejected and utterly out of memory. 
The authors excuse.  If I chance now and then in the discourse of this narration to repeat one thing divers times, or otherwise to make digression, I must desire your holiness therewith not to be offended: For while I see, hear, and write these things, me seemeth that I am herewith so affected, that for very joy I feel my mind stirred as it were with the spirit of Apollo, as were the Sibyl's, whereby I am enforced to repeat the same again: especially when I consider how far the amplitude of our religion spreadeth her wings. Yet among these so many blessed and fortunate things, this one grieveth me not a little: 
By what means the people of the Island are greatly consumed.  that these simple poor men, never brought up in labour, do daily perish with intollerabe travail in the gold mines, and are thereby brought to such desperation, that many of them kill themselves, having no regard to the procreation of children: insomuch that women with child, perceiving that they shall bring forth such as shallbe slaves to the Christians, use medicines to destroy their conception. And albeit that by the kings letters patents it was decreed that they should be set at liberty: yet are they constrained to serve more than seemeth convenient for free men. The number of the poor wretches is wonderfully extenuate, they were once reckoned to be above twelve hundred thousand heads: but what they are now, I abhor to rehearse. We will therefore let this pass, and return to the pleasures of Hispaniola. In the mountains of Cibava, 
The pleasures of Hispaniola.  which are in manner in the midst of the Island, in the province of Caiabo (where we said to be the greatest plenty of native gold) there is a region named Cotobi, 
The region of Cotobi, situate in the clouds.  situate in the clouds, environed with the tops of high mountains, and well inhabited: it consisteth of a plain of xxv miles in length, and xu in breadth. This plain is higher than the tops of other mountains: 
A plain in the tops of mountains.  so that these mountains may seem to be the chief progenitors of the other. This plain suffereth alterations of the four times of the year, as the Spring, summer, Autumn, and winter. 
The higher, the colder. Moderate cold in the mountains.  here the herbs wax withered, the trees lose their leaves, and the meadows become hoar: the which things (as we have said) chance not in other places of the Island, where they have only the Spring and Autumn. The soil of this plain bringeth forth fern and bramble bushes, bearing black berries, or wild raspes, which two are tokens of cold regions: Yet is it a fair region, for the cold thereof is not very sharp, neither doth it afflict thinhabitants with frost or snow. They argue the fruitfulness of the region by the fern, whose stalks or steams are bigger than a spear or javelyn. The sides of those mountains are rich in gold, 
Gold.  yet is there none appointed to dig for the same, because it shallbe needful to have appareled miners, and such as are used to labour: For th'inhabitants living contented with little, are but tender, 
Thinhabitantes of Hispaniola can abide no labour nor cold.  and can not therefore away with labour, or abide any cold. There are two rivers which run through this region, and fall from the tops of the present mountains: One of these is named Comoiayxa, whose course is toward the West, and falleth into the channel of Naiba: the other is called Tirecotus, which running toward the East, joineth with the river of junna. 
The Island of Creta or Candie, under the dominion of the venetians.  In the Island of Creta (now called Candie) as I passed by in my legacy to the sultan of Alcayr or Babylon in Egypt, the venetians told me, that there lay such a region in the tops of the mountains of Ida, which they affirm to be more fruitful of wheat corn then any other region of the Island: But forasmuch as once the Cretences rebelled against the venetians, and by reason of the straight and narrow way to the tops thereof, long defended the region with arms against th'authority of the Senate, and at the length, being foreweryed with wars, rendered the same, the Senate commanded that it should be left desert, and the straits of thentrances to be stopped, lest any should ascend to the region without their permission. Yet in the year of Christ M.d.ii licence was granted to the husband men to till and manure the region, on such condition, that no such as were apt to the wars might enter into the same. There is also an other region in Hispaniola, named Cotoby, after the same name: this divideth the bounds of the provinces of Vbabo and Caiabo. It hath mountains, vales, and plains: but because it is barren, it is not much inhabited: Yet is it richest in gold, for the original of the abundance of gold beginneth herein, insomuch that it is not gathered in small grains and sparks, as in other places: but is found whole, massy, and pure, among certain soft stones, 

Pure and massy gold in the region of Cotoby.  
The vain of gold, is a living tree.  
These colours of flowers are called Marchasites.   and in the veins of rocks, by breaking the stones whereof, they follow the veins of gold. They have found by experience, that the vain of gold is a living tree, and that the same by all ways that it spreadeth and springeth from the root by the soft pores and passages of the earth, putteth forth branches, even unto the uppermost part of the earth, and ceaseth not until it discover itself unto the open air: at which time, it showeth forth certain beautiful colours in the steed of flowers, round stones of golden earth in the steed of fruits, and thin plates in steed of leaves. These are they which are disparkled throughout the whole Island by the course of the rivers, eruptions of the springs out of the mountains, and violent falls of the floods: For they think that such grains are not engendered where they are gathered, especially on the dry land, but otherwise in the rivers. They say that the root of the golden tree extendeth to the centre of the earth, and there taketh nourishment of increase: 
The root of the golden tree.  For the deeper that they dig, they find the trunks thereof to be so much the greater, as far as they may follow it for abundance of water springing in the mountains. Of the branches of this tree, they find some as small as a thread, 

The branches of the golden tree.  
Caves sustained with yyllers of gold.   & other as big as a man's finger, according to the largeness or straightness of the rifts and clyftes. They have sometimes chanced upon whole caves, sustained & borne up as it were with golden pillars, and this in the ways by the which the branches ascend: the which being filled with the substance of the trunk creeping from beneath, the branch maketh itself way by which it may pass out. It is oftentimes divided by encountering with some kind of hard stone: 
The stones of the gold mines.  Yet is it in other clyftes nourished by the exhalations and virtue of the root. But now perhaps you will ask me what plenty of gold is brought from thence. You shall therefore understand, that only out of Hispaniola, 
What gold is brought yearly from Hispaniola into spain  the sum of four hundred, and sometimes five hundred thousand ducats of gold is brought yearly into Spain: as may be gathered by the fifth portion due to the kings Excheker, which amounteth to the sum of a hundred and fourscore, or fourscore and ten thousand Castellan 〈◊〉 of gold, and sometimes more. What is to be thought of the Island of Cuba and Sancti johannis (otherwise called Burichena) being both very rich in gold, we will declare further hereafter: to have said thus much of gold, it shall suffice. We will now therefore speak somewhat of salt, wherewith we may season and reserve such things as are bought with gold. In a region of the province of Bainoa, 
Salt of the mountains, very hard and clear.  in the mountains of Daiaguo, about twelve miles distant from the salt lake, called Caspius, there are salt bays in the mountains, in a manner as hard as stones, also clearer and whiter then crystal. There are likewise such salt bays, which grow wonderfully in Laletania (now called Cataloma) in the territory of the duke of Cadona, the chief ruler in that region: but such as know them both, affirm that these of Bainoa are most notable. They say also, 
Salt as hard as stones.  that this can not be cleft without wedges and beetelles of Iron: But that of Laletana may easily be broken, as I myself have proved. They therefore compare this to such stones as may easily be broken, and the other to marble. In the province of Caizimu, in the regions of Iguanama, Caiacoa, and Guariagua, there are springs whose waters are of marvelous nature, 
springs of salt, fresh, and sour water.  being in the superficial or uppermost part fresh, in the midst mixed of salt and fresh, and in the lowest part salt and sour. They think that the salt water of the sea issueth out softly, and the fresh to spring out of the mountains: The one falleth down, and the other riseth, and are not therefore so universally mixed, whereby the one may utterly corrupt tother. If any man lay his ear to the ground near to any of these springs, he shall perceive the ground there to be so hollow, that the rebounding noise of a horseman coming, 
Hollow caves in the ground.  may be heard for the space of three miles, and a footman one mile. In the last region toward the South, named Guaccaiarima, in the lordship of Zavana, they say there are certain wild men, which live in the caves and dens of the mountains, 
Certain wild men living in caves and dens.  contented only with wild fruits: these men never use the company of any other, nor will by any means become tame. They live without any certain dwelling places, and without tillage or culturing of the ground, as we read of them which in old time lived in the golden age. They say also that these men are without any certain language: 
Men without a certain language.  They are sometimes seen, but our men have yet laid hands on none of them. If at any time they come to the sight of men, and perceive any making toward them, they flee swifter than a Heart: Yea, they affirm them to be swifter than greyhounds. What one of these solitary wanderers did, 
Men as swift as Grehounds  it is worth the hearing. So it is, that our men having granges adjoining near unto the thick woods, certain of them repaired thither in the month of September, in the year. M.D.xiiii. in the mean time, one of these wild men came leaping out of the wood, 
A wild man runnech away with a child.  & approaching somewhat toward them with smile countenance, suddenly snatched up a child of theirs, being the son of the owner of the grange, which he begot of a woman of the Island: He ran away with the child, and made signs to our men to follow him: Many followed, aswell of our men, as of the naked inhabitants, but all in vain. Thus when the pleasant wanderer perceived that the Christians ceased to pursue him, he left the child in a cross way by the which the swineherds were accustomed to drive the swine to their pasture. Shortly after, a swynehearde found the child, and brought him home to his father, yet tormenting himself for sorrow, supposing that wild man to have been one of the kind of the Canibales, and that his son was now devoured. In the same Island they gather pitch, 
Pitch of the rock.  which sweateth out of the rocks, being much harder and sourer than the pitch of the tree, and is therefore more commodious to calk or defend ships against the worms called Bromas, whereof we have spoken largely before. This Island also bringeth forth pitch in two kinds of trees, 
Pitch of two kinds of trees The Pine tree.  as in the Pine tree, and an other named Copeia. I need not speak of the Pine tree, because it is engendered and known in manner every where. Let us therefore speak somewhat of the other tree called Copeia. 
The tree Copeia.  Pitch is likewise gathered of it, as of the Pine tree, although some say that it is gathered by distilling or dropping of the wood when it is burnt. It is a strange thing to hereof the leaf thereof, and how necessary provision of nature is showed in the same. It is to be thought that it is the tree, in the leaves whereof the Chaldeans (being the first finders of letters) expressed their minds before the use of paper was known. This leaf is a span in breadth, 
The leaf of a tree in the steady of paper.  and almost round. Our men write in them with pins or needles, or any such instruments made of metal or wood, in manner as well as on paper. It is to be laughed at, what our men have persuaded the people of the Island as touching this leaf. The simple souls believe, 

They believe that leaves do speak.  
A pretty story.   that at the commandment of our men, leaves do speak and disclose secrets. They were brought to this credulity by this means. One of our men dwelling in the city of Dominica, the chief of the Island, delivered to his servant (being a man borne in the Island) certain roasted Coneys (which they call Vtias, being no bigger than mice) willing him to carry the same to his friend, which dwelled further within the Island. This messenger, whether it were that he was thereto constrained through hunger, or enticed by appetite, devoured three of the Coneys by the way. He to whom they were sent, wrote to his friend in a leaf how many he received. When the master had looked a while on the leaf in the presence of the servant, he said thus unto him, Ah son, where is thy faith? Could thy greedy appetite prevail so much with thee, as to cause thee to eat the Coneys committed to thy fidelity? The poor wretch trembling and greatly amazed, confessed his fault, and therewith desired his master to tell him how he knew the truth thereof. This leaf (quoth he) which thou broughtest me, hath told me all. Then he further rehearsed unto him the hour of his coming to his friend, 
Ignorance causeth admiration.  and likewise of his departing when he returned. And thus they merrily deceive these silly souls, and keep them under obedience: insomuch that they take our men for Gods, at whose commandment leaves do disclose such things as they think most hid and secret. Both the sides of the leaf receiveth the forms of letters, 
The leaf wherein they write.  even as doth our paper. It is thicker than double parchment, and marvelous tough. While it is yet flourishing and new, it showeth the letters white in green, and when it is dry, it becometh white and hard, like a table of wood, but the letters wax yellow: It doth not corrupt or putrefy, nor yet looseth the letters though it be wet, nor by any other means, except it be burnt. There is an other tree named Xagua, the juice of whose sour apple, being of a dark red colour, staineth and coloureth whatsoever is touched therewith, 
A strong colour of the juice of an apple.  and that so firmly, that no washing can take it away for the space of twenty days. When the apple is full ripe, the juice looseth that strength. The apple is eaten, and of good taste. There is an herb also, whose smoke (as we have rehearsed the like before of a certain wood) is deadly poison. On a time when the kings assembled together, 
An herb whose smoke is poison.  and conspired the destruction of our men, where as they durst not attempt th'enterprise by open war, their devise was, privily to lay many bundles of those herbs in a certain house, which shortly after they intended to set on fire, to thintent that our men, making haste to quench the same, might take their death with the smoke thereof: But, their purposed practise being bewrayed, the authors of the devise were punished accordingly. Now (most holy father) forasmuch as your holiness writeth, that whatsoever we have written of the new world, doth please you right well, we will rehearse certain things out of order, but not greatly from our purpose. Of the setting the roots of Maizium, Ages, jucca, Battatas, and such other, being their common food, and of the use of the same, we have spoken sufficiently before: But by what means they were first applied to the commodity of men, we have not yet declared. We now therefore intend to entreat somewhat hereof.   

The ninth book of the third Decade.  
THey say that the first inhabitors lived contented with the roots of Dates, 
The kinds of fruits wherewith thinhabitants lived first.  and Magueans, which is an herb, much like unto that which is commonly called Sengrene or Orpin: also the roots of Guaiegans, which are round and great, much like unto puffs the of earth or muhrooms. They did likewise eat Guaieroes, like unto Persnips, Cibaios, like Nuts, Cibaioes and Macoanes, like unto Onions, with divers other such roots. They say that after many years, a certain Boition, that is, a wise old man, saw upon the banks side a bush like unto fennel, & transplanting the root thereof, brought it from wildness to a better kind, by nooryshing it in gardens. This was the beginning of jucca, which at the first was deadly poison to all such as did eat thereof raw. 
Necessity the mother of all arts.  But for as much as they perceived it to be of pleasant taste, they determined many ways to prove the use thereof, and at the length found by experience, that being sodde, or fried, it was less hurtful: by which means also, they came to the knowledge of the venom lying hid in the juice of the root. Thus by drying, salting, seasoning, and otherwise temperyng it, they brought it to their fine bread, 
The fine bread Cazabbi, made of the roots of jucca.  which they call Cazabbi, more delectable and wholesome to the stomach of man then bread made of wheat, because it is of easier digestion. The same is to be understood of other roots, and the grain of Maizium, which they have chosen for their chief meat among the seeds of nature, 
How Ceres first found wheat and barley in Egypt.  as we read how Ceres the daughter of Saturnus, gathered wheat and barley (with such other corn as are now most in use among men) in Egypt, of certain grains taken out of the mud driven from the mountains of Ethiopia by th'increase of the river Nilus, & left in the plain at such time as Nilus resorted again to his channel. For the which fact, we read that the antiquity gave divine honour to Ceres, who first nourished and increased such chosen seeds. There are innumerable kinds of Ages, the variety whereof, is known by their leaves and flowers. One kind of these, is called Guanaguax, 
The roots of Ages.  this is white both within and without. An other named Guaraguei, is of violet colour without, and white within. The other kinds of Ages, they call Zazaveios, these are red without and white within. Squivetes, are white within and without. Tunna, is altogether of violet colour. Hobos is yellow both of skin and inner substance. There is an other named Atibunieix, the skin of this is of violet colour, and the substance white. Aniguamar, hath his skin also of violet colour, and is white within. Guaccaracca, hath a white skin, and the substance of violet colour. There are many other, which are not yet brought to us. But I fear me lest in the rehearsal of of these. 
The authors excuse.  I shall provoke the spurs of malicious persons against me, which will scorn these our doings, for that we have written of many such small things, to a prince occupied in such weighty affairs, as unto your holiness, upon whose shoulders resteth the burden of the whole Christian world. But I would ask of these malicious enuyers of other men's travails, whether Pliny and such other famous writers, 
Pliny.  when they directed and decicated such things to kings and princes, intended only to profit them to whom they consecrated the fruit of their knowledge. They sometimes intermixed famous things with obscure things, light with heavy, and great with small, that by the furtherance of princes, their universal posterity might enjoy the fruition of the knowledge of things. At other times also being intent about particular things, and desirous of new things, they occupied themselves in searching of particular tracts and coasts, with such things as nature brought forth in the same, by this means to come the better to more absolute and universal knowledge. Let them therefore contemn our doing, and we will laugh to scorn, not their ignorance and slothfulness, but pernicious curiousness: and therewith having pity of their froward dispositions, will commit them to the venomous Serpents of whom envy took his first original. It shall in the mean time abundantly content us, that these things do please your holiness, and that you do not despise our simple vestures, wherewith we have only weaved together, and not adorned, gathered, and not described, such marvelous things, in the garnishing whereof, nature hath sufficiently showed her cunning. Our desire is none other herein, but for your sake to do our endeavour that these things may not perish: let every man take hereof what liketh him best. Of the sheep or Bullock sold in the market, nothing remaineth in the evening, because the shoulder pleaseth one, the leg an other, and the neck an other: yea some have most fantasy to the bowels, and some to the feet. Thus having enough wandered, let us return to our purpose, and declare with what words they salute the kings children when they are first borne, and how they apply the beginning of their lives to the end, and why their kings are called by many names. Therefore when the king hath a son borne, such as dwell near about his palace or village, repair to the queen's chamber, where one saluteth the new borne child with one name, and an other with an other name. 

By what names they salute the kings children when they are borne.  
The names and titles of the Roman Emperors.   God save thee thou shining lamp, saith one: An other calleth him, bright and clear: Some name him the victorer of his enemies: and other some, the puissant conqueror descended of blood royal, and brighter than gold: with divers other such vain names. Therefore like as every of the Roman emperors was called Adiabenicus, Parthicus, Armenicus, Dacicus, Gothicus, and Germanicus, according to the titles of their parents and ancestors: even so by thimposition of names invented by other kings, Beuchicus Anacacoa the lord of the region of Xaragua (of whom and of the wise woman Anachaona his sister, we have spoken largely in the first Decade) was called by all these names following, Tureigua Hobin, which is asmuch to say as, a king shining as bright as laton, Starei, that is, bright, Huibo, highness, Duiheynequen, a rich flood. With all these names, and more than forty other such, doth king Beuchius magnify himself as often as he commandeth any thing to be done, or causeth any proclamation to be made in his name. If the crier by negligence leave out any of these names, the king thinketh it to sound greatly to his contumely and reproach: The like is also of other. 
How they make their testaments.  How fondly they use themselves in making their testaments, we will now declare. They leave th'inheritance of their kingdoms to th'eldest sons of their eldest sisters. If she fail, to th'eldest of the second sister, and so of the third if the second also fail: For they are out of doubt that those children come of their blood, but the children of their own wives, they count to be not legitimate. 
So did great Alexander.  If there remain none of their sisters children, they leave th'inheritance to their brothers: and if they fail, it descendeth to their own sons. Last of all, if all these fail, they assign it to the worthiest, as to him that is of greatest power in all the Island, that he may defend their subjects from their ancient enemies. They take as many wives as them listeth. 
The kings wives & concubines are buried with him.  They suffer the best beloved of the kings wives and concubines to be buried with him. Anachaona the sister of Beuchius the king of Xaragua, being a woman of such wisdom and cunning, that in making of rhymes and balattes she was counted a prophetess among the best, commanded, that among all the wives and concubines of the king her brother, the fayreest (whose name was Guanahattabenechina) should be buried alive with him, and two of her waiting maids with her: She would surely have appointed divers other to that office, if she had not been otherwise persuaded by the prayers of certain friars of saint France's order, 
They bury their jewels with them.  which chanced then to be present. They say that this Guanahattabenechina had none in all the Island comparable to her in beauty. She buried with her all her jewels, 
A dream of an other life after this.  and twenty of her best ornaments. Their custom is, to place beside every of them in their sepultures, a cup full of water, & a portion of the fine bread of Cazabbi. In Xaragua, the region of this king Beuchius, 
Where it raineth but seldom.  and in Hazua, part of the region of Caiabo, also in the fair vale of salt and fresh lakes, and likewise in the region of Yaquino in the province of Bainoa, it raineth but seldom: In all these regions are fosses or trenches made of old time, whereby they convey the waters in order to water their fields, with no less art than do th'inhabitors of new Carthage, and of the kingdom of Murcien in Spartaria for the seldom fall of rain. The region of Maguana, divideth the province of Bainoa from Caiabo, and Zavana from Guaccaiarima. In the deep vales, they are troubled with rain more often then needeth. 
Where it raineth much.  Also the confines of the chief city, named saint Dominike, are moister than is necessary. In other places, it raineth moderately. There are therefore in the Island of Hispaniola, 
Variable motions of the Elements.  divers and variable motions of the elements, as we read the like of many other regions. Of their colonies or mantions which the Spaniards have erected in this Island, 
The colonies and villages which the Spaniards have builded.  we have spoken sufficiently before. They have since that time builded these villages, Portus platae, Portus Regalis, Lares, Villanova, Azuam, and salva terra. Having said thus much of the Island of Hispaniola, the mother and lady of the other Islands, and as it were Tethys the most beautiful wife of Neptunus' the god of the sea, 
The other Islands about Hispaniola.  let us now entreat somewhat of her Nymphs and fair Nereids, which wait upon her, and adorn her on every side. We will therefore begin at the nearest, called the new Arethusa, 
The Island of Arethusa.  so named of the fountain Arethusa in the Island of Sicily. This is famous by reason of a spring, but otherwise unprofitable. Our men named it of late Duas Arbores, because it hath only two trees growing in it: near unto the which is a fountain that cometh from the Island of Hispaniola, through the secret passages of the earth under the sea, and breaketh forth in this Ind, 
A spring running under the sea from Hispaniola to Arethusa.  as the river Alpheus in Achaia runneth under the sea from the city of Eld, and breaketh forth in the Island of Sicily in the fountain Arethusa. That the fountain of this new Arethusa, hath his original from the Island of Hispaniola, it is manifest hereby, that the water issuing out of the fountain, bringeth with it the leaves of many trees which grow in Hispaniola, and not in this Island. They say that the fountain hath his original from the river Yiamiroa, in the region of Guaccaiarima, confining with the land of Zavana. This Island is not past a mile in circuit, and commodious for fishermen. Directly towards the East (as it were the porter keeping the entry to Tethys) lieth the Island of Sancti johannis (otherwise called Burichena) whereof we have spoken largely before: 
The Island of Sancti johannis.  this aboundeth with gold, and in fruitful soil is equal with her mother Hispaniola: in this are many colonies or mansions of Spaniards, which apply themselves to gathering of gold. Towards the west on the North side, great Cuba (for the longness thereof, 
The Island of Cuba.  long supposed to be continent or firm land) wardeth our Tethys on the back half. This is much longer than Hispaniola, and from the East to the west, is diviuided in the midst with the circle called Tropicus Cancri. Hispaniola and the other lying on the South side of this, are included almost in the mid space between the said Tropike and the Equinoctial line, 
Habitable regions under the Equinoctial.  which many of the old writers supposed to be unhabitable and defart, by reason of the fervent heat of the Son in that clime, as they conjectured: but they were deceived in their opinion. They affirm that richer gold mines are found in Cuba, 
The rich gold mine● of Cuba.  then in Hispaniola. They say also that even now while I write these things, there is gold gathered together ready to the melting, amounting to the quantity of a hundred and fourscore thousand Castellans of gold, an argument surely of great richesse. jamaica is more towards the South than these, and is a pleasant and fruitful Island, 
The Island of jamaica.  of soil apt for corn, graffs, and sets, it consisteth of only one mountain: the inhabitants are warlike men, and of good wit, Colonus compared it to Sicily in bigness. They which of late searched it more exactly, say that it is somewhat less, but not much. It is thought to be without gold and precious stones, as the like was supposed of Cuba at the beginning. The Island of Guadalupea (first named Caraqueira) lying on the South side of Hispaniola, 
The Island of Guadalupea.  is four degrees nearer the Equinoctial. It is eaten and indented with two gulfs (as we read of great Brittany, now called England, and Calidonia, now called Scotland) being in manner two Islands. 
England and Scotland  It hath famous Ports. In this they found that gum which the Apothecaries call Animae Album, 
The gum called Anime album.  whose fume is wholesome against rheums and heaviness of the head. The tree which engendereth this gum, beareth a fruit much like unto a Date, being a span in length. When it is opened, it seemeth to contain a certain sweet meal. As our husbandmen are accustomed to reserve Chestnuts, 
Dates.  and such other hard fruits, all the winter, so do they the Dates of this tree, being much like unto a Fig tree. They found also in this Island, 
Pine trees.  pine trees, of the best kind, and such other dainty dishes of nature, whereof we have spoken largely before: Yea they think that the inhabitants of other Islands, had their seeds of so many pleasant fruits from hence. 
The Canibales.  For the Cambales, being a wild and wandering people, and overrunning all the country about them, to hunt for man's flesh, were accustomed to bring home with them whatsoever they found strange or profitable in any place: They are intractable, and will admit no strangers. It shall therefore be needful to overcome them with great power: For as well the women as men, are expert archers, and use to envenom their arrows. When the men go forth of the land a man hunting, the women manfully defend their coasts against such as attempt to invade the same. And hereby I suppose it was thought, 
Whereby it was thought that there were Islands of women.  that there were Islands in the Ocean, inhabited only with women, as Colonus the Admiral himself persuaded me, as I have said in the first Decade. This Island hath also fruitful mountains and plains, and notable rivers. It nourisheth honey in trees, and in the caves of rocks, as in Palma one of the Islands of Canary, 
Honey in trees and rocks.  honey is gathered among the briars and bramble bushes. About xviii miles Eastward from this Island, lieth an Island which our men named Desiderata, being twenty miles in circuit, 
The Island Desiderata. The Island Galanta.  and very fair. Also about ten miles from Guadalupea toward the South, lieth the Island of Galanta, being thirty miles in circuit, and plain: It was so named for the neatness and beautifulness thereof. Niene miles distant from Guadalupea toward the East, there are six small Islands, named Todos Sanctos, or Barbata: these are full of rocks, & barren, 
The Islands of Todos Sanctos, or Barbata.  yet necessary to be known to such as use to travail the seas of these coasts. Again, from Guadalupea xxxv miles toward the North, there is an Island named Monsserratus, containing in circuit forty miles, having also in it a mountain of notable height. 
The Island Monsserratus The Island Antiqua.  The Island named Antiqua, distant from Guadalupea thirty miles, is about forty miles in circuit. Diegus Colonus the son and heir of Christiphorus Colonus, told me that his wife (whom he left in the Island of Hispaniola at his coming into Spain to the court) did write unto him, that of late among the Islands of the Canibales, there is one found which aboundeth with gold. On the left side of Hispaniola toward the South, near unto the haven Beata, there lieth an Island named Portus belus: 

The Island Portus belus Great Tortoises.  
The generation of Tortoises.   they tell marvelous things of the monsters of the sea about this Island, and especially of the Tortoises, for they say that they are bigger than great round targets. At such time as the heat of nature moveth them to generation, they come forth of the sea, and making a deep pit in the sand, they lay three or four hundred eggs therein. When they have thus emptied their bag of conception, they put as much of the sand again into the pit, as may suffice to cover the eggs, and so resort again to the sea, nothing careful of their succession. At the day appointed of nature to the procreation of these beasts, there creepeth out a multitude of Tortoises, as it were pyssemares swarming out of an ant hill: and this only by the heat of the Sun, without any help of their parents. 
The Eggs of Tortoises.  They say that their eggs are in manner as big as Geese eggs. They also compare the flesh of these Tortoises, to be equal with veal in taste. There are beside these, innumerable Islands, the which they have not yet searched, 
Innumerable Islands.  nor yet is it greatly necessary to syft this meal so finely. It may suffice to understand that there are large lands, and many regions, which shall hereafter receive our nations, tongues, and manners, and therewith embrace our religion. The Trojans did not suddenly replenish Asia, the Tyrians Libya, 
Trojans. Tyrians. Greeks. Phenitians. The North Islands.  nor the Greeks and Phenices Spain. As touching the Islands which lie on the North side of Hispaniola, I have let pass to speak: For albeit they are commodious for tillage and fishing, yet are they left of the spaniards as poor and of small value. We will now therefore take our leave of this old Tethis, with her moist and watery Nymphs, and receive to our new acquaintance the beautiful lady of the South sea, 
The Islands of the south sea.  richly crowned with great pearls, the Island of Dites being rich both in name and in treasure. In my Epistle book which I sent unto your holiness this last year, I declared how Vaschus Nunnez Balboa, the Captain of them which passed over the dangerous mountains toward the South sea, learned by report, that in the prospect of those coasts there lay an Island abounding with pearls of the greatest sort, and that the king thereof was rich, 
The Island of pearls.  and of great power, infesting with wars the other kings his borderers, and especially Chiapes and Tumacchus: We declared further, how at that time it was left untouched by reason of the raging tempests which troubled that South sea three months in the year. But it is now better known to our men, who have now also brought that fierce king to humanity, and converted him from a cruel Tiger, to one of the meek sheep of Christ's flock, 
Wild beasts must be tamed with the rod.  sanctified with the water of baptism, with all his family and kingdom. It shall not therefore be from our purpose to declare, by the governance of what captains, or by what means these things were so happily achieved.   

The tenth book of the third Decade.  
AT the arrival of Petrus Arias the new governor of Dariena, he gave commandment that one Gasper Moralis should take in hand th'expedition to the Island of Dites. He therefore took his viage first to Chiapes and Tumacchus kings of the South, 
An expedition to the Island of Dites in the south sea.  whom Vaschus before had conciled and left friends to the Christians. They friendly and magnifically entertained our men, who prepared them a navy of the kings boats to pass over into this Island, which they call Dites, 
The Island of Margaritea.  & not Margarita or Margaritea, although it abound with pearls, which in the latin tongue are called Margaritae. For they first called an other by this name, 
Os Draconis, Paria.  which lieth next to the mouth of Os Draconis in the region of Paria, in the which also is found great plenty of pearls. Gasper brought with him only lx armed men to the Island, for that he could convey over no greater number, by reason of the smallness and narownes of their boats or barks, which they call Culchas, made of one whole piece of timber, as we have said before. The king of the Island came forth against them fiercely, 
A conflict.  with cruel and threatening countenance, & with a great band of armed men, crying in manner of a larome, & in token of the battle, Guazzavara, Guazzavara, which is as much to say as, battle against the enemy, & is (as it were) a watch word to give thonset: wherewith also they threw their darts, for they have not those of bows. They were so obstinate & desperate, that they assailed our men with four Guazzavaras', that is, battles. At the length our men with certain of Chiapes and Tumacchus men (being old enemies to this king of the Island) got the upper hand, by reason they assailed the king suddenly and unawares. Yet was he determined to assemble a greater power, and once again to attempt the fortune of war, but that he was otherwise persuaded by the kings his borderers, which counseled him to give over, and submit himself, sometime by th'example of themselves & other, threatening the destruction of his flooryshing kingdom, and otherwiles declaring unto him the humanity and gentleness of our men, by whose friendship he might obtain honour and quietness to him and his: willing him furthermore to consider, what chanced unto them which the year before resisted and adventured the hazard of the battle, as did these kings, Poncha, Pocchorrosa, Quarequa, ●hiapes, and Tumacchus, with such other. By these persuasions, the king submitted himself, and came friendly to our men, whom he conducted to his palace, which they say to be marvelously adorned and princelike. 

The king of the Island of Dites submitteth himself. The kings palace.  
A hundredth and ten pound weight of pearls.   As soon as they entered into the palace, he brought forth a basket of curious workmanship, and full of pearls, which he gave them. The sum of these pearls amounted to the weight of a hundred and ten pounds, after viii ounces to the pound: being again rewarded of our men, with such trifles as they brought with them of purpose, as garlands of Crystal, and glass, and other counterfeit stones of divers colours, with looking glasses also, and laton bells, 
Axes and hatchets more esteemed than gold.  and especially two or three Iron hatchets (which they more esteem then great heaps of gold) he thought himself abuntdantly recompensed. They laugh our men to scorn, that they will departed with so great and necessary a thing for any sum of gold: affirming an axe or hatchet to be profitable for many uses of men, and that gold serveth only for wanton pleasures, and not to be greatly necessary. Being therefore joyful and glad of the friendship of our men, he took the captain by the hand, and brought him with certain of his familiars to the highest tower of his palace, from whence they might prospecte the main sea: then casting his eyes about him on every side, and looking toward the East, he said unto them, Behold, here lieth open before you the infinite sea, extended beyond the sun beams: 
The kings words.  then turning him toward the South and West, he signified unto them that the land which lay before their eyes, the tops of whose great mountains they might see, was exceeding large: 
Islands rich in gold and pearls.  then coming somewhat nearer, he said, Behold these Islands on the right hand and on the left, which all obey unto our empire, and are rich, happy, and blessed, if you call those lands blessed which abound with gold and pearl. We have in this Island little plenty of gold: but the deep places of all the seas about these Islands are full of pearls, whereof you shall receive of me as many as you will require, so that ye persist in the bond of friendship which you have begun. I greatly desire your friendship, and would gladly have the fruition of your things, which I set much more by then millions of pearls: You shall therefore have no cause to doubt of any unfaithfulness or breach of friendship on my behalf. Our men gave him like friendly words, and encouraged him with many fair promises to do as he had said. When our men were now in a readiness to departed, they covenanted with him to pay yearly to the great king of Castyle a hundred pound weight of pearls. 
C. pound weight of pearls yearly for a tribute.  He gladly agreed to their request, and took it for no great thing, nor yet thought himself any whit the more to become tributary. With this king they found such plenty of Hearts and Coneys, that our men, standing in their houses, 
Plenty of Hearts and Coneys.  might kill as many as them list with their arrows. They live here very pleasantly, having great plenty of all things necessary. This Island is scarcely six degrees distant from the Equinoctial line. They have the same manner of bread, made of roots and the grain of Maxium, and wine made of seeds and fruits, even as they have in the region of Comogra, and in other places, 
Wine of fruits and seeds.  aswell in the Islands, as in the firm land. This king is now baptized, with all his family and subicctes. His desire was, at his baptism, to be named Petrus Arias, after the name of the governor. When our men departed, 
The king is baptized.  he accompanied them to the sea side, and furnished them with boats to return to the continent. Our men divided the pearls among them, reserving the fift portion to be delivered to thofficers of the kings Excheker in those parts. 
The fift part of pearls due to the king.  They say that these pearls were marvelous precious, fair, orient, & exceeding big: insomuch that they brought many with them bigger than hazel nuts. 
Big pearls.  Of what price & value they might be, I consider by one pearl the which Paulus, predecessor to your holiness, 
A pearl for a Pope.  bought at the second hand of a merchant of Venice for four & forty thousand ducats: Yet among those which were brought from this Island, there was one bought even in Dariena, for a thousand & two hundred Castellans of gold: this was almost as big as a mean walnut, 
another pearl of great price.  & came at that length to the hands of Petrus Arias the governor, who gave it to that noble and faithful woman his wife, of whose manner of departure with her husband, we have made mention before. We must then needs think that this was very precious, which was bought so dear among such a multitude of pearls, where they were not bought by one at once, but by pounds, and at the least by ounces. It is also to be thought that the Uenecian merchant bought his for no great sum of money in the East parts: But he sold it the dearer, 
Nyse and superfluous pleasures.  for that he chanced to live in those lascivious and wanton days, when men were given to such nice and superfluous pleasures, and met with a merchant for his purpose. But let us now speak somewhat of the shelfyshes, in the which pearls are engendered. 
divers opinions of the generation of pearls.  It is not unknown to your holiness, that Aristotle, and Pliny his follower, were of divers opinions as concerning the generation of pearls. But these Indians, and our men, rest only in one assertion, not assenting to them in any other: as, either that they wander in the sea, or, that they move at any time after they are borne. They will therefore that there be certain green places, as it were meadows, 
Herbs in the bottom of the sea.  in the bottom of the sea, bringing forth an herb much like unto Time, and affirm that they have seen the same, and that they are engendered, nourished, and grow therein, as we see th'increase and succession of Oysters to grow about themselves: Also that these fishes delighteth not in the conversation or company of the sea dogs, nor yet to be contented with only one, two, or three, or at the most four pearls, affirming that in the fishing places of the king of this Island, there was found a hundred pearls in one fish, the which Caspar Moralis the captain himself, 
A hundred pearls in one shell fish.  and his companions, diligently numbered: For it pleased the king at their being there, and in their presence, to command his divers to go a fishing for those kind of fishes. They compare the matrices of these fishes, to the places of conception in Hens, 
The matrice of the pearl fish.  in the which their eggs are engendered in great multitudes and clusters, and believe that these fishes bring forth their birth in like manner. For the better proof whereof, they say that they found certain pearls coming forth of their matrices, 
The birth of pearls.  as being now come to the time of their full ripenesss, and moved by nature to come out of their mothers womb, opening itself in time convenient: likewise, that within a while after, they saw other succeed in like manner. So that to conclude, they saw some coming forth, and other some yet abiding the time of their perfection: which being complete, they also became lose, and opened the matrice. They perceived the pearls to be enclosed in the midst of their bellies, there to be nourished and increase, as an infant sucking his mothers paps within her womb, before he move to come forth of her privy places. And if it chance any of these shelfyshes to be found scattered in the sand of the sea (as I myself have seen Oysters disparkled on the shores in divers places of the Ocean) they affirm that they have been violently driven thither from the bottom of the sea by force of tempests, and not to have wandered thither of themselves: But, that they become white by the clearness of the morning dew, or wax yellow in troubled weather, or otherwise that they seem to rejoice in fair weather and clear air, or contrariwise, to be as it were astonished and dim in thunder and tempests, with such other: the perfect knowledge hereof, is not to be looked for at the hands of these unlearned men, which handle the matter but grossly, and inquire no further than occasion serveth. Yet do they affirm by th'experience and industry of the divers, that the greatest pearls lie in the deepest places, 
Where the biggest, mean, and least pearls are engendered.  they of the mean sort higher, and the least highest of all, and nearer to the brim of the water: And say therefore, that the greatest do not wander, but that they are created, nourished, and increase in the deepest places of the sea, whither few divers (and that but seldom) dare adventure to dive so deep to gather them, aswell for fear of the sea crabs, which wander among these pearl fishes to feed of them, 
Sea crabs.  and for fear of other monsters of the sea, as also lest their breath should fail them in to long remaining in the water: And this they say to be the cause why the oldest (& therefore byggest) sea muscles inhabit the deepest places, 
The sea muscles wherein pearls are engendered.  from whence they are not lightly moved by tempests. Furthermore, how much the bigger & older these fishes are, they say that in their larger matrices, the greater number & bigger pearls are found, & that for this cause there are fewer found of the bigest sort. They think also, that when they first fall from their fishes in the deep places, they are devoured of other fishes, because they are not yet heard. Again, the smallest differ from the bigest in a certain swelling or impostumation, which the Spaniards call a tympany: For they deny that to be a pearl which in old muscles cleaveth fast to the shell, but that it is a wart, which being razed from the shell with a file, is round & bright but only of one side, and not precious, being rather of the nature of the fish itself, then of a pearl. They confess that they have seen certain of these muscles cleaving on rocks, yet these but few, and nothing worth. It is also to be thought, that the pearl fishes or sea muscles which are found in India, Arabia, the red sea, or Taprobana, are ruled in such order as the aforenamed famous authors have written: For their opinion herein is not utterly to be rejected, forasmuch as they were learned men, and travailed long in the searching of these things. But we have now spoken sufficiently of these sea fishes, and of their eggs, which the fond nysenesse and wantonness of men have made dearer than the eggs of hens or geese. Let us therefore entreat somewhat of other particular things, which are come to our knowledge of late. We have elsewhere largely described the mouths of the gulf of Vraba, with sundry and variable regions divided with the manifold gulfs of that sea: But as concerning the West coasts, in the which our men have builded houses, and planted their habitations on the banks of Dariena, I have no new matter to write. Yet as touching the East parts of the gulf, I have learned as followeth. They say that the universal land of the East region of the gulf, 
The regions of the East side of the gulf of Vraba.  from the corner thereof far reaching into the sea, and from the extreme or uttermost mouth of the same, receiving the waters of the sea which fall into it, even unto Os Draconis and Paria, is by one general name called Caribana, of the Caribes or Canibales which are found in every region in this tract: 
The region of Caribana.  But from whence they had their particular original, and how, leaving their native soil, they have spread their generation so far, like a pestiferous contagion, we will now declare. 
The original of the Canibales.  Therefore from the first front reaching forth into the sea (in whose tract we said that Fogeda fastened his foot) toward the corner, about niene miles distant, there lieth a village of Caribana, named Futcraca: 
The villages of Caribana.  three miles distant from this, is the village of Vraba, of the which it is thought that the whole gulf took his name, because this village was once the head of the kingdom. About two miles from this, is Feti: Niene miles from Feti, is Zerema: And about twelve miles from this, Sorache. Our men found all these villages full of people, all the which give themselves only to manhunting: 
Manhunters.  insomuch that if they lack enemies against whom they may keep war, they exercise cruelty against themselves, and either slay the one the other, or else drive the vanquished to flight. Whereby it is apparent, that by these their continual wars, and driving the one the other out of their countries, this infection hath gone so far, not only on the firm land, but also into the Islands. I was also advertised of an other thing, the which to my judgement seemeth worthy to be put in memory. One Coruales, a judge in causes of law among the spaniards of Dariena, saith, that on a time walking abroad with his book in his hand, he met by the way with a fugitive, which had fled from the great lands lying far toward the west, and remained here with a King with whom he was entertained. When this man perceived the lawyer looking on his book, marvelling thereat, he came running unto him, and by interpreters of the king whom he served, spoke thus unto him, 
Books: Look in the beginning of the book of the lands lately found.  Have you also books, wherein you may reserve things in perpetual memory? and letters, whereby you may declare your mind to such as are absent? And herewith desired that the book might be opened unto him, supposing that he should therein have found the letters of his own country: But when he saw them unlike, he said further, that in his country there were cities fortified with walls, and governed by laws, and that the people also used apparel: but of what religion they were, I did not learn. Yet had our men knowledge both by the words and signs of this fugitive, 
Circumcised people.  that they were circumcised. What now think you hereby (most holy father?) Or what do you divine may come hereof, when time shall subdue all these under your throne? Let us now entermyngle certain small things among these great matters. 
What chanced to the Captains which the governor sent divers ways.  I have not thought good to pretermit that which chanced to johannes Solisius, who, to search the South side of the supposed continent, departed with three ships from the port joppa (not far distant from the Islands of Gades or Cales in the Ocean) the fourth day of the Ideses of September, in the year. M.d.xu or what success johannes Pontius had, whom the new governor Petrus Arias appointed to vanquish and destroy the Caribes or Canibales, 
Look decade iii. liber. vi.  devourers of man's flesh: also to what end the voyages of the other captains came, which were sent forth divers ways at the same time, as Gonzalus Badaiocius, Franciscus Bezarra, and Valleius, johannes Solicius took the matter in hand in an evil hour. 
The vioage of johannes Solisius.  He sailed beyond the point of saint Augustine (which they call Cabo. S. Augustini) toward the South side of the supposed continent beyond the Equinoctial line. For (as we have said before) that point reacheth southward to the seventh degree of the South pole, 
Cab. S. Augustini.  called the pole Antarctic. He proceeded in that viage two hundred leagues, and found the land from the point to extend so far toward the South beyond the Equinoctial, that he came to the thirtieth degree of the South pole. As he sailed thus forward, having now on his back half the stars named Caput Draconis, 
john Solisius is slain of the Canibales.  (that is, the Dragon's head) and the regions of Paria lying northward from him, & prospecting toward the pole arctic, he chanced to fall into the hands of the filthy Canibales: For these crafty foxes seemed to make signs of peace, when in their minds they conceived a hope of a dainty banquet, 
The fyrcenes of the Canibales.  & espying their enemies a far of, began to swallow their spittle, as their mouth watered for greediness of their prey. As unhappy Solisius descended, with as many of his company as could en●er into the boat of the bigest ship, suddenly a great multitude of thinhabitants burst forth upon them, and ●lue them every man with clubs, even in the sight of their fellows. They carried away the boat, and in a moment broke it all to fytters, not one escaping. Their fury not thus satisfied, they cut the slain men in pieces, even upon the shore, where their fellows might behold this horrible spectacle from the sea. But they being stricken with fear through this example, durst not come forth of their ships, or devise how to revenge the death of their Captain and companions. They departed therefore from these unfortunate coasts, and by the way lading their ship with brasell, returned home again with loss, 
Brasyle.  and heavy cheer. Of these things I was advertised of late by their own letters. What they have else done, I shall have more particular knowledge hereafter. johannes Pontius was also repulsed by the Canibales in the Island of Guadalupea, 
johannes Pontius is repulsed by the Canibales.  being one of the chief Islands of their habitation. For when they saw our men a far of on the sea, they lay in ambush, suddenly to invade them when they should come aland. Our men sent forth a few foot men, and with them their Laundresses to wash their shirts and sheets: For from the Island of Ferrea, being one of the Islands of Canary (even unto this Island, for the space of four thousand and two hundred miles) they had seen no land, where they might find any fresh water, forasmuch as in all this large space the Ocean is without Islands. At their coming therefore to land, the Canibales assailed them, carried away the women, and put the men to such distress, that few of them escaped. By reason whereof, Pontius being greatly discomfited, durst not invade the Canibales, fearing their venomed arrows, which these naked manhunters can direct most certainly. Thus good Pontius failing of his purpose, was fain to give over the Canibales, whom (being safe & under the house roof) he threatened to vanquish and destroy. Whither he went from thence, or what new things he found, I have as yet no further knowledge. By these misfortunes, Solisius lost his life, & Pontius his honour. Let us now speak of an other, whose enterprise came to like purpose the same year. johannes Aiora, borne in the city of Corduba, 

The voyage of johannes Aiora.  
Look Decade iii. liber vi.   a man of noble parentage, sent in stead of the Lieutenant (as we have said) more covetous of gold, then careful of his charge, or desirous of prayle for well deserving, sought occasions of quarreling against the kings, and spoiled many, violently extorting gold of them against right & equity: and further, handled them so extremely, that of friends they became most cruel enemies, insomuch that they ceased not with desperate minds, 
The lewd behaviour of john Aiora.  by all means they could, to slay our men openly or privily. By reason whereof it is come to pass, that where before they bartered quietly, exchanging ware for ware, they are now fain to do all things by force of arms. When he had thus exacted a great quantity of gold of them (as it is said) he fled privily, and took away a ship with him by stealth, as the common rumour goeth, nor yet hitherto have we hard whither he went, or where he is arrived. Some suspect that Petrus Arias the governor should consent to his departure, because this johannes Aiora, is brother to Gonsalus Aiora, the kings historiographer, a man both learned, and expert in the discipline of war, and so much the governors friend, that these two among a few, may be counted examples of rare amity. I myself also am greatly bound unto them both, and have long enjoyed their friendship: yet shall I desire them both to pardon me in declaring my fantasy herein, that in all the turmoils and tragical affairs of the Ocean, nothing hath so much displeased me, as the covetousness of this man, who hath so disturbed the pacified minds of the kings. Now among these troublous chances, let us rehearse the variable fortune of Gonsalus Badaiocius, 
The variable fortune of Gonsalus Badaiocius.  and his fellows, whose prosperous beginnings, ended with unfortunate success. Gonsalus therefore in the month of May, in the year of Christ .1515. departed from Dariena with fourscore armed men, directing his voyage toward the South, and resting in no place until he came to the region of Cerabaro, which our men named Gratia Dei, 
Cerabaro. Decade. iii.li.iiii.  distant from Dariena about a hundred and fourscore miles: for they call it threescore leagues. He spent certain days here in idleness: for he could neither by fair means, nor by foul, allure the king of the region to come to him. While he lay thus idly, there came to him other fifty men, sent from Dariena under the governance of captain Lodovicus Mercado, who departed from Dariena in the kalends of May, to the intent to search the inner parts of those regions. When they met together, they determined, after consultation, to pass over the mountains lying toward the South, even unto the South sea lately found. Behold now a wonderful thing, 
The South sea.  that in a land of such marvelous longitude in other places, they found it here to be only about fifty miles distant to the South sea: for they count it xvii leagues, as the manner of the spaniards is to reckon, and not by miles: Yet say they that a league consisteth of three miles by land, 
A league containeth four miles by sea and but three by land.  and four by sea, as we have noted before. In the tops of the mountains and turning of the waters, they found a king named juana, whose kingdom is also named Coiba, as is the region of king Careta, of whom we have made mention elsewhere. But for as much as the region of this juana, is richer in gold, they named it Coiba Dites, that is, Coiba the rich: For, wheresoever they digged the ground, 

The golden region Coiba Dites.  
Sande mixed with gold.   whether it were on the dry land, or in the wet channels of the rivers, they found the sand, which they cast forth, mixed with gold. juana fled at the coming of our men, and could never be brought again. They spoiled all the country near about his palace: yet had they but little gold, for he had carried all his stuff with him. Here they found certain slaves, marked in the faces after a strange sort: 
How their slaves are marked in the face.  For with a sharp prick made either of bone, or else with a thorn, they make holes in their faces, and forthwith sprinkling a powder thereon, they moist the pounced place with a certain black or red juice, whose substance is of such tenacity and clamminess, that it will never wear away: They brought these slaves away with them. They say that this juice is of such sharpness, and putteth them to such pain, that for extreme dolour they have no stomach to their meat certain days after. The kings which take these slaves in their wars, use their help in seeking for gold, and in tillage of the ground, even as do our men. From the palace of juana, following the course of the water about ten miles toward the South, they entered into the dominion of an other king, whom our men named the old man, because he was old, not passing of his other name. In the region of this king also, they found gold in all places, 
Gold.  both on the land, and in the rivers. This region is very fair, and fruitful, and hath in it many famous rivers. Departing from hence, in five days journey they came to a land left desolate: They suppose that this was destroyed by civil discord, 
A fruitful region left desolate by civil discord.  forasmuch as it is for the most part fruitful, and yet not inhabited. The fifth day, they saw two men coming a far of: these were laden with bread of Maizium, which they carried on their shoulders in sacks. Our men took them, and understood by them that there were two kings in that tract, the one was named Periquete, who dwelled near unto the sea, the others name was Totonoga. This Totonoga was blind, and dwelled in the continent. The two men which they met, were the fishers of Totonoga, whom he had sent with certain farthels of fish to Periquete, and had again received bread of him for exchange: For thus do they communicate their commodities one with an other by exchange, without the use of wicked money. By the conducting of these two men, they came to king Totonoga, dwelling on the West side of saint Michael's gulf, in the South sea. They had of this king the sum of six thousand Castellans of gold, both rude, 
Syxe thousand Castellans of gold.  and artifycially wrought. Among those groumes of rude or native gold, there was one found of the weight of two Castellans, which argued the plentiful rychenesse of the ground. Following the same coast by the sea side toward the West, they came to a king, 
king Taracuru.  whose name was Taracuru, of whom they had gold, amounting to the weight of eight thousand Pesos. We have said before that Pesus is the weight of a Castelane, not coined. From hence they went to the dominion of this kings brother, named Pananome, who fled at their coming, and appeared no more afterward. They say that his kingdom is rich in gold. They spoiled his palace in his absence. Syxe leagues from hence, they came to another king, named Tabor. 

Four thousand pesoes of gold.  
Salt.   From thence they came to the king of Cheru. He friendly entertained our men, and gave them four thousand Pesos of gold. He hath in his dominion many goodly salt bays: the region also aboundeth with gold. About twelve miles from hence, they came to another king called Anata, of whom they had xv. thousand Pesos of gold, which he had gotten of the kings his borderers, whom he had vanquished by war. A great part of this gold was in rude form, because it was melted when he set the kings houses on fire whom he spoiled. For they rob and slay the one the other, sacking & fyryng their villages, 
Their manner of war.  and wasting their countries. They keep war barbarously, and to utter destruction, executing extreme cruelty against them that have the overthrow, Gonsalus Badaiocius, with his fellows, wandered at liberty, until they came to this king, and had gathered great heaps of gold of other kings. For, what in bracelets, collars, earerynges, breast plates, helmets, and certain bars wherewith women bear up their breasts, they had gathered together in gold the sum of fourscore thousand Castellans, which they had obtained partly by exchange for our things where they found the kings their friends, & otherwise by forcyble means where they found the contrary. They had gotten also forty slaves, whose help they used both for carriage of their victuals and baggagies, in the steed of Moils or other beasts of burden, & also to relieve such as were sick and forweeried by reason of their long journeys and hunger. After these prosperous voyages, they came by the dominion of king Scoria, to the palace of a king named Pariza, where (fearing no such thing) Pariza enclosed them with a great army, 
Gonsalus Badaiocius hath the overthrow and is spoiled of great riches of gold.  and assailed them straggeling and unwares, in such sort that they had no leisure to put on their armure. He slew and wounded about fifty, and put the residue to flight. They made such haste, that they had no respect either to the gold they had gathered, or to their slaves, but left all behind them. Those few that escaped, came to Dariena. The opinion of all wise men, as concerning the variable and inconstant chances of fortune in human things were false, 
The inconstancy of fortune.  if all things should have happened unto them prosperously. For such is the nature of this blind goddess, that she oftentimes delighteth in the overthrow of them whom she hath exalted, and taketh pleasure in confounding high things with low, and the contrary. We see this order to be impermutable, that who so will apply himself to gather roots, shall sometimes meet with sweet Lyqueresse, and other whiles with sour Cockle. Yet woe unto Pariza: for he shall not long sleep in rest. The governor himself was of late determined with three hunndred & fifty choice soldiers to revenge the death of our men: but where as he by chance fell sick, his power went forward under the conducting of his lieutenant Gaspar Spinosa, a judge in cases of law in Dariena. At the same time other were sent forth to the Island of Dites, to exact the portion of pearls limited to the king for his tribute. What shall succeed, time will bring to our knowledge. The other two attempted thinhabitants beyond the gulf Franciscus Bezerra, 
The expedition of Frances Bezarra against the Canibales.  passing over the corner of the gulf, & the mouths of the river of Dabaiba, with two other captains, and a hundred and fifty soldiers well appointed, went to make war upon the Canibales, even in Caribana their own chiefest dominion, towards the village of Turufy, whereof we have made mention before in the coming of Fogeda. They brought also with them divers engines of war, as three pieces of ordinance, whose shot were bigger than eggs: 
Guns.  likewise forty archers, and xxv hagbutters, to the intent to reach the Canibales a far of, & to prevent their venomed arrows: But what became of him & his company, or where they arrived, we have yet no perfect knowledge. Certain which came of late from Dariena to Spain reported, that at their departure they of Dariena stood in great fear lest they also were tossed with some misfortune. The other captain Valleius obtained the fore part of the gulf, 
Valleius repulsed of his enemies.  but he passed over by an other way than did Bezerra, for he took the beginning of Caribana, & Bezarra the end: Valleius returned again. But of the threescore and ten men which he conveyed over with him, he left forty and eight slain among the Canibales. These are the news which they bring that came last from Dariena. There came to me the day before the Ideses of October in this year 1516. Rodericus Colmenares (of whom we have made mention before) & one Franciscus Delapuente. This Franciscus was one of the under captains of this band, whose chief captain was Gonsalus Badaiocius, who hardly escaped the hands of king Pariza. These two captains therefore, Rodericus & Franciscus, who departed from Dariena immediately after the misfortune which befell to Badaiocius & his company, 
The islands of the South sea.  do both affirm, the one, that he hath hard, 
In this sea lie the Islands of Mollucca, most fruitful of spices.  & the other, that he hath seen, that in the South sea there are divers Islands lying westward from the Island of Dites, and Saint Michael's gulf, in many of the which are trees engendered & nourished, which bring forth the same arromatical fruits as doth the region of Collacutea. This land of Collacutea, with the regions of Cochinus and Camemorus, 
Collacutea.  are the chief mart places from whence the Portugals have their spices: 
Cochinus and Camemorus, from whence the Portugals have their spices.  And hereby do they conjecture, that the land where the fruitfulness of spice beginneth, should not be far from thence, insomuch, that many of them which have overrun those coasts, do only desire that leave may be granted them to search further, and that they will of their own charges frame and furnish ships, and adventure the viage to seek those Islands and regions. They think it best that these ships should be made and prepared, 
He meaneth by the straight of Magellanus.  even in saint Michael's gulf, and not to attempt this viage by saint Augustine's point, which way were both long and difficult, and full of a thousand dangers, and is said to reach beyond the fortieth degree of the pole Antarctic. The same Franciscus, being partner of the travails and dangers of Gonsalus, saith, that in overrunning those lands, he found great herds of Hearts and wild Boars, 
How they take Hearts and wild Boars.  and that he took many of them by an art which thinhabitants taught him: which was, to make pits or trenches in their walks, and to cover the same with boughs: By this means also they deceive all other kinds of wild & four footed beasts. But they take fowls after the same manner that we do: As stock doves, 
Stock doves.  which an other tame stock dove brought up in their houses. These they tie by a string, and suffer them to flee a little among the trees: to the which as other birds of their kind resort, they kill them with their arrows. Otherwise they take them with nets, 
Their manner of fouling.  in a bare place purged from trees & bushes, & scattering certain seeds round about that place, in the midst whereof they tie a tame foul or bird, of the kind of them which they desire to take: In like manner do they take popinjays and other fowls. But they say that popinjays are so simple, 
popinjays are easily taken  that a great multitude of them will flee even into the tree in whose boughs the fouler sitteth, and swarm about the tame chattering Popingiay, suffering themselves to be easily taken: For they are so without fear of the sight of the fouler, that they tarry while he cast the snare about their necks, the other being nothing feared hereby, though they see him draw them to him with the snare, and put them in the bag which he hath about him for the same purpose. There is an other kind of fouling, heretofore never heard of, and pleasant to consider. 
A strange kind of fouling.  We have declared before how that in certain of the Islands, and especially in Hispaniola, there are divers lakes or standing pools: In some of these (being no deeper than men may wade over them) are seen great multitudes of water fowls: as well for that in the bottom of these lakes there grow many herbs and weeds, as also that by reason of the heat of the Sun, piercing to the natural place of generation and conception, where being doubled in force by reflection, and preserved by moister there, are engendered of the slyminesse of the earth and water, and by the providence of the universal creator, innumerable little fishes, with a thousand sundry kinds of frogs, worms, gnats, flies, and such other. The fowls which use these lakes, 
fishes and worms engendered of slime. Foules.  are of divers kinds: as Ducks, Geese, Swans, sea News, Gulls, and such other. We have said also, that in their Orchards they nourish a tree which beareth a kind of great Gourds. 
Gourds of the tree.  Of these Gourds therefore, well stopped lest any water should enter in at their rifts, & cause them to sink, they cast many in the shallow pools, where, by their continual wandering and wavering with the motions of the wind and water, they put the fowls out of suspection & fear: the fouler in the mean time, disguising himself as it were with a viso, putteth a great gourd on his head, much like to a helmet, with two holes near about his eyes, his face and whole head beside being covered therewith: and thus entereth he into the pool even unto the chin. For being from their infancy exercised in swimming, and accustomed to the waters, they refuse not to continue therein a long space: the fowls thinking this Gourd to be one of the other that swim upon the water, the fouler goeth softly to the place where he seeth the greatest flock of fowls, and with wagging his head, counterfeiting the moving of the wavering Gourds, draweth near to the fowls, where softly putting forth his right hand, he suddenly snatcheth one by the legs, and plungeth her into the water, where he putteth her into a bag which he hath with him of purpose: The other fowls supposing that this dived into the water of her own motion to seek for food (as is their manner) are nothing moved hereby, but go forward on their way as before, until they also fall into the same snare. I have here for this cause entered into the declaration of their manner of hunting and fouling, that by these more pleasant narrations, I may somewhat mitigate and assuage the horror conceived in your stomach by the former rehearsal of their bloody acts and cruel manners. Let us now therefore speak somewhat again of the new and later opinions, as concerning the swift course of the sea toward the West about the coasts of Paria, also of the manner of gathering of gold in the gold mine of Dariena, as I was advertised of late: and with these two quiet and peaceable things, 
Later opinions of the swift course of the Ocean toward the West.  we will make an end of the tragical affairs of the Ocean, and therewith bid your holiness farewell. So it is therefore, that Andreas Moralis the pilot, and Ouiedus (of whom we have made mention before) repaired to me, at my house in the town of Matrite. As we met thus together, there arose a contention between them two, as concerning this course of the Ocean. They both agree, that these lands and regions pertaining to the dominion of Castille, 
The continent or firm land.  do with one continual tract & perpetual bond, embrace as one whole firm land or continent, all the main land lying on the North side of Cuba, & the other islands, being also Northwest both from Cuba & Hispaniola: Yet as touching the course of the water, they vary in opinion. For Andrea's will that this violent course of water be received in the lap of the supposed continent, which bendeth so much, and extendeth so far toward the North, as we have said: and that by the object or resistance of the land, so bending and crooking, the water should as it were rebound in compass, and by force thereof be driven about the North side of Cuba, and the other islands, excluded without the circle called Tropicus Cancri, where the largeness of the sea may receive the waters falling from the narrow streams, & thereby repress that inordinate course, by reason that the sea is there very large and great. I can compare his meaning to nothing more aptly, then to the swift stream coming forth of a mill, and falling into the mill pool: For in all such places where waters run with a violent fall through narrow channels, and are then received in large pools, they are suddenly disparkled, and their violence broken: So that whereas before they seemed of such force as to overthrow all things being in their way, it can not then be perceived which way they run. The Admiral himself Diegus Colonus, 
The voyages of Diegus Colonus.  son and heir to Christiphorus Colonus, the first finder of these lands (who had now in coming and going, four times passed through these seas) being demanded of me what he found or perceived in sailing too and fro: answered, that there was much difficulty in returning the same way by the which they go. But whereas they first take the way by the main sea toward the North, before they direct their course to Spain, 
The voyage from the new lands to Spain  he saith that in that tract he felt the ship sometimes a little driven back by the contrary course of the water: Yet supposeth that this chanceth only by the ordinary flowing and reflowing of the sea, and the same not to be enforced by the circumflection or course of the water, rebounding in compass as we have said: But thinketh rather, that this main land or supposed continent, should somewhere be open: and that the said open place, should be as it were a gate, entry, or straight, divyding the North parts of that land from the South, by the which also the Ocean running toward the West, may by the rotation or impulsion of the heavens, be driven about the whole earth. Ouiedus agreeth with Andrea's Moralis as touching the continual adherence and closeness of the said continent: Yet neither that the waters should so beat against the bending back of the West land, or be in such sort repulsed and driven into the main sea: But saith, that he hath diligently considered, that the waters run from the deepest and midst of the main sea, toward the West: Also, that sailing near unto the shore with small vessels, he found the same waters to return again toward the East, so that in the same place they run together with contrary course, as we oftentimes see the like to chance in rivers, 
The contrary course of waters.  where by the object of the banks, divers whirlpools and turnings arise in the water. By reason whereof, if any chaff, straw, wood, or any other thing of light substance be cast in any such places in rivers, it followeth, that all such as run with the water in the midst of the channel, proceed well forward, but such as fall into the bending gulfs and indented margentes of the crooked banks, are carried overthwart the channel, and so wander about until they meet with the full and direct course of the river. Thus have we made you partner of such things as they have given us, and written their divers opinions: We will then give more certain reason, when more certain truth shallbe known. We must in the mean time lean to opinions, until the day come appointed of God to reveal this secret of nature, 
The point of the pole star.  with the perfect knowledge of the point of the pole star. Having said thus much of the course of the Ocean, a brief declaration of the gold mines of Dariena, shall close up our Decades, and make an end of our travails. We have said, that niene miles distant from Dariena, 
The gold mines of Dariena, and the manner of gathering gold.  are the sides of the hills and the dry plains in the which gold is gathered, both on the dry land, and also on the banks, and in the channels of rivers. Therefore to all such as are willing to gather gold, there is of ordinary custom appointed to every man by the suruoyers of the mines, a square plot of ground, containing twelve paces, at the arbitrement of the chooser, so that it be not ground already occupied, or left of other. The portion of ground being thus chosen (as it were assigned of the augurs to build a temple) they enclose their slaves within the same, whose help the Christians use in tilling of their ground, and gathering of gold, as we have said. These places appointed unto them, they keep as long as them list: and if they perceive tokens of little gold, they require an other plot of ground of twelve paces to be assigned them, leaving the first in common: 
Our inclosers would leave no such commons  And this is thorder which the Spaniards inhabiting Dariena observe in gathering of gold. I suppose also, that they use the like order in other places: Howbeit, I have not yet inquired so far. It hath been proved, that these twelve paces of ground, have yielded to their choosers the sum of fourscore Castellanes of gold. 
Auri sacra Fames.  And thus lead they their lives in fulfilling the holy hunger of gold. But the more they fill their hands with finding, the more increaseth their covetous desire. The more wood is laid to the fire, the more furiously rageth the flame. Unsaciable covetousness is no more diminished with increase of richesse, then is the dryness of the dropsy satisfied with drink. 
The dropsy of covetousness.  I let pass many things, whereof I intend to write more largely in time convenient, if I shall in the mean season understand these to be acceptable unto your holiness: my duty and observance to whose authority, hath caused me the gladlier to take this labour in hand. The providence of the eternal creator of all things, grant your holiness many prosperous years.   
Here endeth the three books of the Decades.   

Of Cuba, Hispaniola, and other islands in the West Indies seas: and of the manners of the inhabitants of the same.  
I Have partly declared before in my Decades, how certain fugitives which came out of the large West lands, 
Look Decade 3. Liber. 10.  arrived in the confines of Dariena, and how that marveling at the books of our men, they declared that they sometime dwelled in regions whose inhabitants used such instruments, & were ruled by politic laws: 
Cities fortified with walls.  Also that they had cities fortified with walls, and fair palaces, with streets well paved, & common places whither merchants resort, as to the burse or street: These lands, our men have now found. Therefore who were thauthors hereof, or what success they had herein, who so desireth to know, with the conditions of strange regions, and the manners of the people, let him give diligent attendance to such things as follow. 
The Island of Cuba or Fernandina.  Of the Island of Cuba (now called Fernandina, lying next unto Hispaniola on the West side, and yet somewhat so bending toward the North, that the circle called Propicus Cancri divideth it in the midst, whereas Hispaniola is distant from the Tropic, and declining certain degrees toward the Equinoctial line) we have spoken somewhat before. In this Island of Fernandina, there are now six towns erected, whereof the chief is named Sanstiago, of S. james, the patron of the Spaniards. In this, there is native gold found, both in the mountains and rivers: by reason whereof they are daily occupied in gathering & digging the same. But shortly after that I had finished my said books, 
The Spaniards of Cuba attempt new voyages.  three Spaniards that were the most ancient citizens of Cuba, as Franciscus Fernandes of Corduba, Lupus Ocho, & Christophorus Morantes, determined to seek new lands, as the minds of the Spaniards are ever unquiet & given to attempt great enterprises. They furnished, at their own charges, three of those ships which they call Caravels, and having first licence of Diegus Velasquen the governor of the Island, they departed with a hundred and ten men from the West angle of Cuba: 
The West angle of Cuba.  For this angle is most commodious to relieve ships, & to make provision for fresh water & fuel. Thus they sailed continually six days and a half between the west & the South, contented only with the sight of the heaven & the water, during which time, they suppose that they sailed not passed threescore and six miles: 
Note.  For they lay at anchor all night, wheresoever the falling of the Sun took the day light from them, lest by wandering in unknown seas, they might chance to be cast vpp●● rocks or sands: But at the length they chanced upon a great Island, named jucatana, whose beginning thinhabitaunt●● call Eccampi. 
The Island of jucatana. A great city well builded.  Our men went to the city, standing on the sea side, the which, for the bigness thereof, they named Cayrus, or Alcair, thinhabitants whereof entertained them very friendly. When they were entered into the city, they marveled to behold the houses builded like Towers, magnifical temples, streets well paved, and great exercise of buying and selling by exchange of ware for ware. 
Temples.  Their houses are either built of stone, or of brick and lime, 
human people.  and artificially wrought. To the first porches of their houses, and first habitations, they ascend by ten or twelve stairs: they are covered either with tiles, slates, reads, or stalks of certain herbs, they gratified the one the other with mutual gifts. The Barbarians gave our men many brooches and jewels of gold, 
Cunning artificers.  very fair, and of cunning workmanship: our men recompensed them with vestures of silk and wool, counterfeit stones, of coloured glass and crystal, Hawks bells of laton, and such other rewards, which they greatly esteemed for the strangeness of the same: they set nought by looking glasses, because they have certain stones much brighter. This nation is appareled after a thousand fashions, with vestures made of gossampyne cotton or bombage, 
appareled people.  of divers colours. The women are covered from the girdle to the heel, having divers fashions of veils about their heads and breasts, with great cautel lest any part of their legs or feet be seen: they resort much to their temples, unto the which the chief rulers have the ways paved from their own houses: they are idolaters, 
Circumcised Idolaters.  and circumcised, they occupy their manner of exchanging with much fidelity: they use to adorn the hears of their heads. Being demanded by thinperpretours, of whom they received their circumcision: they answered, that there once passed an exceeding fair man by their coasts, who left them that in token to remember him. Other say, that a man brighter than the Sun, went among them, and executed that office: but there is no certainty hereof. When our men had remained there certain days, they seemed to be molestous to thinhabitants, according to the common saying, The longer a guest tarrieth, the worse is his entertainment: The which thing our men perceiving, they made the more haste away. Being therefore provided of all things necessary, they took their voyage directly toward the West, by the province which thinhabitants call Comi, and Maiam. They overpassed these regions, taking only fresh water and fuel in the same. The Barbarians, both men, women, and children, flocked to the sea side, astonysshed greatly to behold the huge bigness of the ships. Our men marveled in manner no less to view their buildings, and especially their temples situate near unto the sea, and erected after the manner of towers. Thus at the length having sailed about a hundred and ten miles, they thought it good to lay Anchor in a province named Campechium, 
Campechium.  whose chief town consisteth of three thousand houses. 
A town of three thousand houses.  Thinhabitantes came swimming to the ships, marvelling exceedingly at the manner of sailing, and at the sails and other tackelynges: But when they heard the thunder of the guns, saw the smoke, and smelt the savour of brimstone and fire, they supposed that thunderbolts and lightnings had been sent from God. The king received our men honourably, and brought them into his palace: where he feasted them well, after his manner. They are accustomed to eat flesh, and have great plenty of beasts and fowls, 
Plenty of beasts and fowls.  as Peacocks, and other, which they frank and feed in their houses: also divers kinds of wild fowls of the mountains, woods, and waters: likewise Partridges, Quails, Turtle doves, Ducks, and Geese. Of beasts, they have Coneys, Wolves, Lions, Tigers, Foxes, wild Boors, Hearts, and Hares. After this banquet, the king with his train and family brought our men into a broad cross way, where many streets do meet: In this, they showed them as it were a great and high alter, builded four square of marble, 
Their Idols and Idolatry.  compact together partly with the tough clay of Babylon called Bitumem, and partly with small stones, it had on every side four stairs: Upon the altar was an Image of a man made of marble, and fast by it the images of two beasts of unknown shape, which seemed as though they would with yaning mouth have torn in sunder the belly of the man's Image. On the other side stood a great Serpent, compact of the said tough clay and small stones: This Serpent being in length xlvii foot, and of the bigness of a large Ox, seemed to devour a Lion of marble, and was all besparcled with fresh blood. Hard by the altar, were three posts fastness in the ground, the which three other traversed, and were sustained with stones. In this place offenders were put to death, in token whereof they saw innumerable arrows stained with blood, some scattered, some lying on heaps, & some broken: also a great number of men's bones, lying in a court or yard near unto this funestal place, their houses are here also builded of lime and stone: 
Houses of lime and stone.  They named this king Lazarus, because they arrived at this land on saint Lazarus day. Departing from hence, and directing their course still toward the West, for the space of xu miles, 
The province Aquanil.  they came to a province named Aquanil, whose chief town is called Moscow, 
Moscow.  and the king thereof Cupoton. He beheld our men with a froward countenance, and sought occasion to do them some privy mischief, while they sought for fresh water: For he made signs unto them, that on the further side of the next hill they should find springs of water, intending to have assailed them in that narrow passage: But by the colouring of their foreheads (as they are accustomed in their wars) and by the bearing of their bows & other weapons, our men perceived their wiliness, and refused to go any further: Yet a thousand of the Barbarians assailed them unwares, and unprepared: 
The spaniards are put to flight, and many slain.  by reason whereof, they were put to flight, and divers of them slain in the chase. Many that fled toward the ships, were entangled in the mud and marshes near unto the shore: Twenty and two were slain with arrows, and the residue for the most part wounded. Franciscus Fernandes the governor of the navy, received in this conflict three and thirty wounds, and in manner none escaped without hurt: If they had gone to the hills which were appointed them, they had been slain every man. They therefore that escaped, returned to the Island of Fernardina, from whence they came, where they were received of their fellows with heavy cheer. But when Diegus Velasquen the governor of the Island, had intelligence hereof, 
another expedition.  he immediately furnished a new navy of four caravels, with three hundredth men: Of this navy he appointed john Grisalua, his nephew, to be the governor, & assigned for under captains, Alphons Auila, Frannces Montegio, and Peter Aluarado: For the pilot he assigned Antony Alamino, who had the regiment of the first navy. They attempted the same voyage again, but declined somewhat more toward the South, about threescore and ten miles. Before they saw any land, they espied a tower a far of, by the view whereof, they came to an Island named Cozumella, from the which they smelled sweet savours proceeding with the wind, 

The Island of Cozumella. Sweet savours.  
A fruitful Island.   before they approached to the land by the space of three miles. They found the Island to be xlv. miles in circuitie, it is plain, and of marvelous fruitful soil, there is also gold in it, but it is not engendered there, but brought thither from other regions: It aboundeth with honey, fruits, and herbs, and hath also great plenty of fowls, and four footed beasts. Their order and manner of living, is in all things like unto theirs of jucatana: likewise their houses, temples, 
Towers and temples.  streets, and apparel. In many of their houses, are great posts of marble, after the manner of our building. They found there, the foundations of certain old towers ruinated, and one especially with xviii stairs ascending to it, after the manner of solemn temples. They marveled greatly at our ships and manner of sailing. At the first, they would admit no strangers: but shortly after, received them gently. Their chief ruler (whom our men supposed to be a priest) led them up to the top of the tower, where they erected a banner, and addicted the Island to the dominion of the king of Castyle, naming it Sancta Crux, 
Cozumella named Scancta Crux,  because they entered into the same in the nonce of may, being then the feast of the holy cross. They say that it was called Cozumella▪ of king Cozumellaus, whose ancestors were the first that inhabited the Island. In the tower they found many chambers furnished with Images, made both of earth and marble to the similitude of Bears: 
Idles like Bears.  these they call upon with a howling and lamentable song, perfuming them with sweet odours, and otherwise honouring them as their domestical gods: they are also circumcised. 
Idolatry.  The king was in fair apparel, made of gossampine cotton, curiously wrought: he was lame on the one foot, by reason that as he once exercised himself in swimming, a devouring fish called Tuberon, bit of all the toes of one of his feet: he entreated our men very friendly, and made them great cheer. After they had been here three days, they departed: and sailing still towards the West, they espied great mountains a far of, but as they drew near, 
Gentle people.  they perceived it to be the Island of jucatana, being distant from Cozumella only five miles. Directing therefore their course towards the south side of jucatana, 
jucanata but five miles from Cozumella.  they compassed it on that side which lieth nearest to be supposed continent: yet could they not sail round about it, by reason of the multitude of rocks, shallow places, and shelves of sand. Then Alaminus the pilot turned his sails to the North side, whereof he had better knowledge. Thus at the length, they came to the town Campechium, and king Lazarus, with whom they had been that attempted the first voyage the year before. At the first, they were gently received, and required to resort to the town: but shortly after, 
The Barbarians make resistance.  they repented that they had bidden them, and thereupon willed them to stay about a stones cast from the town, and to proceed no further. When our men desired that they might make provision for fresh water before their departure, they assigned them to a certain well which they had left behind them, declaring further, that it should be lawful for them to take water there, or else nowhere. Our men rested that night in the field adjoining to the well: the which thing the Barbarians suspecting, assembled an army of three thousand men, and encamped not far from them. Both parts passed a way the night without sleep: they, fearing lest our men should break into the town: and our men, lest the Barbarians should invade them suddenly, on the one part with Trumpets, and on the other side with the noise of Timbrels, kept them still waking that were disposed to sleep. At the spring of the day, the Barbarians approached to our men's camp, and called for the interpreters of Cuba, whose language is much agreeable unto theirs. They had devised to light a Torch of frankincense, and to place the same between both the armies, to the intent that if our men did not departed before the Torch were consumed, to stand to their peril. The Torch was wasted, and the matter came to hand strokes. They slew only one of our men with an arrow, 
A conflict.  because his Target failed him: but many were wounded. After this conflict, our men resorted to their ordinance, which they had planted near unto the well. When they had discharged certain pieces, the Barbarians fled back into the town, and our men were of fierce and greedy courage to have pursued them, but that Grisalua the governor would not suffer them. From thence they proceeded to the last end of jucatana, which they found to reach more than two hundred miles from the East to the West. 
The length of jucatana.  Here they found a commodious haven, and named it Portus desideratus. From hence they sailed to other lands, & came to the region next to jucatana Westward, which they doubt whether it be an Island, or part of the firm land, but think it rather to be annexed to the continent: in this there is a gulf, which they suppose to be encompassed with both the lands: but of this there is no certainty. The inhabitants call this region Caluacam, 
The region of Caluacam, or Oloan.  or otherwise Oloan. They found here also a great river, which by his violent course and fall, driveth fresh water two miles into the sea: this they called Grisalua, after the name of the governor. The Barbarians marvelling at the huge greatness and moving of our ships, 
The river Grisalua.  came swarming on the banks of both sides the river, to the number of six thousand men, armed with targets and breast plates of gold, 
〈◊〉 and 〈…〉  bows and arrows, broad swords of heavy wood, and long iavelyns hardened at the ends with fire. Thus standing in battle ray to defend their coasts, and with proud countenances forbidding our men to come aland, both parties watched all that night in arms. In the dawn of they day, our men espied about a hundred Canoas' (which we have said to be their boats) full of armed men. Here also, the language of th'interpreters of Cuba agreed well enough with theirs. When they had admitted the peace proffered them by th'interpreters, all the Canoas' stayed, except one which approached toward the ships. A certain ruler that was in this Canoa, demanded of our men what they sought in other men's lands. They answered, Gold, and that for permutation of other ware, and not of gift, or violently. The Canoa returned, and the ruler certified the king hereof, who came gladly to the ships. When he had saluted the governor, he called his chamberlain unto him, commanding him to bring his armour, and other ornaments of gold, wherewith he armed Grisalua from the top of the head, 
Armur of gold.  to the sole of the foot: insomuch that what so ever any man of arms, armed at all parts, 
Expert artificers.  is among us accustomed to wear of Iron or steel when he cometh into the field, all such kind of furnitures made of gold, and wrought with wonderful art, the king gave to the governor. He recompensed him with vestures of sick, cloth, linen, and other of our things. In the beginning of this jucatana, when they sailed to Cozumella, they chanced upon a Canoa of fishermen, to the number of niene, fishing with hooks of gold: they took them all prisoners. 
Fish hooks of gold.  One of them was known to this king, who promised the day following, to send the governor as much gold for his ransom, as the man himself weighed. But the governor denied that he could release him, without the consent of his fellows, and therefore kept him still, to prove what he could further know of him. Departing from hence, and sailing still westward, 
The Islands of Sacrifice.  they found a great gulf, in the which three small Islands were situate: Of these, they went to the bigest. But oh abominable cruelty, oh most corrupted minds of men, 
Children sacrificed to Idols. Their Idols of marble.  and devilish impiety. Let every godly man close the mouth of his stomach, lest he be disturbed. They offer young children of both kinds to their Idols of marble & earth. Among their Idols of marble, there standeth a Lion, having a hole through the neck, into the which they pour the blood of the miserable sacrifice, that it may from thence run down into a sink of marble. Let us now declare with what ceremonies they sacrifice the blood of these poor wretches. They cut not their throats, but open the very breasts of these silly souls, and take out their hearts yet panting, with the hot blood whereof, they anoint the lips of their Idols, and suffer the residue to fall into the sink: This done, they burn the heart and bowels, supposing the smoke thereof to be acceptable to their gods. Of their Idols, one is made to the shape of a man, bowing down his head, and looking toward the sink of blood, as it were accepting the offering of the slain sacrifice. They eat the flesh of the arms, thighs, and legs, especially when they sacrifice an enemy taken in the wars. They found a stream of congealed blood, as though it had run from a boochery. For this mischievous purpose, they bring these wretches from the next Islands. They saw also innumerable heads, and trunks of bodies thus mangled, beside many other yet remaining whole, and covered with certain mats. All the tracts of these regions abound with gold and precious stodes. One of our men wandering in the Island, chanced to find two water pots of alabaster, 
Gold and precious stones.  artificially wrought, and full of little stones of divers colours. They say also that they found a stone of the value of two thousand Castellans of gold, which the sent to the governor. 
A stone of great price.  This Island they named the Island of sacrifice. the inhabitauntes are circumcised. There are also other islands situate about this Coluacana, or Galuacam, the which are inhabited only with women, living without the company of men, after the manner of the Amazons. But they that ponder the matter more wisely, 
Islands of women.  think them rather to be certain women which have vowed chastity, and professed a solitary life, as the Nuns do with us, or as the virgins called Vestales, or Bonae Deae, were accustomed to do among the gentiles in old tyme. At certain times of the year, men of the other Islands resort unto them, not for thintent of generation, but moved with pity, to help them to dress their gardens, and till their ground. The report goeth likewise, that there are other Islands of corrupt women, to whom men resort for carnal copulation, and that they cut of one of the paps of their women children, lest it should hinder their shooting: also that they keep only the women children, and send away the men children. Our men therefore drew near to the shore of Coluacana, where they quietly exercised merchandise with thinhabitants. The king gave them a great Pot of gold: also bracelets, chains, brooches, with many other jewels, and all of gold. 
Gold.  Our men again on the other part satisfied him with such stuff as they had done other before. here would they gladly have planted a new colony or habitation, but that the governor would not permit them, whereat they grudged not a little. The houses and other edifices of this province, are builded like unto Towers. It hath also fifteen great towns in it. Of these they affirm, 
Houses like Towers xu great towns in the province of Coluacana. Towns of twenty thousand houses.  that they have seen some consistyng of more than twenty thousand houses, not joining together, but dissevered with courts and gardens. They have also certain large market places, encompassed with walls, and streets well paved: likewise furnaces & ovens, made of lime and brick: furthermore all sorts of handy crafts men, and very cunning artificers. This kings name was Potanchanus, and the region is called Palmaria. 
The region of Palmaria.  The town where the king keepeth his court, containeth xu thousand houses. When they receive any strangers, & make a league of friendship with them, 
A token of friendship.  they are accustomed with a knife made of a sharp stone to let themselves blood in the tongue, hand, arm, or some other part of the body, and this even in the sight of them whom they admit to friendship, in token that they are ready to shed their blood in their friends causes. Their priests profess a virtuous life, and live unmarried. What it is to have do to with women, 
Priests.  no man knoweth before he be married. Fornication and adultery (which seldom chanceth among them) they count abomination. The women are of marvelous chastity. Every noble man, after that he have had one wife, 
Chastity.  may have as many concubines as him listeth: but a married woman taken in adultery, is sold of her husband, but this only to the prince, 
The punishment of adultery.  at whose hands it shall be lawful for her kinsfolk to redeem her. It is not lawful for such as are not married, to sit at the same table with them that are married, or to eat of the same dish, or drink of the same cup. 
Marriage is honoured.  In the month of August and September, they abstain xxxv days, not only from flesh, whereof they have great plenty, but also from fish, 
Fasting.  and all other things that live by blood, and during these days, live only with herbs and fruits. They reckon twenty days to the month, and twenty months to the year. Our men consumed certain days here very pleasantly. When they departed, coasting still by the same shore, they came to an other king, whom they named Ouandus. When he had intelligence that our men desired gold, 
King Ouandus.  he brought forth certain plaits of molten gold. But when the governor signified unto him by the interpreters, that he desired great plenty of that metal, the day following he brought him a man's image of gold, being a cubit in length: 
Idols, jewels and ouches of gold.  also a fan of gold, and an Idol of one of his domestical gods, of curious workmanship: likewise garlands of stones of sundry colours, with many breast plates, brooches, and other kinds of ornaments, and all of gold. He gave him furthermore abundance of delicate meats, well salted, and powdered with spices. When he had required our men to come aland, he commanded his servants with all speed to prepare a great multitude of branches of trees, and to wait upon our men to his palace. As they went thus in order, some behind, and some before, on both sides, they seemed so to shadow our men with bows, as though they had gone in a continual arbour. The king himself having a Sceptre in his hand, did set them in their array, and some time strike such as were negligent in bearing their bows. They showed themselves obedient in all things, and with grave countenance humbled themselves to receive his stripes. When he was demanded where he had such plenty of gold: he pointed with his finger to the next mountains, 
Gold in mountains and rivers.  and to the rivers descending from the same. They are so accustomed to the rivers, and exercised in swimming, that it is all one to them to live in the water and on the land. When they desire together gold, 
Their manner of gathering gold.  they plunge themselves in the rivers, and bring from the bottom thereof both their hands full of sand, which syfting from hand to hand, they gather out the grains of gold. And by this means in the space of two hours, they fill a reed as big as a man's finger. 
Sweet savours.  Of the sweet savours of these lands, many things might be spoken, the which because they make rather to theffeminating of the minds of men, then for any necessary purpose, I have thought best to omit them. The king also gave the governor a young virgin, of twelve years of age, adorned with rich and fair jewels. Of the stones which he had of this king, 
A stone of great price,  one was valued at two thousand Castellanes of gold. Thus at the length they departed from this king, laden with gold and precious stones. Grisalua the governor, sent one of the caravels to his uncle Diego Velasquen, governor of the Island of Cuba, with messengers to deliver him the gold, jewels, and other ornaments, the residue in the mean time still followed the tract toward the West. One of them in the which Francis Montegius the under governor was carried sailed hard by the shore, and the other two kept aloof within prospect of the land. the inhabitauntes of these coasts also, no less marvelling at the ships than did the other, came with twelve Canoas' to Montegius, desiring him by th'interpreters to come aland, promising in the name of their king, that he should be honourably entertained. But Montegius answered, that he could not assent to their request, because his companions were so far from him: Yet did he give them certain of our things, strange unto them, and thanks for their gentleness. Shortly after, espying a great town, they directed their course thither. the inhabitauntes prohibited them to come aland, and came forth against them with bows and quivers full of arrows, broad swords made of heavy wood, and javelins hardened at the end with fire. They shot at our men a far of, and our men discharged certain pieces of ordinance against them. The Barbarians astonished at the noise of the guns fled amain, and desired peace. Here our men's victuals began to fail them, and their ships were bruised with long viages. Having therefore found and done these things whereof we have spoken, Grisalua returned to the Island of Eernandina well contented, but so were not his companions. We must now divert somewhat from this matter, 
Other viages from Cuba o● Fernandina.  and speak of an other navigation: and from thence will we return to these lands which our men have found. So it is therefore, that Diegus Velasquen, the governor of the Island of Fernandina, about the same time that he had sent forth this navy of four caravels, he prepared an other navigation of only one caravel, and one brygantine, with forty and five men. These exercised violent hands against thinhabitants of those regions where they arrived, thinking that they might forcibly draw them to the digging of gold, because they were Caffranite Idolaters and circumcised. There are at the sea side not far from the supposed continent, 
Many islands between Cuba and the firm land.  many little Islands, of most fortunate and fruitful soil, whereof three are thus named, Guanapan, Guanguan, and Quitilla. Out of one of these (which they named Sansta Marina) they violently carried away three hundred men & women, which they thrust into the caravel, and returned immediately to Fernandina, leaving the brigantine with xxv of their fellows, to th'intent to hunt for more men. The haven where the caravel first arrived, is called Carenas, being distant from the angle of Cuba, 
Sanctiago the chief city of Cuba.  and the chief city of Sanctiago, two hundred and fifty miles: For this Island of Cuba, is very long, reaching in length from the East to the West, and situate directly under the circle called Tropicus Cancri, as we have said before. Now shall you hear how fortune sought the revenge of these poor wretches. Therefore as their keepers went aland, and few remained in the Caravel, they perceiving occasion ministered whereby they might recover their liberty, 
The Barbarians slep the Spaniards with their own weapons  suddenly snatched up our men's weapons, and slew six of them which yet remained in the caravel, while the residue leapt into the sea. And by this means the Barbarians possessed the caravel which they had soon learned to rule, and thus returned to their own countries. But they sailed first to the next Island, where they burned the Caravel, and carried away the weapons with them. From hence they conveyed themselves to their own countries with the Canoas' of this Island. Here in like manner they privily assailed them that were left with the brigantine, and slew many of them also: The residue that escaped, fled to the brigantine, where they bewailed their fellows deaths, and counted their own escape a victory. On the shore not far from the place where they suffered this misfortune, there is a tree, in the top whereof they set up a cross, and graved this inscription in the bark of the tree, Vannuis Aldarieci. There is a river named Darien, on the bank whereof standeth the chief city of the supposed continent. The governor therefore having intelligence hereof, 
The chief city of the supposed continent.  sent with all speed two ships of war well furnished, to the aid of them that were left: but they were wise to late. Yet following the view of the cross, they came to the shore, and red the letters graven on the tree, but durst not attempt fortune. Thus with all their hardy soldiers departing from hence with despair, they sailed to the next Island, out of the which they carried away by violence five hundred men and women, supposing likewise that they might lawfully so do, because they were Idolaters and circumcised: But the like chance happened unto them when they landed at Eernandina. For the Barbarians, 
The spaniards are slain again with their own weapons.  espying opportunity, set upon the spaniards in one of the ships with their own weapons, and slew their keepers: the residue that escaped, casting themselves into the sea, swam to the next caravel, and with their fellows assailed the caravel that was taken from them. This conflict was so sharp, that for the space of four hours, it was doubtful whether part should obtain the victory. The Barbarians both men and women fought very fiercely, aswell to recover their liberty, as also to hold fast the pray which they had gotten: But in fine, the spaniards had the upper hand, by reason they were more expert in handling of their weapons, & ruling of their caravel. The Barbarians being thus overcome, leapt into the sea, but the spaniards took them again with the ship boats. 
The Barbarians are slain and put to flight.  About a hundred of the Barbarians perished, being partly drowned, and partly slain with the sword, and but few of the spaniards. These things thus pacified, the residue of the Barbarians were carried to the town of Sanctiago, and condemned to labour in the gold mines. Shortly after they made out a new voyage to an other of the Islands, 
A multitude of Islands.  which lie there about so thick, 
Archipelagus▪  that they commonly call the number of them Archipelagus, as they in our sea of jonicum are called Symplegades. 
another voyage  Hear our men were cruelly handled, and as many of them as came aland either slain or wounded. This Island they named Florida, because they arrived there on Easter day, which the Spaniards call the flourishing day of the resurrection. They say also that in this tract they saw xxvi Islands, which Colonus had overpassed, 
xxvi. Islands about Hispaniola & Cuba.  and the same so to lie about Hispaniola and Cuba, as though they warded them from the fury of the Ocean. In many of these they found native gold, of like goodness to that which is found in Granatum. Th'inhabitants also wear many jewels, 
Images of gold.  and have many Images of their domestical gods, made both of gold artificially wrought, and also of wood guilded. Francis Cheregatus brought one of their Idols with him, whereby may be considered of what wit and aptness they are. It is a marvelous thing to see what manner of razors they have, made of certain yellow stones, 
Razors of stone.  clear and transparent like unto crystal, with these they shave and carve, as though they were made of fine steel: When the edges are blunt with long exercise, they sharpen them not with a whetstone, or powder, or any other stone, but temper them only with water. They have also a thousand kinds of instruments or tools, 
Instruments and tools.  and such other things of fine device, which were to long to rehearse. Let us therefore return from whence we have digressed, as to Cozumella, jucatana, 
Lands like unto the earthly paradise.  Coluacana, or Olloa, being all lands lately found, and so rich, fruitful, and pleasant, that they may in manner be compared to the earthly paradise. Therefore, after that it was known to our men of how great moment these tracts were, the Spaniards which inhabited the Island of Cuba, Annunstus being the governor of the Island, furnished a new navy of ten caravels, 
another viage of ten Caravels and five hundred men.  and five hundred men, with two small brigantines, as it were in the stead of light horsemen, or forerunners, whose aid they might use as scouts, to search the ways for danger of rocks and shallow sands or shelves. They shipped also certain horses as five stoned horses, 
Horses and mares.  and xxvi mares, apt for the wars. For their general governor and Admiral of the navy, they elected Fernando Cortesius, 
Fernando Cortesius.  who at that time was the chief ruler of the city of Sanctiago. For under Captains, they appointed Alfons Portucareius, Francis Montegius, Alfons Auila, Aluerado Spatense, john Velasquen, and Diegus Ordassus, They still followed the same wind, from the last angle of Cuba toward the West. assoon as Francis Fernandes of Corduba, and then john Grisalua came within prospect of the Island of Sacrifices (whereof we have made mention before) suddenly a tempest of contrary wind prohibited them to take land, and drove them backward to Cozumella, lying on the East side of jucatana: 
The Island of Cozumella.  this Island hath only one haven, named saint john's port, and hath in it only six towns: also none other water then in wells and cisterns, because it lacketh rivers and springs by reason it is plain, containing only xlv miles in circuit. At the coming of our men, thinhabitants fled to the thick woods, and forsook their towns for fear: Our men entered into their houses, where they found plenty of victuals, and many ornaments pertaining to the furnishing of their houses, as hangings and carpets of divers colours, sheets also of gossampine cotton (which they call Amaccas) and much apparel. They have furthermore innumerable books, 

carpets and sheets.  
Innumerable books.   of the which with many other things sent to our new Emperor, we will speak more largely hereafter. The soldiers wandered about the Island, and viewed all things diligently, keeping themselves still in battle ray, lest they might be suddenly invaded. They found but a few of thinhabitants, and only one woman in their company. By th'interpreters of Cuba, and other which the Spaniards took first from jucatana, they persuaded the woman to call the kings that were absent. They came gladly, and made a league of friendship with our men, whereby they were restored to their houses, and a great part of their stuff. They are circumcised idolaters, and sacrifice children of both kinds to their Zemes, 
Circumcised Idolaters.  which are the Images of their familiar and domestical spirits, which they honour as gods. When I inquired of Alaminus the pilot, also of Francis Montegius, and Portucarerius, from whence they had the children they offered in sacrifice: they answered, 
They Sacrifice Children.  that they bought them in the Islands thereabout, by exchange for gold and other of their trafycke: For in all this so large a space of land, the devilish anxiety for the desire of wicked money, hath not yet oppressed thinhabitants. They say the same also of the Islands lately found, whereof two are named Destam and Sestam, 
The Islands of Destam and Sestam.  whose inhabitants go naked, and for scarcenesss of children, sacrifice dogs, which they nourish aswell for that purpose, as also to eat, as we do Coneys: these dogs are dumb, 
The sacrifice of dogs.  & can not bark, having snouts like unto Foxes. Such as they destinate to eat, they geld while they are whelps, whereby they wax very fat in the space of four months. They reserve all the bitches for increase, and but few dogs. Our men dissuaded them from these superstitions, declaring how they were abominable, 
They are soon persuaded to our religion.  and detested of God. They were soon persuaded, and desired a law which they might follow. Our men therefore declared unto them, that there was only one God, which made heaven and earth, the giver of all good things, being of one incomprehensible substance, under triplicity of person. assoon as they heard these words, they broke their Zemes, and pared, scraped, and washed the pavements and walls of their temples. Our men gave them a painted picture of the blessed virgin, which they placed reverently in their temple, 
This people leaving one kind of Idolatry be taught another.  & about it a cross, to be honoured in the remembrance of God and man, and the salvation of mankind. They erected also an other great cross of wood in the top of the temple, whither they oftentimes resort together to honour the Image of the virgin. the inhabitauntes signified by th'interpreters, that in the Island of jucatana, not far from them, there were seven Christians captives, which in time past were driven thither by tempest. The Island of Cozumella, is only five miles distant from jucatana. The governor Cortesius being advertised hereof, furnished two Caravels with fifty men, 
another voyage  willing them incontinent to direct their voyage thither, & to make search for these men. They took with them three interpreters of Cozumella (whose language agreeth with theirs) with letters to the Christians if any might be found. He further declared unto them, how goodly a matter they should bring to pass, if they could bring away any of them: For he no ways doubted but that by their information, he should be fully certified of the commodities of all those tracts, & the manners of thinhabitants. Thus they departed, with commandment to return within the space of six days. But when they had remained there now viii days, & heard no word of their Cozumellane interpreters, whom they had sent aland with the message and letters, our men returned to Cozumella without them, suspecting that they were either slain, or detained. And where as the whole navy was now determined to departed from Cozumella, but that they were hindered by contrary wind, they suddenly espied toward the west a Canoa coming from jucatana, and in it one of the Christian captives (named Hieronimus Aquillaris) who had lived seven years in that Island: 
Aquillaris vii years captive in the Island of jucatana.  With what joy they embraced the one the other, the chance may declare. They were no less desirous to hear, than he to tell of the misfortune which befell to him and his companions. And here it shall not be greatly from my purpose, briefly to rehearse how the thing chanced. In my Decades I have made mention of a certain noble man named Valdivia, whom the spaniards which inhabited Dariena in the supposed continent of the gulf of Vraba, 
Valdivia.  sent to the Island of Hispaniola to Colonus the Admiral and viceroy, with the residue of the Senate and counsel there (to whom pertaineth the redress and ordering of all things in these new lands) to signify unto them in what extreme necessity and penury they lived. Unhappy Valdivia therefore, taking this matter in hand in an evil hour, 
The shipwreck of Valdivia.  was with a sudden and violent whirl wind driven upon certain quicksands, in the prospect of the Island of jamaica, lying on the South side of Hispaniola and Cuba. These blind and swallowing sands, the Spaniards call vipers, and that by good reason, because in them many ships are entangled, 
The quick sands called vipers.  as the Lisertes are implycate in the tails of the vipers. While the caravel thus wrestled with the water, it was so burst in sunder, that Valdivia with thirty of his fellows could scarcely with much difficulty descend into the ship boat: where without oars, and without sails, they were carried away by the violence of the water. For (as we have said before in our Decades) the seas do run there continually with a violent course toward the West. They wandered thus xiii days, 
The course of the sea toward the West.  not knowing whither they went, nor yet finding any thing to eat. Famine consumed seven of them, which were cast into the sea to feed the fishes. The residue likewise, in manner consumed by famine, and falling from one calamity into an other, were driven to jucatana, and fell into the hands of a cruel king, who slew Valdivia the governor, with certain of his fellows: 
Valdivia is sacrificed to Idols.  and when he had first sacrificed them to his Zemes, shortly after he ate them, with his friends of that conspiracy. For they eat only their enemies & strangers, & do otherwise abstain from man's flesh. In this mean time, while Hieronimus Aquillaris, 
How Aquillaris escaped.  with six of his fellows, were reserved to be sacrificed the third day, they broke their bands, escaped the hands of that cruel Tyrant, and fled to an other king being his enemy, who received them, yet only as bondmen. It is a strange thing to hear of the mother of this Aquillaris: For as soon as she heard that her son was fallen into the hands of the nations that eat man's flesh, she fell mad incontinent: so that whensoever after, she saw any meat roasting at the fire, or only ready spitted to lay to the fire, she ceased not to cry out in this manner, O me most wretched mother, behold the members of my son. But to return to our purpose. When Aquillaris had now received the governors letter, sent by the Cozumellane messengers, he declared to the king his master (whose name was Taxmarus) what was their errand thither, 
King Taxmarus.  and wherefore they were sent: using in the mean time many large discourses, in expressing the great power and magnificence of their king, who had of late arrived in those coasts: also of their humanity and gentleness toward their friends and such as submitted themselves to them, & again their rigour and fierceness against such as stubbornly either contemned them, or denied their requests. With these words he brought Taxmarus into such fear, that the master was now fain to desire his servant so to handle the matter, that they might quietly enter into his dominion as his friends, and not as his enemies. Aquillaris promised in their behalf that they should not only come in peace, but also to aid him against his enemies if need should so require. whereupon he dismissed Aquillaris, & with him three of his familiars and companions. Thus they sailed together from Cozumella to jucatana, to the river which they had found before in the first voyage thither, by the governance of Alaminus the pilot. 
The mouth of a river stopped with sand.  They found the mouth of the river stopped with sand, as we read of the river of Nilus in egypt, when the winds (called Etesti) blow in summer, and especially in the canicular days. Therefore where as they could not enter into the river with the biggest vessels (although it be otherwise apt to receive great ships) the governor caused two hundred men to be set aland with the Brigantines and ship boats, willing Aquillaris to offer peace to thinhabitants. They demanded what our men required. Aquillaris answered, victuals. There was a long space of sand by the side of the town, whither they willed them to resort, promising to bring them victuals thither the day following. Our men went, and they came, according to their promiss, and brought with them eight of their Hens, being as big as Peacocks, of brownyshe colour, 
Turkey Hens.  and not inferior to Peacocks in pleasant taste. They brought also as much bread made of Maizium (which is a grain not much unlike unto panyke) as would scarcely serve ten hungry men, and herewith desired them to departed. But when they perceived that our men made no haste away, immediately there came a great company of armed men toward them, demanding what they had to do thus to wander in other men's lands. Our men made answer by Aquillaris, that they desired peace, victuals, and gold, for exchange of other things. They answered again, that they would neither peace nor war with them, but threatened them to avoid the land, except they would be destroyed every man. Our men said that they would not departed, without sufficient victuals to maintain their soldiers. They appointed the day following to bring them more victuals, but they broke promise: Yet perceiving the second day that our men were encamped on the sand, and had reposed there that night, they brought them as much more victuals, and commanded them in the name of their king to depart. Our men said that they were desirous to see the town, and to have yet more store of victuals. The Barbarians denied their request, and therewith departed, whispering and muttering among themselves. In the mean time our men were still so oppressed with hunger, that they were enforced to seek for meat. The governor therefore sent his under captains to land with a hundred and fifty men. 
A conflict.  As they went dispersed in divers companies about the villages of the country, the Barbarians met with one of their bands, and put them to great distress: But when their fellows, being not far from them, heard the noise of their alarum, they came with all possible haste to their rescue. The governor on the other side, placing his ordinance in the brygantines & ship boats, approached to the shorre, with the residue of his soldiers. The Barbarians likewise, being ready furnished to the battle, came running to the sea side, to disturb them, that they should not come aland, and with their arrows wounded many a far of unprepared. The governor discharged about twenty pieces of ordinance against them: 
The Barbarians ar● put to flight.  With the slaughter and terrible thunder whereof, and with the flame of the fire, and smell of the brimstone, they were so astonished, and put to such fear, that they fled and disparkled like wild beasts: whom our men pursuing, entered into the town, which thinhabitants forsook in manner for fear of their own men, whom they saw so dismayed. On the bank of this river there is a town of such portentous biggnes as I dare not speak, but Alanimus the pilot, saith that it containeth in circuit five hundred miles, and that it consisteth of xxv thousand houses: 
The great town of Potanchana or Victoria. A town of xxv. thousand houses.  Some make it somewhat less, but they all agree that it is exceeding great and notable. The houses are divided with gardens, and are builded of lime and stone, very artificial, and of cunning workmanship. To their hauls, chambers, parlours, or other places of habitation, they ascend by ten or twelve stairs, and have certain spaces between every house: so that it is not lawful for any to lad his neighbours wales with rafters or beams. Their houses are separate one from an other by the space of three houses, and are for the most part covered with reed and thatch, and many also with slate or other stone. The Barbarians themselves confessed that they were that day forty thousand men at the battle, 
Guns and horses.  which were vanquished of a few, by reason of the new and unknown kind of fight with guns and horses. For the governor had unbarked xvi horses, which were also at the battle, and so fiercely assailed the Barbarians on the backhalf, that they broke their array, and scattered them as it had been flocks of sheep, overthrowing, wounding, & killing them on every side: Which thing the silly wretches so imputed to a miracle, that they had not the power to occupy their weapons. For whereas before they had never seen any horses, 
The men and the horse▪ thought to be one beast.  they thought that the man on horseback and the horse had been all one beast, as the antiquity did fable of the monster Centaurus. Our men possessed the town xxii days, where they made good cheer under covert, while the owners of the houses lay under the firmament, and durst not assail our men, who had placed themselves in the stroungest part of the town, where some kept continual watch (lest the Barbarians should suddenly invade them) while other gave themselves to rest and sleep. The inhabitants call this town Potanchana: but our men for the victory which they obtained here, named it Victoria. It is a marvelous thing to consider, the greatness, magnificence, & fineness of the building of certain palaces they have in the country, to the which they resort sometimes for their solace and pastime. 
Palaces of marvelous bygnes and well builded.  These are curiously builded with many pleasant diuises, as galleries, solars turrettes, portals, gutters, with chambers boarded after the manner of our waynescot, and well floored. Four of our Spaniards went into one of them, of such greatness, that they wandered in the same for the space of four hours before they could find the way out. At the length by the interpreters, and certain captives, our men sent for the king, and such rulers as were next under him in authority, willing them to submit themselves, and to come into the town unarmed: giving the messengers further in commandment, to certify them that in their so doing, they would commune with them as concerning conditions of peace, and restore them their town. They came gladly, and entered every man into his own house, upon condition, that they should ever thereafter abstain from such ceremonies and horrible sacrifices of man's flesh, to devils, the mortal enemies to mankind, whose Images they honoured, & to direct the eyes of their minds to Christ our God, the maker of heaven and earth, who was borne into this world of a virgin, 
They receive our religion.  and suffered death on the cross for the redemption of mankind, and finally to profess themselves subjects to the Christian king of Spain. They promised both, and were instructed as far as the shortness of time would permit. Being thus restored, they recompensed our men with many rewards, supposing such men to be sent from heaven, which being so few in number, durst attempt battle against so great a multitude. They gave our men also certain gold, and twenty slaves. Departing therefore from hence, and coasting still along by the same shore, they came again to the gulf which Alaminus the pilot found before under Grisalua. This they named Bian Sancti johannis, that is, Saint john's gulf, for Bian in the Spanish tongue signifieth a gulf. here the inhabitants resorted to them peaceably. About a mile from the shore, was a town of a thousand and five hundred houses situate upon a hill. They proffered our men half the town, 
A town of a thousand and five hundred houses.  if they would dwell with them for ever. This perhaps they did the rather, either fearing the example of the inhabitants of Potanchana, the fame whereof might have come to their ears, or else hoping that under the shadow of such valiant men, they might obtain aid and secure against their enemies and borderers. For (as I have said before) they destroy one an other with continual war, for the desire to enlarge their dominions. Our men refused perpetual habitation, and accepted their friendly proffer for a tyme. As they came aland, the people followed them on every side with bows in their hands, which they held over our men's heads, to defend them from the rain, as though they had walked in a continual arbour. here they encamped. And lest the residue left in the ships should in the mean time wax slothful with Idleness, 
Another voyage of two brigantines and fifty men.  the governor gave commandment to Alaminus the pilot, and Francis Montegius, to search the West parts of that land, while he relieved the wearied soldiers, and healed such as were wounded. To them that went forward on this voyage, he assigned two brigantines with fifty men. Unto this gulf, 
Where the sea runneth swiftly from the East to the West.  the course of the water was gentle enough and moderate: but when they had sailed a little further toward the West, they found the sea running with so swift a course, as if it were a great river falling from the tops of high mountains, insomuch that in a short space of time it carried them fifty miles from their fellows. When they were now entered into this violent stream of water, they saw on their left hand a large plain sea, 
A conflict between the waters coming from the West and from the South.  which met with the course of the other waters falling from the West. And like as two great rivers that run contrary ways, make a vehement conflict where they meet: so seemed the waters coming from the South, to resist these waters, as enemies that had entered into the right or possession of an other: On the contrary part, they saw the land reaching far both on the left hand and on the right. In this strife between the waters, they were so tossed on both sides, and entangled with whirlepoles, that they long wrestled without hope of life. At the length, 
A dangerous and painful viage.  with much difficulty turning the stems or forpartes of their ships against the stream from whence they came, and labouring all that they might with their oars and sails, they could scarcely overcome the rage of the water, insomuch that were as they thought that they had in one night sailed two miles, they found that they were driven back four miles: Yet at the length with gods help, they overcame this daungerours conflict. They spent xxii. days in this little space of sea: And when they were now returned to their fellows, 
The land of Coluacana.  declared unto them that that end was the land of Coluacana, which they adjudged to be part of the supposed continent. The land which they saw a far of before their face, 
The land of Baccalaos o● Baccalearum.  they suppose either to be annexed to our continent▪ or to be joined to the large North regions called Baccalaos, whereof we have made mention in our Decades, in the voyage of Sebastian Cabote. This matter is yet doubtful: but we trust it shall once be better known. While Alaminus and Montegius searched these secrets, the king of the province (whose name was Multoxumam) sent our men, by one of his chief officers (being also his lieutenant of the said town) many rich and goodly presents of gold, silver, and precious stones, 
Rich presents of gold and precious stones.  set and wrought after a marvelous strange device, and with no less cunning woorkemanshyp. here they determined to send messengers to our new Emperor, to know his pleasure, that they might in this province plant a new colony or habitation: and this did they without the advise of Diegus Velasquen the governor of the Island of Cuba, or Fernandina, who first sent them forth, with commandment to return again after they had searched these regions, and obtained plenty of gold. While they consulted hereof, they were of divers opinions: but the most part alleged that in this case it was not requisite to make the governor of their counsel, forasmuch as the matter should be referred to a higher judge, as to the king of Spain himself. When they were thus agreed, they received victuals of the gentle king of the province, 
A new colony.  and assigned the place of their colony twelve miles from the said town, in a fruitful & wholesome soil. For their general governor, they elected Cortesius the governor of the navy, against his will as some say. For other magistrates to govern the city which they intended to build, 
This Cortesius hath written a book of these things.  he chose Portucarerius and Montegius, of whom we have made mention before: They chose also certain messengers to send to the king by the conduction of Alaminus the pilot: Furthermore, four of the princes of this province, offered themselves willingly to go with our men into Spain, to th'intent to see our lands, and that king whose power is so great, and whose authority reacheth so far: They brought likewise two women with them, which served and obeyed them in all things, after the manner of their country. The people of this nation is of brown or yelowyshe colour. Both the men and the women have pendants of gold & precious stones hanging at their ears: The men also bore their neither lips full of holes, from the uppermost part of the lip, 
They wear rings and plates at their lips.  even unto the nethermost part of the gum. At these they hang certain rings, and plates of gold and silver, fastened to a small and thin plate, lying within between the lip & the gum. At the biggest hole in the midst of the lip, there hangeth a round plate of silver, as broad as the coin called a Carolyne, & as thick as a man's finger. I do not remember that ever I saw any thing that seemed more filthy in mine eye: 
The divers fantasies of men.  Yet do they think that there is nothing more comely under the circle of the moon, whereby we may see how vainly mankind wandereth in his own blindness. The Ethiopian thinketh the black colour to be fairer than the white, and the white man thinketh otherwise. They that are pulled, think that more decent then to wear a bush, and they that wear beards, judge it a deformity to be shaven. As appetite therefore moveth, and not as reason persuadeth, men run after vanities, and every province is ruled by their own sense, as writeth saint Jerome. From whence they have their gold, we have spoken sufficiently before. But as our men marveled where they had their silver, they showed them certain high mountains, 
Silver.  which are continually covered with snow, saving that at certain times of the year the only tops are seen bare, because the snow is there molten, by reason of the thick and warm clouds. The plains therefore, or mild, soft, & pleasant mountains, seem to bring forth gold, and the rough craggy mountains with their cold valleys, are the places where silver is engendered. They have also Laton, 

Note where gold and silver are engendered.  
I think this Laton to be some kind of pure Copper, or else Copper that holdeth gold. For Laton is an artificial metal, and hath no natural mine.  
Their books.   whereof they make such Mases and Hammers as are used in the wars, dygging Mattocks also, and Spades: for they have neither Iron nor steel. But let us now speak of the presents sent into Spain to the king: and first of the books. These procurators therefore of the new colony of the province of Coluacana, among other their presents, brought also a great number of books, the leaves whereof are made of the inner rinds or barks of trees, thinner than either that of the Elm or of the sallow: these they smear or anoint with the pitch of molten Bitumem, and while they be soft, extend them to what form them listeth: When they be cold and hard, they rub them over with a certain plaster. It is to be thought, that they beat the plaster into fine flower, and so temperyng it with some binding moisture, to make a crust therewith upon the leaves, whereon they write with any sharp instrument, and blot the same again with a sponge or some such other thing, as merchant men and noble men's stewards are accustomed to do with their writing tables made of the wood of fig trees. The leaves of their books are not set in order after the manner of ours, but are extended many cubits in length. The matters which they writ, are contained in square tables, not lose, but so bound together with the tough & flexible clay called Bitumem, that they seem like wooden tables which had been under the hands of cunning Bookbynders. Which way so ever the book lieth open, there are two leaves seen, and two sides written, with as many lying under them, except the book be unfolded in length, For under one leaf there are many leaves joined together. The forms of their letters are nothing like unto ours, but are much more crooked and entangled, like unto fyshhookes, 
Their letters.  knots, snares, stars, files, dice, and such other, much like unto the Egyptian letters, and written in lines like unto ours. here and there between the lines, are pictured the shapes of men, and divers beasts, and especially the Images of kings, and other noble men: Whereby it is to be thought, that in such books, the facts of their kings are contained, 
What is contained in their books.  as we see the like among us, how our printers express the sum of histories in pictures, that men may thereby be the more alured to buy such books. The coverings of their books are also artificially wrought, and painted. When they are shut, they seem to differ nothing from ours in form. In these books are furthermore comprehended their laws, rites of ceremonies and sacrifices, annotations of Astronomy, accounts, computations of times, with the manner of graffing, sowing, and other things pertaining to husbandry. They begin the year from the going down of the seven stars, called Vergiliae, or Pleiades, and count their months according to the moans. They name a month, Tona, of the Moon, for in their language they call the Moon Tona. They reckon the days by the sons: therefore as many days as they name, they say, so many sons, the Son in their tongue, is called Tonatico. They distribute the year (without any reason why) into twenty months, 
Temples richly adorned.  and the month into as many days. The temples which they frequent, they adorn with golden hangings, and other ornaments of gold and silver, with precious stones intermyxt. At the spring of the day, they perfume their temples with frankincense, and make their prayers before they take in hand any other business. 
Prayer.  But oh horrible cruelty: for the inhabitants of all these tracts also, do sacrifice children to their Idols, in like manner as we have said before. At such time as the seeds lie in the ground, 
They sacrifice children and captives.  and when the corn beginneth to show forth the ear, they destinate to their Zemes such bondmen as they have bought, or such captives as they have taken in the wars, which they sacrifice after that they have made them great cheer, and decked them in precious apparel. Also before they sacrifice these poor wretches, they lead them about the town, while all the people salute them humbly and reverently, 
A wrong way to heaven.  affirming that in short space they shallbe received into the company of the gods. They honour their Zemes, with an other sharp kind of devotion: for they let themselves blood, either in the tongue, 
Bloody gods.  lips, ears, legs, thighs, or breast, which they take in their hands, and hurl it up towards heaven, so that with the fall thereof the pavement of the temple is all sparkled with blood, whereby they think that their gods are well pleased. 
Villa Ricca.  From the new colony (called Villa Ricca) niene miles distant, there is a town of xu thousand houses, which thinhabitants call Cemobal, but our men named it Sivilla. The king of this town had five men which he reserved to be sacrificed, whom when our men would have delivered, 
Sivilla Nova.  the king made humble request to them, saying that if they took away such men as he had consecrated to be offered to the gods, they should bring utter destruction to him and all his kingdom: For if our sacrifices (said he) do cease, 
The force of an old error.  our Zemes will take such displeasure with us, that they will suffer our corn, graffs, and fruits, to be consumed of worms, scorched with drought, destroyed with floods, or blasted with lightening. Our men perceiving his earnestness herein, thought it best to choose the least evil, perceiving that it was yet no time to disquiet their minds, and therefore suffered them to exercise their accustomed ceremonies. And although their priests promise them immortal glory, eternal felicity, and perpetual conversation with the gods after the stormy days of this life, yet do they with heavy countenances give ear to their promises, and had rather be set at liberty. Their priests are named Quines, in the plural number, 
Their priests live chaste.  and Quin in the singular: they lead a pure and chaste life, and are honoured of the people with fear and reverence. They make faggots of the bones of their enemies which they have taken in the wars, 
Faggotes of bones.  and hang up the same at the feet of their Zemes, as tokens of the victories obtained by their favour. To these they add certain titles and superscriptions, as testimonies of the same. This is strange and worthy to be noted, that when their children are a year old, the priests in their temples with devout ceremonies and murmuring words, power water in form of a cross upon their heads with a cruet, 
A figure of baptism.  whereby they seem to baptize them: Neither do they, as the jews and Turks, think their temples polluted if any of a strange religion be present at their sacrifices and other solemnities. We have now spoken sufficiently of their books, temples, and superstitions: 

The presents sent into Spain to the king.  
Two Images of gold and silver.   Let us now therefore come to the other presents which were brought to the king. Among these, there were two broad and round plates (which some have named the Images of the Sun and Moon) the one of silver, and the other of gold, in largeness and roundness much like to the stones of handemylles: yet but thin, and in manner both of one circumference, that is xxviii spans in circuit. That of gold is of the weight of three thousand and viii. hundred Castellanes, where as we have said before that a Castellane is a coin of gold which weigheth more than a Ducat by a trient, that is, the third part of a pound. In the centre of this, was the Image of a king of half a cubit long, sitting in a throne, and appareled to the knee like unto a mammet, with such countenance as our painters are wont to paint fairies or spirits: about the Image, were the shapes of trees and flowers, so that it seemed to sit as though it had been in a field. The other of silver, was made to the same similitude, being also in manner of the same weight, and both of pure metal. They brought likewise certain grains of rude gold (that is, such as was never mo●ten) about the bigness of fitches, or the pulse called Lintels, in token of plenty of native gold: Also two chains of gold, 
Two chains of gold marvelously beset with precious stones and jewels.  whereof the one contained viii links, in the which were set two hundred, threescore, and two fair and clear red stones, and yet no rubies, furthermore a hundred fourscore and three green stones, and yet no emeralds: Nevertheless, these are in like estimation with them, as the other are with us. At the edge of this chain, there hang xxvii golden bells, having between every of them four jewels of precious stones enclosed in gold, at every of the which in like manner hang certain spangles of gold. The other chain consisteth only of four golden links, beset round about with a hundred and two red stones, and a hundred threescore & twelve green stones, with xxvi golden bells, curiously wrought and placed in comely order. In the very midst of the chain, are ten great precious stones enclosed in gold, at the which also hang a hundred golden pendants, of cunning woorkemanshyppe. They brought furthermore twelve pair of leather buskynnes of divers colours, 
Buskyns.  some embroidered with gold, and some with silver, with plates and jewels of gold and precious stones enclosed, and at every of them certain golden bells: Also certain miters, 
miters.  beset with precious stones of divers colours, among the which some are blue like unto sapphires. Of crests, girdles, and fans made of feathers, I wots not what I should lay: but surely, if ever the wits and inventions of men have deserved honour or commendation in such arts, 
How can we then call them beastly or Barbarous?  these seem most worthy to be had in admiration. I do not marvel at gold and precious stones, but am in manner astonished to see the woorkemanshyp excel the substance: For I have with wondering eyes beheld a thousand forms and similitudes, of the which I am not able to write, 
If they had changed their gold for our Iron▪ they had not so soon been subdued.  and in my judgement I never saw any thing whose beauty might so allure the eyes of men. As they marveled at the natural beauty of the feathers of our peacocks and pheasants, so did we no less marvel at the artificial beauty of such things as they make of feathers and quills, impaled with gold: For I saw in many of their works, all manner of native colours, even in the quills, 
quills.  whereof they make such instruments. They brought also two helmets, 
Helmets.  garnished with precious stones of a whitish blue colour: One of these is edged with bells and plates of gold, and under every bell two knobs of gold: the other, beside the stones wherewith it is covered, is likewise edged with xxv golden bells and knobs, and hath on the crest a green bird, 
A bird.  with the feet, bill, and eyes, of gold: Also four spears, much like unto trout spears, or ye'll spears, the wood whereof is all covered with quills of divers colours, 
Spears.  marvelously wreathed with golden wires, and plates intermyxte: Every of these spears have three pikes, whose edges or teeth are all of precious stones, made fast with wires of gold. Of like workmanship they brought a great sceptre, 
A sceptre.  beset with precious stones & bells of gold: also a braselet of gold, and shoes made of a Hearts skin, sowed and embroidered with golden wires, 
A braselet. Shoes.  with a whi●e sole beneath: Furthermore a glass of a bright blue stone, 
Glasses.  and an other of white, both enclosed in gold: Likewise a precious stone, of the kind of them that are called Sphinxes, enclosed in gold: Furthermore the head of a great Lisarte, two great shells, two Ducks, the shapes of divers other birds, fowls, and fishes, 

B●●ds, fowls, and fishes, of gold.  
A crown of gold.   and all of massy gold: Furthermore xxiiii round and square targets, shields, and bucklers of gold, and five of silver: Also a triple crown of plates and wires o● gold, marvelously wreathed with quills and ●eathers of divers colours, having on the front a plate of gold, on the which is graven the Image of the Idol Zemes. About this Image, hang four other plates, like crosses of gold, in the which are graven the heads of divers beasts, as Lions, Tigers, Wolves, and such other. They brought also the similitudes of certain beasts, made some of rods or twigs, 
Images of beasts.  and some of wood, with the beasts own skins thereon, and garnished with collars of laton bells: Likewise divers sheets, weaved of gossampyne cotton of sundry colours, 
Sheets.  whereof two are richly frynged with gold and precious stones, and three other with quills and feathers intermyxte with gossampine cotton of sundry colours, and chequered like the panes of a chest board: Some are on the one side, of black, white, and red colours, and on the other side plain, without any variety: Other some are wrought in like manner with variable colours, with a wheel or circle of black in the midst, intermyxte with shining feathers, and sparks of gold like stars: They brought also cloth of Aras or Uerdure, of marvelous workmanship: 
Cloth of Arras  Likewise a soldiers cloak, such as their princes wear in the wars, with certain privy coats of fence, 
A soldiers cloak.  and sundry tirements pertaining to their heads, with also many such other things, more beautiful to the eye then rich or precious, whereof to entreat particularly, it should be more tedious than profitable. I let pass here also to speak of many particular navigations, and of the travails and dangers which they sustained in the same, with the monsters and secrets of nature they saw, which are all contained in the registers of our Senate of the affairs of India, 
Registers of th'affairs of India.  out of the which I have selected these few annotations, such as seemed to me most meet to be published. notwithstanding these rich and goodly presents, yet were they that brought them, and also Coriesius the governor of the navy, and author of erecting their new colony in those remote regions, adjudged by the Senate to have done against right and equity, 
Thauthority of the lieutenant.  in that they attempted the same without thadvice of the governor of the Island of Cuba, who sent them forth by the kings authority, whereas they did other things beside their commission, yea although they went to the king, not first knowing his pleasure whom the king had substitute his lieutenant in that Island: insomuch that by his procurator, he accused them before the Senate as fugitive thieves and traitors. They on the other part alleged, that they had done the king better service than he, & that they had showed sufficient obedience, in appea●yng to the king as the higher judge. But the governor required by the virtue of his commission, & the kings letters patents, that they might be beheaded for their disobedience against him, whom they knew to be authorized by the king. They again replied, that they had not offended the king, but rather deserved reward for their great dangers and travails. Both the reward and punishment were deferred, and a day appointed when both parties should be heard. Let us now therefore come to the spaniards of Dariena, 
The spaniards of Dariena.  th'inhabitors of the gulf of Vraba, in the supposed continent. We have said before, that Dariena is a river running toward the West side of the gulf of Vraba: On the bank of this river, the spaniards planted their first colony or habitation, after they had vanquished king Chemaccus: this colony they named Sancta Maria Antiqua, by reason of a vow which they made to the virgin Marie in the time of the battle against Chemaccus. 
Sansta Maria Antiqua.  To these (as we have made mention in the end of our Decades) was Petrus Arias sent with a thousand and two hundred men, 

Petrus Arias whom the spaniards name Pediarias.  
This sea the spaniards call Mardelser.   at the request of Vaschus Nunnez Balboa, who was then the governor of Dariena, and the first that found and discovered the large South sea heretofore unknown. We have also declared, how at the arrival of Petrus Arias the new governor, he divided his army into Centurions, that is, captains over hundreds, whom he sent forth divers ways. What tragedies followed hereof, I will absolve in few words, because all are horrible and unpleasant: For since we finished our Decades, there hath been none other than killing, sleying, murdering, and accusing. The king made Vaschus governor but during his pleasure. His courage was such, 
Contention between Vaschus and Petrus Arias.  and his facts so notorious, that he could not long abide the hautynes of Petrus Arias. To be brief, their falling out and discord, confounded all things. john Cacedus the pulpit friar of the order of saint Frances, did his uttermost endeavour to make them friends, promising unto Vaschus, the daughter of Petrus Arias to wife: But no means could be found how these two, which bore the chief rule, might be brought to agreement. At the length the matter grew to such extremity, that Petrus Arias finding occasion of quarrelling against Vaschus, 
Petrus Arias commandeth that Vaschus be put to death.  sent process to the magistrates of the town, whereby he commanded them to strangle Vaschus, and five other which were chief captains under him, alleging that they and their confederates conspired to rebel in the South sea, and that Vaschus himself for that intent had builded and furnished four ships, to search the south coasts of the supposed continent: also, that to his three hundred soldiers and companions which he had with him, he should speak words of this effect as followeth. My friends, and fellows of my long pains and travails, 
Vaschus is accused.  how long shall we be subject to the commandment of other, sith we have bidden the brunt, and overcome th'enterprise for the which this new governor was sent with so great a multitude? Who can any longer abide his pride and insolency? Let us therefore follow these coasts whither so ever fortune shall drive us, and among these so many pleasant and fruitful provinces of this large land, let us choose one, in the which we may with liberty spend that portion of our lives which yet remaineth. Who can find us, or shallbe able to proffer us violence? When these or the like words were declared to Petrus Arias, he sent to the South parts for Vaschus, willing him by the virtue of his commission to repair to him forthwith. Vaschus obeyed, and at his coming was cast in prison: yet constantly denying that ever he intended any such thing. Witnesses were brought against him, and his words rehearsed from the beginning: To conclude, he was judged worthy death, and was put to execution. 
Vaschus is put to death.  And this is the reward wherewith the blind goddess oftentimes recompenseth such as have sustained great travails and dangers, to be highly in her favour. Petrus Arias leaving his wife in Dariena, 
Petrus Arias.  embarked himself in the ships left of Vaschus, to th'intent to search those coasts: But whether he be returned or not, we have yet no certain knowledge. He hath also his fortune. Yet is there an other governor assigned, 
Lupus Sosa.  whose name is Lupus Sosa, the viceroy of the Islands of Canary. What stomach Petrus Arias may have if he return, let good men judge. There was nothing done under him worthy glory. Some think that he was at the beginning to slack and negligent in his office, and not severe in correcting errors and misorders. But we will leave him, and rehearse somewhat whereof we have been lately informed, as touching the great and deep river of Dabaiba, 
The great river of Dabaiba or Grandis.  the which for the greatness and largeness thereof, our men named Grandis, that is, great, as we have noted in our Decades. This river falleth into the furthest corner of the gulf of Vraba by seven ports or mouths, as doth the river of Nilus into the Egyptian sea, 
The gulf of Vraba.  whose large description you may also read in our Decades. That the mountains on every side about this river are rich in gold, we have learned by th'information of thinhabitants, 
The rich mountains of Dabaiba.  of whom we made diligent inquisition. Vaschus, and beside him other governors and lieutenants, have fouretymes entered into this river with their armies in battle array, and with divers kinds of ships, first for the space of forty miles, then fifty, and at the last fourscore, and at an other time also overthwart the river. Oh shameful chance, and detestable cowardness of our men. 
Fierce & waclyke people.  A naked nation encountering with them that had apparel, the armed against the unarmed, had the overthrow in manner in all conflicts, and were either all slain or wounded. They use envenomed arrows, and are such expert archers, that if they espy any place of their enemy bare or unarmed, they will not lightly fail to strike him there. They use also many darts, 
Darts.  which in the time of the battle they hurl so thick a far of, that they take the light of the sun from their enemies as it were with a cloud. They have likewise broad & long swords, 
Swords of heavy wood.  made of a heavy and hard kind of wood, wherewith they fight fiercely near at hand. Vaschus himself received many wounds in encountering with them. And thus by reason of the fierceness of these Barbarians, the river of Dabaiba is yet left unsearched. We will now speak somewhat more of the Island of Hispaniola (which the spaniards call Spagnuola) the mother and chief of all other lands or islands whereof we intended to write. In it the Senate is now restored, 
Hispaniola. Ouiedus writeth that there are now five monasteries.  and five judges assigned to give laws to all thinhabitants of those tracts. But in short time, they shall cease gathering of gold, although there be great plenty, by reason they shall lack labourers and miners, forasmuch as thinhabitants whose help they used herein, are brought to a small number, consumed partly by war, and many more by famine that year that they digged up the roots whereof they made their best bread, and left of sowing their grain of Maizium, which is their common food, supposing hereby to have driven our men out of the Island, who had victuals sent them from Spain. 
New and strange diseases.  A great number of them also died of new and strange diseases, which in the year of Christ a thousand five hundred and eightiene, consumed them like rotten sheep. And (to say the truth) our men's unsatiable desire of gold, so oppressed these poor wretches with extreme labour and toil, where as before they lived pleasantly and at liberty, given only to plays and pastimes, as dancing, fishing, fouling, and hunting of little Coneys, that many of them perished even for very anguish of mind, the which (with their unaccustomed labour) are things of themselves sufficient to engender many new diseases. But the king and the Senate have now determined, that they be reduced to a people, and to give themselves only to increase, and tillage of the ground: and that only such as are bought or taken out of other regions, be appointed to labour in the gold mines. But it shall suffice to have said thus much of the pestiferous hunger of gold: therefore I will speak of other matters. It is a marvelous thing to consider how all things increase and prosper in this Island. 
The sugar of Hispaniola.  There are now xxviii sugar presses, wherewith great plenty of sugar is made. The canes or reeds wherein the sugar groweth, are bigger and higher than in any other place, and are as big as a man's arm in the brawn, and higher than the stature of a man, by the half. This is more wonderful, that where as in Valentia in Spain (where a great quantity of sugar is made yearly) where so ever they apply themselves to the great increase thereof, 
Sugar of Valentia.  yet doth every root bring forth not past five, or six, o● at the most seven of those reeds: 
A token of marvelous fruitfulness.  whereas in Hispaniola o●e root beareth twenty, and oftentimes thirty. Four footed beasts and cattle, are marvelously increased in this Island. And albeit that the ravening hunger of gold hath hitherto greatly hindered our men from tillage of the ground, yet is there great plenty of wheat, which prospereth so well, that it yieldeth some time a hundred fold, 
Wheat.  and this especially on the hills or ridge's of the mountains prospecting toward the North: Uines do also increase here with no less fruitfulness. 
Vines.  What should I speak of the trees that bear Cassia fistula, 
Cassia Fistula.  brought first into this Island from the other Islands near unto the supposed Continent, as we have noted in our Decades? There is now such plenty hereof, that after a few years we shall have a pound of the price that we pay now for an ounce. Of the Brasyle, and Mirobalane trees, with other innumerable prerogatives and benefits which nature hath plentifully given to this blessed Island, 
Brasyle. Myrobalanes.  we have spoken sufficiently in our Decades. Yet have I thought good to repeat part of the same, because I think that the wits of many readers have diverted from the weight of great affairs, to the recordation of such pleasant things: And yet do not such things as are savoury, engender tediousness, so that a precious matter be adjourned with a precious vesture.   


A brief rehearsal of the contents of the books of the first Decade, and so following of all the other Decades. Folio. 8.  

IN the first book is declared how Christophorus Colonus, otherwise called Columbus, persuaded Fernando and Elizabeth princes of Spain, to further his attempt in searching new and unknown lands in the West Ocean. Also of the vii Islands of Canaria, by whom they were found and conquered.  
How Colonus found the Islands of Hispaniola, and Cuba, and of the fierce people called Canibales or Caribes, which are accustomed to eat man's flesh.  
Of the roots called Ages, jucca, and the grain Maizìum, whereof the people of the Islands made their bread.  
Of the gold found in the sands of rivers, & of the Serpents which are without hurt: also of turtle doves, ducks, & popingays.  
Of Mastix, and Aloe, with divers fruits and trees unknown to us, and of the fruitfulness of the Island of Hispaniola, which the spaniards call Spagnuola.  
Of the second voyage of Colonus into these regions, and how he was furnished with xvii ships, and a thousand and two hundred soldiers, with all kind of artillery, artificers, and grain to sow: and of the tree from the which water droppeth continually into a trench made by man's hand.   

The contents of the second book. Fol. 12.  
How Colonus departing from the Islands of Canary, sailed viii. hundred & twenty leagues in xxi days, &, came to Dominica an Island of the Canibales: & of the fragrant savour of spices which proceeded from the Islands.  
Of the Islands of Galanta or Galana and Guadalupea, and of the trees which bear that kind of cotton which the Italians call Bombasine, and the spaniards Algadon.  
Of divers kinds of popinjays, and of the Island of Matinino or Madanino, being inhabited only with women: also of divers other fruitful Islands, and of a conflict which the spaniards had with the Canibales.  
Of certain Islands in the which are seen the mines of metals and precious stones, and of the fruitful and populous Island called Burichena, or Boriquen, or Insula. S. johannis.  
How all the Admiral's men which at his first voyage he left in Hispaniola, were slain in his absence by the rebellion of Guaccanarillus, king of the region of Xamana: and of the free kind of life which they lead that have not the use of money.  
Of the seven maidens which swum three miles in the sea, and of the manner of gathering of gold in the sands of rivers.   

The contents of the third book. Fol. 17.  
A Particular description of the Island of Hispaniola, which Colonus thinketh to be Ophir, from whence king Solomon had his great riches of gold.  
Of the marvelous fruitfulness of Hispaniola, and of the sugar canes growing there.  
Of the golden regions of Cipanga or Cibava, & of the rivers in whose sands is found great plenty of gold.  
Of certain grains of gold of exceeding great quantity.  
Of wild vines of pleasant taste, and of grass which in four days groweth as high as wheat.  
Of the Island of johanna or Cuba, being the end of the East and the West, and of the fruitful & populous Island of jamaica.  
How the Admiral thought that he had sailed about the lowest Hemisphere or half circle of the earth, and of a secret of Astronomy touching the same matter.  
How the Admiral gave names to seven hundred Islands, and passed by three thousand unnamed.  
Of certain serpents like unto Crocodiles of eight foot long, whose flesh is delicate to be eaten, and of certain trees which bear Gourds.  
Of the river whose water is very hot, and of the hunting fish which taketh other fishes.  
Of great abundance of Tortoises as big as targets, and of a fruitful mountain well inhabited.  
Of dogs of deformed shape and dumb, and of white and thick water.  
Of woods of Date trees, and pineapple trees, and of certain people appareled like white friars.  
Of certain trees which bear spices, and of Cranes of exceeding bigness.  
Of stock doves of more pleasant taste then partridges.  
An oration of a barbarous governor as touching the immortality of the soul: Also of the reward of virtue, and punishment of vice.  
A similitude of the golden world, and of provision without care.  
How the Admiral fell sick by reason of to much watcheing, and of a sedition which rose among the Spaniards in the Island of Hispaniola.   

The Contents of the fourth book. Fol. 25.  
HOw the Kings of the Island of Hispaniola, were by the Spaniards mysbehaviour provoked to rebellion, and how the Admiral sent for them.  
How king Counaboa the Lord of the house of gold, that is, of the mountains of Cibava, conspired the Admiral's death, and how he with his family were taken prisoners.  
Of a great famine that chanced in the Island of Hispaniola, and how the Admiral builded certain fortresses.  
Of a piece of rude gold weighing twenty ounces, and of the mine of the rich metal called Elestrum.  
Of the mountain in the which is found great plenty of Amber and Orpement: and of the woods of Brasyle trees.  
How the inhabitants are put to their tribute, and how the nature of the Region disposeth the manners of the people.  
How the brother of king Caunaboa came against the Admiral with an army of five thousand naked men, and how he was taken, and his army put to flight.  
Of the fruitful vale Magona, in the sands of whose rivers is found great plenty of gold: and of certain whirlwinds and tempests.  
How the Admiral sent forth his brother Bartholomeus Colonus with an army of men to search the gold mines, and of the Fosses which he found to have been digged in old tyme.   

The Contents of the .v. book. Fol. 27. for 29.  
How the lieutenant builded a fortress in the gold mines, and prepared instruments for the purging and fining of the gold.  
How certain ships laden with victuals, came from Spain: And how the lieutenant sent the kings which rebelled, with three hundred captives into Spain.  
How the lieutenant removed his habitation, and builded a fortress which he called saint Dominickes tower, also how he passed over the river Naiba, and entered into the woods of Brasyle trees.  
How the great king Beuchius Anacauchoa, friendly entertained the lieutenant, and brought him to his palace, where the kings wives and concubines received him honourably with pomps and triumphs.  
Of the fortresses which were erected in Hispaniola, and how the lieutenant exacted tribute of the kings which rebelled again.  
How the lieutenant set upon the kings unwares in the night season, and took xiiii of them prisoners.  
How king Guarionexius, captain of the conspiracy, was pardoned, and how he persuaded the people to obedience.  
How king Beuchius Anacauchoa, sent messengers to the lieutenant to repair to his palace, where he found xxxii kings ready with their tributes: And how the queen Anacaona enticed him to eat of the Serpent's flesh.  
How the Serpent's flesh is prepared to be eaten, and how delicate meat their eggs are if they be sodden.  
How queen Anacauchoa, sister to king Beuchius Anacauchoa, entertained the Lieutenant, & gave him much household stuff, and many vessels of Hebene wodd artifically wrought & carved  
How king Anacauchoa and the queen his sister went aboard the Lievetenantes' ship, and how greatly they were amazed to behold the furniture thereof.  
How Roldanus Xeminus a spaniard, rebelled in the lieutenants absence, by whose mysdemeanour also king Guarionexius was provoked to a new conspiracy, and with him Maiobanexius the king of the mountains.   

The contents of the sixth book. Foli. 35.  
THe third voyage of Colonus, & how he diverted from his accustomed race by the Islands of Canary to the Island of Madera, for fear of certain french pirates and rotters.  
Of the xiii Islands which in old time were called Hesperides, and are now called the Islands of Caput Viride, or Caboverde. Also of the Tortoises of the Island of Bonavista, wherewith the leper is healed.  
How the Admiral found contagious air and extreme heat near the Equinoctial, where the north pole was elevate only five degrees, and how sailing from thence westward, he found the stars placed in other order, and the sea rising as it were the back of a mountain.  
How the Admiral sailing westward, and never passing out of the clime or parallels of Ethiope, found a temperate Region, and people of goodly corporature: and what difference is between the natures of Regions being under one parallel and one elevation of the pole.  
Of the Islands of Puta and Margarita, and of the swift course or fall of the Ocean from the East to the West.  
Of the gulf called Os Draconis, and of the conflict between the fresh water and the salt.  
Of a sea of fresh water, and a mountain inhabited only with Monkeys and Marmasettes.  
Of the fair, rich, and large region of Paria, and how friendly thinhabitants entreated the Admiral and his men.  
Also of pleasant wine made of divers fruits, and of great abundance of pearls and gold.  
Of the regions of Cumana, Manacapana, & Curiana, being regions of the large province of Paria, & of the sea of herbs or weeds.  
A certain secret as touching the pole stars, and the elevation of the same, also of the roundness of the earth.  
Of the mountains of Paria, in the tops whereof Colonus earnestly affirmeth the earthly paradise to be situate, and whether Paria be part of the firm land or continent of India.   

The contents of the vii book. Fol. 39  
How Roldanus Xeminus with his confederates, accused the Admiral to the king, and how he purged himself, and accused them.  
How king Guarionexius rebelled again, and with him king Maiobannexius: also how they with other kings came against the lieutenant with an army of eight thousand naked and painted ciguavians: also two rare examples of friendship and faithfulness in barbarous princes.  
How Colonus the Admiral and the Lieutenant his brother were sent bound into Spain, and new officers appointed in their places.   

The contents of the eight book. Fol. 43.  
THe navigation of Petrus Alphonsus from Spain to Paria, where in the region of Curiana, he had in short space xu ounces of pearls, & great plenty of victuals, for hawks bells, pings, looking glasses, and such other trifles.  
Of certain conjectures whereby Paria is thought to be part of the firm land, & of the golden region of Cauchieta, where in the month of November the air is temperate and not cold.  
How Alphonsus had a conflict with the Canibales, and how they are accustomed to invade other countries.  
Of great abundance of salt in the region of Haraia, and how the dead bodies of their princes are dried, reserved, and religiously honoured.  
How Alphonsus at his return to Spain from Curiana, brought with him threescore & sixteen pound weight of pearls, which he bought for our trifles, amounting only to the value of five shillings.   

The contents of the nienth book. Fol. 47.  
THe navigation of Vincentius Pinzonus and Aries Pinzonus, and how they sailed beyond the Equinoctial line, lost the sight of the north star, and found the stars in other order.  
How Vincentius passing the Equinoctial toward the South pole, found fierce and warlike people of great stature, and of the sea of fresh water.  
How Vincentius directing his course toward the Northwest from the Equinoctial, recovered the sight of the North-pole, and by the regions of Mariatambal, Camomorus, and Pericora, came to the fair and rich province of Paria, and to the regions of Os draconis, Cumana, Manacapana, Curiana. etc.  
A conjecture that Paria (whereby is meant that main land now called America) should be part of the firm land or continent of India, beyond the river of Ganges & no Island, and of the exceeding great river Maragnonus replenished with Islands.  
Of Boriostomea and Spiriostomea, the mouths of the famous river of Dunabius called in old time Ister, and of the commodities of the regions and Islands about Paria: also of the woods of Brasile trees.  
Of many fruitful Islands wasted and left desolate by reason of the Canibales cruelty, and of the trees of Cassia Fistula: also of other trees of exceeding bigness.  
The description of a certain monstrous beast, and how Vincentius lost two of his ships by tempest.  
How Vincentius at his return to Spain, brought with him Cinamome, Ginger, and certain precious stones called Topases: And of the navigations of certain other inhabitants of the town of Palos.  
Of the precious medicine called Animae Album, and of the divers superstitions of the inhabitants of Hispniola: also of their Idolatry, and how they honour the Images of devils, which they call Zemes.   

The Contents of the tenth book. Fol. 54.  
OF great plenty of gold, pearls, and frankincense, found in the regions of Paria, and of innumerable beasts in shape differing from ours.  
How the Spaniards proffered themselves to conquer the new found lands, being in largeness thrice as great as Europe, beside the South lands pertaining to the Portugese's, and how the nature of the place altereth the forms and qualities of things.  
Of the Island of Cuba, and of the gold mines of the Island of Sancti johannis, otherwise called Burichena, or Buchena. Also of the rich gold mines of Hispaniola, and of the order of working in the same.  
Of the two chief gold mines of Hispaniola, and of a piece of gold weighing three thousand three hundred and ten pound weight.  
How the gold is fined and distributed▪ and how that only in the melting shops of the two golden mines of Hispaniola, is melted yearly above three hundred thousand pound weight of gold.  
How thenterprises of the spaniards are not inferior to th'acts of Saturnus or Hercules, and how the Admiral discovered the land over against the West corner of Cuba, and the Island of Guanassa.    

The Contents of the books of the second Decade.  

The contents of the first book. Fol. 57  
HOw after the death of Colonus the Admiral, the king gave free licence to all such as would attempt any voyages, and of the navigations of Diego Nicuesa, and Alphonsus Fogeda.  
Of the Island Codego and the region of Caramairi, and of certain sweet apples which turn into worms when they are eaten, whose trees are also contagious.  
How Alphonsus Fogeda, the lieutenant of Vraba, encountering with the Barbarians, had the overthrow, and how in this conflict fifty of his men were slain, with johannes de la Cossa their captain.  
How Fogeda, and Nicuesa the lieutenant of Beragua, revenged the death of their companions, and how Fogeda came to the Island Fortis and the region of Caribana, where he was repulsed from the gold mines by the fierceness of the Barbarians, using arrows infected with poison.  
How Fogeda was wounded in the thigh with a venomous arrow, and his men almost consumed with famine.  
How a Brigantyne was drowned with the stroke of a Fish: and of the navigation of Ancisus from Hispaniola to Vraba.  
Of the lamentable shipwreck of Ancisus, and of the Date trees and wild Boars which he found.  
Of the fruits or apples of the trees called Cedars of Libane, which bear old fruits and new all the year.  
How only three of the Cannibals with their bows and envenomed arrows assailed Ancisus with a hundred of his men, in which conflict they wounded and slew many●als●, of their swiftness of foot.  
Of the great river of Dariena, and how Ancisus encountered with five hundred of thinhabitants of the gulf of Vraba, and put them to flight: also, how he found great plenty of wrought gold and household stuff in a thicket of reeds.   

The contents of the second book. Fol. 63.  
How Nicuesa lost his fellows in the dark night, and went past the mouth of the river Beragua which he sought, & how the captains of the other ships consulted how to find him: also, of the river Lagartos in the which great Lisartes are found, much like unto the Crocodiles of Nilus.  
How the captains forsook their ships, that the soldiers might be without hope of departure, and of the miserable chance of Petrus de Vmbria and his fellows.  
By what chance Nicuesa was found, and of the calamities which he and his company sustained: also, of the region of Gracia Dei or Cerabaro, and of the river of Sansti Matthei.  
How Nicuesa caused them to remove their habitation from Beragua to point Marmor, where he builded a fortress, and how his men by war and famine, were consumed from seven hundred and odd, to scarcely one hundred.  
How one Vaschus Nunnez usurped th'authority of the lieutenantship of Vraba in th'absence of Fogeda, and of the navigation of Rodericus Colmenaris from Hispaniola to Vraba.  
Of the river Baira descending from the top of a high mountain covered with snow, and how Rodericus Colmenaris in a conflict against the Barbarians, lost xlvii of his men, by reason of their envenomed arrows.  
Of the force of the poison wherewith the Barbarians infect their arrows, and a remedy for the same: also, how Colmenaris by gun-shot and kindling fierce on the high tops of the rocks, came to the spaniards, left desolate in Dariena.   

The contents of the third book. Fol. 67.  
How Nicuesa was sought forth to acquict the contentions of Vraba, and how he was again rejected.  
How Vaschus Nunnez invaded, took prisoners, and spoiled the kings bordering about the region of Vraba, and how Ancisus lieutenant for Fogeda was cast in prison, and afterward set at liberty.  
How Ancisus took his voyage from Vraba to Spain, to accuse Vaschus, who also at the same time sent Valdivia, aswell to speak in his defence, as also to certify the king of their doings.  
How king Careta conspired with the spaniards against king Poncha, whom they put to flight, and spoiled his village.  
How king Comogrus friendly entertained the spaniards, and brought them to his palace, where he showed them the dried carcases of his ancestors reserved, and sumptuously appareled, and how the kings elder son gave Vaschus and Colmenaris four thousand ounces of wrought gold, and fifty slaves: also, a witty oration which he made to the spaniards, wherein he certified them of a country exceeding rich in gold. etc.   

The contents of the fourth book. Fol. 72.  
OF horrible thunder & lightning in the month of November, and of grain which waxeth ripe thrice a year: also, how digestion is strengthened by outward cold.  
How Valdivia is sent again into Hispaniola, to move the governor and counsel there to send into Spain to the king for a supply of a thousand soldiers, to make way to the golden mountains, and how he carried with him the kings portion, that is, the fift part of gold and other things.  
How Vaschus invaded the kings inhabiting the regions about the gulf of Vraba, and how he put king Dabaiba to flight, in whose village he found wrought gold, amounting to the weight of seven thousand Castellans.  
Of Bats as big as Turtle doves, which sometime bite men in the night in their sleep, whose biting is also venomous, but is healed with water of the sea, or by cauterization, as are also the wounds of venomous arrows.  
Of the Island of Cannafistula, and a town of five hundred houses, whose king Abenamachei was taken, and his arm cut of in the fight.  
Of trees of exceeding bigness and height, and how king Abibeiba had his palace in the top of a tree, from the which he was enforced to descend and entreat of peace.   

The contents of the fifth book. Fol. 75.  
How king Abraiba slew a captain of the spaniards, and caused the kings to rebel: also, how they were put to flight, and many of their men slain.  
Of five kings which attempted a new conspiracy with a hundred great Canoas', and five thousand men, and how their intent was bewrayed by a woman, and prevented: also, how Rodericus Colmenaris sacked the village of Tichiri, & hung the king thereof, with four of his chief rulers, and commanded them to be shot through with arrows.   

The contents of the sixth book. Fol. 77.  
How Vaschus with his confederates, sent johannes Quicedus and Colmenaris from Dariena to Hispaniola, and from thence to Spain to the king, for a thousand men to pass over the mountains to the golden regions, and what miseries they sustained in that voyage: also of the death of Valdivia, Zamudius, and Fogeda.  
Of the prosperous voyage of Ancisus, and how God wrought miracles by the simple faith of a mariner: also, how God respecteth th'infancy of faith for zeals sake, and how one religion turned into another, holdeth still many things of the first.  
How many of the Barbarians were baptized by reason of the miracles, and how they rewarded the priests by whom they were baptized.  
How Ancisus shortly after his arrival in Spain, resorted to the court, and made his complaint to the king of th'insolency of Vaschus, whereupon the king gave sentence against him, and how apt the Barbarous nations are to embrace the Christian faith.   

The contents of the seventh book. Fol. 81.  
How Quicedus and Colmenaris the procurators of Dariena, were honourably entertained at the court, and brought to the kings presence, and how their complexion was changed by alteration of the air.  
How Petrus Arias, a noble man, was elected governor and lieutenant of Dariena, and how other of the court laboured for the same office: also, how the bishop of Burges spoke to the king in his behalf.  
How Petrus Arias had a thousand and two hundred soldiers appointed him at the kings charges, and of the kings custom house in the city of Civil, called the house of the contracts of India.  
How a great number of spaniards proffered themselves to go at their own charges, and of a restraint made that no stranger might pass without the kings licence: also, how the author reproveth Aloisius Cadamustus, a writer of the Portugals viages.  
How Petrus Arias shortly after his departure from Civil. lost two of his ships, and was driven back again by tempest, and how being newly furnished, he passed the Ocean with more prosperous winds.  
The third voyage of Vincentius Pinzonus, and how he came to the regions of Paria, where encountering with thinhabitants, he put them first to flight, but after falling to entreaty of peace, they gave him great plenty of gold, and abundance of masculine frankincense, with divers other princely presents.  
Of the great multitude of popinjays which are in the region of Paria, and how th'inhabitors are appareled: also, of the five kings that made a league of friendship with Vincentius.  
How Vincentius sailed Eastward by the tract of the region of Paria, until he came to the point of that long land, which the author supposeth to be the great Island Atlantike, 
Cap. 5. August.  whereof the old writers make mention.   

The contents of the viii book. Fol. 86.  
A Contention between the Castilians and Portugals, as concerning the division of the new found lands, and how the controversy was finished by the bishop of Rome.  
How Don Christopher the governor of the Island of Sancti johannis, was slain by the Cannibals, and the bishop put to flight: also, of the other bishops of the Islands.  
How the Cannibals of the Island of Sancta Crux, slew and ate a king, with certain of his men, being friends to the Christians, and made faggots of their bones, and how quarrelling with our men, they put them to silence.   

The contents of the ix book. Fol. 87.  
OF the marvelous fruitfulness of the regions of Beragua, Vraba, and Dariena, and of the divers kinds of trees and fruits: also, of the pleasant taste of swines flesh, being fed with the fruits of Mirobalane trees.  
Of Lions and Tigers, and other wild beasts, and of a beast of strange form.  
Of the rivers of the gulf of Vraba, as the river of Dariena and Rio Grandis, and how the great serpents called Crocodiles, are found in other rivers beside Nilus in Egypt: also, how th'author of this book was sent Ambassador to the sultan of Alcayr in Egypt.  
Of the Portugals navigations, and of the river Senega found by them to be a channel of Nilus: also, of the multitude of birds and fowls being in the marishes of Dariena.  
A philosophical discourse of th'original and generation of springs and rivers, and of the breadth of the land divyding the North and South Ocean.  
Of the great river Maragnonus, and of the earthly paradise, and how springs are engendered by conversion of air into water.  
Of the often fall of rain under the Equinoctial line, and of the pores of the sea opened by the South winds.  
Of the great rivers of Tanais, Ganges, Danubius, and Eridanus, famous to the old writers, and how certain rivers running through the caves of the earth, break forth into springs a far of.   

The contents of the ten book. Fol. 91.  
How the new found lands discovered by the Spaniards in the West Ocean, are eight times bigger than Italy, beside that which the Portugals possess, and of the cards of the sea drawn by Colonus and Americus Vesputius.  
The order of measuring the land, and how a league containeth four miles by sea, and but three by land.  
The Navigation of johannes Dias, and of the sundry elevations of the pole star.  
Of the Island of Boiuca or Agnaneo, and of the spring whose water being drunk, causeth old men to look young.  
How Nicuesa and his soldiers were so oppressed with famine, that they were driven to eat mangy dogs, Toads, and dead men, and how a broth made of a dog skin, was sold for many pieces of gold.    

The Contents of the books of the third Decade.  

The contents of the first book. Fol. 94.  
OF the desperate adventure and good fortune of Vaschus, and how with a hundred fourscore and ten men, he brought that to pass for the which Petrus Arias was sent with a thousand and two hundred fresh soldiers.  
How Iron serveth for more necessary uses than gold, and how superfluities hinder liberty.  
How Vaschus in one conflict slew six hundred Barbarians with their kings, and how he found the house of king Quarequa infected with unnatural lechery, commanding that the king and forty such as he kept for that purpose, should be given for a pray to his dogs which he used to serve in the wars against these naked people.  
Of a region of black moors, and how Vaschus came to the tops of the mountains, where giving thanks to God, he beheld the new South Ocean, never before seen nor known to men of our world.  
How Vaschus put king Chiapes to flight, and after made a league of friendship with him, and how the king gave him four hundred pounds weight of wrought gold.  
How king Coquera was put to flight, who also being received to friendship, gave Vaschus six hundred and fifty pounds weight of wrought gold.  
Of the gulf called Sinus. S. Michaelis, being full of inhabited Islands, and of the manly courage and godly zeal of Vaschus: also, of the rising and falling of the South sea.  
How king Tumacchus being driven to flight and afterward reconciled, gave Vaschus six hundred and fourtiene peeses of gold, and two hundred and forty of the greatest and fairest pearls, and how the king caused his men to fish for pearls.  
Of the Island called Margaritea Dives, and of the abundance of fair and great pearls found therein.  
Of habitable regions under the Equinoctial line, and of the Portugals navigations to the Antipodes, inhabiting the five and fifty degree of the South pole: also, a declaration of Antipodes, and of the stars about the South pole.   

The contents of the second book. Fol. 101.  
OF the manner of fishing for pearls, and of the three kinds thereof: also, divers other questions concerning pearls.  
Of the multitude of the shell fishes wherein pearls are engendered and found in manner in all places in the South sea, and of abundance of gold found almost in every house: also, how the treasury of nature is in those coasts, and of the gold mines of Dariena.  
How king Teaocha gave Vaschus twenty pounds weight of wrought gold, and two hundred pearls: also, of deserts full of wild beasts, and how Vaschus was troubled with great heat in the month of November.  
How a dog Tiger was taken, and his whelps tied in chains and torn in pieces: also, how Vaschus gave four kings to his dogs to be devoured.  
Of the use of dogs in their wars, and of the fierceness of the Cannibals.  
How king Bononiana favoured the Christians, & gave Vaschus xx. pound weight of wrought gold: also, his oration to Vaschus.  
A similitude proving great plenty of gold in the regions of the South sea, and of the travails which old soldiers are able to sustain.   

The contents of the third book. Fol. 105.  
How king Buchibuea submitted himself to Vaschus, & sent him certain vessels of gold: also, how king Chiorisus sent him xxx dishes of pure gold.  
How Iron serveth for more necessary uses than gold: also, an example of the life of our first parents.  
How king Pocchorrosa submitted himself, and gave Vaschus fifteen pound weight of wrought gold: also, how Tumanama the great king of the golden regions toward the South sea, is taken prisoner: likewise how he gave Vaschus xxx pound weight of pure and wrought gold, and his noble men lx pounds weight of gold.  
Of the cause of vehement winds near unto the Equinoctial line, and of the colour of the earth of the golden mines.  
Of the large and fruitful plain of Zavana, and of the river Comogrus: also how king Comogrus, baptized by the name of Charles, gave Vaschus twenty pound weight of wrought gold.  
Of the good fortune of Vaschus, and how he was turned from Goliath to Elizeus, & from Anteus to Hercules, & with what facility the Spaniards shall hereafter obtain great plenty of gold and pearls.  
Of the spaniards conquests, and fierceness of the Canibales: also an exhortation to Christian princes to set forward Christ's religion.   

The contents of the fourth book. Fol. 110.  
THe fourth voyage of Colonus the Admiral from Spain to Hispaniola, and to the other Islands and coasts of the firm land: also of the flourishing Island Guanassa.  
Of the seven kinds of Date trees, wild vines, and Mirobalanes: also of birds and fowls.  
Of people of goodly stature which use to paint their bodies, and of the swift course of the sea from the east to the west: also of fresh water in the sea.  
Of the large regions of Paria, Os Draconis, and Quiriquetana, and of great Tortoises and reeds: also of the four fruitful islands called Quatuor Tempora, and xii islands called Limonares.  
Of sweet savours and wholesome air, and of the region Quicuri, and the haven Cariai or Mirobalanus: also of certain civil people.  
Of trees growing in the sea after a strange sort, and of a strange kind of Monkeys, which invade men, and fight with wild Boars.  
Of the great gulf of Cerabaro replenished with many fruitful Islands, and of the people which wear chains of gold made of ouches, wrought to the similitude of divers wild beasts and fowls.  
Of five villages whose inhabitants give themselves only to gathering of gold, and are painted, using to wear garlands of Lions and Tigers claws: also of seven rivers, in all the which is found great plenty of gold, and where the plenty of gold ceaseth.  
Of certain people which paint their bodies, and cover their privy members with shells, having also plates of gold hanging at their nostrils.  
Of certain worms, which being engendered in the seas near about the Equinoctial, eat holes in the ships, and how the Admiral's ships were destroyed by them.  
How the king of Beragua entertained the lieutenant, and of the great plenty of gold in the river of Duraba, and in all the regions there about, also in roots of trees and stones, and in manner in all rivers.  
How the lieutenant and his company would have erected a colony beside the river of Beragua, & was repulsed by thinhabitants.  
How the Admiral fell into the hands of the Barbarians of the Island of jamaica, where he lived miserably the space of ten months, and by what chance he was saved and came to the Island of Hispaniola.  
Of wholesome regions, temperate air, and continual spring all the whole year: also of certain people which honour gold religiously, during their golden harvest.  
Of the mountains of Beragua, being fifty miles in length, and higher than the clouds: also the description of other mountains and regions thereabout, comparing the same to Italy.  
Colonus his opinion as touching the supposed continent and joining of the north and south Ocean: also of the breadth of the said continent or firm land.  
Of the regions of Vraba & Beragua, and the great river Maragnonus, and the river of Dabaiba or Sancti johannis: also of certain marshes and desolate ways, and of Dragons and Crocodiles engendered in the same.  
Of twenty golden rivers about Dariena, and of certain precious stones, especially a Diamond of marvelous byggnesse bought in the province of Paria.  
Of the heroical facts of the spaniards, and how they contemn effeminate pleasures: also a similitude proving great plenty of gold and precious stones.   

The contents of the fift book. Fol. 119.  
THe navigation of Petrus Arias from Spain to Hispaniola and Dariena, and of the Islands of Canary: also of the islands of Madanino, Guadalupea, and Galanta.  
Of the sea of herbs, & mountains covered with snow: also of the swift course of the sea towards the West.  
Of the river Gaira, the region Caramairi, and the port Carthago, and Sancta Martha: also of Americus Vesputius, and his expert cunning in the knowledge of the card, compass, and quadrant.  
How the Canibales assailed Petrus Arias with his whole navy, and shot of their venomous arrows even in the sea, also of their houses and household stuff.  
How Gonsalus Ouiedus found a sapphire bigger than a goose egg: also Emeralds, Calcidonies, jaspers', and Amber of the mountains.  
Of woods of Brasyle trees, plenty of gold, and marchasites of metals, found in the regions of Caramairi, Gaira, and Saturma: also of a strange kind of merchandise exercised among the people of Zunu.  
That the region of Caramairi is like to an earthy Paradise, & of the fruitful mountains and pleasant gardens of the same.  
Of many goodly countries made desolate by the fierceness of the Canibales, and of divers kinds of bread made of roots: also of the manner of planting the root of jucca, whose juice is deadly poison in the Islands, and without hurt in the continent or firm land.  
Of certain golden rivers, Hearts, wild Boors, fowls, gossampine, white marble, and wholesome air: also of the great river Maragnonus, descending from the mountains covered with snow, called Serra Nevata.  
How Petrus Arias wasted certain islands of the Canibales, & how by the swift course of the sea, his ships were carried in one night forty leagues beyond thestimation of the best pilots.   

The contents of the sixth book. Fol. 124.  
OF sundry opinions why the sea runnneth with so swift a course from the East to the West, and of the great gulf of the North part of the firm land.  
The voyage of Sebastian Cabot, from England to the frozen sea▪ and how being repulsed with Ice in the month of july, he sailed far Westward.  
Of people appareled with beasts skins, and how Bears take fishes in the sea, and eat them.  
How Sebastian Cabot, after that he had discovered the land of Baccalaos or Baccallearum, was called out of England into Spain, where he was made one of the assistance of the counsel of the affairs of India, and of his second voyage.  
Of the Island Fortis, and how a great foul as big as a Stork lighted in the governors ship: also how he arrived at Dariena with the kings navy.  
How Vaschus received the new governor, and of habitable regions under the Equinoctial.  
How Petrus Arias the new governor distributed his army to conquer the South regions rich in gold, and to erect new colonies in the same.  
Of the rich gold mines of Dabaiba, and of the expedition against the king of that region.  
Of the violent course of the sea from the East to the West, and of the difficult sailing against the same.  
Of the pestiferous and unwholesome air of Sancta Maria Antiqua in Dariena, and how the Spaniards were of necessity enforced to plant their first colony and habitation there.  
The cause of the variety of regions lying all under one degree or parallel, and by what means the Son beams are cause of fervent heat.  
Of toads and flees engendered of drops of water, and of a house set on fire with lightening.  
Of a Dog devoured of a Crocodyle, and of venomous biting of great Bats: also of Lions, Tigers, & other wild beasts.  
How in these regions all four footed beasts grow to a bigger quantity than they which were of the first brood: also of certain trees of whose planks if ships be made, they are safe from the worms called Broma or Bissas.  
Of a tree whose wood is present poison if it be only borne about, and of an herb that is a preservative against the same.  
Of the rich Islands of the south sea, and of certain expeditions against the Canibales.   

The contents of the vii book. Fol. 130.  
THe particular description of the Island of Hispaniola, and of the rich Island called Margaritea Dives, lying in the South sea: also of the great abundance of big pearls found in the same.  
How the author compareth Hispaniola to the earthly paradise, and how it far excelleth Italy in fertility and temperate air.  
Of the first inhabitors of Hispaniola, and of the Islands of Canary.  
How thinhabitants of Hispaniola in their songs and rhymes had certain prophecies that appareled men should come to their country, and bring them into servitude, and of their familiarity with spirits: also how those spirits have no more appeared to them since they were baptized.  
Of their expertenesse in swimming, and of their delicate Serpents, birds, fowls, and Popingiays.  
Of the form and situation of Hispaniola near the Equinoctial, and how cold is in some place thereof accidental, and not by the situation of the region.  
Of the Oxen and Swine of exceeding bigness, and of ears of wheat as big as a man's arm in the brawn: also how the Swine are fed with Mirobalanes. etc.  
Of plenty of gold, Brasyle, Mastix, Gossampyne, Electurum, & of thincommodities of intemperate regions.  
Of divers languages in the Island, and how the provinces are divided into regions.  
How Andreas Moralis sailed into a dangerous and dark cave within the rock of a mountain, and of, whole rivers devoured of such caves: also of the conflict of the waters.  
Of a standing pool in the top of an high mountain: & how fern and bramble bushes grow only in cold regions   

The Contents of the viii book. Fol. 135.  
OF a great lake or standing pool of sour and salt water, and of the sea fishes in the same in the mid land of the Island: also of devouring fishes called Tiburo●i.  
Of the rivers falling into the lakes, and of. CC. springs in the space of a furlong.  
A marvelous history of a king stricken dumb and lame by a miracle, and of the Indian language.  
How such as are drowned in the lake, are never cast up again, and of the Island Guarizacca in the midst of a standing lake: also of a lake of fresh water, and an other of salt and fresh water.  
Of a large plain of two hundred miles in length, and an other of an hundred and twenty.  
Of the marvelous fish or monster of the sea, called Manati, or Matum, fed with man's hands, and how she carrieth men over the lake.  
Of the mountains, vales, hills, plains, and rivers of Hispaniola, and how gold is found in all mountains, and gold and fish in all rivers.  
Of salt bays, and how the rivers have their increase from the caves of the mountains: also how there is no hurtful beast in the Island.  
Of the pleasures of Hispaniola, and of the region of Cotohi well inhabited, & situate in a plain in the tops of mountains reaching to the clouds.  
Of moderate cold in the mountains, and of fern of marvelous bigness.  
How pure and massy gold is found in the region of Cotoy or Cotohi, and that the vain of gold is a living tree: also of the roots, branches, and flowers of the same, and how certain caves are sustained with pillars of gold.  
What gold is brought yearly from Hispaniola into Spain, and of the salt of the mountains, being as hard as stones, and clear as crystal: also springs of salt, fresh, & sour water.  
Of certain wild men, living in caves and dens without any certain language, and of their marvelous swiftness a foot.  
Of pitch of the rock, and two kinds of trees, and of the leaf of a tree used in the steed of paper: also how th'inhabitants think that the Christians can make those leaves speak and disclose all secrets.  
Of a strong colour made of the juice of a certain apple, and of the herb whose smoke is poison.   

The contents of the nienth book. Fol. 142.  
OF the kinds of fruits wherewith the inhabitants of Hispaniola lived first, and how they came to the knowledge of jucca: also how Ceres first found Wheat and Barley in Egypt.  
Why their kings are called by divers names, and by what names they salute the kings children when they are borne.  
How they make their testaments, and how certain of the kings wives and concubines are buried with them.  
Of the variable motions of the elements in Hispaniola, and where it raineth but little, and where much.  
Of the colonies and villages that the Spaniards have builded in Hispaniola, and of the other Islands about the same.  
Of a spring, which running under the sea from Hispaniola, breaketh forth in the Island of Arethusa: also of the habitable regions under the Equinoctial, and of the rich gold mines of the Island of Cuba.  
Of the Gum called Animae Album, and of the Canibales, also whereby it was thought that there were Islands of women.  
Of honey found in trees and rocks, and of the generation of great Tortoises, and of their eggs.   

The contents of the tenth book. Fol. 146.  
OF the expedition against the king of the Island Dites, in the South sea, and how after four conflicts, submitting himself, he gave our men an hundred & ten pound weight of great pearls: also how he agreed to pay yearly a hundred pound weight of pearls for a tribute.  
How axes and hatchettes are more esteemed than gold, or pearls, and of great plenty of Hearts and Coneys: also how the king of Dites and his family were baptized.  
Of pearls of great prise, and how Paul the Bishop of Rome bought a pearl for four and forty thousand ducades.  
divers opinions of the generation of pearls, and of a hundred pearls found in one shell fish: also of the birth of pearls.  
Of the regions of the East side of the gulf of Vraba, and of the original of the Canibales.  
Of certain circumcised people which have the knowledge of letters and use of books, and what chanced of the captains which Petrus Arias sent forth divers ways: also how john Solisius was slain of the Canibales, and of their fierceness.  
How john Pontius was repulsed of the Canibales, and of the lewd behaviour of john Aiora.  
Of the variable fortune of Gonsalus Badaiocius, and how after he had gathered great riches of gold, he had the overthrow, and was spoiled of all.  
Of the golden region of Coiba Dites, and how their slaves are marked in the face.  
Of the Islands of the South sea, and of the regions from whence the Portugese's fetch their spices.  
Of a strange kind of fowling, and of the trees that bear Gourds.  
Of the later opinions as touching the swift course of the Ocean toward the West, and of the continent or firm land: also of the voyage from the new lands to Spain.  
Of the gold mines of Dariena, and of the manner of gathering of gold in the same: also of the dropsy of covetousness which is not satisfied with riches.  
For the contents of the book of the Islands of the West Indies seas, read the margin notes of the same.    
FINIS.   

❧ Gonzalus Ferdinandus Ouiedus, of the west Indies.  
R. E. To the Reader.  
ALthough among divers which have written of the Ocean and West Indies, there is none to be compared to Peter Martyr of Angleria, in declaring by philosophical discourses the secret causes of natural affects, both as touching the land, the sea, the stars, and other strange works of nature: yet forasmuch as of later days those countries have been better known and searched, and divers such particular and notable things found, as are contained in the histories of later writers, among the number of whom, Conzalus Ferdinandus Ouiedus (whom learned Cardanus compareth to the ancient writers) is doubtless the chief, I have therefore thought good to join to the Decades of Peter Martyr, certain notable things which I have gathered out of his book, entitled the summary or abridgement of his general history of the west Indies, written in the firm land of the same, in the city of Sancti Maria Antiqua in Dariena (where he dwelled & was governor many years) and dedicated to Themperors majesty, as may appear by the Epistle following.   

To the most high and mighty prince Charles, the fift o● that name, Emperor of Rome, King of Spain, & of the two Cicilies', of both the sides of the straight of Faro, King of Jerusalem and Hungary, Duke of Burgonie, and Earl of Flaunders, Lord and inheritor of the firm land and Islands of the West Ocean. etc. Gonzalus Ferdinandus Ouiedus, his most humble servant, wisheth health and perpetual felicity.  
THe things which principally preserve and maintain the works of nature in the memories of men, are histories and books composed of the same: among the which certes those are esteemed most true and authentic, which have been written by witty and expert men, well travailed in the world, as faithful witnesses of such things as they have partly seen, and been partly informed by credible persons. Of this mind and opinion was Pliny, who better than any other author hath written in xxxvii books all that pertaineth to the natural history, contained all in one volume, dedicated to Vespasian Themperor: Wherein, as a prudent historiographer, he declareth such things as he had heard, attributing the second authority to such as he had red in authors that wrote before him: And thirdly joined to the same history, such things as he himself had seen, as most certain testimony. Whose example I following, will in this my brief summary, reduce and represent to your majesties memory such things as I have seen in your Empire of the West Indies, aswell in the Islands as in the firm land of the Ocean sea, where I have served now more than twelve years in the place of surveyor of the gold mines, by the commandment of the catholic king Don Fernando, the fift of that name, and grandfather unto your majesty, to whom God gave great fame and glory: Since whose death also I have likewise served, and trust while the rest of my life yet remaineth, to serve your majesty, as shall please you to command. As touching which things, and such other like, I have more largely written in an history begun assoon as my age was ripe to take such matters in hand: Wherein furthermore I have made mention of such things as have chanced in Spain, from the year .1494. unto this time: adding also thereunto such things worthy memory, as I have observed in other realms and provinces where I have travailed, and have likewise particularly written the lives and worthy acts of the catholic Princes of famous memory Don Ferdinando, and Lady Elizabeth his wife, to their last days. After whose fruition of heavenly paradise, I have noted such things as have chanced in your most fortunate succession: not omitting particularly to write a large book of such things as have seemed most worthy to be noted, as touching your majesties Indies. But forasmuch as that volume remaineth in the city of San. Dominico, in the Island of Hispaniola, where I dwell, and am placed in household, with wife, children, and family, I have brought no more with me of that my writing, than I bear in memory, determining (notwithstanding) for your majesties recreation, to make a brief rehearsal of certain notable things, whereof I have more largely entreated in my said general history, and such as may seem most worthy to be red of your majesty: Of the which, although a great part have been written by other, who have also seen the same, yet perhaps they are not so exactly and particularly described as of me, forasmuch as in manner all that travail into these Indies have greater respect to lucre and gains, then diligently to search the works of nature, whereunto I have been ever naturally inclined, & have therefore with all possible endeavour applied mine eyes & intelligence to find the same. And this present summary shall not be contrary or divers from my larger history, wherein (as I have said) I have more amply declared these things: but shall only more briefly express th'effect thereof, until such time as God shall restore me to mine own house, where I may accomplish and fynyshe my said general history. Whereunto to give the first principle, I say, that Don Christopher Colonus (as it is well known) being the first Admiral of this India, discovered the same in the days of the catholic king Don Ferdinando, and the lady Elizabeth his wife, grandfather and grandmother unto your majesty, in the year .1491. and came to Barzalona in the year .1492. with the first Indians, and other shows and proofs of the great riches and notice of this west Empire: The which gift and benefit was such, that it is unto this day one of the greatest that ever any subject or servant hath done for his prince or country, as is manifest to the whole world. And to say the truth, this shall doubtless be so commodious and profitable unto the whole realm of Spain, that I repute him no good Castilian or spaniard that doth not recognize the same. And (as I have said before) forasmuch as in my said general history I have more largely entreated of these things, I intend at this present only briefly to rehearse certain especial things, the which surely are very few in respect of the thousands that might be said in this behalf. first therefore I will speak somewhat of the navigation into these parties, then of the generation of the nations which are found in the same, with their rites, customs▪ and ceremonies: also of beasts, fowls, birds, worms, fishes, seas, rivers, springs, trees, plants, herbs, and divers other things, which are engendered both on the land and in the water. And forasmuch as I am one of thorder and company of them that are appointed to return into these regions to serve your majesty, if therefore the things contained in this book shall not be distinct in such order as I promised to perform in my greater work, I desire your majesty to have no respect hereunto, but rather to consider the novelty of such strange things as I have herein declared, which is the chief end that moved me to write: Protesting, that in this summary I have written the truth of such things as came to my remembrance, whereof not only I myself can testify, but also divers other worthy and credible men, which have been in those regions, and are now present in your majesties court. And thus it shall suffice to have said thus much unto your majesty, in manner of a proheme unto this present work, which I most humbly desire your majesty as thankfully to accept, as I have written it faithfully.   

Of the ordinary navigation from Spain to the west Indies.  
THe navigation which is commonly made from Spain to the west India, is from Seville, where your majesty have your house of contraction for those parts, with also your officers thereunto pertaining, of whom the captains take their passport and licence. The patrons of such ships as are appointed to these viages, embark themselves at San Luca di Barameda, where the river Cuadalchiber entereth into the Ocean sea, and from hence they follow their course toward the islands of Canary. Of these seven Islands, they commonly touch two, that is, either Grancanaria or Gomera: and here the ships are furnished with fresh water, fuel, cheese, beef, and such other things, which may seem requisite to be added to such as they bring with them out of Spain. From Spain to these Islands, is commonly eight days sailing, or little more or less, and when they are arrived there, they have sailed two hundred and fifty leagues, which make a thousand miles, accounting four miles to a league, as is their manner to reckon by sea. Departing from the said islands to follow their course, the ships tarry xxv days, or a little more or less, before they see the first land of the Islands that lie before that which they call La Spagnuola or Hispaniola, and the land that is commonly first seen, is one of these Islands which they call Ogni sancti Marigalante (or Galanta) Lafoy Desseada (otherwise called Desiderata) Matanino, Dominica, Guadalupea, San Christoval, or some other of the Islands, whereof there are a great multitude lying about these aforesaid. Yet it sometimes so chanceth, that the ships pass without the sight of any of the said Islands, or any other that are within that course, until they come to the Island of Sancti johannis, or Hispaniola, or jamaica, or Cuba, which are before the other. It may also chance that they overpass all these likewise, until they fall upon the coasts of the firm land. But this chanceth when the pilot is not well practised in this navigation, or not perfect in the true card. But making this voyage with expert mariners (whereof there is now great plenty) one of the said first Islands shall ever be known. And from the Islands of Canary to one of the first of these, the distance is niene hundred leagues by sailing, or more, and from hence to the city of saint Dominike, which is in the Island of Hispaniola, is a hundred and fifty leagues: so that from Spain hitherto, is a thousand and three hundred leagues. Yet forasmuch as sometimes the navigation proceedeth not so directly, but that it chanceth to wander ever on the one side or on the other, we may well say that they have now sailed a thousand and five hundred leagues, and more. And if the navigation be slow, by reason of some hindrance, it commonly chanceth to be finished in xxxv. or xl days: and this happeneth for the most part, not accounting the extremes, that is, either of them that have slow passage, or of them that arrive in very short time: for we ought to consider that which chanceth most commonly. The return from those parts to Spain, is not finished without longer time, as in the space of fifty days, or a little more or less. Nevertheless in this present year of .1525. there came four ships from the Island of San Dominico, to saint Luca in Spain, in xxv days: But (as I have said) we ought not to judge of that which chanceth seldom, but of that which happeneth most ordinarily. This navigation is very safe, and much used, even unto the said Island. And from this to the firm land, the ships traverse divers ways for the space of five, six, or seven days sailing, or more, according to the parts or coasts whither they direct their viages, forasmuch as the said firm land is very great and large, and many navigations and viages are directed to divers parts of the same: Yet to the firm land, which is nearest to this Island, and lieth directly against San Dominico, the passage is finished in the time aforesaid. But it shallbe much better to remit all this to the card of these navigations, and the new cosmography, of the which no part was known to Ptolemy, or any other of the old writers.  

Of two notable things as touching the west Indies, and of the great richesse brought from thence into Spain.  
AFter my universal description of the history of the Indies, there cometh to my remembrance two things chief to be noted as touching Thempire of these West Indies, pertaining to the dominion of your majesty: and these, beside the other particulars whereof I have sufficiently spoken, are to be considered as things of great importance. Whereof, the one is the shortness of the way, & with what expedition your majesties ships may pass beyond the main firm land of these Indies, into the new South sea, called Mare del Sur, lying beyond the same, & this to th'intent to come to the Islands where the spices grow, beside the other innumerable richesse of the kingdoms & signiories which confine with the said sea, where are so many people & nations of divers tongues & manners. The other thing, is to consider how innumerable treasures are entered into Spain by these Indies, aswell that which cometh daily from thence, as also that is continually to be looked for, both of gold & pearl, & other merchandise, which are first brought into this your realm of Spain before they are seen of other nations, or traded into other realms: Whereby not only this your realm is greatly enriched, but also the benefit thereof redoundeth to the great profit of other countries which are near thereunto. A testimony of this, are the double ducades which your majesty have caused to be coined, and are dispersed throughout the whole world: But after they are once passed out of this your realm, they never return again, because they are the best currant money of the world. And therefore, if after they have been in the hands of strangers, they chance to be returned again into Spain, they come disguised in an other habit, and are diminished of the goodness of their gold, with the stamp of your majesty changed: So that if it were not for their such defacynges in other realms for the cause aforesaid, there should not be found so great quantity of fine gold of the coin of any prince in the world as of your majesties: and the cause of all this, are your Indies.   

Of the mines of gold, and the manner of working in them.  
THis particular of the mines of gold, is a thing greatly to be noted, and I may much better speak hereof them any other man, forasmuch as there are now xii years past since I served in the place of the surveyor of the melting shops pertaining to the gold mines of the firm land, and was the governor of the mines of the Catholic king Don Ferdinando, after whose departure from this life, I served long in the same room in the name of your majesty: By reason whereof, I have had great occasion to know how gold is found and wrought out of the mines, and do know right well that this land is exceeding rich, having by my account, and by the labour of my Indians & slaves, gathered and fyned a great portion of the same, & may therefore the better affirm this by testimony of sight. For I am well assured, that in no part of Castilia del oro, that is, golden Castille (otherwise called Beragua) no man could ask me of the mines of gold, but that I durst have bound myself to have discovered them in the space of ten leagues of the country where it should have been demanded me, and the same to be very rich: for I was allowed all manner of charges to make search for the same. And although gold be found in manner every where in these regions of golden Castille, yet ought we not in every place to bestow the travel & charge to get it out, because it is of less quantity and goodness in some place then in some. And the mine or vain which ought to be followed, aught to be in a place which may stand to save much of the charges of the labourers, and for the administration of other necessary things, that the charges may be recompensed with gains: for there is no doubt but that gold shallbe found more or less in every place. And the gold which is found in golden Castille, is very good, & of xxii caractes or better in finesse. Furthermore, beside this great quantity of gold, which I have said to be found in the mines, there is also from day to day found, or otherwise gotten, great treasure of such wrought gold as hath been in the custody of the subdued Indians & their kings, aswell of such as they have given for their fine and ransom, or otherwise, as friends to the Christians, beside that which hath been violently taken from the rebels: but the greatest part of the wrought gold which the Indians have, is base, and holdeth somewhat of copper, of this they make bracelets and chains, and in the same they close their jewels which their women are accustomed to wear, & esteemed more than all the richesses of the world. The manner how gold is gathered, is this, either of such as is found in Zavana, that is to say in the plains and rivers of the champion country being without trees, whether the earth be with grass or without, or of such as is sometimes found on the land without the rivers in places where trees grow, so that to come by the same, it shallbe requisite to cut down many and great trees. But after which so ever of these two manners it be found, either in the rivers or breaches of waters, or else in the earth, I will show how it is found in both these places, and how it is separate and purged. Therefore when the mine or vain is discovered, this chanceth by searching and proving in such places as by certain signs and tokens do appear to skilful men apt for the generation of gold, and to hold gold: and when they have found it, they follow the mine, and labour it, whether it be in the river, or in the plain, as I have said. And if it be found on the plain, first they make the place very clean where they intend to dig, than they dig eight or ten foot in length, and as much in breadth: but they go no deeper than a span or two, or more, as shall seem best to the master of the mine, digging equally, than they wash all the earth which they have taken out of the said space, and if herein they find any gold, they follow it, and if not, they dig a span deeper, and wash the earth as they did before: and if then also they find nothing, they continue in digging and washing the earth as before, until they come to the hard rock or stone: and if in fine they find no gold there, they follow no further to seek gold in that place, but go to an other part. And it is to be understood, that when they have found the mine, they follow it in digging, in the same measure in level and depth, until they have made an end of all the mine which that place containeth, if it appear to be rich. This mine ought to consist of certain feet or paces in length or breadth, according to certain orders determined, and within that compass of earth, it is not lawful for any other to dig for gold: And where as endeth the my of him that first found the gold, immediately it is lawful for any other man that will, with a staff to assign himself a place by the side of the same, enclosing it with stakes or pales as his own. These mines of Zavana (that is, such as are found in the plains) ought ever to be sought near to some river or brook, or spring of water, or dyke, or standing pool, to th'end that the gold may be washed, for the which purpose they use the labour of certain Indians, as they do other in digging of the mine. And when they have digged out the mine, they fill certain trays with that earth, which other Indians have the charge immediately to receive at their hands, and to carry those trays of earth to the water, where it may be washed: Yet do not they that bring it, wash it, but deliver it to other, putting it out of their own trays into theirs, which they have ready in their hands to receive it. These washers for the most part are the Indian women, because this work is of less pain and travail then any other. These women when they wash, are accustomed to sit by the water side, with their legs in the water even up to the knees, or less, as the place serveth their purpose: and thus holding the trays with earth in their hands by the handles thereof, and putting the same into the water, they move them round about, after the manner of syfting, with a certain aptness, in such sort that there entereth no more water into the trays than serveth their turn, and with the self same apt moving of their trays in the water, they ever avoid the foul water with the earth out of the one side of the vessel, and receive in clean water on the other side thereof, so that by this means by little and little, the water washeth the earth as the lighter substance of the trays, and the gold as the heavier matter resteth in the bottom of the same, being round and hollow in the midst like unto a barbers basin: And when all the earth is avoided, and the gold gathered together in the bottom of the tray, they put it a part, and return to take more earth, which they wash continually as before. And thus they that labour in this work, do gather daily such portion of gold as shall please God to grant to the patrons of these Indians, and such other as travail in the same. Furthermore it is to be noted, that for every two Indians that wash, it is requisite that two other serve them to bring earth from the mine, and other two to break the same small, and fill their trays therewith. Also beside these labourers, it is necessary that there be other people in the place where they work & rest in the night: these are such as make their bread, and provide for victuals, and other necessaries. So that to conclude, there are in all, five persons ordinarily assigned to every trey of washers. There is an other manner of working the mines, in rivers or brooks of running waters: and this is, that in avoiding the water of his course, after that the beds of the rivers are dry and utterly emptied, they find gold among the breaches, clyftes, and rifts of stones, and among all that is in the bottom of the channel, and where naturally the river runneth of greatest force: So that it chanceth sometime, that when the bed of the river is good and rich, they find in it great quantity of gold. And therefore your Majesty ought to understand for a general rule, as it appeareth in fact, that all gold is engendered in the tops and highest places of the mountains, and in continuance of time is by little and little brought down to the vales and plains by shewres of rain, and the falls of springs, rivers, and brooks, having their original in the mountains, and descending from the same, notwithstanding it is oftentimes found in the plains far from the mountains. But when it chanceth to be found in great quantity, it is for the most part among the mountains, and in the rivers, or their branches, more than in any other part of the plain: and in these two manners it is commoly found most abundantly. And for the better proof that gold is engendered on high, and is brought down into the low places, I have one great token thereof, which causeth me to believe it for certain: and this is, to consider that coals never putrefy nor corrupt under the ground, if they be made of strong wood. Whereby it chanceth, that digging the earth by the folds or indented places of the mountains, or on the sides, & breaking a mine in the earth where it had been broken before, and having now digged one or two or three Poles in measure, the miners found certain coals of wood under the same level where they found gold, and this I say in the earth which was taken for a Virgin, that is to say, such as had not before been opened for any mine: the which coals could not naturally be engendered there, or enter in by any means, but when the superfitiall part of the earth was equal with the level where the coals were found, it is like that the coals were left there by some occasion of fire, and that they fastened there in time, and that afterward in long continuance of time, they were by little and little covered with the earth, which the often shewres of rain washed from the mountains, so that by the course of years the earth overgrewe the coals unto the said level & measure, which had before time been the superfitial part of the earth, where the coals and gold were found together: whereby it may appear that the gold was no more engendered there then were the coals, but brought thither from the mountains by the falls of waters as we have said, forasmuch as the mountains are the Matrices and bowels of all rich metals. Further and beside this, I say that in how much more the gold is gone far from the natural place of his generation to the place where it is found, it is so much the more purified and fined, and of a better carat, and the nearer that it is found to his proper mine or vain where it is engendered, it is so much the base, fouler, and more crude, and of a base allay and carat, and doth waste so much the more in melting, and remaineth more brickle. Sometimes there are found grains of gold of great quantity, and of great weight above the earth, and sometimes also under the earth: And the greatest of all other that was found to this day in the Indies, was that which was lost in the sea about the Island Beata, which weighed three thousand and two hundred Castellans of gold, which are in value four thousand a hundred thirty and eight ducades of gold, which weigh one Arrova and seven pound, or thirty and two pound, after twelve ounces to the pound, 
A mark, is a pound of viii. ounces summa. xvi.li. weight viii ounces, after xii. ounces to the li  which make threescore and four marks of gold. And I saw in the year .1515. in the hands of Mychel Passamonte treasurer to your majesty, two grains, of the which one weighed seven pounds, which are xiiii marks, and are in value about threescore and five ducades of gold every mark: the other was of ten marks, which are five pounds of like value, and of very good gold of xxii caractes, and better: There are also found many other great grains, although not equal unto these in bigness. And forasmuch as I have spoken of gold, I have thought good to declare somewhat how the Indians can very excellently guilt such vessels of copper and base gold as they make: for they can give them so fair and flourishing a colour, that all the mass which they gild, appeareth as though it were gold of xxii caractes, and better. This colour they give with a certain herb, as though it were wrought by the art of any goldsmith of Spain or Italy, and would of them be esteemed as a thing of great riches, and a secret manner of gilding. And for as much as I have spoken sufficiently of the mines of gold, I will now speak somewhat of copper, because I have made mention thereof. This metal is found in many of the Islands of the Indies, and also in the firm land, and is found daily in great quantity, holding somewhat of gold. But for the desire that our men have to gold, they nothing esteem the copper, although there might great commodity and profit be had thereby, and also by other metals, which they nothing regard, except silver, which is found abundantly in that part of the firm land which is called new Spain. But of this it shall suffice to have said thus much, because I have more particularly entreated of these things in my general history of India.   

Of the manner of fishing for pearls.  
THe Indians exercise this kind of fishing for the most part in the coasts of the North in Cubagua and Cumana, and many of them which dwell in the houses of certain particular lords in the Islands of San Dominico and Sancti johannis, resort to the Island of Cubagua, for this purpose. Their custom is to go five, six, or seven, or more in one of their Canoas' or barks, early in the morning to some place in the sea thereabout, where it appeareth unto them that there should be great plenty of those shell fishes (which some call Muscles, and some Oysters) wherein pearls are engendered, & there they plunge themselves under the water, even unto the bottom, saving one that remaineth in the Canoa or boat, which he keepeth still in one place as near as he can, looking for their return out of the water: And when one of them hath been a good while under the water, he riseth up, and cometh swimming to the boat, entering into the same, and leaving there all the Oysters which he hath taken and brought with him (for in these are the pearls found) and when he hath there rested himself a while, and eaten part of the Oysters, he returneth again to the water, where he remaineth as long as he can endure, and then riseth again, and swimmeth to the boat with his prey, where he resteth him as before, and thus continueth course by course, as do all the other in like manner, being all most expert swymmers and divers: and when the night draweth near, they return to the Island to their houses, and present all the Oysters to the master or steward of the house of their lord, who hath the charge of the said Indians, and when he hath given them somewhat to eat, he layeth up the Oysters in safe custody, until he have a great quantity thereof, than he causeth the same fisher men to open them, and they find in every of them pearls, other great or small, two, or three, or four, and sometimes five or six, and many small grains, according to the liberality of nature. They save the pearls both small and great which they have found, and either eat the Oysters if they will, or cast them away, having so great quantity thereof, that they in manner abhor them. These Oysters are of hard flesh, and not so pleasant in eating as are ours of Spain. This Island of Cubagua where this manner of fishing is exercised, is in the North coast, and is no bigger than the Island of Zealand. Oftentimes the sea increaseth greatly, and much more than the fishers for pearls would, because where as the place is very deep, a man can not naturally rest at the bottom, by reason of the abundance of airy substance which is in him. as I have oftentimes proved. For although he may by violence and force descend to the bottom, yet are his feet lifted up again, so that he can continue no time there: and therefore where the sea is very deep, these Indian fishers use to tie two great stones about them with a cord, on every side one, by the weight whereof they descend to the bottom, and remain there until them listeth to rise again, at which time they unlose the stones, and rise up at their pleasure. But this their aptness and agility in swimming, is not the thing that causeth men most to marvel: but rather to consider how many of them can stand in the bottom of the water for the space of one whole hour, and some more or less, according as one is more apt hereunto then an other. another thing there is which seemeth to me very strange: and this is, that where as I have oftentimes demanded of some of these Lords of the Indians, if the place where they are accustomed to fish for pearls, being but little and narrow, will not in short time be utterly without Oysters, if they consume them so fast. They all answered me, that although they be consumed in one part, yet if they go a fishing in an other part, or an other coast of the Island, or at an other contrary wind, and continue fishing there also until the Oysters be likewise consumed, and then return again to the first place, or any other place where they fished before, and emptied the same in like manner, they find them again as full of Oysters as though they had never been fyshed. Whereby we may judge, that these Oysters either remove from one place to an other, as do other fishes, 
Of this read more largely in the decades.  or else that they are engendered and increase in certain ordinary places. This Island of Cumana & Cubagua, where they fish for these pearls, is in the twelve degree of the part of the said coast which inclineth toward the North. Likewise pearls are found and gathered in the South sea, called Mare del Sur, & the pearls of this sea are very big, yet not so big as they of the Island of pearls, called de las perlas, or Margaritea, which the Indians call Terarequi, lying in the gulf of Saint Michael, where greater pearls are found▪ and of greater price, then in any other coast of the North sea▪ in Cumana, or any other part. I speak this as a true testimony of sight, having been long in that South sea, and making curious inquisition to be certainly informed of all that pertaineth to the fishing of pearls. From this Island of Terarequi, there was brought a pearl of the fashion of a Pear, weighing thirty and one Caractes, 
By the computation of Venice, four grains make a Caract.  which Petrus Arias had among a thousand and so many pounds weight of other pearls, which he had when captain Gaspar Morales (before Petrus Arias) passed to the said Island in the year .1515. which pearl was of great price. From the said Island also, came a great and very round pearl, which I brought out of the sea, this was as big as a small pellet of a Stonebowe, and of the weight of twenty and six Caractes: I bought it in the city of Panama, in the sea of Sur, and paid for it six hundred and fifty times the weight thereof of good gold, and had it three years in my custody, and after my return into Spain, sold it to the Earl of Nansao marquess of Zenete, great Chamberlain to your Majesty, who gave it to the marquess his wife, the Lady Mentia of Mendozza. I think verily that this pearl was the greatest, fairest, and roundest that hath been seen in those parts. For your majesty ought to understand, that in the coast of the sea of Sur, there are found a hundred great pearls round after the fashion of a Pear, to one that is perfectly round and great. This Island of Terarequi, which the Christians call the Island of pearls, and other call it the Island of Flowers, is found in the eight degree on the South side of the firm land, in the province of golden Castyle, or Beragua, and these are the coasts of the firm land, where pearls are found even unto this day: I understand also that there are pearls found in the province and Islands of Cartagenia. And since your majesty appointed me a governor and captain, I have made further search, and am advertised that pearls are found in divers other places, as about the Island of Codego, which lieth against the mouth of that port of the Island of Cartagenia, which the Indians call Coro, the which Island and port are on the North side, in the tenth degree of the coasts of the firm land.   

Of the familiarity which certain of the Indians have with the devil, and how they receive answer of him of things to come.  
WHen the Indians begin their battle, or go to any combat, or attempt any other great matter, they have certain elect men, whom they reverendly esteem, & call them Tequinas, which in their tongue is as much to say as masters: notwithstanding that they call every man, that is cunning in any science, by the same name, as fishers, fowlers, hunters, or makers of nets. These Tequinas therefore, they call the masters of their answers, because they speak with Tuyra, that is, the devil, and bring them answer what he sayeth, either as touching such things as they have to do, or shall chance to them the day following, or many days to come. For the devil, being so ancient an Astronomer, knoweth the times of things, and seeth how they are naturally directed and inclined, and maketh them believe that they come so to pass by his ordinance, as though he were the Lord and mover of all that is and shallbe, and that he giveth the day light, and rain, causeth tempest, and ruleth the stations of times, giving life, or taking away life, at his pleasure: By reason whereof, the Indians being deceived of him, and seeing also such effects to come certainly to pass as he hath told them before, believe him in all other things, and honour him in many places with sacrifices of the blood and lives of men, and odoriferous spices: And when God disposeth the contrary to that which the devil hath spoken in oracle, whereby he is proved a liar, he causeth the Tequinas to persuade the people that he hath changed his mind and sentence for some of their sins, or deviseth some such lie as liketh him best, being a skilful master in such subtle and crafty devices, to deceive the simple and ignorant people, which hath small defence against so mighty and crafty an adversary. And as they call the devil Tuyra, so do they in many places call the Christians by the same name, thinking that they greatly honour them thereby, as in deed it is a name very fit and agreeable to many of them, having laid apart all honesty and virtue, living more like Dragons than men, among these simple people.  
Before thinhabitants of the Island of Hispaniola had received the Christian faith, there was among them a sect of men, which lived solitarily in the deserts and woods, & led their life in silence and abstinence, more straightly than ever did the philosophers of Pythagoras sect, abstaining in like manner from the eating of all things that live by blood, contented only with such fruits, herbs, and roots, as the deserts and woods ministered unto them to eat: The professors of this sect were called Piaces. They gave themselves to the knowledge of natural things, and used certain secret magical operations and superstitions, whereby they had familiarity with spirits, which they alured into their own bodies at such times as they would take upon them to tell of things to come, which they did in manner as followeth. When any of the kings had occasion to call any of them out of the deserts for this purpose, their custom was to send them a portion of their fine bread of Cazabbi or Maizium, and with humble request and suit to desire them to tell them of such things as they would demand. After the request granted, and the place and day appointed, the Piaces cometh, with two of his disciples waiting on him, whereof the one bringeth with him a vessel of a secret water, and the other a little silver bell. When he cometh to the place, he sitteth down on a round seat made for him of purpose, where having his disciples, the one standing on the one hand, and the other on the other, even in the presence of the king and certain of his nobles (for the common people are not admitted to these mysteries) and turning his face toward the desert, he beginneth his enchantment, and calleth the spirit with loud voice by certain names, which no man understandeth but he and his disciples. After he hath done thus a while, if the spirit yet defer his coming, he drinketh of the said water, and therewith waxeth hot and furious, and inverteth and turneth his enchantment, and letteth himself blood with a thorn, marvelously turmoiling himself, as we read of the furious Sybilles', not ceasing until the spirit be come: who at his coming entereth into him, and overthroweth him, as it were a greyhound should overturn a Squerell, then for a space, he seemeth to lie as though he were in great pain, or in a rapt, wonderfully tormenting himself, during which agony, the other disciple shaketh the silver bell continually. Thus when the agony is past, and he lieth quietly (yet without any sense or feeling) the king, or some other in his stead, demandeth of him what he desireth to know: and the spirit answereth by the mouth of the rapt Piaces, with a direct and perfect answer to all points: insomuch that on a time certain spaniards being present at these mysteries with one of the kings, and in the Spanish tongue demanding the Piaces of their ships which they looked for out of Spain, the spirit answered in the Indian tongue, and told them what day and hour the ships departed from Spain, how many they were, and what they brought, without failing in any point. If he be also demanded of the eclipse of the Sun or Moon (which they greatly fear and abhor) he giveth a perfect answer, and the like of tempests, famine, plenty, war or peace, and such other things. When all the demands are finished, his disciples call him aloud, ringing the silver bell at his ear, and blowing a certain powder into his nostrils, whereby he is raised as it were from a dead s●eape, being yet somewhat heavy headed and faint a good while after. Thus being again rewarded of the king with more bread, he departeth again to the deserts with his disciples. But since the Christian faith hath been dispersed throughout the Island, these devilish practices have ceased, and they of the members of the devil, are made the members of Christ by baptism, forsaking the devil and his works, with the vain curiosity of desire of knowledge of things to come, whereof for the most part it is better to be ignorant, then with vexation to know that which can not be avoided.  
Furthermore, in many places of the firm land, when any of the kings die, all his household servants, aswell women as men which have continually served him, kill themselves, believing as they are taught by the devil Tuyra, that they which kill themselves when the king dieth, go with him to heaven, and serve him in the same place and office as they did before on the earth while he lived: and that all that refuse so to do, when after they die by their natural death or otherwise, their souls to die with their bodies, and to be dissolved into air, and become nothing, as do the souls of Hogs, Birds, fishes, or other bruit beasts: and that only the other may enjoy the privilege of immortality for ever, to serve the king in heaven. And of this false opinion cometh it, that they which sow corn, or set roots for the kings bread, and gather the same, are accustomed to kill themselves, that they may enjoy this privilege in heaven, and for the same purpose, cause a portion of the grain of Maizium, and a bundle of jucca (whereof their bread is made) to be buried with them in their graves, that the same may serve them in heaven, if perhaps there should lack seeds to sow, and therefore they take this with them, to begin withal, until Tuyra (who maketh them all these fair promises) provide them of greater quantity. This have I myself seen in the top of the mountains of Guaturo, where having in prison the king of that province (who rebelled from th●bedience of your majesty) and demanding of him to whom pertained those sepultures or graves which I saw in his house: he answered, that they were of certain Indians which slew themselves at the death of his father. And because they are oftentimes accustomed to bury great quantities of wrought gold with them, I caused two graves to be opened, wherein was nothing found but a vessel full of the grain of Maizium, & a bundle of jucca, as I have said. And demanding the cause hereof, of the king and the other Indians: they answered, that they that were buried there, were the labourers of the ground, and men skilful in sowing of seeds, and making of bread, and servants to the kings father, and to the end that their souls should not die with their bodies, they slew themselves at the death of the king their master, to live with him in heaven, and to the intent that they might serve him there in the same office, they reserved that Maizium and jucca, to sow it in heaven. Whereunto I answered them in this manner, Behold how your Tuyra deceiveth you, and how all that he teacheth you is false. You see how in so long a time since they are dead, they have not yet taken away this Maizium and jucca, which is now putrefied and worth nothing, and not like to be sown in heaven. To this the king replied, saying, in that they have not taken it away, nor sown it in heaven, the cause is, that they chanced to find enough there, by reason whereof they had no need of this. To this error many things were said, which seemed of little force to remove him from his false opinion, and especially any such as at that age are occupied of the devil, whom they paint of the self same form and colour, as he appeareth unto them in divers shapes and forms. They make also Images of gold, copper, and wood, to the same similitudes, in terrible shapes, and so variable, as the painters are accustomed to paint them at the feet of saint Michael th'archangel, or in any other place, where they paint them of most horrible portiture. Likewise when the devil greatly intendeth to fear them, he threateneth to send them great tempests, which they call Furacanas, or Haurachanas, and are so vehement, that they overthrow many houses, and great trees. And I have seen in mountains, full of many and great trees, that for the space of three quarters of a league the mountain hath been subverted, and the trees overthrown, and plucked out of the earth with the roots: a thing doubtless so fearful and terrible to behold, that it may verily appear to be done by the hand of the devil. And in this case the Christian men ought to consider with good reason, 
Doctrine not worthy for a christian man.  that in all places where the holy sacrament is reserved, the said tempests are no more so outrageous, or so perilous as they were wont to be.   

Of the temperature of the regions under or near to the burnt line, called Torrida Zona, or the Equinoctial, and of the divers seasons of the year.  
THe lands and regions that are near about the climes of the Equinoctial line, are naturally hot, although they be otherwise temperate by the divine providence: & therefore such flesh or fish as is taken and killed in these regions, can not be preserved from putrefaction, except it be roasted, sodden, or perboyld, the same day that it is killed. And whereas I have said, that such regions are naturally hot, and yet temperate by the providence of God, it is so in deed: and therefore not without cause the ancient authors were of opinion, that the burnt line, or Torrida zona, where passeth the line of the Equinoctial, should be unhabitable, by reason the Sun hath greater dominion in that place, then in any other of the sphere, remaining continually between the two tropykes of Cancer and Capricorn: For when in these regions the earth is opened or digged from the superficial part thereof to the depth of a man's height, it is found temperate, and within this space the trees and plants fasten and spread their roots, and no deeper, extending the same as far in breadth in the ground as do their branches in the air, and enter no deeper into the ground than I have said, because that beneath the depth of the said space of a man's height the earth is very hot, the upper part being temperate and very moist, aswell by reason of the abundance of water which falleth from heaven upon that earth at certain ordinary seasons of the year, as also for the multitude of great rivers, brooks, springs, and marshes, whereby the mighty and supreme Lord which made these lands, hath most prudently provided for the preservation of the same.  
There are also many rough and high mountains, with temperate air, and pleasant, clear, and moderate nights: of the which particularity the ancient writers having no certain knowledge, affirmed the said burnt line or Torrida zona, or Equinoctial, to be naturally unhabitable. As touching which thing I am able to witness the contrary by testimony of sight and feeling, as by most certain senses, having lived many years in these regions, by reason whereof better credit ought to be given to me, then to such as have grounded their opininion only upon conjectures. And to speak further of the situation of these regions, you shall understand that the coast of the North sea, being in the gulf of Vraba, and in the port of Dariena, where the ships arrive which come out of Spain, is in the sixth degree and a half, and in the seventh, and from six and a half, unto eight, except a small point which entereth into the sea toward the North. That point which of this land and new part of the world lieth most toward the East, is the cape of saint Augustine, which is in the eight degree: So that the said gulf of Vraba, is distant from the Equinoctial line, from a hundred & twenty, to a hundred and thirty leagues, and three quarters of a league, after that account of xvii leagues and a half for every degree from pole to pole: and thus for a little more or less, goeth all the coast. By reason whereof, in the city of Sancta Maria Antiqua in Dariena, and in all that course of the foresaid gulf of Vraba, at all times of the year the days and nights are in manner of equal length: and if there be any difference between them by reason of this small distance from the Equinoctial, it is so little, that in xxiiii hours, making a natural day, it can not be perceived but by the judgement of speculative men, and such as understand the sphere: From hence the North star is seen very low. And when the stars, which are called the guardens of the North star, are under the Chariot, it can not be seen, because it is under the horizontal. And whereas I have said before that it raineth in these regions at certain ordinary times, it is so in deed: For it is winter and summer there at contrary times to that which is in Spain, where the greatest cold of frost and rain is in December and january, and the greatest heat of summer about saint john's day at Midsummer, or in the month of july: But in golden Castille or Beragua, it is contrary, for the summer and time of greatest drought & without rain, is at Christmas, and a month before, and a month after, & the time when it raineth most, is about Midsummer, and a month before, and a month after. And this season which they call winter, is not for that it is any colder then, then at any other time of the year, or hotter at Christmas then at other seasons, the time in these regions being ever after one manner: but for that, that, in this time which they call winter, the Sun is hid from their sights, by reason of clouds and rain, more than at other times. Yet forasmuch as for the most part of the year they live in a clear, open, and temperate air, they somewhat shrink and feel a little cold during the time of the said moist and cloudy air, although it be not cold in deed, or at the least such cold as hath any sensible sharpness.   

Of divers particular things, as worms, serpents, beasts, fowls, trees. etc.  
MAny other things might be said, and much differing from these whereof I have spoken. But to let pass the multitude of things which are as variable as the power of nature is infinite, and to speak of such things as come chiefly to my remembrance, as most worthy to be noted, I will first speak of certain little and troublous beasts, which may seem to be engendered of nature to molest & vex men, to show them & give them to understand, how small and vile a thing may offend and disquiet them, to th'end that they may remember the principal end for the which they were created, that is, to know their maker and procurer of their salvation by the way which is open to all Christian men, and all other which will open the eyes of their understanding. And although the things whereof we intend now to speak, may seem vile and little to be esteemed, yet are they worthy to be noted and considered, to understand the difference and variable works of nature. So it is therefore, that whereas in many parts of the firm land, by the which as well the Christians as Indians do travail, there are such marshes and waters in the way, that they are fain to go without breeches among the herbs and weeds, by reason whereof, certain small beasts or worms (which they call Garapates) much like unto tykes, cleave fast to their legs. These worms are as little as the powder of beaten salt, and cleave so fast, that they can by no means be taken away, except the place be nointed with oil: and after that the legs be nointed a while with oil, or the other parts where these little tykes are fastened, they scrape the place with a knife, and so take them away. But the Indians which have no oil, smoke them, and burn them with fire, and abide great pains in taking them away by this means. Of other little beasts which trouble men, and are engendered in their heads or other parts of their bodies, I say that the Christian men which travail into these parts, have them but seldom times, and that not past one or two, & this also very seldom: For passing by the line of the Diameter where the compass maketh difference of sailing by the wind called Greco, (that is, North-east) and Magistral (that is, south-west) which is in the course of the Islands of Azori, they sail but a little way following our voyage by the west, but that all the lice which the Christians carry with them, or are engendered in their heads, or other places of their bodies, die and utterly consume by little and little, and are not engendered in India, except in the heads of little children in those parts, aswell among the children of the Christians which are borne there, as also among the natural Indians, who have them commonly in their heads, and sometimes in other parts of their bodies, and especially they of the province of Cueva, which is a region containing more than a hundred leagues in length, and embraceth the one and the other coast of the North sea, and of the East. When these Indians are infected with this filthiness, they dress and cleanse one an other: And they that exercise this, are for the most part women, who eat all that they take, and have herein such dexterity by reason of their exercise, that our men can not lightly attain thereunto. There is also another thing greatly to be considered: and this is, how the Christian men, being there clean from this filthiness of India, aswell in their heads as the rest of their bodies, yet when they return to come again into Europe, and begin to arrive in that place of the Ocean sea where we said before that these lice died and forsook them, suddenly in their repassing by the same clime (as though these lice had tarried for them in that place) they can by no means avoid them for the space of certain days, although they change their shirts two or three times in a day: These lise are at the first as little as nits, and grow by little and little, until they be of the bigness that they are in Spain. This have I oftentimes proved, having now four times passed the Ocean sea by this voyage. Beside these worms and vermyn whereof we have spoken, there is another little mysch●uous worm, which we may number among the kinds of 〈◊〉, this pestilence the Indians call Nigua, and is much less than a flea: it pierceth the flesh of a man, and so laun●eth or cutteth the same (while in the mean time it can neither be seen nor taken) that from some it hath cut of their hands, and from other their feet, until the remedy was found to anoint the place with oil, and scrape it with a razor. In the firm land in golden Castyle or Beragua, 
Vipers.  there are many vipers like unto them of Spain: they that are bitten of them, die in short space, for few live to the fourth day, except present remedy. Of these, some are of less kind than other, and have their tail somewhat round, and leap in the air to assail men, and for this cause, some call this kind of vipers Tyro: their biting is most venomous, and for the most part incurable. One of them chanced to bite an Indian maid which served me in my house, to whom I caused the Surgians to minister their ordinary cure, but they could do her no good, nor yet get one drop of blood out of her, but only a yellow water, so that she died the third day for lack of remedy, as the like hath chanced to divers other: This maid was of the age of xiiii years, and spoke the Spanish tongue as if she had been borne in Castyle: she said that the viper which bit her on the foot, was two spans long, or little less, and that to bite her, she leapt in the air for the space of more than six paces, as I have heard the like of other credible persons. I have also seen in the firm land a kind of adders, 
Adders.  very small, and of seven or eight foot long: these are so red, that in the night they appear like burning cools, and in the day seem as red as blood, these are also venomous, but not so much as the vipers. There are other much less, and shorter, and blacker: these come out of the rivers, and wander sometimes far on the land, and are likewise venomous. There are also other adders of a russet colour: these are somewhat bigger than the viper, and are hurtful and venomous. There are likewise an other sort of many colours, and very long: of these I saw one in the year of Christ .1515. in the Island of Hispaniola, near unto the sea coasts, at the foot of the mountains called Pedernales, when this adder was slain, I measure her, and found her to be more than twenty foot long, & somewhat more than a man's fist in byggnesse: and although she had three or four deadly wounds with a sword, yet died she not, nor stonke the same day, insomuch that her blood continued warm all that tyme. There are also in the marishes and deserts of the firm land many other kinds of Lysartes, Dragons, 
Dragons.  and other divers kinds of Serpents, whereof I intend not here to speak much, because I have more particularly entreated of these things in my general history of the West Indies. There are also Spiders of marvelous bigness, 
Spider's  and I have seen some with the body and legs bigger than a man's hand extended every way, and I once saw one of such bigness, that only her body was as big as a sparrow, and full of that lawn whereof they make their webs: this was of a dark russet colour, with eyes greater than the eyes of a sparrow, they are venomous, and of terrible shape to heholde. There are also Scorpions, and divers other such venomous worms. Whereby we may see, that where as natural causes and influence of the planets are of strongest activity, they cease not to engender and bring forth both good and bad, according to the dispotion of the matter, which they also do partly dispose, as the philosophers affirm. Furthermore in the firm land, there are many Toads, being very noyous and hurtful by reason of their great multitude, they are not venomous, they are seen in great abundance in Dariena, where they are so big that when they die in the time of drought, the bones of some of them (and especially the rib) are of such greatness, that they appear to be the bones of Cats, or of some other beasts of the same bigness. But as the waters diminish, and the moisture consumeth in the time of drought (as I have said) they also consume therewith, until the year next following when the rain and moisture increase, at which time they are seen again. Nevertheless, at this present there is no such quantity of them, as was wont to be, by reason that as the land is better cultured by the Christians, aswell by the felling of woods and shrubs, as also by the pasture of kine, Horses, and other beasts, so is it apparent that this poison diminisheth daily, whereby that region becometh more wholesome and pleasant: these Toads sing after three or four sorts, for some of them sing pleasantly, other like ours of Spain, some also whistle, and other some make an other manner of noise: they are likewise of divers colours, as some green, some russet or grey, and some almost black, but of all sorts they are great and filthy, and noyous by reason of their great multitude, yet are they not venomous as I have said. There are also a strange kind of Crabs, which come forth of certain holes of the earth, 
Crabs.  that they themselves make: the head and body of these make one round thing, much like unto the hood of a Faulkon, having four feet coming out of the one side, & as many out of the other: they have also two mouths, like unto a pair of small pincers, the one bigger than the other, wherewith they bite, but do no great hurt, because they are not venomous: their skin and body is smooth, and thin, as is the skin of a man, saving that it is somewhat harder, their colour is russet, or white, or blewe, and walk sydelong, they are very good to be eaten, insomuch that the Christians travailing by the firm land, have been greatly nourished by them, because they are found in manner every where: in shape and form they are much like unto the Crab which we paint for the sign Cancer, and like unto those which are found in Spain in Andalusia in the river Guadalchiber, where it entereth into the sea, and in the sea coasts there about, saving that these are of the water, and the other of the land: they are sometimes hurtful, so that they that eat of them die, but this chanceth only when they have eaten any venomous thing, or of the venomous apples wherewith the Canible archers poison their arrows, whereof I will speak hereafter, and for this cause the Christians take heed how they eat of these Crabs, if they find them near unto the said apple trees. Furthermore in these Indies, aswell in the firm land, as in the Islands, there is found a kind of Serpents, which they call . Y. V anas, which some call juannas, 
Serpents called juanni.  these are terrible and fearful to sight, and yet not hurtful, they are very delicate to be eaten, and it is not yet known whether they be beasts of the land, or fishes, because they live in the water, and wander in the woods, and on the land: they have four feet, and are commonly bigger than Coneys, and in some places bigger than Otters, with tails like Lysartes or Eutes: their skin is spotted, and of the same kind of smoothness or bareness, although of divers colours: upon the ridge of their backs, they have many long pricks, their teeth are very sharp, and especially their fangs or dog teeth, their throats are long and large, reaching from their beards to their breasts, of the like skin to the residue of their bodies: they are dumb, and have no voice, or make any noise, or cry, although they be kept tied to the foot of a chest, or any other thing, for the space of twenty or xxv days, without any thing to eat or drink, except they give them now and then a little of the bread of Cazabbi, or some such other thing: they have four feet, and their fore feet as long as a man's finger, with claws like the claws of a bird, but weaker, and such as can not grasple or take hold of any thing: they are much better to be eaten then to behold, for few that see them, will have desire to eat of them, by reason of their horrible shape, except such as have been accustomed to the beasts of these regions, which are more horrible and fearful, as this is not, but only in appearance: their flesh is of much better taste than the flesh of Coneys, and more wholesome, for it hurteth none but only such as have had the french pox, insomuch that if they have been touched of that infirmity, although they have been whole of long time, nevertheless they feel hurt, and complain of the ear-ring of these juannas, as hath been oftentimes proved by experience. There are found in the firm land certain birds, so little, that the whole body of one of them is no bigger than the top of the bigest finger of a man's hand, and yet is the bare body without the feathers not half so big: This bird, beside her littleness, is of such velocity and swiftness in fleeing, that who so seeth her fleeing in the air, can not see her flap or beat her wings after any other sort than do the Dorres, or humble bees, or beetles: so that there is no man that seeth her flee, that would think her to be any other than a Dorre: they make their nests according to the proportion of their bygnes, and I have seen that one of these birds with her nest put in a pair of gold weights, altogether hath weighed no more than .2. Tomini, which are in poise .24. grains, with the feathers, with out the which she should have weighed somewhat less. And doubtless when I consider the fineness of the claws & feet of these birds, I know not whereunto I may better liken them, then to the little birds which the lymners of books are accustomed to paint on the margin of church books, and other books of divine service. Their feathers are of many fair colours, as golden, yellow, and green, beside other variable colours, their beak is very long for the proportion of their bodies, and as fine and subtle as a sowing needle: they are very hardy, so that when they see a man climb the tree where they have their nests, they flee at his face, & strike him in the eyes, coming, going, and returning with such swiftness, that no man would lightly believe it, that hath not seen it: and certainly these birds are so little, that I durst not have made mention hereof, if it were not that divers other which have seen them as well as I can bear witness of my saying: they make their nests of flocks and hear of cotton, whereof there is great plenty in these regions, and serveth well for their purpose. But as touching the birds, fowls, and beasts of these Indies, because they are innumerable, both little and great, I intend not to speak much here, because I have spoken more largely hereof in my general history of the Indies. There is an other kind of beasts seen in the firm land, which seemeth very strange and marvelous to the Christian men to behold, and much differing from all other beasts which have been seen in other parts of the world: these beasts are called Bardati, and are four footed, having their tail and all the rest of their bodies covered only with a skin like the coperture of a barbed horse, or the chequered skin of a Lisarte or Crocodile, of colour between white and russet, inclining somewhat more to white. This beast is of form and shape much like to a barbed horse, with his barbs and flankets in all points, and from under that which is the barb and coperture, the tail cometh forth, and the feet in their place, the neck also & the ears in their parts, and in fine all things in like sort as in a barbed courser: they are of the bigness of one of these common dogs, they are not hurtful, they are filthy, and have their habitation in certain hillocks of earth, where dygging with their feet, they make their dens very deep, & the ho●es thereof, in like manner as do Coneys, they are very excellent to be eaten, & are taken with nets, and some also killed with Crossbows: they are likewise taken oftentimes when the husbandmen burn the stubble in sowing time, or to renew the herbage for kine and other beasts. I have oftentimes eaten of their flesh, which seemeth to me of better taste than kids flesh, and wholesome to be eaten. And if these beasts had ever been seen in these parts of the world, where the first barbed horses had their original, no man would judge but that the form and fashion of the coperture of horses furnished for the wars, was first devised by the sight of these beasts. There is also in the firm land an other beast, called Orso Formigaro, that is, the Ant bear. This beast in hear and colour, is much like to the Bear of Spain, 
Bears.  and in manner of the same making, save that he hath a much longer snout, and is of evil sight: they are oftentimes taken only with staves, without any other weapon, and are not hurtful, they are also taken with dogs, because they are not naturally armed, although they bite somewhat, they are found for the most part about and near to the hyllockes where are great abundance of Ants. For in these regions is engendered a certain kind of Ants, very little and black, in the fields and plains where as grow no trees, 
Ants.  where by the instinct of nature these Ants separate themselves to engender far from the woods for fear of these Bears, the which because they are fearful, vile, and unarmed (as I have said) they keep ever in places full of trees, until very famine and necessity, or the great desire that they have to feed on these Ants, cause them to come out of the woods to hunt for them: these Ants make a hillock of earth to the height of a man, or somewhat more or less, and as big as a great chest, & sometimes as big as a Butt or a Hogshead, & as hard as a stone, so that they seem as though they were stones, set up to limit the ends & confines of certain lands. Within these hillocks, made of most hard earth, are innumerable and infinite little Ants, the which may be gathered by bushels when the hillock is broken: the which when it is sometimes moisted by rain, and then dried again by the heat of the Son, it breaketh, and hath certain small rifts, as little and subtile as the edge of a knife, and it seemeth that nature hath given sense to these Ants to find such a matter of earth, wherewith they may make the said hillock of such hardness, that it may seem a strong pavement made of lime and stone: and whereas I have proved and caused some of them to be broken, I have found them of such hardness, as if I had not seen I could not have believed, insomuch that they could scarcely be broken with pikes of Iron, so strong fortresses do these little beasts make for their safeguard against their adversary the Bear, who is chiefly nourished by them, and given them as an enemy, according to the common proverb which sayeth, Non e alcuna persona si libera, a chimanchi il suo Bargello, that is, there is no man so free, that hath not his persecutor or privy enemy. And here when I consider the marvelous providence which nature hath given to these little bodies, I call to remembrance the witty sentence of Pliny, where speaking of such little beasts, he sayeth thus, Why do we marvel at the Towrebearing shoulders of Elephants, and not rather where nature hath placed so many senses & such industry in such little bodies? Where is hearing, smelling, seeing, and feeling, yea, where are the veins and arteries (without which no beast can live or move) in these so little bodies, whereof some are so small that their whole bodies can scarcely be seen of our eyes: What shall we then say of the parts of the same? Yet even among these there are many of such sagasitie and industry, as the like is not seen in beasts of greater quantity, no nor yet in man. etc. But to return to the history. This enemy which nature hath given to these little beasts, useth this manner to assail them: When he resorteth to the hillock where the Ants lie hid as in their fortress, he putteth his tongue to one of the rifts whereof we have spoken, being as subtle as the edge of a sword, and therewith continual licking, maketh the place moist, the foam and froth of his mouth being of such property, that by continual licking the place, it enlargeth the rift in such sort by little and little, that at the length he easily putteth in his tongue, which he hath very long and thin, and much disproportionate to his body, and when he hath thus made free passage for his tongue into the hillock, to put it easily in and out at his pleasure, than he thrusteth it into the hole as far as he can reach, and so letteth it rest a good space, until a great quantity of the Ants (whose nature rejoiceth in heat and moister) have laden his tongue, and as many as he can contain in the hollowness thereof, at which time he suddenly draweth it into his mouth, and eateth them, and returneth again to the same practice immediately, until he have eaten as many as him listeth, or as long as he can reach any with his tongue. The flesh of this beast, is filthy and unsavoury, but by reason of the extreme shifts and necessity that the Christian men were put to at their first coming into these parts, they were enforced to prove all things, and so fell to the eating of these beasts: but when they had found more delicate meats, they fell into hatred with this. These Ants have th'appearance of the place of their entrance into the hillock, under the ground, and this at so little a hole, that it could hardly be found, if certain of them were not seen to pass in and out: but by this way the Bears could have no such power to hurt them as above at the said rifts, as I have said. There is an other strange beast, which by a name of contrary effect, the spaniards call Cagnuolo leggiero, 
A strange beast which seemeth a kind of chameleon.  that is, the light dog, whereas it is one of the slowest beasts in the world, and so heavy and dull in moving, that it can scarsety go fifty paces in a whole day: these beasts are in the firm land, and are very strange to behold for the disproportion that they have to all other beasts, they are about two spans in length when they are grown to their full bigness, but when they are very young, they are somewhat more gross then long: they have four subtle feet, and in every of them four claws like unto birds, and joined together, yet are neither their claws or their feet able to sustain their bodies from the ground, by reason whereof, and by the heaviness of their bodies, they draw their bellies on the ground: their necks are high and straight, and all equal like the pestle of a mortar, which is altogether equal even unto the top, without making any proportion or similitude of a head, or any difference except in the noddle, and in the tops of their necks: they have very round faces much like unto Owls, and have a mark of their own hear after the manner of a circle, which maketh their faces seem somewhat more long than large: they have small eyes and round, and nostrylles like unto Monkeys: they have little mouths, and move their ●eckes from one side to an other, as though they were astonished: their chief desire and delight is to cleave and stick fast unto trees, or some other thing whereby they may climb aloft, and therefore for the most part, these beasts are found upon trees, whereunto cleaving fast, they mount up by little and little, staying themselves by their long claws: the colour of their hear, is between russet and white, and of the proper colour of the hear of a weasel: they have no tails, and their voice is much differing from other beasts, for they sing only in the night, and that continually from time to time, singing ever six notes one higher than an other, so falling with the same, that the first note is the highest, and the other in a base tune, as if a man should say La, sol, fa, mi, re, ut, so this beast sayeth, Ha, ha, ha, ha, ha, ha. And doubtless, it seemeth unto me, that as I have said in the Chapter of the beast called Bardati, that those beasts might be the original and document to imbarbe horses: even so, the first invention of music might seem by the hearing of this beast, to have the first principles of that science, rather than by any other thing in the world. But now to return to the history. I say that in a short space after this beast hath song, and hath paused a while, she returneth again to the self same song, and doth this only in the night, and not in the day: By reason whereof, and also because of her evil sight, I think her to be a night beast, and the friend of darkness. Sometimes the Christian men find these beasts, and bring them home to their houses, where also they creep all about with their natural slowness, insomuch that neither for threatening or pricking they will move any faster than their natural and accustomed pace. And if they find any trees, they creep thither immediately, and mount to the top of the highest branch thereof, where they remain continually for the space of eight, or ten, or twenty days, without eating of any thing, as far as any man can judge. And whereas I myself have kept them in my house, I could never perceive other but that they live only of air, and of the same opinion are in manner all men of those regions, because they have never seen them eat any thing, but ever turn their heads and mouths toward that part where the wind bloweth most, whereby may be considered that they take most pleasure in the air. They bite not, nor yet can bite, having very little mouths: they are not venomous or noyous any way, but altogether brutish, and utterly unprofitable, and without commodity yet known to men, saving only to move their minds to contemplate the infinite power of God, who delighteth in the variety of creatures, whereby appeareth the power of his incomprehensible wisdom and majesty, so far to exceed the capacity of man's understanding. In these regions there are likewise found certain fowls or birds, which the Indians call Alcatraz: 
Fowls, and birds.  these are much bigger than Geese, 
Alcatraz.  the greatest part of their feathers are of russet colour, and in some parts yellow, their bills or beaks are of two spans in length, and very large near to the head, and growing small toward the point, they have great and large throats, and are much like to a foul which I saw in Flaunders in Brussels in your majesties palace, which the flemings call Haina: And I remember that when your majesty dined one day in your great hall, there was brought to your majesties presence a Cauderne of water with certain fishes alive, which the said foul did eat up whole, and I think verily that that foul was a foul of the sea, because she had feet like fowls of the water, as have also these Alcatrazi, which are likewise fowls of the sea, and of such greatness, that I have seen a whole coat of a man put into the throats of one of them in Panama, in the year .1521. And forasmuch as in that coast of Panama, 
Panama,  there passeth and fleeth a great multitude of these Alcatrazi, being a thing very notable, I will declare the manner hereof, as not only I, but also divers other now present in your majesties court have often times seen. Your majesty shall therefore understand, that in this place (as I have said before) the sea of Sur riseth and falleth two leagues and more from six hours to two hours: so that when it increaseth, the water of the sea arriveth so near to the houses of Panama, as doth our sea (called Mare Mediteraneum) in Barzalona, or in Naples: and when the said increasing of the sea cometh, there cometh also therewith such a multitude of the small fishes called Sardines, that it is so marvelous a thing to behold, that no man would believe it that hath not seen it. Insomuch that the Cacique (that is) the king of that land, at such time as I dwelled there, was bound daily, as he was commanded by your majesties governor, to bring ordinarily three canoas or barks full of the said sardines, and to unlade the same in the market place, which were afterward by the ruler of the city divided among the Christian men, without any cost or charge to any of them: insomuch that if the people had been a much greater multitude than they were, and as many as are at this present in Toledo, or more, and had none other thing to live by, they might have been sufficiently sustained by these sardines, beside the overplus which should have remained. But to return to the fowls, whereof we have spoken. As the sea cometh, and the sardines with the same, even so likewise come the said Alcatrazzi therewith, and flee continually over it, in such a multitude, that they appear to cover the upper part or floor of the water, and thus continue in mounting and falling from the air to the water, and from the water to the air, during all the time of their fishing: and assoon as they have taken any of these Sardines, they flee above the waters, and eat them incontinently, and suddenly return again to the water for more, continuing thus course by course without ceasing▪ in like manner when the sea falleth, they follow their fishing as I have said. There goeth also in the company of these fowls, an other kind of fowls, called Coda inforcata, (that is) the forked tail, whereof I have made mention before, & assoon as the Alcatraz mounteth from the water with her pray of the sardines, suddenly this Coda inforcata giveth her so many strokes, and so persecuteth her, that she causeth her to let fall the sardines which she hath in her mouth: the which assoon as they are fallen, and before they yet touch the water, the Coda inforcata catcheth them even in the fall, in such sort, that it is a great pleasure to behold the combat between them all the day long. The number of these Alcatrazzi is such, that the Christian men are accustomed to send to certain Islands and rocks which are near about Panama, with their boats or barks to take these Alcatrazzi, while they are yet young, and can not flee, and kill as many of them with staves as they will, until they have therewith laden their Barks or Canoas': these young ones are so fat and well fed, that they can not be eaten, and are taken for none other intent, but only to make grease for candles to burn in the night, for the which purpose it serveth very well, and giveth a clear light, and burneth easily. After this manner, and for this purpose, innumerable of them are killed: & yet it seemeth that the number of them that fish for sardines do daily increase. There are other fowls called Passere sempie, that is, simple sparrows: 
Passere sempie.  these are somewhat less than Seamewes', and have their feet like unto great Malardes, and stand in the water sometimes, and when the ships sail fifty or a hundred leagues about the Islands, these fowls beholding the ships coming toward them, break their flight, and fall down upon the sail yards, masts, and cables thereof, and are so simple and foolish, that they tarry until they may easily be taken with men's hands, and were therefore called of the mariners simple sparrows: they are black, and upon their black, have their head and shoulders of feathers of a dark russet colour: they are not good to be eaten, although the mariners have sometimes been enforced to eat them. There is an other kind of birds in the firm land, which the Christians call Picuti, because they have very great beaks, in respect of the littleness of their bodies, 
Picuti.  for their beaks are very heavy, and way more than their whole bodies beside: these birds are no bigger than quails, but have a much greater ambushment of feathers, insomuch that their feathers are more than their bodies: their feathers are very fair, and of many variable colours, their beaks are a quarter of a yard in length or more, and bending down toward the earth, and three fingers broad near unto the head: their tongues are very quills, wherewith they make a great hissing: they make holes in trees with their beaks, in the which they make their nests. And surely these birds are marvelous to behold, for the great difference which they have from all other birds that I have seen, aswell for their tongues (which are quills as I have said) as also for the strangeness of their sight, & disproportion of their great beasts, in respect of the rest of their bodies. There are no birds found that provide better for the safeguard of their young in the time of their breeding, to be without danger of wild cats, that they enter not into their nests to destroy their eggs or young, and this aswell by the strange manner of building their nests, as also by their own defence: and therefore when they perceive that the cats approach toward them, they enter into their nests, and holding their beaks toward the entrance of the same, stand at their defence, and so vex the cats, that they cause them to leave their enterprise. There are also other birds or sparrows, which the Christians by contrary effect call Matti, 
foolish sparrows.  that is fools: Whereas nevertheless there is no bird that showeth more wit and craft in defending her young from peril. These birds are little, & in manner black, and somewhat bigger than our Thrushes, they have certain white feathers in their necks, and the like sagasitie or sharpness of sense as have the birds or Pies called Gazzuole, they seldom times light upon the earth: they make their nests in trees separated from other, because the wild cats (called Mammoni) are accustomed to leap from tree to tree, not descending to the ground for fear of other beasts, except when they are enforced by thirst to come down to drink, at such times as they are sure not to be molested, and for this cause do not these birds make their nests but in trees far divided from other, they make them of a cubit in length, or more, after the manner of bags or little sacks, large at the bottom, and growing narrower and narrower toward the mouth, whereby they are fastened, having the hole whereat they enter into the sack, of such bigness as may only suffice to receive them. And to the end that the cats may not devour their young, if they chance to mount upon the trees where they have their nests, they use an other craft, which is, to make their nests in thick branches of trees, and to defend the same with sharp and strong thorns, implicate and set in such order, that no ma● is able to make the like, so that the cats can by no means put their legs into the hole of the neaste to take out the young birds, as well for the sharpness of the thorns, as also for the depth of the nests, in the bottom whereof, the young birds rest without danger of their enemy: for some of their nests being three or four spans in length, the leg of the cat can not reach to the bottom thereof. They use also an other policy, which is, to make many of their nests in one tree, the which they do for one of these two causes: that is, that either of their own natural disposition they are accustomed to go in great multitudes, and rejoice in the company of their own generation, as do the birds which we call stars, or else to the intent that if it should so chance that the cats should climb the trees where they make their nests, they might be a greater company to resist and molest the cats, at whose approach they make a fearful and terrible cry, whereby the cats are put to flight. Furthermore, in the firm land, and in the Islands, there are certain birds called Piche, or Gazzuole, 
Cazzuole.  somewhat like unto those which we call Woodwalles, or Woodpeckes, being less than ours of Spain: these are altogether black, and go hopping and leaping, their beaks are also black, and of the same fashion as are the Popingiays beaks, they have long tails, and are somewhat bigger than stars. There are other birds called Pintadellis, 
Pintadellis.  which are like unto certain green birds, which the italians call Fringuelli, and are of seven colours: these birds for fear of the cats, are ever wont to make their nests over the banks of rivers, or the sea, where the branches of trees so reach over the water that with a little weight they may bow down to the water: their nests are made so near the tops of the branches, that when the cats come thereon, the branches bend toward the water, and the cats turn back again for fear of falling: For although no beast in the world be more malicious than this, yet whereas the most part of beasts are naturally inclined to swim, this cat hath no manner of aptness thereunto, and is therefore soon drowned or strangled in the water, and by a privy sense of nature feareth the danger which he can not escape. These birds make their nests in such sort, that although they be we●te and filled with water, yet do they so suddenly rise up again, that the young birds are not thereby hurt or drowned. There are also many nightingalings, and other birds which sing marvelously with great melody and difference in singing: these birds are of marvelous divers colours the one from the other, some are altogether yellow, and some other of so excellent, delectable, and high a colour, as it were a Ruby, other are also of divers and variable colours, some of few colours, and other some all of one colour, being all so fair and beautiful, that in brightness and shining they excel all that are seen in Spain, or Italy, or other provinces of Europe? Many of these are taken with nets, lime twigs, and springs of divers sorts. 
Great fowls.  divers other sorts of great fowls like unto Eagles, and such other as live of pray, are found in the firm land, of such diversity, that it is in manner impossible to describe them all particularly: and forasmuch as I have more largely entreated hereof in my general history of the Indies, I think it not requysite here to make any further mention of the same.   

Of trees, fruits, and plants.  
THere is both in the firm land and the islands, 
Cocus.  a certain tree called Cocus, being a kind of Date trees, & having their leaves of the self same greatness as have the date trees which bear dates, but differ much in their growing, for the leaves of this Cocus grow out of the trunks of the tree, as do the fingers out of the hand, wreathing themselves one within an other, & so spreading abroad: these trees are high, & are found in great plenty in the coast of the sea of Sur, in the province of Cacique Chiman. These date trees bring forth a fruit after this sort: being altogether unite as it groweth on the tree, it is of greater circumference than the head of a man, & from the superficial part to the midst, which is the fruit, it is involved & covered with many webs much like unto those hirds of tow which they use in Andalusia. Of this tow or web, the East Indians make a certain kind of cloth, of three or four sorts, and cords for the sails of ships: but in these Indies of your majesty, they pass not for these cords, or this cloth that may be made of the fruit of Cocus, by reason of the great plenty that they have of the bombage or cotton of the gossampine trees. The fruit which is in the midst of the said tow, is (as I have said) as big as a man's fist, and sometimes twice as big, and more: It is in form like unto a walnut, or some other round thing, somewhat more long than large, and very hard, the rind or bark hereof, is as thick as the circle of letters of a rial of plate, and within, there cleaveth fast to the rind of the nut a carnosity or substance of coornel, of the thickness of half a finger, or of the least finger of the hand, and is very white, like unto a fair Almond, and of better taste and more pleasant. When this fruit is chewed, there remain certain crumbs, as do the like of Almonds: Yet if it be swallowed down, it is not unpleasant. For although that after the juice or moisture be gone down the throat before the said crumbs be swallowed, the rest which is eaten, seem somewhat sharp or sour, yet doth it not so greatly offend the taste, as to be cast away. While this Cocus is yet fresh and newly taken from the tree, they use not to eat of the said carnosity & fruit, but first beating it very much, and then straining it, they draw a milk thereof, much better and sweeter then is the milk of beasts, and of much substance, the which the Christian men of those regions put in the tortes or cakes which they make of the grain of Maizium whereof they make their bread, or in other bread as we put bread in porridge: so that by reason of the said milk of Cocus, the tortes are more excellent to be eaten without offence to the stomach: they are so pleasant to the taste, and leave it aswell satisfied as though it had been delighted with many delicate dishes. But to proceed further, your majesty shall understand, 
I have seen one of these fruits opened, the which when it was whole, if it were shaken the water was hard shogge therein as it were in a bottle, but in time it consumed and was partly congealed into a sa●te substance.  that in the place of the stone or coornell, there is in the midst of the said carnosity a void place, which nevertheless is full of a most clear and excellent water, in such quantity as may fill a great egg shell, or more, or less, according to the bigness of the Cacus, the which water surely, is the most substantial, excellent, and precious to be drunk, that may be found in the world: insomuch that in the moment when it passeth the palate of the mouth, and beginneth to go down the throat, it seemeth that from the sole of the foot, to the crown of the head, there is no part of the body but that feeleth great comfort thereby: as it is doubtless one of the most excellent things that may be tasted upon the earth, and such as I am not able by writing or tongue to express. And to proceed yet further, I say that when the meat of this fruit is taken from the vessel thereof, the vessel remaineth as fair and neat as though it were pullyshed, and is without of colour inclining toward black, and shineth or glistereth very fair, and is within of no less dilicatenesse. Such as have accustomed to drink in these vessels, and have been troubled with the disease called the fretting of the guts, say that they have by experience found it a marvelous remedy against that disease, and that it breaketh the stone, and provoketh urine. This fruit was called Cocus, for this cause, that when it is taken from the place where it cleaveth fast to the tree, there are seen two holes, and above them two other natural holes, which altogether do represent the gesture and figure of the cats called Mammoni, that is, Monkeys, when they cry, which cry the Indians call Coca, but in very deed, this tree is a kind of Date trees, and hath the same effect to heal fretting of the guts, that Pliny describeth all kinds of Date trees to have. There are furthermore in the firm land, trees of such bigness that I dare not speak thereof, 
Great trees.  but in place where I have so many witnesses which have seen the same as well as I. I say therefore, that a league from Dariena or the city of Sancta Maria Antiqua, there passeth a river very large and deep, which is called Cuti, over the which the Indians had laid a great tree, so traversing the same, that it was in the stead of a bridge, the which I myself with divers other that are at this present in your majesties court, have oftentimes passed over. And forasmuch as the said tree had line long there, and by the great weight thereof was so shrunk downward, and partly covered with water, that none could pass over it, but were wet to the knee, I being then in the year .1522. the official or justice in that city at your majesties appointment, caused an other great tree to be laid in that place, which in like manner traversed the river, and reached more than fifty foot over the further side: This tree was exceeding great, and rested above the water more than two cubytes, in the fall, it cast down all such other trees as were within the reach thereof, and discovered certain wines, which were so laden with black grapes of pleasant taste, that they satysfied more than fifty persons which ate their fill thereof. This tree in the thickest part thereof, was more than syxteene spans thick, and was nevertheless but little in respect of many other trees which are found in this province. For the Indians of the coast and province of Cartagenia, make barks or boats thereof (which they call Canoas',) of such bigness, being all one whole tree, that some contain a hundred men, some a hundred and thirty, and some more, having nevertheless such void space within the same, that there is left sufficient room to pass to and fro throughout all the Canoas'. Some of these are so large, beside the length, that they contain more than ten or twelve spans in breadth, and sail with two sails, as with the master sail and the tryncket, which they make of very good cotton. The greatest trees that I have seen in these parts, or in any other regions, was in the province of Guaturo, the king whereof rebelling from the obedience of your majesty, was pursued by me, and taken prisoner: at which time I with my company, passed over a very high mountain, full of great trees, in the top whereof, we found one tree, which had three roots, or rather divisions of the root above the earth, in form of a triangle, or trevet, 
A marvelous tree.  so that between every foot of this triangle or three feet, there was a space of twenty foot between every foot, and this of such height above the earth, that a laden Car● of those wherewith they are accustomed to bring home corn in the time of harvest in the kingdom of Toledo in Spain▪ might easily have passed through every of those partitions or windows which were between the three feet of the said tree. From the earth upward to the trunk of the tree, the open places of the divisions between these three feet, were of such beyght from the ground, that a footman with a javelin was not able to reach the place where the said feet joined together in the trunk or body of the tree, which grew of great height in one piece, and one whole body, or ever it spread in branches, which it did not before it exceeded in height the Tower of Saint Roman in the city of Toledo: from which height and upward, it spread very great and strong branches. Among certain Spaniards which climbed this tree, I myself was one, and when I was ascended to the place where it begun to spread the branches, it was a marvelous thing to behold a great country of such trees toward the province of Abrayme. This tree was easy to climb, by reason of certain Besuchi, (whereof I have spoken before) which grew wreathed about the tree, in such sort that they seemed to make a scaling Ladder. Every of the foresaid three feet which bore the body of the tree, was twenty spans in thickness, and where they joined all together about the Trunk or body of the tree, the principal Trunk was more than forty and five spans in circuit. I named the mountain where these trees grow, the mountain of three footed trees. And this which I have now declared, was seen of all the company that was there with me when (as I have said before) I took king Guaturo prisoner in the year .1522. Many things more might here be spoken as touching this matter, as also how there are many other excellent trees found of divers sorts and difference, as sweet Cedar trees, black Date trees, and many other, of the which some are so heavy that they cannot floote above the water, but sink immediately to the bottom, and other again as light as a Cork. As touching all which things I have written more largely in my general history of the Indies. And forasmuch as at this present I have entered to entreat of trees, before I pass any further to other things, I will declare the manner how the Indians kindle fire, only with wood and without fire, 
kindling of fire without fire.  the manner whereof is this. They take a piece of wood, of two spans in length, as big as the least finger of a man's hand, or as an arrow well pullyshed, and of a strong kind of wood which they keep only for this purpose: and where they intend to kindle any fire, they take two other pieces of wood, of the dryest and lightest that they can find, and bind them fast together one with an other, as close as two fingers joined: in the midst or between these, they put the point of the first little staff made of hard and strong wood, which they hold in their hands by the top thereof, and turn or rub it round about continually in one place between the two pieces of wood which lie bound together upon the earth, which by that uncessant rubbing and chafing, are in short space kindled, and take fire. 
putrefied wood shining in the night.  I have also thought good hear to speak somewhat of such things as come to my remembrance of certain trees which are found in this land, and sometime also the like have been seen in Spain. These are certain putrefied trunks, which have line so long rotting on the earth, that they are very white, and shine in the night like burning firebrands, and when the spaniards find any of this wood, and intend privily in the night to make war and invade any province, when case so requireth that it shallbe necessary to go in the night, in such places where they know not the way, the foremost Christian man which guideth the way, associate with an Indian to direct him therein, taketh a little star of the said wood, which he putteth in his cap, hanging behind on his shoulders, by the light whereof he that followeth next to him, directeth his journey, who also in like manner beareth an other star behind him, by the shining whereof the third followeth the same way, and in like manner do all the rest, so that by this means none are lost or straggle out of the way. And forasmuch as this light is not seen very far, it is the better policy for the Christians, because they are not thereby disclosed before they invade their enemies. Furthermore as touching the natures of trees, one particular thing seemeth worthy to be noted, 
Pliny.  whereof Pliny maketh mention in his natural history, where he saith that there are certain trees which continue ever green, and never lose their leaves, as the bay tree, the Cedar, the Orange tree, & the Olive tree, with such other, of the which in altogether he nameth not past five or two. 
Trees which continue ever green.  To this purpose, I say, that in the Islands of these Indies, and also in the firm land, it is a thing of much difficulty to find two trees that lose or cast their leaves at any time: For although I have diligently searched to know the truth hereof, yet have I not seen any that lose their leaves, either of them which we have brought out of Spain into these regions, as Orange trees, Lemons, Cedars, Palms, or Date trees, and Pomegranate trees, or of any other in these regions, except only Cassia, which loseth his leaves, 
Cassia.  and hath a greater thing appropriate to itself only: which is, that whereas all other trees and plants of India spread their roots no deeper in the earth than the depth of a man's height, or somewhat more, not descending any further into the ground, by reason of the great heat which is found beneath that depth, yet doth Cassia pearl further into the ground, 
A secret thing.  until it find water: which by the Philosophers opinion should be the cause of a thin and watery radical moisture to such things as draw their nourishment thereof, 
Radycall moisture.  as fat and unctuous grounds with temperate heat, yield a fast and firm moisture to such things as grow in them, which is the cause that such trees lose not their leaves, as the said thin and waterish moisture is cause of the contrary, as appeareth by the said effect which is seen only in Cassia, and none other tree or plant in all these parties.   

Of Reeds or Canes.  
I Have not thought it convenient in the chapiture before, to speak of that whereof I intent now to entreat, of reeds or canes, to thintent that I would not mingle them with plants or trees, being things of themselves worthy to be particularly observed. So it is therefore, that in the firm land there are many sorts of reeds, so that in many places they make their houses thereof, covering them with the tops of the same, and making their walls of them in like manner, as I have said before: and among these kinds of reeds, there is one so great, that the canes thereof are as big as a man's leg in the knee, and three spanns in length from joint to joint, or more, insomuch that every of them is of capacity to contain a little bucket of water. In this kind, there are found some greater, and some less, of the which some they use to make quivers for arrows. There is found an other kind, which surely is marvelous, being little bigger than a javelyn, the canes whereof are longer than two spans: these reeds grow one far from an other, as some times twenty or thirty paces, and sometimes also two or three leagues: they grow in manner in all provinces in the Indies, and grow near to very high trees, whereunto they lean, and creep up to the tops of their branches, which they embrace, and descend again down to the earth. Their canes are full of most clear water, without any manner of taste or savour, either of the canes, or of any other thing, and such as if it were taken out of the freshest spring in the world, nor yet is it known that ever it hurt any that drunk thereof. For it hath oftentimes so chanced, that as the Christian men have travailed in these regions in desolate ways, where for lack of water they have been in great danger to die for thirst, they have escaped that peril by reason that they found the said reeds, of the water of whose canes they have drunk a great quantity, without any hurt thereof ensuing. Therefore when they find these in any place, they make water vessels of the canes thereof, and carry as many of them full of water as may suffice for one days journey: and sometime they carry so many, that they take for every man two or three quarts of water, which may serve them for many days, because it doth not corrupt, but remaineth still fresh and good.  
There are also certain plants, which the Christians call Platani. These are as high as trees, and become as big in the trunk as the knee of a man, or more. 
Platani.  From the foot to the top, they bear certain long and large leaves, being more than three spans in largeness, & about ten or twelve in length: the which when they are broken of the wind, the stalk remaineth whole in the midst. In the midst of this plant, in the highest part thereof, there groweth a cluster with forty or fifty platans about it, every of them being a span and a half in length, and as big as a man's arm in the small, or more, or less, according to the goodness of the soil where they grow: they have a rind not very thick, and easy to be broken, being within altogether full of a substance like unto the marrow of the bone of an Ox, as it appeareth when the rind or bark is taken from the same. This cluster ought to be taken from the plant, when any one of the platans begin to appear yellow, at which time they take it, and hang it in their houses, where all the cluster waxeth ripe, with all his platans. This cluster is a very good fruit, and when it is opened, and the rind taken of, there are found within it many good dry figs, which being roasted, 
figs.  or stewed in an Oven, in a close pot, or some such other thing, are of pleasant taste, much like to the conserve of Honey: they putrefy not on the sea so soon as some other fruits do, but continue fifteen days and more, if they be gathered somewhat green: they seem more delicate on the sea then on the land, not for that they any thing increase in goodness on the sea, but because that whereas on the sea other things are lacking, whereof is plenty on the land, those meats seem of best taste, which satisfy present necessity. This trunk or spryg which bringeth forth the said cluster, is a whole year in growing and bringing forth fruit, in which time it hath put forth round about it ten or twelve sprygges, as big as the first or principal, and multiplieth no less than the principal in bringing forth of clusters, with fruits likewise at their time, and also in bringing forth other and many sprygges, as is said before. From the which sprygges or trunks, as soon as the cluster of the fruit is taken away, the plant beginneth to dry and wither, which then they take out of the ground, because it doth none other then occupy it in vain, and without profit. They are so many, and do so marvelously increase and multiply, that it is a thing in manner encredible. They are exceeding moist, insomuch that when they are plucked up from the place where they grow, there ishueth forth a great quantity of water, aswell out of the plant, as out of the place where it grew, in such sort, that all the moisture of the earth far about, might seem to be gathered together about the trunk or block of the said plant, with the fruits whereof, the Ants are so far in love, that they are seen in great multitudes in the branches of the plants: so that for the multitude thereof, it sometime so chanceth, that men are enforced to take away the plants from their possession: these fruits are found at all times of the year. There is also an other kind of wild plants that groweth in the fields, which I have not seen but in the Island of Hispaniola, although they be found in other Islands of the Indies: 
Tunas.  these they call Tunas. They grow of a Thistle full of thorns, and bring forth a fruit much like unto great Figs, which have a crown like Meddlers, and are within of a high colour, with grains and the rind like unto a fig: they are of good taste, and grow abundantly in the fields in many places: They work a strange effect in such as eat them, for if a man eat two, or three, or more, they cause his urine to be of the very colour of blood, which thing chanced once to myself. For on a time as I made water, and saw the colour of my urine, I entered into a great suspicion of my life, being so astonished for fear, that I thought the same had chanced to me upon some other cause, insomuch that surely my imagination might have done me hurt, but that they which were with me did comfort me immediately, declaring the cause thereof, as they knew by experience, being ancient inhabitors in those regions. There groweth also an other plant, which the people of the country call Bihaos: this putteth forth certain straight branches, and very broad leaves, 
Bihaos.  which the Indians use for divers purposes: For in some places they cover their houses with the leaves thereof, couched and laid after the manner of thetche, whereunto it serveth very well: Sometimes also when it raineth, they cast these over their heads, to defend them from the water. They make also certain chests, which they call Havas, weaved after a strange sort, 
Havas.  and intermyxt with the leaves of this Bihaos. These chests are wrought in such sort, that although it rain upon them, or they chance to fall into the water, yet are not such things wet as are within them: they are made of the branches of the said Bihaos, with the leaves weaved together therewith: In these they keep salt, and other subtle things. They use them also for an other purpose, which is this: that finding them in the fields at such time as they have scarceness of victuals, they dig up the roots of these plants while they are yet young, or eat the plant itself, in that part where it is most tender, which is from a foot under the ground, where it is as tender and white as a reed or bulrush. And forasmuch as we are now come to the end of this narration, it cometh to my remembrance to make mention of an other thing, which is not far from my purpose: and this is, how the Indians do slain or die cloth of bombage cotton, or any other thing which they intend to die, of divers colours, as black, tawny, 
Dying of cotton.  green, blue, yellow, and red, which they do with the barks, or rinds, and leaves of certain trees, which they know by experience to be good for this practice: and by this art they make colours in such perfection and excellency, that no better can be devised. 
A strange thing.  But this seemeth a strange thing, that they do all this in one self same vessel: So that when they have caused the said rinds and leaves to boil together, they make in the same vessel without any change (as I have said) as many colours as them listeth: Which thing I suppose to come to pass, by the disposition of the colour which they have first given to the thing that they intend to die or colour, whether it be thread, web, or cloth, or any thing that they intend to colour.   

Of venomous Apples, wherewith they poison their arrows.  
THe Apples wherewith the Indian Cannibals envenom their arrows, grow on certain trees covered with many branches and leaves, being very green, and growing thick. They are laden with abundance of these evil fruits, and have their leaves like the leaves of a pear tree, but that they are less and rounder: the fruit is much like the muscadel pears of the Island of Sicily or Naples in form and bigness, and are in some parts stained with red spots, and of very sweet savour: these trees for the most part, grow ever by the sea coasts, and near unto the water, and are so fair and of pleasant savour, that there is no man that seeth them, but will desire to eat thereof, 
Note.  insomuch that if it may be spoken of any fruit yet growing on the earth, I would say that this was the unhappy fruit whereof our first parents Adam and Eve tasted, whereby they both lost their felicity, and procured death to them and their posterity. Of these fruits, and of the great Ants whose biting causeth swelling, (whereof I have spoken elsewhere) and of the Eutes, or Lysartes, and vipers, and such other venomous things, 
Cannibals archers.  the Cannibals which are the chief archers among the Indians, 
Wherewith they envenom their arrows.  are accustomed to poison their arrows, wherewith they kill all that they wound: These venoms they mingle together, and make thereof a black mass or composition, which appeareth like unto very black pitch. Of this poison I caused a great quantity to be burnt, in Sancta Maria Antiqua, in a place two leagues and more within the land, with a great multitude of their envenomed arrows and other munition, with also the house wherein they were reserved: This was in the year .1514. at such time as the army arrived there with captain Pedrarias da villa, at the commandment of the catholic king Don Ferdinando. 
Petrus Arias.  But to return to the history. These Apples (as I have said) grow near unto the sea. And whereas the Christians which serve your majesty in these parties, suppose that there is no remedy so profitable for such as are wounded with these arrows, as is the water of the sea, if the wound be much washed therewith, by which means some have escaped, although but few: yet to say the truth, albeit the water of the sea have a certain caustike quality against poison, it is not a sufficient remedy in this case, 
The water of the sea.  nor yet to this day have the Christians perceived that of fifty that have been wounded, three have recovered. But that your majesty may the better consider the force of the venom of these trees, you shall further understand, that if a man do but repose himself to sleep a little while under the shadow of the same, he hath his head & eyes so swollen when he riseth, that the eye lids are joined with the cheeks, and if it chance one drop or more of the dew of the said tree to fall into the eye, it utterly destroyeth the sight. The pestilent nature of this tree is such, that it can not be declared in few words. Of these, there groweth great plenty in the gulf of Vraba, toward the North coast, on the West and East side. 
The gulf of Uraba.  The wood of these trees when it burneth, maketh so great a stink, that no man is able to abide it, by reason it causeth so great a pain in the head.  
Among other trees which are in these Indies, aswell in the Islands, as in the firm land, there is an other kind which they call Xagua, whereof there is great plenty: 
Xagua.  they are very high, and straight, and fair to behold. Of these they use to make ●ykes, and javelyns of divers lengths and bigness: they are of a fair colour, between russet and white: this tree bringeth forth a great fruit as big as Papaver or Poppy, and much like thereunto, it is very good to be eaten when it is ripe. Out of this they get a very clear water, wherewith they wash their legs, and sometimes all their bodies, when they feel their flesh weighed, faint, or lose: the which water, beside that it hath a binding quality, it hath also this property, that whatsoever it toucheth, it staineth it black by little and little, until it be as black as get, which colour can not be taken away in less space than ten or twelve days: And if the nail be but touched therewith, it is so stained that it can by no means be taken away, until it either fall of, or grow out, and be clipped away by little & little, as I myself have oftentimes seen by experience.  
There is an other kind of trees which they call Hohi: these are very great and fair, 
Hohi.  
Some think these to be mirobalanes.  and cause wholesome air where they grow, and a pleasant shadow, and are found in great abundance: their fruit is very good, and of good taste and savour, and much like unto certain damsons or prunes being little and yellow, but their stone is very great, by reason whereof they have but little meat: their bark or rind boiled in water, maketh a wholesome bathe for the legs, because it bindeth and stayeth the looseness of the flesh, so sensibly that it is a marvel to consider. It is surely a wholesome and excellent bath against such faintness, and is the best tree that may be found in those parties to sleep under: For it causeth no heaviness of the head, as do divers other trees, which thing I speak, because the Christians are much accustomed in those regions to lie in the fields. It is therefore a common practice among them, that wheresoever they find these trees, there they spread their mattresses and beds wherein they sleep.  

Date trees.  There are also a kind of high Date trees, and full of thorns: the wood of these is most excellent, being very black, and shining, and so heavy that no part thereof can swim above the water, but sinketh immediately to the bottom. Of this wood they make their arrows and darts, 
Th'inhabitants of the sea of Sur.  also javelyns, spears, and pikes: and I say pikes, because that in the coasts of the sea of Sur, beyond Esquegua and Vracha, the Indians use great and long pikes, made of the wood of these Date trees. Of the same likewise they make clubs, and swords, and divers other weapons: Also vessels and household stuff of divers sorts, very fair and commodious. Furthermore of this wood the Christians use to make divers musical instruments, as Claricymballes, Lutes, Gitterns, and such other, the which beside their fair shining colour like unto gete, are also of a good sound, and very durable, by reason of the hardness of the wood.  
After that I have said thus much of trees and plants, I have thought good also to speak somewhat of herbs. 
An herb that beareth cords.  You shall therefore understand, that in these Indies there is an herb much like unto a yellow Lily, about whose leaves there grow and creep certain cords or laces, as the like is partly seen in the herb which we call lase savoury, but these of the Indies are much bigger, and longer, and so strong that they tie their hanging beds thereby, which they call Hamacas, whereof we have spoken elsewhere: these cords they call Cabuia, and Henequen, which are all one thing, 
Cabuia and Henequen.  saving that Henequen is less and of a finer substance, as it were line, and the other is grosser, like the week or twist of hemp, and is imperfect in comparison to the other: they are of colour between white and yellow, like unto abarne, and some also white. With Henequen, which is the most subtile and fine thread, the Indians saw in sunder fetters, chains, 
A strange thing.  or bars of Iron, in this manner: They move the thread of Henequen upon the Iron which they intend to saw or cut, drawing the one hand after the other as do they that saw, putting ever now and then a portion of fine sand upon the thread, or on the place or part of the Iron, where they continue rubbing the said thread, so that if the thread be worn, they take an other, and continue in their work as before, until they have cut in sunder the Iron, although it be never so big, and cut it as if it were a tender thing, and easy to be sawn.  
And forasmuch as the leaves of trees may be counted among herbs, 
Leaves.  I will here speak somewhat of the quality of the leaves of certain trees which are found in the Island of Hispaniola. These trees are so full of thorns, that there is no tree or plant that seemeth more wild and deformed: so that I can not well determine whether they be trees, or plants: they have certain branches full of large and deformed leaves, which branches were first leaves like unto the other. As the branches made of these leaves grow forth in length, there cometh other leaves of them: so that in fine it is a difficult thing to describe the form of these trees, except the same should be done by a painter, whereby the eye might conceive that wherein the tongue faileth in this behalf. The leaves of this tree are of such virtue, that being well beaten and spread upon a cloth, 
A leaf of great virtue.  after the manner of a plaster, and so laid to a leg or arm that is broken in many pieces, it healeth it in fifteen days, & maketh it as whole as though it had never been broken: During the time of this operation, it cleaveth so fast to the flesh, that it can not without much difficulty be taken away, but assoon as it hath healed the sore, and wrought his operation, it looseth itself from the place where it was laid, as I myself, and divers other which have proved it, know by experience.   

Of fishes, and of the manner of fishing.  
IN the sea coasts of the firm land, there are divers & sundry kinds of fishes, much differing in shape & form. And although it be impossible to speak of all, yet will I make mention of some. And first to begin at Sardines, you shall understand that there is found a kind of these fishes very large and with red tails, being a very delicate fish. The best kinds of other fishes are these, Moxarre, Diahace, Brettes, Dahaos, Thorne-backes, & Salmons: All these, and divers other which I do not now remember, are taken in great quantity in rivers. There are likewise taken very good Crevyshes. There are also found in the sea, certain other fishes, as Soles, Mackerel, Turbots, Palamite, Lizzes, Polpi, Chieppe, Xaibas, Locusts, Oysters, exceeding great Tortoises, 
Tiburons. Manates.  & Tiburoni of marvelous bigness: also Manates, and Murene, and many other fishes, which have no n●mes in our language, and these of such diversity and quantity, as can not be expressed without large writing and long tyme. But to let pass to entreat particularly of the multitude of fishes, I intend to speak chiefly, and somewhat largely, of three sorts of most notable fishes: whereof the first is, the great Tortoises, the second is called Tiburon, and the third Manate. And to begin at the first, I say that in the Island of Cuba, 
Great Tortoises.  are found great Tortoises (which are certain shell fishes) of such bigness that ten or fifteen men are scarcely able to lift one of them out of the water, as I have been informed of credible persons dwelling in the same Island. But of that which I myself have seen, I can testify, that in the firm land, in the village of Acla, there are of this sort some taken and killed of such bigness, that six men with much difficulty could scarcely draw them out of the water, and commonly the least sort of them are as much as two men may carry at a burden: that which I saw lifted up by six men, had her shell a yard and a quarter in length, and in breadth more than five yards. The manner of taking them, is this: It sometimes chanceth that in their great nets (which they call shoot nets) there are found certain Tortoises of the common sort, in great quantities, and when they come out of the sea, and bring forth their eggs, and go together by companies from the sea, to feed on the land, the Christians or Indians follow their steps which they find in the sand, and soon overtake them, because they are very heavy and slow in going, although they make all the hast they can to return to the sea, assoon as they espy any body. When they that pursue them have overtaken them, they put a stake or staff under their legs, and overturn them on their backs as they are yet running, so that they can go no further, nor yet rise again or turn, and thus they suffer them to lie still while they follow after the rest, which they overturn in like manner: and by this means take very many, at such times as they come forth of the sea as I have said: This fish is very excellent and wholesome to be eaten, and of good taste. The second of the three fishes whereof I have spoken, is the Tiburon: this is a very great fish, and very quick and swift in the water, 
Tiburons.  and a cruel devourer: these are oftentimes taken, aswell when the ships are under sail in the Ocean, as also when they lie at anchor, or at any other time, and especially the least kind of these fishes. When the ships are under sail, the bigest sort are taken after this manner. When the Tiburon seeth the ship sailing, he followeth it swimming behind, the which things the mariners seeing, cast forth all the filth of the ship into the sea for the fish to eat, who nevertheless followeth them with equal pace, although they make never such haste with full wind and sails, and walloweth on every side and about the ship, and thus followeth it sometime for the space of a hundred & fifty leagues, and more, and when the mariners are disposed to take them, they cast down by the stern of the ship a hook of Iron, as big as the bigest finger of a man's hand, of three spans in length, and crooked like a fyshehooke, with beards according to the bigness thereof, and fastened to an Iron chain of five or six links near unto the end, and from thence tied with a great rope, fastening also on the hook for a bait, a piece of some fish, or hogs flesh, or some other flesh, or the bowels and entrails of an other Tiburon which they have taken before, which may easily be done, for I have seen niene taken in one day, and if they would have taken more, they might also. Thus when the Tiburon hath pleasantly followed the ship a long voyage, at the length he swalloweth the bait with the hook, and aswell by his striving to flee or escape, as also by the swift passage of the ship, the hook overthwarteth and catcheth hold of his chaps: the which fish when it is taken, it is of such huge bigness, that twelve or fifteen men are scarcely able to draw it out of the water, and life it into the ship, where one of the mariners giveth it many knocks on the head with a club or beetle, until he have slain it: they are sometimes found of ten or twelve foot long, and of five, six, or seven spans in breadth, where they are brodest: they have very great and wide mouths, to the proportion of the rest of their bodies, and have two rows of teeth, the one somewhat separate from the other, of cruel shape, and standing very thick. When they have slain this fish, they cut the body thereof in small pieces, and put it to dry, hanging it three or four days at the cords of the sail clothes to dry in the wind, and then eat it: It is doubtless a good fish, and of great commodity to serve the ships for victuals for many days: the least of these fishes are most wholesome and tender, it hath a skin much like to the skin of a Sole whereunto the said Tiburon is like in shape: Which I say, because Pliny hath made mention of none of these three fishes, among the number of them whereof he writeth in his natural history. 
Pliny.  These Tiburons come forth of the sea, and enter into the rivers, where they are no less perilous than great Lisartes or Crocodiles, whereof I have spoken largely before: For they devour men, kine, and horses, even as do the Crocodiles: 
Crocodiles.  they are very dangerous in certain washing places or pools by the rivers sides, and where they have devoured at other times. divers other fishes both great and small, of sundry sorts and kinds, are accustomed to follow the ships going under sail, of the which I will speak somewhat when I have written of Manate, which is the third of the three whereof I have promised to entreat. 
Manates.  Manate therefore, is a fish of the sea, of the bigest sort, and much greater than the Tiburon in length and breadth, and is very bruityshe and vile, so that it appeareth in form like unto one of those great vessels made of goats skins, wherein they use to carry new wine in Medina de Campo, or in Arevalo: the head of this beast is like the head of an Ox, with also like eyes, and hath in the place of arms, two great stumps wherewith he swimmeth: It is a very gentle and tame beast, and cometh oftentimes out of the water to the next shore, where if he find any herbs or grass, he feedeth thereof. Our men are accustomed to kill many of these, and divers other good fishes, with their crossbows, pursuing them in barks or Canoas', because they swim in manner above the water: the which thing when they see, they draw them with a hook tied at a small cord, but somewhat strong: As the fish fleeth away, the archer letteth go, and prolongeth the cord by little and little, until he have let it go many fathams: at the end of the cord, there is tied a cork, or a piece of light wood, and when the fish is gone a little way, and hath coloured the water with his blood, and feeleth himself to faint and draw toward the end of his life, he resorteth to the shore, and the archer followeth, gathering up his cord, whereof while there yet remain six or eight fathams, or somewhat more or less, he draweth it toward the land, and draweth the fish therewith by little and little, as the waves of the sea help him to do it the more easily: then, with the help of the rest of his company, he lifteth this great beast out of the water to the land, being of such bigness, that to convey it from thence to the city, it shallbe requisite to have a cart with a good yoke of Oxen, and sometimes more, according as these fishes are of bigness, some being much greater than other some in the same kind, as is seen of other beasts: Sometimes they life these fishes into the Canoa or bark, without drawing them to the land as before, for as soon as they are slain, they float above the water: And I believe verily that this fish is one of the best in the world to the taste, and the lykeest unto flesh, especially so like unto beef, that who so hath not seen it whole, can judge it to be none other when he seeth it in pieces then very beef or veal, and is certainly so like unto flesh, that all the men in the world may herein be deceived: the taste likewise, is like unto the taste of very good veal, and lasteth long, if it be powdered: so that in fine, the Base of these parts, is by no means like unto this. 
The fish Manate.  This Manate hath a certain stone, or rather bone in his head within the brain, which is of quality greatly appropriate against the disease of the stone, if it be burnt and ground into small powder, and taken fasting in the morning when the pain is felt, 
A remedy against the stone.  in such quantity as may lie upon a penny, with a draft of good white wine: For being thus taken three or four mornings, it acquieteth the grief, as divers have told me which have proved it true, and I myself by testimony of sight, do witness that I have seen this stone sought of divers for this effect.  
There are also divers other fishes as big as this Manate, among the which there is one called Vihuella. This fish beareth in the top of his head a sword, 
The sword fish.  being on every side full of many sharp teeth, this sword is naturally very hard and strong, of four or five spans in length, and of proportion according to the same bigness: and for this cause is this fish called Spada, that is, the sword fish. Of this kind some are found as little as Sardines, and other so great, that two yokes of Oxen are scarcely able to draw them on a Cart. But whereas before I have promised to speak of other fishes, which are taken in these seas while the ships are under sail, I will not forgeat to speak of the Tunnye, which is a great and good fish, 
Tunnye.  and is oftentimes taken and killed with trout spears, and hooks, cast in the water, when they play and swim about the ships. In like manner also are taken many Turbots, which are very good fishes as are lightly in all the sea. And here is to be noted, 
Turbut.  that in the great Ocean sea, there is a strange thing to be considered, which all that have been in the Indies affirm to be true: 
Note.  And this is, that like as on the land there are some provinces fertile and fruitful, and some barren, even so doth the like chance in the sea: So that at some winds the ships sail fifty, or a hundred, or two hundred leagues and more, without taking or seeing of one fish: and again, in the self same Ocean in some places, all the water is seen tremble by the moving of the fishes, where they are taken abundantly. It cometh further to my remembrance to speak somewhat of the fleeing of fishes, which is doubtless a strange thing to behold, 
Fleeing fishes.  and is after this manner. When the ships sail by the great Ocean, following their voyage, there riseth sometimes on the one side or on the other, many companies of certain little fishes, of the which the bigest is no greater than a Sardyne, and so diminish less and less from that quantity, that ●ome of them are very little: these are called Volatori, that is, fleeing fishes: they rise by great companies and flocks, in such multitudes that it is an astonyshment to behold them: Sometimes they rise but little from the water, & (as it chanceth) continue one flight for the space of an hundred paces, and sometimes more, or less, before they fall again into the sea, sometimes also they fall into the ships. And I remember, that on an evening when all the company in the ship were on their knees, singing Salve regina in the highest part of the Castle of the poop, and sailed with a full wind, there passed by us a flock of these fleeing fishes, and came so near us, that many of them fell into the ship, among the which, two or three fell hard by me, which I took alive in my hand, so that I might well perceive that they were as big as Sardines, and of the same quantity, having two wings or quills growing out of their sins, like unto those wherewith all fishes swim in rivers: these wings are as long as the fishes themselves. As long as their wings are moist, they bear them up in the air, but assoon as they are dry, they can continue their flight no further then as I have said before, but fall immediately into the sea, and so rise again, and flee as before from place to place. In the year a thousand, five hundred, and fyfteene, when I came first to inform your Majesty of the state of the things in India, and was the year following in Flaunders in the time of your most fortunate success in these your kingdoms of Aragonie and Castyle, whereas at that voyage I sailed above the Island Bermuda, otherwise called Garza, being the furthest of all the Islands that are found at this day in the world, 
The Island of Bermuda  and arriving there at the depth of eight yards of water, and distant from the land as far as the shot of a piece of Ordinance, I determined to send some of the ship to land, aswell to make search of such things as were there, as also to leave in the Island certain Hogs for increase. But the time not serving my purpose by reason of contrary wind, I could bring my ships no nearer the Island, being twelve leagues in length, and two in breadth, and about thirty in circuit, lying in the three and thyrtieth degree of the North side. While I remained here, I saw a strife and combat between these fleeing fishes, and the fishes named Guilt heads, & the fowls called Seamewes', and cormorants, which surely seemed unto me a thing of as great pleasure and solace as could be devised, while the Guilt heads swum on the brim of the water, and sometimes lifted their shoulders above the same, to raise the fleeing fishes out of the water to drive them to flight, and follow them swimming to the place where they fall, to take and eat them suddenly. Again on the other side, the Seamewes' and cormorants, take many of these fleeing fishes, 
Not to high for the Pie, nor to low for the Crow.  so that by this means they are neither safe in the air, nor in the water. In the self same peril and danger do men live in this mortal life, wherein is no certain security, neither in high estate, nor in low. Which thing surely aught to put us in remembrance of that blessed and safe resting place which God hath prepared for such as love him, who shall acquiete and finish the travails of this troublous world, wherein are so many dangers, and bring them to that eternal life where they shall find eternal security and rest. But to return to the history: these birds and fowls which I saw, were of the Island of Bermuda, near unto the which I saw these fleeing fishes: for they could be of no other land, forasmuch as they are not accustomed to wander far from the coasts where they are bred.   

Of th'increase and decrease (that is) rising and falling of our Ocean sea, and South sea, called the sea of Sur.  
I Will now speak of certain things which are seen in the Province, or at the least in the city of golden Castyle, otherwise called Beragua, and in the coasts of the North sea, & of the South sea, 
Beragua.  called the sea of Sur, not omitting to note one singular and marvelous thing which I have considered of the Ocean sea, whereof hitherto no Cosmographer, Pilot, or mariner, or any other, have satisfied me. I say therefore, as it is well known to your majesty, and all such as have knowledge of the Ocean sea, that this great Ocean casteth from itself the sea Mediterraneum by the mouth of the straight of Gibilterra, in the which the water, 

The west Ocean.  
The sea Mediterraneum.   from th'end & furthest part of that sea, even unto the mouth of the said straight, either in the East toward the coast commonly called Levant, or in any other part of the said sea Mediterraneum, the sea doth not so fall nor increase, as reason would judge for so great a sea, but increaseth very lit●e, and a small space: Nevertheless, without the mouth of the straight in the main Ocean, it increaseth and falleth very much, and a great space of ground, from six hours to two hours, as in all the coasts of Spain, Britan●●, Flaunders, Garmanie, and England. The self same Ocean s●a in the firm land newly found, in the coasts of the same lying toward the North, doth neither rise nor fall, 
Hispaniola. Cuba.  nor likewise in the Islands of Hispaniola and Cuba, and all the other Islands of the same lying toward the north, for the space of three thousand leagues, but only in like manner as doth the sea Mediterraneum in Italy, which is in manner nothing, in respect to that increase and decrease which the said Ocean hath in the coasts of Spain and Flaunders. But this is yet a greater thing, that also the self same Ocean in the coasts of the said firm land lying toward the South, in the city of Panama, and also in the coast of that land which lieth toward the East and West from that city, as in the Island of pearls or Margaritea, which the Indians call Tarrarequi, and also in Taboga and Otoque, and in all other Islands of the south sea of Sur, the water riseth and falleth so much, that when it falleth, it goeth in manner out of sight, which thing I myself have seen oftentimes. And here your majesty may note an other thing, that from the north sea to the south sea, being of such difference the one from the other in rising and falling, 
The South sea.  yet is the land that divideth them not past eighteen or twenty leagues in breadth from coast to coast: So that both the said seas, being all one Ocean, this strange effect is a thing worthy greatly to be considered of all such as have inclination and desire to know the secret works of nature, wherein the infinite power and wisdom of God is seen to be such, as may allure all good natures to reverence and love so divine a majesty. And whereas by the demonstrations of learned men I am not satisfied of the natural cause hereof, 
The power and wisdom of God is seen in his creatures.  I content myself to know and believe, that he which hath made these things, doth know this and many other, which he hath not granted to the reason of man to comprehend, much less to so base a wit as mine is. They therefore that are of greater understanding, shall search the cause hereof for them and for me, forasmuch as I have only put the matter in question, as a witness that have seen th'experience of the thing.   

Of the straight or narrow passage of the land lying between the North and South sea, by the which spices may much sooner and easilier be brought from the Islands of Molucca into Spain by the West Ocean, then by that way whereby the Portugals sail into the East India.  
IT hath been an opinion among the Cosmographers and Pilottes of late time, and other which have had practise in things touching the sea, that there should be a straight of water passing from the North sea of the firm, into the South sea of Sur, which nevertheless hath not been seen nor found to this day. And surely if there be any such straight, we that inhabit those parts do think the same should be rather of land then of water. For the firm land in some parts thereof is so straight and narrow, that the Indians say that from the mountains of the province of Esquegua or Vrraca (which are between the one sea and the other) if a man ascend to the top of the mountains, and look toward the North, 
Esquegua and Vrraca.  he may see the water of the North sea of the province of Beragua: & again looking the contrary way, may on the other side (towards the South) see the sea of Sur, and the provinces which confine with it, as do the territories of the two Lords or kings of the said provinces of Vrraca and Esquegua. And I believe, that if it be as the Indians say, of all that is hitherto known, this is the narrowest straight of the firm land, which some affirm to be full of rough mountains. Yet do I take it for a better way, or so short as is that which is made from the port called Nomen Dei (which is in the North sea) unto the new city of Panama, 
Nomen Dei.  
Panama.  being in the coast and on the bank of the sea of Sur, which way is likewise very rough, full of thick woods, mountains, rivers, valleys, and very difficult to pass through, and can not be done without great labour & travail. Some measure this way in this part, to be from sea to sea eighteen leagues, which I suppose to be rather twenty, not for that it is any more by measure, but because it is rough and difficult, as I have said, and as I have found it by experience, having now twice passed that way by foot, counting from the port and village of Nomen Dei, unto the dominion of the Cacique of juanaga, otherwise called Capira, eight leagues, and from thence to the river of Chagre, other eight leagues. So that at this river, being sixteen leagues from the said port, 
The river of Chagre.  endeth the roughness of the way: then from hence to the marvelous bridge are two leagues, and beyond that, other two, unto the port of Panama: So that altogether, in my judgement, make twenty leagues. And if therefore this navigation may be found in the South sea for the trade of spices (as we trust in God) to be brought from thence to the said port of Panama (as is possible enough) they may afterward easily pass to the North sea, notwithstanding the difficulty of the way of the twenty leagues aforesaid. Which thing I affirm, as a man well travailed in these regions, having twice on my feet passed over this straight in the year 1521. as I have said. It is furthermore to be understood, that it is a marvelous facility to bring spices by this way which I will now declare. From Panama to the river of Chagre, are four leagues of good and fair way, by the which carts may pass at pleasure, by reason that the mountains are but few and little, and that the greatest part of these four leagues is a plain ground void of trees: and when the carts are come to the said river▪ the spices may be carried in Barks and pynnesses. For this river entereth into the North sea five or two leagues lower than the port of Nomen Dei, and emptieth itself in the sea near unto an Island called Bastimento, where is a very good and safe port. Your majesty may now therefore consider, 
The Island Bastimento.  how great a thing▪ and what commodity it may be to convey spices this way, forasmuch as the river of Chagre, having his original only two leagues from the South sea, continueth his course, and emptieth itself into the other North sea. This river runneth fast, and is very great, and so commodious for this purpose as may be thought or desired: 
The marvelous bridge.  the marvelous bridge made by the work of nature, being two leagues beyond the said river, & other two leagues on this side the port of Panama, so lying in the mid way between them both, as framed naturally in such sort, that none which pass by this voyage doth see any such bridge, or think that there is any such building in that place, until they be in the top thereof, in the way toward Panama: But assoon as they are on the bridge, looking toward the right hand, they see a little river under them, which hath his channel distant from the feet of them that walk over it, the space of two spears length or more. The water of this river is very shallow, not passing the depth of a man's leg to the knee, and is in breadth between thirty and forty paces, and falleth into the river of Chagre. Toward the right hand, standing on this bridge, there is nothing seen but great trees. The largeness of the bridge containeth fifteen paces, and the length thereof about threescore or fourscore paces: The arch is so made of most hard stone, that no man can behold it without admiration, being made by the high and omnipotent creator of all things. But to return to speak somewhat more of the conveying of spices, I say, that when it shall please almighty God that this navigation aforesaid shall be found by the good fortune of your majesty, and that the spices of the Islands of the South sea (which may also be otherwise called the Ocean of the East India, in the which are the Islands of Molucca) shallbe brought to the said coast and the port of Panama, 
The Islands of Molucca.  and be conveyed from thence (as we have said) by the firm land with carts unto the river of Chagre, and from thence into this our other sea of the North, from whence they may afterward be brought into Spain, 
The commodity of this voyage.  I say that by this means the voyage shallbe shortened more than seven thousand leagues, with much less danger than is by the voyage now used by the way of Commendator of Aysa, captain under your majesty, who this present year attempted a voyage to the place of the said spices: and not only the way is thus much shortened, but also a third part of the time is abbreviate. To conclude therefore, if any had hitherto attempted this voyage by the sea of Sur, to seek the Islands of spices, I am of firm opinion, that they should have been found long since, as doubtless they may be by the reasons of cosmography.   

How things that are of one kind, differ in form and quality, according to the nature of the place where they are engendered or grow, and of the beasts called Tigers.  
IN the firm land are found many terrible beasts, 
Tigers.  which some think to be Tigers. Which thing nevertheless I dare not affirm, considering what authors do write of the lightness and agility of the Tiger, whereas this beast, being otherwise in shape very like unto a Tiger, is notwithstanding very slow. Yet true it is, that according to the marvels of the world, and differences which natural things have in divers regions under heaven, and divers constellations of the same, under the which they are created, 
plants and herbs.  we see that some such plants and herbs as are hurtful in one country, are harmless and wholesome in other regions. 
Birds.  And birds which in one province are of good taste, are in other so unsavoury that they may not be eaten. 
Men.  Men likewise which in some countries are black, are in other places white: and yet are both these and they men. Even so may it be, that Tigers are light in some region, as they write, and may nevertheless be slow and heavy in these Indies of your majesty, 
Sheep.  whereof we speak. The sheep of Arabia draw their tails long and big on the ground, 
Bulls.  and the Bulls of Egypt have their hear growing toward their heads: yet are those sheep, and these bulls. Men in some countries are hardy and of good courage, and in other naturally fearful and bruityshe. All these things, and many more, which may be said to this purpose, are easy to be proved, and worthy to be believed, of such as have read of the like in authors, or travailed the world, whereby their own sight may teach them the experience of these things whereof I speak. It is also manifest that jucca, 
jucca.  whereof they make their bread in the Island of Hispaniola, is deadly poison if it be eaten green with the iu●se: and yet hath it no such property in the firm land, where I have eaten it many times, and found it to be a good fruit. The Bats of Spain, 
Bats.  although they bite, yet are they not venomous: but in the firm land, many die that are bitten of them. And in this form may so many things be said, that time shall not suffice to write, whereas my intent is only to prove that this beast may be a Tiger, or of the kind of Tigers, although it be not of such lightness and swiftness as are they whereof Pliny & other authors speak, 
Pliny.  discrybing it to be one of the swiftest beasts of the land, and that the river of Tigris for the swift course thereof was called by that name. The first spaniards which saw this Tiger in the firm land, did so name it. 
The Tiger.  Of the kind of these was that which Don Diego Columbo the Admiral sent your majesty out of new Spain to Toledo. Their heads are like to the heads of Lions, or Lionesses, but greater: the rest of all their bodies, and their legs, are full of black spots one near unto an other, and divided with a circumference or fryndge of red colour, showing as it were a fair work and correspondent picture, about their croopes or hinder parts, they have these spots byggest, and less and less toward their bellies, legs, and heads. That which was brought to Toledo, was young, and but little, and by my estimation of the age of three years: but in the firm land there are many found of greater quantity, for I have seen some of three spans in height, and more than five in length. They are beasts of great force, with strong legs, and well armed with nails and fangs, which we call dog teeth: they are so fierce, that in my judgement no real Lion of the bigest sort is so strong or fierce. Of these, there are many found in the firm land, which devour many of the Indians, & do much hurt otherwise: but since the coming of the Christians, many have been killed with Crossbows after this manner. assoon as the archer hath knowledge of the haunt of any of these Tigers, he goeth searching their trase, 
The hunting of Tigers.  with his crossbow & with a little hound or begle, and not with a greyhound, because this beast would soon kill any dog that would venture on him: When the hound hath found the Tiger, he runneth about him baying continually, and approacheth so near him, snapping and grynning, with so quick fleeing and returning, that he hereby so molesteth this fierce beast, that he driveth him to take the next tree, at the foot whereof he remaineth still baying, and the Tiger grinning and showing his teeth, while in the mean time the archer cometh near, and xii or xiiii. paces of, striketh him with the quarrel of his crossbow in the breast, and fleeth incontinent, leaving the Tiger in his travail for life and death, biting the tree and eating earth for fierceness: then within the space of two or three hours, or the day following, the archer returneth thither, and with his dog findeth the place where he lieth dead. In the year .1522. I with the other rulers and magistrates of the city of Sancta Maria Antiqua in Dariena, took order in our counsel, a reward of four or five pieces of gold to be given to every man that killed any of these Tigers: 
A reward for killing of Tigers.  by reason whereof many were killed in short space, both with crossbows, and also with divers snares and ingens. But to conclude, I will not obstinately stand in opinion whether these beasts be Tigers or Panthers, or of the number of any other such beasts of spotted hear, or also peradventure some other new beast unknown to the old writers, as were many other whereof I have spoken in this book: Of which thing I do not greatly marvel, forasmuch as unto our time this great part of the world was unknown to the antiquity, insomuch that none of the writers of that age, nor yet Pcolome in his cosmography, or any other since him, have made any mention hereof, until the first admiral Don Christopher Colonus discovered the same: A thing doubtless without comparison much greater than that which is said of Hercules, 
Colonus compared to Hercules.  that he first gave the entrance of the sea Mediterraneum into the Ocean, which the Greeks could never do before him. 

The pillars of Hercules.  
The strayghtes of Gibilterra.   And hereof riseth the fable that the mountains of Calpe and Abila (which are directly one against an other in the straight of Gibilterra, the one being in Spain, and the other in africa) were joined together before they were opened by Hercules, 
Note.  who erected those his pillars which your majesty give in token of pre-eminence and like enterprises, with likewise these his words Plus Vltra, words doubtless worthy for so great and universal an Emperor, 
Plus Vltra.  and not convenient for any other Prince: 
How far the emperors majesty excelleth Hercules.  forasmuch as your holy catholic majesty have spread them in so strange and remote regions, so many thousand leagues further than ever did Hercules. And certainly sir, if there had been an Image of gold made in the praise and fame of Colonus, he had as well deserved it, as any of those men to whom for their noble enterprise the antiquity gave divine honour, if he had been in their tyme. But to return to the matter whereof I began to speak: I need say no more of the form of this beast, forasmuch as your Majesty have seen that which is yet alive in Toledo. And surely the keeper of your majesties Lions, who hath taken upon him the charge to tame this beast, might better have bestowed his pains in an other thing that might have been more profitable for the safeguard of his life, because this Tiger being yet but young, will daily be stronger and fiercer, and increase in malice. The Indians (and especially they of the firm land in the province which the catholic King Don Ferdinando commanded to be called golden Castyle) call this beast Ochi. This thing is strange that chanced of late: 
A Tiger made tame.  that whereas the Tiger whereof we have made mention before, would have killed his keeper that then kept him in a cage, was in few days after made so tame, that he led her tied only with a small cord, and played with her so familiarly, that I marveled greatly to see it, yet not without certain belief that this friendship will not last long, without danger of life to the keeper, forasmuch as surely these beasts are not meet to be among men, for their fierceness and cruel nature that can not be tamed.   

Of the manners and customs of the Indians of the firm land, and of their women.  
THe manners & customs of these Indians, are divers in divers provinces. Some of them take as many wives as them list, and other live with one wife, whom they forsake not without consent of both parties, which chanceth especially when they have no children. 
The Indian women.  The nobility aswell men as women, repute it infamous to join with any of base parentage or strangers, except Christians, whom they count noble men, by reason of their valiantness, although they put a difference between the common sort & the other to whom they show obedience, counting it for a great matter & an honourable thing, if they be beloved of any of them: insomuch that if they know any Christian man carnally, they keep their faith to him, so that he be not long absent far from them, for their intent is not to be widows, or to live chaste like religious women. Many of them have this custom, that when they perceive that they are with child, they take an herb wherewith they destroy that is conceived: for they say that only well aged women should bear children, and that they will not forbear their pleasures, and deform their bodies with bearing of children, whereby their teats become lose & hanging, which thing they greatly dispraise. When they are delivered of their children, they go to the river & wash them, which done, their blood and purgation ceaseth immediately: And when after this they have a few days abstained from the company of men, they become so straight, as they say which have had carnal familiarity with them, that such as use them, can not without much difficulty satisfy their appetite: They also which never had children, 
The men of India.  are ever as virgins. In some parts they wear certain little aperues round about them before and behind, as low as to their knees and hams, wherewith they cover their privy parts, and are naked all their body beside. The principal men bear their privities in a hollow pipe of gold, but the common sort have them enclosed in the shells of certain great welkes, and are beside utterly naked: For they think it no more shame to have their cods seen, than any other part of their bodies: and in many provinces both the men and women go utterly naked, without any such coverture at all. In the province of Cueva they call a man Chuy, and a woman Ira, which name is not greatly disagreeable to many both of their women and of ours. These Indians give great honour and reverence to their Cacique (that is) their kings and rulers. The principal Cacique, hath twelve of his most strong Indians appointed to bear him, 
The king is borne on men's backs.  when he removeth to any place, or goeth abroad for his pleasure. Two of them carry him sitting upon a long piece of wood, which is naturally as light as they can find, the other ten follow next unto him as footmen: they keep continually a trotting pace with him on their shoulders. When the two that carry him are weighed, other two come in their places, without any disturbance or stay. And thus if the way be plain, they carry him in this manner for the space of xv or twenty leagues in one day. The Indians that are assigned to this office, are for the most part slaves, or Naboriti, that is, such as are bound to continual service. I have also noted that when the Indians perceive themselves to be troubled with to much blood, 
Letting of blood.  they let themselves blood in the calves of their legs, and brawns of their arms: this do they with a very sharp stone, and sometimes with the small tooth of a viper, or with a sharp reed or thorn. All the Indians are commonly without beards, 
They have no beards.  insomuch that it is in manner a marvel to see any of them either men or women to have any down or hear on their faces, or other parts of their bodies: Albeit I saw the Cacique of the province of Catarapa, who had hear on his face and other parts of his body, as had also his wife in such places as women are accustomed to have. This Cacique had a great part of his body painted with a black colour, which never fadeth, 
They paint their bodies.  and is much like unto that wherewith the Mores paint themselves in Barbary in token of nobility. But the moors are painted specially on their visage and throat, and certain other parts. Likewise the principal Indians use these paintings on their arms and breasts, but not on their visages, because among them the slaves are so marked. When the Indians of certain provinces go to the battle (especially the Cannibal archers) they carry certain shells of great welkes of the sea, which they blow, and make therewith great sound, 
The Cannibals.  much like the noise of horns: they carry also certain Timbrels, which they use in the stead of Drums: also very fair plumes of feathers, and certain armure of gold, 
armour of gold.  especially great and round pieces on their breasts, and splintes on their arms. Likewise other pieces, which they put on their heads and other parts of their bodies: 
Their galantness in the Wars.  For they esteem nothing so much as to appear gallant in the wars, and to go in most comely order that they can devise, glistering with precious stones, jewels, gold, 
Their jewels.  and feathers. Of the least of these welkes or perewincles, they make certain little beads, of divers sorts and colours: they make also little bracelets, which they mingle with gaudies of gold, these they roll about their arms from the elbow to the wrist of the hand. The like also do they on their legs from the knee to the soles of their feet, in token of nobility, especially their noble women in divers provinces are accustomed to wear such jewels, and have their necks in manner laden therewith: these beads and jewels, and such other trynkets, they call Caquiras. Beside these also, they wear certain rings of gold at their ears and nostrils, which they bore full of holes on both sides, so that the rings hang upon their lips. Some of these Indians are poulde and rounded: albeit commonly both the men and women take it for a decent thing to wear long hear, which the women wear to the midst of their shoulders, & cut it equally, especially above their brows: this do they with certain hard stones, which they keep for the same purpose. The principal women, when their teats fall, 
How the women bear up their teats, with bars of gold.  or become lose, bear them up with bars of gold, of the length of a span and a half, well wrought, and of such bigness that some of them weigh more than two hundred Castelans or Ducades of gold: these bars have holes at both the ends, whereat they tie two small cords made of cotton at every end of the bars: One of these cords goeth over the shoulder, and the other under the arm holes, where they tie both together, so that by this means the bar beareth up their teats. Some of these chief women go to the battle with their husbands, or when they themselves are regentes in any provinces, in the which they have all things at commandment, and execute the office of general captains, and cause themselves to be carried on men's backs, in like manner as do the Caciques of whom I have spoken before. These Indians of the firm land are much of the same stature and colour as are they of the islands: 

The stature & colour of the Indians.  
The Indians called Coronati.   they are for the most part of the colour of an olive, if there be any other difference, it is more in bigness then otherwise, & especially they that are called Coronati, are stronger and bigger than any other that I have seen in these parties, 
The Island of Giants.  except those of the Island of Giants, which are on the South side of the Island of Hispaniola, near unto the coasts of the firm land, and likewise certain other which they call jucatos, which are on the North side. All which chief, although they be no Giants, 
jucatos.  yet are they doubtless the bigest of the Indians that are known to this day, & commonly bigger than the flemings: and especially many of them, aswell women as men, are of very high stature, and are all archers both men and women. These Coronati inhabit thirty leagues in length by these coasts, from the point of Canoa to the great river which they call Guadalchiber, near unto Sancta Maria de gratia. As I traversed by those coasts, I filled a butt of fresh water of that river, six leagues in the sea from the mouth thereof where it falleth into the sea. They are called Coronati (that is crowned) because their hear is cut round by their ears, and poulde lower a great compass about the crown, much like the friars of saint Augustine's order. And because I have spoken of their manner of wearing their hear, here cometh to my remembrance a thing which I have oftentimes noted in these Indians: and this is, that they have the bones of the skulls of their heads four times thicker, 
The skulls of the Indians heads.  and much stronger than ours, so that in coming to handstrokes with them, it shallbe requisite not to strike them on the heads with swords, for so have many swords been broken on their heads, with little hurt done. And to have said thus much of their customs and manners, it shall suffice for this time, because I have more largely entreated hereof in my general history of the Indies: Yet have I neither there nor here spoken much of that part of the firm land which is called Nova Hispania (that is, new Spain, 
New Spain.  whereof the Island of jucatana is part) forasmuch as Ferdinando courtesy hath written a large book thereof. Of the houses of these Indies, I have spoken sufficiently else where: Yet have I thought good to inform your majesty of the building and houses which the Christians have made in divers places in the firm land. 
The houses of the Christians in India.  They build them now therefore with two solars or lofts, and with loops and windows to open and shut: also with strong timber, and very fair boards, in such sort, that any noble man may well and pleasantly be lodged in some of them. And among other, I myself caused one to be builded in the city of Sancta Maria Antiqua in Dariena, 
Dariena.  which cost me more than a thousand and five hundred Castelans, being of such sort that I may well entertain and commodiously lodge any Lord or noble man, reserving also part for myself and my family: for in this may many households be kept, both above and beneath. It hath also a fair garden, with many Orange trees, both sweet and sour: Cedars also, and Lemons, of the which there is now great plenty in the houses of the Christians. 
Gardens.  On one side of the garden, there runneth a fair river. The situation is very pleasant, with a good and wholesome air, and a fair prospect about the river. In fine, our trust is that in few years all things in these regions shall grow to a better state, according to the holy intention of your majesty.   

Of the chief Islands Hispaniola and Cuba.  
THe Indians which at this present inhabit the Island of Hispaniola, are but few in number, and the Christians not so many as they ought to be, forasmuch as many of them that were in this Island, are gone to other Islands, and to the firm land. For being for the most part young men unmarried, 
Men are desirous of new things.  and desirous daily to see new things, wherein man's nature delighteth, they were not willing to continue long in one place, especially seeing daily other new lands discovered, where they thought they might sooner fill their purses, by being present at the first spoil: Wherein nevertheless their hope deceived many of them, and especially such as had houses & habitations in this Island: For I certainly believe, confirming myself herein with the judgement of many other, 
The commodities of Hispaniola, England, and Sicily.  that if any one Prince had no more signories then only this Island, it should in short time be such, as not to give place either to Sicily or England, whereas even at this present there is nothing wherefore it should malice their prosperity, not being inferior to them in any felicity, that in manner the heavens can grant to any land: being furthermore such as m●y inryche many provinces and kingdoms, by reason of many rich gold mines that are in it, of the best gold that is found to this day in the world, 
Gold mines.  and in greatest quantity. In this Island, nature of herself bringeth forth such abundance of cotton, 
Cotton.  that if it were wrought and maintained, there should be more and better then in any part of the world. There is so great plenty of excellent Cassia, that a great quantity is brought from thence into Spain, 
Cassia.  from whence it is carried to divers parts of the world. It increaseth so much, that it is a marvelous thing to consider. In this are many rich shops where Sugar is wrought, and that of such perfectness and goodness, and in such quantity, 
Sugar.  that ships come laden therewith yearly into Spain. All such seeds, sets, or plants, 
plants and herbs.  as are brought out of Spain and planted in this Island, become much better, bigger, and of greater increase than they are in any part of our Europe. And if it chance otherwise that sometimes they prosper not so well, the cause is that they which should till and husband the ground, & sow and plant in due seasons, have no respect hereunto, being impatient while the wheat and vines wax ripe, being given to wandering and other affairs of present gains (as I have said) as searching the gold mines, fishing for pearls, 
Great things hindered by respect of present gains.  and occupying merchandise, with such other trades, for the greedy following whereof, they neglect and contemn both sowing and planting. Such fruits as are brought out of Spain, into this Island, prosper marvelously, and wax ripe all times of the year, as herbs of all sorts very good and pleasant to be eaten. Also many Pomegranates of the best kind, 
Oranges. Pomegranates.  and Oranges both sweet and sour: Likewise many fair Lemons and Cedars, and a great quantity of all such as are of sharp, sour, and bitter taste. There are also many Fig trees, 
figs all the year. Dates.  which bring forth their fruit all the whole year. Likewise those kind of Date trees that bear Dates, and divers other trees and plants, which were brought out of Spain thither. Beasts do also increase in like abundance, 
Beasts.  & especially the herds of Ryne are so augmented both in quantity and number, that there are now many patrons of cat-tail that have more than two thousand heads of Neat, and some three or four thousand, 
Great herds of cattle.  and some more. Beside these, there are very many that have herds of four or five hundred. And truth it is, that this Island hath better pasture for such cattle than any other country in the world: also wholesome and clear water, and temperate air, 
Good pasture.  by reason whereof the herds of such beasts are much bigger, fatter, and also of better taste than ours in Spain, 
The effect of continual and moderate heat.  because of the rank pasture, whose moisture is better digested in the herb or grass by the continual & temperate heat of the Son, whereby being made more fat and unctuous, it is of better and more steadfast nourishment. For continual and temperate heat, doth not only draw much moisture out of the earth, 
The cause of fat nourishment.  to the nourishment of such things as grow and are engendered in that clime, but doth also by moderation preserve the same from resolution and putrefaction, digesting also and condensating or thyckning the said moist nourishment into a gummy and unctuous substance, 
Beasts of long life in regions about the Equinoctial line. Trees whose leaves do not wither.  as is seen in all such things as grow in those regions: and this is the only natural cause aswell that certain great beasts and of long life (as the Elephant & Rhinoceros, with such other) are engendered only in the regions near unto the Equinoctial, as also that the leaves of such trees as grow there, do not wither or fall, until they be thrust out by other, according to the verse of the poet which sayeth, Et nata pira piris, et ficus in ficubus extant, this is in effect, Pears growing upon Pears, and figs upon figs. Pliny also writeth, that such trees are never infected with the disease of trees that the Latins call carries, which we may call the worm or canker, 
The canker of the tree.  being but a certain putrefaction, by reason of a waterish nourishment not well consolidate. The same thing hath been the cause that certain Philosophers, considering aswell that man is the hottest and moistest beast that is (which is the best complexion) as also that men live longest in certain parts of India near the Equinoctial (where yet to this day some live to the age of an hundred and fifty years) were of opinion that if mankind had any beginning on the earth, 
Long lived men in India.  that place ought by good reason to be under or not far from the Equinoctial line, for the causes aforesaid. Some of the Divines also upon like consideration, 
Paradise near the Equinoctial line.  have thought it agreeable that their Paradise should be about the same, within the precinct of those rivers which are named in the book of Genesis. But to let pass these things, & to return to the history. 
Sheep and Hogs.  In this Island furthermore are many Sheep, and a great number of Hogs, of the which (as also of the Ryne) many are become wild, and likewise many Dogs and Cats, 
Dogs and Cats become wild.  of those which were brought out of Spain: These (and especially the Dogs) do much hurt among the cattle, by reason of the negligence of the herdmen.  
There are also many Horses, Mares, and Mules, and such other beasts as serve the use of men in Spain, and are much greater than they of the first brood brought thither out of Spain. Some places of the Island are inhabited, 
The situation of Hispaniola.  although not so many as were requisite: Of the which I will say no more, but that all the regions of the Island are so well situate, that in the course of time all things shall come to greater perfection, by reason of the rychnesse & pleasantness of the country, and fertility of the soil. But now to speak somewhat of the principal and chief place of the Island, which is the city of San Domenico: I say, that as touching the buildings, there is no city in Spain, so much for so much (no not Barsalona, which I have oftentimes seen) that is to be preferred before this, 
The citi of San Domenico.  generally: For the houses of San Domenico, are for the most part of stone, as are they of Barsalona, or of so strong & well wrought earth, that it maketh a singular and strong binding. The situation is much better than that of Barsalona, by reason that the streets are much larger and plainer, and (without comparison) more direct and straight forth: For being builded now in our time, beside the commodity of the place of the foundation, the streets were also directed with cord, compass, and measure, wherein it excelleth all the cities that I have seen. It hath the sea so near, that of one side there is no more space between the sea and the city than the walls, and this is about fifty paces, where it is furthest of. On this side, the waters of the sea beat upon the natural stones and fair coast: On the other part, hard by the side and at the foot of the houses, passeth the river Ozama, which is a marvelous port, 
The river Ozama.  wherein laden ships rise very near to the land, and in manner under the house windows, and no further from the mouth of the river where it entereth into the sea, then is from the foot of the hill of Monyvia, to the monastery of saint Frances, or to the lodge of Barsalona. In the midst of this space in the city, is the fortress and castle, under the which, and twenty paces distant from the same, pass the ships to arise somewhat further in the same river. From the entrance of the ships until they cast anchor, they sail no further from the houses of the city than thirty or forty paces, because of this side of the city the habitation is near to the river. 
The Haven.  The port or haven also is so fair and commodious to defraight or unlade ships, as the like is found but in few places of the world. The chymneiss that are in this city, are about two hundred in number, and such houses as I have spoken of before: Of the which some are so fair & large, that they may well receive and lodge any lord or noble man of Spain with his train & family, and especially that which Don Diego Colon, viceroy under your majesty, hath in this city, is such that I know no man in Spain that hath the like by a quarter in goodness, considering all the commodities of the same. Likewise the situation thereof, as being above the said port, and altogether of stone, and having many fair and large rooms, with as goodly a prospect of the land and sea as may be devised, seemeth unto me so magnifical and princelike, that your majesty may be as well lodged therein, as in any of the most exquisite builded houses of Spain. There is also a Cathedral church builded of late, where aswell the Bishop according to his dignity, 
A cathadrall church and monasteries in Hispaniola.  as also the Canons are well endued. This church is well builded of stone and lime, and of good woorkmanshyp. There are furthermore three monasteries, bearing the name of saint Dominike, saint Frances, and saint Marie of Mercedes, the which are all well builded, although not so curiously as they of Spain. But speaking without prejudice of any other religious monastery, your majesty may be well assured, that in these three monasteries god is as well served, as in any other religious house, with men of holy living & virtuous example. There is also a very good hospital for the aid and secure of poor people, 
An Hospital  which was found by Michael Passamont, treasurer to your majesty. To conclude, this city from day to day increaseth in wealth and good order, aswell for that the said Admiral & viceroy, with the lord chancellor and counsel appointed there by your majesty, have their continual abiding here, as also that the richest men of the Island resort hither for their most commodious habitation, and trade of such merchandise as are either brought out of Spain, or sent thither from this Island, which now so aboundeth in many things, that it serveth Spain with many commodities, as it were with usury requiting such benefits as it first received from thence. The people of this Island are commonly of somewhat less stature than are the Spaniards, and of a shining or clear brown colour: they have wives of their own, and abstain from their daughters, sisters, and mothers: they have large foreheads, long black hear, and no beards or hear in any other parts of their bodies, aswell men as women, 
The people.  except very few, as perhaps scarcely one among a thousand. They go as naked as they were borne, except that on the parts which may not with honesty be seen, they wear a certain leaf as broad as a man's hand, which nevertheless is not kept close with such diligence, but that sometimes a man may see that they think sufficiently hid. In this Island are certain Glow-worms, that shine in the night as do ours, but are much bigger, 
Glow-worms.  and give a greater light: Insomuch that when the men of the Island go any journeys in the night, they bear some of these worms made fast about their feet and head, in such sort that he that should see them a far, & ignorant of the thing, would be greatly astonished thereat. By the light of these also, the women work in their houses in the night. These worms they call Cievas. Their light lasteth for the space of three days, and diminisheth as they begin to dry up. There is also a kind of Crows, whose breath stinketh in the morning, and is sweet in the after noon: 
crows stinking & sweet.  the excrement which they avoid, is a living worm. As touching other things of this Island, whereof Peter Martyr hath more largely entreated in his Decades, I have thought it superfluous to repeat the same again out of this history of Gonzalus Ferdinandus, but have here g●athered only such things as either are not touched of Peter Martyr, or not so largely declared, as I have done the like in all other notable things, which I have collected out of this summary of Gonzalus.   

Of the Island of Cuba, and other.  
OF the Island of Cuba, and other, 
Saint john his Island.  as the Islands of Sancti johannis, and jamaica, the same way be said in manner in all things as before of Hispaniola, 
jamaica.  although not so largely. Yet in less quantity do they bring forth the like things, as gold, copper, cattle, trees, plants, fishes, and such other, of the which we have spoken there.  
In Cuba, is a certain kind of Partridges, being very little, with their feathers much of the colour of Turtle doves, 
Partridges.  but are of much better taste to be eaten: they are taken in great number, and being brought wild into the houses, they become as tame within the space of three or four days as though they had been hatched there: they become exceeding fat in short space, and are doubtless the most delicate and pleasant meat that ever I have eaten. But to let pass many other things that might be here said, and to speak of two marvelous things which are in this Island of Cuba: whereof the on is, that a valley containing two or three leagues in length between two mountains, is full of a kind of very hard stones, 
Pellettes for Guns wrought by nature.  of such perfect roundness, and like unto Pellettes of Guns, that no art can make better or more exactly polished. Of these, some are as small as Pellettes for Handgunnes, and other so increasing bigger and bigger from that quantity, that they may serve for all sorts of Artyllarie, although they be of bigness to receive one or two or more Quintales of powder, every Quyntale containing one hundred weight, or of what other quantity so ever they be. These Pellettes are found throughout all the valley within the earth, as in a mine, which they dig, and take out such as they need of all sorts. The other marvelous thing of this Island is this: That far from the sea, 
A fountain of the pitch of Bitumen  there ishueth out of a mountain a certain liquor, much like the clay of Babylon, called Bitumen, or like unto pitch, in great quantity, and such as is very commodious for the calking of ships: this falleth continually from the rock, and runneth into sea, in such abundance that it is seen floating above the water on every side of the sea there about, as it is driven from place to place by the wind or course of the water. 
Quintus Cursius.  Quintus Cursius writeth in his history, that great Alexander came to the city of Memi, where is a great Cave or Den, in the which is a spring or fountain that continually avoideth a great quantity of Bitumen, in such sort, that it is an easy thing to believe that the stones of the walls of Babylon might be laid therewith, 
Bitumen of Babylon.  according as the said author writeth. I have seen this mine of Bitumen, not only in the Island of Cuba, but also such an other in new Spain, which was found of late in the province of Panuco, where it is much better than the other of Cuba, 
Panuco.  as I have seen by experience in calking of ships.   

Of the land of Baccalaos, called Terra Baccalearum, situate on the North side of the firm land.  
SHortly after that your majesty came to the city of Toledo, there arrived in the month of November, Steven Gomes the pilot, who the year before of .1524. by the commandment of your majesty, sailed to the North parts, and found a great part of land continuate from that which is called Baccalaos, 
Baccalaos.  discoursing toward the West to the xl and xli degree, from whence he brought certain Indians (for so call we all the nations of the new found lands) of the which he brought some with him from thence, who are yet in Toledo at this present, 
Indians.  and of greater stature than other of the firm land, as they are commonly: their colour is much like the other of the firm land: they are great archers, and go covered with the skins of divers beasts, both wild and tame. In this land are many excellent furs, as martens, Sables, and such other rich furs, 
Rich furs and silver,  of the which the said pilot brought some with him into Spain: they have silver, and copper, & certain other metals: they are Idolaters, and honour the Son and Moon, 
Idolaters.  and are seduced with such superstition and errors as are they of the firm. And to have written thus much it may suffice, of such things as have seemed to me most worthy to be noted in the summary of Gonzalus Ferdinandus, written to Themperors majesty.   

Particularly of new Spain, called Nova Hispania, or Mexico.  
New Spain, is that part of the continent or firm land that lieth West and South from the land of Florida: this was subdued to th'empire of Castille by the right noble gentleman Ferdinando Cortese the marquis of the vale of Quaraca. In this land are many provinces, containing in them in manner innumerable cities, among which, that is the chief which the Indians call Mexico, or Temixtitan, consysting of more than five hundred thousand inhabitants: 
The city of Mexico, or Temixtitan.  It standeth in the midst of a lake of salt water, as doth venice in the sea, the lake containeth forty Persian miles, called Parasange, every one consysting of xxx furlongs, and more, as some say. In these regions is found great plenty of gold, 
Gold and silver.  silver, & precious stones, with innumerable other things, both necessary for the life of man, & pleasant, as Silk, Bombasine cotton, Alame, Safferne, Woad, 
Silk. Cotton. Alame. woad. Sugar.  with divers other things, wherewith cloth and Silk is died. There is also such abundance of sugar, that certain Spanish ships are yearly freighted therewith, and bring the same into Smile, from whence it is carried in manner to all parts of Christendom. Thinhabitantes of Mexico are subtle people, and use much craft in their bargaining: they have not the use of gold and silver money, but use in the stead thereof the half shells of Almonds, 
Shells for money.  which kind of Barbarous money they call Cacoa, or Cacanguate. In manner all kinds of corn are there very good cheap, especially barley and wheat. They have great plenty of Hearts, wild Boars, 
Corne. Beasts.  Lions, Leopards, and Tigers, which beasts wander in manner in every place. The region is most commodious for hawking and hunting, for the great abundance it hath of beasts and fowls: 
Hawking and hunting.  But the people exercise all their cunning in making the images of their idolatry, and in painting. Their women are valiant, 
Painting.  and sumptuous in their apparel, and other tyrementes: 
Women sumptuously apparelled.  for they so richly fring and beset the same with pearls, precious stones, and gold, that nothing can be more excellent: they have a kind of paper greatly differing from ours, in this they express their minds by certain figures, for they have not otherwise those of letters. The nation is desirous of war, and doth not long keep the conditions of peace unviolated: 
A warlike nation.  but delighteth rather in civil and most cruel battle among themselves, then to live in peace and quietness. Such as in the wars fall by any means into the hands of their enemies, either by submission or otherwise, are partly sacryfised to the Idols, and the residue given to the soldiers to be eaten, in like manner as we reward dogs and hawks with part of their prey. 
Captives sacrificed to Idols.  They have innumerable Idols, which every one maketh for his particular god, after the fantasy of his own brain, and giveth thereto divine honour, albeit at this day they do by little and little leave of their barbarous fyercenesse, & with our religion embrace better manners: For they now profess the faith of Christ, and in his name pray unto God the Father.   

Of Peru.  
THe province called Peru, was also named Nova Castilia, by them that first found it. This region is the West part of America, and is situate in the longitude of .290. degrees, proceeding from the West to the East, and Southward beginneth five degrees beyond the Equinoctial line, and is extended very far into the South. This is taken to be the richest land in gold, silver, pearls, precious stones, and spices, 
Peru is the richest land that is known.  that ever was found yet to this day. For gold is there in such plenty that they make pyspots thereof, and other vessels applied to filthy uses. But this is more to be marveled at, that in a city called Coll●o was found a house all covered with massy plates of gold. In their wars also their harness is of gold and silver. 
A house covered with gold.  Their weapons are bows, arrows, slings, darts, and pikes. 
Harness of gold.  The inhabitants are warlike people, and of great agility. They have cities defended with laws and arms. The region is exceeding fruitful, and yieldeth corn twice in the year. It is so flourishing with many fair woods, mountains, rivers, 
A fruitful region.  and other both pleasant & necessary commodities, that it seemeth in a manner an earthly Paradise: it hath divers kinds of beasts, and yet none hurtful, or of ravening kind. Their sheep are of such height, that they use them in steed of Horses: 
Great sheep.  some writ that they are as big as the young Foles of camels, and that their wool is very soft and fine: also that the Ewes bring forth Lambs twice a year. The people are witty, and of gentle behaviour, cunning also in arts, 
The duty of Christian Princes.  faithful of promise, and of manners not greatly to be discommended, save only that they are ignorant of Christ, who nevertheless is now known unto them in many places, as our hope is he shallbe daily more and more, if all Princes will herein put their helping hands to the plough of our Lord, and send labourers into his vinyeard.   

Of the great river called Rio de la Plata (that is) the river of silver.  
THis river reacheth very far in length & breadth, and is called Vruai, in the Indian tongue. 
Parave.  Into this falleth an other river named Parave. The first that sailed into the river of Plata, was john Dias Solis, whom the right noble king of Spain Ferdinandus made Admiral of these seas. 
john Dias Solis. The Island Martinus Gratias.  In the river lieth an Island which john Dias named Martinus Gratias, because a pilot of his, so called, was buried there. This Island is situate in the midst of the river, and is distant from the mouth of the same about forty leagues. As the said admiral attempted to expugn the Island, he was suddenly oppressed and slain of the Indians that privylye assailed him. Wherewith nevertheless their barbarous cruelty was not satisfied until they had torn him in pieces, and devoured him: But many years after, the emperors Majesty, and King of Spain Charles the fift, sent forth Sebastian Cabot (a man of great courage & skilful in cosmography, 
The voyage of Sebastian Cabot to the river of Plata. Charlis. Ophir. Cipango. Cathay.  and of no less experience as concerning the Stars of the sea) with commandment to discover and subdue the Indians of Tharsis, Ophir, Cipango, and Coi Cathai, receiving therefore his commission, and proceeding forwards on his voyage, he arrived by chance at this Island: the cause whereof was, that the principal vessel was lost by shipwreck, and the men that saved their lives by swimming were received into our ships. Perceiving therefore that by reason of this chance he could by no means perform his voyage attempted, he intended to expugn the said Island, and thereupon to convey his victuals to land, to prepare his soldiers to the invasion, to plant colonies, & to erect fortresses by the rivers side, whereby the Spaniards might be defended from the violence of the Barbarians. But before he attempted this, he was advertised that the Island was rich in gold & silver. Which thing did so encourage him, that without respect of peril he thought best to expugn it by one means or other, wherein his boldness took good effect, as often times chanceth in great affairs. Furthermore as touching the river, Sebastian Cabote made relation, that he never saw any comparable unto this in breadth and depth: For whereas it falleth into the sea, 
The river of Plata.  it containeth xxv leagues in breadth. From the mouth of the river, Cabote sailed up the same into the land for the space of three hundred and fifty leagues, as he writeth in his own card. That it is of great depth, may hereby be considered, that many great rivers fall into it, so that the channel can not be shallow that containeth such abundance of water, and such plenty of good and great fishes: For there is in manner no fish in the sea, that is not found in this river. assoon as the spaniards were set aland, they made a proof if the soil were fruitful to bear corn. 
marvelous fruitfulness.  Taking therefore fifty grains of wheat, and committing the same to the earth in the month of September, they gathered thereof two thousand and fifty at December next following: (wherein some being deceived and mistaking the thing, have written in the stead of two thousand and fifty, fifty thousand and two: 
Mountains containing gold and silver. ) the like fertility is there of all other grain and pulse. Furthermore thinhabitants declared, that not far from that place, there are great and high mountains, in the which is found great plenty of gold: and no great distance from the same, to be other mountains no less fruitful of silver, and many other things, long to rehearse. Th'inhabitants are painful men, and till the ground diligently, wherein they take great pleasure, and have therefore great plenty of bread of Maizium. There are sheep of such bigness, that they compare them to young Camels or Asses, as some say: their wool is very fine, 
Great sheep.  and nearest unto the fineness of silk. There are also beasts of divers kinds. Among men there is this difference, that such as live in the mountains, are white, and for the most part like unto the men of our regions: but they that dwell above the river (as though they took their colour thereof) are blackish, or purple, 
Their colour.  of the colour of fine Iron or Steel. This also chanceth to many of them, 
Men with deformed legs.  that their feet and legs are like the legs and feet of the foul called the Oystreche.   

Of the lands of Laborador and Baccalaos, lying west and northwest from England, and being part of the firm land of the West Indies.  
MAny have travailed to search the coast of the land of Laborador, aswell to th'intent to know how far or whither it reacheth, as also whether there be any passage by sea through the same into the sea of Sur and the Islands of Molucca, which are under the Equinoctial line, 
The way to the Islands of Molucca by the north sea.  thinking that the way thither should greatly be shortened by this voyage. The spaniards, as to whose right the said Islands of spices pertain, did first seek to find the same by this way. The Portugals also having the trade of spices in their hands, 
The spaniards.  did travail to find the same, although hitherto neither any such passage is found, or the end of that land. In the year a thousand and five hundredth, Gasper Cortesreales, made a voyage thither with two caravels, 
Gasper Cortesreales.  but found not the straight or passage he sought. At his being there, he named the islands that lie in the mouth of the gulf Quadrado, after his name Cortesreales, lying in the fifty degree, and more, & brought from that land about threescore men for slaves: 
Insula Cortesreales.  He greatly marveled to behold the huge quantity of snow & Ice, for the sea is there frozen exceedingly. Thinhabitantes are men of good corporature, 
snow and Ise.  although tawny like the Indies, and laborious: They paint their bodies, and wear bracelets and hoops of silver and copper: their apparel is made of the skins of Marterns, & divers other beasts, which they wear with the hear inward in winter, 
Furs.  and outward in summer. This apparel they gird to their bodies with girdles made of cotton, or the fynewes of fishes and beasts. They eat fish more than any other thing, and especially Salmons, 
Fish.  although they have fowls and fruit. They make their houses of timber, whereof they have great plenty: and in the stead of tiles, cover them with the skins of fishes and beasts. It is said also that there are Gryfes in this land, and that the Bears and many other beasts and fowls are white. 
Gryfes. Bears.  To this and the Islands about the same, the Britons are accustomed to resort, as men of nature agreeable unto them, 
The Britons.  and borne under the same altitude and temperature. The Norway's also sailed thither with the pilot called john Scoluo, 
Sebebastian Cabot.  and the english men with Sebastian Cabot.  
The coast of the land of Baccalaos, is a great tract, and the greatest altitude thereof is xlviii degrees and a half. Sebastian Cabot was the first that brought any knowledge of this land. 
The land of Baccalaos.  For being in England in the days of king henry the seventh, he furnished two ships at his own charges, 
The voyage of Cabot in the days of king Henry the seventh.  or (as some say) at the kings, whom he persuaded that a passage might be found to Cathay by the North seas, and that spices might be brought from thence sooner by that way then by the voyage the Portugals use by the sea of Sur. He went also to know what manner of lands those Indies were to inhabit. He had with him three hundred men, and directed his course by the tract of Island, upon the Cape of Laborador at fifty and eight degrees, affirming that in the month of july there was such cold, & heaps of Ice, 
ice in july.  that he durst pass no further: also that the days were very long, and in manner without night, and the nights very clear. Certain it is, that at the threescore degrees, the longest day is of eighteen hours. But considering the cold, and the strangeness of the unknown land, he turned his course from thence to the West, following the coast of the land of Baccalaos unto the thirty & eight degrees, from whence he returned to England. 
Baccalaos.  To conclude, the Britons and Danes, have sailed to the Baccalaos, and jaques Cartier a french man was there twice with three galleons: 
Brytons. Danes. jaques Cartyre.  as one in the year xxxiiii and the other in the xxxv and chose the land to inhabit from the xlv degrees to the li being as good a land as France, and all things therein commune to such as first possess the same. Of these lands, jacobus Gastaldus writeth thus. The new land of Baccalaos, is a cold region, 
The people of Baccalaos.  whose inhabitants are idolaters, and pray to the Son and Moon, and divers Idols: they are white people, and very rustical, for they eat flesh and fish and all other things raw. Sometimes also they eat man's flesh privily, so that their Cacique have no knowledge thereof. The apparel of both the men and women, is made of bears skins, although they have Sables and Marterns, not greatly esteemed, because they are little. Some of them go naked in summer, and wear apparel only in winter. The Britons and Frenchmen are accustomed to take fish in the coasts of these lands, where is found great plenty of Tunnies, which thinhabitants call Baccalaos, 
fishing for Tunnies. Laborador,  whereof the land was so named. Northward from the region of Baccalaos, is the land of Laborador, all full of mountains and great woods, in which are many Bears & wild Boars. The inhabitants are idolaters, and warlike people, appareled as are they of Baccalaos. In all this new land, is neither city or castle, but they live in companies like herds of beasts.   

The discovering of the land of Florida.  
THe governor of the Island of Boriovena▪ john Ponce of Leon, 
john Ponce. Water of great virtue, of this read in the Decades.  being discharged of his office, and very rich, furnished & sent forth two Caravels to seek the islands of Boiuca, in the which the Indians affirmed to be a fountain or spring whose water is of virtue to make old men young. While he travailed six months, with outrageous desire among many Islands to find that he sought, and could find no token of any such fountain, 
Bemini,  he entered into Bemini, and discovered the land of Florida, in the year 1512. on Easter day, which the Spaniards call the flourishing day of Pascba, whereby they named that land Florida. And supposing that great riches might be brought from thence, he returned into Spain, and covenanted with king Ferdinando, as touching the trade: and by the intercession of Nicolas de Ouando, and Peter Nunnez de Gusman, the king did not only make him governor of Bemini and Florida, but also sent forth with him three ships from Scivile towards his second voyage, in the year 1515. He touched in the Island of Guaccana, otherwise called Guadalupea, and sent to land certain of his men with the Laundresses of the ships: 
Guaccana.  whom the Canibales (lying in ambush) assailed with their envenomed arrows, 
The Canibales.  and slaying the most part, carried away the women. With this evil beginning, john Ponce departed from hence to Boriquen, 
Boriquen.  and from thence to Florida, where he went aland with his soldiers, to espy a place most commodious to inhabit and plant a colony: But the Indians coming forth against him to defend the entrance, assailed the spaniards fiercely, and slew and wounded many of them. At which conflict also he himself, being wounded with an arrow, died shortly after in the Island of Cuba: and so ending his life, consumed a great part of the richesse he had before gotten at saint Iohans of Boriquen. This john Ponce had before sailed with Christopher Colon to the Island of Hispaniola in the year 1493. 
The death of john Ponce.  He was a gentle soldier in the wars of this Island, and captain of the province of Higuei for Nicolas de Ouando that conquested the same. 
The land of Florida.  The region of Florida is a point or cape of land reaching into the sea like unto a tongue, being a famous and notorious place among the Indians, by reason of many spaniards that have been slain there. But whereas by fame this Florida was esteemed a rich land, many valiant and noble men desired the conquest thereof, among whom Ferdinando de Soto (who had before been a captain in Peru, 
Ferdinando de Soto.  and greatly enriched by the imprisonment of king Atabaliba) attempted a voyage thither with a good band of men, and spent five years in seeking of gold mines, supposing that this land had been like unto Peru. In fine, he died there, and was the destruction and undoing of all that went with him, 
The valiant minds of the spaniards.  without inhabiting that land, in the which the conquestours had hitherto never good success, forasmuch as these Indians are valiant archers, and strong & hardy men. 
The third attempt of the conquest of Florida.  But the valiant minds of the spaniards not discouraged by these misadventures, after the death of Ferdinando Soto, many worthy gentlemen desired this conquest in the year .1544. among whom was julian Samano, and Peter de Abumada, being brethren, and men of sufficient ability for such an enterprise. But neither the Emperor being then in Germany, neither the prince Don Philip his son, who governed all the kingdoms of Castille and Aragonie, neither yet the counsel of the Indies, would in any case agree to the conquest. Nevertheless, not utterly contemning the matter, 
Certain Friars attempt the conquest only with words, but with evil success.  which they were partly persuaded might otherwise be brought to pass, they sent thither Friar Lewis, Cancel of Baluasiro, with other Friars of the order of saint Dominike, who offered them selves to convert the nations of that land from their gentility to the faith of Christ, and obedience to the Emperor, only with words▪ The Friar therefore going forward on his voyage at the kings charges, in the year .1549. went aland with four other Friars which he took with him, and certain mariners, without harness or weapons: unto whom as he began his preaching, 
The Friars are slain and eaten.  many of the Indians of the said Florida resorted to the sea side, where without giving audience to his words, they carried him away, with three other of his companions, and did eat them, whereby they suffered martyrdom for the faith of Christ: the residue that escaped, made haste to the ship, and kept themselves for confessors, as some say. Many that favour the intent of the Friars, do now consider that by that means the Indians could not be brought to our friendship and religion: nevertheless, that if it could so have been brought to pass, it had been better. There came of late from that ship, one that had been the page of Ferdinando de Soto, 
A new kind of disgrading.  who declared that the Indians hanged up the skins, with the heads and crowns of the said Friars in one of their Temples.    

¶ FOR. M. CAP. FURBYSHERS PASSAGE BY THE north-west.  
OF CHINA IN CATHAYO, SITVATED IN THE EAST side OF GREAT ASY.  
OF THE ISLAND GIAPAN, AND OTHER LITTLE ISLES IN TTE EAST OCEAN, BY THE WAY FROM CATHAYO TO THE MOLUCCAES'.  
BY RICHARD wills.   

For. M. Captain Furbishers passage by the Northwest. To the right honourable and virtuous Lady, the Lady Anne, Countess of Warwyke.  
Four famous ways there be spoken of to those fruitful and wealthy Islands, we do usually call Moluccaes', continually haunted for gain, and daily travailed for riches therein growing. These Islands although they stand East from our Meridian, distant almost half the length of the world, in extreme heat, under the Equinoctial line, possessed of Infidels and Barbares: yet by our neighbours great abundance of wealth there is painfully sought, in respect of the voyage dearly bought, and from thence dangerously brought home unto us. Our neighbours I call the Portugals in comparison of the Molucchians for nearness unto us, for like situation westward as we have, for their usual trade with us, for that the far South asterlynges do know this part of Europe by no other name than Portugal, not greatly acquainted as yet with the other nations thereof. Their voyage is well understood of all men, 
1. By the southeast.  and the Southeasterne way round about Africa by the cape of Good hope, more spoken of, better known & travailed than that it may seem needful to discourse thereof any further.  
The second way lieth south-west, betwixt the West Indie or South America, 
2. By the south-west.  and the South continent, through that narrow straight where Magellanus first of all men that ever we do read of, passed these later years, leaving thereunto therefore his name. This way no doubt the spaniards would commodiously take, for that it lieth near unto their dominions there, could the Eastern currant and levant winds as easily suffer them to return, as speedily therewith they may be carried thither: for the which difficulty or rather impossibility of striving against the force both of wind and stream, this passage is little or nothing used, although it be very well known.  
The third way by the North-east, beyond all Europe and Asie, 
3. By the North-east.  that worthy and renowned knight sir Hugh Willoughby sought to his peril, enforced there to end his life for cold, congealed and frozen to death. And truly this way consisteth rather in the imagination of Geographers, than allowable either in reason, or approved by experience, as well it may appear by the dangerous trending of the Scythish Cape set by Ortelius under the eight degree North, 
Ortel. tab. Asiae. 3.  by the unlikely sailing in that Northern sea always clad with Ice and Snow, or at the least continually pestered therewith, if happily it be at any time dissolved: besides bays & shelves, the water waxing more shallow towards the East, that we say nothing of the foul mists and dark fogs in the cold clime, of the little power of the Sun to clear the air, of the uncomfortable nights, so near the Pole, five months long.  
A fourth way to go unto these aforesaid happy Islands Moluccae, Sir Humphrey Gilberte, a learned and valiant Knight, 
4. By the Northwest.  discourseth of at large in his new passage to Cathayo, and was attempted the last year by your Ho. servant. M Cap. Furbisher, presently taking upon him with his company fully to discover the same, and is now, if I be not deceived, ready for his voyage. The enterprise of itself being virtuous, the fact must doubtless deserve high praise, and whensoever it shall be finished, the fruits thereof can not be small: where virtue is guide, there is fame a follower, and fortune a Companion. But the way is dangerous, the passage doubtful, the voyage not thoroughly known, and therefore gainsaid by many, after this manner.  
first, 
Ob. 1.  who can assure us of any passage rather by the Northwest, than by the North-east? do not both ways lie in equal distance from the North pole? stand not the North capes of either continent under like elevation? Is not the Ocean sea beyond America farther distant from our Meridian by .30. or .40. degrees West, than the extreme points of Cathayo Eastward, if Ortelius general Card of the world be true? 
In Theatro.  In the North-east that noble Knight sir Hugh Willoughby perished for cold: and can you than promise a passenger any better hap by the Northwest? who hath gone for trial sake, at any time, this way out of Europe to Cathayo?  
If you seek the advise herein of such as make profession in cosmography, Ptolemy, the father of Geography, 
Ob. 2.  and his eldest children, will answer by their Maps with a negative, concluding moste of the sea within the land, and making an end of the world northward, near the .36. degree. The same opinion, when learning chief flourished, was received in the Romans time, as by their poets writings it may appear: Et te colet ultima Thule, said Virgile, being of opinion, that Iseland was the extreme part of the world habitable toward the North. joseph Moletius an Italian, and Mercator a German, for knowledge men able to be compared with the best Geographers of our time, the one in his half Spheres of the whole world, the other in some of his great Globes, have continued the West indish land, even to the North Pole, and consequently, cut of all passage by sea that way.  
The same Doctors, Mercator in other of his Globes and Maps, Moletius in his sea card, nevertheless doubting of so great continuance of the former continent, have opened a gulf betwixt the West Indies and the extreme northern land: but such a one, that either is not to be travailed for the causes in the first Objection alleged, or clean shut up from us in Europe by Groenland: the South end whereof Moletius maketh firm land with America, the north part continent with Lapponlande and Norway.  
thirdly, the greatest favourers of this voyage, can not deny but that if any such passage be, 
Ob. 3.  it lieth subject unto Ice and snow for the most part of the year, whereas it standeth in the edge of the frosty zone. Before the Sun hath warmed the air, and dissolved the Ice, each one well knoweth that there can be no sailing: the Ice once broken through the continual abode, the Sun maketh a certain season in those parts: how shall it be possible for so weak a vessel as a ship is, to hold out amid whole Islands, as it were, of Ice continually beating on each side, and at the mouth of that gulf, issuing down furiously from the North, safely to pass, when whole mountains of Ice and Snow shallbe tumbled down upon her.  

Ob. 4.  Well, grant the west Indies not to continue continent unto the Pole, grant there be a passage betwixt these two lands, let the gulf lie near us than commonly in cards we find it set, namely, betwixt the .61. & .64. degrees north, as Gemma Frisius in his Maps and Globes imagineth it, and so left by our countryman Sebastian Cabote, in his table, the which my good Lord your father hath at Cheynies, and so tried this last year by your Honour's servant as he reported, and his card and compass do witness. Let the way be void of all difficulties, yet doth it not follow that we have free passage to Cathayo. For example's sake. You may trende all Norway, Finmarke, and Lapponlande, and than bow southward to saint Nicolas in Moscovia: you may likewise in the Mediterranean sea fetch Constantinople, and the mouth of Tanais: yet is there no passage by sea through moscovia, into Pont Euxine, now called Mare Maggiore. Again, in the aforesaid Mediterranean sea, we sail to Alexandria in Egypt, the Barbares bring their pearl and spices from the Moluccaes' up the read sea and Arabian gulf to Sues, scarcely three days journey from the aforesaid haven: yet have we no way by sea, from Alexandria to the Moluccaes', for that Isthmos or little straight of land betwixt the two seas. In like manner, although the northern passage be free at .61. degrees latitude, and the West Ocean beyond America, usually called Mar deal zur, known to be open at .40. degrees elevation, for the Island Giapan, yea .300. leagues northerly above Giapan: yet may there be land to hinder the through passage that way by sea, as in the examples aforesaid it falleth out, Asia and America there being joined together in one continent. Ne can this opinion seem altogether frivolous unto any one that diligently peruseth our Cosmographers doings. josephus Moletius is of that mind, not only in his plain hemispheres of the world, but also in his sea card. The French Geographers in like manner, be of the same opinion, as by their Map cut out in form of a heart you may perceive: as though the West Indies were part of asia. Which sentence well agreeth with that old conclusion in the schools. Quidquid praeter Africam et Europam est, Asia est. Whatsoever land doth neither appertain unto Africa nor to Europe, is part of asia.  

5. Ob.  Furthermore it were to small purpose to make so long, so painful, so doubtful a voyage by such a new found way, if in Cathayo you should neither be suffered to land for silks and silver, nor able to fetch the Molucca spices and pearl for piracy in those seas. Of a law denying all Aliens to enter into China, and forbidding all the inhabiters under a great penalty to let in any stranger into that countries, shall you read in the report of Galeotto Perera there imprisoned with other Portugals: as also in the Giaponyshe letters, how for that cause the worthy traveler Xavierus bargained with a Barbarian Merchant for a great sum of Pepper to be brought into Cantan, a port in Cathayo. The great and dangerous piracy used in that seas, no man can be ignorant of, that listeth to read the Giaponishe and East Indian history.  

Ob. 6.  Finally, all this great labour would be lost, all these charges spent in vain, if in the end our travelers might not be able to return again, and bring safely home into their own native country, that wealth and riches, they in foreign regions with adventure of goods, and danger of their lives, have sought for. By the North-east there is no way, the Southeast passage the Portugals do hold, as Lords of that seas. At the south-west Magellanus experience hath partly taught us, and partly we are persuaded by reason, how the Eastern currant striketh so furiously on that straight, and falleth with such force into that narrow gulf, that hardly any ship can return that way, into our West Ocean, out of Mar deal zur. The which, if it be true, as truly it is, than may we say, that the aforesaid Eastern currant or levant course of waters continually following after the heavenly motions, looseth not altogether his force, but is doubled rather by an other currant from out the North-east, in the passage betwixt America and the North land, whither it is of necessity carried: having none other way to maintain itself in circular motion, and consequently the force and fury thereof to be no less in the streict of Ania●, where it striketh South into Mar deal zur, beyond America (if any such straight of sea there be) than in Magellane frete both streictes being of like breadth: as in Belognine Zalterius table of new France, and in Don Diego Hermano di Toledo his card for navigation in that region we do find precisely set down.  
Nevertheless to approve that there lieth a way to Cathayo at the Northwest, from out of Europe, we have experience, namely of three brethren that went that journey, as Gemma Frisius recordeth, and left a name unto that straight, whereby now it is called Fretum trium Fratrum. We do read again of a Portugal that passed this straight, of whom. M. Furbisher speaketh, that was imprisoned therefore many years in Lesbona, to verify the old Spanish proverb, I suffer for doing well. Likewise An. Vrdaneta a friar of Mexico came out of Mar deal zur this way into Germany: his Card, for he was a great discoverer, made by his own experience and travail in that voyage, hath been seen by gentlemen of good credit.  
Now if the observation and remembrance of things breedeth experience, and of experience proceedeth art, and the certain knowledge we have in all faculties, as the best Philosophers that ever were do affirm: 
Cic. i de orat. Arist. pri. Metaph.  truly the voyage of these aforesaid travelers that have gone out of Europe into Mar deal zur, and returned thence at the Northwest, do most evidently conclude that way to be navigable, and that passage free. So much the more we are so to think, for that the first principle and chief ground in all Geography, as great Ptolemy saith, is the history of travel, that is, 
Lib. i Geog. Cap. 2.  reports made by travailers skilful in Geometry & Astronomy, of all such things in their journey as to geography do belong. It only then remaineth, that we now answer to those arguments that seemed to make against this former conclusion.  
The first objection is of no force, that general table of the world set forth by Ortelius or Mercator, for it greatly skilleth not, being unskilfully drawn for that point: 
Sol. i.  as manifestly it may appear unto any one that conferreth the same wi●h Gemma Frisius universal map, with his round quartered card▪ with his globe, with Sobastian Cabota his table, and Ortelius general Map alone, worthily preferred in this case before all Mercator and Ortelius other doings: for that Cabota was not only a skilful sea man, but a long travailer, & such a one as entered personally that straight, sent by king Henry the seventh to make this aforesaid discovery, as in his own discourse of navigation you may read in his card drawn with his own hand, the mouth of the northwesterne streict lieth near the .318. Meridian, betwixt .61. and .64. degrees in elevation, continuing the same breadth about .10 degrees west, where it openeth southerly more and more, until it come under the tropic of Cancer, and so runneth into Mar deal zur, at the least .18. degrees more in breadth there, than it was where it first began: otherwise I could as well imagine this passage to be more unlikely than the voyage to moscovia, and more impossible than it for the far situation and continuance thereof in the frosty clime: as now I can affirm it to be very possible and most likely in comparison thereof, for that it nether coasteth so far north as the Moscovian passage doth, nether is this straight so long as that, before it bow down southerly towards the Son again. The second argument concludeth nothing. 
Sol. 2.  Ptoleme knew not what was above .16. degrees south beyond the equinoctial line, he was ignorant of all passages northward from the elevation of .63. he knew no Ocean sea beyond Asia, yet have the Portugals trended the Cape of good hope at the south point of Africa, and travailed to Giapan an Island in the east Ocean, betwixt Asia & America: our merchants in the time of king Edward the sixth discovered the Moscovian passage farther north than Thule, and showed Groenlande not to be continent with Lapponlande, and Norway: the like our northwesterne travailers have done, declaring, by their navigation that way, the ignorance of all Cosmographers that either do join Groenlande with America, or continue the west Indies with that frosty region under the north pole. As for Virgil he sang accordingly to the knowledge of men in his time, as an other Poet did of the hot Zone.  
Quarum quae media est, non est habitabilis aestu. Imagining, as most men than did, 
Oued. 1. Meta.  Zonam torridam, the hot Zone, to be altogether dishabited for heat, though presently we know many famous and worthy kingdoms and cities in that part of the earth, and the Island of saint Thomas near Aethiopia, and the wealthy islands for the which chief all these voyages are taken in hand, to be inhabited even under the equinoctial line. To answer the third objection, 
Sol. 3.  besides Cabota & all other travailers navigations, the only credit of. M. Furbisher may suffice, who lately through all these islands of Ice, and mountains of snow, passed that way, even beyond the gulf that tumbleth down from the North, and in some places though he drew one inch thick Ice, as he returning in August did, came home safely again.  
The fourth argument is altogether frivolous & vain, 
Sol. 4.  for neither is there any isthmos or streict of land betwixt America and Asia, ne can these two lands jointly be one continent. The first part of my answer is manifestly allowed of by Homer, 
Lib. Geog.  whom that excellent Geographer Strabo followeth, yielding him in this faculty the prize. The author of that book likewise 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to Alexander, attributed unto Aristotle, is of the same opinion, that Homer and Strabo be of, in two or three places. Dionysius in 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 hath this verse. 
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉.  〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. So doth the Ocean sea run round about the world: speaking only of Europe, Africa, and asia, as then asia was travailed & known. With these Doctoures may you join Pomponius Mela, Cap. 2. lib. 1. Plinius lib. 2. Cap. 67. and Pius. 2. Cap. 2. in his description of asia. All the which writers do no less confirm the whole Eastern side of asia to be compassed about with sea, than Plato doth affirm in Timaeo, under the name Atlantide, the West Indies to be an Island, as in a special discourse thereof. R. Eden writeth, agreeable unto the sentence of Proclus, Marsilius Fi●inus, and others. Out of Plato it is gathered that America is an Island. Homer, Strabo, Aristotle, Dionysius, Mela, Pliny, Pius 2. affirm the continent of asia, Africa, and Europe, to be environed with the Ocean. I may therefore boldly say, though later intelligences thereof had we none at all, that asia and the West Indies, be not tied together by any isthmos or streict of land, contrary to the opinion of some new Cosmographers, by whom doubtfully this matter hath been brought in controversy. And thus much for the first part of my answer unto the fourth objection.  
The second part, 
Lib. 2. Meteor. Cap. 1.  namely that America & Asie cannot be one continent, may thus be proved. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. The most rivers take down that way their course, where the earth is most hollow & deep, writeth Aristotle: and the sea, saith he in the same place, as it goeth farther, so is it found deeper. Into what gulf do the Moscovian rivers Onega, Duina, Oby, and Rha, power out their streams? Northward out of moscovia into the sea. Which way doth that sea strike? The South is main land, the Eastern coast waxeth more and more shallow: from the North, either naturally, because that part of the earth is higher Aristot. 2. met. c. 1. or of necessity, for that the forcible influence of some Northern Stars causeth the earth there to shake of the sea, as some Philosophers do think: or finally for the great store of waters engendered in that frosty and cold clime, that the banks are not able to hold them. Alber. in 2. Meteo. Cap. 6. From the North I say, continually falleth down great abundance of water. So that this Northeasterne currant must at the length abruptly ●owe toward us South on the West side of Fynmarke and Norway: or else strike down south-west above Groneland, or betwixt Groneland and Iseland, into the Northwest streict we speak of, as of congruence it doth, if you mark the situation of that region, and by the report of M. Furbisher, experience teacheth us. And M. Furbisher the further he travailed in the former passage, as he told me, the deeper always he found sea. Lay you now the sum hereof together. The rivers run where the Channels are most hollow, the sea in taking his course waxeth deeper, the sea waters fall continually from the North Southward, the Northeasterne currant striketh down into the streict we speak of, & is there augmented with whole mountains of ise & snow, falling down furiously out from the land under the North Pole. Where store of water is, there is it a thing impossible to want sea, 
Plin. lib. 2. Cap. 67.  where sea not only doth not want, but waxeth deeper, there can be discovered no land. Finally, whence I pray you came the contrary tide, that M. Furbisher met withal after that he had sailed no small way in that passage, if there be any isthmos or streict of land betwixt the aforesaid Northweststerne gulf and Mar deal Zur, to join Asia and America together? That conclusion frequented in schools Quidquid preter etc. was meant of the parts of the world then known, and so is it of right to be understood.  

Sol. 5.  The fift objection requireth for answer, wisdom, and policy, in the travailer, to win the Barbares favour by some good means: and so to arm & strengthen himself, that when he shall have the repulse in one coast, he may safely travail to an other, commodiously taking his convenient times, & discretely making choice of them with whom he will thoroughly deal. To force a violent entry, would for us English men be very hard, considering the strength and valeour of so great a nation, far distant from us, and the attempt thereof might be most perilous unto the doers, unless their part were very good. Touching their laws against strangers, you shall read nevertheless in the same relations of Galeotto Berara, that the Cathaian king is wont to grant free access unto all foreigners that trade into his country for merchandise, and a place of liberty for them to remain in: as the Mores had, until such time as they had brought the Loutea or lieutenant of that coast to be a circumcised Saracene: wherefore some of them were put to the sword, the rest were scattered abroad: at Fuquien, a great city in China, certain of them are yet this day to be seen. As for the Giapans, they be most desirous to be acquainted with strangers. The Portugals though they were straightly handled there at the first, yet in the end they found great favour at the prince his hands, insomuch that the Loutea or precedent that misused them, was therefore put to death. The rude Indish Canoa halleth that seas, the Portugals, the Saracenes, & Moor's travail continually up & down that reach from Giapan to China, from China to Malacca, from Malacca to the Moluccaes': and shall an Englishman, better appointed then any of them all (that I say no more of our navy) fear to sail in that Ocean? What seas at all do want piracy? what navigation is there void of peril? To the last argument. Our travelers need not to seek their return by the North-east, ne shall they be constrained, 
Sol. 6.  except they list, either to attempt Magellane streicte at the south-west, or to be in danger of the Portugals for the Southeast: they may return by the northwest, that same way they do go forth, as experience hath showed. The reason alleged for proof of the contrary, may be disproved after this manner. And first, it may be called in controversy, whether any currant continually be forced by the motion of Primum mobile, round about the world, or no? for learned men do diversely handle that question. The natural course of all waters is downward, wherefore of congruence they fall that way where they find the earth most low and deep: in respect whereof, it was erst said, the seas to strike from the Northern lands Southerly. Uiolently the seas are tossed and troubled diverse ways with the winds, 
Luc. lib. 1. Pharsal.  increased and diminished by the course of the Moon, hoist up and down through the sundry operations of the Son and the Stars: finally some be of opinion, that the seas be carried in part violently about the world after the daily motion of the highest movable heaven, in like manner as the elements of air and fire, with the rest of the heavenly spheres are, from the east unto the west. And this they do call their eastern currant, or levant stream. 
What the eastern currant is.  Some such currant may not be denied to be of great force in the hot Zone, for the nearness thereof unto the centre of the Son and blustering eastern winds violently driving the seas westward: howbeit in the temperate climes, the Son being farther of, and the winds more diverse, blowing as much from the north, the west, and south, as from the east, this rule doth not effectually withhold us from traveling eastward, ne be we kept ever back by the aforesaid Levant winds and stream. But in Magellane streict we are violently driven back westward: Ergo through the Northwesterne straight or Anian fret shall we not be able to return eastward? it followeth not. The first, for that the northwesterne streict hath more sea room at the least by one hundred english miles, than Magellane fret hath, the only want whereof causeth all narrow passages generally to be most violent. So would I say in Anian gulf, if it were so narrow as Don Diego and Zalterius have painted it out, any return that way to be full of difficulties, in respect of such streictnes thereof, not for the nearness of the Son, or eastern winds, violently forcing that way any levant stream. But in that place there is more sea room by many degrees, if the cards of Cabota, and Gemma Frisius, and that which Tramezine imprinted, be true. And hitherto reason see I none at all, but that I may as well give credit unto their doings, as to any of the rest. It must be Peregrinationis historia, that is, true reports of skilful travailers, as Ptolemy writeth, that in such controversies of Geography must put us out of double. Ortelius in his universal tables, 
Lib. 1. Geog. Cap. 2.  in his particular Maps of the west Indies, of all Asia, of the northern kingdoms, of the east Indies, Mercator in some of his globes, and general maps of the world, Moletius in his universal table of the Globe divided, in his sea card, and particular tables of the East Indies, Zalterius, and Don Diego, with Fernando Bertely, and others, do so much differ both from Gemma Frisius and Cabota, among themselves, & in divers places from themselves, concerning the divers situation and sundry limits of America, that one may not so rashly, as truly surmise, these men either to be ignorant in those points touching the aforesaid region, or that the maps they have given out unto the world, were collected only by them, & never of their own drawing. M. Furbishers prosperous voyage, and happy return, will absolutely decide these controversies, and certainly determine where the whole passage lieth, how long it is, what breadth it carrieth, how perilous, how prosperous the journey is, and what commodities the painful travailer can reap thereby, what gain the venturous merchant may look for, what wealth, what honour, what fame will to our english nation thereof ensue.  
Thus much, right honourable, my very good Lady, of your question concerning your servants voyage. If not so skilfully as I would, and was desirous fully to do, at the least as I could, & leisure suffered me, for the little knowledge God hath lent me, if it be any at all, in cosmography and Philosophy, and the small experience I have in travail. Choosing rather in the clear judgement of your Ho. mind to appear rude and ignorant, and so to be seen unto the multitude, then to be found unthankful and careless in any thing your Ho. should command me. God preserve your Honour. At the Court the twenty of March.  
Your Ho. most humbly at commandment. Richard wills.   

To the right worshipful, my singular good Mistress, M. Elizabeth Morisyn.  
Our Indian readings, our Asian lectures, our Geographical description of the whole world, will I end with certain reports of the province China in Cathayo, and some intelligences of the worthy islands lying thereby in the East Ocean. The relation whereof, though at the first might seem briefly to be passed over, and in a few substantial points only to be touched, as in the rest of our discourses concerning this faculty we have done: Yet the worthiness of matter herein contained, the order of civil government, the manners & fashions of the inhabiters, the description of that country, so well gathered the novelty thereof in our language, have effectually moved me to do the whole discourse into English. Needless I grant the labour is for you, that perfectly in so few Months, so few weeks, so few days, learned the Italian tongue, out of the which language this translation is made. The singular care you ever have had of my well doing, and the special favour I have found among your Honourable friends for your sake, would not only not let me to play the negligent Poet in the fift Act, but compelled me to handle even the last Scene more abundantly: aswell to acknowledge your good skill both in cosmography and in foreign languages, as also to testify unto the world, the great benefits the which I have received for uschering, as it were herein, so good, so wise, so virtuous, so worshipful a mistress. Now after all these learned exercises of your younger years, God almighty send you great good success in your present affairs, with increase of prosperity and much honour, as you daily shall grow elder.  
At London the 21. of Feburary. 1576. Your servant ever. R. wills.   

Reports of the province China. Certain reports of the province China, learned through the Portugals there imprisoned, and chief by the relation of Galeotto Perera, a gentleman of good credit, that lay prisoner in that country many years. Done out of Italian into english, by R. W.  
THis land of China is parted into .13. shires, the which sometimes were each one a kingdom by itself, but these many years they have been all subject unto one King. 
Fuquien.  Fuquien is made by the Portugals the first shire, because there their troubles began, and had occasion thereby to know the rest. In this shire be viii. cities, but one principally more famous than others, called Fuquieo, the other seven are reasonably great, the best known whereof unto the Portugals is Cinceo, 
Cinceo.  in respect of a certain haven joining thereunto, whither in time past they were wont for merchandise to resort.  
Cantan is the second shire, not so great in quantity, as well accounted of, both by the King thereof, 
Cantan.  and also by the Portugals, for that it lieth nearer unto Malacca than any other part of China, and was first descried by the Portugals before any other shire in that province: this shire hath in it seven cities.  
Chequeam is the third shire, 
Chequeam.  the chiefest city therein is Donchion, therein also standeth Liampo, with other thirtiene or fourtiene boroughs: country towns therein to to many to be spoken of.  
The fourth shire is called Xutiamfu, 
Xutiamfu.  the principal city thereof is great Pachin, where the King is always resident. In it are fifteen other very great cities: of other towns therein, and boroughs well walled and trenched about, I will say nothing.  
The fift shire hath name Chelim: the great city Nanquin, 
Chelim.  chief of other fifteen cities was herein of ancient time, the royal seat of the Chinish kings. From this shire, and from that aforesaid Chequeam forward, bare rule the other kings, until the whole region became one kingdom.  
The sixth shire beareth name Quianci, as also the principal city thereof, 
Quianci. rather Quinzi  wherein the fine clay to make vessels is wrought. The Portugals being ignorant of this country, and finding great abundance of that fine clay to be sold at Liampo, and that very good cheap, thought at the first that it had been made there, howbeit in fine, they perceived that the standing of Quinzi more near unto Liampo than to Cinceo or Cantan, was the cause of so much fine clay at Liampo: within the compass of Quinci shire be other .12. cities.  
The seventh shire is Quicin, the eight Quansi, the ninth Confu, the tenth Vrnan, the eleventh Sichiva. In the first hereof there be .16. cities, in the next fifteen: how many towns the other three have, we are ignorant as yet, as also of the proper names of the .12. and .13. shires, and the towns therein.  
This finally may be generally said hereof, that the greater shires in China province, may be compared with mighty kingdoms.  
In each one of these shires be set Ponchiassini and Anchiassini, before whom are handled the matters of other cities. There is also placed in each one a Tutan, as you would say a governor, and a Chian, that is a visitor, as it were: whose office is to go in circuit, and to see justice exactly done. By these means so uprightly things are ordered there, that it may be worthily accounted one of the best governed provinces in all the world.  

Pachin. al. Pochang.  The King maketh always his abode in the great city Pachin, as much to say in our language as by the name thereof I am advertised, the town of the kingdom. This kingdom is so large, that under five months you are not able to travail from the towns by the sea side to the Court and back again, no not under three months in post at your urgent business. The Posthorses in this country are little of body, but swift of foot. Many do travail the greater part of this journey by water in certain light barks, for the multitude of rivers commodious for passage from one city to an other.  
The king, notwithstanding the hugeness of his kingdom, 
Their months.  hath such a care thereof, that every Moon (by the Moons they reckon their months) he is advertised fully of whatsoever thing happeneth therein, by these means following.  
The whole province being divided into shires, and each shire having in it one chief and principal city, whereunto the matters of all the other cities, towns, and boroughs, are brought: there are drawn, in every chief city aforesaid, intelligences of such things as do monthly fall out, and be sent in writing to the Court. If happily in one month every post is not able to go so long a way, yet doth there notwithstanding once every month arrive one post out of the shire. Who so cometh before the newe-Moone, stayeth for the delivery of his letters until the Moon be changed. Then likewise are dispatched other posts, back into all the .13. shires again.  
Before that we do come to Cinceo we have to pass through many places, and some of great importance. For this country is so well inhabited near the sea side, that you can not go one mile but you shall see some town, Borough, or Hostry, the which are so abundantly provided of all things, that in the cities & towns they live civilly. Nevertheless such as dwell abroad are very poor, for the multitude of them every where so great, that out of a tree you shall see many times swarm a number of children, where a man would not have thought to have found any one at all.  
From these places in number infinite, you shall come unto two cities very populose, and being compared with Cinceo, not possibly to be discerned which is the greater of them. These cities are as well walled as any cities in all the world. As you come in to either of them, standeth so great and mighty a bridge, that the like thereof I have never seen in Portugal nor else where. I heard one of my fellows say, that he told in one bridge .40. arches. The occasion wherefore these bridges are made so great, is for that the country is toward the sea very plain and low, & overwhelmed ever as the sea water increaseth. The breadth of the bridges, although it be well proportioned unto the length thereof, yet are they equally built, no higher in the middle than at either end, in such wise that you may directly see from the one end to the other, the sides are wonderfully well engraue● after the manner of Rome works. But that we did most marvel at, was therewithal the hugeness of the stones, the like whereof as we came in to the city, we did see many set up in places dishabited by the way, to no small charges of theirs, howbeit to little purpose, whereas no body seeth them but such as do come buy. The arches are not made after our fashion, vaunted with sundry stones set together: but paved, as it were, whole stones reaching from one pillar to an other, in such wise that they lie both for the arches heads, and gallantly serve also for the high way. I have been astunned to behold the hugeness of these aforesaid stones, some of them are xii paces long and upward, the least a xi good paces long, and an half.  
The ways each-where are gallantly paved with foursquare stone, except it be where for want of stone they use to lay brick: in this voyage we travailed over certain hills, where the ways were pitched, and in many places no worse paved than in the plain ground. This causeth us to think, that in all the world there be no better workmen for buildings, than the ininhabitantes of China.  
The country is so well inhabited, that no one foot of ground is left untilled: small store of cattle have we seen this way, we saw only certain Oxen wherewithal the countrymen do plough their ground. One Ox draweth the plough alone, not only in this shire, but in other places also, wherein is greater store of cattle. These countrymen by art do that in tillage, which we are constrained to do by force. Here be sold the voydinges of close stools, although there wanteth not the dung of beasts: & the excrements of man are good merchandise throughout all China. The dungfermers seek in every street by exchange to buy this dirty ware for herbs and wood. The custom is very good for keeping the city clean. There is great abundance of Hens, Geese, Ducks, Swine, and Goats, Weathers have they none: the Hens are sold by weight, and so are all other things. Two pound of hens flesh, Goose, or Duck, is worth two Foi of their money, that is, d. ob. sterling. Swine's flesh is sold at a penny the pound. Beef beareth the same price, for the scarcity thereof, howbeit Northward from Fuquieo, & farther of from the sea coast, there is Beef more plenty and sold better cheap, Beef only excepted, great abundance of all these viands we have had in all the cities we passed through. And if this country were like unto India, the inhabitants whereof eat neither Hen, beef, nor pork, but keep that only for the Portugals and moors, they would be sold here for nothing. But it so falling out, that the Chineans are the greatest eaters in all the world, they do feed upon all things, specially on pork, the fatter that is, unto them the less loathsome. The highest price of these things aforesaid, I have set down, better cheap shall you sometimes buy them for the great plenty thereof in this country. Frogs are sold at the same price that is made of Hens, and are good meat amongst them, as also Dogs, Cats, Rats, Snakes, and all other unclean meats.  
The cities be very gallant, specially near unto the gates, the which are marvelously great, & covered with Iron. The gate-houses built on high with Towers, the lower part thereof, is made of brick and stone, proportionally with the walls, from the walls upward, the building is of timber, and many stories in it one above the other. The strength of their towns is in the mighty walls and ditches, artillery have they none.  
The streets in Cinceo, and in all the rest of the cities we have seen are very fair, so large and so straight, that it is wonderful to behold. Their houses are built with timber, the foundations only excepted, the which are laid with stone, in each side of the streets are paynteses or continual porches for the merchants to walk under: the breadth of the street is nevertheless such, that in them xu men may ride commodiously side by side. As they ride they must needs pass under many high arches of triumph that cross over the streets made of timber, and carved diversely, covered with tile of fine clay: under these arches the Mercers do utter their smaller wares, and such as list to stand there, are defensed from rain and the heat of the Sun. The greater gentlemen have these arches at their doors: although some of them be not so mightily built as the rest.  
I shall have occasion to speak of a certain order of gentlemen that are called Loutea, 
Loutea.  I will first therefore expound what this word signifieth. Loutea is as much to say in our language as Sir, and when any of them calleth his name, he answereth Sir: and as we do say, that the king hath made some gentleman, so say they, that there is made a Loutea. And for that amongst them the degrees are divers both in name and office, I will tell you only of some principals, being not able to advertise you of all.  
The manner how gentlemen are created Louteas, and do come to that honour and title, is by the giving of a broad girdle not like to the rest, & a cap, at the commandment of the king. The name Loutea is more general and common unto more, than equality of honour thereby signified, agreeth withal. Such Louteas that do serve their prince in weighty matters for justice, are created after trial made of their learning: but the other which serve in smaller affairs, as Captains, Constables, sergeants by land and sea, receivers, and such like, whereof there be in every city, as also in this, very many, are made for favour: the chief Louteas are served kneeling.  
The whole province China is divided, as I have said, into thirtiene shires, in every shire at the least is one governor called there Tutan, in some shires there be two.  
Chief in office next unto them be certain other named Chians, that is, 
Chian, al. Chaen.  high Commissioners as you would say, or visitors, with full authority in such wise, that they do call unto an account the Tutanes themselves, but their authority lasteth not in any shire longer than one year. Nevertheless in every shire being at the least seven cities, yea, in some of them fifteen or sixtiene, beside other boroughs & towns not well to be numbered, these visitors, where they come, are so honoured and feared, as though they were some great princes. At the years end their circuit done, they come unto that city which is chief of others in the shire, to do justice there: finally busying themselves in the searching out of such as are to receive the order of Louteas, whereof more shall be said in an other place.  
Over and besides these officers, in the chief city of each one of these aforesaid thirtiene provinces, 
Ponchiassi.  is resident one Ponchiassi, captain thereof, and Treasurer of all the kings revenues. This Magistrate maketh his abode in one of the four greatest houses that be in all these head cities. And although the principal part of his function be, to be captain, to be Treasurer of the revenues in that province, to send these revenues at appointed times to the Court: yet hath he notwithstanding by his office also to meddle with matters appertaining unto justice.  
In the second great house dwelleth an other Magistrate called Anchiassi, a great office also, 
Anchiassi. al. Hexasi.  for he hath dealings in all matters of justice. Who although he be somewhat inferior in dignity unto the Ponchiassis, yet for his great dealings and general charge of justice, whosoever seeth the affairs of the one house and the other, might judge this Anchiassi to be the greater.  
Tuzi, an other officer so called, lieth in the third house, a magistrate of importance, 
Tuzi.  specially in things belonging unto warfare, for thereof hath he charge.  
There is resident in the fourth house a fourth officer, bearing name Taissu. 
Taissu.  In this house is the principal prison of all the city. Each one of these Magistrates aforesaid may both lay evil doers in prison, and deliver them out again, except the fact be heinous and of importance: in such a case they can do nothing, except they do meet altogether. And if the deed deserve death, all they together can not determine thereof, without recourse made unto the Chian wheresoever he be, or to the Tutan: and eftsoons it falleth out, that the case be referred unto higher power. In all cities, not only chief in each shire, but in the rest also, are means found to make Louteas. Many of them do study at the prince his charges, wherefore at the years end they resort unto the head cities, whither the Chians do come, as it hath been erst said, as well to give these degrees, as to sit in judgement over the prisoners.  
The Chians go in circuit every year, but such as are to be chosen to the greatest offices, meet not but from three years to three years, and that in certain large halls appointed for them to be examined in. Many things are asked them, whereunto if they do answer accordingly, and be found sufficient to take their degree, the Chian by and by granteth it them: 
Licentiates.  but the Cap & girdle whereby they are known to be Louteas, they wear not before that they be confirmed by the king. Their examination done, 
Doctors.  and trial made of them, such as have taken their degree wont to be given them with all ceremonies, use to banquet and feast many days together (as the Chineans fashion is to end all their pleasures with eating and drinking) and so remain chosen to do the king service in matters of learning. 
Dutch like.  The other examinates found insufficient to proceed, are sent back to their study again. Whose ignorance is perceived to come of negligence & default, such a one is whipped, and sometimes sent to prison, where we lying that year when this kind of act was, we found many thus punished, and demanding the cause thereof, they said it was for that they knew not how to answer unto certain things asked them. It is a world to see how these Louteas are served and feared, in such wise, that in public assemblies at one shriek they give, all the servitors belonging unto justice, tremble thereat. At their being in these places, when they list to move, be it but even to the gate, these servitors do take them up, and carry them in seats of beaten gold. After this sort are they borne when they go in the city, either for their own business abroad, or to see each other at home. For the dignity they have, and office they do bear, they be all accompanied: the very meanest of them all that goeth in these seats is ushered by two men at the least, that cry unto the people to give place, howbeit, they need it not, for that reverence the common people hath unto them. They have also in their company certain sergeants, with their Maces either silvered, or altogether silver, some two, some four, other six, other eight, conveniently for each one his degree. The more principal and chief Louteas have going orderly before these sergeants, many other with staves, and a great many catchpoules with rods of indish canes, dragged on the ground, so that the streets being paved, you may hear a far of as well the noise of the rods, as the voice of the criers. These fellows serve also to apprehend others, and the better to be known they wear livery red girdles, and in their caps Peacocks feathers. Behind these Louteas come such as do bear certain tables hanged at staves ends, wherein is written in silver letters the name, degree, and office of that Loutea, whom they follow. In like manner they have borne after them hats agreeable unto their titles: if the Loutea be mean, then hath he brought after him but one hat, and that may not be yellow: but if he be of the better sort, then may he have two, three, or four: the principal and chief Louteas, may have all their hats yellow, the which among them is accounted great honour. The Loutea for wars, although he be but mean, may notwithstanding have yellow hats. The Tutanes and Chians, when they go abroad, have besides all this before them led .3. or .4. horses with their guard in armour. Furthermore the Louteas, yea and all the people of China, are wont to eat their meat sitting on stools at high tables as we do, and that very cleanly, although they use nether table clothes nor napkins. Whatsoever is set down upon the board, is first carved, before that it be brought in: they feed with two sticks, refraining from touching their meat with their hands, even as we do with forks, for the which respect, they less do need any table clothes. He is the nation only civil at meat, 
We, that is the Italians and Spaniards.  but also in conversation, and in courtesy they seem to exceed all other. Likewise in their dealings, after their manner, they are so ready, that they far pass all other gentiles and moors: the greater states are so vain, that they line their clothes with the best silk that may be found. The Louteas, are an idle generation, without all manner of exercises and pastimes, except it be eating and drinking. Sometimes they walk abroad in the fields, to make the soldiers shoot at pricks with their bows, but their eating passeth: they will stand eating even when the other do draw to shoot. The prick is a great blanket spread on certain long poles, he that striketh it, hath of the best man there standing a piece of crimson taffeta, the which is knit about his head: in this sort the wynners' honoured, and the Louteas with their bellies full, return home again. The inhabitants of China, be very great Idolaters, all generally do worship the heavens: and as we are wont to say, God knoweth it: so say they at every word, Tien Tautee, that is to say, The heavens do know it. Some do worship the Son, and some the Moon, as they think good, for none are bound more to one then to an other. In their temples, the which they do call Meani, they have a great altar in the same place as we have, true it is that one may go round about it. There set they up the Image of a certain Loutea of that country, whom they have in great reverence for certain notable things he did. 
After the Dutch fashion.  At the right hand standeth the devil, much more ugly painted than we do use to set him out, whereunto great homage is done by such as come into the temple to ask counsel, or to draw lots: this opinion they have of him, that he is malicious and able to do evil. If you ask them what they do think of the souls departed, they will answer, that they be immortal, and that as soon as any one departeth out of this life, he becometh a devil if he have lived well in this world, 
Pithigorian like.  if otherwise, that the same devil changeth him into a bufle, ox, or dog. Wherefore to this devil do they much honour, to him do they sacrifice, praying him that he will make them like unto himself, and not like other beasts. They have moreover an other sort of temples, wherein both upon the altars and also on the walls do stand many Idols well proportioned, but bare headed: These bear name Omithofon, accounted of them spirits, but such as in heaven do nether good nor evil, thought to be such men and women, as have chastely lived in this world in abstinence from fish and flesh, fed only with rise & salates. Of that devil they make some account, for these spirits they care little or nothing at all. Again they hold opinion that if a man do well in this life, the heavens will give him many temporal blessings, but if he do evil, then shall he have infirmities, diseases, troubles, and penury, and all this without any knowledge of God. Finally, this people knoweth no other thing then to live & die, yet because they be reasonable creatures, all seemed good unto them we speak in our language, though it were not very sufficient: our manner of praying especially pleased them, and truly they are well enough disposed to receive the knowledge of the truth. Our lord grant for his mercy all things so to be disposed, that it may some time be brought to pass, that so great a nation as this is, perish not for want of help.  
Our manner of praying so well liked them, that in prison importunately they besought us to write for them somewhat as concerning heaven, the which we did to their contentation with such reasons as we knew, howbeit not very cunningly. As they do their Idolatry they laugh at themselves. If at any time this country might be joined in league with the kingdom of Portugal, in such wise that free access were had to deal with the people there, they might all be soon converted. The greatest fault we do find in them is Sodomy, a vice very common in the meaner sort, & nothing strange amongst the best. This sin were it left of them, in all other things so well disposed they be, that a good interpreter in a short space might do there great good, if, as I said, the country were joined in league with us.  
Furthermore the Louteas, with all the people of China, are wont to solemnize the days of the new and full Moons in visiting one each other, and making great banquets, for to that end, as I erst said, do tend all their pastimes, and spending their days in pleasure. They are wont also to solemnize each one his birth day, whereunto their kindred and friends do resort of custom, with presents of jewels or money, receiving again for their reward good cheer. They keep in like manner a general feast with great banquets that day their king was borne. But their most principal and greatest feast of all, and best cheer, is the first day of their new year, namely the first day of the new Moon of Februarye, so that their first month is March, and they reckon the times accordingly, respect being had unto the reign of their Princes: as when any deed is written, they date it thus, Made such a day of such a Moon, and such a year of the reign of such a King. And their ancient writings bear date of the years of this or that King.  
Now will I speak of the manner the which the Chineans do observe in doing justice, that it may be known how far these gentiles do herein exceed many Christians, that be more bounden than they to deal justly and in truth. Because the Chinishe King maketh his abode continually in the City Pachyn, his kingdom so great, the shires so many, as tofore it hath been said: in it therefore the Governors and Rulers, much like unto our sheriffs, be so appointed suddenly and speedily discharged again, that they have no time to grow nought. Furthermore to keep the state in more security, the Louteas that govern one shire, are chosen out of some other shire distant far of, where they must leave their wives, children, and goods, carryeng nothing with them but themselves. True it is, that at their coming thither they do find in a readiness all things necessary, their house, furniture, servants, and all other things in such perfection and plenty, that they want nothing. Thus the king is well served without all fear of treason.  
In the principal cities of the shires be four chief Louteas, before whom are brought all matters of the inferior towns, throughout the whole realm. divers other Louteas have the maneaging of justice, and receiving of rents, bound to yield an account thereof unto the greater officers. Other do see that there be no evil rule kept in the city: each one as it behoveth him. Generally all these do imprison malefactors, cause them to be whipped & racked, hoisting them up & down by the arms with a cord, a thing very usual there, and accounted no shame. 
The Italians call it the strappado.  These Louteas do use great diligence in the apprehending of thieves, so that it is a wonder to see a thief escape away in any town, city, or village. Upon the sea near unto the shore many are taken, and look even as they are taken, so be they first whipped, and afterward laid in prison, where shortly after they all die for hunger and cold. At that time, when we were in prison, there died of them above threescore and ten. If happily any one, having the means to get food, do escape, he is set with the condemned persons, and provided for as they be by the king, in such wise as hereafter it shallbe said.  
Their whyps be certain pieces of canes, cleft in the middle, in such sort that they seem rather plain then sharp. He that is to be whipped lieth grovelong on the ground. Upon his thighs the Hangman layeth on blows mightily with these canes, that the standers by tremble at their cruelty. Ten stripes draw a great deal of blood, twenty or thirty spoil the flesh altogether, fifty or threescore will require long time to be healed, and if they come to the number of one hundred, then are they incurable.  
The Louteas observe moreover this: when any man is brought before them to be examined, they ask him openly in the hearing of as many as be present, be the offence never so great. Thus did they also behave themselves with us. For this cause amongst them can there be no false witness, as daily amongst us it falleth out. This good cometh thereof, that many being always about the judge to hear the evidence, and bear witness, the process can not be falsified, as it happeneth sometimes with us. The Mores, Gentiles, & jews, have all their sundry oaths, the Mores do swear by their Mossafos, the brahmin's by their Fili, the rest likewise by the things they do worship. The Chineans though they be wont to swear by heaven, by the Moon, by the Sun, and by all their Idols, in judgement nevertheless they swear not at all. If for some offence an oath be used of any one, by and by with the least evidence he is tormented, so be the witnesses he bringeth, if they tell not the truth, or do in any point disagree, except they be men of worship and credit, who are believed without any farther matter: the rest are made to confess the truth by force of torments and whips. Besides this order observed of them in examinations, they do fear so much their king, and he where he maketh his abode keepeth them so low, that they dare not once stir. Again, these Louteas as great as they be, notwithstanding the multitude of Notaries they have, not trusting any others, do write all great processes and matters of importance themselves. Moreover one virtue they have worthy of great praise, and that is, being men so well regarded and accounted of as though they were princes, they be patiented above measure in giving audience. We poor strangers brought before them might say what we would, as all to be lies and falaces that they did write, ne did we stand before them with the usual ceremonies of that country, yet did they bear with us so patiently, that they caused us to wonder, knowing specially how little any advocate or judge is wont in our country to bear with us. For where so ever in any town of Christendom should be accused unknown men as we were, I know not what end the very innocentes cause would have: but we in a Heathen country, having our great enemies two of the chiefest men in a whole town, wanting an interpreter, ignorant of that country language, did in the end see our great adversaries cast into prison for our sake, and deprived of their offices and honour for not doing justice, yea not to escape death, for as the rumour goeth, they shallbe beheaded. Somewhat is now to be said of the laws that I have been able to know in this country, and first, no theft or murder, is at any time pardoned: adulterers are put in prison, and the fact once proved, condemned to die, the woman's husband must accuse them: this order is kept with men and women found in that fault, but thieves and murderers are inprisoned as I have said, where they shortly die for hunger and cold. If any one happily escape by bribing the jailor to give him meat, his process goeth farther, and cometh to the court where he is condemned to die. Sentence being given, the prisoner is brought in public with a terrible band of men that lay him in Irons hand and foot, with a board at his neck one handful broad, in length reaching down to his knees, 
A pylle●● board.  cleft in two parts, and with a hole one handful downward in the table fit for his neck, the which they enclose up therein, nailing the board fast together. one handful of the board standeth up behind in the neck: the sentence and cause wherefore the felon was condemned to die, is written in that part of the table that standeth before.  
This ceremony ended, he is laid in a great prison in the company of some other condemned persons, the which are found by the king as long as they do live. The board aforesaid so made, tormenteth the prisoners very much, keeping them both from rest, & eke letting them to eat commodyously, their hands being manecled in Irons under that board, so that in fine there is no remedy but death. In the chief cities of every shire, as we have erst said, there be four principal houses, in each of them a prison: but in one of them where the Taissu maketh his abode, there is a greater & a more principal prison than in any of the rest: & although in every city there be many, nevertheless in three of them remain only such as be condemned to die. Their death is much prolonged, for that ordinarily there is no execution done but once a year, though many die for hunger and cold, as we have seen in this prison. Execution is done in this manner. The Chian, to wit the high commissioner or Lord chief justice, at the years end goeth to the head city, where he heareth again the causes of such as be condemned. Many times he delivereth some of them, declaring that board to have been wrongfully put about their necks: the visitation ended, he chooseth out seven or viii not many more or less, of the greatest malefactors, the which, to fear and keep in awe the people, are brought into a great market place, where all the great Louteas meet together, and after many ceremonies and superstitions, as the use of the country is, are beheaded. This is done once a year: who so escapeth that day, may be sure that he shall not be put to death all that year following, & so remaineth at the kings charges in the greater prison. In that prison where we lay were all ways one hundred & more of these condemned persons, besides them that lay in other prisons.  
These prisons wherein the condemned caitiffs do remain are so strong, that it hath not been hard, that any prisoner in all China hath escaped out of prison, for in deed it is a thing impossible. The prisons are thus builded. first all the place is mightily walled about, the walls be very strong and high, the gate of no less force: within it three other gates, before you come where the prisoners do lie, there many great lodgings are to be seen of the Louteas, Notaries, Parthions, that is, such as do there keep watch and ward day and night, the court large and paved, on the one side whereof standeth a prison, with two mighty gates, wherein are kept such prisoners as have committed enormous offences. This prison is so great, that in it are streets and Market places wherein all things necessary are sold. Yea some prisoners live by that kind of trade, buyeng and selling, and letting out beds to hire: some are daily sent to prison, some daily delivered, wherefore this place is never void of seven or eight hundred men that go at liberty.  
Into one other prison of condemned persons shall you go at three iron gates, the court paved and vaunted round about, & open above as it were a cloister. In this cloister be eight rooms with iron doors, and in each of them a large Gallery, wherein every night the prisoners do lie at length, their feet in the stocks, their bodies hampered in huge wooden grates that keep them from sitting, so that they lie as it were in a cage, sleep if they can: in the morning they are loosed again, that they may go into the court. Notwithstanding the strength of this prison, it is kept with a garrison of men, part whereof watch within the house, part of them in the Court, some keep about the prison with lanterns and watchebelles answering one an other five times every night, and giving warning so loud, that the Loutea resting in a chamber not near thereunto, may hear them. In these prisons of condemned persons remain some .15. other 20. years imprisoned, not executed, for the love of their honourable friends that seek to prolong their lives. Many of these prisoners be shoemakers, and have from the king a certain allowance of rise: some of them work for the keeper, who suffereth them to go at liberty without fetters and boards, the better to work. Howbeit when the Loutea calleth his check roll, & with the keeper vieweth them, they all wear their liveries, that is, boards at their necks, yronned hand and foot. When any of these prisoners dieth, he is to be seen of the Loutea and Notaries, brought out at a gate so narrow, that there can but one be drawn out there at once. The prisoner being brought forth, one of the aforesaid Parthians striketh him thrice on the head with an iron sledge, that done, he is delivered unto his friends, if he have any, otherwise the king hireth men to carry him to his burial in the fields.  
Thus adulterers and thieves are used. Such as be imprisoned for debt once known, lie there until it be paid. The Taissu or Loutea calleth them many times before him by the virtue of his office, who understanding the cause wherefore they do not pay their debts, appointeth them a certain time to do it, within the compass whereof if they discharge not their debts being debtor in deed, than they be whipped & condemned to perpetual imprisonment: if the creditors be many, & one is to be paid before an other, they do, contrary to our manner, pay him first, of whom they last borrowed, and so ordinarily the rest, in such sort that the first lender be the last receiver. The same order is kept in paying legacies: the last named, receiveth his portion first. They account it nothing to show favour to such a one as can do the like again: 
Of like the first lender's be the more wealthier.  but to do good to them that have little or nothing, that is worth thanks, therefore pay they the last before the first, for that their intent seemeth rather to be virtuous then gainful.  
When I said that such as be committed to prison for theft & murder, were judged by the Court, I meant not them that were apprehended in the deed doing, for they need no trial, but are brought immediately before the Tutan, who out of hand giveth sentence. Other not taken so openly, and do need trial, are the malefactors put to execution once a year in the chief cities, to keep in awe the people: or condemned, do remain in prison, looking for their day. thieves being taken, are carried to prison from one place to an other in a chest upon men's shoulders, hired therefore by the king, the Chest is six handfuls high, the prisoner sitteth therein upon a bench, the cover of the chest is two boards, amid them both a pillerylyke hole, for the prisoner his neck, there sitteth he with his head without the chest, & the rest of his body within, not able to move or turn his head this way or that way, nor to pluck it in: the necessities of nature he voideth at a hole in the bottom of the chest, the meat he eateth is put into his mouth by others. There abideth he day and night during his whole journey: if happily his porters stumble, or the chest do jog, or be set down carelessly, it turneth to his great pains that sitteth therein, all such motions being unto him hanging as it were. Thus were our companions carried from Cinceo, seven days journey, never taking any rest as afterward they told us, & their greatest grief was to stay by the way: as soon as they came, being taken out of the chests, they were not able to stand on their feet, and two of them died shortly after.  
When we lay in prison at Fuquieo, we came many times abroad, and were brought to the palaces of noble men, 
Fuquieo.  to be seen of them and their wives, for that they had never seen any Portugal before. Many things they asked us of our country, and our fashions, and did write every thing, for they be curious in novelties above measure. 
Hereof tofore.  The gentlemen show great courtesy unto strangers, and so did we find at their hands, and because that many times we were brought abroad into the city, somewhat will I say of such things as I did see therein, being a gallant city, and chief in one of the thirtiene shires aforesaid.  
The city Fuquieo, is very great, and mightily walled with square stone both within and without, and as it may seem by the breadth thereof, filled up in the middle with earth, laid over with brick and covered with tile, after the manner of porches or galeryes, that one might dwell therein. The steyers they use, are so easily made, that one may go them up and down a horseback, as eftsoons they do: the streets are paved, as already it hath been said: there be a great number of Merchants, every one hath written in a great table at his door such things as he hath to sell. In like manner every artisan painteth out his craft: the market places be large, great abundance of all things there be to be sold. The city standeth upon water, many streams run through it, the banks pitched, and so broad that they serve for streets to the cities use. Over the streams are sundry bridges both of timber & stone, that being made level with the streets, hinder not the passage of the Barges to and fro, the channels are so deep. Where the streams come in and go out of the city, be certain arches in the wall, there go in and out their Parai, 
Parai.  that is a kind of Barges they have, and this only the day time: at night these arches are closed up with gates, so do they shut up all the gates of the city. These streams and Barges do ennoblyshe very much the city, and make it as it were to seem an other Venice. The buildings are even, well made, high, not lofted, except it be some wherein merchandise is laid. It is a world to see how great these cities are, and the cause is, for that the houses are built even, as I have said, and do take a great deal of room. One thing we saw in this city that made us all to wonder, and is worthy to be noted: Namely, over a porch at the coming in to one of the aforesaid four houses, the which the king hath in every shire for his governors as I have erst said, standeth a Tower built upon forty pillars, each one whereof is but one stone, each one forty handfuls or spans long: in breadth or compass twelve, as many of us did measure them. Besides this, their greatness such in one piece, that it might seem impossible to work them: they be moreover cornered, and in colour, length, and breadth so like, that the one nothing differeth from the other. This thing made us all to wonder very much.  
We are wont to call this country China, and the people Chineans, but as long as we were prisoners, not hearing amongst them at any time that name, I determined to learn how they were called: and asked sometimes by them thereof, for that they understood us not when we called them Chineans, I answered them that all the inhabitants of India named them Chineans, wherefore I prayed them that they would tell me, for what occasion they are so called, whether peradventure any city of theirs bore that name. Hereunto they always answered me, to have no such name, nor ever to have had. Than did I ask them what name the whole country beareth, and what they would answer being asked of other nations what countrymen they were? It was told me that of ancient time in this country had been many kings, and though presently it were all under one, each kingdom nevertheless enjoyed that name it first had, these kingdoms are the provinces I spoke of before. In conclusion they said, that the whole country is called Tamen, and the inhabitants Tamegines, 
Tamen the proper name of China.  so that this name China or Chineans, is not heard of in that country. I do think that the dearness of an other province thereabout called Cochinchina, and the inhabitants thereof Cochinesses, first discovered before that China was, lying not far from Malacca, did give occasion both to the one nation and to the other of that name Chineans, as also the whole country to be named China. But their proper name is that aforesaid.  
I have heard moreover that in the city Nanquim remaineth a table of gold, and in it written a king his name, as a memory of that residence the kings were wont to keep there. This table standeth in a great palace, covered always, except it be in some of their festival days, at what time they are wont to let it be seen: covered nevertheless as it is, all the nobility of the city goeth of duty to do it every day reverence. The like is done in the head cities of all the other shires in the palaces of the Ponchiassini, wherein these aforesaid tables do stand with the king his name written in them, although no reverence be done thereunto but in solemn feasts.  
I have likewise understood that the city Pachin, where the king maketh his abode, 
Pochang. al.  is so great, that to go from one side to the other, besides the Subarbes, the which are greater than the city itself, it requireth one whole day a horseback, going hackney pace. In the Subarbes be many wealthy merchants of all sorts. They told me furthermore that it was Moted about, and in the Motes great store of fish, whereof the king maketh great gains.  

Their enemies  It was also told me that the king of China had no king to wage battle withal, besides the Tartars, with whom he had concluded a peace more than fourscore years ago. Nevertheless their friendship was not so great, that the one nation might marry with the other. And demanding with whom they married, 
Marriage of the kings children.  they said, that in old time the Chinish kings, when they would marry their daughters, accustomed to make a solemn feast, whereunto came all sorts of men. The daughter that was to be married, stood in a place where she might see them all, and look whom she liked best, him did she choose to husband, and if happily he were of a base condition, he became by and by a gentleman: but this custom hath been left long since. Now a days the king marrieth his daughters at his own pleasure, with great men of the same kingdom: the like order he observeth in the marriage of his sons.  
They have moreover one thing very good, and that which made us all to marvel at them being Gentiles: namely, that there be hospitals in all their cities, always full of people, we never saw any poor body beg. 
He speaketh not here of all China, but of the cities, for in other places there be beggars, as you have seen already, swarming out of trees.  We therefore asked the cause of this: answered it was, that in every city there is a great circuit, wherein be many houses for poor people, for blind, lame, old folk, not able to travail for age, nor having any other means to live. These folk have in the aforesaid houses, ever plenty of rice during their lives, but nothing else. Such as be received into these houses, come in after this manner. When one is sick, blind, or lame, he maketh a supplication to the Ponchiassis, and proving that to be true he writeth, he remaineth in the aforesaid great lodging as long as he liveth: besides this they keep in these places Swine and Hens, whereby the poor be relieved without going a begging.  
I said before that China was full of rivers, but now I mind to confirm the same anew: for the farther we went into the country, the greater we found the rivers. Sometimes we were so far of from the sea, that where we came no sea fish had been seen, and salt was there very dear, of fresh water fish yet was there great abundance, & that fish very good: they keep it good after this manner. Where the rivers do meet, and so pass into the sea, there lieth great store of Boats, specially where no salt water cometh, and that in March and Apryll. These Boats are so many that it seemeth wonderful, ne serve they for other than to take small fish. By the rivers sides they make leyres of fine and strong nets, that lie three handfuls under water, and one above, to keep and nourish their fish in, until such time as other fishers do come with Boats, bringing for that purpose certain great chests lined with paper, able to hold water, wherein they carry their fish up and down the river, every day renewing the chest with fresh water, and selling their fish in every city, town, and village, where they pass, unto the people as they need it: most of them have net leyres to keep fish in always for their provision. Where the greater Boats can not pass any farther forward, they take lesser, and because the whole country is very well watered, there is so great plenty of divers sorts of fish, that it is wonderful to see: assuredly we were amazed to behold the manner of their provision. Their fish is chief nourished with the dung of Bufles and Oxen, that greatly fatteth it. Although I said their fishing to be in March and April at what time we saw them do it, nevertheless they told us that they fyshed at all times, for that usually they do feed on fish, wherefore it behoveth them to make their provision continually. When we had passed Fuquien, 
He speaketh of Fuquien shire.  we went into Quicin shire, where the fine clay vessel is made, as I said before: and we came to a city, the one side whereof is built upon the foot of a hill, whereby passeth a river navigable: there we took Boat, and went by water toward the sea: on each side of the river we found many cities, towns, and villages, wherein we saw great store of merchandise, but specially of fine clay: there did we land by the way to buy victuals and other necessaries. Going down this river southward, we were glad that we drew near unto a warmer country, from whence we had been far distant: this country we passed through in eight days, for our journey lay down the stream. Before that I do say any thing of that shire we came into, I will first speak of the great city of Quicin, wherein always remaineth a Tutan, that is a governor, as you have seen, though some Tutans do govern two or three shires.  
That Tutan that was condemned for our cause, of whom I spoke before, was borne in this country, but he governed Foquien shire: nothing it availed him to be so great an officer. This country is so great, that in many places where we went, there had been as yet no talk of his death, although he were executed a whole year before. At the city Quanche whither we came, the river was so great that it seemed a sea, 
Aliis Cenchi.  though it were so little where we took water, that we needed small boats. One day about ix of the clock, beginning to row near the walls with the stream, we came at noon to a bridge made of many barges, overlinked all together with two mighty cheyns. There stayed we until it was late, but we saw not one go either up thereon or down, except two Louteas that about the going down of the sun, came & set them down there, the one in one side, the other in the other side. Than was the bridge opened in many places, & barges both great & small to the number of .600. began to pass: those that went up the stream, at one place, such as came down, at an other. When all had thus shot the bridge, than was it shut up again. We hear say that every day they take this order in all principal places of merchandise, for paying of the custom unto the king, specially for salt, whereof the greatest revenues are made that the king hath in this country. 
The kings revenues.  The passages of the bridge where it is opened, be so near the shore, that nothing can pass without touching the same. To stay the barges at their pleasure, that they go no farther forward, are used certain iron instruments. The bridge consisteth of .112. barges, there stayed we until the evening that they were opened, lothesomely oppressed by the multitude of people that came to see us, so many in number, that we were enforced to go aside from the bank until such time as the bridge was opened: howbeit we were nevertheless thronged about which many boats full of people. And though in other cities and places where we went, the people came so importunate upon us, that it was needful to withdraw ourselves: yet were we here much more molested for the number of people, and this bridge, the principal way out of the city unto an other place so well inhabited, that were it walled about, it might be compared to the city. When we had shot the bridge, we kept along the city until that it was night, than met we with an other river that joined with this, we rowed up that by the walls until we came to an other bridge gallantly made of barges, but lesser a great deal than that other bridge over the greater stream: here stayed we that night, and other two days with more quiet, being out of the press of the people. These rivers do meet without at one corner point of the city. In either of them were so many barges great and small, that we all thought them at the least to be above three thousand: the greater number thereof was in the lesser river, where we were. Amongst the rest here lay certain greater vessels, called in their language Parai, that serve for the Tutan, 
Parai.  when he taketh his voyage by other rivers that join with this, towards Pachin, where the king maketh his abode. For, as many times I have erst said, all this country is full of rivers. Desirous to see those Parai we got into some of them, where we found some chambers set forth with gilded beds very richly, other furnished with tables and seats, & all other things so neat and in perfection, that it was wonderful.  
Quiacim shire, as far as I can perceive, lieth upon the south. On that side we kept at our first entry thereinto, traveling not far from the high mountains we saw there. Ask what people dwelleth beyond those mountains, it was told me that they be thieves, & men of a strange language. And because that unto sundry places near this river, the mountains do approach, whence the people issuing down do many times great harm, this order is taken at the entry into Quiacim shire. To guard this river whereon continually go to & fro Parai great & small fraught with salt, fish powdered with pepper, and other necessaries for that country: they do lay in divers places certain Parai, & great barges armed, wherein watch & ward is kept day & night in both sides of the river, for the safety of the passage, & security of such Parai as do remain there, though the travelers never go but many in company. In every road there be at the least thirty, in some two hundred men, as the passage requireth.  
This guard is kept usually until you come to the city Onchio, where continually the Tutan of this shire, and eke of Cantan, maketh his abode. From that city upward, where the river waxeth more narrow, and the passage more dangerous, there be always armed one hundred and fifty Parai, to accompany other vessels fraught with merchandise, and all this at the king his charges. This seemed unto me one of the strangest things I did see in this country.  
When we lay at Fuquien, we did see certain moors, who knew so little of their sect, that they could say nothing else but that Machomet was a Moor, my father was a Moor, and I am a Moor, with some other words of their Alcorane, wherewithal, in abstinence from swines flesh, they live until the devil take them all. This when I saw, & being sure that in many Chinish cities the relics of Machomet are kept, as soon as we came to the city where these fellows be, I informed myself of them, and learned the truth.  
These moors, as they told me, in times past came in great ships fraught with merchandise from Pachin ward, to a port granted unto them by the king, as he is wont to all them that traffic into this country, where they being arrived at a little town standing in the havens mouth, in time converted unto their sect the greatest Loutea there. When that Loutea with all his family was become Moorysh, the rest began likewise to do the same. In this part of China the people be at liberty, every one to worship and follow what him liketh best. Wherefore no body took heed thereto, until such time as the moors perceiving that many followed them in superstition, and that the Loutea favoured them, they began to forbid wholly the eating of Swine's flesh. But all this countrymen and women, choosing rather to forsake father and mother, than to leave of eating of pork, by no means would yield to that proclamation. For besides the great desire they all have to eat that kind of meat, many of them do live thereby: and therefore the people complained unto the Magistrates, accusing the moors of a conspiracy pretended betwixt them and the Loutea against their king. In this country, as no suspicion, no not one traitorous word is long borne withal: so was the king speedily advertised thereof, who gave comcommaundement out of hand that the aforesaid Loutea should be put to death, and with him the moors of most importance: the other to be laid first in prison, and afterward to be sent abroad into certain cities, where they remained perpetual slaves unto the king. To this city came by hap men and women threescore and odd, who at this day are brought to five men and four women, for it is now twenty years ago this happened. Their offspring passeth the number of .200. and they in this city, as the rest in other cities, whither they were sent, have their Moscheas, whereunto they all resort every friday to keep their holiday. But, as I think, 
That is their temples.  that will no longer endure, then whiles they do live, that came from thence, for their posterity is so confused, that they have nothing of a Moor in them but abstinence from swines flesh, and yet many of them do eat thereof privily. They tell me that their native country hath name Camarian, a firm land, wherein be many kings, and the indish country well known unto them. 
It should seem by their voyage to be Cardandan in Ortelius.  It may so be: for as soon as they did see our servants (our servants were Preuzaretes) they judged them to be Indians: many of their words sounded upon the Persike tongue, but none of us could understand them. I asked them whether they converted any of the Chinishe nation unto their sect: they answered me, that with much a do they converted the women with whom they do marry, yielding me no other cause thereof, but the difficulty they find in them to be brought from eating swine's flesh and drinking of wine. I am persuaded therefore, that if this country were in league with us, forbidding them neither of both, it would be an easy matter to draw them to our religion, from their superstition, whereat they themselves do laugth when they do their Idolatry. I have learned moreover that the sea whereby these moors that came to China, were wont to travail, is a very great gulf, 
It seemeth they came up the river from the Caspian sea.  that falleth into this country out from Tartary and Persia, leaving on the other side all the country of China, and land of the Mogorites, drawing always toward the south: and of all likelihood it is even so, because that these moors, the which we have seen, be rather brown then white, whereby they show themselves to come from some warmer country than China is, near to Pachin, 
At cacan.  where the rivers are frozen in the winter for cold, and many of them so vehemently, that carts may pass over them.  
We did see in this city many Tartars, Mogorites, Bremes, and Laoynes, 
Ali. Auoins Tartars.  both men & women. The Tartars are men very white, good horsemen and archers, confining with China on that side where Pachin standeth, separated from thence by great mountains that are betwixt these kingdoms. Over them be certain ways to pass, and for both sides, Castles continually kept with soldiers: 
Mount Vsont.  in time past the Tartars were wont always to have wars with the Chineans, but these fourscore years passed they were quiet, until the second year of our imprisonment. The Mogorites be in like manner white, 
Mogorites.  and heathen, we are advertised that of one side they border upon these Tartars, and confine with the Persike Tartars on the other side, whereof we saw in them some tokens, as their manner of clothes, and that kind of hat the Saracenes do wear. The moors affirmed, that where the king lieth, there be many Tartars and Mogorites, that brought into China certain blewes of great value: all we thought it to be Vanil of Cambaia wont to be sold at Ormus. So that this is the true situation of that country, not in the Northpartes, as many times I have hard say, confining with Germany.  
As for the Bremes we have seen in this city Chenchi certain men & women, 
Bremes.  amongst whom there was one that came not long since, having as yet her hear tied up after the Pegues fashion: this woman, and other more with whom a black Moor damsel in our company had conference, and did understand them well enough, had dwelt in Peghu. This new come woman, imagining that we meant to make our abode in that city, bid us to be of good comfort, for that her country was not distant from thence above five days journey, and that out of her country there lay a high way for us home into our own. Being asked the way, she answered that the first three days the way lieth over certain great mountains and wilderness, afterward people to be met withal again. Thence two days journey more to the Breames country. Wherefore I do conclude, that Chenchi is one of the confines of this kingdom, 
southward from Chenchi to the sea.  separated by certain huge mountains, as it hath been already said, that lie out towards the South. In the residue of these mountains standeth the province Sian, the Laoyns country, Cambaia, Chinapa, and Cochinchina. 
Auoins.   
This city, chief of other syxteene, is situated in a pleasant plain, abounding in things necessary, sea fish only excepted, 
Chenchi.  for it standeth far from the sea: of fresh fish so much store, that the market places are never empty. The walls of this city are very strong and high: one day did I see the Louteas thereof go upon the walls, to take the view thereof, borne in their seats I spoke of before, accompanied with a troop of horsemen, that went two and two: It was told me they might have gone three and three. We have seen moreover, that within this aforesaid city the king hath more than a thousand of his kin lodged in great palaces, in divers parts of the city: their gates be red, and the entry into their houses, that they may be known, for that is the king his colour. These gentlemen, according to their dearness in blood unto the king, as soon as they be married, receive their place in honour: this place neither increaseth nor diminisheth in any respect, as long as the king liveth, the king appointeth them their wives and family, allowing them by the month all things necessary abundantly, as he doth to his governors of shires and cities, howbeit, not one of these hath as long as he liveth, any charge or government at al. They give themselves to eating and drinking▪ and be for the most part burly men of body, insomuch that espying any one of them, whom we had not seen before, we might know him to be the king his cousin. They be nevertheless very pleasant, courteous, and fair conditioned: ne did we find, all the time we were in that city, so much honour and good entertainment any where, as at their hands. They bid us to their houses, to eat and drink, and when they found us not, or were not willing to go with them, they bid our servants, & slaves, causing them to sit down with the first. Notwithstanding the good lodging these gentlemen have so commodious that they want nothing, yet are they in this bondage, that during life they never go abroad. The cause, as I did understand, wherefore the king so useth his cousynes, is that none of them at any time may rebel against him: and thus he shutteth them up in three or four other cities. Most of them can play on the Lute: and to make that kind of pastime peculiar unto them only, all other in the cities where they do live be forbidden that instrument, the Courtesans and blind folk only excepted, who be musicians, and can play.  
This king furthermore for the greater security of his realm, and the avoiding of tumults, letteth not one in all his country to be called Lord, except he be of his blood. Many great estates and governors there be, that during their office are lodged Lordlyke, and do bear the port of mighty Princes: but they be so many times displaced, and other placed a new, that they have not the while to become corrupt. True it is that during their office they be well provided for, as afterward also lodged at the kings charges, and in pension as long as they live, paid them Monthly in the cities where they dwell, by certain officers appointed for that purpose. The king than is a Lord only, not one besides him as you have seen, except it be such as be of his blood. A Nephew likewise of the king, the king his sisters son, lieth continually within the walls of the city, in a strong palace built Castelwyse, even as his other cousins do, remaining always within doors, served by eunuchs, never dealing with any matters. Their festival days, new Moons, and full Moons the magistrates make great banquets, & so do such as be of the king his blood. The king his Nephew hath name Vanfuli, his palace is walled about, the wall is not high, but four square, and in circuit nothing inferior to the walls of Goa, 
Goa is a city of the Portugals in East Indie.  the outside is painted red, in every square a gate, & over each gate a tower, made of timber excellently well wrought: before the principal gate of the four, that openeth into the high street, no Loutea, be he never so great, may pass on horseback, or carried in his seat. amid this quadrangle standeth the palace where that gentleman lieth, doubtless worth the sight, although we came not in to see it. By report the roofs of the towers and house, are glazed green, the greater part of the Quadrangle set with savage trees, as Okes, chestnuts, Cypress, Pineapples, Cedars, and other such like that we do want, after the manner of a wood, wherein are kept Stags, Oxen, and other beasts, for that Lord his recreation never going abroad, as I have said. One pre-eminence this city hath above the rest where we have been, and it of right as we do think, that besides the multitude of market places, wherein all things are to be sold, through every street continually are cried all things necessary, as flesh of all sorts, freshe-fyshe, herbs, oil, vinegar, meal, rise, in summa, all things so plentifully, that many houses need no servants, every thing being brought to their doors. Most part of the merchants remain in the suburbs, for that the cities are shut up every night as I have said. The merchants therefore the better to attend their business, do choose rather to make their abode without in the suburbs, then within the city. I have seen in this river a pretty kind of fishing, not to be omitted in my opinion, and therefore will I set it down. The king hath in many rivers good store of barges full of sea crows, that breed, are fed, and do die therein, in certain cages, allowed monthly a certain provision of rise. These barges the king bestoweth upon his greatest magistrates, giving to some two, to some three of them, as he thinketh good, to fish therewithal after this manner. At the hour appointed to fish, all the barges are brought together in a circle, where the river is shallow, and the crows, tied together under the wings, are let leap down into the water, some under, some above, worth the looking upon: each one as he hath filled his bag, goeth to his own barge and emptieth it, which done, he returneth to fish again. Thus having taken good store of fish, they set the crows at liberty, and do suffer them to fish for their own pleasure. There were in that city, where I was, twenty barges at the least of these aforesaid crowes·s I went almost every day to see them, yet could I never be thoroughly satisfied to see so strange a kind of fishing.   

¶ Of the Island Giapan, and other little Isles in the East Ocean.  By R. wills. 
THe extreme part of the known world unto us, is the noble Island Ciapan, written otherwise japon and japan. This Island standeth in the East Ocean, beyond all asia, betwixt Cathayo & the West Indies 36. degrees Northward from the equinoctial line, in the same clime with the South part of Spain and Portugal, distant from thence by sea .6000. leagues: the travail thither, both for civil discord, great piracy, and often shipwreck, very dangerous. This country is hilly, and pestered with snow, wherefore it is nether so warm as Portugal, & yet very poor, as far as we can learn, wanting oil, butter, cheese, milk, eggs, sugar, honey, vinegar, saffarne, cinnamon, and pepper. Barley bran the Islanders do use in steed of salt: medicinable things wholesome for the body have they none at al. Nevertheless in that Island sundry fruits do grow, not much unlike the fruits of Spain: & great store of Silver mines are therein to be seen. The people tractable, civil, witty, courteous, without deceit, in virtue and honest conversation exceeding all other nations lately discovered, but so much standing upon their reputation, that their chief Idol may be thought honour. The contempt thereof causeth among them much discord and debate, manslaughter and murder: even for their reputation they do honour their parents, keep their promises, abstain from adultery and robberies, punyshing by death the least robbery done, holding for a principle, that whosoever stealeth a trifle, will if he see occasion steal a greater thing. It may be theft is so severely punished of them, for that the nation is oppressed with scarcity of all things necessary, and so poor, that even for misery they strangle their own children, preferring death before want. These fellows do nether eat nor kill any foul. They live chiefly by fish, herbs, and fruits, so healthfully, that they die very old. Of rice and Wheat there is no great store. No man is ashamed there of his poverty, ne be their gentlemen therefore less honoured of the meaner people, ne will the poorest gentleman there▪ match his child with the base sort for any gain, so much they do make more account of gentry then of wealth. The greatest delight they have, is in armory, each boy at fourteen years of age, be he borne gentle or otherwise, hath his sword and dagger: very good archers they be, contemning all other nations in comparison of their manhood and prowess, putting not up one injury, be it never so small in word or deed, among themselves. They feed moderately, but they drink largely. The use of vines they know not their drink they make of Rice, utterly they do abhor dice, and all games, accounting nothing more vile in a man, then to give himself unto those things, that make us greedy and desirous to get other men's goods. If at any time they do swear, for that seldom they are wont to do, they swear by the Sun: many of them are taught good letters, wherefore they may so much the sooner be brought unto Christianity. Each one is contented with one wise: they be all desirous to learn, and naturally inclined unto honesty and courtesy: godly talk they listen unto willingly, especially when they understand it throughly. 
Their government.  Their government consisteth of three estates. The first place is due unto the high priest, by whose laws and decrees, all public and private matters, appertaining unto religion, are decided. The sects of their clergy men, whom they do call Bonzi, be of no estimation or authority, except the high priest by letters patent do confirm the same: he confirmeth and alloweth of their Tundi, who be as it were Bishops, although in many places they are nominated by sundry Princes. These Tundi, are greatly honoured of all sorts: 
Tundi.  they do give benefices unto inferior ministers, and do grant licences for many things, as to eat flesh upon those days they go in Pilgrimage to their Idols, with such like privileges. finally, this high priest, wont to be chosen in China, for his wisdom and learning: made in Giapan, for his gentry and birth: hath so large a Dominion, and revenues so great, that eftsoons he beardeth the petty Kings, and Princes there.  
Their second principal Magistrate, in their language Vo, is the chief Herehaught, made by succession and birth, honoured as a God. This gentleman never toucheth the ground with his foot without forfayting of his office, he never goeth abroad out of his house, nor is at all times to be seen. At home he is either carried about in a litter, or else he goeth in wooden Chopines a foot high from the ground: commonly he sitteth in his Chair with a sword in one side, and a bow and arrows in the other, next his body he weareth black, his outward garment is red, all shadowed over with Cypress, at his cap hang certain Lambeaux much like unto a Bishop's Mitre, his forehead is painted white and red, he eateth his meat in earthen Dishes. This Herehaught determineth in all Giapan the divers titles of honour, whereof in that Island is great plenty, each one particularly known by his badge, commonly seen in sealing up their letters, and daily altered according to their degrees. About this Vo every noble man hath his Solicitor, for the nation is so desirous of praise and honour, that they strive among themselves who may bribe him best. By these means the Herehaught groweth so rich, that although he have neither land nor any revenues otherwise, yet may he be accounted the wealthyest man in all Giapan. For three causes this great Magistrate may lose his office: first, if he touch the ground with his foot, as it hath been already said: next, if he kill any body: thirdly, if he be found an enemy unto peace and quietness, howbeit neither of these aforesaid causes is sufficient to put him to death.  
Their third chief officer is a judge, his office is to take up & to end matters in controversy, to determine of wars & peace, that which he thinketh right, to punish rebels, wherein he may command the noble men to assist him upon pain of forfeiting their goods: nevertheless at all times he is not obeyed, for that many matters are ended rather by might and arms, than determined by law. Other controversies are decided either in the Temporal Court, as it seemeth good unto the Princes, or in the Spiritual consistory before the Tundi.  
Rebels are executed in this manner, especially if they be noble men, 
P. 231.  or officers. The king, look what day he giveth sentence against any one, the same day the party, wheresoever he be, is advertised thereof, and the day told him of his execution. The condemned person asketh of the messenger where that it may be lawful for him to kill himself: the which thing when the king doth grant, the party taking it for an honour, putteth on his best apparel, and lancing his body a cross from the breast down all the belly, murdereth himself. This kind of death they take to be without infamy, ne do their children, for their father's crime so punished, lose their goods. But if the king reserve them to be executed by the Hangman, than flocketh he together his children, his servants, and friends home to his house, to preserve his life by force. The king committeth the fetching of him out unto his chief judge, who first setteth upon him with bow and arrows, & afterward with pikes & swords, until the rebel and all his family be slain, to their perpetual ignominy and shame.  
The Indyshe writers make mention of sundry great cities in this Island, as Cangoxima a Haven town in the South part thereof, and Meaco distant from thence .300. leagues northward, the royal seat of the king, and most wealthy of all other towns in that Island. The people thereabout is very noble, and their language the best japonishe. In Meaco are said to be nienetie thousand houses inhabited and upward, a famous University, and in it five principal Colleges, besides closes and cloisters of Bonzi, Leguixil, and Hamacata, that is, Priests, Monks, and Nuns. Other five notable Universities there be in Giapan, namely, Coia, Negru, Homi, Frenoi, and Bandu. The first four have in them at the least .3500. scholars: in the fift are many more. For Bandu province is very great, and possessed by six princes, five whereof are vassals unto the sixth, yet he himself subject unto the japonish king, usually called the great king of Meaco: lesser schools there be many in divers places of this Island. And thus much specially concerning this glorious Island, among so many barbarous nations and rude regions, have I gathered together in one sum, out of sundry letters written from thence into Europe, by no less faithful reporters than famous travelers. For confirmation whereof, as also for the knowledge of other things not contained in the premises, the curious readers may peruse these four volumes of indish matters written long ago in Italian, and of late compendiously made latin, by Petrus Maffeius my old acquainted friend, entitulyng the same, De rebus japonicis. One whole letter out of the fift book thereof, specially entreating of that country, have I done into english word for word, in such wise as followeth.  

Aloisius' Froes▪ to his companions in jesus Christ, that remain in China and Indie.  
THe last year, dear brethren, I wrote unto you from Firando, how Cosmus Turrianus had appointed me to travail to Meaco, to help Gaspar Vilela, for that there the harvest was great, the labourers few, and that I should have for my companion in that journey Aloisius Almeida It seemeth now my part, having by the help of God ended so long a voyage, to signify unto you by letter such things specially as I might think you would most delight to know. And because at the beginning Almeida and I so parted the whole labour of writing letters betwixt us, that he should speak of our voyage, and such things as happened therein, I should make relation of the Meachians estate, and write what I could well learn of the Giapans manners and conditions: setting aside all discourses of our voyage, that which standeth me upon I will discharge in this Epistle, that you considering how artificially, how cunningly, under the pretext of religion that crafty adversary of mankind, leadeth and draweth unto perdition the Giaponish minds, blinded with many superstitions and ceremonies, may the more pity this nation.  
The inhabiters of Giapan, as men that never had greatly to do with other nations, in their Geography divided the whole world into three parts, Giapan, Sian, and China. And albeit the Giapans received out of Sian, and China, their superstitions and ceremonies, yet do they nevertheless contemn all other nations in comparison of themselves, & standing in their own conceit do far prefer themselves before all other sorts of people in wisdom and policy.  
Touching the situation of the country, & nature of the soil, unto the things eftsoons erft written, this one thing will I add: in these Islands the summer to be most hot, the winter extreme cold. In the kingdom of Canga, as we call it, falleth so much snow, that the houses being buried in it, the inhabiters keep within doors certain months of the year, having no way to come forth except they break up the tiles. Whirlewyndes most vehement, Earthquakes so common, that the Giapans dread such kind of fears little or nothing at all. The country is full of silver mines, otherwise barren, not so much by fault of nature, as through the slothfulness of the inhabiters: howbeit Oxen they keep, & that for tillage sake only. The air is wholesome, the waters good, the people very fair & well bodied: bore headed commonly they go, procuring baldness with sorrow & tears, eftsoons rooting up with pinsars all the hear of their heads as it groweth, except it be a little behind, the which they knot and keep with all diligence. Even from their childhood they wear daggers and swords, the which they use to lay under their pillows when they go to bed: in show courteous and affable: in deed haughty and proud. They delight most in warlike affairs, and their greatest study is arms. men's apparel diversly coloured, is worn down half the legs, and to the elbows: women's attire made handsomely, like unto a veil, is somewhat longer: all manner of dysyng and theft they do eschew. The merchant, although he be wealthy, is not accounted of. Gentlemen, be they never so poor, retain their place: most precisely they stand upon their honour and worthiness, cerimoniously striving among themselves in courtesies and fair speeches. Wherein if any one happily be less careful than he should be, even for a trifle many times he getteth evil will. Want, though it trouble most of them, so much they do detest, that poor men cruelly taking piety of their infants newly borne, especially girls, do many times with their own feet strangle them. Noble men, and other likewise of meaner calling, generally have but one wife a piece, by whom although they have issue, yet for a trifle they divorce themselves from their wives, and the wives also sometimes from their husbands, to marry with others. After the second degree, cousins may there lawfully marry. Adoption of other men's children is much used among them. In great towns most men and women can write and read.  
This nation feedeth sparely, their usual meat is rise and salattes, and near the sea side fish. They feast one an other many times, wherein they use great diligence, especially i● drinking one to an other, insomuch that the better sort, lest they might rudely commit some fault therein, do use to read certain books written of duties and ceremonies appertaining unto banquets. To be delicate and fine, they put their meat into their mouths with little forks, accounting it great rudeness to touch it with their fingers: winter and summer they drink water as hot as they may possible abide it. Their houses are in danger of fire, but finely made, and clean, laid all over with straw pallettes, whereupon they do both sit in steed of stools, and lie in their clothes, with billets under their heads. For fear of defiling these pallettes, they go either barefoot within doors, or wear straw pantofles on their buskins when they come abroad, the which they lay aside at their return home again. Gentlemen for the most part do pass the night in banqueting, music, and vain discourses, they sleep the day tyme. In Meaco and Sacaio there is good store of beds, but they be very little, and may be compared unto our pues.  
In bringing up their children they use words only to rebuke them, admonishing as diligently and advisedly boy's of six or seven years age, as though they were old men. They are given very much to entertain strangers, of whom most curiously they love to ask even in trifles what foreign nations do, and their fashions. Such arguments and reasons as be manifest, and are made plain with examples, do greatly persuade them. They detest all kind of theft, whosoever is taken in that fault may be slain freely of any body. No public prisons, no common gales, no ordinary justicers: privately each householder hath the hearing of matters at home in his own house, and the punishing of greater crimes that deserve death without delay. Thus usually the people is kept in awe and fear.  
About four hundred years ago (as in their old records we find) all Giapan was subject unto one Emperor, whose royal seat was Meaco, in the Giaponishe language called Cubucama. But the nobility rebelling against him, by little and little have taken away the greatest part of his dominion, howbeit his title continually remaineth, and the residue in some respect do make great account of him still, acknowledging him for their superior. Thus the Empire of Giapan, in times passed but one alone, is now divided into sixty six kingdoms, the only cause of civil wars continually in that Island, to no small hindrance of the Gospel, whilst the kings that dwell near together invade one an other, each one coveting to make his kingdom greater. Furthermore in the city Meaco is the palace of the high priest, whom that nation honoureth as a God, he hath in his house .366. Idols, one whereof by course is every night set by his side for a watchman. He is thought of the common people so holy, that it may not be lawful for him to go upon the earth: if happily he do set one foot to the ground, he looseth his office. He is not served very sumptuously, he is maintained by alms. 
But his alms are very good.  The heads and beards of his ministers are shaven, they have name Cangues, and their authority is great throughout all Giapan. The Cubucama useth them for Ambassadors to decide controversies betwixt princes, and to end their wars, whereof they are wont to make very great gain. It is now two years since, or there about, that one of them came to Bungo, to entreat of peace betwixt the king thereof, and the king of Amanguzzo. This Agent favouring the king of Bungo his cause more than the other, brought to pass that the foresaid king of Bungo should keep two kingdoms, the which he had taken in wars from the king of Amanguzzo. Wherefore he had for his reward of the king of Bungo above thirty thousand Ducats. And thus far hereof.  
I come now to other superstitions and ceremonies, that you may see, dear brethren, that which I said in the beginning, how surly the devil hath deceived the Giaponishe nation, and how diligent and ready they be to obey and worship him. And first, all remembrance and knowledge not only of Christ our redeemer, but also of that one God the maker of all things, is clean extinguished, & utterly abolished out of the Giapans hearts. Moreover their superstitious sects are many, whereas it is lawful for each one to follow that which liketh him best: but the principal sects are two, namely the Amidans and Xacaians'. Wherefore in this country shall you see many monasteries, not only of Bonzii men, but also of Bonziae women diversly attired, for some do wear white under, and black upper garments, other go appareled in ash colour, & their Idol hath name Denichi: from these the Amidanes differ very much. Again the men Bonzii for the most part dwell in sumptuous houses, and have great revenues. These fellows are chaste by commandment, marry they may not under pain of death. In the midst of their Temple is erected an Altar, whereon standeth a wooden Idol of Amida, naked from the girdle upward, with holes in his ears, after the manner of Italian Gentlewomen, sitting on a wooden rose, goodly to behold. They have great libraries, and halls for them all to dine and sup together, and bells wherewith they are certain hours called to prayers. In the evening the superintendant giveth each one a theme for meditation. After midnight before the Altar in their Temple they do say Matins as it were out of Xaca his last book, one quire one verse, the other quire an other. Early in the morning each one giveth himself to meditation one hour: they shave their heads and beards. Their Cloisters be very large, and within the precinct thereof, chapels of the Fotoquiens, for by that name some of the Giapanish Saints are called: their holidays yearly be very many. Most of these Bonzii be Gentlemen, for that the Giaponish nobility, charged with many children, use to make most of them Bonzii, not being able to leave for each one a patrimony good enough. The Bonzii most covetously bend, know all the ways how to come by money. They sell unto the people many scrolls of paper, by the help whereof the common people thinketh itself warranted from all power of the devils. They borrow likewise money to be repaid with great usury in an other world, giving by Obligation unto the lender an assurance thereof, the which departing out of this life he may carry with him to hell.  
There is an other great company of such as are called Inambuxu, 
Inambuxu.  with curled and staring hear. They make profession to find out again things either lost or stolen, after this sort. They set before them a child, whom the devil invadeth, called up thither by charms: of that child than do they ask that which they are desirous to know.  
These men's prayers both good and bad are thought greatly to prevail, insomuch that both their blessings and their curses they sell unto the people. The Novices of this order, before they be admitted, go together two or three thousand in a company, up a certain high mountain to do penance there, threescore days voluntarily punishing themselves. In this time the devil showeth himself unto them in sundry shapes: and they, like young graduates, admitted as it were fellows into some certain company, are set forth with white tenrils hanging about their necks, and black bonnets that scarcely cover any more than the crown of their heads. Thus attired they range abroad in all Giapan, to set out themselves and their cunning to sale, each one beating his basin he carrieth always about with him, to give notice of their coming in all towns where they pass.  
There is also an other sort called Genguis, that make profession to show by soothsaying where stolen things are, 
Genguis.  and who were the thieves. These dwell in the top of an high mountain, black in face for the continual heat of the sun, for the cold, winds, and rains they do continually endure. They marry but in their own tribe and line: the report goeth that they be horned beasts. They climb up most high rocks and hills, and go over very great rivers by the only art of the devil, who to bring those wretches the more into error, biddeth them to go up a certain high mountain, where they stand miserably gazing and earnestly looking for him as long as the devil appointeth them. At the length at noontide, or in the evening, cometh that devil, whom they call Amida, among them to show himself unto them: this show breedeth in the brains and hearts of men such a kind of superstition, that it can by no means be rooted out of them afterward.  
The devil was wont also in an other mountain to show himself unto the Giaponish nation. Who so was more desirous than other, to go to heaven and to enjoy paradise, thither went he to see that sight, and having seen the devil, followed him, so by the devil persuaded, into a den until he came to a deep pit. Into this pit the devil was wont to leap, & to take with him his worshipper whom he there murdered. This deceit was thus perceived. An old man blinded with this superstition, was by his son dissuaded from thence, but all in vain. Wherefore his son followed him privily into that den with his bow and arrows, where the devil gallantly appeared unto him in the shape of a man. Whilst the old man falleth down to worship the devil, his son speedily shooting an arrow at the spirit so appearing, struck a Fox in steed of a man, so suddenly was that shape altered. This old man his son tracking the Fox so running away, came to that pit whereof I spoke, and in the bottom thereof he found many bones of dead men, deceived by the devil after that sort in time past. Thus delivered he his father from present death, and all other from so pestilent an opinion.  
There is furthermore a place bearing name Coia, very famous for the multitude of Abbeys the Bonzii have therein. The beginner and founder whereof is thought to be one Combendaxis a subtle crafty fellow, that got the name of holiness by cunning speech, although the laws and ordinances he made were altogether devilish: he is said to have found out the Giapanishe letters used at this day. In his later years this Sim subtle buried himself in a foursquare grave, four cubits deep, severely forbidding it to be opened, for that than he died not, but rested his body, wearied with continual business, until many thousand thousands of years were passed, after the which time a great learned man named Mirozu should come into Giapan, and than would he rise up out of his grave again. About his tomb many lamps are lighted, sent thither out of divers provinces, for that the people is persuaded, that whosoever is liberal and beneficial towards the beautifying of that monument, shall not only increase in wealth in this world, but in the life to come be safe through Combendaxis help. Such as give themselves to worship him, live in those Monasteries or abbeys, with shaven heads, as though they had forsaken all secular matters, whereas in deed they wallow in all sorts of wickedness and lust. In these houses, the which are many (as I said) in number, do remain 6000. Bonzii, or thereabout, besides the multitude of lay men: women be restrained from thence upon pain of death. another company of Bonzii dwelleth at Fatonochaiti. They teach a great multitude of children all tricks and sleights of guile and theft: whom they do find to be of great towardness, those do they instruct in all the petigrues of princes, and fashions of the nobility, in chivalry, & eloquence, and so send them abroad into other provinces, attired like young princes, to this end, that feigning themselves to be nobly borne, they may with great sums of money, borrowed under the colour and pretence of nobility, return again. Wherefore this place is so infamous in all Giapan, that if any scholar of that order be happily taken abroad, he incontinently dieth for it. Nevertheless these cousyners leave not daily to use their wont wickedness and knavery.  
North from Giapan, three hundred leagues out of Meaco, lieth a great country of savage men, clothed in beasts skins, rough bodied, with huge beards, and monstrous muchaches, the which they hold up with little forks as they drink. These people are great drinkers of wine, fierce in wars, and much feared of the Giapans: being hurt in fight, they wash their wounds with salt water, other surgery have they none. In their breasts they are said to carry looking glasses: their sword they tie to their heads, in such wise, that the handle do rest upon their shoulders. Service and ceremonies have they none at all, only they are wont to worship heaven. To Aquita, a great town in that Giaponishe kingdom, we call Gevano, they much resort for merchandise, and the Aquitanes likewise do travail into their country, howbeit not often, for that there many of them are slain by the inhabiters.  
Much more concerning this matter I had to write, 
The Giaponish Funerals.  but to avoid tediousness, I will come to speak of the Giapans madness again, who most desirous of vain glory, do think than specially to get immortal fame, when they procure themselves to be most sumptuously and solemnly buried. their burials and obsequies in the city Meaco, are done after this manner. About one hour before the dead body be brought forth, a great multitude of his friends, appareled in their best array, go before unto the fire, with them go their kyns women, and such as be of their acquaintance, clothed in white (for that is the mourning colour there) with a changeable coloured veil on their heads. Each woman hath with her also, according to her ability, all her family trimmed up in white silk m●ccado: the better sort and wealthier women go in litters of Cedar, artificially wrought, and richly dressed. In the second place marcheth a great company of footmen sumptuously appareled. Than a far of cometh one of these Bonzii, master of the ceremonies for that superstition, bravely clad in silks & gold, in a large & high litter excellently well wrought, accompanied with .30. other Bonzii, or thereabout, wearing hats, linen albes, and fine black upper garments. Than attired in ash colour (for this colour also is mourning) with a long torch of pineaple, showeth the dead body the way unto the fire, lest it either stumble, or ignorantly go out of the way. Well-near .200. Bonzii follow him singing the name of that devil the which the party deceased chief did worship by his life time, and therewithal a very great basin is beaten, even to the place of fire, in steed of a bell. Than follow two great paper baskets hanged open at staves ends, full of paper roses diversly coloured: such as bear them, do march but slowly, shaking ever now & than their staves, that the aforesaid flowers may fall down by little & little, as it were drops of rain, and be whirled about with the wind. This shower say they is an argument that the soul of the dead man is gone to paradise. After all this, eight beardless Bonzii orderly two and two drag after them on the ground long spears, the points backward, with flags of one cubit a piece, wherein the name also of that Idol is written. Than he there carried te● Lanterns trimmed with the former inscription, overcast with a fine veil, and candles burning in them. Besides this, two young men clothed in ash colour, bear pineaple torches, not lighted, of three foot length, the which torches serve to kindle the fire wherein the dead corpses is to be burnt. In the same colour follow many other that wear on the crowns of their heads fair, little, threesquare, black leathern caps, tied fast under their chins (for that is honourable amongst them) with papers on their heads, wherein the name of the devil, I spoke of, is written. And to make it the more solemn, after cometh a man with a table one cubit long▪ one foot broad, covered with a very fine white veil, in both sides whereof is written in golden letters the aforesaid name. At the length by four men is brought forth the corpses sitting in a gorgeous lyster, clothed in white, hanging down his head, and holding his hands together like one that prayed: to the rest of his apparel may you add an upper gown of paper, written full of that book the which his God is said to have made, when he lived in the world, by whose help and merits commonly they do think to be saved. The dead man his children come next after him most gallantly set forth, the youngest whereof carrieth likewise a pineaple torch to kindle the fire. Last of all followeth a great number of people in such cans as erst spoke of.  
When they are all come to the place appointed for the obsequy, all the Bonzii with the whole multitude, for the space of one hour, beating pans & basins with great clamours, call upon the name of that devil, the which being ended, the obsequy is done in this manner. In the midst of a great quadrangle, railed about, hanged with course linen, and agreeably unto the four parts of the world, made with four gates to go in and out at, is digged a hole: in the hole is laid good store of wood, whereon is raised gallantly a waved roof, before that stand two tables furnished with divers kinds of meats, especially dry figs, Pomegranates, and tarts good store, but neither fish nor flesh: upon one of them standeth also a chaffre with coals, and in it sweet wood to make perfumes. When all this is ready, the cord wherewith the litter was carried, is thrown by a long rope into the fire: as many as are present strive to take the rope in their hands, using their aforesaid clamours, which done, they go in procession as it were round about the quadrangle thrice. Than setting the litter on the wood built up ready for the fire, that Bonzius who than is master of the ceremonies, sayeth a verse that no body there understandeth, whirling thrice about over his head a torch lighted, to signify thereby that the soul of the dead man had neither any beginning, ne shall have at any time an end, and throweth away the torch. Two of the dead man his children, or of his near kin, take it up again, and standing one at the East side of the litter, the other at the West, do for honour and reverence, reach it to each other thrice over the dead corpses, and so cast it into the pile of wood: by and by they throw in oil, sweet wood, and other perfumes, accordingly as they have plenty, and so with a great flame bring the corpses to ashes: his children in the mean while p●●●yng sweet wood into the Chaffer at the table, with doors, do solemnly and religiously worship their father as a Saint: which being done, the Bonzii are paid each one in his degree. The master of the ceremonies hath for his part five ducats, sometimes ten, sometimes twenty the rest have ten julies' a piece, or else a certain number of other presents called Caxae. The meat that was ordained, as soon as the dead corpses friends and all the Bonzii are gone, is left for such as served at the obsequy, for the poor, and impotent lazares.  
The next day return to the place of obsequy the dead man his children, his kynread, and friends, who gathering up his ashes, bones, and teeth, do put them in a gilded pot, and so carry them home, to be set up in the same pot covered with cloth, in the midst of their houses. Many Bonzii return likewise to these private funerals, and so do they again the seventh day. than carry they out the ashes to be buried in a place appointed, laying thereupon a foursquare stone, wherein is written in great letters, drawn all the length of the stone over, the name of that devil the which the dead man worshipped by his life tyme. Every day afterward his children resort unto that grave, with roses and warm water, that the dead corpses thirst not. Nor the seventh day only, but the seventh month, and year, within their own houses they renew this obsequy, to no small commodities and gain of the Bonzii: great rich men do spend in these their funerals .3000. ducats, or there about, the meaner sort two or three hundred. Such as for poverty be not able to go to that charges, are in the night time, darkelong without all pomp & ceremonies, buried in a dunghill.  
They have an other kind of burial, especially near the sea side, for them that be not yet dead. These fellows are such, as having religiously with much devotion worshipped Amida, now desirous to see him, do slay themselves. And first they go certain days begging alms, the which they thrust into their sleeves, than preach they in public a sermon unto the people, declaring what they mind to do, with the great good liking of all such as do hear them: for every body wondereth at such a kind of holiness. Than take they hooks to cut down briars and thorns that might hinder them in their way to heaven, and so embark themselves in a new vessel, tying great stones about their necks, arms, loins, thighs, and feet: thus they launching out into the main sea, be either drowned there, their ship bouged for that purpose, or else do cast themselves over board headlong into the sea. The empty bark is out of hand set a fire, for honour sake, by their friends that follow them in an other boat of their own, thinking it blasphemy that any mortal creature should afterward once touch the bark that had been so religiously hallowed.  
Truly when we went to Meaco, eight days before we came to the Isle of Hiu, at Fore town, six men and two women so died. To all such as die so, the people erecteth a Chapel, and to each of them a pillar and a pole made of pinaple, for a perpetual monument: hanging up many shreds of paper in sticks all the roof over, with many verses set down in the walls, in commendation of that blessed company. Wherefore unto this place both day and night many come very superstitiously in pilgrimage. It happened even then as Aloisius Almeida & I went to christian a child, we travailed that way, at what time four or five old women came forth out of the aforesaid Chapel with beads in their hands (for in this point also the devil counterfeiteth Christianity) who partly scorned at us for folly, partly frowned and taunted at our small devotion, for passing by that holy monument, without any reverence or worship done thereunto at all.  
It remaineth now we speak two or three words of those Sermons the Bonzii are wont to make, not so many as ours in number, but assuredly very well provided for. The Pulpit is erected in a great Temple with a silk Canopy over it, therein standeth a costly seat, before the seat a table with a bell & a book. At the hour of sermon, each sect of the Giapans resorteth to their own doctors in divers Temples. Up goeth the doctor into the Pulpit, and being set down, after that he hath Lordlyke looked him about, signifieth silence with his bell, and so readeth a few words out of that book we spoke of, the which he expoundeth afterward more at large. These preachers be for the most part eloquent, and apt to draw with their speech the minds of their hearers. Wherefore to this end chief, such is their greediness, tendeth all their talk, that the people be brought under the colour of godliness to enrich their monasteries, promising to each one so much the more happiness in the life to come, how much the greater costs & charges they be at in church matters & obsequies: notwithstanding this multitude of superstitious sects and companies, and the diversities thereof amongst themselves: yet in this principally all their superintendentes do travail, so to persuade their Novices in their own tales and lies, that they think nothing else truth, nothing else sure to come by everlasting salvation, nothing else worth the hearing. Whereunto they add other subtleties, as in going, gravity: in countenance, apparel, and in all other outward show, comeliness. Whereby the Giapanes minds are so noussed in wicked opinions, and do conceive thereby such trust and hope of everlasting salvation, that not only at home, but also abroad in every corner of the town, continually almost they run over their beads, humbly ask of Amida and Xaca wealth, honour, good health, and everlasting joys. Thus than, dear brethren, may you think how greatly they need the help of God, that either do bring the Gospel into this country, or receiving it brought unto them, do forsake Idolatry, & join themselves with Christ, being assaulted by so many snares of the devil, troubled with the daily dissuasions of their Bonzii, and finally so injuriously, so hardly, so sharply vexed of their kindread and friends, that except the grace of God obtained by the sacrifices and prayers of the Catholic church do help us, it can not be chosen, but that the faith and constancy of many, if not of all, in these first beginnings of our churches, will greatly be put in jeopardy. So much the more it standeth you upon, that so earnestly long for the health of souls, to commend specially these Giaponish flocks unto our Lord.  
We came to Sacaio, the xxviii of january. Aloysius Almeida first for business, but afterward let by sickness, stayed there some while, but I parting the next day from thence, came thirtiene leagues of, to Meaco the last of january. Of my coming all the Christians took great comfort, but specially Gasper Vilela, who in six years had seen none of our company at Meaco: his years are not yet forty, but his grey hears show him to be seventy, so vehemently is his little body afflicted and worn with extreme cold. He speaketh Giapanish so skilfully after the phrase of Meaco (the which for the renown of this people, and royal seat of the king is best accounted of) that he doth both confess & preach in that language. Certain godly books also he hath done into that speech, not omitting to translate other as leisure suffereth him. To make an end, our Lord for his goodness vouchsafe to preserve us all continually, and to give us aid both rightly to interpret his will, and well to do the same. From Meaco the xix of February. 1565.  
Other such like matter is handled both in other his letters, and also in the Epistles written by his companions, to be seen at large in the aforesaid volume. Amongst the rest this seemed in my judgement one of the principal, and therefore the rather I took upon me to do it into english.   

Of the Isles beyond Giapan, in the way from China to the Moluccaes'.  
AMongst other Isles in the Asian sea, betwixt Cantan a Chinishe haven in Cathayo, and the Moluccaes', much spoken of in the Indish histories, & painted out in Maps, Ainan and Santlianum, are very famous.  
Ainan standeth nienetiene degrees on this side of the Equinoctial line near China, 
Ainan.  from whence the Chinishe nation have their provision for shpping and other necessaries requisite for their Navy. There stayed Balthasar Gagus, a great traveler, five months, who describeth that place after this manner. Ainan is a goodly country, full of indish fruits, and all kind of victuals, 
〈…〉  besides great store of jewels and pearl, well inhabited, the ●own●s built of stone, the people rude in conditions, appareled 〈◊〉 diversly coloured rugs, with two Ox horns, as it 〈◊〉 made of fine cypress hanging down about their 〈◊〉 and a pair of sharp cyzers at their foreheads.  
The cause wherefore they go in such attire, I could not understand, except it be for that they do counterfeit the devil in the form of a bruit beast, offering to him up themselves.  
Santianum, is an Isle near unto the haven Cantan, in the confines likewise of China, 
Santianum.  famous for the death of that worthy traveler, and godly professor, and painful doctor of the Indyshe nation, in matters concerning religion, Francis Xavier, who after great labours, many injuries, and calamities infinite suffered with much patience, singular joy and gladness of mind, departed in a cabin made of bows and rushes upon a desert mountain, no less void of all worldly commodities, than endued with all spiritual blessings, out of this life, the second day of December, the year of our Lord .1552. after that many thousands of these Easterlynges were brought by him to the knowledge of Christ. Of this holy man, his particular virtues, and specially travail, and wonderful works in that region, of other many little Isles, yet not so little but that they may right well be written of at leisure, all the later histories of the Indyshe regions are full.   
FINIS.   

Of the North-east frosty Seas, and kingdoms lying that way, declared by the Duke of Moscovia his ambassador, to a learned Gentleman of Italy, named Galeatius Butrigarius: likewise of the viages of that worthy old man Sebastian Cabote, sometimes governor of the company of the Merchants of Cathay, in the City of London.  
IT is doubtless a marvelous thing to consider what changes and alterations were caused in all the Roman Empire by the Goths and Vandals, 
The Roman Empire.  and other Barbarians into Italy. For by their invations were extinguished all arts and sciences, and all trades of Merchandise that were used in divers parts of the world. The desolation and ignorance which ensued hereof, 
4. hundredth years of ignorance.  continued as it were a cloud of perpetual darkness among men for the space of four hundred years and more, insomuch that none durst adventure to go any whither out of their own native countries: whereas before the incursions of the said Barbarians, 
East India well known in old time.  when the Roman Empire flourished, they might safely pass the seas to all parts of East India, which was at that time as well known and frequented, as it is now by the navigations of the Portugals. And that this is true, it is manifest by that which Strabo writeth, who was in the time of Augustus and Tiberius. 
Strabo.  For speaking of the greatness and riches of the city of Alexandria in Egypt (governed then as a province of the Romans) he writeth thus. This only place of Egypt, 
The great richesse of Egypt.  is apt to receive all things that come by sea, by reason of the commodity of the haven, and likewise all such things as are brought by land, by reason of the river of Nilus, 
The city of Alexandria.  whereby they may be easily conveyed to Alexandria, being by these commodities the richest city of merchants that is in the world. The revenues of Egypt are so great, that Marcus Tullius saith in one of his orations, 
marvelous richesse.  that king Ptolomeus, surnamed Auleta, the father of queen Cleopatra, had of revenues twelve thousand and five hundred talentes, which are seven millions and a half of gold. If therefore this king had so great revenues when Egypt was governed of so few and so negligently, 
The governance and revenues of the Romans. Trogloditica. and India. The gulf of Arabia.  what might it then be worth to the Romans, by whom it was governed with great diligence, and their trade of merchandise greatly increased by the traffic of Trogloditica and India? whereas in time passed there could hardly be found twenty ships together that durst enter into the gulf of Arabia, or show their prowess without the mouth of the same. But at this present, great navies sail together into India, and to the furthest parts of Ethiope, from whence are brought many rich and precious merchandise into Egypt, 
Ethiope.  and are carried from thence into other countries. And by this means are the customs redoubled, 
Rich customs.  aswell by such things as are brought thither, as also by such as are carried from thence, forasmuch as great customs arise of things of great value. 
The richesse which were brought in old time from India and the red sea.  And that by this voyage infinite and precious merchandise were brought from the red sea and India, and those of divers other sorts than are known in our time, it appeareth by the fourth volume of the civil law, wherein is described the commission of Themperours, 
The commission of Themperors Marcus and Comodus.  Marcus and Commodus, with the rehearsal of all such stuff and merchandise, whereof custom should be paid in the red sea, by such as had the same in fee farm, as were paid the customs of all other provinces partayning to the Roman Empire: and they are these following. 

Cinamome.  
Long pepper.  
white pepper.  
Cloves.  
Costus.  
Cancomo.  
spikenard.  
Cassia.  
Sweet perfumes  
Xilocassia.  
Myr.  
Amome.  
Ginger.  
Malabatrum.  
Ammoniac.  
Galbane.  
Lasser.  
Agarike.  
Gum of Arabia.  
Cardamome.  
Xilocinamome.  
Carpesio.  
silks of divers sorts.  
Linen cloth.  
skins and Furs of Parthia and Babylon.  
ivory.  
Wood of Ebony.  
Precious stones.  
Pearls.  
jewels of Sardonica.  
Ceraunia.  
Calamus Aromaticus.  
Berille.  
Cilindro.  
Slaves.  
Cloth of Sarmatia.  
The silk called Metaxa.  
Uestures of silk.  
Died cloth, and silk.  
Carbasei.  
Silk thread.  
Gelded men.  
popinjays.  
Lions of India.  
Leopards.  
Panthers.  
Purple.   Also that juice or liquor which is gathered of wool, and of the hear of the Indians.  
By these words it doth appear, that in old time the said navigation by the way of the red sea, was well known, & much frequented, & perhaps more than it is at this present: 
The great riches the kings of Egypt had by customs.  Insomuch that the ancient kings of Egypt, considering the great profit of the customs they had by the viages of the red sea, and willing to make the same more easy & commodious, attempted to make a fossae or channel, which should begin in the last part of the said sea, where was a city named Arsinoe (which perhaps is that that is now called Sues) and should have reached to a branch of the river of Nilus, named Pelusio, 
The noble enterprises of the kings of Egypt Arsinoe. Damiata. Pelusio.  which emptieth itself in our sea toward the East, about the city of Damiata. They determined also to make three causeys or high ways by land, which should pass from the said branch to the city of Arsinoe: but they found this too difficult to bring to pass. In fine, king Ptolomeus surnanamed Philadelphus, ordained another way, as to sail upon Nilus, against the course of the river, unto the city of Copto, 
Nilus. Copto.  and from thence to pass by a desert country, until they come above the red sea, to a city named Berenice, or Miosormo, 
Berenice.  where they embarked all their merchandise and wares for India, Ethiope, and Arabia, as appeareth by the writing first of Strabo (who writeth that he was in Egypt) and then by Pliny, who was in the time of Domitian. Strabo also, speaking of the said fossae or trench which was made toward the red sea, 
A navigable trench made from Egypt to the red sea.  writeth thus, There is a trench that goeth toward the red sea, & the gulf of Arabia, 
Lacus amari.  and to the city of Arsinoe, which some call Cleopatrida, and passeth by the lakes named Amari (that is) bitter, because in deed they were first bitter: but after that this trench was made, and the river entered in, they became sweet, and are at this present full of fowls of the water, by reason of their pleasantness. This trench was first begun by king Sesostre, before the battle of Troy. 
King Sesostre.  Some say that it was begun by king Psammiticus, while he was a child, and that by reason of his death it was left imperfect: 
King Psammiticus. King Darius.  also, that afterward, king Darius succeeded in the same enterprise, who would have finished it, but yet brought it not to the end, because he was informed that the red sea was higher than Egypt, and that if this land (dividing both the seas) were opened, all Egypt should be drowned thereby. 
King Ptolomeus.  King Ptolomeus would in deed have finished it, but yet left it shut at the head, that he might, when he would, sail to the other sea, and return without peril. Here is the city of Arsinoe, 
The city Heroum.  and near unto that, the city called Heroum, in the uttermost part of the gulf of Arabia, toward Egypt, with many ports and habitations. Pliny likewise, speaking of this trench, saith, 
What Pliny writeth of the navigable trench.  In the furthest part of the gulf of Arabia, is a port called Danco, from whence they determined to bring a navigable trench unto the river of Nilus, whereas is the first Delta. Between the said sea and Nilus, there is a streict of land of the length of lxii miles. The first that attempted this thing, was Sesostre king of Egypt, & after him Darius' king of the Persians, whom Ptolomeus followed, who made a trench a hundred foot large, and thirty foot deep, being. CCC. miles in length, 
The largeness and length of the trench.  unto the lakes named Amari, and durst proceed no further for fear of inundation, having knowledge that the red sea was higher by three cubits then all the country of Egypt. Other say that this was not the cause: but, that he doubted that if he should have let the sea come any further, all the water of Nilus should have been thereby corrupted, which only ministereth drink to all Egypt. But notwithstanding, all these things aforesaid, all this voyage is frequented by land from Egypt to the red sea, 
The voyage by land from Egypt to the red sea.  in which passage are three Causeyes or high ways. The first beginneth at the mouth of Nilus, named Pelutio: All which way is by the sands, insomuch that if there were not certain high Reeds fixed in the earth, to show the right way, the Causey could not be found, by reason the wind ever covereth it with sand. The second Causey is two miles from the mountain Cassius: And this also in the end of threescore miles, cometh upon the way or Causey of Pelusius, inhabited with certain Arabians, called Antei. The third beginneth at Gerro, named Adipson: and passeth by the same Arabians, for the space of threescore miles, somewhat shortter, but full of rough mountains, and great scarcenesss of water. All these Causeyes, lead the way to the city of Arsinoe, builded by Ptolomeus Philadelphus in the gulf Carandra by the red sea. 
What king Ptolomeus discovered.  This Ptolomeus was the first that searched all that part of the red sea, which is called Trogloditica. Of this trench, described of Strabo and Pliny, there are seen certain tokens remaining at this present, as they do affirm which have been at Sues beyond the city of Alcayr, 
Alcayre.  otherwise called Babylon in Egypt. But the merchants that of later days travail this voyage by land, ride through the dry and barren deserts, on Camels, both by day and by night, directing their way by the stars and compass, as do mariners on the sea, and carrying with them water sufficient for many days journeys. 

The voyage to East India frequented in old tyme.  
The customs and manners of the Indians.   The places of Arabia, and India, named of Strabo and Pliny, are the self same where the Portugals practise their trade at this day, as the manners and customs of the Indians do yet declare: for even at this present their women use to burn themselves alive with the dead bodies of their husbands. Which thing (as writeth Strabo in his xu book) they did in old time by a law, for this consideration, that sometime being in love with other, they forsook or poisoned their husbands. And for as much as according to this custom, the old Poet Propertius (who lived about an hundred years before the incarnation of Christ) hath in his book made mention of the contention that was among the Indian women, which of them should be burned alive with their husbands, I have thought good to subscribe his verses, which are these.  
Faelix Eois lex funeris una maritis,  
Quos aurora suis rubra colorat equis.  
Namque ubi mortifero jacta est fax ultima lecto,  
Vxorum fusis stat pia turba comis,  
Et certamen habent lethi, quae viva sequatur  
Coniugium, pudor est non licuisse mori.  
Ardent victrices, & flammae pectora praebent.  
Imponuntque suis ora perusta viris.  
As touching these viages both by sea and by land to East India and Cathay, many things are written very largely by divers authors, which I omit, because they pertain not so much unto us as doth the voyage attempted to Cathay by the north seas, 
The voyage to Cathay.  and the coasts of moscovia, discovered in our time by the voyage of that excellent young man Richard chancellor, no less learned in all mathematical sciences, 
richard Chancellor.  than an expert pilotte, in the year of our Lord .1554. As concerning this voyage, I have thought good to declare the communication which was between the said learned man Galeatius Butrigarius, and that great philosopher and noble gentleman of Italy named Hieronimus Fracastor, as I find written in the Italian histories of navigations. As they were therefore conferring in matters of learning, 
A learned discourse of divers voyages.  and reasoning of the science of cosmography, the said learned man, having in his hand an instrument of Astronomy, declared with a large oration how much the world was bound to the kings of Portugal, rehearsing the noble facts done by them in India, and what lands and Islands they had discovered, 

The voyages of the Portugals.  
The world hanging in the air.  
What is known of the lower hemisphery.  
The land of Brasile. Peru.  
The charge and duty of Christian princes. Note.   and how by their navigations they made the whole world to hang in the air. He further declared of what parts of the ball, the earth remained yet undiscovered: and said, that of the lands of the inferior hemisphery, or half compass of the ball toward the pole Antarctic, there was nothing known but that little of the coast of Brasilia, unto the straight of Magellanus: also a part of Peru: also a little above Africa toward the cape of Bona Speranza. Also that he marveled without measure, that this thing was no better considered of Christian Princes, to whom God hath deputed this charge, having ever on their counsel men of great learning, which may inform them of this thing, being so marvelous and noble, whereby they may obtain glory and fame by virtue, and be imputed among men as gods, by better demerits than ever were Hercules & great Alexander, who travailed only into India: 
Hercules and Alexander.  and that by making the men of this our hemisphery known to them of the other half compass of the ball beneath us, they might by the title of this enterprise, without comparison, far excel all the noble facts that ever were done by julius Caesar, or any other of the Roman Emperors. Which thing they might easily bring to pass, by assigning colonies to inhabit divers places of that hemisphery, in like manner as did the Romans in provinces newly subdued: whereby they might not only attain great riches, but also enlarge the Christian faith and Empire, to the glory of God, and confusion of infidels. After this, 
The colonies of the Romans in regions subdued.  he spoke of the Island of Saint Laurence, called in old time Madagasear, which is greater than the realm of Castille and Portugal, and reacheth from the xii degree toward the Pole Antarctic, unto the xxvi degree and a half, lying North-east from the cape of Bona Speranza, and partly under the line of Tropicus Capricorni, being well inhabited, and of temperate air, 
The great Island of saint Laurence or Madagascar.  with abundance of all things necessary for the life of man, and one of the most excellent Islands that is found this day in the world: And that nevertheless there is nothing known thereof, except only a few small Havens by the sea side, as the like ignorance remaineth of the greatest part of the Islands of Taprobana, Giava, the more and the less, and infinite other. 
The islands of Taprobana or Giava. Pliny.  Then beginning to speak of the parts of our Pole, he caused the books of Pliny to be brought him, where diligently pondering the lxvii. Chapter of the second book, he found where he rehearseth the history of Cornelius Nepos, by these words: 
The history of Cornelius Nepos.  That in his time one Eudorus escaping the hands of king Lathyro, departed from the gulf of Arabia, and came by sea to the Island of Calese: Declaring further, that whereas this narration was many years reputed for a fable, was now in our time, by the virtue of the Portugals, known to be true: And that likewise the same Cornelius Nepos reciteth, that at the time when Quintus Metellus Celer was Proconsul or Lieutenant for the Romans in France, 
Ships of India driven into the sea of Germany.  the king of Suevia gave him certain Indians, which sailing out of India for merchandise, were by tempest driven to the coasts of Germany. When he had red these words, he proceeded, saying that the same thing might be verified now in our time, if the princes which confine upon that sea would endeavour their industry and diligence to bring it to pass: 

An enterprise whereby Princes may obtain true fame and glory.  
Cathay discovered by Marcus Paulus.   and that there could not any navigation be imagined so commodious and profitable to all Christendom as this way might be, if by this voyage should be found open to India, to come to the rich country of Cathay, which was discovered now two hundred years since by Marcus Paulus. Then taking the globe in his hand, he made demonstration that this voyage should be very short, in respect of that which the Portugals now follow, and also of that which the spaniards may attempt, to the Islands of Molucca. He declared furthermore, that the city of Lubyke, being rich and of great power, 
The city of Lubyke.  and situate upon the sea of Germany, and also accustomed with continual navigations to travail the sea of Norway and Gothlande, and likewise the right noble king of Polony, 
The king of Polony.  whose dominions, with his realm of Lituania, extend to the said sea, should be apt to discover this secret: But that above all other, the Duke of Moscovia, should perform the same, 
The Duke of Moscovia.  with greater commodity, & more facility than any other Prince. And here staying a while, he began to speak again, and said. Now, forasmuch as we are come to this pass, me think it should seem a great discourtesy if I should not show you all that I know as touching this voyage, whereof I greatly mused with myself many years by occasion of the words of Pliny. Whereas therefore, being a young man, I was in Germany in the city of Augusta, it so chanced that in those days there came thither an ambassador of the Duke of Moscovia, 
An ambassador from the Duke of Moscovia.  a man singularly learned both in the Greek tongue & the Latin, and of good experience in worldly things, having been sent to divers places by the said Prince, and one of his counsel. Of whose learning being advertised, I sought his acquaintance, and talking with him one day of these Indians, driven by fortune to the coasts of Germany, and of the voyage that might be discovered by the North sea to the Islands of spices, I perceived that at the first he marveled exceedingly, as at a thing that he could never have imagined. But resting a while in manner astonished in his secret fantasy, he took great pleasure therein, and said: forasmuch as the Portugals have now compassed about all the South parts, 
The words of the Ambassador of Moscovia.  supposed in old time to be inaccessible by reason of great heat, why should we not certainly think that the like may be done about this part of the North, without fear of cold, especially to men borne and brought up in that clime: Yet proceeding further, he said, that if his Prince and master had men that would animate him to discover this viage, there was no Prince in Christendom that might do it with more facility. Then calling for a Map, in which was the description of moscovia, 
The way from moscovia to the North Ocean & Cathay  and the provinces subject to the same, he declared that from the city of moscovia or Mosca, going toward the North-east for the space of lx miles, they come to the river of Volochda, 
Volochda, Vstiug. jug. Succana. Duina. Colmogor. The North Ocean.  and afterward by that, and following the course thereof, to the city of Vstiug, so called, because the river of jug falleth into the river of Succana, where they lose their own names, and make the great river Duina, and by that, leaving on the right hand the city of Colmogor, they sail unto the North Ocean. The which way, although it be a long tract, as more than .800. miles, nevertheless he said that in summer it might commodiously be sailed. And that whereas it falleth into the sea, 
Great woods.  there are infinite woods of goodly trees, apt to make ships, and the place so convenient for this purpose, that shypwryghtes and other skilful workmen for all things hereunto appertaining, may easily come out of Germany: also, that the men which are used to travail the sea of Germany about the coasts of Gothlande, 
Gothlande,  should be best and most apt to attempt this enterprise, because they are indurate to abide cold, hunger, and labour. He said furthermore, that in the court of his Prince, 
The Moscovites have knowledge of the great Cam of Cathay. Permia. Pescora. Catena mundi Obdora, Vecchiadoro, Obo.  they have much knowledge of the great Cam of Cathay, by reason of the continual wars they have with the Tartars, of whom the greatest part give obedience to the said great Cam, as to their chief Emperor. He made also demonstration in the said card by the North-east, that being past the province of Permia, and the river Pescora (which falleth into the North sea) & certain mountains named Catena Mundi, there is th'entrance into the province of Obdora, whereas is Vecchiadoro, and the river Obo, which also falleth into the said sea, and it is the furthest border of th'empire of the Prince of Moscovia. The said river hath his original in a great lake called Chethai, 

The lake Chethay  
The Tartars.   which is the first habitation of the Tartars, that pay tribute to the great Cane. And from this lake for the space of two months viage (as they were credybly informed by certain Tartars taken in the wars) is the most noble city of Cambalu, 
The city of Cambalu.  being one of the chiefest in the dominion of the great Cane, whom some call the great Cham. He also affirmed, that if ships should be made on the coasts of the said sea, 
Note this secret.  and sail on the back half of the coast thereof (which he knew by many relations made to his Prince, to reach infinitely toward the North-east) they should doubtless in following the same, 
Difficult traveling in Moscovia.  easily discover that country. Unto these words he added, that although there were great difficulty in moscovia, by reason that the way to the said sea is full of thick woods and waters, which in the summer make great marishes, and impossible to be travailed, aswell for lack of victuals, which can not there be found, not for certain days, but for the space of certain months, the place being desolate without inhabitants: nevertheless he said, that if there were with his Prince, only two spaniards or Portugals, to whom the charge of this voyage should be committed, 
Commendation of the spaniards and Portugals.  he no ways doubted but that they would follow it, and find it, forasmuch as with great ingeniousness and inestimable patience, these nations have overcome much greater difficulties than are these, which are but little in comparison to those that they have overpassed, and do overpass in all their viages to India. He proceeded, declaring that not many years since, there came to the court of his Prince, 

The history of Paulus Centurio.  
〈◊〉 his read more at large in the book of Paulus jomus.  
Malice may do more with some then virtue.  
The Caspian sea. Riga.   an Ambassador from pope Leo, named master Paulo Centurion, a Genuese, under divers pretences. But the principal occasion of his coming, was, because he had conceived great indignation and hatred against the Portugals: And therefore intended to prove if he could open any viage by land, whereby spices might be brought from India by the land of Tartary, or by the sea Caspium (otherwise called Hircanum) to moscovia, and from thence to be brought in ships by the river Riga, which running by the country of Livonia, falleth into the sea of Germany: And that his Prince gave ear unto him, and caused the said viage to be attempted by certain noble men of Lordo, of the Tartars confining next unto him. 
The Tartars of Lordo,  But the wars which were then between them, and the great deserts which they should of necessity overpass, 
Deserts. The viage by the North sea.  made them leave of their enterprise: which if it had been purposed by the coasts of this our North sea, it might have been easily finished. The said Ambassador continued his narration, saying that no man ought to doubt of that sea, but that it may be sailed six months in the year, forasmuch as the days are then very long in that clime, and hot, by reason of continual reverberation of the beams of the Sun, and short nights: 
The worthiness of this viage.  And that this thing were as well worthy to be proved, as any other navigation, whereby many parts of the world, heretofore unknown, have been discovered and brought to civility. And here making an end of this talk, he said: Let us now omit this part of moscovia with his cold, and speak somewhat of that part of the new world, in which is the land of Brytons, 
The voyages of the Frenchmen to the land of Baccalaos.  called Terra Britonum, and Baccaleos, or Terra Baccalearum, where in the year .1534. and .1535. jaques Cartiar, in two voyages made with three great French Galleys, found the great and large countries named Canada, Ochelaga, and Sanguenai: 
Pleasant countries. New France. Apostrophe to to the Christian Princes.  which reach from the xlv to the .51. degree, being well inhabited, and pleasant countries, and named by him Nova Francia. And here staying a while, and lifting up his hands, he said, Oh what do the Christian princes mean, that in such lands discovered, they do not assign certain colonies to inhabit the same, to bring those people (whom God hath so blessed with natural gifts) to better civility, and to embrace our religion, than the which, nothing can be more acceptable to God? The said regions also, being so fair and fruitful, with plenty of all sorts of corn, herbs, fruits, 
Great rivers.  wood, fishes, beasts, metals, and rivers of such greatness that ships may sail more than .180. miles upon one of them, being on both sides infinitely inhabited: 
A thing worthy to be searched.  And to cause the governors of the said colonies to search whether that land toward the North, named Terra de Laborador, do join as one firm land with Norway: Or whether there be any straight or open place of sea, as is most like there should be, forasmuch as it is to be thought that the said Indians, driven by fortune about the coasts of Norway, came by that straight or sea, to the coasts of Germany, 

The way to Cathay and the Islands of Molucca by the Northwest. A notable enterprise.  
The noble enterprise of Antony di Mendoza, viceroy of Mexico.   and by the said straight to sail northwest, to discover the lands and countries of Cathay, and from thence to sail to the Islands of Molucca, and these surely should be enterprises able to make men immortal. The which thing, that right worthy Gentleman master Antony di Mendoza considering, by the singular virtue and magnanimity that is in him, attempted to put this thing in practise. For being viceroy of the country of Mexico (so named of the great city Mexico, otherwise called Temistitan, now called new Spain, being in the twenty degree above the Equinoctial, and part of the said firm land) he sent certain of his Captains by land, and also a navy of ships by sea, 
The discovering of the Northwest parts.  to search this secret. And I remember that when I was in Flaunders in Themperors court, I saw his letter written in the year .1541. and dated from Mexico: wherein was declared how toward the Northwest, he had found the kingdom of Set Citta (that is) seven Cities, whereas is that, called Civola, by the reverend father Marco da Niza: and how beyond the said kingdom yet further toward the Northwest, Captain Francisco Vasques of Coronado, having overpassed great deserts, 
ships sailing from Cathay by the North Hyperboream sea, to the coasts of the Northwest part of the land of Baccaleos. Cathay.  came to the sea side, where he found certain ships which sailed by that sea with merchandise, and had in their banner upon the prooes of their ships, certain fowls made of gold and silver, which they of Mexico call Alcatrazzi, and that their mariners showed by signs that they were thirty. days sailing, in coming to that haven: whereby he understood that these ships could be of none other country then of Cathay, forasmuch as it is situate on the contrary part of the said land discovered. The said master Antony wrote furthermore, that by the opinion of men well practised, there was discovered so great a space of that country unto the said sea, that it passed .950. leagues, 
The sea from new France or Tarra Britonum to Cathay.  which make .2850. miles. And doubtless if the French men, in this their new France, would have passed by land toward the said Northwest and by North, they should also have found the sea whereby they might have sailed to Cathay. But above all things, this seemed unto me most worthy of commendation, 
A notable book.  that the said master Antony wrote in his letter, that he had made a book of all the natural and marvelous things which they found in searching those countries, with also the measures of lands, and altytudes of degrees: A work doubtless which showeth a princely and magnifical mind, whereby we may conceive that if God had given him the charge of the other hemisphery, he would or now have made it better known to us. The which thing I suppose no man doth greatly esteem at this time: 
A great and glorious enterprise.  being nevertheless the greatest and most glorious enterprise that may be imagined.  
And here making a certain pause, and turning himself toward us, he said, Do you not understand to this purpose, how to pass to India toward the Northwest wind, as did of late a citizen of venice, so valiant a man, 
Sebastian Cabote thee grand pilot of the West Indies.  and so well practised in all things pertaining to navigations, and the science of cosmography, that at this present he hath not his like in Spain, insomuch that for his virtues he is preferred above all other pilots that sail to the West Indies, who may not pass thither without his licence, and is therefore called Piloto Maggiore (that is) the grand pilot. And when we said that we knew him not, he proceeded, saying, that being certain years in the city of Seville, and desirous to have some knowledge of the navigations of the spaniards, it was told him that there was in the city a valiant man, a Uenecian borne, named Sebastian Cabote, who had the charge of those things, being an expert man in that science, 
Commendation of Sebastian Cabote. Sebastian Cabote told me that he was borne in Brystow▪ & that at iiii years old he was carried with his father to Venice, and so returned again into England with his father after certain years: whereby he was thought to have been borne in Venice.  and one that could make cards for the sea with his own hand: and that by this report, seeking his acquaintance, he found him a very gentle person, who entertained him friendly, and showed him many things, and among other a large Map of the world, with certain particular navigations, aswell of the Portugals as of the spaniards: and that he spoke further unto him, in this effect. When my father departed from venice, many years since, to dwell in England, to follow the trade of merchandyes, he took me with him to the city of London, while I was very young, yet having nevertheless some knowledge of letters of humanity, and of the sphere. And when my father died, in that time when news were brought that Don Christopher Colonus Genuese, had discovered the coasts of India, whereof was great talk in all the court of king Henry the seventh, who then reigned: insomuch that all men with great admiration affirmed it to be a thing more divine than human, to sail by the West into the East where spices grow, by a way that was never known before. By which fame and report, there increased in my heart a great flame of desire to attempt some notable thing. And understanding by reason of the sphere, that if I should sail by the way of the Northwest wind, I should by a shorter tract come to India, 
The first viage of Sebastian Cabote.  I thereupon caused the king to be advertised of my device: who immediately commanded two Caravels to be furnished with all things appertaining to the viage, which was as far as I remember, in the year .1496. in the beginning of summer. Beginning therefore to sail toward Northwest, not thinking to find any other land then that of Cathay, and from thence to turn toward India. But after certain days, I found that the land ran toward the North, which was to me a great displeasure. Nevertheless, sailing along by the coast, to see if I could find any gulf that turned, I found the land still continent to the .56. degree under our pole: And seeing that there the coast turned toward the East, despairing to find the passage, I turned back again, and sailed down by the coast of that land toward the Equinoctial (ever with intent to find the said passage to India) and came to that part of this firm land which is now called Florida. 
The land of Florida.  Where, my victuals failing, I departed from thence, and returned into England, where I found great tumults among the people, and preparance for wars in scotland: by reason whereof, there was no more consideration had to this viage. whereupon I went into Spain, to the catholic king, and queen Elizabeth: who being advertised what I had done, 
The second viage of Cabote to the land of Brasile, and Rio della Plata,  entertained me, and at their charges furnished certain ships wherewith they caused me to sail to discover the coasts of Brasile, where I found an exceeding great and large river, named at this present Rio della Plata (that is) the river of silver, into the which I sailed, and followed it into the firm land more than six hundred leagues, finding it every where very fair and inhabited with infinite people, 
Cabote told me that in a region within this river he sowed .50. grains of wheat in September, and gathered thereof .50. thousand in December, as writeth also Francisco Lopes.  which with admiration came running daily to our ships. Into this river, run so many other rivers, that it is in manner incredible. After this, I made many other voyages, which I now permit. And waxing old, I give myself to rest from such travails, because there are now many young and lusty Pylotes and mariners of good experience, by whose forwardness I do rejoice in the fruits of my labours, and rest with the charge of this office as you see. And this is as much as I have understood of master Sebastian Cabote, as I have gathered out of divers navigations written in the Italian tongue.  
And whereas I have before made mention how Moscovia was in our time discovered by Richard chancellor in his voyage toward Cathay, 
The voyage to Moscovia.  by the direction and information of the said master Sebastian, who long before had this secret in his mind, I shall not need here to describe that voyage, forasmuch as the same is largely and faithfully written in the Latin tongue by that learned young man Clement adam's, schoolmaster to the Queen's Henshemen, as he received it at the mouth of the said Richard chancellor. Nevertheless, 
The history of Moscovia.  I have thought good here to speak somewhat of moscovia, as I have red in the book of john Faber, written in the Latin tongue, to the right noble Prince Ferdinando, Archeduke of Austria, and Infant of Spain, of the manners and religion of the Moscovites, as he was partly instructed by the Ambassadors of the Duke of Moscovy, sent into Spain to Themperors majesty, in the year .1525. He writeth therefore as followeth.  
I think it first convenient to speak somewhat of the name of this region whereby it is called at this day, 
The divers names of Moscovia.  and how it was called in old tyme. Conferring therefore the most ancient of the Greek and Latin monuments with the histories of later time, I perceive it to be a thing which requireth no small judgement of wit and learning. For we see in how short time the names of things are changed, as are also the manners of men. I find therefore that those people whom at this day we commonly call Moscovites, were in time past (as wynesseth Pliny) called Roxolani, 
Roxolani, Rosolan●, Ruthem.  whom nevertheless by changing one letter, Ptolemy in his eight table of Europe, calleth Rosolanos, as doth also Strabo. They were also many years called Rutheni, and are that people which sometime fought manfully against the Captains of Methridates, as Strabo writeth. They were called Moscovites, of the chief city of all the province, 
The river Moscow.  named Moscovia or Mosca: or (as Volaterane sayeth) of the river Moscow. They were sometime governed by Duke john, whose wife was Helena, of the lineage of Themperours of Constantinople, of the noble family of the Palcologi. Beyond these Roxolanos, Strabo sayeth there is no land inhabited. These Ruthenians therefore or Moscovites, are people of the North-east part of the world from us, and are determined with the limits of the great river Boristhenes of Scythia: 
The river Boristhenes.  on the one side with the Lituanians and Polonians, and on the other side with the Tartars, who cease not to vex them with continual wars and incursions: 
Themperor of Cathay.  Especially the great Emperor Cham of Cathay, the chief Prince of the Tartars, resident by the sea side in Taurico Chersoneso, molesteth them with sore wars. They are toward the North side enclosed with the frozen sea, the land of whose coasts being very large, 
The frozen sea.  pertaineth in manner all to the dominion of the Duke of Moscovy. The sea is it which the old writers call Lacus Cronicus, so named of the Greek word Cronos, which the Latins call Saturnus, 
Lacus Cromicus. Saturnus.  whom they feign to be an old man, of complexion cold and slow, and thereby name all such things as are cold and slow, Cronica, as by like reason they did this North sea, which being in manner ever frozen, is slow and cold, and in manner immovable. And for like consideration (as saith Pliny) Heathens nameth it in the Scythian tongue, 
Amaltheum.  Amaltheum, which word signifieth as much as congealed or frozen. But that I wander not far from my purpose: th'empire and dominion of the Duke of Moscovy, 
The dominion of the Duke of Moscovia.  reacheth so far, that it comprehendeth certain parts of Asia, and also of Europe. The city of moscovia or Moscow, is counted twice as big as Colonia Agrippina, 
The city of Moscovia. The chief cities of Moscovia.  as they faithfully report which know both. Unto this they have also an other, not unequal in bigness, called Fladimer. Also Blescovia, Novogradia, Smolne, and Otifer, all which, their Ambassadors affirm to be of princely and magnifical buildings, and strongly defended with walls both of brick and square stone. Of these, Blescovia is strongest, and environed with three walls. Other which they have innumerable, are not so famous as are these whereof this Duke of Moscovy and Emperor of Russia taketh th'inscription of his title. For even at this present, when so ever, 

The Duke of Moscovia & Emperor of Russia.  
The duke of Moscovia his title.   either by his ambassadors or his letters, he doth signify himself to be Emperor of Moscovy, he is accustomed to use this title, Basilius by the grace of God Emperor of all Russia, and great Duke of Fladamer, moscovy, Novigrade, Blascovia, Smolne, and Otifer. etc. And this is the title whereby the said ambassadors saluted your majesty in the name of great Basilius when they began their oration. This prince of Moscovy, hath under him princes of many provinces, and those of great power: 
Duke Basilius.  Of the which, that old white bearded man, whom this Emperor of the Ruthians, sent for his ambassador to Themperors majesty into Spain, is not one of the least. For even he, 
Their power.  when necessity of war requireth, is accustomed to make for his Emperor a band of xxx thousand horsemen. 
Their obedience to their prince.  But this is to their singular commendation, that they are so obedient to their prince in all things, that being summoned by him by never so mean an herald, they obey incontinent, as if it were to god, thynkeing nothing more glorious then to die in the quarrel of their prince. 
Their wars & conquests.  By reason of which obedience, they are able, in short time, to assemble an army of two or three hundred thousand men against their enemies, either the Tartars, or the great Cham: And have hereby obtained great victories and triumphs, aswell against the Turks, as the Tartars, by the exceeding multitude of their horsemen, and continual experience in wars. At such time as Themperor Maximilian made a league with them, they kept war against the king of Polony. They use not only bows and darts, after the manner of the Parthians, but have also the use of guns as we have. And to be brief, 
Guns. Only the Moscovites have not felt the commodious of peace.  only the Moscovites may seem that nation which hath not felt the commodities of peace: Insomuch that if their region were not strongly defended by the nature of the place, being impreignable, it had or now been oftentimes conquered. Their language agreeth much with the tongue of the Bohemians, Croatians, and slavons: 
Their language.  so that the Slavon doth plainly understand the Moscovite, although the Moscovian tongue be a more rude and hard phrase of speech. The historiographers write that the Sclavous tongue took the name of the confusion which was in Babel in the time of that stout hunter Nembroth, of whom mention is made in the Genesis. But I can not enough marvel at this thing, that whereas between Dalmatia (now called Sclavonia) and Moscovia, 
Dalmatia.  both the Pannonies are situate, yet this notwithstanding, 
Pannonia. Hungary.  the Hungarians tongue nothing agreeth with the Moscovites. Whereby we may conjecture that these nations were sometimes divided by legions, and that they came out of Dalmatia thither: 
Their original.  which thing also Volateranus affirmeth, saying that the language of the Ruthenians (which are the Moscovites) is Semidalmatica (that is, half Slavon) How so ever it be, this is certain, 
The Sclavion tongue reacheth far.  that the Bohemians, Croatians, slavons, & Moscovites, agree in language, as we perceived by th'interpreters which your majesty had then in your court. For whereas the said interpreters were borne among the Croatians & slavons, and none of them had ever been in moscovia, or before that time had any conversation with them, yet did they well understand the ambassadors words. There are in Mosuia, woods of exceeding bigness, in the which black wolves and white bears are hunted. The cause whereof may be th'extreme cold of the North, 
Great woods, white bears and black wolves. Abundance of honey and wax.  which doth greatly alter the complextions of beasts, and is the mother of whiteness, as the Philosophers affirm. They have also great plenty of Bees, whereby they have such abundance of honey and wax, that it is with them of small price. When the commodity of their country is neglected by reason of long wars, their chief advantage whereby they have all things necessary toward their living, is the gains which they have by their rich furs, 
Rich furs.  as Sables, Marterns, Luzernes, most white Armins, and such other, which they sell to merchants of divers countries. They buy and sell with simple faith of words, exchanging ware for ware, 
Their manner of bargaining.  without any curious bonds or cautels. And albeit they have the use of both gold and silver mines, yet do they for the most part exchange their furs for fruits, 
Rude & wild people.  and other things necessary to maintain their life. There are also some people under the dominion of this Emperor, which have neither wine nor wheat, but live only by flesh and milk, 
Tartars.  as do the wild Tartars their borderers, which dwell in woods by the coasts of the frozen sea. These people are bruitishe, and live in manner like wild beasts. But they of the city of Mosca and Novigrade, and other cities, are civil people, 
Civil people in cities.  and agree with us in eating of fish and flesh, although their manner of coquerye is in many things differing from ours. Volaterane writeth that the Ruthenians use money uncoined. 
Their money.  And enquiring further, I was informed that the money of Hungary is much currant with them. But this is cheeflye to be considered, that they embrace the Christian faith, 
They embrace the Christian faith which they received of the Apostles.  which they affirm to have been preached to them first by Saint Andrew the Apostle, and brother to Simon Peter. Such doctrine also as under Constantine the great, in the year. CCC.xviii. was concluded in the first general counsel holden in the city of Nicene in Bethynia, and there determined by. CCC.xviii. Bishops, 
The counsel of Nicene. Basilius Magnus. Chrisostomus.  and also such as hath been written and taught by the Greek Doctors Basilius Magnus and Chisostomus, they believe to be so holy, firm, and sincere, that they think it no more lawful one hear to transgress or go back from the same, then from the Gospel of Christ. For their constancy and modesty is such, that no man dare call those things into question which have once been decised by holy fathers in their general counsels. 
Their constancy in their religion.  They do therefore with a more constant mind persever in their first faith, which they received of Saint Andrew th'apostle, and his successor and holy fathers, then do many of us, being divided into schisms and sects, which thing never chanceth among them. But if any difficulty chance to rise as touching the faith or custom of religion, 
The bishops define controversies in religion.  all is referred to the archbishop and other bishops, as to be defined by their spirit: not permitting any judgement to the inconstant and ignorant people. Their Archbishop is resident in the city of Mosca, where also the Emperor keepeth his court. They have likewise divers other Bishops: as one in Novigradia, 
Their bishops.  where also Isodorus was Bishop under pope Eugebius. They have an other in Roscivia, an other in Sustali, an other in Otifeti: also in Smolne, in Resan, in C●lmum, and in Volut, all which have their Diocese. They acknowledge their archbishop as the chief. 

The Archbishop.  
The patriarch of constantinople.   Before the patriarch of Constantinople was oppressed by the tyranny of the Turks, this archbishop recognized him as his superior: insomuch that this Duke of Moscovia, and Empeperour of Russia, not unmindful hereof, but a diligent observer of his accustomed religion, doth at this day yearly send a certain stipend, in manner of alms, to the patriarch of Constantinople, 
A notable example of a Christian Prince.  that he may with more quiet mind look for the end of this his Egyptian servitude, until it shall please almighty God to restore him to his former church and authority. For he judgeth it much impiety, if he should now forsake him whose predecessors have ruled and governed so many churches, and of whom the faith and religion of so many regions and provinces have depended.  
But to speak briefly of their religion, they agree in many things with us, and in some things follow the Greeks. They have monks and religious men. 
Their religion.  Not far from the city of Mosca, they have a great Monastery, in the which are three hundred monks, living under the rule of Basilius Magnus, in the which is also the sepulchre of S. Sergius the Abbot. They observe their vow of chastity, 
A monastery of ccc. monks.  which none may break that have once professed. Yet such as have married Virgins of good fame, may be admitted to thorder of priesthood, but may never be a Monk. 
Priests.  The priests and Bishops which are admitted to orders unmarried, may never after be married: nor yet such as have wives, marry again when they are dead, but live in perpetual chastity. Such as commit adultery or fornication, are grievously punished by the Bishops, and deprived of the benefices. They celebrate mass after the manner of the Greeks, 
Mass.  which differeth from ours in divers things, as in fermented bread, after the manner of the Greeks. They put in the Chalice as much water as red wine, 
A mystery.  which water they use to heat, because (not without a great mystery) there issued forth of the side of our Lord, both blood and water, which we ought by good reason to think was not without heat: for else should it scarcely have been judged for a miracle. 
The primative church.  In fine, they affirm that all their customs and rites are according to the institutions of the primitive church, and the doctrine of Basilius Magnus, and Chrisostomus. In this thing they differ greatly from us, 
A strange custom.  that they minister the communion to young children of three years of age, which they do with fermented bread dypt in a spoonful of wine, and give it to them for the body and blood of Christ.  

A brief description of moscovia, after the later writers, as Sebastian Munster, and jacobus Gastaldus.  
THe province of moscovia, is so named of the river Moscow, which passeth by the metropolitan city of moscovia, called Mosca by the name of the river Moscow. This province was called of the old writers, Sarmatia Asiatica. 
Sarmatia Asiatica.  The borderers or confines to the moscovians on the one side toward the East, are the Tartars, called Nogai, and the Scianbanians, with the Zagatians. Toward the West, the provinces of Livonia and Lituania. Toward the South, the river of Tanais, and the people confining with the river of Volga, 
The Scythian Ocean.  called of the old writers Rha. And toward the North, the Ocean sea, called the Scythian sea, and the region of Lapponia. Moscovia is in manner all plain, and full of marshes, woods, and many very great rivers, whereof the river of Volga is the principal. Some call this Ledil, as the old authors named it Rha. It beginneth at the great lake called Lacus Albus (that is) the white lake, and runneth into the sea of Bachau, 

The river of Volga.  
Lacus albus.   named of the ancient writers, the sea Caspium or Hircanum. Under the domininon of moscovia, are certain regions and Dukedoms: as Alba Russia (that is white Russia). 
The Caspian sea.  Also Colmogora, Plescovia, Basrida, Novogradia, with also many places of the Tartars, which are subject to the Duke of Moscovia. The chief cities of moscovia, are Mosca, Plescovia, Novogradia, Colmogora, Otogeria, Viatra, Smolenser, Percaslavia, Cologna, Volodemaria, Roslavia, and Cassam. The people of Moscovia are Christians, 
Their chief cities.  and have great abundance of honey and wax: also rich furs, as Sables, Marterns, Foins, and divers other. All the Tartars which inhabit toward the East beyond the river of Volga, have no dwelling places, nor yet cities or Castles, 
The wild. Tartars.  but carry about with them certain carts or wagens covered with beasts hides, under the which they rest, as we do in our houses.  
They remove together in great companies, which they call Hordas. 
Hordas.  They are warlike people, and good horsemen, and are all Macometistes.  
Sebastian Munster in his book of Universal cosmography, writeth that the city of Mosca or Moscovia containeth in circuit xiiii miles, and that it is twice as big as the city of Praga in Bohemia. 
The bygnes of the city of Moscovia.  Of the country of moscovia, beside other provinces subject to the same, he writeth thus: It extendeth in largeness four hundredth miles, and is rich in silver. It is lawful for no man to go out of the realm, 

Silver.  
The region of Moscovia.   or come in, without the Duke's letters. It is plain without mountains, and full of woodds and marshes. The beasts there, by reason of the cold, are less than in other countries more southward. 
Beasts.  In the midst of the city of Mosca, being situate in a plain, there is a Castle with xvii towers, and three bulwarks, so strong & fair, that the like are scarcely seen in any other place. 
A fair and strong castle in the city of Mosca.  There are also in the Castle xvi churches, and three very large courts, in the which the noble men of the court have their lodgings. The Duke's palace is builded after the manner of the Italian building, 

The Duke's palace.  
Their drink.   and very fair, but not great. Their drink is meed and beer, as is the manner of the most part of the people that inhabit the North parts of the world. They are exceedingly given to drunkenness. 
They are given to drunkenness.  Yet (as some say) the princes of the land are prohibit on pain of death to abstain from such strong drinks as are of force to inebriate, except at certain times when licence is granted them, as twice or thrice in the year. They plough the ground with horses, and ploughs of wood. Their corn and other grain, 
Corn and grain.  by reason of long cold, do seldom wax ripe on the ground, by reason whereof they are sometimes enforced to ripe & dry them in their stoves and hot houses, 
Stoves.  and then grind them. They lack wine and oil. Moscovia is extended unto jurham and Corelia which are in Scythia. The famous river of Tanais, the Moscovites call Don, having his springs and original in moscovia in the Dukedom of Rezense. 
The famous river of Tanais.  It riseth out of a ground that is plain, barren, muddy, full of marshes and woods. And where it proceedeth toward the East to the mountains of Scythia and Tartary, it bendeth to the south: and coming to the marshes of Meotis, it falleth into them. The river of Volga (sometime called Rha, 
The marshes of Meotis. Volga. Ocha.  and now called of the Tartars edel) runneth towards the North certain miles, to whom is joined the river Occa or Ocha, flowing out of moscovia, and then bending into the South, and increased with many other rivers, falleth into the sea Euximum, which divideth Europe and Asia. 
The sea Euxinum.   
The wood or forest called Hyrcania silva, occupieth a small portion of Moscovia: Yet is it somewhere inhabited, 
The forest of Hyrcania.  and by the long labour of men, made th'inner and barer of trees. In that part that lieth toward Prusia, is a kind of great & fierce Bulls, called Vri or Brisonts, as writeth Paulus iovius. There are also Alces, much like unto Hearts, with long snowtes of flesh, 
Vri. Alces.  and long legs without any bowing of their houx or pasterns. These beasts the Moscovites call Lozzi, and the Almains, Helenes. 
They travail in winter on sleds.  The journey that is between Vlna of Lituania by Smolence to Mosca, is travailed in winter on sleds, by the snow congealed by long frost, and made very slypperie and compact like Ice, by reason of much wearing and treading, by means whereof this voyage is performed with incredible celerity. But in the Summer, the plain countries can not be overcome without difficult labour: For when the snow beginneth to be dissolved by continual heat, it causeth marshes and quamyres inextricable and dangerous both for horse and man, were it not for certain Causeis made of timber with in manner infinite labour. 
Causeys' of timber.  The region of Moscovia (as I have said) beareth neither Uines nor Olive trees, nor yet any other trees that bear any apples or fruits of very pleasant and sweet savour or taste, except Cherry trees, 
Trees and fruits.  forasmuch as all tender fruits and trees, are burnt of the cold blasts of the North wind. Yet do the fields bear all kinds of corn, as wheat, and the grain called Siligo, 
Corn and grains.  whereof the finest kind of bread is made: also Mill, and Panycke, which the Italians call Melica: Likewise all kinds of pulse, as Beans, Peason, tars, and such other. But their chief harvest consisteth of Honey and Wax, 
Honey in woods and trees.  forasmuch as the whole region is replenished with fruitful Bees, which make most sweet Honey, not in the husband men's hives, but even in hollow trees. And hereby cometh it to pass, that both in the woods and shalowed lawns, are seen many swarms of Bees hanging on the bows of trees, so that it shall not be necessary to call them together, or charm them with the sound of Basins. There are oftentimes found great masses of Honey combs, conserved in trees of the old Honey forsaken of bees, forasmuch as the husbandmen can not seek every tree in so great and large woods: insomuch that in the stocks or bodies of exceeding great and hollow trees, are sometimes found great pools or lakes of honey. Demetrius' th'ambassador of the Duke of Moscovia, whom he sent to the Bishop of Rome not many years since, made relation that a husbandman of the country, 
Lakes or pools of honey.  not far from the place where he remained, seeking in the woods for Honey, descended into a great hollow tree full of Honey, into the which he slipped up to the breast, 
A man almost drowned in honey.  and lived there only with Honey for the space of two days, calling in vain for help in that desert of woodds: and that in fine despairing of help, he escaped by a marvelous chance, 
A marvelous chance.  being drawn out by a great Bear that descended into the tree, with her loins downward after the manner of men. For when the man (as present necessity and opportunity served) perceived the Bear to be within his reach, he suddenly clasped her about the loins with his arms, and with a terrible cry provoked the beast to enforce her strength to leap out of the tree, and therewith to draw him out, as it chanced in deed. These regions abound with Bears, which every where seek both Honey and Bees, not only herewith to fill their bellies, 
Bears feed of honey & bees.  but also to help their sight: For their eyes are oftentimes dulled, and their mouths wounded of the Bees: both which griefs are eased by eating of Honey. They have weakest heads, as Lions have strongest: insomuch that when (being thereto enforced) they cast them selves down headlong from any rocks, they cover their heads with their feet, and lie for a time astonished, and half dead with knocks. They walk sometimes on two feet, and spoil trees, 
Bears invade Bulls.  backward. Sometime also they invade Bulls, and so hang on them with all their feet, that they weerye them with weight. 
The bears birth.  The Bear (as sayeth Pliny) bringeth forth her birth the thirty day, and often times two. Their birth is a certain white mass of flesh without form, and little bigger than a mouse, without eyes, and without hear, with only the nails or claws coming forth: but the dam with continual lycking, by little and little figureth the inform birth. When she entereth into the den which she hath chosen, 
The bears den.  she creepeth thither with her belly upward, lest the place should be found by the steps of her feet. And being there delivered of her birth, remaineth in the same place for the space of xiiii days, immovable as writeth Aristotle. They live without meat xl days, 
Bears live without meat xl. days.  and for that time sustain themselves only by licking and sucking their right foot. At the length chancing to find meat, they fill themselves so full, that they remedy that surfeyte by vomit, which they provoke by eating of Ants. Their birth is oppressed with so heavy a sleep for the space of xiiii days, 
The sleep of Bears.  that it can not be raised either with pricking or wounds, and in the mean time grow exceeding fat. After fourtiene days they wake from sleep, and begin to lick and suck the soles of their fore feet, and live thereby for a space: Nor yet is it apparent that they live by any other meat, until the spring time of the year. At which time beginning to run abroad, they feed of the tender buds and young sprygges or branches of trees, and other herbs correspondent to their lips.  
Before five hundred years, 
The religion of the Moscovites.  the Moscovites honoured the Gods of the gentiles: And then first received the Christian faith when the bishops of Grecia began to descent from the church of the Latins: and therefore received the rites of the Greeks. They minister the sacrament with fermented bread under both kinds: And think that the souls of dead men are not helped with the suffragies of priests, nor yet by the devotion of their friends or kinsfolk: Also that the place of Purgatory is a fable. In the time of the divine service, the history of the miracles of Christ, and the Epistles of saint Paul are rehearsed out of the pulpit. Beyond Moscovia, are many people which they call Scythians, 
The Scythians subject to the Duke of Moscovia.  and are partly subject to the Prince of Moscovia. These are they which Duke ivan subdued, as are the people of Perm, Baskird, Cezriremissa, juhra, Corela, and Permska. These people were idolaters before the Duke compelled them to baptism, & appointed a bishop over them named Steven, whom the Barbarians after the departure of the Duke, flayed alive, and slew. But the Duke returning shortly after, afflicted them sore, and assigned them a new bishop.  
It is here also to be noted, that the old Cosmographers feigned, that in these regions toward the North pole, there should be certain great mountains, which they called Ripheos and Hyperboreos, which nevertheless are not found in nature. It is also a fable, 

It was then an opinion that all rivers sprung out of mountains. The fruitful region of Colmogora.  
The great river Dividna.   that the rivers of Tanais & Volham do spring out of high mountains, whereas it is apparent that both these rivers, and many other, have their original in the plains.  
Next to Moscovia, is the fruitful region of Colmogora, through the which runneth the river of Dividna, being the greatest that is known in the North parts of the world. This river increaseth at certain times of the year, as doth the river of Nilus in Egypt, overfloweth the fields round about, and with abundance of fat moisture, resisteth the coldness of the air. Wheat sown in the ground, groweth abundantly without ploughing: 
Wheat without ploughing.  and fearing the new injury of the proud river, springeth, groweth, and ripeth, with wonderful celerity of hasting nature.  

The river of juga. Vstiuga.  Into the river of Dividna runneth the river of juga: And in the very angle or corner where they meet, is a famous mart town named Vstiuga, being a hundred and fifty miles distant from the chief city of Mosca. To this mart town, from the higher countries, are sent the precious furs of Marterns, Sables, 
Furs.  Wolves, & such other, which are exchanged for divers other kinds of wares & merchandise. Hitherto Munsterus.  
And forasmuch as many do marvel that such plenty of honey should be in so cool a country, 

The natural cause of much honey in cold regions.  
Gums and spices in hoot countries.   I have thought good to declare the reason and natural cause hereof. It is therefore to be considered, that like as spices, gums, and odoriferous fruits are engendered in hot regions, by continual heat during all the whole year, without impression of the mortifying quality of cold, whereby all things are constrained as they are dilated by heat, even so in cold and moist regions (whose moisture is th'inner and more waterish then in hot regions) are flowers engendered more abundantly, 
Flowers in cold regions.  as caused by impression of less and faynter heat, working in thin matter of waterish moisture, less concoct than the matter of gums and spices, and other unctuous fruits and trees growing in hot regions. For although (as Munster sayeth here before) the region of Mosco●●a beareth neither vines or Olives, or any other fruitee of sweet savour, by reason of the coldness thereof, nevertheless, 
Flowers of trees.  forasmuch as flowers (whereof honey is chief gathered) may in summer season grow abundantly in the plains, marshes, & wood, not only on the ground, but also on trees in cold regions, it is agreeable to good reason, that great plenty of honey should be in such regions as abound with flowers, which are brought forth with the first degree of heat, and first approach of the sun, as appeareth in the spring time, not only by the springing of flowers in fields and gardens, but also of blossoms of trees springing before the leaves or fruit, 
Blossoms of trees.  as the lighter and th'inner matter first drawn out with the lowest and least degree of heat: 
An example of the degrees of heat.  as the like is seen in the art of stylling, whereby all thin and light moistures are lifted up by the first degree of the fire: and the heaviest and thickest moistures are drawn out with more vehement fire. As we may therefore in this case compare the generation of flowers to the heat of May, the generation of gums to the heat of june, 
The generation of flowers by moderate heat.  and spices to the heat of july: Even so, in such cold regions whose summer agreeth rather with the temperate heat & moisture of May, then with th'extreme heat of the other months, that heat is more apt to bring forth abundance of flowers, as things caused by moderate heat, as plainly appeareth by their taste and savour, in which is no sharp quality of heat, either biting the tongue, or offending the head, as is in spices, gums, and fruits of hot regions. And as in cold and plain regions, moderate heat, with abundance of moisture, 
Long days and shorce nights.  are causes of the generation of flowers (as I have said) so likewise the length of the days and shortness and warmness of the nights in summer season, in such cold regions, is a great help hereunto. Cardanus writeth in his book De Plantis, 
Bramble and fern.  that bramble & fern grow not but in cold regions, as doth wheat in temperate regions: and that spices and hot seeds, can not grow in cold regions, forasmuch as being of thin substance, 
spices.  they should soon be mortified & extinct by excessive cold. For (as he sayeth) nothing can concoct, ripe, and attenuate the substance of fruits without the help of air, agreeable to the natures of such things as are brought forth in the same, although it may do this in roots. But in manner all flowers are of sweet savour, 
The savour of flowers.  forasmuch as the moisture that is in them, being thin and but little, is by mean heat soon and easily concoct or made ripe. Such also as are soon ry●e, are soon rotten, according to the proverb.  

What Pliny writeth of honey.  Pliny, although in the xi book of his natural history. Cap. viii. he writeth that honey is gathered of the flowers of all trees and sets or plants, except sorrel and the herb called Chenopode (which some call Goose foot) yet he affirmeth that it descendeth from the air: for in the xii Chapter of the same book, he writeth thus.  

Sirius is otherwise called Canicula, that is, the Dog, of whom the canicular days have their name.  This cometh from the air at the rising of certain stars, and especially at the rising of Sirius, and not before the rising of Vergiliae (which are the seven stars called Pleiades) in the spring of the day. For then at the morning spring, the leaves of trees are found moist with a fat dew: insomuch that such as have been abroad under the firmament at that time, have their apparel anointed with liquor, and the hear of their head clammy. And whether this be the sweat of heaven, 
What is honey.  or as it were a certain spettyll of the stars, either the juice of the air purging itself, I would it were pure, liquid, & simple of his own nature, as it first falleth from above. 
How honey is corrupted.  But now descending so far, and infected, not only with such unclean vapours and exhalations, as it meeteth with by the way, but afterward also corrupted by the leaves of trees, herbs, and flowers of sundry tastes and qualities, and likewise aswell in stomachs of the bees (for they vomit it at their mouths) as also by long reserving the same in Hives, it nevertheless retaineth a great part of the heavenly nature etc. 
●ony of great quantity in North regions  Again in the xiiii. Chapter of the same book he writeth, that in certain regions toward the North, as in some places of Germany, honey is found in such quantity, that there have been seen honey combs of eight foot long, and black in the hollow part. By the which words of Pliny, and by the principles of natural philosophy, it doth appear that abundance of honey should chief be engendered in such regions, where the heat of summer is temperate and continual, as well by night as by day, as it is not in hot regions, where the nights be long and cold, 

Hot nights in cold regions.  
A similitude.   as is declared in the Decades. For like as such things as are fyned by continual heat, moving, and circulation, are hindered by refrigeration or cold (as appeareth in the art of stylling and hatching of eggs) even so by the action of temperate and continual heat, without interposition of contrary and mortifying quality, crude things are in short time made ripe, sour made sweet, thick made thin, heavy made light, gross made subtile, hard made soft, dead made living, and in fine, bodies made spirits, 
Natural heat doth subtile and digest all things.  as manifestly appeareth in the marvelous work of digestion of living beasts, whereby the finest part of their nourishment is turned into blood, and the finest of that blood converted into spirits, as the like is also seen in the nourishment of trees, plants, and herbs, & all other things that grow on the ground, all which are moved, digested, subtiliate, attenuate, riped, and made sweet by the action of this continual heat whereof I have spoken. To conclude therefore, if honey be either the sweat of the stars, or the juice of the air purging itself (as Pliny writeth) or otherwise engendered of subtile and fine vapours rising from the earth, 
gentle vapours digested by heat.  and concoct or digested in the air by the said continual and moderate heat, it may seem by good reason that the same should be engendered in summer season more abundantly in cold regions then in hot, for the causes aforesaid. 
Cold regions.  And that it may by authority and reason more manifestly appear, both that the heat of summer in cold regions is continual (as I have said) and also that the cold in winter is not there so intolerable to thinhabitants of those regions as other do think, I have thought good for the better declaration hereof, to add hereunto what I have gathered out of the book of Ziglerus, 
Ziglerus.  written of the north regions.   

Of the North regions, and of the moderate and continual heat in cold regions, aswell in the night as in the day in summer season: Also how those regions are habitable to thinhabitants of the same, contrary to the opinion of the old writers.  
OF this matter, Ziglerus in his book of the North regions in the description of Scondia, 
Ziglerus.  writeth as followeth.  
We will entreat of this matter, not as putting the same in question as did the old writers, nor geathering judgement deducted of reasons in way of argument, forasmuch as we are already more certain by history that these cold regions are inhabited. We will first therefore show by natural reason, and by consideration of the sphere, declare how by the help of man and art, cold regions are inhabited without damage or destruction of living beasts: And will first speak of the quality of summer, 
The quality of summer in cold regions.  declaring how it is there augmented. Yet intent I not to comprehend all that may be said in this matter, but only rehearse such reasons and similitudes as are most apparent and easy to be understood.  
In such regions therefore, as are extended from the burnt line or Equinoctial toward the North, 
The course of the Sun.  as much as the sun riseth higher over them, so much are they the more burnt with heat, as Africa, because it riseth highest over them, as they are nearest to the Equinoctial: & tarrying with them so much the shorter time, causeth shorter days, with longer & colder nights, to restore the damage of the day past, by reason of the moisture consumed by vapour. 
Vapours.  But in such regions over the which the sun riseth lower (as in Sarmatia) it remaineth there the longer in the day, 
Short and warm night's  and causeth so much the shorter and warmer nights, as retaining warm vapours of the day past, which vapours help the work of the day. I speak as I have found by experience, saith Vpsalie●sis: For I have felt the summer nights scarcely tolerable for heat in Gothlande, 
Gothlande.  whereas I felt them cold in Rome. This benefit of the increase of the day doth augment so much the more in cold regions, as they are nearer the poles: and ceaseth not until it come directly over the centre or point of the axes or axceltree of the world, where the sun being, at the highest in summer, is elevate about xxiiii degrees: 
One day of vi months.  In which regions, one continual day consisteth of vi months from the spring time, by the standing of the sun (called Solflitium) in the sign of Cancer, to Autumn. The Sun therefore, without any offence of the night, 
How the summer is increased in cold regions.  giveth his influence upon those lands with heat that never ceaseth during that time, which maketh to the great increase of summer, by reason of continuance. We have now therefore thought good to gather, by a certain conjecture, how greatly we think the summer to be increased hereby.  
We have before declared how high the sun is elevate over the regions that are under the poles at the stay of the sun: And so many parts is it elevate in Rome at the stay of the sun in winter (that is) at the shortest day in the year. But here, 
Rome.  in the mid winter, the sun at noontide is beneficial, and bringeth forth flowers, Roses, and Ie●●floures. I have gathered some in winter in the month of December, not procured at home by human art, but growing in open Gardens in manner in every bed under the bare heaven, brought forth only by the sun. But this benignity of the sun, 
Cold nights in hot regions.  continueth not past five hours in the natural day, forasmuch as the operation thereof is extinct by the coldness of the night following. But if this benefit might be received without hindrance of the night, as it is under the poles, and so continue many months in hot regions unto winter, it should surely bring forth many wonderful things, if moisture failed not. And by this condition thus propounded, 
The Roman winter.  we may well conceive that the Roman winter, although it be not hot, yet to be equal in heat to the full spring time in the same city, during the time of the said five hours. And thus by a similitude of the height of the sun under both places, and of the known quality of the Roman heaven, and by the access of the sun to such places where the longest day continueth certain months, we may gather that summer, in places under the pole, is like unto and equal with the full Roman spring.  
But the more difficult question, 
Our night of vi. months.  is of the time of the vi months in the which the Sun leaveth those regions, and goeth by the contrary or overthwart circle toward the south in winter. For they say that at that time, those regions are deformed with horrible darkness, 
Objections.  and nights not increased, which may be the cause that beasts can not seek their food: And that also the cold should then be intolerable. By which double evils all things constrained should die, so that no beast were able to abide the injuries of winter and famine ensuing thereof: but that all beasts should perish before the summer following, when they should bring forth their brood or succession: and that for these causes, the said cold clime should be perpetually desolate and unhabitable. To all which objections, we answer in this manner.  
As touching the nights not increased, I say, that it was not convenient to assume that for any reason. For not as the Sun falleth, 
The twylightes.  so suddenly cometh the dark night: but that the evening doth substitute and prolong the day long after, as also the day spring or dawning of the day, giveth a certain light before the rising of the Sun: After the which, the residue of the night that receiveth no light by the said evening and morning twilightes, is accomplished by the light of the Moon, 
The light of the Moon.  so that the nights are seldom unaugmented. Let this be an example proved by our temperate regions, whereby we may understand the condition of the night under the pole: Therefore even there also the twilightes help the night a long time, 
The night under the pole.  as we will more presently demonstrate. It is approved by the Astronomers, that the Sun descending from the highest half sphere by eightiene parallels of the under horizon, maketh an end of the twilight, so that at the length the dark night succeedeth: 
A demonstration.  And that the Sun approaching, and rising above the highest half sphere by as many parallels, doth dyminyshe the night and increase the twilight. Again, by the position or placing of the sphere under the pole, the same is the horizontal that is the Equinoctial. Those paralelles therefore that are parallels to the horizontal line, are also paralelles to the Equinoctial. So that the Sun descending there under the horizon, doth not bring dark nights to those regions, until it come to the parallels distant xviii parts from the Equinoctial.  
During the time of these said six months of darkness under the pole, the night is destitute of the benefit of the Sun and the said twylyghtes, only for the space of three months, in the which the Sun goeth and returneth by the portion of the overthwart circle. But yet neither this time of three months is without remedy from heaven. For the Moon with her full globe increased in light, hath access at that time, and illuminateth the months lacking light, every one by themselves, half the course of the month: 
The Moon.  by whose benefit it cometh to pass that the night, named as unaugmented, possesseth those regions no longer than one month and a half, neither that continually or all at one time: but this also divided into three sorts of shorter nights, of the which every one endureth for the space of two weeks, and are illuminate of the Moon accordingly. And this is the reason conceived of the power of the sphere, whereby we testify that the summers and nights under the pole are tolerable to living beasts. But we will now declare by other remedies of nature and art, that this cold so greatly feared, is more remiss and tolerable than our opinion: so that, 
Remedies of nature & art.  compared to the nature of such beasts as live there, it may be abidden. And there is no doubt but there are authors of more antiquity than that age in the which any thing was exactly known or discovered of the North regions. 
The old writers persuaded by conjecture.  The old writers therefore persuaded only by naked conjecture, did gather what they might determine of those places: Or rather, by the estimation of heaven, the which, because they felt it to be hardly tolerable to themselves, and less to men borne in the clime of Egypt and Grecia, took thereby an argument of the whole habitable earth. The history of Strabo is known, that a pot of brass, 
A brazen pot broken with frost.  which was broken in sunder with frozen water, was brought from Pontus, and showed in Delphis in token of a grievous winter. Here therefore, they that so greatly feared the winter (such as chanceth to the earth under the xlviii. paralele) and therefore consecrated that broken pot to the temple of Apollo: what could such men truly define upon regions so far without that parallel, whether they were inhabited or not? But such as followed these, being contented with thinventions of the old authors, and borne in manner under the same quality of heaven, persysted willingly in the same opinion, with more confidence than consideration of the things whereof we now entreat: so lightly was that opinion received as touching the unhabitable clime under the poles. But we with better confidence and faith (forasmuch as we are not instructed with conjectures) intent to stand against the sentence of the old authors, affirming the North regions within the cold clime to be inhabited with herrings, 
fishes of the North seas.  cods, haddocks, and brettes, tunnyes, and other great fishes, with thinfinite number whereof, tables are furnished through a great part of Europe: All which are taken in the North sea extended beyond our knowledge. This sea at certain times of the year, 
The North sea.  poureth forth his plentifulness, or rather driveth forth his increase to seek new mansions, and are here taken in their passage. Furthermore also, even the mouths of the river of Tiber received a fish as a new gest sent from the north sea: this swam twice through France, and twice through Spain, overpassed the Ligurion and Tuscan sea, to communicate herself to the city of Rome. The lakes also and rivers of those regions are replenished with fish: insomuch that no power of cold is able to extinguish th'increase of the year following, and the succession reparable so many hundred years. And I plainly think, that if it should of necessity follow, that one of these two elements, the earth and the water, should be destructive to living creatures, 
The quality of water.  the water should chiefly have wrought this effect. But this is found so tractable, that in the deep winter, both that increase is brought forth, and fishing is also exercised. The land is likewise inhabited with like plentifulness. But that we wander not to far, 
The land.  let the faith hereof rest in th'exposition following, wherein we intent to declare how by the power of nature and industry of man, this commodity may come to pass. 
The divine providence in moderating the elements.  Therefore as touching nature, we suppose that the divine providence hath made nothing uncommunicable, but to have given such order to all things, whereby every thing may be tolerable to the next. The extremities of the elements consent with their next. The air is gross about the earth and water: but thin and hot about the fire. By this providence of nature, the uttermost sea is very salt. 
The nature of the sea.  And salt (as witnesseth Pliny) yieldeth the fattnesse of Oil. But Oil, by a certain native heat, is of property agreeable to fire. The sea then, being all of such quality, 
Salt.  poureth forth itself far upon thextreme lands, whereby by reason of the saltness thereof, it moveth and stirreth up generative heat, 
Generatyve heat.  as by fatness it nourisheth the fecundity of things generate. It giveth this fruitfulness to the earth at certain floods, although the earth also itself have in his inner bowels the same lively and nourishing heat, whereby not only the Dens, Caves, and hollow places, but also springs of water are made warm: 
Outward cold is cause of inward heat.  & this so much the more, in how much the winter is more vehement. This thing doth more appear by this example, that the mountains of Norway and Swethlande are fruitful of metales, in the which, 
Metals.  silver and copper are concoct and molten into veins▪ which can scarcely by done in furnaces. By this reason also, the vapours and hot exhalations piercing the earth and the waters, 
Vapours and exhalations.  and through both those nature's breathing forth into the air, temperateth the quality of heaven, & maketh it tolerable to beasts, as witnesseth the huge bigness of the Whales in those seas, 
Whales.  with the strength of body, and long life of such beasts as live on the land: which thing could not be, 
Beasts.  except all things were there commodiously nourished by the benefit of the heaven and the air. For nothing that in the time of increase is hindered by any injury, or that is evil fed all the time it liveth, can prosper well. Neither are such things as live there, 
Hereby may be considered the cause of the death of our men that sail directly to Guinea.  offended with their natural winter, as though an Egyptian or Ethiopian were suddenly conveyed into those cold regions. For they were in long time, by little and little, brought first acquainted with the nature of that heaven, as may be proved both by the life of man, and by the history of holy scripture They that were led from Mesopatamia, and that famous Tower of Babylon towards the North parts of the world, in the first dispertion of nations, did not immediately pass to the extreme bounds, 
No passage from our extremity, to an other, but by a mean.  but planted their habitations first under a middle heaven, between both, as in Thracia, and Pontus, where their posterity was accustomed the better to sustain the rigour of Scythia and Tanais, as he that cometh from winter to summer, may the better after abide ice and snow, being first hardened thereto by the frosts of Autumn. In like manner mortal men, accustomed to bear the hardness of places next unto them, were thereby at the length more confirmed to sustain the extremities. And here also, if any sharpness remain that may seem intolerable, nature hath so provided for the same, with other remedies. For the land and sea, hath given unto beasts, deep and large Caves, 
Caves and Dens.  Dens, and other hollow places, and secret corners in mountains and rocks, both on the land and by sea banks, in the which are ever contained warm vapours, so much the more intent and vehement, in how much they are the more constrained by extreme cold. Nature hath also given valleys, diverted and defended from the North winds. 
Valleys.  She hath likewise covered beasts with hear, so much the thicker, in how much the vehemency of cold is greater: by reason whereof the best and richest furs are brought from those regions, as Sables, whose price is grown to great excess, 
The best furs. Sables.  next unto gold and precious stones, and are esteemed princely ornaments. The beasts that bear these furs, are hunted chiefly in winter (which thing is more strange) because their hear is then thicker and cleaveth faster to the skin. How grievous then shall we think the winter to be there, 
Beasts that lie hid in winter.  where this little beast liveth so well, and where the hunters may search the Dens and haunts of such beasts through the woods and snow? But such beasts, the condition of whose bodies is so tender that they are not able to abide th'injury of the cold, either lie hid in winter, or change their habitation, as do certain beasts also in our clime. Nature hath furthermore given remedy to man, both by art and industry to defend himself both abroad and at home. Abroad with a thick vesture, and the same well dowbeled. At home, with large fierce on Harthes', Chymneyes, and in stoves for the day, with close chambers, and Couches, soft and warm Beds for the night: by which remedies they mitigate the winters, which seem rigorous to strangers, 
All beasts have the nature of the place where they are engendered.  although they are to thinhabitants more tolerable than our opinion, as in deed by the first natural mixture or composition of their bodies, such things are agreeable to them, as seem very hard to other. The Lion in Africa and the bear in Sarmatia, are fierce, as in their present strength and vigor: but translated into a contrary heaven, are of less strength and courage. The foul called Ciconia (which some think to be the Stork) doth not tarry the winter: yet do the Cranes come at that tyme. The Scythian will accuse the Roman heaven as inducing fevers, whereas nevertheless there is none more wholesome. Such as have been tenderly brought up, if they come suddenly into the camp, can not away with hunger, watching, heat, passages through rivers, battles, 
What exercise may do.  sieges, and assaults: But the old soldier, exercised in the wars, useth these as meditations of the field, as hardened thereto by long experience. He that hath been accustomed to the shadow of the city, and will attempt the saying of the poet Virgil, Nudus ara, sero nudus, that is, naked and bare, without house and home, shall to his peril make an end of the verse, Habebis frigora febram (that is) he shall have the cold ague. Such things therefore as seem hard unto us, 
Use maketh masteries.  being accustomed by little and little, become more tolerable: Insomuch that this exercise of sufferance by such degrees, doth oftentimes grow to prodigious effects, far beyond our expectation. And thus we seem to have made sufficient demonstration, by heaven, nature, and art, whereby it may appear, that no part of the land or sea is denied to living creatures. The reader may also perceive how large matter of reasons and examples may be opened for the declaring of our opinion, wherein we rest. Let therefore th'authority of the ancient auctors give place, and the consent of the new writers agree to this history, not as now at the length comprehended (whereas before many hundred years Germany and Scondia had entercouse of merchandise not severed by the large gulf of Gothia) but as now by our commentaries brought to light: and having said thus much in manner of a preface, 
Scondia.  we will now proceed to write of the North regions.  

Schondia.  
SCondia, Schondania, or Schondenmarchia, is as much to say as fair Dania, or fair Denmark. Pliny in one place, nameth it Scandia, and in an other Scandinavia, 
Scone is fair in the dutch tongue.  if there be no fault in thexamples.  
It was named Schondia, by reason of the fairness and fruitfulness thereof. And this aswell for that in beneficial heaven, fertility of ground, 
The fertility of Schondia.  commodity of havens and mart towns, abundance of rivers and fish, plenty of beasts, great quantity of metal, as gold, silver, copper, and lead, diligent culturing the ground, with towns and cities well ●nhabited and governed by civil laws, it giveth place to none other fortunate region. This was in manner unknown to the old Greeks and Latins, as may appear by this argument, that with one consent they affirmed, that in these north regions the cold Zone or clime, was condemned to perpetual snow, intolerable to all living creatures. For few of them have made mention hereof as to be inhabited. Among whom Pliny, as one of the chief, saith in his fourth book, that Schondania is of unknown bigness: and only that portion thereof to be known, which is inhabited with the nation of the Hilleviones in fifty villages: Neither yet is Eningia less in opinion. Other more ancient than Pliny, 
He meaneth Diodorus Siculus  have placed most fortunate regions, with men of long life (which the Greeks call Macrobios) and of most innocent behaviour under the tract of those lands: and that there came from thence to Delphos, certain religious virgins, with vows and gifts consecrated to Apollo: And furthermore, that that nation observed this institution, until the said virgins were violated of them, of whom they were received as strangers. These are most clear testimonies of Antiquity, both of the greatness of Schondia, and the people that inhabit the same, although they were since unknown: 
Thinuasions of the Goths.  as likewise the Goths departing from these North lands, although they obtained Thempire of the regions about the marshes of Meotis, and the coasts of the sea Euxinus, with the realm of Denmark (whereof that is thought to be a portion which is now called Transiluania) and the banks of the river of Danubius, 
Transiluania.  and in fine, invaded the Roman Empire, yet were not the regions well known from whence they took their original. Therefore like as part of the old writers are unsufficient witnesses, to testify of our narrations as touching these lands unknown to them: Even so the other part which excluded the same as unhabitable, are to be convinced, least their authority, being admitted, should engender opinions not agreeable or convenient to the nature of places. Sigismundus Liberus, in his commentaries of moscovia, writeth thus. Scandia or Scondia, is no Island (as some have thought) but part of the continent or firm land of Suetia, which by a long tract reacheth to Cothland: and that now the king of Denmark possesseth a great part thereof. But whereas the writers of these things have made Scondia greater than Suetia, and that the Goths and Lombard's came from thence, 
The Goths & Lombard's.  they seem in my opinion to comprehend these three kingdoms as it were in one body, only under the name of Scondia, forasmuch as then, that part of land that lieth between the sea Baltheun: (which floweth by the coasts of Finlandia) and the frozen sea, was unknown: and that by reason of so many marishes, innumerable rivers, and intemperateness of heaven, it is yet rude, uncultured, and little known. Which thing hath been the cause that some judged all that was called by the name of Scondia, to be one great Island.   

Gronelande.  
GRonelande is interpreted green land, so called for the great increase and fruitfulness of pasture. By reason whereof, 
Fruitful pasture.  what great plenty of cat-tail there is, it may hereby appear, that at such time as ships may pass thither, they set forth great heaps of Cheese and Butter to be sold, whereby we conjecture that the land is not rough with barren mountains. It hath two Cathedral Churches under the Ordination of Nidrosia. To one of these, was of late years a Bishop appointed, only by the title of a Suffragan, in consideration that while the Metropolitan doth neglect the direction of religion for the distance of the place, and difficult navigation, 
Religion neglecte●.  the people is in manner fallen to gentility, being of themselves of movable wits, & given to magical arts. For it is said that they (as also the people of Laponia) do raise tempests on the sea with magical enchantments, 
Enchanters.  and bring such ships into danger as they intend to spoil. They use little ships made of Leather, and safe against the bruising of the sea and rocks, and with them assail other ships. Peter Martyr of Angleria, writeth in his Decades of the spanish navigations that Sebastian Cabot, sailing from England continually toward the North, 
The voyage of Sebastian Cabot to the frozen sea.  followed that course so far, that he chanced upon great flakes of ice in the month of july: and that diverting from thence, he followed the coast by the shore bending toward the South, until he came to the clime of the Island of Hispaniola, above Cuba, an Island of the Canibales. Which narration hath given me occasion to extend Groneland beyond the promontory or cape of Huitsarch, 
Gronelande.  to the continent or firm land of Lapponia, above the castle of Wardhus: 
Wardhus.  which thing I did the rather, for that the reverend archbishop of Nidrosia, constantly affirmed that the sea bendeth there into the form of a crooked Elbow. It agreeth herewith also, that the Lapones consent with them in the like Magical practices, 
Lapponia and Gronelande.  and do neither embrace the Christian religion, nor refuse it: whereby I have thought this likeness of customs to be between them, because they join together in one continent. The distance likewise, seemeth not to disagree. For between both these people, the distance is not full two hundred Schoeni, every one being a space of ground containing threescore furlongs, 
Schoeni.  which make seven miles, & a half. It furthermore agreeth with this conjecture that Cabot chanced into such ice. And albeit, as touching the month of july, I will contend it is not well rehearsed, 
Cabot told me that this ise is of fresh water & not of the sea.  no although he had sailed under the pool, for such reasons as we have declared before to the contrary: nevertheless, that at some time he sailed by ice, this testifieth in that he sailed not by the main sea, but in places near unto the land, comprehending & embracing the sea in form of a gulf, whereas for the same cause the gulf of Gothland is frozen, because it is straight and narrow▪ 
A commixtion of salt water & fresh.  in the which also the little quantity of salt water is overcome by the abundance of fresh water of many and great rivers that fall into the gulf. But between Norway and Island, 
The sea between Norway and Island.  the sea is not frozen, for the contrary cause, forasmuch as the power of fresh water is there overcome of the abundance of the salt water. There is a fame (but of uncertain authority) that the Spaniards sail at this present to Gronelande, and to an other land, which they call Terra Viridis, that is, the green land, 
Terra Viridis.  bringing from thence such wares as are found in Gronelande. Towards the North▪ it reacheth to the unknown land under the pole, from whence also the thieves and robbers of the Pigmei come into this land. 
Pigmei.  Which is an argument that the regions under the pole are inhabited, & almost environed with the sea, as are they which the Cosmographers call Chersonnesi, or Peninsulae (that is) almost Islands.  

The description of Gronlande. The description of the East side, which lieth toward Norway.  Wardhus Castle. 54.  70. 30. Toward the North. 53. 30. 71. 30. The first extension. 40.  71. 40. The second extension. 28.  72.  Huitsarch promont. 22.  67.  The extension. 5.  61. 45. It is continued from thence by the coasts of the land of Baccalaos. 
Baccalaos.  356. 60.   Toward the West and North, it is termined with an unknown end of lands and seas.       

Island.  
Island is interpreted the land of Ice, 
Island called Thyle.  and is called of the old writers Thyle. It is extended between the South and the North, almost two hundred schoenes in longitude. 
Schoene is lx. furlongs.  It is for the most part full of mountains, and uncultured. But in the plains it hath such fruitful pastures, that they are fain sometimes to drive the beasts from their feeding, lest they should be suffocate with to much fatness. This Island is famous by the strange miracles of nature, 
Miracles of nature in Island.  of the which Saxo Grammaticus in his history of Denmark, and Olanus Gothus, in his description of the North lands, do make mention. There are in it three mountains of marvelous height, 
Three marvelous mountains.  the tops whereof are covered with perpetual snow: but the nether parts of them, are of like nature to the mountain Aetna, in the Island of Sicily, boiling with continual flames of fire, and casting forth brimstone. One of these is named Helga, 
Helga.  and the other Mons Crucis (that is) the mount of the cross. The third is named Hecla, whose flames neither consume flax or tow, matters most apt to take fire, nor yet are quenched with water. 
Hecla.  And with like force as the shot of great artillery is driven forth by violence of fire, even so by the commixtion and repugnance of fire, cold, and brimstone, great stones are here thrown into the air. Near unto these mountains are three chynkes or open places in the earth, of huge bigness, and such depth (especially at the mount Hecla) that no sight can attain thereto. But to such as look into them, 
Strange visions.  there first appear men as though they were drowned, and yet breathing forth their souls: who being exhorted by their friends to resort to their own, they answer with mourning voice and grievous sighs, that they must depart from thence to the mount Hecla, and therewith suddenly vanish out of sight. 
Ise.  He floweth about the Island for the space of seven or eight months, making by running together a certain miserable wailing and groaning noise, not unlike the voice of man. the inhabitauntes think, that in this Ice and the mount Hecla, are the places where the evil souls of their people are tormented. If any man take a great portion of this Ice, and keep it as diligently as may be in a close vessel or coffer, 
A strange thing.  the same doth so vanish at the time when the other Ice about the Island dissolveth, that not so much as one drop of water or Ice can thereof be found.  
Not far from these mountains reaching toward the sea coasts, 
Four springs o● contrary nature.  are four springs of water, of most divers and contrary nature. The first, by reason of his perpetual and fervent heat, suddenly turneth all bodies, that are cast therein, into stones, reserving nevertheless their first form and shape. The second, is of intolerable coldness. The third, is sweeter than honey, and most pleasant to quench thirst. The fourth, is plain poison, pestilent, and deadly. There is furthermore in these springs such abundance of brimstone, 
Abundance of brimstone.  that a thousand pound weight thereof is bought for little, as for the tenth part of a ducat. 
Dried fish.  Their chief wares, are dried fish, as Soles, Maidens, Playces, Salpas, Stockefyshes, and such other, which they exchange for wheat, and such other things as are brought thither from Lubeck, Hamborowe, and Amsterdam. For they have oftentimes such scarceness of corn, 
scarceness of corn.  that they use dried fish in the stead of bread, although in summer the Island so flourisheth with green and fruitful meadows, that they are fain sometimes to drive their beasts from pasture, lest they should suffocate for to much fatness, as I have said before. They make very good butter, and apt to be used in matters of physic. There are found divers kinds of good Hawks, as Falcons, Gerfaulcons, 
Hawks.  Lanners, and Sperhaukes: Also Ravens, Crows, Bears, Hares, and Foxes, both white and black. They have most swift horses, 
White Ravens.  and such as run xxx miles continually without rest or bait. They have many churches: 
Houses of Whales bones  & houses builded of the bones of Whales and other great fishes. 
The navigation to Island.  The navigation is not open to this Island but in summer season: and that only for the space of four months, by reason of the cold and Ice whereby the passage is stopped. If any strife or debate arise on the sea among the mariners for the commodity of the haven, the governor of the place, although he have knowledge thereof, yet doth he not punish them, forasmuch as it appertaineth not to his office to decern such things as are done on the sea, but only on the land. Ships are there oftentimes in great peril, by reason of Whales, 
Whales.  & such other monsters of the sea, except the Mariners take good heed, and keep them far from the ships with the noise of Drums, and empty barrels cast into the sea. There are many Mynstrels and other that play on instruments, 
One thing serving for contrary uses.  with the sweet noise whereof, they use to allure fowls and fishes to their nets and snares. Many also, lie lurking in caves and dens, to avoid the sharpness of cold, as the africans do the like to defend themselves from the heat. On the top of a certain mountain called Weyszarch, (lying between Island and Greenland, or Greonland) is erected a shipman's quadrant of marvelous bigness, 
A shipman's quadrant.  made by two Pirates, named Pinnigt and Pothorst, in favour of such as sail by those coasts, that they may thereby avoid the dangerous places lying toward Greonland.  
The midst of the Island. 7 0 65 30. The city Harsol. etc. 7 40 60 42.   

Laponia.  
THe region of Laponia, was so named of the people that inhabit it. For the Germans call all such Lapones, as are simple or unapt to things. This people is of small stature, and of such agility of body, that having their quivers of arrows gerte to them, 
People of great agility.  and their bows in their hands, they can with a leap cast themselves through a circle or hope of the diameter of a cubit. They fight on foot, armed with bows and arrows after the manner of the Tartars. They are exercised in hurling the dart, and shooting, from their youth: insomuch that they give their children no meat until they it the mark they shoot at, as did in old time thinhabitants of the Islands called Baleares. They use to make their apparel straight and close to their bodies, 
A strange apparel.  that it hinder not their work. Their winter vestures are made of the whole skins of Seals or Bears, artificially wrought, and made supple. These they tie with a knot above their heads, leaving only two holes open to look through, and have all the residue of their bodies covered, as though they were sowed in sacks, but that this being adopted to all parts of their bodies, is so made for commodity, and not for a punishment, as the Romans were accustomed to sow parricides in sacks of leather with a Cock, 
The cause of an old error.  an Ape, and a Serpent, and so to hurl them alive altogether into the river of Tiber. And hereby I think it came to pass, that in old time it was rashly believed, that in these regions there were men with rough & hairy bodies like wild beasts, as part made relation through ignorance, part also taking pleasure in rehearsal of such things as are strange to the hearers. The Lapones defended by this art and industry, go abroad and withstand the sharpness of winter and the North winds, with all the injuries of heaven. They have no houses, but certain Tabernacles like tents or hales, wherewith they pass from place to place, 
So do the Tartars.  and change their mansions. Some of them live after the manner of the people of Sarmatia, called in old time Amaxobii, which used veins in the stead of houses. They are much given to hunting, 
Plenty of wild beasts.  and have such plenty of wild beasts, that they kill them in manner in every place. It is not lawful for a woman to go forth of the tent, at that door by the which her husband went out on hunting the same day, nor yet to touch with her hand any part of the beast that is taken, until her husband reach her on the spit such a portion of flesh as he thinketh good. They till not the ground. The region nourisheth no kind of Serpents: 
No Serpents.  yet are there great and noisome gnats. They take fish in great plenty: 
Great Gnats.  by the commodity whereof, they live after the manner of the Ethiopians, called Ichthiophagi. For as these dry their fish with fervent heat, so do they dry them with cold, and grind or stamp them to powder as small as meal or flower. They have such abundance of these fishes, 
Abundance of fish.  that they hoard great plenty thereof in certain store houses, to carry them unto other lands near about them, as Northbothnia, and white Russia. Their ships are not made with nails, 
Ships without nails.  but are tied together and made fast with cords and wythes. With these they sail by the swift rivers between the mountains of Laponia, being naked in summer that they may the better swim in the time of peril, and gather together such wares as are in danger to be lost by shipwreck. part of them exercise handy crafts, as imbrodering and weaving of cloth, interlaced with gold and silver. Such as have devised any necessary Art, 
Science honoured.  or do increase and amend the inventions of other, are openly honoured, and rewarded with a vesture, in the which is embroidered an argument or token of the thing they devised. And this remaineth to the posterity of their family, in token of their deserts. They frame ships, build houses, and make divers sorts of household stuff artificially, and transport them to other places near about. They buy and sell both for exchange of wares, and for money. And this only by consent of both parties, without communication: 
Bargain without words.  yet not for lack of wit, or for rudeness of manners, but because they have a peculiar language unknown to their borderers. It is a valiant nation, and lived long free, and sustained the wars of Norway and Suetia, until at the length they submitted themselves, and paid rich furs for their tribute. They chose themselves a governor, whom they call a king: But the king of Suetia, giveth him authority and administration. Nevertheless, the people in their suits and doubtful causes, resort to Suetia to have their matters decised.  
In their journeys, they go not to any Inn, nor yet enter into any house, but lie all night under the firmament. They have no horses, 
No horses. A beast of marvelous strength and swiftness.  but in the stead of them, they tame certain wild beasts which they call Reen, being of the just bigness of a M●le, with rough hear like an Ass, cloven feet, and branched horns like a Heart, but lower and with fewer antlettes. They will not abide to be ridden. But when their peytrels or drawing collars are put on them, and they so joined to the chariot or stead, they run in the space of xxiiii hours, a hundred and fifty miles, or xxx Schoenos, the which space they affirm to change the horizon thrice, 
What Schoenus is, look in Gronlande.  that is, thrice to come to the furthest sign or mark that they see a far of. Which doubtless is a token both of the marvelous swiftness & great strength of these beasts, 
The change of the horizon.  being able to continue running for so great a space, in the mean while also spending some time in feeding. I suppose that this thing was somewhat known to the old writers, although received in manner by an obscure and doubtful fame: 
The old authors called all the North people Scythyans.  For they also write that certain Scythians do ride on Hearts.  
They neither follow the Christian religion, nor yet refuse it, or are offended therewith as are the jews: but do sometimes receive it favourably, to gratify the princes to whom they obey. And that no more of them embrace the Christian faith, the fault is somewhat to be imputed to the bishops and Prelates that have either rejected this cure & charge of instructing the nation, 
●●●smus la●●●teth this 〈◊〉 first 〈◊〉 de ratine contionan di▪ where he speaketh of the people, called Pilapii.  or suffered the faith of Christ to be suffocate, even in the first spring. For under the pretence of religion, they would have advanced their own revenues, and overburdened the people by an intolerable example, none otherwise here then in all Christendom, which thing is doubtless the cause of most grievous defections. I heard john, a bishop of Gothlande, say thus: We that govern the church of Vpsalia, and have under our diocese a great part of that nation, like as it is not convenient to declare many things of our vigilance and attendance over the flock committed to our charge, even so abstaining from myscheevous covetousness, whereby religion is abused for lucre, we do in all places our diligent endeavour, that we minister none occasion, whereby this nation, as offended by our sins, may be the less willing to embrace the Christian faith. This is the state of the religion among the Lapones: although of their own institution and custom received of their predecessors, they are idolaters, 
Idolatry.  honouring that living thing that they meet first in the morning, for the God of that day, and divining thereby their good luck or evil. They also erect Images of stone upon the mountains, which they esteem as Gods, attributing to them divine honour. They solemn marriages, and begin the same with fire and flint, 
A mystery of marriage in fire and flint.  as with a mystery so aptly applied to the Image of stone, as if it had been received from the midst of Grecia. For in that they adhibite a mystery to fire, as they do not this alone (forasmuch as the Romans observed the same custom) even so are they herein partly to be commended, in that they use the ceremonies of so noble a people. The mystery of the flint is no less to be praised, both forasmuch as this is domestical philosophy, and hath also a near affinity and signification to these solemnities. For as the flint hath in it fire lying hid, which appeareth not but by moving & force: so is there a secret life in both kinds of man and woman, which by mutual conjunction cometh forth to a living birth. 
expert enchanters.  They are furthermore expert enchanters. They tie three knots on a string hanging at a whip. When they lose one of these, they raise tolerable wynds: When they lose an other, the wind is more vehement: but by losing the third, they raise plain tempests, as in old time they were accustomed to raise thunder and lightning. This art do they use against such as sail by their coasts, and stay or move the rivers and seas more or less, as they list to show favour or displeasure. They make also of lead certain short magical darts of the quantity and length of a finger. 
Magical darts.  These they throw against such, of whom they desire to be revenged, to places never so far distant. They are sometimes so vexed with the canker on their arms or legs, 
The canker.  that in the space of three days they die through the vehemency of the pain. The Sun falleth very low in these regions: 
One night of three months.  and prolongeth one continual night for the space of three months in winter, during which time they have none other light but like unto the twilight of evenings & mornings. This is very clear, but continueth but few hours, and is like the bright shining of the Moon. Therefore that day that the Sun returneth to the hemisphery, they keep holy day, and make great mirth with solemn festivity. And these are the manners of this nation, not so brutish or salvage, as worthy therefore to be called Lapones for their unaptenesse or simplicity, as when they lived under their own Empire, and used no familiarity or intercourse with other nations, & knew not the commodity of their own things, neither the price and estimation of their furs in our regions, 
rich furs.  by reason whereof, they sold great plenty of them for some of our wares of small value.  
The bounds or limits of Laponia (being the extreme land of Scondia known toward the North pole) are extended toward this part of the North, to the world yet unknown to us: And furthermore toward the same part of the uttermost sea, according to this description.  
The first coast. 70 72. The coast following. 80 7. That that yet followeth. 90 70.  

Plenty of sea fish.  From the fishing places and store houses of this sea, they carry forth to Nordbothnia, and white Russia, lands confining to them, great plenty of fish. Whereby we may conjecture that this sea is extended on every side toward the North. Toward the West, it is limited with the most inward gulf at the Castle of Wardhus, 
Wardhus.  at the degree .54 70 30.  
Toward the South, it is limited by a line drawn from thence unto the degree .90 69.   

Norwegia, or Norway.  
NOrdway, is as much to say, as the Northway. This was sometime a flourishing kingdom, whose dominion comprehended Denmark, Friselande, and the Islands far about, until the domestical Empire was governed by the succession of inheritance. In the mean time while this governance ceased for lack of due issue, it was instituted by consent of the nobility, that the kings should be admitted by election: supposing that they would with more equity execute that office, forasmuch as they were placed in the same by such authority, and not by obtaining the kingdom by fortune and new advancement. But it came so to pass, that as every of them excelleth in richesse, ambition, and favour by consangivitie, so were they in greater hope to obtain the kingdom: and were by this means divided into factions, 
Kingdoms destroyed by factions.  attempting also occasions to invade foreign realms, whereby they might strengthen their parties. It is therefore at this present under the dominion of the Danes, 
The Danes.  who do not only exact intolerable tributes, but also bring all their riches and commodities into Denmark, constituting the continuance of their governance in th'infirmity and poverty of the subjects: which exemple, 
The defant of princes.  some other princes do follow at this day in the Christian Empire. For after that the princes had forsaken such virtues as should have shined in them, as to be Patres patriae (that is) the fathers of their countries, and that in the place hereof, only the proud countenance of dominion remained, which opened licentiousness to th'injury of the subjects: this followed thereof, that whereas the Danes by this occasion had no further trust or aid in the love of the people, they provided, 
An exemple of tyranny.  for th'indemnity of their own estate, by forcible extenuating the goods and power of them whom they desired to keep in subjection. This is the fortune of Norway, whose edefices, towns, and cities can not defend their ancient amplitude and dignity: neither is there any hope of repairing their state. For there are no consultations admitted for the redress of the common wealth: No man dare show his advice, or attempt any thing, uncertain of the minds and consent of other. To this difficulty is added the quality of the place: For the Danes have in their power all the navigations of Norway, whereby it may exercise no trade by sea, neither carry forth wares to other places: 
The miserable state of Norway.  So that in fine it may seem most unfortunate, as lacking the favour of heaven, the sea, and the land. From hence is brought into all Europe a fish of the kinds of them which we call haddocks or hakes, 
Stockfyshe.  indurate and dried with cold, and beaten with clubs or stocks, by reason whereof the Germans call them stockefyshe. The taking of these, is most commended in januarie, that they may be sufficiently dried and hardened with cold: For such as are taken in the more temperate months, do corrupt and putrefy, and are not meet to be carried forth.  
The description of the west coast, with the part thereof lying most toward the north.  
Wardhus (that is) the watch house, or watch tower 54.70.30. It is a strong Castle or fortress appointed to the Lapones. The coast following, .48.50.70 Matthkur. etc.  
All the coast from hence, and the places near about unto the degree .45.69. being sometime left desolate by the sedition and destruction of Norway, the Lapones chose for their habitations, as coming to amore beneficial heaven. 
The Lapones.  From the castle of Wardhus, unto the degree .40.30.64.10. all the coast in the spring time is dangerous to pass, 
ships in danger by reason of whales.  by reason of whales, of such huge bigness, that some of them grow to an hundred cubits: for these fishes at that time of the year resort together for generation. Such ships as chance to fall either upon their bodies, or into such whyrlepooles as they make by their vehement motions, are in great peril. The remedy to avoid this danger, 
Castoreum.  is to power into the sea Castoreum (that is) oil made of the stones of the beast called the Bevor, mingled with water: For with this, the whole heard of whales vanisheth suddenly to the bottom of the sea: They make a terrible roaring, and have two breathing places in the highest part of their foreheads, 
The roaring of whales.  standing forth right a cubit in length, and are broad at the ends, being covered with a skin, through the which they blow waters like showers or storms of rain. The pricks of their backs, are found containing three else in circuit, and every knot between them of one ell. They are at the least of lx cubits in length, and are salted and kept in store houses. 
whales salted and reserved.  The greatest are unprofitable to be eaten, by reason of their rank and unsavoury taste, which can not be qualified.  
Nidrosia standing upon the south side of the sea bank, was the chief city and Metropolitan church throughout all Norway, 
The city of Nidrosia.  Iselande, Gronlande, and the Islands there about. This city was noble at the first under the flourishing Empire of Norway, containing in circuit xxiiii parishes, but it is now brought in manner to a village, and is called in the german tongue Truthaim, as the house of the Dryides. There remaineth at this day a Cathedral church in token of the ancient felicity, 
A magnificiall church  being such that in bigness and workmanship of wrought stone, the like is not in all Christendom. The greases or compass about the Altar, was destroyed by fire, and repaired at the same time that we wrote this history. The charge of the reparation, was esteemed to be seven thousand crowns: by which small portion, an estimate may be made of the excellency of the whole Church.  
The tract of all the sea coasts of Norway is very quiet and meek, the sea is not frozen, the snows endure not long. This land hath also a peculiar pestilence, which they call Leem or Lemmer. This is a little four footed beast, 
Noisome beasts of unknown generation.  about the bigness of a Rat, with a spotted skin: these fall upon the ground at certain tempests and soddeyne showers, not yet known from whence they come, as whether they are brought by the winds from remote Islands, or otherwise engendered of thick and feculent clouds. But this is well known, that as soon as they fall down, green grass and herbs are found in their bowels not yet digested. They consume all green things, as do Locusts: and such as they only bite, wither and die. This pestilence liveth as long as it doth not taste of the grass newly sprung. They come together by flocks, as do Swalows: and at an ordinary time, either die by heaps, with great infection of the land (as by whose corruption the air is made pestiferous, and molesteth the Norwegians with swimming in the head and the jaundice) or are consumed of other beasts named Lefrat. Towards the East, it is included within the line that is drawn by the mountains, whose ends or uttermost bounds, they are, that lie toward the South, above the mouths of the river Trolhetta: but that part that lieth toward the North, passeth by the castle of Wardhus, 
Wardhus. The unknown land of the Lapons.  and is extended to the unknown land of the Lapones.  
The Lake called Mos, and the Island of Hosfuen in the midst thereof, is in the degree .45 30 61.  
In this Lake appeareth a strange monster: which is, a serpent of huge bigness. 
A serpent of huge bigness.  And as to all other places of the world, blazing stars do portend th'alteration and change of things: so doth this to Norway. It was seen of late (in the year of Christ .1522. appearing far above the water, rolling like a great pillar, and was, by conjecture far of, esteemed to be of fifty cubits in length. Shortly after followed the rejecting of Christiernus king of Denmark. Such other monstrous things are said to be seen in divers places of the world. 
God warneth us by signs of things to come.  And doubtless except we should think that the divine providence, having mercy upon mortal men, and hereby warning them of their offences, doth send such strange things (as also blazing stars, and armies fighting in the air, with such other portentous monsters, whereof no causes can be found by natural things) we might else suspect that such sights were but imaginations of the sense of man deceived.  
On the East side, are exceeding rough mountains, which admit no passage to Suetia. The sea between Norway and the Islands, is called Tialleslund, Euripus, or the straights. The Island of Lofoth, whose midst .42 67 10. Langanas', whose midst .41 67 Vastrall, whose midst .41 30 67 30.  
The sea between these three islands, is called Muscostrom (that is) boiling. At the flowing of the sea, it is swallowed into the Caves, 
The straits or boiling sea.  and is blown out again at the reflowing, with no less violence than the streams of rivers fall from mountains. This sea is navigable, until it be lower than the mouths of the rocks. Such as chance into it out of due time, are carried headlong into Whyrpooles. The fragments of the lost ships, are seldom cast up again. But when they are cast up, they are so bruised and fretted against the rocks, 
Dangerous places in the sea.  that they seem to be overgrown with hoar. This is the power of nature, passing the fabilous Simpleiades & the fearful Malea, with the dangerous places of Silla and Charybdis, and all other miracles that nature hath wrought in any other sea hitherto known to man.  
The islands about Norway, are of such fruitful pasture, that they bring not their beasts into the stables before the month of November, 
Fruitful islands about Norway.  and do in many places winter them abroad.   

Suecia, or Suethlande.  
SVecia, is a kingdom rich in Gold, Silver, Copper, Lead, Iron, fruit, cattle, 
Gold and silver.  and exceeding increase of fish, of the rivers, lakes, and the sea, and hath no less plenty of such wild beasts as are taken with hunting. Toward the West, it is ended with the mountains of Norway from the castle of Wardhus unto th'end .51.63.40 Toward the South, 
Wardhus castle.  with the line from this end unto the degrees 53.30.61. And from thence unto the degrees. 61.60.30. Above the gulf of Suecia, toward the north, 
The gulf of Suecia.  with the south end of Lapponia from the castle of Wardhus unto the end .62.70.  
Toward the East, it is ended with the line from this end unto the degree .63.69. etc. Stokholme the chief city .64.61. 
The city of Stokholme.  This is the chief mart town of Suecia, and is strongly defended by art and nature. It is situate in marshes, after the manner of Venice: and was therefore called Stokholme, forasmuch as being placed in the water, the foundation is fortified with stocks or piles. The sea entereth in●o it with two arms or branches, of such largeness and depth, that ships of great burden and with main sails may enter by the same with their full freight. This suffered of late years grievous spoil and destruction, to the singular exemple of cruel hostility: and such, as the like hath not been lightly showed to any other city, received by league and composion. In all the tract from Stokholme to the lake above the river of Dalekarle, 
Gold in cold regions. Fish.  which is in the degree .56 30 63 50. are mountains fruitful of good silver, copper, and lead. They get great riches by the salmons and plenty of other fishes which they take in certain great lakes.  
The dukedom of Agermannia occupieth the north side to the confines of Laponia. This tract is full of woods, 
The beast called Vros or Elg.  in the which they hunt the beasts called Vros or Bisontes, which in their tongue they call Elg, (that is) wild Asses. These are of such height, that the highest part of their backs are equal with the measure of a man, holding up his arms as high as he may reach etc. Vpsalia the chief city .62.62.30. here is buried the body of saint Henricus king and martyr. 
Vpsalia.   
Copperdalia (that is) the copper valley, 
Copperdalia.  is a Dukedom southward from the Dukedom of jemptia. Under this, is the valiant nation of the people called Dalekarly.  
Oplandia, 
Oplandia.  is a Dukedom and the navel or midst of Scondia.  
The city of Pircho, on the North side of the lake of Meler▪ was once a great city, and able to arm xiiii thousand men to the wars: but is now brought to a village.  
All the tract of Oplandia, hath mines of Silver, Copper, and Steel.  
Of the Islands and rocks that lie about Suecia, the midst is .67.30.61.30. These were called of the old writers Done, the reason of which name remaineth unto this day: 
Birds.  For there are in these innumerable multitudes of birds, insomuch that thinhabitants of the next coast, sail thither in the month of May, while the birds sit on their eggs: 
Eggs reserved in salt.  which they steal, and reserve them in salt for a long tyme.   

Bothnia.  
BOthnia is so named of the precious furs of all sorts that are carried from thence into foreign regions: For by these and their fishing, 
Precious furs.  they have great commodity. Salmons of the best sort are taken in these seas, & are great riches among these nations. 
Fish.  Bothnia is divided into two parts, as Northbothnia, & South Bothnia, called Ostrobothhia. Northbothnia, is termined with the South end of the Lapones, unto the end .78.30.69  
Toward the East, it is termined with this end, and unto the degree .78.30.68.20.  
Toward the West, with the line termining the East side of Suecia. And toward the South, with the residue of the gulf of Suecia, from th'end that hath degrees .63.69.  
Ostrobothnia, toward the East is termined from the said end of the most East coast. And toward the South, with a line extended by the mountains from this end unto the degree .71 66  
Toward the North and West, with part of the gulf of Suecia, etc.   

Gothia or Gothlande.  
GOthia, is by interpretation good. For the holy name of God, is in the german tongue Goth (that is) Good. At what time the Goths upon a general consent sent forth their offspring or succession to seek new seats or countries to inhabit, 
Thinuasions of the Goths.  and when they possessed the coasts of Meotis and Asia, none of the old writers have made mention as far as I know. But they have been known since the time that the Romans dilated their Empire by Illyria (now called Slavonie) unto the river of Danubius, and were also famous from the time of Cesar Dictator, and Octavianus Augustus, 
The war of the goths against the Romans.  by reason of their great wars at Danubius, being the uttermost bound of Thempire. Nevertheless, in that renown what Gothia was, under what part of heaven it was situate, or of whom the Goths took their original, it hath been unknown almost to this age. This is termined toward the North, with the South end of Suetia, and toward the West, 
The bounds of gothland.  with the other mountains of Norway, which continue from the bounds of Suetia, to the mouths of the rivers of Trolheta. etc.  
It hath many goodly Towns, Cities, Castles, Mines. 
The city of Visba.  etc. The city of Visba, being in the degree .61.30.54.15. was an ancient and famous mart Town, as is Genua in Italy at this day: but afterward being afflicted by the incursions of the Pirates of the Danes and Moscovites, it was left desolate. 
Danes and Moscovites.  There remain to this day certain ruins, which testify the ancient nobility. In this place were the first stations of the Goths that possessed Meotis. It is at this day of fruitful soil, and famous by many goodly and strong Castles & Monasteries. There is (among other) a Monastery of the order of Saint Benedict, in the which is a library of about two thousand books of old authors. 
A library of two thousand books.   
About the year of Christ fourscore and eight, the Goths, unto whom resorted a great multitude of other people of these North parts of the world, as from Li●onia, Prusia, Russia, and Tartary, with divers other countries, 
The goths invaded Europe, and destroyed Rome.  making them divers Kings and Captains, did depopulate and bring in subjection the more part of Europe, invaded Italy, destroyed Rome, inhabited that part of Italy now called Lombardy, and likewise subdued the Realms of Castille and Aragonie. Their wars continued above three hundred years.   

Finland, and Eningia.  
FInlandia, is as much to say as a fair land, or fine land, so named for the fertility of the ground. Pliny seemeth to call it Finnonia: for he saith, that about the coasts of Finland▪ are many islands without names, of the which there lieth one before Scythia called Pannonia. The gulf called Sinus Finnonicus▪ is so named at this day of the land of Finnonia. 
Pannonia falsely taken for Finnonia.  Finnonia confineth with Scythia, and runneth without all Tanais, (that is to say) without the limits of Europe to the confines of Asia. But that the name of Einlande seemeth not to agree hereunto, the cause is, that this place of Pliny is corrupted, as are many other in this author. So that from the name of Finnonia, or Phinnonia, it was a likely error to call it Pannonia, forasmuch as these words do not greatly differ in writing and sound: so that the counterfeit name was soon put in the place of the true name, by him that knew Pannonia and read that name before, being also ignorant of Phinnonia.  

Eningia.  Eningia had in old time the title of a kingdom, it is of such largeness, but hath now only the title of an inferior governor, being under the dominion of the slavons▪ and using the same tongue. In religion, it observed the rites of the Greeks of late years, when it was under the governance of the Moscovites: But it is at this present under the king of Suecia, & observeth thinstitutions of the Occidental church. Spanish wines are brought thither in great plenty, 
Spanish wines.  which the people use merrily and cheerfully. It is termined on the North side by the South line of Ostrobothnia, and is extended by the mountains. Toward the West, it is termined with the sea of Finnonia, according to this description, and hath degrees .71 66. etc.    

Of the difference of regions, and causes of great cities, after the description of Hieronimus Cardanus. Liber xi De Subtilitate.  
THere is an other difference of regions caused of cold and heat. For such as are near unto the poles, are vexed with to much cold: and such as are under the line where the Sun is of greatest force, are oppressed with heat. Such as are in the midst between both, are nearest unto temperateness. Under the pole, it is impossible that there should be populous cities, because the land is barren, and the carriage or conveyance of fruits, victuals, and other necessaries, is incommodious. By reason whereof, it is necessary that the inhabitants of such regions live ever in continual wandering from place to place, or else in small villages. Such as inhabit temperate regions, have mean cities, aswell for that they have more commodious conveyance for necessaries, as also that they may dwell better and more safely together then in villages, by reason of fortifying their towns with walls, and exercising of arts and occupations, whereby the one may the better help the other. Yet that old Rome (being in a temperate region) was of such incredible bigness, the cause was, that it obtained the Empire of the world, by reason whereof, all nations had confluence thither, and not the greatness of the walls. But it is necessary that the greatest cities be in hot regions: first, for that in such regions, part of the soil is either barren if it lack water, or else most fruitful if it abound with water. And for this inequality, when they find any place meet to sustain a multitude, it followeth of necessity that great cities be builded in such places, by reason of great concourse of people resorting to the same. another great cause is, that whereas in such regions, merchants come very far to such commodious places, they pass through many desert and perilous regions: So that it shallbe necessary for their better security, to come in great companies, as it were great armies. And therefore whereas such a society is once knit together in a commodious place, it should be great hindrance aswell to the inhabitants as to merchants, if they should wander in incommodious places. And by this confluence, both of such as dwell near to such places, and also of strangers and such as dwell far of, it is necessary that in continuance of time, small towns become great cities, as are these: Quinsai, Singui, Cambalu, Memphis, Cairus, or Alcair, otherwise called Babylon in Egypt. But if here any will object Constantinople (in old time called Byzantium) being in a temperate region, although it be not to be compared to such cities as are more than lx. miles in circuit, yet do we answer hereunto, that the Turks Empire is the cause of the greatness hereof, as we said before of Rome.    

The history written in the latin tongue by Paulus jonius, bishop of Nuceria in Italy, of the legation or ambassade of great Basilius' Prince of Moscovia, to Pope Clement the vij of that name: In which is contained the description of moscovia, with the regions confining about the same, even unto the great and rich Empire of Cathay.  
I Intent first briefly to describe the situation of the region which we plainly see to have been little known to Strabo & Ptoleme, & then to proceed in rehearsing the manners, customs, & religion of the people: and this in manner in the like simple stile and phrase of speech, as the same was declared unto us by Demetrius the Ambassador, 
Demetrius the ambassador of Moscovia.  a man not ignorant in the latin tongue, as from his youth brought up in Livonia, where he learned the first rudiments of letters, and being grown to man's age, executed thoffice of an Ambassador into divers Christian provinces. For whereas by reason of his approved faithfulness & industry, he had before been sent as Orator to the kings of Suecia and Denmark, & the great master of Prussia, he was at the last sent to Themperor Maximilian, in whose court (being replenished with all sorts of men) while he was conversant, if any thing of barbarous manners yet remained in so docible & quiet a nature, the same was put away by framing himself to better civility. The cause of his legacy or ambassade, was given by Paulus Centurio a Genuese, 
Paulus Centurio.  who when he had received letters commendatory of pope Leo the tenth, & came to moscovia for the trade of merchandise, of his own mind conferred with the familiars of Duke Basilius, as touching the conformation of the rites of both churches. He furthermore of great magnanimity, and in manner outrageous desire, 
Spices brought from India to Moscovia.  sought ●ow by a new and incredible voyage, spices might be brought from India. For while before he had exercised the trade of merchandise in Syria, Egypt, & Pontus, he knew by fame that spices might be conveyed from the further India up the river Indus, 
The river Indus.  against the course of the same, and from thence by a small viage by land passing over the mountains of Paropanisus, to be carried to the river Oxus in Bactria, which having his original almost from the same mountains from whence Indus do●th spring, and violently carrying with it many other rivers, 

Oxus or Hoxina, a river of Asia, runneth through the deserts of Sythia.  
The sea Hircanum is now called mare Abacu●ke, or mare de Sala. Citrachan or Astracan. Sarmatia is that great country wherein is contained Russia. L●●oma, and Tartary, and the North and East part of Polonia. Against the Portugals. The trade of spices in old tyme.   falleth into the sea Hircanum or Caspium, at the port called Strava. And he earnestly affirmed that from Strava, is an easy & safe navigation unto the mart town of Citrachan or Astrachan, and the mou●h of the river Volga, and from thence ●uer against the course of the rivers, as Volga, Occha, and Mescho, unto the city Mosch●, and from thence by land to Riga. and into the sea of 〈◊〉, and all the West regions. For he was vehemently, and more than of equity, accensed and provoked by the injuries of the Portugals, who having by force of arms subdued a great part of India, and possessed all the mart towns, taking wholly into their hands all the trade of spices to bring the same into Spain, and nevertheless to sell them at a more grievous an● intolerable price to the people of Europe then ever was heard of before: And furthermore kept the coasts of the Indian sea so straightly with continual navies, that those trades are thereby left of, which were before exercised by the gulf of Persia, and toward the river of Euphrates, and also by the straits of the sea of Arabia, and the river Nilus, and in fin● by our sea: by which trade all Asia and Europe was abundantly satisfied, and better cheap than hath been since the Portugals had the trade in their hands, with so many incommodities of such long viages, 
Spices corrupted.  whereby the spices are so corrupted by th'infection of the pomp and other filthiness of the ships, that their natural savour, taste, and quality, aswell hereby, as by their long reserving in the shops, sellers, and warehouses in Lusheburne, vanisheth and resolveth, so that reserving ever the freshest and newest, they sell only the worst and most corrupted. But Paulus, although in all places he earnestly and vehemently argued of these things, and stirred great malice and hatred against the Portugals, affirming that not only thereby the customs and revenues of princes should be much greater, if that viage might be discovered, but also that spices might be better cheap bought at the hands of the Moscovites: yet could ●e nothing avail in this suit, forasmuch as Duke Basilius thought it not good to make open, or disclose unto a stranger and unknown man, those regions which give entrance to the sea Caspium, 
The Caspian sea.  and the kingdoms of Persia. Paulus therefore excluding all hope of further travail, and become now of a merchant an Ambassador, brought Basilius' letters (Pope Leo being now departed) to Adrian his successor, 
Basilius wrote to Pope Adriane.  in the which he declared, with honourable and reverend words, his good will and favourable mind toward the bishop of Rome. For a few years before, Basilius (then keeping wars against the Polones, at such time as the general counsel was celebrate at Lateran) required by john, King of Denmark (the father of Christian, who was of late expulsed from his kingdom) that safe passage might be granted to the Ambassadors of moscovia, to go to Rome. But whereas it so chanced, that king john and Pope julius died both in one day, whereby he lacked a convenient sequester or solicitor, he omitted his consultation as touching that legacy. 
War between the Polones and Moscovites.  After this, the war waxed hot between him and Sigismunde the king of Polony: who obtaining the victory against the Moscovites at Boristhene, supplications were decreed in Rome for the overthrow and vanquishing the enemies of the Christian faith, which thing greatly elienated both king Basilius himself, and all that nation from the bishop of Rome. But when Adrian the vi departed from this life, and left Paulus now ready to his second viage, 
The second voyage of Paulus to Moscovia.  his successor Clement the vii perceiving that Paulus still furiously revolved and tossed in his unquiet mind that viage toward the East, sent him again with letters to moscovia, by the which with propense and friendly persuasions, he exhorted Basilius to acknowledge the majesty of the Roman church, 
The Pope persuadeth Basilius to acknowledge the Roman church.  and to make a perpetual league and agreement in matters of religion, which thing should be not only for the health of his soul, but also greatly to the increase of his honour: And further promised, that by the holy authority of his office, he would make him a king, and give him kingly ornaments, if rejecting the doctrine of the Greeks', he would conform himself to the authority of the Roman church.  
But Paulus, who with more prosperous journeys then great vantage, had from his youth travailed a great part of the world, although he were now aged, and sore vexed with the strangury, came with a prosperous and speedy journey to moscovia, where he was gently received of Basilius, and remained in his Court for the space of two months. But in fine, mistrusting his own strength, and deterred by the difficulty of so great a journey, when he had utterly put away all his imaginations and hope of this trade to India, returned to Rome with Demetrius the Ambassador of Basilius, before we yet thought that he had been in Moscovia. The bishop commanded that Demetrius should be lodged in the most magnificent and princely part of the houses of Vatican, the roofs of whose edifies are guilded and embowed, and the chambers richly furnished with silken beds and cloth of Arresse: Willing furthermore that he should be honourably received, and vestured with silk. He also assigned Franciscus Cheregatus, 
Demetrius' entertainment at Rome.  the bishop of Aprutium (a man that had often times been Ambassador to divers regions) to accompany him, and show him the order and rites of our religion, with the monuments and manners of the city. Furthermore, when Demetrius had certain days rested and recreated himself, washing away the filth he had gathered by reason of the long voyage, then appareled with a fair vesture, after the manner of his country, he was brought to the bishops presence, whom he honoured kneeling, with great humility and reverence (as is the manner) and therewith presented unto his holiness certain furs of Sables in his own name, and in the name of his prince, and also delivered the letters of Basilius, which they before, 
Demetrius is brought to the Pope's presence.  and then the Illyrian or Slavon interpreter, Nicolaus Siccensis, translated into the Latin tongue, in this effect as followeth.  
To Pope Clement, shepherd and teacher of the Roman church, 
Basilius' letters to Pope Clement.  great Basilius by the grace of God, lord, Emperor, and dominatour of all Russia, and great Duke of Volodemaria, Moscovia, Novogradia, Plescovia, Smolenta, Ifferia, jugoria, Periunia, Vetcha, Bolgaria, etc. Dominator & great prince of Novogradia, in the lower country: also of Ceruigovia, Razania, Volotchia, Rezevia, Belchia, Rostovia, jarostavia, Belozeria, Vdoria, Obdoria, & Condivia, etc. You sent unto us Paulus Centurio, a citizen of Genua, with letters, whereby you do exhort us to join in power & counsel with you, & other Princes of Christendom, against the enemies of the christian faith: & that a free passage & ready way may be opened for both your Ambassadors & ours, to come & go to & fro, whereby by mutual duty and endeavour on both parties, we may have knowledge of the state of things pertaining to the wealth of us both. We certes, as we have hitherto happily by the aid and help of almighty God constantly and earnestly resisted the cruel & wicked enemies of the christian faith, so are we determined to do hereafter: and are likewise ready to consent with other christian princes, & to grant free passage into our dominions. In consideration whereof, we have sent unto you our faithful servant Demetrius Erasmus, with these our letters: & with him have remitted Paulus Centurio, desiring you also shortly to dismiss Demetrius, with safeguard and indemnity unto the borders of our dominions. And we will likewise do the same, if you send your Ambassador with Demetrius, whereby both by communication and letters, we may be better certified of thorder and administration of such things as you require: so that being advertised of the minds and intent of all other christian princes, we may also consult what is best to be done herein. Thus far ye well. Given in our dominion in our city of moscovia, in the year from the creation of the world vii thousand and .300. the third day of April.  
But Demetrius, as he is expert in divine and human things, and especially of holy scripture, seemed to have secret commandment of greater matters, which we think he will shortly declare to the senate in private consultations. For he is now delivered of the fever, into the which he fell by change of air, and hath so recovered his strength & native colour, that being a man of lx years of age, he was not only present at the Pope's mass, celebrated with great solemnity in the honour of S. Cosmus & Damian, but came also into the Senate, 
Cardinal. Campegius.  at such time as Cardinal Campegius, coming first from the legacy of Pannonia, was received of the Pope & all the nobility of the court: And furthermore also viewed the Temples of the holy city, 
The ruins of Rome.  with the ruins of the Roman magnificence, and with wondering eyes beheld the lamentable decay of the ancient buildings. So that we think that shortly after he hath declared his message, he shall return to moscovia, with the bishop of Scarense the Pope's legate, not unrecompensed with just rewards at the hands of his holiness.  
The name of the Moscovites is now new, 
The description of Moscovia.  although the Poet Lucan maketh mention of the Moschos confining with the Sarmatians: and Pliny also placeth the Moschos at the springs of the great river of Phasis, in the region of Colchos, above the sea Euxinus, toward the East. 
The Altars of great Alexander.  Their region hath very large bounds, and is extended from the Altars of great Alexander about the springs of Tanais, to the extreme lands and North Ocean, in manner under the North stars, called charles wain, or the great Bear, being for the most part plain, & of fruitful pasture, but in summer in many places full of marshes. For whereas all that land is replenished with many and great rivers, which are greatly increased by the winter, snow, and Ise, resolved by the heat of the sun, the plains and fields are thereby overflown with marshes, 
Marshes in summer.  and all journeys encumbered with continual waters and miry slabbynesse, until by the benefit of the new winter the rivers and marshes be frozen again, and give safe passage to the sleds that are accustomed to journey by the same. The wood or forest of Hercynia (and not Hyrcania, 
The forest of Hercynia.  as is red in some false copies) occupieth a great part of moscovia, and is here and there inhabited, with houses builded therein, and so made thinner by the long labour of men, that it doth not now show that horror of thick & impenetrable woods and lands, as many think it to have. But being replenished with many wild beasts, 
Wild beasts.  is so far extended through Moscovia, with a continual tract between the East and the North, toward the Scythian Ocean, that by the infinite greatness thereof, 
The Scythian Ocean.  it hath deluded the hope of such as have curiously searched the end of the same. In that part that reacheth toward Prussia, 
The beasts called Vri, or Bisontes.  are found the great and fierce beasts called Vri, or Bisontes, of the kind of Bu●les: Also, Alces like unto Hearts, which the Moscovites call Lozzi, and are called of the germans Helenes. 
Helenes.   
On the East side of Moscovia are the Scythians, which are at this day called Tartars, 
Of the Scythians and Tartars. Amaxovii.  a wandering nation, and at all ages famous in wars. In the stead of houses they use wagons, covered with beasts hides, whereby they were in old time called Amaxovii. For cities and towns, they use great tents and pavilions, not defended with trenches or walls of timber or stone, but enclosed with an innumerable multitude of archers on horseback. The Tartars are divided by companies, which they call Hordas, which word in their tongue signifieth a consenting company of people, 
Horda.  gathered together in form of a city. Every Horda is governed by an Emperor, whom either his parentage or warlike prows hath promoted to that dignity. For they oftentimes keep war with their borderers, and contend ambitiously and fiercely for dominion. 
The large dominion of the Tartars. Cathay.  It doth hereby appear, that they consist of innumerable Hordas, in that the Tartars possess the most large deserts, even unto the famous city of Cathay, in the furthest Ocean in the East. They also that are nearest to the Moscovites, are known by their trade of merchandise, and often incursions. In Europe, near unto the place called Dromon Achilles, in Taurica Chersoneso, 
The Tartars of Europe.  are the Tartars called Precopites, the daughter of whose prince, Selimus the Emperor of the Turks took to wife. These are most infest to the Polones, and waste the regions on every side, between the rivers of Boristhenes and Tanais. They that in the same Taurica possess Caffam, a colony of the Ligurians (called in old time Theodosia) do both in religion and all other things agree with the Turks. But the Tartars that inhabit the regions of Asia, between Tanais and Volga, 
The Tartars of Asia are subject to the Duke of Moscovia.  are subject to Basilius the king of the Moscovites, and choose them a governor at his assignment. Among these, the Cremii afflicted with civil seditions, where as heretofore they were rich and of great power, have of late years lost their dominion and dignity. The Tartars that are beyond the river of Volga, do religiously observe the friendship of the Moscovites, 
The Tartars beyond the river of Volga.  and profess themselves to be their subjects. Beyond the Cassanites, toward the North, are the Sciambani, rich in herds of cattaylle, and consisting of a great multitude of men. After these, are Nogai, 
Nogai. Sigismundus calleth them Nogay●ri.  which obtain at this day the chief fame of riches and warly affairs. Their Horda, although it be most ample, yet hath it no Emperor, but is governed by the wisdom and virtue of the most ancient & valiant men, after the manner of the common wealth of venice. Beyond the Nogais, somewhat toward the South & the Caspian sea, the noblest nation of the Tartars, called Zagathai, inhabit towns builded of stone, 
The noblest nation of the Tartars. The river Taxartes.  and have an exceeding great and fair city, called Samarkand, which jaxartes, the great river of Sogdiana, runneth through, and passing from thence about a hundred miles, falleth into the Caspian sea. With these people in our days, Ishmael the Sophi and king of Persia, hath oftentimes kept war, 
Ishmael the Sophi king of Persia.  with doubtful success. insomuch that fearing the greatness of their power, which he resisted with all that he might, he left Armenia and Taurisium the chief city of the kingdom, for a pray to Selimus the victorer of one wing of the battle. From the city of Samarkand, 
The city of Samarkand.  descended Tamburlanes the mighty Emperor of the Tartars, whom some call Tanberlanis: But Demetrius saith that he should be called Themircuthlu. This is he that about the year of Christ M.CCC.xcviii. subdued almost all the east parts of the world: And lastly, 
Tanburlanes, the mighty Emperor of the Tartars. The conquests of Tamburlanes.  with an innumerable multitude of men, invaded the Turks dominions, with whom Baiasetes Ottomanus their king, (and father to the great grandfather of this Solyman that now liveth) meeting at Ancira in the confines or marches of Galatia and Bythinia, gave him a sore battle, in the which fell on the Turks part .20000 men, and Baiasetes himself was taken prisoner, whom Tamburlanes caused to be locked in an Iron cage, 
Baiasetes.  and so carried him about with him through all Asia, which he also conquered with a terrible army. He conquered all the lands between Tanais and Nilus, and in fine vanquished in battle the great Soltane of egypt, whom he chased beyond Nilus, and took also the city of Damascus.  
From the region of these Tartars called Zagathei, is brought great plenty of silken apparel to the Moscovites. But the Tartars that inhabit the mydlande or inner regions, 
This apparel they have of the Persians.  bring none other wares than trucks or droves of swift running horses, and cloaks made of white feltes: also hales or tents, to withstand the injuries of cold and rain. These they make very artificially, & apt for the purpose. They receive again of the Moscovites, coats of cloth, and Silver money, containing all other bodily ornaments, 
The Tartars traffic with the Moscovites.  and the furniture of superfluous household stuff. For being defended against the violence of wether and tempests, only with such apparel and coverture whereof we have spoken, they trust only to their arrows, which they shoot aswell backward flying, as when they assail their enemies face to face: Albeit, when they determined to invade Europe, their princes and captains had helmets, coats of fence, and hooked swords, 
The Tartars of the South side of Moscovia.  which they bought of the Persians. Toward the South, the bounds of Moscovia are termined by the same Tartars which possess the plain regions near unto the Caspian sea, above the marshes of Meotis in Asia, and about the rivers of Boristhenes and Tanais in part of Europe. The people called Roxolani, Gete, and Bastarne, inhabited these regions in old time, of whom I think the name of Russia took original. 
Gete and Roxolani. Russia.  For they call part of Lituania, Russia the lower, whereas Moscovia itself is called white Russia. Lituania therefore, lieth on the Northwest side of Moscovia. But toward the full West, 
Moscovia called white Russia. Lituania. Prussia. Livonia. Denmark. Norway. Suecia. The people of Laponia.  the main lands of Prussia and Livonia are joined to the confines or marches of moscovia, where the Sarmatian sea breaking forth of the straits of C●mbrica Chersonesus (now called Denmark) is bended with a crooked gulf toward the North. But in the furthest banks of that Ocean, where the large kingdoms of Norway and Suecia are joined to the continent, and almost environed with the sea, are the people called Lapones: a nation exceeding rude, suspicious, and fearful, flying and astonyshed at the sight of all strangers and ships. They know neither fruits nor apples, nor yet any benignity either of heaven or earth. They provide them meat only with shooting, and are apparelled with skins of wild beasts. They dwell in caves filled with dry leaves, and in hollow trees, cnosumed within either by fire, or rotten for age. Such as dwell near the sea side, fish more luckily then cunningly, and in the stead of fruits, reserve in store fishes dried with smoke. They are of small stature of body, with flat visagies, pale and wannie colour, and very swift of foot. Their wits or dispositions, are not known to the Moscovites their borderers, who think it therefore a madness to assail them with a small power, and judge it neither profitable nor glorious, with great armies to invade a poor & beggarly nation. They exchange the most white furs, which we call Armelines, 
Armeline furs.  for other wares, of divers sorts: Yet so, that they fly the sight and company of all merchants. 
bargaining without words.  For comparing and laying their wares together, and leaving their furs in a mid place, they bargain with simple faith, with absent and unknown men. Some men of great credit and authority, do testify that in a region beyond the Lapones, between the West and the North, 
The dark region by this dark region and pigmei, is the way to Chathay by the North sea.  oppressed with perpetual darkness, is the nation of the people called Pigmei, who being grown to their full grought, do scarcely exceed the stature of our children of ten years of age. It is a fearful kind of men, and express their words in such chattering sort, that they seem to be so much the more like unto Apes, in how much they differ in sense and stature from men of just height.  
Toward the North, innumerable people are subject to the Empire of the Moscovites. 
The Scythian Ocean.  Their regions extend to the Scythian Ocean for the space of almost three months journey.  
Next unto Moscovia, is the region of Colmogora, 
The region of Colmogora. The river of dividna.  abounding with fruits. Through this runneth the river of Dividna, being one of the greatest that is known in the North parts, and gave the name to an other less river, which breaketh forth into the sea Baltheum. This increasing at certain times of the year, as doth the river Nilus, overfloweth the fields and plains, and with his fat and nourishing moisture, doth marvelously resist the injuries of heaven, and the sharp blasts of the North wind. When it riseth by reason of molten snow, and great showers of rain, it falleth into the Ocean by unknown nations, and with so large a Trench, like unto a great sea, that it can not be sailed over in one day with a prosperous wind. But when the waters are fallen, they leave here and there large and fruitful islands: For corn there cast on the ground, groweth without any help of the Plough, and with marvelous celerity of hasting nature, fearing the new injury of the proud river, doth both spring and ripe in short space.  
Into the river Dividna, runneth the river juga: and in the corner where they join together, 
The river of juga or jug. Vstiuga.  is the famous Mart Town called Vstiuga, distant from the chief city Mosca vi hundred miles.  
Note that whereas Paulus iovius writeth here that the river of Dividna, otherwise called Duina, 
The river of Dividna of Duina.  runneth through the region of Colmogor, it is to be understood that there are two rivers of that name, the one on the North-east side of moscovia, toward the frozen sea, & the other on the south-west side, falling into the sea Baltheum, or the gulf of Finnonia, by the city of Riga in Livonia. And forasmuch as the true knowledge of these and certain other is very necessary for all such as shall trade into Moscovia, or other regions in those coasts by the North sea, I have thought good to make further declaration hereof, as I have found in the history of moscovia, most faithfully and largely written by Sigismundus Liberus, who was twice sent Ambassador into Moscovia, as first by Maximilian the Emperor, and then again by Ferdinando king of Hungary and Boheme. This have I done the rather, for that in all the maps that I have seen of moscovia, there is no mention made of the river of Duina, that runneth through the region of Colmogor, and by the city of the same name, although the province of Duina, be in all cards placed Northward from the river of Vstiug or Succana, which is the same Duina, whereof we now speak, and whereof Paulus iovius writeth, although it be not so named but from the angle or corner, 
The river of Suchana.  where joining with the river of jug and Succana, it runneth Northward towards the city of Colmogor: and from thence falleth into the North or frozen sea, as shall hereafter more plainly appear by the words of Sigismundus, that the one of these be not taken for the other, being so far distant, 
The frozen sea.  that great error might ensue by mistaking the same, especially because this whereof Paulus iovius writeth, is not by name expressed in the cards, but only in the other, whereby the error might be the greater. Of that therefore that runneth by the confines of Livonia, and the city of Riga, Sigismundus writeth in this manner.  
The Lake of Duina, is distant from the springs of Boristhenes, almost ten miles, and as many from the marsh of Fronowo. From it a river of the same name toward the West, distant from Vuilna twenty miles, runneth from thence toward the North, where by Riga, the chief city of Livonia, it falleth into the german sea, which the Moscovites call Vuare●zkoie morie. It runneth by Vuitepso, Polotzo, and Dunenburg, and not by Plescovia, as one hath written. This river, being for the most part navigable, the Livons call Duna.  
Of the other Duina, whereof Poulus jovious speaketh, he writeth as followeth.  
The province of Duina and the river of the same name, is so named from the place where the rivers of Suchana and jug meeting together, 
Duina and Suchana.  make one river so called. For Duina in the Moscovites tongue, signifieth two. This river by the space of two hundred miles, entereth into the North Ocean, on that part where the said sea runneth by the coasts of Suecia and Norway, and divideth Engreonland from the unknown land. This province situate in the full North, pertained in time passed to the signory of Novogorode. From moscovia to the mouths of Duina, are numbered. CCC. miles: Albeit as I have said, in the regions that are beyond Volga, 
Greonlande or Engreonland.  the account of the journey can not be well observed, by reason of many marshes, rivers, and very great woods that lie in the way. Yet are we led by conjecture to think it to be scarcely two hundred miles: forasmuch as from moscovia to Vuolochda, from Vuolochda to Vstiug somewhat into th● East, and last of all, from Vstiug by the river Duina, is the right passage to the North sea. This region, beside the castle of Colmogor and the city of Duina, 
Understand miles of Germany, that is leagues.  situate almost in the mid way between the springs and mouths of the river, and the Castle of Pi●nega standing in the very mouths of Duina, is utterly without towns and Castles: Yet hath it many villages which are far in sunder, by reason of the barrenness of the soil. etc.  
In an other place he writeth, that Suchana and jug, after they are joined together in one, lose their first names, and make the river Duina. etc. But let us now return to the history of Paulus iovius.  
Unto Vstiuga, from the Permians, Pecerrians, Inugrians, Vgolicans, and Pinnegians, people inhabiting the North and Northest provinces, 
Rich furs.  are brought the precious furs of martens and Sables, also the cases of wolves and Foxes both white and black: And likewise the skins of the beasts called Ceruari● Lupi (that is) heart wolves, being engendered either of a Wolf and a Hind, or a Hart and a bitch Wolf. 
Lupi Ceruarii.  These furs and skins, they eschaunge for divers other wares. The best kind of Sables, and of the ●inest hear, wherewith now the vestures of princes are lived, 
Sables.  and the tender necks of delicate dames are covered, with the express similitude of the living beast, are brought by the Permians and Pecerrians, which they themselves also receive at the hands of other that inhabit the regions near unto the North Ocean. The Permians and Pecerrians, a little before our time, did sacrifice to Idols, after the manner of the gentiles: but do now acknowledge Christ their God. The passage to the Inugrians, and Vgolicans, is by certain rough mountains, 
The mountains called Hiperborei.  which perhaps are they that in old time were called Hiperborei. In the tops of these, are found the best kinds of Falcons: whereof one kind (called Herodium) is white, with spotted feathers. 
Hawks of divers kinds.   
There are also jerfalcons, Sakers, and Peregrine's, which were unknown to the ancient princes in their excessive and nice pleasures.  
Beyond those people whom I last named (being all trybutaries to the kings of moscovia) are other nations, the last of men, not known by any voyages of the Moscovites, forasmuch as none of them have passed to the Ocean, 
The passage from moscovia to Cathay.  and are therefore known only by the fabulous narrations of merchants. Yet it is apparent that the river Dividna or Duina, drawing with it innumerable other rivers, runnneth with a vehement course toward the North, and that the sea is there exceeding large: so that sailing by the coast of the right hand, ships may have passage from thence to Cathay, as it is thought by most likely conjecture, 
Cathay.  except there lie some land in the way. For the region of Cathay pertaineth to th'extreme and furthest parts of the east, situate almost in the parallel of Thracia, 
Master Eliot calleth Cathay the region of Sinarum.  and known to the Portugals in India when they sailed near thereunto by the regions of Sinara and Malacha to Aurea Chersonesus, and brought from thence certain vestures made of Sables skins, by which only argument it is apparent that the city of Cathay is not far from the coasts of Scythia.  
But when Demetrius was demanded whether either by the monuments of letters, or by fame left them of their predecessors, 
The Goths subverted the roman Empire.  they had any knowledge of the Goths, who now more than a thousand years since, subverted Thempire of the Roman Emperors, and defaced the city of Rome: He answered, that both the nation of the Goths of the name of king Totila● their chief captain, 
The north region conspired against the Romans.  was of famous memory among them: And that divers nations of the North regions conspired to that expedition, and especially the Moscovites: Also that that army increased of the confluence of the Barbarous Livons and wandering Tartars: But that they were all called Goths, forasmuch as the Goths that inhabited Scondania and Iselande, were the auctors of that invasion. 
Moscovia.   
And with these bounds are the Moscovites enclosed on every side, whom we think to be those people that Ptolemy called Modocas: but have doubtless at this day their name of the river Moscow, which runneth through the chief city Mosca, named also after the same. This is the most famous city in moscovia, aswell for the situation thereof, 
The city of Mosca.  being in manner in the midst of the region, as also for the commodious opportunity of rivers, multitude of houses, and strong fence of so fair and goodly a Castle. For the city is extended with a long tract of buildings by the banks of the river for the space of five miles. The houses are made all of timber, and are divided into Parlours, Chambers, and Rytchyns, of large rooms: yet neither of unseemly height, or to low, but of decent measure and proportion. 
Richard Chancellor told me that these masts are smo● what hollow on the one side, & that the whole side of the next entereth into the same, whereby they lie very close.  For they have great trees apt for the purpose brought from the forest of Hercinia: Of the which, made perfectly round like the masts of ships, and so laid one upon an other, that they join at the ends in right angles, where being made very fast and sure, they frame their houses thereof, of marvelous strength with small charges, and in very short tyme. In manner all the houses have private gardens, aswell for pleasure as commodity of herbs, whereby the circuit of the dispersed city appeareth very great. All the wards or quarters of the city, have their peculiar Chapels. But in the chiefest and highest place thereof, is the Church of our Lady, of ample and goodly workmanship, which Aristoteles of Bononie, a man of singular knowledge and experience in Architecture, builded more than threescore years since. At the very head of the city, a little river, called Neglinia which driveth many corn mills, 
The castle of Mosca.  entereth into the river Moscus, and maketh almost an Island, in whose end is the castle, with many strong towers and bulwarks, builded very fair by the device of Italian Architecturs that are the masters of the kings works. In the fields about the city, is an incredible multitude of Hares, and Roe Bucks, the which, 
White Hares and Roe bucks.  it is lawful for no man to chase or pursue with dogs or nets, except only certain of the kings familiars, and strange Ambassadors, to whom he giveth licence by special commandment. Almost three parts of the city is environed with two rivers, and the residue with a large moat, that receiveth plenty of water from the said rivers. The city is also defended on the other side with an other river named jausa, which falleth also into Moscus a little beneath the city. Furthermore, Moscus running towards the South, falleth into the river Ocha or Occa, much greater than itself at the town Columna: 
The river Ocha.  and not very far from thence, Ocha itself, increased with other rivers, unladeth his streams in the famous river Volga, where at the place where they join, 
Volga. Novogradia.  is situate the city of Novogradia the less, so named in respect of the greater city of that name, from whence was brought the first colony of the less city. Volga, called in old time Rha, 
Rha.  hath his original of the great marshes, named the white Lakes. These are above Moscovia, between the North and the West, 
The white Lakes.  and send forth from them almost all the rivers that are dispersed into divers regions on every side, as we see of the Alpes, from whose tops and springs descend the waters, of whose concourse the rivers of Rhine, Po, and Rodanum, have their increase. For these marshes, in the stead of mountains full of springs, minister abundant moisture, forasmuch as no mountains are yet found in that region by the long travails of men, insomuch that many that have been studious of the old cosmography, 
The Riphean & Hiperborcan mountains.  suppose the Riphean and Hiperborean, mountains so often mentioned of the ancient writers, to be fabulous. From these marshes therefore, the rivers of Duina, Ocha, Moscus, Volga, Tanais, and Boristhenes, have their original. The Tartars call Volga Edel: 
Tanais and Borysthenes.  Tanais they call Don: And Boristehenes, is at this time called Neper. This, a little beneath Taurica, runneth into the sea Euxinus. Tanais is received of the marshes of Meotis at the noble Mart Town Azoum. 
The sea Euxinus.  But Volga, leaving the city of Mosca towards the South, and running with a large circuit, and great Wyndynges, and Creeks first towards the East, then to the West, and lastly to the South, 
The Caspian sea. Astrachan. Media. Armenia. Persia.  falleth with a full stream into the Caspian or Hircan sea. Above the mouth of this, is a city of the Tartars called Citrachan, which some call Astrachan, where Martes are kept by the merchants of Media, Armenia, and Persia. On the further bank of Volga, there is a town of the Tartars called Casan, 
Casan.  of the which the Horda of the Casanite Tartars took their name. It is distant from the mouth of Volga and the Caspian sea .500. miles. Above Casan .150. miles, at the entrance of the river Sura, Basilius that now reigneth, builded a town called Surcium, to thintent that in those deserts, 
Sura. Surcium.  the merchants and travelers which certify the governors of the marches of the doings of the Tartars, and the manners of that unquiet nation, may have a ●afe mansion among their customers.  
The Emperors of moscovia at divers times, either moved thereto by occasion of things present, or for the desire they had to nobilitate new and obscure places, have kept the seat of their court and Empire in divers cities. For Novogrodia, 
Novogrodia.  which lieth toward the West, and the Lyvon sea, not many years past, was the head city of moscovia, and obtained ever the chief dignity, by reason of the incredible number of houses and edifies, with the opportunity of the large lake replenished with fish, and also for the fame of the most ancient & venerable Temple, which more than four hundred years since, was dedicated to Sancta Sophia, Christ the son of God, 
The Temple of Sancta Sophia.  according to the custom of the Emperors of Byzantium, now called Constantinople. Novogrodia, is oppressed in manner with continual winter, and darkness of long nights. For it hath the pole Arctic elevate above the Horizon threescore and four degrees: 
The elevation o● the pole at Novogrodia, & Moscovia. Heat by reason of short nights.  and is further from the Equinoctial than Moscovia, by almost six degrees. By which difference of heaven, it is said, that at the summer stay of the Sun, it is burnt with continual heat, by reason of the short nights.  
The city also of Volodemaria, 
The city of Volodemaria.  being more than two hundred miles distant from Mosca toward the east, had the name of the chief city and kings town, whither the seat of the Empire was translated by the valiant Emperors for necessary considerations, that such aid, furniture, and requisites, as appertain to the wars, might be near at hand, at such time as they keep continual war against the Tartars their borderers. For it is situate without Volga, on the banks of the river Clesma, which falleth into Volga. But Moscha, 
The city of Moscha.  aswell for those gifts and commodities whereof we have spoken, as also that it is situate in the midst of the most frequented place of all the region and Empire, and defended with the river and Castle, hath in comparison to other cities been thought most worthy to be esteemed for the chief. Moscha is distant from Novogrodia five hundred miles: 
Ottoferia. Volga.  and almost in the mid way is the city of Ottoferia (otherwise called Otwer, or Tuwer) upon the river of Volga. This river, near unto the fountains and springs of the same, not yet increased by receiving so many other rivers, runneth but slowly and gently, and passeth from thence to Novogrodia, through many woods and desolate plains. Furthermore from Novogrodia to Riga, 
Riga.  the next port of the Sarmatian sea, is the journey of a thousand miles, little more or less. This tract is thought to be more commodious than the other, because it hath many towns, 
The city of Plescovia.  and the city of Plescovia in the way, being embraced with two rivers. From Riga (pertaining to the dominion of the great master of the wars of the Livons) to the city of Lubeck, 
The city of Lubeck.  a port of Germany, in the gulf of Cymbrica Chersonesus (now called Denmark) are numbered about a thousand miles of dangerous sailing.  

From Rome to Moscovia.  From Rome to the city of Moscha, the distance is known to be two thousand and six hundred miles, by the nearest way, passing by Ravenna, Taruisium, the Alpes of Carnica: Also Villacum, Noricum, and Vienna of Pannovie: and from thence (passing over the river of Danubius) to Olmutium of the Marovians, and to Cracovia the chief city of Polony, are counted xi hundred miles. From Cracovia to Vilna, the head city of Lithuania, are counted five hundred miles: and as many from that city to Smolenzko, situate beyond Boristhenes, from whence to Moscha, are counted six hundred miles. The journey from Vilna by Smolenzko to Moscha, is travailed in winter with expedite sleds, 
Winter travail by Ice and snow.  and incredible celerity upon the snows, hardened with long frost, and compact like Ice, by reason of much wearing. But in summer, the plains can not be overpassed but by difficult and laborious travail. For when the snows by the continual heat of the Sun begin to melt and dissolve, 
marishes in summer.  they cause great marshes and quamyres, able to entangle both horse and man, were it not that ways are made through the same, with bridges and cause's of wood, and almost infinite labour.  

Other writers deny this.  In all the region of moscovia, there is no vain or mine of gold or silver, or any other common metal, except Iron, neither yet is there any token of precious stones: and therefore they buy all those things of strangers. Nevertheless, this injury of nature is recompensed with abundance of rich furs, 
Rich furs.  whose price, by the wanton nysenesse of men, is grown to such excess, that the furs pertaining to one sort of apparel, 
The price of furs.  are now sold for a thousand crowns. But the time hath been that these have been bought better cheap, when the furthest nations of the North, being ignorant of our nice fineness, and breathing desire toward effeminate and superfluous pleasures, exchanged the same with much simplicity, oftentimes for trifles and things of small value: insomuch that commonly the Permians and Pecerrians, 
How many Sables skins for an Axe.  were accustomed to give so many skins of Sables for an Iron Axe or Hatchet, as being tied hard together, the merchants of moscovia could draw through the hole where the haft or handle entereth into the same. But the Moscovites send into all parts of Europe the best kind of flax to make linen cloth, and hemp for ropes: Also many Ox hides, 
Flax. Ox hides. Wax.  and exceeding great masses of wax.  
They proudly deny, 
But truly.  that the Roman church obtaineth the principate and pre-eminent authority of all other.  
They so abhor the nation of the jews, 
They abhor the jews.  that they detest the memory of them, and will in no condition admit them to dwell within their dominions: esteeming them as wicked and mischievous people, that have of late taught the Turks to make guns. 
Their books and religion.  Beside the books that they have of the ancient Greek doctors, they have also the commentaries and homilies of saint Ambrose, Augustine, Jerome, & Gregory, translated into the Illyrian or Slavon tongue, which agreeth with theirs: For they use both the Slavon tongue and letters, as do also the slavons, Dalmates, Bohemes, Pollones, and Lithuanes. 
The Slavon tongue spread further than any other.  This tongue is spread further than any other at this day: For it is familiar at Constantinople, in the court of the Emperors of the Turks, and was of late heard in egypt among the Mamalukes, in the court of the Soltane of Alcayre, otherwise called Memphis, or Babylon in Egypt. A great number of books of holy scripture are translated into this tongue by the industry of Saint Jerome and Cyrillus. Furthermore, beside the histories of their own countries, they have also books, containing the facts of great Alexander, 
Saint Jerome was borne in Dalmatia, now called Sclavonia.  and the Roman Emperors, and likewise of Marcus Antonius, & Cleopatra. They have no manner of knowledge of philosophy, Astronomy, or speculative physic, with other liberal sciences: But such are taken for Physicians, as profess that they have oftentimes observed the virtue and quality of some unknown herb.  

How they number the years.  They number the years, not from the birth of Christ, but from the beginning of the world. And this they begin to account, not from the month of january, but from September.  
They have few and simple laws throughout all the kingdom, 
Few and simple laws.  made by the equity and conscience of their princes, and approved by the consent of wise and good men, and are therefore greatly for the wealth and quietness of the people, forasmuch as it is not lawful to pervert them with any interpretations or cavillations of lawyers or Attorneys. They punish thieves, rovers, privy pickers, and murderers. When they examine malefactors, they power a great quantity of cold water upon such as they suspect, which they say to be an intolerable kind of torment. But sometimes they manacle such as are stubborn, and will not confess apparent crimes.  
Their youth is exercised in divers kinds of games and plays, 
The exercise of youth.  resembling the wars, whereby they both practice policy, and increase their strength. They use running both on horseback and a foot. Also running at the tilt, wrestling, and especially shooting. 
Shooting.  For they give rewards to such as excel therein.  
The Moscovites are universally of mean stature, yet very square set, 
The corporature of the Moscovites.  and mightily brawned. They have all grey eyes, long beards, short legs, and big bellies. They ride very short, and shoot backward very cunningly, even as they fly. 
Their fare.  At home in their houses, their fare is rather plentiful then dainty: For their tables are furnished for a small price, with all such kinds of meats as may be desired of such as are given to most excessive gluttony. Hens and Ducks are bought for little silver pence the piece. There is incredible plenty of beasts and cattle, both great and small. The flesh of beef that is killed in the midst of winter, is so congealed and frozen, 
Flesh preserved long, by reason of cold. Hawking and hunting.  that it putrefieth not for the space of two months. Their best and most delicate dishes, are gotten by hunting and hawking, as with us: For they take all sorts of wild beasts with Hounds, and divers kinds of nets. And with Falcons and Erens, or Eagles, of a marvelous kind, which the region of Pecerra bringeth forth unto them, they take not only pheasants and wild Ducks, but also Cranes and wild Swans. They take also a foul of dark colour, about the bigness of a Goose, with red overbrow, whose flesh in taste passeth the pleasantness of Phesauntes: These in the Moscovites tongue are called Tetrao, which I suppose to be the same that Pliny calleth Erythratao, known to the people of the Alpes, and especially to the Rhetians which inhabit the lands about the springs of the river Abdua. 
Plenty of fish.  The river of Volga ministereth unto them great fishes, and of pleasant taste, especially Sturgeons, or rather a kind of fish like unto Sturgeons: which in the winter season being enclosed in Ice, are long reserved fresh and uncorrupt. Of other kinds of fishes, 
Fish long reserved in Ise.  they take in manner an incredible multitude in the white lakes whereof we have spoken before. And whereas they utterly lack native wines, 
Wine.  they use such as are brought from other places. And this only in certain feasts and holy mysteries, 
Malvasy.  especially the pleasant Maluasies of the Island of Creta, now called Candy, are had in most honour: and used either as medicines, or for a show of excessive abundance, forasmuch as it is in manner a miracle that wines brought from Candy by the straits of Hercules pillars, 
All the North part of the firm land was called Scythia, and the people Scythians.  and the Islands of Gades, and tossed with such floods of the enclosed Ocean, should be droonke among the Scythian snows in their native purity and pleasantness.  
The common people drink mead, made of honey & hops sodden together, which they keep long in pitched barrels, where the goodness increaseth with age. They use also beer and ale, as do the Germans and Polones. They are accustomed for delicateness in summer, 
Drink cooled with Ise.  to cool their beer and mead with putting Ice therein, which the noble men reserve in their sellars in great quantity for the same purpose. 
Wine of Cherries.  Some there are that delight greatly in the juice that is pressed out of Cherries before they be full ripe, which they affirm to have the colour of clear and ruddy wine, with a very pleasant taste.  
Their wives & women, are not with them in such honour as they are in other nations: 
Their women.  for they use them in manner in the place of servants. The noble women & gentlewomen, do diligently observe their walks, and have an eye to their chastity. They are seldom bidden forth to any feasts: neither are permitted to resort to churches far of, or to walk abroad without some great consideration. But the common sort of women, are easily and for a small price alured to lechery, even of strangers: by reason whereof, the Gentlemen do little or nothing esteem them.  
john the father of king Basilius, died more than twenty years since. 
Thomas Paleologus.  He married Sophia, the daughter of Thomas Paleologus, who reigned far in Peloponnesus (now called Morea) & was brother to Themperor of Constantinople: She was then at Rome when Thomas her father was driven out of Grecia by the Turks. 
The conquest of the Turks in Grecia.  Of her were five children borne, as Basilius himself, George, Demetrius, simeon, and Andreas. Basilius took to wife Salomonia, the daughter of George Soborovius, a man of singular fidelity & wisdom, and one of his counsel: the excellent virtues of which woman, only barrenness obscured.  
When the Princes of moscovia deliberate to marry, their custom is to have choice of all the virgins in the realm, 
How the princes choose their wives.  and to cause such as are of most fair and beautiful visage and parsonage, with manners and virtues according, to be brought before them: Which afterward they commit to certain faithful men, and grave matrons to be further viewed, insomuch that they leave no part of them unsearched. Of these, she whom the Prince most liketh, is pronounced worthy to be his wife, not without great and careful expectation of their parents, living for that time between hope and fear. The other virgins also which stood in election, and contended in beauty and integrity of manners, are oftentimes the same day, to gratify the Prince, married to his noble men, Gentlemen, and Captains: whereby it sometimes cometh to pass, that while the Princes contemn the lineage of royal descent, such as are borne of humble parentage, are exalted to the degree of princely estate, in like manner as the Emperors of the Turks were accustomed to be chosen, by comeliness of parsonage, and warly prowess.  
Basilius was under the age of forty and seven years, 
Duke Basilius.  of comely parsonage, singular virtue, & princely qualities, by all means studious for the prosperity & commodities of his subjects: furthermore, in benevolence, liberality, and good success in his doings, to be preferred before his progenitors. For when he had vi. years kept war with the Lyvons, that moved lxxii confetherate cities to the cause of that war, he obtained the victory, & departed with few conditions of peace, rather given then accepted. Also at the beginning of his reign, he put the Polones to flight, 
War between the Polones and Moscovites.  and took prisoner Constantine, the Captain of the Ruthens, whom he brought to Moscovia tied in chains: But shortly after, at the river of Boristhenes, above the city of Orsa, he himself was overcome in a great battle, by the same Constantine whom he had dismissed: Yet so, that the town of Smolenzko, which the Moscovites possessed before, and was new won by the Polones, should still pertain to the dominions of Basilius. But against the Tartars, 
War between the Moscovites and Tartars.  and especially the Tartars of Europe, called the Precopites, the Moscovites have oftentimes kept war with good success, in revenge of the injuries done to them by their incursions.  
Basilius is accustomed to bring to the field more than a hundred and fifty thousand horsemen, divided into three bands, 
The Moscovites army.  and following the banners or ensigns of their Captains in order of battle. On the banner of the kings wing, is figured the Image of joshua the Captain of the hebrews, 
Their banner.  at whose prayer the Sun prolonged the day, and stayed his course, as witness the histories of holy scripture. Armies of footmen are in manner to no use in those great wildernesses, aswell for their apparel being lose and long, as also for the custom of their enemies, who in their wars trust rather to the swiftness of their light horses, then to try the matter in a pight field.  
Their horses are of less than mean stature: 
Their horses and horsemen.  but very strong and swift. Their horsemen are armed with pikes, rivets, Mases of iron, and arrows. Few have hooked swords. Their bodies are defended with round Targets, 
Their armure.  after the manner of the Turks of Asia, or with bending and cornarde Targets after the manner of the Greeks: Also with coats of mail, Brygantines', and sharp Helmets. Basilius did furthermore institute a band of Harquebusiers on horseback, 
Harquebusiers.  and caused many great brazen pieces to be made by the workmanship of certain Italians: 
Guns.  and the same with their stocks and wheels to be placed in the Castle of Mosca.  
The king himself with princely magnificence and singular familiarity (wherewith nevertheless no part of the majesty of a king is violate) is accustomed to dine openly with his noble men, 
The Prince dineth openly.  & strange Ambassadors in his own chamber of presence, where is seen a marvelous quantity of silver & guilt plate, standing upon two great and high cubbardes in the same chamber. 
Sigismundus saith that much of this is gold.  He hath not about him any other guard for the custody of his person, saving only his accustomed family. For watch and ward is diligently kept of the faithful multitude of the citizens: Insomuch that every ward or quarter of the city is enclosed with gates, 
The custody of of the city.  rails, and bars: neither is it lawful for any man rashly to walk in the city in the night, or without light. All the cour●e consisteth of noble men, 
The Duke's court.  Gentlemen, and choice soldiers, which are called out of every region by their towns and villages, and commanded to wait course by course at certain months appointed. Furthermore when war is proclaimed, all the army is collected both of the old soldiers, and by mustering of new in all provinces. For the lieutenants and Captains of the army, are accustomed in all cities to muster the youth, & to admit to the order of soldiers such as they think able to serve the turn. Their wages is paid them of the common treasury of every province, 
Soldiers wages of the common treasury.  which is gathered, and partly paid also, in the time of peace, although it be but little. But such as are assigned to the wars, are free from all tributes, and enjoy certain other privileges, whereby they may the more gladly and cheerfully serve their king, and defend their country. For in the time of war, occasion is ministered to show true virtue and manhood, where in so great and necessary an institution, every man according to his approved activity and ingenious forwardness, may obtain the fortune either of perpetual honour, or ignominy.  
Vix olim ulla fides referrentibus horrida regna  
Moschorum, & Ponti, res glacialis erat.  
Nunc Iouio autore, illa oculis lustramus, et urbes,  
Et nemora, et montes cernimus et flwios.  
Moschoviam, monumenta iovi, tua culta revoluens,  
Caepi alios mundos credere Democriti.  

Other notable things as concerning moscovia, gathered out of the books of Sigismundus Liberus. Note that when he saith miles, he meaneth leagues.  
FRom whence Russia had the name, there are divers opinions. 
Russia.  Some think that it was so named of one Russus the son or nephew of Lech the king of the Polons. Other affirm that it was so called of a certain old town, named Russus, not far from Novogoroda or Novogradia the more. Some also think that it was so called of the brown colour of the nation. 
The brown colour of the Russes.  But the moscovians confute all these opinions as untrue, affirming that this nation was in old time called Rosseia, as a nation dispersed, as the name itself doth declare. For Rosseia in the Ruthens tongue, doth signify dispersed, 
Russeia.  or scattered. The which thing to be true, divers other people commyxt with thinhabitants, and divers provinces lying here and there between divers parts of Russia do plainly declare. But whence soever they took their name, doubtless all the people that use the Slavon tongue, and profess the faith of Christ, 
The Slavon tongue spreadeth far.  after the manner of the Greeks (called in their common language Russi, and in the Latin tongue Rutheni) are increased to such a multitude, that they have either expulsed all the nations that lie between them, or drawn them to their manner of living, in so much that they are now called all Rutheni, by one common name.  
Furthermore the Slavon tongue (which at this day is somewhat corruptly called Slavon) runneth exceeding far, as used of the Dalmates, Bossuenser, Croatians, Istrians, and by along tract of the sea Adriatic unto Forum julij: Of the Caruians also, whom the Venetians call Charsos: and likewise of the Carniolans and Carinthians, unto the river Draws: Furthermore of the Stirians within Gretzium, and by Muera unto Danubius, and from thence of the Misians, Seruians, Bulgarians, and other inhabiting, even unto Constantinople: Furthermore of the Bohemians, Lusacians, Silesians, moravians, and thinhabitants near unto the river Vagus in the kingdom of Hungary: The Polones also, and the Ruthenians, whose Empire reacheth very far: likewise the Circasians and Quinquemontanians, unto Pontus: and is from thence used in the North parts of Germany, among the remnant of the Vandals inhabiting here and there. 
Vandals.  All which nations, although they acknowledge themselves to be slavons, yet the Germans taking the denomination only of the Vandals, call all them that use the Slavon tongue, Vuenden, or Vuinden, or Vuindysh.  
Of the Princes that now reign in Russia, the chief is the great Duke of Moscovia, 
The princes of Russia.  who possesseth the greatest part thereof. The second is the great Duke of Lithuania: and the third the king of Polony, who now obtaineth the dominion of Polony and Lithuania.  
In authority and dominion over his subjects, the prince of Moscovy passeth all the monarch of the world: 
The Duke of Moscovia.  For he depriveth all his noble men and gentlemen of all their holds and munitions at his pleasure. He trusteth not his own brethren, but oppresseth all with like servitude: Insomuch that whom so ever he commandeth either to remain with him in the court, or to go to the wars, or sendeth on embassage, they are compelled to be at their own charges, except the young gentlemen the sons of the Boiarons, that is, the noble men of the lowest degree. He usurpeth this authority aswell over the spirituality as the temporalty, constituting what him listeth of the goods and life of all men. Of his counsellors there is not one that dare dissent from him in any thing. They openly confess, that the will of their prince is the will of God: and therefore call him the key bearer and chamberlain of God, & believe him to be the executor of Gods will. By reason whereof, the prince himself, when any petition is made to him for the delivery of any captive, is acaccustomed to answer, when God commandeth, he shallbe delivered. Likewise when any asketh a question of an uncertain or doubtful thing, their custom is to answer thus: God knoweth, and the great Prince. It is uncertain whether the cruelty and fyrcenesse of the nation do require so tyrannous a Prince, or whether by the tyranny of the Prince, the nation is made so fierce and cruel.  
Basilius the Son of john, was the first that took upon him the name and title of a king, in this manner. The great lord Basilius, by the grace of God, king and lord of all Russia, and the great Duke of Vuolodimaria, Moscovia, Novogradia. etc.  
Furthermore, 
Why the Duke of Moscovia was called an Emperor.  whereas now this Prince is called Emperor, I have thought good to show the title and cause of this error. Note therefore that Czar in the Ruthens tongue, signifieth a king, whereas in the language of the slavons, Pollons, Bohemes, and other, the same word Czar, signifieth Cesar, by which name the Emperors have been commonly called. For both they, and the slavons that are under the kingdom of Hungary, call a king by an other name: as some Crall, other Kyrall, and some Korall: but think that only an Emperor is called Czar. Whereby it came to pass that the Ruthene or Moscovite interpreters, hearing their Prince to be so called of strange nations, began themselves also to name him an Emperor, & th●nk the name of Czar to be more worthy than the name of a king, although they signify all one thing. But who so will read all their histories and books of holy scripture, shall find that a king is called Czar, and an Emperor Kessar. By the like error the Emperor of the Turks is called Czar, 
The great Turk.  who nevertheless of antiquity used no higher title than the name of a king, expressed by this word Czar. And hereof the Turks of Europe that use the Slavon tongue, call the city of Constantinople Czargard, (that is) the kings city.  
Some call the Prince of moscovy the white king, which I think to proceed of the white Caps, 
The white king.  or other tyrementes they wear on their heads, like as they call the king of Pertia Kisilpassa (that is) red head. He useth the title of a king when he writeth or sendeth to Rome, 
The Duke of Moscovia his title.  the Emperor, the Pope, the King of Suetia and Denmark, the great master of Prusia and Livonia, and also to the great Turk, as I have been credibly informed: but he is not called king of any of them, except perhaps of the Livons. Yet by reason of his later conquests, some have thought him worthy the name of a king, or rather of an Emperor, because he hath kings under his Empire.  
To the king of Polone, he useth this title: The great lord Basilius by the grace of God, lord of all Russia, and great Duke of Vuolodimeria, Moscovia, Novogradia. etc. leaving out the title of a king. For none of them vouchsafeth to receive the letters of the other augmented with any new title, as I knew by experience at my being in moscovia, at which time Sigismundus the king of Polone sent him his letters augmented with the title of the Duke of Moscovia, wherewith he was not a little offended.  
They glory in their histories that before Vuolodimeria and Olha, 
Russia baptized by Saint Andrew the Apostle.  the land of Russia was baptized and blessed of Saint Andrew the Apostle of Christ, affirming that he came from Grecia to the mouths of the river Boristhenes: and that he sailed up the river to the mountains where as is now Chiovia: and that there he blessed all the land and placed his cross, prophesing also that the grace of God should be great there, and that there should be many churches of Christian men: Likewise, that he afterward came to the springs of Boristhenes, unto the great Lake Vuolok, and by the river Lovat descended into the Lake Ilmer: from whence by the river Vuolcon, which runneth out of the same Lake, he came to Novogradia: and passed from thence by the same river to the Lake Ladoga, and the river Heva, and so unto the sea which they call Vuarezkoia, being the same that we call the german sea, between Vuinlandia or Finlandia and Livonia, by the which he sailed to Rome, and was at the last crucified for Christ his Gospel in Peloponnesus by the tyranny of Agus Antipater, as their chronicles make mention.  
The Prince every second or third year causeth a muster to be taken of the Sons of the Boiorons, 
The Moscovites wars.  and taketh an account booth of their number, and how many Horses and men every of them is able to make: and then appointeth a certain stipend to such as are able further to bear their own charges in the wars. They have seldom any rest or quietness: For they either keep war with the Lithuanians, livonians, Suetians, or Tartars of Casan. Or if it so chance that the prince keep no war, yet doth he yearly appoint garrysons of twenty thousand men in places about Tanais and Occa, to repress the incursions and robberies of the European Tartars, called Precopites.  
As in other matters, 
divers manners of divers people in the wars.  even so in the order of warfare there is great diversity among men. For the Moscovian as soon as he beginneth to fly, thinketh of none other succour, but putteth all his confidence therein. Being pursued or taken of his enemy, he neither defendeth himself, nor desireth pardon.  
The Tartar cast of from his horse, spoiled of all his armure and weapons, and also sore wounded, defendeth himself with hands, feet, and teeth, and by all means he may, until his strength and spirit fail him.  
The Turk, when he seeth himself destitute of all help and hope to escape, doth humbly desire pardon, casting away his weapons and armure, and reaching forth to the victorer his hands joined together to be bound, hoping by captivity to save his life.  
The Moscovites in placing their army, choose them a large plain, where the best of them pitch their tents, 
The Moscovites army.  and the other make them certain arbours of bows fixed in the ground, bending together the tops thereof, which they cover with their cloaks to defend themselves, their bows, arrows, saddles, and other their necessaries from rain. They put forth their horses to pasture, and for that cause have their tents so far in sunder, which they fortify neither with carts or trenches, or any other impediment, except perhaps the place be defended by nature, as with woods, rivers, and marishes.  
It may perhaps seem strange, 
How he maintaineth his army.  how he maintaineth him and his so long with so small an army as I have said. I will now therefore briefly declare their sparing and frugality. He that hath six or sometimes more horses, useth one of them as a pack horse to bear all their necessaries. He hath also in a bag of two or three spans long, the flower or meal of the grain called mill, and viii or ten pounds weight of Swine's flesh powdered. He hath likewise a bag of salt, mixed with pepper, if he be rich. Furthermore every man carrieth with him a hatchet, a fire box, and a brazen pot●e: so that if they chance to come to any place where they can find no fruits, Garlic, Onions, or flesh, they kindle a fire, and fill their pots with water, whereunto they put a spoonful of meal, with a quantity of salt, and make pottage thereof, wherewith the master and all his servants live contented. But if the master be very hungry, he eateth all alone, and the servants are sometimes enforced to fast for the space of two or three days. And if the master intend to far somewhat more delicately, than he addeth thereto a little portion of swines flesh. I speak not this of the best of them, but of such as are of the mean sort. The governors and captains of the army, do sometimes bid the poorer sort to their tables: where they feed themselves so well, that they fast two or three days after. When they have fruits, Garlic, and Onions, they can well forbear all other meats. Proceeding forward to the battle, they put more confidence in their multitude, and with what great armies they assail their enemies, then either in the strength and valiantness of their soldiers, or in well instructing their army, and fight better a far of, then at hand: and therefore study how to cirumvent or enclose their enemies, and to assail them on the back half. They have many trumpeters, 
Instruments of war.  the which while they blow all at once, after their manner, make a marvelous strange noise. They have also another kind of instruments which they call Szurna: these they blow without ceasing for the space of an hour together, so tempering the same, and holding in the wind while they draw more, 
The Moscovites and Tartars apparel.  that the noise seemeth continually without intermission.  
They use all one manner of apparel: as long coats without pleyghtes, and with narrow sleeves, after the manner of the Hungarians. These the Christians use to button on the right side: and the Tartars (useing the like) button them on the left side. They wear red and short buskyns that reach not to their knees, and have the soles thereof defended with plates of Iron. In manner all their shirts are wrought with divers colours about the neck, and have the Collars and Ruffs beset with little round Baules like Beads, of Silver, or gilted Copper, and some time Pearls also. They gird themselves beneath the belly, even as low as their privy members, that they may seem more burly, which they greatly esteem, as do at this day the spaniards, Italians, and almains.  
The province of Moscovia is neither very large nor fruitful, 
The province of Moscovia.  forasmuch as the fertility is hindered with sandy ground, which either with to much dryness or moisture killeth the corn. Furthermore immoderate and sharp untemperateness of the air, while the cold of the winter overcometh the heat of the Sun, sometimes doth not suffer the corn to ripe. For the cold is there sometimes so extreme, 
Extreme cold.  that like as with us in summer by reason of heat, even so there by extreme cold, the earth hath many great chinks or breaches. Water also cast into the air, and spytle falling from ones mouth, are frozen before they touch the ground. I myself, when I came thither in the year 1526. saw the branches of fruitful trees withered by the cold of the winter before, which was so extreme, that many of their wagoners and carriers (whom they call Gonecz) were found frozen to death in their sleds. There were some that at the same time leading and driving their cattle from the next villages to moscovia, died by the way with their beasts, through the extremity of the cold. Furthermore the same year many players that were accustomed to wander about the country with dancing Bears, were found dead in the high ways. Wild Bears also, enforced thereto by famine, left the woods, and ran here and there into divers villages and houses: at whose coming while the men of the country forsook their houses and fled into the fields, many of them perished through the vehemency of the cold. Again it sometimes so chanceth that in Summer the heat is as extreme: 
Extreme heat in cold regions.  as in the year .1525. in the which almost all kinds of pulse and grain were scorched and burnt, and such a dearth of corn followed that drought, that that which before was bought for three Dengas, was afterward sold for twenty or thirty. Furthermore also, many villages, woods, and stacks of corn, were set on fire by the extreme heat: the smoke whereof so filled the region, that the eyes of many were sore hurt thereby. There arose also as it were a dark and thick mist without smoke, which so molested the eyes, that many lost their sight thereby. They sow and nourish the seeds of Melons with great diligence in certain raised beds mixed with dung, whereby they find a remedy both against extreme cold and heat. For if the heat exceed, they make certain rifts in the beds, as it were breathing places, lest the seeds should be suffocate with to much heat. And if the cold be extreme, it is tempered with the heat of the muck or dung.  
Their beasts are much less than ours, yet not all without horns, 
Little beasts.  as one hath written: For I have there seen Oxen, Kine, Goats, and Rams, all with horns.  

The city of moscovia or Mosca.  Not far from the city of Mosca, are certain monasteries, which a far of, seem like unto a city. They say that in this city is an incredible number of houses: and that the sixth year before my coming thither, the prince caused them to be numbered, and found them to be more than one and forty thousand & five hundred houses. The city is very large and wide, and also very slabby and miry: by reason whereof, it hath many bridges and causeyes.  
The air of the region is so wholesome, that beyond the springs of Tanais, 
Wholesome air.  especially towards the North, and a great part also towards the East, the pestilence hath not been heard of since the memory of man: Yet have they sometimes a disease in their bowels and heads, not much unlike unto the pestilence. This disease they call a heat: wherewith such as are taken, die within few days.  
Some writ that john the Duke of Moscovia, and Son of Basilius, 
A rich spoil.  under the pretence of religion, sacked & spoiled the city of Novogradia, and carried with him from thence to moscovia three hundred sleds laden with gold, silver, and precious stones, of the goods of the Archbishop, the merchants, citizens, and strangers. 
The Island of Solowki.  Solowki is an Island situate in the North sea, eight leagues from the continent between Duina and the province of Corela. How far it is distant from moscovia, can not be well known, by reason of many Fens. Marshes, woods, and desolate places lying in the way. Albeit, some say that it is not three hundred leagues from moscovia, and two hundred from Bieloiesero. 
Bieloiesero.  In this Island is made great plenty of salt: and it hath in it a monastery, into the which it is not lawful for any woman or virgin to enter. There is also great fishing for herring. They say that here the Sun at the summer Equinoctial, 
The length of the day.  shineth continually except two hours.  
Demetriowe, is a city with a Castle, distant from moscovia xii. leagues, declining from the West somewhat toward the north. By this runneth the river Lachroma, that runneth into the river of Sest. Sest also receiveth the river Dubna, which unladeth itself in Volga. And by the commodity of thus many rivers, many rich merchandise are brought without great labour or difficulty from the Caspian sea, by the river Volga to Moscovia, 

The trade from moscovia to the Caspian sea.  
Bieloiesero or the white lakes.   and divers other provinces and cities about the same.  
Bieloiesero, a city with a Castle, is situate at a lake of the same name. For Bieloiesero in the Moscovites tongue, signifieth a white lake. The city standeth not in the lake, as some have said. Yet is it so environed with marshes, that it may seem to be inexpugnable: In consideration whereof, the princes of Moscovia are accustomed to keep their treasure there. Bieloiesero is from moscovia, a hundred leagues, and as much from Novogradia the great. The lake itself, is xii leagues in length, and as much in breadth, and hath (as they say) three hundred rivers falling into it. The inhabitants of this place, have a peculiar language, although now in manner all speak the Moscovites tongue. The longest day here in the summer Equinoctial, is said to consist of xix hours. A man of great name and credit told me, that at the beginning of the spring, 
Diversity of temperament in small distance.  when the trees began now to be green, he went in post from moscovia to Bieloiesero: and passing over the river Volga, found the region there so covered with Ice and snow, that he was fain to dispatch the residue of his journey on steads. And although the winter be longer there, yet do the fruits wax ripe and are gathered even at the same time that they are in Moscovia. Within an arrow shot of the lake, there is an other lake that bringeth forth brimstone: 
A lake of brimstone.  which a certain river running out of the same, carrieth with it in great quantity, floating above the water like a scum, yet through the ignorance of the people, they have no commodity thereby.  

Exchange of furs for other ware.  The people that inhabit the regions, lying far North, and East from Moscovia, exchange their furs for apparel, Knives, needles, Spoons, Hatchets, and such other necessary wares: for they have not the use of gold and silver.   

The description of the regions, people, and rivers, lying North and East from Moscovia: as the way from moscovia to the river Petzora, and the province jugaria, or juhra, and from thence to the river Obi. Likewise the description of other countries and regions, even unto th'empire of the great Cham of Cathay.  
THE dominion of the prince of moscovia, reacheth far toward the East & North, unto the places which we will now describe. 
The dominion of the duke of Moscovia.  As concerning which thing, I translated a book that was presented unto me in the Moscovites tongue, & have here made a brief rehearsal of the same, I will first therefore describe the journey from moscovia to Petzora, and so to jugaria and Obi. 
Volochda. werste. Vstiug.  From Moscovia to the city of Vuolochda, are numbered fifty werstes, one wert containing almost the space of an Italian mile. From Vuolochda to Vstiug, toward the right hand, descending with the course of the river of Vuolochda and Suchana with whom it joineth, are counted five hundred werstes, where within two werstes of the town called Strelze, and hard by the city of Vstiug, Suchana joineth: Jug which runneth from the South, from whose mouth, unto the springs of the same, are numbered five hundred werstes.  
Note that whereas here before the author numbereth but fifty werstes from Moscovia to Vuolochda, it seemeth that the place is corrupted by the Printers mistaking one word for an other, as, Quinquaginta, which is fifty, for Quingenta, which is five hundred. For the distance is no less from moscovia to Vuolochda, then is from Vuolochda to Vstiug, which is five hundred werstes.  
But Suchana and jug, after they join together, 
Suchana. jug. So called of his swift and pleasant stream.  lose their first names, and make both one river, named Dwina, by the which, the passage to the city of Colmogor containeth five hundred werstes, from whence in the space of six days journey, Dwina entereth into the North Ocean at six mouths: and the greatest part of this journey consisteth by Navigation: for by land from Vuolochda unto Colmogor, passing over the river Vuaga, are a thousand werstes. Not far from Colmogor, the river Pienega, running from the East on the right hand, for the space of seven hundred wersts, falleth into Dwina. 
Pienega.  From Dwina by the river Pienega, by the space of two hundred werstes, they come to a place called Nicolai, from whence within half a wert, 
Nicolai.  ships have passage into the river Kuluio, 
Kuluio.  which hath his original from a lake of the same name toward the North, from whose springs is eight days voyage to the mouth of the same, where it entereth into the Ocean.  
Sailing by the coasts of the right hand of the sea, they pass by the regions of Stanuwische, Calunczscho, and Apnu: 
The regions by the North sea.  And sailing about the promontory or cape of Chorogoski, Nosz, Stanuwische, Camenckh, and Tolstickh, they come at the length into the river Mezen, and from thence in the space of six days, to a village of the same name, standing in the mouth of the river Pieza, 
Pieza.  by the which again ascending toward the left hand and Summer East, they come to the river Piescoia: 
Piescoia.  from whence sailing for the space of five werstes, they come into two lakes, in the which are seen two ways▪ whereof one on the right side, goeth to the river Rubicho, by the which they pass to the river Czircho. Other, by an other and shorter way, 
Rubicho.  bring their ships from the lake directly into Czircho: from whence, 
Czircho.  except they be hindered by tempest, they come in the space of three weeks to the river and mouth of Czilma, flowing into the great river Petzora, 
Czilma. Petzora.  which in that place is two werstes in breadth. Sailing from hence, they come in the space of six days to the Town & castle of Pustoosero, near unto the which, 
Pustoosero.  Petzora entereth into the North Ocean at six mouths. The inhabitants of this place, are men of simple wit: they received the faith of Christ, and were baptized in the year. M.D.xviii.  
From the mouth of Czilma unto the mouth of the river Vssa, going by Petzora, 
Vssa.  is one months viage. Vssa hath his springs in the mountain Poyas Semnoi, being on the left hand toward the summer East, & springeth out of a great stone of the same mountain, 
Cingulus mundi.  called Camen Bolschoi. From the springs of Vssa to the mouths of the same, are numbered more than a thousand Werstes. Furthermore, Petzora runneth from this south winter part, from whence ascending from the mouths of Vssa, unto the mouths of the river Stzuchogora, is three weeks viage. They that described this viage, said that they rested between the mouths of the rivers of Stzuchogora and Potzscheriema, 
Stzuchogora.  and left their victuals there which they brought with them from Russia. 
Potzscheriema.  Beyond the rivers of Petzora and Stzuchogora toward the mountain Camenipoias', 
Camenipoias'.  and the sea with the Islands there about, and the Castle of Pustoosero, are divers and innumerable nations, 
Samoged.  which by one common name are called Samoged (that is) such as eat themselves. 
Fowls and beasts.  They have great increase of fowls, birds, and divers kinds of beasts: as Sables, Marterns, Bevers, Otters, Hermelines, Squirrels: and in the Ocean the beast called Mors: Also Uesse, white Bears, Wolves, Hares, Equiwoduani, great Whales, and fish called Semfi, with divers other. 
Wild people.  The people of these nations come not to Moscovia: For they are wild, and flee the company and society of other men.  
From the mouths of Stzuchogora, sailing up the river unto Poiassa, 
Poiassa.  Artawische, Cameni, and Poiassa the greater, is three weeks viage. Furthermore, the ascending to the mount Camen, is three days journey: from the which, descending, 
Camen. Artawischa. Sibut. Lepin.  they come to the river Artawischa, and from thence to the river Sibut, from whence they pass to the Castle of Lepin, and from Lepin to the river Sossa. The people that inhabit the region by this river, are called Vuogolici. Leaving Sossa on the right hand, 
Sossa. Obi. Kitaisko.  they come to the great river Obi, that springeth out of the lake Kitaisko, the which with all the haste they could make, they could scarcely pass over in one day, the river being of such breadth that it reacheth fourscore Werstes. The people also that dwell about this river, 
Vuogolici.  are called Vuogolici and Vgritzschi. From the Castle of Obca, ascending by the river of Oby, unto the river Irtische, into the which Sossa entereth, is three months journey. In these places are two Castles named jerom and Tumen, 
Irtische. jerom. Tumen.  kept by certain Lords called Knesi juhorski, being tributaries to the great Duke of Moscovia, as they say. here are divers kinds of beasts and furs.  
From the mouth of the river Irtische to the Castle of Grustina, is two months journey: from whence to the lake Kitai, 
Grustina.  
Kitai.  by the river Oby (which I said to have his springs in this lake) is more than three months journey. From this lake come many black men, lacking the use of common speech. 
Black men without speech.  They bring with them divers wares, and especially pearls and precious stones, which they sell to the people called Grustintzi and Serponowtzi. These have their name of the Castle Serponow, 
Serponow. Lucomorya.  situate in the mountains of Lucomorya, beyond the river Obi. They say that to the men of Lucomorya, chanceth a marvelous thing and incredible: For they affirm, 
Men that yearly die and revive.  that they die yearly at the xxvii day of November, being the feast of Saint George among the Moscovites: and that at the next spring about the xxiiii day of April, they revive again as do Frogs.  
With these also, the people of Grustintzi and Serponowtzi, 
A strange trade of merchandise.  exercise a new and strange kind of trade: For when the accustomed time of their dying, or rather of sleeping, approacheth, they leave their wares in certain places appointed, which the Grustintzi and Serponowtzi carry away, leaving other wares of equal value in their places: which if the dead men at the time of their revyuing perceive to be of unequal price, they require their own again: by reason whereof, much strife and fight is between them.  
From the river of Obi descending toward the left hand, 
Obi. Calami,  are the people called Calami, which came thither from Obiowa and Pogosa. Beneath Obi, about Aurea Anus (that is, the golden old wife) are the rivers Sossa, Beres, Vua, & Danadim, 
Rivers.  all which spring out of the mountains Camen, Bolschega, Poiassa, and the rocks joining to the same. All the nations that inhabit from these rivers to Aurea Anus, are subject to the prince of Moscovia.  

Aurea Anus.  Aurea Anus. called in the Moscovites tongue, Slata Baba, is an idol, 
Obdora.  at the mouths of Obi in the province of Obdora, standing on the furthest bank toward the sea. Along by the banks of Obi, and the rivers near there about, are here and there many castles and fortresses: all the lords whereof, are subject to the prince of moscovia, as they say. They say also, or rather fable, that the idol called Aurea Anus, is an image like unto an old wife, having a child in her lap, and that there is now seen another infant, which they say to be her nephew: Also, that there are certain instruments that make a continual sound like the noise of Trumpets, the which, if it so be, I think it to be by reason of the wind, blowing continually into the hollow places of those instruments.  

Cousin.  The river Cousin falleth out of the mountains into Lucomoria: In the mouth of this is a castle, whither from the springs of the great river Cousin, 
Cassima.  is two months voyage. Furthermore, from the springs of the same river, the river Cassima hath his original, which running through Lucomoria, 
Tachnin.  falleth into the great river Tachnin, beyond the which (as is said) dwell men of prodigious shape, of whom, some are overgrown with hear like wild beasts, 
People of monstrous shape.  other have heads like dogs, and their faces in their breasts, without necks, and with long hands also, and without feet. 

A fish like a man.  
Pliny writeth of the like fish.   There is likewise in the river Tachnin, a certain fish, with head, eyes, nose, mouth, hands, feet, and other members utterly of human shape, and yet without any voice, and pleasant to be eaten, as are other fishes.  
All that I have hitherto rehearsed, I have translated out of the said journey which was delivered me in the Moscovites tongue: In the which, perhaps some things may seem fabulous, and in manner incredible, as of the dumb men, and the dead, reviving, the Aurea Anus also, and the monstrous shapes of men, with the fish of human form: whereof, although I have made diligent inquisition, yet could I know nothing certain of any that had seen the same with their eyes: nevertheless, to give further occasion to other to search the truth of these things, I have thought good to make mention hereof.  
Noss in the Moscovites tongue signifieth a Nose, and therefore they call all capes or points, that reach into the sea, by the same name.  
The mountains about the river of Petzora, 
Mountains.  are called Semnoi Poyas, or Cingulus mundi, that is, the girdle of the world, or of the earth.  
Kithai is a lake, of whom the great Cane of Cathay, 
The great Chane of Cathay.  whom the moscovians call Ezar Kithaiski, hath his name: For Chan in the Tartars language signifieth, A King.  
The places of Lucomoria, near unto the sea, are salvage, full of woods, and inhabited without any houses. And albeit, that the author of this journey, said, 
Lucomoria.  that many nations of Lucomoria are subject to the prince of moscovia, yet for as much as the kingdom of Tumen is near thereunto, 
Tumen.  whose prince is a Tartar, and named in their tongue, Tumenski Czar, that is, a king in Tumen, and hath of late done great damage to the prince of Moscovia: it is most like that these nations should rather be subject unto him.  
Near unto the river Petzora (whereof mention is made in this journey) is the city and castle of Papin, or Papinowgorod, 
Petzora. Papin.  whose inhabitants are named Papini, and have a private language, differing from the Moscovites. 
High mountains, supposed to be Hyperborei and Rhiphei.  Beyond this river are exceeding high mountains, reaching even unto the banks, whose ridge's or tops, by reason of continual winds, are in manner utterly barren without grass or fruits. And although in divers places they have divers names, yet are they commonly called Cingulus mundi, that is, the world. In these mountains do jerfalcons breed, whereof I have spoken before. There grow also Cedar trees, among the which are found the best and blackest kind of Sables: and only these mountains are seen in all the dominions of the prince of moscovia, which perhaps are the same that the old writers call Rhipheos, or Hyperboreos, so named of the Greek word, Hyper, that is, Under, and Boreas, that is, the North: for by reason they are covered with continual snow and frost, they can not without great difficulty be travailed, and reach so far into the North, that they make the unknown land of Engreonland. The Duke of Moscovia, Basilius the son of john, 
Engreonland.  sent on a time two of his captains, named Simeon Pheodorowitz Kurbski, and Knes Peter Vschatoi, to search the places beyond these mountains, and to subdue the nations thereabout. Kurbski was yet alive at my being in moscovia, and declared unto me that he spent xvii days in ascending the mountain, and yet could not come to the top thereof, which in their tongue is called Stolp (that is) a pillar. 
Stolp.  This mountain is extended into the Ocean unto the mouths of the rivers of Dwina and Petzora. But now having spoken thus much of the said journey, I will return to the dominions of moscovia, with other regions lying Eastward and South from the same, toward the mighty Empire of Cathay. 
Cathay.  But I will first speak somewhat briefly of the province of Rezan, and the famous river of Tanais.  

The fruitful province of Rezan. jaroslaw.  The province of Rezan, situate between the rivers of Occa and Tanais, hath a city builded of wood, not far from the bank of Occa: there was in it a Castle named jaroslaw, whereof there now remaineth nothing but tokens of the old ruin. Not far from that city, the river Occa maketh an Island named Strub, which was sometime a great Dukedom, whose prince was subject to none other. This province of Rezan, is more fruitful than any other of the provinces of moscovia: insomuch that in this (as they say) every grain of wheat bringeth forth two, and sometimes more ears: whose stalks or straws grow so thick that horses can scarcely go through them, or quails flee out of them. 
honey.  There is great plenty of honey, fishes, fowls, birds, and wild beasts. The fruits also do far exceed the fruits of Moscovia. The people are bold and warlike men.   

Of the famous river of Tanais.  
FRom moscovia unto the Castle of jaroslaw, and beyond for the space of almost xxiiii. leagues, runneth the river of Tanais, at a place called Donco, where the merchants that trade to Asoph, 
Donco. Asoph. Capha. Constantinople.  Capha, and Constantinople, freight their ships: and this for the most part in Autumpe, being a rayney time of the year. For Tanais here at other times of the year, doth not so abound with water, as to bear ships of any burden. This famous river of Tanais, divideth Europe from Asia, 
Tanais divideth Europe from Asia. The springs of Tanais.  and hath his original or springs almost viii leagues from the city of Tulla, toward the South, inclining somewhat toward the East, and not out of the Riphean mountains, as some have written: But out of a great lake named Iwanwosero (that is) the lake of john, 
A great lake.  being in length and breadth about .1500. Werstes, in a wood which some call Okonitzkilles, and other name it jepipbanoulies'. And out of this lake, spring the two great rivers of Schat and Tanais. Schat toward the West receiving into it the river of Vppa, 
The river Schat.  runneth into the river of Occa between the West and the North: But Tanais at the first runneth directly East, and continueth his course between the kingdoms of Casan and Astrachan within six or seven leagues of Volga, 
Casan. Astrachan.  and from thence bending toward the South, maketh the fens or marshes of Meotis. 
Meotis. Tulla.  Furthermore, next unto his springs, is the city of Tulla: and upon the bank of the river, almost three leagues above the mouths of the same, is the city of Asoph, which was first called Tanais. Four days journey above this, is a town called Achas, situate hard by the same river, which the Moscovites call Don. 
Achas. Fruitful regions about Tanais.  I can not sufficiently praise this river for the exceeding abundance of good fishes, and fairness of the regions on both sides the banks, with plenty of wholesome herbs and sweet roots, beside divers and many fruitful trees, growing in such coomly order as though they had been set of purpose in gardens or orchards. There is also in manner every where such plenty of wild beasts, 
Plenty of wild beasts.  that they may easily be slain with arrows: Insomuch that such as travail by those regions, shall stand in need of none other thing to maintain their life, but only fire and salt. In these parts, 
Fire and salt.  is no observation of miles, but of days journeys. But as far as I could conjecture, from the fountains or springs of Tanais, 
Where Tanais is first navigable.  unto the mouths of the same, journeying by land, are almost fourscore leagues. And sailing from Donco (from whence I said that Tanais was first navigable) in scarcely twenty days voyage, they come to the city of Asoph, tributary to the Turks: 
Asoph.  which is (as they say) five days journey from the straight of Taurica, otherwise called Precop. In this city is a famous mart town, unto the which resort many merchants of divers nations, and from divers parts of the world. 
The mart of Asoph.  For, that all nations may the gladlier have recourse thither, free liberty of buying and selling is granted unto all: 
Liberty allureth strangers.  and that without the city every man may freely use his own and accustomed manner of living, without punishment.  

The altars of Alexander and Cesar.  Of the altars of great Alexander and julius Cesar, which many writers make mention of in this place, or of their ruins, I could have no certain knowledge of thinhabitants or any other that had oftentimes trayvayled these places. Furthermore, the soldiers which the prince of Moscovia maintaineth there yearly to oppress th'incursions of the Tartars, being of me demanded hereof, answered that they never saw or heard of any such thing. Nevertheless they said, that about the mouths of Tanais the less, four days journey from Asoph, near unto a place called Sewerski, by the holy mountains, they saw certain images of stone and marble. 
The holy mountains. Tanais the less.  Tanais the less, hath his springs in the Dukedom of Sewerski, whereof it is called Donetz Sewerski, and falleth into Tanais, three days journey above Asoph. But such as journey from moscovia to Asoph by land, 
From moscovia to Asoph.  they, passing over Tanais about the old and ruinated town of Donco, do somewhat turn from the South to the East: In the which place, if a right line be drawn from the mouths of Tanais to the springs of the same, 
Moscovia in Asia and not in Europe.  Moscovia shallbe found to be in Asia, and not in Europe.   

More directly from moscovia to Cathay.  
THe great and large province of Permia, is distant from moscovia two hundred and fifty, 
The province of Permia.  or (as some sai) three hundred leagues, directly between the East and North: and hath a city of the same name by the river Vischora, which runneth ten leagues beneath Camam. The journey by land can scarcely be travailed thither but in winter, 
marishes in summer.  by reason of many rivers, marshes▪ and fens. But in summer, this journey is dispatched with more facility in boats or small ships by Vuolochda Vstiug, and the river Vitzechda, which runneth into Duina xii leagues from Vstiug. But they that go from Permia to Vstiug, 
Duina. Vstiug,  must sail up the river Vischora against the course of the stream: and passing over certain rivers, sometimes also conveying their boats into other rivers by land, they come at the length to Vstiug, three hundred leagues distant from the city of Permia.  
There is small use of bread in this province. 
Tribute Furs and Horses.  For their yearly tribute, they pay to the Prince furs and horses. They have a private language, and letters of their own, which one Stephen a Bishop (who confirmed them yet wavering in the faith) did invent. For before, being yet infants in the faith of Christ, they slew and fleyde an other Bishop that was appointed to instruct them. This Stephen afterward when Demetrius the son of john reigned, was taken for a Saint among the Ruhens. Of these people there yet remain many idolaters here and there in the woods, 
monks and hermits.  whom the monks and hermits that go thither, do not cease to convert from their vain error. In the winter they journey to Artach, as they do in many places of Russia. Artach, 
Patentes.  are certain long patents of wood of almost six handfuls in length, which they make fast to their feet with Latchets, and therewith perform their journeys with great celerity. 
Marcus Panlus writeth that these dogs are almost as big as Asses: & that they use six to one sled.  They use for this purpose great Dogs in the stead of other beasts, with the which they carry their farthels on sleds, as other do with Hearts in other places, as we will further declare hereafter. They say that the province toward the East confineth with the province called Tumen, pertaining to the Tartars.  
The situation of the province of jugaria, is apparent by that which we have said before. 
jugaria.  The Moscovites call it juhra with an aspiration: and call the people juhrici.  
This is that jugaria from whence the Hungarians came in time past, possessed Pannonia, 
Hungaria. Pannonia. Attila.  and under the conduct of Attila, subdued many provinces of Europe: wherein the Moscovites do greatly glory, that a nation subject to them, invaded and wasted a great part of Europe. Georgius parvus, a Greek borne, and a man of reputation with the Prince of Moscovia, willing to ascribe to the right of his Prince the great Dukedom of Lithuania, and the kingdom of Polony▪ with certain other Dominions, told me that the juhgarici or juhgarie, being subjects to the great Duke of Moscovia, came forth of their own country, and first inhabited the regions about the Fens of Meotis, 
The higher or 〈…〉 called Au●tria. Polony.  and then Pannonie. which was afterward called Hungary, by the river of Danubius: Also that in fine they possessed the region of Moravia, so named of the river: and likewise Pollonie, so called of Polle, which signifieth a plain. Furthermore that Buda was so called after the name of the brother of Attila. 
Buda.  They say also that the juhgarie use the same tongue that do the Hungarians: the which whether it be true or not, I do not know. For although I have made diligent inquisition to know the truth hereof, yet could I find no man of that region with whom my servant, being expert in the Hungarian tongue, might speak. They also pay furs for their tributes to the Prince of Moscovia. 
Furs. Pearls, & precious stones.  And albeit that pearls and precious stones, are brought from thence to moscovia, yet are they not gathered in their Ocean, but in other places: especially about the coast of the Ocean, near unto the mouths of Duina.  
The province of Sibier, confineth with Permia, and Vuiathka: the which, 
Sibier.  whether it have any castles or cities, I do not yet certainly know: In this, the river jaick hath his original, and falleth into the Caspian sea. They say that this region is desert, because it lieth so near the Tartars: or that if it be in any part inhabited, 
Aspreolos, I think to be Marterns: yet some think them to be Squirrels, Gesnerus writeth that the kings of the Tartars, have their tents covered without with the skimes of Lions: & within, with the skins of Sables and Ermines.  the same to be possessed of the Tartar Schichmamai. Thinhabitantes have a peculiar language: and have their chief gains by the furs of Marterns, which in fairness and greatness, excel all the furs of that kind that are found in any other provinces. Yet could I have no great plenty of them in moscovia at my being there.  
Note that long after the writing of this history, at Richard Chancellor his first bring in moscovia, Duke john Vasiliviche that now reigneth, subdued all the Tartars with their regions and provinces, even unto the great city and mart town of Astrachan & the Caspian sea. At the same time also, there was in the Duke's Court an ambassador that came from this province of Sibier, who declared that his father had been sent Ambassador to the great Chan of Cathay, and that the great city of Cambalu, where the great Chan keepeth his Court in winter, was in manner destroyed by Necromancy and Magical Arts, wherein the Cathyans are very expert as writeth Marcus Paulus Venetus.  
There was also at the same time th'ambassador of the king of Pertia called the great Sophy. This Ambassador was appareled all in Scarlet, and spoke much to the Duke in the behalf of our men, of whose kingdom and trade he was not ignorant.  
The people called Czeremisse, 
Czeremisse.  dwell in the woods beneath Novogradia the lower. They have a peculiar language, and are of the sect of Machumet. They were sometime subject to the king of Casan: but the greater part of them are now subject to the prince of Moscovia. Many of them at my being there, were brought to moscovia, as suspected of rebellion. This nation doth inhabit a large region without houses from Vuiathka and Vuolochda, to the river of Rama. All the nation, 
Habitation without houses.  aswell women as men, are very swift of foot, and expert archers: wherein they so delight, that their bows are in manner never out of their hands: and give their children no meat until they it the mark they shoot at. Two leagues distant from Novogradia the lower, were many houses to the similitude of a city or town, where they were accustomed to make salt. 
Salt.  These a few years since being burnt of the Tartars, were restored by the commandment of the prince.  
Mordwa, are people inhabiting by the river of Volga on the south bank beneath Novogradia the lower, and are in all things like unto the Czeremisses, but that they have more houses. And here endeth Thempire of the Moscovites.  
Note here that Mathias of Michou, in his book of Sarmatia Asiatica, writeth that the dominion of the Duke of Moscovia reacheth from the northwest to the southeast five hundred miles of Germany, which are more than leagues: For they affirm that a Germane mile is more than three English miles.   

Of the Tartars.  
WE will now add hereunto somewhat of the people confining with the Moscovites toward the East: 
The Tartars of Casan.  of the which the Tartars of Casan are the first. But before we speak of them particularly, we will first rehearse somewhat of their manners and customs in general.  
The Tartars are divided into companies, which they call Hordas, 
Horda.  of the which the Horda of the Savolhenses is the chief in fame and multitude: For it is said that the other Hordas had their offspring and original of this. And albeit that every Horda hath his peculiar name, as the Savolhenses, Precropenses, and Nahais, with divers other, being all Machumetans, yet do they take it evil, and count it reproach to be called Turks: but will themselves to be called Besermani, by the which name also the Turks desire to be called. 
Besermani.   
And as the Tartars inhabit many provinces reaching far on every side, even so in manners and order of living do they not agree in all things. 
The stature of the Tartars.  They are men of mean stature, with broad and fat faces, hollow eyed, with rough and thick beards, and poulde heads. Only the noble men have long hear, and that exceeding black, which they wreath on both sides their ears. They are strong of body, and stout of mind, prone to leacherye, and that unnatural. They eat the flesh of Horses, camels, and other beasts, except Hogs, from which they abstain by a law. 

They abstain from hogs flesh.  
Abstinence.   They can so abide fasting and hunger, that they sometime forbear meat and sleep for the space of four days, occupied nevertheless about their necessary affairs. Again, when they get any thing to devour, they ingorge themselves beyond measure, 
voracity.  and with that surfect in manner recompense their former abstinence. And being thus oppressed with labour and meat, they sleep continually for the space of three or four days, without doing any manner of work or labour: during which time the Livons and Moscovites, into whose dominions they are accustomed to make their incursions, assail them unwares, thus oppressed with meat and sleep, lying scattered here and there out of order without watch or ward. Also if when they ride, they be molested with hunger and thirst, they use to let their horse's blood, 
So do the Turks.  and with drinking the same, satisfy their present necessity, and affirm their horses to be the better thereby. And because they all wander in unknown places, 
jorneing by the pole star.  they use to direct their journeys by th'aspect of the stars, and especially of the pole star, which in their tongue they call Selesnikoll, 
Mare's milk.  (that is) an Iron nail. They greatly delight in Mare's milk, and believe that it maketh men strong and fat. They eat herbs very much, and especially such as grow about Tanais. 
Horse flesh eaten.  Few of them use salt. When their kings distribute any victuals among them, they are accustomed to give one horse or cow to forty men. Of the slain beast, the bowels and tripes are reserved for the chief men and captains. 
Cleanly.  These they heat at the fire, until they may shake out the dung, and then devour them greedily. They suck and lick, not only their fingers imbrued with fat, but also their knives, & sticks wherewith they scrape the dung from the guts.  
The heads of horses are counted delicate dishes with them, as are Boors heads with us, 
Horse heads dainty meats The Tartars horses.  and are reserved only for the chief men. Their horses (whereof they have great abundance) are but small, and with short necks: but very strong, and such as can well away with labour and hunger. These they feed with the branches and barks or rinds of trees, and the roots of herbs and weeds, whereby they accustom them to hard feeding, and exercise them to continual labour: by reason whereof (as say the Moscovites) their horses are swifter and more durable than any other: these kind of horses, they call Pachmat. They have none other saddles and styrrops then of wood, 
Saddles and styrrops of wood.  except such as they either buy of the Christians, or take from them by violence. Lest their horse backs should be hurt with their saddelles, they underlay them with grass and leaves of trees. They also pass over rivers on horseback. But if when they flee, they fear the pursuing of their enemies, then casting away their saddles, apparel, and all other impediments, reserving only their armour and weapons, they flee amain, and with great celerity.  
Their women use the same kind of apparel that do the men, without any difference, 
The Tartars women.  except that they cover their heads with linen veils, & use linen hose much like unto mariners slops. When their queens come a broad, they are accustomed to cover their faces. The other multitude of the common sort that liveth here and there in the fields, have their apparel made of sheeps skins, which they change not until they be worn & torn in fytters. They tarry not long in one place, judging it a great misery so to do. Insomuch that when they are angry with their children, the greatest curse that they can give them, is that they may remain perpetually in one place, 
The Tartars curse.  & draw the styntch of their own filthiness as do the Christians. When they have consumed the pasture in one place, they go to an other with their droves of cat-tail, and their wives and children, whom they ever carry about with them in Wagons: albeit the Tartars that dwell in cities and towns, use an other order of living.  
If they be enclosed with any dangerous war, 
No justice among the Tartars.  they place their wives, children, and old folks, in the savest places. There is no justice among them. For if any man stand in need of any thing, he may without punishment take it a way from an other. If any complain to the judge of the violence and wrong done unto him, the offender denieth not the crime, but sayeth that he could not lack that thing. Then the judge is wont to give this sentence: If thou also shalt have need of any thing, do the like to other. Some say they do not steal: But whether they steal or not, let other judge. They are surely a theevyshe kind of people, 
The Tartas are thieves and poor.  and very poor, living only by robbing of other, and stealing away other men's cattle, and violently also carrying away the men themselves, whom either they sell to the Turks, or proffer them to be redeemed by ransom, 
They rejoice in spoiling.  reserving only the young wenches. They seldom assault cities or castles, but burn and waste towns and villages: Insomuch that they so please themselves herein, that they think they have so much the more enlarged their Empire, in how much they have wasted and made desolate many provinces. And although they be most impatient of rest and quietness, yet do they not kill or destroy one an other, except their kings be at dissension between themselves. If any man be slain in any fray or quarrel, and the autchours of the mischief be taken, only their horse, harness, weapons, and apparel, are taken from them, and they dismissed. So that the murderer by the loss of a vile Horse or a Bow, is discharged of the judge with these words: Get thee hence, and go about thy business. They have no use of gold and silver, except only a few merchants: but exercise exchange of ware for ware. And if it so chance that by selling of such things as they have stolen, they get any money of their borderers, they buy therewith certain apparel and other necessaries of the Moscovites. The regions of their habitations (the field Tartars I mean) are not lymitted with any bounds or borders. 
The field Tartars.  There was on a time a certain fat Tarter taken prisoner of the Moscovites: 
A meery tale.  to whom, when the Prince said, how art thou so fat thou dog, sith thou hast not to eat? the Tartar answered, Why should not I have to eat, sith I possess so large a land from the East to the West, whereby I may be abundantly nourished? But thou mayest rather seem to lack, sith thou inhabytest so small a portion of the world, and doest daily strive for the same.  
Casan is a kingdom, also a city and a castle of the same name, situate by the river Volga, on the further bank, 
Casan.  almost threescore and ten leagues beneath Novogradia the lower. Along by the course of Volga toward the East and South, it is termined with desert fields: toward the Summer East, it confineth with the Tartars, called Schibanski▪ and Kosatzki. The king of this province is able to make an army of thirty thousand men, especially footmen, of the which, 
The king of Casan.  the Czeremisse and Czubaschi are most expert Archers. 
Archers. Waryners.  The Czubaschi are also cunning Mariners. The city of Casan is threescore leagues distant from the principal castle Vuiathka. Furthermore, Casan in the Tartars language, signifieth a brazen pot boiling. 
The town Tartars.  These Tartars are more civil than the other, for they dwell in houses, till the ground, and exercise the trade of merchandise: They were of late subdued by Basilius the great Duke of Moscovia▪ and had their King assigned them at his arbitrement: But shortly after they rebelled again, and associate with other Tartars, invaded the region of moscovia, 
Moscovia invaded by the Tartars.  spoiled and wasted many cities and towns, and led away innumerable captives, even from the city of moscovia, which they possessed for a time, 
The prince of moscovia tributary to the Tartars.  and had utterly destroyed the same, if it had not been for the valeauntnesse of the Almain Gunnners, which kept the castle with great ordinance. They also put Duke Basilius to flight, and caused him to make a letter of his own hand to Machmetgirei their King, to acknowledge himself for a perpetual tributary to them: whereupon they dissolved the siege, and gave the Moscovites free liberty to redeem their captives & goods, and so departed. But Basilius not long able to abide this contumely and dishonour, 
Duke Basilius army against the Tartars.  after that he had put to death such as by flying at the first encountering were the cause of this overthrow: assembled an army of an hundred and fourscore thousand men shortly after, in the year .1523. and sent forward his army, under the conduct of his Lieutenant, and therewith an Herald at arms to bid battle to Machmetgirei the King of Casan, with words in this effect. The last year, like a thief and robber, without bidding of battle, thou didst privily oppress me, wherefore I now challenge thee, once again to prove the fortune of war, if thou mistrust not thine own power. To this the King answered, that there were many ways open for him to invade moscovia: and that the wars have no less respect to the commodity of time and place, then of armure or strength: and that he would take the advantage thereof, when and where it should seem best to him, and not to other. With which words Basilius being greatly accensed, and burning with desire of revenge, invaded the kingdom of Casan: whose King being stricken with sudden fear at the approach of so terrible an army, assigned the governance of his kingdom to the young King of Taurica his Neuie, while he himself went to require aid of the Emperor of the Turks. 
The king of Casan submitteth himself.  But in ●ine, the King of Casan submitted himself upon certain conditions of peace, which the Moscovites did the gladlier accept for that time, because their victuals failed them to maintain so great a multitude. But whereas Duke Basilius himself was not present at this last expedition, he greatly suspected Palitzki the Lieutenant of the army to be corrupted with bribes, to proceed no further. In this mean time, the King of Casan sent Ambassadors to Basilius to entreat of peace, whom I saw in the Duke's court at my being there: but I could perceive no hope of peace to be between them. For even then, Basilius to endamage the Casans, 
The Island of merchants  translated the mart to Novogradia, which before was accustomed to be kept in the Island of merchants, near unto the city of Casan: Commanding also under pain of grievous punishment, that none of his subjects should resort to the Island of merchants: thinking that this translation of the mart should greatly have endamaged the Casans: and that only by taking away their trade of salt (which they were accustomed to buy of the Moscovites at that mart) they should have been compelled to submission. But the Moscovites themselves felt no less inconvenience hereby then did the Casans, by reason of the dearth and scarceness that followed hereof, of all such things as the Tartars were accustomed to bring thither by the river of Volga, from the Caspian sea, 

The Caspian sea.  
Persia. Armenia. Astrachan.   the kingdoms of Persia and Armenia, and the mart town of Astrachan: especially the great number of most excellent fishes that are taken in Volga, both on the hither and further side of Casan.  
But having said thus much of the wars between the prince of moscovia and the Tartars of Casan, we will now proceed to speak somewhat of the other Tartars, inhabiting the regions toward the Southeast, and the Caspian sea.  
Next beyond the Tartars of Casan, 
The Tartars near to the Caspian sea. Nogai.  are the Tartars called Nagai or Nogai, which inhabit the regions beyond Volga, about the Caspian sea at the river jaick, running out of the province of Sibier. These have no kings but Dukes. In our time, three brethren devyding the provinces equally between them, 
The possession of three brethren.  possessed those Dukedoms. The first of them named Schidack, possesseth the city of Scharaitzick, beyond the river of Rha or Volga, toward the East, with the region confining with the river jaick. The second called Cossum, enjoyeth all the land that lieth between the rivers of Kaman, jaick, and Volga. The third brother named Schichmamai, possesseth part of the province of Sibier, and all the region about the same. Schichmamai, is as much to say by interpretation, as holy or mighty. And in manner all these regions are full of woods, except that that lieth toward Scharaitz, which consisteth of plains and fields.  
Between the rivers of Volga and jaick, about the Caspian sea, there sometimes inhabited the kings called Sawolhenses. 
The kings called Sawolhenses.  Demetrius Danielis (a man among these Barbarians of singular faith & gravity) told us of a marvelous & in manner incredible thing, that is seen among these Tartars. And that his father being sent by the prince of moscovia to the king of Sawolhense, saw while he was in that legacy, a certain seed in that Island somewhat less & rounder than the seeds of Melones: Of the which being hid in the ground, there groweth a fruit or plant very like a Lamb, of the height of five spans: and is therefore called in their tongue Boranetz, which signifieth a little Lamb. 
A marvelous fruit like a lamb.  For it hath the head, eyes, ears, and all other parts like unto a Lamb newly eyved: with also a very thine skin, wherewith divers of the inhabitants of those regions are accustomed to live their caps and hats, and other tyrements for their heads. Many also confirmed in our presence, that they had seen these skins. He said furthermore, that that plant (if it may be called a plant) hath blood, and no flesh, but hath in the stead of flesh, a certain substance like unto the flesh of Crevishes. The hoofs also are not of horn, as are the Lambs, but covered with hear in the same form. The root cleaveth to the navel or midst of the belly: the plant or fruit liveth until all the grass & herbs growing about it, being eaten, the root withereth for lack of nourishment. They say that it is very sweet to be eaten, and is therefore greatly desired, and sought for of the Wolves, and other ravening beasts. And albeit I esteem all that is said of this plant to be fabulous, yet forasmuch as it hath been told me of credible persons, I have thought good to make mention hereof.  
Of this strange fruit Mandevile maketh mention, where in the lxxxiiii Chapter of his Book, 
Wandevile.  he writeth thus: Now shall I say of some lands, countries, and Isles that are beyond the land of Cathay: therefore whoso goeth from Cathay to India the high and the low, he shall go through a Kingdom that men call Cadissen, and is a great land. There groweth a manner of fruit, as it were Gourds, and when it is ripe, m●n cut it asunder, and find therein a beast, as it were of flesh, bone, and blood, as it were a little Lamb, without wool, and men eat that beast, and the fruit also, which is a great marvel: nevertheless, I said unto them, that I held that for no marvel, for I said, that in my country are trees that bear fruit, 
Barnacles of the Orkeneys.  that become birds fleeing, which are good to be eaten, and that that falleth into the water, liveth, and that that falleth on the earth, dieth: And they had great marvel of this. etc.  
From the prince of Schidacke, proceeding twenty days journey toward the East, are the people which the Moscovites call jurgenci, 

Barack Soltan.  
Cathay.   whose prince is Barack Soltan, brother to the great Chan of Cathay. In ten days journey from Barack Soltan, they come to Bebeid Chan. And this is that great Chan of Cathay.  
Names of dignities among the Tartars, are these, Chan, signifieth a King: Soltan, the son of a King: Bij, a Duke: Mursa, the son of a Duke: Olboud, a noble man, or counsellor: Olboadulu, the son of a noble man: Seid, the high priest: Ksi, a private person.  
The names of offices, are these, Vlan, the second dignity to the King: for the Kings of the Tartars have four principal men, whose counsel they use in all their weighty affairs: Of these, the first is called Schirni: the second, Barni: the third, Gargni: the fourth, Tzipsan. And to have said thus much of the Tartars, it shall suffice.  
Marcus Paulus writeth, that the great Chan is called Chan Cublai, that is, the great King of Kings, as the great turk writeth himself in like manner, as I saw in a letter written by him of late in the city of Ragusa, in the which he useth this subscription. Soltan Soliman desclim Cham Signore de Signori en sempiterno.   

The Navigation by the frozen Sea.  
AT my being in moscovia, when I was sent thither by king Ferdinando, my lord and master, it so chanced, that Georgius Istoma, the Duke of Moscovia his Interpreter, a man of great experience, who had before learned the latin tongue in the court of john king of Denmark, was there present at the same tyme. He, in the year of Christ .1496. being sent of his prince with master David, a Scotte borne, and then Ambassador for the king of Denmark (whom also I knew there at my first legacy) made me a brief information of all the order of his journey: the which, forasmuch as it may seem difficult and laborious, as well for the distance as dangerous places, I have thought good to describe the same as I received it at his mouth.  
first, he said that being sent of his prince with the said David, they came first to Novogradia the great. And whereas at that time the kingdom of Suecia revolted from the King of Denmark, 
Novogradia. Suecia under the king of Denmark.  & also the Duke of Moscovia was at dissension with the Suetians, by reason whereof they could not pass by the most accustomed way, for the tumults of war, they attempted their journey by an other way, longer, but safer, and came first from Novogradia to the mouths of the river of Dwina and Potiwlo, 
Dwina. Potiwlo.  by a very difficult and painful journey: For he said that this journey, which can not be to much detested for such labours and travails, continueth for the space of three hundred leagues. In fine, taking four small ships or barks at the mouths of Dwina, they sailed by the coast on the right hand of the Ocean, where they saw certain high and rough mountains: 
High mountains near the north Ocean.  and at the length sailing xvi leagues, and passing a great gulf, followed the coast on the left hand: and leaving on the right hand the large sea which hath the name of the river Petzora (as have also the mountains adjacent to the same) they came to the people of Finlappia: 
Finlappia.  who, although they dwell here & there in low cottagies by the sea side, and lead in manner a beastly life, yet are they more meek and tractable than the wild Lappians. 
The wild Lappians.  He said that these also are tributaries to the prince of Moscovia. Then leaving the land of the Lappians, and sailing fourscore leagues, they came to the region of Nortpoden, under the dominion of the king of Suecia. 
The region of Nortpoden  This the Moscovites call Kaienska Semla, and the people Kaieni. Departing from hence, and sailing along by the coast of a winding and bending shore reaching toward the right hand, they came to a promontory or cape, called the Holy nose, 

The cape called the holy nose.  
A whyrlpoole o● swallowing gulf.   being a great stone reaching far into the sea, to the similitude of a nose: under the which is seen a cave with a whirlpool, which swalloweth the sea every six hours: and casting forth the same again with terrible roaring and violence, causeth the said whirlpool. Some call this the Navel of the sea: and other name it Charybdis. He affirmeth that the violence of this swallowing gulf is such, 
Such whyrlepooles, are called vipers  that it draweth into it, inuolueth, and swalloweth up ships, & all other things that come near it, and that they were never in greater danger. For the whirlpool so suddenly and violently drew unto it the ship or bark wherein they were carried, that with the help of Oars and great labour they hardly escaped. When they had thus overpassed the holy nose, they came to a certain stony mountain, which they should needs compass about: but being there stayed with contrary winds for the space of certain days, the pilot of the ship spoke unto them in this effect: This stone (sayeth he) that you see, is called Seems: 
The stone called Seems.  the which except we please with some gift, we shall not pass by without great danger. 
Superstition  But the Pilot being reproved of Istoma for his vain superstition, held his peace. And when they had been detained there by tempest for the space of four days, at the length the tempest ceased, and they went forward on their voyage with a prosperous wind. Then the pilot spoke unto them again, saying: You despised my admonition of pleasing the Seems, and scorned the same as vain and superstitious: but if I had not privily in the night ascended a rock and pleased the Seems, we should surely have had no passage. Being demanded what he offered to the Seems, 

Sacrifice to the stone Seems.  
The cape Motka.  
The castle of wardhus.   he said that he poured butter mixed with oatmeal upon the stone which we saw reach forth into the sea. As they sailed further, they came to an other cape named Motka, which was almost environed with the sea, like an Island, in whose extreme point, is situate the castle of Barthus, which some call Wardhus, (that is) a house of defence or fortress: For the kings of Norway have there a garrison of men to defend their marches. He said furthermore, that that cape reacheth so far into the sea, that they could scarcely compass it in eight days. By which tarrying least they should be hindered, they carried on their shoulders with great labour, their barks and farthels over a straight of land containing half a league in breadth. From hence they sailed to the region of the wild Lappones, called Dikillappones, to a place named Dront, 
The region of the wild Lappones. Dront.  being .200. leagues distant from Dwina, toward the North. And thus far as he saith, doth the prince of Moscovia exact tribute. Furthermore, leaving their Barks here, they furnished the residue of their journey on sleds. 
journeying on sleds.  He further declared, that there were herds of Hearts, as are with us of Oxen, which in the Norwegians tongue are called Rh●n, 
How the Hearts draw sleds.  being somewhat bigger than our Hearts. These the Lappones use in this manner: They join them to sleds made like fisher Boats, as we put horses to the Cart, the man in the sled is tied fast by the feet, lest he fall out by the swift course of the Hearts. In his left hand he holdeth a collar or reign, wherewith he moderateth the course of the Hearts: and in the right hand a piked staff, wherewith he may sustain the sled from falling, if it chance to decline too much on any part. And he told me, 
Twenty leagues in one day  that by this means he travailed twenty leagues in one day, and then dismissed the heart, who by himself returned to his own master and accustomed stable. 
The city of Berges in Norway.  This journey thus finished, they came to Berges a city of Noruegia, or Norway, situate directly toward the North, between the mountains, and went from thence to Denmark on horseback. At Dront and Berges the day is said to be xxii hours long in the Summer Equinoctial. Blasius, an other of the prince of Moscovia his Interpreters, who a few years before was sent of his prince into Spain to the Emperor, declared unto us an other and shorter way of his journey: 
A shorter journey.  for he said, that when he was sent from moscovia to john the king of Denmark, he came first on foot unto Rostowe, 
Rostowe. Pereaslaw. Castromow.  and taking ship there, came to Pereaslaw: and from Pereaslaw, by the river Volga, to Castromow: and that from thence, going seven werstes by land, he came to a little river, sailing by the which, when first he came to Vuolochda, 
Vuolochda. Suc●ana. Dwina. Hafnia Koppenhagen.  then to Suchana, and Dwina, and in five, to the city of Berges in Norway, overpassing in this voyage all the perils and labours that Istoma rehearsed before, he came at length to Hafnia the chief city of Denmark, which the Germans call Koppenhagen: but in their returning home, they both confess that they came to moscovia by Livonia, and that they were a year in this voyage: 
Livonia.  albeit Georgius Istoma said, that half the part of that time he was hindered by tempests, and enforced to carry long in many places by the way, 
Werst is almost an Italian mile.  yet they both likewise constantly affirm, that in this journey either of them travailed a thousand, threescore, and ten werstes, (that is) three hundred and forty leagues. Furthermore also Demetrius, who of late was sent ambassador from the prince of moscovia to the Bishop of Rome, (by whose relation also Paulus iovius wrote his description of moscovia) confirmed all these things to be true. 
Paulus iovius.  All they being demanded of me of the congealed or frozen sea, made none other answer, but that in places near unto that sea, 
Rivers falling into the frozen sea.  they saw many and great rivers, by whose vehement course and abundant flowing, the seas are driven far from the shore: and that the said water of the rivers is frozen with the sea a good space from the land, as in Livonia and other parts of Suecia. For although by the vehemency of the winds, the Ice is broken in the sea, yet doth this chance seldom or never in rivers, 
wind. Ise.  except by some inundation or fluode the Ice gathered together be lifted up and broken. For the flakes or pieces of Ice carried into the sea by force of the rivers, do float above the water in manner all the whole year, and are again so vehemently frozen together, that a man may there sometimes see great heaps of the Ice of many years, as doth appear by such pieces as are driven to the shore by the wind. I have also been credybly informed by faithful men, 
IIse of many y●eres.  that the sea Baltheum (otherwise called the gulf of Livonia) is oftentimes frozen in many places. They say furthermore, 
The sea Baltheum.  that in that region which is inhabited of the wild Lappones, the Sun in the summer Equinoctial doth not fall for the space of xl days: 
Where the Sun falleth not in xl days.  yet that the body thereof is so hidden with a dark mist or cloud three hours, that the beams do not appear: nevertheless to give such light during that time, that the darkness hindereth not their work. The Moscovites make their boast that these wild Lappones are tributaries to their prince. Whereat I do not greatly marvel, forasmuch as they have none other near unto them, that may demand tribute of them. 
The wild Lappones are tributares to the Moscovites. Furs and fish.  Their tribute is only furs and fish, having in manner none other thing greatly commodious. And albeit they lack bread, salt, and other enticements of gluttony, and live only with fish and wild beasts, yet are they exceeding prone to lechery. They are such expert archers, that if in their hunting they espy any beasts, 
Expert archers  whose skins they desire to save unperyshed, they will not lightly miss to hit him in the nostrils. When they go forth on hunting, they are accustomed to leave at home with their wives such merchants or strangers as they have received into their houses: So that if at their return, they perceive their wives through the company of the strangers to be merrier and more jocund than the were wont to be, 
Good fellowship.  they give the strangers some present. But if they find it otherwise, they thrust them forth of the doors with words of reproach. But now by the company they have with strangers that resort thither for gains, they begin to leave their native barbarousness. They gladly admit merchants, 
Necessary wares.  because they bring them apparel of gross cloth: also hatchettes, needle's, spoons, knives, drinking cups, earthen and brazen pots, with such other necessary wares: So that they use now to eat sodden and roasted meat, and do embrace more civil manners. Their own apparel is made of the skins of divers beasts sowed together. And in this apparel they sometimes come to Moscovia. Yet few of them have caps or hosen, which they use to make of hearts skins. They have not the use of gold or silver money: but use only bartering of ware for ware. 
No use of money.  And being ignorant of other languages beside their own, they seem among strangers to be in manner dumb. Their cottages are covered only with the barks of trees. 
Their cottages.  They have no certain resting habitation: But when they have consumed the fish and wild beasts in one place, they remove to an other. Furthermore also the said ambassadors of the prince of Moscovia declared, that in the same parts they saw certain high mountains, 
Mountains continually burning.  continually casting forth flames of fire, as doth the mountain of Aetna in the Island of Sicilia: and that even in Norway many mountains are fallen down and burnt in manner to ashes with such continual flames. Which thing some considering, fain the fire of Purgatory to be there. And as concerning these mountains of Norway, when I was sent ambassador to Christian king of Denmark, I was informed the like by the governors of Norway, who chanced at that time to be present there.  
About the mouths of the river Petzora that are toward the right hand from the mouths of Duina, 
The river Petzora.  are said to be divers and great beasts in the Ocean: and among other, a certain great beast as big as an Ox, which the inhabitants call Mors. This beast hath short feet like a Beaver or an Otter, with a breast somewhat high and broad, 
The beast called Mors.  for the proportion of the residue of his body, and two long and great teeth groweing out of the upper jaw. These beasts for rest and increase, do sometimes leave the Ocean, and by great herds ascend the mountains: where, before they give themselves to profound sleep (whereunto they are naturally inclined) they appoint one of their number as it were a watch man, 
The providence of nature.  as do Cranes for the security of the rest. Which if he chance to sleep, or to be slain of the hunters, the residue may easily be taken. But if the watchman give warning with roaring (as the manner is) immediately the whole heard awakened thereby, suddenly put their hinder feet to their teeth, and so falling from the mountain with great celerity as it were on a sled, they cast themselves headlong into the Ocean: where also they rest and sleep for a while upon the heaps of ice. The hunters pursue these beasts only for their teeth: Of the which the Moscovites, Tartars, and especially the Turks, make haftes for sword and daggers very artificially: and use these rather for ornament, then to give the greater stroke for the weight or heaviness thereof, as some fable. Also among the Turks, Moscovites, and Tartars, these teeth are sold by weight, and are called the teeth of fishes.  
The frozen sea reacheth far and wide beyond Duina, to Petzcora, and unto the mouths of the great river Obi: 
The frozen sea.  beyond the which they say to be the region of Engreonland, 
Engreonland or greonland.  unknown and separate from the trade and conversation of our men, by reason of high mountains covered, and cold with perpetual snow, and the sea no less encumbered with continual ice, which hindereth navigations, and maketh them dangerous, as they say.   


Exemplar Epistolae seu Literarum Missivarum, quas illustrissimus Princeps Eduardus, eius nominis Sextus, Angliae, Franciae, et Hiberniae Rex, misit ad Principes Septentrionalem, ac Orientalem, mundi plagam inhabitantes juxta mare glaciale, nec non Indiam Orientalem. Anno Domini. 1553. Regni sui Anno septimo, et ultimo.  
EDuardus sextus, Angliae, Franciae, & Hiberniae Rex. etc. Omnibus Regibus et principibus ac Dominis, et cunctis judicibus terrae, et Ducibus eius, quibuscunque est excellens aliqua dignitas in ea, cunctis in locis quae sunt sub universo caelo: Pax, tranquillitas, & honor vobis, terris, et regionibus vestris quae imperio vestro subiacent, cuiquae vestrum quemadmodum convenit ei. Propterea quod indidit Deus Opt. Max. hominibus prae cunctis alijs viventibus, cor & desiderium tale, ut appetat quisquae cum alijs societatem inire, amare, et vicissim amari, beneficijs afficere, et mutua accipere beneficia studeat, ideo cuiquae pro facultate sua hoc desiderium in omnibus quidem hominibus beneficijs fovere et conseruare convenit, in illis autem maxime, qui hoc desiderio adducti, a remotis etiam regionibus ad eos veniunt. Quo enim longius iter, eius rei gratia ingressi sunt, eo ardentius in eis hoc desiderium fuisse declararunt. Insuper etiam ad hoc, nos patrum maiorumque nostrorum exempla invitant, qui semper humanissime susceperunt et benignissime tractaverunt illos, qui tum a locis propinquis, tum a remotis, eos amice adibant, eorum se protectioni commendantes. Quod si omnibus id prestare aequum est, certe mercatoribus imprimis prestari debet, qui per universum orbem discurrunt, mare circumlustrantes et aridam, ut res bonas et utiles que Dei beneficio in regione eorum inveniuntur, ad remotissimas regiones et regna adferant, atquae inde vivissim referant, quod suae regioni utile ibi repererint: ut et populi ad quos eunt, non destituantur commodis, quae non profert illis terra eorum, & ipsi sint participes rerum, quibus illi abundant. Nam Deus caeli et terrae, humano generi maxime consulens, nosuit ut omnia in quavis regione invenirentur, quo regio ope alterius regionis indigeret, et gens ab alio gente commodum aliquod expectaret, ac ita stabiliretur amicitia inter omnes, singulique omnibus benefacere quererent, Hoc itaque ineundae ac stabiliendae amicitiae desiderio moti viri quidam regni nostri, iter in remotas maritimas regiones instituerunt, ut inter nostros et illos populos, viam mercibus inferendis et eferendis aperirent, nosque rogaverunt ut id illis concederemus. Qui petitioni illorum annuentes, concessimus viro honorabili et forti, Hugoni Wilibeo, et alijs qui com eo sunt servis nostris fidis et charis, ut pro sua voluntate, in regiones eye prius incognitas eant, quesituri ea quibus nos caremus, et adducant illis ex nostris terris, id quod illi carent. Atque ita illis et nobis commodum inde accedat, sitque amicitia perpetua, et foedus indissolubile inter illos et nos, dum permittent illi nos accipere de rebus, quibus super abundant in regnis suis, et nos concedemus illis ex regnis nostris res, quibus destituuntur. Rogamus itaque vos Reges et principes, & omnes quibus aliqua est potestas in terra, ut viris istis nostris, transitum permittatis per regiones vestras. Non enim tangent quicquam ex rebus vestris invitis v●bis. Cogitate quòd homines et ipsi sunt. Et si qua re caruerint, oramus pro vestra beneficencia, eam vos illis tribuatis, accipientes vicissim ab eis, quod poterunt rependere vobis. Ita vos gerite erga eos, quemadmodum cuperetis ut nos, et subditi nostri, nos gereremus erga servos vestros, si quando transierint per regiones nostras. Atque promittimus vobis per Deum omnium quae coelo, terra et mari continentur, perque vitam nostrum, et tranquillitatem regnorum nostrorum, nos pari benignitate servos vestros accepturos, si ad regna nostra aliquando venerint. Atque a nobis et subditis nostris, ac si nati fuissent in regnis nostris ita benignè tractabuntur, ut rependamus vobis benignitatem, quam nostris exhibueritis. Postquam vos Reges, Principes. etc. rogavimus ut humanitate et beneficentia omni prosequamini servos nostros nobis charos, oramus omnipotentem Deum nostrum, ut vobis diuturnam vitam largiatur, et pacem que nullam habeat finem. Scriptum Londini, quae civitas est regni nostri. Anno. 5515. a creato mundo, mense Iiar xiiii die mensis, anno septimo regni nostri.   

The copy of the letters missive which the right noble prince Edward the vi sent to the Kings, Princes, and other potentates inhabiting the Northest parts of the world to ward the mighty Empire of Cathay, at such time as sir Hugh Willoby knight and Richard Chancellor, with their company, attempted their voyage thither in the year of Christ .1553. and the vii and last year of his reign.  
EDwarde the sixth by the grace of God, king of England, France and Ireland. etc. To all Kings, Princes, Rulers, judges, and Governors of the earth, and all other having any excellent dignity on the same in all places under the universal heaven: Peace, tranquillity, and honour, be unto you, and your lands and regions which are under your dominions, and to every of you, as is convenient.  
Forasmuch as the great and almighty God hath given unto mankind, above all other living creatures, such a heart and desire, that every man desireth to join petition with other, to love and be loved, also to give and receive mutual benefits: it is therefore the duty of all men, according to their power, to maintain and increase this desire in every man, with well deserving to all men, and especially to show this good affection to such, as being moved with this desire, come unto them from far countries. For in how much the longer voyage they have attempted for this intent, so much the more do they thereby declare that this desire hath been ardent in them. Furthermore also, thexamples of our fathers and predecessors do invite us hereunto, forasmuch as they have ever gently and lovingly entreated such as of friendly mind came to them, aswell from countries near hand, as far remote, commending themselves to their protection. And if it be right and equity to show such humanity toward all men, doubtless the same ought chiefly to be showed to merchants, who wandering about the world, search both the land and the sea, to carry such good and profitable things as are found in their countries, to remote regions and kingdoms, and again to bring from the same, such things as they find there commodious for their own countries: both aswell that the people, to whom they go, may not be destitute of such commodities as their countries bring not forth to them, as that also they may be partakers of such things whereof they abound. For god of heaven and earth, greatly providing for mankind, would not that all things should be found in one region, to th'end that one should have need of an other, that by this means friendship might be established among all men, and every one seek to gratify all. For the establyshing and furtherance of which universal amity, certain men of our realm, moved hereunto by the said desire, have instituted and taken upon them a voyage by sea into far countries, to the intent that between our people and them, a way be opened to bring in, and carry out merchandizes, desiring us to further their enterprise. Who assenting to their petition, have licensed the right valiant and worthy sir Hugh Wylloby Knight, and other our trusty and faithful servants which are with him, according to their desire, to go to countries to them heretofore unknown, aswell to seek such things as we lack, as also to carry unto them from our regions, such things as they lack. So that hereby not only commodity may ensue both to them and to us, but also an indissoluble and perpetual league of friendship be established between us both, while they permit us to take of their things, such whereof they have abundance in their regions, and we again grant them such things of ours whereof they are destitute. We therefore desire you Kings and Princes, and all other to whom there is any power on the earth, to permit unto these our servants, free passage by your regions and dominions: for they shall not touch any thing of yours unwilling unto you. Consider you that they also are men. If therefore they shall stand in need of any thing, we desire you of all humanity, and for the nobility which is in you, to aid and help them with such things as they lack, receiving again of them such things as they shallbe able to give you in recompense. Show yourselves so towards them, as you would that we and our subjects should show ourselves towards your servants, if at any time they shall pass by our regions.  
Thus doing, we promise you by the God of all things that are contained in heaven, earth, and the sea, and by the life and tranquillity of our kingdoms, that we will with like humanity accept your servants if at any time they shall come to our kingdoms, where they shall as friendly and gently be entertained, as if they were borne in our dominions, that we may hereby recompense the favour and benignity which you have showed to our men. Thus after we have desired you Kings and Princes. etc. With all humanity and favour, to entertain our well-beloved servants, we will pray our almighty God to grant you long life, & peace, which never shall have end. written in London which is the chief city of our kingdom: in the year from the creation of the world 5515. in the month of jiar, 
jiar, I would read Mair, that is in the Sarasen language, mixed of Turkish & Egyptian, February, interpreted by them the month to set ships to the sea.  the fourteen day of the month, and seventh year of our reign.  
This letter was written also in Greek, and divers other languages.     

The voyages of Persia, travailed by the merchants of London, of the company and fellowship of Moscovia. In the years .1561. 1567. 1568.  
IT shall not here be needful to write any thing of the way from hence to moscovia by sea, unto the port of Saint Nicolas, where our merchants have a house of their traffic, for as much as the same is already well known. And therefore it shall suffice for the description of this voyage, to show the way from Saint Nicolas in Moscovia unto Persia, as our men travailed by the regions of moscovia unto the Caspian sea, and by that sea into Media and Persia, unto the court of the great Sophy King of Persia, and many other realms and kingdoms subject unto the same, as hereafter shall be more particularly declared, with such brevity as the time and matter now requireth. Forasmuch as many things might be written touching this voyage, and the merchants traffic in these regions, which for many great considerations ought not to be published or put in print: and therefore touching only those things, it shall suffice to the reader to understand the description of the regions, with the manners and customs of the people of those countries, after the manner of a Geographical history, partly to delight and content the desire of such as take pleasure in the knowledge of strange things and countries, whereby the mind of man increaseth in wisdom and knowledge, both in human affairs, and also of the marvelous and manifold works of god & nature, that thereby God may be glorified and sanctified in all his works, in the spirits of all good and virtuous men which delight in the same. And whereas in the description of this voyage, I may seem to have kept no due order of writing, I shall desire the reader to have me excused, for that I could not orderly have any information of them that came from Persia: but was fain to gather certain notes only by communication and conference with them at sundry times, with few words as occasion served. But now to enter into the voyage.  
From the merchants house at the port of Saint Nicolas in Moscovia, they travail up the rivers of Duina and Sachana, until they come unto the city of Vologda, (where also the merchants have an other house) a thousand werstes or Rus miles, or miles of Russia, which may be about seven hundred english miles. Then from Vologda overlande, to the city of Yeraslave, which lieth on the river Volga, a hundred and fourscore Rus miles. 
A wert is their mile, and is three quarters of an english mile.  At this city of Yeraslave, the merchants land their goods for Persia, and builded their ships there upon the said river, at a place named Vstwicki Zelesnoy, about a hundred miles from Yeraslave. So traveling from thence down the river Volga, until they come to Astracan, a fort of the Emperor of moscovia, lying threescore miles from the Caspian sea. Upon Volga lieth a great town of merchandise, named Costrum, and beyond that a strong Castle of brick, named His Novogorod, standing upon a hill. And from thence, upon an arm of the same river, lieth a great fortress named Cazan, which the Moscovite won from the Tartars, Nogais being their chief and principal hold: and therewith conquered the whole country of Cazan, or the Tartars Cazamites, containing two thousand miles. From Cazan upon the said river, the Moscovite hath in his subjection the one side of the river, and the Tartars, called Crimes, have the other side. But they dare not pass over the river, by reason that the Moscovite keepeth many Garrisons on the river, and in certain Islands of the river from place to place, as occasion serveth: So that the river is kept quietly, notwithstanding the conflict that happened to Banister outward, by reason of the Turks soldiers that would have spoiled his ships: which nevertheless defended themselves manfully, and slew two hundred of the Turks. For the Turk sent thither an arm of xl thousand Turks and Tartars, to recover Astracan from the Moscovite: but they were enforced to break up their Camp for lack of victuals and other necessaries, especially because the winter drew near, and the Moscovite prepared a great army against them.  
From Astracan, down the said river, to the Caspian sea, is the distance of threescore miles. From the entrance into the Caspian sea, in two or three days sailing with a good wind, cross over that sea from the North to the South, they come to the realm of Media, arriving at a port named Bilbil, entering into a small river that falleth into the Caspian sea, and passing from thence by land with Camels, in three days journey, they come to a city of Sharuan or Media, named Shamaki. 
Media now called Sharuan.  And from thence in xviii days journey by camels, they come to the great and famous city of Tauris, or Teveris, being the greatest city of Persia, for trade of merchandise. This city is esteemed almost twice as big as London, and for the most part is builded of raw bricks, not burnt, but only dried and hardened in the sun: the doors of the houses be very low and little. The Sophy in time paste remained chief in this city: But after that the region about this city was invaded by the Turks, he went further into the country, and builded a town named Casbin, which before twenty years was but a village, where he now keepeth his court, being xiii days journey from Shamaki, by horse, and twenty days by camels.  
Note, that near unto this side of the Caspian sea, dwell the Tartars called Nogais and Shalcavis. Also certain Arabians, and Christians named Armenians. 
Armenians. Christians.  The Caspian sea is otherwise called Mare de Baccan: and may seem so to be called, by reason of a town by the sea side, named Bacco.  

Certain extractes of the voyage of master Antony jenkinson into Persia, in the year .1561.  
IN the year .1561. master Antony jenkinson was sent as Ambassador into Persia, with the Queen's majesties letters, in the Latin, Italian, and Hebrew tongue, to the great Sophy or king of Persia, to entreat of commodities of merchandise which might be between her majesties merchants and them, upon certain privileges and free passage to be granted unto her merchants both by the Emperor of moscovia and the Sophi of Persia, as hereafter shall appear, where we will write of the said privileges. Master jenkinson at his first coming, found some difficulty to obtain the emperors licence to go into Persia: but at the length by friendship made, he gave him both licence to go, and also gave him letters commendatory unto the Sophy, and committed also to him certain affairs of his to do there. And after certain banquets, and honourable entertainment, accompanied him with an Ambassador of Persia, who had been long in his Court. Therefore sailing over the Caspian sea, they arrived on the West side thereof. Not far from thence is a town named Darbent, where is a very strong Castle of stone made by Alexander Magnus, 
A marvelous long wall builded by great Alexander.  and a wall of the length of thirtiene days journey, which he made when he kept wars against the Persians and Medians, that the inhabitants of that country then newly conquered, should neither lightly flee, nor his enemies invade them. This Darbent, is now under the dominion of the Sophy, and in the latitude of .41. degrees. From Darbent to Bilbec, or Bilbil, the port and harborowe where they discharge their goods, is half a days sailing.  
And from thence to Sharuan is ten days journey: This town standeth in a valley, & is in the country of Media: in the which town also, remaineth the Soltan or governor of Media, under the Sophy.  
In the mean time, the King of Media, named Abdalica, cozen unto the Sophy, came thither, 
The magnificence of Abdalaca king of Media.  and honourably entertained master jenkinson and the english merchants which were with him, and made them a great banquet, causing master jenkinson (who was then richly appareled in silk, velvet, and scarlet, as became an Ambassador for the Queen's majesty) to sit down somewhat far from him. The King himself did sit in a very rich Pavilion wrought with silk and gold, of the length of sixtiene fathom, or thereabout, placed on a hills side, having before him a goodly fountain of fair running water, whereof he and his nobility drunk. He was richly appareled with long garments of silk, and cloth of gold, broidered with pearl and precious stones. Upon his head, he had a Cap with a sharp end of half a yard long, standing upright, of rich cloth of gold, wrapped about with a piece of Indian silk of twenty yards long, wrought with gold. On the left side of his Tollepan (so is the cap called) was a plume of feathers set in a troonke of gold, richly enameled and set with precious stones. At his ears, he wore earerynges, with pendantes of gold and stones a handful long, with two great Rubies of great value in the ends thereof. All the ground within his Pavilion, was covered with carpets, and under himself was spread a square Carpet wrought with silver and gold, and thereupon were laid two suitable Cushions. Thus the king and his noble men sat in his Pavilion with their legs across, as do Tailors: Yet commanded stools to be given to our men, because they could not sit so: then caused meat to be set before them, and made them a banquet of a hundred dishes of meat, and as many of fruits and conserves. After the banquet, he caused them to go with him a hunting and hawking, in the which they killed certain beasts and Cranes. 
Hawking and hunting.  Master jenkinson found so much favour with this king, that at his departing, he commended him to the Sophy with his letters, and also wrote in his favour to his son, being then in the Sophy's court. So that after his coming thither, by his means, he came at the length to the presence and speech of the Sophy: which otherwise he should have done very hardly, 
The Turks Ambassadors resist master jenkinson.  by reason of the Turks Ambassadors which then were there, and resisted his affairs, with many persuasions to the Sophy, and other of his nobility, against the Christians, as mortal enemies both to the Turks and Persians, and their religion. And whereas a while before, a perpetual peace and amity was concluded between the Turk and the Sophy, the Ambassadors would persuade him that his friendship with the Christians, or contract with them touching any affairs, and especially such as might be prejudicial to the Turk, or any of his subjects, might engender new suspicions and occasions of breach of the la●e concluded peace, with many such other surmised accusations. Whereupon the Sophy stayed, and prolonged the time, before he would admit master jenkinson to his speech. At the length when by the friendship and favour of King Abdalaca and his son, with other friends made in the court, the time was appointed that master jenkinson should be hea●de, there was one that came to him without the court gate, before he light from his horse on the ground, and gave him a pair of shoes sent from the Sophy, 
Great holiness in shoes.  such as he himself was wont to wear in the night when he riseth to pray, willing him to put them on his feet, for that it was not otherwise lawful for him being a Gawar or Caffer (that is a mysbeleever) to tread upon that holy ground. When he came to his presence, he demanded of him of what country of franks he was, 
Christians called franks.  meaning by franks Christians: For they call all Christians franks (that is French men) as we commonly call all mahometans, Turks, although there be many mahometans of other nations beside Turks. He answered, that he was a Christian of the best franks of the country of England: declaring further unto him, the cause of his coming thither, to be for the great commodity of him and his subjects by the way of merchandise, as might further appear by the letters directed unto his majesty from the Queen of England his Prince, and the Emperor of Moscovia. Much more talk had he with master jenkinson, not here to be written: but by reason of the Turks Ambassadors, at this present, was no great thing done herein to the preferment of the merchants affairs. Yet he commanded that master jenkinson should be honourably used, and sent him certain rich apparel. At this time was also in the Sophy's court the son of the King of the Georgians, a Christian Sismatike as they are now called. The same time also, 
The Turks son beheaded.  a son of the Turks (who had before attempted somewhat against his father, and fled to the Sophy) was by him at the Turks request detained in prison: And upon the late conclusion of peace, the Turk required the Sophy to send him his head: which he granted, and sent it him by the said Ambassadors. This voyage of master jenkinson, was in the year .1561.   

Here followeth such informations as was given me by master Geferie Ducat, principal Agent of the merchants, for the last voyage into Persia, in the year of our Lord▪ 1568. beginning in the dominion of the Sophy, at the city of Shamaki in Media, because the beginning of the voyage from moscovia hitherto, is declared here before.  
SHamaki is the fairest town in all Media, and the chiefest commodity of that country is raw silk, and the greatest plenty thereof, is at a town three days journey from Shamaki, called Arashe: and within three days journey of Arashe, is a country named Groysine, whose inhabitants are Christians, 
Christians.  & are thought to be they, which are otherwise called Georgians: 
Georgians.  there is also much silk to be sold. The chief town of that country is called Zeghavi, from whence is carried yearly into Persia, an incredible quantity of hazel Nuts, all of one sort and goodness, 
Hasell Nuts.  and as good and thine shaled as are our filberts. Of these are carried yearly the quantity of 4000 camels laden.   

Of the name of the Sophy of Persia, and why he is called the Shaugh, and of other customs.  
THe King of Persia (whom here we call the great Sophi) is not there so called, but is called the Shaugh. It were there dangerous to call him by the name of Sophi, because that Sophi in the Persian tongue, is a beggar: and it were as much as to call him, the great beggar.  
He lieth at a town called Casbin, 
Casbin.  which is situate in a goodly fertile valley, of three or four days journey in length. The town is but evil builded, and for the most part all of brick, not hardened with fire, but only dried at the Sun, as is the most part of the building of all Persia. The king hath not come out of the compass of his own house in xxxiii or xxxiiii years, whereof the cause is not known, but as they say, it is upon a superstition of certain prophecies, to which they are greatly addicted: he is now about fourscore years of age, and very lusty. And to keep him the more lusty, he hath four wives always, and about three hundred concubines. And once in the year, 
The kings Concubines.  he hath all the fair maidens and wives, that may be found a great way about, brought unto him, whom he diligently peruseth, feeling them in all parts, taking such as he liketh, and putting away some of them which he hath kept before. And with them that he putteth away, he gratifieth some such as hath done him the best service. And if he chance to take any man's wife, her husband is very glad thereof, and in recompense of her, oftentimes he giveth the husband one of his old store, whom he thankfully receiveth. If any stranger, being a Christian, shall come before him, 
How strangers are used.  he must put on a new pair of shows made in that country, and from the place where he entereth, there is digged as it were a causye all the way, until he come to the place where he shall talk with the king, who standeth always above in a gallery when he talketh with any strangers: and when the stranger is departed, then is the causye cast down, and the ground made even again.   

Of the religion of the Persians.  
Their religion is all one with the Turks, saving that they differ who was the right successor of Mahumet. The Turks say that it was one Homer and his son Usman. But the Persians say, that it was one Mortus Ali, which they would prove in this manner. They say there was a counsel called to decide the matter who should be the successor: 
Haly,  and after they had called upon mohammed to reveal unto them his will and pleasure therein, 
A goodly and well grounded religion.  there came among them a little lizard, who declared that it was Mahumetes pleasure that Mortus Ali should be his successor. This Martus Ali was a valiant man, and slew Homer the Turks prophet: He had a sword that he fought withal, with the which he conquered all his enemies, and killed as many as he stroke. When Mortus Ali died, there came a holy prophet, who gave them warning that shortly there would come a white Camel, upon the which he charged them to lay the body and sword of Mortus Ali, and to suffer the Camel to carry it whether he would. The which being performed, the said white Camel carried the sword and body of Mortus Ali unto the sea side, and the Camel going a good way into the sea, was with the sword and body of Mortus Ali taken up into heaven, for whose return they have long looked for in Persia. And for this cause, the king always keepeth a horse ready saddled for him, and also of late kept for him one of his own daughters to be his wife, but she died in the year of our Lord .1573. And say furthermore, that if he come not shortly, they shallbe of our belief: much like the jews, looking for their Messiah to come and reign among them, like a worldly king for ever, and deliver them from the captivity which they are now in among the Christians, Turks, and gentiles.  
The Saugh, or King of Persia, is nothing in strength and power comparable unto the Turk: for although he hath a great Dominion, yet is it nothing to be compared with the Turks: neither hath he any great Ordinance of Guns, or Harkebuses. notwithstanding, his eldest son Ishmael, about twenty and five years past, fought a great battle with the Turk, and sleeve of his army about an hundred thousand men, who after his return, was by his father cast into prison, and there continueth until this day: for his father the Shaugh, had him in suspicion that he would have put him down, and have taken the regiment upon himself.  
Their opinion of Christ, is that he was an holy man, 
Their opinion of Christ.  and a great Prophet, but not like unto mohammed: saying that Mahumet was the last Prophet, by whom all things were finished, and was therefore the greatest. To prove that Christ was not God's son, they say that God had never wife, and therefore could have no son or children. They go on pilgrimage from the furthest part of Persia, unto Mecha in Arabia, and by the way they visit also the sepulchre of Christ at jerusalem, which they now call Couch Kalye.  
The most part of spices which cometh into Persia, is brought from the Island of Ormus, situate in the gulf of Persia, called Sinus Persicus, between the main land of Persia and Arabia. etc. The Portugals touch at Ormus both in their voyage to East India, and homeward again, and from thence bring all such spices as is occupied in Persia and the regions there about: for of Pepper they bring very small quantity, and that at a very dear prise. The Turks oftentimes bring Pepper from Mecha in Arabia, which they sell as good cheap as that which is brought from Ormus. silks are brought from no place, but are wrought all in their own country. Ormus, is within two miles of the main land of Persia, and the Portugals fetch their fresh water there, for the which they pay tribute to the Shaugh or king of Persia.  
Within Persia, they have neither gold nor silver mines, yet have they coined money, 
Their money.  both of gold and silver, and also other small moneys of Copper. There is brought into Persia an incredible sum of Duche Dolours, which for the most part is there employed in raw silk.  
They have few books, and less learning, and are for the most part very brutish in all kind of good sciences, 
Their books and learning.  saving in some kind of silk works, and in such things as pertain to the furniture of Horses, in the which they are passing good.  
Their laws are, as is their religion, wicked and detestable. And if any man offend the Prince, 
Such was the law of the Macedons for Treason.  he punisheth it extremely, not only in the person that offendeth, but also in his children, and in as many as are of his kin. Theft and murder are often punished, yet none otherwise then pleaseth him that is ruler in the place where the offence is committed, and as the party offending is able to make friends, or with money to redeem his offence.  
There is often times great mutenye among the people in great towns, 
Dissension for religion.  which of Mortus Ali sons was greatest: insomuch that sometimes in the town two or three thousand people are together by the ears for the same, as I have seen in the town of Shamaky and Ardaruill, and also in the great city of Teveris, where I have seen a man coming from fighting, in a bravery bringing in his hand four or five men's heads, carrying them by the hear of the head: for although they shave their heads most commonly twice a week, 
Shaving.  yet leave they a tuft of hear upon the crown, about two foot long. I have inquired why they leave that tuft of hear upon their heads. They answer, that thereby they may easilier be carried up into heaven, when they are dead.  
For their religion, they have certain priests, who are appareled like unto other men. They use every morning and afternoon, to go up to thetoppes of their churches, and tell there a great tale of mohammed and Mortus Ali: and other preaching have they none. 
Their pryestes, and preaching. Their Lent.  Their Lent is after Christmas, not in abstinence from flesh only, but from all meats & drinks, until the day be of the sky: but then they eat sometimes the whole night. And although it be against their religion to drink wine, yet at night they will take great excess thereof, and be drunken. 
Abstinence from wine, but not from drunkenness.  Their lent beginneth at the new Moon, and they do not enter into it until they have seen the same: Neither yet doth their lent end, until they have seen the next new Moon, although the same through close weather should not be seen in long tyme.  
They have among them certain holy men, whom they call Setes, 
Their saints and holy men.  counted holy for that they or any of their ancestors have been on pilgrimage at Mecha in Arabia, for whosoever goeth thither on pilgrimage to visit the sepulchre of mohammed, both he and all his posterity, are ever after called Setes, 
Pilgrimage.  and counted for holy men, and have no less opinion of themselves. And if a man contrary one of these, he will say that he is a saint, and therefore aught to be beloved: and that he can not lie, although he lie never so shamefully. Thus a man may be to holy, and no pride is greater than spiritual pride, of a mind puffed up with his own opinion of holiness. These Setes do use to shave their heads all over, saving on the sides a little above the temples, the which they leave unshaven, and use to brayed the same as women do their hear, and wear it as long as it will grow.  
Every morning they use to worship God, Mahumet, and Mortus Ali, and in praying turn themselves toward the South, because Mecha lieth that way from them. 
Their prayer and worshipping of God and Mahumet,  When they be in travail on the way, many of them will (as soon as the Sun riseth) light from their horses, turning themselves to the South, and will lay their gowns before them, with their swords and beads, and so standing upright, worship to the South: And many times in their prayers kneel down and kiss their beads, or somewhat else that lieth before them.  
The men or women do never go to make water, 
Washing and outward clenlenesse.  but they use to take with them a po●te with a spout, and after they have made water, they flash some water upon their privy parts, and thus do the women aswell as the men: and this is a matter of great religion among them, and in making of water, the men do cowre down as well as the women.  
When they earnestly affirm a matter, they will swear by God, 
Their swearing  Mahumet, or Mortus Ali, and sometimes by all at ones: as thus in their own language, saying, Olla Mahumet Ali. But if he swear by the Shaughes head, in saying Shaugham basshe, you may then believe him if you will.  
The Shaugh keepeth a great magnificence in his court: and although sometimes in a month or six weeks, 
The kings magnificence.  none of his nobility or counsel can see him, yet go they daily to the court, and tarry there a certain time, until they have known his pleasure whether he will command them any thing or not. He is watched every night with a thousand of his men, which are called his Curshes, who are they that he useth to send into the countries about his greatest affairs. 
Pursivantes.  When he sendeth any of them (if it be to the greatest of any of his nobility) he will obey them, although the messenger should beat any of them to death.  
The Shaugh occupieth himself always two days in the week in his Bathestove, 
The kings company with his wives and concubines.  and when he is disposed to go thither, he taketh with him five or two of his concubines, more or less, and one day they consume in washing, rubbing, and bathing him, and the other day in paring his nails, and other matters. The greatest part of his life, he spendeth amongst his wives and concubines. He hath now reigned about fifty and four years, 
A very Sardanapalus.  and is therefore counted a very holy man, as they ever esteem their kings, if they have reigned fifty years or more: for they measure the favour of God by a man's prosperity, or his displeasure by a man's misfortune or adversity. The great Turk hath this Shaugh in great reverence, because he hath reigned king so long tyme.  
I have said before that he hath four wives, and as many concubines as him listeth: and if he chance to have any children by any of his concubines, 
The succession of the kingdom.  and be minded that any of those children shall inherit after him, then when one of his wives dieth, the concubine whom he so favoureth, he maketh one of his wives, and the child whom he so loveth best, he ordaineth to be king after him.  

Marriage.  What I heard of the manner of their marriages, for offending of honest consciences and chaste ears, I may not commit to writing: their fasting I have declared before. They use Circumcision unto children of seven years of age, as do the Turks. 
Circumcision.   
Their houses (as I have said) are for the most part made of Brycke, not burned, but only dried in the Sun: 
Their houses & manner of eateing.  In their houses they have but little furniture of household stuff, except it be their Carpets, and some Copper work: for all their Kettles and dishes wherein they eat, are of Copper. They eat on the ground, sitting on Carpets cross legged as do tailors. There is no man so simple but he sitteth on a Carpet better or worse, and the whole house or room wherein he sitteth, is wholly covered with Carpets. Their houses are all with flat roofs, covered with earth: and in the summer time, they lie upon them all night.  
They have many bond servants both men and women▪ Bond men and bond women, 
Bond men & bond women.  is one of the best kind of merchandise that any man may bring. When they buy any maids or young women, they use to feel them in all parts, as with us men do horses: when one hath bought a young woman, 
Women bougth & sold, and let to hire.  if he like her, he will keep her for his own use as long as him listeth, and then selleth her to an other, who doth the like with her. So that one woman is sometimes sold in the space of four or five years, twelve, or twenty times. If a man keep a bond woman for his own use, and if he find her to be false to him, and give her body to any other, he may kill her if he will.  
When a merchant or travailer cometh to any town where he intendeth to tarry any time, he hireth a woman, or sometimes two or three during his abode there. And when he cometh to an other town, he doth the like in the same also: for there they use to put out their women to hire, as we do here hackney Horses.  
There is a very great river which runneth through the plain of javat, which falleth into the Caspian sea, by a town called Backo, near unto which town is a strange thing to behold. 
Abundance of Oil ishuing out of the ground.  For there ishueth out of the ground a marvelous quantity of Oil, which Oil they fetch from the uttermost bounds of all Persia: it serveth all the country to burn in their houses.  
This Oil is black, and is called Nefte: they use to carry it throughout all the country upon kine and Asses, of which you shall oftentimes meet, with four or five hundred in a company. There is also by the said town of Backo, an other kind of Oil which is white and very precious: and is supposed to be the same that here is called Petroleum. 
Oleum Petroleum.  There is also not far from Shamaky, a thing like unto Tar, and ishueth out of the ground, whereof we have made the proof, that in our ships it serveth well in the stead of Tar. 
Two sorts of kine.   
In Persia are kine of two sorts, the one like unto ours in these parts, the other are marvelous evil favoured, with great bones, and very lean, and but little hear upon them: their milk is walowish sweet: they are like unto them which are spoken of in the scripture, which in the dream of Pharaoh signified the seven dear years: for a leaner or more evil favoured beast, can no man see.  
In the country of Sheruan (sometime called Media) if you chance to lie in the fields near unto any village, as soon as the twilight beginneth, you shall have about you two or three hundred Foxes, 
Foxes in great plenty.  which make a marvelous waweling or howling: and if you look not well to your victuales, it shall scape them hardly but they will have part with you.  
The Caspian sea, doth neither ebb nor flow, except sometimes by rage of wind it swelleth up very high: the water is very salt. Howbeit, the quantity of water that falleth out of the great river of Volga, maketh the water fresh at the least twenty leagues into the sea. The Caspian sea is marvelous full of fish, but no kind of monstrous fish, as far as I could understand, yet hath it sundry sorts of fishes which are not in these parties of the world.  
The Mutton there is good, and the Sheep great, having very great rumps with much fat upon them. Rise and Mutton, is their chief victuale.   

Of the Empire of the Persians, and of their original.  
THe kingdom or Empire of the Persians, 
Abraham O●tilius.  as it was in ancient time most famous, even so is it at these days, mighty & glorious, comprehending many great & large regions. For all the tract of Asia, which is between the river of Tigris, the gulf of Persia, and the Indian sea (sometime called the sea Indus) and the river jaxartes (at this day called Chefell) even unto the Caspian sea, is at this day under the dominion of the Sophy of Persia.  
Of the original of the Sophies, thus writeth Caelius Curio in his Saracenicall history. In the year of our Lord .1369. was a certain Prince among the Persians, who possessed the town of Ardenelim, his name was Sophi: & glorified himself to descend of the race and progeny of Alis Muamedis, by Musan Cazin his nephew. He, after the death of Calyfa, the Soltan of Babylon, and the contrary faction which the Turks defended, suppressed also of the Tartars, began more boldly and freely to profess his opinion and sentence of their religion. And because that Ocemus the son of Alis, (from whom he glorified himself to descend) had twelve children, willing to add to them of his sect a certain sign, whereby they might be known from other, ordained that they that would embrace his sect and profession, should were on their heads a high cap of purple under a vele, wherewith all the Turks involve their heads, and in their language call it Tulibante, having in the midst of it xii plumes or shape tops. After his death, succeeded his son Guines: who in all the East parts obtained so great opinion of wisdom and holiness, that most famous Tamerlanes, Emperor of the Parthians (who before had taken Bayazetes king of the Turks) made a journey into Persia, to visit him as a most holy man, 
Tamerlanes. Thamurlanes. Tamburlanes. or Tamurthlam.  of whom Guines had so much favour, that he obtained of him the liberty of xxx thousand Captives which he brought with him, whom also Guines addicted to his faction: and his son Secaidar used them in his wars. For with these, after the death of Guines, he made war to certain people of Scythia, 
Georgians Christians.  named Georgians, his borderers, being Christians, & afflicted them very grievously. Thus much of the original of the Sophy of Persia: they keep continually wars with the Turks for the religion of Mahumet. 
Contention for religion between Turks and Persians.  For the Sophians or Persians, follow one manner of interpretation of Mahumettes religion, and the Turks an other: the which interpretations nevertheless are so differing one from the other, that the one of them esteemeth the other for heretics. The Persians are of liberal nature, 
Persians.  of much civility and courtesy, greatly esteeming arts and sciences: they acknowledge a certain worthiness or nobility among men, wherein they differ much from the Turks, 
Turks.  which make no difference between slaves and worthier men or Gentlemen.   

Of the Region of Persia, and the manners of the Persians: 
Anno. do. 1280.  Marcus Paulus Venetus, writeth thus. Cap. nineteen. Lib. 1.  
PErsia is a great and large province, & was once noble and of great fame, but now devastate and overrun by the Tartars, it is of less dignity, & the ancient renown thereof greatly diminished, and the name divided into the provinces confine or adjacent unto it. So that now the province of Persia (as it is divided) containeth eight kingdoms: whereof the first is named Chasum, the second Churdistam, the third Loc, the fourth Cielstam, the fift, Instanich, the sixth, Zerazi, the seventh, Socham, and the eight, Timochaim, in the confines of Persia. There are very fair and goodly horses of great price, insomuch that sometimes one is sold for .200. pounds of Turon. Merchants bring them to the cities of Chisi and Curmosa, situate on the sea side, and sell them into India. Also Asses be there very fair and great, insomuch that sometimes one is sold for xxx pound weight of silver. The people is of evil disposition, quarrelous, thieves, and murderers: and rob and kill merchants by the way, except they go in great companies. Yet in the cities, they are of bet●er manners, and of more humanity: also very excellent artificers in works of gold, silk, Embroidery, needle work, and such like. They have abundance of bombasine, wheat, barley, mill, wine also, and fruits, but in religion, they are Mahometans.   

Of the kingdom of the Persians, Haithon in his book de Tartaris. Cap. seven. writeth as followeth.  
THe kingdom of the Persians, is divided chief into two parts, which make one kingdom, because they are both subject to the dominion of one king. The first part of Persia, beginneth in the East, from the confines of the kingdom of Turquestan, and is extended toward the West, to the great river of Phison, 
Phison is thought to be Ganges.  which is the chief among the four floods which run out of earthly paradise. Toward the North, it is extended to the Caspian sea, and toward the South, unto the deserts of India. The region is in manner all plain: in the midst whereof, are two very great and rich cities, the one is named Boctara, and the other Seonorgant. The Persians have a language proper to themselves: they use merchandise and tillage of the ground, and among themselves live in peace: In time paste they were idolaters, and honoured fire chief for God. But after that the sect of the mahometans occupied the dominion of those lands, they became universally Saracens, 
Saracens (that is) Mahometans.  believing the devilish doctrine of Mahumet. The other part of Persia, beginneth from the river Phison, and is extended Westward unto the confines of the kingdoms of Media, and partly also of Armenia the greater. Toward the North, it is extended unto the Caspian sea, on the South side, it confineth with a certain province of the kingdom of Media, and in this province are two great cities, one named Nesabor, and the other Sachen, which in sect and manners, are like unto the other.  
Of Persia, and of divers cities thereof, & other notable things read hereafter, the third book of the voyage of Lodovicus Vartomannus. Also, the first book of the same voyage. Cap. 12. of Mahumet and his fellows: where you may see the difference in religion between the Turks and Persians, being both mahometans.   

The name of the Sophy, Thomas Shaugh, and why he is so called.  
THe Persians do not call their king by the name of Sophy, but this name sophy, is given him by other nations: for of his own people, he is called Thomas Shaugh, which is, Thomas the ruler, Soltan, or governor: for Shaugh, is not the name of a king, but of an office. For a king in their language, is called Pachet, but no Prince is called by this name, before he have reigned by seven discentes: but he that now reigneth, is but only of five discentes, and is therefore called only Shaugh, which is a name of office.  
He hath four wives and xii sons, and hath kept one of his sons in prison many years, for a great overthrow which he gave the Turk in the wars, although he took the same for acceptall service, and a noble exploit. Yet forasmuch as by that fact, he obtained great renown of a valiant and warlike man, he began himself to have him in suspicion, lest the glory of that enterprise might encourage him to attempt somewhat against his father, as oftentimes the Turks sons have rebelled against their fathers yet living, and displaced them of their dignity.   

Of the kingdom of Ormus, confine to Persia, and of the traffic between them. Also of the city and Island of Ormus or Armusium.  
ORmus is a great kingdom, 
Abraham Ortelius.  and hath a peculiar King, tributory to the king of Portugal. This kingdom containeth all the sea coasts of Arabia, in the gulf of Persia, from the mouth of the river of Euphrates, until the Cape of Razalguati, and also part of the kingdom of Persia, which is adjacent unto the straight of Bazora, called Fretum Bazorae, and in manner all the Islands of the gulf of Persia, called Sinus Persicus. The Metropolis or chief city of the kingdom of Ormus, is the city of Ormus, situate in an Island named Geru, being one of the famoust martes of these parts of the world. The Island is within the gulf of Persia, not far within the straight of Bazora. This straight of Bazora, other have named the straight of Ormus, being between Arabia Foelix, and the region of Persia. The region of Ormus is well peopled, & hath many goodly places & cities. The gulf is not every where navigable, by reason of many shelves and low places. Within four days sailing of Ormus, are the Islands of Baharen, where are found the fairest oriental pearls of the world. Ormus useth traffic of merchandise with Adem & Cambaia, and with the kingdoms of Decan & Goa, & with the ports of Narsinga & Malabar. The chief merchandise brought from thence, are horses of Arabia & Persia, pearls, salt peter, brimstone, silk, Tutia, Alum, also Alum of Alexandria or Borace, U●triol, or Copporose, salt in great quantity, silver, Musk, Ambar, wheat, many dried fruits, Rise, & many other provisions of victuals, and other things to be eaten. For these, they return pepper, cloves, Cinnamon, Ginger, and divers other sorts of spices and drugs, which are dispersed into sundry regions of Persia and Arabia, and also into Aden where there is great plenty. But if they be dear in Ormus, it is not possible that they should be carried to Cair, to come into Italy. Their return, is with Rise, as much as they can have, white cloth, & Iron. Their horses are of marvelous great price in the kingdoms of Goa, Decan, and Narsinga, and therefore yearly the merchants of Ormus bring many thither, and yet sometime one horse is there at the price of seven. hundred of those pieces of gold, which they call Saraffos. The best are of Arabia, the second of Persia, and the worst of Cambaia.   

Of the Sophy and kingdom of Persia, after the later writers.  
PErsia is one of the greatest and most famous Provinces of the world. It toucheth not the sea, but at the gulf of Ormus. On the side of Cambaia, it confineth with the people named Motagues, on the side of Arabia, with the gulf of Ormus, on the side of the firm land, with the mountains of Deli, and on the side of Carmania, 
Babylon of Chaldea, and not of Egypt.  and in manner by the confines of Babylon, it extendeth toward India: it hath many kingdoms and cities subject unto it. The people of Persia, are called Azemini. It containeth four principal provinces, which are these: Coraconi, Ginali, Tauris, Xitarim. In the which also are these four most famous cities: 
Tauris or Teveris.  That is Tauris, Siras, Samarcante, Coraconi: They are valiant and warlike men, & of great estimation. They of Samarcante, have in ancient time been Christians. Tauris and Siras, are cities as famous among them, as is with us Paris in France: they are men of great civility and courtesy. The women of Siras, are of commendable beauty and behaviour, very neat and delicate, and thereof cometh a proverb among the mahometans, that Mahumet would never go to Siras, lest if he had tasted the pleasures of those women, he should never after his death have gone to paradise. The king of Persia is called Siech Ishmael, whom the Italians call Gualizador, or Sophi. His chief mansion place or court, 
Ishmael, they pronounce Smael.  is at Tauris, or Teveris, which is distant from Ormus fifty days journey with camels. He is called the great Mahometan of the order of the red bonnet (that is) of the sect of Hali, which our men that came late from Persia, call Mortus Ali, 
Mortus Ali.  whereof we have spoken more before. The region of Persia, hath all sorts of domestical or tame beasts, such as are in our countries. It hath furthermore, Lions, Onces, and Tigers, the people are much given to pleasures and sports, and are honourably appareled, delighting greatly in perfumes and sweet savours: they have many wives, and commit the keeping or charge of them to enuches or gelded men: who for that service, 
Enukes or gelded men.  are oftentimes preferred to great promotion, yet are they very jealous of their wives. Notwithstanding, both the Persians, and also their neighbours of Ormus, are detestable Sodomites. In time passed many great and valiant personages, as Cyrus, Darius, Assuerus, and great Alexander, have invaded Persia. It is not barren as some have written, but hath abundance of all sorts of victuals, and pleasures, and things necessary for the life of man.   

The traffic of Persia, with other countries.  
IN the region of Persia, are many sorts of merchandise, wherewith they use great traffic in the countries of Armenia, Turchia, and in the city of Cair or Alcayr. From the land of Siras, is brought great abundance of silk, whereof is made an infinite quantity of all sorts of silken clothes, and fine chamolettes of divers colours: also great abundance of roche alum, Vitriol, Alcoffare. Likewise many horses, victuals, Turques stones, wax, honey, butter. etc. Also great pieces of tapestry of divers sorts & works, clothes of sundry colours, velvets both high and low after their manner: Likewise cloth of gold of sundry sorts: Pavilions, and great abundance of armure. From the other side of the mountains by the way of Siam, are brought Musk, Aloes, rhubarb, Lignum aloes, Camphora, etc. All these things, and many other, are carried to Ormus: for the which, the return is, great quantity of Pepper, and other spices and drugs: for the Persians use much spices with their meats, and especially Pepper.   

Of the Gulf of Persia, or Sinus Persicus.  
THe region and land of Persia, is situate between two rivers, which fall not into the Ocean sea, but into the gulf of Persia: the which gulf hath on every side many goodly countries well inhabited. The gulf containeth in largeness lx miles, and is navigable with great Barks, and is sometimes troubled with great tempests. There is taken great abundance of fish, which being salted or dried, is carried into all parts of Persia. The gulf is also very long, and containeth from Ormus to the end, lx. days journey with camels.  
1 Articles of the Privileges which the Sophy of Persia granted to the english merchants.  
These articles were sent unto the company of merchants from Mosko, by master jenkinson, granted in the names of these persons. Sir William Garret, Sir William Chester, governors. Sir Thomas Lodge, Master Antony jenkinson, Master Thomas nicols, and Arthur Edwardes, merchants of London: as also in the names of the whole company.  
2 first, it is granted that you shall pay no manner of customs or tolls any kind of ways, now nor in time coming unto his heirs after him. And that all english merchants now present, or hereafter, may pass and repass into all places of his dominions, and other countries adjoining to him, in the trade of merchandise, to buy and sell all manner of commodities, with all manner of persons.  
3 Item that in all places, where any of our merchants shallbe chief governors, rulers, and justices, to take heed unto the English merchants, and be their aid, and punish them that shall do them any wrong or hurt.  
4 Item that such debts as shallbe owing by any manner of person, justice to be done on the party, and to see all English merchants paid at the day.  
5 Item that no manner of person of what estate or degree they be of, so hardy to take any kind of wares, or any gifts, without the english merchants good wills.  
6 Item if by chance medley, any of the merchants or servants (as God forbid) should kill any of his subjects, no parts of their goods to be touched or meddled withal, neither no person but the offender, and being any of the merchants, not to suffer without the prince's knowledge & advice.  
7 Item that all such debts as shallbe oweing, to be paid to any of the merchants in the absence of the other, be the party dead or alive.  
8 Item that no person return any kind of wares back again, being once bought or sold.  
9 Item that when God shall send the merchants goods to shore, presently his people to help them aland with them.   

The prosperous viage of Arthur Edwardes into Persia, and of the favour that he found with the Sophy, and also what conference he had with that prince.  
WHen he came first to the Sophy's presence, bringing his interpreter with him, and standing far of, the Sophy (sitting in a seat royal with a great number of his noble men about him) bad him come near, and that thrice, until he came so near him that he might have touched him with his hand. Then the first demand that he asked him, was from what country he came: he answered, that he came from England. Then asked he of his noble men, who knew any such country. But when Edward's saw that none of them had any intelligence of that name, he named it Inghilterra, 
Londro.  as the Italians call England. Then one of the noble men said Londro, 
London.  meaning thereby London, which name is better known in far countries out of Christendom, then is the name of England. When Edwardes hard him name Londro, he said that that was the name of the chief city of England, as was Teveris, of the chief city of Persia. He asked him many things more, as of the realm of England, marvelling that it should be an Island, of so great richesse and power, as Edwardes declared unto him, of the riches and abundance of our merchandise, as he further understood by our traffic in moscovia and other countries. He demanded also many things of the Queen's majesty, and of the customs and laws of the realm: saying oftentimes in his own language, Bara colla (that is to say) well said. He asked also many things of king Philip, and of his wars against the Turk at Malta. Then demanded of him what was the chief cause of his resort into his realm. And being certified that it was for the trade of merchandise, he asked what kind of merchandise he could bring thither. Such (said he) as the Venetian merchants, which dwelling in our country in the city of Londro, send to Uenes, and from thence into Turkey by Halepo and Tripoli in Sorya, from whence, as by the second and third hands, with great charges of many customs and other things thereunto pertaining, they are at the length brought into your country and cities of Persia. What merchandise are those, said the Sophy? Edward's answered, that they were great abundance of fine carseiss, of broad clothes, of all sorts and colours, as scarlettes, violettes, and other of the finest cloth of all the world. 
The Venetians traffic in England.  Also that the Venetians brought out of England, not only such clothes ready made, but furthermore great plenty of fine wool to mingle with their wools, of the which they could not otherwise make fine cloth: Affirming that there went out of England yearly that ways, 
English clothes, carses & fine wool.  above two hundred thousand carseiss, and as many broad clothes, beside fine wool and other merchandise, beside also the great abundance of like clothes, that which were carried into Spain, Barbary, and divers other countries. The Sophy then asked him by what means such merchandise might be brought into Persia. Right well Sir (said he) by the way of moscovia, with more safety and in much shorter time than the Venetians can bring them, first from England to Uenes, and from thence into Persia, by the way of Turkey. And therefore if it shall please your majesty to grant us free passage into all your dominions, with such privileges as may appertain to the safeguard of our lives, goods, and merchandise, we will furnish your countries with all such merchandise, & other commodities, in shorter time, and better cheap than you may have the same at the Turks hands. This talk and much more was between the Sophy and Edwardes for the space of two hours, all which things liked him so well, that shortly after he granted to the said Arthur Edward's two other privileges, for the trade of merchandise into Presia, all written in Azure and gold letters, and delivered unto the lord keeper of the Sophy his great seal. The lord keeper was named Coche Califaye, who said that when the Shaughe (that is the king or prince) did sit to seal any letters, that privilege should be sealed and delivered to Laurence Chapman. In this privilege is one principal article for servants or merchants: That if the Agent do perceive that upon their naughty doings, they would become Busor men, 
Busor men, be they that forsake their faith, and receive the religion of Mahumet.  that then the Agent wheresoever he shall find any such servant or servants, to take them, and put them in prison: and no person to keep them, or maintain them. This article was granted in respect of a custom among the Persians, being Mahometans: whose manner is friendly to receive and well entertain, both with gifts & living, all such Christians as forsaking their religion, will become of the religion of the Persians. Insomuch that before this privilege was granted, there was great occasion of naughty servants to deceive and rob their masters: that under the colour of professing that religion, they might live among them in such safety, that you might have no law against them, either to punish them, or to recover your goods at their hands, or else where. For before the Sophy (whom they say to be a marvelous wise and gracious prince) seemed to favour our nation, and to grant them such privileges, the people abused them very much, and so hated them that they would not touch them, but reviled them, calling them Cafars & Gawars, which is, infidels, or misbelievers. But after they saw how greatly the prince favoured them, they had them afterward in great reverence, and would kiss their hands, and use them very friendly. For before, they took it for no wrong to rob them, defraud them, bear false witness against them, & such merchandise as they had bought or sold, make them take it again, and change it as often as them listed. And if any stranger by chance had killed one of them, they would have the life of two for one slain, and for the debts of any stranger, would take the goods of any other of the same nation, with many other such like abuses, in manner unknown to the Prince, before the complaints of our men made unto him for reformation of such abuses: which were the cause that no merchant strangers of contrary religion, durst come into his dominions with their commodities: which might be greatly to the profit of him and his subjects.   

The Articles.  
10 Item that the merchants have free liberty, as in their first privilege, to go unto Gylian, and all other places of his dominions, now or hereafter when occasion shallbe given.  
11 Item if by misfortune any of their ships should break, or fall upon any part of his dominions on the sea coast, his subjects to help with all speed to save the goods, & to be delivered to any of the said merchants that liveth: or otherwise to be kept in safety until any of them come to demand them.  
12 Item if any of the said merchants depart this life in any city or town, or on the high way, his governors there to see their goods safely kept, and to be delivered to any other of them that shall demand them.  
13 Item the said merchants to take such camel men as they themselves will, being country people: and that no Kyssell Bayshe do let or hinder them, 
Kyssell Bashe are the gentlemen that wear red caps.  And the said owners of the camels, to be bound to answer them such goods as they shall receive at their hands: and the camel men to stand to the losses of their camels or horses.  
14 Item more, that the said carryars do demand no more of them, than their agreement was to pay them.  
15 Item more, if they be at a price with any carryours, and given earnest, the Camel men to see they keep their promise.  
16 Item if any of the said merchants be in fear to travail, to give them one or more to go with them, and see them in safety with their goods to the place they will go unto.  
17 Item in all places, to say, in all cities, towns, or villages on the high way, his subjects to give them honest rooume, and victuals for their money.  
18 Item the said merchants may in any place where they shall think best, build or buy any house or houses to their own uses: And no person to molest or trouble them, and to stand in any Caravan where they will, or shall think good.  
THe commodities which the merchants may have by this trade into Persia, are thought to be great, 
The commodity which English merchants may have by the trade into Persia.  and may in time perhaps be greater than the Portugals trade into the East Indies, forasmuch as by the way of Persia into England, the return may be made every year once, whereas the Portugals make the return from calicut but once in two years, by a long and dangerous viage all by sea: for whereas the city and Island of Ormus, lying in the gulf of Persia, is the most famous mart town of all East India, whither all the merchandise of India are brought, the same may in shorter time, and more safely, be brought by land & rivers through Persia, even unto the Caspian sea, and from thence by the countries of Russia or Moscovia by rivers, even unto the city of Yeraslave, and from thence by land a hundred and fourscore miles to Vologda: and from thence again all by water, even unto England.  
The merchandise which be had out of Persia for the return of wares, are silk of all sorts and colours, both raw and wrought: Also all manner of spices and drugs, Pearls and precious stones: likewise carpets of divers sorts, with divers other rich merchandise, whereof you may read more here before in the Chapter entitled, Of the traffic of Persia with other countries. It was told me of them that came last from Persia, that there is more silk brought into some one city of Persia, then is of cloth brought into the city of London. Also that one village of Armenia, named Gilgat, doth carry yearly five hundred, and sometime a thousand mules laden with silk to Halepo in Sorya of Turkey, being four days journey of Tripoli, where the venetians have their continual abiding, and send from thence silks, which they return for English carses, and other clothes, into all parts of Christendom.   

The manner how the Christians become Busor men, and forsake their religion.  
I Have noted here before, that if any Christian will become a Busor man, that is, one that hath forsaken his faith, and be a Mahometan of their religion, they give him many gifts, and sometime also a living. The manner is, that when the devil is entered into his heart to forsake his faith, he resorteth to the Soltan or governor of the town, to whom he maketh protestation of his devilish purpose. The governor appointeth him a horse, and one to ride before him on an other horse, bearing a sword in his hand, and the Busor man bearing an arrow in his hand, and rideth in the city, cursing his father and mother: and if ever after he return to his own religion, he is guilty of death, as is signified by the sword borne before him. A young man, a servant of one of our merchants, because he would not abide the correction of his master for his faults, was minded to forsake his faith. But (as God would) he fell suddenly sick and died, before he gave himself to the devil. If he had become a Busor man, he had greatly troubled the merchants, for if he would then have said that half their goods had been his, they would have given credit unto him. For the avoiding of which inconvenience, it was granted in the privileges that no Busor man etc. as there appeareth.  
In Persia in divers places, oxen and kine bear the tents and household stuff of the poor men of the country, 
Oxen and kine bear burdens.  which have neither camels nor horses.   

Of the tree which beareth Bombasine cotton. or Gossampine  
IN Persia is great abundance of Bombasine cotton, and very fine, this groweth on a certain little tree or briar, not past the height of a man's waste, or little more: the tree hath a slender stalk, like unto a brier, or to a carnation gyleflour, with very many branches, bearing on every branch a fruit, or rather a cod, growing in round form, containing in it the cotton: and when this bud or cod cometh to the bigness of a walnut, it openeth and showeth forth the cotton, which groweth still in bigness until it be like a fleece of wool as big as a man's fist, and beginneth to be lose: and then they gather it as it were the ripe fruit. The seeds of these trees, are as big as peason, and are black, and somewhat flat, and not round: they sow them in ploughed ground, where they grow in the fields in great abundance in many countries in Persia, and divers other regions.   

The writing of the Persians.  
ARthur Edwardes showed me a letter of the Sophy, written in their letters backward, subsigned with the hands both of the Sophy & his secretary. The Sophy's subscription, was only one word (his name I suppose of Shaugh) written in golden letters upon red paper. The whole letter was also written on the same piece of red paper, being long and narrow, about the length of a foot, and not past three inches broad. The private signet of the Sophy, was a round printed mark, about the bigness of a Ryall, only printed upon the same paper, without any wax or other seal: the letters seem so myshapen and disordered, that a man would think it were somewhat scribbled in manner at adventures. Yet they say that almost every letter with his prick or circumflexe, signifieth a whole word. Insomuch that in a piece of paper as big as a man's hand, their writing doth contain as much as doth ours almost in a sheet of paper.    

¶ The two viages made out of England into Guinea in Africa, at the charges of certain merchants adventurers of the city of London, in the year of our Lord▪ 1553.  
BEing desired by certain of my friends, to make some mention of these viages, that some memory thereof might remain to our posterity, if either iniquity of time, consuming all things, or ignoranuce creeping in by barbarousness and contempt of knowledge, should hereafter bury in oblivion so worthy attempts, so much the greatlyer to be esteemed, as before never enterprised by english men, or at the least so frequented, as at this present they are, and may be, to the great commodity of our merchants, if the same be not hindered by the ambition of such, 
Ambision.  as for the conquesting of forty or fifty miles here & there, and erecting of certain fortresses, or rather blockehouses among naked people, think themselves worthy to be lords of half the world, envying that other should enjoy the commodities, which they themselves can not wholly possess. And although such as have been at charges in the discovering and conquesting of such lands, aught by good reason to have certain privileges, pre-eminences, and tributes for the same, yet (to speak under correction) it may seem somewhat rigorous, and against good reason and conscience, or rather against the charity that ought to be among Christian men, that such as violently invade the dominions of other, should not permit other friendly to use the trade of merchandise, in places nearer, or seldom frequented of them, whereby their trade is not hindered in such places, where they themselves have at their own election appointed the martes of their traffic. But forasmuch as at this present, it is not my intent to accuse or defend, approve or improve, I will cease to speak any further hereof, & proceed to the description of the first voyage, as briefly and faithfully as I was advertised of the same, by the information of such credible persons, as made diligent inquisition to know the truth hereof, as much as shallbe requisite, omitting to speak of many partiticuler things, not greatly necessary to be known: which nevertheless, with also the exact course of the navigation, shall be more fully declared in the second viage. And if herein favour or friendship shall perhaps cause some to think that some have been sharply touched, let them lay a part favour and friendship, and give place to truth, that honest men may receive praise for well doing, and lend persons reproach, as the just stipend of their evil deserts, whereby other may be deterred to do the like, and virtuous men encouraged to proceed in honest attempts.  
But that these voyages may be more plainly understood of all men, I have thought good for this purpose, before I entreat hereof, to make a brief description of Africa, 
Africa.  being that great part of the world, on whose West side beginneth the coast of Guinea at Cabo Verde, about the twelve degrees in latitude, on this side the Equinoctial line, 
The coast of Guinea.  and two degrees in longitude from the measuring line, so running from the North to the South, and by East in some places within. u.iiii. and iii degrees and a half within the Equinoctial, and so forth in manner direcly East and by North, for the space of xxxvi. degrees, or there about, in longitude from the West to the East, as shall more plainly appear in the description of the second viage.  

A brief description of Africa.  
IN Africa the less are these kingdoms: the kingdom of Tunes & Constantina, 
Tunes.  which is at this day under Tunes, and also the region of Bugia, Tripoli, and Ezzah. 
Bugia. Tripoli.  This part of Africa is very barren by reason of the great deserts, 
Numidia.  as the deserts of Numidia & Barcha The principal ports of the kingdom of Tunes are these: Goletta, Bizerta, Potofarnia, Bova, and Stora. The chief cities of Tunes, are Constantina, and Bova, with divers other. Under this kingdom are many islands, as Zerbi, 
Islands of Tunes. Malta.  Lampadola, Pantalarea, Limoso, Beit, Gamelaro, and Malta, where at this present is the great master of the Rhodes. Under the South of this kingdom, are the great deserts of Libya. 
The deserts of Libya.  All the nations in this Africa the less, are of the sect of mohammed, & a rustical people, living scattered in villages. The best of this part of Africa, 
Barbary.  is Barbaria, lying on the coast of the sea Mediterraneum.  

Mauritania.  Mauritania (now called Barbaria) is divided into two parts, as Mauritania Tingitania, and Cesariensis. Mauritania Tingitania, is now called the kingdom of Fes, and the kingdom of Marrocko. 
The kinkdoms of Fes and marrocko.  The principal city of Fes, is called Fessa: and the chief city of Marrocko, is named Marrocko. Mauritania Cesariensis, is at this day called the kingdom of Tremisen, 
Tremisen.  with also the city called Tremisen or Telensin. This region is full of deserts, and reacheth to the sea Mediterraneum, to the city of Oram, with the port of Massaquiber. 
Oram. Massaquiber.  The kingdom of Fes reacheth unto the Ocean sea, from the West to the city of Argilla: and the port of the said kingdom is called Salla. 
Salla.   
The kingdom of Marrocko is also extended above the Ocean sea, unto the city of Azamor and Azafi, which are above the Ocean sea toward the West of the said kingdom. 
Azamor.  In Mauritania Tingitania (that is to say, in the two kingdoms of Fes and Marrocko) are, 
The Islands of Canary.  in the sea, the Islands of Canary, called in old time the fortunate Islands. Toward the South of this region, 
Guinea.  is the kingdom of Guinea, with Senega, jaiofo, Gambra, and many other regions of the black moors, 
Ethiopians.  called Ethiopians or Negroes, all which are watered with the river Negro, called in old time Niger. In the said regions are no cities, but only certain low cottages made of boughs of trees, plastered with chauke, and covered with straw: In these regions are also very great deserts.  

Marrocko.  The kingdom of Marrocko hath under it these seven kingdoms: Hea, Sus, Guzula, the territory of Marrocko, Duchala, Hazchora, 
Fes.  and Telde. The kingdom of Fes hath as many: as Fes, Temesne, Azgar, Elabath, Errifi, Garet, and Elcauz. The kingdom of Tremisen hath these regions: 
Tremisen.  Tremisen, Tenez, and Elgazaet, 
Guinea.  all which are Machometistes. But all the regions of Guinea are pure gentiles and idolaters, without profession of any religion, or other knowledge of God, then by the law of nature.  

Africa the great.  Africa the great, is one of the three parts of the world, known in old time, and severed from Asia, on the East by the river Nilus, on the West, from Europe by the pillars of Hercules. The hither part is now called Barbary, and the people Moors. The inner part is called Libya and Ethiopia. 
Africa the lease.  Africa the less, is in this wise bounded: On the West it hath Numidia: On the East Cyrenaica: On the North, the sea called Mediterraneum. In this country was the noble city of Carthage. 
Carthage.   
In the East side of Africa, beneath the red sea, dwelleth the great and mighty Emperor and Christian king Prester john, 
Prester john.  well known to the Portugals in their voyages to Calicut. His dominions reach very far on every side: and hath under him many other kings both Christian and heathen that pay him tribute. This mighty prince is called David Themperor of Ethiopia. Some write, that the king of Portugal sendeth him yearly viii ships laden with merchandise. His kingdom confineth with the red sea, and reacheth far into Africa toward egypt and Barbary. 
Cape de Buona Speranza. The sea of sand. Alcair.  southward it confineth with the sea toward the cape de Buona Speranza: and on the other side with the sea of sand, called Mare de Sabione, a very dangerous sea, lying between the great city of Alcayer, or Cairo in Egypt, and the country of Ethiopia: In the which way are many unhabitable deserts, continuing for the space of five days journey. And they affirm, that if the said Christian Emperor were not hindered by those deserts (in the which is great lack of victuals, and especially of water) he would or now have invaded the kingdom of Egypt, and the city of Alcayer. The chief city of Ethiopia, where this great Emperor is resident, is called Amacaiz, being a fair city, whose inhabitants are of the colour of an olive. There are also many other cities, as the city of Sava upon the river of Nilus, where Themperor is accustomed to remain in the summer season. There is likewise a great city named Barbaregaf, and Ascon, from whence it is said that the Queen of Saba came to Jerusalem to hear the wisdom of Solomon. 
From whence the queen of Saba came.  This city is but little, yet very fair, and one of the chief cities in Ethiope. In the said kingdom is a province called Manicongni, 
Manicongni.  whose king is a Moor, and tributary to Themperor of Ethiope. In this province are many exceeding high mountains, upon the which is said to be the earthly paradise: 
The earthly Paradise. The trees of the Sun and Moon.  and some say that there are the trees of the Sun and Moon, whereof the antiquity maketh mention: yet that none can pass thither, by reason of great deserts of a hundred days journey. Also beyond these mountains, is the cape of Bona Speranza. And to have said thus much of Africa it may suffice.   

The first viage to Guiena.  
IN the year of our Lord .1553. the xii day of August, sailed from Porchmouth two goodly ships, 
The Primrose. The Lion. The Moon.  the Primrose and the Lion, with a pinnace called the Moon, being all well furnished aswell with men of the lustiest sort, to the number of seven score, as also with ordinance and victuals, requisite to such a voyage: having also two Captains, the one a stranger, called Antoniades Pinteado, a Portugal, borne in a town named the port of Portugal, 
Pinteado.  a wise, discreet, and sober man, who for his cunning in sailing, being as well an expert pilot as politic Captain, was sometime in great favour with the king of Portugal, and to whom the coasts of Brasile and Guinea, were committed to be kept from the Frenchmen, 
Brasile. Guinea.  to whom he was a terror on the sea in those parts, and was furthermore a Gentleman of the king his masters house. But as fortune in manner never favoureth but flattereth, 
The flattering of fortune.  never promiseth but deceiveth, never raiseth but casteth down again, and as great wealth and favour hath always companions emulation and envy, he was after many adversities and quarrels made against him, enforced to come into England: where in this golden viage he was evil matched with an unequal companion, and unlike match of most sundry qualities and conditions, with virtues few or none adorned. Thus departed these noble ships under sail on their viage. But first Captain Wyndam, putting forth of his ship at Porchmouth, a kinsman of one of the head merchants, and showing herein a muster of the tragical parts he had conceived in his brain, and with such small beginnings nourished so monstrous a birth, that more happy, yea and blessed was that young man being left behind, 
The Islands of Madera.  then if he had been taken with them, as some do wish he had done the like by theirs. Thus sailed they on their viage, until they came to the Islands of Madera, where they took in certain wines for the store of their ships, and paid for them as they agreed of the price. At these Islands they met with a great Galion of the king of Portugal, full of men and ordinance: 
A galleon of the king of Portugal.  yet such as could not have prevailed if it had attempted to withstand or resist our ships, for the which cause it was set forth, not only to let and interrupt these our ships of their purposed voyage, but all other that should attempt the like: yet chief to frustrate our viage. For the King of Portugal was sinisterly informed that our ships were armed to his castle of Mina in these parties, 
The Castle of Mina.  whereas nothing less was meant.  
After that our ships departed from the Islands of Madera forward on their viage, began this worthy Captain Pinteados sorrow, as a man tormented with the company of a terrible Hydra, who hitherto flattered with him, and made him a fair countenance and show of love. Then did he take upon him to command all alone, setting nought both by Captain Pinteado, with the rest of the merchante factors: sometimes with opprobrious words, and sometimes with threatenings, most shamefully abusing them, taking from Pinteado the service of the boys & certain mariners that were assigned him by the order and direction of the worshipful merchants, and leaving him as a common mariner, which is the greatest despite and grief that can be to a Portugal or spaniard, to be diminishte their honour, which they esteem above all riches. Thus sailing forward on their viage, they came to the islands of Canary, 
The Islands of Canary. The Island of S. Nicolas.  continuing their course from thence until they arrived at the Island of Saint Nicolas, where they vyttayled themselves with fresh meat, of the flesh of wild Goats, whereof is great plenty in that Island, and in manner of nothing else. From hence following on their course, and tarrying here and there at the desert Islands in the way, because they would not come to timely to the country of Guinea for the heat, 
Guinea.  and tarrying somewhat to long (for what can be well ministered in a common wealth, where inequality with tyranny will rule alone) they came at the length to the first land of the country of Guinea, 
The river of Sesto.  where they fell with the great river of Sesto, where they might for their merchandise have laden their ships with the grains of that country, 
Grains.  which is a very hot fruit, and much like unto a fig as it groweth on the tree. For as the figs are full of small seeds, so is the said fruit full of grains, which are lose within the cod, having in the midst thereof a hole on every side. This kind of spice is much used in cold countries, and may there be sold for great advantage, for exchange of other wares. But our men by the persuasion or rather enforcement of this tragical Captain, not regarding, and setting light by that commodit●e, in comparison to the fine gold they thirsted, 
The thirst of gold.  sailed an hundred leagues further, until they came to the golden land: where not attempting to come near the Castle pertaining to the king of Portugal, 
The Castle of Mina.  which was within the river of Mina, made sale of their w●re only on this side and beyond it, for the gold of that country, 
The quantity of gold.  to the quantity of an hundred and fifty pounds weight, there being in case that they might have dispatched all their ware for gold, if the untame brain of Wyndam had or could have given ear to the counsel and experience of Pinteado. For when that Wyndam, not satisfied with the gold which he had (and more might have had if he had tarried about the Mina) commanding the said Pinteado (for so he took upon him) to lead the ships to Benin, 
Benin.  being under the Equinoctial line, and a hundred and fifty leagues beyond the Mina, where he looked to have their ships laden with pepper: and being counseled of the said Pinteado, 
Pepper.  considering the late time of the year, for that time to go no further, but to make sale of their wares such as they had for gold, whereby they might have been great gainers. But Wyndam not assenting hereunto, fell into a sudden rage, 
Fury admitteth no counsel.  reviling the said Pinteado, calling him jew, with other opprobrious words, saying, This whoreson jew hath promised to bring us to such places as are not, or as he can not bring us unto: but if he do not, I will cut of his ears, and nail them to the mast. Pinteado gave the foresaid counsel to go no further, for the safeguard of the men & their lives, which they should put in danger if they came to late, for the rossia which is their winter, 
The Rossia. Rotting heat.  not for cold but for smothering heat, with close and cloudy air, and storming wether, of such putrefying quality, that it rotted the coats of their backs: or else for coming to soon for the scorching heat of the sun, 
Scorching heat.  which caused them to linger in the way. But of force, and not of will, brought he the ships before the river of Benin: where riding at an Anchor, 
Benin.  sent their pinnace up into the river fifty or threescore leagues, from whence certain of the merchants with Captain Pinteado, Francisco a Portugal, 
Francisco. Nicolas Lamberte.  Nicolas Lambert Gentleman, and other merchants, were conducted to the court where the king remained, ten leagues from the river side: whither when they came, they were brought with a great company to the presence of the King, 
The king of Banin his court.  who being a black Moor (although not so black as the rest) sat in a great huge hall, long and wide, the walls made of earth, without windows, the roof of thin boards, open in sundry places, like unto lovers, to let in the air.  
And here to speak of the great reverence they give to their king, 
Reverence toward the king.  being such that if we would give as much to our saviour Christ, we should remove from our heads many plagues which we daily deserve for our contempt and impiety.  
So it is therefore, that when his noble men are in his presence, they never look him in the face, but sit couryng, as we upon our knees, so they upon their buttocks, with their elbows upon their knees, and their hands before their faces, not looking up until the King command them. And when they are coming toward the King, as far as they do see him, do they show such reverence, sitting on the ground with their faces covered as before. Likewise when they depart from him, they turn not their backs toward him, but go creeping backward with like reverence.  
And now to speak somewhat of the communication that was between the King and our men, 
The communication between the king of Benin and our men.  you shall first understand that he himself could speak the Portugal tongue, which he had learned of a child. Therefore after that he had commanded our men to stand up, and demanded of them the cause of their coming into that country, they answered by Pinteado, that they were merchants, traveling into those parties for the commodities of his country, for exchange of wares which they had brought from their countries, being such as should be no less commodious for him and his people. The King then having of old lying in a certain store house thirty or forty kyntalles of pepper (every kyntall being an hundred weight) willing them to look upon the same, 
Pepper.  and again to bring him a sight of such merchandise as they had brought with them. And thereupon sent with the Captain and the merchants, certain of his men to conduct them to the waters side, with other to bring the ware from the pinnace to the court. Who when they were returned and the wares seen, the king grew to this end with the merchants, 
The kings gentleness toward our men.  to provide in thirty days the lading of all their ships with pepper. And in case their merchandise would not extend to the value of so much pepper, he promised to credit them to their next return: and thereupon sent the country round about to gather pepper, causing the same to be brought to the court: So that within the space of thirty days they had gathered fourscore tun of pepper.  
In the mean season, our men partly having no rule of themselves, 
The disorder and death of our men.  but eating without measure of the fruits of the country, and drinking the wine of the Palm trees that droppeth in the night from the cut branches of the same, and in such extreme heat running continually into the water, not used before to such sudden and vehement alterations (than the which nothing is more dangerous) were thereby brought into swellings and agues: insomuch that the later time of the year coming on, caused them to die sometimes iii & sometimes four or .v. in a day. Then Windam perceiving the time of the xxx days to be expired, & his men dying so fast, sent to the court in post to captain Pinteado, and the rest, to come away, and to tarry no longer. But Pinteado, with the rest, wrote back to him again, certifying him of the great quantity of pepper they had already gathered, and looked daily for much more: Desiring him furthermore to remember the great praise and name they should win, if they came home prosperously, and what shame of the contrary. With which answer Wyndam not satisfied, and many of their men dying daily, willed and commanded them again either to come away forthwith, or else threatened to leave them behind. When Pinteado heard this answer, thinking to persuade him with reason, took his way from the court toward the ships, being conducted thither with men by the kings commandment.  
In the mean season Windam all raging, broke up Pinteados' Cabin, broke open his chests, spoiled such provision of cold stilled waters and suckettes as he had provided for his health, and left him nothing, neither of his instruments to sail by, nor yet of his apparel: and in the mean time falling sick himself, died also. Whose death Pinteado, coming abroad, 

The death of wyndan.  
Pinteado evil used of the mariners.   lamented as much as if he had been the dearest friend he had in the world. But certain of the mariners and other officers did spette in his face, some calling him jew, saying that he had brought them thither to kill them: and some drawing their swords at him, making a show to slay him. Then he, perceiving that they would needs away, desired them to tarry, that he might fetch the rest of the merchants that were left at the court. But they would not grant his request. Then desired he them to give him the ship boat, with as much of an old sail as might serve for the same, promising them therewith to bring Nicolas Lambert and the rest into England: But all was in vain. Then wrote he a letter to the court to the merchants, 
This Lambart was a Londener borne, whose father had been Lord mayre of London, and this Lambart sometime a knight of the roads, one as he was unmarried, so he lived in the fear of God, and was the first of that order that forsook the Pope, and cla●e to Gods holy word. The death of Pinteado.  informing them of all the matter, and promising them if God would lend him life to return with all haste to fetch them. And thus was Pinteado kept a bordeshyppe against his will, thrust among the boys of the ship, not used like a man, nor yet like an honest boy, but glad to find favour at the cook's hand. Then departed they, leaving one of their ships behind them, which they sunk for lack of men to carry her. After this, within six or seven days sailing, died also Penteado, for very pensiveness and thought that struck him to the heart: A man worthy to serve any prince, and most vilely used. And of sevenscore men came home to Plymmowth scarcely forty, and of them many died. And that no man should suspect these words which I have said in commendation of Pinteado, to be spoken upon favour otherwise then truth, I have thought good to add hereunto the copy of the letters which the king of Portugal and the infant his brother wrote unto him, to reconcile him, at such time as upon the king his masters displeasure (and not for any other crime or offence, as may appear by the said letters) he was only for poverty enforced to come into England, where he first persuaded our merchants to attempt the said voyages to Guinea. But as the king of Portugal to late repent him that he had so punished Pinteado, upon malicious informations of such as envied the man's good fortune, even so may it hereby appear, that in some cases, even Lions themselves, may either be hindered by the contempt, or aided by the help of the poor mice, according unto the fable of Esope.   

The copy of Antoni Anes Pinteado his letters patents, whereby the king of Portugal made him knight of his house, after all his troubles and imprisonment, which, by wrong information made to the king, he had sustained of long time, being at the last delivered, his cause known and manifested to the king by a grey friar the kings confessor.  
I The king do give you to understand lord Frances Desseosa, one of my counsel, and overseer of my house, that in consideration of the good service which Antony Anes Pinteado, the son of john Anes, dwelling in the town called the port, hath done unto me, my will and pleasure is, to make him knight of mi house, 
Seven hundred reis are ten s. Alcayre is half a bushel.  allowing to him in pension seven hundred reis monthly, and every day one alcayre of barley, as long as he keepeth a horse, and to be paid according to the ordinance of my house. providing always that he shall receive but one marriage gift: And this also in such condition, that the time which is excepted in our ordinance, forbidding such men to marry for getting such children as might succeed them in this allowance, which is two years after the making of this patent, shallbe first expired before he do marry. I therefore command you to cause this to be entered in the book called the Matricola of our household, under the title of knights. And when it is so entered, let the clerk of the Matricola, for the certainty thereof, write on the backside of this Aluala, or patent, the number of the leaf wherein this our grant is entered. Which done, let him return this writing unto the said Anthony Anes Pinteado for his warrant.  
I Diego Henriques have written this in Almarin the twenty and two day of September, in the year of our Lord .1551. And this benevolence the king gave unto Anthony Anes Pinteado the twenty and five day of july this present year.  
Rey.   

The secretaries declaration written under the kings grant.  
YOur Majesty hath vouchsafed, in respect & consideration of the good service of Anthony Anes Pinteado, dwelling in the port, and son of john Anes, to make him knight of your house, with ordinary allowance, of seven hundred Reys pension by the month, and one Alcayr of Barley by the day, as long as he keepeth a Horse: and to be paid according to the ordinance of your house, with condition that he shall have but one marriage gift: and that not within the space of vi years after the making of these letters patents. The secretaries note. Entered in the book of the Matricola. Fol. 683.  
Francisco de Siquera.   

The copy of the letter of Don jews the infant, and brother to the king of Portugal: sent into England to Anthony Anes Pinteado.  
ANthonie Anes Pinteado, I the infant brother to the king, have me heartily commended unto you. Peter Gonsalues is gone to seek you, desiring to bring you home again into your country. And for that purpose, hath with him a safe conduct for you, granted by the king, that thereby you may freely and without all fear come home. And although the weather be foul and stormy, yet fail not to come: For in the time that his Majesty hath given you, you may do many things to your contentation and gratyfiing the king, whereof I would be right glad: and to bring the same to pass, will do all that lieth in me for your profit. But forasmuch as Peter Gonsalues will make further declaration hereof unto you, I say no more at this present.  
written in Luxburne the eight day of December. Anno. M.D.LII The infant Don jews.  
ALL these foresaid writings I saw under seal, in the house of my friend Nicholas Liese, with whom Pinteado left them, at his unfortunate departing to Guinea. But notwithstanding all these friendly letters and fair promises, Pinteado durst not attempt to go home, neither to keep company with the Portugals his country men, without the presence of other: forasmuch as he had secret admonitions that they intended to slay him, if time and place might have served their wicked intent.   

The second voyage to Guinea.  
AS in the first voyage I have declared rather the order of the history, than the course of the navigation, whereof at that time I could have no perfect information: so in the description of this second voyage, my chief intent hath been to 〈◊〉 the course of the same, according to the observation and ordinary custom of the mariners, and as I received it at the hands of an expert Pilot, being one of the chief in this voyage, who also with his own hands wrote a brief declaration of the same, as he found and tried all things, not by conjecture, but by the art of sailing, and instruments pertaining to the mariners faculty. Not therefore assuming to myself the commendations due unto other, neither so bold as in any part to change or otherwise dispose the order of this voyage, so well observed by art and experience, I have thought good to set forth the same, in such sort and phrase of speech as is commonly used among them, and as I received it of the said pilot, as I have said. Take it therefore as followeth.  
In the year of our lord .1554. the .11. day of October, we departed the river of Thames with three goodly ships, the one called the Trinity, a ship of the burden of sevenscore tun, the other called the Barthelmew, a ship of the burden of. lxxxx. the third was the john Evangelist, a ship of sevenscore tun. With the said ships and two pynnesses (whereof the one was drowned in the coast of England) we went forward on our viage, and stayed at Dover xiiii days. We stayed also at Rye three or four days. Moreover last of all we touched at Darthmouth.  
The first day of November at ix of the clock at night, departing from the coast of England, we set of the start, bearing south-west all that night in the sea, and the next day all day, and the next night after, until the third day of the said month about noon, making our way good, did run .60. leagues.  
Item from xii of the clock the third day, till xii of the clock the four day of the said month, making our way good southest, did run every three hours two leagues, which amounteth to xvi leagues the whole.  
Item from. x●i. of the clock the four day, to xii of the clock the .v. day, running south-west in the sea, did run xii leagues.  
Item running from xii of the clock the v day, until xii of the cloak the vi day, running southeast, did run xviii. leagues.  
And so from xii of the clock the vi day, until xii of the clock the vii day, running southsouthwest, did run every hour ii leagues, which amount to xlviii leagues the whole.  
Item from xii of the clock the vii day, till iii of the clock the viii day, southsouthwest running in the sea, did run xxx leagues.  
Item from three of the clock the viii day, until iii of the clock the ix day, running southsouthwest, did run xxx leagues.  
Item from iii of the clock the ix day, till iii of the clock the ten day, did southsoutheast in running in the sea the sum of xxiiii leagues.  
Also from iii of the clock the ten day, until xii of the clock the xi day, did run southsouthwest the sum of xii leagues, and from xii of the clock, till vi of the said day, did run vi. leagues.  
Running south and by west in the sea, from vi of the clock the xi. day, till vi of the clock the xii. day, did run xxxvi leagues.  
From vi of the clock at after noon the xii day, till vi of the clock the xiii day at after noon, did run xiii leagues. Item from vi of the clock the xiii day, till vi of the clock the xiiii day at after noon, we were becalmed, that we could lie south-west with a sail. And the xu day in the morning, the wind came to the East and Eastnortheast. The xvii day in the morning, 
The I'll of Madera.  we had sight of the isle of Madera, which doth rise to him that cometh in the northnortheast part upright land in the west part of it, and very high: and to the southsoutheast a low long land, and a long point, with a saddle through the midst of it, standeth in the xxxii degrees: and in the west part, many springs of water running down from the mountain, and many white fields like unto corn fields, and some white houses to the southeast part of it: and the top of the mountain showeth very ragged if you may see it, and in the North-east part there is a byght or bay as though it were a harborowe: Also in the said part, there is a rock a little distance from the shore, and over the said byght, you shall see a great gap in the mountain.  
The xix day at xii of the clock, we had sight of the isle of Palms and Teneriffa and the Canaries. 
The I'll of palms. Teneriffa. The Canaries.  The I'll of Palm riseth round, and lieth southeast and northwest, and the northwest part is lowest. In the south, is a round hill over the head land, and an other round hill above that in the land. There is between the Southeast part of the isle of Madera and the northwest part of the isle of Palm lvii leagues. 
From Madera to the isle of Palms.  This I'll of Palm lieth in the xxix degrees. And our course from Madera to the isle of Palm was south, & south and by west, so that we had sight of Teneriffa & of the Canaries. The southeast part of the isle of Palm, and the northnortheast of Teneriffa, lieth southeast and northwest, and between them is twenty leagues. Teneriffa and the great Canary, called Grancanaria, and the West part of Fortisuentura, standeth in xxvii degrees and a half. Gomera, 
Grancanaria. Fortisuentura. The Island of Gomera.  is a fair Island and very ragged, and lieth West south-west of Teneriffa. And who so ever will come between them two Islands, must come South and by East, and in the South part of Gomera is a town and a good road in the said part of the Island: and it standeth in twenty and seven degrees and three terces. Teneriffa is an high land, & a great high pick, like a sugar loaf: 
Teneriffa. snow.  and upon the said pick is snow throughout all the whole year. And by reason of that pick it may be known above all other Islands, and there we were becalmed the twenty day of November, from six of the clock in the morning, until four of the clock at after noon.   

Between Gomera, and Cape de las Barbas.  
THe xxii day of November, under the tropic of Cancer, the Sun goeth down West and by South. 
The coast of Barbary. Cape blank.  Upon the coast of Barbary xxv leagues by North Cape blank at three leagues of the main, there is xu fathom, and good shelly ground, & sand among, and no streams, and two small Islands standing in the xxii degrees & a terce.  
From Gomera to Cape de las Barbas is an hundred leagues, and our course was South and by East. The said Cape standeth in xxii. and a half: and all that coast is flat xvi or xvii. fathom deep. Uii or viii, leagues of fr●m the river de Oro to cape de las Barbas, 
The river of de Oro.  there use many spaniards and Portugals to trade for fishing, during the month of November: and all that coast is very low lands. Also we went from cape de las Barbas southsouthwest, and south-west and by south, till we brought ourselves in twenty degrees and a half, reckoning ourselves vii leagues of: and that was the least shoals of cape Blank.  
Then we went South, until we brought ourselves in thirteen degrees, reckoning ourselves twenty and five leagues of. And in fifteen degrees, we did rear the crossiers, 
The Cros●ers or cross s●arres.  and we might have reared them sooner if we had looked for them: They are not right a Cross in the month of November, by reason of the nights are short there. Nevertheless we had the sight of them the xxix day of the said month at night.  
The first of December out thyrteene degrees, we set our course South and by East, until the fourth day of December at twelve of the clock the same day. Then we were in niene degrees and a terce, reckoning ourselves thirty leagues of the shoals of the river called Ria Grande, 
Rio Grande.  being West south-west of them: the which shoals be thirty leagues long.  
The fourth of December▪ we began to set our course Southeast, we being in six degrees and a half.  
The ninth day of December we set our course East Southeast: the fourteenth day of the said month, we set our course East, we being in five degrees and a half, reckoning our selves thirty and six leagues from the coast of Guinea.  
The xix of the said month, we set our course East and by North, 

Cape Mensurado.  
The river of Sesto.   reckoning ourselves xvii leagues distant from Cape Mensurado, the said Cape being East. North-east of us, and the river of Sesto being East.  
The xxi day of the said month, we fell with Cape Mensurado to the Southeast, about two leagues of. This Cape may be easily known, by reason the rising of it is like a purpose head. Also toward the Southeast there are three trees, whereof the Eastermost tree is the highest, and the myddlemost is like a high stack, and the Southermost like unto a Gibbet: and upon the main, are four or five high hills rising one after an other like round hoommockes or hyllockes. And the Southeast of the three trees, is three trees like a brandierwyse: and all the coast along is white sand. The said Cape standeth within a little in six degrees.  
The xxii of December, we came to the river of Sesto, and remained there until the xxix day of the said month. Here we thought it best to send before us the pinnace to the river of Dulce, called Rio Dulce, that they might have the beginning of the market before the coming of the john.  
At the river of Sesto, we had a Tun of grains. This river standeth in vi degrees, 

The river of Sesto.  
Rio Dulce.   lacking a terce. From the river of Sesto to Rio Dulce, is xxv leagues. Rio Dulce standeth in five degrees and a half. The river of Sesto is easy to be known, by reason there is a ledge of rocks on the Southeast part of the Rode. And at the entering into the haven, are five or six trees that bear no leaves. This is a good harborowe, but very narrow at the entrance into the river. There is also a rock in the havens mouth right as you enter. And all that coast between Cape de Monte, and cape de las Palmas, lieth Southeast and by East, 
Cape de monte.  Northwest and by West, being three leagues of the shore, And you shall have in some places rocks two leagues of: and that between the river of Sesto and cape de las Palmas. 
Cape de las Palmas.   
Between the river of Sesto & the river Dulce. is xxv leagues: and the high land that is between them both, is called Cakeado, 
The land of Cakeado.  being eight leagues from the river of Sesto. And to the southeastward of him, is a place called Shawgro, and an other called Shyawe or Shavo, where you may get fresh water. 
Shavo.  Of this Shyawe, lieth a redge of rocks: and to the southeastward, lieth a hedlande called Croke. Between Cakeado and Croke, 
Croke.  is ix or ten leagues. To the southeastward of, is a harborowe called saint Vincent: Right over against saint Vincent, 
Saint Vincentes harborowe.  is a rock under the water, two leagues and a half of the shore. To the southeastward of that rock you shall see an Island about three or four leagues of: this Island is not passed a league of the shore. To the East Southeast of the Island, is a rock that lieth above the water, and by that rock goeth in the river of Dulce, 
The river Dulce.  which you shall know by the said river and rock. The Northwest side of the haven, is flat sand, and the Southeast side thereof, is like an Island, and a bare plat without any trees, and so is it not in any other place.  
In the Road, you shall ride in xiii. or xiiii fathoms, good owes and sand, being the marks of the Road to bring the Island and the North-east land together, and here we anchored the last of December.  
The third day of january, we came from the river of Dulce.  
Note that cape de las Palmas, is a fair high land, 
Cape de las Palmas.  but some low places thereof by the water side look like red cliffs with white streaks like ways, a cable length a piece, & this is to the East part of the cape. This cape is the Southermost land in all the coast of Guinea, 
The coast of Guinea.  and standeth in four degrees and a terce.  
The coast from Cape de las palmas to Cape Trepoyntes, or the tres Puntas, is fair and clear without rock or other danger.  
Twenty and five leagues from Cape de las Palmas, the land is higher than in any place, until we come to Cape Trepoyntes. And about ten leagues before you come to Cape Trepoyntes, the land riseth still higher and higher, until you come to Cape Trepoyntes. Also before you come to the said Cape, after other five leagues to the Northwest part of it, there is certain broken ground, with two great rocks, and within them in the byght of a bay, 
The castle of Arra.  is a castle called Arra, pertaining to the king of Portugal. You shall know it by the said rocks that lie of it: for there is none such from Cape de las Palmas to cape Trepoyntes. This coast lieth East & by North, West & by South. From Cape de las Palmas to the said castle, is fourscore and fifteen leagues. And the coast lieth from the said castle to the westermost point of the Trepoyntes, Southeast and by South, Northwest and by North. Also the westermost point of the Trepoyntes, is a low land, lying half a mile out in the sea: and upon the innermost neck to the land ward, is a tuft of trees, & there we arrived the eleventh day of january.  

The town of Samma.  The twelve day of january, we came to a town called Samma or Samua, being viii leagues from Cape Trepoyntes toward East north-east. Between Cape Trepoyntes and the town of Samua, is a great ledge of rocks a great way out in the sea. We continued four days at that town: & the captain thereof would needs have a pledge a shore. 
The pledge was sir john yo●k his nephew.  But when they received the pledge, they kept him still, & would traffic no more, but shot of their ordinance at us. They have two or three pieces of ordinance and no more. The xvi day of the said month, we made reckoning to come to a place called Cape Corea, 
Cape Corea.  where captain Don John dwelleth, whose men entertained us friendly. This Cape Corea, is four leagues Eastward of the castle of Mina, other wise called La mina or Castello de mina, 
The castle of mina pertaining to the king of Portugal.  where we arrived the xviii day of the month. Here we made sail of all our cloth, saving two or three packs.  
The xxvi day of the same month we weighed anchor, and departed from thence to the Trinity, which was vii leagues Eastward of us, where she sold her wares. Then they of the Trinity willed us to go Eastward of that viii or ix leagues, to sell part of their wares, in a place called Perecow, 
Perecowe. Perecowe grands.  and an other place named Perecow Grande, being the eastermost place of both these, which you shall know by a great round hill near unto it, named Monte Rodondo, lying westward from it, 
Monte rodond●.  and by the water side are many high palm trees. From hence did we set forth homeward the xiii day of February, and plied up alongst till we came within vii or viii leagues to Cape Trepointes. About viii of the clock the xu day at afternoon, we did cast about to seaward: and beware of the currants, 
The currants  for they will deceive you sore. Whosoever shall come from the coast of Mina homeward, 
From Mina homeward.  let him be sure to make his way good west, until he reckon himself as far as Cape de las Palmas, where the currant setteth always to the eastward. And within twenty leagues eastward of Cape de las Palmas, is a river called De los Potos, where you may have fresh water and balasse enough, 

Rio de los Potos.  
ivory.   and plenty of ivory or Elephants teeth. This river standeth in four degrees, and almost two terces. And when you reckon yourself as far shot as Cape de las Palmas, being in a degree, or a degree and a half, 
Cabe de las Palms.  you may go west, & west by north, until you come in three degrees: and then you may go west northwest, and northwest and by west, until you come in five degrees, and then northwest. And in the vi degrees, we met northerly winds, and great roofling of tides. And as we could judge, the currants went to the north northwest. Furthermore between Cape de Monte and Cape verde, go great currants which deceive many men. 
currants.   
The xxii day of Apryll, we were in viii degrees and two terces: and so we ran to the northwest, having the wind at North-east and east North-east, and sometimes at east, until we were at xviii degrees and a terce, which was on may day. And so from xviii and two terces, we had the wind at east and east North-east, and sometimes at east southeast: and then we reckoned the Islands of Cape Verde east southeast of us, we judging ourselves to be xlviii leagues of. And in twenty and xxi degrees, we had the wind more easterly to the southward then before. And so we ran to the Northwest & north northwest, and sometimes north & by west and north, until we came into xxxi degrees, where we reckoned ourselves a hundred and fourscore leagues south-west, and by south of the Island de Flore or de los Flores, 
The Ilede Flora.  and there we met with the wind at south southeast, and set our course North-east.  
In xxiii degrees, we had the wind at the South and south-west, and then we set our course north North-east, and so we ran to xl degrees, and then we set our course North-east, the wind being at the south-west, and having the Isle de Flore East of us, and xvii. leagues of.  
In xli degrees, we met with the wind at North-east, and so we ran northwestwarde, than we met with the wind at the west northwest, and at the west within vi leagues, running toward the northwest, and then we cast about, and lay North-east, until we came in xlii degrees, where we set our course East North-east, 
The I'll of Coruo.  judging the isle of Coruo south and by west of us, and xxxvi. leagues distant from us.  
A remembrance that the xxi day of May, we communed with john Ralph, and he thought it best to go North-east, and judged himself xxv leagues Eastward to the Isle de Flore, and in xxxix degrees and a half.  


Where they lost the sight of the North star.  
How the compass doth vary.   Note that in the fourth day of September, under niene degrees, we lost the sight of the north star.  
Note also, that in the xlv degrees, the compass is varied viii degrees to the West.  
Item, in xl degrees, the compass did vary xu degrees in the whole.  
Item, in xxx degrees and a half, the compass is varied .v. degrees to the West.  
Be it also in memory, that two or three days before we came to cape Trepointes, the pinnace went alongst the shore, thinking to sell some of our wares, and so we came to Anchor three or four leagues west and by south of the cape Trepointes, where we left the Trinity.  
Then our pinnace came aboard with all our men: the pinnace also took in more wares. They told me moreover that they would go to a place where the primrose was, 
The Primrose.  and had received much gold at the first viage to these parties, and told me furthermore that it was a good place: but I fearing a brigantine that was then upon the coast, did weigh and follow them, & left the Trinity about four leagues of from us, and there we road against that town four days: so that Martin by his own desire, and assent of some of the Commissioners that were in the pinnace, went a shore to the town, and there john Berin went to traffic from us, being three miles of trafcking at an other town. The town is called Samma or Samua, for Samma and Sammaterra, are the names of the two first towns, 
The town of Samma.  where we did traffic for gold, to the North-east of cape Trepoints. 
Gold.   
hitherto continueth the course of the viage, as it was described by the said Pilot. Now therefore I will speak somewhat of the country and people, and of such things as are brought from thence.  
They brought from thence at the last viage, 
Gold four hundred weight. Grains.  four hundred pound weight and odd of gold, of xxii Carrattes and one grain in fineness: also xxxvi butts of grains, and about two hundred and fifty Elephants teeth of all quantities. Of these, I saw and measured some of ix spans in length, 
Elevantes teeth.  as they were crooked. Some of them were as big as a man's thigh above the knee, and weighed about four score and ten pound weight a piece. They say that some one hath been seen of a hundred and xxv pound weight. Other there were which they call the teeth of calves, of one or two or three years, whereof some were a foot and a half, some two foot, and some three, or more, according to the age of the beast. These great teeth or tusks, grow in the upper jaw downward, and not in the nether jaw upward, wherein the painters and arras workers are deceived. At this last viage was brought from Guinea the head of an Elephante, of such huge bigness, 
The head of an Elephant.  that only the bones or cravewe thereof, beside the nether jaw and great tusks, weighed about two hundred weight, and was as much as I could well lift from the ground: insomuch that considering also herewith the weight of two such great teeth, the nether jaws with the less teeth, the tongue, the great hanging ears, the big and long snout or troonke, with all the flesh, brains, and skin, with all other parts belonging to the whole head, in my judgement it could weigh little less than five hundred weight. This head divers have seen in the house of the worthy merchant sir Andrew judde, where also I saw it, and beheld it, not only with my bodily eyes, but much more with the eyes of my mind and spirit, considered by the work, the cunning and wisdom of the workmaster: 
The contemplations of God's works.  without which consideration, the sight of such strange and wonderful things may rather seem curiosities, then profitable contemplations.  
The Elephante (which some call an Oliphante) is the biggest of all four footed beasts, 
The description and properties of the Elephant  his forelegges are longer than his hinder, he hath ankles in the lower part of his hinder legs, and five toes on his feet undivided, his snout or troonke is so long, and in such form, that it is to him in the steed of a hand: for he neither eateth nor drinketh but by bringing his troonke to his mouth, therewith he helpeth up his master or keeper, therewith he overthroweth trees. Beside his two great tusks, he hath on every side of his mouth four teeth, wherewith he eateth and grindeth his meat: either of these teeth, are almost a span in length, as they grow along in the jaw, and are about two inches in height, and almost as much in thickness. The tusks of the Male are greater than of the Female: his tongue is very little, and so far in his mouth, that it can not be seen: of all beasts they are most gentle and tractable, for by many sundry ways they are taught, and do understand: insomuch that they learn to do due honour to a King, and are of quick sense and sharpness of wit. When the Male hath once seasoned the Female, he never after toucheth her. The Male Elephante liveth two hundred years, or at the least one hundred and twenty: the Female almost as long, but the flower of their age, is but lx years, as some write. They can not suffer winter or cold: they love rivers, and will often go into them up to the snout, wherewith they blow and snuff, and play in the water: but swim they can not for the weight of their bodies. Pliny and Solinie write, that they use none adultery. If they happen to meet with a man in wilderness being out of the way, gently they will go before him, and bring him into the plain way. joined in battle, they have no small respect unto them that be wounded: for they bring them that are hurt or weary into the middle of the army to be defended: they are made tame by drinking the juice of barley. They have continual war against Dragons, which desire their blood, because it is very cold: 
Debate between the Elephant and the Dragon.  and therefore the Dragon lying await as the Elephant passeth by, windeth his tail (being of exceeding length) about the hinder legs of the Elephant, and so steying him, thrusteth his head into his troonke and exhausteth his breath, or else biteth him in the ear, whereunto he can not reach with his troonke, and when the Elephant waxeth faint, he falleth down on the Serpent, being now full of blood, and with the poised of his body breaketh him: so that his own blood with the blood of the Elephant, runneth out of him mingled together, which being cold, is congealed into that substance which the Apothecaries call Sanguis Draconis, (that is) Dragon's blood, otherwise called Cinnabaris, 
Sanguis Draconis.  although there be an other kind of Cinnabaris, 
Cinnabaris.  commonly called cinoper or vermilion, which the painters use in certain colours.  
They are also of three kinds, as of the marshes, the plains, and the mountains, no less differing in conditions. 
Three kinds of Elephants.  Philostratus writeth, that as much as the Elephant of Libya in bigness passeth the horse of Nysea, so much doth the Elephants of India exceed them of Libya: for of the Elephants of India, some have been seen of the height of ix cubits: the other do so greatly fear these, that they dare not abide the sight of them. Of the Indian Elephants, only the Males have tusks, but of them of Ethiopia and Libya, both kinds are tusked: they are of divers heyghtes, as of. xii.xiii. and xiiii dordantes, every dodrant benig a measure of niene inches. Some write that an Elephant is bigger than three wild Oxen or Buffs. They of India are black, or of the colour of a Mouse, but they of Ethiope or Guinea, are brown: the hide or skin of them all, is very hard, and without hear or bristles: their ears are two dodrantes broad, and their eyes very little. Our men saw one drinking at a river in Guinea, as they sailed into the land.  
Of other properties and conditions of the Elephant, as of their marvelous docilicie, of their fight and use in the wars, of their generation and chastity, when they were first seen in the theatres and triumphs of the Romans, how they are taken and tamed, and when they cast their tusks, with the use of the same in medicine, who so desireth to know, let him read Pliny, in the viii book of his natural history. He also writeth in his xii. book, that in old time they made many goodly works of ivory or Elephants teeth: 
Works of ivory.  as tables, trestles, posts of houses, rails, lattesses for windows, Images of their gods, and divers other things of ivory, both coloured and uncoloured, & intermyxt with sundry kinds of precious woods, as at this day are made certain Chairs, Lutes, and Uirginalles. They had such plenty thereof in old time, that (as far as I remember) josephus writeth, that one of the gates of Jerusalem was called Porta Eburnea, (that is) the ivory gate. The whiteness thereof was so much esteemed, that it was thought to represent the natural fairness of man's skin: insomuch that such as went about to set forth (or rather corrupt) natural beauty with colours and painting, were reproved by this proverb, Ebur atramento candefacere, that is, to make ivory white with ink. The Poettes also, describing the fair necks of beautiful virgins, call them Eburnea colla, that is, ivory necks. And to have said thus much of Elephants and ivory, it may suffice.  
Now therefore I will speak somewhat of the people and their manners, 
The people of Africa.  and manner of living, with also an other brief description of Africa. It is to understand, that the people which now inhabit the regions of the coast of Guinea, and the mid parts of Africa, as Libya the inner, and Nubia, with divers other great and large regions about the same, were in old time called Ethiopes and Nigrite, which we now call moors, Moorens, or Negroes, a people of beastly living, without a God, law, religion, or common wealth, and so scorched and vexed with the heat of the sun, that in many places they curse it when it riseth. Of the regions and people about the inner Libya (called Libya Interior) Gemma Phrysius writeth thus. 
Libya Interior.   
Libya Interior, is very large and desolate, in the which are many horrible wildernesses and mountains, replenished with divers kinds of wild and monstrous beasts and Serpents. first from Mauritania or Barbary toward the South is Getulia, 
Getulia.  a rough and salvage region, whose inhabitants are wild and wandering people. After these follow the people called Melanogetuli and Pharusii, which wander in the wilderness, carrying with them great gourds of water. The Ethiophians, called Nigrite, occupy a great part of Aphrica, 
Ethiopes. Nigrite.  and are extended to the West Ocean. southward also they reach to the river Nigritis, whose nature agreeth with the river of Nilus, 
The river Nigritis or Senega.  forasmuch as it is increased and diminished at the same time, and bringeth forth the like beasts as the Crocodile. By reason whereof, I think this to be the same river which the Portugals call Senega: For this river is also of the same nature. It is furthermore marvelous and very strange that is said of this river: And this is, that on the one side thereof, 
A strange thing  thinhabitants are of high stature and black, and on the other side, of brown or tawny colour, and low stature, which thing also our men confirm to be true. There are also other people of Libya called Garamantes, whose women are common: 
Garamantes.  for they contract no matrimony, neither have respect to chastity. After these are the nations of the people called Pyrei, Sathiodaphnite, Odrangi, Mimaces, Lynxamate, Dolopes, Agangine, 
People of Libya.  Leuce Ethiopes, Xilicei Ethiopes, Calcei Ethiopes, and Nubi. These have the same situation in Ptolemy that they now give to the kingdom of Nubia. Here are certain Christians under the dominion of the great Emperor of Ethiopia, called Prester john. From these toward the west, 
Prester john.  is a great nation of people called Aphricerones, whose region (as far as may be gathered by conjecture) is the same that is now called Regnum Orguene, 
Regnum Orguene.  confining upon the east parts of Guinea. From hence Westward, and somewhat toward the North, are the kingdoms of Gambra and Budomel, 
Gambra.  not far from the river of Senega. And from hence toward the inland regions, and along by the sea coast, are the regions of Ginoia or Guinea, which we commonly call Gynnee. On the West side of these regions toward the Ocean, 
Guinea or Cap. Perde. The Portugals navigations to Brasile.  is the cape or point called Gaboverde, or Caput viride (that is) the green cape, to the which the Portugals first direct their course when they sail to America or the land of Brasile. Then departing from hence, they turn to the right hand toward the quarter of the wind called Garbino, which is between the west and the south. But to speak somewhat more of Ethiopia. 
Ethiopia.  Although there are many nations of people so named, yet is Ethiopia chiefly divided into two parts, whereof the one is called Ethiopia under egypt, 
The Island of Meroe.  a great and rich region. To this pertaineth the Island of Meroe, embraced round about with the streams of the river Nilus. In this Island women reigned in old tyme. 
The queen of Saba.  josephus writeth, that it was sometime called Sabea: and that the queen of Saba came from thence to Jerusalem, to bear the wisdom of Solomon. From hence toward the East, reigneth the said Christian Emperor Prester john, whom some call Papa johannes, 
Prester john Emperor of Ethiopia.  and other say that he is called Pean ivan (that is) great john, whose Empire reacheth far beyond Nilus, and is extended to the coasts of the red sea and Indian sea. The middle of the region is almost in the .66. degrees of longitude, and xii degrees of latitude. About this region inhabit the people called Clodu, 
People of the east side of Africa.  Risophagi, Babilonij, Axiunite, Molili, and Molibe. After these is the region called Trogloditica, whose inhabitants dwell in caves and dens: for these are their houses, 
Ephiophagi.  and the flesh of serpents their meat, as writeth Pliny, and Diodorus Siculus. They have no speech, but rather a grinning and chattering. 
People without heads.  There are also people without heads, called Blemines, having their eyes and mouth in their breast. Likewise Strucophagi, and naked Ganphasantes: Satyrs also, which have nothing of men but only shape. Moreover Oripei, great hunters. Mennones also, and the region of Smyrnophora, 
Myrrh. Azania.  which bringeth forth myrrh. After these is the region of Azania, in the which many Elephants are found. A great part of the other regions of Africa that are beyond the Equinoctial line, 
Regnum Melinde.  are now ascribed to the kingdom of Melinde, whose inhabitants are accustomed to traffic with the nations of Arabia, and their king is joined in friendship with the king of Portugal, and payeth tribute to Prester john.  
The other Ethiope, called Ethiopia Interior (that is) the inner Ethiope, is not yet known for the greatness thereof, but only by the sea coasts: 
Ethiopia Interior.  yet is it described in this manner. first from the Equinoctial toward the South, is a great region of Ethiopians, which bringeth forth white Elephants, Tigers, 
white Elephants.  and the beasts called Rhinocerontes. Also a region that bringeth forth plenty of cinnamon, lying between the branches of Nilus. Also the kingdom of Habech or Habasia, a region of Christien men, 
Habasia.  lying both on this side and beyond Nilus. Here are also the Ethiopians, called Ichthiophagi (that is) such as live only by fish, 
Ichthiophagi.  & were sometimes subdued by the wars of great Alexander. Furthermore the Ethiopians called Rhapsii, and Anthropophagi, 
An thropophagis.  that are accustomed to man's flesh, inhabit the regions near unto the mountains called Montes Lunae, (that is) the mountains of the Moon. 
Montes Lunae.  Gazatia, is under the tropic of Capricorn. After this, 
Gazatia,  followeth the front of Africa, the Cape of Buena Speranza, or Caput Bonae Spei, (that is) the Cape of good hope, 
Cape bonae Spei.  by the which they pass that sail from Spain to Calicut. But by what names the Capes and gulfs are called, forasmuch as the same are in every globe and card, it were here superfluous to rehearse them.  
Some write that Africa was so named by the Grecians, because it is without cold. For the Greek letter Alpha, or A, 
Aphrica without cold.  signifieth privation, void, or without: and Phrice, signifieth cold. For in deed although in the stead of winter, they have a cloudy and tempestuous season, yet is it not cold, 
The winter of Africa.  but rather smothering hot, with also hot shewres of rain, and somewhere such scorching winds, that what by one means and other, they seem at certain times to live as it were in furnaces, and in manner already half way in Purgatory or hell Gemma Phrisius writeth, that in certain parts of Africa, 
Flames of fire & noise in the air.  (as in Atlas the greater) the air in the night season is seen shining, with many strange fierce and flames rising in manner as high as the Moon: and that in the element are sometime heard as it were the sound of pipes, trumpets, and drums: Which noises may perhaps be caused by the vehement and sundry motions of such fiery exhalations in the air, as we see the like in many experiences wrought by fire, air, & wind. The hollowness also, & divers reflections and breaking of the clouds, 
The middle region of the air is cold.  may be great causes hereof, beside the vehement cold of the middle region of the air, whereby the said fiery exhalations, ascending thither, are suddenly stricken back with great force: For even comen and daily experience teacheth us, by the whyssing of a burning Torch, what noise fire maketh in the air, 
The strife of elements.  & much more where it striveth when it is enclosed with air, as appeareth in guns, and as the like is seen in only air enclosed, as in Orgen pipes, and such other instruments that go by wind. For wind (as say the Philosophers) is none other than air vehemently moved, 
Wind.  as we see in a pair of bellows, and such other.  
Some of our men of good credit that were in this last voyage to Guinea, affirm earnestly that in the night season they felt a sensible heat to come from the beams of the Moon. The which thing, 
The heat of the Moon.  although it be strange and insensible to us that inhabit cold regions, yet doth it stand with good reason that it may so be, forasmuch as the nature of stars and planets (as writeth Pliny) consisteth of fire, 
The nature of the stars.  and containeth in it a spirit of life▪ which can not be without heat.  
And that the Moon giveth heat upon the earth, the Prophet David seemeth to confirm in his. Cxxi. Psalm, where speaking of such men as are defended from evils by god's protection, he sayeth thus: Per diem Sol non exuret te, nec Luna per noctem. That is to say, In the day the Sun shall not burn thee, nor the Moon by night.  
They say furthermore that in certain places of the sea, they saw certain streams of water, 
Spouts of water falling out of the air.  which they call spouts, falling out of the air into the sea, and that some of these are as big as the great pillars of Churches: Insomuch that sometimes they fall into ships, and put them in great danger of drowning. Some fantasy that these should be the Caractes of Heaven, 
Carractes of heaven.  which were all opened at noah's flood. But I think them rather to be such fluxions and eruptions as Aristotle in his book de Mundo saith, to chance in the sea. For speaking of such strange things as are seen often times in the sea, he writeth thus. Oftentimes also even in the sea are seen evaporations of fire, and such eruptions and breaking forth of springs, that the mouths of rivers are opened, Whyrlepooles, and fluxions are caused of such other vehement motions, 
Vehement motions in the sea.  not only in the midst of the sea, but also in creeks and streyghtes. At certain times also, a great quantity of water is suddenly lifted up and carried about with the Moon. etc. By which words of Aristotle it doth appear that such waters may be lifted up in one place at one time, and suddenly fall down in an other place at an other tyme. And hereunto perhaps pertaineth it that Richard chancellor told me that he hard Sebastian Cabot report, that (as far as I remember) either about the coasts of Brasile or Rio de Plata, 
A strange thing.  his ship or pumesse was suddenly lifted from the sea, and cast upon land, I wot not how far. The which thing, and such other like wonderful and strange works of nature while I consider, and call to remembrance the narrowness of man's understanding and knowledge, in comparison of her mighty power, 
The power of nature.  I can but cease to marvel and confess with Pliny, that nothing is to her impossible, the least part of whose power is not yet known to men. Many things more our men saw and considered in this viage, worthy to be noted, whereof I have thought good to put some in memory, that the reader may aswell take pleasure in the variety of things, as knowledge of the history. Among other things therefore touching the manners and nature of the people, this may seem strange, that their princes and noble men use to pounce and raze their skins with pretty knots in divers forms, as it were branched damask, 
They raze their skins.  thinking that to be a decent ornament. And albeit they go in manner all naked, yet are many of them, 
Fyne jewels.  and especially their women, in manner laden with collars, bracelets, hoops, and chains, either of gold, copper, or ivory. I myself have one of their bracelets of ivory, 
A braslet.  weighing two pound and vi ounces of Troy weight, which make xxxviii ounces: this one of their women did wear upon her arm. It is made of one whole piece of the bigest part of the tooth, turned and somewhat carved, with a hole in the midst, wherein they put their hands to wear it on their arm. Some have of every arm one, and as many on their legs, wherewith some of them are so galded, that although they are in manner made lame thereby, yet will they by no means leave them of. Some wear also on their legs great shackles of bright copper, which they think to be no less comely. 
Shackles.  They wear also collars, bracelets, garlands, and girdles, of certain blue stones like beads. Likewise some of their women wear on their bare arms certain foresleeves, made of the plates of beaten gold. On their fingers also they wear rings, 
rings.  made of golden wires, with a knot or wreath, like unto that which children make in a ring of a ryshe. Among other things of gold that our men bought of them for exchange of their wares, were certain dogs chains and collars. 
Dog's chains of gold.   
They are very aware people in their bargaining, and will not lose one spark of gold of any value. They use weights and measures, and are very circumspect in occupying the same. They that shall have to do with them, must use them gently: for they will not traffic or bring in any wares if they be evil used. At the first viage that our men had into these parties, it so chanced, that at their departure from the first place where they did traffic, one of them either stole a musk cat, or took her away by force, 
A musk cat.  not mistrusting that that should have hindered their bargaining in an other place whither they intended to go. But for all the hast they could make with full sails, the fame of their mysusage so prevented them, that the people of that place also, offended thereby, would bring in no wares: insomuch that they were enforced either to restore the cat, or pay for her at their price, before they could traffic there.  
Their houses are made of four posts or trees, and covered with bows. 
Their houses.   
Their common feeding is of roots, and such fishes as they take, 
Their feeding  whereof they have great plenty. There are also such sleeing fishes as are seen in the sea of the West Indies. Our men salted of their fishes, hoping to provide store thereof: but they would take no salt, 
fleeing fishes.  and must therefore be eaten forthwith as some say. How be it, other affirm that if they be salted immediately after they be taken, they will last uncorrupted ten or xii days. But this is more strange, that part of such flesh as they carried with them out of England, 
A strange thing.  and putrefied there, became sweet again at their return to the clime of temperate regions.  
They use also a strange making of bread, in this manner. They grind between two stones with their hands as much corn as they think may suffice their family, 
Their bread.  and when they have thus brought it to flower, they put thereto a certain quantity of water, and make thereof very thin dough, which they stick upon some post of their houses, where it is baked by the heat of the Sun: So that when the master of the house or any of his family will eat thereof, they take it down, and eat it. They have very fair wheat, 
Their wheats.  the ear whereof is two handfuls in length, and as big as a great Bulrush, and almost four inches about where it is byggest. The stem or straw, seemeth to be almost as big as the little finger of a man's hand, or little less. The grains of this wheat are as big as our peason, round also, and very white, and somewhat shining, like pearls that have lost their colour. Almost all the substance of them turneth into flower, and maketh little bran or none. I told in one ear two hundred and threescore grains. The ear is enclosed in three blades longer than itself, and of two inches broad a piece. And by this fruitfulness the Sun seemeth partly to recompense such griefs and molestations as they otherwise receive by the fervent heat thereof. 
The Sun.  It is doubtless a worthy contemplation to consider the contrary effects of the Sun: or rather the contrary passions of such things as receive the influence of his beams, either to their hurt or benefit. Their drink is either water, or the juice that droppeth from the cut branches of the barren Date trees, called Palmites. 
Their drink.  For either they hang great gourds at the said branches every evening, and let them so hang all night, or else they set them on the ground under the trees, that the drops may fall therein, They say that this kind of drink is in taste much like unto whey, but somewhat sweeter, and more pleasant. They cut the branches every evening, because they are seared up in the day by the heat of the Sun. They have also great Beans as big as chestnuts, and very hard with a shell in the stead of a husk.  
Many things more might be said of the manners of the people, and of the wonders and monstrous things that are engendered in Africa. But it shall suffice to have said thus much of such things as our men partly saw, and partly brought with them.  
And whereas before speaking of the fruit of grains, I described the same to have holes by the side (as in deed it is, 
Grains.  as it is brought hither) yet was I afterward informed, that those holes were made to p●t strings or twigs through the fruit, thereby to hang them up to dry at the Sun. They grow not past a foot and a half, or two foot from the ground, and are as red as blood when they are gathered. The grains themselves, are called of the physicians, Grana Paradisi.  

Shells that cleave to ships.  At their coming home, the keels of their ships were marvelously overgrown with certain shells of two inches length and more, as thick as they could stand, and of such bigness that a man may put his thumme in the mouths of them. They certainly affirm that in these there groweth a certain slimy substance, which at the length slypping out of the shell and falling in the sea, becometh those fowls which we call Barnacles. The like shells have been seen in ships returning from Iselande, 
Barnacles.  but these shells were not passed half an inch in length. Of the other that came from Guinea, I saw the primrose lying in the Dock, and in manner covered with the said shells, which in my judgement should greatly hinder her sailing. Their ships were also in many places eaten with the worms called Bromas or Bissas, 
Bromas.  whereof mention is made in the Decades. These creep between the planks, which they eat through in many places.  

A secret.  Among other things that chanced to them in this voyage, this is worthy to be noted, that whereas they sailed thither in seven weeks, they could return in no less space than twenty weeks. The cause whereof they say to be this: That about the coast of Cabo Verde, the wind is ever at the East, by reason whereof they were enforced to sail far out of their course into the main Ocean, to find the wind at the West to bring them home. 
The death of our men.  There died of our men at this last voyage about twenty and four, whereof many died at their return into the clime of the cold regions, as between the Islands of Soria and England. They brought with them certain black slaves, whereof some were tall and strong men, & could well agree with our meats and drinks. The cold and moist air doth somewhat offend them. Yet doubtless men that are borne in hot regions, may better abide cold, 
Cold may be better abiden than heat.  than men that are borne in cold regions may abide heat, forasmuch as vehement heat resolveth the radical moisture of men's bodies, as cold constraineth and preserveth the same.  
This is also to be considered as a secret work of nature, that throughout all Afric under the Equinoctial line, and near about the same, on both sides, the regions are extreme hot, and the people very black. Whereas contrarily such regions of the West Indies as are under the same line, are very temperate, and the people neither black, nor with curled and short wool on their heads, as have they of Africa, but of the colour of an olive, with long and black hear on their heads: the cause of which variety is declared in divers places in the Decades.  
It is also worthy to be noted that some of them that were at this viage told me: That is, that they overtook the course of the Sun, so that they had it North from them at noon, the xiiii. day of March. And to have said thus much of these voyages, it may suffice.   

Of the doves of the Island of Madera.  
CAdamastus writeth, that before the Portugals came to this Island, it was overgrown with trees, and unhabited, yet were there many beasts, and great plenty of doves, which were utterly without fear of men, because they had never seen any men before, nor yet were accustomed to be put in fear: insomuch that they stood still while snares were put about their necks with long rods and poles: the which thing he sayeth, he hath also seen in other Islands. There are many rich men in this Island, and great abundance of flesh, because the whole Island is in manner one garden.   

Of the Island of Saint Thomas, under the Equinoctial line.  
THe chiefest occupation and living of the inhabitants of this Island, is the making of sugar, which they sell yearly to the ships that come for it out of Spain and Portugal, laden with butts of meal and flower, also wine, oil, cheese, leather, swords, cups of glass, beads, certain scaruels of the fine white earth called Porcellana, of the which are made the earthen dishes of the work of Maiolica. And if it were not that such victuals and provisions were brought them out of Spain and Portugal, the white merchants which dwell in that Island (pertaining to the dominion of the king of Portugal) should not be able to live there, forasmuch as they are not accustomed to eat such meats as do the Ethiopians or negroes. And therefore the Portugals which inhabit this Island, have certain black slaves of Guinea, Benin, and Manicongo, which they set to till and labour the ground, and make sugar. Among these white inhabitants, there are many rich men, which have 150. or .200. and some .300. black slaves of men and women, to till the ground, and do other laborious works. This Island was discovered a hundred years since, by the navigations of the Portugals, and was unknown to the old writers. It lieth in the great gulf of Africa, in the .30. degree of longitude from the West to the East, & is in manner round. It is of largeness from side to side lx Italian miles, (that is to say) one degree. The horizontal line of the Island passeth by the two poles, Arctic, and Antarctic, and hath ever the day equal with the night, without any sensible difference, whether the Sun be in Cancer or in Capricorn. The star of the pole Arctic, is there invisible: but the wardens are seen somewhat to move about: & the stars called the Cross are seen very high. Of this Island, with the other lands and Islands lying between Portugal and the same, a certain pylotte of Portugal hath written a goodly viage to Conte Rimondo.   
FINIS.   

The Navigation and voyages of jews Vertomannus, Gentleman of the city of Rome, to the regions of Arabia, egypt, Persia, Syria, Ethiopia, and East India, both within and without the river of Ganges. etc. In the year of our Lord .1503. Containing many notable and strange things, both historical and natural.  
Translated out of Latin into english, by Richard Eden.  
In the year of our Lord .1576.   

The Preface of the Author.  
THere have been many before me, who to know the miracles of the world, have with diligent study read divers Authors which have written of such things. But other giving more credit to the lively voice, have been more desirous to know the same by relation of such as have travailed in those countries, & seen such things whereof they make relation, for that in many books, gathered of uncertain authority, are mixed false things with true. Other there are so greatly desirous to know the truth of these things, that they can in no wise be satisfied, until by their own experience they have found the truth, by voyages and peregrinations into strange countries and people, to know their manners, fashions, and customs, with divers things there to be seen: wherein, the only reading of books, could not satisfy their thirst of such knowledge, but rather increased the same, in so much that they feared not with loss of goods and danger of life to attempt great voyages to divers countries, with witness of their eyes to see that they so greatly desired to know. The which thing among other chanced unto me also. For as often as in the books of histories and cosmography, I read of such marvelous things whereof they make mention (especially of things in the East parts of the world) there was nothing that could pacify my unquiet mind, until I had with mine eyes seen the truth thereof. I know that some there are endued with high knowledge, mounting unto the heavens, which will contemn these our writings, as base and humble, because we do not here, after their manner, with high and subtle inquisition entreat of the motions and dispositions of the stars, and give reason of their working on the earth, with their motions, retrogradations, directions, mutations, epicicles, revolutions, inclinations, divinations, reflections, and such other pertaining to the science of Astrology: which certainly we do not condemn, but greatly praise. But measuring us with our own foot, we will leave that heavy burden of heaven to the strong shoulders of Atlas and Hercules: and only creeping upon the earth, in our own person behold the situations of lands and regions, with the manners and customs of men, and variable forms, shape's, natures, and propriettes of beasts, fruits, and trees, especially such as are among the Arabians, Persians, Indians, and Ethiopians. And whereas in the searching of these things, we have (thanked be God) satisfied our desire, we think nevertheless that we have done little, except we should communicate to other, such things as we have seen and had experience of, that they likewise by the reading thereof, may take pleasure, for whose sakes we have written this long and dangerous discourse, of things which we have seen in divers regions and sects of men, desiring nothing more than that the truth may be known to them that desire the same. But what incommodities and troubles chanced unto me in these viages, as hunger, thirst, cold, heat, wars, captivity, terrors, and divers other such dangers, I will declare by the way in their due places.   


The first Chapter, of the navigation from Venice to Alexandria in egypt.  
IF any man shall demand of me the cause of this my viage, certainly I can show no better reason than is the ardent desire of knowledge, which hath moved many other to see the world and miracles of God therein. And forasmuch as other known parts of the world, have heretofore been sufficiently travailed of other, I was determined to visit and describe such parts as here before have not been sufficiently known: and therefore with the grace of God, and calling upon his holy name to prosper our enterprise, departing from Venice with prosperous winds, in few days we arrived at the city of Alexandria in egypt: where the desire we had to know things more strange and further of, would not permit us to tarry long. And therefore departing from thence, and sailing up the river of Nilus, we came to the city of new Babylon, commonly called Cayrus or Alcayr.   


The same was also called Memphis in time past.  Of the city named Babylon, or Alcayr, a city of Nilus in Egypt. Cap. 2.  
WHen we arrived there, I marveled more than I am able to say: yet when I approached so near the city that I might well see into it, it seemed to me much inferior to the report and fame that was thereof: for the greatness thereof, seemed nothing agreeable to the bruit, and appeared no more in circuit then the city of Rome, although much more peopled, and better inhabited. But the large fields of the suburbs have deceived many, being dispersed with in manner innumerable villages, which some have thought to have been part of the city, which is nothing so. For those villages and dispersed houses, are two or three miles from the city, and round about it on every side. Neither is it here needful to spend much time in declaring of their manners, or religion, forasmuch as it is well known, that all the inhabitants of those regions are mahometans, and Mamalukes, 
Mamalukes. Mahometans.  which are such Christians as have forsaken their faith, to serve the mahometans and Turks: Although commonly they that served the Soltan of Babylon in time past, before the Soltan was overcome by the Turk, were called Mamaluchi, as they that serve the Turk, are called jenetzari. 
jenezzari.  But these Mamaluke Mahometans, are subject to the Soltan of Syria.   

Of the cities of Berynto, Tripoli, and Antioch. Cap. 3.  
THe riches, fairness, and magnificence of Babylon aforesaid, and the strange soldiers Mamalukes, as things known, we will now pretermit. Therefore departing from Babylon, and returning to Alexandria, where we again entered into our sea, we came to Berynto, a city on the sea coast of Syria Phoenicia, 
Syria Phoenicia.  where we spent many days. This is inhabited of Mahometans, and plentiful of all things. The sea beateth on the walls of the town: it is not compassed with walls, but on the West side toward the sea. Here found we nothing memorable, but only an old place ruinated, where they say that Saint George delivered the kings daughter from a cruel Dragon, 
Saint George and the Dragon.  which he slew, and restored her to her father. Departing from hence, we sailed to Tripoli. This is a city of S●ria, Eastward from Berynto two days sailing. 
Tripoli.  The inhabitants are subject to the Lieutenant or governor of Syria, and are Mahometans. The soil is very fertile, and for the great traffic of merchandise, incredibly aboundeth with all things. Departing from thence, we came to the city Comagena of Syria, 
Aleppo or Antioch.  commonly called Aleppo, and named of our men Antioch.  
It is a goodly city, situate under the mount Taurus, and is subject to the Lieutenant or Soltan of Babylon. 
The mount Taurus. The mount Olympus.  There be the scales or ladders (for so they call them) of the Turks and Syrians, for it is near the mount of Olympus. It is a famous mart town of the Azamians and Persians. 
Azamia.  The Azamians, are people of Mesopotamia, 
Mesapotamia.  near unto the Persians, & of the religion of Mahumet. From thence, is the journey to the Turks and Syrians, and especially of them that come from the part of Mesopotamia, 
Persia  named Azamia.   

Of the cities of Aman and Menin. Cap. 4.  
Departing from thence, we came to Damascus, 
Damascus.  in ten days journey. But before you come there, in the mid way, is a city named Aman, where is great abundance of gossampine or cotton wool, and all manner of pleasant fruits. Going a little from Damascus, the space of six miles, is a city named Menin, situate on the declining of a mountain. It is inhabited of Christians of the Greek profession, who also obey to the governor of Damascus. There are seen two fair Temples, which (as the inhabitants report) were builded by Helena, 
Saint Helen the mother of Constantine the Emperor.  the mother of the Emperor Constantine. There are all kinds of fruits, and goodly Grapes, and Gardens watered with continual springs. Departing from thence, we came to the city of Damascus.   

Of the city of Damascus. Chap. 5.  
IT is in manner incredible, and passeth all belief, to think how fair the city of Damascus is, and how fertile is the soil. And therefore alured by the marvelous beauty of the city, I remained there many days, that learning their language, I might know the manners of the people. The inhabitants are Mahometans and Mamalukes, with also many Christians, 
Christians Greeks.  living after the manner of the Greeks. By the way, it shall not be from my purpose to speak of their Hexarchatus: the which (as we have said) is subject to the lieutenant, 
Hexarchatus is a principate or government.  viceroy, or governor of Syria, which some call Sorya. There is a very strong fortress or Castle, which a certain Ethruscan, borne in the city of Florence, builded at his own charges, while he was there the chief Hexarchatus or governor, as appeareth by the flower of a Lily there graven in marble, being the arms of the city of Florence. The city is compassed with a deep fossae or ditch, with four goodly high towers. They pass the dyche with a hanging bridge, which is lifted up or let down at their pleasure. There is all kind of great artillery and munition, with also a guard of fifty Mamalukes, which daily assist the governor or captain of the castle, and receive their stipend of the governor or viceroy of Syria. 
The Soltan of Syrya.  Fortune seemed to give the Hexarchatus or principate to the said Florentine, which we will declare as we have heard of thinhabitants. They say that poison was once given to the Soltan of Syria: and when he sought for remedy, he chanced to be healed by the said Florentine, which was one of the company of the Mamalukes. After which good fortune, he grew daily in favour with the said Prince, who for reward gave him that city: where also the said Florentine builded a castle, and died: whom to this day the citizens honour for a saint, for saving the life of their prince: after whose death, the government returned to the Syrians. They say furthermore that the Soltan is well beloved of his lords and princes, for that he easily granteth them principates and governements: yet with condition to pay yearly many thousands of those pieces of gold which they call Saraphos. They that deny to pay the sum agreed of, ar● in danger of imminent death. Of the chief noble men or governors ten or xii ever assist the Prince. And when it pleaseth him to extort a certain sum of gold of his noble men or merchants (for they use great tyranny and oppression by the injuries and theft of the Mamalukes against the mahometans) the Prince giveth two letters to the captain of the Castle. 
A strange manner to demand a subside.  In the one is contained, that with an oration he invite to the Castle such as pleaseth him. In the other is declared the mind of the Prince, what he demandeth of his subjects. When the letters be read, withal expedition they accomplish his commandment, be it right or wrong, without respect. This means the Prince invented to extort money. Yet sometimes it cometh to pass, that the noble men are of such strength, that they will not come when they are commanded, knowing that the tyrant will offer them violence. And therefore oftentimes when they know that the captain of the Castle will call them, they flee into the dominions of the Turk. This have we gathered as touching their manners, we have also observed, that the watchmen in the towers, do not give warning to the guard with lively voice, but with drums, the one answering the other by course. But if any of the watchmen be so sleepy, that in the moment of an hour he answer not to the sound of the watch, he is immediately committed to prison for one whole year.   

Of such things as are seen in the city of Damascus. Cap. 6.  
AFter that I have declared the manners of the Princes of Damascus, it seemeth agreeable to speak of some such things as I have seen there. And therefore to speak first of the excellency and beauty of the city, it is certainly marvelously well peopled, and greatly frequented, and also marvelous rich. It is of goodly building, and exceedeth in abundance and fruitfulness of all things, and especially of all kind of victuales, flesh, corn, and fruits, as fresh damesenne grapes all the whole year: also Pomegranates, Oranges, Lemons, and excellent olive trees. Likewise Roses, both white and red, the fairest that ever I saw: and all kinds of sweet apples, yet pears and peaches very unsavoury. The cause whereof, they say to be to much moisture. A goodly and clear river runneth about the city: & therefore in manner in every house are seen fountains of curious work embossed and graven. Their houses outwardly are not very beautiful, but inwardly marvelously adorned with variable works of the stone called Ophis, or serpentine Marble. Within the town are many temples or churches, which they call Moscheas. But that which is most beautiful of all other, 
Their churches.  is builded after the manner of Saint Peter's church in Rome, if you respect the greatness, excepting this, that in the middle is no roof or coverture, but is all open: but about the rest of the temple, it is altogether vaulted. There they observe religiously the body of the holy Prophet Zacharie. 
The body of the Prophet Zacharias.  The temple hath also four great double gates of metal, very fair, and many goodly fountains within it. There are yet seen the ruins of many decayed houses, which were once inhabited by the Christians. Those houses they call Canonicas, and are of work both carved and embossed. There is also to be seen the place where (as they say) our saviour Christ spoke to Saint Paul these words, 
The place of the conversion of Saint Paul.  Paul, Paul, why dost thou persecute me. etc. This place is without the city about a mile.  
There are buried the Christians that die in the city. There is seen also the Tower in which Saint Paul was committed to prison, 
The prison of Saint Paul.  and joineth to the wall of the city. But that place of the Tower where Paul was brought forth by the Angel, the mahometans do not attempt to close up: Saying, that if it be closed over night, they find it open again in the morning. I saw also there, those houses in the which (as they say) Cain slew his brother Abel. 
The place where Cain slew Abel.  These are on the other part of the city a mile of, in a certain valley, yet on the side of a hill. But let us now return to the stranger Solgiers, which they call Mamaluchos, and to speak somewhat how licentiously they live in that city.   

Of the Mamalukes of Damascus. Cap. 7.  
THe Mamalukes therefore, are that kind of men, which have forsaken our faith, and as slaves are bought by the governor of Syria. They are very active, & brought up both in learning and warlike discipline, until they come to great perfection. 
The Mamalukes wages.  As well the little as the great, without respect, receive stipend of the governor: which for every month amounteth to two of those pieces of gold which they call Saraphos, beside the meat and drink of themselves and their servants, and also provision for their horses. And the more valiant they be, & of greater activity, they are hired for the greater wages. They walk not in the city but by two or three together, for it is counted dishonour for any of them to walk without a companion. And if by the way they chance to meet with two or three women (for they lay wait to tarry for them about such houses whither they know the women resort) licence is granted them, 
How the Mamalukes abuse women.  as they by chance first meet with them, to bring them into certain taverns, where they abuse them. When the Mamalukes attempt to descover their faces (for they go with their faces covered) they strive with them because they will not be known. But when the Mamalukes persist wanton to discover them, they say thus unto them, Is it not enough for you that you have abused our bodies as pleaseth you, but that you will also discover our faces? Then the Mamalukes suffer them to depart. But sometime it chanceth, that when they think to prostitute the daughter of some gentlemen or noble men, they committee the fact with their own wives: which thing chanced whilst I was there. The women beautify and garnish themselves as much as any. They use silken apparel, 
The women of Damascus.  and cover them with cloth of gosampine, in manner as fine as silk. They wear white buskyns, and shoes of red or purple colour. They garnish their heads with many jewels and earerynges, and wear rings and bracelets. They marry as often as them listeth: for when they are weary of their first marriage, they go to the chief press of their religion (whom they call Cady) and make request to him to be divorced from their first marriage. This divorcement in their language is called Talacarè: which granted by the high Priest or Bishop, they begin new marriages. 
Change of husbands and wives.  The like liberty is also granted to the husbands. Some think that the mahometans have five or two wives together, which I have not observed: but as far as I could perceive they have but two or three. 
The mahometans wives.  They eat openly, specially in the martes or fairs, and there dress they all their meats. They eat horses, Cammelles, Bufles, Goats, and such other beasts. They have great abundance of fresh cheese. They that sell milk, drive about with them xl. or l Goats, 
goats milk.  which they bring into the houses of them that will buy milk, even up into their chambers, although they be three roofs high, and there milk them, to have it fresh and new. These Goats have their ears a span long, many voders or paps, and are very fruitful: There is great abundance of mussheromes, for sometimes there are seen twenty or xxx Cammelles laden with mussheromes, 
Mussheromes. Asia the less now named Anatolia or Turchia.  and yet in the space of three days they are all sold. They are brought from the mountains of Armenia, and from Asia the less, which is now called Turchia or Anatolia, or Anatolia.  
The mahometans use long vestures and lose, both of silk and cloth. The most part use hose of gossampine cloth, and white shoes. When any of the mahometans by chance meeteth with any of the Mamalukes, although the Mahometan be the woorthyer person, yet giveth he place and reverence to the Mamaluke, who otherwise would give him the Bastonado, and beat him with a staff. The Christians also keep there many aware houses of merchandise, 
Christians of Damascus.  where they have divers sorts of silks and velvet: but the Christians are there evil entreated of the mahometans.   

The journey from Damascus to Mecha, and of the manners of the Arabians. Chap. 8.  
AFter that I have largely spoken of Damascus, I will proceed to the rest of my viage. Therefore in the year of our lord .1503. the eight day of the month of Apryll, when I had hired certain Cammelles (which they call Caravanas) to go to Mecha, and being then ignorant of the customs and manners of them in whose company I should go, 
Caravana, a company of camels.  I entered familiarity and friendship with a certain captain Mamaluke, of them that had forsaken our faith, 
Mamaluchi renegadi.  with whom being agreed of the price, he prepared me apparel like unto that which the Mamalukes use to wear, and giving me also a good horse, accompanied me with the other Mamalukes. This (as I have said) I obtained with great cost, and many gifts which I gave him. Thus entering to the journey, after the space of three days, we came to a certain place named Mezaris, where we remained three days, 
Mezaris.  that the merchants which were in our company might provide things necessary, as specially Camels, and divers other things. There is a certain Prince whom they call Zambei, 
The prince Zambei in Arabia.  of great power in the country of Arabia: he had three brethren and four children. He nourisheth forty thousand horses, ten thousand mares, & four thousand Camels. The country where he keepeth the herds of these beasts, is large, of two days journey. This Prince Zambei, is of so great power, that he keepeth war with the Soltan of Babylon, the governor of Damascus, and the prince of jerusalem all at once. In the time of harvest and gathering of fruits, 
The Prince of jerusalem.  he is given wholly to pray and robbing, and with great subtlety deceiveth the Arabians: 
A Prince a thief.  for when they think him to be a mile or two of, he is with them suddenly betimes in the morning: and invading their lands, carrieth away their fruits, Wheat, and Barley, even as he findeth it in the sacks: and so liveth continually day and night with such incursions. When his Mares be wearied with continual running, he resteth a while: 
Mares.  and to refresh them, giveth them camels milk to drink, to cool them after their great labour. Those Mares are of such marvelous swiftness, that when I presently saw them, they seemed rather to flee then to run. 
The Arabians live by robbery.  Note also that these Arabians ride on horses only covered with certain clothes or mats, and wear none other vesture then only an inward coat, or petticoat: for weapon, they use a certain long Dart of Reeds, of the length of ten or twelve cubits, pointed with Iron (after the manner of javelyns) and frynged with silk. When they attempt any incursyons, they march in such order, that they seem to go in troops: they are of despicable and little stature, and of colour between yellow and black, which some call Olivastro. They have the voices of women, and the hear of their head long and black, and laid out at large. They are of greater multitude than a man would believe, and are among themselves at continual strife and war. They inhabit the mountains, and have certain times appointed to robbery: for this purpose they observe especially the time, when they are certain of the passage of the Pylgryms and other that journey that way to Mecha, then like thieves they lie in the way and rob them. When they make these theevysh invasions, they bring with them their wives, children, families, and all the goods they have. Their houses they put upon the camels, for other houses have they none, 

House's 〈◊〉 on Camels backs.  
Tents and pavilions▪   but live only in tents and pavilions as do our Soldiers.  
Such tabernacles are made of black wool, and that rough and filthy. But to return to our voyage. The eleventh day of April, departed from Mezaris a company of Camels (which company they call the Caravana) to the number of xxxv thousand, with forty thousand men. But we were no more than threescore persons, of whom the Mamalukes had taken the charge to guide and guard us, 
This for fear of the Arabians.  and the Caravana of our company, which the Mamalukes divided into three parts, as some in the front, other in the midst of the army, and other in a wing after the manner of a half Moon, enclosing the whole army: for in this order march the peregrines which journey in these regions, as hereafter we will further declare. But you shall first understand that Damascus is from Mecha forty days and forty nights journey. 
From Damascus to Mecha.  Departing therefore from Mezaris, we continued our journey that day, until the xxii hour of the day. Then our Captain and guide Agmirus, after he had given the watch word and sign, commanded that every man should rest and remain in the place where the sign should be given them. Therefore as soon as they heard the sign by the sound of a Trumpet, they stayed, and after they had unburdened their Camels, spent there two hours to victual themselves and their beasts: 
Perhaps with the sound of a Horn of Trumpet.  then the Captain giving a new sign, charging their camels again, they departed speedily from thence. Every Camel hath at one feeding five Barley loaves, raw and not baked, as big as a Pomegranate. Taking Horse, they continued that journey the day and night following, until xxii. hours of the day, and at that hour they observe the order which we have spoken of herebefore. Every eight day they draw water by digging the ground or sand: by the way nevertheless somewhere are found Welles and Sesternes. 
Water.  Also every eight day, they rest their camels two days to recover their strength. The camels are laden with incredible Burdens, 
The Burden of the camels.  and double charge: that is to mean, the burden of two great Mules. They drink but once in three days.   

Of the strength and valiantness of the Mamalukes. Cap. 9  
WHen they tarry and rest them at the waters aforesaid, they are ever enforced to conflict with a great multitude of the Arabians: but the battle is for the most part without bloodshed. For although we have often times fought with them, yet was there only one man slain on our part: for these Arabians are so weak and feeble, that threescore Mamalukes, 

The feebleness of the Arabians.  
Pagans.   have often put to the worst fifty thousand Arabians. For these field Arabians, which are called Pagani, are not in strength or force of arms to be compared to the Mamalukes, of whose activity I have seen great experience: among the which this is one. 
The activity of the Mamalukes.  A certain Mamaluke laid an Apple upon the head of his servant, & at the distance of about xii or xiiii paces, struck it of from his head. I saw likewise an other, who riding on a saddled horse with full course (for they use saddles as we do) took of the saddle from the horse still running: and for a space bearing it on his head, put it again on the horse, still continuing his full course.   

Of the cities of Sodoma and Gomorrha. Cap. 10.  
Passing the journey of twelve days, we came to the plain or valley of Sodoma and Gomorrha, where we found it to be true that is written in holy scripture: for there yet remain the ruins of the destroyed city, as witness of God's wrath. We may affirm that there are three cities, and each of them situate on the declining of three hills: and the ruins do appear about the height of three or four cubits. There is yet seen, I wot near what, like blood, or rather like red wax mixed with earth. It is easy to believe that those men were infected with most horrible vices, as testifieth the barren, dry, filthy, and unwholesome region, utterly without water. 
Manna, turned in bitter plagues.  Those people were once fed with Manna: but when they abused the gift of God, they were sore plagued. Departing twenty miles from these cities, about thirty of our company perished for lack of water, 
Lack of water.  and divers other were overwhelmed with sand. Going somewhat further forward, we found a little mountain, at the foot whereof we found water, and therefore made our abode there. The day following early in the morning, came unto us xxiiii▪ thousand Arabians, 

Water dearly bought.  
So did Abraham with the Philistians.   asking money for the water which we had taken. We answered that we would pay nothing, because it was given us by the goodness of God. Immediately we came to hand strokes. We gathering ourselves together on the said mountain, as in the safest place, used our camels in the steed of a bulwark, and placed the merchants in the midst of the army (that is) in the midst of the camels, while we fought manfully on every side. 
So doth the Turk his army.  The battle continued so long, that water failed both us and our enemies in the space of two days. The Arabians compassed about the mountain, crying and threatening that they would break in among the camels: at the length to make an end of the conflict, our Captain assembling the merchants, commanded a thousand and two hundred pieces of gold to be given to the Arabians: who when they had received the money, said that the sum of ten thousand pieces of gold should not satisfy them for the water which we had drawn. Whereby we perceived that they began further to quarrel with us, and to demand some other thing than money. Whereupon incontinent our Captain gave commandment, that whosoever in all our company were able to bear arms, should not mount upon the camels, but should with all expedition prepare themselves to fight. The day following in the morning, sending the camels before, and enclosing our army, being about three hundred in number, we met with the enemies, and gave the onset. In this conflict, we lost only a man and a woman, and had none other damage: we slew of the Arabians a thousand and five hundred. Whereof you need not marvel, if you consider that they are unarmed, and wear only a thin lose vesture, and are beside almost naked: their horses also being as evil furnished, and without saddles, or other furniture.   

Of a mountain inhabited with jews, and of the city of Medinathalhabi, where Mahumet was buried. Cap. 11.  
IN the space of eight days, we came to a mountain which containeth in circuit ten or twelve miles. This is inhabited with jews, to the number of five thousand, or thereabout. 
Jews Pigmet.  They are of very little stature, as of the height of five or six spans, and some much less. They have small voices like women, and of black colour, yet some blacker than other: They feed of none other meat than goats flesh. They are circumcised, and deny not themselves to be jews. If by chance any Mahometan come into their hands, they slay him alive. At the foot of the mountain, we found a certain hole, out of the which flowed abundance of water. By finding this opportunity, we laded sixtiene thousand Camels: which thing greatly offended the jews. They wandered in that mountain, scattered like wild Goats or Prickettes, yet durst they not come down, partly for fear, and partly for hatred against the mahometans. Beneath the mountain, are seen seven or eight thorn trees, very fair, and in them we found a pair of Turtle Doves, which seemed to us in manner a miracle, having before made so long journeys, and saw neither beast nor foul. Then proceeding two days journey, we came to a certain city named Medinathalhabi: 
The city of Medinathalhabi.  four miles from the said city, we found a well. here the Caravana (that is, the whole heard of the camels) rested.  
And remaining here one day, we washed ourselves, and changed our shirts, the more freshly to enter into the city: it is well peopled, and containeth about three hundred houses, the walls are like bulwarks of earth, and the houses both of stone and brick. The soil about the city, is utterly barren, except that about two miles from the city, are seen about fifty palm trees that bear Dates. There, by a certain garden, runneth a course of water falling into a lower plain, where also passengers are accustomed to water their camels. And here opportunity now serveth to confute the opinion of them which think that the Ark or Tomb of wicked mohammed in Mecha, 
The Tomb or Sepulchre of Mahumet.  to hang in the air, not borne up with any thing. As touching which thing. I am utterly of an other opinion, and affirm this neither to be true, nor to have any likeness of truth, as I presently beheld these things, and saw the place where Mahumet is buried, 
Mahumet was not buried in Mecha.  in the said city of Medinathalhabi: for we tarried there three days, to come to the true knowledge of all these things. When we were desirous to enter into their Temple (which they call Meschita, and all other churches by the same name) we could not be suffered to enter, without a companion, little or great. They taking us by the hand, brought us to the place where they say Mahumet is buried.   

Of the Temple or chapel, and Sepulchre of mohammed, and of his fellows. Cap. 12.  
HIs Temple is vaulted, and is a hundred paces in length, and fourscore in breadth: the entry into it, is by two gates: from the sides, it is covered with three vaults, it is borne up with iiii. hundred columns or pillars of white brick, there are seen hanging lamps about the number of .3. thousand. From the other part of the Temple in the first place of the Meschita, is seen a Tower of the circuit of five paces, vaulted on every side, and covered with a cloth of silk, and is borne up with a grate of copper curiously wrought, and distant from it two paces: and of them that go thither, is seen as it were through a lattesse. Toward the left hand, is the way to the Tower, and when you come thither, you must enter by a narrower gate. On every side of those gates or doors, are seen many books in manner of a Library, 
Mahumets Library.  on the one side twenty and on the other side xxv. These contain the filthy traditions and life of mohammed and his fellows: within the said gate, is seen a Sepulchre (that is) a digged place, where they say Mahumet is buried and his fellows, which are these, Nabi, Bubacar, Othomar, Aumar, 
Nomothetae Turcarum.  and Fatoma: But Mahumet was their chief Captain, and an Arabian borne. Hali, was son in law to mohammed, 
This Hali, our men that have been in Persia, call Mortus Hali, That is, Saint Hali. Discord and sects of religion among the mahometans, Turks, and Persians.  for he took to wife his daughter Fatoma. Bubacar, is he who they say was exalted to the dignity of a chief counsellor and great governor, although he came not to the high degree of an Apostle or prophet, as did Mahumet. Othomar and Aumar, were chief Captains of the army of Mahumet. Every of these have their proper books of their facts and traditions. And hereof proceedeth the great dissension and discord of religion and manners among this kind of filthy men, while some confirm one doctrine, and some an other, by reason of their divers sects of patrons, Doctors, and saints, as they call them. By this means, are they marvelously divided among themselves, 
Note.  and like beasts kill themselves, for such quarrels of divers opinions, and all false. 
Such come, such chaff. Not only among Turks and 〈◊〉, Sed.  This also is the chief cause of war between the Sophy of Persia and the great Turk, being nevertheless both mahometans, and live in mortal hatred one against the other, for the maintenance of their sects, Saints, and Apostles, while every of them thinketh their own to be best.   

Of the Sect of Mahumet. Cap. 13.  
NOw will we speak of the manners and sect of Mahumet. understand therefore, that in the highest part of the Tower aforesaid, is an open round place. Now shall you understand what craft they used to deceive our Caravana. The first evening that we came thither to see the Sepulchre of mohammed, our Captain sent for the chief priest of the Temple to come to him: and when he came, declared unto him that the only cause of his coming thither, was to visit the Sepulchre and body of Nabi, 
Nabi▪ i● the 〈◊〉 of Mahumet. A great price for vil● merchandise.  by which word, is signified the Prophet Mahumet: and that he understood that the price to be admitted to the sight of these mysteries, should be four thousand Saraphes of gold. Also that he had no parents, neither brothers, sisters, kinsfolks, children, or wives, neither that he came thither to buy merchandise, as spices, or Baccar, or Nardus, or any manner of precious jewels: but only for very zeal of religion and salvation of his soul, and was therefore greatly desirous to see the body of the Prophet. 
Such people such priest.  To whom the priest of the Temple (they call them Side) with countenance like one that were distraught, made answer in this manner, Darest thou with those eyes with the which thou hast committed so many horrible sins, desire to see him by whose sight God hath created heaven and earth? 
My lord bishop of Mecha  To whom again our Captain answered thus, My Lord, you have said truly: nevertheless I pray you that I may find so much favour with you, that I may see the Prophet: whom when I have seen, I will immediately thrust out mine eyes. The Side answered, O Prince, I will open all things unto thee. So it is, that no man can deny but that our Prophet died here, who if he would might have died at Mecha: 
It seemeth that they know not where he was buried.  But to show in himself a token of humility, and thereby to give us example to follow him, was willing rather here then elsewhere to depart out of this world, and was incontinent of Angels borne into heaven, and there received as equal with them. 
The devil he was.  Then our Captain said to him, Where is jesus Christus the son of Marie? To whom the Side answered, At the feet of Mahumet. Then said our Captain again: 
Thri●● at the feet of Mahumet.  It sufficeth, it sufficeth, I will know no more. After this, our Captain coming out of the Temple, and turning him to us, said, See (I pray you) for what goodly stuff I would have paid three thousand Saraphes of gold? The same day at evening, at almost three a clock of the night, ten or twelve of the Elders of the sect of Mahumet entered into our Caravana, which remained not passed a stone cast from the gate of the city. These ran hither and thither, crying like mad men, with these words, Mahumet the messenger and Apostle of God, shall rise again. O Prophet, O God, 
Mahumet shall rise▪ etc. with juda.  Mahumet shall rise again, have mercy on us God. Our Captain and we all raised with this cry, took weapon with all expedition, suspecting that the Arabians were come to rob our Caravana: We asked what was the cause of that exclamation, and what they cried? for they cried as do the Christians, when suddenly any marvelous thing chanceth. The Elders answered, 
False miracles to confirm false religion.  Saw you not the lightning which shone out of the Sepulchre of the Prophet Mahumet. Our Captain answered, that he saw nothing, and we also being demanded, answered in like manner. Then said one of the old men, Are you slaves? That is to say, bought men: meaning thereby Mamalukes. Then said our Captain, We are in deed Mamalukes. Then again the old man said, 
Neophiti.  Y●u my Lords, can not see heavenly things, as being Neophiti, (that is) newly come to the faith, and not yet confirmed in our religion. To this our Captain answered again, 
Sic ne respondes pontifi●i.  O you mad and insensate beasts, I had thought to have given you three thousand pieces of gold, but now, O you dogs, and progeny of dogs, I will give you nothing. It is therefore to be understood, that none other shining came out of the Sepulchre, than a certain flame which the priests caused to come out of the open place of the Tower spoken of here before, whereby they would have deceived us. And therefore our Captain commanded that thereafter none of us should enter into the Temple. Of this also we have most true experience, 
The ●able that Mahumets Tomb hangeth in the air.  and most certainly assure you, that there is neither Iron or steel, or the Magnes stone that should so make the tomb of mohammed to hang in the air, as some have falsely imagined: neither is there any mountain nearer than four miles: we remained here three days to refresh our company. To this city, victuals and all kind of corn is brought from Arabia Foelix, and Babylon or Alcayr, and also from Ethiope, by the red sea, which is from this city but four days journey.   

The journey to Mecha. Cap. 14.  
AFter that we were satisfied, or rather wearied, with the filthiness and lothesomenesse of the trumperyes, deceits, trifles, and hypocrises of the religion of mohammed, we determined to go forward on our journey: and that by guiding of a pilot, who might direct our course with the mariners box or compass, 
journey on the land by card and compass as on the sea.  with also the card of the sea, even as is used in sailing on the sea. And thus bending our journey to the West, we found a very fair well or fountain, from the which flowed great abundance of water. The inhabitants affirm that Saint Mark the Evangelist was the author of this fountain by a miracle of God, 
The fountain of Saint Mark the Evangelist.  when that region was in manner burned with incredible dryness. Here we and our beasts were satisfied with drink. I may not here omit to speak of the sea of sand, and of the dangers thereof. This was found of us before we came to the mountain of the jews. 
The sea of sand.  In this sea of sand we travailed the journey of three days and nights: 
Mare fabulosum.  this is a great broad plain, all covered with white sand, in manner as small as flower: If by evil fortune it so chance that any travail that way southward, if in the mean time the wind come to the north, they are overwhelmed with sand. And although they should have prosperous wind, yet are they so involved with sand, that they scatter out of the way, and can scarcely see the one the other ten paces of. And therefore thinhabitants travailing this way, are enclosed in cages of wood, borne with Camels, and live in them, so passing the journey guided by pilots with mariners compass and card, even as on the sea, as we have said. In this journey also many perish for thirst, and many for drinking to much, when they find such good waters. In these sands is found Momia, which is the flesh of such men as are drowned in these sands, and there dried by the heat of the Sun: 
Momia.  So that those bodies are preserved from putrefaction by the dryness of the sand: and therefore that dry flesh is esteemed medicinable. Albeit there is an other kind of more precious Momia, which is the dried and embalmed bodies of kings and princes, 
Momia of kings bodies embalmed.  which of long time have been preserved dry without corruption. When the wind bloweth from the North-east, them the sand riseth, & is driven against a certain mountain which is an arm of the mount Sinai. There we found certain pillars artificially wrought, which they call januan. 
Mont Sinai.  On the left hand of the said mountain, in the top or ridge thereof, is a den, and the entry into it, is by an Iron gate. 
The den where Mahumet lived in contemplation.  Some feign that in that place Mahumet lived in contemplation. Here we heard a certain horrible noise and cry: for passing the said mountain, we were in so great danger, that we thought never to have escaped. Departing therefore from the fountain, we continued our journey for the space of ten days: And twice in the way fought with fifty thousand Arabians, and so at the length came to the city of Mecha, where all things were troubled by reason of the wars between two brethren, 
Mecha, The kingdom of Mecha.  contending which of them should possess the kingdom of Mecha.   

Of the form and situation of the city of Mecha: and why the mahometans resort thither. Cap. 15.  
Now the time requireth to speak somewhat of the famous city of Mecha, or Mecca, what it is, how it is situate, and by whom it is governed. 
Mecha, which Abraham O●telius calleth Mecca.  The city is very fair and well inhabited, and containeth in round form two thousand houses, as well builded as ours, and some that cost three or four thousand pieces of gold: it hath no walls. About two furlongs from the city is a mount, where the way is cut out, which leadeth to a plain beneath. It is on every side fortified with mountains, in the stead of walls or bulwarks, and hath four entries. The governor is a Soltan, and one of the four brethren of the progeny of mohammed, and is subject to the Soltan of Babylon, 
The Soltan of Mecha.  of whom we have spoken before: His other three brethren be at continual war with him. The xviii. day of may, we entered into the city by the north side: then by a declining way, we came into a plain. On the south side are two mountains, the one very near the other, distant only by a little valley, which is the way that leadeth to the gate of Mecha. On the east side, is an open place between two mountains, like unto a valley, and is the way to the mountain where they sacrifice to the patriarchs Abraham & Isaac. This mountain is from the city about ten or xii miles, 
Sacrifice to Abraham and Isaac.  and of the height of three stones cast: it is of stone as hard as marble, yet no marble. In the top of the mountain, is a Temple or Meschita, made after their fashion, and hath three ways to enter into it. At the foot of the mountain are two cisterns, which conserve waters without corruption: of these, the one is reserved to minister water to the Camels of the Caravana of Babylon or Alcayr, and the other, for them of Damascus. It is rain water, and is derived far of.  
But to return to speak of the city: for as touching the manner of sacrifice which they use at the foot of the mountain, we will speak hereafter. Entering therefore into the city, we found there the Caravana of Memphis, or Babylon, which prevented us eight days, and came not the way that we came. This Caravana contained threescore and four thousand camels, and a hundred Mamalukes to guide them. And here ought you to consider, that by the opinion of all men, this city is greatly cursed of God, 
Mecha cursed of god.  as appeareth by the great barrenness thereof, for it is destitute of all manner of fruits and corn. It is scorched with dryness for lack of water, and therefore the water is there grown to such price, 
Water very dear.  that you can not for twelve pence buy as much water as will satisfy your thirst for one day. Now therefore I will declare what provision they have for victuales. The most part is brought them from the city of Babylon, otherwise named Memphis, Cayrus, or Alcayr, a city of the river of Nilus in Egypt, 
The river Nilus.  as we have said before, and is brought by the red sea (called Mare Erythreum) from a certain port named Gida, 
The red sea.  distant from Mecha forty miles. The rest of their provisions, is brought from Arabia Faelix (that is) the happy or blessed Arabia: so named for the fruitfulness thereof, 
Arabia Faelix,  in respect of the other two Arabiaes, called Petrea & Diserta, that is, stony and desert. They have also much corn from Ethyopia. Here we found a marvelous number of strangers and peregrynes, 
Many pilgrims and strangers at Mecha.  or Pylgryms: Of the which, some came from Syria, some from Persia, and other from both the East India's, (that is to say) both India within the river of Ganges, and also the other India without the same river. I never saw in any place greater abundance and frequentation of people, forasmuch as I could perceive by tarrying there the space of twenty days. These people resort thither for divers causes, as some for merchandise, some to observe their vow of pilgrimage, 
Why so many nations 〈◊〉 to Mecha.  and other to have pardon for their sins: as touching the which we will speak more hereafter,   

Of the merchandise of Mecha. Cap. 16.  
FRom India the greater, which is both within & without the river of Ganges, they have pearls, precious stones, and plenty of spices: and especially from that city of the greater India, which is named Bangella, they have much gossampyne cloth and silk. They have also spices from Ethiopia: and therefore we must needs confess that this city is a famous mart of many rich things, whereof there is great plenty.   

Of the Pardons or Indulgences of Mecha. Cap. 17.  
LEt us now return to speak of the pardons of pilgrims, for the which so many strange nations resort thither. In the midst of the city, 
The temple of Mecha.  is a Temple, in fashion like unto the Colossus of Rome, the Amphitheatrum I mean, like unto a stage, yet not of marble or hewed stones, but of burnt bryckes: For this temple, like unto an amphitheatre, hath fourscore and ten, or an hundred gates, and is vaulted. The entrance, is by a descent of twelve stairs or degrees on every part: in the church porch, are sold only jewels and precious stones. In the entry the gilted walls shine on every side with incomparable splendour. In the lower part of the temple (that is under the vaulted places) is seen a marvelous multitude of men: For there are five or two thousand men that sell none other thing then sweet ointments, and especially a certain odoriferous and most sweet powder, wherewith dead bodies are embalmed. And from hence, all manner of sweet savours are carried in manner into the countries of all the mahometans. It passeth all belief to think of the exceeding sweetness of these savours, far surmounting the shops of the Apothecaries. The xxiii day of may, the pardons began to be granted in the Temple, and in what manner we will now declare. The Temple in the midst is open, without any enclosing, 
A Turret in the Temple of Mecha.  and in the midst also thereof, is a Turret, of the largeness of six paces in cercuitie, and involved or hanged with cloth or tapestry of silk, and passeth not the height of a man. They enter into the turret by a gate of silver, and is on every side beset with vessels full of balm. 
A gate of silver.  On the day of Pentecost, licence is granted to all men to see these things. The inhabitants affirm, that balm or balsam, to be part of the treasure of the Soltan that is Lord of Mecha. At every vault of the turret, is fastened a round circle of Iron, 
Balsam or balm.  like to the ring of a door. The xxiii day of may, a great multitude of people began early in the morning before day, seven times to walk about the Turret, kissing every corner thereof, oftentimes feeling and handdeling them. From this Turret, about ten or twelve paces, is an other Turret, like a Chapel builded after our manner. 
A chapel with a well in it, in the Temple.  This hath three or four entries: in the midst thereof is a well of threescore and ten cubits deep: the water of this Well is infected with salt Peter or salniter. Eight men are thereunto appointed to draw water for all the people: and when a multitude of people have seven times gone round about the first Turret, they come to this well: and touching the mouth or brim thereof, they say thus, Be it in the honour of God, God pardon me, 
A strange baptism for remission of sins.  and forgive me my sins. When these words are said, they that draw the water, power three buckets of water on the heads of every one of them that stand near about the well, and wash them all wet from the head to the foot, although they be appareled with silk. Then their doting fools dream that they are clean from all their sins, 
Good meaning sufficeth not.  and that their sins are forgiven them. They say furthermore, that the first Turret, whereof we have spoken, was the first house that ever Abraham builded: and therefore, while they are yet all wet of the said washing, they go to the mountain, 
The house of Abraham. Sacrifice to Abraham.  where (as we have said before) they are accustomed to sacrifice to Abraham. And remaining there two days, they make the said sacrifice to Abraham at the foot of the mountain.   

The manner of Sacrificing at Mecha. Cap. 18.  
Forasmuch as for the most part, noble spirits are delighted with novelties of great and strange things, therefore to satisfy their expectation, I will describe their manner of sacrificing. Therefore, when they intent to sacrifice, some of them kill three sheep, some four, and some ten: So that the butchery sometime so floweth with blood, 
Sacrifice of sheep.  that in one sacrifice are slain above three thousand sheep. They are slain at the rising of the Sun, and shortly after are distributed to the poor for God's sake: for I saw there a great and confounded multitude of poor people, as to the number of xxx thousand. These make many and long dyches in the fields, where they keep fire with Camel's dung, and roast or seethe the flesh that is given them, and eat it even there. I believe that these poor people come thither rather for hunger then for devotion: 
Religion for poverty.  which I think by this coniectur, that great abundance of cucumbers are brought thither from Arabia Faelix, which they eat, casting away the parynges without their houses or tabernacles, where a multitude of the said poor people gather them even out of the mire and sand, and eat them, and are so greedy of these parynges, that they fight who may gather most. The day following, their Cadi (which are in place with them as with us the preachers of gods word) ascended into a high mountain, 
Cadi, a preacher.  to preach to the people that remained beneath: and preached to them in their language the space of an hour. The sum of his sermon was, 
A goodly sermon.  that with tears they should bewail their sins, and beat their breasts, with sighs and lamentation. And the preacher himself with loud voice, spoke these words, O Abraham beloved of god, O Isaac chosen of god, and his friend. ●●aye to god for the people of Nabi. When these words were said, 
Soldiers trouble the word of God.  suddenly were heard lamenting voices. When the sermon was done, a rumour was spread that a great army of Arabians, to the number of twenty thousand, were coming. With which news, they that kept the Carau●nas being greatly feared, with all speed, like mad men, fled into the city of Mecha, and we again hearing news of the Arabians approach, fled also into the city. But while we were in the midway between the mountain and Mecha▪ we came by a despicable wall, of the breadth of four cubits: The people passing by this wall, had covered the way with stones, the cause whereof, they say to be this: 
Where Abraham sacrificed his son Isaac.  When Abraham was commanded to sacrifice his son, he wylled his son Isaac to follow him to the place where he should execute the commandment of God. As Isaac went to follow his father, there appeared to him in the way a devil, 
The Devil appeareth to Isaac.  in likeness of a fair and friendly person, not far from the said wall, and asked him friendly whither he went. Isaac answered that he went to his father who tarried for him. To this the enemy of mankind answered, that it was best for him to tarry, and if that he went any further, his father would sacrifice him. But Isaac nothing feareing this advertisement of the devil, went forward, that his father on him might execute the commandment of God: and with this answer (as they say) the devil departed. Yet as Isaac went forward, the Devil appeared to him again in the likeness of an other friendly person, and forbade him as before. Then Isaac taking up a stone in that place, 
Isaac wounded the devil in the forehead.  huride it at the devil, and wounded him in the forehead: In witness and remembrance whereof, the people passing that way, when they come near the wall, are accustomed to cast stones against it, and from thence go into the city. As we went this way, the air was in manner darkened with a multitude of stock Doves. They say that these Doves, 
Stock doves of the progeny of the Dove which spoke in Mahumets ear.  are of the progeny of the Dove that spoke in the ear of mohammed, in likeness of the Holy Ghost. These are seen every where, as in the villages, houses, taverns, and graniers of corn and rise, and are so tame, that one can scharsely drive them a way. Too take them or kill them, is esteemed a thing worthy death: and therefore a certain pension is given to nourish them in the Temple.   

Of the unicorns of the temple of Mecha▪ which are not seen in any other place. Cap. 19  
ON the other part of the temple are parks or places enclosed, where are seen two Unicorns, named of the Greeks Monocerotae, 
Monoceros.  and are there showed to the people for a miracle, and not without good reason, for the seldomenesse and strange nature. 
The Unicorns.  The one of them, which is much higher than the other, yet not much unlike to a colt of thirty months of age, in the forehead groweth only one horn, in manner right forth, 
The unicorns horn.  of the length of three cubits. The other is much younger, of the age of one year, and like a young colt: the horn of this, is of the length of four handfuls. This beast is of the colour of a horse of weasel colour, and hath the head like an heart, but no long neck, a thin mane hanging only on the one side: their legs are thine and slender, like a fawn or hind: the hooves of the fore feet are divided in two, much like the feet of a Goat, the outward part of the hinder feet is very full of hear. This beast doubtless seemeth wild and fierce, yet tempereth that fierceness with a certain comeliness. These Unicorns one gave to the Soltan of Mecha▪ as a most precious and rare gift. They were sent him out of Ethiope by a king of that country, who desired by that present to gratify the Soltan of Mecha.   

Of divers things which chanced to me in Mecha: And of Zida, a port of Mecha. Cap. 20.  
IT may seem good here to make mention of certain things, in the which is seen sharpness of wit in case of urgent necessity, which hath no law, as sayeth the proverb: for I was driven to the point how I might privily escape from Mecha. Therefore whereas my Captain gave me charge to buy certain things, as I was in the market place, a certain Mamaluke knew me to be a Christian. And therefore in his own language, spoke unto me these words, Inte mename: That is, whence art thou? To whom I answered that I was a Mahometan. But he said, Thou sayest not truly. I said again, By the head of mohammed, I am a Mahometan. Then he said again, Come home to my house. I followed him willingly. When we were there, he began to speak to me in the Italian tongue, and asked me again from whence I was, affirming that he knew me, and that I was no Mahometan: Also that he had been sometime in Genua and Venice. And that his words might be the better believed, rehearsed many things which testified that he said truth. When I understood this, I confessed freely that I was a Roman, but professed to the faith of mohammed in the city of Babylon, and there made one of the Mamalukes. Whereof he seemed greatly to rejoice, and therefore used me honourably. But because my desire was yet to go further, I asked the Mahometan whether that city of Mecha was so famous as all the world spoke of it: 
Why Mecha is not so much frequented as in time paste.  and inquired of him where was the great abundance of pearls, precious stones, spices, and other rich merchandise that the bruit went of to be in that city. And all my talk was to the end to grope the mind of the Mahometan, that I might know the cause why such things were not brought thither as in time paste. But to avoid all suspicion, I durst here make no mention of the dominion which the King of Portugal had in the most part of that Ocean, 
The dominion of the King of Portugal in the East parts  and of the gulfs of the red sea and Persia. Then he began with more attentive mind, in order to declare unto me the cause why that mart was not so greatly frequented as it had been before, and laid the only fault thereof in the king of Portugal. But when he had made mention of the King, I began of purpose to detract his fame, lest the Mahometan might think that I rejoiced that the Christians came thither for merchandise. When he perceived that I was of profession an enemy to the Christians, he had me yet in greater estimation, and proceeded to tell me many things more. When I was well instructed in all things, I spoke unto him friendly these words in the Mahumets language, Menaha Menalhabi: That is to say, I pray you assist me. 
Hypocrisy.  He asked me wherein. To help me (said I) how I may secretly depart hence. Confirming by great oaths, that I would go to those Kings that were most enemies to the Christians: Affirming furthermore, that I knew certain secrets greatly to be esteemed, which if they were known to the said kings, I doubted not but that in short time I should be sent for from Mecha. Astonyshed at these words, he said unto me, I pray you what art or secret do you know? I answered, that I would give place to no man in making of all manner of Guns and artillery. Then said he, Praised be Mahumet who sent thee hither, to do him and his Saints good service: and willed me to remain secretly in his house with his wife, and required me earnestly to obtain leave of our Captain, that under his name he might lead from Mecha fiftiene camels laden with spices, 
Paying of custom to the Soltan.  without paying any custom: for they ordinarily pay to the Soltan thirty Saraphes of gold, for transporting of such merchandise for the charge of so many camels. I put him in good hope of his request, although he would ask for a hundred, affirming that that might easily be obtained by the privileges of the Mamalukes, and therefore desired him that I might safely remain in his house. Then nothing doubting to obtain his request, he greatly rejoiced, and talking with me yet more freely, gave me further instructions, and counseled me to repair to a certain King of the greater India, 
The realm of Decham in India.  in the kingdom and realm of Decham, whereof we will speak hereafter. Therefore the day before the Caravana departed from Mecha, he willed me to lie hid in the most secret part of his house. The day following, early in the morning, the trumpeter of the Caravana gave warning to all the Mamalukes to make ready their horses, to direct their journey toward Syria, with proclamation of death to all that should refuse so to do. When I heard the sound of the Trumpet, and was advertised of the straight commandment, I was marvelously troubled in mind, and with heavy countenance desired the mahometans wife not to bewray me, and with earnest prayer committed myself to the mercy of God. On the Tuesday following, our Caravana departed from Mecha, and I remained in the mahometans house with his wife, but he followed the Caravana. Yet before he departed, he gave commandment to his wife to bring me to the Caravana, which should depart from Zida the port of Mecha, to go into India. This port is distant from Mecha xl miles. Whilst I lay thus hid in the mahometans house, I can not express how friendly his wife used me. This also furthered my good interteynement, that there was in the house a fair young maid, the Niese of the Mahometan, who was greatly in love with me. But at that time, in the midst of those troubles and fear, 
Affliction cooleth lechery.  the fire of Venus was almost extinct in me: and therefore with dalliance of fair words and promises, I still kept myself in her favour. Therefore the Friday following, about noon tide I departed, following the Caravana of India. And about midnight, we came to a certain village of the Arabians, and there remained the rest of that night, and the next day till noon. From hence we went forward on our journey toward Zida, 
The city of Zida.  and came thither in the silence of the night. This city hath no walls, yet fair houses, somewhat after the building of Italy. here is great abundance of all kind of merchandise, by reason of resort in manner of all nations thither, except Jews and Christians, to whom it is not lawful to come thither. assoon as I entered into the city, I went to their Temple or Meschita, where I saw a great multitude of poor people, as about the number of xxv thousand, 
Poor pilgrims that came from Mecha.  attending a certain Pilot who should bring them into their country. here I suffered much trouble and affliction, being enforced to hide myself among these poor folks, feigning myself very sick, to the end that none should be inquisitive what I was, whence I came, or whither I would. The Lord of this city is the Soltan of Babylon, brother to the Soltan of Mecha, who is his subject. The inhabitants are Mahometans. The soil is unfruitful, and lacketh fresh water. The sea beateth against the town. There is nevertheless abundance of all things: but brought thither from other places, as from Babylon of Nilus, Arabia Foelix, and divers other places. The heat is here so great, that men are in manner dried up therewith. And therefore there is ever a great number of sick folks. The city containeth about five hundred houses.  
After fifteen days were passed, I covenanted with a pilot, who was ready to depart from thence into Persia, 
From Arabia to Persia.  and agreed of the price, to go with him. There lay at Anchor in the haven almost a hundred Brigantines and Foists, with divers boats and barks of sundry sorts, both with Oars and without Oars. Therefore after three days, giving wind to our sails, we entered into the red sea, 
The red sea.  otherwise named Mare Erythraeum.   

Of the red sea, and why it can not be sailed in the night. Cap. 21.  
IT is well known to wise men that this sea is not red, as some have imagined, but is of the colour of other seas. We continued therefore our viage until the going down of the Sun. For this sea, is navigable only in the day time: and therefore in the nights, the mariners rest them, until they come to the Island named Chameran, from whence they proceed forward more safely. Why this sea can not be sailed in the night, they say the cause to be, that there are many dangerous sands, rocks, and shelves: and therefore that it is needful of diligent and long prospecte, from the top castle of the ship, to foresee the dangerous places.    

The second book, entreating of Arabia Foelix, That is, the happy or blessed Arabia.  

Of the city of Gezan, and the fruitfulness thereof. Cap. 1.  
Forasmuch as hitherto we have spoken somewhat of the manners of the people and cities of Arabia Foelix, it may now seem convenient to finish the rest of our viage with such things as we have seen in the said country of Arabia. 
The city of Gezan.  Therefore after six days sailing, we came to a city named Gezan. It hath a commodious port, and very fair, where we found about forty and five Brigantines and Foists of divers regions. The city is hard by the sea side, and the Prince thereof, is a Mahometan. The soil is fruitful, like unto Italy: It beareth Pomegranates, Quinses, Peaches, Apples of Assyria, Pepons, Melons, Oranges, Gourds, and divers other fruits: Also Roses, and sundry sorts of flowers, the fairest that ever I saw: It seemeth an earthly paradise. The most part of the inhabitants go naked▪ In other things, they live after the manner of the mahometans. There is also great abundance of flesh, wheat, barley, the grain of white Millet or Hirse (which they call Dora) whereof they make very sweet bread.   

Of certain people named Banduin. Cap. 2.  
DEparting from the city of Gezan, the space of .v. days, sailing toward the left hand, having ever the coast of the land in sight, we came to the sight of certain houses, where about xiiii of us went aland, hoping to have had some victuals of the inhabitans. But we lost our labour, for in the steed of victuals, they cast stones at us with stings. They were about a hundred that fought with our men for the space of an hour. Of them were slain xxiiii The rest were driven to flight, they were naked, and had none other weapons then slings. After their flight, we brought away with us certain hens and Calves very good. Shortly after a great multitude of the inhabitants showed themselves to the number of five or two hundred: but we departed with our pray, and returned to the ships.   

Of an Island of the red sea, named Camaran. Cap. 3.  
THe same day sailing forward, we came to an Island named Camaran, which containeth ten miles in circuit. In it is a town of two hundred houses, the inhabitants are Mahometans: it hath abundance of fresh water and flesh, and the fairest salt that ever I saw. The port is eight miles from the continent, it is subject to the Soltan of Amanian of Arabia Foelix. After we had remained here two days, we took our way toward the mouth of the red sea in the space of two days sailing: This sea may here be sailed both day and night. For (as we have said before) from this Island unto the port of Zida, the red sea is not safely navigable by night. When we came to the mouth of the sea, we seemed to be in manner enclosed, for that the mouth of the sea is there very straight, and no more than three miles over. Toward the right hand, the continent land is seen of the height of ten paces: the soil seemeth rude and not cultured. At the left hand of the said mouth, riseth a very high hill of stone. In the midst of the mouth, is a little Island unhabited, named Bebmendo, and is toward the left hand to them that sail to Zeila: But they that go to Aden, must keep the way to the left hand. All this way, we had ever the land in our sight, from Bebmendo to Aden, in the space of two days and a half.   

Of the city of Aden, and of their manners and customs toward strangers. Cap. 4.  
I Do not remember that I have seen any city better fortified then this: It standeth on a soil not much unequal, 
Of the city of Aden look. Cap. 13.  it is walled on two sides: The rest is enclosed with mountains, having on them five fortresses. The city containeth six thousand houses. Their exercise of buying and selling, 
Buying and selling by night.  beginneth the second hour of the night, by reason of extreme heat in the day tyme. A stone cast from the city, is a mountain, having on it a fortress. The ships lie near the foot of the mountain: it is certainly a very goodly city, and the fairest of all the cities of Arabia Foelix. To this, as to the chief mart, the merchants of India, Ethiopia, and Persia, have recourse by sea, and they also that resort to Mecha. assoon as our Brigantines came into the haven, immediately the customers and searchers came aboard, demanding what we were, from whence we came, what merchandise we brought, and how many men were in every Brigantine.  
Being advertised of these things, immediately they took away our mast, sails, and other tackelynges of our ships, that we should not depart without paying of custom. The day after our arriving there, the mahometans took me, and put shackles on my legs, 
The Author taken and put in prison.  which came by occasion of a certain idolater who cried after me, saying, O Christian Dog, borne of Dogs. 
Picade the monk writeth that Christians are found in all regions saving in Arabia and Egypt, where they are most hated.  When the mahometans heard the name of a Christian, incontinent they laid hands on me, and brought me to the lieutenant of the Soltan of that place, who assembling his counsel, asked their opinion if I should be put to death as a spy of the Christians.  
The Soltan himself was out of the city, and therefore his lieutenant, who had yet never adjudged any man to death, thought it not good to give sentence against me, before the Soltan should be advertised hereof. And therefore I escaped this present danger, and remained in custody fifty and five days, with an Iron of eightiene pound weight hanging at my feet. The second day after I was taken, many mahometans in great rage resorted to him, whose office was to make inquisition of treason. These a few days before, by swimming hardly escaped the hands of the Portugals, with the loss of their Foists and Barks, and therefore desired greatly to be revenged of the Christians: affirming with outrageous cry, that I was a spy of the Portugals. But God failed not to assist me. For the master of the prison, perceiving the outrage of the mahometans, and fearing that they would offer me violence, made fast the gates of the prison. After that five and fifty days were paste, the Soltan commanded that I should be brought before him: and so, set upon a Camel with my shackles, I came in eight days journey to the place where the Soltan lay, and was brought to his presence in a city named Rhada: for there the Soltan had assembled an army of thirty thousand men, to make war against the Soltan of the city of Sana, which is three days journey from Rhada, and situate partly on the declining of a hill, and partly in a plain, very fair to be seen, well peopled, and having plenty of all things. When I came before the Soltan, he began to ask me what I was. I answered that I was a Roman, professed a Mamaluke in Babylon of Alcayr, and that of religious mind to discharge my conscience of a vow which I had made to see the body of Nabi the holy Prophet, I came to the city of Medinathalhabi, where they say he is buried: and that in all cities and countries by the way, I heard honourable report of his greatness, wisdom, and singular virtue, and therefore ceased not until I entered his dominions, most desirous to see his face, yielding thanks to God, and Nabi, that it was now my chance to be presented before him: trusting that the equity of his wisdom, would thereby consider that I was no spy of the Christians, but a true Mahometan, and his servant and slave. Then said the Soltan, 
〈◊〉 ●oordes of them that profess the religion of Mahumet.  Say, Leila illala Mahumet resullala: which words I could never well pronounce, either that it pleased not God, or that for fear and scruple of conscience, I durst not. Therefore when he saw me hold my peace, he committed me again to prison, commanding that I should be straightly looked unto, where xvi men of the city were appointed, every day four, to watch me by course. So that for the space of three months, I had not the fruition of heaven, during which miserable time, me diet was every day a loaf of millet, so little that seven of them would not have satisfied my hunger for one day: But if I might have had my fill of water, I would have thought myself happy. Within three days after the Soltan marched with his army of thirty thousand footmen (as we have said) and three thousand horsemen, to besiege the city of Sana. These horsemen were borne of Christian parents, and black like the Ethiopians, 
Soldiers horsemen of Christian Ethiopians of the dominion of Presbyter johannes. Abbyssini, under Prester john.  and while they were yet very young, were bought in the kingdom of Prester john, named in Latin Presbyter johannes, or rather Preciosus johannes. These Christian Ethiopians, are also named Abbyssini. They are brought up in discipline of war, as are the Mamalukes and jenetzares of the Turks. This Soltan hath them in great estimation, for they are the guard of his own person, and therefore have greater wages, and are in number fourscore thousand. 
A guard of fourscore thousand black men.  They cover their body with a sindon, like unto a cloak or cape, putting out only one arm, and are beside naked without any other apparel. In the wars they use round targets, made of bufles hides, 
Targets.  with certain little bars of Iron to strengthen them. These targets are painted very fair with sundry colours, and very commodious to resist darts, and are in largeness as much as the mouth of a barrel: the handle is made of wood, as big as they may well hold in their hands, and made fast with nails. They use darts, and short broad swords. At other times, they use also vestures of linen cloth of sundry colours. Also of gossampine or Xylon, otherwise also named bombasine. In the wars, every man beareth with him a sling, which he casteth, 
slings.  first shaking it often about his head. When they come to xl or l years of age, they make them horns, by wreathing the hear of their heads, so bearing two horns like young Goats. When they proceed to the wars, five thousand Camels follow the army, all laden with ropes of bombasine.   

How the women of Arabia, are greatly in love with white men, Cap. 5.  
AFter the army was departed, I was incontinent committed to prison, as I have said. Hard by the prison was a long entry in manner of a cloister, where sometime we were permitted to walk. Ye shall further understand, that in the Soltans' place remained one of his three wives, with twelve young maids to wait upon her, very fair and comely, after their manner, and of colour inclining to black. The favour that they bore me, helped me very much, for I with two other, 
Counterfeit madness.  being in the same prison, agreed that one of us should counterfytte himself to be mad, that by this device, one of us might help an other. In fine, it was my lot to take upon me the mad man's part, and therefore stood me in hand to do such follies as pertain to madness. Also the opinion which they have of mad folks, made greatly for my purpose: for they take mad men to be holy, and therefore suffered me to run more at large, until the Eremites had given judgement whether I wear holy, or raging mad, as appeareth hereafter. But the first three days in which I began to show my madness, wearied me so much, that I was never so tired with labour or grieved with pain, for the boys and rascal people sometime to the number of xl or l hurled stones at me almost without ceasing, while in the mean time again I paid some of them home with like wages. The boys cried ever after me, calling me mad man. And to show it the more, I carried always stones with me in my shirt, for other apparel had I none. The queen hearing of my follies, looked oftentimes out of the windows to see me, more for a secret love she bore me, then for the pleasure she took in my follies, as afterward appeared.  
Therefore on a time, when some of them, much madder than I, played the knaves with me in the sight of the queen (whose secret favour towards me I somewhat perceived) that my madness might seem more manifest, I cast of my shirt, and went to the place before the windows, where the queen might see me all naked: wherein I perceived she took great pleasure. For she ever found some occasion that I might not go out of her sight: and would sometimes, with all her damoselles waiting on her, spend almost the whole day in beholding me: and in the mean season divers times sent me secretly much good meat by her maidens, and when she saw the boys or other do me any hurt, she bad me kill them, and spare not, reviling them also, and calling them dogs and beasts. In the palace was nourished a great fat sheep: for there are some of such exceeding bigness, that only the tail weigheth xi or xii pound weight. 
Sheep with exceeding great tails.  Under the colour of madness, I laid hand on this sheep, saying, Leila illala Mahumet resullala: which words the Soltan before, when I was brought to his presence, willed me to say, to prove whether I were a Mahometan or a professed Mamaluke. But the beast answering nothing, I asked him if he were a Mahometan, jew, 
A Sheep made a mahometan.  or Christian. And willing to make him a Mahometan, I rehearsed again the said words Leila illala Mahumet resullala, (that is to say) there is one God, and Mahumet his chief Prophet: which are the words which they speak in professing their faith. But when the beast yet answered nothing, I broke his legs with a staff. The queen took great pleasure in these my mad follies, and commanded the flesh of the sheep to be given me to eat: I never ate meat with more pleasure, or better appetite. Also three days after, 
Hunger maketh appetite.  I likewise killed an Ass that was wont to bring water into the palace, because he refused to be a Mahometan, and to say those words. The same time also I handled a jew so evil, that I had almost killed him, one in the mean time calling me Christian dog, dog borne. With which words being very angry, I cast many stones at him: but he again hurling at me, gave me a stroke on the breast, and an other on the side, which grieved me very sore.  
And because I could not follow him by reason of my shackles, I returned to the prison, and stopped the door with a heap of stones, and there lived in great pain for the space of two days without meat or drink: And therefore the queen and other thought me to be dead, but the door was opened by the queen's commandment. Then these dogs deryding me, gave me stones in the steed of bread, and pieces of white marble, saying that it was sugar: other gave me clusters of Grapes full of sand. But partly that they should not suspect that I counterfeited madness, I ate the Grapes as they gave me them. When the bruit was spread that I lived two days & nights without meat and drink: 
Madness taken for holiness.  some began to suspect that I was a holy man, and some that I was stark mad. And thus being divided into divers opinions, they consulted to send for certain men, 
hermits. Mahometans.  of whom they have such opinion of holiness, as we have of hermits: these dwell in the mountains, and lead a contemplative life. When they came unto me, to give their judgement what manner of man I was, certain merchants asked them if I were a holy man, or a mad man. These were also of divers opinions, some affyrming one thing, and some another. While they were yet debating this matter, for the space of an hour, I pissed in my hands, and hurled it in their faces: whereby they agreed that I was no Saint, but a mad man. The queen seeing all this at the window, laughed well thereat among her maidens, and said thus to them, By the goodness of God, and by the head of mohammed, this is a good man. The day following, when in the morning I found him a sleep that had so sore hurt me with stones, I took him by the hear of the head with both hands, and with my knee so pounched him on the stomach, and battered his face, that I left him all bloody, and half dead. Which thing the queen seeing, cried unto me saying, kill the beast, kill the dog: whereupon, he ran his way, and came no more in sight. When the Precedent of the city heard that the queen favoured me, & took pleasure in my mad sport, thinking also that I was not mad, commanded that I should go at liberty within the palace, only wearing my shackles: Yet every night was I put in an other prison in the lower part of the palace, and so remained still in the court for the space of twenty days. In the mean time, the queen willed me to go a hunting with her, which I refused not, and at my return, I feigned me to be sick for weariness. So continuing for the space of eight days, under the colour of sickness, the queen often sent to me to know how I did. After this, finding opportunity, 
A holy vow.  I declared to the queen that I had made a vow to God and mohammed to visit a certain holy man in the city of Aden, and desired her to give me leave to go thither. Whereunto she consented: and commanded immediately a Camel and xxv Sarraphes of gold to be delivered me. Therefore the day following, I took my journey, and in the space of eight days, came to the city of Aden: and shortly after my coming, visited the man of whom was so great report of holiness, and whom the people honoured for a saint. 
A holy saint.  And this only, because he had ever lived in great poverty, and without the company of women. And hear are seen many other such: But doubtless all such lose their labour, being out of the faith of Christ. When I had performed my vow, I feigned that I had recovered health by miracle of that holy man, and certified the queen thereof, desiring that I might tarry there a while, to visit likewise certain other men in that country, of whom was the like fame of holiness: which excuse I devised, because the fleet of India would not yet departed from thence for the space of a month. In the mean time I secretly agreed with a certain captain of that navy to go with him into India, 
The fleet of India.  and made him many fair promises to reward him largely. He answered, that he would not go into India before he had first been in Persia: whereunto I agreed.   

Of the cities of Lagis and Aiaz in Arabia Felix: And of the martes of Aiaz and the town of Dante. Cap. 7.  
THe day following, mounting upon a Camel, and making a journey of xxv miles, I came to a certain city maimed Lagi, situate in a great plain, well peopled, having abundance of Olives, and flesh, with also great plenty of corn, after our manner: but no vines, and great scarceness of wood. The inhabitants are uncivil and rustical people, of the nation of vagabond and field Arabians, and therefore but poor. Departing from hence one dai● journey, I came to an other city named Aiaz, situate upon two hills, with a great plain between them, and hath in it a notable fountain, & therefore divers nations resort thither as to a famous mart. The inhabitants are mahometans, and yet greatly differing in opinion of their religion: 
Strife and hatred for religion and all worth nought.  insomuch that therefore they be at great enmity one against the other, and keep sore war. The cause whereof they say to be this: That the people of the north mountain, maintain the faith and sect of mohammed and his fellows, of whom we have spoken before: but the other of the South mountain affirm, that faith should be given only to mohammed and Haly, 
Mortus Hali, as the Persians call him.  saying the other to be false prophets. But let us now return to the mart. Almost all manner of spices are brought hither. The region bringeth forth silk and bombassine: also divers goodly fruits, and wines. On the top of both the hills, are very strong fortresses, two days journey from thence is the city of Dante, well fortified both by art and nature, situate in the top of a very great mountain.   

Of Almacharan, a city of Arabia Faelix, and of the fruitfulness thereof. Cap. 8.  
Departing from Dantè, we came to the city of Almacharan, in two days journey. This is situate on a very high mountain, and declining, and difficult to ascend, as of the height of seven miles, and the way so narrow, that only two men can pass together. In the top, is a plain of incredible largeness, very fruitful, with plenty of all things to the use of man. And therefore I think it to be inexpugnable & inaccessible: having also so great abundance of water, that one fountain may suffice for a hundred thousand men. And therefore they say that the Soltan here hideth his treasure, because he was borne in this city.  
Here also ever remaineth one of his wives. The air is marvelous temperate and wholesome, and the city second to none in all respects: the colour of the inhabitants is rather inclining to white, than any other colour. 
As much gold as will lad a hundred Camels.  And to speak that I have seen, the Soltan reserveth here as much gold, as will lad a hundred Camels.   

Of Ream a city of Arabia Faelix, and the temperateness thereof. Cap. 9  
THis city is distant two days journey from Almacaran. The colour of the inhabitants is inclining to black: they are great merchants. The soil is fruitful of all things saving wood: it containeth in circuit two thousand houses: on the one side is a mountain having on it a very strong fortress. Here I saw a certain kind of sheep having their tails of forty and four pound weight, 
A sheeps tail of .44. pound weight.  and are without horns, and also so marvelous fat, that they can scarcely go for fatness. There be likewise certain grapes without grains, the sweetest that ever I eat, and all manner of such fruits, as I have spoken of before. 
Grapes without grains.  It is of marvelous temperateness, as witnesseth the long life of men, for I have spoken with many of them that have passed the age of a hundred and five and twenty years, 
Men of long life in temperate air.  & yet very lusty and well complexioned. They go for the most part naked, wearing only shirts, or other lose and thin apparel, like mantles, putting out one Arm all bare. Almost all the Arabians make them Horns with wreathing of their own hear, and that they think very comely.   

Of Sana a city of Arabia Faelix. Cap. 10.  
Departing from thence three days journey, I came to a city named Sana, situate upon a very high mountain, very strong by Art and Nature. The Soltan besieged this, with a great army of fourscore thousand men for the space of three months, but could never win it. 
An army of fourscore thousand men.  Yet it was at the last rendered by composition. The walls are of eighteen cubits height, and twenty in breadth, insomuch that eight Camels in order may well march upon them. 
Strong walls.  The region is very fruitful and much like unto ours, and hath plenty of water. A Soltan is Lord of the city: he hath twelve sons, of the which one is named mohammed, who by a certain natural tyranny and madness, delighteth to eat man's flesh, 
Anthopophagus.  and therefore secretly killeth many to eat them. He is of large and strong body, of four cubits high, and of the colour inclining to ashes. The soil beareth certain spices not far from the city. It containeth about four thousand houses. The houses are of fair building, and give no place to ours. The city is so large, that it containeth within the walls, fields, gardens, and meadows.   

Of Taessa, Zibith, and Damar. great cities of Arabia Eaelix. Cap. 11.  
AFter three days journey, I came to a city named Taessa, sytuate upon a mountain, and very fair to sight: it hath plenty of all delices, and especially of marvelous fair Roses, 
Roses.  whereof they make Rose water. It is an ancient city, and hath in it a Temple builded after the fashion of the church of Sancta Maria Rotunda in Rome. The houses are very fair, and show yet the monuments of antiquity: innumerable merchants resort hither for the traffic of sundry merchandise. In apparel they are like unto other, and of darkyshe ash colour of skin, inclining to black. Three days journey from thence, I came to an other city named Zibith, very fair and good, distant from the red sea only half a days journey: there is great abundance of merchandise by reason of the dearness of the sea. It aboundeth with many goodly things, and especially with most white Sugar, and sundry kinds of pleasant fruits. 
Sugar.  It is situate in a very large plain within two mountains: it lacketh walls, and is one of the chiefest martes for all sorts of spices. The inhabitants are of the colour of them aforesaid. From hence in one days journey, I came to the city of Damar: it is in a fruitful soil, and hath great exercise of merchandise. The inhabitants are mahometans, in apparel and colourlyke unto the other.   

Of the Soltan of the aforesaid cities, and why he is named Sechamir. Cap. 12.  
THese cities whereof we have spoken here a little before, are subject to a Soltan of Arabia Faelix, named Sechamir. 
The Soltan of Arabia felix.  Secha (by interpretation) signifieth holy, and Amir, a Prince, named the holy Prince, because he abhorreth shedding of man's blood. 
A pitiful pagan.  At the time of my being there in prison, he nourished syxteene thousand poor men, and captives in prison condemned to death, allowing to every of them daily for their diet, six of their pence of the smallest valour, 
A great family.  and at home in his palace entertaineth as many black slaves.   

Of Monkeys and Marmasettes, and other beasts, noisome to men. Cap. 13.  
Departing from hence, I returned to the city of Aden in three days journey: in the mid way, 
Of Aden read the fourth cap.  I found an exceeding high and large mountain, where is great pentie of wild beasts, and especially of Monkeys, which run about the mountain every where. There are also many Lions, very noisome to men: and therefore it is not safe to journey that way, but when a multitude of men go together, 
Monkeys and Lions.  at the least to the number of a hundred. I passed this way with a great company, and yet were we in danger of the Lions, and other wild beasts which followed us: 
Danger of wild beasts.  for we were sometimes constrained to fight with them with darts, slings, and bows, using also the help of dogs, and yet escaped hardly. When I came to the city, I feigned myself sick: and in the day time lurked in the temple, and went forth only in the night to speak with the pilot of the ship (of whom I have made mention before) and obtained of him a foist or bark to departed thence secretly.   

Of certain places of Ethiopia. Cap. 14.  
IN the sixth chapter here before, I have made mention how departing from the queen I went to the city of Aden, where I covenanted with a certain pilot to go with him into India, and that he would not go thither before he had first made a voyage into Persia, and that at my first being in the city of Aden, he could not yet for the space of a month departed from thence: During which time, I travailed the regions and cities, whereof I have spoken, unto this my return to Aden. Now therefore according to our agreement to travail divers countries and regions, committing ourselves to the sea, we were by inconstant fortune and sundry tempests, 
Tempest.  deterred from that voyage: for whereas we were now six days sailing on our way to Persia, 
The voyage to Persia. Ethiope.  a sudden contrary tempest drove us out of our way, and cast us on the coast of Ethiope. Our barks were laden with rubric (that is, 
Rubric.  a certain red earth) which is used to die cloth: for yearly from the city of Aden, depart fifteen or twenty ships laden with rubric, which is brought out of Arabia Faelix. Being therefore thus tossed with storms, we were driven into a port, named Zeila: where we remained five days to see the city, and tarry until the sea were more quiet.   

Of the city Zeila in Ethiopia, and the great fruitfulness thereof: and of certain strange beasts seen there. Cap. 15.  
IN this city, is great freequentation of merchandise, as in a most famous mart. 
Gold. ivory. Black slaves.  There is marvelous abundance of gold and ivory, and an innumerable number of black slaves, sold for a small price: these are taken in war by the Mahometan Mores, out of Ethyopia, of the kingdom of Presbyter johannes, or Preciosus johannes, 
Presbyter johannes, king of jacobins & abyssin's. justice & good laws.  which some also call the king of jacobins or abyssin's, being a Christian: and are carried away from thence into Persia, Arabia Faelix, Babylonia of Nilus or Alcair, and Mecha. In this city justice and good laws are observed: the soil beareth Wheat, and hath abundance of flesh, and divers other commodious things. It hath also Oil, not of olives, but of some other thing, I know not what. There is also plenty of Honey and Wax: there are likewise certain sheep, 
Sheep with great tails,  having their tails of the weight of syxeteene pound, and exceeding fat, the head and neck are black, and all the rest white. There are also sheep altogether white, having tails of a cubit long, hanging down like a great cluster of grapes: and have also great laps of skin hanging from their throats, as have Bulls and Oxen, 
Palearia.  hanging down almost to the ground. 
kine with Hearts horns.  There are also certain kine with horns like unto Hearts horns, these are wild: and when they be taken, are given to the Soltan of that city as a kingly present. I saw there also certain kine, 
kine with only one horn.  having only one horn in the midst of the forehead, as hath the Unicorn, and about a span of length, but the horn bendeth backward: they are of bright shining red colour. But they that have Hearts horns, are inclining to black colour. Conye is there good cheap. The city hath an innumerable multitude of merchants: the walls are greatly decayed, and the haven rude and despicable. The king or Soltan of the city is a Mahometan, and entertaineth in wages a great multitude of foot men and horsemen. They are greatly given to wars, and wear only one lose single vesture, as we have said before of other. They are of dark ashy colour, inclining to black. In the wars, they are unarmed: and are of the sect of Mahumet.   

Of Barbara, an Island of Ethiope. Cap. 16.  
AFter that the tempests were appeased, we gave wind to our sails, and in short time arrived at an Island named Barbara, the Prince whereof is a Mahometan. The Island is not great, but fruitful and well peopled: it hath abundance of flesh. The inhabitants are of colour inclining to black. Al their riches, is in herds of cattle. We remained here but one day, and departing from hence, sailed into Persia.    


The third book entreateth of Persia: and of certain towns and parts of Persia. Cap. 1.  
WHen we had sailed the space of twelve days, we arrived at a city called Divobanderrumi, 
Divobanderrumi.  (that is to say) the holy port of Turks. It is but a little way from the continent: when the sea riseth with high tides, it is an Island environed with water, but at a low flood, or decrease of the sea, one may go thither by land: it is subject to the Soltan of Cambaia. The Governor is named Menacheas: It is a mart of great merchandise. 
The Soltan of Cambaia.  There dwell about it four hundred merchants of Turkey: it is well walled round about, and defended with all sorts of engines. They have barks and brygantines somewhat less than ours: we remained here two days. Departing from hence, 
Goa.  we came to an other city named Goa, in the space of three days journey: this also aboundeth with merchandise, and is a mart greatly frequented. The soil is fruitful, with plenty of all things necessary: the inhabitants are Mahometans. Near unto this, are two other fair cities and ports, 
Giulfar. Meschet.  named Giulfar and Meschet.   

Of the Island and city of Ormus, or Armusium: and of an Island of Persia where pearls are found. Cap. 2.  
Proceeding on our voyage, we came to a city named Ormus, 
Ormus. Pearls.  very fair. This is second to none in goodly situation, and plenty of pearls: it is in an Island distant from the continent twelve miles: It hath great scarcenesss of fresh water and corn, From other regions, is brought thither all victuals that nourish the inhabitants. Three days sailing from thence, are gathered those muscles which bring forth the fairest and bigest pearls: they are taken as I will now declare. 
fishing for Pearls.  There are certain men that get their living by fishing. These having small Boats, cast into the sea a great stone, fastened to a cord, and this on both sides of the Boat, to make it as steadfast and immovable as a ship lying at an Anchor. The Boat thus stayed as it were with weight and balance, an other appointed to that purpose, casteth into the sea a cord with a stone hanging at it. In the midst of the Boat an other having a sack hanging on his shoulder before and behind, 
divers under the water.  and a stone hanging at his feet, hurleth himself into the sea, and swimmeth under the water even unto the bottom of the sea, for the depth of fifteen paces or more, and there remaineth until he have gathered the pearl Muscles, which he putteth in his sack, than he casteth away the stone that weighed him down, and cometh up by the cord. There are seen sometime almost three hundred ships, and other kind of vessels, which come thither from many places and countries. The Soltan of the city, is a Mahometan. There are above four hundred merchants and factors remaining here continually, for the traffic of merchandise which come from divers other regions, as silk, pearls, precious stones, spices, and such like. They live with Rise for the most part, for they have none other corn.   

Of the city named Eri in Chorazani, a region of Persia, and of the riches thereof: Also of Reubarbarum. Cap. 3.  
Departing from Ormus, I went into Persia: And after ten days journey, I came to a certain city named Eri. The name of the region is Chorazani, 
Chorazani or Chorashan.  by which signification we may also name it Flaminia. The King of the region, dwelleth in the city: It is fruitful and plentiful almost of all things. There is seen so great abundance of silk, that you may in one day buy as much as may suffice to lad three thousand camels. 
Great abundance of silk.  Corn is there never dear, by reason of the great abundance. There is great plenty of Rhubarb, as I gather by this conjecture, that six pound of Rhubarb, 
Plenty of corn. Rhubarb of small price.  after our pound of xii ounces to the pound, are sold for one crown of gold. The city containeth in circuit about seven thousand houses. They are of the sect of Mahumet. Departing from hence twenty days journey, I observed that the continent region or firm land, far from the sea side, is very well inhabited with many good towns and villages.   

Of the river thought to be Euphrates. And of Castoreum. Cap. 4.  
IN this journey I came to a certain great river, which in the inhabitants language even at this day is named Eufra, which I verily think to be Euphrates, 
The riven Euphrates.  considering also the large capacity thereof. Proceeding therefore on my journey by the river toward the left hand, I came in the space of three days to an other city, 
Schira.  named Schyra. This hath only one prince, and he a Persian Mahometan, and subject to none other. 
Precious stones The stone Eranon▪ A Turques.  Here are found all sorts of precious stones, and especially the stone Eranon, which delivereth men from witchcrafts, madness, and fearfulness, proceeding of melancholy. It is the stone commonly called the Turquesse. They are brought in great abundance from a city named Balascam, 
Balascam.  where is also great plenty of Castoreum, and sundry kinds of colours. 
Castoreum.  And here I notify unto you, why there is found little true Castoreum among us, because it is adulterate by the Persians before it come to our hands, for these people are greatly given to the counterfeiting of such things, as I saw by experience before mine eyes: for willing on a time to prove the odoriferous strength of pure Castoreum, 
The proof of true Castoreum.  I saw certain, that had experience hereof, do in this manner. They took the bladder of Castoreum, and four of them one after an other, put it to their noses to smell.  
The favour of it was so strong, that it made their noses bleed: and by this proof, they knew it to be pure Castoreum, & not counterfeit. I asked the Persian whether Castoreum (as other the like ungments or drugs) would soon lose his strength. He answered, that the strength of that savour might be preserved the space of ten years, if it were not counterfeit. 
Commendation of the Persians.  The Persians are very courteous and gentle people, liberal and gracious one to an other, and favourable to strangers: and this I speak as I have found and seen by experience. During the time that I was there, I found a certain Persian merchant, who the year before knew me in the city of Mecha: he was borne in the city of Eri in Corozain. As soon as he saw me, he spoke to me in this manner, lodovic, what God or fortune hath sent thee into these countries? Art not thou he whom not long sense I knew in Mecha? To whom I answered, I am certainly the same, and am now come hither for the great desire that I have to see the world. Praised be God, said he, that I have now found a companion of my journey, that is taken with the same desire that I have: and therefore for the space of fifteen days we remained together in a city named Squilaz. 
Squila●.  He exhorted me not to departed from him, but that we should together, by his guiding, travail the chief parts of the world. Entering therefore on our journey, we came first to a place named Saint Bragant. 
Saint Bragant.    

Of the city of Saint Bragant, bigger than Babylon. And of the king of Persia, named the Sophy. Cap. 5.  
THey say that the city of Saint Bragant, is bigger than Babylon: the king of the city, is a Mahometan. The merchants say that when it pleaseth him, he assembleth an army of threescore thousand Horsemen. 
An army of threescore thousand horsemen.  The people are of colour inclining to whiteness, and very warlike men. This we say only by enformation of other: for we could not safely pass any further, by reason of the great wars which the Sophy then made against those mahometans, 
War between the Sophy's of Persia and the Turk, for their religion.  which are of the sect and religion of Bubachar, Othomar, & Omar▪ These were the fellows of mohammed, as we have written before of mohammed and his fellows. 
The Turks hold of mohammed and his fellows.  The Persians abhor these as heretics and false doctors, although they themselves also be Mahometans of an other sect, which is of mohammed and Hali, 
The Persians hold of mohammed and Hali, or Mortus Hali.  whose doctrine they embrace and esteem for most perfect and true religion. Here therefore the said Persian, my good friend, and joyful companion of my journey, said thus unto me, That thou mayest understand (Lodovic) the unfeigned good will that I bear thee, and the desire I have that our friendship may be knit with indissoluble bands, 
A sure friend in necessity.  and thereby to assure thee that I will not fail thee in thy necessity, I have a Nyese named Samis, whom I will give thee to wife. Samis in their tongue, signifieth the Sun (for she deserved so to be called for her singular beauty) and said furthermore, that he did not travail the world for lack of any thing, but only for his pleasure and desire of knowledge. And therefore passing no further, by reason of the wars (as we have said) we returned to the city of Eri, where he entertained me in his house honourably: and showing me his Nyese, instantly desired me to take her to wife. But I, having my mind otherwise destinate, would not seem to contemn his so friendly a proffer, but deferred it to a more convenient tyme. Therefore departing from thence, within eight days after, we returned to Ormus, and sailed from thence into India, arriving there at a certain port named Cheo. 
Cheo.     

Here followeth the fourth book, which entreateth of India, and of the cities and other notable things seen there.  

Of the city of Cambaia in India, most fruitful in manner of all things. Cap. 1.  
Forasmuch as in the beginning of this work we promised that we would declare all things briefly, we intend now here to speak only of things which may seem most worthy to be known. Entering therefore into India, we came to a certain port, which the great and famous river Indus passeth by, and is not far from the city of Cambaia. 

The river Indus.  
The city of Cambaia.   It is situate three miles within the land, toward the South. The Brigantines or foists can have no access to it, except the flood rise higher then commonly it is wont to do, which sometimes overfloweth the land the space of four miles. But here the floods have contrary courses of increasing, for here they increase in the wane of the Moon, 
Note the increase of rivers contrary to ours.  but with us in the full Moon. The city is walled after our manner, and aboundeth with all necessary things, especially with wheat, and all sorts of wholesome and pleasant fruits. There are also certain kinds of spices, the names whereof I know not. It hath also abundance of gossampine or bombassine cotton. merchants bring from thence yearly so much bombassine and silk, 
xl. ships laden with silk and bombasine.  that sometime they lad forty or fifty ships to carry into other countries. In this region is also a mountain where the Onyx stone, commonly called Corneola, is found: and not far from thence also an other mountain, where the Calcedony and Diamant are found.   

The manners of the people of the city of Cambaia: and of the Soltan thereof. Cap. 2.  
THe Soltan of Cambaia, at my being there, was named Macamut, and had reigned forty years, after he had expulsed the king of Gugerat. They think it not lawful to kill any living beast to eat, 
Pithagorici.  or to eat flesh. They are no Mahometans, neither Idolaters, and therefore I believe that if they were baptized, 
Good people.  they were not far from the way of salvation, for they observe the exquisite rule of justice, doing no worse to other, than they would to be done to them. As touching their apparel, some of them go naked, and other cover only their privities. On their heads, they wear fyllettes of purple colour. They themselves are of dark yellow colour, commonly called leonel colour. This Soltan maintaineth an army of twenty thousand horsemen. 
They may see me the successors of Darius and Po●us.  Every morning resort to his palace, fifty men, sitting on Elephants. Their office is, with all reverence to salute the king or Soltan, the Elephants also kneeling down. In the morning assoon as the king waketh, is heard a great noise of Drums, Tambartes, Tymbrelles, waits, and also Trumpets, 
The great pomp of the king of Cambaia.  with divers other musical instruments, in rejoicing that the king liveth. The like do they while he is at dinner: and then also the men sitting on the Elephants, make him the like reverence as before. We will in due place speak of the wit, 
Elephants.  customs, and docility of these beasts. The Soltan of this city, hath his upper lip so gross, that it is a monstrous thing to behold: 
Monstruos great lips.  insomuch that sometime he beareth it up with a fillet, as women do the hear of their heads: his beard is white and long, even unto the navel. He is so accustomed to poison from his infancy, 
A strange history of a king accustomed to eat poison.  that he daily eateth some to keep it in use. And although he himself feel no hurt thereof by reason of custom, yet doth he thereby so empoison himself, that he is poison to other: for when he is disposed to put any of his noble men to death, he causeth him to be brought to his presence, and to stand naked before him. Incontinent's he eateth certain fruits (which they call Chofolos) like unto nutmegs: and eateth also the leaves of certain herbs, which they call Tambolos, 
A venomus king.  adding also thereto the powder of beaten oyster shells. And a while chawing all these together in his mouth, he spiteth it upon him whom he desireth to kill, who being sparkled therewith, dieth, by force of the poison within the space of half an hour. He entertaineth about four thousand concubines: for when soever he hath live with any of them, she with whom he hath lain, dieth the day following, being by him empoisoned. 
Belike he getteth no children.  And therefore when he changeth his shirt or other apparel, no man dare wear it: and for this cause he hath great change of apparel. My companion inquired diligently of the merchants by what means he was of so venomous nature? They answered, that the Soltan his father brought him so up of a child with poison by little and little, with preservatives so accustoming him thereto. But let us now return to speak of the manners of the people: For the most part they wear but only one single vesture, and are very warlike men: also greatly given to merchandise. The fruitfulness and plentifulness of the region can not be spoken. 
Great fruitfulness & abundance of merchandise.  It is frequented almost of all nations. Therefore from this city, and from an other (whereof we will speak hereafter) divers and innumerable sorts of merchandise, are transported to almost all the regions of the world, and especially to the Turks, Syrians, Arabians, Indians: also to divers regions of Africa and Ethiopia: principally exceeding abundance of silk and Bombasyne, 
Plenty of silk.  and therefore is this Soltan marvelous rich. He keepeth in manner continual war with the king of joga, whose realm is fifteen days journey from Cambaia, and reacheth very far every way. 
The king of joga, an idolater.  This king maintaineth an army of xxx thousand fighting men: he and all his people are idolaters. He liveth in continual progress, 
Continual progress.  with a mighty train at the charges of the people: and continually carrieth about with him four thousand tents and pavilions: also his wife, children, concubines, & slaves, furthermore, four or five of most courageous horses: 
wives and concubines.  likewise muskattes, moonkeys, Parrottes, Leopards, & hawks. And in this order he walketh almost over all India. The kings apparel, is a double goats skin, one covering his breast, and the other his back, with the hearysyde outward: he is of wesel colour, inclining to blackness, 
The colour of the Indians.  as are the most part of these Indians, being in manner scorched with heat of the Sun. They wear all earrings, precious stones, and jewels of sundry forts: some cover their body with a single, light, & thin vesture, putting out one arm naked. The king and certain of his noble men, paint their faces with certain sweet gums & spices: and some also other parts of their bodies. They are led with many vain superstitions: for some profess never to lie on the ground, some to live in continual silence, as though they were speechelesse, having two or three appointed by signs to serve them meat and drink.  
They have all horns hanging about their necks: and therefore when they come to any city, 
Horns.  they blow their horns all at once, to make the inhabitants afraid, as do they that with us keep Crows or Rooks out of the corn. Then coming to talk with the citizens, they demand victuales, and what soever other things they stand in need of. While the king any time resteth a while in one place, almost all the whole army guarding his person about his pavilion, five or two hundred in the mean time range abroad together to get what they can. 
Wandering nations. Field men.  They tarry not past three days in one place, but are ever wandering after the manner of the vagabond Egyptians, Arabians, & Tartars. The region is not fruitful, but rough, with craggy mountains. The houses of the city are despicable: the city is also without walls. This king is enemy to the Soltan of Machamir, & vexeth him greatly with divers incursions.   

Of the city of Ceull, and the manner of the people. Cap. 3.  
Departing from Cambia, in twelve days journey I came to a city named Ceull: the land that lieth between them both, is called Guzerat. The king of this city, is an idolater: 
Guzerat.  they are of dark yellow colour, or Lion tawny: some were such slender apparel as they whom we have spoken of before: other are naked, covering only their pryvyties. They are prompt to the wars, and use sword, bows, darts, slings, and round targets. They have engines to beat down walls, & to make great slaughter in an army: the city hath walls, and is distant from the sea but three miles. A fair river runneth by the city, by the which much merchandise is brought thither. The soil beareth almost all manner of fruits, except Uynes, walnuts, and chestnuts. It hath also Wheat, Barley, and other kinds of corn. Here is made great plenty of Bombasyne cloth. They are such idolaters as are they of calicut, 
idolaters.  of whom we will speak hereafter: yet are there in the city many merchants Mahometans. They exercise justice. The king entertaineth but a small army. There are many horses and kine. Two days journey from hence, is a city named Dabuly, 
Dabuly.  having a great river running by it. It hath walls after the manner of ours. The soil is fruitful, and the city beautiful. There are innumerable merchants Mahometans. The king is an Idolater, and hath an army of xxx thousand men. 
Idolaters.  They are in manners like unto the other, and of the same colour.   

Of Goga, an Island of India. Cap. 4.  
Departing from hence, I came to the Island of Goga, not past a mile destant from the continent. This payeth yearly tribute to the king of Dechan a thousand pieces of gold, of the value of the Saraphes of Babylon, 
Tribute.  having on the one side the Image of the devil, and on the other side, certain unknown caractes. Upon the sea coast of one side of this Island, 
Coin.  is a town builded after the manners of ours. The governor is a certain Captain of soldiers named Savain: 
Mamalukes.  he hath in his regiment four hundred Mamalukes, and is also a Mamaluke himself: and therefore when he findeth any white men, he entertaineth them friendly, 
white men.  and giveth them stipend of twenty Saraphes of gold every month. But he first maketh proof of their strength and valiantness by wrestling: and if they be not found meet for the wars, he putteth them to handy crafts. This Captain with only his four hundred Mamalukes, greatly vexeth the king of Narsinga. Departing from hence, in eight days journey by land, I came to the city of Dechan.   

Of Dechan, a very fair city of India. Cap. 5.  
THe king or Soltan of Dechan, is a Mahometan, of whom the foresaid captain Mamaluke is entered in wages. This city is beautiful in sight, and the soil very fruitful and plentiful in manner of all things necessary. The king is accounted a Mamaluke, and with him xxxv thousand men of his dominion of horsemen and footmen. The city is beautified with a marvelous fair palace, 
A fair palace.  and the palace adorned with many fair rooms, for before you come to the kings chamber, you must pass by xliiii other chambers, for the solers of the chambers are so orderly disposed, that one chamber still giveth entry into an other, until you come to the last. The city is compassed with a wall, after the manner of the Christians. 
Great pomp and magnificence.  The houses are not uncomely. The king useth incredible pomp, and regal magnificence. They that wait upon his person wear upon their shoes or starpins Rubies and Diamonds, and such other precious stones. What ouches and jewels they wear in their earrings and Condalijs, Carkenettes colours, let witty men judge, comparing the feet to the more noble parts of the body. Six miles from the city is a mountain where Diamonds are digged. 
Where Diamuntes are found.  It is compassed with a wall, and kept with a Garrison. The region hath plenty of all things. The people are Mahometans. Their apparel for the most part is of silk: or at the least the shirt or inmost vesture. They wear also thine buskins: and hose like gregascos or mariners slops. 
women's faces covered.  Their women, after the manner of the women of Damascus, have their faces covered. The king keepeth in manner continual war with the king of Narsinga. The most part of his soldiers are strangers, 
White men.  entertained for wages. They are white men: but the inhabitants, of the colour of the other Indians. The king is marvelous rich, and liberal. He hath also a great navy of ships. 
The king of Decham, hateth the Christians.  He hateth the Christians as much as any other. Thus having traveled this part of the region, I took my journey toward a city named Bathacala, five days journey from Dechan. 
The city Bathacala.  The inhabitants are Idolaters, except certain Mahometan merchants, which resort thither for merchandise. It hath abundance of Rise, Sugar, figs, walnuts, Wheat, Corn, and many other fruits and roots unknown to us. They haves beeves, kine, Bulfes, Sheep, Goats, and divers other beasts, but no Horses, Mules, or Asses.   

Of certain other goodly cities of India. Cap. 6.  
Departing from hence, I took my journey toward a city named Centacola, one days journey from Bathacala. The prince of this city is no lord of great richesses. There is nevertheless abundance of flesh, Rise, 
Centacola.  and other such fruits as grow in India: many mahometans resort hither for merchandise. The king is an Idolater, and of Lion tawny colour. They go stark naked, 
Idolatars. Barthacal.  and wear nothing on their heads. This prince is subject to the king of Barthacal. Departing from hence two days journey, I came to an Island named Onor, whose king is an Idolater, 
The Island of Onor.  and serveth the devil, and is subject to the king of Narsinga: He is very gentle and familiar, he maintaineth eight foists, which make excursions and live by roving and piracy. 
A king a pirate. Naked men.  He is in great friendship with the king of Portugal. The inhabitants cover their privities with a sindone, and are beside all naked. The soil beareth plenty of Rise, as in other parts of India. 
Rise. Beasts.  There are in manner all kinds of beasts, as wild Boars, Hearts, Wolves, Lions, & sundry kinds of birds and fowls unlike unto ours, Peacocks also and Parrottes. 
Birds and fowls.  It hath innumerable kine of shining yellow colour: also sheep exceeding fat. There is so great abundance of flowers and Roses, that they fail not in winter. There can not be a more temperate air: 
Flowers all the year long.  and therefore they live much longer than we do. Not far from this city, is an other city named Mangolor: from whence, 
Long life. Myngolor.  about the number of lx ships depart yearly laded with Rise. The inhabitants are partly Idolaters, and partly Mahometans. Their manner of living and apparel, is as we have said before. 
Rise.    

Of Canonor and Narsinga, great cities of India. Cap. 7.  
Departing from hence, we directed our journey toward the city of Canonor, being a very goodly city. 
afterward he became friend to the Portugals.  here the king of Portugal hath a very strong town. The king of the city is an Idolater, and no great friend to the king of Portugal.  
The city hath a port, whither are brought the horses of Persia: but the custom for horses is exceeding great. Departing from hence, and entering further into the land, we came to the city of Narsinga, 
〈…〉  where many Mahometan merchants do dwell. The soil beareth neither wheat, nor wines, or few other fruits, except Oranges and Gourds. 
oranges.  They eat no bread: but live with rise, fish, and such walnuts as the country beareth. In manners and idolatry, they are like unto them of calicut, 
Rise.  of which we will speak hereafter. There is found plenty of spices, as Ginger, Pepper, Myrobalans, Cardanum, Cassia, 
spices.  and divers such other. Also many and divers kinds of fruits unlike unto ours, and much sweeter. The region is in manner inaccessible for many dens and ditches made by force. 
Strange fruits.  The king hath an army of fifty thousand gentlemen, which they call Heros. In the wars they use swords, round Targets, 
An army of fifty thousand gentlemen. Guns.  or Buklers, Lances, Darts, Bows, slings: and begin now also to use Guns. They go naked, covering only their privities, except when they go to the wars. They use no horses, Mules, Asses, or those Camels which we commonly call Dromedaries. 
Dromedares. Elephants.  They use only Elephants, yet not to fight in the battle. Great merchandise is used in the city: for thither resort from divers countries two hundred ships yearly. Departing from the kingdom of Narsinga, in xu days journey toward the East, we came at the length to a city named Bisinagar.   

Of the fruitful city of Bisinagar in the kingdom of Narsinga. Cap. 8.  
THe city of Bisinager is under the dominion of the king of Narsinga, and subject to him. The city is very large and well walled, situate on the side of a hill, and eight miles in circuit. 
A triple wall.  It is compassed with a triple wall, and is a famous mart of all sorts of rich merchandise. The soil is marvelous fruitful, and hath whatsoever pertaineth to delicates and pleasures. There is no land more commodious for hawking and hunting, 
Hawking and hunting.  for it hath large plains, and goodly woods: a man would say it were an earthly paradise. The king and people are Idolaters. He is a Prince of great power, he hath an army of four thousand horsemen. And yet is it to be noted, the price of a good horse there, 
An army of four thousand horsemen.  to be no less than four or five hundred of those pieces of gold which they call Pardaiss: And sometime it so chanceth that a horse is sold for eight hundred of those pieces of gold. 
Horses of great price.  The cause of which great price is, that they are brought out of other countries: and that they have no Mares, being forbidden by the commandment of the kings, straightly charging the ports to be kept, lest any Mares should be brought into the country. 
Four hundred Elephants.  He hath also four hundred Elephants to serve in the wars: and likewise as many camels, of the kind of those swift running camels which be commonly called Dromadarii. 
Dromedary camels.  And here me seemeth good opportunity to say somewhat of the docility, agility, and wit of Elephants, as we have promised.   

Of the docility, agility, and wit of Elephants. Cap. 9  
THe Elephant, of all four footed beasts, and next unto man, is most witty and docible, and not far from human sense, and surmounteth all other beasts in strength. When the Indians bring them to the wars, 
How the Elephants are prepared to the wars.  they put great packesaddelles on their backs, such as in Italy they use for the great Mules. These packesaddelles, they gird under their bellies with two chains of Iron. Upon the saddelles, they place on every side a little house, or if you will, rather call them turrets, or Cagies, made of wood: every Turret containeth three men. Between the two turrets, sitteth an Indian on the back of the beast, and speaketh to him in his own language, which the beast understandeth and obeyeth: for it is certain that no other beast approacheth so near to the understanding of man. Seven men therefore are thus placed upon one Elephant when they go to the wars, 
Seven men fight upon one Elephant.  and all armed with coats of fence, Targets, Bows, Lances, Darts, and slings. Also the trunk or snout of the Elephant (which of the Latins is called Promuscis, or Proboscis, and of some, 
How the Elephant is armed  the hand of the Elephant) is armed, and hath a sword fastened to it of the length of two cubits, very strong, and of a handful in breadth. And thus furnished, they proceed to the battle. When it is requisite to go forward, or backward, the governor sitting above, giveth them an instruction with such voices as they are accustomed unto: 
The Elephant understandeth the voice of his keeper.  for sometime he saith thus to the beast, Strike here, strike there, forbear here, go forward there, turn this way, and that way. All which words he understandeth and obeyeth without spur or bridle. But where it so chanceth that by casting of fire, 
The Elephant can not abide fire.  they are with fear driven to flight, they can by no means be stayed. And therefore these people have many subtle devices how they may fear them with fire, which this beast, by the sense of nature, feareth above all things, and therefore flieth in manner at the sight of fire. And to speak somewhat of their strength, as I have seen by experience, I remember that when I was in the city of Canonor, 
The strength of the Elephant  certain mahometans drew a ship aland, turning the ship, after the manner of the Christians, with the fore end toward the land, and laying under it three rolling beams. Then three Elephants commodiously applied, drawing with great force, and bending down their heads to the ground, brought the ship to land. But many have thought that the Elephants have no joints in their legs, and that therefore they could not bend their legs: which thing doubtless is false, 
The Elephants have joints in their legs.  for they have joints as have other beasts, but in the lowest part of their legs. The Females are more fierce than the Males, and much stronger to bear burdens. Sometime they are taken with fury or madness, and testify the same by disordinate running here and there. One Elephant exceedeth the bigness of three Bufles, & not unlike of hear. They have eyes like swine, & the snout or trunk very long, wherewith they put meat and drink into their mouth: and therefore may it well be called the hand of the Elephant. 
The hand of the Elephant.  The mouth is under the throat, much like the mouth of a Sow, and the trunk is hollow, and can therewith hold fast sticks or slaves, and them rule as it were with a hand. I saw also the trunk of a tree overthrown by an Elephant, which xxiiii. men attempting, could not do. The two great teeth or tusks, 
The teeth of the Elephant is ivory.  are placed in the highest jaw. Each of their ears, are two handfuls big, whether the beast be of the bigger or less kind. The feet are like unto such round thick trenchers of wood as he commonly used. The foot containeth five hooves, in roundness like unto great Oysters. The tail is like to the tail of a Bufle, four handful long, and of thine hear. The Females are also bigger than the Males, they are of sundry bigness, 
The bigness of the Elephant  for some are of xiii handfuls high, and other of xiiii handfuls, and some also have been seen of sixtiene handfuls. They go slowly, and wallowing, and therefore some that have not been used to them, are moved to vomit even as it were on the sea. Yet is it a pleasure to ride on the young Elephants, because they go softly like ambeling Mules. When you mount on them, they stoop & bend their knees, that you may easily ascend. They are never bridled, neither use their keepers any halters to govern them.   

Of the engendering of Elephants, and of the magnificence & riches of the king of Narsinga. Cap. 10.  
WHen they engender, they resort to the meadows or woods, 
The natural shamefastness of Elephants  for by a certain natural shamefastness they do it not but in secret places: Although some Authors have written that Elephants engender backward. Some take it for a great present to give the king the member or pissell of an Elephant, 
The pissell of an Elephant.  which perhaps they do for the exceeding great price of Elephants: For some are sold there for five hundred pieces of gold, and some (as they say) for two thousand: which peradventure, is not for their greatnesses of body, but rather for certain properties, wit, & docility, wherein some far exceed other, even as among men. 

Men of less. understanding then Elephants.  
The riches of the king of Narsinga.   And I dare well say that I have seen some men much inferior to Elephants in wit and sense. Therefore the king of Narsinga, in riches and dominion, far exceedeth all kings that ever I have seen or heard of. The city in situation and fairness, representeth the city of Milane, except only that it is in a declining place, and less equal. Other kingdoms which are subject to this, lie round about it, as the kingdom of Ausonia & Venice lie about Milane. 
A great tribute by the day.  Their Bramini (so are the priests named) told me that the king receiveth daily of that city for tribute or revenue, the sum of twelve thousands of those pieces of gold which they call Pardios. He maintaineth an army of many thousands of men, for he liveth in continual war with his borderers. 
Idolaters.  He is an idolater, and honoureth the devil, even as doth the king of calicut. They that are of the richest sort, use a slender inward apparel or petticoat, not very long, and bind their heads with a philet or broad band, of sundry colours, after the manner of the mahometans. The common sort, cover only their privities, and are beside all naked. The king weareth a Cap of cloth of gold, of two handfuls long: when he goeth to war, he weareth a vesture of bombasine, 
A rich cloak.  and thereon a cloak adorned with plates of gold, having the borderer guard beset with all sorts of precious stones and jewels. 
The magnificence of the king of Narsinga.  His horse with the furniture, is esteemed to be worth as much as one of our cities, by reason of innumerable jewels of great price. When he goeth a hunting, three other kings bear him company, whose office is to be ever near him, and guide him. When he maketh any journey, or rideth abroad, he is accompanied with six thousand horsemen: And therefore it is manifest that not only for these things whereof we have spoken, but also for divers other of like magnificence, he is one of the greatest Kings in the world. 
Coin of gold and silver.  He coineth money and pieces of gold named Pardios. Also other silver money of less value, which they call Fano, containing the value of sixtiene of the smallest money of copper. Traveylers' may here go safely through all his dominions, 
Danger of Lions.  if they can avoid the danger of the Lions. Of their diet and order of living, I will speak more largely where occasion shall serve to write of calicut. 
The king of Narsinga, friend to the king of Portugal.  This king of Narsinga, is a great friend to the Christians, and is in great amity with the king of Portugal: and beside him, he knoweth none other Christian Prince: and therefore the Portugals are here friendly and honourably used. When I had remained in this city many days, I returned to the city of Canonor. And after I had remained there three days, I entered further into the land, 
The city of Trompata.  and came to a city named Trompata, about twelve miles from Canonor.  
The inhabitants are idolaters. It is near unto the sea, and therefore there are seen many merchants Mahometans. They live moderately, & have in manner none other riches than nuts of India, but there are very fair trees to make ships. There are in the city above fiftiene thousand Mahometans, 
Mahometans.  although the King be an idolater. Departing from hence, 
Pandara.  I came to the city of Pandara: 
Capagot.  and from thence passing by the city of Capagot, I came at the length to the famous city of calicut. 
calicut.  And to be brief, I have here overpassed to speak largely of many other people and kingdoms, as are these, Chianul, Dabul, Bathecalo, Onouè, Bangolor, Cavonor, Cuchin, Cacilon, and Calonue, which I have done, to the end that I may entreat more largely of calicut, as the chiefest, and as it were the head and metropolitan of all the cities of India. 
The king of calicut, a God on the earth.  For it is certain that the King of calicut in royal majesty exceedeth all the kings of the East, and is therefore in their language called Samory, that is to say, God on the earth.    


The fifth book of East India, and first of the famous city of calicut. Cap. 1.  
THe city of calicut, 
The city of calicut.  is situate upon the continent or firm land, and the sea beateth upon the houses of the city. There is no port: but on the South side about a mile from the city, is a river which runneth into the Ocean sea by a narrow mouth. This runneth by many branches into the plain fields, and is of the inhabitants by divers trenches dispersed to water the ground. It is not past the depth of three or four foot of water. The course of it bendeth toward the city, and runneth into it. The city is not compassed with walls, but containeth in circuit six thousand houses, not adherent or joining together after the manner of ours, 
Houses divided.  but by a certain space distant one from the other, either for fear of fire, or by ignorance of the builders. It is a mile of length. The houses are despicable, 
Very low houses.  as no higher from the ground than a man on horseback, and are for the most part covered with boughs of trees, in the steed of tiles or other covering. The cause whereof they say to be, that in digging the ground five or six handful depth, water immediately issueth forth. And therefore they can lay no deeper foundations to bear the weight of any greater buildings. The houses of merchandise, or warehouses, are sold for fifteen or twenty pieces of gold. 
Houses of small price.  But the common houses, are of no greater price than two pieces of gold at the most, and some for less.   

Of the king of calicut, and of their Idolatry. Cap. 2.  


Idolatry and serving of the devil.  
One God.   THe king of calicut and his people, are given to Idolatry and serving of the devil: yet deny they not but that there is one great God, maker of heaven and earth, and first and chief cause of all things: 
Pseudoplatonici.  But they add thereunto a fable, saying that God could take no pleasure of his principate or dominion, if he himself should take upon him the government of the world, and therefore that he gave the vicarage of that governance to the devil, 
The devil Prince of this world.  who (they say) was sent from heaven for that purpose, and to judge the world, rendering unto men well or evil, according to their deserving. This devil they name Deumo: But the great God himself, they call I amerani. 
Deumo, quasi  The king hath a Chapel in his Palace, where he honoureth this Deumo: 
Daemon. The Chapel of the devil.  the Chapel is open on every side the breadth of a vault of two paces, and is no higher from the ground than three paces. The entrance is by a door of wood, garnished with carved work, containing the divers monstrous forms and shapes of devils. In the midst of the Chapel, 
The devils chair of majesty. Difference between the Pope's crown and the devils. A well favoured Prince.  is a seat of majesty made of copper, with also a devil of copper sitting in it. This devil hath on his head a crown, after the manner of the bishop of Rome, but this hath overplus four horns, his mouth gaping, with four notable teeth, a deformed nose, louring and grim eyes, a threatening look, crooked hands like a flesh hook, and feet not much unlike the feet of a Cock: A monster doubtless horrible and fearful to behold. In every corner of the Chapel sit such devils of shining copper, as though they were of flaming fire, devouring souls miserably. These souls are about the bigness of half a finger, and some little bigger. 
The devils ordinary diet and dentie meat.  He putteth one soul in his mouth with the right hand, and with the left hand taketh an other from beneath. Every morning the priests (whom they call Bramini) wash the Idol with rose water, 
Bramini.  and perfume him with sweet savours, and lying prostrate on the ground, 
Brachmani.  pray unto him. They sacrifice unto him once a week. Their manner of sacrifice is this, 
The manner of sacrifice to the devil.  They have a little cubbarde like unto an Altar, three handfuls high, four handfuls broad, and five handfuls long: this cupboard they straw with all manner of flowers and sweet powders. Then having a great Chafingdyshe, or the like vessel of silver, full of burning coals, 
Gallus Esculapio.  they put the blood of the Cock thereon, and also cast thereon innumerable sweet savours: In the mean time also with sensors in their hands, they go round about the Altar, making perfume with frankincense, ringing a little silver bell all the while of the sacrifice. They kill the Cock with a silver knife, and the knife also being rayed with blood, they put often in the fire, that no part of the blood be lost. Sometime having the knife in their hand, they make certain strange gestures, much like to those which the master's offence use in giving or avoiding of strokes. They never cease putting to more coals and spices or perfumes, until all the blood of the Cock be burnt. The priest that offereth the blood of the Cock, 
A goodly priest the devils Chaplain.  hath his arms and feet garnished with silver plates and pendantes, in such sort, that while he moveth, they make a certain noise, much like unto sonnets or Hawks bells. He hath on his breast a certain boss, 
A counterfeete Aaron.  containing I know not what secret figure, which may seem to be the secret carat or sign of some mystery. The sacrifice being finished, he taketh both his hands full of wheat, 
Offering of wheat.  and goeth from the Altar backward like a Crevice, never moving his eyes from the Altar, until he come to a certain tree: where opening his hands, he casteth the wheat on the tree. Then holding his hands above his head, he returneth to the Altar, and taketh away all that is thereon.   

Of the manner which the king useth at his meat. Cap. 3.  
THe King doth not sit down to his meat, before four of the priests offer it to the devil, in this manner. Lifting their hands above their heads, with also many other fantastical gesticulations, and murmuring voices, they offer the meat to the devil, 
The devil is served before the King.  & spend long time in those ceremonies, to the end that the king should eat no meat that is not first offered to the devil. They offer the meat in a tray of wood, and therein lay it upon the broad leaves of a certain tree. His meat is Rise, and divers other things, as fruit, flesh, and fish. He sitteth on the ground without cloth or Carpet. The priests in the mean time stand round about him, 
Chaplains of honour.  but approacheth no nearer than four or five paces, observing diligently the kings words. When the king hath left eating, the priests carry away all that is left, 
I think the Priests take part with the Crows.  and in a certain place thereto appointed, offer it to certain Crows, which they keep for the same purpose: And therefore being used to be thus fed, gather together at a sign given them, and eat up the meat. These crows are therefore of them esteemed holy: 
Crows esteemed holy.  and therefore it is not lawful for any man to take them, or hurt them.   

Of the Priests of calicut, called Bramini▪ Cap. 4.  
THese Bramini, are in place with them, as are the chief priests or bishops with us. 
The priests ever provide for themselves.  Therefore when the king shall marry, he lieth not with his wife before she be deflowered by the Archbishop, yet taketh he not this upon him without reward: 
A goodly office for a bishop.  for the king giveth him for his labour fifty pieces of gold. Only the king of calicut keepeth this custom.   

Of the divers sorts of Idolaters in the city of calicut. Cap. 5.  
THe chiefest Idolaters, and of the greatest dignity, are the Bramini. They of the second order, are named Naeri: 
Priests and gentlemen.  And in the same place with them, as are with gentlemen, whose office is when they go abroad to bear swords, targets, bows, lances, and other weapons. The third order consisteth of mecanike or handy crafts men. In the fourth place, are victuallers, and such as make provision of fish and flesh. Next unto these, are they that gather Pepper, Wine, walnuts, and such other fruits and spices. The last and basest sort, (named Neravi) are they that sow and gather Rise. These, as the inferior tribe of men, 
Poor men have no souls  are in such subjection to the Bramini and Naeri, that in pain of death they may approach no nearer unto them then l paces. And therefore they lie lurking in certain shadows and dark places, and marshes, lest they should suddenly chance to meet with them. Wherefore when they come abroad, that they may be heard a far of, they cry with loud voice I wot near what, that they may be heard of the said Bramini and Naeri, least being suddenly betrapped, they should be put to death.   

Of the apparel of the king, queen, and Inhabitants of the city of calicut. And of their manner of feeding. Cap. 6.  
THe apparel of the king and queen, is little or nothing differing from the other Idolaters: 
They are not troubled with garderobes, or making them ready morning and evening.  among the which the mahometans (as strangers) are not to be accounted. They cover only their privy parts with bombasine cloth or silk, and are beside all naked, barefooted also, and beareheadded. But the mahometans wear single apparel, reaching only unto the navel. The women are appareled even as are the men, saving only that they let their hear grow very long. The king and nobility of the city, eat no flesh, except they first ask counsel of the Priests. But the common people may eat what flesh they will, except the flesh of kine. Been they of the basest sort, named Nirani and Poliar, may eat only fishes dried at the Sun.   

Of their custom after the death of the king. Cap. 7.  
AFter the death of the king, if he have any male children living, or brethren, or brother's children, they succeed not in the kingdom: For of ancient law and custom, the sceptre pertaineth to the kings sisters sons, 
The kings children succeed not to inherit the kingdom.  of which if there be none, it cometh to the next of the blood: And this, for none other cause (as they say) but that the priests have deflowered the queen. When the king goeth abroad or on hunting, 
What pains the priests take for their living, and what service they do the king.  the priests, be they never so young, keep the queen at home, and remain near about her: For there is nothing more acceptable to the king, then that the priests should so keep company with the queen. And therefore the king may well think that the children borne of her, are not to be numbered amongst his children, and therefore taketh the children of his sisters, to be nearest of his blood, and right inheritors to the crown. 
Bastordes.  When the king is dead, all his subjects, by cutting their beards and shaving their heads, testify how grievously they take his death. 
mourning for the death of the king.  Yet hearein they use not all one fashion, for some cut only part of the hear of their chin, and some part of the hear of their head, and other all: and so every man as he doth fantasy. During the time that they celebrate the funerals of the king, they that live by fishing, forbear fishing for the space of eight days. And when any of the kings wives die, they observe the like ceremonies as for the death of the king. 
Chastity and abstinence.  The king sometime, by a certain superstition, abstaineth from venery, or the company of women, for the space of a year: and likewise forbeareth to eat certain leaves, which they call Betolas, 
Meats that move to echerie.  being the leaves of Assyrian apples: which they use not only for delicates, but also because their property is to move men greatly to wanton lusts.  
For the same purpose also they eat a certain fruit, named Coffolo, somewhat like unto Dates.   

Of their changing of wives. Cap. 8.  
THe gentlemen & merchants, to show great courtesy and friendship one to the other, use sometime to change wives, 
Great friendship.  and therein use this manner of speech: My friend, we have now of long time lived together as faithful friends, and therefore for the last accomplyshement of our friendship, if it so please thee, let us change wives. Content saith the other, for I bear thee even as good will. The wives refuse not to agree to the condition herein also, to please their husbands. Then the one bringeth his wife to the other, saying: Woman, this man shall hereafter be thy husband. The other saith the like to his wife also. Thus all parts being agreed, they depart with friendly embracing: But the children remain with the first husband. These Idolatars have also divers other customs: For among some of them, one woman is married to seven husbands, of the which every of them hath his night by course appointed to lie with her: And when she hath brought forth a child, she may give it or father it to which of them she listeth: Who may in no case refuse it.   

The manner of feeding of the common people, of the Idolatars, and of their justice. Cap. 8.  

Diogenistae.  LYing along on the ground they eat their meat out of a traye of copper: For spoons, they use certain leaves of trees. Their meat commonly, is Rise, fish, spices, and fruits, of the commoner sort. The labouring men or ruder sort, eat so filthily, 
The punishment of murderers.  that putting their foul hands in the pot, they take out rise by handfuls, and so thrust it in their mouths. They use this kind of justice for homicide. Where any hath slain a man, he is thus punished.  
They have a kind of gallows made in manner of a double cross, where while the murderer is tied fast, one thrusteth a stake through his body, 
Beating.  where the poor wretch so hangeth until he be dead: But they that wound or hurt any man, redeem the fault for money paid to the king. They that are in debt, are thus enforced to pay the same. 
A strange manner to demand debt.  The creditor first demandeth his money: and if it be found that the debitour break promise, than he to whom the money is owing, goeth to one of the kings scriveners (which are said to be a hundred) and before him making dew proof of the debt, receiveth of him a green wand of a tree, with authority to prosecute his debitour until he have found him, where when he hath arrested him, with these words (go no further before thou pay me) thrice rehearsed, he saith furthermore thus: I charge thee by the head of Bramini, and by the head of the king, not to stir from this place before thou pay me. There is no shift but either to pay incontinent, or there to lose his life. But if he be found alone, 
Death for debt.  and escape after the said words, he is ever after adjudged a rebel, and therefore shall it be lawful for any man to kill him wheresoever he is found, within the kings dominions.   

Of the honouring of Idols. Cap. 9  
WHen they pray to their Idols, in the morning before the Sun rise, 
Outward cleanliness.  they resort to the pools or rivers to wash them: And so at their coming home to their houses (where they keep their Idols) they touch nothing before they pray to the Idols prostrate on the ground secretly: while they pray, they make certain devilish gesticulations like mad men, so marvelously defourming their faces, eyes, and mouths, that no man can behold it without horror: and thus continue their prayer a quarter of an hour. When the time of eating approacheth, they may not fall to their victuals, before some one of the gentlemen have dressed it, and set it in order. But this custom is observed only among the gentlemen, or noble men. The women have none other charge or care, 
〈…〉  then to dress and beautify themselves, for their husbands use not to have to do with them before they be curyously washed, and perfumed with sundry sweet savours. When the women go abroad, 
Cleanly women.  it is marvelous to behold how they are behanged with jewels and precious stones, on their ears, arms, and legs.   

Of their manner of war. Cap. 10.  
THey have in the city certain masters of fence, that teach them how to use the sword, the target, the lance, 
Masters of fence.  and such other weapons. When the king proceedeth to the wars, 
The kings army.  he is furnished with an army of a hundred thousand footmen, for of horsemen there is no use, but only Elephants: For the king himself rideth on an Elephant. They that are next to the king, wear about their heads, fyllettes or bands of silk, of crymisyn or scarlet colour. Their weapons are certain crooked swords, targets, lances, 

Their weapons.  
The kings ensign.   and bows. The kings ensign, is a certain thing made of bows of trees, implicate round like the covering of a tub, borne up on a reed. This is borne so that the shadow thereof may cover the king from the heat of the Sun: and is in their tongue, called Somler. When both the armies approach within three arrow shoot, the king sendeth his Braminos into the tents of his enemies, 
The priests▪ are harold. A challenge to cumbatte.  in manner of harold to challenge a hundred of them to come forth (if they dare) to combat against a hundred of his Naeres, which before we said to be his gentlemen and chief strength of his army: which message done, both sides prepare themselves to the battle, and in the midway, first a hundred fight with a hundred. The which if they should fight continually for the space of three days, would never strike with the point, but with the edge of the sword, and for the most part at the head, 
A great battle and little bloodshed.  and seldom at the legs. But when five or six are slain, incontinent the Bramini on both parts make an end of the fight: and by their commandment the retreat is sounded on both parts. Then again the Bramini (which are the chief priests as we have said) on both sides, speak unto the kings, and ask them if they will any more. And thus for the most part make they an end of the quarrel and battle, without great slaughter of men.  
The king sometimes rideth on an Elephant, and sometimes also is borne by his noble men, named Naeri. When he proceedeth, 
Minstrels.  there follow him a great multitude of mynstrels, making a great noise, with Tymberels, Tamberets, and such other instruments. The stipend of the Naeri is four Carlines▪ every month in peace, and two in time of war: these have their teeth very black, 
Black teeth.  by eating of a certain herb, which they much use. When any of these are slain, their bodies are burned, 
The dead gentlemen are burnt, but the poor men are buried.  with great pomp, and many superstitions, and also their ashes reserved: but the common sort are buried, in divers manners, for some are buried in their houses, some in their gardens, and other in fields, meadows, or woods. They coin money here, 
Coined money.  as in the city of Narsinga. When I was there, there was in the city merchants of almost all parts of the East, and especially a great number of Mahometans, 
merchants resort to calicut.  and many also of the region of Melacha, and Bangella: other also of Tarnassari, Pego, and Ciriomandel: some likewise of the Islands of Zeylan, and Sumatra, which is Taprobana: other of Cholon, Caicolon, and Bathecala: and almost innumerable other, of nations whose names are better known to us, as Persians, Arabians, Syrians, Turks, and Ethiopians, and also many of the kingdom of Narsinga, strangers of so many nations, were in the city of calicut while I remained there. Understand furthermore, that the idolaters use not to sail on the sea, but that is appointed to the mahometans, as meeter men for that purpose. And there is in the city of calicut more than fifteen thousand Mahometans, 
Mahometans of calicut.  which were borne in the same city.   

Of their Ships, and manner of sailing on the sea. Cap. 11.  
Their Ships are made no less than may suffice for the burden of four or five hundred Ton, 
Their ships.  & all open without any coverture. In the joints of their Ships they put no Low, but join the planks so artificially, that they hold out water very well: yet do they pitch the joints, and make them fast with nails of Iron. They do not forbear Tow for lack thereof, for they have great plenty of Hemp and Flax. They have planks or boards and posts of divers sorts, for they have as good wood and better than we. Their sails are of Bombasine cloth, and doubled in the neither part, whereby they gather more wind, and swell therewith, like a bag: and in this they pass us, using but only single sails. They use anchors of marble, of the length of eight spans, 
Ankers of marble, on every side two.  and on every side two: these they hang in the sea by double ropes, and beside these, have none other anchors. They have certain appointed times and seasons of sailing: for some times serve best for one coast, and some other, for other coasts and viages. The changes and also contrariety of times, is there greatly to be considered: 
Seasons of the year, contrary to ours.  for when with us all things for heat are almost scorched, then have they large shewres, as in the months of May, june, and july. Their ships are of divers quantities, as with us, and therefore also of divers names. They have one sort of vessels made of one whole piece of wood, like a trough, 
divers fashions of ships and other vessels.  veri long, sharp, and narrow: in these they use both sails and oars, and are therefore swifter then our Galleys or foists. The Pirates use these very much. The best of their ships are made in an Island named Porcai, not far from calicut.   

Of the Court or Palace of the king of calicut. Cap. 12.  
THe Palace of the king of calicut containeth no less than a mile in circuit, 
A goodly palace.  the wall is not high, the building is fair, with beams or posies well joining the frame, and curiously wrought and carved with the figures & shapes of devils on every side. Why the walls be no higher, 
Images of the devil to garnish the kings palace.  we have declared before, where we have spoken of the low building of the houses of the city: the cause whereof (as we have said) is the unstable ground, so full of water, that they can dig no depth to lay foundation to bear higher buildings. But what pearls and precious stones the king weareth upon him, can not be expressed for the greatness of the thing: 
The rich jewels which the king weareth.  for doubtless it exceedeth all estimation. Although at the time of my being there, he was not given to joyfulness, but lived in grief of mind, aswell for the wars which the king of Portugal made against him, 

The king of Portugals wars against the king of calicut.  
The french Pox among precious jewels.   as also that he was diseased with the French pox, which had now entered into his throat: nevertheless, his ears, arms, hands, legs, and feet, were so beautyfully and richly garnished with all sorts of jewels and precious stones, that it can not be spoken. His treasure is esteemed so unmeasurable, 
Unestimable treasure.  that it can not be contained in two wonderful great cellars or warehouses. This treasure consisteth of precious stones, plates of gold, and also so much coined gold as may suffice to lad a hundred M●les, as their Bramini report, to whom it is best known. They say also that this treasure was gathered and reserved by twelve kings which were before him, and that in his treasury is a coffer of three spans in length, and two in breadth, full of only precious stones, of price inestimable.   

Of the spices of calicut. Cap. 13.  

Pepper.  PEpper is gathered in the fields about the subarbes, and also in certain places within the city. The stalk of pepper is very weak, and like unto vines, which can not bear itself, 
The pepper tree.  without the help of a stake or prop, and is much like unto an ivy, and in like manner creepeth and embraceth such trees as are near unto it. This tree (or rather bush) is dispersed into sundry branches, of the length of two or three spans, and hath the leaves like unto the leaves of an Assyrian apple, but that these are somewhat thick and fatter. On every twig hang six clusters, 
Clusters of pepper.  no bigger than Dates, and like unto clusters of little grapes, and of the colour of unripe grapes, but grow thicker. They are gathered in the month of October, and November, inclining yet to green colour, and are so laid on mats, and set in the Sun to dry, where in the space of three days, they become black, as they are brought hither. The fruitfulness of these, proceedeth only of the simple goodness of the soil, without help of lopping or pruning. This region beareth also Gynger, 
Genger.  which is doubtless a root, and is sometime digged of the weight of xii ounces, it entereth no deeper into the ground than three or four handfuls. When they dig it out, they leave the knot or joint of the root in the pit, and cover it again with earth, as a seed for more against the next year. It is found in an equal soil, as are the Myrabolanes: yet is the earth where it groweth, of very red colour. The stalk, is much like the stalk of a young pear tree.   

Of the fruits of calicut. Cap. 14.  
IF I should describe all the sorts of strange fruits that are seen there, it would rather require a volume, 
Fruits unlike ours.  than a brief rehearsal of them particularly: For they have not only many greatly differing from ours in form, savour, and taste, but also those of the kind of such as we have, differ in manner no less. Whereby may the natural Philosopher consider how those things which are all of one kind, 
A philosophical consideration of the difference of things of one kind.  differ according unto the nature of the soil and divers situation under the heavens. By which natural cause, & alteration, some fruits and seeds, by transplanting into a better soil, become more perfect in their kind, as bigger, fairer, sweeter, and more fruitful: As also contrariwise, the contrary, by transplanting into a worse soil, or colder region: which diversity is seen, not only in plants and herbs, but also in beasts, and even in man kind. It is very strange to consider how diversly trees bear their fruits and seeds, as some in one part of the tree, and some in an other. There is in calicut a fruit which they name jaceros: the body of the tree, is of the bigness of a Pear tree: 
A great fruit growing out of the body of the tree.  the fruit is of the length of two handfuls and a half, & as big as the thigh of a man. The fruit groweth out of the body of the tree under the branches, and some even in the very midst of the tree, and other yet lower also. The colour is green, and in form, in manner like unto a Pine apple, but with less grains or knobs: when it is ripe, it becometh black. It is gathered in the month of December. 

Ripe fruits in December.  
A fruit of sundry tastes.   It hath the taste of a Pepon, and the savour somewhat like Castoreum. It seemeth in eating to give divers and sundry pleasant tastes: as sometime the taste of a peach, sometime of a Pomegranate, and leaveth at the end a taste so sweet, that you would think it to be new honey combs. Under the skin, it is like unto a peach. And within the body containeth an other frui, 
One fruit within an other  not much unlike soft chestnuts, and being roasted, hath the same taste, and is therefore certainly one of the goodliest fruits that I know. I will here, to be brief, omit to speak much of their Nuts, and walnuts, Almonds, Prunes, Peaches, Quinces, Gourds, Melons, and such other fruits known to us, and yet much more pleasant and fairer than are ours. There is one fruit worthy to be known, which they call Apolanda. The tree groweth to the height of a man, 
A tree with very broad leaves.  it beareth not past four or five leaves hanging by certain slips, every leaf is able well to cover a man from rain, and the heat of the sun: In the midst of the leaf, 
A very goodly fruit.  riseth a twyg or stalk, like the stalk of a bean, which bringeth out flowers and also fruits of a handful long, and of the bigness of a man's arm: these fruits are gathered unripe, 
Two hundred fruits on every slip.  because they become ripe in keeping. Every slip beareth about two hundred fruits, a thing certainly wherein is greatly seen the fruitfulness of nature. They touch one an other, and cluster together. They are of yellow colour, and have a very thine cod, and are in eating delicate and wholesome. There are three sorts of this kind of fruit, of the which one is of evil taste, and therefore not so much esteemed. It is yet more strange, 
A tree that never beareth fruit but once.  that this tree beareth fruit but once, yet when it dieth, there rise about the root thereof fifty or threescore young slips, which renew the life of their parent, that he die not without succession. The gardeners or graffers transplante these in other places, 
Fruits and flowers gathered at all times of the year.  for within the space of one year they bring forth fruit. They are gathered in great abundance almost all the whole year, and are therefore very good cheap, and of small price, as twenty for a penny. The same soil beareth likewise innumerable and most fair and sweet flowers all the year long, and especially Roses, both white, red, and yellow.   

Of a most fruitful tree of all the world. Cap. 15.  
THere is also an other tree, most worthy to be known, the which in fruitfulness, and sweetness of the fruit, passeth all the trees of the world. 
This tree in the west India, is called Coccus.  It beareth certain fruits like unto great Dates or Nuts, & generally bringeth forth ten commodities: For it beareth wood most apt to nourish fire, 
Ten commodities of one tree.  and Nuts very pleasant to be eaten, also cords or ropes which may well serve for sailors: Likewise very fine cloth, which when it is coloured, showeth like silk: The wood is the best that may be found to make coals, it yieldeth also wine and odoriferous water: Furthermore also, oil, and sugar. The boughs of the tree, are commodious to cover houses in place of tiles or thetche: for by reason of the closeness and fatness of the leaves, they keep out the rain very well. The fruit of this tree (as we have said) is in form like unto great Dates or Nuts. One tree beareth about two hundred of those fruits. 
Nux Indica.  Taking away the first rhyme, they put it in the fire, 
They are as big as a man's fynt, and some bigger.  where it burneth quickly and with great flame. The second fruit under the said first rhyme, is much like unto bombasine or silk, and is like unto flax when it is wrought. Of the flowers, they make a certain kind of cloth, not unlike silk. The tow or refuse of the first flax, they spin and make thereof a grosser cloth, and small ropes or cords: & of the smallest, wreathed together, they make greater ropes, which may serve for ships. That part of the Nut which is under the third rhyme, containeth also a substance apt to make coals. The last rhyme, includeth the substance or cornel of the Nut, very delicate to be eaten. This rhyme or bark, is of the thickness of a man's little finger. 
Very sweet and clear water within a Nut.  As the Nut groweth in bigness, so doth also the water contained therein. So that the Nut coming to his full ripenesss and bigness, the water occupieth the inner part: and sometime is found so much water in the Nut, that you may take out of every Nut two or three cups of water, very sweet to be droonke, and as clear as Rose water, of the which also b●ing thickened by seething, is made very fat oil. The Nut likewise itself, 
Oil made of water.  is of very pleasant taste. They suffer but one part of the tree to bring forth fruit: For on the other part or side, they cut and wound the tree in divers places every morning and evening, 
Wine of cut branches of a tree.  and power into the wounded places a certain liquor, which draweth out of the tree a ioise, which falleth into vessels placed to receive it, and so receive they every day and night in every vessel, a cup of most precious liquor, which sometimes also they seeth at the fire, putting ever more unto it, until it come to the strength of Aqua vitae, and troubleth the brain both in savour and drinking, as doth most strong wine. On an other branch of the same tree, they gather likewise sugar, but not very sweet. The tree beareth fruit continually: for there are seen on it both the old and dry fruits of the season paste, 
A tree that beareth fruit continually all the whole year.  & also green fruits of the new spring. It beareth not before the fifth year. These trees are found in the space or distance of about two hundred miles. They are so greatly esteemed, that in the midst of most cruelest wars, it is not lawful for any man to hurt them, even in the lands of their enemies. They live but to the age of xxv years. They prosper best in sandy ground, and are set or planted as are walnuts. This region hath also other fruits whereof they make good oil. 
Oil.    

How they sow Rise. Cap. 16.  

Ploughing of the ground.  THey till the ground and plough it with Oxen as we do: when the time approacheth to sow Rise, they testify the joyfulness of that day with all sorts of instruments, singing & dancing. And in the way of their good speed, that all things may prosper the better (as they believe) they disguise ten men in apparel, 
A dance of devils.  to the similitude of the three devils, and dance about them with all the noise of their instruments. 
Solem suum oriri facit super bonos et malos. etc.  And thus celebrating the festival day, they pray the devils good grace to send them plenty of Rise.   

How their Physicians visit sick folks. Cap. 17.  
WHen any merchant of the Idolaters is sore grieved with any disease, and in manner near unto death, then certain of them, which they take for physicians, called to visit the patiented in this extremity, come thither in the silence of the night, 
The devil a Physician.  appareled like the devil (as is aforesaid) carrying fire sticks in their mouths and hands. And there, with a mad cry and howling, and with the iangeling of certain instruments, maketh so horrible a noise in the ears of the sick man, that it were enough to make a whole man sick. 
Such a Physician such physic  And this is all the remedy and comfort which their Physicians bring to their sick men, which is none other, then in the article of death to present unto them the similitude of him whom they (worse than devils) honour for gods vicar: Either meaning perhaps by this means, to call again the sick man almost dead. 
A remedy 〈◊〉 surfeiting.  When the inhabitants have so ingorged themselves with to much meat, that they be sick in their stomach, they take the powder of the roots of ginger, and making it in form of a syrup, with putting some liquor unto it, drink it all up, and within three days recover their health.   

Of their exchangers, bankers, and Brokers. Cap. 18.  
THeir exchangers and bankers, have weights and balances so little, that the box, 
Fyne weights and balances.  with the weights and all that pertaineth thereto, passeth not the weight of an ounce, and are made so just, that the weight of a hear will cast them. When they will try true gold from false, or base from fine, they use the touch stone, as we do, but have this more than we: They have a ball composed (I know not whereof) and like unto wax, and when they have first rubbed the gold on the touch, they rub likewise the touch on the said ball, where then the spots of the gold remain, and thereby they know a more exact proof of the fineness or baseness of the gold. 
A strange experiment to know the fine gold from base.  When the said ball is full of gold, they melt it in the fire, & gather the gold which it had imbibed. These exchangers are but gross witted men, and ignorant of the art which they profess. In buying and selling of merchandise, they use this manner. They have a broker, whose help they use in these affairs. 
Proxeneta.  Therefore when the merchants come thither, than the broker, 
A superstitious manner of buying and selling.  having with him a veil or scarf, taketh the seller by the right hand, and covereth it with the vail. Then doth the merchant number on his fingers, from one unto a hundred thousand, privily & secretly, & then the seller also with like numbering of his fingers and joints, until he come to the number of the price of his merchandise. Then the broker goeth again to the buyer, and covering his hands with the veil in like manner, and numbering of his fingers, certifieth him how much the seller demandeth for his ware, than the buyer again, by feeling and numbering the broker's fingers, signifieth what he will give the seller for his merchandise. And thus the broker goeth to and fro, showing both their meaning with silence until they be agreed. They sell their cloth by measure: but their spices and jewels by weight.   

Of the inhabitants of Poliar and Hirava, and how they nourish their children. Cap. 19  
THe women wean their children when they come to the age of three months, and afterward nourish them with goats milk: 
Little pain or cost for nursing of children.  and when in the morning they have given them milk, they tumble them in the sands all foul & filthy, where they let them lie all the day, and are so scorched of the Sun, that far of they seem like Bufles Calves, I never saw more deformed or filthy creatures: at evening, their mothers give them milk again. By this kind of wild bringing up, they become men of marvelous dexterity in swiftness of running, 
Funambuli.  and other things of great agility, as to walk upon ropes, swimming, leaping, vaulting, and such like.   

Of four footed beasts, fowls, and birds of calicut. Cap. 20.  
THere are many beasts and kinds of birds, as Lions, wild Boars, Hearts, Hinds, Bufles, kine, Goats, and Elephants: yet not all engendered there, but brought thither partly from other places. 
popinjays or Parottes.  There are also parottes of sundry colours, as green, purple, & other mixed colours. There is such multitude of them, that there are men appointed to keep them from the Rise in the fields, as we use to keep Crows from the corn. 
A great noise of birds.  They are marvelous crying and chattering, and of small price, as one sold for two pennies, or half a sauce. There are many other birds much unlike to ours, which every morning and evening make so great a noise & sweet singing, that nothing can be more pleasant or delectable to hear, and therefore the inhabitants live in great pleasure, and in manner as it were in an earthly paradise, 
An earthly paradise. Continual spring, and temperate air.  in continual spring and flourishing of flowers, herbs, & trees, all the year long: beside also the goodly and wholesome temperateness of the air, being neither extreme hot nor cold, but in manner in temperature of continual spring tyme. That region hath also Monkeys, 
Monkeys do much hurt.  which are there of small price. These are very hurtful to husbandmen, and such as live by tillage of the ground: for they climb the trees of those goodly Indian Nuts & precious fruit, whereof we have spoken here before, of the which they make wine, which these beasts do spill, and cast down the vessels that are made fast there to receive the said liquor of wine.   

Of certain Serpents which are seen in calicut. Cap. 21.  
THere are certain Serpents, of such bigness, that they are equal to swine, their heads are much greater than the heads of Boars: they are four footed, 
Crocodiles without poison.  and of the length of four cubits, and are engendered in marshes. The inhabitants say that they are without poison, and do not otherwise hurt, then by biting. There are furthermore three kinds of Serpents: of the which, some are of so strong poison, that if they draw never so little blood, present death followeth, 
Three kinds of Serpents.  which thing chanced oftentimes whilst I was there Of these kinds of serpents, some are of the bigness of an Asp, & many much bigger. Of these there are a very great number. The cause whereof (they say) is this: That the king of calicut, 
Serpents superstitiously kept and nourished.  of a certain foolish superstition, maketh so great account of these Serpents, that he causeth little houses or cottages to be made for them, believing that they have virtue against over much rain & overflowing of rivers, and therefore if a man kill any of them, he is punished with death, as though he had killed a man: 
Death for killing a Serpent or a Cow.  and the like punishment is also for him that killeth a cow. They greatly esteem these Serpents, because (as they say) they came from heaven, and therefore they take them for heavenly spirits, which they affirm, for that only with touching, they bring present death. And this is the cause that there are many serpents, being thus permitted by the commandment of the king. These serpents know the Idolaters inhabitants from Mahometans or other strangers, 
Because they go naked.  and will sooner venture upon them. When I was there, I came into a house where eight men lay dead and greatly swollen, which the day before were killed by these serpents, yet do they esteem it for good luck, when going abroad, they meet with any of them. 
Superstition.    

Of the lights and Lamps which are seen in the Palace of the king of calicut. Cap. 22.  
IN the kings Court or Palace, are divers mansions, and very many chambers, and therefore in the evening when it waxeth dark, there are seen innumerable burning Lamps.  

Goodly candlesticks of laton.  In the hall of the palace, are seen ten or twelve candlesticks of laton, very fair, and of cunning workmanship, much like unto goodly fountains, and of the height of a man. In each of them are divers vessels, and in every vessel three candles light, of two spans length, 
Polyxines et Polychni.  and great plenty of oil. In the first vessel, are many Lamps made of cords of bombasine cotton. In the middle part, is seen a narrower vessel, also full of lamps and lights. In the lowest vessel also the like number of lights. But in an other vessel in the top of all the candlestick, 
Innumerable lights and Lamps.  are in manner innumerable lights, maintained with oil, and have matches of bombasine cotton. 
The devil serveth in the kings chamber.  At the angles or corners of these candelsticks, are the Images of devils, which also hold the lights that are in the kings presence. When any of the kings blood dieth, he sendeth for all the Bramini or priests of his realm, & command them to mourn for the space of a year. 
Mourning the space of a year.  At their coming, he banqueteth them three days together, and at their departing, giveth each of them five pieces of gold.   

Of the great multitude of Idolaters which resort to calicut, for pardon of their sins. Cap. 23.  

The Temple of sacrifice to Idols.  NOt far from the city of calicut, is a certain church or Temple, compassed about with water, like an Island, builded after an ancient fashion, having a double order of pillars, much like the Temple of saint john De font in the city of Rome. In the midst of the Temple, is an Altar of stone, where the people sacrifice to Idols. Between the pillars on high, is a Boat of the length of two paces, and full of oil. 
Trees behanged with Lamps.  Also round about the Temple, are many trees with an innumerable multitude of Lamps & lights hanging on them: The temple also itself, is as full of lights. The xxv day of December, resorteth thither an infinite multitude of people, from all parts, even for the distance of xu days journey, and especially of the priests, to whom pertaineth the order of sacrificeing: But they do not sacrifice unto their Idols before they wash themselves in the water which is about the Temple. 
Washing before sacrifice.  When the priests ascended to the place whereas is the boat filled with oil (as we have said) they sprinkle the people with the said oil, but anoint only their heads: Who being so anointed, 
Holy oil in the stead of holy water.  may then proceed to the sacrifice. On the one side of the altar, where they sacrifice, is seen a most horrible form of a devil, to whom the people, prostrate on the ground, pray unto, and then departed to their houses and countries. 
Sacrifice to the devil for forgiveness of sins.  By this means they believe that all their sins are quite forgiven them, and therefore for the space of three days, they live there in safeguard, as if it were in Sanctuary: and for that time, is it not lawful for any man to arrest or trouble an other for what so ever quarrel. 
Sanctuary. Large is the way that leadeth to perdition. etc.  Certainly I never saw in any place a greater multitude of people assembled, except in the city of Mecha.    

The sixth book containing the voyage of India.  

Of the Cities of Caicolon, and Colon. Cap. 1.  
MY faithful companion Cociazenor the Persian (of whom I have made mention here before) considering that by the means of wars and imminent dangers, there was now no place for merchandise, especially for that the Portugals had made sore wars and great slaughter in the city of calicut, 
The king of Portugals wars in the city of calicut.  by occasion that the inhabitants of the city had conspired with the mahometans for the murder of eight and forty Portugals (which was done at my being there) I thought it best in time to departed from thence. This fact so greatly moved the king of Portugal to revenge, that he hath since that time kept hostile wars against them, and greatly consumed them, and defaced their city. We therefore departing from thence by a very fair river, 
Caicolon.  came to a city named Caicolon, distaunte from the city of calicut fifty leagues: the inhabitants are idolaters. There is great abundance of merchandise, and great frequentation of merchants: the soil beareth plenty of the best kind of pepper. 
Pepper.  The king of the city is not very rich. In apparel and manners, they differ little from them of calicut. here we found certain merchants, 
Christians of the profession of saint Thomas.  Christians, named of the profession of saint Thomas the Apostle. They observe the fasting of forty days, as we do, and believe in the death and resurrection of Christ, as we do, and therefore celebrate Easter after our manner, and observe other solemnities of our religion, after the manner of the Greeks. They are commonly named by the names of john, james, Mathias, and Thomas. Departing from thence, in the space of three days journey we came to an other city, 
Colon.  named Colon, about twenty miles distant from the aforesaid. 
An army of twenty thousand horsemen.  The king is an idolater, and a prince of great power, having ever an army of twenty thousand horsemen: there is a very fair port. Near to the sea side the soil beareth no corn, yet great abundance of fruit and pepper, as in the city of calicut: but by reason of the wars we remained no longer here. Not far from hence, we saw men fish for pearls, in manner as we have said before of the city and Island of Ormus. 
Pearls.    

Of Cyromandel, a city of India. Cap. 2.  
THe city of Cyromandel is by the sea side, and distant from the city of Colon seven days sailing. The city is very large, but without walls: it is subject to the king of Narsinga, 
Zeilon.  and is within the sight of the Island of Zaylon. After that you are passed the point of Comerin, 
Comerin.  the soil beareth plenty of Rise. This city is in the way to divers great regions and cities: It is inhabited with innumerable Mahometan merchants, resorting thither from many countries. There are no spices, but abundance of fruit, as in calicut. I found there certain Christians, who affirm that the body of saint Thomas the Apostle is there in a certain place, about twelve miles from this city, 
The body of Thomas the Apostle.  and also that there are certain Christians which religiously observe the holy body: and that the Christians are evil used, because of the wars which the king of Portugal hath made against the people of these countries. 
The king of Narsinga friend to the portugals.  Also that the Christians are sometime murdered secretly, lest it should be known to the king of Narsinga, who is in amity and friendship with the king of Portugal, and greatly favoureth the Christians. The cause whereof (as they say) is also partly by reason of a certain miracle, which was this. 
A miracle at the sepulchre of S. Thomas.  The Christians on a time had a great conflict with the mahometans, where one of the Christians being sore wounded on his arm, resorted incontinent to the sepulchre of saint Thomas, where making his prayers, & touching the holy place, his arm was immediately healed. Whereupon (as they say) the king of Narsinga ever after greatly favoured the Christians. Here my companion sold much of his wares. But by reason of the wars between the kings of Narsinga and Ternaseri, we determined to departed from hence. And therefore sailing over a gulf of twenty leagues with great danger, we arrived at an Island named Zailon, very large, as containing in circuit a thousand miles.   

Of the Island of Zailon, and the precious stones found there. Cap. 3  
IN this Island are four kings of great dominion, by reason of the largeness of the Island. 
Four kings in one Island.  But because of the wars among them at my being there, I could not tarry long to have particular knowledge of the region and manners of the people. There are in the Island many Elephants. There is also a very long mountain, at the foot whereof, 
Elephants. Ruby stones,  are found many precious stones, named Piropis, commonly called Rubines, or Rubies. The merchants iewelers, come by them by this means.  
first, going to the king, they buy of him a certain measure of that ground where such stones are found, of the largeness of a cubit every way. The price of this, is five pieeces of gold: yet with such condition, that in digging the ground, there is ever one present for the king, to the end that if in digging be found any of those precious stones exceeding the weight of x. Caractes, 
Precious stones.  the same to be reserved for the king. And the rest that are found under that weight, to appertain to the merchant. Not far from the said mountain, are found divers other sorts of precious stones, as jasynthes, sapphires, Topases, and such like. Hard by the mountain, runneth a great river. The soil bringeth forth the sweetest fruits that ever I saw, especially cloves, and apples of Assiria, of exceeding sweetness, and all other, as in calicut.   

Of the tree of cinnamon in the Island of Zaylon. Cap. 4.  
THe tree of cinnamon is not much unlike a Bay tree, especially the leaves, it beareth berries as doth the Bay tree, but less, and white: It is doubtless therefore none other then the bark of a tree, and is gathered in this manner. 
How cinnamon is gathered.  Every third year they cut the branches of the tree. Of this, is great plenty in the said Island. When it is first gathered it is not yet so sweet, but a month after when it waxeth dry. A certain Mahometan merchant of the Island, told my companion, that there in the top of a high mountain is a certain den, whither the inhabitants of the country resort to pray, in memory of our first father Adam, who (they say) after he had sinned by breaking the commandment of God, 
A den where Adam lived in penance.  lived in that place in continual penitence. Which thing they affirm by this conjecture, that there is yet seen the print of the steps of his feet, of the length of almost two spans. The inhabitants are subject to the king of Narsinga, and pay him tribute. 
Temperate regions under the Equinoctial line.  The region is of temperate air, although it be situate in manner under the Equinoctial line. The people are of dark tawny colour. Their apparel, are certain single cloaks of bombasine cloth, which they wear, bearing ever the right arm out all naked, as is the manner of all the Indians. They are no warlike men, neither have they the use of Iron. Here my companion sold to the king much Saffran and corals. 
Saffran and Coral.    

Of Paleachet, a city of India. Cap. 5.  
Departing from the Island of Zailon, in three days sailing we came to a city named Paleachet, subject to the king of Narsinga. It is a famous mart of rich merchandise, and especially of jewels and precious stones, brought thither from Zailon and Pego. There is also great plenty of spices. There dwell in the city many Mahometan merchants, where we being received in one of their houses, told him from whence we came, and what merchandise we brought, as Saffran, and corals, whereof he was very glad. The city hath great scarceness of corn, but plenty of Rise: and in other fruitfulness of the soil and manner of the people, much like unto calicut. But because they were at dissension with the king of Tarnassari, and prepared wars against him, we departed from thence, and in xiii days sailing, arrived at the city of Tarnassari, a hundred miles distant.   

Of Tarnassari, a city of India. Cap. 6.  
THis city is not far from the sea, and situate on a meetly equal ground, well walled, having also a famous port, and a very fair river running on the North side of the city. The king is an idolater, and a prince of great power. He keepeth continual war with the kings of Narsinga and Bangella. He bringeth to the field a hundred Elephants, of the fairest and bigest that ever I saw. 
Elephants.  He hath an army of an hundred thousand pencionarie footmen, 
An army of a hundred thousende footmen.  & as many horsemen. Their weapons are swords, round targets, pelts, bows, darts, and javelins of great and long reeds. They are also armed with jacks made of bombasine cotton, wrought very hard, and closely couched. Their houses are walled, and continent in order as ours are. The region bringeth forth wheat, bombasine, silk, of sundry kinds of colours, Brasile, and sundry kinds of fruits, much like unto ours. Also apples of Assiria, Oranges, Lemons, Citrons, Gourds, Cucumbers. 
Fruits.  etc.   

Of the wild and tame beasts of the city of Tarnassary. Cap. 7.  
THis region bringeth forth many beasts both wild and tame. The tame beasts, are Oxen, kine, Sheep, Goats, Hogs, Hearts, and Hinds. The wild beasts, 
Wild beasts.  are Lions, Wolves, Cats of the mountain, and also Muskecattes. In the fields are many Peacocks, and those kind of Eagles which we call Falcons. 
Peacocks. Falcons. popinjays.  Popingays also or Parrottes, marvelous fair, of the which some are white, and other of seven colours. There is likewise great plenty of Hares, and Partridges, and divers other sorts of great birds living by pray, 
A great and fair foul.  much bigger than Eagles: for of the upper part of their becks, they make haf●es for swords. The beck is of yellow colour, distinct with crimson, very fair and beautiful to be seen. But the bird is black and purple, with certain white feathers intermyxt. There are also the bigest Hens and Cocks that ever I saw: 
Cock fighting.  and therefore th'inhabitants and mahometans which dwell there, take much pleasure in Cockefyght, and lay great wagers in that kind of sport. I have seen them fight for the space of six hours, and yet sometimes they kill one an other at the first stroke. There are certain Goats far exceeding ours in bigness, 
Fruitful Goats.  and much fairer: these are so fruitful, that at one birth they bring forth four young kids. There is so great abundance of beasts, that twelve weathers are sold for one piece of gold to the value of a crown or pistole●. There are also certain weathers or rams with horns like unto bucks horns, 
Rams with bucks horns.  and are much bigger and fiercer than ours.  
Their Buffles are not so fair as ours. The region hath also abundance of fish, very big and good, and of small price. These people eat all manner of beasts, except kine. They eat on the ground without carpet or other cloth: yet have they vessels of wood artificially made. Their drink is water and sugar: their beds are raised from the ground, after the manner of ours. Their couch is of bombasine cotton, and the coverings of silk. Their apparel, is a cloak or mantel of bombasine or silk, with one arm out, all bare. But some of the merchants, wear inner vestures or shirts of silk or bombasine cloth. They go all barefooted, except the priests, which wear on their heads certain rails or crests of two spans long, with a knot on the crown like unto an acorn, and sparkled with gold. They delight also in earrings: but wear neither rings nor bracelets. The colour of the inhabitants inclineth to white, for the temperature of the climate or air, is colder than at calicut. Their manner of tillage, and gathering of fruit, is like unto ours.   

Of the manner which the king of Tarnassarie useth, when he permitteth his wife to be deflowered of white men. Cap. 8.  
THis king useth not to give his wife to the priests to be deflowered, as doth the king of calicut, but committeth this fact to white men, as to the Christians or mahometans, for he will not suffer the Idolaters to do this. The inhabitants likewise have not to do carnally with their wives, before some white man, of what so ever nation, have first the breaking of them.   

The manner of burning dead bodies in the city of Tarnassary. Cap. 9  
WHen the king or any of the priests or gentlemen die, their bodies are burnt in a great fire made of a pile of wood: then all the while they sacrifice unto the devil. Their ashes are reserved in certain pots of the earth of Samos, and buried in their houses. They sacrifice in the shadows of trees as do they of calicut. Whilst the bodies are burning, they cast in the fire all manner of sweet savours, as Aloes, Myrrh, Frankincense, Storax, Sandals, Coral, and innumerable such other sweet gums, spices, and trees. These make the fire much greater, increasing the flame by reason of their gummositie: in the mean time also they never cease to make a great noise with Trumpets, Pipes, 
Canonizing of saints.  Drums, Tambarells, and such other instruments, not much unlike the ceremonies which in old time were used among the gentiles in canonizing their saints. Furthermore, during these funerals, there are xu or twenty disguised like devils, which continually walk round about the fire, with many strange gesticulations, after the manner of rejoicing. The wife also of the burned king or priest, standeth by the tire alone, without the company of any other woman, lamenting and beating her breast. These ceremonies are done the second watch of the night. Within fifteen days after, the wife biddeth to a banquet all her husbands kinsfolks, 
The wife burneth herself after the death of her husband.  and when they come at a day appointed, they go all to the place where her husband was burnt, and at the same hour of the night: then cometh forth the wife, garnished with all her jewels and best apparel, using therein the help of all her kinsfolks. In the same place is made a pit, no deeper then may serve to receive the woman: This pit, is set about with reeds, and the reeds are covered with a cloth of silk, that the pit may not be seen. In the mean time also a fire is made in the pit, with sundry sorts of sweet woods: & the wife, after that her gests have well banqueted, eateth very much of a certain meat which they call Betola, which troubleth her mind as though she were half mad or drunken. In the mean while, a great company of such their musicians as we have spoken of before, appareled like devils, 
Dancing devils.  with burning sticks in their mouths, dance first about the pit, and then make sacrifice to the great devil Deumo. The wife also in the mean season runneth up and down like a mad body, 
Sacrifice to the devil.  with countenances of dancing and rejoicing. Then turning her to them that are disguised like devils, she commendeth herself to their devout prayers, desiring them for her to make intercession to the great Deumo, that after this transitory life, it may please him to receive her into the company of his Angels. After the ceremonies are finished, she taketh her leave of all her kinsfolks, which stand round about her, and near unto the pit, 
The high way to hell.  then with sudden outrage and a loud cry lifting up her hands, she hurleth herself into the burning pit, which done, her kinsfolks, standing near unto the fire, cover her with little faggots of sweet wood, hurling also thereon much pitch, that the body may the sooner be consumed: and except the wife should do this after the death of her husband, 
Great respect of fame and honesty.  she should ever after be esteemed an evil woman, be hated of all men, and in fine, in danger to be slain both of her own kinsfolks and her husbands, and therefore she goeth to it the more willingly. The king himself is present at these pomps: which are not commonly used for all men, but only for the kings, priests, and noble men.   

Of the justice which the inhabitants of Tarnassari observe. Cap. 10.  
IF any kill a man, he is adjudged to death, as in the city of calicut. Of giving and receiving, justice is ministered, as proof may be made by writing or witness. 
Writing.  They write in parchment like unto ours, and not in barks of trees as do they of calicut. When they contend for any thing, they resort to the governor of the city, to whom the king hath given full authority of jurisdiction: and if any merchant stranger die there without children, he may make no inheritor, but all his goods is due to the king: when the king is dead, his children succeed in the kingdom. When the inhabitants die, their goods are equally divided among their children.   

How the mahometans are buried in the city of Tarnassari. Cap. 11.  
WHen any of the Mahometan merchants die, they are embalmed with many spices and sweet gums, and their bodies put in Coffins of wood: with chief regard that their heads lie toward the city of Mecha, 
Mecha.  which is from thence Northward.   

Of the divers sorts of their ships or other vessels. Cap. 12.  
THey have Brigantines' very shallow, and with flat bottoms, which draw but small depth of water. Some also use Foists, having two or double foreparts, and two Masts, and are open without any coverture. There is an other kind of ships of burden: Of the which, some bear the burden of a thousand tons. In these they carry Botes and other smaller vessels, to the city of Melacha, when they go for spices.   

Of Bangella, a great and rich city of India, and of the great power of the king. Cap. 13.  
IT is now time to speak further of our voyage, and of our proceeding therein. Therefore packing up our wares, and commiting us to the sea, we came in twelve days sailing to a city named Bangella, 
The city of Bangella.  distant from Tarnassari seven hundred miles. This city in fruitfulness and plentifulness of all things, may in manner contend with any city in the world. The kingdom and dominion of this city is exceeding large. The king hath an army of two hundred thousand footmen and horsemen Mahometans, 
An army of two hundred thousand men.  and is of so great power, that he keepeth sore wars with the king of Narsinga. The region is so plentiful in all things, that there lacketh nothing that may serve to the necessary uses or pleasures of men: for there are in manner all sorts of beasts, good and wholesome fruits, and plenty of corn: Spices also of all sorts. 
Spices and silk.  Likewise of bombasine and silk, so exceeding great abundance, that in these things, I think there is none other region comparable with this, and therefore here are very many rich merchants. 
rich merchants.  For every year depart from hence, fifty ships laden with cloth of bombasine and silk, into the cities and countries of Turchia, Syria, Arabia, Persia, Ethiopia, and India. There are also many merchant strangers, 
Precious stones.  which buy precious stones of the inhabitants.   

Of certain Christian merchants, which exercise merchandise there. Cap. 14.  
HEre we found many Christian merchants which were borne in the city of Sarnau, as they told us. 
Christians.  They resort thither, as to a great mart, with cloth of silk, 
Lignum Aloes.  and wood of Aloes, & Laser, 
Laserpitium.  which yieldeth the sweet gum named Laserpitium, commonly called Belzoi, 
Belzoi.  being a kind of myrrh. They bring also Castoreum, 
Castoreum.  and divers other sweet savours. The said Christians told us also, 
Christian Princes under the great Cham of Cathay.  that there be in that kingdom, many Christian Princes, subject to the great Cham, of the city of Cathai. The apparel of these Christians, was Chamlet, lose and very full of pleytes, and lined with bombasine cloth. On their heads they wear certain coppen or sharp pointed caps, of two handful high, of scarlet colour. They are white men. They acknowledge one God in Trinity, & are baptized after our manner. They believe the doctrine of the Apostles and Evangelists. They write backward, after the manner of the Armenians. They celebrate the birth and burial of Christ, and observe fasting the forty days of Lent as we do. They celebrate also certain saints days. They use no shoes, but wear lose hose of silk, garnished with divers jewels. On their fingers they wear Rings, with stones of incomparable splendour. At meat, they use no table, but eat lying on the ground, and feed of all sorts of flesh.  
They affirmed also, that there are certain Christian kings (which they call Rumi) of great power, 
Christian Princes near the Turks dominions.  confining or bordering on the dominions of the great Turk. When these Christians had seen the precious merchandise of my companion, and specially a great branch of Coral, 
Coral of great price.  they earnestly desired him, to go with them to a certain city, where they promised him that by their procurement he should sell his ware at great advantage, 
Rubies.  if he would buy Ruby stones, and that he might thereby easily get above ten thousand pieces of gold: Affirming that those kind of stones were of much greater value in Turkey. Whereunto my companion answered, that he would go with them if they would depart in short space. We will (said they) depart even to morrow: for here is a Foist which departeth hence to morrow, 
Pego.  and taketh her voyage to the city of Pego, whither we desire to bring you. My companion consented the rather to his request, because he was advertised that he should find there certain Persians, his country men. Therefore with this good company departing from the city of Bangella, and sailing over a great gulf lying on the South side, we came at the length to the city of Pego, a thousand miles distant from Bangella.   

Of Pego, a famous city of India. Cap. 15.  
THe city of Pego, is not far from the sea, and is situate upon the continent or firm land. A very fair river runneth by the city, by the which merchandise are carried to and fro. 
Idolaters.  The king of the city, is an Idolater. The inhabitants, in apparel, living, and manners, are like unto them of Tarnassari: but of whiter colour, as in a colder region, somewhat like unto ours. 
White men.  The city is walled, and the houses well builded, and very fair, of stone and lime. The king hath a mighty army both of footmen and horsemen, and hath in his army pensionary Christians, borne even in the same region. 
Christians.   
Their wages, is every month six of those pieces of gold which they call Pardaios, & is paid them out of the Kings treasury. They have abundance of corn and flesh, as in calicut. Here are but few Elephants, yet other beasts and fowls, as in calicut. Here are also trees for building, and to make ships, the fairest that ever I saw: Also exceeding great Reeds, 
Great Reed●●.  as big as the body of a gross man, or a tub. Here are likewise sivit Cats, or Musk Cats, and of small price, 
Musk catte●.  as three for one piece of gold. There are few merchandyes in this city, except precious stones, and specially Rubies: 
Precious stones and spices.  which nevertheless are brought thither from an other city named Capela, being toward the East thirty days journey, 
Capela.  where are also found precious stones named Smaragdes or Emeralds. 
Smaragdes or Emeralds.  When we arrived at Pego, the king was absent five & twenty days journey, in a place where he kept war against the king of Aua. But shortly after, he returned with great triumph for the victory which he had against his enemy.   

Of the munificence, humility, and great richesses of the King of Pego. Cap. 16.  
THis king useth not such pomps and magnificence as doth the king of calicut: But is of such humanity and affability, that a child may come to his presence and speak with him, being nevertheless very rich. It is in manner incredible to speak of the rich jewels, 
Great riches of jewels and precious stones  precious stones, pearls, and especially Rubies, which he weareth, surmounting in value any great city. His fingers be full of Rings, and his arms all full of bracelets of gold, all beset and most gloriously shining with such precious stones: His legs also and feet being garnished in like manner. His ears likewise are so laded with such jewels, that they hang down half a handful. The splendour or shining of these jewels is so great, that if one see the king in the dark night, 
A king shining with earthly stars.  he shineth in manner as it were the beams of the sun. At good opportunity the Christian merchants spoke to the king, and certified him that my companion had brought sundry merchandise of great estimation. The king answered, that they should come to him the day following, 
The king sacrifyceth to the devil.  because that, that present day, he should sacrifice to the devil. Therefore the next day he sent for us, willing that my companion should bring with him such merchandise as he had. The which the king took great pleasure to behold, and not without good cause: for among other things, there were two great branches of coral, 
Coral.  of such bigness and fairness, as no man there had ever seen the like. The king astonished at these things, asked the Christians what men we were. They answered that we were Persians. Then said the king to his interpreter, Ask them if they will here make sale of their merchandise. To whom then my companion said thus, Most honourable Prince, all these are yours, take them, and use them at your pleasure. Then said the king again, These two years paste I have kept continual war with the king of Ava, and therefore my treasure of money is consumed: But if you will bargain by the way of exchange, for precious stones, and especially Rubies, I will so deal with you, that it shall not repent you. Then said my companion to the Christians: I pray you give the king to understand, 
The king and the merchant contend of liberality.  that I desire none other thing than the benevolence of his highness, and therefore that I desire him to take of my merchandise what liketh him best, and that without money, or permutation of any other thing. When the king heard this, 
Commendation of the Persians.  he answered, that he had heard by report that the Persians were very courteous and liberal men, and that he never knew so liberal a man as this was, and swore by the head of the devil, that by this occasion he would prove which of them two should be most liberal, and therefore calling unto him a Page of his chamber, 
A casket full of Rubies.  commanded him to fetch a casket of precious stones. This casket was of the breadth of a span and a half, every way square, and full of Rubies: having also within it sundry receptacles or boxes, where the stones were sorted in order. When he had opened the casket, he commanded it to be set before the Persian, willing him to take of those precious stones as many as he would. But my companion the Persian, yet more moved to liberality by this the kings munificence, spoke to the king these words, O most honourable Prince, I perceive your benevolence to be such toward me, that I swear by the holy head of mohammed, and all the mysteries of his religion, whereunto I am professed, that I freely and gladly give unto you all my merchandise: For I do not travail about the world for gains of richesse, but rather of desire to see the world. In the which thereto, I never found any thing wherein I so greatly rejoiced, as in the benevolence and favour which your majesty hath showed me. The king answered, Wilt thou yet contend with me in liberality? And with those words, took out of the casket, (of every box some) as many Rubies as he could hold in his hand, & with this reward (which was two hundred Rubies) showed his kingly munificence and benevolence toward the Persian, saying unto him, Take these, I pray thee, for thou shalt not refuse them. He gave also to each of the Christians two Rubies, which were worth a thousand crowns to be sold: but those which he gave the Persian, were esteemed worth a hundred thousand crowns. 
A Princely gift.  This king therefore doubtless in munificence passeth all the kings of the world, and in manner no less in richesse: for he receiveth yearly of his subjects two hundred thousand pieces of gold. This region bringeth forth all sorts of colours, 
Colours.  and great plenty of bombasine and silk: but these great riches, the king consumeth on his soldiers. Not long after, news were brought that the king of Ava was coming with a mighty force, whom the king in manner with an innumerable army went to resist. Here also in certain places we saw women burned, aft●r the manner of Tarnassari.   

Of the city of Melacha, and the great river of Gaza. Cap. 17.  
WIthin two days after, taking ship, we sailed westward toward the city of Melacha, and arrived there in eight days sailing. Not far from this city, is a famous river named Gaza, the largest that ever I saw, containing xxv. miles in breadth. On the other side, is seen a very great Island, 
A river of xxv miles broad. The Island of Sumetra or Taprobana.  which they call Sumetra, and is of old writers named Traprobana. The inhabitants say that it containeth in circuit five hundred miles. When we came to the city of Melacha (which some call Melcha) we were incontinent commanded to come to the Soltan, being a Mahometan, and subject to the great Soltan of Chini, 
Chini or China.  and payeth him tribute. Of which tribute, they say the cause is, that more than fourscore years past, that city was builded by the king of Chini, for none other cause, then only for the commodity of the haven, being doubtless one of the fairest in that Ocean, and therefore it is likely that many ships should resort thither for merchandise. The region is not every where fruitful, yet hath it sufficient of wheat and flesh, and but little wood. They have plenty of fowls, as in calicut: but the Popingays are much fairer. There is also found Sandalum, 
popinjays. Sandalum, Tyn.  and Tin. Likewise Elephants, horses, sheep, kine, Pardalles, Bufles, Peacocks, and many other beasts, and fowls. They have but few fruits, and therefore there is no merchandise to be sold but spices and silk. 
Spices and silk.  The people are of blackish ash colour. Their apparel is like to the mahometans of the city Memphis, otherwise named Cayr, Alchayr, or Babylon of Nilus. They have very large foreheads, round eyes, and flat noses. It is dangerous there to go abroad in the night, the inhabitants are so given to murder and robbery, 
Unruly people.  for they kill one another like dogs, and therefore the merchants remain in their ships all the night. The people are fierce, of evil condition, and unruly, for they will obey to no governor, being altogether given to sedition and rebellion, 
Anarchia.  and therefore say unto their governors, that they will forsake the country, if they strive to bind them to order, which they say the more boldly, because they are near unto the sea, and may easily depart into other places. For these causes, we spent no long time here: but hiring a Brigantine, we sailed to the Island of Sumatra, where in few days sailing, we arrived at a city of the Island named Pyder, distant about fourscore miles from the continent or firm land.   

Of the Island of Sumatra, or Taprobana. Cap. 18.  
WE have said here before that the Island of Sumatra, containeth in circuit five hundred miles. 
The Island of Samatra or Samotra.  The city where we first arrived in the Island, is named Pider, having a very fair port. I believe verily this Island to be Taprobana, as also most authors do agree. It is governed by four kings, and all Idolaters, in fashions, apparel, and manner of living, 
Four kings in one Island.  not much differing from the king of Tarnassari. The women burn themselves after the death of their husbands, as do they of whom we have spoken before. They are of whityshe colour, 
Women burns themselves.  with large foreheads, round eyes, and of brasyll colour. They wear their hear long, and have very broad and flat noses, and are of despicable stature. justice is there well observed. Their money is of gold, silver, and tin. The gold coin, 
justice. Coined money of gold, silver, and tin. Elephants.  hath on the one side, the graven head of a devil: and on the other side, a waggon or charrette drawn with Elephants. The silver money hath the like coin: ten of these, are valued for one of gold. But of the tin coin xxv make the value of one of gold. Here are seen more Elephants, bigger, and fairer than in any other place that I have been. This people hath no experience of wars, but are given altogether to gains and merchandise. They are hospitable, and entertain strangers friendly.   

Of an other kind of Pepper. Also of silk, and the precious gum called Laserpitium, or Belzoe. Cap. 19  
IN the said Island is a kind of long Pepper in great abundance. Pepper in their language, is called Molaga, 
Long Pepper.  & is much longer & whiter then that which is brought hither: yet lighter & hotter: it is sold there not by weight, but by measure as wheat with us. It is there in so great abundance, that there is carried from hence yearly twenty ships laden with Pepper. This is carried to Cathay, and is there well sold, 
Cathay or Catai a cold region.  by reason of the coldness of the region. The tree that beareth this kind of pepper, hath a greater body, and larger and fatter leaves, than the pepper tree of calicut. 
Silk of the trees.  This Island beareth also plenty of silk, which for the most part, is made after our manner. There is an other sort, which the trees bring forth of themselves in the woods and fields, without menage or dressing: but this is worse than the other. Here also groweth the Laser tree, which bringeth forth the precious gum named Laserpitium or Belzoe, 
Laserpitium or Belzoe.  as the inhabitants and merchants told us: but because I have not seen it, I will speak no more of it.   

Of three sorts of the tree of Aloes. Cap. 20.  
FOrasmuch as variety delighteth, and the well disposed mind can never be satiate with contemplation of the marvelous and sundry works of God in nature, therefore that the reader may take the more pleasure, or at the least feel less tediousness in the reading of these things, I have thought good to write somewhat more of such things as I have seen. You shall therefore understand, that there is no great plenty of true Aloes or Laserpitium brought to us, 
Little true Aloes or Laserpitium.  because it is brought hither from the furthest parts of the world. understand furthermore, that there are three kinds or sorts of Aloes, greatly differing in goodness. The perfectest, they call Calampat, which the aforesaid Island bringeth not forth: But it is brought from the city of Sarnau, 
Sarnau.  not far from the place where the said Aloes Calampat is engendered, as the Christian merchants or companions told us. There is an other kind of Aloes, named juba (or Luba) brought hither by this river, I know not from whence. The third kind, is named Bochor. The said Christian merchants told us also, that none of the first and best kind of Aloes is brought unto us, because it cometh from the kingdoms of Cathay, Chini, Macym, Sarnau, and Gravay, countries much richer than ours, 
Cathay, and other rich countries.  having much greater abundance of gold, and kings of greater power and richesse than are ours: And also that the said kings take great pleasure in such kind of sweet savours, and use them much more than our princes do: So that by this means, the true kind of Aloes is worth even in the city of Sarnau, ten crowns the pound weight.   

How the gums of Aloes and Laserpitium, are proved. Cap. 21.  
WE came by certain experience to the knowledge of the two sweet gums of Aloes and Laserpitium, as we were taught by the said Christian merchants our companions: For one of them had a certain portion of them both, and had of that best sort of Aloes, named Calampat, about the quantity of two ounces: Of the which, my companion taking a piece in his hand, and holding it fast and close for the space that one may thrice say the Psalm of Miserere mei Deus, the Aloes thereby being heat, 
Aloes of very sweet savour.  at the opening of his hand gave a savour of incredible sweetness, and such as I never felt of any other thing. He took also of the common Laserpitium or Belzoe, the quantity of a walnut, 
The proof of Laserpitium.  and again half a pound of that which cometh from the city of Sarnau, to compare the one to the other: And so putting them both in sundry chafing dishes, with burning coals in a close chamber, that which was of the byggnesse of a walnut, in sweet savour far exceeded the other which was half a pound in weight, and would doubtless so have done though it had been of two pound weight. In this region is also found Lacca, or Lacta, wherewith is made a shining red colour. 
Lacca, merchants wax.  It is the gum of a tree, not much unlike our walnut tree. There are also sundry kinds of beasts, such as we have.   

Of divers merchants in the Island of Sumatra, or Taprobana. Cap. 22.  
IN the said city of Pyder, in the Island of Sumatra, I saw many curious works, very artificially wrought, as fine Cophines' or baskets, garnished with gold, sold for two crowns the piece: I saw also there in one street five hundred exchangers: there are so many bankers. Hither, as to a famous mart, resort innumerable merchants. The inhabitants wear Mantles of silk, and Syndone, made of Bombasine. The region hath plenty of wood, and trees, very commodious to make such ships as they call Gunchos, 
ships of a strange fashion.  having three masts, two fore parts, and also two sternes or governals on both sides. When they sail in the Ocean, and have now given wind to the sails, if afterward it shallbe needful to have more sails, not changing the first, they go backward without turning the ship, and using only one mast. 
Swymmers.  They are most expert swymmers, and have skill to make fire in an instant. Their houses are of stone, and very low. In the place of coverings or tiles, they use the skins or hides of a fish, 
Great hides of fishes.  called Tartaruca, found in that sea of India. I saw so hugeous a hide of this monster, that it weighed a hundred & three pounds. I saw there also great teeth of Elephants, 
Great teeth of Elephants. Great Serpents.  as one weighing three hundred & thirty pound weight. Likewise Serpents of incredible bigness, and much bigger than in calicut. Here our companions, the Christian merchants, for affairs they had to do other ways, would have taken their leave of us. Then my companion the Persian spoke unto them in this manner: Although (my friends) I am not your countryman (yet being all brethren, and the children of Adam) I take God to witness that I love you as if you were mine own brethren, begotten of the same parents: and therefore, considering how friendly we have kept company together so long time, I assure you I can not, without great grief of mind, bear your departing from us. And although you would departed from me, will you now forsake this my companion, a man of your faith and religion? Then said the Christians, How hath this man, being no Persian, received our faith? Then said my companion, Truly he is now a Persian, and was once bought at jerusalem. 
The name of Jerusalem in reverence.  When the Christians heard the holy name of jerusalem, they lifted up their hands to heaven, and prostrating themselves on the ground, kissed it thrice: then rising, they asked him of what age I was, when I was brought from jerusalem. Of the age of fifteen years said my companion. Then said they again, He may then remember his country. Then answered my companion, He doth remember it in deed, and I have taken great pleasure of such things as he hath told me of his country. Then said the merchants, Although of long time we have desired to return to our country, being more than three hundred miles hence, nevertheless at your request we will bear you company to the place whither you desire to go. Preparing therefore all things pertaining to the voyage, we took shipping, and in xu days sailing, came to an Island named Bandan.   

Of the Island of Bandan, where Nuttemegs and Mace are found. Cap. 23.  
IN this voyage to the Island of Bandan we found about twenty Islands, some inhabited, and some desert. This Island is very salvage, barren, and very low, 
Anarchia.  and containeth a hundred miles in circuit. It hath neither king nor governor, but is inhabited with a rascal and beastly kind of men, living without law, order, or government. They have low houses, 
Lawless people.  or rather cottages of wood, rising but little from the ground. Their apparel is only a shirt. They go bareheadded and barefooted, with their hear hanging down, and have broad and round forheaddes. They are of colour inclining to white, and of despicable stature. They are Idolaters, and worse than are the inhabitants of calicut, called Poliar, and Hyrana. They are also of dull wit and little strength, and in kind of living altogether beastly. The soil beareth no fruits, except only nutmegs: the body of the Nuttemegge tree, is like to the body of a peach tree, and hath like branches and leaves, 
Idolaters. The Nuttemegge tree. Mace.  but the leaves are somewhat narrower. Before these Nuts come to ripenesss, the Mace flourisheth like unto a red rose: but when the Nut waxeth ripe, the Mace closeth itself and embraceth the Nut and shell, and are so gathered together without order or distribution, by scambling, catch that catch may, 
All things common.  for that all things are there common. The tree yieldeth fruit of his own fruitfulness, without graffing or cutting, or any other art. These Nuts are sold by weight, 
nutmegs of small price.  and xxvi pound weight, is sold for the value of three souses (that is) half a Carline, of such money as is used in calicut. This people hath none other order of justice, 
The law of nature.  then by the law of nature, and therefore they live without such contentions as proceed of thine and mine. When we had been here three days, my companion asked the Christian merchants, where was the region which brought forth Cloves? They answered, That Cloves were found in an Island named Monoch, six days sailing from thence. Therefore proceeding on our voyage, we came thither in the space of seven days.   


These Islands of spices, are called Moluccdae, and in them is seen the rare bird named Manucodiata, or paradisea.  Of the Island of Monoch, where Cloves grow. Cap. 24.  
THis Island is very narrow, yet in length exceedeth the Island of Bandan. The inhabitants are much worse than they of Bandan: for, were it not only for man's shape, they should in manner differ nothing from beasts. Their colour is whiter, and the region colder. This Island bringeth forth Cloves, as do also many other little and desolate Islands lying about it. 
The Clove tree.  The body of this tree, is not much unlike the Box tree, and hath leaves like unto the Cinamome tree, but rounder, and almost like the bay leaf. When they wax ripe, the inhabitants beat them down with reeds, laying first mats under the trees. The ground is sandy, and the region so low under the Horizon, that the North star can not be seen there. They sell Cloves for the double price that Nutmegs are sold, 
Cloves dearer than Nutmegs.  & sell them by measure: for they are utterly without knowledge of weights.   

Of the Island of Bornei. Cap. 25.  
AS we were together talking of our voyages, the Christian merchants spoke unto me in this manner. Our dearly beloved friend, forasmuch as by the grace of God, we are come thus far in safety, if it please you, we will go see one of the fairest Islands in the world, and very rich, and such as I believe you never saw: 
The Island of Gyava.  but we must first go to an other Island named Bornei, for there shall we have bigger vessels: for we must needs pass a deep and rough sea. 
Bornei.  Then said my companion, Do as shall please you, for we are contented to go with you. Therefore hiring a greater Foist, we directed our journey to that Island both by day and night, sailing always southward: By the way we passed forth the time with pleasant talk. The merchant men asked me many things of the ceremonies and solemnities of the Christian religion used among us: 
Veronica or Vernacle.  And when I made mention of the Veronica (commonly called the Uernacle of the face of christ) and of the heads of Peter and Paul the chiefest of the Apostles, 
The heads of Peter and Paul.  and also of many other saints, they advertised me secretly, that if I would go with them, I should become a great man for the knowledge of such great things. But being deterred by the greatness of the journey, & fearing that then I should never have come home, I refused to go with them. At the length we came to the Island of Bornei, distant from Monoch about two hundred miles, and is somewhat bigger, 
The Island of Bornei. Idolaters.  but much lower beneath the Horizon or Equinoctial. The inhabitants are Idolaters, of sharp wit, and manner of living not greatly to be discommended. Their colour inclineth more to whiteness. They wear not all one manner of apparel, for some wear shirts of bombasine cloth, other mantels of chamlet, and other also sharp caps of red colour. They observe justice and good order. This Island yieldeth yearly great abundance of Camphora, which they said to be the gum of a tree: but I dare not affirm it, 
Camphora.  because I have not seen it. Here my companion hired a light ship or bark for a hundred pieces of gold.   

Of the observations used in the navigation to the Island of Giava. Cap. 26.  
AFter that we had made provision of victuals sufficient for the voyage, we directed our journey to the Island of Gyava, and came thither in the space of five days, sailing ever toward the south. Our Pilot used the mariners box or compass, with also the load stone and sea card, 
The north star.  after the manner of ours. Therefore when my companion saw that the Septentrions or north stars could not be seen there, he asked the Christians how they could sail on that sea without they guide of the north star? & asked also, by what other star they were guided? The Pilot answered, that the inhabitants of these regions observe principally five stars, 
The stars about the pole Antarctic.  and also one other star, opposite or directly contrary to the Septentrions or North stars, whereby they governed their viages in these regions: 
The load stone serveth in the south regions beyond the Equinoctial line.  and said, that he also used the load stone, because it ever moveth to the North: and said furthermore, that on the other side of that Island, is a certain people, which in sailing observe certain stars, contrary to the Septentrions, for that the said people are Antipodes to them of Europa Sarmatiae, and that they inhabit as cold a region and climate, 
Antipodes.  and as near unto the pole Antarctic, as is manifest by the shortness of the day, being but four hours long in their winter: of which talk we took great pleasure.   

Of the Island of Gyava, and the manners of the people. Cap. 27.  
Therefore proceeding on our journey five days sailing, we came to the said Island, being very great & large, and having in it many kingdoms, and kings, being all Idolaters, 
Idolaters.  and of divers manners of living: for some of them honour Idols, after the manner of calicut: some also honour the Son, and some the Moon: other take kine for their Idols: and some, the first thing that they meet in the morning, 
The Image of the devil.  take for the Idol of that day: other also honour the picture or similitude of the devil. This Island bringeth forth silk, which groweth of itself in the woods, 
Silk of trees, Smaragdes. Gold. Copper.  and also the fairest Smaragdes or Emeralds that are in the world: there is likewise plenty of Gold, and Copper. The soil is fruitful of Corn, and all sorts of fruits, as in the city of calicut. There is great abundance of flesh of all sorts, as with us. The inhabitants are faithful, 
white men good people.  and true dealing people: they are of the ●ame colour and stature that we be, but have larger foreheads, very great eyes, and of brasil or red colour, and flat noses, wearing their hear long. There is a great multitude of fowls and birds, 
Birds and fowls.  but unlike unto ours, except Peacocks, Turtle dove, and Crows. They greatly observe justice, and good order. For their apparel they use mantles, or cloaks, of Bombasine cloth, or silk, or Chamlet, ever wearing out one arm. They use no coats of fence, or armure, because they have no wars: but when they travail on the sea, they use bows, 
Empoisoned arrows.  and empoisoned arrows made of Reeds. They use also certain long and hollow staves (which we call Trunks) through the which after our manner, they blow little arrows, 
Trunks.  so infected with poison, that if they raise never so little blood, death followeth incontinent. They have no Guns or other engines. They eat all sorts of flesh, fish, and fruits: yet some feed of one kind of meat, and other of other, as them listeth.   

Of their cruel manners in selling their parents to the Anthropophagi to be eaten. Cap. 28. 
Anthropophagi eat man's flesh. In the West India, they are called Cannibals.   
THe inhabitants of the said Island (they I mean which feed of flesh) when they see their parents so feeble by age, that they serve for no use, but are tedious both to themselves and other, they bring them to the market or fair, and sell them to the Anthropophagi, which use to eat man's flesh. They that buy them, kill them out of hand & eat them. Likewise when any young person among them, falleth into any such sickness, 
A strange pity.  that by the judgement of their wise men he can not escape, to the end that he should not unprofitably linger in pains, his brethren and kyns folks sell him to the Anthropophagi. When my companion, being deterted with these cruel manners, showed in countenance that he detested this horrible inhumanity, a certain merchant of the inhabitants said thus unto him: O Persians, no sacrifice can redeem your sins, 
Rather to butchers than worms.  in that you give so fair flesh to the worms to be eaten. Therefore abhorring these beastly manners, we returned to our ship, not intending any longer to tarry there.   

Of the strange course of the sun in the Island of Gyava. Cap. 29.  
While we remained here, the Christian merchants, ever desirous to show us new and strange things, which we might declare at our return into our countries, said thus unto us, My friends, make report in your country of a strange thing which I will now show you. Behold (said they) the place of the Sun in the South at high noon, and thereby consider how far this region is from your country. We than beheld the Sun to run toward the right hand: and again, to show or mark a sphere, about two handfuls broad, toward the left hand, which doubtless seemed to us very strange. And this (as they say) is ever seen in the month of july. But I now scarcely bear this in mind, for I there forgot even the names of our months. But this is certain, that in this region, the times and seasons of the years are like unto ours, and of like temperature of heat and cold. Here my companion bought two fair Emeralds for a thousand pieces of gold, 
Emeralds of great price. Gelded children.  and also two gelded children for two hundred pieces of gold: for here are certain merchants that buy none other ware, than such gelded children.   

Of our return from the Island of Gyava. Cap. 30.  
AFter that we had remained here fifteen days, weary of the manners of the inhabitants, and of the coldness of the country that time of the year, we determined to proceed no further: for this cause also, that there remained in manner none other region worthy to be seen, and therefore hiring a light ship, we departed from thence, sailing Eastward for the space of fifteen days, and came at the length to the city of Melacha, where remaining three days, we took our leave of our companions the Christian merchants, with friendly embracings, and sorrowful minds. Which departure (I take God to witness) grieved me so sore, that if I had been a single man without wife and children, I would never have forsaken such friendly men. We therefore departed, and they remained there, saying that they would shortly return to the city of Sana: 
Sana.  and we taking a Foist, returned to the city of Cyromandel. 
Seven thousand Islands. Malacha or Melacha.  By the way, the governor of the ship told us, that about the Islands of Gyava and Taprobana, there are above seven thousand little Islands. When we arrived at Melacha▪ my companion bought as much spices, sweet savours, and silk, as cost him five thousand pieces of gold: But we came not to the city of Gyromandel in less space than fifteen days sailing. There we unladed our Foist, and after we had remained there twenty days, hiring an other Foist, we came at the length to the city of Colon, where we found xxii Christians, 
Colon. Portugals.  of the realm of Portugal. And fearing that they would take me for some espion, I began to imagine how I might departed from thence: But seeing that they were so few in number, I changed my purpose, especially for that there were many merchant Mahometans which knew that I had been at Mecha, to see the body of Mahumet. But within the space of twelve days, we came to calicut by the river.   

Again of the city of calicut after our return thither. Cap. 31.  
AFter so many long and dangerous peregrinations and viages, in the which we have been partly satisfied of our desire, and partly wearied by many such occasions of inconveniences as chance in the way (as they can well consider that have been used to such long journeys) we determined to proceed no further, but to think only of our safe return into our native country, and therefore I will briefly declare what chanced to me in the way: the rather that other men, taking example by my travails, may know the better how to govern themselves in the like, if like ardent affection shall move them to take such viages in hand, as I am sure noble spirits of many valiant men will move them thereto. Therefore entering into the city of calicut, 
Two Christians of Milan in calicut.  we found there two Christians, borne in the city of Milan, the one named john Maria, and the other Peter Antony. These were jewellers, and came from Portugal with the kings licence to buy precious stones. When I had found these men, I rejoiced more than I am able to express: for we went naked after the manner of the inhabitants. At our first meeting, seeing them to be white men, I asked them if they were Christians. They said, yea. Then said I, that I was also a Christian, by the grace of God. Then taking me by the hand, they brought me to their house, where for joy of our meeting, we could scarcely satisfy ourselves with tears, embrasynges, and kissing: for it seemed now to me a strange thing to hear men speak mine own language, or to speak it myself. Shortly after, I asked them if they were in favour with the king of calicut. We are (said they) in great favour with him, and very familiar. Then again I asked them what they were minded to do. We desire (said they) to return to our country, but we know not the means how. Then said I, Return the same way that you came. Nay (said they) that may not be: for we are fled from the Portugals, 
The Christians have made a rod for their own arse.  because we have made many pieces of great ordinance, and other Guns for the King of calicut, and therefore we have good cause to fear, and now especially, for that the navy of Portugal will shortly be here. 
The Navy of Portugal.  I answered, that if I might escape to the city of Canonor, I doubted not but that I would get their pardon of the governor of the Navy. There is small hope thereof (said they) we are so famous and well known to many other kings in the way which favour the Portugals, and lay wait to take us, for we have made more than four hundred Guns, little and great, and therefore we are out of all hope to escape that way. In which their talk, I perceived how fearful a thing is a guilty conscience, and called to remembrance the saying of the Poet.  
Multa malè timeo, quia feci multa proteruè. That is, I fear much evil, because I have done much evil. For they had not only made many such pieces of artillery for the infidels, to the great damage of Christians, and contempt of the holy name of Christ and his religion, but had also taught the idolaters both the making and use of them. And at my being there, I saw them give a model or mould to certain idolaters, whereby they might make brazen pieces, of such bigness, 
A great piece of ordinance.  that one may receive the charge of a hundred and five Tankardes (Cantaros) of powder.  
At the same time also, there was a jew, 
A jew that made Guns and ships, was drowned.  which had made a very fair Brigantine, and four great pieces of artillery of Iron. But god shortly after gave him his due reward: for when he went to wash him in the river, he was drowned. But to return to our said Christians. God is my witness how earnestly I persuaded them, never thereafter to make any more artillery or Guns, to the great contempt and indignation of God, and detriment of our holy faith. When I had said these words, the tears fell from the eyes of Peter Antony. 
Repentance.  But john Maria (who perhaps had not so great desire to return to his country) said that it was all one to him, to die there, or in the city of Rome: 
Predestination.  and that God knew what he had decreed of him. Within two days after, I returned to my companion, who marveled where I had been, fearing lest I had been either sick, or departed. I told him that I was all night in the Temple, lest he should suspect my great familiarity with the Christians.   

Of the coming of the Portugal ships, to the city of Canonor. Cap. 32.  
While I remained here in the lodging of my companion, there came to him two Persian merchants from the city of Canonor, saying that they had some evil news to tell him: wherewith seeming to be somewhat troubled, he asked what was the matter? There are come (said they) twelve ships of Portugal, which we have seen with our eyes. Then said he, What manner of men are those? They are (said the Persians) Christians, armed with harness of shining Iron, 
A fortress of the Portugals in the city of Canonor.  and have builded an inexpugnable fortress in the city of Canonor. My companion hearing those words, turned to me, and said, lodovic, what manner of men are the Portugals? To whom I answered, that they were a nation of mischievous people, given to none other thing than piracy and robbing on the sea. He was not so sorry to hear this, as I was glad of their coming.   

How I played the Physician, and counterfeit holiness, lest by my colour I should be taken for a spy for the Portugals, before I could come to their ships. Cap. 33.  

Hypocrisy.  AFter the rumour was spread of the Portugals arriving, I began to think what was best to be done, and thought nothing more safe and easy among this people, then to get some opinion of holiness by hypocrisy, and therefore all the day time, I lurked in the Temple, living without meat, as all the people thought: but in the night, I ate flesh in the house of Peter Antony, and john Maria. And by this means, none had other opinion of me, 
A Saint by hypocrisy.  but that I was a Saint, and therefore might after a few days go abroad in the city without suspicion: and to help the matter withal, it chanced in the mean time, that a certain rich Mahometan of the city of calicut was very sick▪ having his belly so bound, that he could not 〈…〉 of nature. And because he was a 〈…〉 my companion, and his disease 〈◊〉, he asked me if I had any skill in physic? I said, that my father was a Physician, and that I had learned many things of him by experience. Then I pray you (said he) do what you can to help this my friend. We went therefore together to the sick man, whom my companion asked where he felt himself most grieved. In my head (said he) and my stomach, having also my belly so sore bound, that I can not go to the stool. Then my companion again in his presence, desired me to consider his infirmity, and take upon me to minister unto him some medicine. My companion had told me before, that he was a great eater and drinker. Therefore, taking him by the hand, and feeling his pulse, I said that his stomach and bowels were full of choler, by reason of surfeiting, and therefore that it should be good for him to take a glister. Then said the sick man, Do what you will, I will abide your order. Then made I a glister of eggs, 
A glister.  salt, and sugar, adding also butter and certain herbs, such as came first to my memory upon the sudden, and in the space of a day and night, I gave him five glisters, but all in vain: for beside the pains which he endured, he was rather worse then better, insomuch that it repented me of mine enterprise: But it was now best to set a good face on the matter, and attempt an other way, 
A strange ministering of a glister.  but the last error was worse than the first. Yet still putting him in good hope, I used him thus. I made him lie grovelling on his belly, & then tying cords on his feet, I raised up the hinder parts of his body, so that he rested only upon his breast and hands, and as he lay, ministered a glister unto him, and let him so hang for the space of hallfe an hour. My companion beholding this strange kind of practice, said unto me, Lodovic, is this the manner of ministering to sick folks in your country? It is, said I, yet never but in case of extremity. Then smiling, he said, I believe it will heal him one way or an other. In the mean time the miserable man cried, saying in his language, It is enough, it is enough, for my soul now departeth. We comforted him, desiring him to have patience yet a while. In manner immediately after, his belly was loosed, and avoided matter as if it had been out of a gutter. 
More good hap then cunning.  Then when we had let down his body, he avoided as much as might almost fill a pail, and shortly after, the pain of his head and stomach, and also the fever, ceased: whereof we were all very glad. And by this adventurous cure, I began to be in great credit among them, by the means also of my counterfeit holiness, and therefore whereas he would have given me ten pieces of gold, I would take but only two, and gave them also incontinent to the poor. 
Sely souls.  These silly souls believed so much in my hypocrisy (which I showed no less in countenance and gravity, forbearing also openly to eat flesh) that well was he that might have me in his house, or kiss my hands and feet. The report also of my companion, affirming that he met with me first at Mecha, where I was to see the body of the holy Prophet Mahumet, increased greatly (and specially among the mahometans) the opinion they had conceived of my holiness. But in the mean time, secretly in the dark night, I resorted privily to the aforesaid Christians, by whom being advertised that twelve of the Portugal ships were now arrived at Canonor, I considered that now would be good opportunity to escape: And therefore remaining there yet seven days, I learned all that I could of the preparations which the king of calicut and his people made against the Portugals, both touching his army, artillery, and other things pertaining to the wars. But before I come to speak of my manner of departing, it will here not be from the purpose, to declare how the mahometans call the people to their churches, and of their manner of praying.   

How the Mahometan priests call the people to their Churches. Cap. 34.  
Their priests and other ministers of the Temple (of the which there is a great number) observe this manner to call the people to the church. Certain of these ascend to the highest Tower of the Temple, where first blowing three or four brazen Trumpets, 
Trumpets in the steed of bells.  in the steed of bells, they cry to the people with a loud voice, to resort to the Temple to prayers. Then stopping one ear with their finger, they say in their own language these words: Alla u eccubar. That is to say, God is great. 

Not all thac say, Lord, Lord. etc.  
Some of them say that he is risen.   And again, God is great: Come to the Temple of the great God, Come to pray to the great God: God is great, God is great, God was, God is, Mahumet the messenger of God shall rise. They invited me also to the Temple, and desired me to pray to God for the mahometans, which I did outwardly, but of much other meaning than they did.   

Of the manner of praying among the mahometans. Cap. 35.  
THey have certain daily and usual prayers, as we have, in the which they call God their father, 
God the father. The virgin Marie.  and vouchsafe to name the virgin Marie, full of grace. They pray not before they have been washed. Then standing in order, after the priest hath prayed, they pray also in their own language. Here to my companion, I feigned myself sick, & found divers other occasions to departed from thence, and to go to Canonor. Well said he, It shall not be long ere I come thither to you, & in the mean time, with my letters I will commend you there to a friend and country man of mine, a rich merchant, who for my sake shall give you good entertainment.   

What subtlety I used to departed from calicut, to go to the Portugals. Cap. 36.  
THe day before I departed from thence, I made the said Christians privy of my intent. In the mean time my companion joined me in company with two other Persian merchants, which were minded also to go to Canonor: 
Merchants of calicut.  for there was in the city of calicut many merchants of Persia, Syria, and Turchia. Therefore the first day of December, I, with the other two Persians, hiring a light ship, gave wind to our sails to proceed on our voyage. But see what chanced suddenly, we had scarcely sailed as far as a man may shoot an arrow, but four of the inhabitants of the order of them which they call Naeros (of whom we have spoken before) cried to the governor of the ship to draw near the land in the kings name. 
Noeros are gentlemen of the kings guard.  When they understood who we were, they asked why they carried me away without making the king privy thereto? Then said the Persians, This Mahometan that is here with us, is a holy man, and goeth in our company to the city of Canonor. They answered, that they knew me to be a man that had wrought miracles. Nevertheless, that because I could speak the language of the Portugals, it was to be suspected lest I should bewray their secrets to them, and tell them of the navy and army which the king prepared against the Portugals, and therefore commanded the governor of the ship to carry us no further. He obeyed their commandment, and left us on the shore. Then said one of the Persians, Let us return to calicut. To whom I answered, Take heed what you do, for so shall you be in danger to lose all your silks if it be known that you have paid no custom to the king. Then said the other Persian, What then (by your advise) is it best for us to do? I answered, that it was best for us to go somewhat further by the shore, until we might find some bark: whereunto they agreed. Therefore we, and our slaves laden with our fardels, went so xii miles along by the shore. But what fear I was in, in the mean season, I commit to wise men to judge. But as God would, we found there a poor fisher man with a boat, with whom we agreed to bring us to Canonor, where we arrived late in the evening. Incontinent we went to the merchant Persian, to whom I had letters of commendation from my companion. The tenor of the letters was, that he should receive me into his house, and entertain me friendly, until his coming: Also that whatsoever petition he showed unto me, he would ascribe it to be done unto himself: Furthermore, that I was a holy man, and joined with him in near amity and petition. When the merchant had red the letters, he laid his hand on his head, and said unto me, By this head you are welcome to me, and shall be here in safety, and caused a good supper to be prepared for us. After supper, the Persians said unto me, Let us go walk to the sea side. I agreed: and in short time we came to the place where the Portugals ships lay at anchor. I am not able to express the secret joy which I felt in myself at the sight of these ships. In the way, I marked well the place where the Portugals had builded their fortress, determining to come thither the next day.   

How I fled to the Portugals from the city of Canonor. Cap. 37.  
THe day following, when I saw best opportunity, I went toward the fortress of the Portugals: and by the way, meeting with two Portugals, in the Spanish tongue I asked them where was the fortress of the Portugals. Then said they to me, Art thou a Christian? I am (said I) by the grace of God. Then said they again, From whence comest thou? From the city of calicut said I. Then come with us (said they) for we will bring thee to the governor. This governor was one master Laurentius, son to the viceroy. So I went with them to the fortress, which is not past four furlongs from the city. At the time of our coming, the governor had not yet dined. 
The governor of Portugals fortress.  When I came to his presence, I fell down on my knees, and prayed him with all humility for Christ's sake, to whom I was consecrated by baptism, to have compassion upon me, and to deliver me from the hands of those infidel dogs. When it was now noised in the city that I was escaped to the Christians, there began a stir and mutiny, in manner of a tumult. Which when the governor understood, commanded all his Captains, soldiers, & other officers, to pla●● their artillery, & order all things in readiness, lest the 〈◊〉, sudden rage should attempt any thing against the 〈…〉 all things were pacified in short tyme. Then 〈…〉, taking me by the hand, brought me into 〈…〉, and there demanded of me, what the king 〈…〉 of calicut imagined or devised to do 〈…〉? I informed him of all things, as 〈…〉, having diligently searched to understand all 〈…〉. When the governor was thus by me 〈…〉 secrets, he appointed a galley to bring 〈…〉, who was then in the city of Cusin. The 〈…〉 the galley, was named johannes Seranus▪ When 〈…〉 saw me, he received me very favourably. I 〈…〉 also of all things: Saying furthermore unto him, 
The Viceroy of the king of Portugal in India.  〈◊〉 might by his favour obtain pardon and assurance for 〈◊〉 said two Italians, Peter Antony and john Maria, which 〈…〉 made artillery for the infidel princes, I would procure that they should return to the Christians, and do them right good service, and that I was well assured, that they did that by constraint: Also that they desired none other thing then safe conduct and money for their charges. He was glad of this, and granted my request. Whereupon within three days after, he sent me with letters to his son, the governor in the city of Canonor, with commandment to deliver me as much money as should suffice for the charges of the Christian exploratours or espions of the city of calicut. I went therefore incontinent to Canonor, where I agreed with one of the idolators (who for poverty had gauged his wife & children) to carry letters to calicut to john Maria and Peter Antony. The content of which letters was, that the viceroy had granted them pardon and safe conduct, and also money for their charges: Advertising them to make none privy of this thing, and especially to beware lest it should be known to their slaves or concubines (For each of them had a concubine, a child, 
Concubine's and slaves.  & a slave) Furthermore to leave all their goods behind them, except things of great price, as money & jewels: For they had a very fair Diamond of the weight of xxxii caractes, 
〈…〉  esteemed to be worth xxxv thousand crowns. They had also a pearl of the weight of xxiiii caractes. Furthermore, 〈◊〉 thousand rubies: of the which, some were of the weight 〈…〉, and some of one and a half. They had also lxiiii 〈…〉 garnished with many jewels: 
Beware of covetousness.  likewise in ready 〈…〉 and five hundred pieces of gold. But see 〈…〉 much covetousness. While they thought to have 〈…〉 all, and their lives therewith: For not contenting 〈…〉 with the aforesaid riches, they would needs also 〈…〉 (notwithstanding the advertisement we had given 〈…〉 Guns, three Munkeiss, two Muskecattes, and two of 〈…〉 wherewith precious stones are polished. All which 〈…〉 the only cause of their death; For whereas so many 〈…〉 not be secretly conveyed, one of their slaves 〈…〉 〈…〉 of calicut hereof, who at the first would scarcely 〈…〉 〈…〉 for the good opinion he had conceived of them: Yet sent four 〈◊〉 his guard (of them which are called Naery) to 〈…〉 true. But the slave, perceiving that the king would 〈◊〉 favourably with them, went to the high priest or Bishop of the faith of the mahometans (whom they call Cady) and told him all that before he had told the king of calicut: 
The Bishop of the mahometans.  Adding moreover, that the said Christians had disclosed their secrets to the Portugals. When the Bishop understood these things, he called a counsel of all the Mahometan merchants, willing them, 
The mahometans conspire the death of the Christians.  of the common treasury, to give a hundred pieces of gold to the king of Gioghi (who was then at calicut) and to speak to him in this manner. It is not unknown to you (most noble prince) how a few years past, when your majesty came hither, we received you with more honourable entertainment than we are now able to do: The cause whereof, is no lack of good will or knowledge of our devetie toward your highness, 
An Oration.  but rather the great and manifold injuries and oppressions which we have sustained, and do daily sustain by our mortal enemies the Christians, whereof we have, at this present, example of two Christian traitors of this city, which have disclosed to the Portugals all our secrets, and therefore we make most humble petition unto you to take of us a hundred pieces of gold, to command them to be slain. When the king of Gioghi heard these words, he consented to their petition, and forthwith appointed two hundred men to commit the murder: And that they might be the less suspected of the Christians, meaning suddenly to kill them in their house, came by ten and ten as though they came to demand their accustomed reward. But when the Christians saw so great a company assembled about their house, they suspected that they sought somewhat else then their reward or offering, and therefore incontinent taking their weapons, they fought so manfully at the windows and doors of their house, that they slew two men and woounded forty. But at the length, some of the Gioghi, shot at them certain iron arrows out of cross bows, with the which they were both slain, 
The death of john Maria and Peter antony.  the one being sore wounded in the head, & the other in the body. As soon as they saw them fall down, they cut their throats: and taking the hot blood in the palms of their hands, drunk it up, with contumelious words against the Christians. After this murder, the concubine of john Maria came to Canonor, with her young son, whom I bought of her for eight pieces of gold: and causing him to be baptized, named him Laurence, because it was saint Laurence day: But within a year after, 
The french pox.  he died of the french pox, which disease had then dispersed almost through all the world. For I have seen many infected with it four hundred miles beyond calicut. They call it Pua. And they affirm that this disease was never seen there past xvii. years before. It is there more grievous and outrageous then with us.   

Of the Navy of the city of calicut, and of the memorable conflict between the Christians and mahometans. In the which the Portugals with incredible valiantness gave their enemies the overthrow. And how the king of Canonor rejoiced at their victory. Cap. 38.  
IN the year of our Lord .1506. the fourth day of March, word was brought us of the death of the said Christians. 
The navy of the king of calicut against the Portugals.  The same day, from the cities of calicut, Pavan, Capagot, Pandaram, & Trompatam, departed a great navy of two hundred and eight ships, of the which fourscore and four were great ships, or ships of burden, and the rest were driven with Oars, 
The Mahometan soldiers.  after the manner of foists, which they call Parao. The Navy was manned with in manner innumerable Mahometans, showing themselves very brave in apparel of purple silk and Bombasine, with also their high and sharp caps, after their manner, of the same colour, lined with silk: wearing also on their arms many bracelets, and on their hands had gloves, embroidered & garnished with divers kinds of works: for weapons, they had Turkey bows, swords, lances, pelts, and all sorts of guns, after our manner. When we saw their Navy proceeding in order, and well instructed, it seemed far of like a wood, the masts presenting the similitude of trees: Which thing seemed so little to deter us, that we were in sure belief, that our God and Christ would give us the victory against the blasphemers of his holy name, the idolaters and Saracens, old enemies of our religion. And therefore the valiant knight and governor, the son of the honourable lord Don Francisco Dalmeda, viceroy of India, who had there the supreme government of twelve ships, with the assistance of the Admiral of the Navy, when he saw the great force of the enemy, mindful of his accustomed virtue, 
The oration of the governor to the Christian soldiers.  with sound of trumpet assembled all the soldiers, and spoke to them in this manner. My dear friends, and brethren in one God, and one faith of jesus Christ, now is the time come when you ought to remember, that as jesus Christ spared not, neither feared to give his precious body to death for our sakes: even so, except we will show ourselves most unkind, and unworthy so great grace of God, it shallbe our duties to spend our lives in the defence of his glory, and our holy faith, assuring ourselves of the victory against these dogs, hateful to God, & progeny of the devil. Now therefore fighting in his name, & under the banner of his holy cross, show yourselves manful & valiant: for now is in you the powwer to get eternal fame, in maintaining the quarrel of our saviour. Therefore with me, lifting up your hearts to God, & your arms with force & courage, let us give the onset on these dogs. When the governor had said these words, the priest went up to the highest part of the ship, & holding in his hand the picture of Christ nailed on the cross, showed it unto the soldiers, exhorting them to remember the commandments of God, and the holy faith and baptism whereby they were consecrated to God, putting no doubt in the forgiveness of their sins, dying in so godly a quarrel: and then blessing them, with invocation of the name of God, he pronounced the sentence of absolution and forgiveness of their sins. The exhortation of the priest, so moved the hearts of all men, that the tears ran from our eyes for joy & great desire we had to die in the quarrel. In the mean time the navy of the mahometans made sail toward us. 
The navy of the mahometans.  The same day our Admiral with two foists made toward them, & passing between two of their greatest ships, discharged his ordinance on both sides: which the admiral did, to prove the strength of those ships, which they chiefly esteem, 
The Admiral of the Christians.  and trust most unto: But this day was nothing done worth the memory. The day following, the mahometans with full sails drew near the city of Canonor, and sent us word by a messenger, that if we would permit them to go whither they would, they would not have to do with us. Our Admiral answered, that the Christians could not so forget the perjury of the mahometans, 
The quarrel and occasion of the war.  in violating their faith and promise made by common consent, when they would not suffer the Christians to pass that way, but contrary to their faith and promise slew xlvii Christians, and rob them of four thousand pieces of gold: and therefore bad them pass further if they durst, and they should well know of what reputation and spirit the Christians are. Then said the mahometans, Mahumet will defend us, and confound the Christians: and with those words, assaulted us all at once with incredible fury, 
The mahometans give the onset.  thinking to have passed through, having no further to sail then ten miles from the shore. But our Admiral of purpose suffered the enemies to come nearer until they were right overagainst the city of Canonor, meaning there to set on them with all his force, that the king of Canonor beholding the conflict, might be witness of the valiantness of the Christians. Then when the trumpeter of the Admiral's ship sounded the battle, and gave the sign, incontinent he assaulted two of their greatest ships.  
here I am not able to express the exceeding noise of their Drums, Trumpets, Tambarels, and other such innumerable, 
The valiantness of the Admiral.  which they use in this case. The Admiral himself, in manner contemning all their mean ships, passed through their navy, and invaded one of their greatest ships, casting thereon chains and grasples, to fight with them at hand strokes: but they cast of the chains thrice, yet the fourth time the chains took such hold, that the Christians entered into the ship, where they made such havoc and slaughter, that all the mahometans of that ship (which were six hundred in number) were slain, 
A great slaughter of the mahometans.  insomuch that there was not one left alive to tell news. The Admiral encouraged by this victory, invaded another of their great ships, which had chained itself with a Foist of the Christians, where was also a great conflict, in the which were slain above five hundred mahometans, and their ship sunk. The mahometans discouraged by this defeat, assaulted our twelve foists with all their force, and carried them away. But here the manhood and valiantness of john Seranus, the captain of the Galley, 
The valiantness of john Seranus.  showed itself, who only with one Galley made such a slaughter among the mahometans, that it may seem incredible: for he so fiercely invaded them that had carried away the foists, that he recovered them all, & sunk two other of the Mahometan ships. In these wars, God of his grace so prospered the Christians, that few of them were slain, but many wounded. 
Few Chrians slain.  The conflict continued from morning, until the darkness of the night made an end of the battle. I may not here forgeat to speak of the marvelous adventure and Godly zeal of Simon Martin, captain of one of our ships: For it so chanced, that the Brigantine in the which I was, departing somewhat from our navy, gave occasion to our enemies to pursue us, for incontinent four of the Mahometan ships assailed us, and put us to much trouble, insomuch that xu Mahometans had now entered into our Brigantine, and we were constrained to flee to the Poop, as to the safest place: But the valiant captain Simon Martin, seeing the danger that we were in, 
The valiantness of Simon Martin.  and that the mahometans were entered into our Brigantine, leapt into it fiercely, and calling upon the name of jesus Christ, fought so valiantly, that he slew six of the mahometans: whereby we, being encouraged, assisted him in such sort, that the mahometans cast themselves into the sea, where some were drowned, & some escaped by swimming. Therefore when the mahometans knew that the Christians had the victory, they sent four other Foists to help the first. But when the captain of our Brigantine saw this, he took certain empty tub, 
A Stratagem.  in the which gun powder had been kept before, and stopping them with flax, placed them in such sort, that they seemed far of, like pieces of great artillery: then laying a little gun powder by the flax, and holding a fire stick in his hand, as though he would put fire to the Gun, the mahometans thinking that it had been a gun in deed, were thereby put in such fear, that they departed. 
Ten Mahometan ships sunk with the shot of great artillery.  The Admiral yet further pursuing the enemies, gave them an other great overthrow, and took seven of their Foists, laden with all sorts of merchandise, and sunk ten other with the shot of great artillery, of the which one was laden with Elephants. Therefore when the mahometans saw the sea now almost covered with the bodies of their slain men, and their chief ships some taken, some sunk, & some spoiled, were out of all hope to recover, & therefore saved themselves by fleeing. 
The Christians had the victory  But the Christians, seeing yet hope of further victory, and the mahometans so discouraged, thought it not best to leave them so, but rather upon such prosperous success, to take the opportunity, and utterly to destroy them: & therefore the Admiral, seeing his men joyful of the victory, and desirous to pursue the enemy, followed the mahometans, and gave them a new battle, 
another great conflict.  which lasted all day and all night, whilst the Christians in the night time slew them even in their fleeing, & sunk almost all their ships. In the mean time certain of our Foists saw a ship of burden of the enemy, wandering out of the way, and made sail thither with all haste. 
The mahometans slain in swimming.  But the enemies in short space seeing themselves overmatched, hurled all their carriages into the sea, and trusting to swimming (wherein they are most expert) cast themselves after. But our men followed them even to the shore, with lances, crossbows, & stones, so killing them as they swam, that the sea was coloured and polluted with their blood. 
The mahometans expert in swimming.  Yet by swimming many escaped, by estimation about the number of two hundred, for they are in youth so brought up in swimming, that they swam in the sea almost twenty miles, oftentimes so diving under the water, and remaining there so long, that they deceived our sight: for sometimes we thought that they were sunk, and sometime again seeing them float on the water, it so troubled our sense, that we thought we had seen some fantasy or vision: but they were in manner all destroyed by one mischance or an other, and especially a great number in the great ships which were sunk by shot of the great artillery. The day following, the Admiral sent certain Brigantines and Galleys to the shore, to number the dead bodies, which the sea had cast up: they were found to be about three thousand, beside them also which the sea had devoured. 
The king of Canonor.  The king of Canonor, beholding all these things, was greatly in love with the Christians, and commended their valiantness and virtue, and not unworthily: 
The valiantness of the Portugals.  For to speak that I have seen, I have been in many sore wars, yet never saw I more valiant men, than the Portugals here showed themselves to be.  
But when we thought that we had now made an end of these Tragedies, 
The death of the king of Canonor.  we had in manner a worse to begin: For it so chanced, that in few days after, the king of Canonor, who favoured us, died: In whose place succeeded an other mortal enemy to the Christians, and friend to the king of calicut, by whose help and richesse, he was advanced to the kingdom of Canonor. He therefore assembled his power to make new war against the Christians, 
A new expedition against the Christians.  with great expedition and haste, because he supposed that a great part of their munitions was now wasted, and they also sore wearied, and for the most part wounded. And to further his attempt, the king of calicut sent him xxiiii. pieces of great artillery. This war began the seventh day of April, 
Long wars.  and continued until the twenty of August, before all things were pacified. It were here to long to declare how in these wars also the Christians behaved themselves manfully against the mahometans, 
Great odds. The mahometans artillery.  which never encountered with them fewer than five or six and twenty thousand in number, having also with them a hundred and forty pieces of artillery, and were armed after the manner of the inhabitants of calicut: but the Christians with harness after our manner.  
These Infidels use this order in their wars. They divide their army into many wings, 
The order of the mahometans Campe.  every wing containing the number of two or three thousand men, and only one wing proceedeth to the battle, the rest attending what end or success they have, before they attempt any further. But whilst these wings are now marching to join in battle, it passeth all imagination to think, with how great a noise of innumeral musical instruments, after their manner, 
Instruments.  they fill the ears of all the army, to encourage them to fight, while in the mean season also, a great number runneth before the army with marvelous flames of artificial fires: and in fine, give the onset with such outrageous fury and outcry, 
Outrageous out cry.  that two thousand of them were able to fear ten thousand that had no experience of these things. But see the goodness of God, who never forsaketh them that believe faithfully in his holy religion. Even now in the extremity of these troubles, our men being in manner overcharged with the multitude of their enemies, and long wars, 
The arriving of a new Navy of Portugals.  sudden news was brought that a new navy of Portugals was arrived at Canonor by the conduct of the valiant knight Don Tristan dè Cugna: Whom we immediately advertised with how grievous wars we were oppressed. Who incontinent sent us, in certain Barks, three hundred valiant Soldiers, well armed with harness, after the manner of the Christians. When we saw these, we recovered our spirits, in such sort, that if our Admiral would have permitted, we would have burnt the city of Canonor. 
The mahometans seek to make peace with the Christians.  But when the mahometans understood the new succours that we had, all discouraged in mind, they sought all means to make peace with the Christians, and assigned one named Mamalmaricar, a man of great riches and wisdom among them, to be intermediatour, and to make the conditions of peace. He therefore under safe conduct, came to us to common of the matter. We told him, that we could make no peace without the consent of the viceroy, who was then in the city of Cucin. The Admiral thought it best not to contemn the conditions of peace, for for that during the time of the wars, they could not send their ships laden with merchandise into Portugal, and therefore by the consent of the viceroy, 
The peace concluded.  the peace was concluded.  
But now, to mingle some delight with these sorrows, you shall hear a pleasant fable worthy to be put in memory. 
A pleasant fable.  Therefore all things being pacified, as I walked in the city of Canonor, I met with certain merchants idolaters, with whom I was acquainted before the wars, who in their language said thus unto me, Are you our friend? Yea said I. Then we pray you in the way of friendship, 
Saint Christopher, the Christian Giant.  show us that Christian which is much higher and stronger than any other of the Christians, and killed in manner every day about twenty of the mahometans, and resisted the darts of fifty Naeroes (these are of the guard) and escaped without hurt? I answered, that that Christian was not now in the city, but was gone to Cucin to the viceroy. But when I better considered the matter, I said thus unto them, Are you my friends? Yea, we are, said they. Then said I, That soldier that fought so valiantly in the battle, was no Portugal. Then said they: Of what country was he then? I answered again, that he was the God of the Portugals, and the great God of all the world. Then said they, verily you speak the truth. For we heard the mahometans say, 
The enemies confess that God gave the victory.  that it was not the Portugals, but the Portugals God, that gave them the overthrow, and therefore we think your God to be better than theirs, although we know him not: And by this means it was brui●ed over all the country, that the mahometans were overcome rather by the assistance of God, then by the strength of men. For these people are very simple and ignorant, 
Simple and ignorant people.  and astonished in manner at every thing. For some when they saw one of our company having a little bell in his hand, and heard the noise of the bell when he moved his hand, and no noise when he set it down, they took it for a miracle, saying one to an other: doubtless their God is the greatest God, 
Messis multa, sed operarii pauci. etc.  for when they touch the bell, it speaketh, and when they touch it not, it sayeth nothing. They took pleasure and admiration to behold the solemnities of the Mass. 
The Mass.   
And when the priest lifted up the holy bread or host, I said unto them, behold here the God of the Portugals, and of all the world. Then said they, You say truly: but we can not perceive it. This have I said, 
No more can wiser men than they.  that you may hereby know what simple and ignorant people these are: yet are they very great enchanters, and can inchaunte Serpents, whose poison is so strong, that they kill only with touching. 
Enchanters, and of great agility.  They are also of incredible agility, and therefore excel in vaulting, leaping, running, swimming, tumbling, walking on ropes, and such other exercises of lightness and agility.    


The seventh book, entreating of the voyage or Navigation of Ethiopia. Cap. 1.  
THey that will take upon them to write any history, had need to bear well in memory what they have promised and taken in hand, lest for their pains and well meaning, they be reward with shame and rebuke, and therefore whereas in the beginning of this book, I promised to write of the Navigation of Ethiope, I will with the description of this voyage, make an end of my long travail, and speak of such things as I saw there by the way, in my return from India into my long desired country, in the company of the Portugals.   

Of divers and many Islands of Ethiope. Cap. 2.  
THerefore the seventh day of December, we directed our journey toward Ethiope, traversing first the great gulf, and sailing four hundred miles, came to an Island named Monzambrich, 
The Island of Monzambrich.  under the dominion of the king of Portugal. But before we arrived there, we saw by the way many towns pertaining to the Portugals, and also many strong fortresses in the kingdoms of Melinda and Mombaza. 
Melinda.  The king of Portugal, 
The king of Portugals dominion in Ethiopia.  hath also certain fortresses in Monzambrich and Zaphala.  
But if I should here speak of the memorable facts of the valiant knight Tristan dè Cugna, 
The conquests of Tristan dè Cugna.  at his return from India, I should take in hand a thing far above my reach: being such, as deserve rather the commendations of Homer & Virgil, for he invaded and subdued the great cities of Gogia, Pati, and Crava, with also the goodly Island of Sacutara, 
Sacutara.  where the king of Portugal hath erected certain fortresses, and omit also to speak of many other Islands which we saw in the way: as the Island of Cumeris, 
Cumeris.  and six other which bear plenty of ginger, sugar, & divers other goodly fruits, and abundance of flesh: also the most fruitful Island of pend, 
Pendè.  likewise subject to the king of Portugal.   

Of the Island of Monzambrich, and the inhabitants thereof. Cap. 3.  
THis Island (as we have said) is subject to the king of Portugal, 
Zaphala.  as is also Zaphala. From the Island of Monzambrich, 
Gold.  is brought much gold and oil, but is brought thither from the firm land. The Island is not big, and is inhabited with black Mahometans, 
Black Mahometans.  living in manner in necessity of all things, yet hath it a commodious port. They have no corn but that is brought from the continent, where also we went aland to see the country, where we saw nothing but a vagabond and rascal kind of black men, 
Trogloditae. Ethiopes.  covering only their privities with leaves of trees, and are beside naked, and the women in like manner. Their lips are two fingers thick, their foreheads very large, their teeth great, and as white as snow. They are fearful at the sight of every thing, and especially when they see armed men. Therefore seeing their fearfulness, & knowing them to be without weapons that can do any great hurt, only six of us well armed▪ bearing also with us Hargabuses, and having in our company a black slave that somewhat knew the country, we began to enter further into the land: and when we had gone forward one days journey, we found many herds of Elephants. Here the slave that was our guide, 
Herds of Elephants. Elephants are afraid of fire.  gave us counsel to take firebrands in our hands, because these beasts fear fire above all things. But we once chanced to find three Female Elephants, which had very lately brought forth their Calves, and therefore feared not the fire: but without all fear, followed us so far, that we were fain to flee to a mountain to save us from the beasts. When we had entered about ten miles into the land, we found a certain den on the side of a mountain, where some of the black inhabitants lurked. These spoke so confoundedly and chatteringly like Apes, 
An Apyshe language.  that I am not able to express their manner of speech: Yet to go the nearest thereto that I can, their speech is likest to the evil favoured voice which the Muleteers of Sicilia use when they drive their Mules: and such manner of blabbering use these people in their speech. here the Pilot of the ship asked us if we would buy any kine, saying, that here we should have them good cheap. But we, thinking that either he had mocked us, or that agreeing with the inhabitants (whom he knew before) he would have deceived us of our money and wares, said that we had no money. Then said he unto us, These people desire nothing less than money, having much more plenty of gold than we have, which is found not far hence. Then said we to him, What desire they then? They love (said he) despicable things, 
Rich merchandise for gold.  and of small value: as pins, knives, sysers, looking Glasses, Hawks bells, bags, or boxes, to keep their gold in, copper rings, iangelinges to hang at their Tymberelles, bosses, laces, broochs, copper chains, carkenettes, bracelets, and such other trifles to trim their wives and children. We answered, that we were content to give them such wares for their kine, if they would bring them to the next mountain. Then said our Pilot again, They will bring them with us to the mountain: but no further in any condition: Therefore speak what you will give. Then one of our companions said, that he had a boss of graven copper, and also a little bell. But I, because I had no such merchandise, yet being desirous to eat flesh, said that I would sell one of my shirts for kine. Then said the Pilot, Let me alone with the matter. Then calling unto him five or six of the Inhabitants, he showed them our goodly jewels, and demanded for them three hundred kine.  
But the inhabitants, not much differing from beasts, made signs that they would give only fifteen. 
kine very good cheap.  In fine, we agreed, yet suspecting some deceit, nevertheless they kept their promise, and sent us fifteen kine by two of their companions. We were scarcely departed, but we heard a noise and tumult in their dens, 
Trogloditae.  and were partly afraid lest these Troglodytes would follow us, and therefore leaving our kine, we took us to our weapons. But they made signs unto us to fear nothing. Then our pilot told us, that their tumult was only which of them should have the boss of copper Then recovering our kine, we drove them forward to the top of the mountain, and there dismissed the two black slaves that came with them. While we were thus driving our kine by the side of a little wood, we met again with the Elephants, whereof being in great fear, we forsook our kine, and trusted to our feet. Therefore departing from hence, we returned to the Island, where making provision for our viage, we sailed toward the Cape, 
Cabo dè Buena Speranza. The Island of Saint Laurence or Madagascar.  called Caput Bonae Spei, passing the Island of Saint Laurence (otherwise named Madagascar) being fourscore leagues distant from the nearest continent or firm land. I suppose that in short time the king of Portugal will be Lord of this Island: For having now burned and destroyed many villages and towns of the Island, his name is fearful among them. And as far as I can conjecture by my peregrinations of the world (especially of India and Ethiopia) I think that the king of Portugal, 
The king of Portugal.  if he continue as he hath begun, is like to be the richest king in the world, and doubtless not unworthily for the dignity and godly zeal of so noble a prince, 
The Christian religion spreadeth in India.  as by whose means the Christian faith is daily greatly increased. For it is certain that in India, and especially in the city of Cucin, where the viceroy remaineth, every holy day, ten or twelve Idolaters or mahometans are professed to our religion, whereby we may conceive good hope, that in time our faith shall there be greatly enlarged by the grace of God, who hath there given such supernatural victories to the Christians, and therefore all professers of Christ's holy name, aught to pray to almighty God to assist him in so godly an enterprise.   

Of the Cape called Caput Boneae Spei. That is, the Cape of good hope. Cap. 4.  
Departing from the Cape named Caput Bonae Spei, when we had now sailed about two hundred miles, 
Tempest.  there rose suddenly a tempest with contrary wind. The cause whereof was, that we had on the left hand the Island of Saint Laurence, and many other little Islands, from whence bloweth for the most part a great gale of wind. And therefore for the space of seven days, being here dangerously tossed to and fro by the rages of the sea and wind, at the length we escaped, by the grace of God. But proceeding about two hundred leagues, a new tempest rising so scattered our ships in the space of six days, that we met not together again until we arrived at Luxburne in Portugal. I was in the ship of Barthelmewe, a Florentine, citizen of Luxburne. The ship was named Saint Uincent, 
An exceeding great ship and great riches of spices.  a vessel of exceeding capacity, & laden with seven thousand tons of all sorts of spices. In the way, we passed also by an other Island, named the Island of saint Helen, where we saw certain fishes of such enorm and monstrous bigness, 
Great Whale fishes.  that one of them was as big as a great house. When they rise above the water, they yane or gape so wide, that the upper jaw covereth all the forehead, as it were a soldier in shining harness. Again when they swim on the brim of the water, the forehead is seen the breadth of three great paces. And when they swim in the sea, they so trouble the water, and come so near the ships, that we were fain to discharge all our artillarye to drive them away. Shortly after we found an Island, 
The Island of ascension.  named the Island of ascension, where we saw many fowls, about the byggnesse of our Ducks, so simple, without suspicion or fear, that we took them with our hands: but shortly after they were taken, they showed an incredible fierceness. I think verily that they never saw any man before, they so beheld us before they were taken, and were as still as if they had been astonished: For in that Island we saw no living creature, save only innumerable fishes, and the said birds. After we had passed this Island many days sailing, as though we were now come to our own world, the North star, and guardions of our mariners, appeared unto us. And here opportunity serveth well, to confute the opinion of them that think that men may not sail in regions subject to the pole Antarctic or south pole, by the guide of the north star. 
Sailing by the north star in regions beneath the Equinoctial line.  For it is certain, that the Portugals sail by the guide of the north stars, although they be utterly out of sight by the elevation of the pole Antarctic. Yet do they sometimes refresh the virtue of the needle, with the stone which ever naturally respecteth the north pole. A few days after, we arrived at the fair region, where are seen many Islands, named the Islands of Astures, so named for the multitude of those Eagles which we commonly call Astures. These Islands are diversely named: for some are named Pici, Martij, some, Dè Coruo: also De Floribus, Sancti Georgij, Gratiosa, and Feial. Departing from hence, we came to the Island of Tertiera, where we remained two days. All these Islands are marvelous fruitful, and have plenty of all things necessary for man's life. Departing from hence, in seven days sailing, we came to the goodly city of Luxburne, or Vlisbona in Portugal. A● my coming thither, I was brought to the kings presence, whose hands kissing with most humble reverence, I thanked his majesty for the great favour I had found at the hands of his subjects and officers in India. He entertained me most graciously in his court, until I had informed him of all things which I had observed in my voyage to India. A few days after, I showed his highness the letters patentes whereby his lieutenant the viceroy of India, gave me the order of knighthood, desiring his majesty to confirm the same by his great seal: which my petition, he immediately granted. And thus departing from thence with the kings passport and safe conduct, at the length after these my long and great travails and dangers, I came to my long desired and native country, the city of Rome, by the grace of God, to whom be all honour and glory.   
FINIS.   

Of the higher East India, called India Tercera, or Treciera.  
IN this India, which the portugals call Tercera, are very great kingdoms: as the kingdoms of Beugala, Pegu, Berma, Erancangui, Dausian, Capelam, and the great kingdom of Malacha, called of the old writers Aurea Chersonesus, 
Malacha.  whose chief city is also called Malacha, and was in old time named Tachola. Under this kingdom are infinite Islands called Maluche, whereof the principal are these, java the greater, java the less, Polagua, Mendana, Cuba, Cailon, 
Tachola. The Islands of Malucha.  Huban, Burr, Tenado, Anbon, and Gilolo, with infinite other. On the south-west part from Malacha, is the great Island of Samotra, called in old time Taprobana, 
The Alande of Samotra.  in the which are the kingdoms of Pedir, Biraen, Pazer, Ardagni, and Ham. This Island, & all the other called Maluche, bring forth great quantity of Cloves, cinnamon, nutmegs, Maces, and all other kinds of spices, except Pepper, 
Spices.  which groweth in the province of calicut, and the Island of Ceilam. All these sorts of spices are carried to Malacha to be sold. But the greatest part of them is carried to Cathay and China: 
calicut. Ceilam. Cathay. China.  and from thence to the North parts of Tartary. This kingdom of China, is very great, and was in old time called Sina. Here is found great plenty of precious stones. The people are very subtle and rich. They are all appareled either in silk or cloth, or vestures of other woorkemanshyppe, and are of good civility. They do not gladly permit the Portugals or other strangers to traffic in their kingdom: 
Precious stones. Silk.  whose most famous place upon the sea side, is named Cantan, and the sea Machiam, called of the old writers, the sea of Sina. 
Cantan.    

Of the prices of precious stones and Spices, with their weights and measures, as they are accustomed to be sold both of the moors and the gentiles: And of the places where they grow.  

Forasmuch as in divers places of this history, mention is made of precious stones, I have thought good to declare somewhat aswell of their prices, as of the places of their generation, that we may not utterly be ignorant of the things which we so greatly esteem, and buy so dear.  

Of the Ruby.  
THe Rubies grow in India, and are found for the most part in a river named Pegu. These are of the best kind and finest, which they of the land of Malabor call Nunpuclo, and are well sold, if they be fair and clean without spots. The Indians, to know their fineness, put them upon their tongues, counting that to be best that is couldst and most hard. And to see their fineness: they take them up with a piece of wax by the sharpest point, and looking against the light, espy in them every small spot or flake. They are also found in certain drepe fosses or pits, which are made in mountains that are beyond the said river. They are scoured and made clean in the country of Pegu: yet can they not square and polish them, but for this purpose send them to divers other countries, & especially to Palcacate, Narsinga, calicut, and the region of Malabor, where are many cunning Lapidaries.  
And to give you intelligence of the value of these stones, ye shall understand that this word Fanan, signifieth a weight, somewhat more than two of our carats: and xi Fanans and a quarter, is one Mitigal: and vi Mitigals and a half, make one ounce. This Fanan, 
One caratte is iiii. grains.  is also a kind of money which is in value one rial of silver, and therefore after this account I say that. 
Eight fine Rubies of the weight of one Fanan (which are in all, about two carats) are in value. 
Fanan ten 
Which is one crown of gold.   Four Rubies that weigh one Fanan, are worth. 
Fanan twenty  Two that weigh one Fanan. 
Fanan xl  One that weigheth three quarters of one Fanan. 
Fanan .30.  One that weigheth one Fanan. 
Fanan .50.  One that weigheth one Fanan and a quarter. 
Fanan .65.  One that weigheth one Fanan and a half. 
Fanan .100.  One that weigheth one Fanan and three quarters. 
Fanan .150.  One that weigheth two Fanans. 
Fanan .200.  One that weigheth two Fanans and a quarter. 
Fanan .250.  One that weigheth two Fanans and a half. 
Fanan .300.  One that weigheth two Fanans and three quarters. 
Fanan .350.  Of three Fanans. 
Fanan▪ 400.  Of three and a quarter. 
Fanan .500.  Of three and a half. 
Fanan .550.  Of three and three quarters. 
Fanan .600.  Of three and three quarters and a half. 
Fanan .630.  Of four Fanans. 
Fanan .660.  Of four and a quarter. 
Fanan .700.  Of four and a half. 
Fanan .800.  Of five Fanans. 
Fanan .1000  Of five and a half. 
Fanan .1200  Of six Fanans, which are about twelve Carats. 
Fanan .1500   which make a hundred and fifty crowns of gold. And these are commonly the prices of perfect Rubies. But such as are not perfect, and have any spots in them, or are not of good colour, are of less price, according to the arbitrament and estimation of the buyer.   

Of the Rubies which grow in the Island of Zeilam.  
IN the Island of Zeilam, being in the second India, are found many Rubies, which the Indians name Manecas, the greatest part whereof do not arrive to the perfection of the other aforesaid in colour, because they are red, as though they were washed, and of fleshy colour, yet are they very cold and hard. The perfectest of them are greatly esteemed among the people of the Island, and are reserved only for the king himself, if they be of any great quantity. When his jewellers find any big piece of this Rock of the best kind, they put it in fire for the space of certain hours: which if it come out of the fire uncorrupt, it becometh of the colour of a burning coal, and was therefore called of the Greeks, Anthrax, which signifieth a burning coal. The same that the Greeks call Anthrax, the Latins call Carbunculus▪ These they greatly esteem. When the king of Narsinga can get any of them, he causeth a fine hole to be bored in the undermost part of them, to the midst, and suffereth none of them to pass out of his realm, especially if they have been tried by the said proof. These are of greater value than the other of Pegu, if they be in their natural perfection and cleanness.  
Of these, one that weigheth a Carratte (which is half a Fanan) is worth in calicut. 
Fanan .30 
Which are iii crowns of gold.   One of two carats. 
Fanan .65  Of three carats. 
Fanan .150  Of three carats and a half 
Fanan .200  Of four carats. 
Fanan .300  Of four carats and a half. 
Fanan .350  Of five carats. 
Fanan .400  Of five carats and a half. 
Fanan .450  Of six carats. 
Fanan .530  Of six carats and a half. 
Fanan .560  Of seven carats. 
Fanan .630  Of seven carats and a half. 
Fanan .660  One of viii carats, that hath been well proved in the fire, is worth 
Fanan .800  Of viii carats and a half. 
Fanan .900  One such of ten carats. 
Fanan .1300  One of ten carats and a half. 
Fanan▪ 1600  Of xii carats. 
Fanan .2000  Of xiiii carats. 
Fanan 3000  Of xvi carats. 
Fanan 6000    

Of the kind of Rubies. called Spinelle.  
THere is also found an other kind of Rubies, which we call Spinelle, and the Indians, Caropus. They grow in the self same country of Pegu where as are the fine Rubies, & are found in the mountains in the upper crust or flower of the earth. These are not so fine, nor of so good colour as are the true Rubies, but have somewhat the colour of a Granate, which we commonly call a Garnet: yet of these, such as are perfect in their colour, are of value half less than true Rubies.   

Of the Rubies called Balassi.  
BAlassi are of the kinds of Rubies, but are not so hard: their colour is somewhat like a Rose, and some are in manner white: they grow in Balassia, which is a region within the firm land, above Pegu and Bengala, and are brought from thence by merchants of the moors to calicut, where they are wrought and pullyshed, and are sold of the same price that are Spinel.   

Of the Diamonds of the old mine.  
THese Diamonds are found in the first India, in a kingdom of the moors named Decan, from whence they are brought to other regions. There are also found other Diamonds, which are not so good, but somewhat white, and are called Diamonds of the new mine, which is in the kingdom of Narsinga. They of the old mine are not pullyshed in India, but in other places. There are made likewise in India other false Diamonds, of Rubies, Topases, and white sapphires, which appear to be fine, and are also found in the Island of Zeilam: these stones differ in none other, saving that they have lost their natural colour. Of these, some are found that have half the colour of Rubies, & other of sapphires, other also of the colour of a Topase, other have all these colours mingled together. They bore a fine hole in these through the mids, whereby they appear like the eyes of a Cat. Of the whitest, they make many small Diamonds, which can not be known from the true, saving by touching, of such as are skilful in that practice. They are sold by a poised or weight, which they call Mangiar, which weigheth two Tar, and two thirds, which amount to two thirds, or third parts of one Carat: for four Tarres weigh one Fanan, which is about two carats. Eight Diamonds that weigh one Mangiar, which is two third parts of a Carat, are in value Fanan▪ thirty. which are three crowns of gold. 
Six diamonds that weigh one Mangiar. 
Fanan .40.  Four that weigh one Mangiar. 
Fanan .60.  Two that weigh one Mangiar. 
Fanan .80.  One that weigheth one Mangiar. 
Fanan .100.  One of one Mangiar and a quarter. 
Fanan .165.  One of one Mangiar and a half. 
Fanan .180.  Of one Mangiar and three quarters. 
Fanan .220.  Of two Mangiars. 
Fanan .320.  Of two Mangiars and a quarter. 
Fanan .360.  Of two Mangiars and a half. 
Fanan .380.  Of two Mangiars & three quarters full perfect. 
Fanan .420.  Of three Mangiars of like perfection. 
Fanan .450.  Of three Mangiars and a half. 
Fanan .480.  Of four Mangiars. 
Fanan .550.  Of five Mangiars. 
Fanan .750.  Of six Mangiars. 
Fanan .800.  Of seven Mangiars. 
Fanan .1200.  Of eight Mangiars. 
Fanan .1400.   And thus they proceed, increasing the price, as they increase in weight.   

Of sapphires.  
IN the Island of Zeilam, are found the best and most true sapphires, being very hard and fine, and of the colour of Azure. They are of price as followeth. 
A marcel, is a silver coin of Venice, of xi unnes. iii.d. with 〈◊〉, whereof ten make an ounce.  
One that weigheth one Caratte, is of value. which are about two Marcels of silver. 
Fanan .2.  One of the weight of two carats. 
Fanan .5.  Of three carats. 
Fanan .10.  Of four carats. 
Fanan .15.  Of five carats. 
Fanan .18.  Of six carats. 
Fanan .28.  Of seven carats. 
Fanan .35.  Of eight carats. 
Fanan .50.  Of niene carats. 
Fanan .60  Of ten carats. 
Fanan .65.  Of eleven carats. 
Fanan .70.  Of twelve carats. 
Fanan .75.  Of xiii carats in all perfection of colour. 
Fanan .115.  Of xiiii carats. 
Fanan .160.  Of xu carats. 
Fanan .180.  Of xvi carats. 
Fanan .200.  Of xviii carats. 
Fanan .250.  One that weigheth a Mitigall, which is xi Fanans and a quarter, that is about xxiii carats. 
Fanan .350.   Likewise in the Island of Zeilam, is found an other sort of sapphires, which they call Quinigelinam. These are not so strong, of darker colour, and of much less value than are the other of the best kind, whereof one is worth thirtiene of these of equal poised. Also in the kingdom of Narsinga, in a mountain above Bacanor and Mangalor, is found an other sort of sapphires, more tender and of worse colour, which they call Cinganloam. These are somewhat white, and of small value: So that the most perfect of this kind, weighing .xx carats, is not worth one Ducat. Their colour is inclining somewhat to yellow. There is likewise found an other kind of sapphires, upon the sea coasts of the kingdom of calicut, in a place named Capucar. These the Indians call Carahatonilam. They are of a dark Azure colour, not shining but in the clear air. They are also tender & brickle, and of small estimation among the Indians. They seem on the one side like glass.   

Of Topasies.  
THe natural Topasies grow in the Island of Zeilam, and are named of the Indians Purceragua. It is a hard and fine stone, and of equal estimation with the Ruby & the sapphire, because all these three are of one kind. The perfect colour of this, is yellow, like unto fine beaten gold, and if it be perfect and clean, whether it be great or little, it is worth in calicut as much fine gold as it weigheth. But if it be not perfect, it is worth the weight of gold the Fanan, which is less by the half. And if it be in manner white, it is worth much less. And of these, are small diamonds counterfeit.   

Of Turquesses.  
Turquesses' are found in Exer, a place of Siech Ishmael. Their Mine is a dry earth, that is found upon a black stone, which the moors take of in small pieces, and carry them to the Island of Ormus, from whence they are brought to divers parts of the world by sea and by land. The Indians call them Perose. They are soft stones, of small weight, and not much cold: & to know that they are good & true, in the day they shall appear of the very colour of the Turquesse, and in the night, by the light, they shall appear green. They that are not so perfect, do not so change their colour to the sight. If these stones be clean and of fine colour, they have underneath, in the bottom, a black stone, upon the which they grow. And if any little vain rise upon the said stone, it shall be the better. And to know more certainly that they are true Turquesses, they put on the tops of them, a little quick lime, tempered with water, after the manner of an ointment. So that if the quick lime appear coloured, they are judged perfect, and are of value as followeth. 
One that weigheth one Caratte, is worth in Malabar. 
Fanan .15  One of two carats. 
Fanan .40.  Of four carats. 
Fanan .90.  Of six carats. 
Fanan .150.  Of eight carats. 
Fanan .200.  Of ten carats. 
Fanan .300.  Of twelve carats. 
Fanan .450.  Of fourtiene carats. 
Fanan .550.   Of greater than these they make none account, because they are lighter pieces and of greater circuit. These of the bigest sort the moors carry into the kingdom of Guzerath.   

Of hyacinths.  
hyacinths, grow in the Island of Zeilam. They are tender stones, and yellow. They are best that are of deepest colour. The greatest part of these, have in them certain pimples or burbuls, which diminyshe their fairness. And they that are in their perfection cleave from this deformity, are nevertheless of small value: For in calicut where they are polished, they that weigh one Fanan, are worth no more than half a Fanan. And they of xviii Fanans, are not worth xvi Fanans.  
There are also found other stones like unto cats eyes, as Chrisolytes, & Amethystes, which they do not much esteem, because they are of small value, as also the stones called Giagonze.   

Of Smaragdes or Emeralds.  
SMaragdes grow in the country of Babylon, where the Indians call the sea Dieguan. They grow also in other parts of India. They are stones of fair green colour, and are light and tender. Of these stones, many are counterfeit. But looking on them curiously toward the light, the counterfectes show certain burbuls, as doth glass: but in the true, there is no such seen, but rather there appeareth to the eye, a certain verdour, shining like the beams of the Sun: and being rubbed upon the touch stone, they leave the colour of copper. And the smaragd of this fort, is the best and most true, and is in value in calicut, as much as a Diamunde, and somewhat more: And this not by weight, but by greatness, because the Diamunde quantity for quantity, is of greater weight than the smaragd. There is likewise found an other kind of Smaragdes, which are green stones, but not so much esteemed. Nevertheless, the Indians reserve these to set them forth with other precious stones. They leave not any green colour upon the touch.    

Of divers kinds of Spices, where they grow, what they are worth in calicut, and whither they are carried from thence.  

Of Pepper.  
first in all the kingdom of Malabor and calicut, Pepper groweth, and is sold in calicut by every CC. Bahars, fine, for. CCxxx. Fanans, every Fanan (as I have said) being in value one rial of place of Spain, which is as much as one marcel of silver in Venice. Bahar, weigheth four Cantares of the old weight of Portugal, by the which they sell all spices in Lisbona. Cantare is in Venice. Cxii. pound weight, of the gross pound (being xviii. ounces) and of the subtile pound. Clxxviii. So that the said .712. pounds of Venice subtle, will cost about twenty french crowns of gold: which amount to about two Marchetti (which make one penny) the pound. They pay also to the king of calicut for custom xii Fanans, every Bahar by the load. They that buy them, are accustomed to bring them to Cambaia, Persia, Aden, and Mecha, and from thence to Alcayr and Alexandria. Now they pay custom to the king of Portugal after the rate of 6562. marvedis the Bahar, which are .193. Fanans. marvedis are Spanish coins, whereof six go to a penny. This do they, partly because there arriveth no more so great diversity of merchants to buy them, and partly by the agreement which the said king of Portugal made with those kings, & the moors, and merchants of the country of Malabar.  
Much pepper groweth likewise in the Island of Sumatra, near unto Malaca, which is fairer and bigger than that of Malabar, but not so good and strong. This is brought from Bengala to China, and some part to Mecha, privylie and by stealth, unwares to the Portugals, which would not otherwise suffer them to pass. It is worth in Sumatra, from four C. unto vii C. marvedis the Canter of Portugal, of the new weight. And from the new to the old weight in Portugal, the difference is two ounces in the pound weight: For the old pound consisteth of xiiii ounces, and the new pound of xvi. ounces.   

Of Cloves.  
Cloves grow in the Islands of Molucca, from whence they are brought to Malacha, and then to calicut, and the country of Malabar. They are worth in calicut every Bahar (which is .712. pounds, of the subtle pound of Venice) from .500. to .600. Fanans (which are about fifty french crowns) which are in value about twelve Marchetti the pound weight, and being clean from stalks & husks are in value .700. Fanans. To carry them from thence into other regions, they pay for passport. xviii. Fanans the Bahar, which is worth in Malacca from ten to xiiii Ducades, according to the rate and custom of the merchants.   

Of cinnamon.  
CInamome of the best sort, groweth in the Island of Zeilam, and in the country of Malabar groweth the worst. That of the best kind, is of small price in Zeilam, But in calicut (if it be choice and fresh) it is worth 300. Fanans the Bahar, which are about five Marchetti the pound.   

Of Ginger, called Beledi.  
GInger Beledi, groweth on every side about calicut, from six to ntene miles, and is worth the Bahar xl Fanans, and sometimes fifty, which is less than one Marchetto the pound. They bring it from the mountains, and out of the country, to the city, where they sell it by retail to the Indian merchants, who gather it together in great quantity, and keep it to such time as the moors ships arrive there, to whom they sell it, by the price of xc Fanans, to. Cx. which is less than two Marchetti the pound, because the weight is greater.   

Of Ginger Mechino.  
GInger Mechino groweth, beginning from the mountain of Deli, unto Canonor. It is small, and not so white nor so good as the other. It is worth the Bahar in Canonor, about .60. Fanans, which is about one Marchetto the pound. They pay for the Bahar six Fanans in money for the custom. It is sold uncleansed or unpurged.   

Of green Ginger in conserves.  
IN Bengala is found great plenty of Ginger Beledi, of the which they make much Ginger in conserves with Sugar, and carry it in stone pots from Martabani, to be sold in the country of Malabar, and is worth the Farazuola (which is xxii pounds and six ounces) after the rate of. xiiii.xv. or xvi Fanans.  
That that is fresh and made in conserves, is worth in calicut xxv Fanans the farazuola, because Sugar is dear there. Green Ginger to put in conserves, is worth in calicut three quarters of one Fanan the farazuola, which is about two pounds for one Marchetto.    

Of the Apothecary's drugs, and of what price they are in calicut and Malabar.  
LAcca of Martabani, if it be of the best, is worth the farazuola, which is xxii pound weight and six ounces of Portugal, after sixtiene ounces the pound (which is about forty pound weight of the subtle pound of Venice) and is in value eightiene Fanans: which are eightiene Marcels of silver. For one Fanan, is in value about one marcel of silver.  
Lacca of the country, is worth the farazuola. 
Fanan. 12  Borace that is good and in great pieces, is worth the farazuola. 
Fanan .30 to .40. & 50.  Camphire that is gross in cakes, is worth the farazuola. 
Fanan .70. to .80  Camphire to anoint Idols, 
***  Camphire for their children to eat, is worth the Mytigall. 
Fanan .3.  Aguila is worth the farazuola. 
Fanan .300. to .400.  Lignum aloe, black, heavy, and fine, is worth. 
Fanan .1000.  Musk of the best, is worth the ounce 
Fanan .36.  Benjamin of the best, is worth the farazuola. 
Fanan .65.  Tamarindi being new, are worth the faraz. 
Fanan .4.  Calamus Aromaticus, the farazuola. 
Fanan .12.  Endego to die silk, true and good, the farazuola. 
Fanan .30.  Mirre, the farazuola. 
Fanan .18. to .20.  frankincense good and in grains, is worth the farazuola. 
Fanan .15.  frankincense in paste of the basest sort, the faraz. 
Fanan .3.  Ambracan or Amber grease that is good, is worth the Metigall. 
Fanan .2. to .3.  Mirabolanes in conserve of sugar, the faraz. 
Fanan .16. to .25  Cassia, fresh and good, the farazuola. 
Fanan one and a half.  Red Sanders, the farazuola. 
Fanan .5. to .6.  white Sanders and Citrine, which grow in the Island of Timor, the farazuola. 
Fanan .40. to .60.  spikenard, fresh and good, the faraz. 
Fanan .30. to 40.  nutmegs, which come from the Island of Bandan, where the Bahar is worth from viii to ten Fanans, (which import vi. pounds weight to the Marchetto) are worth in calicut, the faraz. 
Fanan .10. to .12.  Mace which is brought from the Island of Bandan, where the Bahar is worth fifteen Fanans (which import about one Marchetto, the pound are worth in calicut, the farazuola. 
Fanan .25. to .30  Turbithes, are worth the farazuola. 
Fanan .13  Woormeseede of the best kind, called Semenzana, is worth the farazuola. 
Fanan .18.  Zerumba, the farazuola. 
Fanan .2.  Zedoaria, the farazuola. 
Fanan .1.  Gum Serapine, the farazuola. 
Fanan .20.  Aloe Cicotrine, the farazuola. 
Fanan .18.  Cardamome in grains, the farazuola. 
Fanan .20.  rhubarb groweth abundantly in the country of Malabar, and that which cometh from China by Malacha, is worth the farazuola. 
Fanan 40. to .50.  Mirabolani Emblici, the farazuola. 
Fanan .2.  Mirabolani Belirici, the farazuola. 
Fanan one & a half.  Mirabolani citrini & Chebuli, which are all of one sort. 
Fanan .2.  Mirabolani Indi, which are of the same Citrine trees. 
Fanan .3.  Tutia, the farazuola. 
Fanan .30.  Cububes, which grow in the Island of java or Giava, are there of small price, and sold by measure 
without weight.  Opium, which is brought from the city of Aden where it is made, is worth in calicut the faraz. 
Fanan .280. to 320.  Opium of an other sort, which is made in Cambaia, is worth the farazuola. 
Fanan .200. to .250.    

Of the weights of Portugal and India: And how they agree.  
THe pound of the old weight, containeth xiiii ounces. The pound of the new weight containeth xvi ounces. Eight Cantares of the old weight, make vii of the new. And every new Cantare, is of. C.xxviii. pounds, after xvi. ounces to the pound.  
Every old Cantare, containeth three quarters and an half of the new Cantare: And is of. C.xxviii. pounds, after xiiii ounces the pound.  
One Farazuoles, is xxii pounds of xiiii ounces, and vi ounces more, with two fift parts.  
Twenty Farazuoles, are one Bahar.  
One Bahar is four Cantares of the old weight of Portugal. All the Spices and drugs, and all such other things as come from India, are sold in Portugal by the old weight and all the rest by the new weight.  
Herby may we well consider, that as we ought to rejoice and give God thanks for the abundance of all these things, which he causeth the earth so plentifully to bring forth to our use, so may we lament the abuse of men, whose covetousness causeth great dearth and scarceness in the midst of abundance: herein no less offending the law of nature, then do such as by witchcraft do entermingle poison with things created for the health of man, or by enchantment corrupt the seeds in the ground: yea rather, as the unnatural mother, who destroyeth the child whom she hath long nuryshed.    

Of the voyage made by the spaniards round about the world.  
THe voyage made by the spaniards round about the world, is one of the greatest and most marvelous things that have ben known to our tyme. And although in many things we excel our ancient predecessors, in this especially we so far exceed all their inventions, that the like hath not heretofore been known to this day. 
Don Peter Martyr.  This voyage was written particularly by Don Peter Martyr of Angleria, being one of the counsel of th'emperors Indies, to whom also was committed the writing of the history & examination of all such as returned from thence into Spain to the city of Seville, 
Rome sacked.  in the year .1522. But sending it to Rome to be printed, in that miserable time when the city was sacked, it was lost, and not found unto this day, or any memory remaining thereof, saving such as some that read the same have borne in mind. And among other notable things by him written as touching that voyage, 
A day lost in three years & one month.  that is one, that the spaniards having sailed about three years and one month, and the most of them noting the days, day by day (as is the manner of all them that sail by the Ocean, they found when they were returned to Spain, that they had lost one day: So that at their arrival at the port of Seville, being the seventh day of September, was by their account but the sixth day. And whereas Don Peter Martyr declared the strange effect of this thing to a certain excellent man, who for his singular learning was greatly advanced to honour in his common wealth, and made Themperors ambassador: this worthy gentleman, who was also a great Philosopher & Astronomer, answered, that it could not otherwise chance unto them, having sailed three years continually, ever following the Sun toward the West: and said furthermore, that they of old time observed, that all such as sailed behind the Sun toward the West, did greatly lengthen the day. And albeit that the said book of Peter Martyr is perished, yet hath not fortune permitted that the memory of so worthy and marvelous an enterprise should utterly be extinct: 
It is now found with one master Harold, a prebend in wyndsor. Antony Pigafetta.  forasmuch as a certain noble gentleman of the city of Vincenza in Italy, called master Antony Pigafetta (who being one of the company of that voyage, and after his return into Spain in the ship Victoria, was made knight of the Rhodes) wrote a particular and large book thereof, which he gave to Themperors Majesty, and sent a copy of the same into France, to the lady Regent, mother unto the French king, who committed it to an excellent philosopher, called master jacobus Faber, 
jacobus Faber.  having long studied in Italy, willing him to translate it into the French tongue. This book therefore was printed first in the French tongue, and then in the Italian, with also an epistle to the Cardinal of Salsepurge as touching the same voyage, written by Maximilian Transiluane secretary to Themperors Majesty, in the year 1522. And doubtless among all the cities of Italy, 
Maximilian Transiluane.  the city of Vincenza may herein much glory, that beside the ancient nobility, and many excellent and rare wits which it hath brought forth, aswell in learning as discipline of war, it hath also had so worthy and valiant a gentleman as was the said master Antony Pigafetta, who having compassed about the ball or globe of the world, hath likewise described that voyage particularly. For the which his so noble and wonderful an enterprise so happily achieved, 
The reward of noble enterprise  if the same had been done in the old time, when th'empire of the Greeks and Romans flourished, he should doubtless have been rewarded with an Image of marble or gold, erected in a place of honour, in perpetual memory, and for a singular example of his virtue to the posterity. In fine, this may we boldly affirm, 
The antiquity had no such knowledge of the world as we have.  that the antiquity had never such knowledge of the world, which the Sun compasseth about in xxiiii hours, as we have at this present, by the industry of men of this our age. But before I speak any thing of the viage, I have thought it good first to add hereunto the Epistle of Maximilian Transiluane, which he wrote to the Cardinal of Salsepurge, as a preface to his said book.  

¶ The Epistle of Maximilian Transiluane, secretary to the emperors Majesty: written to the right honourable and reverend lord, the lord Cardinal of Salepurge, of the marvelous and wonderful navigation made by the spaniards round about the world in the year of Christ. M.d.xix  
IN these days (my most honourable and reverend lord) returned one of those five ships, which, the year before Themperours being at Saragosa in Spain, were at his majesties commandment sent to the new world, 
The Islands of Molucca.  heretofore unknown unto us, to seek the Islands of spices. For albeit the Portugals bring us great quantity of spices from that part of East India, which in old time was called Aurea Chersonesus (where is now thought to be the great rich city of Malaccha) yet in East India grow none of those spices, 
Aurea Chersonesus.  except Pepper. 
Malaccha.  For other spices, as Cinnamon, Cloves, Nuttemegs, 
Spices.  and Mase (which is the husk that covereth the shell of the Nut) are brought from other far countries, and from Islands scarcely known by their names: from the which Islands they are brought in ships or barks made without any Iron tools, and tied together with cords of Date trees, with round sails likewise made of the small twigs of the branches of Date trees weaved together. These barks they call Giu●che: with the which barks and sails, they make their voyage with only one wind in the stern, or contrariwise. Neither yet is it a thing greatly to be marveled at, that these islands where the Spices grow, have been unknown so many worlds passed unto our time, 
The Islands of Spices unknown in old tyme.  forasmuch as all such things as unto this day have been written of old authors of the places where spices grow, are all fabulous and false: Insomuch that the countries where they affirm them to grow, are now certainly found to be further from the place where they grow in deed, than we are from them. For letting pass many other things that are written, I will speak more of this which Herodotus (otherwise a famous author) affirmeth, that Cinnamon is found in the tops of the nests of certain birds and fowls that bring it from far countries, and especially the phoenix, the which I know no man that ever hath seen. But Pliny, 
The Phoenix. Pliny.  who might more certainly affirm things by reason that before his time many things were known and discovered by the navigations of great Alexander and other, saith, 
The navigations of great Alexander. Ethiope. Trogloditi.  that Cinnamon groweth in that part of Ethiope which the people inhabit called Trogloditi. Nevertheless it is now found that Cinnamon groweth very far from all Ethiope, & now much further from the Trogloditi, which dwell in caves under the ground. But to our men which are now returned from those parts and the Islands of spices, 
The navigation about the world.  having also good knowledge of Ethiope, it was necessary to pass far beyond Ethiope before they come to these islands, and to compass about the whole world, and many times under the greatest circumference of heaven. The which navigations made by them, being the most marvelous thing that ever was done by man upon the earth sense the first creation of the world, and never found before, or known, or attempted by any other, I have deliberated faithfully to write to your honourable lordship, and to declare the whole success thereof. As touching which matter, I have with all diligence made inquisition to know the truth, aswell by relation of the Captain of that ship, as also by conference with every of the mariners that returned with him. All which, gave the self same information both to Themperors Majesty, and divers other: And this with such faithfulness and sincerity, that not only they are judged of all men to have declared the truth in all things, but have thereby also given us certain knowledge, that all that hath hitherto been said or written of old authors as touching these things, are false and fabulous. For who will believe that men are found with only one leg. 
The old authors.  Or with such feet whose shadow covereth their bodies? Or men of a cubit height, and other such like, being rather monsters than men? Of the which, neither the spaniards, 
Monsters. The wages of the Spaniards and Portugals.  who in our time sailing by the Ocean sea, have discovered all the costs of the land toward the West both under and above the Equinoctial, nor the Portugals, who compassing about all africa, hath passed by all the East, and likewise discovered all those costs unto the great gulf called Sinus Magnus, nor yet the Spaniards in this their last navigation, in the which they compassed about the whole earth, did never in any of their viages write of such monsters: which doubtless they would not have omitted, if they might have had certain knowledge thereof. But now intending to speak of the whole world, I will not be long in my preface, but begin my narration as followeth.    

¶ A brief declaration of the voyage or navigation made about the world. gathered out of a large book written hereof by master Antoni Pigafetta Vincentine, knight of the Rhodes, and one of the company of that viage in the which Ferdinando Magalianes a Portugal (whom some call Magellanus) was general captain of the navy.  
ALthough Sebastian Munster in his universal cosmography in the fifth book of the lands of the greater Asia (which I translated into english about .24. years sense) hath written of the viage of Magellanus, 
Sebastian Munster.  declaring therein how the spaniards by the West, and the Portugals by the East, sailing to the Islands of Molucca, compassed the whole globe of the world between them, 
The Islands of Molucca.  yet have I here thought it good to make a brief repetition of this viage, adding hereunto divers notable things which were not touched of Munster, as I have gathered them out of the books of Antoni Pigafetta, and Transiluanus, writing of the same viage. For albeit in deed it was a strange and wonderful thing that the spaniards and Portugals compassed the whole circumference of the world between them, yet is it more marvelous, that the same was done with one ship, & one company of men, as did the spaniards in this voyage, who keeping their continual course by the west, returned into Spain by the east: a thing doubtless so much more wonderful and strange, then if they had returned from the half circumference by the same way they went, in how much they were ignorant in the viage never attempted before, beside the thousand dangers and perils which they were daily like to fall into, aswell by wandering in unknown coasts, as also by falling into the hands of the Portugals, 
Controversy between the spaniards and Portugals.  by whose dominions in the East they should needs pass of necessity, not trusting to their gentleness for the controversy which had been long between them for the Islands of Molucca. I will therefore (as I have said) make a brief rehearsal of this voyage, from the beginning to the ending, omitting nevertheless many notable things, which are more largely described in the books of Maximilianus Transiluanus, and Antonius Pigafetta.  
The tenth day of August, 
Ferdinando Magalianes.  in the year of our Lord .1519. Ferdinando Magalianes▪ departed from the port of Seville in Spain, with a navy of five ships, and 237. men, well furnished with all things necessary. And sailing first down by the river of Guadalchiber, which runneth from the said port into the sea, they came first to a place named Giovan Dulpharaz, where are many villages of the moors: and from thence, arrived at a castle of the duke of Medina Sidonia, where is the port from which they enter into the sea, & to the cape saint Vincent, 
The Cape of saint Vicent.  being distant from the Equinoctial .37. degrees, and from the said port .10. leagues, and is from thence to Seville between 17. and 20. leagues. here they remained certain days, to make new provision of such things as they lacked. Departing from hence the 20. day of September, 
The Islands of Canary.  they arrived the 26. day of the same month at one of the Islands of Canary, called Tenerife, being 25. degrees above the Equinostial. In one of these Islands is none other water but that is continually engendered of a cloud, 
Water engendered of a clude.  which appeareth daily at noon tide, as though it descended from heaven, and compasseth about a certain great tree, from whose branches distilleth great abundance of water, and falleth in streams from the root of the same, into certain trenches and cisterns, made and placed to receive it. This water serveth sufficiently all the inhabitants and cattle of the Island. 
The Island of S. Thomas.  The like thing is also seen in the Island of saint Thomas, lying directly under the Equinoctial line.  
The third day of October, about midnight, the captain commanded them to light fire brands, and to hoist up their sails, directing their course toward the South, sailing sailing between Capo Verde of Africa, and the Islands lying about the same, 
Capo verde.  being from the Equinoctial fourteen degrees & a half. They sailed thus many days in the sight of the coast of Guinea of Ethiope, 
Guinea in Ethiope.  where is the mountain called Serra Liona, being eight degrees above the Equinoctial. In this coast they had no manner of contrary wind, but a great calm, and fair weather, for the space of threescore and ten days, in the which they came under the Equinoctial line. In this voyage they saw many strange fishes, 

fishes and monsters of the sea.  
The fire of. S. Helen and S. Nicolas.  
A tempest.   & monsters of the Sea, beside another strange thing which appeared unto them: For there appeared in their ships certain flames of fire, burning very clear, which they call saint Helen, & saint Nicholas: these appeared as though they had been upon the mast of the ships, in such clearness, that they took away their sight for the space of a quarter of an hour, by reason whereof they so wandered out of their course, and were dispersed in sunder, that they in manner despaired to meet again: but (as God would) the sea and tempest being quieted, they came safely to their determined course. And before I speak any further of the voyage, 
The natural cause of such fires as fall in the ships.  I have here thought good to say somewhat of these strange fierce, which some ignorant folk think to be spirits, or such other fantasies, whereas they are but natural things, proceeding of natural causes, and engendered of certain exhalations. Of these therefore, the great Philosopher of our time Hieronimus Cardanus, in his second book De Subtilitate, writeth in this manner. 
Cardanus.  There are two manner of fierce engendered of exhalations, whereof the one is hurtful, the other without hurt. That which is hurtful, is fire in deed, engendered of malicious and venomous vapours, which in success of time take fire, as apt matters to be kindled. The other kind is no true fire, but like the matter that is in such old putrefied wood, 
Two kinds of fires engendered of exhalations.  as giveth the shining of fire, without the substance or quality thereof. Of the kind of true fire, is the Fyreball or Star, commonly called saint Helen, which is sometime seen about the masts of ships, 
True fire and false fire.  being of such fiery nature, that it sometime melteth brazen vessels, and is a token of drowning, forasmuch as this chanceth only in great tempests: for the vapour or exhalation whereof this fire is engendered, can not be driven together or compact in form of fire, but of a gross vapour, and by a great power of wind, and is therefore a token of imminent peril: As on the contrary part, the like fires called in old time Castor and Pollux, 

Castor and Pollux.  
The lights of Saint Peter and Saint Nicolas.   and now named the two lights of Saint Peter and Saint Nicolas, which for the most part fall on the cables of the ships, leaping from one to an other, with a certain fluttering noise like birds, are a token of security, and of the tempest overpassed: For they are but vapours cleaving to the cables, which in success of time, the fire passing from one to an other, appear in the similitude of a light candle. They are a token of security, because they are little, not slow or gross, whereby they might have joined altogether in one, and been thereby more malicious, and lasted longer, whereas being many and but little, they are the sooner consumed. Hitherto Cardanus. But let us now return to the viage.  
When they had sailed passed the Equinoctial line, 

They lost the sight of the North star. The Island of Brasile.  
The South pole.   they lost the sight of the North star, and sailed by the south-west, until they came to a land named the land of Bressil, which some call Brasilia, being xxii degrees and a half toward the south pole or pole Antarctic. This land is continuate and one firm land with the cape of saint Augustine, which is viii degrees from the Equinoctial. In this land they were refreshed with many good fruits of innumerable kinds, and found here also very good sugar canes, and divers kinds of beasts and other things, 
Sugar.  which I omit for brevity. They entered into this haven on saint Lucy's day: where the Sun being their Zenith (that is, the point of heaven directly over their heads) they felt greater heat that day, then when they were under the Equinoctial line. This land of Brasile is very large and great, 
The greatness of the land of Brasile.  and bigger than all Spain, Portugal, France, and Italy, and is most abundant in all things. The people of this country pray to no manner of thing: but live by the instinct of nature, and to the age of C.xx. and. C.xl years. Both the men and women go naked, and dwell in certain long houses. They are very docible, and soon alured to the Christian faith.  
Thirtiene days after that they arrived at the said port, they departed from this land, and sailed to the xxxiiii. degree and a half toward the pole Antarctic, where they found a great river of fresh water, and certain Cannibals. 
Cannibals.  Of these they saw one out of their ships, 
Giants.  of stature as big as a Giant, having a voice like a Bull. Our men pursued them, but they were so swift of foot that they could not overtake them. About the mouth of this river, 
Insulae gemmarum. Cap. S. Marry.  are seven Islands, in the bigest whereof they found certain precious stones, and called it the cape of saint Marie. The spaniards thought that by this river they might have passed into the South sea, but they were deceived in their opinion: For there was none other passage then by the river, which is xvii leagues large in the mouth. Thus following this coast by the tract of the land toward the pole Antarctic, 

The pole Antarctic. Geese.  
Sea wolves.   they came to a place where were two Islands replenished with Geese and Wolves of the sea, which some think to be those fishes that we call Pikes. These were in such number, that in an hour all the five ships might have been laden with Geese, being all of black colour, and such as can not flee. They live of fish, and are so fat, that they could scarcely flay them. They have no feathers, but a certain down, and their bills like ravens bills. These Wolves of the sea are of divers colours, and of the bigness of Calves, with their heads of golden colour. Here were they in great danger by tempest: But as soon as the three fires, called saint Helen, saint Nycolas, and saint Clare, appeared upon the cables of the ships, suddenly the tempest and fury of the winds ceased. Departing from hence, they sailed to the .49. degree and a half under the pole Antarctic: 
The xlix degree of the South pole.  where being wintered, they were enforced to remain there for the space of two months, all which time they saw no man, except that one day by chance they espied a man of the stature of a Giant, 
Giants.  who came to the haven dancing and singing, and shortly after seemed to cast dust over his head. The Captain sent one of his men to the shore with the ship Boat, who made the like sign of peace. The which thing the Giant seeing, was out of fear, and came with the Captains servant to his presence into a little Island. When he saw the Captain with certain of his company about him, he was greatly amazed, and made signs, holding up his hand to heaven, signifying thereby that our men came from thence. 
The bigness of the Giants.  This Giant was so big, that the head of one of our men of a mean stature, came but to his waste. He was of good corporature, & well made in all parts of his body, with a large visage painted with divers colours, but for the most part yellow Upon his cheeks were painted two Hearts, and red circles about his eyes. The hear of his head was coloured white, and his apparel was the skin of a beast sowed together. This beast as (seemed unto us) had a large head, and great ears like unto a Mule, with the body of a Camel, and tail of a horse. The feet of the Giant were folded in the said skin, after the manner of shoes. He had in his hand a big and short bow, the string whereof was made of a sinew of that beast. He had also a bundle of long arrows made of Reeds, feathered after the manner of ours, typte with sharp stones in the stead of Iron heads. The Captain caused him to eat and drink, & gave him many things, and among other a great looking glass: In the which as soon as he saw his own likeness, was suddenly afraid, and started back with such violence, that he overthrew two that stood nearest about him. When the Captain had thus given him certain Hawks bells, and other great bells, with also a looking glass, a comb, and a pair of beads of glass, he sent him to land with four of his own men well armed. Shortly after, they saw an other Giant of somewhat greater stature, 
another Giant.  with his bow and arrows in his hand. As he drew near unto our men, he laid his hand on his head, and pointed up toward heaven, and our men did the like. The Captain sent his ship Boat to bring him to a little Island being in the Haven. This Giant was very tractable and pleasant. He song and danced, and in his dancing left the print of his feet on the ground. He remained long with our men, who named him johan. He could well speak and plainly pronounce these words, jesus, ave Maria, johannes, even as we do, but with a bigger voice. The Captain gave him a shirt of linen cloth, & a coat of white woollen cloth: also a cap, a comb, a looking glass, with divers such other things, and so sent him to his company. The day following, he resorted again to the ships, and brought with him one of those great beasts, which he gave the Captain. But after that day, they never saw him more, supposing him to be slain of his own company, for the conversation he had with our men.  
After other xu days were passed, there came four other Giants without any weapons, 
Four other Giants.  but had hid their bows and arrows in certain bushes. The Captain retained two of these, which were youngest and best made. He took them by a deceit, in this manner, 
Two Giants are taken by a policy.  that giving them knives, shears, looking glasses, bells, beads of Crystal, & such other trifles, he so filled their hands that they could hold no more: then caused two pair of shackles of Iron to be put on their legs, making signs that he would also give them those chains: which they liked very well, because they were made of bright and shining metal And whereas they could not carry them because their hands were full, the other Giants would have carried them: but the captain would not suffer them. When they felt the shackles fast about their legs, they began to doubt: but the Captain did put them in comfort, and bade them stand still. In fine, when they saw how they were deceived, they roared like bulls, & cried upon their great devil Setebos, 
The devil Setebos.  to help them. Being thus taken, they were immediately separate and put in sundry ships. They could never bind the hands of the other two, yet was one of them with much difficulty overthrown by ix of our men, & his hands bound: but he suddenly loosed himself and fled, as did also the other that came with them. In their fleeing, they shot of their arrows and slew one of our men. They say that when any of them die, there appear x. or xii devils, 
devils appear to the Giants when they die.  leaping and dancing about the body of the dead, and seem to have their bodies painted with divers colours, and that among other, there is one seen bigger than the residue, who maketh great mirth & rejoicing. This great devil they call Setebos, and call the less Cheleule. One of these Giants which they took, declared by signs that he had seen devils with two horns above their heads, with long hear down to their feet: and that they cast forth fire at their throats both before and behind. The Captain named these people Patagoni. 
Patagoni.  The most part of them wear the skins of such beasts whereof I have spoken before: and have no houses of continuance, but make certain cottages, which they cover with the said skins, and carry them from place to place. They live of raw flesh, and a certain sweet root, which they call Capar. One of these which they had in their ships, did eat at one meal a basket of Bysket, 
The Giants feeding.  and droonke a bowl of water at a draft.  
They remained five months in this port of Saint julian, 
They conspire against their Captain.  where certain of the under captains conspiring the death of their General, were hanged and quartered: among whom the Treasurer Luigo of Mendozza was one. Certain of the other conspirators, he left in the said land of Patogoni.  
Departing from hence, to the .52. degree toward the pole Antarctic, lacking a third part, they found a river of fresh water and good fish. Their ships were here in great danger. They remained two months in this port, where they made new provision of fresh water, fuel, and fish. Here the Captain caused all his men to be confessed. 
Confession.  Approaching to the .52. degrees, they found the strait now called the strait of Magellanus, 
The strait of Magellanus.  being in some place a hundred and ten leagues in length, and in breadth somewhere very large, and in other places little more than half a league in breadth. On both the sides of this strait, are great and high mountains covered with snow, beyond the which, is the entrance into the sea of Sur. 
The South sea.  This entrance the Captain named Mare Pacificum. here one of the ships stole away privily, and returned into Spain: 
Mare pacificum.  In this was one of the Giants, who died assoon as he felt the heat that is about the Equinoctial line. 
The Giants died for heat.  When the Captain Magalianes was passed the strait, and saw the way open to the other main sea, he was so glad thereof, that for joy the tears fell from his eyes, and named the point of the land from whence he first saw that sea, Capo Desiderato. Supposing that the ship which stole away had been lost, 
Capo Desiderato.  they erected a cross upon the top of a high hill, to direct their course in the strait, if it were their chance to come that way. They found that in this strait in the month of October, 
Short nights in the month of October.  the night was not passed four hours long. They found in this strait at every three miles, a safe haven, and excellent water to drink: wood also, and fish, and great plenty of good herbs. They think that there is not a fairer strait in the world. Here also they saw certain fleeing fishes. 
Fleeing fishes. The Giants language.  The other Giant which remained with them in the ship, named bread Capar: water, Oli, red cloth, Cherecai, red colour, Cheiche, black colour, Amel: And spoke all his words in the throat. On a time, as one made a cross before him, and kissed it, showing it unto him, he suddenly cried Setebos, and declared by signs, that if they made any more crosses, Setebos would enter into his body, and make him burst. But when in fine he saw no hurt come thereof, he took the cross, and embraced and kissed it oftentimes, desiring that he might be a Christian before his death: 
The Giant is baptized.  He was therefore baptized, and named Paul. Departing out of this strait into the sea called Mare Pac ficum, the xxviii day of November, in the year .1520. they sailed three months and twenty days before they saw any land, 

Three months sailing without the sight of land.  
Extreme famine.   and having in this time consumed all their Bysket and other victuals, they fell into such necessity, that they were enforced to eat the powder that remained thereof, being now full of worms, and stinking like piss by reason of the salt water. Their fresh water was also putrefied and become yellow. They did eat skins and pieces of leather, which were folded about certain great ropes of the ships: but these skins being made very hard by reason of the Sun, rain, and wind, they hung them by a cord in the sea, for the space of four or five days, to mollify them, and sodde them, and ate them. By reason of this famine and unclean feeding, 
Diseases of famine.  some of their gums grew so over their teeth, that they died miserably for hunger. And by this occasion died menetiene men, and also the Giant, with an Indian of the land of Brasile, otherwise called Terra de papagalli, that is, the land of popinjays. Beside these that died xxv or xxx were so sick, that they were not able to do any service with their hands or arms for feebleness: So that there was in manner none without some disease. In these three months and xx. days, they sailed four thousand leagues in one gulf, by the said sea called Pacificum, (that is) peaceable, which may well be so called, forasmuch as in all this time, having no sight of any land, they had no misfortune of wind or any other tempest. During this time also, they discovered only two little Islands unhabited, where they saw nothing but birds & trees, and therefore named them infortunate Islands, 
Unfortunate Islands.  being one from the other about two hundred leagues distant. The first of these Islands is from the Equinoctial toward the pole Antarctic xv. degrees, and the other five. Their sailing was in such sort, that they sailed daily between l.lx. to lxx leagues. So that in fine, 
What they sailed daily.  if God of his mercy had not given them good weather, it was necessary that in this so great a sea, they should all have died for hunger. Which nevertheless they escaped so hardly, that it may be doubted whether ever the like voyage may be attempted with so good success. They considered in this Navigation that the pole Antarctic, hath no notable star, after the sort of the pole Arctic. But they saw many stars gathered together, 
The stars about the South pole.  which are like two clouds, one separate a little from an other, & somewhat dark in the midst. Between these, are two stars, not very big, nor much shining, which move a little: and these two are the pole Antarctic. 
The needle of the compass.  The needell of their compass varied somewhat, and turned ever toward the pole Arctic, nevertheless, had no such force, as when it is in these parts of the pole Arctic: Insomuch that it was necessary to help the needle with the load stone (commonly called the Adamant) before they could sail therewith, because it moved not, 
The load stone.  as it doth when it is in these our parts. When they were in the midst of the gulf, they saw a cross of five clear stars, directly toward the West, and of equal distance the one from the other.  

The order of the stars about the pole Antarctic, some have figured in this manner.  
A. The pole Antarctic. B. The Crosse.  
In these days they sailed between the West and South, so far that they approached to the Equinoctial line, 
The Equinoctial line.  and were in longitude from the place from whence they first departed, a hundred and twenty degrees. In this course they sailed by two Islands of exceeding height, whereof the one named Cipanghu, is twenty degrees from the pole Antarctic: 
The islands of Cipanghu and Sumbdit.  and the other named Sumbdit, fifteen degrees. When they were passed the Equinoctial line, they sailed between the West & south-west, at the quarter of the West, toward the south-west more than a C. leagues, changing their sails to the quarter of the south-west, until they came to the thirtiene degrees above the Equinoctial toward the pole arctic, intending as much as were possible, to approach to the Cape called of the old writers Cattigara: the which is not found as the old Cosmographers have described it, but is toward the north about xii degrees, as they afterward understood.  
When they had thus sailed lxx leagues of this voyage in the xii. degree above the Equinoctial, and. C.xlvi. degrees of longitude (as I have said) the sixth day of March they discovered a little Island toward the northwest, and two other toward the south-west: but the one was higher and bigger than the other. In the bigest of these, the general captain would have rested himself a while, but he could not, by reason the people of these Islands resorted continually to the ships with their Canoas', and stole now one thing & now an other, in such sort that our men could take no rest: and therefore demanded of the captain that they might strike their sails to bring the ships to land. But the captain being provoked to anger, went aland with forty armed men, and burnt about fifty of their houses, with many of their Canoas', and slew also about seven men, and recovered a ship boat which the Barbarians had stolen, and so departed, following his voyage. The Captain named these Islands Insulae Latronum, that is, the Islands of thieves. 
Insulae Latronum.  When our men had so wounded some of them with arrows, that they were stricken through both sides, they pulled forth the arrows, not ceasing to marvel at them, till they fell down dead: And yet could not the other so depart, but still followed the ships with more than two hundred of their boats, approaching as near to the ships as they could, and proferring our men certain fishes. As the ships passed with full sail in the midst of their boats, they saw in some of them certain women, lamenting and tearing their hear, which our men thought they did for the death of their husbands. As far as they could perceive, these people live at their own liberty, without any ruler or governor. They go naked, 
People with long hear.  and have black beards and black hear on their heads, which they wear long down to their wastes. They are of the same stature that we are, and well made, of colour like unto an Olive. Their women are well favoured, with black & thick hear on their heads, reaching to the ground. The men colour their teeth red and black, which they esteem a comely thing. They anoint their bodies and hear with they oil of Cocus. Their boats are some all black, some white, and some red, and have sails made of the broad leaves of Date trees, sowed together. In the stead of a rudder, they use a certain broad board, with a staff in the top, and may when they will, make the stern the forecastle, or the forecastell the stern. They sail so swiftly, that they seem a far of, like Delphyns, swimming above the water.  
The tenth day of March, in the year .1521. they went aland upon a little Island named Zamal xxx leagues distant from the Island of thieves. 
The Island of zamall.  Because this Island was not inhabited, they rested here a while, where the captain caused a pavilion to be pitched for the sick & crazed men, and a hog to be killed.  
The xviii day of March, they saw a boat with nine men coming toward them, showing themselves joyful and rejoicing of their coming. They brought many presents with them, and seemed to be people of much humanity. They gave the Captain a great fish, and a great vessel of the wine of those Date trees which bear the fruit Cocus. 
Wine of Date trees.  They made also signs, that within the space of four days, they would bring Rise, and divers fowls and beasts, as they did in deed. This Cocus is a fruit of certain Date trees, 
The maruilous fruit Cocus.  whereof they make bread, wine, oil, and vinegar. They make wine in this manner. They cut a big branch of the tree, and hang thereat a reed as big as a man's leg, into the which droppeth a sweet liquor from the tree, like unto white wine, somewhat tart, and let the reed continue there from morning till evening, and from evening to morning. The fruit of this tree called Cocus, is as big as the head of a man, or more. The first rind of this, is green, and of the thickness of two fingers, having in it certain threads whereof they make cords, with the which they tie their boats. Under this rind, there is a thick shell, which they burn and make powder thereof, and use it as a remedy for certain diseases. Under this shell, is a white substance like the carnel of a Nut, being a finger in thickness, which they eat with flesh and fish, as we do bread. It hath the taste of an Almond, and is used in the stead of bread, when it is dried. In the midst of this carnel, is a clear and sweet water, being very wholesome and cordial. This water sometime coniealeth and lieth within the shell like an egg. When they intend to make oil hereof, the lay it to putrefy in water, and boil it until it be like oil or liquid butter. When they intend to make vinegar, they suffer only the water to putrefy, and then set it to the Sun, where it becometh vinegar, like unto that which is made of white wine. And when they mingle the carnel with the water which is in the midst of the fruit, and strain it through a cloth, they make a milk thereof, like unto goats milk. These Date trees are like unto them that bear Dates, but are not so full of knots. With the juice of two of these Date trees, a whole family of ten persons may be mentayned with wine, using one viii days, and the other, other viii days: for they should else be dried and withered. These trees continue for the space of a hundred years. This Island where they found this human and gentle people, 
The Island of zuluan.  is called Zuluan, and is not very big. About this Island they found many other Islands, 
The sea called Archipelago di san Lazaro.  and therefore named this sea Archipelago di San Lazaro, that is, the great sea of saint Lazarus, being ten degrees above the Equinoctial toward our pole, and C.lxi from the place from whence they departed. The people of this Island are Caphranita (that is Gentiles. They go naked, 
Gentiles.  saving that they cover their privy parts with a cloth made of the rind of a certain tree. The chiefest men, have about their heads a silken cloth of needle work. They are gross and broad set, and of the colour of an olive. They anoint their bodies with the oil of Cocus, to defend them against the heat of the Sun, and dryness of the wind. The xxv day of March, they departed from hence, and directed their course beteweene the West and south-west, and sailed between four Islands, named Cenalo, Huinanghan, Hibusson, and Abarien▪ etc.  
The xxviii day of March, 
Four islands.  they came to the Island of Buthuan, where they were honourably entertained of the King and the Prince his son, 
The Island of Buthuan.  who gave them much gold and spices. The Captain gave the King a vesture of red cloth, and an other of yellow, made after the turkish fashion, and also a red cap: and gave likewise to other that came with him certain knives, glasses, and beads of Crystal. After that the Captain had showed the King the secrets of his ship, and such merchandise as he had therein, he caused a piece of ordinance suddenly to be shot of, whereat the king was greatly amazed, until the Captain comforted him. Then the Captain commanded one of his men to be armed from the head to the foot, and caused three other to strike him with their swords, whereat the king marveled greatly, and said to th'interpreter (who was a slave borne in Malacha) that one of those armed men was able to encounter with a hundred of his men. But he marveled much more, when the Captain told him by th'interpreter, how he found the straight by the compass and load stone, and how many days they were without sight of any land. Then asking licence to departed, the Captain sent two of his men with him, of that which Antony Pigafetta was one. When the king saw Antony Pigafetta write the names of many things, and afterward rehearsed them again, he marveled yet more, making signs that such men descended from heaven. The king brought them first to his palace, where he entertained them honourably, and gave them many gifts, as did also the Prince in his palace, being in an other Island named Caleghan. 
The Island of Caleghan.   
As they sifted a certain mine of earth in the kings Island, they found pieces of gold, some as big as Nuts, and other as big as Eggs. All the kings vessels were of gold, and his house well furnished. In all the whole nation there was no man of comelyer parsonage than the king: 
Plenty of gold.  he had his hear long down to his shoulders, and very black, with a vail of silk rolled about his head, 
The king of Buthuan.  and two great rings of gold hanging at his ears. He had about his middle, a cloth wrought of cotton and silk, impaled with gold, and reaching down to his knees. On his one side, he had a long dagger with a haft of gold, and the sheath of a fair kind of carved wood. He had on every finger three rings of gold, and had his body anointed with oil of storax and Benjamin. The natural colour of his face was like unto the colour of an Olive: and all his body beside painted with divers colours. The kings name was Raia Colambu, and the prince was called Raia Siagu.  
The last day of March, near unto Easter, the Captain caused his priest to say Mass, and sent to the king by the interpreter, that his coming a land at that time was not to dine with him, but only to hear Mass. The Captain came aland, with fifty of his men, in their best apparel, without weapons or harness, and all the residue well armed. Before the boats came to land, he caused six pieces of ordinance to be shot of, in token of peace, and so came aland, where the two kings embraced him, and accompanied him to the place appointed for Mass to be said, not far from the sea side. Somewhat before the beginning of Mass, the Captain sprinkled the kings with Damask water. When the priest was at mid Mass, at the offertory, the kings proffered themselves to go to kiss the cross with the Captain, but offered nothing. At the time of sacring, when the priest lifted up the body of Christ, and the Christians kneeled down and held up their hands joined together, the kings did the like also, with great reverence. In the mean time, while certain of the Christians were at the Communion, a handgunne was shot of, to signify unto them that were in the ships to discharge all their ordinance. When Mass was finished, 
A combat.  the Captain caused certain of his men to put on their harness, and to make a combat with their naked swords, whereat the kings took great pleasure. This done, the Captain caused a cross to be brought forth, with nails, and a crown of thorns, giving commandment to all his men to give reverence thereunto, and signifying to the kings, by the interpreter, that that banner was given him by the Emperor his lord and master, with commandment to leave the same in all places where he came, to the great commodity and profit of all such as would reverendly receive it, as an assured token of friendship, and that he would therefore leave it there, aswell to accomplish his lords commandment, as also that if at any time any ships of Christians should chance to come that way, might by seeing that cross, perceive that our men had been well entertained there, and would therefore not only abstain from doing them any hurt or displeasure, but also help to aid them against their enemies: and that therefore it should be requisite to erect that cross upon the top of the highest mountain that might be seen from the sea on every side, also to pray unto it reverently: and that in so doing, they should not be hurt with thunder, lightening, and tempests. When the kings heard these words, they gave the captain great thanks, promising gladly to observe and fulfil all such things as he required. Then the Captain demanded, whether they were Moors or Gentiles: They answered, 
Moors and Gentiles.  that they had none other kind of religion, but that lifting up their hands joined together, and their faces toward heaven, they called upon their God Abba. Which answer liked the Captain very well, because the Gentiles are sooned persuaded to our faith then the moors.  
Departing from hence, they came to the Islands of Zeilon, Zubut, 
Mani islands.  Messana, and Calaghan, by the conduct of certain Pilots of the said kings. Of these, Zubut is the best, and hath the trade of best traffic. 
The Island of Messana.  In the Island of Messana they found Dogs, Cats, Hogs, Hens, Goats, Rise, ginger, Cocus, Mill, Panic, Barley, figs, Oranges, Wax, and Gold, in great quantity. This Island is above the Equinoctial toward our pole niene degrees, & two third parts, and 162. degrees from the place from whence they departed. They remained in this Island for the space of eight days, and then directed their voyage toward the Northwest, and passed between these five Islands, Zeilon, Bohol, Canghu, Barbai, and Catighan. In this Island of Catighan are certain great Bats, as big as Eagles, 
Bats as big as Eagles.  of the which they took one: they are good to be eaten, and of taste much like a Hen. There are also Stock Doves, Turtle Doves, Popingays, & certain fowls as big as Hens: 
Fowls with horns.  these fowls have little horns, & lay great eggs, which they cover a cubit depth in the sand, by the heat whereof, & virtue of the Son, they are hatched, & the young birds creep out of the sand by themselves. 
Eggs hatched in sand.  From the Island of Messana to Catinghan, are 20. leagues sailing toward the West. And because the king of Messana could not follow the ships, they tarried for him about the Islands of Polo, Ticobon, and Fozon, where the Captain took him into his ship, with certain of his principal men, 
The Island of zubut.  and so followed their voyage toward the Island of Zubut, which is about fifty leagues distant from Catighan.  
The seventh day of Apryll, about noon, they entered into the port of Zubut: And passing by many villages and habitations in trees, they came to the city, where the Captain gave commandment to the mariners to strike their sails, and to set themselves in order in manner of battle ray, causing all the ordinance to be shot of, wherewith all the people were put in great fear. After this, the Captain sent an ambassador with th'interpreter to the king of Zubut.  
When they approached near to the city, they found the king with a great company of men sore astonied at the noise of the guns. But th'interpreter advertised them, that it was the custom of our men, in all such places where they come, to discharge their ordinance in token of friendship, and to honour the lord of the city. With which words the king and his company were well quieted. After this, the interpreter declared that his master was the Captain of the ships of the greatest Prince in the world, and that they went to discover the Islands of Molucca: And further, that hearing of his good name and fame by the report of the king of Messana, they determined to visit him, & to have victuals for exchange of their merchandise. The king answered, that he was well content therewith, and that they were heartily welcome: Nevertheless, that it was a custom in that place, that all such ships as entered into that haven, should pay tribute: And that there were not many days past, sense a ship laden with gold and slaves did so pay. In token whereof, he caused to come before him certain merchants of that company which yet remained with him. 
A ship laden with gold and slaves.  To this th'interpreter answered, that forasmuch as his lord was the Captain of so mighty a Prince, he never paid tribute to any king in the world, and would not now begin: Willing him to take this for a resolute answer, that if he would accept the peace that was proffered him, he should enjoy it, and if he rather desired war, he should have his hands full. When th'interpreter had said these words, one of the said merchants (who was a Moor) spoke to the king in this manner Catacaia Chitae: that is, Take heed syr: 
calicut. Malacha.  For these men are they that have conquered calicut, Malacha, and all the greater India, and are of such power, that if you entreat them otherwise then well, you may to late know what they are able to do, more than they have done at calicut and Malaca. When th'interpreter heard these words, he said, that the king his Lord was of much greater puissance and more dominions, and lord of more ships than was the king of Portugal: declaring further that he was king of Spain, and Emperor of all Christendom. Adding hereunto, that if he would not be his friend, he would hereafter send thither such a power of armed men as should destroy his country. The Moor conferred all these words with the king, who said that he would further deliberate with his counsel, and give them a full answer the day following. In the mean time he sent them certain victuals and wine. When all these things were declared to the king of Messana, who was the chiefest thereabout next unto him, and lord of many Islands, he went a land and repaired to the king of Zubut, and declared unto him the great humanity and courtesy of the general Captain. Shortly after, the Captain sent certain of his men with th'interpreter to the king of Zubut, to know his pleasure, and what answer he would make them. As they went toward the court, they met the king coming in the street, accompanied with many of his chief men. He caused our men to sit down by him, and demanded of them if there were any more than one Captain in their company: and whether it were their request that he should pay tribute to Themperor. They answered, that they desired none other thing, but that they might exercise merchandise with them, and to barter ware for ware. The king made answer, that he was well content therewith: 
Sheadding of blood is a token of friendship.  willing the Captain, in token of friendship, to send him a little blood of his right arm, affirming that he would do the like etc.  
After this, the king of Messana, with the king of Zubut his nephew (who was the prince) and certain other of his gentlemen, 
The king of zubut is baptized.  came to the ships, and brought the Captain many goodly presents. They entered into great amity, and had large communication of many things. The Captain persuaded them to the Christian faith: which they gladly embraced, and took such pleasure in hearing the articles of our belief, that the tears fell from their eyes for joy. They were baptized, and shortly after all the people of the Island. They esteem nothing more precious than drinking glasses of Venice work. When they came to the city, they found the king in his Palace sitting upon a floor or story made of the leaves of Date trees, wrought after a curious devise, like a certain kind of mats. He had upon his body none other apparel but only a cloth of Bombasine cotton, hanging before his privy parts. 
The king of Zabut his apparel.  On his head, he had a veil of needle work, and about his neck a chain of great price. At his ears, hung two rings of gold, wherein were enclosed many precious stones. He was but of small stature, but somewhat gross, and had the residue of his body painted with divers colours, whereof some were like unto flaming fire. Before him, he had two vessels made of the fine earth called Porcellana, with sodden eggs. Also four vessels of Porcellana full of wine made of Date trees, and covered with many odoriferous herbs. The Prince brought them to his house, where he had four daughters, 
Well favoured women.  very well favoured and white, like ours. He caused them to dance all naked, and therewith to sing, and play on certain Tymbrelles made of metal. At this time it so chanced, that one of the spaniards died in one of the ships, and when certain of their company desired the king to give them leave to bury him on the land: he answered, that forasmuch as he and all his, were at the commandment of their king and master, how much more ought the ground so to be? They greatly marveled at the ceremonies pertaining to the manner of our funerals, and honoured the crosses which were set at both the ends the grave. They live with justice, and use weights and measures. Their houses are made of Timber and sawn boards, and are so builded above the ground upon props and piles, that they ascend to the same by certain stairs. Under their houses, they keep their Hogs and Hens.  
When they came to bartering, they gave gold, Rise, 
Bartering.  Hogs, Hens, and divers other things for some of our trifles of small value. They gave ten Pesos of gold for sixtiene pounds weight of Iron. One Pesus is in value a ducat and a half. The Sunday following, 
Pesus what it is.  the king was baptized with great solemnity: at which time, the Captain admonished him before, not to be afraid at the shooting of of the ordinance, because it was their custom so to do at such solemn feasts. After this, 
They break their Idols and erect the Crosse.  the Captain caused them to break all their Idols, and to set up the cross in divers places, praying to the same both morning and evening kneeling on their knees, and holding up their hands joined together. The king in his baptism was named Charles, after the emperors name, and the Prince, Ferdinando, after the name of his majesties brother. The king of Messana was named john, & the Moor Christopher. To all other they gave such names as are commonly used in Christendom. 
five hundred men baptized.  And thus before mass was begun, were five hundred men baptized. When mass was finished, the Captain invited the King to dine with him in his ship, and at his coming, caused the ordinance to be discharged. The Queen was also baptized, 
The Queen of Zabut.  with forty of her gentlewomen, and her daughter the prince's wife. The Queen was very young and fair, having her body covered with a white cloth. Her lips were red, and she had on her head a Hat, on the top whereof was a triple crown, much like the Popes: this crown and the Hat, were made of the leaves of Date trees. Within the space of eight days, the inhabitants of the Island were baptized, except one village of idolaters, who would not herein obey the kings commandment. Whereupon the Captain sent certain of his men thither, who burned the town, and erected a cross in that place, because the people of the village were gentiles (that is) Idolaters. But if they had been Moors (that is, Machumetistes) they would have erected a pillar of stone, because the moors are more stubborn and harder to be converted then are the gentiles. When the Queen came to the place where she should hear mass, she came forth with great pomp and solemnity, 
The Queen's apparel.  having going before her three young damosels, and three men with their Caps in their hands, whom she followed appareled in white and black, with a great veil of silk upon her head, fringed about with gold, which covered her hat, and hung down to her shoulders: She had also a great train of women following her, being all barefooted and naked, except that upon their heads and privy parts they wore certain veils of silk, and had their hear spread.  
Before the king of Zubut was baptized, he was named Raia Humabuon. When the Captain demanded of him why all the Idols in the Island were not burnt according to his promise, he answered, that they esteemed them no more as gods, but only made sacrifice to them for the Prince's brother, who was very sick, and as noble and witty a man as was in the Island. The Captain answered, that if he would burn all his Idols, and believe faithfully in Christ, and be baptized, he should be immediately restored to health, and that he would else give them leave to strike of his head. By these words and persuasions of the Captain, he conceived such hope of health, that after he was baptized he felt no mare grief of his disease. And this was a manifest miracle wrought in our time, 
A miracle.  whereby divers Infidels were converted to our faith, and their Idols destroyed, and also their Altars overthrown on the which they were accustomed to eat the sacrificed flesh. The people of the Island pay the king a portion of victuals for their tribute by all their cities and villages.  
Not far from this Island of Zubut, is the Island of Mathan, 
The Island of Mathan.  whose inhabitants use marvelous ceremonies in their sacrifices to the son, and burying the dead. They wear rings of gold about their privy members. The Island is governed by two Princes, whereof the one is named Zula, and the other Cilapulapu. And whereas this Cilapulapu refused to pay tribute to the king of Spain, the Captain went against him in his own person with .60. of his men, armed with coats of mail and Helmets. Cilapulapu divided his army into three battles, having in every battle two thousand & fifty men, with armed bows, arrows, darts, and javelins hardened at the points with fire. This continued long and sharp. But the Captain being a valiant man, 
The Captain Magellanus is slain.  and pressing himself in the brunt of the battle, was sore wounded and slain, forasmuch as the most of the Barbarians directed all their force against him. Beside the Captain, were slain of our men about viii or ix Of the Barbarians, were xu slain, & many sore wounded. After the death of the Captain, they chose two other in his place, of the which one was Odoardo Barbessa a Portugal, and the other john Serrano▪ who was shortly after betrayed by the interpreter, and taken prisoner with divers other.  
Certain days before the captains death, they had knowledge of the Islands of Molucca, which they chiefly sought. Departing therefore from the Island of Mathan, they sailed far, and came to the Cape of an other Island named Bohol. 

The Island of Bohol.  
They burned one of their ships.   In the midst of this main sea (which they named Archipelagus) they consulted to burn the ship named Conception, because they were now few in number, and to furnish the other two ships with the artillery thereof. Thus directing their course toward south-west, they came to an other Island named Paviloghon, 
Black men.  where they found black men, like unto the Saracens. Shortly after, they arrived at an other great Island, whose king, named Raia Calavar, entreated them very friendly in all things, as did the king of Massana. This Island is rich in gold, 
The Island of Chippit.  and hath plenty of Rysse, ginger, Hogs, Goats, Hens, and divers other things: It is named Chippit, and is viii. degrees above the Equinoctial line toward our pole, and in longitude from the place from whence they first departed .170. degrees, and about .50. leagues from Zubut.  

The Island of Caghaian.  Departing from hence, they came to an other Island, named Caghaian, being .40. leagues from Chippit, as they sailed between the West and south-west. This Island is very great, and in manner unhabited. The people are moors, and were banished out of the Island of Burnei, which some call Porne.  
From this Island about xxv leagues between the West and Northweste, they found a marvelous fruitful Island named Pulaoan, 
The Island of Pulaoan.  being toward our pole above the Equinoctial niene degrees and a third part, and. C.lxxix. degrees and a third part in longitude from the place of their departing.  
From this Island ten leagues toward the south-west, they saw an other Island, 
The Island of Burnei or Porne.  which seemed to them sometimes to mount as they sailed by the coasts thereof. As they were entering into the port, there arose a boystuous & dark tempest, which ceased assoon as the fires of the three saints (whereof we have spoken before) appeared upon the cables. From the beginning of this Island to the port, are five leagues. This Island is great and rich, 
A great city.  and the chief city thereof containeth xxv thousand houses. The King entertained our men very friendly, and sent them, beside many other presents, two Elephants, trapped with silk, 
Elephants.  to bring them to his Palace that brought the presents which the captains sent him. He hath a magnifical Court, and a great guard, also a multitude of concubines. He is a Moor, and is named Raia Siripada. He is a king of great power, and hath under him many other kings, islands, and cities. This Island of Burnei, is above the Equinoctial toward our pole, five degrees and a quarter, and in longitude from the place of their departing. C.lxxvi. degrees, and two third parts.  
Departing from Burnei, they came to an Island called Cimbulon, being viii degrees above the Equinoctial line. 
The Island of Cimbulon.  here they remained xl days, to calk their ships, and furnish them with fresh water and fuel, which was to them great pain and travail, because they were in manner all bare footed, their shoes (and in manner their other apparel) being worn, by reason of the long viage. In the woods of this Island, they found a tree, 
Leaves of trees which seem to live.  whose leaves as soon as they fall on the ground, do stir and remove from place to place, as though they were alive: they are much like the leaves of a Mulberry tree, and have on every side as it were two short & blunt feet. When they are cut or broken, there is no blood seen come forth of them: Yet when any of them are touched, they suddenly move and start away. Antoni Pigafetta kept one of them in a platter for the space of viii days, and ever when he touched it, it ran round about the platter. He supposeth that they live only by air.  
Departing from hence, they directed their course by the West quarter toward the Southeast, to find the Islands of Molucca, and sailed not far from certain mountains, where they found the sea full of great weeds and herbs. 
A sea full of weeds.   
From hence, they came to the Islands of Zolo and Taghima, in the which are found pearls of exceeding bigness. 
Pearls.   
Following their course toward the North-east, they came to a great city named Mangdando, lying above the Islands of Butbuan and Calaghan, where they took a Canoa of certain of the inhabitants: by whom being informed of the Islands of Molucca, they left their course toward the North-east, and followed the Southeast, near unto a Cape of the Island of Buthuan: they were advertised for certainty, that on the banks of a certain river, there dwelled men overgrown with hear, 
Men overgrown with hear.  and of high stature.  
Following still their course by the Southeast, and passing by many small Islands, 
The Islands of Molucca.  they came to the Islands of Molucca, the sixth day of November, and the xxvii month after their departure out of Spain. Being therefore joyful, and giving thanks unto God, they discharged all their ordinance. In the coast of all these Islands, even unto the Islands of Molucca, sounding with their plummet, they found the depth of the sea to be no less than a hundred and two yards, which is contrary to the saying of the Portugals, 
The Portugals are reproved.  who affirm that no ship can pass that way without great danger, by reason of the shalownesse and rocks or shelves, and for the darkness which the clouds cause in the heaven. All which things they feigned, to the intent that none other should have knowledge of their viages.  
The eight day of November, in the year 1521. before the rising of the Sun, they entered into the port of the Island of Tidore, 
Tidore one of the Islands of Molucca.  being one of the chief Islands of Molucca, where they were honourably interteyned of the king, who declared that he had long before seen a sign in heaven, that certain ships should come from a far country to the Islands of Molucca: And that whereas for the better certificate thereof, 
A vision in the planets.  he considered the stations of the Moon, he saw therein the coming of our ships, and that we were the men whom he seemed to see in the same. Whereupon he proffered himself to enter into league of friendship with the king of Spain, and to accept our men as his brethren and children, willing them to come aland as into their own houses: Also, that for their coming, that Island should no more be called Tidore, but Castille, for the great love which he bore to their King, whom he reputed as his Lord and master. This King is a Moor, and is named Raia Sultan, Mauzor.  
The Islands of Molucca, are five in number, and are thus named, 
The five Islands of Molucca.  Tarenate, Tidore, Mutir, Macchian, and Bacchian. Of these, Tarenate is the chiefest.  

Tarenate.  Directly against the Island of Tidore, there is an other great Island, 
The Island of Gilolo.  named Gilolo, inhabited of moors and Gentiles. The moors have two Kings, 
Moors and gentiles.  of the which one hath six hundred children, and the other six hundred and fifty. The gentiles keep not so many women as do the moors, nor yet live in such superstitions. They pray to the first thing that they meet in the morning when they go forth of their houses, and honour that as their God for that day. The King of the gentiles is very rich in gold. In the said Island of Gilolo, 
Gold. Water in Reeds.  are Reeds as big as a man's leg, and full of clear water wholesome to be drunk.  
The xii day of November, the king of Tidore appointed our men a warehouse in the city, where they might sell their merchandise. Their manner of exchange was in this sort. 
Their manner of bartering.  For ten yards of good red cloth, they had one Babar of Cloves, which amounteth to four Cantari and six pound weight: And one Cantar is a hundred pound weight. For xu yards of cloth somewhat worse than the other, they received in Cambie, one Bahar. For xxxv drinking cups of glass, they had one Bahar. For xvii Cathyls of quick silver, one Bahar. They came daily to the ships with many of their Barks full of Goats, Hens, figs of a span long, also the fruit called Cocus, with divers other kinds of victuals, in such quantity that it was a marvelous thing to behold. 
Water of a strange quality.  They furnished also their ships with fresh water, which is hot as it issueth out of the spring, but is very cold when it hath stood a while in an other place. It springeth from the mountains on the which the clove trees grow. They saw a cloud rise in manner daily, which compasseth about the said mountains.  
The king of the Island of Bacchian, 
Birds of a strange form.  sent the king of Spain two dead birds of strange form. They were of the bigness of Turtle doves, with little heads and long bills: also long and small legs, and no wings, but in the steed thereof certain long feathers of divers colours, and tails like Turtle doves: all the other feathers are of one colour, much like unto tawny, except those of the wings: they flee not but when the wind bloweth. These moors are of opinion that these birds come from the heavenly paradise, and therefore call them Manuccodiata, that is, the birds of God.  
When they were determined to depart from the Islands of Molucca, certain kings of the Islands accompanied them with their Canoas', and conducted them to an Island called Mare, where they refreshed their ships with fresh water and fuel. The kings sent the emperors majesty many presents: and embracing our men, departed with the tears in their eyes, and our men for their last farewell, shot of all their ordinance. When in the Island of Mare, they perceived that one of their ships leaked and took water very sore, 
They leave one of their ships behind them.  whereby they were enforced to tarry there three days: But seeing that they could find no remedy for the same, but in long time, they determined to leave it, giving order that if afterward it could be repaired, they should return into Spain as well as they could.  

The Islands of Molucca.  In all the Islands of Molucca is found Cloves, Ginger, bread of the root of Sagu, Rise, Goats, sheep, Hens, Figs, Almonds, sweet Pomegranates and sour, Oranges, Lemondes, 
Honey of flies.  and honey, which is made of certain flies less than Ants: Also canes of sugar, oil of Cocus, Melons, Gourds, and a marvelous cold fruit which they name Camulicai, and divers other fruits. 
popinjays.  Furthermore, white and red popinjays, and other of variable colours. It is not passed fifty years since the moors first inhabited any of these Islands, which were before inhabited only with Gentiles.  

The Island of Tidore.  The Island of Tidore, is above the Equinoctial line toward our pole about .27. minutes, and in longitude from the place from whence they departed .171. degrees, and from the Archipelagus, in the which is the Island of Zamal, which our men named the Island of thieves ix degrees and a half, and runneth to the quarter of South south-west, and North north-east. Terenate, 
Terenate.  is under the Equinoctial line four minutes, under the pole Antarctic. 
Mutir.  Mutir, is directly under the Equinoctial line. Macchian is xu minutes toward the pole Antarctic, and Bacchian one degree. 
Macchian.  These islands are like iiii. sharp mountains, except Macchian, 
Bacchian.  which is not sharp. The biggest of all these, is Bacchian. Departing from the Island of Mare, and directing their course toward the south-west, with only xlvi men in their ship, and xiii Indians, they passed by the Islands of Chacovan, 
Many islands  Lagoma, Sico, Gioghi, Caphi, Sulacho, Lumatola, Ten●tum, Bu●u, Ambon, Budia, Celaruri, Benaia, Ambalao, Bandon, Zorobua, Zolot, Nocevamor, Galian, and Mallua, with divers other islands both great and small, of moors, Gentiles, and Canibales. 
The Island of Mallua.  Our men remained xu days in the Island of Mallua, to repair their ship in certain places where it took water. All the fields of this Island is full of long and round Pepper, and is situate toward the pole Antarctic under the Equinoctial line viii degrees and a half, 
Pepper.  and is in the longitude of .169. degrees and .40. minutes.  
The Pilot, which our men brought out of the Islands of Molucca, 
Little men with long ears.  told them that not far from thence was an Island named Arucetto, in the which are men and women not past a cubit in height, having ears of such bigness, that they lie upon one, and cover them with the other. But our men would not sail thither, both because the wind and course of the sea was against them, and also for that they gave no credit to his report. The xxv day of januarie in the year .1522. they departed from Mallua, and the day following, 
The Island of Timor.  arrived at a great Island named Timor, being five leagues distant from Mallua between the south and south-west. In this Island is found the wood of white Saunders and ginger, 
White Saunders and Gynger.  and divers kinds of fruits. Also sundry kinds of beasts, and plenty of victual and gold. They of the Islands of Giava, Molucca, and Lozon, resort to this Island for Saunders. The inhabitants are gentiles. 
The devil appeareth.  They say that when they go to cut the wood of Saunders, the devil appeareth to them in divers forms, and asketh them what they have need of: And that after this vision, many of them are long sick. In all the islands of this Archipelagus, 
Saint job his disease.  raineth the disease of saint job (which we call the french pox) more than in any other place in the world.  
far from this Island between the west and northwest, they came to an Island named Eude, in the which groweth great plenty of Cinnamon. 
Cinamome, The Islands of Giana.  In this tract are found many Islands, lying in order as it were one directly behind an other even unto the Island of the greater Giava, named Giava maior, 
Malaccha.  and unto the cape of Malacha, being in East India. Giava the less, is as big as the Island of Madera, and is but half a league distant from Giava maior. Here they were informed that above Giava mayor toward the north, is a great gulf called the gulf of China, in the which are trees of exceeding byggnesse, inhabited with fowls of such greatness, 
The great gulf of China.  that they carry great beasts in the air. The fruits of these trees are as big as Cucummers. The cape of Malacha, is one degree and a half above the Equinoctial line toward the pole Arctic. 
The cape of Malacha.  On the east side of this cape, runneth a very long coast, in the which are many regions & cities, whereof some are called by these names, Cingaporla, which is the cape. 
The names of many regions.  Also Pahan, Calantan, Patani, Braalin, Benu, Longon, and Odia, wherein is the city in the which dwelleth the king of Sian named Zacabedera. Their cities are builded as ours are, and subject to the king of Sian. After the realm of Sian, are the regions of jamgoma, 
Rhubarb.  and Campaa, where rhubarb groweth, of the which are divers opinions, some supposing it to be a root, and other a putrefied tree, affirming that if it were not putrefied, it should not have so great a savour. They call it Calama. Next unto this, is found the great China, whose king is thought to be the greatest prince in the world, 
The great king of China.  and is named Santoa Raia. Furthermore, all that is written hereafter of this king and these regions, they learned by th'information of a Moor that was in the Island of Timor. He affirmed that the said king hath threescore and ten crowned kings under his empire, and hath a port in the sea named Canthan, and two principal cities named Nauchin and Connulaha, where he remaineth himself, and hath ever four of his chief princes lying about his palace on every side, toward the east, west, north, and south, giving diligent attendance what is done in every of their quarters. 
The greater India.  All the princes of the greater India (called India Mayor) and of that whereof I have spoken before, are obedient to this king. And in token that they are true subjects, they keep in their palaces, which are in the midst of their cities, 
The beast called Linx.  the beast called Linx, being fairer than a Lion, and is the great kings signet, which all such as intend to go to China, bear with them sealed in wax, or on a piece of ivory, for their safe conduct, without the which they may not enter into the haven.  
When any of his kings rebel or are disobedient, he causeth them to be flayen, and salted, and dried at the Sun, then to be stuffed with chaff, 
The punishment of rebels.  and set up on some high thing in the midst of the chief street of the city, where all the people may see it. He never suffereth his own person to be openly seen to any man: But when his noble men of the court are desirous to see him, 
The king is not seen but at a glass.  he cometh down from his palace into a rich pavilion, accompanied with six of his principal concubines, appareled with like vestures as he himself is. All this way he is not seen, by reason of the pavilion. When he hath passed through the pavilion, he entereth into a Serpent, named Nagha, being the most marvelous and rich work of the world, 
A thing of strange workmanship.  and placed in the greatest court of the palace. When the king entereth into this with the women, to the intent that he may not be known among them, he causeth the said noble men only to look in at a glass which is in the breast of the Serpent, where they see the king among the women, but can not discern which is he. He joineth in marriage with his sister, that the blood royal be not mixed with any other. 
The king marrieth his sister. His palace.  His palace is environed with seven large walls, the one being far distant from the other, and hath in every such circuit ten thousand men for the garrison of his palace, 
A marvelous guard.  who have their waiting days appointed them course by eourse, with fresh men in their places, and thus keep their watch continually both day and night. In this palace are lxxix haules, in the which is an infinite number of women that serve the king, 
Women serve the king.  having ever light torches in their hands for the greater magnificence. He that would see all the palace, should spend a whole day therein. Among other, there are four principal haules, 
Four marvelous haulles.  where sometimes the king giveth audience to his noble men. Of these, one is covered both above and beneath with metal, an other all over with silver, the third with gold, and the fourth with pearls & precious stones. These people of China, are white men, apparelled as we are, and eat their meat on tables as we do. They have the cross in some estimation, 
The people of China.  but know not the cause why. Beyond the coast of China, are divers other nations and people, as Cheneby, where Pearls and Sinamonie are found: also the people named Lickij, where reigneth the great king of Mien, having under him xxii kings, and is subject to the king of China. Here is also found the great city of Cathay▪ 
The great king of Mien. Cathay.  in the East, and divers other nations in the said firm land, of the which some are bruityshe, and bestial, which use to kill and eat their parents when they be old, thinking thereby that they shall revive in them: All these people are gentiles.  
The xi day of February in the year .1522. they departed from the Island of Timos, and were engulfed by chance in the great sea called Lantchidol, 
The sea of Lantchidol.  and took their course between the west and south-west, leaving the north coasts on their right hand, fearing lest if they should sail toward the firm land, they might be seen of the Portugals, 
Malacha.  who are of great power in Malacha: 
The Island of Sumetra.  and therefore directed their course without the Island of Sumatra, called in old time Taprobana, leaving also on their right hand, 
Pegu.  
Bangala. calicut. Canonor. Coa. Cambala. Ormus. East India. Cap. de Buona Speranza.  upon the firm land, the provinces and regions of Pegu, Bengala, calicut, Canonor, Coa, Cambaia, the gulf of the Island of Ormus, and all the coasts of the greater India. And more safely to pass the cape of Buona Speranza, being above Africa, they sailed about xlii degrees toward the pole Antarctic, & remained seven weeks about that cape, with many fetches compassing the wind with their sails continually aloft, because they had a west and northwest wind in the proos of their ship, which would not suffer them to pass. The cape of Buona Speranza, is toward the pole Antarctic, beneath the Equinoctial line .34. degrees and a half, and .1600. leagues from the cape of Malacha, and is the greatest and most dangerous cape that is found at this day in all the world.  
When they had by these perils overpassed this cape, certain of them, aswell for lack of victuals, as also by reason of sickness, were minded to sail to a haven of the Portugals named Monzambique, above africa: But the other answered, that they would rather die, 
The port of Monzambique.  then go to any other place then directly to Spain. They followed their course therefore, sailing toward the south-west, two months continually without touching at any port, in which time there died about xxi of their company, whom they cast into the sea. And surely if God of his infinite mercy had not preserved the residue in time, they had all died of famyn.  
In fine, being enforced of necessity, and half of their company dead, they sailed to one of the Islands of Capo verde, called Insula Sansti jacobi, that is, saint james Island, pertaining to the king of Portugal. Where, as soon as they arrived, they sent certain a land in the ship boat for victuals, declaring to the Portugals with all love and favour what necessity they were driven to, and what miseries and travails they had sustained, infourming them furthermore of their marvelous voyage, and such things as they had seen in both the East and West India, with such other gentle words, 
The ingratitude of the Portugals.  whereby they obtained certain measures of Rise. But when afterward xiii. of them returned for more Rise, they were detained: whereupon the rest which remained in the ship, fearing the like chance, departed with full sails, and the vii day of September with the help of God entered into the haven of San Lucar near unto Seville, 
The port of S. Lucar near unto Sivile.  where discharging all their ordinance for joy, they went immediately to the great church in their shiertes, and barefooted, with a torch before them, to give thanks to almighty God, who had brought them safe to their own country, and restored them to their wives and children. As touching the end of this voyage, Transiluanus writeth somewhat more largely, as followeth.  
The other ship which they left behind them to be repaired, returned afterward by the Archipelagus afore said, 
What became of the other ship. Dariena.  and by the great sea to the coasts of the firm of the West India, and arrived at a region of the same being against Dariena, where the South sea of Sur is separate but by a little space of land from the west Ocean, in the which are the islands of Hispaniola & Cuba, and other Islands of the spaniards. The other ship which returned into Spain by compassing about the whole bowl of the world by the coasts of East India and Africa, departing from the Island of Tidore, 
The Cape of Cattigara.  and sailing ever on this side the Equinoctial, did not find the cape of Cattigara, being about Asia, and (by the description of Ptolemy) reaching many degrees beyond the Equinoctial: But having sailed many days by the main sea, they came to the cape of Buona Speranza and from thence to the Islands of Capo verde, where their ship, being sore bruised by reason of the long voyage, leaked and took water, in such sort that the mariners, being now but few in number, 
The voyage, hardly performed.  and those also weak and feeble by reason of long sickness & hunger, were not able both to dry the pomp continually, and otherwise govern the ship, and were therefore of necessity enforced to go aland at the Island of saint james, to buy them certain slaves to help them. 
They buy slaves for lack of help.  But being destitute of money, according to the custom of the mariners, they proffered them cloves for their slaves. The which thing when it came to the ears of the Portugal that was Captain of that Island, he cast xiii of them in prison: Whereby the residue that remained in the ship (being now but xviii in number) were put in such fear, that they departed immediately without rescuing their fellows, & sailed continually both by day & by night by the coasts of Africa, & came in fine to Spain that vi day of September in the year of our lord .1522. and arrived at the port near unto Seville the xvi month after they departed from the Island of Tidore. Mariners doubtless more worthy to be celebrated with eternal memory than they which in old time were called Argonauti, 
Mariners worthy immortal fame.  that sailed with jason to win the golden fleece in the region of Colchis & the river of Phasis in the great sea of Pontus. And the ship itself, more worthy to be placed among the stars, than that old Argo, which departing out of Grecia, sailed to the end of that great sea. For this our marvelous ship, taking her voyage from the straights of Gibelterra, and sailing by the great Ocean toward the South and pole Antarctic, and turning from thence to the West, followed that course so far, that passing under the great circumference of the world, she came into the East, and from thence again into the West, not by returning backward, but still sailing forward, so compassing about the ball of the world under the whole circumference of heaven, until she were miraculously restored to her native region of Spain, and house of Seville.    

¶ The debate and strife between the spaniards and Portugals, for the Division of the Indies, and the trade of spices, and also for the Islands of Molucca, which some call Malucas. Written in the Spanish tongue by Francisco Lopes de Gomara.  
THe emperors majesty was very glad that the Malucas and Islands of the Spycery were discovered, and that he might pass unto them through his own countries, without any prejudice or hurt to the Portugals: and because also that Almanzor, Lusfu, and Corala, which were the lords of the Spycerie, showed themselves to be his friends, 
john Sebastian.  and became tributaries to him. He also gave certain gifts and rewards to john Sebastian for his great pains and good service, forasmuch as he craved a reward for the good news that the Islands of the Malucas, and other Islands richer and greater than they, were found to be in his part of those countries which pertained unto him, according to the Popes Bull. And hereby it came to pass, that there was great contention and strife between the spaniards and the Portugals, about the Spycery, and the division of the Indies, by reason of the return of john Sebastian, and the information which he gave thereof: who also affirmed, that the Portugals had never any entrance before that time into those Islands. Hereupon the counsel for the Indies advertised the Emperor to maintain his fleet for those parts, and to take the trade of spices into his own hand, 
The trade of spices pertaineth to Themperor.  forasmuch as it was his own of duty, aswell for that those Islands fell on his part, as also that he had now found passage and way through his West Indies into those regions: and finally, to consider that he should thereby obtain and get to himself great revenues, beside the inryching of his subjects and realms, and that with small cost and charge. The Emperor, being thus advertised of the truth, took it for good counsel, & commanded all things hereunto appertaining to be furnished accordingly. In this mean time, 
john king of Portugal.  when king john of Portugal had knowledge what the Emperor determined to do, and the speedy haste his counsel made for the performance hereof, and of the coming home of john Sebastian of Cane, with th'information he made, what of stoutness of mind, and what for grief, was puffed up with anger, as were also the rest of the Portugals, storming as though they would have plucked down the sky with their hands, not a little fearing lest they should lose the trade of Spices, if the spaniards should once put in their foot. Whereupon the king immediately made supplication to the Emperor, not to set forward any ships, until it were determined to whether of them those Islands should belong: and that he would not so much endamage him, as to cause him to lose the trade of spices, which was so cominodious and profitable to him: 
The trade of Spices.  and finally, to avoid the occasion of murder and bloodshed, which were like to ensue thereof, if the spaniards and Portugals ships should meet together. The Emperor, although he knew that all this was but to make delays, and prolonging of time, yet was he glad to have it tried by justice, for the better justification of his cause and right. In fine, both parties were agreed to appoint learned men, 
The controversy determined by Cosmographers and Pilots.  Cosmographers and Pilottes, which should determine the controversy between them: promising on both parties to abide and stand to the sentence & determination made by those persons, appointed and sworn to judge indifferently.  

The Repartition and division of the Indies and new world, between the Spaniards and the Portugals.  
THis matter concerning the trade of Spices, and the new world of the Indies, by reason of the great riches thereof, was of great importance, and very difficult to be limited, and drawn forth by lines. By reason whereof, it was necessary and convenient to seek wise and worshipful men, expert in Navigations, 
The arbytrers on the emperors side.  in cosmography, and the Mathematical sciences. The Emperor for his side chose and named, for judges of the possession, the Licentiate Acuna, one of the kings counsel, also the Licentiate Barrientos, of the counsel of the orders, the licentiate Petro Manuel, Auditor of the court of the Chancery in Valladolith. For judges of the property, he chose Don Fernando Colono, the son of Christopher Colonus: Also Doctor Sancho Salaya, Peter Ruiz of Villegas, Friar Thomas Duran, Simon of Alcazava, and john Sebastian of Cano. His advocate and Attorney, he made the licentiate john Rodriguez of Pisa: and for his fyscall Doctor Ribera, and his Secretary, Barthalome Ruiz of Castaneda. He also appointed that Sebastian Cabote, 
Sebastian Cabote.  Steven Gomes, Nunnio Gracia, Diego Rivero, being all expert Pilottes, and cunning in making cards for the sea, should be present, and bring forth their Globes and Maps, 

Instruments of cosmography.  
The Islands of Maluca.   with other instruments necessary to declare the situation of the Islands of the Malucas, about the which was all the contention & strife. But order was taken, that they should show their minds on neither side, nor enter into the company of the other, but when they were called. All these, and divers other, went together to a town called Badaioz: and as many Portugals came to Elbes, 
The Arbitrers on the Portugals side.  or rather more. For they brought with them two Fiscalles and two Advocates. The principal of them, was the licentiate Antony de Assevedo, Diego Lopes of Sequeyra, the Clerk of the weights and rece●ptes, who had before been governor in India. Also Peralfonso of Melo, Clarke, Simon of Tavira, with divers other, whose names I know not. Before they met together, the one part remaining at Badaioz, and the other in Elbes, there was much ado among them, before they could agree upon the place where they should meet, 
The place where they met.  and who should speak first: For the Portugals do greatly weigh such circumstances. At the last, they concluded to meet together at Caya, a little river which divideth Castille from Portugal, standing in the mid way between Badaioz and Elbes. And when they were assembled together one day at Badaioz, and an other day at Elbes, and saluted the one the other, both parties were sworn that they should proceed and speak according to truth, 
The order of their process.  justice, and equity. The Portugals refused Simon de Alcazava, because he was a Portugal, and Friar Thomas Duran, because he had sometime been Preacher to their King: So that Simon was by consent put out of the company, in whose room was placed master Antony of Alcaraz. Yet fell they not to reasoning the matter, until the Friar was put out. They were many days in beholding Globes, Maps, and Cards of the sea, and hearing what might be said, both sides alleging for the right which they pretended. 
The Portugals.  But the Portugals standing in vain contention, said very angrily, The Islands of Maluca, whereupon their meeting and reasoning was at that present, fell on their part, and was of their conquest: and that they both had been there, and had them in their possession before john Sebastian had ever seen them: 
Contention for drawing the line of the division.  Likewise that the line should be drawn from the Island of Bonavista, or the Island called de la Sal, which are the most Easterly Islands from Caboverde, and not from the Island of Santanton, or saint Antony, which lieth toward the West, and are. lxxxx. leagues the one from the other. All this was no more but to contend, and the other of the Malucas, is untrue: But they that have a naughty matter, must set it forth with words and brabbeling. Here they found how greatly they were deceived, 
How the Portugals were deceived.  in that they demanded that the line should be drawn three hundred threescore and ten leagues more to the West, from the Islands of Caboverde (as appeareth hereafter) and not one hundred, according to the assignment of the Popes Bull. 
The spaniards allegations.  The spaniards on the contrary part affirmed, and made demonstration, that not only the Islands of Lurney, Gilolo, Zubut, and Tidore, with the other Islands of the Malucas: but as well Samatra, Malacha, and a great part of China, 
Samatra. Malacha. China. Magallanes.  should belong to the Castilians, and that those countries fell on their side, and on the part of their conquest: Also, that Magallanes and john Sebastian were the first Christian men that found them, and obtained them for the Emperor, as the letters and presents of Almanzor do testify. And although the Portugals had been there first, yet went they thither after the donation of the Pope: neither got they any right or just title thereby. For although they should draw the line by Buena Vista, 
Buena Vista.  what inconvenience should follow thereof, sith as well by the one way as the other, the Islands of the Malucas must pertain to the Castilians? yea and moreover, the Islands of Caboverde should also pertain to the Castilians, 
The Islands of Cabo Verde.  forsomuch as drawing the line by Buena Vista, the Islands of the Malucas do remain within the line on the emperors side. They continued in these controversies for the space of two months, without any resolution or end made. For the Portugals prolonged and put of the matter, 
The Portugals cavillations.  fleeing from the sentence with cavillations and cold reasons, to the end that they might dissolve that assembly without any conclusion or determination: for so it stood them upon The Castilians which were the judges of the property, 
The line of division.  drew a line in the great globe three hundred and .70. leagues from saint Antony's Island, lying by West Cabo Verde, according to the entreaty and determination which was agreed upon, between the catholic Princes and the king of Portugal. These judges gave sentence upon this matter, 
The sentence.  calling the contrary part before them upon the bridge of Caya, in the year .1524. The Portugals could neither disturb or defer the sentence, nor yet would they allow it to be just, and according to right: Saying that there was not sufficient process made, that they should pass to the giving of sentence: and so departed, threatening to slay the Castilians, 
The Portugals threaten death to the Castilians.  as many as they should find in the Islands of the Malucas: For they knew right well that their countrymen the Portugals, had already taken the ship called the Trinity, and had also taken the Castilians in Tidore. Then also departed our men, taking their journey to the Court, giving up to the Emperor all their writings and declaration what they had done. And according to this declaration must be signed and marked all Globes and Maps which good Cosmographers & masters do make. The line also of the repartition and last division of the new world of the Indies, 
The line of the last division.  aught to pass (little more or less) by the points of Humos and Buen Abrigo, as I have said in an other place. And thus shall it appear evidently, that the Islands of spices, and also the great Island of Samotra, do pertain to Castille. 

The great Island of Samotra.  
The land of Brasile, pertaineth to the Portugals.   But the land of Brasile pertaineth to the king of Portugal, where the Cape of saint Augustine is, being viii degrees beneath the Equinoctial. This land reacheth from the point of Humos to the point of Buen Abrigo, and is in length North and South viii hundred leagues: being also some way two hundred leagues East and West.  
And here after these serious matters, 
A merry tale.  we will rehearse one merry thing, which was this. It so chanced that as Frances de Melo, Diego Lopes of Sequeyra, and other of those Portugals of this assembly, walked by the rivers side of Guadiana, a little boy, who stood keeping his mother's clothes which she had washed, demanded of them whether they were those men that parted the world with the Emperor. And as they answered, yea: he took up his shirt and showed them his bare arse, saying, Come and draw your line here through the midst. Which saying was afterward in every man's mouth, and laughed at in the town of Badaios: yea even among the Commissioners themselves, of whom some were angry, and some marveled at the saying of the child.   

The cause and authority whereby they divided the Indies.  
THe Castilians and Portugals had long debated and reasoned about the gold mine of Guinea, 
The gold mine of Guinea.  which was found in the year of our Lord .1471. in the time of the reign of Don Alonso king of Portugal, 
Alonso king of Portugal. Gold for things of small value.  the first of that name. This was a matter of great importance: For the Negroes or black moors, for things of no value, gave gold by whole handfuls, which was at that time when the said king of Portugal pretended title and claim to the kingdom of Castille, 
Contention for the kingdom of Castille.  in the right of his wife Queen joane (called the excellent) against the catholic Princes Isabel, and Don Fernando, whose it was in deed. But that strife was ended as soon as Don Fernando had vanquished Don Alonso, 

War against the moors of Granada.  
The conquests of the Portugals in Africa   at a place called Temulos, nor far from Toro, which place Don Fernando chose rather to make war against the moors of Granada, then to buy and sell with the black moors of Guinea. And thus the Portugals remained with the conquest of africa, from the straits forward: which began where the infant of Portugal Don Henrique (son to King john the bastard, and master of avis) did begin to enlarge it. 
Pope Alexander.  When Pope Alexander the vi (being a Valentinian borne) had knowledge hereof, he minded to give the Indies to the kings of Castille, without any prejudice to the Portugals, who had conquered the sea coasts of africa. These Indies, the Pope gave of his own mind without the motion of any other, with this burden & charge, that they should convert the idolaters to the faith of Christ: 
The Pope marks the division.  and commanded a line or meridian to be drawn North and South, from one hundred leagues Westward, beyond one of the Islands of Capo Verde toward the West, because the spaniards should not meddle in Africa, 
The king of Portugal refuseth to stand to the Popes Bull.  pertaining to the conquest of the Portugals, to the avoiding of all strife between them. King john of Portugal, the second of that name, was greatly offended when he read the Bull and donation of the pope, although his own Ambassadors had made the self same request unto his holiness: He also found himself aggrieved with the catholic princes Isabel and Fernando, that they had shortened the course of the lands he had discovered, depriving him of the richesse which belonged to him, and therefore refused to stand to the Pope's Bull in this case: desiring the catholic princes Isabel and Fernando, to grant him three hundred leagues more to the West, beside the one hundred which they had granted before: and therewith sent his ships to keep the coasts of africa. The princes catholic were content to satisfy his mind, and to please him according to their gentle nature, and for the alliance that was between them: And in fine, with the consent & agreement of the Pope, 
The agreement of the last division.  granted two hundred & sixty leagues more than the Bull made mention of, at Tordesillas' the seventh day of june, in the year of our Lord .1494. And whereas our kings thought that they should have lost ground in granting so many leagues that way, they won by that means the Islands of the Malucas, with many other rich Islands. The king of Portugal also herein deceived himself, or was deceived of his, whom he put in trust, 
Wherein the Portugals were deceived.  having no certain knowledge of the situation of the Islands of the rich Spicery, in demanding that which the king did demand: For it had been better for him to have requested the three hundred and sixty leagues, rather Eastward from the Islands of Capo Verde, then toward the West. And yet for all that, I doubt whether the Malucas should have fallen within his conquest, according to the ordinary account and dimension which the pilots and Cosmographers do make. And after this manner they divided the Indies between them by authority of the Pope, for the avoiding of further strife and contention.   

How and by what occasion the Emperor laid the Islands of Maluccas to pledge to the king of Portugal.  
WHen the King of Portugal Don ivan the third of that name, had knowledge that the Cosmographers and pilots of Castille, had drawn the line from the place before named, and that he could not deny the truth, fearing also thereby to lose the trade of spices, made suit & request to the Emperor, that he should not send forth Lovisa, 
Sebastian Cabote.  nor Sebastian Cabote to the Malucas, and that the Castilians should not attempt the trade of spices, nor see such evils and miseries as his Captains had showed in those Islands to them that adventured that voyage with Magallanes: which thing he greatly covered, although he paid all the charges of those two fleets, and made other great bargains. In the mean time, the Emperor married the Lady Isabel, 
The Emperor and the king of Portugal joined in alliance by marriage.  sister to king john, and king john married the Lady Catharine, sister to the Emperor: whereby this matter waxed cold, although the king ceased not to speak hereof, ever moving the partition. The Emperor by the means of a certain Biscaine that was with Magallanes in the governors ship, had knowledge what the Portugals had done to the Castilians in the Island of Tidore, 
The Portugals rob the Castilians.  whereof he took great displeasure, & brought the said mariner face to face before the Ambassadors of Portugal, who denied all that he said, one of them being the chief Captain and governor of India, when the Portugals took the Castilians in Tidore, and rob them of their Cloves & cinnamon, and such other things as they had in the ship named the Trinity. But as the king of Portugals trade was great, and our necessity greater, 
The coronation of the Emperor.  in the mean time Themperor (who was now going into Italy to be crowned in the year .1529.) gauged the Malucas and the spicery to the king of Portugal, 
The gauging of ●he Islands of Malucas.  for three hundred and fifty thousand Ducats, without any time determined, 
Zamatra and Malaca.  otherwise then the controversy defined upon the bridge of the river of Caya: for the which thing, king john punished the licentiate Azevedo, because he paid the money without declaration of the tyme. The covenant of the pledge was blindly made, and greatly against the minds of the Castilians, as men that well understood the profit, commodity, and riches of that trade: affirming that the trade of spices might have been rented, for one year or for two, for six times as much as the king gave for it. Peter Ruiz of Villegas, who was twice called to the bargain, as once at Granada, and an other time at Madrid, said that it had been much better to have pledged Estremadura or Serena, or other great lands and cities, rather than the Malucas, Zamatra, or Malaca, or other rich lands and rivers in the East, not yet well known: forasmuch as it may so chance, that either by continuance of time, or alliance, the pledge might be forgotten, as though it pertained to the right of Portugal. In fine, the Emperor considered not the jewel that he pledged, nor the king what he received. The Emperor was oftentimes counseled to release the pledge of those islands, in consideration of all the advantage he might have thereby in few years. Furthermore, in the year .1548. the procurators of Cortes being in Valladol●d, made petition to the Emperor, to surrender the spicery to the kingdom of Cast●le for vi. years, and that they would repay to the king of Portugal his .350. thousand crowns, and after those years, restore the trade to the crown, that his majesty might enjoy the same, as was agreed at the beginning But the Emperor, being then in Flaunders, sent word to the counsel, that they should not assent to Cortes his request, nor speak any more hereof. Whereat, some marveled, other were sorry, and all held their peace.    


Exemplar Bullae Seu Donationis, Autoritate cuius, Episcopus Romanus Alexander eius nominis sextus, concessit et donavit Castellae regibus & suis successoribus, regiones & Insulas novi orbis in Oceanooccidentali Hispanorum navigationibus repertas.  
ALexander Episcopus, servus servorum Dei, Charissimo in Christo filio Ferdinando Regi, et Charissimae in Christo filiae Elizabeth Reginae Castellae, Legionis, Aragonum, Siciliae, et Granatae, illustribus, salutem et Apostolicam benedictionem.  
Inter caetera Divinae maiestati beneplacita opera et cordis nostri desiderabilia, illu● profecto potissimum existit ut fides catholica & Christiana religio nostris praesertim temporibus exaltetur ac ubilibet amplietur ac dilatetur, animarumque salus procuretur, ac barbarae nationes deprimantur et ad fidem ipsam reducantur. unde cum ad hanc sacram Petri sedem Divina favente clementia (meritis licet imparibus) evocati fueremus, cognoscentes vos tanquam veros catholicos reges et principes: quales semper fuisse novimus, & a vobis praeclare gesta, toti pens orbinotissima demonstrant, nedum id exoptare, sed omni conatu, studio, et diligentia, nullis laboribus, nullis impensis, nullisque parcendo periculis, etiam proprium sanguinem effundendo efficere, ac omnem animum vestrum, omnesque conatus ad hoc iam dudum dedicasse, quemadmodum recuperato regni Granatae a tyrannis de Sarracenorum hodiernis temporibus per vos, cum tanta Divini nominis gloria facta, testatur. dign ducimur non immerito, et debemus illa vobis etiam sponte, ac favorabiliter concedere per quae huiusmodi sanctum ac laudabile ab immortali deo acceptum propositum, indies feruentiori animo ad ipsius dei honorem et ●mperij Christiani propagationem, prosequi valeatis. Sane accepimus que vos qui dudum animum proposu●ratis aliquas insulas et terras firma● remotas et incognitas, ac per alios hactenus non repertas, quaerere et invenire, ut illarum incolas et habitatores ad colendum redemptorem nostrum et fidem catholicam profitendum reduceretis, hactenus in expugnatione et recuperatione ipsius regni Granatae plurimum occupati, ●uiusmodi sanctum et laudabile propositum vestrum ad optatum finem perducere nequivistis: Sed tamem sicut Domino placuit, regno predicto recuperato, volentes desiderium vestrum adimp●ere, dilectum filium Christophorum Colonum, virum utique dignum, et plurimum commendatum, ac tanto negotio aptum, cum navigijs et hominibus ad similia instructis, non sine maximis laboribus, ac periculis, et expensis destinastis ut terras firmas et insulas remotas et incognitas, huiusmodi per mare ubi hactenus navigatum non fuerat, diligenter inquireret. Qui tandem (Divino auxilio fasta extrema diligentia in mari Oceano navigantes) certas insulas remotissimas, et etiam terras firmas, quae per alios hastenus reperte non fuerant, invenerunt. In quibus plurimae gentes pacifice viventes, et (ut assiritur) nudi incedentes, nec carnibus vescentes, inhabitant: Et ut praefati nuncij vestri possunt opinari, gentes ipsae in Insulis, et terris praedistis habitantes, credunt unum deum creatorem in Coelis esse, ac ad fidem catholicam amplexandum et bonis moribus imbuendum, satis apti videntur: Spesque habetur, quod si erudire●tur, nomen salvatoris Domini nostri jesu Christi in terris et insulis praedictis facile induceretur. Ac prefatus Christophorus in una ex principalibus Insulis praedictis, iam unam turrim satis munitam, in qua certos Christianos qui secum inerant in custodiam, et ut alias insulas ac terras firmas remotas et incognitas inquirerent posuit, construi et aedificari fecit. In quibus quidem Insulis et terris iam repertis, aurum, aromata, et aliae quam plurimae res praeciosae diversi generis et diversae qualitatis reperiuntur. unde omnibus diligenter, et praesertim fidei catholicae exaltatione et dilatione (prout decet Catholicos Reges et Principes) consideratis, more progenitorum vestrorum clarae memoriae Regum, terras firmas et insulas predictas, illarumque incolas et habitatores, vobis divina favente clementia subijcere, et ad fidem Catholicam reducere proposuistis. Nos itaque huiusmodi vestrum sanctum et laudabile propositum plurimum in domino commendantes, ac cupientes ut illud ad debitum finem perducatur, et ipsum nomen salvatoris nostri in partibus illis inducatur, hortamus vos quamplurimum in domino, et per sacri lavacri susceptionem, qua mandatis Apostolicis obligati estis, et per viscera misericordiae Domini nostri jesu Christi attent requiribus, ut cum expeditionem ●uiusmodi omnino prosequi et assumere prona mente orthodoxae fidei zelo intendatis, populos in ●uiusmodi Insulis et terris degentes, ad Christianam religionem suscipiendum inducere velitis et debeatis, nec pericula nec labores vllo unquam tempore vos deterreant, firma spe fiduciaque conceptis, quod Deus omnipotens conatus vestros foeliciter prosequetur. Et ut tanti nego●ij prou●ntiam Apostolicae gratiae largitate donati, liberius et audacius assumatis, motu proprio non ad vestram vel alterius, pro vobis super hoc nobis oblatae petitionis instantiam, sed de nostra mera liberalitate, et ex certa scientia, ac de Apostolicae potestatis plenitudine, omnes Insu●as et terras firmas inventas et inveniendas, detestas et detegendas versus Occidentem et Meridiem, fabricando et construendo unam lineam a polo Arctico, scilicet Septentrione, ad polum Antarcticum, scilicet Meridiem, sive terrae firmae et insulae inventae, et iveniendae sint, versus Indian, aut versus aliam quamcumque partem, quae linea distet a qualibet insularum, quae vulgariter nuncupantur de los Azores, et Cabo verde centum leucis, versus Occidentem et Meridiem. Itaque omnes insulae et terrae firmae repertae et reperiendae, detectae et detegendae a praefata linea versus Occidemtem et Meridiem, quae per alium Regem aut Principem Christianum non fuerint actualiter possess usque ad diem nativitatis Domini Nostri jesu Christi proxime praeteritum, a quo incipit annus praesens Millessimus Quadringentessimus Nonogessimus tertius, quando fuerunt per nuncios et capitaneos vestros inventae aliquae praedictarum insularum, Autoritate omnipotentis Dei nobis in beato Petro concessa, ac viccariatus jesu Christi, qua fungimur in terris, cum omnibus illarum dominijs, civitatibus, castris, locis, et villis, iuribusque et iurisdictionibus ac pertinentijs universis vobis, heredibusque, et successoribus vestris (Castellae et Legionis regibus) in perpetuum tenore praesentium donamus, concedimus, et assignamus: Vosque, et haeredes, ac successores prefatos illarum Dominos, cum plena, libera, et omnimoda potestate, autoritate, et jurisdictione, facimus, constituimus, et deputamus. Decernentes nihilo minus, per huiusmodi donationem, concessionem et assignationem nostram, nullo Christiano Principi, qui actualiter prefatas insulas et terras firmas possederit usque ad predictum diem nativitatis Domini nostri jesu Christiius quaesitum, sublatum intelligi posse, aut auferri debere.  
Et insuper mandamus vobis in vertute sanctae obedientiae (ut sicut pollicemini et non dubit●mus pro vestra maxima devotione et regia magnanimitate vos esse facturos) ad terras firmas et insulas predictas, viros probos et Deum timentes, doctos, peritos, et expertos ad instr●endū incolas et habtaitores prefatos in fide chatholica, et bonis moribus inbuendum, destinare debeatis, omnem debitam diligentiam in praemissis adhibentes. A quibuscumque personis, cuiuscunque dignitatis, etiam imperialis et regalis status, gradus, ordinis vel conditionis, sub excommunicationis latae sententiae poena quam eo ipso, si contra fecerint incurrant, districtius inhibemus ne ad insulas et terras firmas inventas et inveniendas, detectas et detegendas versus Occidentem et Meridiem, fabricando et construendo lineam a polo Arctico ad polum Antarcticum, sivae terrae firmae et Isulae inventae et inveniendae sint versus Indiam aut versus aliam quamcumque partem, quae linea distet a qualibet insularum, que vulgariter nuncupantur de los Azores, et Cabo verde centum lucis versus Occidentem et Meridem ut praefertur, pro mercibus habendis, vell quavis alia causa accedere praesumat, absque vestra ac haeredum et successorum vestrorum praedictorum licentia speciali: Non obstantibus constitutionibus et ordinationibus Apostolicis, caeterisque quibuscumque, in illo in quo imperia et dominationes et bona cuncta procedunt: Confidentes quod dirigente Domino actus vestros, si huiusmodi sanctum ac laudabile propositum prosequamini, brevi tempore cum felicitate et gloria totius populi Christiani, vestri labores et conatus exitum felicissimum consequentur. Verum quia difficile foret praesentes literas ad singula quaeque loca in quibus expediens fuerit deferri, volumus ac motu et scientia similibus decernimus, quod illarum transsumptis manu publici notarij inderogati subscriptis, et sigillo alicuius personae in ecclesiastica dignitate constitutae, seu curiae ecclesiastice munitis, ea prorsus fides in judicio et extra ac alias ubilibet adhibeatur, quae praesentibus adhiberetur si essent adhibitae vel ostensae.  
Nulli ergo omnino hominum liceat banc paginam nostrae commendationis, hortationis, requisitionis, donationis, concessonis, assignationis, constitutionis, deputationis, decreti, mandati, inhibitionis, et voluntatis, infringere, vel ei ausu temerario contrair. Si quis autem hoc attentare praesumpserit, indignationem omnipotentis Dei, ac beatorum Petri et Pauli Apostolorum eius, se noverit incursurum.  
Datum Romae apud sanctum Petrum, Anno incarnationis Dominicae 1593. quarto nonas Maij, Pontificatus nostri, anno primo.   

The copy of the Bull or donation, by th'authority whereof, Pope Alexander the sixth of that name, gave and granted to the kings of Castille & their successors, the Regions and Islands found in the west Ocean sea, by the navigations of the spaniards.  
ALexander Bishop, the servant of the servants of God, to our most dear beloved son in Christ king Ferdinando, and to our dear beloved daughter in Christ Elizabeth Queen of Castyle, Legion, Arragon, Sicily, and Granata, most noble princes, greeting, and Apostolical benediction. Among other works acceptable to the divine majesty, and according to our hearts desire, this certainly is the chief, that the catholic faith and Christian religion, specially in this our time, may in all places be exalted, amplified, and enlarged, whereby the health of souls may be procured, and the Barbarous nations subdued and brought to the faith. And therefore whereas by the favour of God's clemency (although not without equal deserts) we are called to this holy seat of Peter, and understanding you to be true catholic princes, as we have ever known you, and as your noble and worthy facts have declared in manner to the whole world, in that with all your study, diligence, and industry, you have spared no travails, charges, or perils, adventuring even the shedding of your own blood, with applying your whole minds and endeavours hereunto, as your noble expeditions achieved in recovering the kingdom of Granata from the tyranny of the Sarracens in these our days, do plainly declare your facts, with so great glory of the divine name. For the which, as we think you worthy, so ought we of our own free will favourably to grant you all things, whereby you may daily with more fervent minds, to the honour of God, and enlarging the Christian Empire, prosecute your devout and laudable purpose, most acceptable to the immortal God. We are credibly informed, that whereas of late you were determined to seek and find certain Islands and firm lands, far remote and unknown (and not heretofore found by any other) to the intent to bring the inhabitants of the same to honour our redeemer, & to profess the catholic faith, you have hitherto been much occupied in the expugnation and recovery of the kingdom of Granata, by reason whereof you could not bring your said laudable purpose to the end desired. Nevertheless, as it hath pleased almighty God, the foresaid kingdom being recovered, willing to accomplish your said desire, you have, not without great labour, perils, & charges, appointed our well-beloved son Christopher Colonus (a man certes well commended, as most worthy and apt for so great a matter) well furnished with men and ships, and other necessaries, to seek (by the sea, where hitherto no man hath sailed) such firm lands and Islands far remote, and hitherto unknown, who (by God's help) making diligent search in the Ocean sea, have found certain remote Islands & firm lands, which were not heretofore found by any other: in the which (as is said) many nations inhabit, living peaceably, and going naked, not accustomed to eat flesh: and as far as your messengers can conjecture, the nations inhabiting the foresaid lands and Islands, believe that there is one God, creator in heaven, and seem apt to be brought to the embracing of the catholic faith, and to be imbued with good manners: by reason whereof, we may hope that if they be well instructed, they may easily be induced to receive the name of our saviour jesus Christ. We are further advertised, that the forenamed Christopher hath now builded and erected a fortress, with good munition, in one of the foresaid principal Islands, in the which he hath placed a garrison of certain of the Christian men that went thither with him, aswell to th'intent to defend the same, as also to search other Islands and firm lands far remote, and yet unknown. We also understand, that in these lands and Islands lately found, is great plenty of Gold and spices, with divers and many other precious things, of sundry kinds and qualities. Therefore all things diligently considered (especially the amplifying and enlarging of the catholic faith, as i● behoveth catholic princes, following the examples of your noble progenitors of famous memory) whereas you are determined, by the favour of almighty God, to subdue and bring to the catholic faith thinhabitants of the aforesaid lands and Islands.  
We greatly commending this your godly and laudable purpose in our Lord, and desirous to have the same brought to a due end, and the name of our saviour to be known in those parts, do exhort you in our Lord, and by the receiving of your holy baptism, whereby you are bound to Apostolical obedience, & earnestly require you by the bowels of mercy of our Lord jesus Christ, that when you intend for the zeal of the catholic faith to prosecute the said expedition, to reduce the people of the foresaid lands and Islands to the Christian religion, you shall spare no labours at any time, or be deterred with any perils, conceiving firm hope and confidence, that the omnipotent God will give good success to your godly attempts. And that being authorized by the privilege of the apostolical grace, you may the more freely and boldly take upon you th'enterprise of so great a matter, we of our own motion, and not either at your request, or at the instant petition of any other person, but of our own mere liberality and certain science, and by the fullness of apostolical power, do give, grant, and assign to you, your heirs and successors, all the firm lands and Islands found, or to be found, discovered, or to be discovered, toward the west & south, drawing a line from the pole Artik to the pole Antarctic (that is) from the North to the South: Containing in this donation, whatsoever firm lands or Islands are found, or to be found toward India, or toward any other part what so ever it be, being distant from, or without the foresaid line, drawn a hundred leagues toward the West and South from any of the Islands which are commonly called De los Azores and Capo verde. All the Islands therefore, and firm lands, found and to be found, discovered and to be discovered, from the said line toward the West and South, such as have not actually been heretofore possessed by any other Christian king or prince, until the day of the nativity of our Lord jesus Christ last paste, from the which beginneth this present year being the year of our Lord. M. CCCC.lxxxxiii. when so ever any such shallbe found by your messengers and captains, we by the authority of almighty GOD, granted unto us in saint Peter, and by the office which we bear on the earth in the steed of jesus Christ, do for ever, by the tenor of these presents, give, grant, assign, unto you, your heirs, and successors (the kings of Castyle and Legion) all those lands and Islands, with their dominions, Territories, cities, castles, towers, places, and villages, with all the right, and jurisdictions thereunto pertaining: constituting, assigning, and deputing, you, your heirs, and successors, the lords thereof, with full and free power, authority, and jurisdiction: Decreeing nevertheless by this our donation, grant, and assignation, that from no Christian Prince, which actually hath possessed the foresaid Islands and firm lands, unto the day of the nativity of our Lord beforesaid, their right obtained, to be understood hereby to be taken away, or that it ought to be taken away. Furthermore we command you in the virtue of holy obedience (as you have promised, and as we doubt not you will do upon mere devotion and princely magnanimitte) to send to the said firm lands and Islands, honest, virtuous, and learned men, such as fear GOD, and are able to instruct thinhabitants in the catholic faith and good manners, applying all their possible diligence in the premises. We furthermore straightly inhibit all manner of persons, of what state, degree, order, or condition soever they be, although of Imperial and regal dignity, under the pain of the sentence of excommunication, which they shall incur if they do to the contrary, that they in no case presume, without special licence of you, your heirs, and successors, to travail for merchandise, or for any other cause, to the said lands or Islands, found, or to be found, discovered, or to be discovered, toward the West and South, drawing a line from the pole arctic to the pole Antarctic, whether the firm lands and Islands, found and to be found, be situate toward India, or toward any other part, being distant from the line drawn a hundred leagues toward the west, from any of the islands commonly called De los Azores and Capo Verde: notwithstanding constitutions, decrees, and apostolical ordinances whatsoever they are to the contrary. In him from whom empires, dominions, and all good things do proceed: Trusting that almighty GOD, directing your enterprises, if you follow your Godly and laudable attempts, your labours and travails herein, shall in short time obtain a happy end, with felicity and glory of all Christian people. But forasmuch as it should be a thing of great difficulty these letlers to be carried to all such places as should be expedient, we will, and of like motion and knowledge do decree, that whither so ever the same shall be sent, or wheresoever they shallbe received, with the subscription of a common notary thereunto required, with the seal of any person constitute in ecclesiastical dignity, or such as are authorized by the ecclesiastical court, the same faith and credit to be given thereunto in judgement▪ or else where, as should be exhibited to these presents.  
It shall therefore be lawful for no man to infringe or rashly to contrary this letter of our commendation, exhortation, request, donation, grant, assignation, constitution, deputation, decree, commandment, inhibition, and determination. And if any shall presume to attempt the same, he ought to know that he shall thereby incur the indignation of almighty God, and his holy Apostles Peter and Paul.  
Given at Rome at saint peter's: In the year of th'incarnation of our lord M. CCCC.lxxxxiii. The fourth day of the nonce of may, the first year of our seat.    

An Abridgement of. P. Martyr his .5.6.7. and .8. Decades, and particularly of Ferd. Cortesius conquest of Mexico, by. R. W.  
THe first four Decades of. P. Martyr, you have already seen done into english by R. Eden, as also certain parcels of the four last. P. Martyr made eight decades of the west Indish news: in less labour these may be run over, special regard being had unto that Decade wherein the more principal matter is expressed: I mean the first, and that chief for the famous conquest of the city Themistitan, in Mexico province, yea of all that great region we do now usually call new Spain. As for the sixth Decade, it containeth very little matter worth the rehearsal, except it be certain reports of the Spaniards, how they found, where they travailed in the West Indies, plough stuff of gold: that the prince of Nicoragua with his family became christian: that certain beardless Indians greatly fear such men as have beards: that they use to sacrifice live men unto their Idols, either taken in the wars, or fatted up at home bountefully for that purpose: that Nicoragua Mere, for the greatness and unknown length thereof, for the ebbs and floods and many Islands therein, might worthily be called a fresh water sea. This freshet hath been thought to run into the Northwesterne straight, rather of ignorance (the course thereof being not thoroughly known) than that it so falleth out in deed, as. P. Martyr writeth. Finally in the .9. & .10. books of the sixth Decade, news is sent to Rome of the controversy betwixt the Spaniards & Portugals, concerning the Moluccaes', handled more effectually & in more ample manner, by. R. Eden. Fol. 448. than. P. Martyr in this place penned it. Wherefore it were a needless work and actum agere in deed to trouble the reader therewith any further, especially whereas in this volume, mention hath been made thereof, even by. P. Martyr himself, as you have already seen.  
The like opinion am I also of, touching the vii & viii decades, some parcels whereof the Author doth repeat out of his former writings as Dec. 7. c. 2. the ruin of the Islands jucaies, out of his fourth Dec. c. 3. Item out of the second Decade. c. 10. the nature of that spring in the Island Boiuca, otherwise called Agnaneo, the water whereof who so drinketh, by report, of an old man becometh young again, is in many words repeated by. P. Martyr, Dec. 7. c. 7. the whole sum of whose second discourse thereof is expressed in the former place, by. R. Eden's addition of this clause (Perhaps with some diet) the which words are not in P. Martyr his text: to be short, the two kinds of bread the Indians do make of the roots jucca, and a kind of grain called Maiz, sufficiently declared. Dec. 1. lib. 1. &. Dec. 3. lib. 5. lib. 9 Dec. 3. be repeated again, Dec. 8. c. 3. Other parcels of these aforesaid Decades, wherein the subtleties of their Magicians and conjurers pieces or Pages are described, their Tigers cruelty, their sundry kinds of wild beasts, foul, & Serpents, their divers sorts of trees and fruits, partly may you read of in the breviary of Gonzal. Ferd. Ouiedus history: as of the fountain of pitch, the stone pellets naturally made for Guns. Fol. 224. out of the .7. Decade. c. 7. and the Glowoormes out of the same c. 9 partly in R. Eden his notes of new Spain, Peru, Rio de la Plata, Baccaleos, and Florida, set down in this volume. Fol. 225. as particularly of the Nutshelles used in steed of money, taken out of P. Mart. Dec. 8. c. 4. Partly in Thevetus works of the new found world, Englished long since, and finally in those books which sundry learned Simplicistes have lately written principally to aid the Physicians of our tyme.  
Some other curiosities there be contained in. P. Martyr his two last Decades, namely the jucaien women, to be so fair, that for their love other country Barbares seek to inhabit those Islands. Dec. 7. c. 1. The spaniards well used of the jucaiens, contrary to all courtesy, to have carried away many of those Islanders into slavery and misery: Again certain travelers to have been seen there that had tails like fish. Dec. 7. c. 2. Fond fantasies of men's souls departed, Dec. 7. c. 3. wandering first North and than South about the world, afterward to grow young again in jollity: Again, other to imagine that the departed souls rest in Caves, and to be that reflection of the air the which we do call Echo. Dec. 8. c. 9 The contention betwixt Garaius and Cortesius, for ambition, Dec. 7. c. 5. & Dec. 8. cap. 1. & .2. The great cormorants that devour fish of five pound weight at one morsel. Dec. 7. c. 9 The shameless dances of naked women at their funerals and obsequies. Dec. 7. c. 10. Their worshipping of the cross in Saltier ten Or made thus, x upon their new borne babes to drive away devils, as also in the night time if they fear any thing, imagining with that sign the place to be purified. Dec. 8. c. 9 The Chiribikes follies in dancing whole weeks together, their language full of difficulties for leaving out some syllables in speech, their manner of marriage by clipping the brides hear, Dec. 8. c. 8. The dead bodies of gentlemen to be roasted, & so hanged up to roof for buttery gods, the bones of other that lay buried a whole year to be taken up again at the xii months end, and solemnly buried. Decade 8. c. 9 To conclude, How Captain Olitus, whom Cortesius feared not a little, & therefore sent under the pretext of honour as it were to discover other lands, took head himself against Cortesius, and miserably was murdered in the end. Dec. 8. c 6 & .10. These with some other the like things, may the curious reader find in many words, set down in the aforesaid .7. and .8 Decades, spoken of all for the most part before in. P. Martyr his other doings, or mentioned in Ouiedus Summary, or by. R. Eden briefly noted, or not greatly needful to be set forth at large in english, except they were matters of greater weight. One special thing I observed amongst other in reading over these .6 7. and 8. Decades, to wit, the West Indians not only to be conquered by the Spaniards, but also to be their slaves and bondmen: the cause why after the conquest made of them, the spaniards do in continual bondage and slavery keep them under, is expressly brought forth by. Pe. Martyr. Dec. 7. c. 4. in the spanish tongue, as it was read at the indish counsel board in Spain, and may thus be Englished.  

These be the Indians qualities, in respect whereof they deserve no liberty.  
IN the continent or firm land they eat man's flesh: they be more given to sodomy than any other nation of the world: there is no order of justice among them, they go naked, they have neither love nor honesty, they be fools and furious, there is no truth in them, except it be for their own profit: inconstant, without all discretion, very unkind, & lovers of novelties: they delight to make themselves drunk with wines made of divers herbs, fruits, and grain, as ale and cider, & to overcome their brains, as well otherwise with herbs, as in making drink thereof, or eating them▪ They are very bruitishe, and do make it a praise to wallow in vices. No obedience, no reverence at all showeth the young man to the old, the child to his father. Neither teaching nor chastening amendeth them: they be traitors, cruel, so full of revenge that they never forgive any offence, great enemies unto our religion. They be slothful, thieves, of judgement very gross and base, without all honesty and good order. Neither do the men behave themselves loyally with their wives, nor the wives with their husbands: they be superstitiously given to soothsaying, as fearful as Hares, filth, eating lice, spiders, & worms, wheresoever they find them: they have no art, nor good condition of men. Having learned any points of Christian religion, they are wont to say that to be good in Spain, but in India nothing worth, for that they desire not to alter their manners. They have no beards, for they peel and pluck up the hear as fast as it groweth. They take no piety on sick folk, such as be very sick, they give over to some one kinsman or neighbour of theirs, or else carry them to the mountains to die there, leaving with them some small portion of bread and water, and so go their way. The elder they wax, the worse they be: until they be xi or xii years old, some hope there is that they would prove civil and virtuous, when they grow elder, they become bruit beasts. In conclusion, I say that god never created so corrupt a people for vice and beastliness, without any mixture of goodness and civility: they are as blockish as Asses, making no account at all to kill themselves.  
In the fift Decade is written by. P. Martyr, or gathered rather by him out of Ferd. Cortesius relations, the conquest of that portion of the West indish continent, that lieth in the hot zone, near the Tropic of Cancer, betwixt our West sea and Mar deal zur, the chief province wherein is Mexico, and the principal city Themistitan. This region, after that it was conquered by Cortesius, began to be called Nova Hispania, new Spain, for the likeness thereof unto the spanish kingdom in nature of soil, greatness, disposition of the air, & other such like things, as Cortesius himself writeth unto Charles the fifth, humbly desiring his majesty to allow of that name. Some later writers have given the particular name of one shire unto the whole, calling it Mexico, and the general name of that whole shire to the head city therein, calling Themistitan likewise Mexico, howbeit in truth Themistitan is the principal city in Mexico province, Mexico the chief province in all new spain. Of this country, the commodities it doth yield, the nature of the inhabiters, partly you have already seen in Gon. Ferd. Ouiedus history. Fol. 221. and chiefly Fol. 225. The king of this country bare name Monte Zuma, or Muteezuma, as Cortesius that conquered him writeth▪ in P. Martyr his Decades printed in spain. An. d. 1530. Meteezuma. in his .4▪ Decade, entitled the insul. nuper inventis to. no. orb. p. 506. Multoxumam, as also in the last edition thereof at Cullen, jointly with the three first decades, the which our Printer in the translation hereof, hath followed in the discourse of the West Indies Islands. Strange names are many times diversly written, though in effect they mean all one, Henricus say we, with the Frenchmen Henry, the Almans Henreich, the Italians Arrigo, the Portugals Henrico, as Barros speaking of king john the first his son, whom Cadamust called in his Navigation Huric.  
This king was so wealthy, so mighty, his dominions so large, that the inhabiters knew no other prince in all the world, of him Cortesius had intelligence by Montegius and Portucarrerius, and from him certain rich presents for his master Charles Themperor, as in the aforesaid discourse of the west Indish islands it hath been said. Wherefore the .16. day of August, in the year of our Lord .1520. Ferdinandus Cortesius, with .15. light horsemen, and five hundred footmen well appointed, besides three noble men of the city Cempoal, named Teuchius, Mamexus, & Tamaius, and .13 hundred men of that country, to serve in steed of pack horses, for carriage, after the manner there, began to set forward from his Castle Vera crux, towards Themistitan in Mexico, distant from thence Westward a hundred leagues, or thereabout. Cempoal standeth from Vera Crux .4. leagues, each league in this country is .4. Italian miles. Four days journey from Cempoal Cortesius was entertained curtuously by the inhabiters of a goodly shire named Sienchimalen, as also by the citizens of Texuacan, after that he had passed with his army an exceeding high hill, thick clad with ice & snow even in the month of August. The like entertainment was offered him & his company as he marched forward, until he came to the Tascaltecans land, who are so great enemies unto the Mexicans, that living amid their dominions, they had rather want their greatest necessaries, to wit salt, and cotton to clothe them, than become subjects in any wise to the Prince of Mexico. With these Tascaltecans, Cortesius had three conflicts passing through their country, & in the end valiantly gave them the overthrow. Tascalteca is a greater city, more populous, 
Tascalteca.  and better served than Granata in Spain was, at what time the moors yielded: their bread is made of Maiz, that is, Indish corn, a very good seat for hawking, hunting, & fresh water fishing, sea fish is scarce, for it standeth from the sea above .50. leagues: of pulse good store. This town walls, & houses in number 20000. built of stone, high, & strong, in respect of the enemy ever at hand: they keep markets and fairs. The people doth wear hose, and maketh good account of jewels, precious stones, of crests, & bushes of feathers, to set them forth in the wars, they garnish every thing with gold: wood is brought to be sold to the market on men's shoulders: timber, boards, brick, lime, & stone, are usual merchandise. Their Carpenters, Masons, & Potters, are very skilful. There is no vessel wrought amongst us more artificially than theirs is Medicinable herbs are sold openly. They use baths, the nation politic, governed in manner of a common wealth. The whole circuit of this province is .90. leagues, full of towns, boroughs, and villages, hills and dales most fruitful, & well stored of good soldiers, in respect of their enemies round about them. About one league of this city encamped Cortesius, & by his spials understanding the citizens not to mistrust or fear any invasion, took the strongest part thereof by night: in the morning came the best citizens to offer him all obedience. Cortesius than returning with the victory & victuals to his camp, found it in a troublesome mutiny for the great distresses & present calamies they thought themselves to be in, so far of from their own country, in the midst of their enemies This mutiny appeased he with good words, & comfortable reasons, persuading them their enemies to be weaker, the spreading abroad of the gospel to be now in their hands, themselves to be Spaniards, who esteem not death to win glory: a most happy death that to be, where life is spent in the conquest of infidels and barbares, & to lie by the sea side idly, that were to no purpose. 
Churultecal.  Thus appeased he the rebellious minds of his companions, and after .20. days abode made in this province, he led them into an other shire for pastures and rivers the most commodious, for habitation best in all that country. The principal city hath name Churultecal, as great, as fair, as Tascalteca, and so governed, until the king of Mexico oppressed it. Here was Cortesius received with songs, musical instruments, and trumpets, by the priests and children of the city after their manner, & well feasted. The end of all this mirth was an uproar of the inhabiters against him, procured by the king of Mexico, as it was supposed, whereof Cortesius having secret intelligence by a woman of Cempoal that followed his Camp, summoned a parley with the best citizens of Churultecal, at his own lodging. Those citizens first laid he fast by the heel's, & than speedily with his army, warned to be in a readiness for that purpose, set upon the deceitful Barbares of a sudden, before that they were thoroughly provided, and gave them the overthrow. The prince of Mexico acquitted himself of this uproar, protesting by his Ambassadors to Cortesius, that his disloyal subjects the Churultecals had bruited that conspiracy under his name to do him injury, whom they would not willingly obey. He sent withal rich presents, praying Cortesius to come to Themistitan, promising him that he should want nothing there, notwithstanding the hard provision thereof in so barren a place, altogether in the water. To conduct Cortesius thither, he sent also certain Gentlemen for guides, and other of his nobility to receive him as he came near. To speak of every courtesy showed him in this journey, and to write of every place he passed, and particularly to rehearse every days journey, every hill, town, river, house, and garden, by the way, would breed overmuch tediousness. In few, the Lords of the country, as he went, used him well, especially in Guazucingo province, and Chialcho shire, the one whereof was violently oppressed by the prince of Mexico, the other willingly subject unto him. In the cold mountains he wanted no wood, in the towns he was provided for, and his companions, who were of Cempoallens, Tastaltecans, Churultecans, & G●zucinges, in number .4000. of Spaniards not above .300. In this manner, Cortesius accompanied & followed, came at the length into a vale, bearing name Colua▪ wherein be two meres, the one salt water of .60. leagues in circuit, the other a freshet. Partly on the land, partly in the salt mere standeth Iztapalapa a fair town, from whence to Themistitan, the royal seat of Mexico, there lieth a way on a stone wall, two spears length broad, built up in the water by hand with infinite charges, the wall serveth also for a bridge, by this bridge sides stand three fair towns, Mesicalcingo, Coluacan, & Wichilabusco. The first is supposed to have .3000. houses, the second .6000. the third .4000. well built, especially their Towers, & their Temples wherein they do sacrifice. In these towns great abundance of salt is made, that serveth all such as do acknowledge the Prince of Mexico for their Lord. Other be denied it, as of the Tascaltecans it was said. This salt mere rising doth flow into the Freshet, & as it ebbeth the Freshet falleth into the salt mere again. The fresh water may serve nevertheless for drink, the salt water becometh not fresh therewithal. The wall hath many draft bridges for warfare, and sluices for passage, where toll is paid unto the king. Half one league before you come to Themistitan, where the like bridge or causey from the land joineth with the aforesaid wall, standeth a strong Castle, double walled about, with two strong Towers, not possible to be conquered. To this place came a thousand Gentlemen Courtiers forth of the city to receive Cortesius, all appareled a like, saluting him one by one after their country manner, to wit, touching the ground with their finger, and than kissing it, in sign of reverence. After all them came the king of Mexico Montezuma himself in the middle of the bridge, accompanied with two hundred of his nobles, orderly two and two, in better attire than the other aforesaid, but all on their bare feet, though every body in this country otherwise weareth shoes. The king as he went, leaved upon the shoulders of two noble men, the one whereof was his brother: not that he needed any such help, but for that the kings of Mexico are wont so to be honoured, as though they were holden up by the strength of their nobility. These two noble men, Cortesius meeting with king Meteezuma, and lighting of his horse to embrace him, did forbid him to touch their king, as an unlawful action in that country: the rest of the kings company came orderly to salute Cortesius, after their manner. Cortesius presented the king with a chain of Bugle, set with some Diamonds and Rubies, of no great value, but such as pleased the king, who rewarded him again with two other chains of gold, wrought in manner of sea Crabs, & Snails, & so returned into the city with Cortesius again, where he, lodging him in the royal palace, erected therein for him a throne, and presented him the second time with other rich gifts, and provision of all things necessary for him and his train. All the bridge length, as he went with the king, stood on each side certain great Temples, wherein were sacrificed slaves, and children paid for tribute by king Meteezumaes' vassals. near unto Cortesius throne king Meteezuma had his cloth of estate, where unto the Spaniards, before his nobles there assembled, he spoke in this sort.  
Noble and valiant men of arms in the field, and merciful Capitanes unto such as do yield themselves, you are welcome into this country. Of ancient time we have heard, 
King Metuzuma his oration to the Spaniards,  and in our old Chronicles we do read, that neither I, nor any of this land, be ancient inhabiters hereof, but aliens and foreigners, brought hither by a great prince, unto whom we were all subject. While this prince, leaving us here, went home again to see his country, our forefathers married, had issue, builded up houses, and erected certain cities, so that at his return we neither would go back again with him, nor acknowledge him for our prince any more: Wherefore we have been ever of opinion, that his posterity would come to recover this country, and make us his subjects again. considering then the place from whence you say that you do come, and that which you give us to understand of your great and mighty lord and king that sent you hither, we be thoroughly persuaded that he is our true Lord, so much the more, for that, as you say, he hath long since known that we dwelled here Assure yourselves therefore, that we will all yield unto you, and acknowledge you our lords, in his name that sent you: in this will we not fail, we will not deceive you, all my dominions shall you rule, for all my subjects shall obey, command all that we have, for you be now in your own province and house. Be ye merry, and refresh yourselves after your long travail and many labours in the wars. I am not ignorant what hath happened unto you all the way, I doubt not but that the Campoales and Churultecanes have said evil of me unto you, but I pray you give no credit unto any man's words concerning me, especially unto my enemies, some whereof having been my subjects, at your coming are gone from me, and do report untruths of me, to purchase therewith your favour. I know that they bear you in hand, that my seat, the furniture of my house, the very walls thereof, are beaten gold. Furthermore, that I am a God, that I fain myself a God, and such like toys: but you see all things here are made of lime, stone, and earth. Do you not see that I am made of flesh and bone, mortal, and corpulent? you see they have not said the truth. I have in deed certain place left me by my forefathers, 
A note.  what soever I have it shall be yours, dispose thereof as you think good, I will now depart to other of my houses where I am wont to lie, I will see that neither you, nor your train want any thing: be ye of good cheer, be glad, for you are in your own country, you be in your own houses.  
Cortesius answered in few, and to the purpose, especially concerning that point, the king of Spain to be that prince whom they looked for. After two days spent there joyfully, noise was brought to Cortesius of certain murders and injuries offered unto the spaniards in a town of Muteezumaes' dominions, 
A note.  and that by Muteezuma his consent. This occasion took he, thoroughly to bring Muteezuma in subjection. And first he caused him to keep that house wherein Cortesius lay, then to send for the malefactors, whom Cortesius openly executed, by whose confession Muteezuma found guilty, was for a time set by the heels, but delivered again by and by, confessing his fault, and promising all loyalty and duty, chose rather to remain a true subject in Cortesius palace, then to live abroad at liberty like a king, as in effect he showed, both in sending abroad commission to discover the gold mines throughout all his dominions at Cortesius motion, in gathering together great sums of gold and treasure to be presented unto the Spanish king, in giving both counsel, and the means how to conquer crftelie prince Cacamozin, Muteezumaes' vassal, refusing all obedience unto the spaniards, finally in a public assembly, exhorting all his nobles to acknowledge the king of Spain for their sovereign Lord, and to yield unto him that obedience and in his name, to Cortesius that duty, which he himself was wont to look for at their hands. The process was written by public notaries, confirmed by the nobles, and a copy thereof delivered unto Cortesius. Mexico province, 
Mexico.  environed about with high and Alpyshe mountains, standeth in a plain country in circuit .70. leagues, about the greatest part whereof are two Meres, the one of salt water, the other of fresh. The two lakes go one into the other at a streict, caused by little hills that run amid all the foresaid plain. This streict is passed by boat out of the one lake into the other, to all the towns standing on either side of the aforesaid lakes. Our Indyshe writers name the boats Canoa, the Indians call them A●caler, troughs as it were, all of one piece. I have travailed in the like upon the river Sone, in the edge of France, near high Burgundy. In the midst of the salt Mere, two leagues every way from the land, standeth that rich and wealthy city Temixtitan or Themistitan, 
Themestitan  no less in quantity then Sivilia, or Corduba in Spain. From the land, unto it lie four ways, or walls built up out of the water two Spears length broad, commodiously for such as trayvayle thither by land, with sundry draft bridges by the way, to cut of invasions if need were. Of these four ways, one was that, where Cortesius met with king Muteezuma. In one of these walls or bridges, fresh water is brought from the land into the city by two gutters, no less in quantity than hoggesheades: the one thereof serveth when the other is either stopped, or musty. The streets are straight, many in number, built much after the manner of Venice, both to go by land and by water. The bridges over the water in this city be made of wood, of such breadth that ten may pass over them together, so many in number, that it were a thing almost infinite to reckon them.  
The number of houses therein amounteth to .60. thousand. Amongst other one street is very large, sumptuously built, and famous for all sorts of merchandise, that province yieldeth, wont to be sold there .60. thousand merchants, as it is thought daily haunt that street. There are sold sundry sorts of mettales jewels, fruits, foul, herbs, and all other necessaries serving for meats, clothes, warfare, buildings, and pleasure. For every special kind of merchandise, is appointed a special standing by itself. They sell by tale and measure, the use of weights as yet they have not. Their money is a kind of Nut shells, of the kernel itself is made their drink. The tree is planted under the bows of some other for defence, until it be grown strong, able to abide the heat of the Sun, then is the fence tree cut down, and that let to continue, many Lords have thereof great revenues in that country. Steel and Iron they want, in steed whereof they use to make their instruments of a kind of hard stone, wherewith they work gold, silver, copper, brass, exellently well in what form or shape so ever they list. You can not show them any kind of thing, but they will draw it, and set it out most lively in metal, so cunning artificers they be. To the markets all things are brought, either by water in Canoaes, or on slaves backs. There standeth a goodly palace in the market place for judgement. There be resident always ten or xii grave senators, to see good order kept in that street, to decide controversies happening there, to punish offenders. Other see what is to be sold in the market, and what measure is made. Many gorgeous temples be in this city, many goodly tower's built where noble men have been buried, with gallant chapels to their Idols, many princely palaces, for that all the nobility of that country lieth some part of the year in the city, and the best citizens great rich men. The good order and policy in so barbarous a nation, is wonderful to behold. Concerning their abominable Idolatry, Cortesius is worthy of great commendation, for the throwing down the Idols where he came, being a stranger, though the princes of that province and Meteezuma also took it not well, principally in the palace, persuading them that it was not seemly for a king to worship that which a knave or slave of his had made. Every noble man hath, besides the palaces in the city, his castle, soldiers, receivers, & other officers in the country: and near the court gallant houses for recreation, with pleasant gardens, orchards, ponds, 
The Courtiers.  & other the like delights. The noble men and Gentlemen of this country, can not be few in number, whereas daily the court is furnished with five hundred young gentlemen, besides the multititude of serving men that attend on them. And the fashion in this country is of all the nobility, to send their sons for education sake unto the Court, although many of them dwell an hundred and fifty, or two hundred leagues of. So large & so mighty is the kingdom of Mexico, & yet so well governed, the king so duetyfully obeyed of all his subjects, aswell absent as present, each shire yielding and duly paying unto him the commodities thereof, according to their custom, that Cortesius thinketh no prince in the world to be more feared & reverenced of his people. The king hath sundry goodly palaces, 
The kings houses.  and in them many rich and costly ornaments, of gold, of silver, of feathers, so artificially wrought, that neither any sort of needle work, nor kind of picture, may seem to make the like show. Among the rest, three special houses of recreation the king hath in his palace. In one of them are a number of moustrous and deformed persons, dwarves, crookebackes, singing men by nature, two headed monsters, and others, with their keepers. The second house is so large, that in it commodiously two kings may be resident. The place is set forth with many Alabaster & Marble pillars, ten goodly ponds therein, well stored with fish, and foul, of all sorts that either do live in the water, or on the land, with their keepers, and diversities of meats for their divers natures. In this place kept he also young children, that had white heads, & were of fair complexion, aswell boys as girls. The third house served for Lions, Tigers, Wolves, Foxes, and other the like wild beasts, each sort in their several dens. The least of these three houses is so well built, that the king at his pleasure may lodge therein, with all his court. The prince is thus served. five hundred gentlemen at the least, with their followers, give attendance at the court all the day long, 
The service of the king.  though they come not always in the kings sight. These gentlemen sit down to dinner when the king sitteth, and do fare as well as he, their followers have their reversion. The buttery, cellar, pantry, and other offices never shut, come in who will, meat & drink he can not want. The hall wherein the king dineth, is matted under foot, his meat is brought up by .300. young men pensioners, flesh, fish, fruits, salates of all sorts upon chaffyng dishes in the winter to keep the meats warm. These waiters never come near the board, for the king sitteth on a leather cushing artificially wrought, at a table raylled about, within the precinct whereof standeth his Sewer, to set him down those meats he liketh of best. At his right hand two old men sit down, unto whom the king himself carveth. The king washeth before meat and after, he is served in earthen dishes, his cups be of the same metal: he shyfteth himself four times a day. Whatsoever he hath once used, be it apparel▪ nappery, or any other kind of household stuff, it is never brought him any more to use, but bestowed by him upon his servants or friends at convenient times. For honour sake each one cometh into the palace barefoot, in most humble wise they come before the king, when they are called, bowing down their heads, their eyes to the ground. It were great presumption to look the king in the face when he talketh with any of them. A man would think they were all dumb in the presence of the king, such is their silence. No man dare turn his back to the king, but departing from him each one goeth backward. No man dare go out of his place when the king passeth by. At his going abroad he is followed with a great troop of his nobles and gentlemen, and hath three rods borne before him, one whereof he taketh in his own hand when he cometh forth out of his litter, wherein commonly he is carried abroad. In conclusion no heathen prince hath so many ceremonies as this king of Mexico. Quietly in this city from the .8. of September the year of our lord .1520. until May following, remained Cortesius with all honour, enjoying his pictorye, and ruling so mighty a kingdom conquered by him, with all prosperity. When Velasque a spaniard, than lieutenant of Cuba, that ever envied at his good hap, sent Naruaez a lusty young captain with eighteen sail well appointed to command Cortesius out of Mexico, and to give over the rule of that country, which he himself had painfully conquered unto their pleasure, by forged patents from the Spanish king. Much amazed at the first was Cortesius with this tidings, considering that if he went against Naruaez, the Mexicanes not yet thoroughly brought in subjection might in the mean time revolt: again if he stayed, Naruaez might put his conquest in jeopardy, violently forcing the country everywhere as he came. The matter was thoroughly known to the barbares of Themistitan. The king himself had brought him by his vassals, painted in a table, the ships, their number, artillarye, horsemen and footmen landed. In the end Cortesius resolved himself to go against Naruaez. Wherefore leaving at Themistitan a Garryson of Spaniards, the which he highly commended unto Muteezuma, marched forward with .170 footmen, sending other .80. that way before him. Naruaez likewise came on against Cortesius, and had now taken Cempoal, and stirred up against him those citizens. Cortesius having intelligence of Naruaez certain being there in an high tower guarded with .800. soldiers, and .19. Canons set at the steyre foot, thinking nevertheless nothing at all of his coming, set upon Naruaez with .250. men, and there took him on Witsunday night, the rest of his company yielded themselves. In the mean while the citizens of Themistitan revolted against their prince and the Spanish government, as by a messenger dispatched thither from Cempoal, to declare Cortesius good hap and Naruaes' imprisoment, it was understood. The castle of Themistitan besieged, in many places set a fire and undermined, the Spanish Gartyson to be in great jeopardy, the fly boats they made, burnt, the messenger himself grievously wounded, Muteezuma the king only to favour them, and him now scarcely obeyed, the nobles to choose death rather than to obey such geastes, that keep their king like a ward, that dispossess them of their own city, that meyntayne therein their enemies the Tascaltecans & Guazuingoes, even before their face at their own charges, to despite them, that devour their vittaylles hard to come by in that city so situated in the water, that injury them, that lay on tributes, that by hook a●d by crook make away from them whatsoever good there is to ●e had, that break down their Idols, and suppress their ancient rites and ceremonies.  
Cortesius therefore speedily with .70. horses and five hundred footmen, 
Corte●ius returneth to Themistitan.  and as much artillery as he could, returneth again to Themistitan, whither he came about midsummer day. At Cortesius entry into the city again, the spaniards, thoroughly beaten by the Barbares with darts and stones from high pineapple trees, & an high tower that was near, began to take heart, and to hope for good hap after their great troubles. The Barbares likewise understanding of Cortesius coming, grew to be more cruel and fyrce▪ with horrible cries, shooting of their arrows, and throwing an infinite number of darts and stones, for the company of them was innumerable, that the air seemed dark and cloudy therewith. Cortesius sent out a captain with two hundred to rescue the spaniards in the palace. This captain slew many of the Barbares, but the multitude was so great that he did little good. Four of his soldiers were slain, he himself, greevousely wounded, had much a do to retire again. Cortesius set upon them at an other side, little harm did he them likewise, for that as soon as the Barbares had spent their darts and stones, each one got up into the turrette of his house to save himself. The fight held on fyrcely a good while. Cortesius was forced in the end to retire with some danger, and loss of many of his soldiers. The which thing when the Barbares had espied, they began to give a new assault on every side of the palace, to fire the gates, and stoutly to continue battery, fighting even upon their fellows dead carcases, and wishing with them rather to be slain, then to live in bondage under the spaniards. Thus spent they in arms the whole day, yielding a new supply of men (the multitude was so great) four times an hour, and raising clamours all the night long to the spaniards great annoy, that then could take no rest after their painful and dangerous conflict the day time, few in number, fighting from morning to night without intermission, and .80. of their company wounded. The next day the Barbares set upon the spaniards again. Cortesius planteth xiii field pieces, and furnysheth his vanguard with harquebuziers and archers, but their enemies so little esteemed death, that seeing at one shoot a dozen of their fellows torn in pieces, all fear set a side, they supplied still the void places. The day following, the spaniards wanting victuals, issued out in open field: they slew many Barbares, they overthrew the houses near the palace, they took certain draft bridges, but at night they returned with their General and 50. of their company wounded, as hungry as they went forth. Wherefore they caused warlike engines to be made of boards, in form of a foursquare house, going on wheels, placing in each one thereof .20. shot, whom many rascal soldiers followed with pikeaxes and hatchets, to do harm that way in destroying their buildings: but stones & darts came so mightily & so thick about the Spaniards ears, that such as went thus forth, were feign to creep home again out of their engines torn in pieces: they that tarried at home could not once look out but they were damaged. King Muteezuma, desirous to dissuade his citizens from the assault, 
Muteezuma slain.  showing himself unto them out of the Palace, had a blow with a stone, whereof in three days he died. This Prince was of a very good nature, wise, and very patiented, his body the Spaniards left unto the Mexicans to bury, for that they themselves had little other leisure then to think how to save their lives, rather than to bury the dead.  
The next day the nobles of the country came to a parley with Cortesius, 
A Parle.  at the same place where Muteezuma took his death's wound. Cortesius exhorted them to peace, otherwise threatening the utter decay & ruin of that their so famous and noble a city, with protestation of piety on them whom once he had taken to be his friends, promising pardon for that which was done, and setting down what befell unto other nations that refused his friendship. The Mexicans making small account of his words, answered, that they took him for no friend, but for their enemy, that he should departed with all his train out of their country if he would have peace, otherwise they would so long continue their siege, until by force they had driven him out, though for every spaniard slain, there died a thousand Mexicans, for his friendship they cared not, pardon they asked not, most willingly they would all die, so that they might deliver their posterity from the Spanish tyranny.  
Wherefore Cortesius, weighing with himself the great danger that presently might ensue for want of victuals if he stayed, the Mexicans continuing their assault, for peril to be stopped at the draft bridges if he departed, so much the more for that these Barbares were not ignorant of .70. thousand ducats heaped up together by him in that province: set upon them the second time with the aforesaid engines, but all in vain. So stoutly their enemies defended themselves, and so fiercely they resisted the assault given. Chief the Spaniards courage appeared in winning of a certain Tower that always commanded them, next in the ruin of such houses as for the nearness thereof bred them great encumbrance and peril. After many wounds received, and great slaughter done on both sides, the principal citizens, counterfecting a conclusion of peace, promised obedience unto Cortesius, so that all deeds past might be forgotten. Cortesius liking well thereof, at their request set free a priest he had of theirs in prison, to deal betwixt them, and thoroughly persuaded that no guile was meant, withdrew his company from skirmishing. But he was no sooner set down to dinner, after his restless afflictions and continual labours, but the Mexicans took the town bridges, and voided the trenches, which Cortesius for passage had caused to be filled up. Presently therefore he rushed out amongst them again with his horsemen, but the journey went so hardly with the spaniards, that Cortesius wounded in the head was scarcely able to retire again, many of his company were slain, such as escaped were not able to continue in the field any longer, wearied with blows, worn out with hunger. It remained only, that now they either presently must perish, or else departed out of the country. By night therefore Cortesius and his soldiers privily thought to slip away with Muteezumaies children, 
Cortesius fleeeth out of Themistitan.  and certain of the Mexican nobles captives, charging the spanish king his officers with the fif●h part of his treasure, and taking the residue thereof with him. But the Barbares having intelligence thereof, oppressed them in the way, took their goods, slew many of the Spaniards, and with them their captives: if happily any escaped, they were such as marched in the most, for both the vanguard and rearward were altogether discomfited and lost, to the number of .150 spaniards 42. horses .2000 Tascaltecans, and Guazuzing, that aided them. Thus painfully, with great danger and no less grief, Cortesius left Themistitan, pursued by his enemies that followed him, nothing helped by the way as he repaired home, refreshing his Camp with a dead horse, after five days spent with the food of parched corn, and that in small quantity before he came to Tascalteca.  
The Tascaltecans curtuously entertained him and his, with whom he made his abode .20. days, to refresh his wearied army: that done, he conquered other cities in that province, either enemies unto the Tascaltecans, as Tepeaca, where he built for safety of passage Segura la Frontera: or such as for fear of the Mexicans had not yielded themselves before, to wit, Guaccachiulla, Izzuca, and other principal towns thereabout. Finally, he sendeth for horsemen and shot out of the Island Hispaniola, winneth many Barbares favour & assistance against the Mexicans, maketh provision of .13. fly Boats, to annoy by water the citizens of Themistitan. Meteezumaes, Nepheu, Catamazinus, the new king of Mexico, fearing on the other side the spaniards return, and seeing many of his subjects to fall from him, wanteth not in any wise to set all things in a readiness for wars, especially pikes, to annoy the horsemen, whom they most dreaded. Eightiene leagues from Tascalteca towards Themistitan, 
Cortesius returneth to the siege of Themistitan,  standeth Tazuco, a goodly city of the Mexicans. Cortesius first of all took this city, & caused his provision for fly Boats wrought in Tascalteca to be brought thither. Such was the hatred of the Tascaltecans and Guazuzing against the Mexicans, that they carried the timber upon their shoulders from Tascalteca to Tazuco, without any grudging, for the provision aforesaid. From Tazuco Cortesius cut a passage into the salt Mare of Mexico, to bring his fly Boats to the siege of Themistitan: this trench, three english miles long, and four fathom deep, was finished by .8000. pioneers of that country in fifty days. This navy annoyed very much the citizens, in destroying their skulls and troughs, and stopping their passage from place to place, besides the assault given therewith to the town itself. Cortesius army, ever as it came, destroyed all such places by the way, that either persecuted him fleeing away before, or presently might damage his return.  
The city he besieged in three places at once, after that he had cut of all the fresh water conducts, and taken the ways and bridges, and stopped all passage for any enemy of his into the town: the number of his soldiers amounted unto .120000. for out of all the country about, the Barbares came with Cortesius, some for liberty, some for friendship, some for hope of gain. The siege lasted nevertheless ten weeks, in the end whereof with continual battery the city defaced, and more than .100000. citizens worn out partly in fight, and partly wasted with misery and hunger, Cortesius took their new king privily walking in a secret corner of the lake, 
Themistitan conquered again.  and subdued thoroughly with him the city Themistitan .14. towns by the lake side, & all the Mexican realm and province, unto the Spanish crown, in the jurisdiction whereof it doth presently remain. The spoil of the city, in value great, Cortesius divided amongst the Spanish soldiers, reserving the fifth part thereof, and certain fine feather works, the which he sent into Europe, to be presented unto Charles the fifth king of Spain, and Emperor, than in Germany.  
Who listeth to see this history more at large, may read Cortesius Navigations, and Francis Lopez work thereof written in the Spanish tongue, made not long since Italian by Lucius Maurus, and if I be not deceived, now a doing into english. An abridgement thereof I promised, or a commentary, as Caesar termeth such kind of writings, to give other men occasion to set forth at large those things by leisure, which briefly are noted and signified in few unto some, that willingly would not be altogether ignorant thereof, nor yet stand to long in any such discourses. To set down particularly each spaniard and Portugal his doings in these new discovered lands, to draw Geographically the places, to write all their battles, victories, and conquests, to describe the cities razed, the towns erected, to point out the Captains personages, to show their travails and good hap, it would require an other Homer, an other Thucydides, an other Livius labour: it would require an other Emperor to set students a work, as justinian did his law geatherers: the relations of the Indyshe travelers are so many in number, their reports so divers, the volumes written thereof so huge, and in so sundry languages.  
R.W.   
FINIS.   

R. Wills Special advises to be observed in reading over this work.  

Fol. 6. De Medea. put out De.  
Fol. 7. Of my Decades, read of my first Decade. For as the two first books of the first Decade were by. P.M. dedicated unto Ascanio Visconte, than Cardinal and Uicechaunceller of Rome, so are the eight books following in the same Decade written to the Cardinal of Aragonia. Fol. 54. Every Decade hath ten books or Chapters, whereof it hath, according to the Greek word, that name.  
Fol. 20 A. and. O. etc. His meaning is, that this self same point is extreme West, in respect of one half of the world, and extreme East in respect of the other half, or hemisphere beneath us.  
Fol. 31. juga de Canias. read. juego de Canas.  
Fol. 35. Barramedabas. read. Barrameda.  
Fol. 39 To be part of the continent. This was then spoken for want of further knowledge, as in other writings following it will appear.  
Fol. 45. The gold whereof they are made is native. etc. This place should be thus Englished. Their gold is like unto that gold in Germany, whereof the Florenes are made. The next sentence likewise is not without some salt of the translator, for the latin goeth thus. Alibi in eo tractu intra vaginam mentularem neruum reducunt, funicuio que praeputium aligant.  
Fol. 47. Gorgodes Meducias. read. Medusaeas',  
Folly 49. Being demanded of me. This place should you read thus. Being demanded of me afterward, were it not a sea separating two lands: they answered, the water there of to be fresh & sweet, & the further they went up against the stream, it to be so much the more fresh & sweet, to be full of Islands and wholesome fish. They dare avouch the breadth thereof to be more than .30. leagues, and the river very swiftly to fall into the sea, yielding unto the fury of the fresh water.  
Fol. 49. Beyond the city of Cathayo. They supposed it according to their skill in unknown places.  
Fol. 50. Animae album. read. Animen.  
Item. You shall now therefore. This sentence is not in. P.M. But an other of the same length, wherein he abaseth his own knowledge, in respect of T. Livius, and avoucheth the fantasies following to be better than Lucianus tales, for that Lucianus ●●●ned his fables, but these follies to be truly such in deed.  
Folly 51. But now most noble Prince. Three other vain tales are here left out, of the beginning of the sea, and the original of woman kind: all Greece could never have imagined more vain, more scornful, more shameful fables: and so are they left to such as list to read them in that language wherein P. Martyr did write them, with the praise of such Barbarous ministers as do preach them.  
Fol. 57 The year of Christ .1520. Read .1502.  
Fol. 83. Pezulana. read. Petrus Arias.  
Fol. 89. Or that in Niogita. Read, or that in the black burnt moors country, or kingdom of Melinde.  
Fol. 90. Water is turned into air. Read, air is turned into water.  
Fol. 98. The niene Boats of Culchas. Read, or Culchas.  
Fol. 153. Co●lacutea read. calicut, Cochin, Comorin  
Fol. 164. Etesti. Read, Etesiae  
Fol. 169. ●emobal read, Cempoal  
Fol. 186. The generations of nations. Read, of metals.  
Fol. 231. Eight. Read, eighteth.  
Item. 36. Read, 63.  
Fol. 232 The West Ocean. Read, South Ocean, namely Mar deal zur  
Fol. 234. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in the margin, should have place in the text before. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. Read, the Greek verse 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉.  
Fol. 252. P. 231. In the margin. put it out.  
Fol. 253. Peruse, these four volumes, Read, the four volumes.  
Fol. 260. Santlianum, read, Santianum  
Fol. 265. Obo, alias, Oba and Obi  
Fol. 268. Fladimer, all, Volodimer  
Item, Smolne, all, Smolensko  
Fol. 269. Impreignable, Read, inexpugnable.  
Fol. 270. Nicene, read, Nice. And of their faith more likely hereafter. fol 273 although fol. 302. the former opininion be recited again.  
Fol. 274. Prohibit, Read, prohibited.  
Fol. 283▪ Volham, read, Volgha  
Item, Dividna, all, Duina  
Item, Vistiuga, Read each where, Vstinga  
Fol. 279. Schondia, for these countries following see Ortelius. 45. table in his first edition, de reg, Septentional  
Fol. 280. Sigismundus liberus, read, liber, for he was Baron of Harbestein & the Deutche Barons are called frey herren, whereof in latin also his title was written, Liber Baro ab Herbestein, out of his works is that discourse taken. Fol. 301.  
Fol. 281. Wardhus Castle .54. the one row of figures here signifieth the longitude, the other showeth the Latitude. The reader for his assurance herein, shall do well to confer all the figures so set, with the Maps, lest he be deceived.  
Fol. 294. By unknown nations. Read, motions.  
Fol. 297. The river Clesma. al. Desma.  
Item. Marovians. read. moravians  
Fol. 298. This tongue is spread further. Read again of the Slavon tongue at large. Fol. 301.  
Fol. 304. Bengas, Of their money, and also of all other nations coins shall you have a special discourse hereafter, if God send us life.  
Fol. 308. Tumen. It should seem to be that Tamen spoken of before. Fol. 246.  
Fol. 310. To Artach. Read, in Artaches.  
Fol. 311. Besermanni. What they be. Read, Fol. 335.  
Fol. 312. As do the Christians, imagining so of us, for that many Christians, to wit, the meaner sort, dwell commonly ever in one place.  
Fol. 316. Seven werstes, to wit, seven Moscovian miles, that is, five english miles and somewhat more.  
Fol. 321. It shall suffice to the reader, put out, to. 

Item. Sachana. al. Sughava.  
Hisnovogrod. Read, Nisnovogrod.  
Tartars, Nogays, point it thus. Tartar's Nogais.  
Bilbil. all Bilbek.  
Casbin. Read, Casmin.  
Baccho. all Bachu.    
Fol. 323. Sharuan. all Chirua, and Seruan. Tollepan. Read, Torbante.  
Fol. 324. Arash al. Exesch.  
Fol. 326. Unto Mecha in Arabia, to honour Mahumets tomb, whereof you shall read in jews Vartomannus Navigations.  
Item. Ardaxuil. read. Ardovil. Item. Fol. 320. for Ardevelim.  
Fol. 327. Ought to be beloved. Read, believed.  
Fol. 329. Tulibante. Read Torbante.  
Fol. 329. The Persians, to wit, the Gentlemen of Persia. Esteeming arts and sciences, for silks and furnitures of horses. Fol. 326. &. 330.  
Fol. 330. Turquestan, it lieth North-east from the Caspian sea.  
Item. Phison, is thought to be Ganges. it should rather seem to be some branch of Tigris.  
Fol. 331. 

Deli. al. Dalangar.  
Caraconi. al. ●orassan.  
His chief mansion place, it was so: but now it is not. Fol. 322.    
Fol. 337. 

Potofarina, read Portofainra.  
Bova, read ●ona.    
Fol. 345. We made sail. Read, sale.  
Fol. 354. inclinations, divinations. Read, diviations or wandering.  
Fol. 358. Stranger solgiers, read Soldiers.  
Fol. 375. In the mean tyme. This is the later end of the sixth Chapter, the residue whereof the Printer hath for modesty left out: And Eden himself hath in this translation also left out many things to be seen in the latin copy, either as superfluous, or unseemly. I am not willing to defraud Vartomannus, Eden, or the Printer of their due.  
Fol. 382. Condaliis. I would read Sandaliis, as it may seem in the letter following, meaning thereby a kind of high shoe or buskyn.  
Fol. 394. Rhyme. Read, rind.  
Fol. 429. It was lost and not found until this day. It may be that P. Martyr did write the history thereof at large, in Pope Clement the .7. his time, that happily was lost at the sack of Rome: but his abridgement of the aforesaid voyage shall you find written to Pope Adrian afterward in his fift Decade, Cap. 7. Out of the which work, together with the reports of other travelers that went the aforesaid viage, this present Pamflet hath been taken.  
Fol. 429. A day lost in three years and one month. I do not think but that in very deed these spaniards that sailed thus round about the world, following continually the west, did lose on day in their journey. In like manner I am of opinion, that if the Portugals followed continually the east round about the world, they should find at their journeys end one day to many. I mean it thus. Let two passengers depart from Lisbona, the one Westward, the other Eastward, round about the world, and both return home again that day which we do call Midsummer day. I say that day would be to the Eastern passengers the next day after Midsummer day, to the western travelers but Midsummer even. My reason is, for that every xu degrees of the great circle East or West, maketh difference one hour: wherefore Eastward after fifteen degrees, you shall begin your day one hour sooner: after fifteen degrees Westward, you shall end your day one hour later, than you did in that place whence you did set forth. The whole circle than of the world containing precisely .360 degrees, that is, four and twenty times xv proportionably to the .24 hours of the day, how can it be otherwise, but that these passengers traveling still either Westward round about the world, or Eastward, should either miss a day at their journeys end or else find one to many.  
Fol. 430. The epistle of Maximilian Transiluane. This preface is to be found in the tome of the navigations written in Latin. Fol. 524.  
Fol. 436. The pole Antarctic Of these stars, and the order thereof about the Antarctic pole, may you read more at large in Albericus Vesputius navigations. Cap. 119. to be seen in the volume of navigations written in Latin. Fol. 91.    

The Table.  

richard wills Epistle dedicatory to the Countess of bedford.  
The Preface for the whole work.  
The first discovering of the west Indies. Fol. 1  
What manner of man Christopher Colombus was. Fol. 1  
What labour Columbus took. Fol. 2  
Why they were called Indians. 
The first part.  Fol. 3  
Of the colour of the Indians. Fol. 4  
Plato his testimony of the west Indies. Fol. 5  
Seneca his testimony thereof. Fol. 6  
P. Martyrs Epistle to Charles the Emperor. Fol. 30  
The first Decade. Fol. 8  
The second Decade. Fol. 57  
The third Decade. Fol. 94  
The .4. Decade otherwise entitled of the west Indish Islands. Fol. 155  
A brief rehearsal of the contents of the aforesaid Decades. Fol. 173  
R. Eden's preface, Gonzalus Ferdinandus Ouiedus Epistle to Charles the 5. concerning his history of the west Indies. Fol. 185  
The ordinary navigation from Spain to the West Indies. Fol. 187  
Of two notable things as touching the west Indies: and of the great riches brought from thence into Spain. Fol. 188  
Of the gold mines and manner of working in them. Fol. 188  
The manner of fishing for pearls. Fol. 191  
The familiarity that the Indians have with the devil. Fol. 193  
Of temperate and habitable regions under the Equinoctial line. Fol. 195  
Of divers particular things, as Worms Serpents, beasts fowls. Fol. 198  
Of trees, fruits, and plants. Fol. 204  
Of Reeds or Canes. Fol. 207  
Of the venomous apples wherewith the Canibales envenom their arrows. Fol. 209  
Of fishes and the manner of fishing. Fol. 211  
Of the rising and falling of our Ocean sea and the south sea called Mar deal zur. Folly 215  
Of the strict of land between the north sea and Mar deal zur. Fol. 216  
How things of one kind differ by the nature of the place, and of the beasts called Tigers. Fol. 217  
Of the manners and customs of the Indians of the firm land and of their women. Fol. 219  
Of the Islands Hispaniola and Cuba. Fol. 221  
Of the Island Cuba and other. Fol. 224  
Of the land of Baccalaos. Fol. 225  
Particularly of new Spain called Nova hispania or Mexico. Fol. 225  
Of Peru. Fol. 226  
Of the river called Rio de la Plata that is the river of silver. Fol. 226  
Of the lands of Laborador and Baccaleos lying west and northwest from England, and being part of the firm land. Fol. 227  
The description of the land Florida. 
The second part  Fol. 228  
For master. Cap. Furbysheys passage by the northwest. Fol. 230  
Reports of the province China. Fol. 237  
Of the Island Giapan and other little Isles in the east Ocean. Fol. 251  
●oysins Fr●es letters touching Giapan. Fol. 253  
Of 〈◊〉 Isles betwixt China and the Moluccaes'. Fol. 260  
A discourse o● divers voyages and ways by the which Spices, precious sto●es, and gold were brought in old time from India into Europe 〈◊〉 par●es of the world also of the voyage to Cathayo and east India by the north sea, of the voyages likewise of Sebastian Cabote and particularly of moscovia. Fol. 254 
The third part.   
A b●ie●e description of moscovia by Munster and Gastaldus. Fol. 271  
A description of the north regions and how they are habitable, contrary to the opinion of the old writers. Fol. 275  
Schondia. Fol. 279. Swecia or Sweth land. Fol. 287. Bothnia. Fol. 187  
Groenland. Fol. 280. Gothia or Gothlande. Fol. 288  
Island. Fol. 281. Futland with Emingia. Fol. 288  
Laponia. Folly 282.  
Norway. Fol. 284.  
The difference of regions and causes of great cities. Fol. 288  
Paulus iovius history of the Moscovian embassage. Fol. 289  
Other notable things concerning moscovia gathered out of Sigismunde Baron of Herbestein. Fol. 301  
A description of the regions and people lying north and east from moscovia to the river Petzora and the province of jugra and Oby even to Cathayo. Fol. 305  
Of the famous river Tanais, Fol. 308  
The way out of moscovia to Cathayo. Fol. 309  
Of the Tartars. Fol. 311  
The navigation by the frosty sea. Fol. 315  
K. Edward the .6. letters to the northeasterne princes by Sir Hugh wylloughbye, in latin and english. Fol. 318  
Our english merchants voyage into Persia. Fol. 321  
Of master jenkensons voyage into Persia. Fol. 322  
Of the last viage into Persia in the year of our lord 1568. Fol. 324  
Of the king of Persia his name. Fol. 330.  
Of the Persians religione and other their fashions. Fol. 325  
Of the Persian Empire and the original thereof. Fol. 329  
Of Persia out of. M. P Uenetus. Fol. 329  
Of the Persian kingdom out of Haytthon. Fol. 330  
Of Ormius kingdom joining unto Persia. Fol. 331  
Of the Sophi or king of Persia according to the late writers. Fol. 331  
The traffic of Persia with other countries. Fol. 332  
Of the Persian gulf. Fol. 332  
The previleages granted by the Sophi to our merchants. Fol. 332  
Arthur Edward's viage into Persia, with the continuance of the former privileges. Fol. 333  
The commodities that Engglyshe merchants may have by the trade into Persia. Fol. 335  
The manner how Christians become Busormen. Fol. 335  
Of the Bombasine or Cotton tree. Fol. 336  
The writing of the Persians. Fol. 336  
Of two voyages made out of England into Guinea in Africa. Fol. 336.  
A brief description of Africa. Fol. 337.  
The first voyage to Guinea. Fol. 338.  
Pinteado his letters patents made him by the king of Portugal his master for his return. Fol. 341.  
The second voyage to Guinea, with a more full description of Africa, Ethiopia, and the black moors country. Fol. 342.  
The Doves of the Island Madera. Fol. 353.  
Of S. Thomas Island under the Equinoctial line. Fol. 353.  
jews Uertomannus navigation into Arabia, egypt, Persia, Syria, Ethiopia, and East India. Fol. 354.  
The contents of the which voyages are these following.    

The contents of the vii books of navigations and voyages of Lodovicus Vartomannus to the regions of Arabia, egypt, Persia, Syria, east India, and Ethiopia.  


The contents of the first book.  
The first Chaptere is of the navigation from Venice to Alexandria in egypt. Fol. 355.  
Of the city named Cayrus, Alcayr, Memphis, or Babylon in egypt, upon the river of Nilus. Cap. 2. Fol. 355.  
Of the cities of Beryntho, Tripoli, and Antioch. Cap. 3. Fol. 356.  
Of the cities of Aman and Menin. Cap. 4. Fol. 356.  
Of the city of Damascus. Cap. 5. Fol. 357.  
Of such things as are seen in the city of Damascus. Cap. 6. Fol. 358.  
Of the Mamalukes of Damascus. Cap. 7. Fol. 358.  
The journey from Damascus to Mecha: And of the manners of the Arabians. Cap. 8. Fol. 359.  
Of the strength and valiantness of the Mamalukes. Cap. 9 Fol. 361.  
Of the cities of Sodoma and Gomorrha. Cap. 10. Fol. 361.  
Of a mountain inhabited with jews: And of the city named Medinathalhabi, where Mahumet was buried. Cap. 11. Fol. 362.  
Of the Temple or chapel and Sepulchre of mohammed and his fellows. Cap. 12. Fol. 362.  
Of the Sect of Mahumet. Cap. 13. Fol. 363.  
The journey to Mecha. Cap. 14. Fol. 364.  
The form and situation of the city of Mecha: And why the mahometans resort thither. Cap. 15. Fol. 365.  
Of the merchandise of Mecha. Cap. 16. Fol. 366.  
The pardons and Indulgenses of Mecha. Cap. 17. Fol. 366.  
The manner of Sacrificing in Mecha. Cap. 18. Fol. 367.  
Of the Unicorns of the Temple of Mecha, which are not seen in any other place. Cap. 19 Fol. 368.  
Of divers things which chanced to the autour in Mecha. Cap. 20. Fol. 368.  
Of the red sea, and why it can not be sailed in the night. Cap. 21. Folly 370.    


The contents of the second book.  
Of the city Gezan in Arabia Foelix. That is, the blessed or happy Arabia. Cap. 1. Fol. 371  
Of certain people named Banduin. Cap. 2. Fol. 371  
Of an Island of the red sea named Camaran. Cap. 3. Fol. 371  
Of the city of Aden, and their manners and customs toward strangers. Cap. 4. Fol. 372  
how the women of Arabia are greatly in love with white men. Cap. 5. Fol. 373  
Of the liberality of the queen toward the autour. Cap. 6. Fol. 375  
Of the cities of Lagis and Aiaz in Arabia Foelyx. And of the town of Dante. Cap. 7. Fol. 375  
Of Almacharan, a city of Arabia Foelyx: And of the fruitfulness thereof. Cap. 8. Fol. 375  
Of Ream, a city of Arabia Foelyr: And the Temperateness thereof. Cap. 9 Fol. 376  
Of Sana, a city of Arabia Foelyx. Cap. 10. Fol. 376  
Of Taessa, Zibith, and Damar: great cities of Arabia Foelyx. Cap. 11. Fol. 376  
Of the Soltan of the foresaid cities: And why he is named Sechamir. Cap. 12. Fol. 377  
Of Monkeys and Marmasettes, and other beasts noisome to men Cap. 13. Fol. 377  
Of certain places of Ethiope. Cap. 14 Fol. 377  
Of the city of Zoila in Ethiope: And the great fruitefelnesse thereof: And of certain strange beasts seen there. Cap. 15. Fol. 377  
Of Barbara, an Island of Ethiope. Cap. 16. Fol. 378  
Of Ethiope, read more in the last navigation in the end of the book.    


The contents of the third book.  
Of Persia, and of certain towns and ports of Persia. Cap. 1. Fol. 378  
Of the Island and city of Ormus or Armusium: And of an Island of Persia where pearls are found. Cap. 2. Fol. 378  
Of the city named Eri, in Corozani, a region of Persia, and of the riches thereof: Also of Reubarbarum. Cap. 3. Fol. 379  
Of a river thought to be Euphrates: and of Castoreum. Cap. 4. Fol. 379  
Of the city of Saint Bragant, bigger than Babylon: And of the king of Persia, named the Sophi. Cap. 5. Fol. 380    


The contents of the fourth book.  
Of India, and of the cities, and notable things seen there: And first of the city of Cambaia, most fruitful. Cap. 1. Fol. 381  
The manners of the people of Cambaia: And of the Soltan of that city Cap. 2. Fol. 381  
Of the city of Ceul, and the manners of thinhabitants. Cap. 3. Fol. 382  
Of Goga an Island of India. Cap. 4. Fol. 383  
Of Decham a very fair city of India. Cap. 5. Fol. 383  
Of certain other goodly cities of India. Cap. 6. Fol. 384  
Of Canonor and Narsinga, great cities of India. Cap. 7. Fol. 384  
Of the fruitful city of Bisinagar in the kingdom of Narsinga. Cap. 8. Fol. 384  
Of the docility, agility and wit of Elephants. Cap. 9 Fol. 385  
Of the engendering of Elephants: And of the magnificence and riches of the king of Narsinga. Cap. 10. Fol. 386    


The contents of the fifth book.  
Of the famous and rich city of calicut Cap. 1. Fol. 387  
Of the king of calicut: And of their idolatry. Cap. 2. Fol. 387  
Of the manner which the king useth at his meat. Cap. 3. Fol. 388  
Of the Priests of calicut named Bramini. Cap. 4. Fol. 388  
Of the divers sects of idolaters in the city of calicut Cap. 5. Fol. 398  
The apparel of the king, queen, and the inhabitants of the city of calicut: And of their manner of feeding. Cap. 6. Fol. 389  
Of their custom after the death of the king. Cap. 7. Fol. 389  
Of their changing of wives. Cap. 8. Folly 390  
The manner of feeding of the common people of the Idolaters: And of these justice. Cap 9 Fol. 390  
Of their honouring of Idols. Cap. 10. Fol. 390  
Of their manner of war. Cap. 11. Fol. 391  
Of their ships and manner of sailing on the sea. Cap. 12. Fol. 391  
The palace and court of the king of calicut. Cap. 13. Fol. 392  
The Spices of calicut. Cap. 14. Fol. 392  
The fowls and birds of calicut. Cap. 15. Fol. 393  
Of a most fruitful tree of all the world. Cap. 16. Fol. 393  
How they sow Rise. Cap. 17. Fol. 394  
How their Physicians visit the sick folks. Cap. 18. Fol. 394  
Of their exchangers, bankers, and brokers. Cap. 19 Fol. 395  
Of thinhabitants of Poltar and Hirava. Cap. 20. Fol. 395  
Of four fouted beasts, fowls, and birds of calicut. Cap. 21. Fol. 395  
Of certain Serpents which are seen in calicut. Cap. 22. Fol. 396  
Of the lights and lamps which are seen in the palace of the king of calicut. Cap. 23. Fol. 396  
The great multitude of Idolaters which resort to calicut for pardon of their sins. Cap. 24. Fol. 396    


¶ The contents of the sixth book, of the Navigation of India.  
Of the city of Calcolon and Colon. Cap. 1. Fol. 397  
Of Cyromandel a city of India. Cap. 2. Fol. 397  
Of the Island of Zailon, and the precious stones found there. Cap. 3. Fol. 398  
Of the tree of cinnamon in the Island of Zailon. Cap. 4. Fol. 398  
Of Paleachet, a city of India. Cap. 5. Fol. 399  
Of Tarnasari, a City of India. Cap. 6. Fol. 399  
Of the wild and tame beasts in the city of Tarnasari. Cap. 7. Fol. 399  
The manner which the king of Tarnasari useth when he permitteth his wife to be deflowered of white men. Cap. 8. Fol. 400  
The manner of burning dead bodies in the city of Tarnasari. Cap. 9 Fol. 400  
The justice which th'inhabitants of Tarnasari observe. Cap. 10. Fol. 401  
how the mahometans are buried in the city of Tarnasari. Cap. 11. Fol. 401  
The divers sorts of their ships or other vessels of sailing. Cap. 12. Fol. 401  
Of Bangella, a great and rich city of India: And of the great power of the king of that city. Cap. 13. Fol. 401  
Of certain Christian merchants which traffic there. Cap. 14. Fol. 402  
Of Pego a famous city of India. Cap. 15. Fol. 402  
Of the magnificence, humanity, and great riches of the king of Pego. Cap. 16. Fol. 403  
Of the city of Melacha, and the great river of Gaza. Cap. 17 Fol. 404  
Of the Island of Sumatra or Taprobana. Cap. 18. Fol. 405  
Of an other kind of Pepper: Also of silk, and the precious gum called Laserpitium or Belzoe. Cap. 19 Fol. 405  
Of three sorts of the tree of Aloes. Cap. 20. Fol. 405  
how the gums of Aloes & Laserpitium, are proved. Cap. 21. Fol. 406  
Of divers merchants in the Island of Sumatra or Taprobana. Cap. 22. Fol. 406  
Of the Island of Bandan where Nutmegs & Maze are found. Cap. 23. Fol. 407  
Of the Island of Monoch, where Cloves grow. Cap. 24. Fol. 407  
Of the Island of Bornei▪ Cap. 25. Fol. 407  
Of certain observations used in the navigation to the Island of Giava. Cap. 26. Fol. 408  
Of the Island of Giava, & the manners of the people. Cap. 27. Fol. 408  
Of the cruel manners in slaying their parents to the Anthropophagi to be eaten. Cap. 28. Fol. 409  
Of the strange course of the Sun in the Island of Giava. Cap. 29. Fol. 409  
Of their return from the Island of Giava. Cap. 30. Fol. 409  
Again of the city of calicut after their return thither. Cap. 31. Fol. 410  
Of the coming of the king of Portugals ships to the city of Canonor▪ Cap. 32. Fol. 411  
how the autour played the physician, and counterfeit holiness, lest he should be taken for a spy of the Portugals. Cap. 33. Fol. 411  
How the Mahometan priests call the people to their church. Cap. 34. Fol. 412  
The manner of praying among the mahometans. Cap. 35. Fol. 412  
What subtlety the autour used to depart from calicut, to go to the Portugals. Cap. 36. Fol. 413  
How he fled to the Portugals from the city of Canonor. Cap. 37. Fol. 413  
Of the navy of the city of calicut, and of the memorable conflict between the Christians and mahometans: In the which the Portugals with incredible valiantness, gave their enemies the overthrow: And how the king of Canonor rejoiced at the victory. Cap. 37. Fol. 415    


The contents of the seventh and last book.  
The voyage or navigation of Ethiopia. Cap. 1. Fol. 419  
Of divers and many Islands of Ethiops. Cap. 2. Fol. 419  
Of the Island of Monzambrich, & the inhabitants thereof. Cap. 3. Fol. 419  
Of the Cape, named Caput Bone Spei: That is, the the Cape of good hope. Cap. 4. Fol. 421  
Of the higher east India, called Terciera. Fol. 42  
Of the prices of precious stones and spices, with their weights and measures, as they are accustomed to be sold both of the moors, & the gentiles: and of the places where they grow. Fol. 423.  
Of the Ruby. Fol. 423  
Of the Rubies which grow in the Island of Zeilam. Fol. 423  
Of the kind of Rubies called Spinelle. Fol. 424  
Of the Rubies called Balasni. Fol. 424  
Of the Diamonds of the old mine. Fol. 424  
Of sapphires. Fol. 425  
Of Topasies. Fol. 425  
Of Turquesses. Fol. 425  
Of hyacinths. Fol. 426  
Of Smaragdes or Emeralds. Fol. 426  
Of divers kinds of spices, where they grow, what they are worth in calicut, and whither they are carried from thence. And first of Pepper. Fol. 426  
Of Cloves. Fol. 427  
Of cinnamon.  
Of Ginger called Beledi.  
Of Ginger Mechino. Fol. 427  
Of green Ginger in conserves.  
Of the Apothecary's drugs, and of what price they are in calicut and Malabar. Fol. 428  
Of the weights of Portugal and India, and how they agree. Fol. 429  
Of the viage made by the spaniards round about the world. Fol. 429  
Maximilian Transiluanus' letter thereof to the Cardinal of Saltzburge. Fol. 430  
The debate and strife, between the Spaniards and Portugals for the division of the Indies, and the trade of Spices, and the Moluccaes', out of Lopez de Gomara. Fol. 448  
The repartition and division of the Indies and new world between the spaniards and the Portugals. Fol. 448  
The cause and authority whereby they divided the Indies. Fol. 450  
how and by what occasion the Emperor laid the Islands of Moluccaes' to pledge to the king of Portugal. Fol. 451  
Pope Alexander the .6. his Bull touching the aforesaid partition of the Indies, Latin and english. Fol. 452. &. Fol. 454  
An abridgement of. P. Martyr his .5.6.7. and .8. Decades, & particularly of F. C. conquest of Mexico by. R.W. Fol. 457    
FINIS.   

Imprinted at London by Richard jug. Anno. 1577.  
Cum Privilegio.